LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



DDDQ4535L.5D 



ifc 



< ' \^ 



*' 










^.^ 



* 



^V 



<&<< 









* <£ ^ *> 



^^r:'A ^IJ-V^ .«; v Vr*;^ 
















*\^* 



s v^.-^% 



<£><< 



9* .v 



ft 









^ o< ^?5 q< -^ ^ Oft i 



" ^ V 



; .^ 



° 0j * > 



$ 



%u 



\^ Q, 



v x 































s s ^ 



^ 



<£ ^ 

^ ^ 










^0* 



tf> ^ 



\> ***** % • V .***°* % N> r * Y * ^ *% 

v * v* <v ^ v v * * * ° * % 




W : 



<^ 






* ° /• 



^o< : 



<j5 o 




1 * * s ■ ^ b 


















%^ 



^^ 







GRAMMAR 



THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 



FOR THE USE OF 



HIGH SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES, 



DIt, RAPHAEL XUHNER. 

CONRECTOR OF THE LYCEUM, HAKOYER 

TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN 
BY 

B. B. EDWARDS, 

I.ATS PROFESSOR IN THE THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY, AND 

S. H. TAYLOR, 

PRINCIPAL OF PHILLIPS ACADEMY, ANDOVER. 



EIGHTH EDITION. 



NEW-YOKK: 

D . APPLETON & COMPANY 

4-4 3 & 4 4 5 BROADWAY. 
1864. 



5* 






.^ 5 4 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1852, by 

D. APrLETON & Co., 

In the Cierk's Office of the District Court of the Unitea States 

for the Southern District of New Y ork. 






Y 



?s 



PREFACE. 



Raphael Kuhner, the author of the following Grammar 
was born at Gotha, in 1802. From 1812 to 1821, he 
studied at the celebrated gymnasium in his native city. 
Among his classical teachers were Doring, Rost and "Wuste- 
mann. From 1821 to 1824, he enjoyed, at the University 
of Gottingen, the instructions of Mitscherlich, Dissen and 
Ottfried Miiller. "While there, he prepared an essay on 
the philosophical writings of Cicero, which received a 
prize. Since 1824, he has been a teacher in the Lyceum 
at Hanover. The principal works from the pen of Dr. 
Kuhner are the following : 

1. Versuch einer neuen Anordnung der griechischen Syntax, 

mit Beispielen begleitet. 1829. " Attempt towards a 
new Arrangement of the Greek Syntax," etc. 

2. M. Tull. Ciceronis Tusculan. Disputationum libri. 1829 

ed. altera 1835 ; ed. tertia 1846. 

3. Sammtliche Anomalien des griechischen Verbs in Attisch. 

Dialecte, 1831. " Anomalies of the Greek Verb, etc. 

4. Ausfuhrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache, in 2 

Theilen, 1834, 1835. " Copious Grammar of the Greek 
Language, in two Parts." The second Part of this 
grammar, containing the Syntax, translated by W. E. 
Jelf, of the University of Oxford, was published in 
1842; the first Part in 1845. A second edition of 
Jelf s translation of this work was published in 1851. 
This work is, however, only in part a translation, Mr. 

A* 



VI PREFACE. 



Jelf being the author of the remarks on the Cases., the 
particle av, the compound verbs, etc. 

5. Schulgrammatik der griechischen Sprache, 1836 ; zweite 

durchaus verbesserte u. vermehrte Auflage, 1843; 
dritte verbesserte und vermehrte Auflage 1851. 
" School Grammar of the Greek Language, third 
edition, improved and enlarged." The present vol- 
ume is a translation of this Grammar, from the 
sheets, furnished for this purpose by the author. 

6. Elementargrammatik der griechischen Sprache, neunte 

Auflage 1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Greek 
Language, containing a series of Greek and Eng- 
lish exercises for translation with the requisite vocab- 
ularies." This Grammar, translated by Mr. S. H. 
Taylor, one of the translators of the present volume, 
has passed through eleven editions in this country. 

7. Xenophontis de Socrate Commentarii, 1841. 

8. Elementargrammatik der lateinischen Sprache, siebent 

Auflage, 1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Latin 
Language with Exercises." This Grammar, trans- 
lated by Prof. Champlin, of "Waterville College, has 
passed through several editions in this country. 

9. Lateinische Vorschule nebst eingereihten lateinischen 

und deutschen Ubersetzungsaufgaben, vierte Auflage, 

1849. 
10. Schulgrammatik der lateinischen Sprache, dritte sehr 

verbesserte Auflage, 1850. " School Grammar of 

the Latin Language, third edition, greatly improved." 
Dr. Kiihner has also published in the Bibliotheca Graeca 
the first part of his edition of Xenophon's Anabasis. 

From the above statements, it will be seen that Dr. 
Kiihner has enjoyed the most favorable opportunities for 
preparing the work, a translation of which is now pre- 
sented to the public. The names of his early instructors 
are among the most honored in classical philology. For 



PREFACE. 



nearly thirty years, he has been a teacher in one of the 
principal German gymnasia, and has thus had ample facili- 
ties for testing in practice the principles which he has 
adopted in his Grammars. At the same time, he has pur- 
sued the study of the classical authors with the greatest 
diligence, in connection with the productions which his 
learned countrymen are constantly publishing on the differ- 
ent parts of Latin and Greek grammar. Of course, his 
works might be expected to combine the advantages of 
sound, scientific principles with a skilful adaptation to prac- 
tical use. The " School Grammar of the Greek Lan- 
guage," being his latest publication, contains the results of 
his most mature studies. Its chief excellences, it may be 
well, perhaps, briefly to indicate. 

First, The grammar is based on a profound and accurate 
knowledge of the genius and principles of the Greek lan- 
guage. The author adopts substantially the views which 
are maintained by Becker, Grimm, Hupfeld and others, and 
which are fully unfolded in the German grammars of 
Becker. According to these views, the forms and changes 
of language are the result of established laws, and not of 
accident or arbitrary arrangement. Consequently, language 
may be subjected to scientific analysis and classification. 
The multitude of details may be embraced under a few 
comprehensive principles, and the whole may have some- 
what of the completeness and spirit of a living, organic 
system. Dr. Kiihner's grammar is not a collection of de- 
tached observations, or of rules which have no connection, 
except a numerical one. It is a natural classification of 
the essential elements of the language, an orderly exhibi- 
tion of its real phenomena. It is, at the same time, a truly 
practical grammar, fitted for its object, not by a theorist in 
his closet, but by an experienced instructor in his school. 

Second, The author has adopted a clear and satisfactory 
arrangement of his materials. This can be seen by an 



yiU . PREFACE 

examination of the table of contents. To those, indeed, 
who are familiar only with the common distribution of 
subjects in our Greek grammars, the arrangement of Dr. 
Kuhner may appear somewhat obscure and complicated. 
A slight acquaintance, however, with the plan on which 
the Syntax, for example, is constructed, will show that he 
has followed the true and logical method. Abundant 
proofs of the justness of this remark may be seen in the 
exhibition of compound sentences. The particles are 
treated, not as isolated, independent words, but as a com- 
ponent and indissoluble part of discourse. 

Third, Fulness and pertinence of illustration. The cor- 
rectness of every principle advanced, especially in the Syn- 
tax, is vouched for by copious citations from the classics. 
If, in any case, a principle is stated in an abstract form, or 
if a degree of obscurity rests upon the enunciation of it, 
its meaning may be readily discovered by reference to the 
illustration. The paradigms contain much more complete 
exemplifications of conjugation and declension than are to 
be found in the grammars in common use in this coun- 
try. In this connection, it may be stated, that Dr. Kuhner 
has chosen a pure verb as the model of regular inflection. 
He can thus exhibit the stem unchanged, throughout the 
entire conjugation. 

Fourth, The perfect analysis to which the forms of the 
language, especially of the verb, is subjected, may be men- 
tioned as another excellence of the grammar. In learning 
a paradigm, in the manner which the author points out, the 
pupil first resolves the verb into its elements, and then 
rearranges these elementary parts into a complete form. 
In this method, and in no other, can he attain a mastery 
of this most difficult portion of the subject. 

Fifth, Every part of the grammar is equally elaborated. 
The closing pages exhibit the same fulness and conscien- 
tious accuracy, which characterize the forms, or the first 



PREFACE. IX 



portions of the Syntax. No part can be justly charged 
with deficiency or with superfluous statement. The view 
of the Third Declension, the scientific list of Irregular 
Verbs, the Dialectic peculiarities, the observations on the 
Use and Position of the Article, on the Middle and Passive 
Verbs, on the delicate shades of thought indicated by the 
Modes and Tenses, and on the difference between the use 
of the Participle and Infinitive, may be referred to as spe- 
cimens of careful observation and nice analysis. 

The Appendix on Versification has been supplied by the 
translators, the grammar of Ktihner containing nothing on 
that subject. The materials were drawn from a variety of 
sources. A more full view is less necessary, as the excel- 
lent work of Munk on Greek and Roman Metres, trans- 
lated by Profs. Beck and Felton, is now accessible. 

Much pains have been taken in verifying the almost in- 
numerable references to classical authors. The very few 
exceptions are those cases where the author made use of 
an edition of a classic not accessible to the translators. In 
this verification, the following editions of prose authors 
were used : Kiihner's edition of the Memorabilia ; Weiske's 
and Tauchnitz's editions of the other works of Xenophon ; 
Schafer's and Tauchnitz's editions of Herodotus ; Becker's 
and Tauchnitz's editions of Thucydides ; Dobson's edition 
of the Oratores Attici ; and Stallbaum's Plato. There are 
slight variations in numbering the lines of poetry in differ- 
ent editions, particularly in the tragedians. 

The present edition has been prepared from the third 
German edition, in which the author had made many im- 
portant improvements, particularly in the Syntax, having 
availed himself of the corrections or remarks of his learned 
friends and his reviewers. This the translators have en- 
deavored to put into such a form as would best meet the 
wants of American scholars. They have not aimed merely 



X PREFACE. 

at a translation ; it has been their c eject to state in as cleat 
and concise a manner as possible the principles contained 
in the original, without reference to the particular form in 
which the statements were there made. The translators 
have also added principles and illustrations of their own, 
where it seemed desirable. 

The numbering of the paragraphs has not been changed 
in the present edition, and most of the subdivisions and 
Remarks are the same as in the former edition. The 
changes in this respect have been so few, that it has not 
been thought necessary to indicate them. 

The labor of preparing the first edition c i this work was 
shared equally by the translators ; so, also, in the second 
edition as far as the 210th page. At this point in the 
progress of the work, the state of Professor Edwards's 
health made it necessary for him to relinquish his labors in 
connection with it, for the purpose of seeking a milder 
climate. After a few months' residence in one of the South- 
ern States, he was called away from his labors on earth, 
deeply lamented by his associate, and the large circle of 
friends to whom his character presented so many attractive 
qualities. His loss will be extensively felt also in the cause 
of Biblical and Classical literature, for which none cher- 
ished a deeper interest, and for the promotion of which he 
contributed with great zeal and success the rich stores of 
his elegant and varied learning. 

The proofs of the Grammar have been read by Mr. P. 
S. Byers, an associate Instructor in Phillips Academy, to 
whom special acknowledgments are due for these services* 
as well as for many valuable suggestions. 

Andover, July 15, 1852. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



SECTION I. — SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE. 
Chapter I. — Letters and Sounds op the Language. 



Alphabet 

Sounds of the Letters 

History of the Alphabet 

Organs of Speech 

Vowels 

Consonants 

Breathings 

Changes of Letters 

Changes of the Vowels 

Hiatus 

Contraction of Vowels 

Crasis 

Synizesis 

Elision 

N Paragogic (icpeXKvcmKOf) ; 

ovtw(s) ; e£ and e/c ; ov and qvk. 
Strengthening and Weakening 

of Vowels 



9 

10, 11 

12 

13, 14 



Prolongation. Shortening. In- 
terchange and Variation, ... § 16 
Influence of a Vowel or Con- 
sonant on another vowel. ... 16 
Syncope, Omission of a Vowel 16 

Euphonic Pro thesis 16 

Changes of the Consonants. . . 17 — 25 

Mutes 17 

Liquids 18 

Mutes and Liquids, Liquids and 

Mutes 19 

Sibilant <r with Mut. and Liq.. . 20 

Change of separated Consonants 21 

Metathesis of Liquids 22 

Doubling of Consonants 23 

Strengthening and Addition of 

Consonants 24 

Expulsion and Omission of 

Consonants 25 



Chapt. II. — Syllables. 



Nature and Division of Syllables 26 

Quantity of Syllables 27 

Quantity of the Penult 28 

Accents 29 

Change and Removal of the 
Accent by Inflection, Compo- 
sition and Contraction 30 

Change and Removal of the Ac- 
cent in connected Discourse 31 — 35 



I. Grave instead of the acute 31 

II. Crasis 31 

III. Elision 31 

IV. Anastrophe 31 

V. Atonies or Proclitics ... 32 

VI. Enclitics 33—35 

Division of Syllables 36 

Punctuation Marks — Diastole. 37 



SECT. II. — GRAMMATICAL EORMS. 

Division of the Parts of Speech. — Inflection 
Chapt. I. — The Substantive. 



Different kinds of Substantives ... 39 

Gender of Substantives 40 

Number, Case and Declension ... 41 



Eirst Declension 42 

I. Eeminines 43 

II. Masculines 44 



Xll 



CONTENTS. 



Quantity and Accentuation . § 45 

Second Declension 46 

Contraction of the second Dec. 47 
Attic second Declension. ... 48 

Accentuation 49 

Remarks on Gender 50 

Third Declension 51 

Remarks on the Case-endings 52, 53 

Paradigms . , 54 — 63 

Quantity 64 

Accentuation 65 



Gender 66 

Anomalous Nouns 67, 68 

Defective Nouns 69 

Interchange of Forms in the 

Declensions 70 — 72 

I. Redundant Nouns 70 

II. Heteroclites 71 

III. Metaplasts 72 

Indeclinable and Defective 

Nouns 73 



Chapt. II. — The Adjective vnd Participle. 



Nature, Gender and Declension 74 

Accentuation 75 

Summarv of the Adjective and 

Part. Endings 76—80 

I. Adjectives and Partici- 
ples of three Endings. . 76, 77 
II. Adjectives of two Endings 78, 79 
III. Adjectives of one Ending 80 



Comparison of Adjectives 81 

A. -repos, -rooa, -repow, -raroSy 

-Ta.T7], -raiw 82 

B. -LWV, -10V, 'COV, -OV\ -KTTOSy -?J, 

-ov 83 

Anomalous forms of Comparison. 84 
Comparison of Adverbs 85 



Chapt. III. — The Pronoun. 



Nature and Division of Pronouns 86 

I. Personal Pronouns 87-90 

II. Demonstrative Pronouns 91 
III. Relative Pronouns 92 



IV. Indefinite and Interrogative 

Pronouns 93 

Correlative Pronouns 94 

Lengthening of the Pronoun 95 



Chapt. IV. — The Numerals. 



Nature and Division of Numerals 96 
Numeral Signs 97 



Principal classes of Numerals .... 98 
Remarks on the Numerals 99 



Chapt. V. — The Adverb. 

Nature and Division of Adverbs 100 I Formation of Adverbs 101 



Chapt. VI. — The Verb. 



Nature and Division of the Verb 102 

Classes 102 

Tenses 103 

Modes 104 

Infinitive and Participle 105 

Persons and Numbers 106 

Conjugation of Verbs in -a 107 

Stem, Augment, Reduplication 

and Characteristic 108 

Inflection-endings 109 

a. Tense-characteristic and 

Tense-endings 110 

b. Personal-endings and Mode- 

vowels Ill — 114 

Full Paradigm of a Regular Verb 115 
Remarks on the Inflection-endings 116 
Remarks on the Formation of the 
Attic Future . . . 117 



Accentuation of the Verb 118 

Further view of Aug. and Redup. 119 

(a) Syllabic Augment 120 

(b) Temporal Augment. . 121, 122 

Reduplication 123 

Attic Reduplication 124 

Aug. and Redup. in Compounds 125-6 
Formation of the Tenses of Verbs 

in -co 127—167 

Division of Verbs in -co according 

to the Characteristic 127 

Derivation of Tenses 128 

I. Formation of the Tenses of 

Pure Verbs 129 

a. "With a short Characteristic- 

vowel 13C 

b. With crin Aor. Pass, and Perf. 

Mid. or Pass 131 



CONTENTS. 



Xlll 



Paradigms of Pure Verbs § 132—137 

A. Uncontracted Pure Verbs. . 132 

(a) Without <r in the Mid. or 

Pass 132 

(b) With o- in the Mid. and 

Pass 133 

B. Contract Pure Verbs... 134—136 
Eemarks on contract verbs... 137 

II. Formation of the Tenses of 

Impure Verbs 138 

Strengthening of the Stem 139 

Variation of the Stem-vowel. . . . 140 
Remarks on the Secondary Tenses 141 

A. Formation of the Tenses of 

Mute Verbs 142—144 

Remarks on the Characteristic 143 
Paradigms of Mute Verbs 145 — 148 

B. Formation of the Tenses of 

Liquid Verbs 149 

Paradigms 150—153 

Peculiarities in the Formation of 

Single Verbs 154 

Syncope 155 

Metathesis 156 

Verbs in -« with Stem of the Pres. 

strengthened 157 

I. Verbs with v inserted 158 

II. Verbs with the syllable ve 159 

III. Verbs with au or aiv 160 

IV. Verbs in -<tko>, -io-Kw. . 161 

V. Verbs in -&» 162 

VI. Verbs with Reduplication. 163 
VII. Verbs whose Pure Stem- 
vowel a is strengthened by i 164 
VIII. Verbs which assume e . . . . 165 
Verbs which assume an e in form- 
ing the Tenses 166 

Verbs whose Tenses are formed 

from different Roots 167 

Conjugation of Verbs in -/it 168 

Division of Verbs in -/tit 169 



Characteristic- vowel and Strength- 
ening of the Stem of the Pres. \ 170 

Mode-vowels 171 

Personal-endings 172 

Formation of the Tenses. . . 173, 174 

Paradigms 175 

Remarks on the Paradigms 176 

Summary of Verbs in -/xi. . 172 — 190 

I. Verbs in -fit which annex the 

Personal-endings immediate- 
ly to the Stem- vowel 177 

(a) Verbs in -a 177 

*??/u 178 

Deponents 179 

(b) Verbs in -e . ." 180 

(c) Verbs ir -t : E?/it. — El/xl. . . 181 

II. Verbs in -fit which annex vw 

or w to the Stem-vowel . . 182 

Formation of the Tenses 182 

Summary of this class of Verbs 183 
- —188 

A. Verbs whose Stem ends in a 

Vowel 183—186 

(a) in -a 183 

(b) in -e 184 

(c) in-t.. 185 

(d) in-o. 186 

B. Verbs whose Stem ends in a 

Consonant 187,188 

(a) in a Mute 187 

(b) in a Liquid. ... .... 188 

Inflection of Kelpou and ^ixat 189, 190 

Verbs in -« analogous in Forma- 
tion to those in -/xi . . 191 — 196 
I. Second Aor. Act. and Mid- 
dle 191, 192 

II. Perf. and Plup. Act.. . 193, 194 

OlSa and eoiKa 195 

III. Present and Imperfect 196 

Summary of Deponent Passives. 197 
Summary of Active Verbs with a 
Mid. Fut 19S 



Chapt. VII. — Prepositions, Conjunctions and Interjections 199 



PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS. 



A. Orthography. 
Digamma or Labial Breathing F. 200 

Interchange of the Vowels 201 

Interchange of the Consonants 202-204 

Change of the Vowels 205-207 

Contraction, Diaeresis 205 

Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Par- 

agogic, Hiatus 206 

Lengthening and Shortening of 
the Vowels. — Syncope. — Apo- 
cope 207 

B 



Prothesis and Insertion of Vowels 207 

Changes of Consonants 208 

Quantity 209 

B. Dialectic Forms. 

Declensions 210- 214 

Homeric Suffix (pi or <piv 210 

First Declension 211 

Second Declension 212 

Third Declension . 213 

Anomalous and Defective 
Words. Metaplasts . . , 214 



XIV 



CONTENTS. 



The Adjective §215 

Comparison 216 

Pronouns 217 

Numerals 218 

The Verb 219-230 

Augment and Reduplication . . 219 
Personal-endings and Mode- 
vowels 220 

Epic and Ionic Iterative Form 221 
Contraction and Resolution in 
Verbs 222 



Formation of the Tenses ... § 223 

Conjugation in -pa 224 

Elf.d and El/ii 225, 226 

Verbs in -co with a Sec. Aor. an- 
alogous to Verbs in -fii . . . .227 

Verbs in -co with a Perf. and 
Plup. Act. like Verbs in -/xi 228 

Verbs in -co with a Pres. and 
Impf. Act. like Verbs in -/xi 229 

List of Dialectic Verbs 230 



SECT. III. — FORMATION OF WORDS. 



Radical Words, Stems,Derivatives 231 

A. Derivation 232-235 

I. Verbs 232 

II. Substantives 233 



III. Adjectives 234 

IV. Adverbs 235 

B. Compounds 236 

Formation of Compounds 237 



SYNTAX. 



SECT. I. — SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 
Chapt. I. — Parts of a Simple Sentence. 



Nature of a Sentence. — Subject 
and Predicate 238 

Comparison. Attribute and Ob- 
ject 239 

Agreement 240 

Exceptions to the general rules of 
Agreement 241 

Agreement when there are several 
Subjects 242 

Remarks on Peculiarities in use of 
Number 243 

The Article 244 

Position of the Article 245 

Use of the Article with Pronouns 

and Numerals 246 

The Article as a Demon, and 
Rel. Pronoun 247 



Classes of Verbs 248 

A. Active form 249 

B. Middle 250 

C. Passive 251 

Remarks on Deponents 252 

Tenses and Modes 253 

A. Particular View of the Tenses 254 

(a) Principal tenses: Pres., 
Perf., Fut 255 

(b) Hist. Tenses : Aor., Impf., 

Plup 256 

Tenses of the Subord. Modes 257 

B. Particular View of the Modes 258 
Use of the Subj.,Opt.and Imp. 259 

The Modes with &v 260 

Position and Repetition of fa> 251 



Chapt. II.— 


-Attributive Construction. 




lipsis of the Substantive . 
(a) Attributive Adjective . 


... 263 1 (b) Attributive Genitive . . 
. . . 264 | (c) Apposition 


. . 265 
. . 266 



Chapt. III. — Objective Construction. 



I. The Cases 268 

Nominative and Vocative . . . 269 
(1) Genitive 270 

A. Local Relation 271 

B. Causal Relation 272 

(a) Active Genitive 273 

(b) Causal Genitive 274 



(c) Gen. denoting mutual re- 
lations 275 

(2) Accusative 276 

A. Local Relation 277 

B. Causal Relation 278 

(a) Ace. denoting effect ... 278 

(b) Acc.of the Object on which 

the action is performed . 279 



CONTENTS. 



XV 



Two Accusatives § 280 

Remarks on the Ace. with the 

Passive 281 

(3) Dative 282 

A. Local Dative 283 

B. Dative as a personal Object 284 

C. Dative of the thing 285 

II. Construction of Prepositions . 286 



(1) Prepositions with the Gen. 

only § 287, 288 

(2) With the Dative only .... 289 

(3) With the Accusative only . 290 

(4) With the Gen. and Ace. 291-294 

(5) With the Gen., Dat. and 

Ace 295-299 

Remarks on peculiarities of the 

Prepositions 300 



Chapx. IV. — The Pronoun as Subjecx, Predicate, Axxribuxe 

Objecx. 



I. Personal Pronouns 302 

II. Remaining: Pronouns 303 



Prospective and Retrospective 
Use of the Pronoun 304 



Chapi. V. 



The Infiniiive and L?arxiciple used as an Axxribuxe 
and Objecx. 



A. The Infinitive 305 

(I) Inf. as an Object without 

the Article 306 

Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 
with the Inf. 307 

(II) Inf. with the Article .... 308 

B. The Participle 309 

(I) The Part, as the Comple- 
ment of the Verb .... 310 



Remarks on the Inter- 
change of the Part, and 

the Inf. 311 

(II) Part, used to express Ad- 
verbial Subordinate Re- 
lations 312 

Special Peculiarities in the 
Participial Construction 313 



Chapx. VI. — The Adverbial Objecxive. 



A. Ay, Srjra, frf}v> Srj^ev, d-fjirov^ey, 

Sai 315 

B. Confirmative Adverbs 316 



C. Emphatic Suffixes, ye, irep, rol 317 

D. Negative Particles SIS 



SECT. II. — SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 
Chapx. VII. A. — Coordinaiion. 



Different Forms of Coordinate 

Sentences 320 

I. Copulative Coordinate Sen- 
tences 321 

II. Adversative Coordinate Sen- 
tences 322 



III. Disjunctive Coordinate Sen- 
tences 323 

IV. Causal Coordinate Sen- 
tences 324 

Remarks on Asyndeton 325 



Chapx. VIII. B. — Subordinaiion. 



Principal and Subordinate Sen- 
tences 326 

Sequence of Subjunctive Tenses 

in Subordinate Sentences 327a 

Use of Modes in Subordinate 

Clauses 327b 

I. Substantive Clauses 328 

A. Introduced by on or us, that 329 

B. Introduced by "va, so that, etc. 330 

II. Adjective Clauses 331 



Agreement of the Rel. Pron. . . 332 
Modes in Adjective Clauses . . 333 
Connection of several Adjective 

Clauses 33* 

Interchange of the Subordinate 

Clause with the Adj. Clause 334 
III. Adverbial Clauses 335 

A. Adverbial Clauses of Place 336 

B. Adverbial Clauses of Time 33? 

C. Causal Adv. Clauses . 338—340 



XVI 



CONTENTS. 



I. Denoting Ground or 

Cause § 338 

II. Denoting Condition 339, 340 
III. Denoting Consequence 

or Effect 341 



D. Adverbial Clauses denoting 

Manner and Quantity 342, 343 
I. Comparative Adv.Clauses 

denoting Manner 342 

II. Comparative Adv.Clauses 
denoting Quantity 343 



Chapt. IX. — Interrogative Sentences. 



I. Interrogatives 344 

II. Oblique Discourse 345 

III. Special Peculiarities in the 
Construction of Words and Sen- 
tences 346, 347 



Ellipsis, Brachylogy, Zeugma, 

Contraction, Pleonasm 346 

Anacoluthon 347 



Chapt. X. — Position op Words 348 



Appendix A. — Versification Page 574 
Appendix B. . Abbreviations 

in writing 587 



Index of Subjects Page 589 

Greek Index 602 

Index for the Eoi*ms of Verbs 614 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

Aesch. Aeschylus, Ag. Agamemnon, S. Septem adv. Th. — Ar. Aristophanes. — 
Dem. Demosthenes, 01. Olynth., Ph. Philipp., Cor. Corona, Chers. Chersones., Aph. 
Aphobus. — Eur. Euripides, M. Medea, C. Cyclops, H. Hecuba, 0. Orestes, H. F. 
Hercules Furens, Hipp. Hippolytus. — Her. Herodotus. — Isae. Isaeus. — Lys. Ly- 
sias. — PI. Plato, Cr. Onto, L. Leges, Th. Theages, Men. Meno, Soph. Sophista, 
Crat. Cratylus, Prot. Protagoras, Phil. Philebus, Kp. Respublica. — Soph. Sophch 
cles, O. C. Oedipus Coloneus, 0. P. Oedipus Rex, Ant. Antigone, Ph. Philoctetes, 
Aj. Ajax, El. Plectra. — X. Xenophon, C. Commentarii, An. Anabasis, H. Hellen 
ica, S. Symposium, P. Ath. Respublica Atheniens., R. L. Respubl. Lacedaem., O. 
Qeconomicus, Ag. Agesilaus, P. Equ. R. Equestris. 



GREEK GRAMMAR 



DIALECTS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 

1. The Greek language was divided into numy different 
dialects, the most highly cultivated of which were the 
iEolic, Doric, Ionic, and Attic. The iEolic prevailed in 
Bceotia, Thessaly, and in the ^Eolian colonies in Asia 
Minor ; the Doric, throughout the Peloponnesus, and in the 
Dorian colonies in Asia Minor, Italy, and Sicily ; the 
Ionic, in the Ionian colonies in Asia Minor ; the Attic, in 
Attica. 

2. The iEolic and Doric dialects are characterized by 
harshness and roughness, being the opposite of the Ionic, 
which is distinguished for delicacy and softness. The 
Attic dialect holds a beautiful medium between the two 
former and the Ionic, as it skilfully combines the soft and 
pleasant forms of the Ionic with the strong and full-toned 
forms of the Doric. 

3. The Ionic dialect is divided into the Older and the 
Later Ionic. The older Ionic is the language of Hoitk 
and of his school, although these poets were not satisfied 
with their own dialect merely, but were able, in accordance 
with the true principles of art, to select, from all the 
dialects, those forms which corresponded to the nature of 
their poetry ; and to employ — since the regular laws of 
versification had much influence in forming the language 

2 



14 



GREEK DIALECTS. 



— a peculiar and definite poetic language, called the Epic, 
or Homeric. This had a great effect on the language of 
all the Greek poets even to the latest times. We find the 
later Ionic in the works of the historian Herodotus, born 
484 b. c, and of Hippocrates, b. 460 b. c. 

4. The Attic dialect is drvided, in accordance with cer- 
tain peculiarities, into the Older, the Middle, and the Latei 
Attic. The older is used by Thucydides, b. 472 b. c. ; the 
tragic poets ; iEschylus, who died 456 b. c. ; Sophocles. 
b. 497 b. c, d. 405 b. c. ; Euripides, b. 480 b. c. ; and the 
more ancient comic writers, e. g. Aristophanes, d. 390 b. c. : 
by several orators, e. g. Antiphon, b. 479 b. c, and An- 
docides, b. 467 b. c. The middle Attic is used by Plato, 
b. 430 b. c. ; Xenophon, b. 447 b. c. ; and the orator Iso- 
crates. b. b. c. 436. The later Attic is employed by De- 
mosthenes, b. 385 b. c, and other orators, the later comic 
writers, and the prose authors in more recent times, who 
sought to preserve in their works the language of the earlier 
writers. 

5. After the freedom of the Greeks had been destroyed 
by Philip, king of Macedon, the Attic dialect came to be 
the common written language. As it extended, not only 
over all Greece, but also over the Macedonian provinces of 
Syria and Egypt, it lost much of its peculiar stamp by the 
introduction of foreign forms and words, and it then 
received the name of the Common, or Hellenic language, 
r] kolvt], or - EWtjvl/ct] hdXe/cTos. It was used, e. g. by Apol- 
iodorus, Diodorus, and Plutarch. 



ETYMOLOGY 



SECTION I. 



CHAPTER I. 
Letters and Sounds of tie Language 
§ 1. Alphab et. 
The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty-four letters, 



Form. 


Sound. 


Name 




A 


a 


a 


"A\(j)a 


Alpha 


B 


$ 


b 


BrJTd 


Beta 


F 


7 


g 


rd/JLfia 


Gamma 


A 


8 


d 


Aikra 


Delta 


E 


6 


e short 


*E yjrZXov 


Epsllon 


Z 


e 


z 


ZfJTd 


Zeta 


H 


V 


elong 


*Hra 


Eta 





%d 


th 


Qyjra 


Theta 


I 


I 


i 


'Icbra 


Iota 


K 


K 


k 


Kdirira 


Kappa 


A 


X 


] 


AafJLJSha 


Lambda 


M 


p 


m 


MO 


Mu 


N 


V 


n 


Nv 


Nu 


S 


i 


X 


m 


Xi 








o short 


U jjbucpov 


Omikron 


n 


IT 


P 


m 


Pi 


p 


P 


r 


( P<o 


Rho 


z 


<79 


s 


%l<yfia 


Sigma 


T 


T 


t 


Tav 


Tau 


T 


V 


u 


*T^i\6v 


Upsllon 





4> 


ph 


<f>l 


Phi 


X 


X 


ch 


XI 


Chi 


-¥ 


-V^" 


ps 


wz 


Psi 


a 


w 


o long 


^12 fiija 


Omega. 



16 SOUNDS OF PARTICULAR LETTERS. [$ % 

Remakk 1. Sigma at the end of a word takes the form s, e. g. eeia/xts, in 
most editions of the classics. This small s is also used in the middle of com- 
pound words, if the first part of the compound ends with Sigma, though such 
a usage is contrary to the authority of the manuscripts, e. g. Trposcpepw or 
irpofftptpw, dvsywfjs or Svffyevris. 

Rem. 2. When a and r come together, both letters may be expressed by one 
character, sr, Sti, or Stigma. 

Rem. 3. Besides their use as alphabetic characters, e and v were originally 
osed as mere marks of aspiration, the former for the spiritus asper (§ 6), for which 
in the earliest times H was also employed, the latter for the Digamma (§ 25) ; 
hence, as letters, they were called, in opposition to their use as aspirates, e tyi\6v 
and v if/tAov, i. e. unaspirated. Omicron and Omega (small and large o) derive 
their name from their relative size. 

Rem. 4. The principle on which most of the otters of the Greek alphabet 
are named, is entirely different from that adopted in this country and among 
the European nations, at the present day. We name each letter by the sound 
it represents, as a, b, c, adding a vowel to the consonants in order to vocalize 
them. But among the Orientals, from whom the Greek alphabet was derived, 
the name was not determined by the sound of the letter. They gave their 
letters the name of some familiar object, the first sound or syllable of which 
was the alphabetic character to be represented. For example, the Phoenicians 
and Hebrews called the first letter of the alphabet Aleph (Greek Alpha), which 
means an ox : now the first sound or syllable of Aleph is the character or 
element to be represented. The second letter was Beth (Greek Beta), a house, 
the first sound of which is the character to be represented. The third is Gimel 
( Greek Gamma), a camel. This mode of naming letters, undoubtedly originated 
from the custom of designating those letters by the picture of the object from 
which they derived the name, instead of by the characters now used. Thus 
Aleph was represented by the picture of an ox, Beth by that of a house, etc. 



k 2a. Sounds of particular Letters. 

The sound of the letters is indicated by the Roman characters opposite tc 
them. The following remarks on particular letters are all that is needed in 
addition : — 

Remark. The sounds given to the following letters are those more usually 
adopted in pronouncing the Greek in New England; but the usage is not 
entirely uniform. 

A has the sound of a in fan, when it is followed by a consonant in the same 
syllable, e. g. x^^-k6s; the sound of a in fate, when it stands before a single 
consonant which is followed by two vowels, the first of which is e or t, e. g. 
avaa-rdaeoos, (TTpanuTris ; also, when it forms a syllable by itself, or ends a 
syllable not final, e. g. fiey-d-Xr], orrpa-rSs; it has the sound of a in father, when 
it is followed by a single p, in the same syllable, and also Avhen it ends a word; 
but a final in monosyllables has the sound of a in fate, e. g. Bap-fia-pos, ydp, 
kya&d, rd. 



$ 2b.] BRIEF HISTORY OF THE ALPHABET. 17 

7, before 7, k, x» anc l !> has the sound of w/ in angle, or nasal n m ancle, e. g 
^77eAos, ang-gslos ; K\ayyfi, clangor' ; 'Ayxicys, Anchises (Angchises) ; o-vynSirri, 
syncope ; \dpvyl-, larynx. 7 before vowels always has the hard sound, like g in 
get; also before consonants, except 7, k, x-> !> e - 8'- yh as - 

e has the sound of short e in met, when it is followed by a consonant in the 
same syllable, e. g. pey-as, [xer-d ; the sound of long e in me, when it ends a 
word or a syllable, or when it forms a syllable by itself, e. g. 76, S4-w, fiaatXr 

7] has the sound of e in me, e. g. /.101/77. 

3 has the sound of tit in £/mc/!:, e. g. Swcctos. 

j has the sound of i in mine, when it ends a word or syllable, or forms a 
syllable by itself, e. g. iXiri-ai, on, ired-l-ov ; the sound of i in pin, when it is 
followed by a consonant in the same syllable, e. g. irpiv, Kiv-dvvos. 

k always has the hard sound of Ic, and was expressed in Latin by c, e. g. 
KthiKia, Cilicia ; Ke/cpoi//, Cecrops ; Kinepeov, Cicero. 

I, at the beginning of a word or syllable, has the sound of 2, e. g. £eVos ; else- 
where, the sound of x, e. g. Sia^vco, irpa^is, av<x%. 

g has the sound of short in not, when it is followed by a consonant in the 
same syllable, e. g. \6y-os, nv-pos ; the sound of long in go, when it ends a 
word or syllable, or forms a syllable by itself, e. g. r6, vtt6, &o-6s, ro^-o-r-ns. 

a has the sharp sound of s in son ; except it stands before fi, in the middle 
of a word, or at the end of a word after 77 or 00, where it has the sound of z, 
e.g. aKTjwf], vo/xicrfxa, yrjs, /caAws: before t it does not have the sound of sh, as in 
Latin, but retains its simple sound, c. g. 'Aala =A-si-a, not A-shi-a. 

t followed by t has its simple sound, never the sound of sh, as in Latin, e. g. 
raXaria = Galati-a, not Galashi-a ; Kpirias =Kriti-as, not Krishi-as ; Alyinrrtoi. 

v has the sound of u in tulip, e. g. rvxv ', but before p the sound of u in pure, 
e. g. 7ri5p, yecpvpa. 

X has the bard sound of ch in chasm, e. g. raxvs. 

o) has the sound of long in note, e. g. 'dyca. 



§ 2b. Br i ef history of the Alphabet . 

1. The Greeks derived most of their alphabet from the Phoenicians. Ac- 
cording to the common tradition, letters were brought into Greece by Cadmus, 
a Phoenician. The Phoenician alphabet, being nearly the same as the Hebrew, 
consisted of 22 letters, the names of which are, Alepb, Beth, Gimel, Daleth, 
He, Vau, Zain, Heth, Teth, Jod, Kaph, Lamed, Mim, Nun, Samech, Oin, Pe, 
Tsade, Koph, Eesch, Schin, Thau. Vau, the 6th letter of the Phoenician 
alphabet, was rejected by the Greeks as an alphabetic character, and used only 
as the numeral sign for 6. Koph (Greek Koppa), the 19th letter of the Phoe- 
nician alphabet, was also rejected, because its sound so nearly resembled that 
of Kaph (Greek Kappa), and was used as the numeral sign for 100. Zain 
nnd Tsade were modifications of the same sound; Tsade. like the Greek Zeta 
2* 



J 8 ORGANS OF SPEECH. f? 3 

represents the sound of both, and takes the place of Zain, becoming the 6th 
Letter of the Greek alphabet, while Zain (Greek San, Sampi), was rejected as an 
alphabetic character, and used as a numerical sign for 900. Thus 19 letters of 
the Phoenician alphabet were adopted by the Greeks, as alphabetic characters. 
These are the first 19 letters of the present alphabet. To these the Greeks 
themselves added the five last letters of the alphabet, viz., v, <p, %■> ty> a - This 
seems to be the most rational view of the formation of the Greek alphabet, 
though somewhat different from the common legendary account, which repre 
sents Cadmus as bringing only 16 letters into Greece, viz., a, /3, y, §, €, 1, fr, A, 

fly v, O, IT, p, <T, T, v. 

2. The alphabet was not brought at once into its present complete form. 
The old Attic alphabet contained but 21 letters. H was considered merely as 
a breathing, and the place of t\ and a was supplied by e and 0, and that of $ 
and I by 4>2 and X2, e. g. AI0EP (ulfrrip), EX0PON (ix&p&v), S2TXAI ($v%af), 
X2TN (£w). The alphabet is said to have been completed in the time of the 
Persian war, by Simonides, who added E, "*", and n, and changed the breathing 
H, to the long vowel tj. The Ionians first adopted the present full alphabet 
of 24 letters, and by them it was communicated to the Athenians. This full 
alphabet was first used in Attic inscriptions in the archonship of Euclidcs, 
B.C. 403, before this period only the old Attic alphabet is found in Attic 
inscriptions. 

3. The early Greeks used the capital letters exclusively, and left no spaces 
between the words, e. g. METAAETOYTONEinEXEIPno*02, i. e. /xeTo. Se rod- 
tov et7T6 X<£iplcro(pos. The cursive, or small character, was not introduced till 
very late. A document has been found in Egypt written in the cursive char- 
acter, 104 b. c. But cursive writing was not in general use till long after that 
time. It is first found in manuscripts in the eighth century. 

4. The early Greeks commonly wrote in the Oriental manner, i. e. from 
right to left, as may be seen in several inscriptions. Other inscriptions, how- 
ever, of equal antiquity, are written from left to right, proving that both modes 
were in use. A third method was from left to right and right to left alternate- 
ly. This was called fiovffrpo(p7]d6u i because it resembled the turning about of 
oxen in ploughing. Solon's laws were written in this way. But in the time of 
Herodotus, the Greeks wrote only from left to right. 



§ 3. O rg ans of Sp eech. 

1. The organs of speech, used in forming or articulating 
words, are the palate, the throat, the tongue, and the lips. 

2. The sounds which are emitted almost without any action 
of the throat, tongue, and lips, and which proceed in the freest 
manner from the breast, are called Vowels; the rest, Conso- 
nants. 



f 4.J VOWELS. 19 



M- Void els. 

1. The Greek has seven vowels, a, i, v, which may be 
long or short, e and o, which are always short, rj and co 
which are always long. The character (") over one of the 
vowels a, t, v, shows that the vowel is short; (~) that it is 
tong ; (~) that it may be either long or short, e. g. a, a, a. 



Remark i a, i, and v are called the principal vowels, because they denote 
the principal sounds ; the other vowels are called subordinate, because their 
sounds are the intermediates of the principal sounds. Thus, the sound of e is 
intermediate between a and l, the sound of o is intermediate between a and v ; 
n is produced by lengthening e or a, co by lengthening o. The relation of these 
vowels may be illustrated by the following diagram : — 




2. When two vowels are so combined as to form but 
one sound, the sound so produced is called a diphthong. 
When both the vowels are sounded, the diphthong is called 
proper ; when only one, improper. 

3. The Greek diphthongs originate from the union of the 
vowels a, e> o, v, rj, co, with the vowels i and v, thus : — 

a -J- t = at, pronounced like ai in aisle, c. g. at'£, 



a -f- v = av, " " au in laud, " pads, 

e -f- i = ei, " " ei in sleight, " Beivo 



7]-j-V = T]V 



r " " eu in feudal, 



eirAevcra, 7ju|o 



o -f i = oi, " " oi in oil, " kolu6s, 

o -f- v = ov, " " ou in sound, " ovpav6s, 

v -\- i = w, " " whi in whine, " vlos, 

a> -J- v = av, (only Ionic,) " " ou in sound, " cout6sj also the im- 

pi'oper diphthongs, o, y, co (i. e. a -f- i, rj -j- t, co -f- «) ; " alcrxpS, Kepa, rrj, red. 

Rem. 2. The pronunciation of the diphthongs a, ??, w is the same as that of 
the simple vowels d, 77, «, though the ancient Greeks probably gave the 1 a 
slight sound after the other vowel. 

Rem. 3. With capital letters, the Iota subscript of a, 77, co, is placed in a 
line with the voAvels, but is not pronounced, e. g. Tfll KAAflI= rep /eaA.<£, -nf 
A1877, but aSr?. 



20 VOWELS. [$ 4. 

Rem. 4. The Iota subscript, which in the most nourishing period of the 
Greek language was always pronounced, at length became a silent letter, and 
was either omitted in writing, or was written under the vowel to which it 
belonged. It was first written under the vowel in the thirteenth century. 

Rem. 5. The following examples will show how the Romans sounded the 
diphthongs : ai is expressed by the diphthong ae, et by I and e, oi by oe, ov by m ; 
v was generally expressed by y, e. g. 

$cu8pos, Phaedrus ; Edpos, Eurus ; ©pa/ces, Thraces ; 

rA.au/cos, Glaucus ; Boiurla, Bceotia ; ©ppcrcro, Thressa ; 

NelXos, NIlus ; Movcra, Musa ; Tpaya>86s, tragoedus ; 

AvKe'iov, Lyceum ; EiAei&via, Ilithyia ; Kvpos, Cyrus. 

In words adopted later, the Romans expressed a> by o, as cidrj, ode. 

Rem. 6. When two vowels, which would regularly form a diphthong, are tc 
be pronounced separately, it is indicated by two points, called Diaeresis, placet, 
over the second vowel (i. v), e. g. atSot, for aldol, vis, frinrvos. If the acute 
accent is on the t or v, it is placed between the points ; if the circumflex, over 
them, as ai8r}s, K\e'idi, irpavs. 

Rem. 7. The pronunciation given under § 2a, as well as that given to the 
diphthongs above, is the one more generally adopted in New England. The 
original pronunciation of the Greek is lost. It is, therefore, the common, cus- 
tom for scholars (in each country) to pronounce it according to the analogy of 
their own language. This is the method proposed by Erasmus in the sixteenth 
century, and is generally adopted in Europe at the present day. The pronun- 
ciation defended by Reuchlin ' in the same century, corresponds nearly with 
the modern Greek. 

1 For the benefit of those who may wish to compare the two modes, the fol- 
lowing explanation of the Reuchlinian is extracted from the Greek Grammar 
of Sophocles : " A is pronounced like a in father, far. fi, y, 5, like b, g hard, 
d; in later times, like Romaic J3, y, S. Before k, y, %» !> 7 na ^ the sound of 
ng in hang, e, like Romaic e, or Italian e. £ like z, but stronger. t\, like Erench 
c, as in ftte. &, like th in thin, ether, saith. t, like i in machine, k, like k. 
A, /x, like I, m, respectively, v, like n. At the end of a word it was often pro- 
nounced and written as if it were a part of the next word. |, in the Attic 
dialect, like £s ; in the other dialects, like ks. In later times, the sound ks pre- 
vailed, o, like Romaic o, or Italian o. tt, like p. p, like r. At the begin- 
ning of a word it was rolled ; when it was doubled, only the second one was 
rolled. It was rolled, also, after &, <p, %• c, like s in soft, past. Before p, it 
was, in later times, sounded like £ and even changed into ( in writing ; as 
Zfxvpva, for 2/xvpa, in an inscription, t, like t in tell, strong, v, like Erench u. 
<f>, like/ but stronger. x> l^ ce Romaic x> German ch, or Spanish j (x). ^, in 
the Attic dialect, like <ps ; in the other dialects, like its. In later times, the 
sound its prevailed. a>, like o in note, nearly. When a consonant was doubled 
in writing, it was doubled also in pronunciation. During the most flourishing 
period of the language, both the vowels of a diphthong were distinctly heard 



I 5.\ CONSONANTS. 21 



§ 5. Consonants. 

1. The consonants are divided, first, according to the dif- 
ferent organs of speech, by which they are formed, into — 

Palatals, 7 /c % 
Linguals, $ t*& v\ p cr, 
Labials, /3 it cp jjl. 

Remark 1. The consonants, which are produced by the same organ of 
speech, are called cognate consonants ; thus y, k, % are cognate consonants. 

2. Consonants are divided again, according to the greater 
or the less influence of the organs of speech in their forma- 
tion, into breathings, liquids, and mutes. 

(a) The Breathings form a land of transition from the 
vowels to the consonants. There are three breath- 
ings : the lingual <r; the Spiritus Asper ( f ), correspond- 
ing to our h (§ 6) ; and the labial F (Digamma) ; on 
the last, see the remarks upon the Dialects. 

(b) The Liquids, \ p v p, are so called, because they easily 
coalesce with the other consonants. 

Rem. 2. The Breathings and Liquids are also included under the commoi 
name of semivowels, forming; a kind of transition to the full vowels. 



During the brazen age, and probably during the latter part of the silver age. 
the diphthongs ai, «, ov, had each the power of a single vowel, at, like ai in 
aisle ; in later times, like 77, or French e ; during the latter part of the brazen 
age, like e. av, like ou in our, house ; in later times, like av, of. et, like ei in 
freight, nearly ; in later times, like 1. During the silver and brazen ages, e was 
often prefixed to t long, merely to mark its quantity ; as Kpelvco, relo-at, Teifxrjaai. 
And when quantity began to be disregarded, even short t was represented by 
€t ; as El(rL5a>pos, ElcroKparris, yv/xva(reiapxr}<ras. ev, like eh-oo rapidly pro- 
nounced ; in later times, like ev, ef. ot, like oi in oil, nearly, ov, like oh-00 
rapidly pronounced ; in later times, like 00 in moon, or like French ou, Italian u. 
When the Boeotians used ov for v, they pronounced it long or short, according 
as the original u was long or short ; thus, in otiSoop, o-olv, it was short, like 00 in 
book ; in ov\r), aaovXia, long, like oo in moon, vi, like wi in twist ; vi, like whi in 
whip ; in later times, like v. As to the diphthongs ot, 77, a, av, -nv, cov, they 
differed from <u, ez, 01, av, ev, ov only in the prolongation of the first vowel. 
In later times, ot, 77, o> were pronounced like a, 77, a, respectively." — Tit. 



22 



BREATHINGS. 



[»* 



(c) The Mutes are formed by the strongest exertion of the 
organs of speech ; they are, ^yS^fCTrr^^. 

3. The Mutes are divided, 

(a) According to the organ of speech used in pronouncing 
them, into three Palatals, three Linguals, and three 
Labials ; 

(b) According to their names, .nto ujree Kappa, three 
Tau, and three Pi-mutes ; 

(c) According to the force of articulation, into three smooth, 
three medial, and three rough Mutes. 

Rem. 3. Hence each of the nine mutes may be considered in a threefold 
point of view, e. g. y may be called a palatal, a kappa-mute, or a medial, ac- 
cording as we wish to bring into view the organ by which it is pronounced, its 
name, or the force of articulation, a medial mute requiring less force to articu- 
late it than a rough mute. 



Palatals 


SMOOTH. 


MEDIAL. 


ROUGH. 




K 


7 


X 


Kappa-mutes 


Linguals 


T 


S 


$ 


Tau-mutes 


Labials tt 


P 


$ 


Pi-mutes 



Rem. 4. The consonants, which are produced by the same effort of the 
organs, are called coordinate, e. g. the smooth mutes, k, tt, t, are coordinate. 

4. From the coalescence of the Mutes with the Breath- 
ing a, three double consonants originate, — 

^ from tto- P<x <p<r, as rvxpw (tht), x^ Kv ^ ($<*)■> KarriKi^ (<p<r), 

| from K(T ya %*■> as K-6pa\ (ncr), Ae|w (ytr), ovv^ (x a ). 

£ is not, like \|/ and £, to be regarded as a sound compounded of two con- 
sonants, but as a soft hissing sound, to be pronounced like a soft z. 
Only in the adverbs in £e, is C to be considered as composed of <r8, e. g. 
'A&-fiva(<: instead of 'AS-nvasSe ; also, Pv(r}i> (close), for (3v(T$7)v (from $vv4a>, 
to stop, Perf. PePvo-fiai). It may be regarded, perhaps, as a transposition 
of sounds, as when the iEolic and Doric dialects use, in the middle of 
a word, ad instead of (T, C. g. /xeXiadeTai for fibeKi^etau 



§ G. Breathings . 
1. Every word beginning with a vowel has a smooth or 
a rough Breathing; the former (Spiritus Lenis) is indi- 



to 7, 8 ] hiatus. 23 

cated by the mark ( ' ) ; the latter (Spiritus Asper) by the 
mark ( r ). The rough breathing answers to the English 
and Latin h, e. g. Icrropla, historia, history. The smooth 
breathing is connected with every vowel which has not the 
rough ; but the smooth has no influence on the pronuncia- 
tion, e. g. ^AiroXKwv, Apollo. 

Remark 1. With diphthongs, the breathing is placed over the second vowel, 
e. g. oTos, ev&vs, avriKa. But when the improper diphthongs, a, y, a, are capital 
letters, the breathing is placed over the first vowel, as these three diphthongs 
are regarded, to a certain extent, as simple vowels, e. g. "AiStjs (^5rjs) ; ^Hi, ^rii 

Rem. 2. Originally, the Greeks had no mark for the smooth breathing. The 
rough breathing was at first denoted by E or H. But when H came to be used 
as a vowel, Aristophanes of Byzantium, about 200 years b. c, divided it into 
two characters I- and i, the former as the sign of the rough breathing, the 
latter of the smooth. Later, these became ( r ) and ( ), and at last ( ' ) and ( ' ). 

Rem. 3. The liquid p at the beginning of words has the rough breathing, 
e. g. pdfiSos. When two p's come together, the first has the smooth breathing, 
the last the rough, e. g. Tlvppos, Pyrrhus ; but some editors omit both breath- 
ings, e. g. Tlvppos. 

Rem. 4. At the beginning of a word, v always has the rough breathing, 
except in the .ZEolic dialect. 



CHANGES OF LETTERS. 

§ 7. General Remark. 

Both the vowels and consonants are subject to a variety of 
changes. These changes result from the tendency of the 
language to euphony, from their grammatical significance, and 
from the difference of dialects. The last will be considered 
in treating of the Dialects. 



I. Changes of the Vowels. 

S 8. Hiatus. 
The concurrence of two vowels in two successive sylla- 
bles or words, occasions a harshness in the pronunciation, 



24 EUPHONIC CONTRACTION OF VOWELS. [| 9. 

called Hiatus. Thk is avoided by Contraction, Crasis, 
Synizesis, and Elision. 

Remark 1. The poets, particularly the Attic, were decidedly averse to the 
Hiatus of two vowels in two successive words ; among the prose-writers, the 
orators sought most carefully to avoid it. 

Rem. 2. In the Iambuses of the tragic poets, the Hiatus is allowed in Uie 
interrogative ri; what ? e. g. t'l ovv ; rl elires ; among the comic poets, its use is 
mostly confined to ri, on, ire pi, 3>, e.g. on is, on ovx'h Tepl v/xwv, also in ou5e 
(/x77§e) efs (eV), ne anus qiridem, to distinguish it from ovdeis, nullus. In addition 
to its use in the Iambic measure, the Hiatus is found frequently, even in the 
Tragedians, who endeavored to avoid it when possible ; still, it is mostly limited 
to special cases ; for example, it occurs with interjections and imperatives, e. g. 
3>, vai, &va {up!), t&i, as foi, fth fioi ircu&v, Soph. Ph. 832; aK>C &ua, e| e5pa 
va>y, Aj. 194. On the Hiatus in the Epic dialect, see § 200. 



§ 9. A. Contraction of Vowels. 

Contraction is the union of two successive vowels in the 
same word into one long syllable. These contractions arise 
either from the natural coalescence of two successive vowels, 
in accordance with the laws of euphony, or from grammatical 
principles. The first kind of contractions is called euphonic, 
the latter, grammatical. In the Common language, the follow- 
ing contractions occur : — 

I. Euphonic Contractions. 



(a) a +a 


= a 


as • (T€\aa = (re\a 


* +* 


= et 


11 <j>i\ee = <pi\€i (Comp. No. II.) 


« + ' 


= l 


>l iropni = iroprl 


o -j- 


= ov 


" voos == vows 


(b)a-f-s ) 


. 


" ri/xae = Ti/id 


a +V > 




>; Tlp.a.7]T€ = TljJ.aTG 


«+i 


= a 


' ; 7T7pai" = 777pa 


a+o } 




'" njj.a.0jj.£V = n/j.a>/xev 


a + « > 




' ; TLfxdai/JLev = nfxci/xev 


«+« I 




" njxaeis = r:,uas 


o.+v i 


— ' 


" TLjxar,s = tijjlS.s 


a -\- oi 


= CO 


'' Tlfldoifll = Tlfl^fil 


a -\~ ov 


= CO 


" njxdov = Tiftco 


(c)e -f-d 


= 7J 


" Tei'xed == Teix^7 (Comp. No. II.) 


e -j- a 


= d 


" X°^d = X°" 


* + « 


= et 


" Tetxei' = ret'xei 


s + o 


= ou 


" <pi\eo/xev = (pi\ov/J.€v 


e -f" w (a>) 


= CO (w) 


" (plXeCO = (plXw, 0CTT60J = OffT^ 


6 -j- a* 


= JJ 


" rvirreai = rvirrrt 



♦ 9.J GRAMMATICAL CONTRACTIONS 25 



e -f- et 


= et 


as 


cpiXeeis = cpiXeTs 


f +!? 


— # 


" 


<piXer;s = (piXys 


€ -f- 01 


= 01 


c< 


cpiXeois = (piXoTs 


€ + OU 


= ov 


" 


cpiXeov = cpiXov 


(d) 77 -f € 


= 7? 


" 


vXrjecrcra = vXrjtrcra 


77 + z 


= V 


" 


Qp-fl'icro-a = Qpfjcrcra 


77 + « 


— V 


cc 


Ti/xfeis = Tc^urjs 


(e) i + « 




" 


ir6prias — irSprls 


« + 6 


== i 


" 


ir6prt.es = TrSprls 


(f)o+« 


= &> 


" 


alS6a = cuSto (Comp. No. II.) 


o+e 


= ov 


" 


fiicr&oe = /j.icr&ov 


o +77 


= CO 


cc 


fjo.crfr67iT€ = fucrfrcore 


*+< 


= 01 


cc 


cdd6i = alSoT 


+ CO (to) 


— w (v) 


" 


liicr&oto = [j.icr&to, ttXSco = 7rA<p 


o + ax 


= ai 


" 


iotAo'cu = airXai 


O + €i 




" 


fiicr&oei = fiicr^oT ( Comp. Rem. 2.) 


0+7? 


= 01 


" 


fiicr&6r) — fj.tcr&o? 


+ 01 




cc 


/xicr&Soifii = fAio-frot/M 


+ OU 


= ov 


cc 


/xicr&6ovcn = jAicr&ovcTi 


(g) i; + a 




cc 


tX&vas = i'x&i/s 


,+e 


= V 


cc 


iX&ve? = Ix&vs 


v +77 




" 


tJeiKvvrjTai. = Sew^uTat (rarely) 


(h) to + a 


= CO 


" 


Tipaa = H\pu> (only in Ace. of some Sub. of 


0) + l 


= to 


" 


Xco'icrros = Xcparos. [3d Dec 



Remark 1 . The above contractions take place in accordance with the fol- 
lowing principles: (1) Both vowels are retained and form a diphthong, e. g. 
Te^xei* = Tetxei, ald6'i = aldou (2) Both vowels coalesce into a cognate long 
vowel or diphthong, e. g. Ti/xdopev == ri/xto/xev, alSoa = alSto. (3) A short vowel 
is absorbed by a diphthong or long vowel preceding or following it ; e. g. 
cpiXeco = cpiXto, cpiXeov = cpiXov, vX^ecrcra = vXTJcrcra. (4) The short vowels, a, t, 
v, absorb the following vowel and become long ; e. g. riuae = ri/xd, Ix&vas = 
tX&vs. (5) A short vowel coalesces with the first vowel of a diphthong, ac- 
cording to the preceding principles ; when the second vowel is t, it is subscribed 
with o, 77, w, but if it is any other vowel it is dropped ; e. g. ri/xdrjs = tc^os, 

TlfidoiflL = TlfAtofJU = Tt/XCXOU = Tl[Xto, TVTTTeai = TVTTTr). 

II. Grammatical Contractions. 

(ii) e + e = 77, particularly in the third Dec, e. g. rpi^pee = rpirjpr], yeuee 
= 761/77. 

(1>) c + o = d in the second Dec, e. g. oared = octtu, xpv°~* a = XP V0 & 
(PL), and elsewhere, if a vowel precedes, c g. TlepucXe-ea =~ 
UepiKXed, /cAe-ea = /cAed, vyi-ea = vyici ; in the Ace PL 
Pern, of Adjectives in -eos, -ea, -eov, e. g. xpvo~e-as = xp^craSj 
finally, in the Pern, of Adjectives in -eos, -4a, -eov, when 
these endings are pi-eceded by a vowel or p, e. g. epe-eos, 
e-€o, 6-eoi/ = ipeovs, epea, ipeovv, dpyvpeos, ea, eoy = ovs, 
a, ow. 

3 



26 crasis. [HO 

€ -f- a = t\ in the Pern. Sing, of adjectives in -eos, not preceded by a 
vowel or p ; e. g. xP v<r * a — XP va v, xP U(reas = XP V(y ^ s - 

€ -f- a = ei in Accusatives PL in eas of third Dec, e. g. aa<p4-as = <ra 
<pe?s ; so -rr6Xeis, -n-fix^is, iyx^\eis, from 7r^Aeas, etc. 
(c) o -f- a = » m Adjectives in Jos, 07), oov, e.g. air\6-a — avXa. 

o -\- 7} = 7) in Adjectives in Jos, or], 6ov, e. g. airXo-r] = airXr). 

o -J- a = ov in Accusative PL of £o0s ; so also /j.d£oas = p.el£ovs, anrf 
the like. 

Rem. 2. The contraction of oet into ov is found only in the Inf. Act. of 
rerbs in 6a, and is accounted for from the fact that the Inf. originally ended in 
iv y not in eiv (consequently, not pur&6eiv = fiio-bow, but finr^6ev = ixia&ovv), 
and in adjectives in 6eis, e. g. 'OirSeis = 'Ottovs, in which the root ends in oevr, 
and consequently the t does not belong to the root. On the accentuation of 
contract forms, see § 30. 

Rem. 3. The Tragic poets sometimes neglect the contractions on account 
of the measure, yet only in the lyric and anapestic passages, not written in the 
pure Attic dialect, e. g. KaXia, Aesch. Ag. 147 ; rpo/xeav, Prom. 542 ; veiiceos, 
Sept. 936; eVeo, Soph. OC. 182; evpei, Trach. 114. 

Rem. 4. Sometimes the grammatical importance of the ending, or the form 
of the nominative, prevents the usual contraction, especially if the ending 
would thereby become doubtful. 



$ 10. B. Crasis. 

1. Crasis (fcpacris) is the coalescence of the final and 
initial vowels of two successive words into one long sylla- 
ble, e. g. to ovo/jLa = Tovvo/jLa, to e7ro<;=Toi>7ro$. 

Remark 1. The mark of Crasis is the same as that of the Spiritus 
Lenis ( ' ), and is named Coronis. It is placed over the vowel or diphthong 
formed by Crasis, but is omitted when the word begins with a vowel or diph- 
thong so formed, because it would then coincide with the Spiritus Lenis, e. g. 
Tct aya&d = raya^d ; & &v = av ; a &u&paTre = tivfrpaire. On the accentuation, 
see § 31, II; on the change of the smooth Mute into the rough before the 
Spiritus Asper, as rb vSap = frovSap, see 4 below, and § 17, Rem. 3. 

2. Crasis is found only with closely connected words, the first 
of which is unimportant; hence it most frequently occurs, (a) 
with the article, e. g. 6 avrjp = avrjo, tov dvSoos = rdvopos ; — (b) 
frequently with /Wand the interjection o>, e. g. /cat aperrj = Kaperrj, 
& avSpwTrc = wv3po)7r€, w dya#e = uryaSe, a> dva£ = wra£ ; — (c) some- 
what often in eyw with oTSa and ot//,cu, e. g. iyu>8a, iyutpau; — 
(d) less often with the neuter relative 6 and a, as o eyw, a cyw = 
ovya), dyw; with rot, jxivroi, ovrot, particularly in connection 



$ 11.] MOST COMMON INSTANCES OF CRASIS. 27 

with aV, apa, e. g. rav (seldom in prose), //.cvtoV; rapa and ovrapa 
(poetic) ; but seldom with 7rp6, e. g. irpovpyov for irpb 'dpyov ; fre- 
quently in composition with the augment e, as rrpovSioKa. 

3. As the second word is the most important, it has properly 
a greater influence on the form of the Crasis, than the first ; on 
this principle it is to be explained, that the Iota subscript is 
used only when the t belongs to the last of the two vowels, 
e. g. Kat ctra = Kara, eya> oT8a = eya»oa ; on the contrary, Kat en-ci- 
ra = KaVciTa; at dya#at = aya&u, tw o^\w = tw^A.w. 

4. When Crasis occurs with the article, and an a follows, the 
vowels of the article — even ov and o> — ■ are combined with the 
following a into a long a, and, if the article is aspirated, the 
aspirate is transferred to the long a, e. g. 6 av-qp = awjp, ol avopes 
= aVopes, to akirjSis = Ta\r)$£<s, to, aXAa = raAAa, rov avSpos = ravSpos, 
t<3 avSpl = ravSpt ; also, to9 avTov = tclvtov, tu aur<3 = raur^. 

Rem. 2. Also the forms of the article ending in o, o, ou, «, y, oi, at, among 
the Attic poets, comhine with the first vowel of erepos (Doric arepos), and 
form long a ; when the second word has the aspirate, as here, the preceding 
smooth mute must he changed into the cognate rough; see also § 17, Rem. 3 
e. g.: — 

ra erepa = &&repa 6 erepos = arepos rod kripov = Saripov 

t$ erepa = frarepa oi erepoL == arepoi at Urepai = arepai 

5. In Crasis, at of the particle Kat coalesces with the follow- 
ing vowel, the a being sometimes retained and sometimes 
absorbed, e. g. Kat eKetvos = kolkuvos, Kat av = koV, Kat £v = kolv, Kat 
eyw = Kayai [Kat ct = Ket, Kat ets = Ket?, poetic], Kat t}\Sov = K.y)\$ov 
[if at ov = kov, Kat evSaifiwv = KevSaifXtov, poetic]. 

§ 11. Summary of the most common instances of 
Crasis. ■ 

(a) The following cases conform to the rules of contraction 
given in 4 9 : — 

a-r-a = a\ a-f-« = «; a-f-o = »; o-j-o = w 1 

o -f" e = ov; o -(- * — oi; 77 — |— e = rj ; » + a = ». 

(b) The following instances belong to Crasis only: — 

-f" v = ov as: to vScop = fraffiup (§17, Rem. 3.) 
+ av = av " to avr6 = tovt<{ 
• + «u = a :e b a&Tiov = t$tiov 



^8 SYNIZESIS. ELISION. [$$ 12, 13 

o -f- oi = u> as : 6 olvos = Svos 

o +v =V " to rjixirepov == Sfrj^repov (§ 17, Rem. 3.) 

CO -f" 6 = CO " TW C/ifp = TQO[X(^ 

co -f- o = co " tco 6(p&a\iA(£> = raxp^aX/xca 

oi -f- o = o <k (xivroi av — fievrav 

oi -f- 6 = ou " croi ecrTty == crolcrTiv, /xoi eSo'/cet = /j.ovo6kgi (bothpoetia. 

OU -f* € = OU " 7T0V CCTTtJ/ = TTOUCTTtJ/ 

ou -|- o = ov " tou bvojxaros = robv6ixaros 

ov-j- v = ov " tou uSotos = frovSaros (§ 17, Rem. 3.) 

rj -f- ?7 = V " T P yptpy = &7i/j.4pa (§17, Rem. 3.) 

co -f- cu = cp " 670b oTSa = eyc^So 

ou -\~ V = 77 " tow 7]/j.er4pov == &7}fj.eTepov, poetic. (§17, Rem. 3.) 

00 -f- ou = ou " tou ovpavov == robpavov 

cu -f- « = <j " /cat elra = Kara 

(c) Here belong the examples given under $ 10, 4 and 5. 



§ 12. C. Synizesis. 

1. Synizesis is the contraction in pronunciation of two 
vowels into one syllable, e. g. when firj ov is pronounced as 
a monosyllable. It can occur only among the poets, but 
may have been used in the common colloquial language. 

Remark. The difference between Contraction and Synizesis is, that in the 
ordinary Contraction and also in Crasis, the contraction is made in writing, 
e. g. c/>iAco from c/xAeco, robpavov from tou ovpavov 5 but in Synizesis, it is made 
only in the pronunciation, both vowels or diphthongs being written out in full. 

2. In the Attic poets, Synizesis occurs almost exclusively 
between two words, viz., with zttu, r), y, fJLrj, followed by «, ov, a, 
oi, e. g. C7r€t ou, r) ovScls (dis syllable), pirj ov (monosyllable), ^ 
aWoi, iyo) ov (dissyllable), and ey<6 elfii S. Ph. 577; also, in a 
few single words and forms, e. g. #eot (=&oi, monosyllable), 
kwpaKa (=<opaKa, trissyllable), avetpy fxzvos ( = dvcoy/xevos, four sylla- 
bles), particularly in the Ionic- Attic Genitive -ccos, as (styo-ews 
(dissyllable). On Synizesis in Homer, see $ 2D6. 

§ 13. D. Elision. 

1. Elision is the omission of a short final vowel before 
the initial vowel of the following word. It occurs also in 
compounds, but the apostrophe is then omitted. 



1 14.] USE OF ELISION IN THE POETS. 29 

Remark 1. The mark, of Elision is tne same as tnat of the Spiritus Lenis, 
and is called apostrophe, as rovr '4gtiv, yevoir &v. 

Rem. 2. Elision differs from Crasis in that the former elides the vowel, 
while the latter lengthens it, e. g. &AA' dye (Elision), to. d\\a = tSaAo (Crasis). 
This distinction, however, does not hold, when the second word begins with a 
long vowel or diphthong, e. g. rb avr6 = ravrS. 

2. In the prose writers, Elision is confined mainly to the 
following cases, where it often occurs : — 

(a) In prepositions which end in a vowel, except irepi and irpb; also /*e'xpi 
and &xph use( i as prepositions, but rarely in eW/cec, e. g. 81 oIkov, iir' oIkov, but 
irepl oIkov, irpb oikov. Elision is regular in composition, except with irepi, irp6, 
and sometimes d[x.<pi, e. g. aveK&eiv, but irepiopqv; 

(b) In conjunctions and adverbs, aAAd*, dpa, apa, d/xa, elra, eirena, jxdXa, 
udKiffTa, rdxa, and in many other adverbs ending in a before &v ; also in the 
following adverbs and conjunctions, 'Iva, y4, re, $£, ov84, /xr]Z4, 8>o~tc, tire (not 
#rt), 7roT6 (with the compounds, as ofo-ore), t^t*, %ri, ovk4ti, /xiikcti ; e. g. aAA' 
avros, dp ovv, /xd\i(TT &V; 

(c) In forms of pronouns in a, o, e, as ravra, roiavra, oAAo, rlva\ Tr6repa 
more rare ; tovto, avrS, 4/x4, o~4, ad (never in t6, rd) ; also in nouns and adjectives 
of the second and third declensions, ending in o, as aixapr^fiaTa, etc.; dpiara, 
etc. ; epya, e. g. tout' ahrd, irdvT dya&d, XPW* 7 ' «s <p4pei ; 

(d) In (prjfjLt, oTSo, ola-fra, and generally in verbal forms in pi, <ri, i,'d, e, o, e. g. 
(pilfM iyd>, olS' oVSpa, ikeyer' dv, hvirrovT &v, yei/on" 1 &v ; of the forms which 
admit the v Paragogic (§ 15), in prose, only io-rl often suffers elision ; 

(e) In certain familiar phrases, as vt] A'C ecprj. 

Rem. 3. The above elisions are most frequent in the orators, particularly 
Isocrates, much more seldom in the historians. 

Rem. 4. A smooth mute before an aspirate is changed into the correspond- 
ing rough, as vdv& Sera. 

Rem. 5. A vowel, followed by a punctuation-mark, cannot be elided. Hence, 
in words closely connected, as vf\ Af e^rj, the comma is omitted, for in such cases, 
without doubt, the ancients pronounced the words nn quick saccession. On 
accent in Elision, see § 31, III. 



§ 14. Use of Elision in the Poets. 

1. The use of Elision in poetry is very frequent, and much more extended 
than in prose ; yet the following points are to be noted : A word ending in u is 
never elided ; nor a, i, o in a monosyllable ; hence the article t6, and the pro- 
nouns rt and t/, are not elided ; and irepi in no case, — at least among the Attic 
poets, — nor on, fiexph &XPh nor substantive adverbs of place ending in &i 
{oSn excepted), and very rarely the Optative ending in eie. 

2. The Elision of the t in the Dat. of the third Dec, particularly in the 
Sing., is ve;y rare in the Attic poets, and is even doubted by many. 

3. The verbal endings, jxai, tcu, <r&at, which are short in respect to th» 



50 N Paragogic. [f lft 

accent, are rarely elided in the Attic poets ; the Datives \xoi and <rot are nevei 
elided. 

4. In the verbal forms which may take the v Paragogic (e<£eA/cu<rTt/c(fo), the 
poets use Elision or the v, according to the necessities of the verse. 

5. Sometimes in Attic poetry, a weak and grammatically unimportant sylla- 
ble is excluded by a preceding long vowel ; this is specially the case with the 
augment e, e. g. Tax« 3 iropevcrav, Soph. OC. 1602, eVel 'Sdicpvffa, Phil. 360. This 
omission of the vowel is called aphaeresis (a<paipe<ris). It can also occur after 
a punctuation-mark, e. g. <ppd<rw ' 'irei^ tj!&> • VI loiron. 



$15. N Paragogic {Z<j>e\Kv<rTiK6v). — Ovtu(s). — 'Ei and 
€K. — Ov(k). 

1. Another means of avoiding the concurrence of two vowels 
in two successive words is by appending a v 3 (v ZfeXicvo-TiKov, or 
Paragogic,) to certain final syllables, viz. : — 

(a) to the Dat. PL in m, to the adverbs Tripvo-i, iravraTrao-i, and 

all adverbs of place in crt, as ttoxtiv e\e£a; 17 nAaratao-iv 

rrye/xovLa ; 
(/?) to the third Pers. Sing, and PL in <tl, as rxmrovrnv ipc, 

TtSyjcnv ev rfj rpairitfl ; SO also with Icrri ) 
(y) to the third Pers. Sing, in c, e. g. hvirrev c/xe; 
(8) to the numeral cikoo-i, though even before vowels the v 

is often omitted, e. g. clkoo-lv avope? and e'Uocn avSpes; 
(c) to the Demonstrative C (§ 95, e) but rarely, and then 

always after o-, e.g. ovtoo-w, Ikuvoctlv, tovtovo-iv, ovtomtw ; 
(£) to the Epic particles, vv and /ce, and to the Epic suffix <f>i; 

hence also to v6cr<f>L. 

Remark. The poets place the v Paragogic before a consonant, so as to make 
a short syllable long by position. In Attic prose, it stands regularly at the end 
of a book or section ; it is, also, sometimes found before the longer punctuation- 
marks, and sometimes elsewhere for the sake of a more emphatic pronun 
ciation. 

2. The adverb ovrw? always retains its full form before a 
vowel, but drops the final s before a consonant, e. g. ovrois liroir^ 
crev, but ovTio ttolw ; still, ovtws may stand even before consonants, 
when it is to be made emphatic, e. g. ovtw? ye, Xen. C. 3. 6, 9. 

3. So the Prep. i£ retains its full form before vowels and at 
the end of a sentence, but before consonants becomes oc, e. g. 
l£ cip7Jn/9, but iK Trjs dprjvrjs ; so also in composition, e. g. e&Xaw- 



J 16.J STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VOWELS. 31 

vov, but cKreAetj/. It also has its full form when it stands aftei 
the word it governs, and is then accented, dp-qvqs eg. 

4. So ovk has its full form before a vowel, e. g. ovk al<rxp6<s; 
before a vowel with the rough breathing it becomes ofy, e. g- 
ovx fjSvs', but before a consonant, ov, e. g. ov kolXos; so also fxyjK&n 
(instead of firj hi) after the analogy of ovkIti. 

Eem. 2. When ov stands at the end of a discourse, or of a sentence, and is 
to be pronounced with emphasis, the form ov with the acute accent is used 
even before a vowel ; in this case there must be an actual break in the discourse, 
as when ov stands at the end of an answer expressed interrogatively, without 
connection with what follows, as Uws yhp ov] TAp ovv kt\. Xen. C. 4. 2, 37 ; 
or when it is found in the answer only, and corresponds to our No ; it is found 
especially in antithetical sentences, e. g. Taya&d, rk Se kaica o v : 'Eai/ 5e ktK. 
Xen. C. 1. 2, 42 ; Al&ovs els rov irora/AOu ipplirrow, Qikvovvts %s ov, o&re ej8Ao7r- 
tov ovSeva. An. 4. 8, 3. If, on the contrary, the following sentence is closely 
connected with the preceding, then it is written ovk, e. g. ovk, aAA& kt\. Xen. 
C. 2. 6, 11. and 13 ; 4. 6, 2 ; ovk, ei or ijv kt\. Hell. 1. 7, 19. 

$ 16. Strengthening, Weakening, Prolongation, Shortening, Inter- 
change, and Variation of Vowels. — Influence of a Vowel or 
a Consonant on another Vowel. — Syncope. — Omission of a 
Vowel. — Euphonic Prothesis. 

The changes, which further take place in vowels, are : — 

i. Strengthening of vowels ; this consists in changing a weaker vowel into a 
stronger (see § 4, Rem. 1). There are different degrees of strength in the 
voweb ; the weakest is e. The strengthening takes place, e. g. in words of the 
third Dec. in os, Gen. -eos; the pure stem of these words ends in es: in the 
Norn., however, which prefers fuller forms, the weaker e is changed into the 
stronger o (in Latin into u), e. g. yivos, genus, Gen. yeveos (instead of yeveo~-os), 
gen8r-is. In yovv and 56pv (Gen. ySvar-os, SSpar-os), a, the final vowel of the 
stem, is changed into the stronger v. 

2. The weakening or attenuation of vowels ; this is the opposite of the 
change just described ; it occurs, e. g. in substantives of the third Dec. in -Is, -t, 
-i5r, -i> ; in these, the stronger stem- vowels 1 and v are changed into the weaker e, 
e. g. ir&Kts, ttSXcws ; irrjxvs, Tvr)X e<as 5 cfown, aivdireos ; &o'tv, &o~reos. So with 
adjectives in -vs, -v, e. g. y\vK6s, y\vKi, Gen. -eos. 

3. Prolongation of vowels ; this changes a short vowel into a long vowel or 
diphthong, viz. a into i\ or ai 5 t into r or ei ; v into or ev ; e into i\ or et ; o into c* 
or ov. This prolongation takes place either for the sake of euphony, or from 
grammatical reasons, or from both together ; in the poets often on account of the 
metre. The prolongation of vowels is very prevalent in the Greek language. 
One instance only is here mentioned, namely, the strengthening of the Present 
tense in Mute and Liquid verbs, e. g. Kptvw, irKvvw, \-fi&w, (paivoo, Aehrw, <pevy*. 



32 INTERCHANGE AND VARIATION OF VOWELS. [$ 16. 

instead of Kptvco, irxivo}, \afrca, (pavca, xtirco, <pvyco. — The reason of the prolon* 
gation is very often found in the omission ofay with a Tau-mute, more rarely 
of a mere v, or in the omission of a <r after a Liquid, or of a final Sigma, e. g. 
dSovs instead of odSvrs, didovs instead of 5i86vts, jSouAeiW instead of /3ouAeu- 
ovts ; jiekas instead of p.4\avs ; %<r<priXa instead of eo-cpaXaa, tfyyeiXa instead of 
ijyyeXo~a, ecp&eipa instead of e<p&epo~a; p-ryrwp instead of pT)Tops, iroifj.7}i' instead 
of Troifievs, daifxwv instead of Sai/xoi/s, aldds instead of aldoas, aXT)frf)s instead of 
aXri&eos. 

4. Shortening of vowels. See the remarks on the Dialects § 207. 

5. Interchange of vowels ; this consists in softening a long vowel into a 
short one, and as a compensation, in lengthening the short vowel immediately 
following. Thus, in the Ionic and Attic dialects, ea> instead of do, e. g. 'iXecos, 
-uv, instead of 'Ix&os, -ov, Xeds instead of Ado's, yews instead of vdos, MeveAews 
instead of MeveXaos ; further, in the Attic dialect, fiajiXecos, fiaariXea instead of 
the Ionic fiao-iXTjos, -rja) so also, Tr6\cas, ?ri7X e «s> Attic, instead of ir6\ios, 
Trf)X V0S i e is weaker than t and v, see No. 2. 

6. Variation, i. e. the change of the radical vowel e into o and a, for the 
formation of the tenses (§ 140) and derivatives (§ 231, 6); when et in the 
Present is lengthened from the radical i, it becomes oi in the second Perf, hut 
when from the radical e, it becomes o ; e. g. rpe^co, rerpocpa, irpa<priv ; Xelxt* 
(root A(7r), XiXonra, tp&eipa (root </>&ep), tcp&opa, i<p&apr]v ; <px4ya, <|>Ao| ; Tpex«, 
rpoxos] rpecpoo, rpocp-f], rpocpevs, rpacpepSs. Comp. Germ, stehle, gestohlen, stahl, 
English, ring, rang, rung. The 77 is changed into », e. g. ap-fiyw, apayf). 

Remark 1. Whether the a is to be regarded as a variation, or rather as a 
euphonic change of e, introduced by a preceding or following Liquid, partic- 
ularly p and A, sometimes even p and v, may be doubted. Comp. erpairov, 
eTpdcprju, i(TTpd(pT]v, ifipaxw, iddprjv, ity&dpqv, i&TdXrjv, erapov, 4ktolvov with 
4^4y7]v, irtkov. 

7. Change of a vowel by the influence of another vowel or of a consonant. 
Here belong two special cases: — 

(a) The Attic writers change the Ionic t\ into a after the vowels e and t and 
the diphthongs ending with t, sometimes even after other vowels, and 
after the Liquid p, e. g. lS4a (Ion. iS4rj), <ro(pla, %pela, 7)(J.4pa, apyvpa, 
iirldya, iiripava ; 

(b) The union-vowel e in verbs in w, is changed into before the terminations 
beginning with /* and v, e. g. fiovXtvofxtv, fiovXevovrai, i^ovXevofxev, ejSov 
Xeiouro. 

8. Syncope (a-vyKoirrj) , i. e. the omission of e in the middle of a word between 
a Mute and a Liquid, or between two Liquids, or between 7tt ; the same, also, 
occurs in the declension of certain substantives of the third Dec, e. g. irarp6s 
instead of irarepos ; in the forming of the Present tense of certain verbs, e. g. 
yiyvop.ai instead of yiyeyoficu, ttlittco instead of iwrerw, /jlI/jlvo: instead of fii/m-eva) ; 
and in the formation of the tenses of some verbs, e. g. 7)yp6/xr}v from iyeipw ; 
Syncope rarely occurs after a, e. g. i(*x°v, eo-7r6>7?y, earat, instead of ea-exov. 
io-eTrSixyv, ifftrai. A striking example of Syncope is found in ^xStov instead 
of %XvS>ou, from 'EAEY0fl. Comp. § 155 



♦ 17.) 



33 



9. Apocope. See on the Dialects, § 207. 

10. One of the vowels o, e, o is prefixed to several words, for the sake of 
euphony. This is called euphonic prothesis, e. g. affTepoiri] and trrepoTnft, aarcupis 
and aracpls, ex&es and x<^ es » eKeTvos and kuuos, i&4\u and £-eA«, oKpvoeis and 
Kpvos, oSvpo/ACU and dvpo/jLcu, o/ceAAw and /ceAAco, etc. 

Rem. 2. From these euphonic letters care must he taken to distinguish 
(1) a when it stands for air6, e. g. a-fiweiv, to avert, or when used instead of 
avd, e. g. a,mWeij/, to tear up, or instead of the a or a copulative with the 
meaning of a/xa, from which also a intensive has been formed ; (2) e, when it 
is used instead of e| or £v, e. g. iyetpew, to wake up, epevyew, eructare, ipe&eiy, 
irritare 5 (3) with the meaning of 6/j.ov, e. g. dfiix^-V' 



II. Changes of the Consonants 
$ 17. a. Mutes. 

1. The changes of the consonants arise, in a great degree, 
from the tendency of language to assimilate different sounds. 
This assimilation is either a me*e resemblance in sounds, as 
when AAey-raris changed into AcAcktcu, the smooth r chang- 
ing the medial y into the smooth k ; or it is a complete identity 
: .n sounds, as when aw-pCima is changed into cruppi7rTw. — 
Sometimes, however, the language shuns a sameness in sound, 
and seeks to remove it by changing similar sounds into dissim- 
ilar, e. g. 7T€-(JiLA.r]Ka for <j>e-<j>L\r)i«x, 2<X7r</>w for ^a<£</>w. 

2. A Pi-mute (tt /?</>) or a Kappa-mute (xy^) before a Tau- 
mute (t 8 #) must be coordinate with the Tau-mute, i. e. only 
a smooth Mute (tt k) can stand before the smooth t ; only a 
medial (/? 7) before the medial 8; only an aspirate ($ \) before 
the aspirate #; consequently, ttt and kt\ fi8 and yS; </>$ an 
X$, e. g. 

(from Tp£/8«) 
ypd<pu) 
Ae-yw) 
fy>e'x«0 

KU7TTO>) 

irAe/cco ) 
£pe'xw) 
7re^7rco) 
TpijSco) 
irAe/ceo) 



£ before t 


into 7T as : (i 


<*> 


u 


T 


it 


7T « ( 


7 


u 


T 


" 


K " ( 


X 


tc 


T 


" 


K " ( 


IT 


K 


8 


a 


/3 " ( 


* 


" 


8 


u 


" ( 


K 


(( 


8 


a 


7 " ( 


X 


(( 


8 


a 


7 " ( 


K 


a 


& 


(( 


<*> " ( 


3 


" 


£ 


" 


4> " ( 


R 


u 


& 


" 


X " ( 


y 


u 


d 


» 


X " ( 



r4rpifi-rai 


= TtTpiirrai 


y4ypa<p-rcu 


— yeypaarrai 


\4\cy-rcu 


■— AeAe/crcu 


j8e£pex~ Tat 


= /Je/Jpe/crai 


Ki57r-8a 


= KvPda 


ypd(p-5r}u 


= ^pciiSSTjv 


ir\4K-8rii> 


= ir\eySr)i> 


Ppex-Sw 


= fSpeySrjv 


itrefjiir-frrit/ 


= iir4(.«p&7}v 


irpifi-frriv 


= eTpl<p&r]V 


t7rAe/c-&ijJ/ 


= iir\4x^V* 


ixdy-^yjv 


— eAe'x^rjJ'. 



34 MUTES. [f 17 

Remark 1. The preposition 4k remains unchanged, probably by virtue of an 
original movable <r, thus e/cs, e. g. 4k8ovv(ii, iK&eivcu, etc., not iydovveu, 4x&wai. 

3. The smooth Mutes (tt k t) before a rough breathing, are 
changed into the cognate aspirates (<j> x $), not only in inflec- 
tion and derivation, but also in two separate words, the rough 
breathing being transferred from the vowel to the smooth Mute ; 
but the medials (/2 y B) are thus changed only in the inflection 
of the verb ; elsewhere there is no change, hence : — 

air' ov = d(£' ov, iirfjficpos (from 4irl, Tj/J-epa) = 4<pJ}(j.epos 
iirvcpaivu (from 4iri, ixpaiva)) = 4(pv(paivco, T6TU7t-o = Tervcpa 
ovk ocriws = ovx oaias, SeKTjfxepos (from Scko, Tj^pa) = Sex^^pos 
avjeXKu = ap&4\K<o = from cut/, €Ako>), but ovdels (not ovfrels, from ovS" and tts) 
etAoy-a = eJfAoxa, but \4y 4r4pav (not Aex' kripav) 
Terpifi-a = TerpKpa, but rplf? ovtods (not rpTfi ovrws). 

Rem. 2. The negative ovk (ov) thus becomes ovx, e. g. ovx ySvs', yet this 
change does not occur before the aspirate />, e. g. ob piirTw. In some com- 
pounds, the smooth Mute is retained even in the Attic dialect, according to 
Ionic usage, e. g. cwnjAtwT^s (east wind, from airo and tj\ios), XevKnriros (one who 
rides a white horse, from \wk6s and 'fairos), KpcLrnnros, etc. 

Rem. 3. This change of the smooth Mute before the rough breathing takes 
place also in Crasis (§§ 10 and 11), e. g. ret erepa == frfrrepa, to IfxaTiov = bolfia.- 
riov, Kal erepos = x& Te P°Sj «<** oaa '6ffTis, onus = x&°~ a > X^ aTls ) X^ 7rft ' s ' Yet 
this Crasis is only poetic. When the smooth Mutes irr or kt precede the rough 
breathing, both must be changed into Aspirates (No. 2), e. g. 4<pfrfj[jLepos instead 
of eirT-fj/xcpos (from eirrd, rifjiepa), vvx^' oAtjv instead of vvkt o\r\v. Attic prose 
uses also the full forms, e. g. vvkto. q\t\v. 

Rem. 4. In some compounds, the aspirated liquid p changes the preceding 
smooth Mute into the Aspirate, e. g. (ppolfiiov, formed by Crasis from irpooijjuov 
(from irp6 and ol/xos) ; Te&punrov (from rdrpa and iWos), dpatrco) from rapdaacoj 
so (ppovdos from irp6 and 656s. 

4. On the contrary, a rough Mute cannot stand before the 
same rough Mute, but is changed into the corresponding smooth, 
e. g. ^a7r<pu), Baxxos, titSt), 'AtSis; not Sa<£</>w, Ba^o?, tlSStj, 
A££is: on the same principle, when p is doubled, the first 
Aspirate disappears, e. g. ILvppos, not Tlvppos. 

5. A Tau-mute (t 8 #) before another Tau-mute is changed 
into o- (comp. claustrum from claudo) ; but it disappears before 
k (in Perf. and Plup. Act.), e. g. 

iiretb-frnv (from 7re&«) becomes eirelo-frrii/ 

ireifr-reos ( " ird&eo) " ireurrios 

7]pei5-^riu ( " 4pelBw) " T)puo~frqv 

r4irei&-Ka ( u Tci&a>) " ireireiKa. 



I 18.J LIQUIDS. 35 

6. The t, which, in the Attic dialect very often becomes <r, is 
frequently changed into o- by the influence of a following t, e. g. 
irkovanos (instead of irXovnos, from 7r\ovros), 'AfxaSovo-Los (instead 
of 'AfxaSovvT-Los), MtA-^crtos (from MlXtjtos), 'Ax^povaLos (instead 
of 'A^epovr-tos), ovaia (instead of oVr-ia), yepovcria (instead of 
yepovr-Lo), h/tava-Lo<s (from iviavros). The t sometimes changes 
by assimilation the other Tau-mutes, and the Palatals, into <r ; 
thus in the forms of the Comparative in -o-ow and -£<««', where 
there is a double change, first of the Tau-mute or Palatal to a 
by means of the t, and then the assimilation of the i to <r, e. g. 
fipaSvs ((3paoLQ)v, ySpacrtW), fipdcro-ayv, pocx., Tragus (7ra^cW, iracr- 
uov), 7T da- or oiv, poet., /xeyas, p.ci£a)v (instead of fieyCcov), ra^us, 
# a or a- tov (instead of ra^-tW). 



$ 18. b. Liquids. 

1. The Liquid v is sometimes changed into a. This takes 
place, e. g. in the Ace. Sing, third Dec. of substantives, whose 
stem ends with a consonant, e. g. Kopa£, KopaK-a (not KopaK-tv), 
\apL7rd<;, A,a/>i7raS-a. The same change, also, sometimes takes 
place in the third Pers. PL Perf. and Plup. Mid. and Pass, of 
mute and liquid verbs, which properly should end in -vrat and 
-vto (as in pure verbs, e. g. fieftovXev-vrai, ifiefiovXev-vro), e. g. 
rcrpt^axat, IreTpicfraTO, 7T€7rA.e)(aTa.i, Tcra^aTat, icrKevaoarou, Ke^coptSaTCU, 
k^Sdparai (instead of rirpt^vraiy IrirpifivTO, etc., from t/oi/3-<o, 
7rXeK-co, ravcr-io, OTC€ua£-a), ^copt^-co, <f>9eip-u)). See § 116, 15. 

2. N before a Liquid is changed into the same Liquid, e. g. 

<rvv-\<yyi£a) becomes crvWoylfa ffvv-fierpia becomes <rv[j.fi*Tpla 

iy-fievw " ififxevca avv-plirTw " cvpp'nrru. 

Remark. Comp. iZftno, iwwmneo, instead of inZino, inmineo. Assimilation 
takes place in 6\\v/j.i, instead of 8kwp.i. — 'Ev before p is not assimilated, e. g, 
irplvrw ; yet e/5pu3-/xos is more frequent than evpv&fios ; on the contraiy, iyt&jc- 
ui<» stands instead of iWaKneiw. 

3. M initial before a Liquid is changed into ft, e. g 

pikiTTeiv (from fj.4\i) becomes PKirreiv 

pXdoaKca ( " fj.oKe7y) " f3\6(rica> 

ufor6s ( " /j.6pos, mors) " 0por4s. 



36 



MUTES AND LIQUIDS. 



\\ iv 



$19 c. Mutes and Liquids. — Liquids and Muti s 

1 . A Pi-mute (tt ft <f>) before ft is changed into //,, 

a Kappa-mute (k y x) " p " " y> 

a Tau-mute (r 8$) "ft " " <r, e. g. 



(a) Pi-mute : TeTpifS-fxcu 

\e\6LTr-fJLCU 

y4ypa(p-fj.at 
(fi) Kappa-mute: ireir\eK-p.a.L 
AeAey-ttcu 

£pripei§-p.ai 
ireireiS-pai 
KeK6p.iB-p.ai 



(•>-) Tau-mute: 



from rplfiw) 

' Aefrrw) 

' 7rAe/c«) 

' Aeyw) 

' dvuT« ) 

' iptlSo) ) 

' Trei&w ) 

• Kop.i£w) 



becomes reTpip.p.ai 

" AeAei/iiiat 

" yeypap.p.ai 

" 7re7rAe7/xai 

remains \4\eyp.at 

becomes fie&peypxu 

" tfvv<rp.ai 

" ipr}pei<rp.ai 

" TreireKT/jLai 

" KeK6p.iffp.aL. 



Remark 1. In some words, the Kappa and Tau-mutes are not changed 
before /x, e. g. d/c/x^, Trorp-os, \axp-6s, Kev&p.u>v, etc. In some words, even ^ 
stands before p., instead of the original k or y, e. g. lwxp-6s from ic£/c«, vKo-xji6i 
from whence. The preposition ear, in composition, is not changed, e. g. e/ctiov- 

2. The medial /? before v is changed into fx, e. g. 

aeP-v6s (from vefiopai) becomes <xep.v6s 
£pef}-v6s ( " epefios) " £pep.v6s. 

\ N before a Pi-mute (ir ft $ if;) is changed into /*, 
N before a Kappa-mute (* y x i s changed into y, 
N before a Tau-mute (r 8 $) is not changed, e. g. 

£v-TT€ipla becomes ipireipia irw-KaXew becomes ffvyKaXeu. 

eV-/3aAAco " £pf$6.\\u> ffvv-yiyvcoffK(a " cruyyt-yj/cSo-icft. 

ev-<pp(cv " ep.<ppwv ffvv-xpovos " ffvyxpovos 

er-i|/£>xos " Zpo\i\>xos ffvv-\ew " truy£ea> ; 

but (rvvTetvu), (TvfSeco, <rvv&4a>. Comp. i/niuo, imprimo. 

!!km. 2. The enclitics are not changed, e. g. oWep, -roVye, not oyirep, etc. 

Rem. 3. Also at the end of a word, v before a Pi-mute, as well as before ju, 
was, without doubt, pronounced like p., and before a Kappa-mute, like y ; and 
jo it is found in ancient inscriptions, e. g. TOMITATEPAKAITHMMHTEPa, 
rOrXPHMA«ri2MON (i. e. rhu irarepa nal ttjv p.r\repa, rhv xP y )i laTi(rUi ^ v )- So also 
V and <r are used instead of v before \ and <r. e g. 'EAAHMNOI, 'E22AM01 
•i e. £v ATjp.vq>, iu ~2.ap.ui) 



♦ 20.1 



THE SIBILANT O" WITH MUTES AND LIQUIDS. 



37 



$ 20. d. Use of the Sibilant <r, with Mutes and 

Liquids. 

I. A Pi-mute (jr f3 c/>) with cr is changed into \J/, 

a Kappa-mute (k y x) with or is changed into £ 
a Tau-mute (t 8 #) disappears before <r, e. g. 



(a) Pi-mute: 


Aenrcrw (from Aenrco) becomes Aetyw 




rpi^aca ( 


' rpijSa?) 


rptyw 




ypdcpcrco ( 


' ypd<pa>) 


•yp&fyco 


0) Kappa-mute 


: -KXeKau) ( 


' 7rAe/ca>) 


ir\4^ca 




\4y<ra ( 


' Ae-yw) 


Ae£« 




iSpe'xo-ft) ( 


' £/>e'X w ) 


j3pe'{« 


(7) Tau-mute : 


avvTcra) ( 


' az/uT«) 


avvcrw 




cpetScra? ( 


{ epeiSai) 


' epeicrca 




Tret&crco ( 


' Trefoa) 


Trdtrat 




iX-rridcra ( 


' €A7Tl£a>) 


eXirtcru,. 



Remark. 1 . Comp. duri, rerri, coxi ; from d uco, re^o, coguo. The Prep. eVt 
before <r is an exception, e. g. e/ccw£a>, not il-c&crw. — In irovs, Gen. 7ro5-Js, and 
in the Perf. active Part, in -cos, Gen. -cn-os, after the Tau-mute disappears, the 
preceding vowel is lengthened. 

2. N disappears before o-; but when v is joined with a Tau- 
mute, both disappear before cr, but the short vowel before o-, is 
lengthened : e into «, o into ov, a, X, v into a, I, v, Comp. Rem. 3, 



rvcp&4vT-cri becomes rvcp&elcri \4ovt-ci becomes \4ov<ri 

<nr4j>8-arco " crireicrco e\[iiv&-cn " eXixlcri 

rtyavT-cri Tinpacri Sei/ciwr-ct " Seucvvn 

Sai/xov-cri " dai/xocri "S.evocpS>vT-cri " "Eevocpoocn. 

Rem. 2. Exceptions : 'Ev, e. g. ivcrireipw ; 7rav- before cr with another conso 
nant, e. g. irdvcrKoiros, in some words is assimilated ; e. g. irdtrcrocpos is used as 
well as irducrocpos, etc. (in ird\iv the usage varies) ; also in some inflective and 
derivative forms in -crai and -cris from verbs in -aivw, e. g. Tv4<pavcrai (from 
<palvco), ■K4irav(Tis (from ireiraivcti), and in the substantives, t\ e\fxius, earth-worm, t) 
xelpivs, wagon-basket, 7} Tlpvvs, v is retained before cr. — In composition, the v in 
vvv is changed into cr before cr followed by a vowel, e. g. crvcrcrwfa (from civ and 
cra>fa) ; but before cr followed by a consonant, or before & it disappears, e. g. aiv 
CTTj/xa becomes cricrTr}fj.a, <rvv-(vyia becomes <rv(vyia. — In xapiecri, vt is dropped ; 
on the contrary, in rd\ds, /x4xds (Gen. -duos), Krels, els (Gen. -Ifos), els, and in 
the third Pers. Pi. of the principal tenses (see § 103), e. g. fiovAevovcri (instead 
of fiovAevovcri), the ouission of the simple v is compensated by lengthening 
the vowel. 

3. On the contrary, in the Aorist of Liquid verbs, cr is omitted 
4 



38 CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. [} £1 

after the Liquid, but the omission is compensated, by lengthen- 
ing the stem-vowel, e. g. 

f/yyeA-cra becomes tfyyeiXa evefx-cra becomes iveifxa 

%<pav-<xa " e<pr)va %(pfrep-cra * ecp&eipa. 

Rem. 3. Sigma is likewise omitted before « in the future of Liquid verbs, e 
being inserted before a for the sake of an easier pronunciation, and eu being con- 
tracted into &>, e. g. ayyeA-e-frw, ayyeXa). So too in the Nom. of the third Dec. 
the final Sigma is omitted, when v or p precedes, and the short vowel is 
lengthened, e. g. eiKdcv instead of €ik6v-s, iroip^v instead of ttoi/mpv-s, prjToop 
instead of pi\rop-s, alfrhp instead of al&ep-s. — T and <r are omitted in the Nom. 
of substantives and participles in -av, Gen. -ovr-os ; but, as a compensation, o is 
lengthened into o>, e. g. \4ovt-s becomes AeW, fSovAevovr-s becomes fiovXsvwv. 

Rem. 4. In epvvfu (instead of cff-vv/xi, ves-tio) the <r is assimilated to the 
following v, and in el/xl (instead of ia-fii) or is omitted, but e is lengthened 
into ei. 

$ 21. e. Change of separated Consonants. 

1. Sometimes a consonant affects another consonant, though 
they do not immediately follow one another, but are separated 
by a vowel or even by two syllables. Thus, one X changes 
another X into p, e. g. K€<pa\apyia (instead of KecpaXaXyia from 
aAyetv), yAoocnxapyia (instead of yAu)o-o-aAyia) , dpyaAeos (instead of 
dAyaAeos from aXyftv) ; the suffix gAt? becomes wp^, when a A pre- 
cedes, e. g. «9uA7ra)0?7. 

2. In the reduplication of verbs whose stem begins witli a 
rough mute, instead of repeating tins mute, winch would be 
the regular formation, the first rough mute is changed into the 
corresponding smooth, thus : — 

<pe-<pl\r]Ka (from (pi\4a>) is changed into tre(piKt]Ka 
X^'X^ Ka ( " X* u ) " " nexvKa 

&4-&VKO, ( " 3vw) " t4&vk<x 

frl-frr)[jLi (stemOE) " " rldy/n. 

Likewise in the verbs, bveiv, to sacrifice, and r&evai (stem 0E), to place, & of 
the root is changed into t, in the passive forms which begin with S : — 

(TV-&7IV, Tvfrf)<rofuu, ire-frnu, T€-&r t (ro/xai, instead of i&v-frriv, i&e-frrjv. 

So also, for the sake of euphony, the p is not reduplicated, and instead of it 
ipp is used, e. g. ippvrjKa. 

3. In words whose stem begins with r and ends with an 
Aspirate mute, the aspiration is transferred to the preceding 



f$ 22, 23.] METATHESIS OF THE LIQUIDS. 39 

smooth t, when the Aspirate before the formative syllable be- 
ginning with cr, r, and /a, must, according to the laws of euphony 
($$ 17, 2; 19, 1; 20, 1), be changed into a smooth consonant; 
by this transposition, r is changed into the Aspirate #. Such a 
change is called the Metathecis of the aspiration. 

Thus, rpe<p-G) (reTptxpa Perf.) is changed into (frpeir-ffo) &ptya>, frpeir-r-fip, (bpeit- 
fia) &pe}J.fia ; 

racp-fj, TA$-w, racprivai. (second Aor. Pass.), into &ctyo>, bdir-ro), (rebaT- 
ucu) TeSra/x/xai. (but third Pers. PL rerdcparcu, e. g. Her. 6, 103, with one 
of the better MSS. is to be lead instead of Tefrdcparcu) ; 

rpxxpos, TPT*-a) into frptyw, frpvir-Tco (re&pvir-fAat), Tefrpvpficu ; 

rpex-o into (dy>e/c-(TOjUc») ^pe^o/xai] — rpi%-6s into $pi£, &/»£tV; 

tox^s, in the comparative, becomes bdacrav. For the same reason, the 
future e£a>, from exco, to Aare, is the proper form, the aspiration of 
the x being transferred to the smooth breathing and making it 
rough. 

Remake 1. Teu|a> from revxa, and rpfya from rpvxv, remain unchanged. 

Kem. 2. Where the passive endings of the above verbs, Tp4<p<o, TA&Q 
(frdTrTa>), TPT*n (frpvirTw), begin with &, the aspiration of the two final conso- 
nants <p&, changes t, the initial consonant of the stem, into 3-, e. g. 

ifrpecp-frriv, &pe<p-&fii'cu, 3-pe<|>- 1 ^j<re(r&at, 
£&d<p-&7)j', &a<p&ets, fraQ-frfio-oftai, Tefrd<p-frcu. 

Eem. 3. In the imperative ending of the first Aor. Pass., where both sylla- 
bles should begin with £-, namely, fr^d-i, not the first, but the last aspirate mute 
is changed into the corresponding smooth ; thus frr)Ti, e. g. PovKevfrrjTi. 

$ 22. Metathesis of the Liquids. 

The Liquids, and also the Lingual r when ir precedes, often 
change place with a preceding vowel, for the sake of euphony. 
The vowel then usually becomes long. This lengthening of 
the vowel distinguishes Metathesis from Syncope (the latter 
being the mere omission of e), e. g. ixi-pvqo-K<a (from the root ficv, 
comp. mens), SvrjaKU} (from Sav-eiv), rer/xyKa (from Tt^-eiv), 
(tefiXriKa (from y8aA-etv), TrrrjcrofxaL (from virofixu). 

$ 23. Doubling of Consonants. 

1. Consonants are doubled, in the first place, for the sake of 
euphony, e. g. f3a$vppoos from fia$v and pew ; eppeov instead of 
tptov; in the second place, in consequence of the concurrence 



*0 gTE-ENGTHENING AND ADDITION OF CONSONANT^. [$ 24 

of like or similar sounds, m the inflection and derivation, e. g 
tv-vofAos (from kv and vopos), eX-XetVco (instead of cvA..), o-vfx-fxaxoi 
(instead of crvvp..), XiXeifA-fxai (instead of AeAei7r/>t,.), Xyj/jL-pia (in- 
stead of X7J7r/j.a), KOfx-fxa (instead of KOirp.a), racr-cna or tcxt-toi 
(instead of ray-o-w), 770-ow or t]tto)v (instead of tjk-luv), fxaXXov 
(instead of pidX-Lov), aXXos (instead of aAtos, alius). 

2. In the Common language, only the Liquids ; \, fx, v, p, the 
Sibilant a, and the Mute r, can be doubled ; yet tt and k are 
also doubled in single words, e. g. Ittttos, a horse ; kokkos, a berry. 
The Medial y is often doubled, but this letter thus doubled is 
softened in the pronunciation ($ 2). Two Aspirates are not 
doubled ($ 17, 4). 

3. p is doubled when the augment is prefixed, e. g. eppcov, 
and in composition, when it is preceded by a short vowel, e. g. 
apprjKTos, fiaSvppoos ; but eiz-poocrros (from cv and pciWu/u) 

Remark. In imitation of Homer, the Tragic writers also double the or, yet 
much less frequently than Homer, e. g. t6<t<tov, Soph. Aj. 185; oAeWas, 390; 
£<T<rvSn), 294; ^eVo-77, Ant. 1223 ; %<r<reTai> iEsch. Pers. 122 ; so also in the Dat. 
PL of the third Dec. eaa-t. 



$ 24. Strengthening and Addition of Consonants. 

1. Consonants are frequently strengthened, in the inflection, by the addition 
of a corresponding consonant, namely : — 

(a) The Labials (;8 ir <p) by t, e. g. fixdir-T-w (instead of £\o0-a>), tvtt-t-w 
(instead of tvtt-w), piir-r-ca (instead of pi<p-o)) ; sometimes also by ar, which 
assimilates the preceding Labial (thus car, Attic tt), e. g. TreVtrw (root 
7re7r), Att. 7reTTa>, Put. irfyu), the poetic 6crcro/xai, Put. tyo/iai ; in 5e'i//« 
(instead of Secpoo), <p and <r are changed into yp ; 

(b) The Palatals (7 k x) are strengthened by a, which assimilates the pre 
ceding Palatal (thus car, Att. tt), or, though more seldom, the PalataJ 
unites with the a and is changed into (, e. g. rde-ar-co, Att. tcSt-t-*- 
(instead of rdy-ca), (ppicr-a-v, Att. (ppir-T-w (instead of <ppiK-co), fST]<T-<T-(> 
Att. &-f}T-T-w (instead of fifiX' *) 5 "pd-fa (instead of icpdy<t>),Tpify (instead 
of rpiyw) ; a Kappa-mute with <r is seldom changed into £, e. g. av£* 
(aug-eo), d\€|w, oSa|o> and dddfy; the strengthening t is found only ir 
irtKTO) and tIktc*}. 

(c) The Linguals (8t&) are strengthened by <r, which with the preceding 
Lingual is changed into £, e. g. <£pa£a> (instead of <ppddw), or, though 
more seldom, a assimilates the preceding Tau-mute, e. g. fdaaopxu and 
Xiro/xai, £pe<r(rw, iperreo (instead of epeVco), Kopv<r<rco (instead of icopv&w). 

2. The unpleasant concurrence of p.p and vp in the middle of some words, 
occasioned by the omission of a vowel, is softened by inserting £ between p.p 



♦ 25.] EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. 41 

and 8 between vp, thus, in fiearffi-^-pta (formed from fiea-qfj-epia, fj.eo~rifj.pia)> yap 
$-p6s (from yafx-e-p6s, ya.fj.p6s), a.v-5-pos (from avepos, avp6s). 

3. N also is used to strengthen the Labials, especially in poetiy, so as to -make 
a syllable long by position, e. g. rvfj-ravov (from tu7t-t-&>), CTp6fj.f3os (from arpi- 
<pu)) ; frdfifios (tol(j)os) ; Kopvfj.f3T] (nopvcpr)) ; frpSfifios (rpe^ei^) ; bfupi) (etVeiy); 
vvjx<pri (nubere) ; bfipifios and 6jj.f3piy.os, v&wfios and v&uvfxvos. In the present 
tense of many verbs, this strengthening v is found, e. g. vvvbdvofxai, &tyydm 9 
kafj.&dv(i> instead of irv^ofiai, friya, Aa£&>. On the change of u, see § 19, 3. On 
the v Paragogic, see § 15, 1. 

4. 2 also is prefixed to some words, but mostly to such as begin with /x, e. g 
u<£5i£ and crixudi^, fxiKp6s and aixiKpos ; a strengthening o~ is also inserted before it 
and t in the Peif. Mid. or Pass., and before 3- in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. rereAe- 
a-fiai, TCT4\e-ar-Tai, iTe\4-<r-frr]v (§ 131) ; also in the derivation and composition 
of words, a is frequently inserted for the sake of euphony, e. g. o~ei-o--/j,6s, irov 
c-dvefios, fj.oyo-o--r6Kos, etc. ; instead of cr, 3- also is inserted before /x, e. g. 
fj,vio)-&-fJ.6s, 6pxn-&-f*6s> o~Kap-&-fj.6s from cncaipa), irop-&-/j.6s from ire'ipa. 



$ 25. Expulsion and Omission of Consonants. 

1. In inflection, <r is very often omitted between two vowels, e. g. tvtttti, 
irvirrov, tvtttoio instead of TviTTe-cr-ai or T\mT7)-o~ai, eTU7TTe-(T-o, rvirrot-o'-o ' 
yeve-os, y e v e-a> v instead of yive-a-os, yei>4-o~-ow (comp. gene-r-is, gene-r-um). 
At the end of a word, and after Pi and Kappa-mutes, it is retained, e. g. yeVos, 
Tityw (=tiW«), 7rAe|co ( = -r\eK-cra>) , but after the Liquids, in inflection, as 
well as commonly at the end of a word, it is omitted, e. g. #77 e* Act (instead 
of tfyye\-cr-a) , ayyeAeo (instead of a.yye\-e-c~-ci>, ayyeA-e-w), p^rcop (instead 
of p-f}Top-s). Comp. § 20, Rem. 3. 

2. The Digamma softened into the vowel v (§ 200) is omitted: (a) in the 
middle of the word between two vowels, e.g. w6v (uF6v), ovum, 6'is (&Fiy),ovis, 
al(t>u (alFwv), aevum, vios (ueFos), novus, CKai6s (o-kcuF6s), scaevus, f3o6s ((3oF6s), 
bovis ; &ea>, 7rAew, -rvea, i\dco instead of &4Fa, etc. ; (b) at the beginning of 
the word before vowels and p, e. g. divos (FoTvos), vinum, eap (Feap), ver, Is 
(Fls) vis, oIkos (FoTkos), vicus, lUeiv (FideTv), videre, io-^s (Fearfrfis), vestis, 
piiywfii (Fp^yvvfxi), frango. On the contrary, the Digamma (this softened v) 
is retained in connection with a preceding o, e, o, with which it then coalesces 
and forms a diphthong : (a) at the end of a word, e. g. fiov (instead of fioF), 
fiao-iXevi etc.; (&) before a consonant, e. g. fiovs (f36Fs, bovs, bos), vavs (vdFs)> 
J) avis, fiovv, f3ovai, f3a<nXevs, fiao-iXevat, &evo~ofxcu, irXevaofiai, irvevcrofiai, iKavvcv. 
But when an t or v precedes it, then it disappears before a consonant, but 
lengthens the t or v, e. g. k?s (instead of kIFs), o-vs (instead of trvFs) Ix&vs 
(instead of Ix&vFs), Ace. k7u, trvv, Ix&vv, but it disappears also, in this case, 
in the middle of a word between vowels, e. g. A?-6s, k?-6s, o-v-6s, ix&v-os (instead 
of AtF-6s, kHF-6s, o~i>F-6s, Ix&vF-os. 

4* 



42 EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. [§ 25 

3. Since the Greek language admits an accumulation of three consonants, 
only in composition, not in simple words, unless the first or the last is a 
Liquid, then, if in the inflection of the verb, a termination beginning with oft 
is appended to the consonant of the root, the <r is dropped : — 

KeXeiTr-afrav (from Aet7r-a>) becomes AeAei<££W (§ 17, 2.) 
\e\4y<r&ca ( " \4y-u) " AeAe'x&cu (§17,2.) 

iffrak-c&ai ( " OTeAA-a>) " e<rraA&CH. 

Remark. On the omission of a Tau-mute, and a v and vt before <r, and a a 
after a Liquid, see § 20. On TreVe/ijuar, e<r<piyficu, etc. instead of ireVe/ijU^ai, 
e(r<piyyixcu, see §144, R. 2. In composition, v is often omitted, e g. IIv&o/ctJ- 
vos, 'A7roAA({-Sw/305, instead of IIu&oy/cT., \A7roAA(fo§. 

4. Some words may drop their final consonant, either to avoid an accumula- 
tion of consonants, or, in verse, to prevent a syllable becoming /bng by position. 
In addition to the words mentioned under § 15, namely, ovk (ov), e| (e/c), ovt&s 
(oStoj), which usually retain their final consonant before a vowel to prevent 
Hiatus, but drop it before consonants, here belong, 

(a) adverbs of place in d-er, e. g. TrpSofrev, oiriar^ev, virep&ev, etc., which never 
drop the v before a consonant, in prose, but very often in Epic poetry, 
more seldom in the Attic poets ; 

(b) pexpis and &xpts, which, however, in the best classical writers, drop 
their o~, not only before consonants, but commonly even before vowels, 
e. g. fi^xpi 'Avafayopov, PI. Hipp. Maj. 281, c ; fi4xpi ivrav&a, Id. Symp. 
210, e ; jue'xpi otov, X. C. 4. 7, 2 ; jue'xpt ipvfrpas &aAaTT7?y, Id. Cy. 8. 
6,20; 

(c) the adverbs arpe/xas, Hpnras, fiecrriyvs, avriKpvs, dvecas, frtyvas, which in 
poetry may drop their s, but never in prose ; in the Ionic dialect, numeral 
adverbs in -dais also frequently drop the a before consonants, e. g. 
voKkaKi. Her. 2, 2. 

5. A genuine Greek word can end only in one of the three Liquids, v, or (ty, 
£, i. e. iro; kct) and p. The two words, ovk, not, and 4k, out of, form only an 
apparent exception, since, as Proclitics (§ 32), they incline to the following 
word, and, as it were, become a part of it. This law of euphony occasions 
either the omission of all other consonants, or it changes them into one of the 
three Liquids just named; hence, o-S>ixa (Gen. o-w/xar-os), instead of o-w/iar, 
ydXa (Gen. ydXaKT-os), instead of yaXaKr, x4wv (Gen. \4ovr-os), instead of 
x4ovt, 4(Zoi>\€vov instead of ejSouAeiwT ; — repas (Gen. r4paT~os), instead of 
repar, n4pas (Gen. Kepar-os), instead of K€par, fx4xi (Gen. ii4xit-os), instead 
of fUh.IT. 



H 2G, 27.] NATURE AND QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES- 43 

CHAPTER II. 
Syllables. 

$26. Nature and Division of Syllables. 

1. Every vowel, pronounced by itself, or in connection with 
one or more consonants, is called a syllable. 

2. A word consists of one or more syllables. When a word 
consists of several syllables, a distinction is made between the 
stem-syllables and the syllables of inflection or derivation. 
The stem-syllables express the essential idea of the word, the 
syllables of inflection or derivation, the relations of the idea. 
Thus, e. g. in yi-ypa^-a, the middle syllable is the stem-syllable ; 
the two others, syllables of inflection : in Kpny-fia, the first is 
the stem-syllable ; the last, the syllable of derivation. 

$ 27. Quantity of Syllables. 

1. A syllable is short or long, by nature, according as its 
vowel is short or long. 

2. Every syllable is long which contains a diphthong, or a 
simple long vowel, or two vowels contracted into one, e. g. 
fiovXevw ; rjpios; "o.ko)v (from de/cooi/), fiorpvs (from fiorpvas). 

3. A syllable with a short vowel becomes long by position, 
when two or three consonants, or a double consonant (£ £ ij/), 
follow the short vowel, e. g. o-tcAAw, tv^uvtcs, n6pa£ (KopaKos) 
rpairltp.. 

Remark 1. The pronunciation 1 of a syllable long by nature, and of one 
long by position, differs in this, that the former is pronounced long, but the 
latter not. When a syllable long by nature is also long by position, its pronun- 
ciation must be protracted. Hence a distinction is made in pronouncing such 
words as irparroi, irpa^is, irpayfMa (d), and toVtoj, Tet£is, rdyfxa (a). 

Rem. 2. But when a short vowel stands before a Mute and a Liquid (Positio 
debihs), it commonly remains short in the Attic dialect, because the sound of 
the Liquids, being less distinct than the Mutes, they are pronounced with more 



1 The method of pronunciation stated in this remark is adopted in many of 
the German gymnasia, and in some of the schools in England and Scotland, 
but not to any extent in this country. — Te. 



*4 QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. [$ 2ft 

ease, e. g. dreKvos, &weir\os, 'atc/xt), fiorpvs, dldpaxpos, yet in two cases the posi- 
tion of the Mute and Liquid lengthens the short vowel : — 

a) in compounds, e. g. 'iKve/xw ; 

b) when one^ of the Medials (/3 7 8) stands before one of the three Liquids 
(a /j. v ), e. g. fiifixos, evod/xos, TreirXzyixai ; in tragic trimeter, &A also lengthen 
the preceding short vowel. 

It is obvious that a vowel long by nature cannot be shortened by a Mute and 
Liquid, e. g. jj.r)vvrpov. 

4. A syllable, which contains one of the three doubtful 
vowels (a, 1, v), cannot, in the same word, be pronounced long 
and short, but must be either long or short. 



y 28. Quantity of the Penult. 

hi order to a correct pronunciation, the quantity of the three 
doubtful vowels, a, i, and v, in the penult of words of three 01 
more syllables, must be determined. The following are the 
principal instances in which the penult is long. The quantity 
of the syllables of inflection is treated in connection with the 
Forms : — 

The penult is long, 

1. In substantives in -aow (Gen. -aovos or -awvos), in substantives of two or 
more syllables in -iwv (Gen. -iovos; but -twv, Gen. -Xwvos), and in forms of the 
comparative in -low, -lov (Gen. -iovos), e. g. biraoav, -ovos, 6, r), companion, Uocrei- 
Sdatv, -wvos ; ictav, -ovos, r), pillar, fipayiwv, -ovos, 6, arm, 'Atupiwv, -ovos ; but 
AevKa\twv, -a>vos ; KaXktav, ndWIov, more beautiful. 

Exceptions. The two Oxytones, 7) rfi&v (l), shore, and generally r\ }#&#, snow. 
In Homer, the comparatives in -loov, iov, are always short, where the versifica- 
tion admits. 

2. In oxytoned proper names in -av6s, and in the compounds in -ay6s (from 
&yw, to lead, and dyvvpn, to break), -avtop and -Kpavos, e. g. 'Aowcfc, \0xay6s, 
captain ; va.va.y6s, naufrdgus ; Biavap, hUpavos, having two horns. 

3. In adjectives in -ays (Fern, -ais) derived from verbs- in -dw, in proper 
names in -arris, in substantives in -fr-ns (Fern. -Ins), and in those in -irr\s of the 
first Dec. (Fern, -vns), and in proper names in -fry, e. g. axpaf)s, untouched; 
EixboaTTis, MifrptiaTris, irohfr-ns, -ov, citizen (Fern. ttoXTtis) : irpe<rPvTr}S, -ov, old 
.nan ; 'AcppoSfr-n, ''Afxipirpfrr}. 

Exceptions: (a) to the proper names in -arris : TaXarris, AoA/mTTjs, %ap(xarr\s, 
all in -fiarris and -cpar-ns, and compounds formed from verbal roots, e. g. ZwKpa- 
TrjS . — (b) Kp Xrr)s, judge, from the short root Kpi, Krlrr)s, builder, and frvr-ns, 

one who sacrijices. 

4. In Proparoxytones in -lAos, -l\ov, -Ivos, -Ivov, in words in -lvr\, -Iva> 
■ivn, -Ova, in those in -ivos, when a does not precede the ending; in Pro 



$ 28. J QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. 45 

Proparoxytones in -up a, and in adjectives in -vpos with a preceding long 
syllable, e. g. 

'O '6fj.l\os, multitude; dcorTur], gift ; 6 kIvSvvos, danger; 

iredlXov, shoe; Atylva, yecpvpa, bridge; 

7] Kct/xlvos, oven ; alo-xvvi)., shame : laxvpos, strong ; 

asKZvov., parsley ; &p.wa, defence; (but dxvpos and e'xtyxk), firm. 

Remark 1. The following may be added to the Proparoxytones in -ivos 
and -Op a, namely, 6 x a ^ y 6s, rein; 6 ipluos, wild fig-tree; and r) KoAAupa, coarse 
bread. 

Exceptions. E I Kairivn, feast, and compounds in -y v vo s (from yvvr), woman) 
e. g. avdp6yvpos, and Koptvn, club. 

5. In substantives in -vtos, whose antepenult is long, and in compound 
adjectives in -tiaicpvTos and -rpvros (from SaKpva, rpva), and also in sub 
stantives in -vp.a, -vyi„ and -vyuv, and in adverbs in -vdov, e. g. 

6 kwkvtSs, wailing ; &Tpvros, indestructible ; 6\o\vyr), ululatus ; 

aSdicpvTos, without tears ; 'ffipvfxa, -dros, seat; bXoXvy&v, ululatus, 

BoTpvSov, in clusters. 
Exception. Map/napvyrj, splendor. 

6. In dissyllabic Oxytones in -ik6s, -Zp.6s, -li/6s, -los, -v\6s, -v/x6s, 
vv6s, and in Paroxytones in -i/iij, -tvn, e. g. 

$ix6s, bare ; r) plvos, skin ; 6 f>v[x.6s, pale ; £vv6s, common ; 

& x^Sifidder; 6 'los, dart; 6 Sv/x6s, mind; AujUt;, injury ; 

6 \Ip.6s, hunger; 6 x^os, juice ; so, Sdvpios, etc.; nvvn, excti&s. 

Exceptions. BiSs (6), bow ; ir\vv6s (6), washing-trough. 

7. In dissyllables in -tios, -dv6s (oxytoned), and in dissyllables in -ia 7 which 
b*>gin with two consonants, e. g. 

6 va6s, temple ; <pavos, brilliant ; eria, pebble ; <p\id, door-post. 

Rem. 2. The following may be added to dissyllables in -to: Ka\id, shed, 
avta, trouble ; novta, dust ; and to those in -aos, the variable ?Aaoy, and the proper 
names in -d o s, e. g. ' Afjupidpaos ; Oli/6/iaos is an exception. 

Exceptions. Taos or rdds (6), peacock; VKid (D. shadow. 

8. The following single words should also be noted: — 

I. d. 

*AKparos, unmixed; veauts, young girl ; riapa % turban ; 

avLdp6s, troublesome ; 6iraS6s, attendant ; <pd\apos, clear ; 

av&advs, self-sufficient; alvam, mustard; 5 $\vapos, tattle. 

Also the proper names, ''A/tacts, "Avd-rros, ''Aparos, Arifidparosy ®eavd>, 'idccav 
Upiairos, 'Xdpdiris (Serapis), ^rv/xcpaXos, $dpo-&Aos. 

II. r. 

'Aieplf$r)s, exact ; 4vtitf}, rebuke ; irap&evoirbrns, gallant. 

ty&Ifjios, strong; epl&os, day-laborer; 

rh rdplxos, pickled fish ; 6 r) x^ZSdv t swallow; 



48 ACCENTS. J$ 29 

it must have the circumflex, when the ultimate is short, e. g. 
reixos, TTpaTTc, but the acute, when the ultimate 1 is long, e. g 
t€l X ov^ Trpdrroi ; if the penult is short it has only the acute, e. g. 
rarrw, tottc. On the ultimate, either the acute or the circumflex 
stands, e. g. 7raTr}p, irarpo)v\ nominatives accented on the ulti- 
mate usually have the acute, e. g. whim's Trora/Aot, Srjp. 

Rem. 6. In the inflection-endings, -ai and -oj, and in the adverbs, irp6ira\ai 
and eKiraXai, the diphthongs, in respect to the accent, are considered short, e. g. 
rpdirefai, TinrreTcu, yXwcrffai, fofrpwiroi, x<*>P 01 ' The optative endings, -o i and 
-at, e. g. rifi-ficrai, e'/cXei7rot, AetVot, and the adverb oIkoi, domi, at home, are long; 
on the contrary, oIkoi, houses, from oTkos. 

Rem. 7. In the old Ionic and Attic declension, a is considered as short 
in respect to accent, having only half its usual length, as it takes the place of o, 
e.g. MeyeAecus, ayuyeoou; — Tr6\ea>s, ■n6Xeoov — ; '/Aecos, 'dyrjpcos, Gen. C /Ae&>, ayrjpco', 
but if adjectives like '/Aecos are declined according to the third Dec, they are 
accented regularly, e. g. <piAoy4\a>s, cpiXoyeXaros ; so also in the Dat. Sing, and 
PI., as well as in the. Gen. and Dat. Dual, where the penult is long, e. g. 'dynpas, 
ayfipct), a.yt]pa>s, ay-fjpccy. 

Rem. 8. In the words, eftye, that, vaiyCh certainly, the penult has the acute, 
apparently contrary to the rule ; but these must be treated as separate words. 
The accentuation of the words efre, ovre, cbsirep, ^tis, rovsSe, etc., is to be 
explained on the ground, that they are compounded with Enclitics (§ 33), 

Rem. 9. According to the condition of the last syllable with respect to 
accent, words have the following names: — 

(a) Oxytones, when the ultimate has the acute, e. g. rervcpcis, ko.k6s, S-fip', 

(b) Paroxytones, when the penult has the acute, e. g. riir™ ; 

(c) Proparoxytones, when the antepenult has the acute, e. g. frvSpwiros, tvit- 

t6(A€VOS, &V&P0OTTOI, TVTTt6/JL€VOI] 

(d) Perispomena, when the ultimate has the circumflex, e. g. kukws ; 

(e) Properispomena, when the penult has the circumflex, e. g. irpay/xa, <pi- 
\ovcra ; 

(f ) Barytones, when the ultimate is unaccented, e. g. irpdyixara, irpuyixa. 

1 Hence the accent often enables us to determine the quantity of syllables, 
e. g. from the acute on the antepenult of iroi^rpia, fia^-fjTpia, we infer that the 
ultimate is short, otherwise the accent could not stand further back than the 
penult, No. 6, above ; — from the circumflex on alros and irpa^is, that those 
syllables are long by nature, 7; — from the circumflex on fioipa and <rre?pa. 
that the ultimate is short, 7 ; — from the acute on x^P a > ^/° > an( i "Hpa, that 
the ultimate is long, otherwise the penult of these words must be circumflexed, 
8; — from the acute on <pihos and ttolkiXos, that the penult of these words is 
short, otherwise they must have been circumflexed, 8.— Tm. 



$ 30.] CHANGE AND REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT. 4§ 



$ 30. Change and Removal of the Accent by Inflec 
tion, Composition, and Contraction. 

1. When a word is changed by inflection, either in the quan- 
tity of its final syllable or in the number of its syllables, there 
is generally a change or removal of the accent. 

(a) By lengthening the final syllable, 

(a) a Proparoxytone becomes a Paroxytone, e. g. 7roAe/xo§, 

TToXefxov ; 
(/3) a Properispomenon, a Paroxytone, e. g. ret^os, ret^ou? ; 
(y) an Oxytone, a Perispomenon, e. g. £eo?, £eoi). Yet this 

change is limited to particular cases. See § 45, 7, a. 

(b) By shortening the final syllable, 

(a) a dissyllabic Paroxytone with a penult long by nature 

becomes a Properispomenon, e. g. ^>evya>, <£evye, Trparrc 

(but Tarre) ; 
(/3) a polysyllabic Paroxytone, whether the penult is long 

or short, becomes a Proparoxytone, e. g. fiovXeva), pov- 

Xevc. 

(c) By prefixing a syllable or syllables to a word, the accent 
is commonly removed towards the beginning of the word, e. g. 
<f>evyo), c<f>evyov ; so also in compounds, always in verbs, com- 
monly in substantives and adjectives, e. g. 686<s <rvvo8os, #eos 
<£/Ao#eo?, ti\jJ] arl/xos, <f>evye airocfievye. But when syllables 
are appended to a word, the accent is removed towards the 
end of the word, e. g. rvirroi, TV-n-TOfxcd^a, Tvc}i$7]cr6ixe$a. 

Remark 1. The particular cases of the change of accent by inflection, and 
the exceptions to the general rules here stated, will be seen below, under the 
accentuation of the several parts of speech. 

2. The following principles apply in contraction : — 

(1) When neither of the two syllables to be contracted is 
accented, the contracted syllable also is unaccented ; and the 
syllable which had the accent previous to contraction, still 
retains it, e. g. (£iAee = <£iAa (but <£iA€a = <^\ei),yeWi = y«'ei (but 
yevecov = yevw). 

5 



59 CHANGE OF THE ACCENT. [$ 3l 

(2) But when one of the two syllables to be contracted is 
accented, the contracted syllable also is accented, 

(a) when the contracted syllable is the antepenult or penult, 
it takes the accent which, the general rules require, e. g. 

ayaTraojxai = aya.Tra>ij.ai (piXeS^vos = (pi\ovu.evos 

iaraSros = ecrruros op&Sovai = op&ovcri 

v\r}ecr<ra = v\r\<r(ra Tifj.a6vrcov = riixcayTuv ; 

(b) when the contracted syllable is the ultimate, it takes the 

acute, when the last of the syllables to be contracted had 

the acute ; the circumflex, when the first of the syllables 

was accented, e. g. eaTaws = ecrrw?, ^x°i ~ VX G ^' 

Rem. 2. The exceptions to the principles stated, will he seen helow, under 
the contract Declensions and Conjugations. 

CHANGE AND REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT IN CONNECTED 
DISCOURSE. 

$31. I. Grave instead of the Acute. — II. Crasis. — 
III. Elision. — IV. Anastrophe. 

I. In connected discourse, the Oxytones receive the mark of 
the grave, i. e. by the close connection of the words with each 
other the sharp tone is weakened or depressed, e. g. Ei /^ 
firjTpvir] 7T€piKaX\.r)<; 'Hept/2oia v\v. But the acute must stand before 
every punctuation-mark by which an actual division is made 
in the thought, as well as at the end of the verse, e. g. 'O pev 
K.vpo^ i-repacre tov TrorajaoV, ot 8k iroXijXioi airecfrvyov. 

Exceptions. The interrogatives rts, rl, quis 1 who ? quid ? what ? always 
remain oxytoned. 

Remark 1. When an Oxytone is not closely connected with the other 
words, i. e. when it is treated grammatically, the acute remains, e. g. el to p.4\ 
\4yeis — rb avrip ovo/j.a. 

II. Words united by Crasis ($ 10), have only the accent ot 
the second word, that being the more important, e. g. rdya^or 
from rb aya$6v. When the second word is a dissyllabic Paroxy- 
tone with a short final syllable, the accent, according to $ 30, 2, 
(2) (a), is changed into the circumflex, e. g. to e-n-os = tovttos, 
to. aXAa = raAAa, to tpyov = rovpyov ; ra oVXa = $w7rAa, iyu) ot/xai. = 
iy&ixai. 



$ 32.] ATONICS OK. PROCLITICS. 51 

III. When an unaccented vowel is elided (§ 13), the accent 
of the word is not changed, e. g. tovt &mv. But if the elided 
vowel is accented, its accent is thrown back upon the preceding 
syllable, as an acute ; yet, when the elided word is a preposi- 
tion or one of the particles, a\\d, ovSe, /xvySe (and the poetic 
rj&e, iSe), the accent wholly disappears, and also when the 
accented vowel of monosyllabic words is elided, e. g. 

iroWa tira^ov = iro^A' iirc&ov irapb. e/xov = Trap ifxov 

Seiva. epcoras = Sei;/' ip<ara.s airb eavrov = cuff eavrov 

$711*1 eyw = (pTjUL eyca aAAcfc eyd = oAA' eyw 

alo~xpd e\e|as = aXtrxP eAe£as ovde eydo = ovo* eyca 

eirra fjcrav = eirr' tfcrav r) 5e os = 7) 8 s us. 

IV. Anastrophe. When a preposition folio ws the word which 
it should precede, the tone of the preposition natiirally'inclines 
back to its word, and hence the accent is removed from the 
ultimate to the penult ; this drawing back of the accent is 
called Anastrophe (avaarpocjirj), e. g. 

/Mcix7]s erri but e7rt fxdxTJs vewv faro but airb pewv 

'Idxt/C7}j/ Kara " Kara. 5 l3-aK7jy KaXwv irepi " irepl na\G>v. 

Eem. 2. The prepositions, a/xcpi, avr'i, avd, did, and the poetic viral, inreip, 
dial, Trapai, do not admit Anastrophe. If the preposition stands between an 
adjective and a substantive, according to Aristarchus the Anastrophe is found 
only when the substantive stands first, e. g. "S,dv&a> eiri Ziv-qevrt (but Zivi)evri iir] 
Eoyd-w). Other Grammarians reject the Anastrophe in both cases. — In poetry, 
trepi is subject to Anastrophe only when it governs the Gen., but then very 
often, and even when the Gen. and irepi are separated by other words. See 
§ 300, (c.) 

Eem. 3. Prepositions, moreover, admit Anastrophe, when they are used 
instead of abridged forms of the verb, e. g. ava instead of avdofrriTi 5 fxera, rrdpa, 
em, vrco, irepi, en, instead of the indicative present of etvai, compounded with 
these prepositions, e. g. eyw irdpa instead of irdpei/xi, irepi instead of ireplecrri', 
also, when the preposition is separated from the verb and placed after it, which 
is often the case in the Epic dialect, e. g. bKecras &iro irdvras eralpovs. But the 
accent of air6 is drawn back without any reason, in such phrases as airb &a\d<r- 
0-775 oikcIv, curb ffKOTrov, air iKiridos, and the like ; in such cases it is properly on 
the ultimate. 



$ 32. V. Atonies or Proclitics. 

Atonies or Proclitics, are certain monosyllables which, in 
connected discourse, are so closely united to the following 



52 ENCLITICS. [$ 33. 

word, that they coalesce with it, and lose their accent. They 
are: — 

(a) the forms of the article, 6, rj, ol, at; 

(b) the prepositions, iv, ets (is), Ik (e£), tb?, ad; but if ££ is 
after the word which it governs, and at the end of a verse, 
or before a punctuation-mark, it retains the accent, e. g. 
KaKuiv e& H. £ 472 ; in prose, i£ does not stand after its 
case, 

(c) the conjunctions, d>s (as), el; but if ws follows the word 
which it should precede, it has the accent ; this position, 
however, is found only among the poets, e. g. kolkol w?, 
for o)s kolkol; 

(&) ov (ovk, ovx), not ; but at the end of a sentence and with 
the meaning No, it has the accent, ou (ovk). Comp. 
$ 15, Rem. 2. 

} 33. VI. Enclitics. 

Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, which, in 
connected discourse, are so closely joined, in particular cases, 
to the preceding word, that they either lose their tone or throw 
it back upon the preceding word, e. g. <£i'Ao? rts, tt6Xcjxo<s tl<s. 
They are : — 

(a) the verbs el/xl, to be, and <pri[ii, to say, in the Pres. Indie, except the second 
Pers. Sing., el, thou art, and (p-ps, thou sayest ; 

(b) the following forms of the three personal pronouns in the Attic dia- 
lect:— 

Dual. <r<pa>iu PL <x<pi<ri (v) 



\ S. ixov 


II. P. S. GOV 


III. P. S. oS 


jxol 


col 
ere 


Gl 

€, viv 



(c) the indefinite pronouns, rls, ri, through all the cases and numbers, 
together with the abridged forms rod and tw, and the indefinite adverbs Trcfo, 
7rc6, -n-f), irov, 7rod-t, 7ro&eV, Trot, 7tot€ ; but the corresponding interrogative pro- 
nouns are always accented, e. g. rls, ri, nus, etc. ; 

(d) the following particles in the Attic dialect, re, roi, ye, vvv, irep (and in 
the Epic, zee, Key, vv, pd), and the inseparable particle Be, § 34, Rem. 3. 

Remark. Several small words are combined with these enclitics, forming 
with them one word, with a meaning of its own, e. g. efrre, otire, ufae, Sisre, 
&nrep, ostis, etc. 



\ 34.J INCLINATION OF THE ACCENT. 53 



9 34 . In clinatio n of the Accent. 

1. Ail Oxytone so unites with the following enclitic, that the 
accent, which is commonly grave in the middle of a sentence 
(k 31, I), again becomes acute, e. g. 

hr\p ris for &r}p rls Ka\6s eariv for fca\bs eariv 

/cot rives " Kal rives Trorafios 76 " irora/jibs ye 

na\6s re " KaXbs re irorajxoi rives " irora/xol rives. 

2. A Perispomenon unites with tne following enclitic without 
farther change of the accent, e. g. 

(pus ri for (pus r\ (piXe7 ris for (pi\e7 rls 

(pus eariv " (pus eariv koXov rivos " KaXov riv6s. 

Remark 1. A Perispomenon followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, is regarded 
as an Oxytone. For as (pus eariv, for example, are considered as one word in 
respect to accent, and as tbe circumflex cannot go further back than the penult 
(§ 29, 7), the Perispomenon must be regarded as an Oxytone. Long syllables 
in enclitics are treated as short in respect to the accent ; hence oTvrivoiv, uvri- 
vuv, are viewed as separate words, e. g. kolKuv nvuv. 

3. A Paroxytone unites with the following monosyllabic 
enclitic without further change of the accent ; but there is no 
inclination when the enclitic is a dissyllable, e. g. 

(pi\os fiov for (pi\os ixov but (piAos eariv, (pi\oi (paaiv 
iXKos irus " &\Kos ttus " aWos irore, aXKuv rivuv. 

Rem. 2. It is evident that if there was an inclination of the accent when a 
Paroxytone was followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, the accent would stand on 
the fourth syllable, e.g. $\oi-(paaiv, which is contrary to the usa ... i;f the 
language. 

4. A Proparoxytone and a Properispomenon unite with the 
following enclitic, and take an acute accent on the last sylla- 
ble; this syllable forms the tone-syllable for the following 
enclitic, as av^pco-7ro'? n?, e. £. 

Q.v^rpuir6s ris for avbpunos rls aujxd ri for aujxa rl 

av&puTroi rives " av&puirot rives au,ud eariv " aufxa eariv. 

Exception. A Properispomenon, ending in | or \p, docs not admit the incli- 
nation of a dissyllabic enclitic, e. g. auAa| rivos, av\a£ eariv, (poivi£ eariv, K-f)pv$ 
tariv, \cu\cvp eariv. 



52 ENCLITICS. [$ 33. 

word, that they coalesce with it, and lose their accent. They 
aire: — 

(a) the forms of the article, 6, rj, ol, at; 

(b) the prepositions, iv, tk (e?), Ik (i£), w?, ad; but if ig is 
after the word which it governs, and at the end of a verse, 
or before a punctuation-mark, it retains the accent, e. g. 
kclkw e£, H. £, 472 ; in prose, i£ does not stand after its 
case, 

(c) the conjunctions, cos (as), ci; but if ws follows the word 
which it should precede, it has the accent ; this position, 
however, is found only among the poets, e. g. ko.koI d>?, 
for ws kclkol ; 

(d) ov (ovk, ovx), not; but at the end of a sentence and with 
the meaning No, it has the accent, ov (ovk). Comp. 
$ 15, Rem. 2. 

5 33. VI. Enclitics. 

Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, which, in 
connected discourse, are so closely joined, in particular cases, 
to the preceding word, that they either lose their tone or throw 
it back upon the preceding word, e. g. <j>l\os n?, 7toAc/aos tl<s. 
They are : — 

(a) the verbs elpi, to be, and <pr\ixl, to say, in the Pi-es. Indie, except the second 
Pers. Sing., eT, thou art, and <pys, thou sayest ; 

(b) the following forms of the three personal pronouns in the Attic dia- 
lect:— 



I. P. S. flOV 
[xol 



II. P. S. ffov 
col 



III. P. S. ov Dual. <r<pu>iv PL ccpiai (v) 

ot 
e, vlv ; 



(c) the indefinite pronouns, rls, r\, through all the cases and numbers, 
together with the abridged forms rod and tw, and the indefinite adverbs ireos, 
7rc6, Try], irov, TTo&i, iro&4v, not, 7tot€ ; but the corresponding interrogative pro- 
nouns are always accented, e. g. rls, ri, irws, etc. 5 

(d) the following particles in the Attic dialect, tc, toi, ye, vvv, irep (and in 
the Epic, /ce, KeV, vv, p&), and the inseparable particle 8e, § 34, Rem. 3. 

Remark. Several small words are combined with these enclitics, forming 
with them one word, with a meaning of its own, e. g. efre, oire, M^e, &sre, 
Crrrep, orris t etc. 



f 34.] INCLINATION OF THE ACCENT. 53 



? 34 . In c I i n ation of the Accent. 

1. An Oxytone so unites with the following enclitic, that the 
accent, which is commonly grave in the middle of a sentence 
[h 31, I), again becomes acute, e. g. 

h-hp ris for &r)p ris kuXos eariv for KaXbs iffri* 

Kal rives " /cot rives Trora/xos 76 " irorafxbs ye 

KaXSs re " KaAbs re iroTa/ioi rives " irora/xol rives. 

2. A Perispomenon unites with tne following enclitic without 
further change of the accent, e. g. 

<pus ri for (pus r\ (piXe? ris for (pi\e? ris 

(pus eariv " (pus eariv Kakov rivos " KaXov riv6s. 

Remark 1. A Perispomenon followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, is regarded 
as an Oxytone. For as (pus eariv, for example, are considered as one word in 
respect to accent, and as the ch-cumflex cannot go further back than the penult 
(§ 29, 7), the Perispomenon must be regarded as an Oxytone. Long syllables 
in enclitics are treated as short in respect to the accent ; hence olvrtvoiv, uvri- 
vuv, are viewed as separate words, e. g. naXuv nvuv. 

3. A Paroxytone unites with the following monosyllabic 
enclitic without further change of the accent ; but there is no 
inclination when the enclitic is a dissyllable, e. g. 

<plXos fxov for (pi\os fiov but (piAos eariv, (pihoi (paaiv 
dWos irus " dWos irus " dWos irore, aKXuv nvuv. 

Rem. 2. It is evident that if there was an inclination of the accent when a 
Paroxytone was followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, the accent would stand on 
the fourth syllable, e.g. $'\oi-(paaiv, which is contrary to the usa . at the 
language. 

4. A Proparoxytone and a Properispomenon unite with the 
following enclitic, and take an acute accent on the last sylla- 
ble; this syllable forms the tone-syllable for the following 
enclitic, as avSpoi-Tros ns, e. £. 

uv&puTr6s ris for avSpuiros rls au/md ri for aufxa rl 

av&puTroi rives " uv&puwoi rives au/u.d iariv " aujxa eariv. 

Exception. A Properispomenon, ending in | or \p, docs not admit the incli- 
nation of a dissyllabic enclitic, e. g. ctuAaf rtv6s, av\a£ eariv, (poivi£ eariv, K^pv^ 
iariv, \cu\a\p eariv. 



54 ENCLITICS ACOENTEF. [$ 35 

Rem. 3. The local suffix 8e (£e), which expresses the relation to a plaoe^ 
whither, coalesces with suhstantives according to the rules of inclination, e. g. 

"OKvixjrosoe ~2,(pr\TT6vhe ovpavovSe Tlv&wde (from Ilu&w) 

epefiosoe 'E\eva?vdde Meyapdde o6/j.ou5e. 

So 'A^vaCe (i- e - 'A&VasSe), UXaraia^e (llAoTatoi), X^^C 6 (x ^"* 5 Ace.) The 
suffix 8e when appended to the Demon, pronoun draws the accent of this pro- 
noun to the syllable before Se. In the oblique cases, these strengthened 
pronouns are accented according to the rules for Oxytones, § 45, 7 (a), e. g. 

t6<tos — roaosfie, roaovde, roacpoe, Toarjvde, TOaavSe, 
ro7os — roiosde, ttiXlkos — T7]\iK6s5e, roTai — roiaide, 

euba — eV&aSe. 

5. When several enclitics occur together, each throws back 
its accent on the preceding, e. g. ei Trip tis ae /W cjhtjo-l irorc. 

§35. Enclitics accented. 

Some enclitics, whose signification allows them to be in a measure indepen- 
dent, are accented in the following cases : — 

1. 'Eari (j/) is accented on the penult, when it stands in connection with an 
Inf. for e^eari (v), and after the particles aAA', el, ovk, fxi\, u>s, icai, fxev, on, ttov, 
and the pronoun rovr, and also at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. loe?v eariv 
(licet videre), el eariv, ovk eariv, tovt eariv, eari &eos, etc.; the other forms of 
elfii which are capable of inclination, retain the usual accent on the ultimate, 
when they stand at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. elal &eoi. 

2. The forms of (pr\fxi which are capable of inclination, retain the accent, 
when the} r stand at the beginning of a sentence, and also when they are sep- 
arated from the preceding word by a punctuation-mark, e. g. (p-niA ey&. — "Egtiv 
avrjp aya&6s, <pr)/j.l. 

3. The encl'tic Pers. pronouns, aov, aoi, ere, oT, acpiai (u), retain their accent: 
(a) when an accented Prep, precedes, e. g. irapa aov, fiera ae, irpbs aoi. But 

the enclitic forms of tiie first Pers. pronoun are not used with accented 
prepositions, but, instead of them, the longer and regularly accented 
forms, e. g. 

Trap ifiov not irapd fiov irpbs e/xoi not irp6s fioi 

Kar e/j.4 " Kard. fie irepl e/xov " irepi fiov. 

Remark 1. There are, however, a few instances of enclitics of the first Pers. 
pronoun standing with accented prepositions, e. g. irp6s fj.e. PI. Symp. 218, c. 

Rem. 2. When the emphasis is on the preposition, there is an inclination 
of the accent, e. g. iirl ere ij aw aoi, X. An. 7. 7, 32 {against you, rather than with 
you). — The enclitic forms are used with the unaccented prepositions, e. g. en 
fiov, ev fxoi, es ae, h /xe, e« aov, ev aou But when the emphasis is on the pro- 
noun, there is no inclination, and instead of fiov, /xoi, fie, — ip.ov, ifioi, ifie, are 
used, e. g. e" euoi, a\\' ovk ev aoi. 



{ 36.] DIVISION OP SYLLABLES. 55 

(b) The enclitic pronouns generally retain their accent when they are em- 
phatic, as in antitheses, e. g. ifih iced <re ; i/j.e f) ere ; hence the forms ou, of, 
e, are accented only when they are used as reflexive pronouns. 

4. The pronoun t\s is accented when it stands at the beginning of a sentence, 
e. g. rives Xeyovaiv. 

5. There is no inclination, when the accent of the word on which the enclitic 
rests disappears by Elision, e. g. naXbs 8* itxrlu, but KaXbs Se eanv — noXXol 8* 
elfftu, but ttoXXoI Se elcriv. 



* 36. Division of Syllables . 

Preliminary Remarks. The division of syllables, according to our mode 
of pronouncing Greek, depends in part upon the place of the accent. The 
term accent and accented, throughout these rules, is used with reference to our 
pronunciation of the Greek, and not to the written accent on the Greek words. 

The accent (stress) is on the penult in dissyllables, and on the antepenult in 
polysyllables, when the penult is short. The accent on the penult or antepenult 
is called the primary accent. If two syllables precede the primary accent, there 
is a secondary accent on the first syllable of the word. 

The following rules exhibit the more general method of dividing syllables, 
except where the pronunciation is regulated by the Greek accent : — 

1. A single consonant between the vowels of the penult and ultimate is 
joined to the latter, e. g. $-70?, ira-pd, fxd-Xa, 'i-va, 1-t6s, t-X&Pi iro'XG-fios, (Trpdrev- 
juo, Xtt*e-ir<fc, \0xa-y6s, viroXa-fidov. 

Exception. In dissyllables, a single consonant following e or o is joined to 
the first syllable, e. g. x6y-os, reX-os, irep-l, ot-i, ttoX-v, e^-w, ar6x-os. 

2. The double consonants £ and ty are joined to the vowel preceding them ; 
e. g. Ta|-w, Sty-os, irpa^-ts, ^rira,l-d t uevos. But £ is joined to the vowel following 
it, except when it stands after e or 0, or after an accented vowel in the ante- 
penult, — in which case it is joined with these vowels; e. g. vo/xl-fa, vo/xi-fa 
apird-fa ; but rpdirc^-a, o£-os, vojx'i^-oixev, apizd^-ofxev. 

3. A single consonant (except in the penult) before or after the vowels a and 
1 having the accent, and also a single consonant before or after e and having 
the accent, is joinel to these vowels; e. g. ay-a&6s, iror-afxos, fSa-aiX-ia, v-ttoX- 
afiwv, o-iroT-epos, ri&-o(j.ev, a-irop-ia, ev-Sm-ia, eiri-rtfi-la] for a single consonant 
after a long vryrel, etc., see 4. 

Exception. A single consonant preceded by a, and followed by two vowels, 
the first of which is e or t, is joined to the vowel after it ; e. g. (rrpa-rid, auaard- 
cecDS, (TTpa-Tidrris (not ar par-id, etc.). 

4. A single consonant after a long vowel, a diphthong or v, is joined to the 
vowel following ; e. g. airorri-X6dri, i(pr r /j.epos, (piXd-repos, cucoXov-frta, aicov-crare 
fiv-plas, a&v-fj.la, (pv-yoi/res, (pv-yoyiev. 

Exception. A single consonant following long a or t in the antepenult, and 
having the accent, is joined with the vowel preceding ; e. g. airoKpii/-aro, €«rif 
u&v-aueu. 



06 DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH, ETC. [§$ 37, 38 

5. Two single consonants coming together in the middle of a word, ar« 
separated ; e. g. 7roA-Aa, la-rdvai, refr-j/nica, Srap-paAsoos, /cAuTOTe'x-^s. 

Exception. A mute and liquid are sometimes joined to the following vowel j 
e. g. iri-Tpcacrzor. 

€. When three consonants come together in the middle of a word, the last 
two, if a mute and liquid, are joined to the following vowel ; if not, the last 
only ; e. g. &v-&pu>iros, av-Spla, but irepcp-Surjv. 

7. Compounds are divided into their constituent parts, when the first part 

ends with a consonant ; hut if the first part ends with a vowel followed by a 

short syllable, the compound is divided, like a simple word; e.g. ck-jScuVw, 

ffvveK-(pd!)V7]<Tis, Trp6Sr-earis, avdfi-curit, but inro-^> / f)Trjs, not inro<p-'!]T7]S ; SO irapa- 

(dvb). 

§ 37. Punctuation- marks — Diastole . 

• • The colon and semicolon are indicated by the same mark, a point above 
the line, e. g. ES eAe|as • irdvres yap a>jj.o\6yr}<rav. The interrogation-mark is 
our semicolon, e. g. Tis tout a i-jro'iyo-cu ,• who did this ? The period, comma, and 
mark of exclamation have the same characters as in English; the mark of 
exclamation is rarely used. 

2. The Diastole (or Hypodiastole), which has the same character as the 
comma, is used to distinguish certain compound words from others of like 
sound, but of dissimilar meaning, e. g. b, ti, whatever, and on, tJiat, since ; o, tc, 
whatever, and ore, when. More recently, such words are generally separated in 
writing marely, e. g. '6 n, '6 re. 



SECTION II. 

ETYMOLOGY, OR GRAMMATICAL FORMS. 

$ 38. Division of the Parts of Speech. — Inflection 

1. Etymology relates to the form and meaning of the Parts 
of Speech. 

2. The Parts of Speech are : — 

(1) Substantives, which denote anything which exists, any 
object (person or thing) ; as man, rose, house, virtue; 

(2) Adjectives, which denote a property or quality; as greats 
small, red, beautiful, hateful; 



♦ 38.] DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH. INFLECTION. 51 

(3) Pronouns, which denote the relation of the object spoken 
of to the speaker ($ 86) ; as I, thca, he, this, that, mine, ihin a - % 
his ; 

(4) Numerals, which denote the number or quantity of an 
object; as one, tico, three, many, few ; 

(5) Verbs, which denote an action or state; as to bloom, to 
wake, to sleej), to love, to censure ; 

(6) Adverbs, which denote the way and manner in which an 
action takes place, or the relations of place, time, manner, qual- 
ity, and number; as here, yesterday, beautifully (=in a beautiful 
manner), perhaps, often, rarely ; 

(7) Prepositions, which denote the relation of space, time, 
etc. of an object to an action or thing; as (to stand) before the 
house, after sunset, before sleep ; 

(8) Conjunctions, which connect words and sentences, or 
determine the relation between sentences ; as and, but, because, 

3. Words are either essential words, i. e. such as express a 
notion, or idea, viz. the substantive, adjective, verb, and the 
adverbs derived from them; or formal words, i. e. such as 
express merely the relations of the idea to the speaker or some 
one else, viz. the pronoun, numeral, preposition, conjunction, the 
adverbs derived from them, and the verb thai, to be, when it is 
used as a copula, with an adjective or substantive for its predi- 
cate; as 6 avSpwTros SvrjTos kcrTiv. 

Remark. Besides the parts of speech above mentioned, there are certain 
organic sounds, called interjections ; as alas 1 oh I ah ! They express neither 
an idea nor the relation of an idea, and hence are not to be considered as proper 
words. — Prepositions, conjunctions, and adverbs not derived from adjectives 
and substantives, are included under the common name of Particles. 

4. Inflection is the variation or modification of a word m 
order to indicate its different relations. The inflection of the 
substantive, adjective, pronoun, and numeral, is termed Declen- 
sion ; the inflection of the verb, Conjugation. The other parti 
of speech do not admit inflection. 



l)8 different kinds and gender of substantives. [§$39,40 

CHAPTER I. 
The Substantive. 

$39. Different kinds of Substantives . 

1. When a substantive ($ 38) indicates an object, which haa 
an actual, independent existence, it is termed a Concrete substan- 
tive, e. g. man, woman, lion, earth, flower, host; but when the 
substantive indicates an action or quality, which is only conceived 
of as being something actual or independent, it is called an 
Abstract substantive, e. g. virtue, wisdom. 

2. The Concretes are, 

(a) Proper nouns, when they denote only single persons or 
things, and not a class ; as Cyrus, Plato, Hellas, Athens ; 

(b) Appellatives, when they denote an entire class or an 
individual of a class ; as mortal, tree, man, ivoman, flower. 

Remark. Appellatives are called material nouns, when they indicate the 
simple material, e. g. milk, du3t, water, gold, coin, grain ; collective nouns, when 
they designate many single persons or things as one whole, e. g. mankind, 
cavalry, fleet ; nouns of quantity, when they denote measure or weight, e. g. a 
bushd, a pound. 

§40. Gender of Substantives . 

Substantives have three genders, as in Latin ; the gender is 
determined partly by the meaning of the substantives, and 
partly by their endings. The last mode will be more fully 
treated under the several declensions. The following general 
rules determine the gender of substantives by their mean- 
ing:— 

1. The names of males, of nations, winds, months, and most 
rivers, are masculine, e. g. 6 /foo-iAevs, the Icing ; 61 "EAA^ves, 6 
Tapvrjkiuv (January, nearly) ; 6 'AX^eto?, the Alpheus ; 6 evpos, the 
southeast wind. 

Remark 1. Exceptions : Diminutives in -ov, which are not proper names 
(these are conceived of as things and are neuter) ; e. g. to /xeipaKiov, the lad 
(but proper names of females in -ov are feminine, e. g. 77 AcSvtiov) ; also rh 
kvSpdirodov, a slave, mancipium ; to irotSt/ca, a favorite ; and some rivers, e. g. 
\\ 2tv|, and also some according to the ending, e. g. r\ X-i^rt]. 

2. The names of females are feminine, e. g. y \mft)P> mother. 



$ 40. J GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 59 

3. The names of the letters, infinitives, all indeclinable 
words, and every word used as a mere symbol, are neuter, e. g. 
to \djjbf38a, rb TV7TTeiv, the striking ; to ^T-qp, the word mother. 

Rem. 2. The gender of the names of mountains is determined by their 
endings ; hence (a) masculine, 'EXIkwv, -£>vos, etc. ; those in -os, Gen. -ov, e. g. 
IIapua<r6s] in -cos, -«, e. g. "A&ws (d'Epv^, derived from the name of a person, 
is particularly to be observed) ; (b) feminine, those in -77 (a), Gen. -77s, e. g. 
Mtj/t), y lS?7, O'ittj ; those in -is and -vs, e. g. 'AXttis, Gen. -ews, ''AAneis, -ewv, 
Kapa/xfiis, -i§os, "O&pvs, -vos (masculine in Lat.), Tldpurjs, -tj&os ; (c) neuter, those 
in -ov, e. g. Avkcliov, Ht]\iov. 

Rem. 3. The gender of the names of places also is determined almost entirely 
by the endings ; only a few of these are feminine, properly agreeing with the fem- 
inine appellatives 777, x&P a i v^aos (i. e. veovcra x^P a )i toAis to be supplied with 
them : (a) names of cities and islands in -os, -ov, e. g. 77 Kopiv&os \ir6Xis], 77 'P6Sos 
[vrjaos], 77 Ar)\os [vr)aos\ (except o 3 Oyx7j otto's, 6 TlpwirSs, 6 Alyia\6s, 6 Kdvcairos; 
usually 6 'Opxo^v6s, 6 'AXiapros; but generally 77 IIuAos and 7) 'ETriSavpos) ; and 
the following names of countries : 77 A'tyvirros, 77 Xepp6vr)aos, 77 "Hireipos, r) IleAo- 
ttoWtjctos ; (b) names of cities in -uv, e. g. 77 BafivAdov, -wvos, 77 AaKeSai/xwv, -ovos, 
77 , Av&7)b'a>v, -ovos, 77 XaAK7j5c6V, -ovos, 7) Kapx7j8c6i/, -ovos (except 6 Olvewv and 6 
Bpavpwv, -wvos, usually 6 MapaSrwv, -wvos; but commonly 77 ~2,ikvwv, -wvos) ; (c) 
i) Tpot£i)v, -r)vos. The gender of the others is determined by the endings. 
Hence, 

(a) All names of countries in -os, Gen. -ov (except those named above), are 
masculine, e. g. 6 B6o-7ropos, 'logo's, YlSvros, 'EWtjsttovtos, Alyia\6s ; all plural 
names of cities in -01, Gen. -wv, e. g. $i\nnroi ; names of cities in -ovs, Gen. 
-ovvTos, e. g. 6 'T^ovs (some of these are used both as masculine and feminine, 
e. g. Qikovs ; 'Afxa^rovs, KepaeroDs, 'Pa/xvovs, 2t5oCs, and Tpcnre&vs, are feminine 
only) ; those in -as, Gen. -avros, e. g. 6 Tapas ; those in -ens, Gen. -ecos, e. g. 
Qavorevs ; finally, 6 Macros, Gen. -tjtos; 

(b) All names of countries of the first Dec. and those of the third, which 
have feminine endings, are feminine (see § 66, II), e. g. r) 'EAei/cns, -tvos, 7) 
SaActjius, -Ivos, €tc. ; 

(c) All in -ov, Gen. -ov; plurals in -a, Gen. -wv, and those in -os, Gen. -ovs, 
are neuter, e. g. to "IAiov, to. AevKrpa, to "Apyos, Gen. -ovs. 

4. The names of persons which have only one form for the 
Masc. and Fern, are of common gender, e. g. 6 i) Stos, god and 
goddess ; o y) 7rats, boy and girl. 

Rem. 4. Movable substantives are such as change their ending so as to 
indicate the natural gendei*, e. g. 6 fia<riAevs, king ; 77 /3acrtAeta, queen. See For- 
mation of Words. 

Rem. 5. Substantives (mostly names of animals) which have but one gram- 
matical gender, either Masc. or Fern., to denote both genders, are called 
Epicenes (itriKoiva), e. g. 77 aXwirril, the fox, whether the male or female fox: 7) 
&Pktos, the bear ; 77 KafiyXos, the camel ; 6 fxvs, the mouse ; 77 x e ^dov, the swallow ; 
ri ols, the sheep ; 77 /3oCs (collectively), at &6es, cattle; 6 tWos, horse (indefinitely), 
but in PL, al 'ltvttoi ; but when the natural gender is to be distinguished, appriv, 
male, or &r\\vs, female, is added, e. g. Acrycos 6 &r)\vs, the female hare ; ciAc^l r\ 
&pp7]v, the male fox ; or the gender may be indicated by prefixing the article, or 
by another adjective, e. g. 6 &pKros, the male bear. Some masculine names of 
animals have also the corresponding feminine forms, e.g. 6 AeW, a lion: { 
AeWct, a lioness. See Rem. 4. — Here belong, in the second place, the Masc 
names of persons in the PL, which include the Pern., e. g. ol yoveTs, the parents 
0* waiSes, liberi, the children (sons and daughters) 



CO 



NUMBER CASE, AND DECLENSION. FIRST DEC. [$$ 41,4? 



$ 41. Number, Case, and Declensioir 

1. The Greek has three Numbers ; the Singular, denoting one 
person or thing ; the Plural more than one ; and the Dual, two. 

Remark 1. The dual is not often used; it is found most frequently in the 
Attic dialect ; it docs not occur in the iEolic, nor in the Hellenistic Greek 

2. The Greek has five Cases, 1 Nominative, Genitive, Dative, 
Accusative, and Vocative. 

Rem. 2. The Nom. and Voc, as they represent an object as independent of 
any other, are called independent cases (casus recti) ; the others, as they rep- 
resent an object as dependent on or related to some other, are called dependent 
cases (casus obi i qui). 

Rem. 3. Neuter substantives and adjectives have the same form in the Nom., 
Ace, and Voc. of all numbers. The dual has only two case-endings ; one for 
the Nom., Ace, and Voc, the other for the Gen. and Dat. 

3. There are in the Greek three different ways of inflecting 
substantives; distinguished as the First, Second, and Third 
Declensions. 

Rem. 4. The three declensions may be reduced to two principal declensions, 
viz. the strong and the weak. The case-endings of the strong are prominent and 
clearly distinguishable, while those of the weak are less distinctly marked. 
Words of the third Dec. belong to the strong, those of the first and second to 
the weak. In the third Dec. the case-endings uniformly appear pure; in the 
first and second this is less so, because in these declensions the steins end in a 
vowel, and hence combine with the case-endings which begin with a vowel. 
The inflexion of both the principal declensions, in the Masc. and Fern., is as 
follows : — 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 




Strong. 


Weak. 


Strong. 


Weak. 


Strong. 


Weak. 


Nom. 


s 


I — II 5 


es 


i 


€ 


e 


Gen. 


OS 


S 


cov 


ccv 


OIV 


IV 


Dat. 


i 


i 


ai(v) 


is 


OIV 


IV 


Ace. 


v and a 


V 


as 


as 


€ 


€ 



§ 42. First Declension. 

The first declension has four endings, a and -q feminine ; as 
and 77s masculine. 



See a fuller statement under the Cases in the Syntax, § 268, seq. 



•43.] 



NOUNS OF THE FEMININE GENDER. 



61 







Endings. 








Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 


Norn. 


a a or t] 


as or rjs 


at 


d 


Gen. 


7}s as 


ys 


ov 


(OV 


aiv 


" Dat. 


V £ 


V 


? V 


ais 


aiv 


Ace. 


av av 


7]V 


ay 7)v 


as 


a 


Voc. 


a a 


V- 


% V, a. 


at 


a. 



Remark 1. It will be seen from the above terminations, that the plural as 
well as the dual endings are the same, whatever may be the form of the singu- 
lar. 

Rem. 2. The original ending of the Dat. PL was aiai (v), as in the second 
Dec. oia'i(v), e.g. ZixaKTi, raTcri, KafnraTfft, &eo7(ri, <r{j.u<po7cri, aya&o7<Ti. This 
form is also found in the Attic poets, and is not foreign even to prose, at least 
to that of Plato, especially in the second Dec. Even tbe Ionic form -yet (v) 
is sometimes used by the Attic poets. 



$ 43. Nouns of the Feminine Gender. 

1. (a) The Nom. ends in a or a, which remains in all the 
Cases, if it is preceded by p, e, or t (a pure), e. g. x^P a > land; 
lhia,form; cro<£ia, ivisdom ; ^da, utility ; ewoia, benevolence ; here 
also belong the contracts in a (see No. 2), e. g. pa ; some sub- 
stantives in a, e. g. aXaXd, ivar-cry, and some proper names, e. g 
'AvSpofxiSa, ArjSa, TeXd, ^iXofx-qXa, Gen. -as, Dat. -a, Ace. -av. 

Remark 1. Th; following words whose stem ends in p, take the ending ?j 
instead of a: nSpr], maiden; KSpprj, cheek; Sep?, neclc; ahap-n, water-gruel; and 
some proper names introduced from the Ionic dialect, e. g. 'E<j>vp-n ; the t\ then 
remains through all the cases of the Sing. — If any other vowel than e or i, 
precedes, the Nom. and all the cases of the Sing, have r\, e. g. ano-fj, <pvfj, o-Kevrj, 
far) ; except it 6a, grass; xP^ a > color; cr6a, porch; yva, field; aiKva, gourd; 
kapva, walnut-tree ; ikaa, olive-tree ; aXwd, threshing-floor ; Navo-iKaa, all Gen. -as. 

(b) The Nom. ends in a, which remains only in the Ace. and 
Voc. ; but in the Gen. and Dat., it is changed into -q, if the a is 
preceded by A, XX, o-, o-cr (jt), £, $, \b. 

Rem. 2. The ending is commonly in a when v precedes, e. g. %x&va (so es- 
pecially in words in -aiva) ; but -n is often found, as is always the case in the 
suffix cvvn, e. g. eveppoo-vvrj, also boivq, Trpv/xva and irpv/xva, ireivn and iretva. 
Alaira is the only word ending in a preceded by a single t. 

(c) In other cases, the Nom. ends in -q, which remains 
throughout the singular. 

6 



62 



NOUNS OF THE MASCULINE GENDER. 



[H4. 



2. If a is preceded by e or a, -ea is contracted in most words 
into rj, and -da into a in all the Cases (comp. poppas, § 44, 3). 
The final syllable remains circumflexed in all the Cases. 

Rem. 3. The first Dec. is called the a declension, as its uninflected forms 
end in o, e. g. yvw^-n from the uninflected yvw/j.ea (comp. crvKea), veavias frorr^ 
the uninflected veavla, ttoAittjs from iroXirea; the second, the o declension, as 
its uninflected forms end in o, e. g. x6yos, uninflected form x6yo : the third, the 
consonant declension, as its uninflected forms end in a consonant, and the vowels 
and v, which originated from consonants. 

Paradigms. 







a) n 


through a 


11 the cases. 


b) d through 


all the cases. 


c) d, Gen. 7js. 






Opinion. 


Fig-tree. 


Shadow. 


Land. 


Hammer. 


Lioness. 


s 


N. 


V 


yvw/x-q 


ffVK-(4a)r} 


(TKL-a 


Xupa. 


acpvpo. 


Xeaivd 




G. 


T7)S 


yVW/Ji7]S 


(TVK-7]S 


(TKl-aS 


Xwjods 


<r<pvpds 


Xeaivrjs 




D. 


- T V 


yvca/xr) 


avK-v 


(TKi-a 


X<»P<$ 


acpvpa 


Xeatvp 




A. 


T7]V 


yvcofx-nv 


(TVK-7]V 


(TKI-O.V 


X&pw 


atpvpav 


Xeaivav 




V. 


& 


yv&fiTI 


CTVK-7] 


<TKi-a. 


X<*pa 


crcpvpa 


Xeaiva 


p 


N. 


ai 


yv&fxai 


ffvK-ai 


(TKi-ai 


X&pcu 


(Tcpvpcu 


Xeaivat 




G. 


TO)V 


yvwfxcav 


(TVK-CtiV 


(TKl-toV 


X&P&V 


acpvpwv 


Xeaivwv 




D. 


rats 


yvw/j.ais 


(fVK-CUS 


(TKL-CUS 


X&pa.is 


<T(pVp<XLS 


Xeaivais 




A. 


ras 


yvdifxas 


crvK-as 


CKL-O.S 


X^po-s 


crcpvpds 


Xeaivas 




V. 


& 


yVCDfAOU 


ffvK-ai 


CKi-ai 


X w P al 


ccpvpai 


Xiaivai 


Dual. 


TW 


yi/do/xa. 


avK-a 


(TKl-OL 


X<i>pd 


crcpvpa 


Xeaiva 






TCi.IV 


yvwfxaiv 


avK-aiu 


(TKI-O.LV 


X<*>pau> 


ccpvpaiv 


Xeaivaiv. 



Remark 1. On the form of the article tco instead of rd, see § 241, Rem. 10. 
On the declension of the article 77, see § 91. The t% standing before the singu- 
lar and plural Voc. is a mere exclamation. 

Rem. 2. On the contraction of -ea into -77, see § 9, II. (a) ; in the plural and 
dual of the first and second declensions, however, -ea is contracted into o. 
Comp. § 9, II. (b). Nouns in -aa are contracted as follows: N. fxvda, /jlvu 
(mina), G. jxvdas, [xvas, D. /xvda, [xva, A. /JLvdai , uvav) PI. "N. /jlvoi, etc. 



$44. II. Nouns of the Masculine Gender. 

1. The Gen. cf masculine nouns ends in -ou; nouns in -as 
retain the a in the Dat., Ace, and Voc, and those in -i?? retain 
the r) in the Ace. and Dat. Sing. 

2. The Voc. of* substantives in -779 ends in a : — 

(1) All in -TTjs, e. g. to^otyjc, Voc. rot-ora, Trpo<f>r)Tr}<; i Voc. Trpo^rj- 
ra; (2) all in --qq composed of a. substantive and a verb, e. g 

y<-o)(JL€Tpr)<;, Voc. yeoj/xerpa, (xvpon-ioXyji, a salve-seller, V.OC. fivpo 



44. 



MASCULINE NOUNS. ■ FIRST DECLENSION. 



63 



7ra>Aa; (3) national names in -r/?, e. g. Ilepo-rjs, a Persian, Voc. 
Xlepora. — All other nouns in -r;s have the Voc. in 77, e. g. IT eparjs, 
Perses (the name of a man), Voc. Ilipo-q. 

3. The remarks on contract feminine nouns ($ 43, 2), ap- 
ply to Masc. nouns contracted from -eas, e. g. 'Epfxyjc, poppas. 
In fiopeas, the ea is contracted into a, and not into tj, since p 
precedes, $ 43, 1 (a). The doubling of the p in fioppas is merely 
accidental. 

Remark 1. Contrary to § 43, I, compounds of fierpeco (to measure), as 
yecofisTpris, end in -rjs instead of -as ; on the contrary, several proper names, etc, 
as TleXotriSas and yevvadas, a noble, end in -as instead of -r/s. 

Rem. 2. Several masculine nouns in -as have the Doric Gen. in a, namc/y, 
iraTpakoias, firjTpaXotas, patricide, matricide; opvi&o&ripas, fowler; also several 
proper names, particularly those which are Doric or foreign, e. g. "TXas, Gen. 
'TAd, ^.Koiras, -d, 'Avvifias, -d, ^vXXas, -a ; (the pure Greek, and also several 
of the celebrated Doric names, e. g. 'Apxvras, AeaviSas, Uav<ravlas (also the 
Boeotian 'Ewa/JLeivavSas), commonly have ov;) finally, contracts in as, e. g. 
Boppas, Gen. fioppa. 

Paradigms. 



Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


Citizen. 

iro\TTn)s 
iroXirov 
iroKlrri 

7TOAlT7JJ/ 
TOAiTd 


Mercury. 

'Epfi (eas) rjs 
'Ep/xov 

'Epfirjv 
'Epfirj 


Youth. 

veavids 

veaviov 

veavia. 

veavidv 

veavld 


Fowler. 

6pv&ofrfipds 
dpvi&ofr-fipd 
opvi&o&r)pqi 
opv&ofrfipdv 
dpvi&ofrfjpd i 


Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


troXirai 

iroXirStv 

troXirais 

-iroXirds 

ttoATtcci 


'Epfia? 
'Epfiav 
'Ep/xa?s 
'Epfias 
'Epfiai 


veaviai 
veaviwv 
veaviais 
veavids 
veavtai 


8 <3 8 '8 8 

£ £ £ £ 2 

s s s s s 

«.© »© "© "© *o 


Dual. 


iroXlrd 
iroXiraiv 


'Epfia 
'Epfiauv 


veavid 
veaviaiv 


opvidrofrftpd 
opv&ofriipaiv 



Rem. 3. The Ionic Genitive-ending -ea of Masc. nouns in -77s (§ 211), is 
retained even in the Attic dialect in some proper names, e. g. 0ctAe« from 
®aX7js, Tr)peco from Ty)pr\s. — The contract (3oppas is also found in the Attic 
writers in the uncontracted form ; thus, fiopeas, X. An. 5. 7, 7. PI. Phaedr. 229, 
b. Popeov, Th. 3, 23. Qopeav, 3, 4. 

Rem. 4. The ending 77s occurs, also, in the third Dec. To the first Dec. 
belong: (a) proper names in -idrjs and -d5r)s, e.g. ®ovKi8idr)s, 'ArpeiSrjs (from 
'Arpe and idrjs), MiXrLoiBrjs, as well as gentile nouns, e. g. 'XirapTidrris ; (b) nouns 
in -T7js derived from verbs, e. g. iroi'fjrrjs from 7iWa>; (c) compounds consisting 
of a substantive and verb, or of a substantive compounded with another of the 
first Dec, e. g. *cw5oTpf/3»7S, Pl&XiottvXtis, apxeSticiis. 



64 QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION. FIRST DEC. [§45 



$45. Quantity and Accentuation of the First 
Declension. 

a. Quantity. 

1. The Nom. ending a is short in all words, which have the Gen. in -77s [§ 43, 
I (b;] ; but long in those which have the Gen, in -as, e. g. irreXed, (tkioL, <ro<pia, 
jraiSe/d, xp^°-> XP 01 ^ ir ^ a > '/M 6 V°' AtjSs, aXaka, etc. ; the same is true of the Fern, 
ending of adjectives in os, e. g. ihev&epti, ducaia. 

Exceptions . 
The following classes of words have a short in the Nom. : — 

(a) Dissyllables, and some Polysyllabic names of places in -aid, e.g. 'lariaia, 
HXaraia. 

(b) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -eia, e. g. aATjd-e/a, MTjSeta, fia<rl\eia t 
queen. y\vice?a, except abstracts from verbs in -evw, e. g. fiacriXeia, king- 
dom ; dov\cla, servitude (from fiaaiXeva, SouAeuw) ; 

(c) the names and designation of females, etc. in -rpia, e. g. \paArpia, a female 
musician, words in -v7d, e. g. ixvia, rerv(pv?a, the numeral pia, and, finally, 
some poetic words ; 

(d) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -01a, e. g. evvoia, &voia; 

(e) words in -pa whose penult is long by a diphthong (except av), by, v, or 
by pp, e. g. irelpa, \xaxaipa ) yecpvpa, ffcpvpa ; Tlvppd. 'Eraipd, TraXaiarpd, 
Al&pa, Qaldpa, noWvpa, are exceptions. 

2. The Voe. ending a is always short in nouns in -ns ; but always long in 
nouns in -as, e. g. ito\jt& from iroKir-ns, veavtd. from veavias. The quantity of 
Fem. nouns in -& and -d, is the same in the Yoc. as in the Nom. 

3. The Dual ending a is always long, e. g. Moved, from Movea. 

4. The Ace. ending av is like the Nom., e. g. Movcrdv, yiipdv from Moved, 
Xdboa. 

5 The ending as is always long, e. g. tccs rpairefas from rpdirefa, 6 veavtds, 
robs veavtds, ttjs oiKias, ras ot/ads. 

b. Accentuation. 
6. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom., as long as the laws 
of accentuation permit (§ 3(V). 

Exceptions. 

(a) The Voc. oeairora from ^«tit6t7)s, lord; 

(b) The Gen. PI. of the first Dec. always has the final syllable wv circum 
flexed, which is caused by the contraction of the old ending dwu, e. g 
Keaivwv from Aeaiva, veaviwv from veavias. — But the substantives, xpfo' 
r-ns, creditor ; a<pv-n, anchovy ; irrjfflat, monsoons ; and x^ ovyr l s i wild-boar, 
are exceptions ; in the Gen. PL they remain Paroxytones, thus xP"h ffTm '\ 
cupvwv, irijalun/ (but acpvwy, xpyv™" from atpvjfS, unapt; xpVO'™*, useful)- 



♦ 46.] 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



65 



Remark. On the accentuation of Adjectives, see § 75. 



7 The accent of the Nom. is changed, according to the quantity of the final 
syllable, thus : — 

(a) Oxy tones become Perispomena in the Gen. and Dat. of the three num- 
bers, e.g. (Nom. Tifir]) ti/x?is, -fj, -av, -cuv, -cus; this holds, also, in the 
second Dec; e. g. &e6s, -ov, -<£ -wv, -o?v; 

(b) Paroxytones with a short penult remain so through all the Cases, except 
the Gen. PL, which is always circumflexed on the last syllable; but 
Paroxytones with a long penult become Properispomena, if the last syl- 
lable is short, as in the Nom. PL, and in the Voc. Sing, in o of Masc. 
nouns in -rjs (§ 44), e. g. yvdofj.7], yvw/ucu, but yva/xuv] iro\i'TT)s, iroXTrd, 
7roAiToi, but ttoXituv ; on the contrary, Slf/c^, Sfkat, but ducwv ; 

(c) Properispomena become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. 
MoOca, Movcriqs ; 

(d) Proparoxytones become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. 
\4aiva, Kealvrjs. 



§46. Second Declension. 

The Second Declension has two endings, os and ov ; nouns 
in -os are mostly masculine, but often feminine (§ 50) ; those 
in -ov are neuter; except Fern, diminutive proper names in -ov, 
e. g. 7} TXvKeptov (MO). 



Endings 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 


Nom. 


OS ov 


01 




a 


a 


Gen. 


ov 




0)V 




OIV 


Dat. 


V 




OlS 




OLV 


Ace. 


ov 


ovs 




a 


0) 


Voc. 


os and e ov. 


01 




a. 


ca. 



Remark 1 . The Gen. and Dat. endings of the different genders are the 
same in all numbers; neuters have the Nom., Ace., and Voc. alike in aU 
lumbers, and in the plural they end in a. 

Rem. 2. On thi form of the Dat. PL oiat (v), see $ 42, Rem. 2. 



6* 



66 



SECOND DECLENSION. 

Paradigms 



N47 





Word. 


Island. 


God. 


Messenger. 


Fig. 


S.N. 


6 x6y-os 


■)] VTjCTOS 


6(r})&e6s 


6 ayyeXos 


rb avKOV 


G. 


rod Xoy-ov 


rrjs vqcrov 


rov &eov 


ayyeXov 


rov gvkov 


D. 


T(p Xoy-a> 


rfj VTiGca 


T<p &e£ 


ayyeXw 


T(f 0~VK(p 


A. 


rbu Xoy-ov 


T7]U vr\<rov 


rbv &e6v 


ayyeXov 


rb avKOV 


V. 


3> X6y-e 


3 VT](T€ 


3 &eos 


&yyeAe 


3) &VKOV 


P.N. 


oi x6y-oi 


al VTJaot 


ol &eoi 


&yyeXoi 


ra ffvKa 


G. 


r&v Xoy-oov 


rdv vrjcrwy 


rwy &e£>v 


ayyiXoiv 


rwv GVK03V 


D. 


ro7s Xoy-ois 


reus vr\(rois 


ro?s &eo?s 


ayyeXois 


rots ffvhois 


A. 


TOVS \6y-Qvs 


ras vrjerovs 


robs &eovs 


ayyeXovs 


ra. avKa 


V. 


3 Xoy-oi 


3 vr\<JQi 


3) &eoi 


&yyeXoi 


3> o^vKa 


1). 


TW X6y-w 


ra vi](TO} 


t« Sect) 


ayyiXa) 


rui avKca 




roiv x6y-oiv 


roiv vi]aoiv 


toiv &eo?v 


ayyeXoiv 


row CVKOLV. 



Rem. 3. The Voc. of words in -os commonly ends in e, though. Dften in -os, 
e. g. 3) (ptxe, and 3> <pi\os ; always 3 &eos in classic Greek. 

§ 47. Contraction of the Second Declension. 

1. A small number of substantives, with o or e before the 
case-ending, are contracted in the Attic dialect (§ 9). 

Paradigms. 





Navigation. 


Circumnavigation. 


Bone. 


S.N. 


o irXoos 


irXovs 


6 TrepiirXoos 


irepiirXovs 


rb oariov 


barovv 


G. 


itXSov 


ttXou 


irepnrXoov 


irep'nrXov 


oareov 


oarov 


D. 


irX6co 


irXcp 


irepiirXoco 


irepiirXa 


O0"T6O) 


ocrcp 


A. 


ttXoov 


irXovv 


TrephrXoov 


irepiirXovv 


oareov 


oarovv 


V. 


irXoe 


irXov 


irepiirXoe 


TrepiirXov 


ocrreov 


ocrrovv 


P.N. 


ttX6ol 


irXo? 


TT€piTTXOOL 


TrepiirXoi 


oarea 


bcrra 


G. 


■xXowu 


ttXuiu 


irepnrXowi/ 


■KepiirXdiV 


ocrrecou 


oGr&v 


D. 


7rX6ois 


ttXoTs 


TrepnrXoois 


TrepiirXocs 


oareoLs 


ocrrots 


A. 


ttXoovs 


ttXovs 


irepnrXoovs 


irept-rrXovs 


ocrrea 


oara 


V. 


itXooi 


ttXoT 


irepiirXooi 


irepiirXoi 


oarea 


oara 


D. 


irX6<a 


ttXco 


irepnrXSoo 


irepiirXa} 


ocrreco 


ocrrcio 




ttXoolv 


ttXoTu 


irepnrXooii/ 


TeplnXoiv 


oareoiv 


oarotv 



Only the folloAving nouns besides the above are contracted in this manner : o 
u6os, vovs, tip mind ; o oan<;. pods, a stream ; 6 &povs, noise ; 6 x^ovs, dozen ; I adeX 
ipiSovs, a nephew : 6 Svyarpib'ovs, grandson . h ave^iadovs, son of a sister's child. 

Remark Uncontraeted forms sometimes occur even in the Attic dialect 
though seldom in substantives, e g. i/6u>, Plato, Prot. 344, a; much oftener in 
adjectives, particularly neuters in oa, as to a.voa, erepS-rrXoa. On the contrac 
tion of ea a ill the PI see « y. II (h) 



» 48.. 4 9. J 



THE ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 



67 



§48. The Attic Second Declension. 

Several substantives and adjectives have the endings m 
(Masc. and Fern.) and wv (Neut.), instead of o? and ov; they 
retain the w through all the Cases instead of the common 
vowels and diphthongs of the second Dec. and subscribe / 
under co where the regular form has o> or ot ; thus, ov and a 
become w ; os, ov, and ous become cos, qiv, and ws ; ol, ol<s, and olv 
become w, a>s, and wv ; — w, w, and wv remain unchanged. The 
Voc. is the same as the Norn 







Paradigms 






Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


People. 

6 \e-cas 
Ae-w 
Ae-<5 

Ae-ws 


Table. 

^ K<xA-a>s 
/caA-w 
- /caA-aj 

KClA-WJ' 

/caA-a>s 


Hare. 

6 A<ry-c<;s 
\ay-a> 
\ay-(S 
Kay-clou 
Xay-cos 


Hall. 

to avcbys-Qov 
avcvye-ca 
avwye-co 
avaye-cov 
avcoye-cov 


Plar. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


Ae cp 

Xe-wv 

Ae-(ps 

Ae-c6s 

Ae-<j> 


kciA-cp 

/caA-wv 

/coA-ws 

/caA-ws 

/cc^A-y 


Xay-ip 

Xay-av 

Xay-cps 

Xay-t&s 

Xay-cp 


ava>ye-<o 

avioye-wv 

avc&ye-as 

avwye-ia 

avc&ye-co 


\ D. N. A. V. 
1 G. and D. 


Ae-d5 

Ae-wj/ 


/caA-w 
KaA-aij' 


Xay-cc 
Xay-Su 


aucoye-co 
avwye-(cv. ! 



Remark 1. Some words of the Masc. and Fern, gender often reject the v 
in the Ace. Sing., namely, 6 Xayc&s, the hare; (Ace. rbv Xaywu and Xaycv), and 
commonly r) eeos, the dawn ; r) aXas, a threshing-floor ; r) Keccs, 7) Kcos, 6 "A&oes, r) 
Teas, and the adjectives &ynpws, not old ; iirl7rXews,full; virepxpecas, guilty. 

Rem. 2. This Declension is termed Attic, because, if a word of this class 
has another form, e. g. Xecis and Xa6s, vtc&s and va6s, MeveAews and Me^eAdos, 
the Attic writers are accustomed to select the form in -ecus ; though, in the 
best Attic writers, the non-Attic forms also may be found. On the interchange 
of the long vowel in this Declension, see § 16, 5. 



§49. Accentuation of Second Declension. 

1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Norn, as long as the quan- 
tity of the final syllable permits; the Voc. &8eA<pe from dSeXrpSs, brother, is 
an exception. 

2. The change of accent is the same as in the first Dec. (§ 45, 7); in the 
Gen. PI., however, only oxytones, e. g. &e6s, are perispomena ; the rest are pro 
paroxytones. See the Paradigms 



68 REMARKS ON THE GENDER OF THE ENDING O?. |$ 50. 

3. The following exceptions to the rules given for the accentuation of eon 
tracts in § 30, 2, should be observed : (a) the Dual in u> of words in -oos, -coy, 
-eou, has the acute instead of the circumflex, e. g. ir\6ca = ir\d>, ocrrew = o(tt(*>, 
instead of ir\u, oarca; — (b) compounds and polysyllabic proper names, which 
retain the accent even on the penult^ when it would regularly stand as a cir- 
cumflex on the contracted syllable, e. g. irepnr\6-ov = irepiirXov (instead of 
wepnrXov), from irepiirKoos = irepiivXovs ; YIeipi&6-ov = lie ipidov (instead of 
Tleipi&ov), from Tleipl&oos = Uetpl&ovs ; also adjectives, e. g. ewJ-ou = e vvov (not 
tvvov), from ewoos = evvovs ; yet the accent is never removed to the antepenult \ 
thus, TreptirXoi, not irepnrXoi] ko.k6voi, not ko.kovol\ — (c) 7b Koiveou, basket, takes 
the circumflex on the ultimate, in the contract forms; hence ndveov = kolvovv 
(instead of navow) ; — (d) words in -8e6s = Sods denoting kindred, have the cir- 
cumflex instead of the acute on the ultimate, e. g. ab*€\<piSe6s = aSeXcpidovs, 
nephew (instead of aSeA^uSous). It may be stated as the rule, that all simple 
substantives and adjectives in -eos and -oos take the circumflex on the contracted 
syllable, hence navovv, aS€\<pidovs, xp v<T( >vs (from xpwre-os). 

4. In the Attic Dec, Proparoxytones retain the acute accent on the antepe- 
nult through all the cases and numbers. See § 29, Rem. 7. Oxytones in -As 
retain the acute accent in the Gen. Sing., contrary to § 45, 7 (aj, e. g. Aec6. ft 
here absorbs o, the inflection-vowel of the Gen. (e. g. \6yo-o = \6yov), which 
accounts for this unusual accentuation, thus A.e« instead of A.e<£-o. 



$ 50. Remarks on the Gender of the Ending os. 

Substantives in -os are regularly Masc. ; yet many are Fern. In addition to 
the names of countries, cities, and islands, mentioned under the general rule 
in § 40, the following exceptions occur, which may be divided into general 
classes • — 

(a) Substantives which denote certai;. products of trees and plants, e. g. 
7) ukvXos, acorn ; 7) fidXavos, acorn ; t) fivo-cros, fine linen ; 7) 8ok6s, a beam ; 7) 
pdfitios, a staff; i) filfi\os, baric of the papyrus ; 7) ^ta^os, rush mat; 

(b) Such as denote stones and earths, e. g. 6 7) \ibos, a stone; 7) \l&os, partic- 
ularly a precious stone ; 7) \prj<pos, a small stone ; t) ipdix/xos, sand ; 7) o-ttoSos, ashes ; 
7) jjllAtos, red earth; 7) KpvcrTaWos, crystal. (6 KpvaraWos, ice) ; 7) fidaiivos, a touch- 
stone; 7) TJXsKTpos, electrum ; 7) a/mdpaydos, a smaragdus ; 7) j8<£Aos, a clod; 7)yv\\ios, 
gypsum; 7) vakos, glass; 7) r'navos, chalk; i) &pyl\os, clay ; 7) 7r\li/&os, brick; 7) 
dafioXos, soot ; 7) K6irpos, ordure ; 7) &o~<poAros, bitumen ; 

lc) Such as denote a hollow or cavity, e. g. 7) Kapdoiros, kneading-trough ; 7) KifS<a- 
iLs and 7) xn^s, a box ; 7) o-op6s, a coffin; ■'] \7}v6s, a wine-press; 7) \7)kv&os, an 
oil-flask ; 7) Kap-luos, an oven; 7) <pcopia/j.6s, a chest; 7) 7rve\os, tub ; 

(d) Such as express the idea of a way, e. g. 7) 686s, a road; 7) a/za£n-os (sc. 
686s), a carriage-road ; 7) Tpifios and 7) drpairos, afoot-path; 7) rdeppos, a ditch; 

(e) Many of the above substantives were originally adjectives, and hence 
appear as feminine nouns, because the substantives with which they properly 
igree are feminine. There are also many others, e. g. 7) atiteios (sc. &wpa). 



51, 52? 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



69 



toiise-door ; r) tfireipos (ac. 7-/)), the mainland] r) 'dvvdpos (sc. 77}), thirsty land, desert ; 
jj veos (sc. x<*>pa)> a f a tt° w Ji e ld> r) vtj<tos (from veiv, sc. 77?), an island; 7) SidKeie 
tos (sc. <powr)), a dialect; 7) avyicX-nTos (sc. fiov\i)), senate; 7) pdpfiiros (sc. Xvpa), 
lyre; 7) 5idp.eTpos (sc. ypap.jj.7)), diameter; 7) (more seldom 6) Hkcltos (sc. mDs), 
toai; ^ &<$Aos (sc. oIkIu), round building, etc.; 

(f ) Several feminine nouns which stand alone, and hence specially to be 
noted, e. g. 7) v6<ros, sickness ; 7) yvd&os, jaw-bone ; 7) Zp6o~os, dew ; 7) p.7}piv&Qs, 
twine ; 

(g) Some words which have a different meaning in different genders, e. g. 
6 '[iriros, horse ; 7) 'Ittttos, mare, also cavalry ; 5 Ae/a&os, pea-soup ; 7) Ae'/a&os, the 
yolk of an egg. 

Remark. On the diminutives in -oj>, see § 40, Rem. 1. 



§51. Third Declension. 
The third Declension has the following Case-endings 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 

e 

oiv 

oiv 

e 
e 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 


s Neut. — 

OS 

X 

v and Neut. — 

mostly as the Nom. ; Neut. — 


es ; Neut. d 

uv 

at (v) 

as; — d 

es ; — d. 



Remarks ok the Case-endings. 
$ 52. A. Nominative. 

1. The Nom. of Masculine and Feminine nouns ends in s, 
e. g. 6 Kopa£ (instead of KopaK-s), i) XatXaij/ (instead of \a2\(nr~<s) 
Still, the laws of euphony do not always allow the s to be an 
nexed to the stem; it is either rejected entirely, or, as a com 
pensation, the short vowel of the stem is lengthened (§ 16, 3). 
But when the stem allows s to be annexed, the usual euphonic 
(§ 20) changes take place in the final consonant of the stem. 

2. In this way all Masc. and Fern, nouns may be divided intc 
three classes : — 

(a; The first class includes words, which in the Nom. assume 
the gender- sign 9, e. g. 



CQ 



' <p\e/3 




' 7) <|>Ae'j3-s 


0Aty(§2O,I) 


f <p\e&-6s 


Kopaic 


<a 


Kopan-s 


K 6pa.${k 20,1) » 


nSpnK-os 


\afiira5 




?7 \ap.irdS-s 


ka/xirds ($ 20, 1) > 


\afnrdS-os 


yiyavr 


S3 " 


6 yiyavT-s 


yiyas ($ 20, 2) ."» J 


yiydvT'OS 


5e\(plu 


s 


6 Se\(piv-s 


SeXxpis (§ 20, 2) § 


8e\<p?ji>-os 


&6F (Pov, bov) 


a 


6 h &6F-s (bdv-s) 


fiovs, bos ($ 25, 2) ° 


&o-6s 


[a:F 


16 AtF-s 


Afs (§ 25, 2) 


I AUs 



70 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 53 

(b) The second class includes words, which in the Nom. 
reject the gender-sign <$, but, as a compensation, lengthen the 
short final vowel of the stem, e into tj, o into w ($$ 16, 3, and 
20, Kern. 3), e. g. 

.. I" iroi/xev .. (o ttoi/x7]v mm ( iroi/xev-os 

fi j Xsovr g J 6 (A.eWr) A.ewi/ pj J \4ovt-os 

& | pTjTop o 1 § tf™p $ 1 prjjop-os 

[alSos [tj ald(as [(al86cr-os) al8o-os', 

(c) The third class includes words, which in the Nom. have 
the stem pure, since the stem neither assumes the gender-sign 
?, nor lengthens its final vowel, e. g. 

.. ( &VP .. f o frfip (instead of frfip-s) .. ( frnp-os 

£ J alow g J o atw^ ( " " ataj'-s) c J alwv-os 

•2 j ripois o 1 6 fyjcos ( " " ^paxr-s) ^ | (^pwc-os) rjpu-os 

[ dafxapr ^ iv Zdp.ap ( " " bd/xapr-s, Sd/xapr) [ Sdfxapr-os. 

3. Neuters exhibit the pure stem in the Nom. ; still, euphony 
does not permit a word to end in r (§ 25, 5). Hence, in this 
case, the t is either wholly rejected (as in the Masc. XeW, Gen. 
AeWos), or is changed into the corresponding o- ($ 25, 5), e. g. 

. . f Trzirep? . . f t2> ireirepX , . f Trewepi-os or e-os 

S J ceAas g J t& <re\as S3 J (ae'Aa<r-os) ae\a-os 

2 j (Tca/xar ° 1 t2> (<ra>/iaT) c&yux ^ j croj/xaT-os 

\ repair ^ [rb (repar) repas [repar-os. 

Remark. The stem irty is lengthened in the Nom., contrary to the rule : 
rb Trvp, Gen. izi>p-6s. 



§ 53. B. The remaining Cases. 

1. The remaining Cases (with a few exceptions, which will 
be specially treated), are formed by appending the endings to 
the stem, e. g 

Stem KopaK Nom. Kopa£ Gen. tc6pa.K-os PL Nom. K6pa.K-es. 

2. In forming the Dat. PL by appending the syllable o-t to 
stems ending in a consonant, the same changes take place as 
have already been noticed hi regard to the Nom. of similar 
words [$ 52, 2 (a)], e. g. 

tpXefi-cri = (pAetyi Kopan-ari = nSpa^i XaiaraS-fft = Kajxirdot 

ylyavr-tri = yiya<ri b^ovr-ai = 6dov<ri fioF-cri = fiovcri. 

The following points also are to be noted : — 

3. (a) The Ace. Sing, has the form in -v with masculines and 



$53.] THIRD DECLENSION. 7\ 

feminine s in -is, -us, -aw;, and -ovs, whose stems end in -i, -v, -ax; 
and -ov, e. g. 

Stem iroXi Nom. tt6\is Acc. tv6\iv, Stem fiorpv Nom. fioTpvs Ace. fiorpw 

vaF vav vaFs vavs paFv vavv, fioF fiov fioFs fiovs fi6Fy fiovv. 

But the Acc. has the form in -a, 1 when the stem ends in a con- 
sonant, e. g. </>A.€/3, (fiXeij/, <£Ae/?a — KopaK, Kopa$, KopaK-a — Xa/x,7rao\ 
A.a/X7ra5, Aa/X7raS-a. 

(b) Yet barytoned substantives in -is and -us, of two or more 
syllables, whose stems end with a Tau-mnte, in prose have only 
the form in v, e. g. 

Stem ept5 Nom. epis Acc. epa/ (poet. epi8-a ; in the dramatists epiv) 

bpv& ipvis 6puiv (poet. 6pv&-a) 

Kopvfr nSpvs Kopvv (poet. Kopvfr-a) 

X&PLT X°^P LS X^P IV (poet. xapiT-a). 

In prose there are hut few exceptions, e. g. Tepyt&a, X. H. 3. 1, 15, and else 
where (instead of Tepyw) from % Tepyis] x°-P lTa (instead of x<*-P lv )i lb- 3 - 5, ^ 
in constant use rpiiroSa, tripod. (X. An. 7. 3, 27, rairi5a is to he read instead 
of rdirida.) The goddess x<*P ls nas X«P iTct m tne Acc; still, in Luc. Deor. d. 
15, 1 and 2, rfyv x&P w ' 

Kemakk 1. Oxy tones of one or more syllables have only the regular form 
in •%, e.g. (Trod) ttovs, Acc. iroS-a; (e'A7n5) iXiris, Acc. i\irtd-a] (x^ctfivd) x^ a ~ 
fivs, Acc. x^ a H-^- a - The monosyllable /cAeis, Gen. /cAei5-os, contrary to the 
rule, usually has the Acc. /cAety, instead of K\(u5-a. 

4. The Voc. is like the stem, e. g. SaCfuav, Gen. Batfxov-os, Voc. 

BaifjLov. Still, euphony does not always allow the stem-form to 

appear. Hence the following points should be noted : — 
(1) The Voc. is like the stem in the following cases: — 
(a) When the final vowels of the stem, e and o, in the Nom. 

are lengthened into r/ and <o, the short stem-vowel reappears in 

the Voc, e. g. 

fiatfiay Gen. Bai/iov-os Voc. Sa?/j.ov 

yepav yipovr-os yipov (instead of yipovr) 

\x-r\Tr\p [ir)Tsp-os /Mrjrep 

~2.wKp6.Tris 'EwKpare-os (instead of ea-os) ^Kpares. 



1 It is probable that the Acc. Sing, in the third declension as well as in the 
first and second, originally ended in v ; but where the stem ended in a conso- 
nant, the v could not be appended without a union-vowel ; a was used for this 
purpose ; hence, e. g. KSpaicav ; the termination v was at length omitted The 
Acc. ending a, may therefore strictly be regarded as a union-vowel. 



72 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 53 

Exceptions: Oxytoned substantives (not adjectives) retain the lengthened 
vowel, e. g. 

Troi/x-qv, Gen. iroiixiv-oS) Voc. iroi[xrjv (not Troi/ieV), 
except the three oxytones : irar-ftp, avrip, and 8a-f)p, which, in the Voc, take 
again the short stem- vowel e, but with the accent drawn back, thus : 7rdVe/>, 
&vep, 5aep. According to this analogy, even 'H/>a/cA( 677)77? (stem 'Hpa/cAees) is 
shortened in the Voc. by the later writers, into "Hpa.K\es. 

(b) Adjectives in -a?, Gen. -avos, and also adjectives (not 
participles, see Rem. 5), whose stems end in -vr, have in the 
Voc. a form like the neuter (or the stem) ; 7ras and its com- 
pounds are exceptions, e. g. 

/x4\ds, Gen. dv-os Neut. and Voc. [xeKav 

Xapteis, evT-os x a p' l * v (instead of x a p' l * VT > § 52, 3). 

So substantives in -a?, Gen. -avros, have the Voc. in -av (instead 
of -avr), § 52, 3, e. g. 

7170s Gen. avT-os Voc. yiydv (instead of ylyavr) 

Koi\xas avT-os KaAxaV 

Aids avT-os Alav. 

Rem. 2. Some substantives of this class, with the t reject also the v, but as 
a compensation lengthen the short a, e. g. "ArXds, Gen. -avr-os, Voc. "At Ad, 
Ilo\vd<ifj.a.s, Voc. IIoAy&d7id. 

(c) Substantives in -is, -us, -aus, -evs, and -ovs, whose stems 
end in -1, -v, -av, -ev, and -ov, have the Voc. like the stem, the 
s of the Nom. being rejected, e. g. 

udvTis Voc. jxavri ; irpicrfivs Voc. Trpeafiv ; fxvs Voc. jw ; avs Voc. o-C ; Ais Voc. 
AT; 7paCs' Voc. 7/>at) ; fiacriXevs Voc. fiaaiXev ; /8ot)s Voc. /3o0. 

The word 7ra?s, Gen. 7rc«5-os, has 7ra? in the Voc, since, by rejecting the gender- 
sign s, the stem would end in S (raTS), a letter which cannot end a word, and 
must be dropped. 

Rem. 3. Substantives in -is, -vs, -ovs, whose stems end in a consonant, have 
the Voc. like the Nom., e. g. S> opvis, nopvs, irovs. Still, some substantives in 
-is, Gen. -ivos, have the Voc. like the stem, e. g. 5 SeA^iV (also SeA^is), from 
SeAf/ns, Gen. -Ivos. 

(d) The Voc. is like the stem in all words, which in the 
Nom have their stem pure, e. g. $rjp, alwv, etc.; but 'AttoWwv 
(Gen. -u>vo<s), Hoo-ciSojv (-Svos) and oroirrjp (-ypos) are exceptions, 
the Vocn fives being S "AttoAAov, Tloo-etoov, o-urzp, with the accent 
draw*i ioack 



$ 54.] THIRD DECLENSION. 73 

(2) The Voc. is not like the stem, but like the Nom., in most 
words whose stems end in one of the consonants which cannot 
euphonically stand as the final letter ($ 25, 5), because after 
dropping the stem-consonant, frequently it could not be de- 
termined from the Voc. what the true stem was ; e. g. from 
o-dpi, Gen. o-apK-09, the Voc. would be a-dp (instead of adpK.) ; from 
6 </><os, Gen. <£<ot-os, Voc. <£to (instead of <£<ot) ; from vfy, Gen. 
vufi-os, Voc. vi (instead of vC<f>) ; from <Jtyr, Gen. w7r-os, Voc. oj 
(instead of w-ir) ; from ttovs, Gen. -n-oS-os, "* r oc. n-e. 

Rem. 4. The Voc. of dvat,, Jang, in the Common language, is like the Nom. 
5 &/a|, or hy Crasis <t>pa|; but in the solemn language of prayer: & dva (in 
Horn, and the Attic poets, e. g. Soph. 0. C. 1485 : ZeD dva, <tq\ (pwv&), or S>vd 
{instead of dvaKT, according to § 25, 5). 

3. Substantives in -w and -ws, whose stems end in -o?, have 
tke Voc. neither hke the stem, nor the Nom., but, contrary to 
all analogy, in -ot, e. g. 

Stem tixos N. r/%^ & 7/x<£-os (instead of tjx^o-os) V. 7fx°* (instead of f/xo<n, ^x ' - *) 
ot'Sos chScos cuSJ-os ( " " ald6o~-os) alSo? ( " " alS6<r-t ald6-i) 

Rem. 5. The Voc. of all participles is like the Nom., e. g. S> tvtttwv, rerv 
fpds, rvxpas, tv^wv, deiKvvs. "Apxw, Voc. dpxov, when a substantive, is an 
exception. 



4- Words which in the Gen. have a consonant before the ending 
-OS, i. e. WORDS WHOSE stem ends in a consonant. 

$ 54. I. The Nom. adds <r to the stem 

(a) The stem ends in A. ; thus : 6 ^ aA?, Gen, aA-o's, Dat. PI. 
a\-ai(^). See Rem. 1. 

(b) The stem ends in a Pi or Kappa-mute— ft, it, <£; y, yy, 
x, /ok (^ <rdp£, <rapK-6s), and ^. See § 52, 2 (a). 

(c) The stem ends in a Tau-mute — 8, r, kt, #, v$. See 
§ 52, 2 (a). On the Ace. see $ 53, 3 (b). 

The stems of the Neuter, belonging to this class, end in r and kt (yaXaKr), 
but, according to § 25, 5, reject the t and kt ; thus : o-cD^ua instead of trw/idT, and 
•ycUa instead of yaKaKT ; or, according to § 52, 3, they change the r into o~ ; on 
the omission of the t before <n in the Dat. PL see § 20, 1. 

(d) The stem ends in v or vr. See § 52, 2 (a). 

7 



74 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[♦54. 





7), Storm. 


7], Torch. 7), Helmet, rb, Body. 


7, Nose. 


5, Tooth. 


Sing. N. 


AcuXaif/ 


Xajxiras 


Kopvs <rw/xa 


pts 


oSovs 


G. 


AalAair-os 


hapirdd-os 


KOpV&-OS (TCt)/XaT-OS 


plv-6s 


oSovt-os 


D. 


AaiAa7r-i 


AajU7ra5-i 


Ic6pv&-1 (TdofACtT-l 


plv-i 


oSoUT-l 


A. 


\a(\air-a 


\a/J.Trd8-a. 


Kopvv ca^ia 


piv-a 


ddovT-a 


V. 

Plur. N. 


\ai\d\f/ 


Ka/xTrds 


Kopvs (Tcop.a 


piv 


oSovs 


AaiAcbr-es 


Aa/XTraS-es 


n6pv&-e$ (Tufxar-a 


pTv-es 


odovr-es 


G. 


AaiAair-wv 


AafXTrdS-ow 


KOpV&-(t)V (TCOfxdT-CDU 

K.6pv-cn{v) (r<£>iA<x-(ri{v) 


piv-oov 


6d6vT-av 


D. 


XaiXa^i(i') 


\a[XTrd-cri(v) 


pl-ai{v) 


6dov-(Ti(y) 


A. 


AcuAa7r-as 


\auTrd8-as 


K.6pv&-as arw/xar-a 


p?v-as 


656uT-as 


V. 


Ao(Aa7r-6S 


Aa/.«ra5-es 


Kopv&-es aw/xar-a 


piv-es 


686vT-es 


D.N.A.V. 


\ai\air-e 


XafxTrdd-e 


Kopvfr e (rco/xar-e 


p?v-e 


686vT-e 


G. and D. 


\ou\air-oiv 


Xa/xTrdd-oiv 


Kopv^-riiv (rcofxar-oiu 


piu-oiu 


b§6vT-oiv. 



So: 6 /copa£, -olkos, raven; 6 \dpvy£, -vyyos, throat; 6, i) opvls, -I&os, bird; 6 
6.va^, -anros, king ; r) eXuivs, -ivfros, tape-ivorm ; 6 8e\<pTs, -7vos, dolphin ; 6 yiyas, 
-avros, giant, etc. 

Remark 1. The stem of nouns in -ty and -| commonly ends in the smooth 
it and k ; the stem of those in -7I ends in -77, except 6, r) Avy£, Gen. \vyic-6s, 
lynx (but 7) Auyl, Gen. \vyy-6s, hiccough). Instead of (pdpvyyos from 7) (pdpvy^, 
throat, the poets, according to the necessities of the verse, use cpdpvyos also. On 
7) fyn'£, rptx6s, hair, see § 21, 3. 

Rem. 2. The word 7) aKs, Gen. a\-6s, signifying sea, and in the Fern, gender, 
is only poetic, and the Sing. 6 a\s, signifying salt, is only Ionic and poetic ; 
elsewhere, only ot aAes, salt, occurs (PL Symp. 177, b. Lys. 209, e). 

Rem. 3. To class (c) belong also the contracts in -77^, Gen. -Tjidos = -rjs, 
jj8os, e. g. 7) Trap-ps, cheek, irapfjdos. 

Rem. 4. The stem of rb ovs, ear, is wt, thus : Gen. w-ros, Dat. ari, PL 2>ra, 
&T00V, ual(v). The word rb repas, according to the rule of the ancient gram- 
marians, usually admits contraction in the plural, among the Attic writers, 
after the r is dropped: repd, repay (but X. C. 1. 4, 15. PL Phil. 14, e. Hipp 
300, e. repara) ; — rb yepas, reward of honor ; rb yrjpas, old age; rb Kpeas, flesh, 
and rb Kepas, horn, reject r in all the Numbers, and then suffer contraction in the 
Gen. and Dat. Sing., and throughout the Dual and Plural (except the Dat. PL) 5 
yet icep&s, besides these forms, has the regular form with r ; Thucyd. uses the 
contracted forms ; the uncontracted nipara occurs only in 5, 71. Kepws is uni- 
formly employed in the phrase eVt Kepcos, in column. When the a, contracted 
from act, is used by the poets as short, it must be considered a case of elision, 
not of contraction ; the same is true also of Neuters in -as, -aos, -os, -eos, e. g. 
tnctxa (fr. aiceTras) instead of <r/ce'7rd, /cAed (fr. /cAeos) instead of /cAe'a. 



$55.1 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



73 



Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 



rb repas, wonder. 
repaT-os 
repar-i 



rb KepaSy horn. rb Kp4as, flesh. 

Kepar-os and Kepws (Kp4a-os) Kp4cas 
Ktpar-i and /cepa (/cpea-i') /cpeai 



Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 



r4par-a and repa 
repdr-cou and repiav 
repa-<ri(v) 



Kepar-a and /cepd (wpea-o) /cped 

Kepdr-uu and /cepwj/ (icped-a>v) upewu 
Kepa-<ri{i>) Kpea-(Ti(u) 



Dual. 



rtpar-e 
rspdr-oiv 



Kepar-e and /cepd (/cpeo-e) /fpe'd 

nepdr-oiv and Kepqv (icped-ow) Kpecpv. 



Rem. 5. To class (d) belong also the contracts in -(tas, Gen. -6evros = oOs, 
owtoj, e. g. 6 irKaKovs, cake, Gen. irAa/cotWos ; also in -^ety, Gen. -^euros = -j/s, 
-'/jj/tos, e. g. Ti/i^s, honorable, ri/jLrjuros. 

Rem. 6. For the irregular lengthening of the rowel in Krels, efs, /i4xd.s, and 
ra\as, see § 20, Rem. 2. 



$ 55. II. TVae Nom. rejects 9, &w£ lengthens the short 
final vowel of the stem t or o into rj or w ($ 16, 3). 

1. The stem ends in -v, -vf, and -p. For the omission of v, 
and vr, before an, see $ 20, 2, and for the omission of r, in the 
Nom. of stems ending in vr, e. g. AeW, see $ 25, 5. 

2. The following substantives in --qp: 6 7rarrjp, father ; rj firj- 
rqp, mother ; rj Svyanqp, daughter ; rj yaa-rrjp, belly ; fj Ayjfirjmqp, 
Demeter (Ceres), and 6 dvrjp, man, differ from those in the above 
paradigms only in rejecting « in the Gen. and Dat. Sing, and 
Dat. PL ($ 16, 8), and in inserting an a in the Dat PL before 
the ending o-t, to soften the pronunciation. 

The word avfip (stem av4p), rejects e in all Cases and Numbers, except the 
Voc. Sing., but inserts a 5 (§ 24, 2), thus: Gen. avdp6s, Dat. avSpi, Ace. fotya, 
Voc. &vep, PL &vdpes, avSpwv, av§pao-i{v), &v8pas, etc. 



Sing 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


6, Shepherd 

TTOlfi-flU 

TTOljx4v-OS 

TTOljx4u-L 

iroi(x4v-a 

TTOL{li\V 


. 0, Lion. 

\4(tiV 
\4oUT-OS 

\4ovr-t. 
\4ovr-a 
AeW 


6, Orator. 

prircop 

pyrop-os 

pijrop-i 

prjrop-a 

prjrop 


6, Father. 

irar-ftp 

Tcarp-6s 

irarp-i 

irar4p-a 

Trdrep 


rj, Daughter. 

frvydrrip 

frvyarpos 

frvyarpi 

frvyar4pa 

biyarep 


Plur. 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


iroifi4v-es 
iroi/xeu-wv 

■7TOl/x4-(Tl{y) 

Troifi4u-as 

■KOl(l4v-SS 


\4our-es 

\e6vr-a)v 

\4ovcri{v) 

K4ovr-as 

Aeovr-es 


f>7]T0p-eS 

pr\r6p-a>v 
p7irop-<rt(v) 
p-qrop-as 
p-f]70p-es 


Trar4p-es 

irar4p-<av 

irarp-a.-o~i{v) 

irar4p-as 

irar4p-es 


Svyar4pes 

&vyar4pa)v 

&vyarpa<ri{v) 

&vyar4pas 

&vyar4pes 


Dual. 


Troifi4v-e 
iroifi4u-oiv 


\4ovr-e 
\*6vr-oiv 


p^rop-e 
pt)r6p-oiv 


irar4p-e 
irar4p-oiv 


&vyar4pe 
frvyarepoiv. 



76 



THIED DECLENSION. 



[$56 



Remark 1. The substantive % x ei V> hand, belongs to nouns of class No. 2, 
and differs from them only in not lengthening the c of the stem (xep) into if, 
but into ei, e. g. x*' l P instead of x*ps 5 it is irregular in retaining the ei in 
inflection, thus : x^'p, X €l P^ etc -> except in the Dat. PI. and the Gen. and Dat. 
Dual xep<ri{v), x e P°^ v - Yet m P oetl 7> the short as well as the long form is used 
in all the Cases, as the necessities of the verse require, e. g. x ei P° s an d X e P& s i 
Xepolv and x^ l P°^ v i X € P°~' L an ^ x €l P e(Tl - 

Rem. 2. The following nouns in -uv, Gen. -ovos, reject the v in particular 
Cases, and suffer contraction : tj elK<&v, image, ehSvos, etKovi, elic6va, elic6vas, etc., 
together with the Ionic and poetic forms : Gen. et/cot/s, Ace. eiKca, Ace. PL eiKovs 
(the irregular accent is to be noted in €(«<£ and cIkovs) ; 77 arjdAv, nightingale. 
Gen. arfiSvos and arjdovs, Dat. a^Sot; ^ xcAtSwy, swallow, Gen. x^aiSJj/os, Dat 
X^AtSo?. 

Rem. 3. To class No. 2, belongs the obsolete Nom. 0, ^ 'APH'N, Za/n6; the 
Nom. of this is supplied by 6 t\ ay.v6s, Gen. apv6s, Dat. apvl, Ace. 'dpva, PL 
Nom. apj/es, Gen. apvuv, Dat. a/wac^y), Ace. dpvas; farther, the word 6 ao-T^p, 
-epos, star, though not syncopated like irar-fip, etc. belongs to this class on account 
of the assumed a in the Dat. PL ao-rpao-i(u). In substantives belonging to 
class No. 2, the accent of the Gen. and Dat. Sing, (and in the word avhp, also 
that of the Gen. PL and Gen. and Dat. Dual) is removed by syncope to the last 
syllable, and that of the Dat. PL to the penult, e. g. irarp6s, varpi, avSpwv, 
irarpa<ri(v). The word Arj/xrjTrjp has a varying accent, viz. Ari/xTfrpos, Ai}/at)- 
rpi, Vbc. ArjixrjTep (but Ace. ArjurjTepa). So also bvyarep Voc. of bvydrrip. 
On the Yoc. otirarrip and avrjp, see § 53, 4 (1) (a). In poetry, according to the 
necessities of the verse, are found frvyarpes, &vyaTp£>v, A-fj/xriTpa, and also, on 
the contrary, iron-epos, Svyarepos, firjTepi. 



§ 56. III. The Stem, of the Nom. is pure. 

s is omitted without changing the final vowel of the 



The 

stem. The stem ends in v, vt, p, and (only in Sd/xap, ivife) in 
pr. The Case-endings are appended to the Nom. without 



change. On the omission of r in stems ending in vt and pr, see 
k 25, 5 ; and on the omission of v, vt, before <ri, see § 20, 2. 





0, Paean. 


6, Age. 


6, Xenophon. 


6, Wild beast 


to, Nectar. 


Sing. N. 


iraiav 


al&v 


aevotyuv 


Hp 


veKTap 


G. 


iraiav-os 


aiwv-os 


"EevocpoevT-os 


frr)p-6; 


veKTap-os 


D. 


iraiav-t 


aicov-i 


"E>evo<pcbvT-i 


&VP-L 


petciap-i 


A. 


iraiav-a 


a«t)v-a 


"Eevocp&VT-a 


&rjp-a 


veKTap 


V. 


iraiav 


alwv 


aevocpuv 


Wp 


veKTap 


Plur. N. 


iraiav-es 


alwv-es 


aevoepwur-es 


&rjp-es 


veKTap a 


G. 


iraiav-wv 


ala>v-wv 


"BevocpwvT-wv 


Sfr\p-S)v 


veKTdp-av 


D. 


iraia-o~i{v) 


aXS>-o~i(v) 


p,evo<pS}-cri{v) 


frqp-cri[v) 


veKTapo~i[v) 


A. 


iraiav-as 


aiccv-as 


"Eevocpwvr-as 


&r)p-as 


veKTap- a. 


V. 


iraiav-es 


aicov-es 


aevo(paJvT-es 


&r}p-es 


veKTap-a 


Dual. 


ira.ia.v-e 


alwv-e 


"Eevocp&VT-e 


Strjp-e 


veKTap-e 




•xaikv-oiv 


alwv-oiv 


aevocpcivT-oiv 


frrip-o7v 


veKTap-oiv. 



$57.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



7? 



Remark 1. The three words in -<av, Gen. -avos: 'AttSxXwv, Iloareidwv, r) 
aXccv, threshing-floor, drop v in the Ace. Sing., and suffer contraction ; thus, 
('AirSWwj/a, 'AirSxXwa) 'AttSxXw, UoaeiSw, aXca (on aXw, comp. § 48, Rem. 1, on 
KVKeu, § 213, 11). Also the Ace. yXr)x&, from 7) yX-fjx^v or {SXrjX<*>v, penny- 
royal, Gen. -wvos, is found in Aristophanes. 

Rem. 2. All the Neuters belonging to this class end in -p (ap, op, up, vp), 
e. g. tJ) vtKTap, i\rop, ireXoop, irup (Gen. irvpSs). The word to Zap, spring, may 
also be contracted, e. g. r)p, Gen. tfpos. 

B. Words which hate a vowel before the ending -os in the Gen. 
$ 57. I. Words in -evs, ~av<s, -oOs. 

1. The stem of substantives in -evs, -av<s, -ovs, ends in v (from 
the Digamma F) ; s is the gender-sign. On the omission of v 
between vowels, see § 25, 2. 

2. Substantives in -eus have -ed in the Ace. Sing., and -eds in 
the Ace. PL, from eFa, eFas) the omission of the F lengthens 
the a and as. These nouns have the Attic form in the Gen. 
Sing., viz. -e'ws instead of -e'os, and in the Dat. Sing, and Nom. 
PL admit contraction, which is not usual in the Ace. PL When 
a vowel precedes the ending -evs, as, e. g. x°™s, Ev/3ocvs, the end- 
ings -iuis, -£u)v, -id, -id<s are also contracted into -co?, -tov, -a, -as. 
Nouns in -aSs and -o£s are contracted only in the Ace. PL, which 
is then like the Nom. PL, as in all contracts of Dec. III. 





6, King. 


6, A measure. 


O, 7], OX. 


r), Old woman. 


Sing. N. 


fiaffiXevs 


Xoevs * 


fiods, bos for bovs 


ypavs 


G. 


fiaaiXe-ws 


Xo{4o})us 


fio-6s, bov-is 


ypa-os 


D. 


fiaatXei 


X oei 


Po-i; bov-i 


ypa-i 


A. 


fSaaiXs-a 


Xo(4d)a 


fioVV 


ypavu 


V. 


fSacriXtv 


Xoev 


(3ov 


ypav 


Plur. &. 


PaaiXzls 


Xoeis 


$6-es 


ypa-es 


G. 


fSa.o~iX4-toU 


Xo[ea>)(ov 


fio-wv, bo-um 


ypa-wv 


D. 


Pao-iXivai(v) 


Xoevo'i(i') 


Povai{v) 


ypavai(p) 


A. 


fiaaiXe-as (and 


e?s) x°{* a )as 


fiovs 


ypavs 


V. 


{Jaxri\eis 


Xoeis 


Po-es 


ypa-es 


Dual. 


j8a<nAe-€ 


X oe 'e 


/3o'-e 


ypa-e 


fiacriXe-oiv 


XOeoiv 


fio-o?v 


ypa-oiv. 



Remark 1. Among the Attic poets, the Gen. Sing, of nouns in -evs some- 
times ends in -eos instead of -e«s ; thus Grjcrios, apio-reos, and the Ace. Sing., 
not only in the Attic, but in all the poets, sometimes ends in -rj, instead of -€«, 
e. g. ieprj, £vyypa<pr\. The Nom. and Voc. PI. in the older Attic writers, 

1 Commonly written x^os, contract x°vs. 



78 THIRD DECLENSION. [$$ 58, 59. 

especially in Thueydides, end also in -rjs (formed from the Ionic -r)es), e. g. 
Ba<ri\rjs, iTrirrjs, UXaTcurjs instead of UXaraieis. The nncontracted Nom. 07jo"*e5 
occurs in PI. Theaet. 169, 6. The Ace. ending -e7s instead of -eds is very 
common in Xen., e.g. tovs linreis, C. 3. 5, 19. robs yoveTs, 2.2, 14. ypa<pe7\, 
aKweis, xaA/ceTs, 3. 7, 6. robs fiaaiX^s, 3. 9, 10. and elsewhere, but more seldom 
among the other Attic prose writers. The Ace. vU7s is regular in all the Attic 
writers. 

Rem. 2. The following are declined like x°™ s '• ^leipaievs, Gen. Ileipaiws, 
Ace. Heipaia, 6 ayvievs, altar before the door, Gen. ayvius, Ace. aryvia, Ace. PI. 
ayvias, and several proper names, e. g. 'Eperpiws, ^reipiws, M77A1S, Evfious, 
Evfioa, Evfioas, UXaraias, Acopias ; yet the uncontracted forms are often found 
in proper names, e. g. 0e<T7rieW, Qecririeas, 'S.rzipUa, Yl\aTai4<av, 'Eperpieoov, 
Aapieuv, TleipaUwv (in Thu., X., PL, Dem.). The uncontracted forms are 
regular in ahisvs, fisherman, ahiiws, kxUa, aTueas, 

Rem. 3. The Nom. PI. of fiovs and ypavs are always uncontracted in good 
Attic writers : Boes, ypaes ; on the contrary, in the Ace. only the contract forms 
ypaiis and vavs occur ; the Ace. PI. fiovs is the common form ; fi6as occurs only 
very seldom. 

Rem. 4. Only 6 x o " s > a measure, a mound, and 7) povs, vinegar-tree, are de- 
clined like fiovs ; but in the PI. both without contraction ; only 7) vavs [vaFs, 
navis), is declined like ypavs ; still, this noun is quite irregular; see § 68. 

§58. II. Words in -rjs, -es {Gen. -cos); -cos {Gen. 
-coos), -tos and -co {Gen. -oos^; -as {Gen. -aos), -os 
{Gen. -60s). 

The stem of words of this class ends in s. On the omission 
of cr, see k 25, 1. In the Dat. PL, a o- is omitted. 

$ 59. i x l) Words in -77s and -es. 

1. The endings -77s and -es belong only to adjectives (the 
ending ->?s is Masc. and Fem., the ending -es neuter), and to 
prope" names, terminating like adjectives, in -<f>dv7)<s, -/xeV^s, 
-yevrjg, -Kocmys, -fn^s, -7rd9ys, -o$evr)<;, -reA/tyS, -k?/8^s, ~dv$r)<;, -tp/oys, 
-fidprjs, -dprjs (-y]prj^), -apK^s, -veiKqs, -Aa/XTrqs, -craKrjs, -rv^S, and 
(kAcV) kXtj<;. The neuter exhibits the pure stem ($ 52, 3) ; but 
in the Masc. and Fem., e, the short final vowel of the stem, is 
lengthened into r) [$ 52, 2 (b)]. 

2. The words of this class, after dropping o-, suffer contraction 
in all the Cases, except the Nom. and Voc. Sing, and Dat. PL ; 
and nouns in -nXer)?, which are already contracted in the Nom 
Sing, (into kA^s), suffer a double contraction in the Dat. Sing. 



§ 59.] THIRD DECLENSION. 79 





Singular. Plural. 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


<ra<pr]s, clear. o~a<p4s (<ra<p4-€s) <ra<pe7s (<ra<p4-a) aacprj 
((ra<p4-os) 1 (rcxpovs (<ra<p4-cov) aacpay 
(cra(p4-i) (racpei aa<p4-(Ti(v) 
(<ra<p4-a) aaipj) <ra<p4s (<Ta<p4-as) cracpeZs (cra<p4-a) <ra<prj 

o~a<p4s aacp4s (tra<p4-€s) (Taipcls (<ra(p4-a) (racpr) 


Dual N. A. V. 1 (ra<p4-e <ra<p?} 
G. and D. | o~a<p4-oiv. aacpoiv. 


Singular. Plural. Dual. 


G. 
N. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


i) rpLTjpTis, trireme. (Tprtpe-es) rpiijpeis rpd/pe-e 
(Tpnipe-os) Tpir)povs (TpLT)p4-(oi/) rpiripcav Tpir)p4-oiv rpiiipoiv 
(rpt-qpe-'i) rpiijpei Tpir]pe-(ri{v) 
(rpiTjpe-a) rpir]pr} (TpLi]pe-as) rprfpeis 
rpirjpes (Tpir)p<z-es) rpirjpeis 


Singular. 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


Sco/cpaTTjs {U.epLK\4r]s) Tl€piK\.y$ 

~2wK.p6.TOvs (Ilepi/cAee-os) TIepiKk4ovs 

ItcaKpaTei (TlepiK\4e-i) (ilepj/cAeei) TlepiK\et 

~tcoKpaTri (nept/c\ee-a) riepi/cAed (Poet, also IleptKAi?) 

2&>/cpaTes (ilepiKAees) TlepiKXeis. 



Remark 1. On tlie contraction in the Dual of ee into tj (not into et), and in 
the Ace. PI. of -eas into -eis, see § 9, II. When a vowel precedes the endings 
-Tjs, -es, then -ea in proper names in -K\rjs is always contracted into -d, and 
commonly also in adjectives (§ 9, II.), e.g. ITepi/cAee-a = nept/cAed ; d/cAeifc. 
ivithout fame, d/cAeea == d/cAea, vyirjs, healthy, vyi4a = vyia, eVSe^s, poor, eVSe'ea = 
eVSea, vir€p<pvr)s, supernatural, virep(pv4a = inrepepva (Ace. Sing. Mas c. and Nom., 
Ace, and Voc. PI. neuter) ; but sometimes the contraction into -r) occurs, e. g. 
vyir), dicpvr), a<pvr), avrocpvyj, X. R. Equ. 7, 11 (in all the MSS.). The Ace. PL 
Masc. and Pern, has -eis, e. g. vyieis, abrocpvels. 

Rem. 2. Proper names in -Kpdrns, -<t&4j/t}s, -y4yrjs, -cpdvrjs, etc., also "Ap-qs 
(Voc. "Apes), form the Ace. Sing, both according to the first and third Dec, 
and are hence called Heteroclites (i. e. of different declensions), e. g./XaKparrj 
and 2o)KpaT7jv, according to Dec. I., 'AA/ca^vr) and -[i4vt\v, 'Avtht^vti and 
-<t&4vt}v, "Apr] and -i\u, etc. ; Plato commonly uses the form in -77, Xenophon that 
in -7]v, other writers both, without distinction ; in words in -urjs, the form in -vt\v 
is preferred to that in -vn\. (The Gen. of "Apt\s in good prose is "Apeoos [often in 
Plato], yet in the poets "Apeos is also used according to the necessities of the 
verse.) But in words in -kAtjs, the Ace. in -kAtjv is first used in later writers. 
The PL is declined according to Dec. I., e. g. 'Apiffrocpdvai, to?? AewKpdrais, robs 
'ApHTTocpdvas, robs Arj/xoo-^vas ; still, 'Hpa/cAees occurs in PL Theaet. 169, 6. 

Rem. 3. The Gen. PL of rpir)pr]s occurs, also, in the uncontracted form, viz. 
Tpir)p4wv ; but in all the other Cases it is uniformly contracted ; the Dual 
also in words of this class occurs in an uncontracted form in Attic writers, 
e. g. j-vyy4vee, and the Tragedians use the uncontracted forms of proper names 

1 <ra<p4-os from cra<p4<T-os, the <r of the stem being dropped ; and so in tho 
other Cases, except the Nom. and Voc. 



80 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[« 60, 61. 



in -nXeys — K\rjs, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. 'Hpait\4ris, Dat. 
-tfAeet, Voc. -/cA.ees. The contract Ace. in -kXtj is rare, The Voc. 5"HpaKAes, 
as an exclamation, belongs to the later prose. 

Rem. 4. The irregular accent of the Gen. PI. and Dual is to be noted, viz. 
Tpcfipcw (instead of rpiripcav from. Tpirjpecau), rpiiipoiv (X. H. 1. 5, 19. 5. 4, 56). In 
addition to this word, adjectives in -tj^s and the word avrdpnTis, have the like 
accent, e. g. o~vvr}&4(av == cvv^cdv, avrapKewv = avrapKav. 



$ 60. (2) Words in -ws, Gen. -coos, and in -cos and -co, 

Gen. -oos. 

(a) -dis, Gen. -wos. 
Thus, e. g. 6 rj #to9, jackal, Gen. #coos, etc. Polysyllables have 
the Ace. Sing, and PL either contracted or uncontracted, e. g. 
6 770009, hew, rov 77000a and 77000, tous ^pcoas and 77000s. 

(b) -cos and -w, Gen. -oos. 
Substantives of these endings are always feminine. The 
stem ends in -os. The short final vowel, according to § 52, 2 
(b), is lengthened into 00. The ending -oos, however, is retained 
in the Attic and Common language only in the substantive 
tu&os (stem atSos), and in poetry in 7706s, morning (in Eurip.) ; 
but in all other words, it has been changed into a smoother 
form, so that the Nom. ends in -co, e. g. 77^00 (stem 77x0s). On 
the Voc. in ot, see k 53, 4 (3). The Dual and PL are formed 
like the ending -os of Dec. II ; thus, cuSot, 77x01, etc. 



Sing. N. 


7? atScos (stem alSos). shame. 


rj i)x<t> (stem 7/xos), echo. 


G. 


(al56-os) alSovs 


(nx^-os) iixovs 


D. 


(alS6-'i) alSoT 


(vxt-'i) 7?x<" 


A. 


(cu&o-a) cu5<3 


(r)x<S-a) VX& 


V. 


(alSo-l) aldo?. 


(vxt-'O ilX ?- 



$ 61. (3) Words in -as, Gen. -aos, and in -os, Gen. -eos, 
(a) -as, Gen. -oos. 
Only the Neuters to o-eXas, light, and to SeVas, goblet, belong to 
this class : Gen. o~e\a-o<s, Dat. aeka-'i, and creA-a, ; PL treAa-a and 
creA-d, Gen. creAa-cov, Dat. o~£\a-cn(v) ; Dual o-eAa-e, creAa-oii/. 

Remark 1. On the poetic shortening of the contract a, see § 51, Rem. 4. 
In the following four Neuters in -as, the a in the Gen., Dat., and in the PL, is 
changed, according to Ionic usage, into the weaker e, viz. 



62.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



81 



Bpiras (poet.), image, Gen. jSpereos, PL jSpeVea and Bperr], Bperiav 
Kwas (poet.), place, PL in Homer, Kwta, K(t>e<ri(v). 
ovSas (poet.), ground, Gen. ovdeos, Dat. oi/Sei' and ovSzi (Horn.) 
Kv4(pas (poet, and prose), darkness, Gen. Kvi<paos Epic, uv4(povs Attic, Kv4<pal 
Epic, Kv4<pa Attic. 

(b) -os, Gen. -eox. 
All substantives of this class are also neuter. In the Nom., 
e, the stem- vowel of the last syllable, is changed into o ($ 16, 1). 



■Sg.N.A. 
G. 
D. 


rb y4vos (instead 
(yeVe-os) 
(y&e-i) 


of yeVes), genus. 
yeVovs 
yeVei 


rb Kheos (instead of k\4*s), glory. 
(«-A.e'e-os) k\4ovs 
(/cAee-i') AcAeet 


Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 


(yeve-a) 
yev£-<av and 
7eVe-(7t(i') 


7eV77 


(«AeVa) /cAed 
(/cAe-&>j/) kXswv 
KAee-(Tt(j/) 


Dual. 


(yeVe-e) 
(yej^e-oiy) 




(wAe'e-e) /cAer; 
(/cAee'-otj/) <cAeou'. 



Eem. 2. On the contraction of ee into r; (instead of ei)> and of eo into a 
(instead of 7?), when a vowel precedes, see § 9, II. On the poetic shortening 
of the contracted d in /cAea, see $ 54, Rem. 4. 

Rem. 3. The uncontracted form of the Gen. PL is not unusual, e. g. opeW, 
iSeAeW, /cepSeW, and almost without exception d»/&€W; in PL Polit. 260, a., the 
uncontracted Dual in ee occurs : rovrco rw yeVee. In the lyric portions of the 
Attic tragedians, 7ro&ea, ax«t, etc. occur. 



III. Words in -is, -vs, -i, -v. 
$ 62. (1) Words in -Is, -vs. 

The substantives in -Is, -vs originally ended in -XFs, -vFs. 

See § 25, 2. 



Sing. N. 


6 k7s, corn-worm. 


7] CVS, SOW. 


6 Ix&vs, fish. 


G. 


kX-6s 


o~v-6s 


iX&v-os 


D. 


Ki-i 


av-i 


Ix&v-'i 


A. 


KlV 


aw 


iX&bv 


V. 


Kt 


(TV 


i X M 


Plur. N. 


ici-es 


o~v-es 


t%dS-6S 


G. 


Ki-tav 


(TV-toV 


iX^v-cov 


D. 


Kt-ai(v) 


o-v-ai(v) 


iX^v-cri(v} 


A. 


ict-as 


av-as, Attic o~vs 


iX&v-as, Attic Ix&vs 


V. 


itf-es 


av-es 


Ix&v-es 


Dual. 


kU 


av-e 


f&SH&J IxM 




Kl-OtV 


ffV-OlV 


lx&v-ou>. 



Remark. The contracted Nom. PL at tyicvs occurs in X. Ven. 2, 9 ; 6, 2 
10. 2, 19. 



82 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[$63 



$ 63. (2) Words in -Is, -i, -vs, -v. 

The stem of these substantives ends in X or v. The stem- 
vowels i and v remain only in the Ace. and Voc. Sing. ; in the 
other Cases they are changed into e ($ 16, 2). In the Gen. 
Sing, and PI., masculine and feminine substantives take the 
Attic form in -w? and -wv, in which the w has no influence on 
the accent (comp. § 29, Rem. 7). In the Dat. Sing, and in the 
Nom. and Ace. PL, contraction occurs. 



Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


7] TroXts, city. 

Tt6\€-0)S 
7r6\€l 

TtoXl 


6 irrjxvs, cubit. 
7T7/xe-cw 

7T77X" 

TVX VJ/ 
Trrjx v 


rh aivairi, mustard. 
(rnraTre-os 
aivdirei 

aivain 


to acrTu, city. 
affre-os 
ao~rei 
aarv 
d<rrv 


Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


TTOXtlS 

irSXe-wv 

ttSXsis 
ir6Xeis 


irtix*is 

TT7]X^' WV 

irr)xe-<ri(v) 

Tr-fixeis 

iri)xeis 


rnvd-m) 

oivaTrs-oiv 

civ6.Tre-(Ti{v) 

ClvdlTT] 

aivdirr) 


&0-T7) 

acrre-wv 

ao-re-(Ti(v) 

a(TTr] 

do~Tf\ 


Dual. 


ir6Xe-e 

TTOhi-OlV 


irriXe;* 

TTTIXS-OIV 


ffivdirs-s 
(Tivaire-oiu 


dares 
aare-oiy. 



Remark 1. Here belong all substantives in -|ts, -tyis, most in -<ris and many 
others, e. g. i) k6vis, dust ; 6 {xdvTis, prophet ; 7) 6<pts, serpent ; i) tt'kttis, faith ; i) 
vfipis, abuse; 6 7reXeKvs, axe; 6 TrpeafSvs, old man; rh 7reVe pi, pepper ; ih nyyd- 
fiapi, cinnabar ; rh iruv (poet.), herd (without contraction). Adjectives in -vs, 
-e?a, -i are declined in the Masc. and Neut. like Trrixvs and da-rv, except that the 
Gen. Masc. takes the regular forms -eos, -iwv (not -ews, -eui/), e. g. i)dvs, rjdeos. 

Rem. 2. In the Attic poets, though probably only in the lyric passages, the 
Gen. in -eos, from substantives in -is, occurs, e. g. ir6Xeos. 

Rem. 3. In X. An. 4. 7, 16, the contracted Gen. Tn\x&v is found. Instead 
of the Dual form in -ee, one in -rj is also used ; likewise a form in -ei (instead 
of -ee), is quoted by the ancient grammarians from Aeschines. — The Ace. PI. 
of nouns in -vs sometimes occurs uncontracted in the Attic poets, e. g. 7rr)x^as. 

Rem. 4. Neuters in -i and -v have the Attic Gen. Sing, very seldom, e. g. 
atTTews, Eur. Bacch. 838 (831). Or. 761 (751). 

Rem. 5. Adjectives in -Is, -i, e. g. t5/>Ts, 78pt, skilful, and some substantives 
in -"is, which are partly poetic, have the regular inflection : i-os, t-i, t-es, etc., 
or both forms together, e. g. i) firjvis, anger (also fir)i/i8os, etc.), 6 r) oh, sheep ; to 
weirepi (Gen. -epios and -eos), pepper; 5 t) ir6pTis, calf; 6 i) irSais, spouse (Gen. 
ir6aios, but Dat. always Troaei) ; i) rpoTTis, keel (also rpoiridos, etc.); r) rvpais, 
tower (G^n. rvpaios,X. An. 7. 8, 12. rvpffiv, ib. 13, but Plural rvpffeis, Tvpoeai, 
etc.) ; i) /xdyadis (Gen. -ios, Dat. /xaydol, X. An. 7. 3, 32) ; some proper names, 
e. g. 2ueWe<m, *lpis (Gen. -ios, etc.), X. An. 1. 2, 12; 6. 2, 1 (5. 10, 1), finally 
one noun in -vs, r) eyx^vs, but only in the Sing. 



64, 65: 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



83 



Sing. N. 


6, 7} irSpris, calf. 


7) eyx^vs, eel. 


6, t\ oh, sheep. 


G. 


iz6pTi-os 


iyX^\v-os 


ol6s 


D, 


irSpri-i and ir6p7i 


eyxeAu-t 


oil 


A. 


Tv6priv 


eyx^w 


oiv 


V. 


irSpri 


«7XeAu 


ois 


Plur. N. 


iropTL-es and ir6prls 


eyxeAets 


ohs 


G. 


Troprl-wv 


eyxeAe-cov 


0103V 


D. 


ir6pri-ai{v) 


e7XeAe-(n(i/) 


olai(v) 


A. 


iropri-as and Tropris 


€7%eA6ts 


olas and oh 


V. 


ir6pTt-es and irSpTis 


e'7xeA€is 


oUs 


Dual. 


ir6pri-e 


67xeAe-e 


oh 




iropri-oiv 


iyx e ^' 0iv 


oio?v 



Rem. 6. Xenophon uses the Ionic forms of oh : oiv, fries, o'iwv, frias, and oi'y. 

$ 64. Quantity of the Third Declension. 

1. The inflection-endings -a, -t, -u, and -as, are short. 

Exception : The a in the Ace. Sing, and PI. of substantives in -evs is long, 
e. g. rbv Upia, robs Upias from 6 lepevs, priest. 

2. Words, whose Nom. ends in -o|, -i£, -u£, -wj/, -i\p, -v\p, -is, and -us, have the 
penult of the Cases which increase, either short or long, according as the 
vowel of the above endings is long or short by nature ; a, i, v, are long in all 
Genitives in -avos, -ivos, -vvos, e. g. 6 &c6pd£, breastplate, -d/cos 5 6 pity, reed, piir6s ; 
7} aKTTs, ray, -7vos, but 7) j6a>Ad£, clod, -olkos, t) iKirh, hope, -tSos. See fuller 
explanations in Larger Grammar, Part I. § 291. 



§65 Accentuation of the Third Declension. 

1 . The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the laws 
of accentuation (§ 30) permit, e. g. to 7rpay/j.a, deed, 7rpdyfj.aros (but Trpay/xaTuv) , 
to ovo/xa, name, dvofxaros (but ovofxaTcuv), 6 7) xeAtSdJj/, swallow, xeXi§6vos, aevo- 
<pwv, -&>vtos, -upTeSy -(!)vtu>v. Particular exceptions have been noticed in the 
Paradigms. 

2. Monosyllables are accented in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers on the 
final syllable ; the long syllable <av and oiv having the circumflex ; the others, 
the acute, e. g. 6 lit\v, /xtjvSs, /xtjvi, (xtjvoTv, /xtjvwv, fXT)crl(v). 

Exceptions: 
(a) The following ten substantives are Paroxytones in the Gen. Pi. and Gen. 
and Dat. Dual: 7) oa.s, torch; 6 8fxci>s, slave; 6 7) &cas, jackal ; rb KPA2, poet. 
(Gen. Kpar6s), head; to oSs (Gen. wt6s), ear; 6 7) ttcus, child; 6 ays, moth; 6 t\ 
Tpois, Trojan, Trojan woman; 7) <p<?s (Gen. <pq}d6s), a burning; rb <pa>s (Gen. 
<p(aTos), light; e. g. daScav, SofSoir, &<Z>oov, Kparcov, &twv, &roiv, ira'iSoiv, iralSoiv, 
reccv, Tpojwu, <pcpb*av, (pcLrcov (on the contrary, ruv 8/xwoov from at Succai, t&v 
Tpcowi/ from at Tpwal, t&v (ponwv from 6 <pojs, man ; tuv &wwv from 7] &»^, 
injury). 



^4 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 65 

(b) The following contracts, according to the nature of the final syllable, arc 
either Properispomena or Paroxytones, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, 
as in the other Cases, e g. rb eap (Epic %>), spring; K rjp (Epic from neap), heart; 
6 Aas (from Aaas), stone; 6 irpcvv (from irp7}6v), hill, e. g. fjpos (rarer eapos), tfpi 
(rarer eapi), K?]pos, KTJpi, Aclos, Acu, Aawy, nrpcavos, irp&vt. 

Remark. The following contracts, on the other hand, follow the principal 
rule (No 2) : (neap = crrf/p, tallow ; crredros = <ttt]t6s, cppeap, well, (ppedros and 
<ppr}Tos, PI. (ppv)Tuy, 0/>5£, Qpfil, Qp-fjiKos = QpaKos, and OpjjKos, ols, ol6s, oli, 
olc/oV) oiai(v). 

(c) Monosyllabic participles, as well as the pronoun rls ; quisf retain the 
accent, through all the Cases, on the stem-syllable ; but the pronoun iras and 
6 Udu is an Oxytone in the Gen. and Dat. Sing. ; in the other Cases either a 
Paroxytone or a Properispomenon, according to the nature of the final syllable, 
C. g. (pus, (piuros, a>y, euros, ovn, ivrwv, ovai(v), ovroiv, tis, rlvos, rivi, etc. ; Ttas, 
ivayros, iravri, Trdyrcvy, rcdvroiv, irao-i(y), 6 Tldv, Tlavos, roh Tlao'i(y). 

3. The following are accented, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, like 
monosyllabic substantives : — 

(a) 7) ywi\, wife (yuvaiKos, yvvaiKi, yvvaixolv, yvvaiKwv, yvvai^i(v) ; but yvvai- 
Ka, yvva7x.es, etc.) ; or) kvcov, dog (kvuos, kvv'i, kvvoIv, kvucop, kvo~i(v) ; but 
Kvva, nvves, etc.) ; 

(b) Syncopated substantives in -rjp, on which see § 55, 2 : 

(c) Compounds of els, units, in Gen. and Dat. Sing., e. g. ovdeis, ovSevos, 
ovdevi; but ovdevon; ovBecri(u), SO /j.7]5eis, fxydevos, etc.; 

(d) The Attic poetic forms, Sopos, Sopl, from 56pv. 

4. For the accentuation of substantives in -is, -vs, Gen. -eus, see § 63 ; of 
those in -d (§ 60), the irregular accentuation of the Ace. Sing, of 7?x^ a — "hx** 
(instead of frx«), should be noted. 

5. (a) In the Voc. of syncopated substantives (§ 55, 2) in -rip, the accent, 
contrary to the principal rule, is drawn hack as far as possible, e. g. 3> irdrep, 
Svyarep, A-hurjrep, dvep; so also (a) in the following substantives; 'AttoAAwj' 
(wvos), UocreiSwi' (cvvos), aarrip (rjpos), 'Aficpicau (iovos), 8afip (epos)', thus, 3) 
"AivoAXov, Tloo-eidov, acorep^AfjLcpioy, Saep ; — (b) in compound substantives in 
-cay, Gen. -ovos, in adjectives in -ccv, Gen. -ovos, whether simple or compound ; 
also in comparatives in -iwv, -a>v (in adjectives and comparatives, also, in the 
neuter gender), e. g. ' Ay d/xejuLuou from ' Ay afiefii/cav, ' Apiffr6yeirov from 'Apicrro- 
yelrcvy (but 'lacrov, TlaAaijxov, $i\ript.ov, etc. as simple) : d> and rb etidai/xoy, 3> and 
to e\ernxoy, 3 and rb ttaWiov ; (the following are exceptions : <5 AaKedaT/xoy from 
AaveSai/jLcay, compounds in -eppoov, e. g. S> AvKocppov from. AvuScppcioy, Ev&vcppoy from 
Eb&vrppeov, & and rb Sa'icppoy from daieppcay ;) — (c) in the compound Paroxytones in 
-77s, mentioned in § 59, e. g. ~2d>Kpares, AT)fji6<r&eyes ; S> and rb ab'&ab'es from av&d- 
or)',, <pi\d\7i$es from <ptAa\r)&r)s (but aArj&es from aAy&rjs as a simple), avrapices, 
tczxSo^es. — (Adjectives and substantives in -ojtjs, -0877s, -coAtjs, -wprjs, --npris, are 
exceptions, e. u - . ebdbSrjs, eu«5es, ap.<pwr]s a/jLcpues, 7raya>ArjS iravuAes, yedprjs ve&pes, 
tityiipris ^icpTjpes, 7) rpi7)p7)s rpiTjpes, Aid>p7)s 8) Aiwpes. 

(I») The Voc. of nouns in -aus, -evs, -ous, -cay and -ws is Perispomenon, e. g 
ypav, /ScwrtAeO, Bov, ~2,air(poi, cuSo?. 



♦ 66.] THIRD DECLENSION. 85 



$ 66. Gender of the Third Declension. 

The natural gender — the masculine and feminine — is distinguished in the 
third Declension, not by a special form, but partly by the signification, partly 
by the forms, and in part by usage alone. The following rules will aid in 
determining the gender : — 

I. Masculines: (A) all nouns whose Nom. and stem (which can be recognized 
by the Genitive) end in -av, Gen. -av-os ; -av, Gen. -ovt-os and -wvt-os ; -vv, 
Gen. -vv-os (only 6 /xoaaw, tower) ; -eis, Gen. -ev-os (only 6 ktcis, comb) ; -ay, 
Gen. -avr-os ; -ovs, Gen. -ovt-os, -owt-os, -o5-os (6 ttovs) ; -cap, Gen. -op-os] -evs, 
Gen, -eas ; -77s, Gen. (-e-os) -ovs ; -cos, Gen. -co-os ; 

(B) the following with exceptions : — 

(a) in -7]v, Gen. -tjvos ; but 6 77 %V> goose; — in -nv, Gen. -ev-os ; jut 6 77 ad-riv, 
gland, and 77 <pp7\v, diaphragm ; 

(b) in -uv, Gen. -uv-os; but 77 aAcoi/, threshing-floor; 77 f3\i)x<0v or y\7)x<»v, 
penny-royal ; 7) /ueAeSco*' (poet.), care; 77 /xtjkoov, poppy; 77 irAaTaytibv, rattle 
(but 6 ttA. peto/ of the poppy) ; 77 Tp-fjpav, pigeon; 77 auAcoV (poet., but prose 
0), ravine; 77 6 kc65coj/ bell; 

(c) in -np, Gen. -77p-os ; but 77 Krjp,fate (on account of 77 kt)p, goddess of fate) ; 
6 77 paio~Tf)p, hammer; (those in -rip contracted from -cap, are neuter: rb 
Kr\p (poet.), Gen. Krjpos, heart; to Zap, Gen. r)pos, spring;) — in -77^, Gen. 
•pos ; but 77 yao~Tr)p, yao-Tpos, belly ; — in -np, Gen. -ep-os ; but 6 77 a\3rt)p % 
ether; 6 77 ar)p, air; 

(d) in -eip, Gen. -«/)-os; but 77 x^?i hand (regularly, 6 avTixeip, the thumb) ; 

(e) in -up, Gen. -up-os ; but to e'Acop (poet.), booty ; 7-6 iriXcap (poet.), monster; 

(f ) in -ous, Gen. -o-os, see § 57, Eem. 4; 

(g) in -cos, Gen. -arr-os; but t6 (pcos, %/tf; 
(h) in -1//, Gen. -?ros, -780s. 

II. Feminines: (A) a# nouns ia -as, Gen. -aS-os ; -ets, Gen. -eid-os (only 7) 
tcAe/s, key) ; -ai/s, Gen. -c-os ; -ivs, Gen. -jj/3-os ; -ws, Gen. -ui/^-os ; -77s, Gen. 
-tjt-os; -is, Gen. -jt-os (only 77 x°-P ls ) 5 " us > Gen. -u5-os and -v£--os; -c6 and -cos, 
Gen. -<f-os ; 

(B) the following nouns with exceptions : — 

(a) in -is, Gen. -i-os; but 6 x^ ls ^ P ure wine; b (paXnis, a part of a ship; 6 
'dpTis, carpenter's tool; 6 ki*, corn-worm ; 6 yXavis, a kind of fish ; 6 A?s 
(Epic), lion, raid 6 7) ols, sheep; — in -is, Gen. -ecos, but 6 opxis, testicle (77 
opxis, a kind of olive) ; 6 o<pis, serpent; 6 (later also 77) ex's, viper; 6 (later 
7*7) icSpis, bug ; ol and at KvpfSeis, law-tables; — in -is, Gen. -j5-os; but 6 cp&ois, 
-idos, a kind of cake ; 77 6 Tiypis, Gen. -10s and -idos, tiger; — in -is, Gen. 
-&-os; but 6 77 opi/is, bird; — in -is, Gen. -twos; but 8eA<pts, dolphin; 6 
Iktis, weasel; 6 77 Stis, heap ; 6 TeXfxls, marsh-mud; 

(b) in -vs, Gen. -u-os; but 6 farpvs, cluster; 6 SpTjvvs, footstool; 6 lx^vs,flsh; 
6 fids, mouse ; 6 vinvs, corpse ; 6 o-rdxvs, ear of com ; 6 o~ko\\vs, mode of 
tonsure ; 6 ri<pvs t the night-mare ; 6 k<lv8vs, a Median garment p 6 7) vs or <rvs, 

8 



86 THIRD DECLENSION. [§ 6* 

simne; 6 fxeXawSpvs, tun-fish; i) (later also «5) eyx^Xvs, eel ; 6 xp*H- vs > a sea- 
fish; — in -vs, Gen. -ews; but 6 TreAe/cus, axe; 6 ttt)xvs, cubit; 
(c) in -u>v, Gen. -ov-os ; but 6 frx/Aav, anvil; 6 irptwv, saw; 6 koih&v, rule; 6 
&^cav, axle ; 6 aeio-uv. earthen-vessel ; 6 i-mcre'iav, flag ; 6 i) klcou, pillar ; 6 
KAaScav and aKpe/xau, bough ; 6 Xaydiv, gulf; 6 nrXayydiv, doll ; 6 /xvp/j.r]dcau, 
anfs nest ; 6 i) aXenrpvcav, cock and hen. 
Remark 1. Nouns in -£ are partly masculine, partly feminine, except those 
in -a£ (Gen. -d/cos), which are masculine ; most of those in -£ are feminine; the 
larger part of those in -ty are masculine, but many are feminine, e. g. i) KaXav- 
po\p, -oiros, shepherd's crook; i) AcuAchJ/, tempest; i) 6\p (vox), ottos, voice; i) (rarely 
6) &ty, uTTos,face; i) cpXety, (pXefios, vein; t) x^P VL ^t holy-water; r) KaTr)Xi\p, -icpos, 
upper story, etc. 

III. Neuters : (A) all in -a, Gen. -ar-os ; -r?, Gen. -tit-os (only to Kapt}) ; -i, 
Gen. -iT-os (only to /xeXi with its compounds) ; -vp, Gen. -vp-os (only to wvp, Gen. 
irvp-6s, fire) ; -ap, Gen. -aT-os or -rip, Gen. -vt-os ; -op, Gen. -op-os ; -as, Gen. -aT-os ; 
-os, Gen. (-e-oy) -ous ; -i, Gen. -eos ; -v, Gen. -u-os, and -eos, and -aT-os, § 68, 1 ; — 

(B) the following with exceptions: (a) -ap, Gen. -ap-os' : but 6 r dp, star- 
ling; (b) -as, Gen. -a-os ; but 6 ASs, stone; (c) -w/>, Gen. -ar-os (except 6 ax*** ) 
tX^/J, eoTTwp, 7]KeKToop, § 68, 15). 

Rem. 2. The following single words may be noted in addition : i) Sals, Gen. 
Zan-6s, feast ; to ctcus or ffTais, ctchto's, dough; to ows, Gen. wr-Js, ear. 

$ 67. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declension. 

All substantives, whose inflection differs from the rules and 
analogies above given, are included under the irregular substan- 
tives of the third Dec. All the anomalous forms of the third 
Dec. may be divided into three classes : — 

(a) The first class includes those substantives whose Nom. cannot be derived, 
according to general analogy, from the Genitive-stem, e. g. i) yvvr), ivife, Gen. 
yvvaiK-6s. 

(b) The second class incudes those substantives, which, with one Nom. 
form, have in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation ; both of these, 
however, may come, in accordance with the general rules, from one form of the 
Nom., e. g. 6 i) opvis, Gen. -I&os, bird, PL opvi&ss and opi/eis, as if from opuis, 
Gea. -ews. These substantives are called Heteroclites (i. e. of different declen- 
sions or irregularly declined). 

(c) The third class includes substantives, which, with one Nom. form, admit, 
in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation, one of which may be 
derived from the Nom. form in use, but the other supposes a different Nom. 
form, e. g. ^epdirccv, -ovtos, servant, Ace. drepdirovTa and poet. StepaTra, as if from 
bepaty. This formation is called Metaplasm (transformation), and the substan- 
tives included under it, Metaplasts. The Nom. form, presupposed in this case, 
is called the Theme. 



*68.] ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THIRD D£C. 87 

$ 68. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declenion. 

1. Vow (to, knee), and So pv (to, spear), see h 54 (c). 

In the tragic poets, the Epic forms, yovvara and yovva, yovuacri, occur , 
also in the Attic poets, the Gen. Sopos, Dat. dopi, and even S6pei, and 
PL dop f] instead of Sopara, are formed from dopv; and in the phrase, Sopl 
eAelV, to take a prisoner of war, this Dat. form is retained even by the Attic 
prose writers. 

2. Ywrj (rj, woman), Gen. ywaiK-os (as if from ywai£), Dat. 
yvvaiK-c, Ace yvvcuK-a, Voc. yvroi; PL ywauces, yvvaiKwv, yvvai^C (v), 
ywatKas; on the accentuation, see § 65, 3 (a). 

3. Aopv, see yow, No. 1. 

4. Zev?, Gen. Aios, Dat. Au, Acc. Ata (as if from &ts), Voc. 
Zev. 

Poet, corresponding forms are Zt}v6s, Zrt\vi, Zrjva. 

5. ®epa.7r(Dv (6, servant), -ovtos. In Eurip. Ace. Skpaira, PI. 
&ipa7T€s, § 67 (c). 

6. Kdpa (to, head), an Epic and poetic word, Gen. Kpa.T-6<$, 
Dat. KparC and Kapa, Ace. to Kapa, to Kpara (tov Kpara, § 2 14) ; 
AcC. PL tovs KpaTa?, § 67 (c). 

7. KAei? (17, key), Gen. kAciS-o?, Dat kXuS-l, Acc. kA.€«/ ($ 53, 
Rem. 1), later KAetoa; PL Nom. and Acc. /cActs, and kXciSc?, 
KkelSas, § 67 (b). 

Old Attic, K\ys, K\p86s, ./eApSt, K\rj8a. 

8. Kv'(i)r (6, 17, dog")> Gen. kw-6<$, Dat. kwi, Acc. Kvva, Voc. ktW; 

PL KWCS, KiJVWV, kvo-l, Kvvas. 

9. At7ra (to, oil, fatness), in the Epic dialect always in the 
phrases, dXeiif/aoS^ai AiV eXatw, ^otcrat and xpLaaoSaL AiV eAato>, and 
so also in the Attic prose, aAei<£ecr#at, xpUo-Sai AiVa ; AiVa is thus 
an abridged Dat. instead of Xurdi, AiVa, from to XC-rra, Gen. -aos, 
but tXaiov must be considered as an adjective from eAda, olive, 
so that AtVa ZXaiov means olive-oil. 

10. Maprus (6, ivitness), Gen. p.dpTvpo<s, Dat. fxaprvpi, Acc. 
udpTvpa, and in Simonides paprvv ; Dat. PL /mprvcri (1/). 

11. NaC?(^, s/wjo), Gen. vcw?, Dat. vi/t, Acc. row, Voc. want- 
ing; Dual, Gen. and Dat. vzolv (Nom. and Acc. wanting) ; PL 
vfjes, ve<ov, vavai(v), vav<s. Comp. ypavs, § 57. 

In Attic poets and later prose also, vi)6s, vt\i, vrja, ete 



88 DEFECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. [fr 5„ 

'2. "Opvus (6, f], bird), Gen. 6pvZ$-os, etc. The PL has a col« 
lateral form declined like 7roAis, except the Dat. : opvlSes and 
opvei?, opviSwv and opveow, opvlcn, op vlJas, opvcts, and o/ovt?, § 67 (b). 
So 'Ava^apcrc?, 'Ava^apo-iSos, and 'Ava^apcrew?. 

In the Attic writers, the i is sometimes shorfc, opm, tpvtv, Aristoph. Av. 16. 
270, 335 (but opvls, 'opvlv, 70, 103, 73). 

13. Hvv% (rj, place of meeting), Gen. ttvkv-os, Dat. ttvkvl, Acc. 
irvKva. 

14. !§7Js (6, moth), Gen. o-e-os; PL o-ees, Gen. o-eW, etc.; in the 
later writers, Gen. 0-17x0$. 

15. Skwjo (to, efcV^), Gen. o-kotos, etc., and vSwp (to, ivater), 
Gen. vSaros, etc. To both of these belong : — 

16. <&p£ap (to, a well), and a- reap (to, talloiv), Gen. -eWos and 
-rjros (a long in Attic, short in Epic). 

17. <£#ot9, (jiSots (6, art o/* cooking), Gen. <£#oi-o's and (from 
<{i3o J Cs) cf>%i8-o<s ; PL </>^o'ets and <p$oi8es. 

18. Xods (6, « measure), xoos, X°4 X ^ X° €9 > X ^ x ov<r ^ X° as 
like /3oi)s (§ 57) ; also Gen. x°^> Acc. x°«> Acc. PL x°«s> a s if 
from x o *v<;. The latter forms are preferred by the Attic writers ; 
xovs, with the meaning of mound, is inflected only like /3ov<s. 
The form x o *v<s is Ionic, Dat. xoei*. 

19. X pais (6, shin), xpwr-os, XP WT ^ XP^ ra * Collateral forms in 
the Ionic dialect and the Attic poets, are, Gen. xp°-°s> Xpo'h xp6 a > 
like cuStos. The Dat. xp<? is found in certain phrases with cv, 
e. g. iv xp$ Kupzo-Sai, Xen. Hell. 1. 7, 8. £vptl lv xp§> it shaves close 
to tht ikin, it comes home, Soph. Aj. 786. 

§69. Defective Nouns of the Third Declension. 

Some nouns of the third Dec. are wanting in one or more of the Cases, and 
are, consequently, called Defectives. Existing forms, however, of such substan- 
tives, are found, for the most part, only in certain phrases, e. g. 

Xpiws (rb, debt), Ionic-Attic form for the Nom., Gen., and Acc; also rb 
Xptos, Gen. xp^ovs, PI. to. xp* a > Gen. XP™"': tne Dat. an( ^ Dual are wanting; 
ovap and virap (only as Nom. and Acc), in dreaming and waking ; 6<pe\os (only 
as Nom. and in the construction of the Acc. with the Inf.), advantage; fjAkr\ 
only in the phrase wb udhrjs, under the arm. 



J} 70, 71.] REDUNDANT NOUNS. HETEROCLITES. 89 

Remarks on the Declensions. 

§70. I. Redundant Nouns. 

Nouns are called Redundant, which have two modes of 
inflection in all or in most of the Cases : - 

A. They belong to the same declension, 

(a) of the same gender, e. g. 

o Aews and Ados, people; 6 yecas and va6s, temple; 6 Xay&s and \ay6s, hare; 
5 kolKws, rope, PI. also icd\oi ; r\ aAcos, threshing-floor, PI. also at a\oi ; tj Topyd 
and Topy&v. 

(b) of different genders (hence called heterogeneous), e. g. 

6 vwtos and to vwtov, back (the last form was regarded by the Atticists as the 
only proper form, still rbv vutou Xen. R. Equ. 3, 3) ; 6 £vy6s and to £"7^1 yoke. 
— In the PI. the neuter form of these heterogeneous nouns is more frequently 
used, e. g. 6 ctTtos, ra ana : ol dea/xoi, and more commonly ra. Sea/xd ; o arab/uSs, 
a station, balance, ol o-Tafyioi and ra errata, stations, and to ara&jxd, sometimes 
also balances; ol £vyot does not probably occur. 

B. To different declensions, and commonly of different gen- 
ders (heterogeneous), e. g. 

6 <p&6yyos and t) cpSoyyri, voice; 6 x&P os an< i V X^P a > space; r) ox&>1 an( ^ <5 
l^X^os, rising ground ; r\ dtya and to dtyos, thirst; r] vdir-q (the older form) and to 
vdiros, valley, etc. It should be observed further, that the word 6 irpeafivs, elder. 
has only Ace. irpeafiw, Voc. irpeafiv; these three forms are almost entirety 
poetic (irpeo-pvTepos and irpecrfivTaTos formed from this, are in frequent use) ; 
in the Common Language, 6 TrpeaPvrrjs, -ou, elder ; in the meaning of messenger, 
envoy, the Common Language uses in the Sing. 6 TrpeaPevr-ns, -ov ; but in the 
PL ol and tous irpeafieis, "irpeafiewv, irpeafieai ; also, to fidupvou and to Sdicpv 
tear. The latter and older form is retained in the poetic dialect ; still, the Dat. 
PI. daKpvo-L is found even in the Attic prose-writers (Thu. 7, 75; Dem. c. Onet. 
I. §32). 

§71. II. Heteroclites . 

Heteroclites [$ 67 (b)] have two modes of formation; they 
are either of the third Dec, which have been already presented 
together (§ 68), or of two different declensions. Those of dif- 
ferent declensions are, e. g. as follows : — 

A. Of the First and Third Declension. 
Several substantives in -77s are inflected, either in whole or in 
part, according to the first and third declensions : — 
(a) Some in -77s, Gen. -ov and -tjtos, through all the Cases according to both 
8* 



90 THIRD DEC. METAPLASTS. [$72. 

declensions : 6 ixvkt\s, mushroom, Gen. [xvkov and ixvktitos, and some proper 
names, e. g. Xdprjs. The name Qa\rjs, in the old Attic, has tha Ionic Gen. 
form 0aA.eo>, Dat. &a\fj, Ace. QaXyv] in the later writers, @a\ov and &d\7)Tos t 
QaKrjTL and 0oA?jTa. Observe that the accent is drawn back on ©aAew. 

(b) The proper names mentioned, § 59, Rem. 2, have rj as well as rju in the 
Ace. Sing. only. 

B. Of the Second and Third Declensions. 

(a) Of the Common second and third declensions : several 
substantives in -o?, as masculine, are inflected according to the 
second Dec, but as neuter, according to the third Dec, e. g. 6 
and to oxps, chariot, rov oxpv and o^ovs, rbv o^ov and to 0^05 ; 6 
and to 0- kotos, darkness. 

(b) Of the contract second and third declensions : - — 

■npSxoos (7), watering-pot), Att. irpSxovs, Gen. nrpSxov, etc., Dat. PI. irfoxovai 
(like flovs, fiovcriv). 
OlSiirovs, Gen. OtStVoSoy and (poet.) OlSiirov, Dat. Oldiirodi, Ace. OldiTroda and 

OlZiirovv, Voc. OlStirov. 

(c) Of the Attic second and third declensions : — 

In the Ace. Sing., 6 ye\as, laughter, yeXwros, yiKwTi, Ace. yeAwTo and 
yi\wv, and the three following: irdTpas, patruus, ixi]rpus, avunculus, and 
Wiims, which, in the Gen. and Ace. Sing., are inflected according to the third 
Dec. and the Attic second Dec. ; in the other Cases, according to the third 
Dec. 

trdrpws, Gen. Trdrpw and irdrpotios, Dat. irarpcoi, Ace. "ndrpav and irdrpwa; 
Mtvws, Gen. MiV&> and Mivcaos, Dat. Mivm, Ace. Mfr/00 (§ 48, Eem. 1), Mirny 
and Mivooa. 

§ 72 ]II. Metaplasts. 

Metaplasts [$ 67 (c)] like Heteroclites, have two modes of 
formation ; they are either of the third declension, which have 
been already presented together (68), or of two different declen- 
sions. Those of different declensions are, e. g. as follows : — 

(a) Of the Common second and third declensions: — 

AevSpov (rb, tree), Gen. SevSpov, etc.; but in the Dat. PI. among the Attic 
writers, 8eV5/>e<n (from the stem to AENAPOS) and SeuSpois; the first form is 
regarded by the Atticists as the better. To this stem belong, also, the forms 
r<£ devdpei and to. SeuSprj, which occur in the Attic poets, and in later prose 
writers. 

YLoivwv 6s (6, partaker), Gen. koivwvov, etc.; Xenophon uses the forms 01 
Koivvvss and tovs KOtvSavoa (from KOINflN). 



♦ 73.] INDECLINABLE AND DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 91 

Kpivov {rb, lily) Gen. Kpivov, etc., with the secondary form in the Dat. PL 
Kpiveai in Aristoph. from the PL Kplvea (in Herod.). Comp. Sevdpov. 

Aas (6, stone), Gen. Aaos and in Soph. 0. C. 196. Kaov. 

'O oveipos [and poetic to oveipov], dream, Gen. bvdpov and dvetparos. 

n Op (rb,flre), irvpos. But PL, rh irvpd, watch-fires, according to the second 
Dec. 

"ti6s (6, son), Gen. vlov, etc. Together with this formation, there is another 
according to the third Dec, much in use, particularly in the Attic writers, from 
the theme 'TIET2, Gen. v!4os, Dat. vUi (Ace. vUa is rejected) ; PL vU?s, Gen. 
vUwv, Dat. vUai, Ace. (vleas), Attic vle?s (§ 57, Rem. 1); Dual, wee, Gen. 
vUoiv. 

(b) Of the Attic second and third declensions; — 

The three substantives, tj a\cos, threshing-floor ; 6 rads, peacock; and 6 rv<pdbs, 
whirlwind, have, together with the common inflection according to the Attic 
6econd declension, another according to the third declension, in -am, etc., e. g. 
rvcpuua. 

Remark. The words rj aXws and 5 rads are generally declined accord- 
ing to the Attic second Dec, Ace. Sing. aAcw, radov ; still, the v is commonly 
rejected from a\oos in the Ace, § 48, Rem. 1. But the forms aXwvos, aXwyes, 
&\w(ti{v), raSivi, raa>ves, rawaiv, etc., are used on account of their greater 
perspicuity. 

§73. Indeclinable and Defective Nouns. 

1. Substantives which do not vary the termination, but retain in all the Cases 
the form of the Nom., are called indeclinable. Except foreign proper names, as 
6 'A(3pad[A, rod 'AfipadfjL, and the indeclinable cardinal numbers, all indeclinable 
nouns are of the neuter gender. Here belong especially : — 

(a) The names of the letters, e. g. rb, rod, rip, &\<pa; 

(b) Most of the cardinal numbers, e. g. 8e/ca avdpav; 

(c) Tb, rod, t$, xP ec ^j necessity, destiny, and &4pus with 4o~riv and elvcu, and 
several foreign words, e. g. rb, rod, rep irdaxa ] 

(d) The substantive infinitives, e. g. rb, rod, r<p ypd.<peiv. 

2. Some substantives are used only in the Sing., or only in the PL Such 
words may be termed defective in number. The reason of it is found, eithe? 
in the meaning of the word, or simply in usage, e. g. 6 alfrfjp, ether; ol irr]<rlai, 
the Etesian wind ; ai 'A&rjvcu, Athens ; ra 'OXvfnria, the Olympic games. Comp. 
further, Syntax, § 243. 

3. It has been already noted, § 69, that some substantives are found only in 
single Cases (Defectiva casu). 



92 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. [$$ 74, 75 

CHAPTER II. 

The Adjective and Participle. 

$74, Gender and Declension of the Adj ectiv e 
and Participle . 

1. The Adjective and the Participle, like the Substantive, 
have three genders, being varied by inflection to agree with 
the gender of their substantive. But all adjectives have 
not separate forms for the three genders ; many have but 
two endings, one for the Masc. and Fern., the other for the 
Neuter, e. g. 6 craxjipwv avrjp, r) acocppcov <yvvr), to crwcfrpoj, 
rifcvov. Several, indeed, have but one ending, commonly 
used only for the Masc. and Fern. See § 80, e. g. 6 (j>vyas 
avrjp, r) (f)vya$ <yvvr). 

2. In Adjectives and Participles of three endings, the 
Masc. and Neuter belong to the same declension (second or 
third), and the Neuter is like the Masc. in the Gen. and 
Dat. ; the Fern, is always of the first Dec. 

Remark 1 . Hence, in an Adjective in -os of three endings, the Masc. is 
declined like \6yos (§ 46), the Fern, like Slfkrj or cmd (§ 44), and the Neut. 
like <rvnoi> (46). 

Rem. 2. The declension of Adjectives and Participles differs only in a few 
points from that of the Substantive ; these will be noted hereafter. But it may 
be remarked here, as an essential deviation, that Participles always have the 
Voc. of the third Dec. like the Nom., § 53, Rem. 5. 

klb. Accentuation of Adjectives and Participles. 

The accentuation of Adjectives and Participles is like that 
of Substantives, with a few exceptions, which are now to be 
noted : — 

1. The Fern, is accented on the same syllable as the Masc. through all the 
Cases, where the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g. ko.\6s, /caA^, koXou\ 
Koxxpos, Kovcpri, Kovtpcv-j ^apt'eis, xapieffffa, x a P l€V 5 MeAas, ^Aaiva, fj.4\av ; ^(p^v, 
rcptiva, repeis ; fiapvs, /3ape7a, fiapv ; PovAevcas, ySouAeuo-dtra, jSouAeutray ' Tidfis t 



If 75.] ACCENTUATION OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 93 

Remark 1. In adjectives in -os, --n, -oi>, or -os, -d, -ov, the Fern., on accoun\ 
of the length of the final syllable (77, d), must be a Paroxytone, when the Masc. 
is a Proparoxytone, or a Properispomenon, e. g. av&pcamvos, ay&pwirivri, av&pca- 
ttivov; iAev&epos, iAev&epa, iAevSepov ; novcpos, Koxxp-q, Kov<pou; cnrovSauos, o-irov- 
Satd, o-novdatov ; but, Avhen the final syllable in the declension is short, it again 
takes the accentuation of the Masc, i. e. it becomes again a Proparoxytone, or 
a Properispomenon, e. g. avStpcinrivcu, iAev&epcu, Kovcpcu, o-rrovdeucu, like avSrpdtin- 
yoi, eAev&epoi, Kovcpoi, <rirov8a?oi. Hence the difference between 'P6Siai, Aviciai 
(ywcuKes), as adjectives, and 'PoSicu, Aviciai, as substantives, according to 
& 45, 6. 

2. Participles accent the same syllable in the Neuter Nom. as in the Masc, 
when the nature of the syllable permits, e. g. 

iraiSevwv, 7ra*8evov rifj.'ftcrav, ri[x.r\(rov 

<pi\wu, <pi\ovv Xiir&p, Kiirov. 

Rem. 2. Yiet Adjectives sometimes deviate from this rule, see § 65, 5. 

3. Contracts in -ovs, -rj, -ovv, from -eos, -ed, -eov, 60s, -6rj, or 6a, -6ov (except 
the Nom. and Ace. Dual Masc. and Neuter, which are Oxytones, § 49, 3), are 
Perispomena through all the Cases and Numbers, though the uncontracted 
forms of those in -eos are Proparoxytones, e. g. apyvpeos = apyvpovs, apyvpeov 
«= apyvpovv. On contracted compounds in -00s, -oov, e. g. evvovs, eVvow, see 
4 49, 3. 

4. Barytone feminines of adjectives and participles, whose Masc. is of the 
third declension, are Perispomena [§ 45, 6 (b)] in the Gen. PL, but all the 
other Cases retain the accent of the Masc, e. g. 

(Sapvs, -era, -v Gen. PL $ape<av, fiapeicov 

Xapteiy, 4e<r<ra, -lev " x a P l * VTWV i X a P leffa '^ v 

fieKas, fxeAaiva, fxeXav " /neXavcov, [AeAaivtov 

iras, iratra, irav " rrdvTcov, iraawv 

rv<p&els, -eTtro, -ev " rvcp&evTcov, rv<p&e io~£jv 

rvtyas, rv-tyacra, rtyav " rvipavrcov, t v \p a c a> v ; but, 

av&pwTrivos, -ivq, -tvov " a v & p a> it Iv a> v, as Masc, F., and N. 

ehev&epos, -epa, -epov " e Ae v&epuv, as Masc, P., and N. 

rvTrT6fievos, -evr], -evov " rvirrofievcov, as Masc, P., and N. 

Rem. 3. On the accentuation of the monosyllable vus, and of monosyllabic 
participles in the Gen. and Dat., see § 65, 2 (c). 

Rem. 4. On the accentuation of the Nominative of compound adjectives, 
the following things are to be noted : — 

(a) Those in -os, when the last part is formed of a substantive or adjective, 
follow the general rule [§ 30, 1, (c)], and are Proparoxytones, e. g. <pi\6- 
tgkvos (from tskvov), irayKaicos (from ko.kos). But if the last part is 
formed of a verb, then adjectives with a long penult, are Oxytones, e. g. 
^ivxoTToij.ir6s, /j.e\oiroi6s, heivoitr6s, 6Srjy6s ; but those with a short penult, 
are commonly Paroxytones, if they have an active sense, but if a passive, 
Proparoxytones, e. g. 

\&o&6Aos, one casting stones ; X&ofloXos, cast down by stones ; 

fx-qrpoKrovos, matricide; ix-nTpoicTovos, slain by a mother ; 

&-npoTp6cpos, nourishing wild beists ; &r)p6Tpo<pos, no irished by wild bezsts. 

Words compounded with prepositions, o privative and intensive, ei and 



04 



ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [$ 76. 



Hvs, and det, ayav, api, apri, ipi, tj/xi, £d, irav, and iroXv, are alw&ys Pro 
paroxytones, and hence exceptions to the rule respecting words with a 
short penult. 

(b) Verbal adjectives in -t6s remain Oxytones, even in compounds, if they 
have three endings, but are Proparoxytones, if they have but two. Sea 
§ 78, I. (c). 

(c) All compounds in -n-A^I, -p«|, -rp&%, -<r<pa£, are Oxytones. 



Summary or the Adjective and Participle Endings, 



$76. I. Adjectives and Participles of three 
Endings. 



I. -o< 



-if, -ov. 



Nom. 


aya&os, 


ayafrf], 


aya&6v, goody 


Gen. 


aya&ov, 


aya&rjSy 


\ya&ov 


Nom. 


oydoos, 


6yS6r], 


oydoov, eighth, 


Gen. PL 


bydowv, 


oy86a>v, 


oyUwv (§ 75,4.) 


Nom. 


ypa<p6/xevos, 


ypcKpo/xevrii 


ypa<p6fxevov 


Gen. PI. 


ypacpofxevcov, 


ypa<po[i4vo)V. 


ypa<pofx4va>v 


Nom. 


Siicaios, 


tiiKaia, 


dinaiov, just, 


Gen. 


Sucaiov, 


Sucaias, 


SiKaiov 


Gen. PI 


SiKaiwv, 


dtnaicav, 


SiKaiwv 


Nom. 


iX^pos, 


exM. 


ix&p6v, hostile. 


Gen. 


4x&pov, 


ix&pas, 


ix&pov 


Nom. 


a&poos, 


&&p6a, 


a&poov, full, 


Gen. 


a&p6ov, 


a&poas, 


a&p6ov 


Gen. PI. 


a&p6cav, 


a&p6av, 


a&powv. 



Most of the adjectives belong to this class. The Pem. ends in a, when pre- 
ceded by t or p, § 43, 1. Still, adjectives in -oos have -6a in the Pem., when p 
precedes o, otherwise, -6-n, e. g. khp6a, yet by$6v,. On the accentuation of 
adjectives in -os, -rj (d), -ov, see § 75. 

Adjectives in -eos, -4 a, -eov, which denote the material, e. g. xpvo~eos, 
golden ; apyvpeos, silver ; nepd/xeos, earthen ; and multiplicative adjectives in 
-60s, -6 7), -6ov, e. g. air\6os, single; Snr\6os, doable, are contracted. On the 
accentuation of those in -eos, -4a, -eov, see § 75, 3, and on the contraction of 
those in -ia into -S, -or) into -rj, and -6a into -a, see § 9, II. 



Xpv<r-eos, 


Xpi*r-ea, 


Xpvff-eov 


Xpvff-ovs, 


Xpv<r-rj, 


Xpvo~-ovv 


ip4-eos, 


ep€-ed, 


ipe-eov 


ipe-ovs, 


epe-S, 


4pe-ovv 


apyvp-eos, 


apyvp-ed, 


apyvp-eov 


apyvp-ovs, 


apyvp-a, 


apyvp-ovv 


8nr\-6os, 


8nr\-6ri, 


Snr\-6ov 


5iir\-ovs, 


dnr\-rj, 


5iir\-ovy 



Kemaek 1 . Contraction is seldom omitted in Attic classic prose, not unfre- 
quently in the Tragedians, e. g. xpvcea, Xen. Ag. 5, 5 ; yet a&p6os, -6 a, -6ov, 
crowded, is rarely found contracted; SiKpoos, -6 a, -6ov, two-pronged, is com- 
monly contracted in the Masc. and Neut., Swpovs, SiKpovv, but in the Pem tha 
uncontracted form is usual, r) 8iKp6a; 6 ydoos is always uncontracted. 



II 



-v : Nom. yXvKi/s, y\vKt7a, y\vKv, sweet, 
Gen. yhvKeos, yKvKeias, 7A.11/ceos 

Gen. PI. yX.vK.4wv, ykvueiwv, yXvKcasv (§ 75, 4) 



<? 76.] ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. 95 

The declension of the Masc. is like injxus, though with the common genitives 
in -cos, -eW ; the declension of the Neut. is like &o-tv, yet always uncontracted in 
the PL (-4a). The only deviations from the regular accentuation are, rj/xtarvs, 
7]/j.taeia, '-qix-io-v, half; &?)Avs, d^Aeia, &rj\v, female ; irp4o*fivs, old (used only in the 
Masc.), and some poetic forms. OrjXvs is sometimes used as feminine in Homer 
and in the Tragedians. 

Hem. 2. The adjective rnxiavs, in the Attic writers, has both the contracted 
and uncontracted forms in the Ace. PL, 7)/xi<reis and rj/xiaeas ; also the Neut. 
fm'urea is found in several passages in Demosthenes in the contracted form 
tujl'ktt). Sometimes the Ionic Pem. form -4a occurs, e. g. Tr\ar4a, X. R. Equ. 1, 
14. (in all MSS.) T)(j.l<reas, PI. Menon. 83, c. in the best MSS. 

Ill -us, -vera, -vv: Nom. SeiKvvs, dtuevvcra, ZeiKvvv, showing, 

Gen. Szikvvvtos, Seiicvvarrjs, SeiKvvvros 

Gen. PL Seucvvvroov, SeiKvvo-oov, SeiKvvvruv (§ 75,4.) 

Nom. <pvs, <f>vo~a, <j>6v, produced, 

Gen. (pwros, <pvo-qs, (pvvros [§ 65, 2 (c).] 

Gen. PL (pvvrwv, (pvauv, (pvvrwv. 

So the Pres. and second Aor. Act. participles of verbs in -ui. For the de- 
clension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d). 

IV. -e is, -€ <r a a, -e v : Nom. x a p' iels > X a p' ie(r(ra i X a p' iev i lovely, 

Gen. x a ?' iiVT0S i X a P l * <T<r y s i x a p' iej/T0S 

Gen. PL x a P l * VTUV i x a P Leo ~°~" >J/ > x a P L * VT(av - 

For the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d), the only difference 
being that the Dat. PL ends in -cart, not -e«n, e. g. xaptecn. — The Masc. and 
Neut. is in the Nom. a Paroxytone, in the Pern, a Proparoxytone ; yet the 
ancient grammarians prescribe that the Neut. of x a P' Lels should be accented on 
the antepenult, hence x*P lev - 

Rem. 3. Some of the adjectives in -r\eis, -f) e o- or a, -rj e v, and -oeu, -6t &- 
<ra, -6ev, admit contraction, e. g. 

Nom. ri[A7)-eis, Tifj-rj-ecrcra, ri/xrj-ev, honored, 

ri/j.fjs, Ti\jfr\G<ra, TLjxrjV 
Gen. TifxyjvTOS, Ti/j.7}0-crr)s, Tt/XrjVTOS 
Nom. ixe\iro-€is, jUEAiT^-ecrcra, /j.eXn6-ev, honeyed, 

fj.e\iTovs, fjLe\iTov(T(ra, fxeXirovv 

Geil. IXeXlTOVVTOS, /J.eXlTOVaO'7}S, /XeXlTOVVTOS. 

V. -els, '€?<ra, -4 v. Nom. Xeicp&ets, Xei(p&e?(ra, Xei(p&4v, relictus, 

Gen. Xei(p&4vros, Atup&eicrris, Kticp&ivTos 

Gen. PL X€Kp&4vTU)v, XeKp&eicrwv, Xsi<p&4vTwv 

Nom. r&eis, ri&eTo-a, ti&4v, placing, 

Gen. tiS4vtos, T&eicrr)s, t&4vtos. 

For the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d), and also in the Dat. 
PL, e. g. TvtySeitu. So likewise the first and second Aor. Pass. Participle, and 
the Pres. and second Aor. Active Part, of rifrntu and 'i-qfu, e. g. ids, Ulaa, I4v. 
eis, elcra, ev, &sis, &e7<ra, &4v. 

VI. -d s, -aiv a, -a. v '. Nom. ii4xas, ix4Xaiva, /x4Xav, black, 

Gen. /i4xdvos, fxeXaivrfs, ix.4\avos 

Gen. PL fieXavwv, ixeXaiv&v, iizXavoov. 

In the same manner only rdxas, raXaiva, rdxdv, unhappy, the feminine Voc. 
of which has also rdXav. Por the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see 4 54 
(d), with Rem. 6. 



90 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [§ 76. 

VII. -a s, -a era, -av: Nom, iras, iraera, irav, all, every, 
Gen. iravros, irdo"ns, iravros 

Gen. PL irdvrav, iracrav, irdvrav. 

In the same manner only the compounds of 7ray, e. g. airas (airdcra, airav), 
av/xirds, irpoirds, etc. ; these compounds have a short a in the Neut., in dac- 
tylic and anapestic verse. See § 54 (d),for the declension of the Masc. and 
Neut., and § 65, 2 (c), for the accentuation of the simple adjective in the Gen. 
and Dat. PI. and Dual. 

VIII. -ds, -a era, -dv : Nom. Xstyas, Xetyacra, Aefyai/, having left, 

Gen. Xstyavros, Xeirpderrjs, Xdipavros 

Gen. PI. Xet,\pdvrav, Xettyacrav, Xtvtydvrav. 

So the first Aor. Act. Part., and also the Pres. and second Aor. Act. Part, of 
ttrrrjfii: lards, -acra, -dv ; crrds, -Sea, -dv. Por the declension, see § 54 (d). 

IX. -rjv, -eiva, -ev: Nom. reprjv, repeiva, repev (poetic), smooth, 

Gen. repevos, repeivrjs, repevos 

Gen. PL repevav, repeivav, repevav. 

No other adjective is thus declined. Por the declension, see § 55, 1. 

X. -o v s, -over a, -6 v. Nom. SiSovs, SiSovaa, SiSov, giving, 

Gen. Sidovros, dtSovo-ns, diSovros 

Gen. PL SiSovrav, SiSovcrav, SiS6vrav. 

Thus only the Part. Pres. and the second Aor. Act. (Sovs, Sovcra, 86v, Gen. 
Sovros, dovarrjs, Gen. PL Pern, dovcrav) of verbs in -w/jli. 

XI. -(!> v, -over a, -6 v : Nom. eKc&v, eicovcra, en6v, willing, 

Gen. £k6vtos, eKovcr-ns, kic6vros 

Gen. PL kn.6vrav, eKOvaav, knovrav. 

Thus only the compound amav, commonly 'dicav, &K-ovcra, aKov. Por the 
declension, see § 54 (d). 

XTI. ■ail', -over a, -ov: Nom. Xeiirav, Xeiirovcra, Xeiirov, leaving, 
Gen. Xeiirovros, Xeiirovcr'ns, Xeiirovros 

Gen. PL Xeiir6vrav, Xeiirovcrav, Xziir6vrav. 

So also the Pres., Put., and second Aor. Act. Part., the last, however, with a 
different accentuation : -av, -ovcra, -6v, e. g. Xiira'v, -ovcra, -6v. For the declen- 
sion, see § 54 (d). In the same manner, the Present participles of contract 
verbs in -da, -©», and -6a, e. g. 

Nom. rifxav, -acra, -ay Nom. (piXav, -ovcra, ~ovv 

Gen. np-avros, -acn\s, *wvros Gen. PL cpiXovvrav, -ovcrav, -ovvrav. 

Gen. PL rifxavrav, -acrav, -wj/TOJt'. Nom. [xicr&av, -ovcra, -ovv 

Gen. PL fjucr&ovvrav, -overav, -ovvrav. 

The Put. Act. Part, of Liquid verbs is declined like <piXav, <piXovcra, cpiXovv, 
Gen. (piXovvros, etc., e. g. crirepav, -ovcra, -ovv (formed from erirepeav, etc.), from 
trireipa, to sow. 

XIII. -cvs -via -6 s: Nom. rervepas, rerv(pv?a, rervepos, having struck, 

Gen. rerveporos, rervcpvlas, rerveporos 

Gen. PL rerveporav, rerv<pviav, rerv(p6rav. 

On the form kardis, -acra, karas and -6s, etc., see below, § 193, Rem. 2 and 3. 



« /', 



ADJECTIVES. 



PARADIGMS. 



97 



XIV. The adjective?, fieyas, fxeydXri, fJ.eya, great, iroXvs, iroXX-q, 
vohv, much, ara irregular in the Nom., Ace., and Voe. of the Masc. and Neut. 
Sing. ; the other parts are regular : but even it o A A 6 v instead of iroXvv or iroXu, 
occurs in the Attic poets; Aesch. S. 824, uses the Voc. /xeyaXe; irpaos, 
irp a eta, irpaov, soft, is also irregular ; it has, throughout the Fem., in the 
PI. and Dual Neut., as also in the Gen. PL Masc., and sometimes, also, in the 
other Cases of the Masc. PL, a form like irpavs, -e?a, -v (comp. jXvkvs, -eia, -u), 
which occurs in tks Dialects. See the Paradigm. 



77. Paradigms 



S.N. 




ayab-f] 


aya§-6v, goocl 


(piXt-os 


<piXi-a 


(plXi-ov, loxely 


ayab-6s 


G. 


ay ab-ov 


a.ya$-rjs 


uya^-ov 


(ptXi-ov 


(piXl-as 


(piXi-ov 


D. 


ayc&-u> 


ayaZ-fj 


aya§-$ 


(piXl-ca 


(piXi-a 


<piXi-a> 


A. 


ayab-6v 


ay ah-'l]:' 


hyab-6v 


(piXi-ou 


(ptXi-av 


(piXi-oi 


V. 


ayaS-e 
aydb-oi 


aya^r-'f] 
aya^-ai 


ayad-oV 
dya^-a 


(plXi-e 


(piXi-a 


(piXi ov 


P.N. 


(piXi-oi 


(piXi-ai 


(piXi-a 


G. 


aya$-S>v 


aya^-av 


aya^-wv 


tyiXi-av 


(piXi-cov 


(piXl-cou 


D. 


aya<$--o?s 


aya$-a?s 


aya&-o?s 


(piXi-ois 


(piXt-ais 


<piXi-ois 


A. 


aya^-ovs 


aya&-ds 


aya&-d 


<piXi-ovs 


(piXi-as 


(piXi-a 


V. 


ayab-oi 
ayaS-w 


aya&-ai 
aya^r-a. 


ayafr-d 
ayaS-^v 


<piXi-oi 


(piXi-ai 


(piXi-a 


Dual. 


<piXi-u} 


(piXi-a 


(piXi-ca 




hyaS-olv 


aya§-a?v 


ayaS-aw. 


[(piXi-oiv 


<piXi-aiv 


(piXi-oiv. 


S. N. yXvKvs 


yXvneia 


yXvKv, swe^t 


rpaos 


irpae?a 


irpaov, soft 


G. yXvice-os 


yXvKelas 


yXvKe-os 


irpaov 


Trpaeias 


irpdov 


D. yXvue? 


yXv/ceia 


yXvice? 


it paw 


irpaeta 


Trpaci} 


A. yXvKvv 


yXvKtiav 


yXvKv 


zpaov 


Trpaeiav 


irpaov 


"\ . y?^vKv 
P.N. yXvueis 


yXvKeTa 
yXvKtTai 


yXvKv 
yXvKea 


irpaos(e) 


irpaeia 


irpaov 


xpaoi, irp 


aels irpasTai wpaea 


G. yXvKeoiv 


yXviceiocv 


yXvKewu 


i'p aecov 


■k pae iodv 7r paecov 


D. yXvKeo~i{v) yXvtctlais 


yXvKeai(v) 


irpa.ois, it p 


a 4 a i Trpaeiaisirpaeai 


A. yXvKels 


yXvKeias 


yXvKea 


•xpdovs, irp 


as is it pat 


i as it paea 


V. 


yKvKels 


yXvKilai 


yXvKea 


irp.xGi, irp 


aeiSTrpaeiai trpaea 


Dual. 


yXvuee 


yXvKeta 


yXvKee 


■Kpdx 


it p a e id 


it pax 


yXvxeoiv 


yXvK€iaiv 


yXvKeoiv 


irpxoiv 


tt p a e iaiv irpaoiv. 


S.N. 


Xapieis 


Xapie&cra 


Xapiev 


Xei'P&eis 


XeKp^eTaa 


Xeicp^ev 


G. 


Xaplevros 


XapLeacn)s 


Xapt-evTos 


Xeuffoevros 


XeKpSreiaiqs 


Xeicp^evTOS 


D. 


XapievTi 


Xapieaarj 


XapitvTi 


Xei(p&eVTl 


Xei<pdrei<Ty 


Xei<p§4vTi 


A. 


XO-piiVTa 


Xapietrcrav 


Xapiev 


Xsup&ty-Ta 


XeKp&elcrav 


Xetcp&ev 


V. 


Xapitv 


Xap(t(T(ra 


Xo.p^v 


Xeicp&els 


X€i(p&e7aa 


Xetcp^tev 


P.N. 


Xapievres 


XapietrcraL 


Xaplevra 


Xei(p$ev7es 


Xeicp^e'icra.i 


Aeicpd-eVra 


G. 


XapievTooj/ 


Xapiecraiov x a P L€VTa)J/ 


\€Kp$evTooi/ 


Xei<pv?i<TO)V 


Xei(p?revTcoy 


D. 


Xapie<n(j/ 


Xo.pi4(T(Tais x a p' L * (TL ( i/ ) 


\€l(p&t?<7l(l' 


X€L(pysi(rais Xei<p$s?(ri(v) 


A. 


Xapievras 


Xapieacras 


Xapievra 


Keicpvevrc ? 


Aeiod-eurds 


XsLcp^evra 


V. 


Xaplevres 


XapieacraL 


Xapieura 


\et<p 3-eV"~e ; 


XeKp&eTcrai 


XeKpSevTa 


Dual. 


Xapievre 


Xapiccraa 


Xapisure 


Keup&evre 


KeKpSe'iaa. 


Xeicp^evTe 


L 


XCLpLeVTOlV 


Xap^(r<raiu x a P l 4vToiv. 


\eicp&4vi ) i 


Xenp^rdcraLU XGicpSeuTOiv . 



ADJECTIVES. FARAIHGMS. 



tt 77 



Xpvffcos 
Xpvcovs 


Xpvo~4a 

XpVO-TJ 


Xpvcreov, golden 
Xpvaovu 


arrXovs 
dirXovs 


airXorj 
airXri 


airxSov, single 
airXovv 


Xpv&zov 
Xpvcrov 


Xpvcrias 
Xpvtrrjs 


Xpvcreo-j 
Xpwov 


airXoov 
airXov 


airX6r]s 
car At? s 


airXoov 
airXov 


X/JU0-6O) 

Xpva-M 


Xpvo~4q 
XP V <?V 


Xpvcrecp 
Xpvo-cp 


airXocp 
aTTXeo 


airXorj 
dirXfj 


airXoqi 
dirXfp 


Xpvcreov 
Xpvffovp 


Xpvo-eav 
Xpvcrrjv 


Xpvcrovv 


airXoov 
airXovv 


arrX6r)v 
airXrjv 


cnrAcW 
citcXovv 


doubtful 


Xpvo-ea 
Xpvo-yj 


Xpv&eov 
Xpvffovv 


doubtful 


dirXSr] 
airXr) 


airX6ov 
airXovv 


Xpvcreoi 
Xpvo-oi 


Xpvcreai 
Xpvaa? 


Xpvcrea 
Xpvo~a 


airXdoi 
airXol 


cnrXoai 
airXat 


arrXSa 
aTrXa, 


Xpvcreoov 
Xpvaoov 


Xpvcrecov 
Xpvo-cov 


XPV0~€60V 

Xpvcr&v 


ebrAcW 
airX&v 


cnrXSwv 
airXtov 


airXScav 
hirX&v 


Xpvffeois 
Xpvcrois 


Xpvo-eais 
Xpvo-ous 


Xpvffeois 
Xpvo-ols 


airX6ois 
anXoTs 


airX6ais 
airXa7s 


airXoois 
dirXols 


Xpvcreovs 
Xpvaous 


Xpvcreds 
Xpvcras 


Xpvffea 
Xpvo~a 


arrXSovs 
cnrXovs 


dirXSas 
airXas 


arrXSa 
a7rAa 


Xpv&eoi 
Xpvao? 


Xpvo'eai 
Xpvaa? 


Xpvcred 
Xpvo"a 


airXooi 
airXo? 


arrXSai 
ctTrAa? 


airXSa 
dirXa 


Xpvffeci) 
Xpvcr£> 


Xpvcred 
Xpvo-a 


Xpvo-eca 
Xpvaoj 


aTrX6co 
arrXoo 


arrXoo. 
aTrXa 


ctTrXoco 

b.TTXS} 


Xpvcreoiv 
Xpvffdiv 


XpvGeaiv 
Xpvo~a?v 


Xpvcreoiv 
Xpvo~o7v 


c.ttX6oiv 
drrXoiv 


hirXoaiv 
a-rrXaiv 


airXSoiv 
airXo7v 


dpyvpeos 
apyvpovs 
apyvpeov 
apyvpov 


hpyvpea 
apyvpa 

dpyvpeas 
apyvpas 


apyvpeov, silver 
apyvpovv 
apyvpeov 
apyvpov 


rervepcos 
rerv<p6ros 

TeTVCpOTl 

rerv<p6ra 


rerv<pv?a 
rervepvias 
rervepvia 
rervcpvlav 


rervcpSs, having 
rerocpSros [struck. 
rervcpSri 
T€T v<pos 


apyvpea 
apyvpa 

apyvpeov 
apyvpovu 


apyvpea 
apyvpa 
dpyvpeav 
apyvpav 


apyvpeco 
apyvpip 

apyvpeov 
apyvpovv 


rervcpSres rervcpvTai 
rervcpSrwv rerv(pviu>v 
Terv(p6o~i rervcpviais 
rerveporas rervepvias 


rervepora 
TeTvcpoTCoy 
Tervcpotri 
rervepora 


apyvpee 


apyvpea 
apyvpa 


apyvpeov 
apyvpovv 


rervcpSre rervepvia 
rerv(p6roiv rervtpviaiv 


rervepore 
rervcpSroiv 


ttoXvs 
iroXXov 
■xnXX'2 
it oXvv 
tt oXv 


ttoXXt) 
ttoXXtjs 

TTOXXfj 

ttoXXtju 
ttoXXt) 


ttoXv, much 
ttoXXov 

TTOXXcp 
7T Xl) 
TTOXv 


jx eyas 
/xeydXov 
[xeydXoi 
jxeyav 
fj. eya 


fxeydXrj 

fieyaXrjs 

pieyaXy 

fAeydXrjv 

lieydXi) 


fiey a, great 
/xeyaXov 
{leydh w 
[xeya 
p.eya 


rroXXoi 

TTOXXUV 
TTOXXOLS 
TTOXXOVS 
TToXXoi 


TroXXai 

ttoXXoov 

TToXXaus 

ttoXXus 

TroXXai 


TTOXXd 

TTOXX&V 

TTOXXOLS 

TTOXXd 

TTOXXd 


/xeyaXoi 

fieydx&v 

fxeyaXoLS 

/xeyaXovs 

[xeydXoi 


fxeyaXai 
fxeyaXcov 
jxeyaXais 
[xeyaXas 
fxeyaXai 


fxeyaXa 

[xeyaXcov 

/xeyaXois 

[xeyaXa 

/xeyaXa 




[xeydXca 
fieydXatv 


/xeydXa 
/.leydXaiv 


fxeydXw 
/xeyaXotv 



♦ 78.] 



ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 



99 



u.4Xas 


fx4Xaiva 


fj.4Xav, black 


iras 


iraGa 


irav, all 


peXavos 


fj.eXaivr)s 


lu.4Xa.vos 


ttovt6s 


TTaG7]S 


tto.vt6s 


fx4Xavi 


fxeXaivri 


fj.4Xa.vi 


iravTi 


7raGT] 


TTaVTl 


fx4Xava 


fi4Xaivav 


fj.4Xav 


izavTa 


iraGav 


irav 


fj.4Xav 


fx.4Xa.iva 


fx4Xav 


iras 


iraGa 


irav 


fj.4Xaves 


fj.4Xaivai 


fj.4Xa.va 


irdvTes 


iraGai 


TrdvTa 


/xeXdvcov 


fj.eXa.ivwv 


fxeXavwv 


irdvTUV 


TTaGVV 


irdvTuv 


/ncXaGi 


fxeXa'ivais 


fx4XaGi 


iraGi 


iraGais 


TTUGl 


fi4Xavas 


ixeXaivas 


fj.4xava 


irdvTas 


iraGas 


iravTa 


fj,4Xaves 


fx4Xaivai 


fx4Xava 


irdvTes 


iraffat 


iravTa 


fx4Xave 


fxeXaiva 


fj.4Xave 


f 

iravTe 


irdGa. 


TTaVTS 


fxeXavoiv 


fxeXaivaiv 


fj.eXa.voiv. 


irdvTOiv 


irdGaiv 


TTaVTOlV. 


GTO.S 


(Traaa. 


GTav, standing 


Xnrdv 


XlTTOVGa 


Xitt6v, leaving 


aravTOS 


GTaGtjs 


GTavros 


Xittovtos 


XnrovGt)s 


Xittovtos 


(TTCLVTl 


ard.<rr\ 


Grdvri 


XittSvti 


XiirovGr} 


XlTTOVTl 


crravra 


aracrav 


GTav 


Xnr6vTa 


XiirovGav 


Xitt6v 


GTas 


(TTacra 


GTav 


Xittwv 


XnrovGa 


Xitt6v 


aravres 


aracrai 


GTavra 


Xnr6vTes 


XiirovGat 


XnrSvTa 


(TrdvToov 


araawv 


GTaVTWV 


Xitt6vtwv 


XlTTOVGtoV 


XittSvtwv 


(TTaai(v) 


GTO.GOXS 


GTCLGl{v) 


XnrovGi(v) 


XnrovGais 


XlTTOVGl(v) 


aravras 


GTO.GO.S 


GTavTa 


Xnr6vTas 


XlTTOVGCiS 


XnrSvra 


GTavres 


GraGai 


GTavTa 


XlTTOVTCS 


XnrovGai 


Xnr6vTa 


(TTcivTG 


GTO.GO. 


GTavTe 


XlTTOVTe 


XiTTovGa. 


Xitt6vt€ 


crravToiv 


GraGatv 


GTaVTOlV. 


XittSvtoiv 


XiTrovGaiv 


Xitt6vtoiv. 


(pavcov 


(pavovGa. 


(pavovv, about to 


£evyvvs 


£evyvvGa 


(evyvvv, joining 


(pavovvTos 


(paV0VG7]S 


(pavovvTos [show 


{evyvvvTos £evyvvG7]s 


CevyvvvTos 


(pavovvTi 


(paVOVGT) 


(pavovvTi 


£evyvvvTi 


{evyvvGTj 


(evyvvvTi 


(pavovvTa 


(pavovG&v 


(pavovvra 


£evyvvvTa 


£evyvvGav 


{evyvvv 


(pavcov 


(pavovGa. 


(pavovv 


£evyvvs 


£evyvvGa 


£evyvvv 


(pavovvTes 


(pavovGat 


(pavovvTa 


CevyvvvTes C^evyvvGai 


(evyvvvTa 


(pavovvTwv 


(pavovGciiv 


(pavovvTwv 


CeuyvvvTwv ^zvyvvGwv 


CevyvvvTCov 


(pavovGi 


(pavovGais 


(pavovGi 


£evyvi>Gi 


£evyvvGais 


{evyvvGi 


(pavovvTas 


(pavovGds 


(pavovvTas 


{evyvvvTas 


fcvyvvGas 


{evyvvvTa 


(paVOVVTCS 


(pavovGai 


(pavodvTa 


£evyvi)VTes 


^evyvvGai 


£evyvvvTa 


(pavovvre 


(pavovGa. 


(pavovvre 


£evyvvvTe 


£evyvvGa 


(evyvvvTe 


(pavowroiv 


cpavovGaiv 


(pavovvTotv. 


(evyvvvTOiv ^evyvvGaiv 


{evyvvvToiv. 



Kemark. All participles in -cis are declined like Xei<p&ets (see § 76, V.) ; all 
participles in -us, like ocikvvs (see § 76, III.) ; all participles in -as, like GTas (see 
4 76, Till.): the Pres. Fut. and second Aor. Part. Active, like Xnr6v (§ 76, 
XII.) : the Fut. Act. Part, of Liquid verbs, like GTrepwv (§ 76, XII.) 



§ 78. II Adjectives of two Endings. 

Adjectives in -os of two endings are declined like dya^o?, 
except that they have no separate form for the feminine, the 
same form being used for the masculine and feminine. 



100 ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS, ($ 78 

I. -os, -ov; 6 t) dXoyos, to 'dXoyov, irrational. 

To this class belong, 

(a) A few simple adjectives without particular derivative endings, e. g. 6 t) 
fidpfiapos, not Greek ; xdfipos, vehement ; rj/aepos, gentle ; XoiSopos, calumniating ; 
T&ao-6s, mild; x*P <ros i unfruitful; yjcrvxos, silent; Sdiravos, extravagant; zcoXos, 
yesterday ; 

(b) Most simple adjectives with the derivative-endings -los and -eios, and 
•ifios, e. g. 5 7) orwT-fjpios, saving ; 6 i) fiacriXeios, regal ; 6 t) yvwpijxos, recognizable ; 

(c) All compounds, e. g. 6 t) aXoyos, to 'dXoyov, irrational; 6 t) apySs (instead 
of aepy6s), inactive (but apy6s, -t), -6v, bright) ; 6 i) irdyKaXos, very fair (but KaX6s, 
•$, -6v) ; 6 7] iraXXsvicos, very white (but Xevnos, -f), -6v) ; freowvevo-Tos, -ov, divinely 
inspired (but ttv€v<tt6s, -t), -6v) ; adjectives compounded with adjectives in 
-k6s, which then become Proparoxy tones, e. g. 6 r) \pev5aTTiKos, not pure Attic, 
but ('Attikos, -r), -6v) 6i] (jLiaoirzpaiKos (but U(paiK6s, -t), -6v). 

Exceptions are adjectives derived from compound verbs with the deriva- 
tive-endings -k6s, which remain Oxytones ; those in -tsos, which remain 
Paroxytones, e. g. iwiSetKTiKSs, -t), -6u, from iTriSeiKw/ju ; those in -t6s vary 
between two and three endings, e. g. avexTSs, -?;, -6v (from avex 00 )- an d aueKT6s, 
-6v, see Lobeck, ad S. Aj. 1296. Paralipp. p. 482, sq. Poppo ad Th. 2, 41, 4. 
But when compounds in -t6s, -tt), -t6v, are again compounded, they have but 
two endings, and are Proparoxytones, e. g. 6 i) aiaxTacrKtvacrTos. 

Remark 1. Comparatives and Superlatives have three endings, even when 
the Positive has but two, though there are some rare exceptions, e. g. anopcoTe- 
pos 7} XTJipis, Thu. 5. 110. 8vse/xf5oXcoTa,Tos r) AoKpis, Id. 3, 110. 

II. -o v s, -o v v ; 6 7] evvovs, t5 evvovv, benevolent. 

Adjectives with these endings are, 

(a) Those compounded with the contracted substantives vovs and ttXovs, and 
hence in the Masc. and Pern, are declined like these, but in the Neuter like 
octovv (§ 47), yet the Neuter PI. in -oa does not admit contraction, consequently 
ra evvoa. On the accentuation, see § 49, 3. 

Rem. 2. Attic writers sometimes omit the contraction in the PL, e. g. /ca/co- 
v6ois X. Cy. 8. 2, 1. Kpvtyiv6ovs X. Ag. 11,5. Msvooi X. H. 2. 1, 2. 

(b) Such as are compounded with the substantive ttovs, e. g. 6 i) ttoXvttovs, 
to ttoXvttovu, and are inflected like it, but in the Ace. Sing., even as OiS'nrovs 
[§ 71, B. (b)], are partly of the contract second Dec. and partly of the third, 
e. g. Gen. ttoXvito5os and txoXvttov] Acc. TroXviroda and ttoXvttovv, etc. 

Rem. 3. In several adjectives of this kind, e. g. dwovs, fipaZvirovs, dlxovs.j 
avnrTSirovs, the inflection does not follow the second Dec. 

III. -co s, -co v ; 6 7] 'iXeccs, to 'iXeccv, compassionate. 

Adjectives of these endings are like the Attic second Dec. (§ 48). 

Rem. 4. The Acc. commonly ends in -ccv, but in a number of compound 
words, it ends in -co (§ 48, Rem. 1 ), e.g. a^xp^co, avdirXtco, dyypco (in respect to 
the accentuation, see § 29, Rem. 7), e?n7rAe&>, imepxpeco. 

Rem. 5. There are three endings to the simple adjective: — 

HXecos, 7rAea, irXicov, full, Gen. ttXcco, 7rAeas, irXico, PI. TrXew, ttXzcu, TvXia ; the 
compounds are either of two endings, e. g. 6 7) avdirXecos, rb avd-rrXecov, PI. ot at 
eKirXect) ('nnreTs eKirXecp X. Cy. 6. 2, 7. e/cTrAew Tpdirefai X. Hier. 1, 18), tc\ e/c7rAew 
X. Cy. 3, 1, 28. 1, 6, 7, and even the Nom. PI. tvx4cc, of the simple adjective 
is not seldom used for the Masc. and Pem., or they have (yet more seldom) 



f78.] ADJECTIVES OF "TWO ENDINGS. 101 

three endings, e. g. avdirXtoos, avaitxia (PI. Phaedon 83, d.), avdirXzuv. Eur 
Ale. 730, has nvXeou, after the example of Homer, as Neuter Sing. So like* 
wise compounds, seldom in the Sing., e. g. rb ep.TrXeov, Soph., oftener in the 
PI.,- e. g. e/xirXeoi PI. Rp. 6. 505, e and very frequently in the Neuter, e.g. 
eCT\ f « X. Cy. 6. 2, 7, and 8. irep'nrXea 6. 2, 33. Also from i'Aews, Plato Phaedon 
95, a. has t'Aea as Neut. PI. 

Rem. 6. 'O 77 <rws, rb aS>v, salvus, is formed from the old word XA.02 by 
contraction. In addition to the Nom. aws, cwv, this word forms only the Ace. 
Sing, o~S>v, like the Attic second Dec. ; it has also the Ace. aooov. The form era 
(from tract), occurs as Fern. Sing, in Eurip. Fr. 629. (Dind.) and as Neut. PL in 
Plat. Critias, 111, e in the best MSS. The PI. consists of forms from aass of 
the second Dec. and of forms from the lengthened <ru.os, namely : — 

PI. N. ol ai cra>s (from craies), and ol ercoot, at crwat, N. <rwa, rarely era. 
A. robs rots crws (from awas), and rovs cr&ovs, N. a£>a, rarely era. 

The Singular forms of (Twos are very rare in the Attic writers, e. g. cruos, X. 
An. 3. 1, 32. 

Rem. 7. The compounds of iczpas and yeXccs are partly like the Attic 
second Dec, partly like the third Dec, e. g. 6 % xpucrci/cepws, rb xp v(r ° K€ P a}l/ > 
Gen. xp v(r ^ K€ P ca an< i XP V(T0K ^P 0iTQS '■> & V <piXoyeXa)S, rb <ptX6yeXoov, Gen. <piX6yeXw 
and (piXoyeXcoros ; fiovtczpais, Gen. (Hov/cepa and fiovKepcoros, so evKtpcvs. The 
adjective Svsepws follows the third Dec. only, e. g. 8vsepcaros, etc. Forms like 
the Common second Dec. originate from forms of the Attic second Dec, e. g. 
Sinepov, v-fjKepot, aicepa. On the accentuation, see § 29, Rem. 7. 

IV. -to v : -o v ; N. 6 77 o~&<ppa)v, rb caxppou, prudent, 

G. rod TTJs rov (raxppovos (according to § 55, 1). 

Rem. 8. From 6 rj iritav,fat, comes also the Fem. form irUtpa, even in prose 
writers; so also 7rp6<ppa<r<ra from 5 rj Ttp6(pp<av, occurs in the poets. 

Rem. 9. Here belong, also, the Comparatives in -wv, -ov, -tew, -lov\ but in 
respect to the declension of these it is to be noted, that, after the rejection of 
v, they are contracted in the Ace Sing., and in the Nom., Ace, and Voc PI. 
See the Paradigms, § 79. In the Attic writers, the uncontracted forms in -ova, 
-oyes, -ovas, frequently occur, e. g. ptei^ova, ixdrrova, KaXXiova, ixdrroves, 
KaKioves, ptei^oves, fieXrioves, TrXeiovss, ^rrovas, fieXrtovas, ixdrrovas, X. Cy. 5. 2, 
36. 7. 5, 83. 2. 1, 23. 2. 1, 13. 5. 2, 36. Hell. 6. 5, 52. Cy. 7. 5, 70. On the accen- 
tuation, see § 65, 5. 

V. -7j s-y -e s ; N. o 7) aXrj^i'is, rb aX-q&es, true, 

G. rov rrjs rov aXrj&eos, aXrj&ovs (§ 59). 

On the contraction of -ca into -a (instead of -77), where a vowel precedes, see 
§ 59, Rem. 1. 

Rem. 10. Compounds in -errjs (from eros, Gen. 4rovs), are either of two 
endings, C g. iropeiav X'AieTT?, PI. Rp. 10. 615, a. Trept6Scp rrj x^^tu, Phaed. 249, 
a., or they take a particular Fcm. form, namely, -ens, Gen. -4rt8os, e. g. 

e7TTeT7JS, F. |7TT6T£S J rptaKOVrOVKlhtOV Q-ITOVO'wV, Til. 1, 87. 

Rem. 11. Simple adjectives in -r,s are Oxy tones, except irX-fipris, irXrjpes, 
full. On the accentuation of the Voc. and of the Neuter, see § 65, 5, and on 
the accentuation of the Gen, PI. § 59, Rem. 4. 

VI. -77 v, -e «' ; N. 6 77 appyv, rb appeu 

G. rov ttjs rov appevos (§ 55, 1). No other word like this. 

VII. -up, -op ; N. 6 77 a-rrdrup, rb dirarop, fatherless, 

G. rov rrjs rod airdropos (§ 55, 1). In like manner only 
ap.7}rup, dp.r\rop. 

9# 



102 



PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. 



[$73 



VIII. -is, -i] (a) N. 6 r) iSpis, rb tdpi, knowing, 

G. tov rr}s tov 'iSpios (§ 63, Rem. 5). 



In like manner, only vrjtfris, temperate, and rp6(pis, nourished. In addition to 
the form in -ios, these adjectives have another in -idos, but more rare, and only 
poetic, e. g. XSpfia, 'iSpiSes. 

(b) N. 6 7] evxapis, to evx a Ph agreeable, 
G. tov tt)s tov evxoipiTos. 

Here belong the compounds of x°-P ls i ir&TpiSy eXiris, <pp6vTis, which are 
declined like the simples, e. g. eveh-n-is, eveh-m, Gen. euetartSos ; <pi\6ira,Tpis, Gen. 
<pi\o7ra.Tpi5os ; the Ace. ends according to § 53, 3, in -w, e. g. sfeXiriv, evx a P lv i 
but compounds of tt6als, when they refer to persons, are inflected in the Attic 
dialect in -i5os, e. g. (pi\6Tro\ts, Gen. • -Sos, yet in tb i Ace, <pi\6-n:o\iu and -i5a ; 
still, as epithets of cities, etc., they are inflected like irohis, e. g. KaA\iiro\is, 
8ikcu6ito\is, etc., Gen. /ca\At7rdA.e&>s, etc. 

IX. -us, -u ; (a) N. 6 ^ ti.da.Kpvs., rb &5a/c/>u, tearless, 

So compounds of Sawpu ; yet these inflect only the Ace. Sing, like the third 
Dec, e. g. ti.da.Kpvv, Neut. tidaKpv. The other Cases are supplied by aSdKpvros, 
•oi', Gen. -ov, according to the second Dec. 

(b) N. 6 r) Mtttixvs, Tb 8'nrr)xv, two ells long, 
G. tov ttjs tov Sinr)x^os. 

Here belong the compounds of irrjxvs ', the declension is like jXvkvs, y\vic6 
(§§ 76, II. and 77), except that the Neuter PI. in -ea is contracted into -77, like 
itTTT), e. g. 5nrr)xV' 

X -0 u s, -0 v ; N. 6 7] fiouddovs, Tb fxouoBoy, one-toothed, 

G. TOV TT)S TOV fl0v6d0VT0S. 

So the remaining compounds of odovs. Por the Dec, see § 54 (d). 



§ 79. Paradigms. 



S.N. 


evdo^os 


evdoj-ov 


dlirovs 




Siirovv 


G. 


eV8d£ou 


eV5d|ou 




SIttoSos 




D. 


£p56£a> 


€V8d|w 




StTToSl 




A. 


ivdo^ov 


euSo^ou 


dtiroSa and Siirow 


Siirovv 


V. 


eV8o£e 


tvdol-ov 


diirov 




SlTTOVU 


P.N. 


QVQ~0%01 


evdol-a 


b'liroo'es 




Siiroda 


G. 


eud6^ay 


iv56^uv 




SiirSSuv 




D. 


ivd6^ois 


evSo^ois 




SiTroffi 




A. 


eV5d|ous 


ei/§o£ous 


dlirodas 




SiiroSa 


V. 


ev8ol-oi 


ei/5o£a 


b'tTroo'es 




SiVoSa 


Dual. 


6J/5d|&> 


iu56^co 




SiVoSe 






ivdo^oiv 


ivho^oiv. 




Snr6Soiu- 





§79.] 



PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. 



J 03 



| S.N. 


evir\(o-os)ovs €vttX(o-ov)ovv 


lAews 


i'Aewv 


G. 


evirXov 




i'Aeco 


D. 


€virAq> 




i'Aeo) 


A. 


evirAovv 




lAecoy 


V. 


doubtful 


'iXecos 


t'Aecwy 


P.N. 


e5?TAoz «wrAoa 


i'Aero 


i'Aew 


G. 


evirXccv 




YAeajp 


D. 


svirXois 




iXeqis 


A. 


evrrXovs gvttXoo. 


'/Ae&js 


tAew 


V. 


€§7rAot evirAoa 


tAeoj 


i'Aecu 


Dual. 


djirXca 




i'Aeaj 




evirXoiv. \ 


i'Ae&w. 


S.N. 


evdaifxccv evSaifj.ov 


e'x&iW %x&iov 


fxzifav fJ,e?£ov 


G. 


evSalp.ovos 


e%i8ri ovo s 


fiei^ovos 


d. 


evSaifxovi 


iX&iovi 


uel^ovi 


A. 


evdaifiova, evfiaifiov 


ex&iova-'uo Ix&Joy 


fj.el£ovm juei^co fJ-el^ov 


V. 


zvZaifiov 


eX^t©^ 


fj.ei(Qv 


P.N. 


evdai/j,oves ev'5al[J.ova 


eX&ioves ixSlova 


fxei^oves fj.ei(ova 






iX&ovs £x&' l(a 


fiei^ovs fJ-^C ^ 


G. 


evdaifJiSvwv 


iX&iv'vtov 


fJ.€l£6v(0V 


D. 


evdaiiAOGi(v) 


iX&io<TL(v) 


fizi£o<ri(v) 


A. 


evoaifj.ovas evda(fJ.ova 


ix&ovas ix&iova 


fielfrvas }xei{ova 






iX&iovs e'x^ico 


fxei(ovs fJ.ei.(o> 


V. 


zvda.lfj.Qi/ts eiidaifAOva 


like the Nominative. 


like the Nominative. 


Dual. 


evdalfAOve 


eX&iove 


fjieiCove 




evdaifj6voiv. 


ix^ l ^voiv. 


fj.ei£6voiv. 


S.N. 


aXr}&r}S aATj&e's 


vyi-frs 


vyUs 


G. 


aXT}&(4-os)ovs 




jyi(4-os)ovs 


D. 


a\i)&(4-i)ei 


1 


jyi(4-'i)e? 


A. 


aXriSf ( e'-a ) t) a.Xri&4s 


vyi (« - a) 


a 2 vyUs 


Y. 


aX7]&4s 


i 


jyies 


P.N. 


aXr)fr(4-es)eis aX7]^r(4-a)rj 


uyz(e'-es)ei 


5 vyi(4-a)a 2 


G. 


a\7)&(4-cw)(tip l 




jyi(4-<>iv)a>v 


D. 


aXri&4<ri(v) 




jyi4(n.(v) 


A. 


a.X7)§{4-as)e?s aX7i&(4-a)ri 


wyj(e-as)e' 


s vyi (4- a) a 


V. 


like the Nominative. 


like 1 


he Nominative. 


Dual. 


a\r]&( 6-6)77 




jyi{4-e)rj 




aXrj&(4-oiv)o?v. 




jyi(4-oiv)oiv. 


■ S.N 


evx a P ls ei/'xapt 


cbraTajp 


airarop 


G. 


ey%apiTos 


< 


xiraropos 


D. 


eu%apiTi 




lirdropi 


A. 


eu%ctpiTa and ei>xdpiv evx«pi 


airdropa 


&irarop 


V. 


€VX a P l 


i 


nrarop 


P.N. 


evxdpires ebxdpna 


aTrdropes 


aTraropa 


G. 


evxa-pt-Ttov 


( 


XTraropcov 


D. 


evxapiai 




xirdropai 


A. 


ebxdpiTas evxdpcra 


airdTopas 


airaTopa 


V. 


evxdpires evxdpira 
evxdpire 


airdropts 


aTraropa 


Dual. 


( 


'nrdrope 




evxapir 


oiv 


( 


maropoiv. 


1 but a 


vvr\h4-o>v -■ - (rvvr&av, 6 


S9. Rem. 4. 




2 § 59. Pern. 1. , 



104 ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. f$ S( 

$ 80. III. Adjectives of one Ending. 

Adjectives of one ending have no separate form for the Neu 
ter, partly because then meaning is of such a nature that the} 
generally occur in connection with persons, and partly because 
their formation admits of no separate neuter form. In poetry, 
however, these adjectives sometimes occur in those Cases in 
which the Neut. form is like that of the Masc. and Fern., i. e 
in the Gen. and Dat, even in connection with neuter substan- 
tives, e. g. /xaviacriv Xvcra-qfxacrtv, Eur. Or. 264. iv 7t£vy)tl crco/xart, la 
El. 375. They very seldom take a separate form for the Neut, 
e. g. hr-qkvs, i7rrj\v8a ed-yea, Her. 8, 73 ; a derivative aljective is 
commonly used, where the neuter is to be denoted. 

Endings. 
I. -as, Gen. -ov; 6 /xovias, Gen. /jlouiov, single (Paroxytone). 
II. -as, Gen. -avros: 6 r) aicdfias, Gen. -avros, unwearied (Paroxytone). 

III. -as, Gen. -ados: or) (pvyds, Gen. <pvy ados, fugitive (Oxytone). 

IV. -ap, Gen. -apos : only fidicap, though the Fern, form fidxaipa is sometimes 
found. 

V. -1) s, Gen. -ov: 6 i&e\ovTi]s, Gen. ifreXovrov, voluntary. 

Some of these adjectives take, in connection with Pern, substantives, a sepa- 
rate Pem. form in -is (Gen. -i5os), e. g. ebcoTr-ns, Fem. tvobrr is, fair-looking. They 
are Paroxytones, except 4\re\ovTr)s, kKovrr\s, and vfipio-Tr)s. 

VI. -7)s, Gen. -rjT os: or) apyr)s, Gen. apyr)ros, white. 

So all compounds in -frvi)s, -d/xris, -p\r)s, -ir\r)s, and -K/j.r)s, and some simple 
adjectives, e.g. yvfxvr)s, naked; x £ P v ^ s ' needy; iriv-ns, poor ; irXav^s, wandering, 
etc. 

VII. -r)v, Gen. -rjvos: or) airrfy, Gen. airrrjuos, unfeaihered. In like manner 
no other. 

VIII. -cis, Gen. -uros: or) ayvws, Gen. dyi/wTos, unknown. 

So all compounds in -Ppciis, -yvdos, and -%p6s, and also airrws, firm. 

IX. -is, Gen. -iSos : 6 r) avaXKis, Gen. avd\Ktdos, powerless. 

These adjectives after the omission of a feminine substantive to which they 
belong, arc, like tbose in -ds, -ados, e. g. i) 'EK\ds (sc. 77}), used as substantives, 
B. g. r) iraTpis (sc. yrj), fatherland. 

X. -us, Gen. -vSos: or) ue-qXvs, Gen. verjXvdos, one lately come 
In like manner only a few other compounds. 



$ g) 1 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 105 

XI. -f, Gen. -70s, -kos, -x°s '• ° v-apirdl-, Gen. -a7oy, rapacious. 
6 7) f/At£, " -i/cos, equal. 
6 % /j.£>vv£, " -vxos, one-hoofed. 

XII. -^, Gen. -7ros : o ^ afyiAnp, Gen. -t7ros, ZiiV/A. 

XIII. Such as end in an unchanged substantive, e. g. facus, childless ; fiaKpS' 
X* l pi long-handed; abr6x^ip, done with one's own hand; /jLUKpaiwv, long-lived; 
uaKpavxWi long-necked • KevKao"iris, having a white shield. The declension of such 
adjectives is like that of the substantives, e. g. [xaKpavx^vos. On the compounds 
of irovs, however, comp. § 78, II. (b). 

$ 81. Comparison of Adjectives. 

1. The quality expressed by an adjective may belong to 
an object in different degrees : — 

(a) When the quality belongs to one object in a higher 
degree than to another, the form is called the Comparative, 
e. g. Plato ivas more learned than Xenophon. 

(b) When the quality in the highest degree belongs to an 
object, the form is called the Superlative, e. g. Plato was 
the most learned of the disciples of Socrates, 

(c) The form of the adjective which expresses its simple 
meaning without any comparison, is called the Positive, 
e. g. Plato was learned. 

2. Only the adjective and adverb are susceptible of com- 
parison ; the participle does not admit it, except in a few 
rare cases, where the participle has the meaning of an 
adjective, e. g. ippco/juevos, -earepos, -eararo^. 

3. The Greek has two classes of terminations for the 
Comparative and Superlative. The first, and much the 
most common, is -repo?, -re pa, -repov, for the Compara- 
tive, and -raros, -rdrrj, -rarov, for the Superlative; the 
second is -(it)cdv, -(i)ov, or -cov, -ov, for the Comparative, 
and -(t)o-To?, -(I)o-tt], - (*) crrov, for the Superlative. The 
l is the union-vowel. 

4. The first class of terminations is appended to the stem 
of the adjective by the connecting syllables o (&>), at, t?, e?; 
hence the general rule : In most adj&ctives, the usual end- 
ings are appended to the stem by means of the connecting 
syllable. ■*-••■•■- 



106 ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. f$ 82 

Remark. Instead of the single forms of the Comparative and Superlative, 
the Greek, like the Latin, can prefix /xaXXov (magis) and fidXia-ra (maximej to 
the Positive. This periphrasis is necessary in all adjectives, which, for the sake 
of euphony, have no Comparative form. 

$ 82. A. First Form of Comparison. 

Comparative, -repos, -rip a, -repov; 
Superlative, -raros, -rdrrj, -tcltov. 
These endings are appended to the stem of the adjective ; 
the stem is found by rejecting os in the Nom. of the second 
Dec, and the same syllable in the Gen. of the third Dec. 
I. Adjectives in -os, -rj (-a), -ov. 

(a) Most adjectives of this class annex the above endings to 
the stem by means of the union-vowel o or to ; the union-vowel 
is o, when a syllable long by nature or by position ($ 27, 3), pre- 
cedes, but co, when a short syllable precedes, — w being then 
used to prevent the concurrence of too many short syllables, 
e.g. 

Koiiip-os, light, Com. Kov<p-6-Tepos, Sup. Kov<p-6-Taros, -77, -oy % 

l<rxvp-6s, strong, " Icrxvp-o-rspos, " l(rxvp-6-raTos, 

Xeirr-os, thin, " XGirT-6-repos, " Xeirr-o-raTos, 

<r(podp-6s, vehement, " <r<podp-6-Tepos, " <r<podp-6-Ta.Tos, 

irinp-os, bitter, " TriKp-6-repos, " TriKp-6-raros, 

<ro<p-6s, wise, " co<p-di)-repos, " <J0<p-(I)-'raT0S, 

exvp-6s, firm, " ixvp-d>-Tepos, " e%vp-w-TaTOS, 

&£i-os, worthy, " aj-i-w-repos, " agi-w-raros. 

Remark 1 . A mute and liquid here always make a syllable long by posi- 
tion, though the Attic poets, on account of the verse, sometimes consider such 
syllable as short, e. g. eureK^Ta-ros from evreKvos, Eur. Hec. 579. 618. (Pors.), 
dvsiroTfxctiTepa, Id. Ph. 1367. 

(b) Contracts in -eos = -ovs and -00s — -ov<s are contracted also 
it the forms of Comparison ; the first contract c and cu the union- 
vowel into w ; the last assume the union-syllable e? and contract 
in with the preceding o, e. g. 

iropcpvp-eos — iropcpvp-ovs airX-6os — clttX-ovs 

rrop<pvp-e(t>Tepos = irop<pvp-u>-Tepos airXo-eff-repos = anX-ovs-repos 

iropfpvp-ewTaTos = Tropcpvp-ca-raros airXo-ecr-Taros = anX-ova-raros. 

Here belong also contracts of two endings in -ovs and -ow, e. g. etiv-oos =» 
ttfv-ovs, Neut. zvv-oov = etfv-ow, Com. evvo-eff-rcpos = ew-ovs-repos, Sup. cwk©» 
4ar-raros =» fvv-ova-raros. 



$82.] ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 107 

Rem. 2. Adjectives in -oos take also the uncontracted forms of the Compara- 
tive and Superlative in -oarepos, -odiraros, e. g. evirvocoTepoi, X. R. Equ. 1, 10. 
evxpodrepos, X. 0. 10, 11. 

(c) The following adjectives in -a to s: yepcuos, old; n a A. a i- 
09, ancient; irepalos, on the other side; vy^oXalo^ at leisure, 
assume -repos and -raros without a union-vowel, e. g. 

yepai-6s, Com. p/epat-repos, Sup. yepai-raros, 

naXat-os, " iraXai-repos, " 7raAcu-TaTos. 

Rem. 3. riaAaios and o"xoAatos have also the usual forms of Compari- 
son; iraXadrepos, axoXa^repos, so also yepai6izpos, Alitiph. 4, p. 125, 6. 

(d) The following adjectives in -09: cvSlos, calm; rjo-vxos, 
qzciet; 1810 s, peculiar ; 'Laos, equal; /x zeros, middle; opSpios, 
early; oij/ios, late; tt a p air \-qer cos, similar; and Trpwios, in the 
morning, assume the union-syllable <u, the Comparative and 
Superlative thus becoming like the preceding words in -aios, 
e.g. 

jWeV-os, Com. jxea-ai-Ttpos, Sup. fiscr-al-raros. 

XBi-os, " Idi-ai-Tepos, " ldi-al-7a,Tos. 

Rem. 4. Sometimes also the common form is found, e. g. riavx^repos, 
7)<rvx<f>TaTos ; (piXwrepos, <pi\wraTos are the usual forms in the Attic writers. 
Here belong also the adverbial forms irpaiaiTepov, irpwiatreTa, from irp&ios ; thus 
in Plato ; likewise irpoSfoepov and Trpm-rara ; thus always, as it seems, in Thu. 
(Popp. ad 7, 19, 1), also in Xen. Anab. 3. 4, 1. irpco'hepov according to the best 
MSS. (on the contrary irpcoiairaTa, Cy. 8. 8, 9). The adjective <plXos has 
three forms: cpiXccrepos seldom (e. g. Xen. C. 3. 11, 18.), and <piX(*>TaTos. 
<piXa'n<spos seldom in prose (e. g. Xen. An. 1. 9, 29, though one good Ms. has 
<ptX(x>Tepov), and <piXairaros seldom in prose (e.g. Xen. H. 7.3,8.), (piXTepos 
poetic, and (ptXraTos very frequent ; the Comparative is usually expressed by 
fiaXXov (jnXos. In addition to these three forms, also the Superlative <pixio~To< 
(as in Homer, the Comparative <piXi<av) is found in Attic poetry. 

Rem. 5. The two adjectives, fieaos, middle, and vios, young, have a special 
Superlative form, fi4(raros, vearos; but this is in use only when a series 
of objects is to be made prominent, /j.4<to.tos denoting the very middle of the 
series, and viaros the last or most remote, whereas fxe<rairaTos expresses the 
idea of the middle in general, and pecoraros retains the primary signification 
of the adjective, young, new. In prose, vearos is used only in reference to the 
tones of music (veaTos cpboyyos) ; and then the Feminine is contracted, v-iyr-n, 
the lowest line or string. 

(e) Two adjectives in -05: Zppupbevos, strong, and a/cparos, 
unmixed, append the union-syllable c<? to the stem, e g. ipptaficv- 



103 ADJECTIVES. — FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. [§82. 

ecr-Tepos, eppco/Aev-ecr-Taros, a/cpar- ecr-Tepos, d/cpar-e'cr-Taro?. So also 
aiSotos has atSot-e'cr-raros in the superlative. 

Rem. 6. Further, the adjectives, 'd<p&oi/os, rich; <nrov5a?os, zealous; and 
&(Tfxeios, glad, sometimes take the above form, as acpfroyecrrepos, -eararos, 
together with the common form, -cbrtpos, -uraros. From ao-pLtvos is formed 
aa p.ey xt epos, and the adverbial neuter, aa/xeyairaTa and dcr/iev-ecr-TOTa. — Several 
other adjectives also have this formation, yet for the most part only in poetry, 
e.g. cvfepos, unmixed (of wine) ; tjSuijlos, sweet; iTriireh'os, flat (iiwred4o~Tepos, 
X. H. 7. 4, 13), and all contracts in -ovs; comp. (b). The forms in -earepos, 
-eo-Taros, belong properly to adjectives in -rjs and -coy. 

(f) The following adjectives in -09: XdXos, talkative; fiovo- 
</>a-yos, eating alone ; 6 ij/o<j> ay os, dainty ; and it r o> x 6 s, poor, 
drop os, and append the syllable is, e. g. AaA-os, Com. AaA-i'cr- 
repos, Sup. AaA-icr-raros ; tttcu^o? has also Sup. Trrco^oraTos. 

Rem. 7. These endings properly belong to adjectives in -rjs, Gen. -ov. 

II. Adjectives in -77?, Gen. -ov, and if/evSr^, -es. Gen. -e'os, drop 
-17s, and append the syllable -is, e.g. KAeVr-T/s (Gen. -ou), thievish, 
Com. K/\e7rr-to--Tepo?, Sup. KAe7rr-tcr-TaTos ; ij/evS-Lcr-Tepos, ij/evS-to-- 
raros. 

Exceptions. 'TfipiaTTjs, -ov, insolent, has vfipio-TSTepos, X. An. 5. 8, 3, vfipio-To- 
raros, X. An. 5. 8, 22. C. 1. 2, 12. From aKpar^s (Gen. -eos) is the Com. ctKpa- 
TLcrTepos, to distinguish it from atcpaTeo-TaTos, No. (e). 

III. Adjectives of the third Declension. The Comparison- 
endings are appended to the stem of the adjectives, either 
directly or by inserting the syllable -es (also -is). 

(1) Those in -vs, -eta, -v, 77s, -es (Gen. -eos = -oi;s), a?, 

-av, and the word //.a /cap, happy, append the endings of Com- 
parison directly to the pure stem, which appears in the Neuter 



form, e. g. 






yXvKvs, 


Neut. -v — yXvKv-repos 


yXvKv-raros 


c\X.r]^-)]S, 


Neut. -4s — aA.7j^eV-Te/3oy 


a\7i&eo~-Ta.Tos 


/j.e\as, 


Neut. -ay — /xsXdy-repos 


/xeXdy-Taros 


rd\as, 


Neut. -av — ra\dy-repos 


raXdv-raros 


fxaKap, 


— fxanap-Tepos 


jACUtdp-TaTOS. 



Rem. 8. The adjectives r)8vs, raxvs, and ttoXvs are compared in -lap and 
•w. See § 83, I. 

(2) Adjectives in -o>v, -ov (Gen. -ovos), assume -es, e. g. 

ehZdixoiv, Neut. evdai^oy, happy. 

Com. evScu/JLOV-ea-Tepos, Sip. €vSaifwv-4<r-raTOS. 



$ 83.] ADJECTIVES. SECOND. FORM OF COMPARISON. 109 

(3) Adjectives in -£ sometimes assume -es, sometimes -is, 
e.g. 

d<^7}Ai|, Gen. a<pri\iK-os, growing old, aprca^, Gen. apiray-os, rapax, 

Com. acp7)AiK-e(r-Tepos, Com. apiray-ia-Ttpos, 

Sup. &<pr]\iK-e(r-TaTOSj Sup. apiray-iJ-TctTos. 

(4) Adjectives in -as, -ev, whose stem ends in vt, append the 
Comparison-endings directly to the stem, the last r being 
changed into o-, and the preceding v being then dropped ('$ 20, 2). 

XctpieiSy -lev, Gen. x a P L€VT ~ 0S '» J^easaiit. 

Com. xapkcr-Tejoos-, Sup. x a p'^ c ' TaT0 ^- 

(5) The compounds of x^pis assume w, e. g. 

iirixapis, Gen. iirixapir-os, pleasant. 

Com. iirtxapiT-u>-T€pos, Sup. dirixapir u-iaros. 

'Axup^re^s in Homer, comes from axapir-rtpos ; eomp. No. '4). 

$ 83. B. Second Form of Comparison . 

Comparative. -iW, Neut. -lov, or -a>v, Neut. -o»/. 
Superlative, -to-ros, -io-t^, -to-rov. 

Remark 1. On the quantity of t in -lav, -iov, see § 28, 1 ; on the declension, 
S 78, Rem. 9 ; and on the accent, § 65, 5 (a). 

This form of Comparison includes, 

I. Some adjectives in -vs, which drop -v<s and append -iW, 
eic. ; tins usually applies only to fjSvs, sweet, and Ta^u'?, sivlft 
(the other form of these adjectives in -vrepos, -vraros, is some- 
times used, but not by Attic writers). Ta^vs has in the 
Comparative #ao-ow (Att. &mw), Neut. Saaarov (Sclttov). 
Comp. $$ 21, 3, and 17, 6. Ta^tW is found only among the 
later writers. Thus, 

fjd-vs, Com. r/S-icoi/, Neut. tfS-iotr, Sup. ^5-kttos, -17, -ov. 

rnx-vs, " frdaro-wv, Att. &iittwv, Neut. Sracaov, Att. Sclttov, Sup. tcCx'O"™* 

Pi^m. 2. The other adjectives in -us, as fia&vs, deep; fiapvs, heavy ; (Zpa- 
ovs, slow; Ppaxvs, short; y\vicvs, sweet; 8a<rvs, thick; evpvs, wide; o£vs, 
sharp; irpeo-ffv s, old; wkvs, swift, have the form in -vrepos, -iraros (§ 82, 
III.) ; in Attic poetry, however, single examples of these adjectives are found 
with the other form, e. g. /3pax">"ros, irp4<T0i(TTos, &ki<ttos. 

II. The following adjectives in -p os : aio-^pos, base; e^pos, 
hostile; kvSpos, "honorable ; '"and oUrp 6s, wretched (but always 

10 



110 ADJECTIVES ANOMALOUS FORMS DF COMPARISON. [$ 84 

oLKTpoTepos in the Comparative), — -the ending -pos here alsc 
being dropped, e. g. aurxpos, Com. aio"x-iW, Neut. ala-x-lov, Sup. 
aur^-ioTOS. 

Rem. 3. O'l'kthttos, Kvdiwi/, KvdiffTos, are poetic. Besides this form, in -lap, 
etc., -which is preferred by the Attic writers, the above adjectives have also, 
though seldom, the other form in -orepos, -6to,tos, e. g. ^x^piraTos ; but always, 
hi prose, oltcrpSraTos 



$ 84. Anomalous Forms of Comparison. 



Positive. 
1 aya&Ss, good, 



2. kok6s, bad, 



3. kcLXos, beautiful 

4. aXyeivos, painful, aXyeivoTepos 

aXylew 



Compai-ative. 
a/JLelvwVj Neut. u,U€iyov 
fieXTico]/ 

(jSeArepos, Poet.) 
Kpeicrauy, Att. KpeiTToov 
Xu>oiv 

((peprepos, Poet.) 
KcuclwP 
X^ipwv 

7Jff<rcov, Att. tJttow 
KaXXiwv 



5. fia,Kp6s, long, 

6. p.iKp6s, small, 

7. 6xiyos,few, 

8. fxiyas, great, 

9. iroXvs, much, 

10. paSios, easy, 

11. ireircov, ripe, 

12. TTLOWffat, 



fxaKporepos 

(fxdo-crcov, Poet.) 

(xiKporepos 

iXaacruv, Att. i\a.TTu>v 

fieiwv 

TrXelwv, or 7rAeW 
pawv 

ireTrairepos 
Triorepos 



Superlative. 

&OICTTOS 
04\TL(TTOS 

(ySeATaTos, Poet.) 

KpaTHTTOS 
XwO~TOS 

{(pipraros, <pepi<T"i*s, Poet.) 

KOLKlffTOS 
XilpKTTOS 
Adv. 7}Kl(TTa 
KaXXlffTOS 

aXyeivoTcnos 

&\yi(TTOS 

/J-aKpOTdTOS 

fJ.7jKl(TT0S 

IXlKpOTUTOS 

i\a.Xl(TTOS 

oXlyiCTOs 
piyiaros 
irXelffTOS 

pa<TTOS 

TceTra.iTa.Tcs 
tti6to.tos. 



Remark 1. The Superlative a\pi<TTos (from* 'Aprjs, the god of war), and the 
Comp. a/xeivcav, have particularly the idea of bravery, boldness ; fieXTlwv, like tho 
Latin melior, signifies better, in a moral sense, though by no means confined to 
that ; Xywv is mostly used in such phrases as Xw6v i<rrt, it is better, and X$<ttos 
mostly in the Voc. S> Aycrre. The poetic Superlative <p4pi<rTos is found in 
Plato, in the exclamation 2> <p4pi<TTe\ most worthy ! The irregular forms of 
fiiKp6s, viz. ixdacruv, ixdxicrTos, express both the idea of smallness and fewness 
(bxiyos); but /xdav generally expresses the idea of fewness, seldom that of 
smallness; the regular forms of fUKpos, viz. jxiKp6Tepos, -o'totoj, always retain 
their original idea of smallness*, and also bxiyiaTos that of fewness, though bxiyos 
often signifies small. 



$84.] ADJECTIVES. ANOMALOtS FORMS OF COMPARISON. 11' 

Rem. 2. The use of the longer and shorter form of the Comparative irXeiau, 
n-AeW, should he particularly noted. The neuter irx4ov is more frequent than 
irXeTov, especially when it is used adverbially ; irXdovos and irxdovos, irhiovi 
and irXelovi, Ace. 7rAea>, irXeova, and 7rAei'w, are used indiscriminately ; PI. Nom. 
and Ace, usually irXelovs, also TrXeioves and TrXelovas (but not TrXeovs) ; TrXdco 
is much more frequent than irkiw ; irXeiovwu and 7r\eiWt are more frequent than 
irXeovw and irXioai. Finally, the shortened form of the Neut. Sing. irXeiv 
(formed from irXsiov), but limited to such phrases as ttXzlv •>) /xvpioi, should be 
mentioned as a special Atticism. 

Several adjectives, which express the idea of an order or 
series, have only the Comparative and Superlative forms, 
because, on account of their signification, Jiey cannot be used 
absolutely, but only in comparison. An adverb of place is 
usually the root of these forms of Comparison, e. g. 

v from Trp6). -n-porepos (prior), Trpwros (primus ), first. 

( " &ua>), avdorepos (superior), aucararos (supremus). 

( " vvep), inreprepos (superior), higher, xmipraros, Poet, viraros (supremus). 

( " virol), varepos (posterior), later, v<rraTos (postremus), last. 

( " e|), z<Tx aT0S (extremus), outermost. 

( " TrXr)ffiov, prope), (ttXijo-ios, Homeric), TrXr]<rialrepos, or trXr]ai4<rTepos 

(proprior), nearer, irXr}<nairaTos., -iffraros (proximus), nearest. 
( " irp6aca), far, irpoo-urepos, farther, irpocrwraTos, farthest. 

Rem. 3. Other adjectives in the Comparative and Superlative, which are 
also derived from adverbs, have no Positive form of the adjective, e. g. iipefxa, 
quietly, ripe/xea-Tepos, ripefxeo-Taros ; 7rpovpyov, useful, Trpovpyiairepos, more useful, 
irpovpyiairaTos. 

Rem. 4. Comparatives and Superlatives are also formed from substantives. 
Here two cases are to be distinguished : (a) when the substantive, both in form 
and signification, is the Positive from which the Comparative and Superlative 
may be formed, i. e. when the substantive can be considered as an adjective, 
e. g. SovXos, slave, dovXSrepos, more slavish; — (b) when the substantive, in 
respect to the signification, is not really the Positive, but only in respect to the 
form can be considered as the basis of the Comparative and Superlative, the 
proper Positive form having been lost, (comp. KparurTos from the Epic nparis, 
ik4yx iffT0S from the Epic iXeyx^s.) Numerous examples of the last kind may 
be found in poetry, particularly in Epic. See § 216, Rem. 2. 

Rem. .5. Eor the sake of greater emphasis, the Comparative and Superla- 
tive are sometimes compared, e. g. io-x a - TOS (Superl.), io-xarwrcpos, ecrxarcoTo- 
Toy ; so TTpcoTio-Tos from irpwros. This is frequent in the Comic writers, seldom 
in Homer and the Tragedians, still more seldom in prose. 



112 



COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 



f$85. 



§ 85. Comparison of Adverbs . 

1. Adverbs derived from adjectives, when compared, have 
commonly no independent adverbial ending ; the Comparative 
is expressed by the Ace. Sing, menter of the Comparative 
adjective, and the Superlative by the Ace. PI. neuter of the 
Superlative, e. g. 



aoepcos 

Xo.pi4vro>s 
evdaifiovccs 

Toxews 



from co<p6s) 
" ffacprjs) 

" evdatfiwv) 
" al&xpos) 

" rax^s) 



Com. ao&direpov 
(ra<p4(TT epov 
XapizcTTepou 
evdai/xovearepov 
(uffx^ov 
rfiiov 
Stacaov, -ttov 



Sup. crotyuTara. 
<ra<p£<na.Ta 
Xapieffrara 
evSaipoiteo-TdTa 
ctf<rxio"TCL 
rfiiffTa 
TaxKTra. 



Remark I. The Singular of the Comparative is used, because only two 
objects are compared, and it is affirmed that one of these is better, etc. than 
the other ; but the Plural of the Superlative, because the object compared is 
the best, etc. of many others. 

■ Rem. 2. But sometimes these adverbs also retain in the Comparative the 
adverbial ending of the Positive -a>s, e. g. xaAe7ra>Tepa>s, aXrifrearrepcos, /xox^vpo- 
repas, KaKXiouas, especially /j.ettfvccs, etc. The Neuter Singular is seldom used 
in the Superlative, and belongs mostly to poetry. 

2. All original adverbs in -o>, e. g. aVoo, Karoo, e£a>, ccroo, etc., 
retain the ending -m regularly in the Comparative, and almost 
uniformly in the Superlative, e. g. 



a\va>, above, 
Ka.ru, below. 



Com. avwr4pca 
KaTUTepca 



Sup. avuraTco 
Ka.TOiTa.ra>. 



Ill like manner, most other original adverbs have the ending 
►w in the Comparative and Superlative, e. g. 



ayx ov > near, 
nepa, ultra, 
rrjXov, far, 
eKas,far, 
lyyvs, near, 



Com. ayxorepco 
irepairepo> 
Tt]\orip(a 
eKaarepo) 
iyyvr ipta 
iyyirepov 



Sup. ay xoTa.ro> 

Sup. wanting 

T7]K0TO.T0> 

kKa.aTa.ra> 
iyyvrdro) and 
iyyvrara 
fyyip-ra (rarely). 



9* 86, 87.] 



THE PRONOUNS eyw, (TV, OV, 



113 



CHAPTER III. 



The Pronoun 



$ 86. Nature and Division of Pronouns. 

1. Pronouns do not, like substantives, express the idea 
of an object, but only the relation of an object to the 
speaker ; i. e. they show whether the object is the speaker 
himself (the first person), or the person or thing addressed 
(the second person), or the person or thing spoken of (the 
third person), e. g. I (the teacher) give to thee (the scholar) 
it (the book). 

2. All pronouns are divided into five principal classes : 
(1) Personal, (2) Demonstrative, (3) Relative, (4) Interrog- 
ative, (5) Indefinite Pronouns. Pronouns are again di- 
vided, according to their signification and form, into (a) 
Substantive, (b) Adjective, and (c) Adverbial Pronouns, 
e. g. e'70) ravra iiroLTjaa] (a) J, thou, he, she, it; (b) my, thy, 
his; (c) here, there, thus. 



I. Personal Pronouns. 

A. Substantive Personal Pronouns. 

§ 87. The simple iyw, ego, o-v, tu, ov, sui, 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Pat. 
Ace. 

N.A. 
G.D. 



4y&, 1 

jiov (fiov), ipod, of me 
/J.OL 1/j.oi), ifu.oi, to me 
fj.4 (/*€), ifx4, me 



Singular. 
(Tv, thou 

crov (crov), of thee 
vol (croi), to thee 
<x4 (ere), thee 

Dual. 



wanting 

ov {o\>), of himself etc. 
of (0:), to himself etc. 
e (e), himself, etc. 



o-<pu>4, Ace. (Poet.), them both 
acpoS'iv (aipcc'Cu), of them both, 
to you both to them both 

Plural. 

v/xels, ye (v) I ccpe7s, Neut. <rcp4a (Poet.), (c^ea) 

vjxwv, of you (v) acpoov, of them [they 

vixiv, to you (u) C(pi(Ti{v) [a<pi<ri\y\), to them 

v/jlus, you (v) I ccpas, Neut. <r<p4a (crcpea), them. 



vd, we both, us both | o~(pw, you both 
vo3v, of us both, to Us o-<prZv, of you both 
both 



riixsis, we 

7}fxS>V, of its 
'i]/jL?I/, to us 
il/uas, us 



134 the reflexive pronouns ifxavTov, creavrov, tavrov. [$ 88 

Remark 1. The forms susceptible of inclination are put in a parenthesis, 
without any mark of accent. Comp. §§ 33 (b), and 35, 3. On the accentuation 
and use of the third Pers. of the Pronoun, see § 302, Rem. 3. The Vocative 
is here, as in the following paradigms, omitted, because, when it occurs, it is 
always like the Nominative. 

Rem. 2. The Gen. Sing, of these three pronouns, in imitation of Homer, 
often has, among the Attic poets, also the forms ifiefrev, ceSrev, e&ei/: these 
forms always retain their accent, except when e&ev is not used as a reflexive 
(sui), but as a pronoun of the third person (ejus). Comp. § 35, 3 (b). 

Rem. 3. The Ace. Sing, and PL of ov ha^ in Attic poetry also the form 
viv (viv) signifying him, her, it, PI. them, e. g. Soph. OR. 868. 1331, instead of 
avrovs and auras. See the Dialects, § 217. 

Rem. 4. The oblique Cases of ri/j.e?s and vpeTs, when not emphatic, some- 
times undergo a certain inclination among the poets, being written in the fol- 
lowing manner : %fx<av ijxwv, "}fxiv vfj.Ii/, or iijjuv vfxiv ; still, this inclination 
cannot take place if a Paroxytone precedes. The shorter form of the pronoun 
of the third Pers. is used in the Dat. and Ace. PI. by the poets (also by the 
Attic writers), e. g. Dat. acpi (or o~(plv) instead of G(piai(v)> to them, Ace. <r(j>i 
instead of crtyas, them. Both forms, a<pi and o~<piv, though seldom, are used by 
the poets as the Dat. Sing. ; the form a<pe, on the contrary, is used much more 
frequently as the Ace. Sing, instead of avrov, -r,v, -6, also as reflexive instead 
of kavr6v. 



$ 88. (b) The Reflexive Pronouns, ifxavrov, creavrov, 

kavrov . 



Singular. 


G. 
D. 


ifjuavrov, -r)s, of 

myself 
kfiavrw, -fj, to 


creavrov, -r)s, or 
cavrov, -f/s, of thyself 
creavru), fj, or 


kavrov, -r)s, or 

avrov, -r)s, of himself, of herself 

kavrS, -fj, or [itself 


A. 


€fiavr6v, -7}v, 
myself 


o~eavr6v, -r)v, or 
cavr6v, -t)v, thyself 


kavrov, -r)v, -6, or [itself 
avrov, -r)v, -6, himself, herself, 


Plural. 


G. 
D. 


7ip.au avrfav, of 

ourselves 
7]/juv avrols, -ais, 

to ourselves 


vfj.au avruv, of your- 
selves 

vfjuv avrois, -ais, to 
yourselves 


kavrcov or avrwv, or 1 
cr(puv avrwv, of themselves 
kavrols -ais, or avrols -ais, or 
crcpio'iv avrols -ais, to themselves 


A. 


rjfias avrovs, -as, 
ourselves 


v/xas avrovs, -as, 
yourselves 


kavrovs, -as, -a, or avrovs, -as, | 

-a, or 
acpas avrovs, -as, o~<pea avrd, 1 

themselves. 



($89-91.] RECIPROCAL AND DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 1J5 

§ 89. (c) Reciprocal Pronouns. 

To express reciprocal relation, the Greek 1ms a special pro* 
nominal form, which is made by the coalescence of aAAoi aAAwv, 
olXXol aAAois, oXXol aWovs, into one word. From the nature of 
the relation, this word can have no Singular. 



Plural Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



dWr'ikcov, of one another 
aAAr/Aois, -ais, -ois 
&AA17A0US, -as, -a 



Dual a.XXr)\oiv, -cuv, -oiv i 
dAA7}AotJ/, -<xiv, -oiv I 

\XKi\Kco, -d, -co. 



§ 90. B. Adjective Personal Pronouns. 

Personal pronouns, having the form of adjectives, are called 
Possessive pronouns, since they express possession. They are 
formed from the Genitive of substantive personal pronouns : — 

ifj.6s, -7], -6v, metis, -a, -um, from i/xov; r)(ji.€Tepos, -Tepct, -Tepov, noster, -tra, -trmn, 

from tj/xSjv ; 
o~6s, -i), -6v, tints, -a, -um, from crov : ifxeTepos, -repd, -Tepov, vester, -tra, -trum, 

from v/xoov ; 
a<f>4Tepos, -Tepa, -Tepov, suus, -a, -inn, from trcpav (used in speaking of many ; 

when single persons or things are spoken of, Att. prose always uses the 

Gen. tavTov, -rjs). The Epic form, os, t\, ov, suus, -a, -am, also occurs in 

the Tragedians, though seldom. 



91. II. Demonstrative Pronouns. 











Singular. 








Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


the 



TOV 
TCp 

t6v 


7] t6 
TT/S TOV 
TJ) TCp 

tt\v TO 


hie 

OVTOS 
TOVTOV 
TOVTCO 
TOVTOV 


haec 

aVTT] 

Tainrjs 

TaVTt] 
TCtVTTJV 


hoc 

TOVTO 
TOVTOV 
TOVTCO 
TOVTO 


ipse 

ovt6s 

avTov 

WTcp 

avTd'v 


ipsa 
avTi) 
avTr)s 

OUTJ7 
a.VTT]V 


ipsum 

o.vt6 

avTov 

avTco 

cvt6 










Plural. 








Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


01 
TCOV 


al to\ 

TCOV TCOV 


OUTOl 
TOVTCOV 


ciutcu 

TOVTCOV 


TdVTa 
TOVTCOV 


avTol 
avTcov 


ainai 
avTcov 


aiiTcL 
avTcov 


TOVS TO.S TO. 


TOVTOVS 


TavTas 


TCtVTa 


avTovs 


avTcis 


avTti 


1 








Dual 










N. A. 
1 G. D. 


T(t) 
TOIV 


[to.) tw 

TCUV Totv 


TOVTCO 
TOVTOLV 


(touto,) 

TOVTaiV 


TOVTCO 
TOVTOLV 


avTco 
avTolv 


avTct 
avTcxiv 


avTco 
avToiv. 



1. The pronoun outos is composed of the article 6, r), to, and the pronoun 
wtos] where the article has o, co, or oi, they combine with the first syllable 
of auT(fc and make ov ; all other vowels of the article are absorbed by the 



](V 



RELATIVE PUONOTJN. 



ff-92 



first syllable of abros. Hence the first syllable of olros ends in ov where the 
article has o, «, or 01 : elsewhere in ov. The same rule holds when avros is 
compounded with an adjective pronoun, c. g. too-outos (from roaos and avr6s). 

Examples : 6 avros == ouros, rj avrr, = avrr], rb avro = rovro : rod avrov = 
rovrov, r?is avri]s == ravT7]5, etc.: SO tocos avros = rocrovros, i narj avri) = to<T- 
avrr\, roaov avro = roaovro, roaov avrov = rocrovrov, etc. 

2. Like 6, r), ro is declined, 6'5e, 7?5e, ro8e, rovSe, rr)soe, PI. ot$e, a'iSe, rdde ; 
Like ovros are declined, rocrovros, roaavrt], rocrovro{v), tantus, -a, -am, roioi- 
ros, roiavrr], roiovro(v), talis, -e, rrjXiKovros, rrjXiKavrr], rt]XiKovro{v), sogreat, 
so old ; it is to be noted, that the neuter Sing., besides the form in o has 
also the common form in ov ; 
Like avros is declined, eVcetj/os, ene'ivr}, iitelvo, he, she, it, aAAos, 6.\Ar t> oAAo, 
alius, alia, aliud, the neuter Sing, here also ending in o. 

Remark 1. The neuter form in o seems to have rejected a S, as may be 
inferred from the Latin, is, ea, id, ille, -a, -ud, alius, -a, -ud. — On the Dual 
forms, rd, raw, ravrd, ravraiv, see § 241, Rem. 10 (b). — Instead of IksIvos, the 
Ionic Ktivos is also used in Attic poetry ; this word occurs somewhat frequently, 
in Attic prose, but always after a long vowel or diphthong ; nence Aphaeresis 
(§ 14, 5) must be assumed here, as r) \dvces, PI. Rp. 2. 370, a. 





Singular. 


Plural. 




Xom. 


1 roaovros roaavrrj roo~ovro{v) 


TOffovroi roaavrai 


roaavra 


Gen. 


\ roaovrov roaavrrjs roaovrov 


roaovroiv roaovruv 


roaovroiv 


Dat. 


1 roaovrco roaavrr) roaovrco 


roaovrois roaavrais 


roaovrois 


Ace 


! roaovrov roaavry\v roaovro(v) 


roaovrovs roaavras 


roaavra 




Dual. 






1ST. A. 1 roaovra roaavra roaovrco 






G. D. | roaovroiv roaavraiv roaovroiv. 


\ 



Rem. 2. The article usually coalesces by Crasis (§ 10) with avr6s and forms 
one word, viz. avros (instead of 6 avros, idem), air i), tout 6, usually r av- 
rov (instead of to avro), r avrov, but rr)s avrrjs, r aired, ravrrj (to distinguish 
it from rairr;, this), but rbv avrov, r)]v avrr)v, airoi, airat, ravrd (instead of 
to outcc, to distinguish it from to~to, haec), but rcov avrwv, rois avro7s, etc. 



§92. III. Relative Pronoun. 







Singular. 






Plural. 






Dual. 






Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 


OS 
OV 


V 

VJ 

V 



OV 

& 


o'i 
£>v 
oTs 


a" 
wv 

aTs 


a 

wv 

cits 


olv 
oTv 


a 

aXv 

CUV 

» 


5 

otv 

oTv 




1 




r t v 












1 



§93.1 



INDEFINITE AND INTERR0GA1IVE PRONOUNS 



117 



§ 93. IV. Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns. 

The Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns are denoted 
by the same form, but are distinguished by the accent and 
position, the Indefinite being enclitic 33) and placed after 
some word or words, the Interrogative being always accented 
and placed before. 

"Remark 1. "When the interrogative pronouns stand in an indirect question, 
the relative o is placed before their stem, which, however (except in the case 
of osns), is not inflected, e. g. oirdios, oTr6o~os i oir6repos, etc. 



I Sing. N. 


rls, some one N. rl, some thing 


rls ; quis 1 ri ; quid ? 


G. 


nvos, or rov 




rivos, or rod 


I). 


rivi, or TCO 




rivi-, or toj 


A 


nvd N. rl 


riva rl 


P'u-. X. 


rives N. nvd and arra 


rives riva 


1 G. 


nvuiv 




rivcov 


f 13 


riai(v) 




ricri(v) 


A. 


nvds N. nvd and tirra 


rivas riva 


Dual N. A. 


rive 




rive 


[ 't nnd )). 


rivoiv 




rivoiv. 


-\ . 


osns, whoever ^ns o ri 


o'lnves drives anva, or arret 




OuTlVOS, 01' OTOV 7]STIV0S 


wvnvoov (rarely oroov) 


1 *>• 

i A> 


Sr iv i, or or ca ynvi 

OVTIVa TjVTlVa Tl 


6isri<ri(v) (rarely oroiai[v\ ) ahno-i(v) oTsnai(v)] 
ovsrivas asrivas anva, or arret 


i 


Dual N. A. &nve, 


'inve, G. D. oTvnvoiv, aTvrivoiv. 



Rem. 2. The form arra not enclitic (Ion. tXaaa) is often used instead of nvd 
in connection with adjectives, e. g. Seiva 'arra, /xiKpa 'arra, or placed first, e. g. 
fy yap $7) arra roidBe, PI. Phaedon. 60, e. On the accent of uvnvwv, ohnvoiv, 
ahnvoiv, see § 34, Rem. 1. The shorter forms, orov, orw, etc. are used by the 
dramatists almost always ; orov, ortp are also used by the orators ; but orwv, 
Stoo-i(v) are very rare in prose. The negative compounds of rls, viz. ovns, 
ovn, fifiris, fi-fjn, no one, nothing, inflect the simple rls merely, e. g. ovrivos, 
ovnves, elc. These forms are poetic ; instead of them, prose writers use ovdeis, 
Wdeis ; only ovn and fi^ri are used in prose with the adverbial meaning, in no 
respect, not at all, and in the phrase, ovn ye 8-n (fi-fin ye H), let alone then, much 
less. 



Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 



6 7} to 8e?va, some one, some thing 
rov rrjs rov Se?vos 
rcS rrj rat deivi 
rbv rrjv to Selva 



Plur. ol Se?ves 

rSiv Seivwv 
wanting 
robs delvas. 



Rem. 3. Ae?va is also used indeclinably, though seldom, e. g. rod r$ raw 
%eiva~ 



118 



CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



[$94 



§ 94. Correlative Pronouns. 

Under Correlative Pronouns are included all those which 
express a mutual relation (correlation) to each other, so that if 
one implies a question, the other with a corresponding form 
contains the answer. 

1. This mutual relation is either a general or a definite one. The general 
correlation is expressed by ris ,- ji ; who ? what ? ris, t2, some one, some thing ; 
'65s, oZros, he, this; itceTvos, that one; ovSels, no one; os, who, ivhich, etc. Here 
the forms of the correlatives do not correspond with each other, except in the 
case of ris. For example, if a question is asked t^ ris, the answer may be by 
t\s, o'5e, ovros, etc. 

2. The definite correlation has four different foi-rcs, viz. the Interrogative, 
Indefinite, Demonstrative, and Eelative. This fourfold correlation belongs both 
to adjective and adverbial pronouns. All the four forms come from the same 
root, but they are distinguished, partly by a different accent, partly by a differ- 
ent initial : the Interrogative begin with it, the Indefinite have the same form, 
though with a different accent, the Demonstrative begin with r, and the 
Relative with the Spiritus Asper. The indirect interrogatives, as shown above, 
§ 93, Rem. 1, place the relative 6 before the initial ir. 

3. Correlative adjective pronouns express relations of quantity and quality; 
correlative adverbial pronouns, the relations of place, time, and manner, or 
condition. 



(a) Adjective Correlatives. 



Interrogative. 


Indefinite. 


Demonstrative. 


Relat. and De- 
pend. Interrog. 


ttoctos, -77, -ov ; 
how great 1 ? how 
much ? quan- 
tus? 


tto(t6s, -77, -6v, 
of a certain 
size, or number, 
aliquantus 


T0V09, -77, -ov, so great, so 

much, tantus 
roo~6o~Be, ToarjSe, roaSvo'c 
rooouros, -avrr], -ovro(v) 


oo~os, -77, -ov and 

07r6aos, -77, -ov, 

as great, as 

much, quantus 


iro7os, -a. -ov ; 
of ichat land? 
qualis? 


tvolos, -a, -6v, of 
a certain kind 


to7os, -a, -ov, of such a 

kind, talis 
TOiJsSe, TOLa.de, toiSvSe 

TOIOVTOS, -CWT7J, -OVTo(v) 


oios, -a, -ov and 
ottoTos. -a, -ov, 

of what /■' -* 

qualis 

rjXiKos, -n),-ov and 

oirnAixos, -77, -ov, 

as great, as old. 


irnXinos, -77, -ov; 
how great? how 
old? 


wanting 


t7]\Ikos, -77, -ov, so great, so 
tvAikSsSg, -TjSe, -6v8e [old 
ttjKlkovtos, -avTT), -ovro[v) 



Remark 1. The simple forms r6cos and roios are seldom used in Attic 
prose ; roaos and roios are found in the phrase, roios t) rolos, PI. Phaedr. 271, 
d, and elsewhere; tocos ko\ toVos (PI. ib.) ; Ik ro<rov (so long time since), PI. 
Leg. 642, at end 5 toVoj with a Comparative, corresponding to the relative '6oq>. 
8. g. Th. 8, 24. X. Cy. 1. 6, 26. Vect. 4, 32. 



* 95.] 



LENGTHENING OF THE PRONOUN. 



119 





(b) Adverb 


ial Correlatives. 




Interrogative. 


Indefinite. 


Demonstrative. 


Relative. 


Indirect 
Interrog. 


nod ; where ? 


irov, somewhere, 


av anting (hie, 


oo, ivhere. 


ottov, where. 


ubi? 


alicubi 


ibi) 


ubi 


ubi 


ir6&€v ; whence 1 ? 


■Ko^reu, from some 


wanting (hinc, 


oSrev, whence, 


bitohev, 


unde 1 


place, alicunde 


inde) 


unde 


whence,\mde 


tvol ; whither t 


iroi, to some place, 


wanting (eo) 


of, whither, 


oiroi,ichither. 


quo 1 


aliquo 




quo 


quo 


irSre ; when ? 


Tvore, some time, 


t6t€, then, turn 


ore, ivhen, 


5tt6t€, 


quando 1 


aliquando 




quum 


when, 
quando 


TrrjVLKa ; quo 


wanting 


T7]Vl- *| hoc 


r]vlKa, when. 


owni/ina, 


temporis punc- 




KoSe 1 ipso 
Tt\vi- \ tem- 


quo ipso 


when, quo 


to ? quota ho- 




tempore 


ipso tem- 


ra? 




Kavra J pore 




pore 


ttcos ; how? 


ir&s, some how 


outco(s) £5e, so 


&s, now 


OTT00S, h0W 


irrj ; whither ? 


ir-fj, to some place, 


Tfjde ( hither, 
ravTT) \ or here 


rj, where, 


oirrj. where, 


how? 


thither, in some way 


whither 


whither. 



Rem. 2. The forms to express the idea of here, there (hie, ibi), wanting in 
the Common language, are supplied by ivrav&a, eVdxtSe, and the idea of hence, 
thence (hinc, inde), by iv&4v8e, ivrev&w, evSra and ev&eu in the old and poetic 
language have both a demonstrative and relative sense, but in prose only a 
relative sense, except in certain phrases, e. g. 4v&a plu — 4vba 5e, hie, illic, 
ev&ev Kai ev&ev, hinc, illinc, and. when the signification of place is changed to 
that of time, e. g. 4vfra \4yei, then he says, ev&ev, thereupon. The forms twj, thus, 
rrj, hither, here, are poetic ; &s (instead of ovtws), is also for the most part 
poetic •; in prose, it is confined almost wholly to certain phrases, e. g. ical &s, vel 
sic, ouS' (^5') Sis, ne sic quiclem, and in comparisons, as — #s, ut — sic, PI. Rp. 
7. 530, d. Prot. 326, d. ; also &s ovu, so then, Th. 3, 37. 



$ 95. Lengthening of the Pronoun. 

Some small words are so appended to the pronouns, for the purpose of giving 
a particular turn to their signification, that they coalesce and form one word. 
They ai'e the following : — 

(a) The enclitic y4 is joined to the Personal pronouns of the first and second 
person, in order to make the person emphatic, by putting him in contrast with 
others, e. g. eyurye, I for my part. The pronoun iydo then draws back its accent 
in the Nom. and I)at. e.g. eycoye, i/xovye, efioiyt, ifi4ye, arvye. As y4 can be 
joined with any other word, so also with any other pronoun, but it does not 
form one word with the pronoun, e. g. ovr6s ye. 

(b) The particles S^ (most commonly S-fjnore), and ovv, are appended to 
relatives compounded of interrogatives or indefinites, as well as to oaos, in 
order to make the meaning general or indefinite, i. e. to extend it to everything 
embraced in the object denoted by the pronoun, e. g. ostisBt), dsTisdyTroTt, Sstis- 
§r)TTOTovv, osTtsovv, tjtlsovu, otiovv, ivhoevcr it be, I know not ivho, nescio quis, qui- 
cunque (Gen. ovtivosovv or orovovu, i]srivosovv, Dat. (priviovv or otg>ovv, etc.) ; — 
faooosSi), 6-n-ocrosovv, ocrosS^iroTe. quantuscunque ; — otttjAikosovv, however greats 
how old soever ; so also us-rrepovv [comp. (d)]. 



120 NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. [$ 96. 

(c) The suffix 8 e is joined with some demonstratives for the purpose of 
strengthening their demonstrative relation, e. g. ode, '/fie, t6B<e ; ToiosSe ; roaos- 
8e ; Tr)\iKosde. from to?os, t6o-os, t7j\(kos, which change their accent after 8e is 
appended (§ 34, Rem. 3). 

(d) The enclitic irep is appended to all relatives, in order to strengthen the 
reference to a demonstrative, and thus to connect the relative more closely with 
its antecedent ; hence it denotes, even who, which, the very man, iclio, etc. c. g. 
osirep, '/jTrep, oizep (Gen. ovirep, etc.) ; ovosirep, otosirep (Gen. oaovirep, o'iovnep, etc.) ; 
ob-nrep, oSevirep. 

(e) The inseparable demonstrative t, is appended to demonstratives and some 
few adverbs, always giving them a stronger demonstrative sense. It takes the 
acute accent (which yet, according to § 31, I., is changed into the grave in con- 
nected discourse) and absorbs every short vowel immediately preceding it, and 
also shortens the long vowels and diphthongs : — 

ovroav, this here (hicce, celui-ci), avrrji, tout/, 

Gen. rovroii, ravrrjo-f, Dat. tovtoh, Tavrrjt, PI. ovroli, avrad, ravri; 

odt, Tjdi, rodt from ode ; d>5r from w5e ; ovrccai from outojs ; 

evTevSevi from evrev&ev ; iv&adt from ev&dde ; vvvi from vvv ; Sevpl from devpo. 



CHAPTER IV. 
The Numerals . 

$ 96. Nature and Division of Numerals. 

1. Numerals express the relation of number and quantity. 
They are divided into the following classes, according to their 
signification : — 

(a) Cardinals, which express a definite number absolutely, 
and answer the question, lioiv many ? e. g. one, two, three. The 
first four Numerals and the round numbers from 200 (SuxkoVioi) 
to 10,000 (fjLvptot) and their compounds, are declined; but all the 
others are indeclinable. The thousands are expressed by 
adverbial Numerals, e. g. rpi^yikioi, 3000. 

(b) Ordinals, which denote a series, and answer the question, 
which one in the series 1 . All have the three endings of adjec- 
tives, -o?, -7], -ov, except Sevrepos, which has -os, -a, -ov. All up 
to 19, except 2, 7, 8, end in -tos and have the accent as near 
as possible to the beginning of the word. From 20 upwards 
they end in -o-tos. 

Remark 1. Adverbial Ordinals, which also denote a series, are expressed by 
the Xcut. Sing, or PI., with or without the article, but sometimes also with tho 
adverbial ending -cos, e. g. irpcoroy, to irpwrou, Trpwra, ra irpwra, TrpojTus, 



$ 96.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. 121 

(c) Numeral adverbs, which express how often, or how many 
times anything has happened, and which answer the question, 
how many times ? They are formed, except the first three, from 
the ordinals with the ending -dias, e. g. Tren-aKi?, jive times 
{\ 98). 

(d) Multiples, which show the number of parts of which 
a whole is composed, and answer the question, /tow many fold? 
All are compounded of 7rXov<s, and are adjectives of three end- 
ings, -ovs, -rj, -ovv (§§ 76, I, and 77). 

cnrXovs, -77, -ovv, single; SnrXovs (2), rpnrXovs (3), reTpanXovs (4), irevTcnrXovs 
(5), e^airXovs (6), e7TT07rAoi/s (7), oKrairXovs (8), tvvanrXovs (9), Se/ccnrAoDs (10), 
eKaTOvrairXovs (100), %£Ata7rAo0s (1000), {xvpiairXovs (10,000). 

Eem. 2. The adverbial Multiples in answer to the question, hoiv many 
fold ? or into how many parts ? are formed from the Cardinals with the ending 
-%a or -xv and -x^s, e. g. irivraxa, irej/raxv, TrevTax&s- 

(e) Proportionals, which denote a proportion, and answer the 
question, hoiv many times more ? All are compounded with the 
endings -TrXacnos, -id, -iov (more seldom -7rA.acr<W, -ov, e. g. kKarov- 
TairXacruov, -ov) : — 

SnrXao-ios, twice as much (as another which is taken as an unit), rpnrXdo-ios 
(3), TerpairXdcrios (4), irevTair Xacrios (5), QcarXdaios (6), k-nrcarXdo-ios (7), onra- 
7r\d(Tios (8), ivvairXdcrios (9), SeKcarXdcrios (10), GKarovTairXdcrios (100), ^i\to- 
rAacnos (1000), fivpioirXacrios (10,000). 

(f ) Substantive Numerals, which express the abstract idea 
of number. Except the first, all are formed from the Cardinals 
witn the ending -as, Gen. -a£o?: — 

r} fiovds (from }i6vos, only), more seldom % kvds, unity ; Buds, duality; rpids (3). 
rtrpds (4), irevrds or ir^jXTrrds (5), e|as (6), ifiSo/xds (7), 078005 (8), ivvtds (9). 
Se/cas (10), ei'/cas (20), rpiands (30), rerrapaKOvrds (40), irepTTjKOUTas (50), e/co« 
roz/ras (100), x^"k (1000), juupick (10,000), 5uo fivpiddes (20,000). 

Rem. 3. In addition to the Numerals mentioned above, there is still another 
class, which does not, like those, express a definite number, but either an 
indefinite number or an indefinite quantity, e. g. evioi, some ; irdvres, all ; iroX- 
?ol, many (§ 77); bxiyoi, few; bxiyov, bxlya, a little; ovSels, no one; ouSeV, 
nothing, etc. 

2. Numerals, like pronouns, are divided, according to theii 
signification and form, into Substantive, Adjective, and Adver- 
bial Numerals, e. g. rpe is r)\$ov ; 6 rpiros dvrjp ; rpi's. 
11 



122 



NUMERALS, 



[« 97, 98 



$ 97. Numeral Signs. 

1. The Numeral Signs are the twenty-four letters of the Greek alphabet, ta 
which three obsolete letters are added, viz. after e, Bad, or the Digamma F, of 
2t?, r ; the last character is taken from the figure r, which is a mutilated form 
of the Digamma, but which has only an accidental resemblance to the abbre- 
viation of <r (r) and t (§ 1, Rem. 2) ; — Koinra, 5, as the sign for 90 ; — 'Safnr?, 
^ , as the sign for 900. 

2. The first eight letters, i. e. from a to & with the Bad or 2t?, denote the 
units ; the following eight, i. e. from t to ir with the KSirira, the tens ; the last 
eight, i. e. from p to a with the Sct/wr?, the hundreds. 

3. Up to 999, the letters as numeral signs, are distinguished by a mark 
placed over them, and when two or more letters stand together, as numeral 
Bigns, only the last has this mark. With 1000, the alphabet begins again, but 
the letters are distinguished by a mark placed under them, thus, a f = 1, jat = 
1000, i = 10, /t = 10,000, jetynff = 5742, /mofiff = 1842, p' = 100, ,p == 
100,000. 





§ 98. Princijial 


Classes of Numerals. 




Cardinals. 




Ordinals. 


la' 


els, fila, eV 




TTpS>Tos, -t], -ov, primus, -a, -urn 


2ff 


8vo 




Sevrepos, -d, -ov 


3 y' 


Tpeis, rpia 




TplTOS, -7], -OV 


4 5' 


TeTrctpes, -o, or 


reacrapes 


, -a rerapros, -77, -ov 


5 e' 


irevre 




TTe/jUTTOS, -7), -ov 


6 V 


H 




€KTOS, -7], -ov 


U' 


€7TT(X 




e738ouos, -7], -ov 


8 V 


0/CTc6 




oyfioos, -7], -ov 


9S 


ewea 




ivaros, -7], -ov 


10 i' 


5e/ca 




Zmaros, -77, -ov 


11 la 


eVSe/ca 




ivdeKaros, -7], -ov 


12 iff 


5c65e/c»- 




SwdinaTos, -77, -ov 


^3 r> 


Tpe?s (Tpio) Kai BeKa 1 


rpiros, -77, -ov Ka\ Se/coTos, -77- -ov 3 


14 id' 


TeTTapes(a) «ol 8e/ca 2 


TeVaproy, -77, -ov Kai 5e/caTos, -77, -ov 


15 ie' 


■7rei/Te/ccu5e/ca 




ire/xTTTOs, -77, -ov Ka\ Se/caTos, -77, -op 


16 it' 


e/c/ccu5e/ca 




cktos, -77, -ov Kai deKaros, -77, -ov 


17 tC 


e7rTaKCu8e/ca 




eySSopos, -77, -ov /cat Se/caros, -77, -ov 


18 17]' 


o/crwKatSe/ca 




oydoos, -7), -ov Kai denaros, -77, -ov 


19 !»' 


eVz/eaKcu5eKa 




zvaros, -77, -ov Kai StKaros, -tj, -ov 


20 ic' 


e?K0(Tl(v) 




elKOGTOS, -Tj, -6v 



1 The rare Attic form rpisKatdeKa is indeclinable. 

2 The non- Attic form reo-crapaKaiSeKa is indeclinable. 



3 The forms given from the 13th to the 19th are preferable to rpisKaiUKaros 
ccTTapaKcuSe/cctTos, 7rej/T€/cat8e/faTos, etc. 



*9S.] 



NUMERALS. 



21 Kaf 
30 A/ 

40 // 

50 v' 

60 |' 

70 o' 

80 tt' 

90 5' 

100 // 

200 </ 

300 t' 

400 v' 

500 <j/ 

600 x' 

700 f 

800 »' 

900 *% 

1000 ,a 

2000 ,£ 

3000 /y 

4000 ,5 

5000 ,e 

6000 ,r 

7000 ,£ 

8000 jn 

9000 ^ 

10,000 ,t 

20,000 ,/c 

100,000 ,p 

1,000,000 ifi 

R,000,000 Kfi 



Cardnals 
tiKOcriv efs, jxla, %9 
rpiaKovra 
TGTTapaKovi a 

e^rjKOvra 
efldofiJiKOVTa 
oydo'fjKOt'Ta 
£vevi)KOVTa 
4/cotoV 

dia.K6(rioi, -a;, -a 
Tpia.K6arioi, -at, -a 
TeTpo.K6(Tioi, -ai, -o 
Trej/ra/coViot, -ai, -a 
QaKocrioi, -ai, -a 
eTTTaKoViot, -at, -a 
OKTa/tSarim, -at, -a 
' ivvaKocTLOi, -at, -a 
XtAtot, -at, -a 
Sisx&ioi, -at, -a 
rpisxi\ioi, -ai, -a 
T6TpctKtsxiA.tot, -at, -a 
7revTaKtsxtAtot, -at, -a 
e^aKisx^ioi, -ai, -a 
e7TTa/<:isxtAiot, -at, -a 
o/cTa/ctsxtAiot, -at, -a 
efj/a/ct5X'A.tot, -at, -a 
fxvpioi, -ai, -a 
8isp.vpioi, -ai, -a 
SeKaKisfxvpioi, -at, -a 
eKarovraKiSfivpioi, -cu, -a 
SiaKOffiaKis/j.'ipioi, -at, -a 



Ordinals. 
et/cocTos, -/?, -by, irpuTos, -7, 
rptaKoCT^s, -17, -Of 
TeTTapd/coCTo's, -77, -oV 

Tr<iVT7]KO(TT6s, -7], -6v 
QaKOCTTOS, -7], -OV 

efidofiriKocrTos, -77, -oV 
078077/coaTo's, -7^, -oV 
ivevriKOCTTos, -r), -6v 
€KaToar6s, -7), -oV 
§i5.ko(Tioo , t6s, -77, -oV 
Tpia.KOGiocr6s, -17, -op 
reTpaKoaio(rr6s, -77, -oV 
irevTaKOffioffrSs, -i), -6v 
kl-aK.o<Tio<rT6s, -7), -oV 

€TTTaKO(riO<TT6s : -7), -ov 

oKTa/coctoo-Td'y, -77, -ov 

£waKO(TLO(TT6s. l -i), -6v 
X^OffT6s, -7}, -OV 

Sisx^oo-tSs., -t), -6v 
Tpisx^o<rr6sj -77, -oV 
TiTpaKisx^ioards, -i), -6v 
7refTa/ctsxtAtocrTdy, -77, -oV 
e|a/cisx'^ to O" T ^j -^5 -^ 
iTrTa/ctsx^tocTT^y, -7^, -oV 

O/CTOKtSX'A.tOO'To's-, -77, -dV 

ivvaKisx^i-offrSs, -i), -6v 
Ixvpioo-rSs, -7), -6v 
8isp.vpioffT6s, -77, -oV 
deKaKiSfivpiotfTos, -7), -6v 
€KaTOVTaKisfJLvpio(TT6s, -77, -oV 
diaKocriaKisfJi.vpio<Tr6s, -i), -6v. 



1 aVa|, once 

2 8fr, iwi'ce 

3 Tpfs 

1 T€Tpa/as 

5 7T€fTeiKtS 

6 QaKis 

7 errra'/cts 

8 0K7A.KIS 

9 tWecC/cts, e; 

10 S€K«i/cty 

11 eVSe/ca/c ts 

12 Sw5e/cciKts 



Numeral Adverbs. 

13 rpiSKcudeKaKis 

14 rerrapesKaideKaKis 

15 TTepTe/caiSe/caKts 

16 eKKcuSeicdias 

17 liTTa/catSe/caKis 

18 OKTCOKaideKOLKlS 

19 ii/vea.KaideKa.Kis 

20 GiKOcrdKis 

21 dKO<ra.Kis a7ra£ 

22 eiKO(rd.Kis Sis 
30 rpiaKovrdKis 

40 TfTTapaKOVTOLKlS 



50 7revT7]KovrdKis 
60 kl7]K0vrd.Kis 

70 €fi8o/JL7)KOVTdKlS 

80 oyFoTiKovrdnts 
90 ivevriKOvrdicts 
100 eKarovrdKis 
200 SiaKocridKis 
300 rpiaKO<ridKis 
1000 x'AtaKts 
2000 Stsx'A.'a'cts 
10,000 ixvpidms 
20,000 Sis/xvpidKis. 



124 REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. f$ 99. 



§ 99. Remarks. 

1. The rarer subordinate forms of 13, 14, etc., used by later writers, are 
tienarpels, Neut. SeKarpia, Se/coTeTTapes, -a, SeKairej/re, etc. 

2. Mvpioi, 10,000, when Paroxytone (/xvpioi), signifies innumerable. 

3. In compound numerals, the smaller number either precedes the larger, 
and then always with /ecu, or it follows the larger, usually with /cat, sometimes 
without it. The first order corresponds with the usage in English, e. g. Jive 
and twenty ; the second only in part, e. g. twenty-Jive, e. g. 

25 : 7reVre Kal e?KOcri(v), or etnocri Kal Tret/re, 
345 : irevT€ Kal TtTrapaKovi a /col TpiaKoaioi, or TpiaK. tctt. /col it. 

The same holds of the Ordinals, e. g. 

irefxirTos Kal €ikoo~t6s, or elKocrTos Kal Tr^tnos. 

4. The tens compounded with 8 or 9 are frequently expressed in the form of 
subtraction, by means of the participle of Selu, to want, which agrees with tha 
larger number, e. g. 

49 : irevTriKOUTa evbs SiovTa cttj 1 , undequinquaginta anni, 
48 : irevTrjKovTa Svolv deovTa ctt), duodequinquaginta anni, 
39 : vrjes /Mas Seovaai. TeTTapaKovTa, undequadraginta naves. 

So with the Ordinals, e. g. 

49 : kvbs SeW TrevTT)Koo~Tbs avhp, undequinquagesimus vir. 

5. Fractions are usually expressed by fiepos or fxoipa. These words, as 
denominators of the fraction, are put in the Gen., depending on the numeral 
which denotes the numerator. If they are expressed as denominators, they are 
understood with the numeral denoting the numerator; if they are expressed 
as numerators, they are understood with the numeral denoting the denominator, 
e. g. -| is t5>v TreVre fxepSov to dvo [fiepy], or tu>v xeVre [fxepwv] to. dvo fiepr), twe 
parts of the Jive ; § is ruu 6kt£> {xoipuv ai irivTe [jtto?j0ot], or t&v o/ctw [fxoipwv] aJ 
dvo /xo?pai. But one half is expressed by compounds with rjfii, e. g. 7]/j.idapeiK6y, 
half a daric ; so in the PL Tpia, 7reWe rj/xiBapetKa, a daric and a half, two darics 
and a half. — Fractions are also expressed by an ordinal with /xopiov or /nepos, 
e. g. Tpnt\\i6piou or tp'itov /xepos = £, ire^-KTou jiepos = j ; a mixed number is 
also expressed by tj/xi preceded by a numeral, e. g. irevre r)fj.idapeiKa = 2^- darics, 
also by irri prefixed to an ordinal, e. g. inirpiTov = l£, 4iri7re/xirTou — 1 -§•. 

6. The Cardinal numbers compounded with avv are equivalent to the Latin 
distributives, e. g. cvvdvo (bini), two together, two at a time, each two, avvrpeu 
(terni), a-v/jLireuTe (quini), etc. 

1 Fifty years, wanting one. 



$ 100.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF THE ADVERB. 125 

7. Declension of the first four Numerals : — 



Nora. 


els (xia ev 


dvo 


Gen. 


kv6s /xius kv6s 


Svo?v (very seldom 8ve?v) 


Pat. 


kvi [xiz kvi 


Svo?v (Svai[v] Ionic and Th. 8, 101.) 


Ace. 


kva /xiav hv 


dvo 


Nom. 


rpeTs Neut. rpia 


rerrapes, or re<r<rapes Neut. Terrapa 


Gen. 


rpiwv 


T€TTO.p00V 


Dat. 


rpiaiiv) 


reTTaptri(v) 


Ace. 


rpus Neut. rpia 


rerrapas Neut. rerrapa 



Remark. Like els are also declined ovSeis and /xr]5eis, no one ; like eh too 
they have the irregular accent, e. g. ovSds, ovde/xia, ovdzv, Gen. ov5ev6s, ov5e- 
fiias, Dat. ovSevi, olde/xiy, etc. ; but in the PI. ovSeves (^UTjSeVes), -ivwv, -e<ri(v), 
-has. Comp. further, § 65, 3 (c). The form lv<a, instead of Svo, seems to be 
foreign to the Attic dialect. Avo is often used as indeclinable in all the Cases. 
"Ajj.'pw. both, is declined like Sio, Gen. and Dat. a/j.<po7v, Ace. afxfa. 



CHAPTER V. 

The Adverb 



§ 100. Nature and division of the Adverb. 

Adverbs (§§38 and 314) are indeclinable words, denoting 
the relations of place, time, manner, modality, intensity, and 
repetition. They are formed either from essential words 
(§ 38, 3), viz. Substantives, Adjectives, Participles, or from 
formal words, viz. Pronouns and Numerals, or they are 
primitive words, e. g. ov, fir), kcli, y^v, rj, av, etc. 

(a) Adverbs of place, e. g. obpav6&ev, coelitus, iravraxn, ubivis; 

(b) Adverbs of time, e. g. vvKrcop, noctu, vvv, nunc; 

(c) Adverbs of manner, e. g. KaAobs, ovtco(s) ; 

(d) Adverbs of modality, which, e. g. vai and ov(k), express an affirmation and 
negation, or e. g. nfo, roi, %, ^ fx-f]v, S-ft, foots, irov, 'av, -navrws, etc. -which 
express certainty, dejiniteness, uncertainty, conditionally ; 

(e) Adverbs of intensity and frequency, e. g. /xaAa, iravv, iro\v, oo~ov, etc. rpis t 
three times ; avSris, again ; TroKhatus, often. 

11* 



t26 



FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 



[§ 101 



$ 101. Formation of Adverbs. 

1. Most Adverbs are formed from adjectives by the ending 
-ws. This ending is annexed to the pure stem of the adjective ; 
hence, as the stem of adjectives of the third Dec. appears in the 
Gen., and as adjectives in the Gen. PI. are accented like 
adverbs, the following rule for the formation of adverbs from 
adjectives may be given : — 

Change -wv, the ending of the adjective in the Gen. PL, into -cos, 
e.g. 



<pi\-os, lovely, 
Ka\-6s, fair, 
Kaipi-os, timely, 
air\(6-os)ovs, simple, 
evv(o-os)ovs, benevolent, 
iras, all, Travr6s, 
trctxppwv, prudent, 
Xapiezs, pleasant, 
raxvs, swift, 
ixiyas, great, 
a\-nfrf)s, true, 
trvvr)&r}s, accustomed, 



Gen. PI. <pi\-(av 
' : KaK-wv 



KOLlpl-UV 

air\(6-uv)ut/ 
(evvo-wv) evvav 
irdvT-uv 

(T(ti<pp6v-(t)V 

XO-pUvr-uv 

rax^-oov 

/jL€yd\-cov 



Adv. (p'lXrUS 

Kdk-ws 
Kaipl-as 
b.tr\(6-<tis)Sis 
(evvo-ws) evvas 
irdvT-cos 

(TWCppSv-US 

Xapievr-ws 

Ta%e-cos 

/j.eyd\-as 

&A7j&(e-a>s)ws 

(ffvvri&e-as) (Tvvr)&ws. 



Remark 1. On the accent of compounds in ->]Soos, and of the compound 
avrdpicws, see § 59, Rem. 4, also on the accent of ewus, instead of evuus, § 49, 
3. On the comparison of Adverbs, see § 85. 

2. In addition to the adverbs with the ending -cos, there are 
many which have the endings of the Gen., Dat, or Ace. 

(a) The Gen. ending appears in many adverbs in -rjs and -ov, 
e. g. e^s, £<f>e£r)s, in order; k^airivr]% suddenly ; nov, alicubi; irov t 
ubi ? o7Tov, ov, ubi ; at-rov, ibi ; cv8ap.ov, noivhere. 

(b) The Dat., or an obsolete Abl. or Locative 1 ending, occurs 
in the following adverbs, 

(a) In adverbs with the ending -j, e. g. r)pi, in the morning, comp. rip, spring , 
acopt, unseasonably ; bktjti (Dor. e'/caTi), aeKriri, eicovTi, azKovri; in adverbs 
of manner in -el and -f, from adjectives in -qs and -t]s, and almost exclu- 
sively in adverbs compounded of a privatrve and iras cr avr6s, e. g. 
iravop/xei and iravop/it On the use of both forms, see Large Grammar, 
Part I, § 363 f/3). 



The Locative Case, is one which denotes the place where. 



$ 102.] CLASSES OF THE VERB. 127 

(/8) In local adverbs in -01, commonly derived from substantives of the sec- 
ond Dec, e. g. , I(t&/j.o'i from 'laSf/j-Ss, Ilv&o? from TIv&d>, MeyapoT (tA 
Meyapa), Tltipcuo?, KiKVWot from 77 KiKvvva), of, ottoi, quo, whither, gXkoi, 
domi, from oTkgs. 

Rem. 2. Adverbs in -o?, derived from substantives, denote an indefinite 
where, but those derived from pronouns commonly denote the direction whither , 
ret sometimes the indefinite where. 

(y) In local adverbs in -at. This ending occurs only in a few forms, e. g. 
XW-U humi, ira\ai. To this form corresponds the PI. locative form 
-7] a i (*/), or where i precedes, -aatv, derived from substantives of the first 
Dec. ; this ending originally belonged to plural substantives only, but 
was transferred later to substantives in the singular number, e. g, ©-77)877- 
(Tt(u) from @TJ$<u, 'A&-fivr)(Ti(v) from 'Afryvai, TlXaTaiaat(v) from YlXaratai ; 
Uepya(T7J(ri(v} from Hepyaar), '0\v/j.Trldai(v) from 'OXv/xirla. 

(8) In adverbs in -77 and -d, e. g. aAATj, eTepr), ire^r}, on foot ; upvcprj, Aa&pa, 
eiKTJ, temere ; ov^a/xi], S^/xocrla, publice ; koivtj, in common ; I8ia, privatim ; 
Ko/judrj, diligenter ; also 71-77, o' 71 "^ irdvrri, ?;, ttj, T?j8e, tovtiq, etc. ; 77 and a com- 
monly have an Iota subscript. 

(c) The Ace. ending occurs in the following forms, 

(o) In the endings -tj v and -a v, e. g. irp&riv ; fxaicpdu, far ; irepav and ipsprjv, 

trans (but ir6pa, ultra), etc.; so also of substantives, e. g. SIktjv, instar; 

h.KpA\v (acme), scarcely ; doopedv, gratis. 
(/8) In the ending -ov, e. g. drjpSv, diu; ctj/ac/w, hodie ; avpiou, to-morrow. 
\y) In the endings -dov, -5r]v, -5 a (adverbs of manner), e. g. avTocrx<36v, 

cominus ; x av ^ v i 'nnroTpoxd5riv, airoa-Todd. 
(8) In some substantive forms in the Ace. of the third Dec, e. g. x^P iV -> f of 

the sake of; irpoiKa, gratuitously. 



CHAPTER VI. 

The Verb. 

Nature and Division of the Verb. 

$ 102, Classes of the Verb. 

1. The Verb expresses an action or state, which is af- 
firmed of a subject, e. g. the father writes, the rose blooms, 
the boy sleeps, God is loved. 

2. Verbs are d'.vided into the following classes : — 

(1) Active verbs, which express an action, that the sub- 
ject itself performs or manifests, e. g. rypd<f>o), to ivrite ; 
^rdWo), to bloom (comp. § 248) ; 

(2) Middle or Reflexive verbs, which express an action 
that the subject performs on itself, the subject being, 



128 VETIBS. TENSES. [$ 103 

therefore, both agent and object, e. g. fiovXevofiaiy 1 
advise myself, I deliberate ; 
(3) Passive verbs, which express an action that the sub- 
• ject receives from another object, e. g. rvirTOfxai viro 
twos, I am smitten by some one. 
3. Verbs, which are used only in the middle form, are 
called Deponent. They have either a reflexive or intransi- 
tive meaning. They are divided into Middle Deponents, 
which have a middle form for their Aorist and Future, e. g. 
yapiCpyuai, gratificor, Aor. e^apiadfiriv, Fut. yapiovfiai ; and 
into Passive Deponents, which have a Passive form for 
their Aorist, but commonly a middle form for their Fut, 
e. g. iv^vfieofiat, mecum reputo, Aor. eve^v/jb^Tjv, mecum 
reputavi, Fut. iv^v^r}ao}xai, mecum reputabo. Comp. § 197. 

§ 103. The Tenses. 

1. The Tenses denote the time of the action of the verb. 
The Greek has the following Tenses : — 

I. (1) Present, (BovXevco, I advise, 

(2) Perfect, /3ej3ov\€v/ca, I have advised; 
II. (3) Imperfect, ifioiiXevov, I was advising; 

(4) Pluperfect, efSeftovkeviceiv, I had advised, 

(5) Aorist, e(3ov\evcra, I advised (indefinite) ; 
III. (6) Future, fiovXevcrco, I shall or will advise, 

(7) Future Perfect (almost exclusively in the mid- 
dle form), ftefiovXevcro/jLaL, I shall have advised my- 
self, or I shall have been advised. 

2. All the Tenses may be divided into, 

a. Principal tenses : Present, Perfect, and Future ; 

b. Historical tenses : Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist. 

Remark. The Greek has two forms for the Perf. and Plvrperf. Act., two for 
the simple Fut. Pass., and two each for the Act., Pass., and Mid. Aorist ; these 
two forms may be distinguished as Primary and Secondary tenses ; i. e. the 
first Perfect is a primary tense, the second Perfect a secondary tense, etc. 
Still, only a very few verbs have both forms ; most verbs construct the above 
tenses with one or the other form, but not with both. No verb has all the 



M 104, 105.] VERBS. MODES. PARTICIPIALS. 129 

tenses. Pure verbs (§ 108, 5) form, with very few exceptions, only the primary 
tenses. Mute and liquid verbs (§ 108, 5) may form both the primary and 
secondary tenses, but no verb has all the forms in use. The Fut. Pert'., which 
is found in but few verbs, is entirely wanting in liquid verbs. It is seldom 
found in verbs which have the temporal augment (§ 121), e. g. aipew, to take, 
TJp7}<ro/Aai r PI. Prot. 338, c, dr^aco, to dishonor, ijTifj.cixrofiai, Dem. 19, 284. 



$ 104. The Modes. 

The Modes denote the manner in which the action of 
the verb is represented, whether as a direct affirmation, a 
condition, or a command, etc. (comp. § 258, seq.) The 
Greek has the following Modes : — 

I. The Indicative, which makes a direct affirmation, e. g 
the rose blooms, bloomed, ivill bloom. 

II. The Subjunctive, which expresses what is merely 
conceived, or conditional. The Subjunctive of the his- 
torical tenses is called the Optative. Comp. ypdfoc/M with 
scriberem. 

Remark. See § 257, 2 (a), (b), and Rem. 1, for the manner in which the 
Aorist may use both forms of the Subj., and how the Future may have an 
Optative. 

III. The Imperative, which expresses a command, e. g. 
/3ov\ev€, advise. 

§ 105. Participials (Infinitive and Participle^ 

Besides the modes, the verb has two forms, which, as 
they partake both of the nature of the verb and also of 
the nature of the substantive and adjective, are called 
Participials : — 

(a) The Infinitive, which is the substantive participial, 
e. g. i^eXco /3ov\eveiv, I wish to advise, and to fiovXevetv, 
the advising. 

(b) The Participle, which is the adjective participial, e. g. 
j3ov\€V(ov avrjp, a counsellor. 

Remark. These two participials maybe called verbum infinitum; the re» 
maining forms of the verb, verbum finitum. 



130 VERBS. STEM, AUGMENT, AND REDUPLICATION. [H 106-109 

$ 106. The Persons and Numbers. 

The personal forms of the verb show whether the sub- 
ject of the verb be the speaker himself (I, we, first person) ; 
or a person or thing addressed (thou, you, second person) ; or 
a person or thing spoken of (he, she, it, third person). They 
also show the relation of number: Singular, Dual, and 
Plural (comp. § 41, 1), e. g. ftovXevco, I, the speaker, advise ; 
fiovkeveus, thou, the person addressed, advisest; (SovXevei, he, 
she, it, the person or thing spoken of, advises ; fiovXeverov, 
ye two, the persons addressed, advise ; /3ovXevovac, they, the 
persons spoken of, advise. 

Remark 1. The student will at once observe that the ending, or personal 
forms of the Greek verb, determines the person and number without the subject 
being expressed. So in Latin. But in English, as the verb is not varied so 
as to indicate the person and number of itself, the subject must be expressed. 

Rem. 2. There is no separate form for the first Pers. Dual throughout the 
Act., and none for the Pass. Aorists ; in these instances it is expressed by the 
form of the first Pers. PI. 

$ 107. Conjugation. 

Conjugation is the inflection of the verb in its Persons, 
Numbers, Modes, Tenses, and Voices. The Greek has 
two forms of conjugation, that in -co, which includes much 
the larger number of verbs, e. g. /3ovXev-oo, and the older, 
original conjugation in -jm, e. g. tary-fja, to station. 



Conjugation of Verbs in -a> 

§ 108. Stem, Augment, and Reduplication. — Char- 
acteristic. 

1. Every verb is divided into the stem, which contains the 
ground-form of the verb, and into the syllables of formation, by 
which the relations of person, number, tense, etc. are denoted 
The stem is found in most verbs in -w by cutting off the ending 
of the first Pers. Ind. Pres., e. g. fiovXtv-w, Aey-w, Tpifi-o). 



H 109, llO.J VERBS. INFLECTION AND TENSE-ENDINGS. 131 

2. The syllables of formation are either annexed as endings 
to the stem, and are then called inflection-endings, e. g. {3ov\ev-oj, 
fiovXcv-au), fiovXtv-o-ofAai, or are prefixed to the stem, and are 
then called Augment and Reduplication, e. g. i-fiov\evov, I was 
advising ; (3e-f3ov\€vi<a, I have advised. For a change in the stem 
of many verbs, e. g. rpiiT-oi, ri-rpofy-a, k-rpaTr-rjv, see § 140. 

3. The Augment is e prefixed to the stem of verbs which 
begin with a consonant, e. g. i-fiovXevaa, I advised; but in 
verbs which begin with a vowel, it consists in lengthening the 
first stem-vowel, a and e into 77 (and in some cases into et), t and 
v into I and v, and o into to. The Augment implies past time, 
and hence belongs to all the historical tenses (Imperfect, 
Aorist, and Pluperfect) ; but it is confined to the Indicative. 

4. Reduplication consists in repeating the first stem-conso- 
nant with e, when the stem begins with a consonant ; but when 
the stem begins with a vowel, the Reduplication is the same as 
the augment, e. g. (Se-ftovXevKa, I have advised; 'iKerevKa, I have 
supplicated, from 'tKerev-w. The Reduplication denotes the com- 
pletion of the action, and hence belongs to the Perfect, Pluper- 
fect, and Future Perfect. For a fuller view of the Augmenl 
and Reduplication, see § 119, sq. 

5. The last letter of the stem, after the ending -<o is cut ofl. 
is called the verb -characteristic, or merely the characteristic, 
because, according to this, verbs in -co are divided into different 
classes ; according as the characteristic is a vowel, a mute, or 
a liquid, verbs are divided into pure, mute, and liquid verbs, e. g. 
fiovXeij-u), rijxa-oi (pure verbs), rpip-o) (mute), <£aiv-to (liquid), 

§ 109. Inflection- endings. 

In the inflection- endings, so far as they denote the relation 
of tense, mode, and person, there are three different elements : 
the tense-characteristic, the mode-vowel, and the personal- 
ending, e. g. (3ov\ev-cr-o-iJLcu. 

§ 110. (a) Tense-characteristic and Tense-endings. 

1. The tense-characteristic is that consonant which stands 
next after the stem of the verb, and is the characteristic mark 



132 VERBS. PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. [$lll, 

of the tense. In pure verbs, k is the tense -characteristic of the* 
Perf. and Plup. Incl. Act., e. g. 

f3e-&ovAev-K-a £-fSe-fiovAev-K-etv ; 

the characteristic of the Fnt. and first Aor. Act. and Mid., and 
the Fut. Perf. is a-, e. g. 

PovAev-cr-eo fiovAsv-(r-o}iat fte-BovAev-cr-oiAou 

i-fiovAev-cr-a, £-fiovAev-<r-djj.r)v ; 

the characteristic of the first Aor. Pass, is $; the first Fut. 
Pass, has, besides the tense-characteristic a, the ending of the 
first Aor. Pass. -Srj, thus, 

e-fiovAev-fr-Tii/ &ovAev-frf}-(r-o/j.cu. 

The primary tenses only ($ 103, Rem.) have a tense-charac- 
teristic. 

2. The tense-characteristic, together with the ending follow- 
ing, is called the tense-ending. Thus, e. g. in the form fiov- 
Xevcro), a- is the tense-characteristic of the Fut., and the syllable 
ero> is the tense-ending of the Fut. The stem of the verb, 
together with the tense-characteristic and the augment or 
reduplication, is called the tense-stem. Thus, e. g. in i/Sov- 
Xeva-a, iBovXeua- is the tense-stem of the first Aor. Act. 



§ 111. (b) Personal-endings and Mode-voivels. 

The personal-ending denotes the person of the verb, and 
takes a different form according to the different persons and 
numbers ; the mode-vowel connects the tense-stem and the 
personal-ending, and takes a different form according to the 
different modes, e. g. 

1 Pers. Sing. Ind. Pres. M. fZovAev-o-ficu Subj. fSovAev-a>-/u.cu 

3 " " " Fut. " )3ovAeu-o"-e-Tat Opt. fiovAeu-cr-oi-TO 

1 " PI. " Pres. if f3ovAev-6-/xe&a Subj. (SovAev-6-/Ae&a 

2 " " " " " fiovAev-e-a&e " fio-jAev-7]-o~&6 

1 " Sing. " A. I. " i/3ouAeii-(T-d-iJ.T]y " /3ovAev-(T-ci}-pMi 

3 " " " " " £j3ovAev-cr-a-TO Opt. PovAev-a-cu-ro. 

Remark. In the above forms, fSovAev is the verb-stem, and /3ouAev, ySoi/Aewr, 
and i&ovAevo- are the tense-stems, namely, of the Pres., Put., and first Aor, 
Mid: the endings -pai, -Tat, etc., are the personal-endings, and the vowels o, 
«, e. oi, 7] a, c», are the mode-vowels. The mode-vowels e and o of the Indie 
<ire lengthened into tj and « in the Subj. 



« 11 



113.] MODE-VOWELS. TERSONAL-ENDINGS. 133 

Ml 2. Summary of the Mode -voiu els. 





Indicative. 


Subj. 


Opt. 


Impr. 


Inf. 


Part. 


Person. 


Pres. and Fut. 
Active. 


lmpf., A. II. A. and 
M. and Prs.and F.M. 


Act. Mid. 








S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.'l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


a 

et 
et 

e 

6 

6 





e 

€ 


6 

e 



e 




ca 
V 
V 

V 
V 

0} 

V 


0} 

V 
V 

03 
V 
1\ 
CO 

V 

CO 


01 
01 
01 
01 
01 
01 
01 
01 
01 


e 
e 

€ 

e 

e 
e 


61, 6 


CO, 




Indicative. 


Optative. 


Impr. 


Infinitive. 


Person. 


Plpf. 


A. I. M. 


A. I. A. and 

Pf. A. 


A. I. A. 
and M. 


A. I. A. and M. 


A. I. A. and M. 
a 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


61 

et 
ei 

6( 

ei 

6t 

et 
(«)■ 


a 
d 


a 
a 
e 

a 

a 
a 
a 
a 


at 
at 


o a 




a 
a 

a 
a 
a 
a 
a 


ai 
at 
ai 
ai 
cu 
ai 
ai 


a 

a 
a 

a 
a 


Participle. 

A. I. A. and M. 
and Pf. A. 

a 



$ 113. Personal-endings 


of Verbs in -co. 


I. Active Form. 


II. Middle Form. 


A. Ind. and Subj. 
the Princ. tenses. 


B. Ind. and Opt. 
the Hist, tenses. 


A. Ind. and Subj. 
the Princ. tenses. 

/xai 

crai 

Tai 

fxe&ov 

cr&ov 

cr&ov 

vtoli (oTat) 


B. Ind. and Opt. 
the Hist, tenses. 


Sing. 1. 

2. 

3. 
Dual 1. 

2. 

3. 
Plur. 1. 

2. 

3. 


s 

TOV 
TOV 

fxev 

T6 

(j/ti) cri(v) 


v, Opt. /it 
s 

TOV 
Tf\V 
fl€V 
T6 

v, crav 


y.r,v 
cro, o 

TG 
fX&OV 

cr&ov 

0~&7}V 

fxe^a 
vto (aTo) 


C. Imperative. 


C. Imperative. 


Sing. 2. 
Dual 2. 
Plur. 2. 


3. -o> 

TOV 3. t^}V 

T6 3. Tcocrav 


Sing. 2. (cro) o 3. crhco 

Dual 2. o-frov 3. c&cov 

Plur. 2. a&e 3. cr&cocrav, c&wv 


D. Infinitive. 


D. Infinitive. j 


v Pres., Put., and Aor. II. 

vcu Pcrf. Act. and Aor. I. and II. Pass. 

i Aor. I. 


cr&cu 


E. Participle. 


E. Participle. 


Stem it, with exception of the Perf., 
wbose stem ends in -or. 


fievos, ftzvri, fievov ; 
/j.4vos, ptvT), fievov, Perf. 



134 FERSONAL-ENJJ1NGS. [$114 

Remark. The Personal-endings follow so directly the mode-vowel, and are 
so closely joined to it, that often the two do not appear separately, but are 
united together, e. g. fiovXeiHT-ys, instead of fiovXeva-rj-Ls, BovXev-r), instead of 
8ovXev-e-cu (a and e coalescing and i being subscribed). 

$ 114. Difference between the Personal-endings tn 
the Principal and the Historical Tenses. 

1. The difference between the Principal and Historical tenses is important. 
The Principal tenses (Pres., Perf., and Put.) form the second and third Pers. 
Dual with the same ending -ov, e. g. BovXev-erov BovXev-e-rou ; PovXev-e-o&op 
BovAev-e-a&ov ; the Historical tenses also form the second Pers. Dual in -o v, 
but the third in -tj v, e. g. 

£f$ov\ev-e-T o v ifSovXev-e-Trjv, ifiovAev-e-cr&ov £BovX€v-e-o~&r)v. 

2. The Principal tenses form the third Pers. PI. Act. in -<ri(v), from -vti, 
-vcriy and the Mid. in -vrai; the Historical tenses in the Active, in -v, and Mid., 
in -vto, e. g. 

BovXev-o-v <T i = fiovAzv-ov<ri(p) ejSouAeu-o-j/ 
BovXev-o-vrai £Bov\zv-o-vt o. 

Remark. In BovKevovcri the v is dropped, and as a compensation the o pre- 
ceding it is lengthened ; so also in the Put. Act. Comp. 116, 5. 

3. The Principal tenses in the Sing. Mid. end in -fxai, -o*ai, -rat ; the Histori- 
cal in -jxriVf -(To, -to, e. g. 

BovXev-o-fxai £BovXev-6-fj.r]u 

Bov\ev-e-o~ a i = BovXev-7), e/3ouAeu-e-(T o = e/3ouAeu-ou 

jSoi/Aeu-e-T a i ejSovAeu-e-T o. 

4. The Personal-endings of the Subj. in the Principal tenses are like those 
of the Ind. in Ihe same tenses ; the Opt. are like those of the Ind. of the His- 
torical tenses : 



2 and 3 Du. In ; 


. Pr. fiovAeve-r o v Subj. BovXevrj-r o v 




fiovAeve-ar&ov " BovXevT}-o~ & o v 


3 PI. " 


" BovXevov-c t ( ') " Bov\eva>-o~i{v) 




BovXevo-vra " fiovXeva-vrai 


1 Sing. " 


•' Bovtevo-fiai " BovXsvco-nai 


2 '• " 


" /3ouAeu-?7 " BovAev-rj 


3 " " 


" BovXeie-rai " fiovXevrj-T a t 


2 and 3 Du. " 


Impf.e/3ouAeue-Toi', -4-ttju Opt. BovXevoi-rov, -ol-njv 




£BovXeve-(r&ov, -4-o-&t}v " BovXtvoi-o-frov, -oi-a$T\v 


3 PL " 


'• £fiovXevo-v " BovXevoi-ev 




£BovXevo-VT o " BovXevoi-uro 


1 Sing." 


" £BovX€vo-/jlt] v " BovXevol-/AT)v 


2 « " 


" (eBovXeve-ao) £BovXev-ov " (BovXevoi-aro) /3ooAe<5oi-o 


3 " « 


11 iBovXeve-TO " BovXevoi-TO. 



< 115.] CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -(O. 136 

§ 115. Conj ligation of the Regular Verb in -o> 
Preliminary Remarks. 

1. Since pure verbs do not form the secondary tenses (§ 103, Rem.) these 
tenses are supplied in the Paradigm from two mute verbs and one liquid 
verb (rpifi-co, AetV-co, stem AIIT, ^aiv-co, $AN), so as to exhibit a full Conju- 
gation. 

2. In learning the table, we are to note, 

(1) That the Greek forms may always be resolved into, (a) Personal-ending, 
(b) Mode-vowel, (c) Tense-characteristic, (d) Tense-stem, (e) Verb-stem, (f ) 
Augment, or Reduplication. 

(2) The spaced forms, e. g. )8ouAeu-e to u y fiovAev-rjTov, third Pers. Du. Ind. 
and Subj. Pres., may direct attention to the difference between the Historical 
tenses in the Ind. and Opt., and the Principal tenses. 

(3) Similar forms, as well as those that differ only in accentuation, are 
distinguished by a star (*). The learner should compare these together, e. g. 
i8ouAev<r&), 1. Sing. Ind. Put. Act. or 1. Sing. Subj. I. Aor. Act.; f3ovA*v<rcu, 
2. Sing. Imp. I. Aor. Mid., fiovAevo-ai, 3. Sing. Opt. I. Aor. Act., Pov\zV<rcu, 
Inf. I. Aor. Act. 

(4) The accentuation (§ 118) should be learned with the form. The follow- 
ing general rule will suffice for beginners : TJie accent of the verb is as far from 
the end as the final syllable will permit. Those forms, whose accentuation 
deviates from this rule, are indicated by a dagger (f ). 

(5) When the Paradigm is thus thoroughly learned, the pupil may first 
resolve the forms either of jSouAeuw, or any pure verb, into their elements, i. e. 
Personal-ending, Mode- rowel, etc. ; observing this order, viz. /JouAeucrcu is, (1) 
first Pers., (2) Sing., (3| Ind., (4) Put., (5) Act., (6) from fiovXevw, to advise; 
then he may arra *ge the elementary parts of the form, and in the following 
order: (1) Verb-stem, (2) Augment, or Reduplication, (3) Tense-characteristic, 
(4) Tense-stem, (5) Mode-vowel, (6) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel, (7) Per 
sonal ending, (8) Tense-stem with Mode- vowel and Personal-ending. E. g. 
What would be the form in Greek of the phrase, he advised himself using the 
Aor. of the Pres., PovAei-w, to advise ? Answer : The Verb-stem is jSouAeu-, 
Augment, i, thus ifiovAev ; the Tense-characteristic of the first Aor. Mid. is <r, 
thus Tense-stem is i-fiovXev-<r ; the Mode-vowel of the first Aor. Ind. Mid. is a; 
thus, 4-fiovAev-(r-a ; the Personal-ending of the third Pers. Sing, of an Historical 
tease of the Mid. is to ; thus, e-/3ouAeu-<r-a-To. 

Remark. By making himself familiar with the above elements, the pupil 
can construct from the root any form of the verb he may wish. 



136 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -0). 



[f 115 



Tenses. 



Indicative, 



Subjunctive 
of the Principal tenses. 



Present, 

Tense- 
stem: 
BovXev- 



Imperfect, 

Tense- 
stem : 
i-fiovKev- 



PerfectL, 

Tense- 
stem: 
/3e-j8ouAeu-/c 



Pluper- 
fect L, 

Tense- 
stem : 
i-fc- 

8ov\€V-K- 



Perf. II 
Plpf. II 



Aorist I. 

Tense 

stem : 

e-/3ou/\eu-cr- 



Aorist II, 
e'-AtTr- 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 

P. 1. 

2. 
3. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 



D. 



Pov\ev-(0,* I advise, 
&ov\ev-€is, thou advisest, 
Bov\ev-ei, he, she, it advises, 
fiovXev-eTov, ye two advise, 
8ov\ev-€ tov, they two advise, 
BovXev-0/j.ey, we advise, 
BovAev-ere* you advise, 
Bov\ev-ov(ri(u), they advise, 
e-/3ouAeu-oi/,* I was advising, 
e-/3ouAeu-es, thou wast advising, 
e-j3ouAet/-e(j/), he, she, it was adv. 
i-BovXev-erov, ye two were adv. 
i-BovXev-4 t 7] v, they two were adv 
i-Bov\€v-o/xev, we were advising, 
£-Bov\ev-ere, you were advising, 
S-BovXev-ov,* they were advising, 



Bov\ev-a,* I may advise, 

Bov\ev-r}s 

Bovtev-rj^ 

Bov\ev-r)Tov 

B0V\€V-7] TOV 

BovXev-w/xev 

Bov\ev-7)TG 

Bov\ev-a)<ri.(v) 



/3e-/3ouAeu- 
/3e-/8ouAeu- 
Be-BovAev- 
Be-BovXev- 
Be-Bov\ev- 
advised, 
/3e-/3ouAeu- 
Be-Bov\ev 
/3e-/3ouAev- 



K-a, I have advised, 
K-as, thou hast adv'd, 
K-e(v),* he, she, it has a. 
K-arrov, ye two have a. 
K-a tov, they two have 

K-a/xev, we have adv'd, 
K-aTe, you have adv'd, 
K-aai (v), they have a. 



k-slv, I had advised, 
K-eis, thou hadst adv. 
K-et, he, she, it had ad. 
K-eirov, ye two had 



e-/3e-/3ovAeu 
i-B^-Bov\ev- 
i-Be-Bov\ev 
e-/3e-/3ouAeu 

advised, 
i-Be-Bov\ev-K-e it -nv, they two had 

advised, 
e-/3€-/3ouAeu 
i-Be-Bov\€v- 
e-/3e-/3ouAeu 



-K-eifiev, we had adv. 
-K-eiTe, you had adv. 
/c-e a a v, they had a. 



TTe-(p7]V 

i-ire-(pT]v 
i-Bov\ev- 
i-Bov\ev 
i-Bov\ev 
i-BovAev 
e-/3oi;Aeu- 
i-BovAtv 
i-Bovhev 
e-/3ouAei/ 



e-hnr-ov, 

e-Ai7r-es, 

Ind. 



•a, 1 I appear, 
■eiv, 2 I appeared, 
(r-a, I advised (indef.), 
cr-as, thou advisedst, 
<r-e(u), he, she, it adv'd, 
G-aTov, ye two advised, 
a--aT7)u, they two adv'd, 
(T-a/xeu, we advised, 
(T-aTe, you advised, 
■cr-a v, they advised, 
Heft, _ 

etc. declined like Impf. 



Future, 
Bov\zv-ar 



S. 1. 



Bov\ev-<r-w,* I shall advise, 
like the Indie. Pres. 
The inflection of tho 2d Perf. in all the Modes and Participles, is liko that of the 1st Perf. 



Be-Bov\ev-K-a},Imayhavea 
Be-Boutev-K-ys 
Bz-Bov\ev-K-r] 
Be-BovAev-K-7]Tov 
/3e-y8ouAeu-/c-7j tov 

Be-BovXev-K-wfjiev 

Be-Bov\ev-K-7)Te 

Be-Bov\ev-K-c»(ri(v) 



ire-(pi]v-u, I may appear, 



Bov\ev-a-a>* I may advise, 

BovXev-ff-ys 

BovXev-ff-y * 

BovA€v-<t-t)tov 

Bov\ev-(r-T) top 

BovAev-cr-ufxev 

Bov\ev-ar-r)T€ 

Bov\€v-(T-a)(ri(v) 



AiV-w, etc., like the Subj.i 
Pres. 



$ 115.] 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -CO. 



137 



Modes. 



Optative 
i. e. Subj. of Historical tenses. 



/SouAeu-otjUi, / might advise, 

fiovAev-ots 

/3oi/Aeu-oi 

fiovkev-oiTOP 

fiov\ev-o'iTT]v 

fiovAev-oifxev 

fiovAev-oire 

j8ot»Aeu-o i e v 



j8ouAeu-e, advise, fiovXev- 

/3ouAei>-eTa>, let him ad. eiv, 

fZovAev-erov, ye two ad. to 

fiovAev-erav, let them advise, 

both advise, 
ySoi/Aeu-ere,* do ye ad. 
fiovAev-eTOMrav, usually fiovAev-Si/Tovv,* let ther, 



Pe-ftovAzv-K-oijAi, 1 mig. have a. 
fie-ffovAevic-ois 
fSe-(iov\ev-K-oi 
f&e-$ov\ev-K-oiTOP 

fie-fiovAev-K-o irr]V 

Ps-fiovAev-K-oinei/ 
j3e-/3ov\cv-K-oiTe 
/3e-/3ouAeu-«:-o L 6 l' 



Tre-cpriv-oiiiu, I might appear, 
ffovXev-cr-aifjU, I might advise, 
fiovAev-cr-ais, or -etas 
j8oi»Aeu-<r-az,* or -eie(v) 

&0VheV-(T-CUTOV 

ftovAev-a-aiT tj v 
^ovAev-ff-ai/xeu 
fiovAev-a-aiTe 
/8ovAeu-<r-a i e v, or -e i a v 



Anr-oL/xL, etc., like 
Impf. 



the Opt. 



Imperative, 



Participials. 



Innn. Particip. 



fiovAev-ow 
fiovAev-ovo-a 
/SouAet-oj't 
G.f3ovAev-ovTos 

fiovAev-ov<r7)s. 

advising, 



[jSe-zSouAeiz-K-e,*] etc., 
like the Imp. Pres. 
yet only a few Per- 
fects, and such as 
have the meaning 
of the Pres., form 
an Imperative. 



Tre-cprjv-e, appear, 



fiovAev-cr-ov, advise, 
fSovAzv-a-arw 
fiovAev-a-aToi/ 
PovAev-cr-aTGW 

$ovA€v-<r-a.Te 

^ovAev-cr-drccaau, usually -adurcuu* 



£e-j8oi/- 
Aev- 

to have 
advised, 



7re-<p7j- 
vi-vai, 



fiov- 
Aev- 

to 
advise, 



#e-j8ouAei>-/c-£i!st 

f3e-fiovAev-K-v?d\ 

Pe-{iovAev-K-6s'\ 

G. -k-6tos, -k- 

vtas, having 

advised. 



ire-cprjv-ds^ 



/3ovA(v-(T-ds 
fSovAev-a-aca 
fiovAev-(r-au'\ 
Genitive : 
fiovAev-(r-avTOS 
fiovAev-<T-dcr7)s, 
having advised, 



A'nr-e, etc., like 
Imp. Pres. 



the 



Anr- 



\Anr-(l)v,ox;(?a, 6v\ 

G. OUTOS, OVffTjS 



fiovAev- IfiovAev-v-cav, 
<r-eiv, etc. like Pr. Pt, 



/HovAzv-cr-oL/JLi, I woulU advise. 
like the Opt. Impf. 
2 The inflection of the 2d Pluperf. is like that of the 1st Pluperf., both in the Ind. and Opt. 

12* 



138 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN 



[* 115 



i 


U CO 


The 


Tenses. 


Sts § 




a fl m 
S eS S 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive 




fc; ft 




of the Principal tenses. 




S. 1. 


fiovAev-opai, I deliberate, or am 


{iovAev-oofiai, I may de- 




2. 


fiovAev-ri * [aefozsee/, 


fiovAci-r) * [liberate, 


Present, 


3. 


j8ouAeu-6Tat 


fiovAev-r] t a t 




D.l. 


jSoi/Aeu-cfyte&oy 


/SouAeu-^e^ov 


Tense- 


2. 


jSouAeu-ea'iS-oy 


)8oi»Aeu-T7cr l &-oj/ 


stem: 


3. 


fiovAev-e a & o v 


fiovAev i]<T&ov 


/3ovAeu- 


P.l. 


fiovAev-6/j.e&a 


fiovAev-cafiefra 




2. 


flovAev-ea&e * 


fiovAev-riff&e 




3. 


fiovAev-o j/tcu 


^oyAeu-ft/vrat 




S. 1. 


i-fiov\ev-6fA7]i', I was deliber- 






2. 


e-/3oi/Aeu-o u [aft'n<7, 




Imperfect, 


3. 


e-/3oi/Aeu-e t o 






D.l. 


e-jSouAev-^ueiS-oj/ 




Tense- 


2. 


€-/3oi/Aeu-e<r$w 




stem: 


3. 


k-fiovXev-itr&'iiv 




e-/3ouAeu- 


P.l. 


i-fiovAev-6iJ.e&a 






2. 


e-jSouAeu-eafre 






3. 


e-/3oi>Aeu-oj/TO 






S. 1. 


fSe-fiovXev-fxai, I have deliberated, 


fie-fiovAev-fxevos, 8), I may 




2. 


/3e-j8ovAeu-<r a t 


fSe-ffovAev-iizvos ys [have 
fSs-fiovAev-fxtvos rj [delib- 


Perfect, 


3. 


$e-/3ovAeu-T a t 




D.l. 


jSe-^ovAeu-^e^ov 


erated, 


Tense- 


2. 


/Se-ySovAeu-trfroj/ 


Be-f$ovA€V-[/.ev(0 1\tov 


stem : 


3. 


fie-fiovAev-cr & o v #e-/3ouAeu-yUeVa> ^t<w 


fis-fiovAev- 


P.l. 


ySe-jSoi/Aeu-jue^-a 


fie-fiovAev-fAsvoi &fxeu 




2. 


fie-fiovAev-cr&e * 


fie-fiovAev-(jL4voi tfre 




3. 


/3e-/3ouAei/-z/rcu 


fSt-fSovAev-iLevoi Sxti 




S. 1. 


e-/3e-/3ouAev-,u. t]v, 1 had deliber- 


Pluperfect, 


2. 
3. 


e-/3e-/3ouAeu-<ro [atec?, 
e-/3e-/3ouAei/-T o 




Tense- 


D.l. 


e-;8e-/3ouAeu-,ue l 3w 




stem : 


2. 


e-;3e-)8ovA€u-o'i8-oj' 




e-/3e- 


3. 


e-/3e-/3ouAeu-<r 3- 77 y 




/SouAeu- 


P. 1. 


e-^e-jSouAeu-^e&a 






2. 


e-/3e-/3ouAey-(r&e 




3. 


e-/3e-)8ouAei;-j/TO 






S. 1. 


i-fiovAev-a-d fj.T}v, I deliberated, 


jSouAeu-tr-co fiai, I may de- 




2. 


e-/3ovAeu-(T-a> [(indefinite) 


fiovAev-cr-r) * [/derate, 


Aorist I., 


3. 


e-/3ojuAeu-tT-aTO 


&ovAev-<r-r] r a i 




D.l. 


e-/3ouAeu-a'-cS / tA€d-oi' 


fiovAev-(T-ufj.€^ou 


Tense- 


2. 


e-£ouAeu-<r-aor 1 9w 


PovAev-ff-na&ov 


stem: 


3. 


i-fiovAev-cr-d (r&r]i/ 


PovAev-a-r] g&op 


i-fiovAeu-ff- 


P. 1. 


i-^ovAev-cr-d/xe^a 


(3ovAev-(T-cii(Ae&a 




2. 


e-/3ovAeu-a'-ao'&s 


fiovAtv-(r-7)(r&e 




3. 


e-/3ouA«y-<r-a j/to 


/3oi»Aev-<r-co y t a t 


Aorist 11. 


S. 1. 


i-knr-6/j.7)v, I remained, like Ind. 
Imp erf. 


Alir-xdficu, I may remain, 
like Pres. Subj. 


Future, 


S. 1. 


(SovXev-a-ofxai, I shall deliberate, 
like Pros. Indie. 


- 


Fat. Per/., 


S.l. 


/3e-/3ouAeu-0--O;U.at, I shall have de- 




liberated, like Pros. Indie. 





♦ 115.] 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -0J. 



139 



] 


Modes. 


Participials. \ 




Optative 
i. c. Subj. of Hist, tenses. 


Imperative. 


Infin. 


Particip. 






BouXev-ou, deliberate, 
BovXev-ea&ca 

BovXtv-ecr&ov 
BovXev-ea&Gov * 

BovXev-ev&e * 


BovXev- 
eff&ai, 

to deliber- 
ate, 


BovXev-6[A€Vos I 
BovX€v-o/x4vr] 
BovXev-6fxeuou, j 
deliberating, 




BovX£v-4<T&(ti<Tav, usually BovXev-4<r&wv * 




8ovXev-ol/.'.7]v, I might 
BovXev-o i o [deliberate, 
BovXev-o iro 
BovXev-oi/j.e&ov 
BovXgv-okt&ov 
BovXsv-oi<r&iqv 
BovXev-oifxe^ra 
BovXtv-our&e 
BovXev-o ivto 










Be-BovXev-jiievos dit)u, I 
Be-BovXev-(x4vos efrishni't 
Be-BovXev-fj.euos e?t) [de- 
liberate, 
Bs-BovXev-iiivw e'frjrov 
Be-BovXev-fxevo) dr\Tqv 
Be-BovXev-fievot e'(r)(J.ev 
Be-BovXev-fj.4voi etrjTe 
Be-BovXev-fieyo, etriffav 


Be-BovXev-cro, deliberate, 
Be-BovXev-a&co 

Be-BovXev-a&ov 
Be-BovXev-a&ow * 

Be-BovXev-ff&e * 


Be-BovXev- 
tr3-aJ,t to 
have delib- 
erated, 


BeBovXev-fxeuos^ 
BeBovXev-fievn 
BeBovXtv-fj.*- 
vov,~\ having 
deliberated, i 




Be-BovXsv-cr&axrai', usual 


[y Be-BovXcv-a&wv * 












BovXev-rr-aifir) /, I might 
BovXev-a-a i o [deliberate, 
BovXev-cr-a i r o 
BovXsv-v-aiiAe&ov 
BovXsv-(X-aio~&ov 
8ovXev-<r-a l(T&r]v 
BovXev-(r-ai(j.e&a 
8dvXev-<r-cucr&e 
BovXev-cr-a i v r o 


BovXev-cr-ca,* deliberate, 
BovXev-a-da&w 

BovXev-cr-acr&oi/ 
BovXev-ar-da&wv * 

BovXev-cr-acr&e 


BovXev- 
o~-3.<r-&a,i, 
to deliber- 
ate, 


BovXev-a-dfJievos 
BovXev-(r-a[x4vr) 
BovXev-(r-dfj.evov 
having deliber- 
ated, 




BovXev-(r-da&QQ(ray, usual 


ly BovXzv-<r-d<T&(i>v* 




Xnr-oifj.riv,Imight remain, 
like Opt. Impf. 


Anrou,t -eVdw, like Pres. 
Imp. 


Anr-eVi^att 


Xnr-6fi€vos, -o- 
/U6J/77, -ofievou 




BovXev-a-oi/Li-nv,! m. have 
deliberatedJikeOpt.Inrp. 




BovXei- 
<r-e<r&cu 


BovXev-<r-6(JLs- 

l/OS, -7], -ov 




Be-BovXev-(r-oijj.'riv, IsKd 
deliberate, like Opt. Imp. 




Be-BovXev- 
<r-€<r&ai 


Be-BovXev-a-6- 
ixevos, -7], -ov 



140 



VERBS. REMARKS ON TEE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [$ 116 



Tenses. 


2 rA 


The 




Indicative. 


S u b j u n c t i v e 
of the Principal teases. 




Aorist Z, 

Tense- 
stem : 
£-fiovAev-&- 


S. 1. 

9. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


i-fiovk<cv-&-r]i', I was advised. 
i-(3ovAevS-r]S 
e-jSouAeu-S-?; 
4-fiovAev-&-7]TOi' 
i-fiov\ev-&-7) tt)v 
£-fiov\ev-&-T)iJLeir 
e-{5ov\ev-&-T}Te 
£-(3ovAev-&-7i <x av 


fiovAev-&-a, I might have 
fiovAevS-ps [been advised. 

fSovA£V-&-fj 

fiovAev-&-rjTov 
fiovAev-fr-T] t o v 
/3ouAeu-,9--a5 i uej/ 
PovAzv-fr-riTe* 
PovAev-fr-axr^v) 




Future I. 


S. 1. 
2. 


fiov\f:vS7)-(r-ofxai, I shall be adv. 
PovXev-frfj-cr-v, etc., like the 
Ind. Pres.'Mid. 






Aorist U. 


S. 1. 

2. 

irrr 

2. 


£-Tpifi-7]v, I was rubbed, 
£-rpi&-T)s, etc., like the first 
Aor. Ind. Pass. 


TpifS-G>, I may have been rub'd, 
rpL$-fjs, etc., like the first 
Aor. Subj. Pass. 




Fut. 11. 


Tpifi-Ji-cr-o/Acu, I shall be rubbed, 
rpij3-v-<r-ri, etc., like the first 
Fut. Ind. Pass. 






Verbal Adjectives : &ovAgv-t6s, -tj, -6v, advised, 





§ 116. Remarks on the Inflection- ena 

1. The personal-endings of verbs in -co are apocopated forms, as may be 
shown from the older conjugation in -/m, and in part from the dialects (§ 220, 
1); thus, -/jll in the first Pers. Sing. Ind. and Subj. Act. and -ti in the third 
Pers. have disappeared, e. g. fiovAev-w instead of /3oi;Aeu-o- i ui or fiovAev-wfxi, 
/So'jAeu-ei instead of fiovAev-e-Ti (by the dropping of -fa in fiovAtv-o-fju, the o is 
lengthened into eo, and by the dropping of -ii in /3ouAeu-e-rz, e is lengthened 
into ei) ; in the first Pers. Sing, first Aor. Ind. Act., v has disappeared, e. g. 
tfiovAevaa instead of i^ovAevaav ; in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. Act., except 
the first Aor., -£n has disappeared, e. g. fiovAev-e instead of fiovAev-e-fri ; but the 
first Aor. Imp. Act. has a different ending -ov, e. g. fiovAev-(r-ov. 

2. The second Pers. Sing. Act. has the ending -<r&a in the Common lan- 
guage in the following forms only : — 

ola-Sra, nosti, from the Peif. oT5a; fj 8 curb a and yd-naba, Plpf. of olSo^ 
ecp-na&a, Impf.fiom ct>7j,ui, to say ; ij<rfra, Impf. from elfj.1, tobe; ■peicrSra, 
Impf. from dfii, to go. 

3. There is no special form for the first Pers. Dual Act., or for the first 
and second Aor. Pass.; the first Pers. PL is used for this purpose. Comp. 
S 106, Rem. 2. 

4. The original form of the first Pers. PI. Act. is -fie s (not -/xev). Comp 
the Diolccts, § 220, G, and the Latin ending -mus, e. g. ypd<p-o-/j.ss, scrib-i-wiws. 

5. The original form of the third Pers. PI. Act. of the Principal tenses was 



* 116.] 



REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. 



14] 





SIVE. 










Modes. 


Participials. j 




Optative 
i. e. Subj. of the Hist, tenses. 


Imperative. 


Infin. | Participle. j 




f3ovKev-&-eir)p, I might be 
ffovAevS-eiris [advised, 

fiovAev-Sr-si'f]Tov 

fiovAGv-&-eir)nev and -tifxev 
/3ouAet»-d-ei?7Te and -e?re 
fiovAev-&-e? s v 


fiov*.ev-&-r]Ti, be thou ad- 
fiovA£v-&-7]Tco [vised, 
fiovAevS-7]'T ov 

f$OVA€V-&-7]TCOV 
/3ovAeV-&-r)T€ * 

fiovAev-&-7)TOi}<Ta.v 


fiovAev- 
8r-7\vai, 
to be ad- 
vised, 


/3ovAev-&-eist | 
fiovAev-&-e?(ra\ ] 
j3ov\ev-&-4i/\ 1 

Genitive : 
fiovAev-fr-evros 
fiovAev-fr-eio-ris, 

being advised. , 




6ov\ev-&7i-<r-ol/xriv, I should 
be advised, etc., like the 
Impf. Opt. Mid. 




fiovAev- 
oSai 


fiovAev-&r]-o--6- 
fieuos, -rj, -ov 




Tpifi-dTjv, I might be rubbed, 
Tpifi-eiris, etc.. like the first 

Aor. Opt. Pass. 
rptfi-ri'(T-oifj.T)v, I should be 

rubbed, etc., like the first 

Fut. Opt. Pass. 


Tpif3-r)&i, -t?t&), etc., like 
the first Aor. Imp. Pass. 


rpift- 
r\vai 


Tp<j8-6is,t etc., 
like first Aor. 
Part. Pass. 




Tpi$-r\- 


Tpl^-T]-(T-6jJ.eVOS, 
-7], -OV 


fiovAev-reos, -Tea, -t4oj/, to be advised. 



-vtl; when t was changed into a, v was dropped (§ 20, 2), e. g. fiovAevovri = 
fiovAevovo-i = fiovAevovo-i. On the irregular lengthening of the vowel pre- 
ceding the v, see § 20, Rem. 2. 

6. In the first Pers. Sing. Plup. Act., Attic writers use, together with the 
form in -eiu, a form in -77, which arises from the Ionic ending of the Plup. -ea, 
e. g. i(ief$ovAevK-r) instead of -K-eiv. The mode-vowel et in the third Pers. PL 
is commonly shortened into e, e. g. ifiefiovAev-K-e-crav instead of 4fle/3ovAev-K- 
ei-aav. 

7. The first Pers. Sing. Opt. Act. has the ending -fit in verbs in -a>, e. g. 
Traioiv-a /jll, Trai5evo--ai-/.u- : but the ending -77 v in the first and second Aor. Pass., 
according to the analogy of verbs in -fit. This 77 remains through all the per- 
sons and numbei-s, though it is often dropped in the Dual and PI., especially 
in the third Pers. PI. and then, dr]/j.eu = ufxev, enjTe = elYe, eiricrav = etej/, e. g 
TratSeu&eiTijUej/ and irai^v^reip.^v, fivrjar^eiTjTe and -fretre, <paveir)(ra.v X. H. 6. 5, 
25., TrpoKpibeirjaav Ibid. 34., ir€/j.(p8rdT]<rau Th. 1, 38, and (more frequently) 
•&e7ev (-€?€»'). 

8. The Attic Optative endings -77/', -77s, -77, etc., and the third Pers. PI. -ev 
(rarer -r\<rav) which appropriately belong to verbs in -/xi, are used with verbs in 
■«, in the following cases : — 

(a) Most commonly in the Imperf. Opt. uf contract verbs, e. g. rificpT)?, 

<piAo'i7]V, fxiaSrolrjv 5 
(h) In all Futures in -«, e. g. (pavoiriv Soph. Aj. 313., ipoir] Xen. Cy. 3. 1, 

14, from the Fut. <pavw, ipeo ; 
(c) Somewhat often in the second Plup., e. g. iKTre<pevyolr]i/ S. 0. E. 840, 

irpoeA-rjAv^oi-ns X. Cy. 2. 4, 17., Trewoifroiri Ar. Acharn. 940; 



142 VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [$ 116 

(cl) In the second Aor. ax ' 1 '*) 1 ' uniformly {'4(rx ov from £%&>) ; still, not gen 
erally in compounds, e. g. irapdax 01 ^ 1 - 

9. The forms of the first Aoi*. Opt. Act. in -etas, -ete (v), -eiav, instead of 
•ais, -at, -aiv, have passed from the JEolic Opt. in -eia, -eias, etc., into com- 
mon use in all the dialects, and are employed by the Attic writers more fre- 
quently than the regular forms, e. g. fiov\ev<r-eias, -ete(^), -eiav. 

Remark. The second Pers. Dual Act. of the Historical tenses often ends, 
among the Attic writers, in -i\v instead of -ov, e. g. emir-qv PI. Symp. 189, c, 
iiredrjfx.r}crdT7}v Euthyd. 273, e., tfffTTji/ 294, e., iXeydrrju L. 705, d., iKoivwvqad- 
tt\v To. 753, a. On the Dialects, see § 220, 9. 

10. The Middle endings -ecu and -co, when immediately preceded by a 
mode-vowel, drop <r (§ 25, 1), and then coalesce, except in the Opt., with the 
mode-vowel, e. g. 

BovXev-e-crcu BovXev-s-ai = BovXev-r) 

BovXev-rj-ffai BovXev-r]-ai = BovXev-y 

BovXcv-oi-aro BovXev-oi-o 

iBovXev-e-tro eBovXev-e-o = ifiovXei-ov 

iBovXevcr-a-co iBovXevff-a-o = iBovXticr-a. 

11. In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Put. Mid. and Pass., the Attic writers 
use a subordinate ending in -et, together with the ending -p, e. g. BovXev-y and 
-et, fiovAsvff-r) and -et, fieBovXevcr-ri and -et, BovXevfrftcr-r) and -et, TpiBfori, and -et, 
irotfj and -e?, bxfj and -e?. This form in -et passed from the Attic conversational 
language, into the written language ; hence it is the regular form in the Come- 
dies of Aristophanes, but is avoided by the tragedians. Also Thucydides 
and Xenophon use it; other writers, as Plato and the orators, employ both 
forms ; yet three verbs always take the form -et, namely, 

fiovAo/xai BovAcl (but Subj. BoiXy) 

oYop.ai otei (but Subj. o'ty) 

fiipofxcu Fut. oij/ei. 

12. Together with the endings of the third Pers. PI. Imperative Act. and 
Pass. -irco<Tav, -drcoaav, -adrwaav, the abbreviated forms -6vtwv, -durwy, 
-<r&<av, are used; and since they are employed very frequently by Attic 
writers, they are called Attic forms. These abbreviated Imperatives of the 
Active Voice are like the Gen. PL of the Participle of each tense respectively, 
except the Perfect ; and the Middle form -<rSw is like the third Pers. Dual, 
e.g. 

Pres. Act. fiovXeveTwaav and fiovXevSvTwv 

Perf. " TreTroixrerwaav " irz-KOiSSvTwv (Gen. Part. ireiroi^Tcou) 

Aor. I. " /3oi»Aevo"aTCt)(rai/ " /3ouAeucrai'Ta>r 

Pres. Mid. BovXeveoftwcrav " BovXevea&wv 

Aor. " (TKt-tydcr&waav " (TKetyda&uiv. 
The Aor. Pass, ending -iviuv or -titcou, abridged from -rjTwcrau, is found in 
PI. Legg. 856, d. ireix^evrwv, and lb. 737, e. diavenrjfrfiTwv (according to several 
MSS.). 



$ 1 17- j VERBS. ATTIC FUTURE. 143 

13. Besides the simple form of the Subj. Perf. and the Opt. Plup. Act., a 
periphrasis, formed by the Perf. Part, and the Subj. or Opt. of elvai (to be), &, 
e'l-qv, is very frequent, e. g. ireiraib'evKcius &, educaverim ; ireiraideuK^s efyv, educa- 
vissem. Yet this form seems to denote a circumstance or condition, more than a 
simple completed action ; comp. PI. Hipp. M. 302, a. el neK/xti/cds ri, '/) Terpco- 
uepos, >i) ireirX'nyjxevos, 3) &XX' otiovv ireirov&QJS eKarepos 7]/j.wv e'fr], ov kcu aix<p6- 
repoi av tovto ireir6v&oiixev; examples of the simple forms are, aireiXri<pr), PL 
Pp. 614, a., elX-fjcpcaaiv Polit. 269, c, e/.i.TreirTd!>Koi X. An. 5. 7, 26., KaTaXeXoiiroiev 
X. H. 3. 2, 8., aTroKex u py KOi ib. 5, 23., vTrriperiiKoi ib. 5. 2, 3., ireiroii\Koi Th. 8, 
108., es&efiX-riKoiev ib. 2, 48. — The Imp. Perf. docs not often occur in the Act., 
e. g. yiyuve, Eur. Or. 1220. 

14. The Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, append the personal-endings to the 
tense-stem without a mode-vowel, and hence they cannot form the Subj. and 
Opt. (with few exceptions, which will be further treated below, § 154, 9), 
but must also be expressed periphrastically by means of the Participle and 
eivcu, e. g. Treiraidevfievos do, e1r]v, educatus sim, essem. 

15. The third Pers. Ind. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, of pure verbs ends in 
-vrai, -vto, e. g. fSefiovXewTai, efiefiovXevvTo ; but in mute and liquid verbs, this 
formation is not possible. Hence the Attic writers usually express this person 
periphrastically, by means of the Perf. Part, and elffi(v), sunt, %<rav, erant; the 
older and middle Attic writers, however, sometimes use the Ionic forms -arai, 
-aro (instead of -vtoli, -vto)', the o of these endings is aspirated after the 
Kappa and Pi-mutes, and hence changes the preceding smooth Kappa or Pi- 
mute into the corresponding rough (comp. § 144) ; but this a is not aspirated 
after the Tau-mutes ; thus, 

Tpt/3-co, to rub, Perf. re-Tpi[x-(xai 3 J^.TeTpicparai (for rerpifii/Tai) Pip. eT€Tpl<pa.To 
TrXeK-co, to twine, ire-irXey-fiai " 7T67rAe%dTai ( " TceirXenvrai) eTreirXex&TO 

tc£tt-&>, to arrange, re-Tay-fxcu " rerdxarai ( " rerayvTai) eTera.xo.TO 

XwplC-ca, to separate, Ke-x&pio-pcu " /ce%wpiSaTat ( " Kex^p^vrai) eKex^ptMro 
<f)&elp-v, to destroy, e-cp^ap-fiai " ecp&dparcu ( " ecp&apVTai) e<p&dparo. 

16. The two Aorists Pass, follow the analogy of verbs in -fit, and hence are 
not treated here. 



$ 117. Remarks on the Formation of the Attic 
Future. 

1. When one of the short vowels a, e, t, in the Fut. Act. and Mid. of verbs 
in -<roo, -<ro/j.a,L, from stems of two or more syllables, precedes <r, certain verbs, 
after dropping <r, take the circumflexed ending -So, -odfiai; because it was fre- 
quently used by the Attic writers instead of the regular form, this is called 
the Attic Future, e. g. ixdco (usually eXaivw), to drive, ixd-a-a, Put. Att. eXao, -q.s, 
-a, -utov, -oofiev, -are, -Sxri(u) ; reXeca, to finish, reXe-ff-oo, Put. Att. reXw, -e7s, -el, 
'eirov, -ovfiev, -etre, -ov(ri(v) ; TeXe-cr-ofiai (reXeo/xai), TeXodfiai, -ei, -eiTai, etc.; 
KQuifa, to carry, Put. Ko/M-ff-oo, Fut. Att. KOfxiSo, -ie?s, -ie?, -teiTOV, -wvixev, -tene, 



144 VERBS. ACCENTUATION. [^ 118- 

iovai(v) ; KOfiiodfiai, -ie?, -ie?rai, -iovp.e&ov, etc. This Fut. is inflected like the 
forms of contract verbs. 

2. This form of the Put. is found only in the Inch, Inf., and Part. ; never in 
the Opt., thus, reXa, reXsTv, reXwv ; but reXiffoifii. The verbs which have this 
form are the following: (a) ixdcc (iXavvw), to drive; re\ea>, to finish; itaAeia, 
to call; and, though seldom, aXeto, to grind; — (b) all verbs in -i£a> (character. 
$) j — ( c ) a f ew verbs in -0.(00, very generally fiifidfa ; — (d) of verbs in -/xi, all 
in -dvvv /j.i and also a/xcp ievvi> fit, to clothe (a/jupies, -tels, etc.). A few exceptions 
to this Fut. are found even in the Attic dialect, e. g. ixdaoo X. Cy. 1. 4, 20., «=Aa- 
csvtols X. An. 7. 7, 55., reXeaovatv Cy. 8. 6, 3., /caAecets 2. 3, 22., vo/ii<rov(ri 3. 
1, 27. (according to the best MSS.) tyrjQlcreo-fre, Isae. de Cleonym. hered. § 51. 



§ 118. Accentuation of the Verb. 

1. Primary Law. The accent is drawn back from the end of the word 
towards the beginning, as far as the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g. 
fiovXeve, fiovXevo/iat, fiovXevaov, iravcrov, rtyov, but fiovXevets, QovXevetv. On 
the ending -at, see § 29, R. 6. 

2. This law holds good in compounds, e. g. (pipe -rrposcpepe, <pevye eKcpevye, 
\e?ire airoXetire ; also in words in the Subj., when they are not contracted, e. g. 
«aTa<r%co, Kard(rxV s > KaTacrx^f-^v, ima-ircc, iiriairris (but avafico, airocrTco, SiaSw, 
7rapaSw, avafioipev, etc., on account of the contraction, avafidw, ava.pdo0fj.ev, etc.). 
Still, this rule has the following exceptions: (a) the accent cannot go back 
beyond the syllable of the preceding word, which before the composition, had 
the accent, e. g. aw6Sos [air6 the preceding word being accented on the ultimate), 
<rv/nrp6es, eiriax^s, iirides (not dirodos, av/nrpoes, e7ncrxes, eirtSes) ; (b) the accent 
cannot go back of the first two words of the compound, as in the examples 
just quoted, and also o-vvexdos, TrapevBes (not trwe/cSos, but like zkSos ; not 
irdpzv&es, but like ev&es) ; (c) the accent cannot go back of an existing augment 
(this holds of the Impfi, Aor., and Plup. as well as of the Perf), e. g. irposeixov 
like elxov, irapsaxov like eaxov, ££?iyov like f\yov, il-rjv like f,v (not trp6seixov, 
irdpeaxov, e^rjyov, e£rjv) ; so also TrposrjKoi. like ijKOV, airsipyov like elpyov, but 
Imp. aireipye, also acpTxrat, a<p?KTO, like Imai, Tkto. 

Exceptions to the Primary Law. 

3. The accent is on the ultimate in the following forms : — 

(a) In the Inf. second Aor. Act. as circumflex, and in the Masc. and Neut. 
Sing. Part, of the same tense as acute, e. g. Xtireiv (from Xnreetv), Xt-ncav, -6v\ 
and in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. second Aor. Act. of the five verbs, e«re, 
eXbi, eype, Xafie, and t'5e (but in composition, ct7ret7re, airoXa&e, ct7reAfre, e'tsioe). 

(b) Also in the Imp. second Aor. Mid. as circumflex, e. g. Xafiov, &ov (from 

T 1^7] fit). 

Remark 1. In compounds, the Imp. (not Participials) of the second Aor 
Act. draws back the accent in all verbs according to the primary law, e. g. 
e. i :/3aAe, €£eAd-e, en5os, e/c5oT6, cnr68os, air6doTe, fierdSos, fierdSore (yet not olttoSos, 



$ 118.] VERBS. ACCENTUATION. 145 

f*eVa8oy, see No. 2), but e/cj3aAe?j/, eKfiak&v, €K\nre?v, i£e\Swv, etc. But in the 
Imp. Sing, second Aor. Mid. of verbs in -w, the circumflex remains on the 
ultimate in compounds also, e. g. infiaAov, acpitcov, eKAnrov, i-n-iXadrov, cupeAov, 
tveveyKov ; so in verbs in -jxi, when the verb is compounded with a monosylla- 
bic preposition, e. g. Trpodov, iv&ov, acf>ov ; yet the accent is drawn back, when 
the verb is compounded with a dissyllabic preposition, e. g. airSBov, Kard&ov, 
dnr^ou; but in the Dual and PI. of the second Aor. Mid., the accent is in all 
cases drawn back, e. g. e/c/3aAe<r3-e, a7roAaj3e<rfre, 7rpJ5o<r3-e, eVd-ecrd-e, &(pec-&e, 
Kard&ea&e. 

(c) The acute stands on the ultimate in all participles in -s (Gen. -ros), con- 
sequently in all active Participles of verbs in -/xi, as well as in those of the first 
and second Perf. Act. and first and second Aor. Pass, of all verbs, e. g. fie/Sov- 
Aeu/cws (Gen. -6ros), Trecprjvdos (Gen. -6tos), /3ouAet>3-eis (Gen. -evros), rvireis (Gen. 
-eVros), terras (Gen. -dvTOs), ti&sls (Gen. -eVros), SiSois (Gen. -6vros), deixvvs 
(Gen. -vvtos), SiacrTas, e/c^ets, irpodovs, Gen. diaardvros, in&evros, irpodSuros. 

Rem. 2. The first Aor. Act. Part., which is always paroxytone, is an excep- 
tion, e. g. iraideixras, Gen. ircudevcravTos. 

(d) In the Sing, of the first and second Aor. Subj. Pass, as circumflex, e. g. 
Bov\ev&oo, Tptfia) (w being contracted from -ecu). 

4. The accent is on the penult in the following forms : — 

(a) In the Inf. of Perf. Mid. or Pass., of first Aor. Act. and second Aor. 
Mid. ; also in all infinitives in -vcu, hence in all active infinitives according to 
the formation in -fit, as well as in the Inf. of first and second Aor. Pass, and 
of the first and second Perf. Act. of all verbs, e. g. Terixpfrai, PefiovAeva&ai, 
T€Ti/j.rja^aL, ireQiArjcr&cu, ixeiucrdrGxr&ai; — (pvXa^ai, fiovAevcrcu, TifjL?i<rcu, (piXrjcrai, 
uicr&Sxrai ; — AiiricrStai, inSiaSai, diaS6cr&ai : — lardvai, ri&evai, SiSovai, SeLKWvcu, 
(TTrjvai, iKcrrrivca, &e?vai, iK&e?vcu, dovvcu, /xeraSovvai. : — ^ov\ev^rivai, Tpifirjvcu ; 
— jSe^ouAeuftreVat, XeAonrevai. 

(b) In the Participle Perf. Mid. or Pass., e. g. /8e/3ouAeu,ueVos, -fxewrj, -/a<evov, 
TfHifj.7)fj.eyos, Tre(pi\r]fitvos. 

(c) As circumflex in the Dual and Plu. of the first and second Aor. Subj. 
Pass., e. g. fiovAev&wfAev. 

Rem. 3, The three corresponding forms of the Inf. first Aor. Act., Imp. 
first Aor. Mid., and the third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Act., when they consist 
of three or more syllables, whose penult is long by nature, are distinguished 
from one another by the accent, in the following manner : — 

Inf. 1st Aor. A. ^ot/Aew-cu, Imp. 1st Aor. M. /SouAeuo-cw, Opt. 1 st Aor, A. fiovAevercu, 
iroirj<Tai, Trolr](Tai, Troirjffai. 

Bat when the penult is short by nature or long only by position, the Inf. 
first Aor. Act. corresponds with the third Pers. Sing. Opt.,' first Aor. Act., e. g 
0vAa£c» ; but Imp. first Aor. Mid. (pvAa£ou. 

1$ 



14 G VERBS. SYLLABIC AUGMENT. [H 119, 120. 



$ 119. Further vieiv of the Augment and Redu- 
plication. 

1. After the general view of the Augment and Reduplicat ;on 
($ 108, 3), it is necessary to treat them more particularly. 

2. As has been already seen, all the historical tenses (the 
Impf., Plup., and Aor.) take the augment, but retain it only in 
the Ind. There are two augments, the syllabic and temporal. 

§ 120. (a) Syllabic Augment. 

1. The syllabic augment belongs to those verbs whose stem 
begins with a consonant, and consists in prefixing c l to the 
stem, in the Impf. and Aorists, but to the reduplication in the 
Plup. In this way, the verb is increased by one syllable, and 
hence this augment is called the syllabic augment, e. g. j3ov 
kevo), Impf. i-/3ov\€VOV, Aor. k-fBovXevcra, Plup. £-/3e-f3ov\evKew. 

2. If the stem begins with p, this letter is doubled when the 
augment is prefixed (§ 23, 3), e. g. piTrrw, to throw, Impf. eppnrrov, 
Aor. eppuf/a, Perf. eppupa. Plup. ipptcpetv. 

Remark 1. The three verbs fiovAo/xai, to will ; Svvafiai, to be able ; and 
ueAAco, to be about to do, to intend, among the Attic writers take rj, instead of e, 
for the augment ; still, this is found more among the later than the earlier 
Attic writers, e. g. £j3ovAr)&r) / and 7),8ovA-f)&w j £^vudjj.7]u and i]dvvd/uL7]v, idvvri&rip 
and 7)dw7}&r]j/ (but always iSwdafrrii/) ; eytieAAoj/ and fjfieAAov. The Aorist is 
very seldom ruiiAA-qca (comp. X. H. 7. 4, 16. 26). 

, Rem. 2. Among the Attic writers, the augment e is often omitted in the 
Pluperfect ; in compounds, when the preposition ends with a vowel ; in sim- 
ples, when a vowel which is not to be elided precedes, e. g. avafie^Kei, X. An. 
5, 2, 15 ; KaTadeSpa/x^Keaay, X. H. 5. 3, 1 ; KaraAeAenrro, X. Cy. 4. 1,9; Kcfra 
TreTTTdiKei, Th. 4, 90 ; al <rvv&rjKai yeyevrjvro, X. Cy. 3. 2, 24 (according to the 
best MSS.) ; but in the Impf. and Aorists, the syllabic augment is omitted 

1 According to analogy, we may suppose that e is prefixed to all verbs in the 
augmented tenses, whether the verbs begin with a vowel or consonant. If the 
verb begins with a consonant, e appears as an additional syllable, e. g. %-irpar- 
tou, but if with a vowel, e is assimilated with that vowel and lengthens it, if it 
is not already long, e. g. ayw, Impf. iayov = ^you ; ed-eAw, Impf. ie&eAov = ■ftd-e- 
Aov ; 6k4aAoo, Impf. 46k€AAou = &KeAAov. If the word begins with a long vowel, 
it absorbs e, e. g. ^/Actcr/cco , Impf. iyAacntov = ¥iAo.(tkov ; a>3-i£cu, Impf. £w&i£ov = 
&Si£oj/. When the verb begins with e, the augment e is sometimes contracted 
with this into et, e. g. e?x 0J/ > instead of ^xov. 



121, 121.] VERBS. TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 



147 



only in the lyric parts of the tragedies, and here not often ; in the dramatic 
portions it is rarely omitted, and only in the speeches of the messengers (pr)<reis 
ayyeXiKai) ; also at the beginning and middle of the trimeter, and likewise at the 
beginning of a sentence, and even in these cases but seldom. The Impf. 
Xpyvt which, together with exPV") * s use ^ in prose, is an exception. 



§ 121. (b) Temporal Augment. 

The temporal augment belongs to verbs, whose stem begins 
with a vowel ; it consists in lengthening the first stem-vowel. 
This is called the temporal augment because it increases the 
time, e. g. 



a becomes 


■n, 


e. g. "ctyw 


Impf. fyov 


Perf 


•^X« 


Plup. ^%etj/ 


6 " 


V, 


" i\viCu 


" ¥i\iri£ov 


a 


j?A7n/ca 


" T/Airfrcetj/ 


I 


h 


" 't/ceTeuco 


t; 'Ik4t€vov 


cc 


'iKerevna 


" 't/ceTeu/cew 





cu, 


" ajxiXioo 


" wfilXovy 


u 


WfJ.l\T}Ka 


" U>fXlK4]KilV 


V " 


v, 


" wc« 


" "vfipiCov 


" 


"vfipitca 


" 'vfSpltcuv 


ai " 


V> 


" alp4<a 


" rjpovv 


" 


rjprjKa 


" r\p'i)K.siv 


av " 


7]V, 


" av\4(a 


" T]V\OVlf 


" 


rjvhrjKa 


" 1)v\i]K€lV 


01 " 


V, 


" OlKTlfa 


" (pienQov 


" 


tpKTlKCt, 


" CpKTlKeiV. 



Remark. Verbs which begin with tj, t, 0, a>, ou, and et, do not admit the 
augment, e. g. ^ttoo^oi, to be overcome, Impf. TjTT^fiijp, Perf. ^Trrj/xat, Plup. 
7}TT-{][JLr)v ; 'iir6a, to p*ess, Aor. "lirwcra; 'virv6a>, to lull to sleep, Aor. "t/7n/a><ra ; 
0)<p€\4u, to benefit, Impf. axpeAeov ; ovT&£a>,to wound, Impf. ovia&v ; effcw, 
to ?/ze/c?, Impf. el/Co*/, Aor. eT|a ; et/cci^w, to fo'&ew, is an exception, which among 
the Attic writers, though seldom, is augmented, e. g. cha^ou, e?Ka<ra, efoatr/ucu, 
seldom r)Ka(oi/ (e. g. Th. 6, 92. r]Ka£ov, in the best MSS.), rJKao-a, ■pKaar/JLai. 
Also those verbs whose stem begins with eu, are usually without an augment, 
e. g. ^vxofiai, to supplicate, evxow, more rarely -nvx^w^ Dut Perf. 7]ly[iai (not 
eify/uat) ; efyuV/cw, to find, in good prose, always omits the augment. 



$ 122. Remarks on the Augment. 

I. Verbs beginning with & followed by a vowel, have d instead of -n, e. g. 
'dfa, (poet.), to perceive, Impf. *a'Cov ; but those beginning with d, ou, and ot fol- 
lowed by a vowel, do not admit the augment, e. g. 'd^Si^ojucu, to Aave an un- 
pleasant sensation, Impf. , dr]5i(6iJLr]v ; avaivca, to dry, Impf. avaivov ; olaKl£c0,to 
steer, Impf. olaKi^ov ; also di/dAur/cw, to destroy, though no vowel follows d, has 
avaAaxra, dcaXaiKa, as well as av^Xwaa, a^Aw/ca. But the poetic detSw (prose 
£'8<v), to sm(7, and a'icrcrco (Att. aWa>), to ri/s/t, take the augment, e.g. ■fjeiSoi' (prose 
p&w), iji£a (Att. ?J|a) ; o'wfxai, to believe, cp6fj.r]y, etc. does not belong here, since 
the o following oi, is not a pai't of the stem. 



148 VERBS. REDUPLICATION. [$ 123 

2. Some verbs also beginning with oi and followed by a consonant, do not 
take the augment, e. g. olnovpeo), to guard the house, Aor. oiKovprjo-a] olvi^w, to 
smell of wine, Impf. oivi^ov ; olv 6oi, to intoxicate, Pcrf. Mid. or Pass. o\voi\>.ivos. 
and (Zvtojxtvos ; olar pdoo, to make furious, Aor. o'larprjaa. 

3. The twelve following verbs, beginning with e, have et instead of 77 for the 
augment, viz. ido), to permit, Impf. efav, Aor. e 5 /a<ra; i&l(o),to accustom (to 
which belongs also doj&a, to be accustomed, from the Epic eSrw) ; e la a, poetic 
Aor. (stem 'EA), to place (in prose only, Part. Aor. Mid. ead/xwos and etadyievos, 
establishing, founding) ; eXiaaa,to wind; %Xkw, to draw; Aor. uXKvaa (stem 
'EAKT) ; elXov, to take, Aor. (stem f EA) of atpeo?; eTro/xai, to follow ; ipyd- 
£0 fiai, to w;or& ; epiroj, kpirv ^a>, to creep, to go ; ear id 00, to entertain ; e^ &>, to 
ftaye (on the Epic eTjuat, see § 230). 

4. The six following verbs take the syllabic, instead of the temporal, 
augment : — 

&yvvfxi, to break, Aor. ea|a, etc. (§ 187, I). 

aXianopiai, capior, Perf. eaAw/ca and ^Aw/co, captus sum (§ 161, 1). 

h.v Sdvca, to please (Ion. and poet.), Impf. kdvdavov, Perf. e&da, Aor. eadov 

('§ 230.) 
ov pea, mingere, iovpovv, iovprjica. 
a>3-€0», to push, ico&ow, etc. (sometimes without the augment, e. g. Sico&owTo, 

Th. 2, 84; i^wa^aav, X. H. 4. 3, 12 ; &Sei, PI. Charm. 155, c). 
wv 4ofj.au, to buy, Impf. Zoovovpuriv {oovovpn^v, Lys. Purg. Sacril. 108. §4; e£«- 

j/otWo, Aeschin. c. Ctes. c. 33; avroivCi.ro, Andoc. p. 122.), Aor. koivnad- 

fxrjv (see however § 179, 6.), Perf. iojv-nfxcu. 

5. The verb koprd^oo, to celebrate a feast, takes the augment in the second 
syllable, Impf. kdopra^ov. The same is true of the following forms of the 
Plup. II.: — 

EIKfl, second Perf. Zouca, I am like, Plup. icpneiv. 

eXirofiai, to hope, second Perf. eoXwa, I hope, Plup. iojXTretv. ) „ 

EPm, to do, second Perf. eopya, Plup. iojpye tv. ) 

6. The three following verbs take the temporal and syllabic augment at the 
same time, the Spiritus Asper of the stem being then transferred to the e of 
the augment : — 

dp da), to see, Impf. kdopwv, Perf. eojpcuca, kd>pa.p.ai. 

avotyco, to open, Impf. avewyov, Aor. aveoj^a (Inf. avol^ai), etc. 

ahicr Kop.ai, to be taken, Aor. kaXwv (Inf. aXwvcu, a), and 7'iXwv. 



§ 123. Reduplication. 

1. R,e duplication (§ 108, 4) is the repeating the first conso- 
nant of the stem with e. This implies a completed action, and 
hence is prefixed to the Perf., 1 e. g. Xi-XvKa, to the Fut. Perf., 

1 Strictly, wc may say that the first letter of all verbs is repeated in the 
Perf., whether tbc verb begins with a vowel or a consonant. When the conso* 



f 123.] 



VERBS. 



REDUPLICATION. 



149 



e. g. Ke-Kocr/^o-o/xai (from Koa-jxiw), and to the Plup., which, as an 
historical tense, takes also the augment e before the reduplica- 
tion, e. g. Z-pc-fioAevKuv. This remains in all the modes, as 
well as in the Inf. and Part. 

2. Those verbs only admit the reduplication, whose stem 
begins with a single consonant or with a mute and liquid ; but 
verbs beginning with p, yv, yX, fiX,* take only the simple aug- 
ment, except f3\a7TTOi /3e/3Aa<£a, f3\aa(f>r]jjLeoi) (3€J3\a(rcp\r]fJL7)Ka, and 
(3\ao-T&v<i) fiefi\d(rT7]Ka and ij3X.d<TTr]Ka ) e. g. 
AiJco, to loose, Perf. Ae-Au/ca 



&vo), to sacrifice, 
<pvTeva), to plant. 
Xopeucsj, to dance, 
ypd<pa, to write, 
K\iveo, to bend down, 
Kpiuu, to judge, 
irj/ew, to breathe, 
dAa«, to bruise, 
p'nrTa}, to throw, 
yvwplCa, to make known, 
jSAa/ceiJco, to be slothful, 
yXixpWj to carve, 



t4-&vko, (§ 21, 2.) 
Tre-cpvTzvica (§ 21, 2.) 
Ke-xfyevKa (§ 21, 2.) 
y4-ypcupa 
k4-k\iko, 
Ke-KpiKa 
Tre-TrvevKa 
re-^AoKa (§ 21, 2.) 
'4ppi<pa (§ 23, 3.) 

i-yvdiptKa 

£-@Ad.K€VKa 
'4-y\v<pa 



Plup. i-Xe-\vKeiu 

" 4-ire-(pvT€VKeiv 

" i-Ke-xopevK€iv 

" i-ye-ypd<peiv 

" i-Ke-KAbceii/ 

" i-Ke-upiKeii/ 

" i-ire-in/evKeiv 

" e-Te-^Ao/cetj/ 

" 4ppi<p€iv 

" e-yvwpLK€iv 

" c^A^et^. 



3. Besides the verbs just mentioned beginning with p, yv, y8X, 
yA, the reduplication is not used, when the stem begins with a 
double consonant or with two single consonants, which are not 
a mute and liquid, or with three consonants, e. g. 



Qr\\6<ti) to emulate, 
£ep<fa, to entertain, 
tydWco, to sing, 
0"7T€tpW, to sow, 
KTify, to build, 
7TTuo-<ra>, to fold, 
(Trpar-nyio), to be a general, 



Perf. i-0]XcaKa 
" e-£eVw/ca 
" e-\pa\Ka 
1,1 i-GitapKa. 

" %-KTUta 

" e-7TTi»xa 

i-o~Tpa.Tr}yr)Ka 



Plup. i-grjXdoieeiv 

" i-tyd?uceiv 
" i-ffirdpneiv 

" 4-KTlK€lV 

" i-irrvxeiv 

" i-a-TparriyfiKeiv 



nant is repeated, e is joined with it in order to vocalize it. If the verb begins 
with a vowel, the vowel is doubled and the two coalesce, if the initial vowel is 
short, and thus form a long vowel ; but if the initial vowel is long, it absorbs 
the other, e. g. 

dyw, Perf. properly 'daxa — %X a 

eyeipca, " " 44yepKa = tfyepKa 

ot/ceco, " " 6oLK7]Ka = (j>K7]Ka. 

Sometimes when the verb bogins with e, the double e, instead of coalescing 
into -77, is contracted into -ei, e. g. ida, Perf. tfaica, instead of tfaKtz. 

1 "Words beginning with these letters are excepted on account of the dini 
culty of repeating them. 

3* 



150 VERBS. ATTIC REDUPLICATION. [$124 

Remark 1. The two verbs fx i fi v r) a k co (stem MNA), to remind, and ktolo- 
wot, to acquire, though their stem begins with two consonants, which are not a 
mute and a liquid, still take the reduplication, fj.4-fj.u-n/jun, Ke-KTnfxai, i-fj.e-fxvfjiJ.vv, 
i-Ke-KT-hn-nv. The regular form eKT-n/xai, is Ionic, but it is found also in Aesch. 
Prom. 79-2, and in Plato with Ke-KT-nfxai; likewise in Th. 2, 62. TrposeKrrjfxeva 
(as according to the MSS. it must probably be read, though elsewhere, Th 
always uses Kenrnixai). Perfects f jrmed by Metathesis or Syncope, are seem- 
ing exceptions to the rules of reduplication, e. g. Sed/x-nica, ireirrafxai, etc. (§§ 22, 
and 16, 8.) 

4. Five verbs beginning with a liquid do not repeat this 
liquid, but take et for the augment : — 

Xaixfldvw, to take, Perf. etX-ncpa Plup. eix-f)<peiv 

Xayxdva, to obtain. " etX-nxa " elA.7]X eiJ/ 

Xeyw, crvXXeyw, toctllcct. " avveiXoxa, arvveiXeyfxai " o~vveiX6x*i-v 
'PEG, to say, " eXpT\Ka " elprjueiv 

fieipofiai, to obtain, " e'l/xaprai (with rough breathing), it is fated. 

Rem. 2. The regular reduplication is sometimes found in the Attic poets, 
e. g. XeXrifXfxe&a, ^vXXeXey/xevos, also in Xen. i-nriXeXeyixevot, occurs, Cy. 3. 3, 41 
(Altorf, a-rreiXeyfxevoi), and eKXeXex&ai, H. 1. 6, 16. — AiaXeyofiai,to converse, 
has Perf. 8 leiXey/xai, though the simple Xeyw, in the sense of to say, always 
takes the regular reduplication, XeXey/xaL, dictus sum (Perf. Act. wanting) 



§ 124. Attic Reduplication. 

1. Several verbs, beginning with a, a, or o, repeat, in the Pcif 
and Plup. before the temporal augment, the first two letters of 
the stem This is called the Attic Reduplication The Plup. 
then veiy rarely takes an additional augment; e. g. Stoop u>pvkto, 
X. An. 7. 8, 14 ; so rjK-rjKoew, but somethnes aKijKoetv. 

2. The verbs, which in the Attic dialect have tins reduplica- 
tion, are the following : — 

(a) Those whose second stem-syllable is short by nature : — 

aXeca, -w, to grind, ifiew, -a>, to vomit, 

[dX-i]XeKa) aX-i]Xecrfxai ifi-rifxeKa efj.--fjfJ.eo' fiat 

(aX-riXexeiv) aX-riXecr/x-nv efj.--nfxeK.eiv efx-infLea-fx-nv 

ap6(a, -£>, to plough, ixdu (eXavvu), to drive, 

(ap-7]poKa) ap-rjpofxai eX-i]XaKa eX-7]Xa/xai 

(ap-r]p6Keiv) ap-inpofx-nv eX-riXaneiv eX-7)Xa.fxr}v 

'OMOfl, bfivvfxt, to swear, 'OAEfl, 6b\vfxi, to destroy, 

bfi-wfxoKa ofx-wfioafxai bX-d/Xena Perf. II. ftX-wXa ('OAO) 

lifx-(i}fx6Keiv dfx-wfxSo'fi-nv oXctiXexeiv Plup. II. oX-wXeiv 



k 125.J AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN COMPOUNDS. 151 

i\eyX&, to convince, bpvrTw, to dig 

(eA.-77A.e7xa) iK-T)Keyp.ai op-wpvxa op-wpvy/xat and wpvyfiai 

(eA-TjAeyx 6 '*') eX-7)\eyfir}y op-wpu%eiv bp-wpvyjx-qv and wpvyp.r\v. 

Further: e\ljr<rw, to ivind, (eA-7}Aixa), iK-faty/icu (the rough breathing- be- 
ing rejected), and in good usage among later writers, e'lXiyfxai ; o£&> ('OAH). 
to smell, o5-o>5a; cpepw ('ENEKCl), to carry, iv--f)yoxa, ev-f]veyfiai ; itrfrlw fEAfl), 
to eat, e'5-7j5o/ca, eS-rySeo-^a: ; ayai, to lead, Perf. usually r)x a i ^7770x0 (instead 
of 07-7770x0, so as to soften the pronunciation) is later, and is rejected by the 
Atticists as not Attic, though in I/ysias 5 but Perf. Mid. or Pass, always ?>y/j.ai. 

(b) Those which in the second stem-syllable have a vowel 
long by nature, and shorten this after prefixing the reduplication 
(except epetSco) : — 

a\el<pw, to anoint, aicouw, to hear, 

a\-7]Ai(pa aX-^M/J./xai aK-^Koa rJKOvcr/j.ai 

a\-ri\i<pew a\--n\ifj.ix7iv r\ k - 77 n6e iv f]Kov(T/x7}v 

'EAET0H, epxo/Juxi, to come, ipeidw, to prop, 

eA-TjAv&a e p-rj peiKa ip-7ipei<r{.iai 

i\-rj\v&et.v ip-T)pe'iKeiv ip-7}pei<TfXT)v 

ayeipw, to collect, iyelpw, to wake, 

ay-7]y epKa ay-7)yepixat ( iy-rjyepica) iy-^]yepixai 

ay--nyepK.eiv ay-7]yep/xr]v ( iy-7]yepicetv) e 7 - tj 7 epfxn]u. 

So from iyelpw comes the second Perf. iyp-fjyopa (on account of euphony 
instead of iy-r\yopa), I wake, second Plup. Act. iyp-nyopeiv, I awoke. 

Remark 1. The forms included in parentheses are such as are not found 
in good Attic prose. 

Rem. 2. The verb ayw, to lead, forms the second Aor. Act. and Mid., and 
tpepw, to carry, forms all the Aorists with this reduplication ; here, however, the 
reduplicated vowel takes the temporal augment, and that only in the Ind., and 
the vowel of the stem remains pure : — 

&yw, to lead, Aor. II. 777-0701', Inf. ayayelv, Aor. II. Mid. 7]yay6/xr}v ; 
(pepw, to carry (stem 'EPK), Aor. II. fy-eyKov^ Inf. iv-eyiceTv, Aor. I. tfv-eyna, 
Inf. iv-iynai, Aor. Pass. T)v-exfrnv, Inf. iv-ex^rr\vai. 



$ 125. Augment and Reduplication in Compound 
Words. 

1 First rule. Verbs compounded with prepositions take the 
augment and reduplication between the preposition and the 
verb ; the final vowel of prepositions, except ire.pt and rrpo, is 
elided [$ 13, 2, (a)] ; irpo frequently combines with the augment 
by means of Crasis ($ 10), and becomes 7rpou; ex before the 
syllabic augment is changed to e£ ($ 15, 3 ) ; and eV and <rvv 



152 



VERBS. 



REMARKS. 



I* 126 



resume their v which had been assimilated ($ 18, 2), or changed 
($19, 3), or dropped (20, 2), e. g. 

a-Ko-jSaKkco, to throivfrom, Im. air-efiaWov Pf. airo-fiefi\7)Ka Pip. a.Tr-e^efi\7]Ksiv 



nepi-fidWa), to throw around, 
npo-fidWw, to throw before, 
tK-jSaAAw, to throw out, 



Trepi-efiaWoj/ 
( irpo-e^aXKov 
\ irpovfiaWov 
i£-efia\\ov 
aw-eXeyov 
avv-ippnrrov 
iv-^ytyv6[ir\v 
£v-efia\\ov 
crvv-eGKeva^oi/ 



Trepi-PefiXrjKa 
■irpo-fiefikriKa 
Trpo-fizfiXrjKa 
£K-(5l$\f]Ka 

avv-eppicpa 
iy-yiyova 

(rvv-ecriceitaKa 



Trepi-efie(i\ir)Keii> 
jrpo-efiefi\r)Keii/ 
rrpovfiefSX-tiKtiv 

crw-epplcpeiv 
iv-eyeyoveiv 

(rvv-ecrKevdneu/. 



(fv\-\4yo), to collect together, 
crvp-piiTTw, to throw together, 
iy-yiyvo[icu, to be in, 
6/x-j8a\A»> to throw in, 
<Tu-aKevd£c0, to pack up, 

2. Second rule. Verbs compounded with Evs, take the aug 
ment and reduplication, (a) at the beginning, when the stem 
of the simple verb begins with a consonant or with rj or <o ; (b) 
but in the middle, when the stem of the simple verb begins 
with a vowel, except 77 or w, e. g. 

Svs-tvxm, to oe unfortunate, 4-Svs-tvxow Se-oys-ruxTjKa 4-8e-8vs-rvxriKeiv 
8vs-wjr4(a, to make ashamed, i-dvs-dirovu de-Svs-dbirriKa i-de-^vs-air^Keiu 
dvs-apearico, to be displeased, 8vs-7ip4(TTov / dvs-r]p4crrr]Ka Sus-7]ps<rTr]Keiv. 

Remark 1. Verbs compounded with eu may take the augment and redupli- 
cation at the beginning or in the middle, yet they commonly omit them at the 
beginning, and evepyereca usually in the middle, e. g. 

ev-rvx^co, to be fortunate, Impf. -nv-rvx^oy, but commonly €v-tvx*ov 

ev-oox^oixai, to feast well, " ev-ux^firjv 

€i»-ep76Teo), to do good, " sv-YipyiTeov, but commonly sv-epyereov, Perf. 

ev-7)pyeT7]Ka, but commonly ev-epytrriKa. 

3. Third Rule. All other compounds take the augment and 
reduplication at the beginning, e. g. 



Ixv&oXoyiw, to relaA' 
oIko$o[a4(c, to build, 



i/xv&o\6yeoj> 
cfKoSo/xeov 



ue-fiv&oA6yr}Ku 



Thus 7rappr)(TidCo(xai (from Trapp-naria, and this from irav aril prjais), to speak 
openly, Aor. 4-Trappr}aiaadixr)v, Perf. ire-irapprjo-Laa/xaL. 

Rem. 2. 'OSo7roiew has the Perf. didoireirot'TicrSfai, X. An. 5. 3, I. Lycurg. c 
Leocr. § i39, has linroTCTpocp'nKei'. 



J 126. Remarks. 

1. The six following words compounded with prepositions take the augment 
in both places, viz. at the beginning of the simple verb and before the preposi- 
tion : — 



$126.] VERBS. REMARKS 153 

AfjiirexofJUU, to clothe one's self, Impf. 77 J u7retx<fy"7 I '> 1 or o-fiireix- Aor. rjfnrea-x^V^ 
av4xofJ.at, to endure (not aj/e'x«), " ^veixo^w " -rjueax^W 

a.fJL<piyvo4a), to be uncertain, " i]fM<p€yv6ovu and i]fj.(piyv6ovv 

auop&6oo, to raise up, " T)v&pSovv Perf. riuwp&ooKa " ijva>p^oo<ra 

tVoxAeco, to molest, " fycox^ovv " i]uwx^ r l Ka " 7/^xA.rjco 

irapoweoo, to riot, '• iirapcpvovv " ireTrapefvnKa " iirapcfvtj(ra. 

2. The analogy of these verbs is followed by three others, which are not 
compounded with prepositions, but are derived from other compound words, 
viz. 

Ziandia (from liana, food), (a) to feed, (b) to 6e a judge, Impf. SSirJTwv and 
StTjTajj/, Aor. e8i?7T77(ra and SirJTycra ; Perf. SeSiyr-nKa ; Impf. Mid. dirjTcaiJ.'np 

SiaKoveia, to serve (from Sia/cows, servant), Impf. i5ir]K6vovu and 5i7;k(Wuj', 
Perf. deSiy^vrjKa 

atuptcrfi-nrea) (from AM$I2BHTH2), to dispute, Impf. i)ix.$z<r$i\Tovv and r)fi<pi<r- 
firjTovv. 

3. Exceptions to the first rule. Several verbs compounded with prepositions, 
take the augment before the preposition, since they have nearly the same 
signification as the simple verbs, e. g. 

a/x<piyj/o4ea (voia), to be uncertain, Impf. 7\{j.(piyv6ovv, or 7]jx<peyv6ovv (No. 1} 
afjuptevvvfii, to clothe, Aor. rifupietra, Perf. ijfKptecrfjLai 

eVto-TOjuat, to &/20W, Impf. TiTnarTajxiqu 



acpi-nfxi, to dismiss, 
tca&i£w, to set, 
Ka&e&nai, to sit, 
KafrnfJLai, to sit, 
Ka&evda, to sleep, 



a<plovv and rjcptovv, or ii<pieiu [&ik« 

iKd&i£oi' (old Att. also kc&?(oj'), Pf. /ce/ca- 
e/ca3-e^jU7?i/ and /ca^eC- (without Aug.) 
iKa&-f)ixnv and Ka&r)/J.r)v 
iicd&ev$ov, seldom /co^tjOSoj/. 



4. Those verbs are apparently an exception to the first rule, which are not 
formed by the composition of a simple verb with a preposition, but by deriva- 
tion from a word already compounded, e. g. 

ivavriodfiaij to oppose one's self to (from evavrlos) Impf. 7]vavriovfj.7}v 

avTidiKecD, to defend at law ( " avriSiKos) " rjuridtKovv and TjvTeSiicouy 



avrifioKea}, to hit upon ( " avrifioXi)) 

i/ATropdo), to gain by traffic ( " ifx-nopi}) 

ifj.ired6ci}, to establish ( " e/xiredos) 



7]VTlfi6\OVV 
TJ/JLTTOpCOV 

r][xiredow. 



5. Many verbs, however, which apparently are formed only by derivation, are 
treated, even by the best classical writers, as if they were compounded of a 
simple verb and a preposition. Thus, irapavoixew, Trap-nv6fiovu and TrapevSfiow, 
Trap-r)v6ix7)cra, Perf. irapavsv6[irnKa, although it is not from irapd and avowee or 
vofxew, which two verbs are not in use, but from the compound irapdvofios ; so 
further, iyxeipv (from 'ErXEIPOS), to take in hand, Impf. iyex^pow; eTriSv- 
fi e co (from 'EI1I0TMO2), to desire, Impf. iirefrvfiovu ; 4vSrv fi4o fiai, Aor. iue^vfii) 
&r)v, Perf. ivre&iprifiai) KaTnyopioo (from Kariiyopos), to accuse, Impf. Karny6' 
cow, Perf. KaTriy6pr)Ka; Trpo^rvfiov[xai (from irpS&vfios), to desire earnestly, 
Impf. irpov&v/AovfA7}V and irpo^v/xovfir]v; so iyKWfjLid^ciu, irpo(f)7]Teveiv, ivedptveiv, 
e/c/cA7j<na£etj/, VTroTrreveiv, eTrmjSeueti', ifxpavt^eu', <rwepye?v, etc. 

1 So PI. Phaed. 87, 6, according to most and the best MSS. 
* "Eur. Med. 1128, and Aristoph. Thesm. 165. 



154 VE2BS IN -CO. DERIVATION OF TENSES. U$ 127, 128 



Formation of the Tenses of Verbs in -». 

$ 127. Division of Verbs in -co according to the 
Char a c t eris tic. 

Verbs in -co are divided into two principal classes, accord- 
ing to the difference of the characteristic (§ 108, 5) : — 

I. Pure verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel ; these are 
again divided into two classes : — 

A. Uncontracted verbs, whose characteristic is a -vowel, 
except a, e, o, e. g. iraihev-co, to educate; \v-co, to loose ; 

B. Contract verbs, whose characteristic is a, e, or o, e. g. 
Tifjbd-co, to honor ; cpiXe-co, to love ; fiio^o-to, to let out 

for hire. 

II. Impure verbs, whose characteristic is a consonant; 
these are again divided into two classes : — 

k. Mute verbs, whose characteristic is one of the nine 
mutes, e. g. \elir-co, to leave ; 7f\eK-co, to twine ; irefe-co, 
to persuade ; 

B. Liquid verbs, whose characteristic is one of the four 
liquids, A, \x, v, p, e. g. ciyyeSX-co, to announce ; vefx-co, 
to divide ; <f>alv-to, to show ; <ffoeip-co, to destroy. 

Remark. According to the accentuation of the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act., 
all verbs are divided into : — 

(a) Barytones, whose final syllable in the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act. is not 
accented, e. g. \v-u, tt\4k-w, etc. ; 

(t) Perispomena, whose final syllable is circumflexed in the first Pers. ; these 
are consequently contract verbs, e. g. ri/xw, <pt\S>, iakt&v. 

§ 128. Derivation of Tenses. 

All tenses are formed from the stem of the verb, the inflection-endings men- 
tioned above (§ 113), being appended to this. The Primary tenses only have 
a distinct tense-characteristic (§ 110); this is always wanting in the Pres. 
and Impf, the mode-vowels and personal-endings being sufficient; but the 
Pres. and Impf. very frequently strengthen or increase the pure stem, e. g. 
tuttt-o) (pure stem TTn), afxapT-dvco (pure stem 'AMAPT) ; the Secondary tenses 
never admit such an increase, but are formed from the pure stem, and without 
the tense-characteristic; yet, in certain cases (§ 140), they admit a change of 



6 129 j FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS 155 

the stem-vowel. Hence, certain tenses, which are formed from a common stem, 
may he distinguished from each other and classed hy themselves. Tenses, 
included in such a class, may he said to be derived from one another. The 
principal classes are the three following : — 

I. Tenses, which may strengthen the pure stem. These are the Pies, and 
Impf. Act., Mid., or Pass., e. g. 

(pure stem TTn) tvtt-t-w rvir-T-oficu 

e-TVTr-r-op i-TV7r-T-6(j.r]P. 

IT. Tenses, which have a tense-characteristic. These are the Primary 
tenses, e. g. 

(a) First Perf. and first Plup. Act., e. g. (ir4-<ppad-Ka) iri-<ppaKa, £-ire-<pp&- 

K€IV, 

(b) Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass. These do not have the tense-charac- 
teristic; from the Perf. Mid. or Pass, the Fut. Perf. is formed by 
rejecting -fxai and annexing -<ro/*cu, e. g. ri-rvjx-ixaL (instead of rerxnr- 
/uot), ire-TVfx/iTjv, TeTvipofiai (instead of T^rvrrcofxai). The Perf. has 
a short vowel, but the Fut. Act. and Mid. a long vowel, e. g. Kva, 
AeAu/ca, AeAfytat, Xvaco, Xvcro/jLcu, Sew, SzdrjKa, ddSe/xai, 8tj<tw, S^o-o/xai ; 
so the Fut. Perf. has a long vowel, e. g. AeXvaoficu, ded-f)<rofj.cu ; 

(c) First Fut. and Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. rvtya rv\pofj.aL 

e-Tvipa i-Tv^d/j-riv ; 

(d) First Aor. and first Fut. Pass., e. g. i-rv(p-&riv Tvcp-Srriao/Aai. 
III. Tenses, which are formed from the pure stem without a tense-character- 
istic, may yet, in certain cases, admit a change of the stem-vowel. These 
are the Secondary tenses, e. g. 

(a) The second Perf. and second Plup. Act. e. g. re-rvir-a, i-re-TuTr-civ ; 

(b) The second Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. e-Aa&-ov, i-ha&-6uriu from Kav 
&dvo) (pure stem AA0) ; 

(c) Ths second Aor. and second Fut. Pass., e. g. i-riir-rjvj Tinr-rio-ofxcu. 

§ 129. I. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs. 

X. In pure verbs, both Barytoned and Perispomena, the 
tense-endings are commonly appended to the unchanged chai- 
acteristic of the verb, e. g. fiovXev-aw, fiefiovXtv-Ka. Pure verbs 
commonly form no Secondary tenses, but only the Primary 
tenses; the Perf. with k (W), the Fut. and Aor. with a and 3 
(o-g), cm, Srjv, Srjo-o-jjLaL). Pure verbs, however, are subject to the 
following regular change in the stem : — 

2. The short characteristic vowel of the Pres. and Impf., is 
lsngthened in the other tenses, viz. 

X into t, c. g. firjvia), to be angry, firiui-au, i-fxiivlaa, etc. 

ft " 0, " kw\v-c» (v commonly long), to hinder, Kcn\v-aci), Ke-/«t>AtVuH, etc. 



156 



TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. [§ 130 



c into 77, e. g. <pi\4-ca (<pi\a>), to love, <pL\r\-co), 7re-<ptA7?-/ca, etc. 

o " a, " fiicr&o-w (hht&w), to let out for hire, iiiabca-croo, jue-^tVda-Ka, etc. 

d " 7j, " ri/xd-u {rip.S}), to honor, ti/j.7)-<tu), re-ripL-n-Ka, etc. 

Remark 1. d is lengthened into d, when e, i, or p precedes it [comp. \ 43 
1, (a)], e. g. 

ia-co, to permit, id-crco, daaa, elana, efaficu, .tlcfo-nv ; eoTta-co, to entertain, ken id 
ocd ; (pcapd-u, to steal, (peepd-aa ; but iyyvd-cc, to give as a pledge, iyyv-rjacc ; /3oaa>, 
to call out, jSotjcto^cu, ifiorjGa (like 078077 ). 

The two following imitate those in -edw, -Law, -pace, viz. 

nAoa-w, to strike, to thresh, old Att. Fut. dAos-trw ; but usually h\oi)<ru>; 
atcpoa-ofiai, to hear, Fut. aKpodcro/uai, Aor. ^Kpodcrdfirju (like a&poa). 

Rem. 2. The verbs %pa&>, to give an oracle; x/>aoM ai > to use >' and tit pax 
to bore, though p precedes, lengthen d into 77, e. g. xp^op-ai, rpr,(ra. 

$ 130. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs ivith 
a short Characteristic-vowel. 

The following pure verbs, contrary to the rule [h 129, 2) re- 
tain the short characteristic-vowel, either in forming aU the 
tenses, or in particular tenses. Most of these verbs assume a 
or in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, and first Aor. Pass., and in the 
tenses derived from these, and also in the verbal adjectives; 
such verbs are designated by : Pass, with o-. 

(a) -ice. 

Xpice, to sting, Fut. xP" ra, > Aor. expfoa, Inf. xp^ra'- Pass, with <x\ (but xpiu, 
to anoint, Fut. XP™ 03 * Aor. *XP l(Ta i I n f- XP" 7 * "* Aor. M*d. expifrd/A-nv ; Perf 
Mid. or Pass, /cexpj-c-^cu, Kexp^oSrai ; Aor. Pass. ixpi-<r-&Wi verbal adj. 
Xpicros). 

Remark 1. eVafo, to perceive, of the Ionic dialect, belongs here (§ 230). 
The poetie aia is found only in the Pres. and Impf. ("aiov, § 122, 1). 

(b) -ice. 

1. 'Avvw (also old Att. avvrco) to complete, Fut. avuera ; Aor. tfvvaa. Pass. 

with o". 
a pi; o> (also old Att. dpuTa>), to c?ra?« water. Fut. apvcrw ; Aor. 7^piio-a. Pass, 

with o\ 
nyw(O), to close, e. g. ftta eyes, Fut. (jlv<tu>, Aor. eixxxra; but Perf. uifxvKa, to hi 

closed, to be silent. 
ktvlo (v), to spit, Fut. 7TTi5o-w, Aor. e7TTvo"a. Pass, with c (eVru-o'-iSTjj'), verbal 

adj. irTv-(T-r6s. 

2 Tbe following dissyllables in -vw lengthen the short characteristic-vowel 
in the Fut and Aor. Act. and Mid. and in Fut. Perf. Mid., and Sva also in the 
Perf. and Flap. Act.; but they resume the short vcwel in the Perf. and Plup. 



$ 130.] TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. 157 

Act. (except Suo>), Mid. or Pass., in the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and id verbal 
adjectives : — 

Si a, to wrap up, Put. Svcrco Aor. edixra Perf. Se'Swa 545vy.ai Aor Pass, idvfrnv 
& v o>, to sacrifice, " frbaca " e&vaa " tz&vko. T€&vfj.ai " " irvfrnv 
Avu, to loose, ' ; Xvcrci) " eAvca " AeAi/ca AeAvuoi " " eAu37j^. 

Rem. 2. The doubtful vowel u is commonly used as long in the Pres. and 
Inrpf. by the Attic poets ; but in prose it must be considered as short ; hence to 
be accented fxve, irrve, Ave, etc., and not juGe, irrve, Ave, etc. 

(c) -aw. 

Ye Ad a, to laugh, Put yeXatrofiai (seldom yeXacrw) ; Aor. 4y4\dffa. Pass. 

with or. 
e A da (usually iAawa), to drive, Fut. iAaau (Att. e'Aw), etc. See § 158, 3. 
&Aoa>, to bruise, 3-Aa<rw, etc. Pass, with <r (r4^Aa-o--[jLai, e^Aa-a--^^). 
K\dw, to break, /cAacro>, etc. Pass, with <r (/ce'/cAa-o'-juai, eKAd-a-^nv). 
XaAaw, to loosen, xaAatrw, etc. Pass, with c (exaAa-tr-S??;/). 
8afj.dco (usually Sa^a^a), domo, Aor. iSdpeura. Pass, with a. 
irepda, to transport, to sell, Put. irepa<ra ; Aor. iirepacra; Perf. ireir4paKa (but 

irepdw, to pass over, Intrans., Put. irepda-a ; Aor. eWpdcra). These seven 

verbs have a liquid before the characteristic-vowel a. 
(rirdw, to draw, o-wao-a, etc. Pass, with <j (iaird-(r-^7]u) . 
<rX«w, to loose, to open, ayaaa, etc. 

(d) -4a. 

1. AlSeofxai, to reverence. See § 166, 1. 

aKeofiai, to heal, a/ceVo^ai, TjKea-dfiriu ■; Perf. Mid. or Pass. tfK€-<r-p.ai ; Aor. Pass. 

&A e'o>, to grind, to beat, aAe-cr-w, Att., yet seldom aAa ; Aor. ?7Ae<ra; Perf. Mid. or 

Pass. aA4)Ae(rfj.ai (§§ 117, 2, and 124, 2). 
apnea, to suffice, etc. Pass, with <r. 
e>e'o>, to vomit, Put. e/xeVw, etc.: Perf. Act. e^/ie/ca 5 Perf. Mid. or Pass. i/x^/jLea- 

fiat (§ 124, 2). 
ffw, to 6o?7 (usually intrans., and (4vvvfju, usually trans.). Pass, with <r. 
|e'o>, to scrape. Pass with o\ — re\4a>, to accomplish. Pass, with <r (§ 117, 2). 
rp4a, to tremble, -e<ro>, etc.; verbal adj. Tpe-cr-Tos. — x ea, > to P°ur. See § 154, 

Rem. 1. 

2. The following have in some tenses the long, in others the short vowel: — 
alvito (in Attic prose eiraiveoo), to praise, Put. alu4<ra ; Aor. fjveca; Perf. yveica; 

Aor. Pass. -pv4bi]v ; Put. Pass, alve^haofxai ; verb. adj. otVe-roV, -Teos ; but 

Perf. Mid. or Pass, rju-n/xai. 
alp 4 a, to choose, Aor. Pass. rjp4frnv; also rjpJifrnv] atprjcra, rjpvKa, yprjfiai. 
ya/x4a, to marry, Put. 70,10); Aor. 4yn/j.a; Pert' yeyd/xrjKa ; Aor. Pass. 4yafj.r)$rnv 

(I was taken to wife). 
Sew, to fo'/irf, 8770-01, "Svcra, eS-qad^v ; but 5e'5e/ca, Se'Seoat, £§4frnp ; Put. Perf. 

8e8r)(ro/xaL is commonly used for 8<E&Vouai (the latter is used by Dem. and 

later writers). 

14 



t58 VERBS. A0RIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE WITH CT. [$ 131 

<a\4co, to call, Fut. Ka\4crca, Att. KaXw (§ 117,2); Aor. e/caAecra ; Perf. Act 

/cckAtj/co ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. /ce/cATj^ucu, lam called; Put. Perf. /ce/cATjcro/icu, 

I shall be called; Aor. Pass. c/cA^tjj/; Put. Pass. KX-n&rjcroiAcu ; Put. Mid. 

KaXodjACU ; Aor. Mid. iKa\ecrd/j.7]u. 
iro&ew, to desire, 7ro,$e<ro,ucu, Lys. 8, 18, Pl.Phaed. 97, a. ; eW&effa, Isoc. 4, 122. 19, 

17; elsewhere, iro&rjcrco, iiro&n'ru; Perf. Act. TreirSfrnKa ; ireKiSwfxai ; Aor. 

Pass. iTro&ea&r)j'. 
it op 4 co, laboro, Put. irovrjcrco, etc. (<;o w;or&) ; irov4aco (to be in pain) ; Perf. 7re7ro- 

nj/ca in both senses ; Mid and Pass, always have -n, e. g. 4irovno-a.iJi.riu and 

iirov-qSriv, Perf. TreTrdvtyxai. 

[d) -oca. 
kp6co, to plough, Put. dpSacc, Aor ^potra ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ap-fipoficu (§ 124, 
2) ; Aor. Pass. T)p6Srt)v. 



$ 131. Formation of the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and 
the Perf., Pluperf. Mid. or Pass, with a-. 

1. Pure verbs, which retain the short characteristic-vowel in 
forming the tenses, in the Aor. and Fut. Pass, and in the Perf. 
and Piup. Mid. or Pass, (also in the verb, adj.), unite the tense- 
endings $r)v, ix a 1, etc. to the tense-forms by inserting a ($ 130), 
e g. 

re\4-ca 4-Te/\4-cr-frnv Te-TeAe-c-^ucu 

T€\€-o~-&-f)(roixaL e-Te-TeAe-a'-^UTjj/. 

2. Besides these verbs, several others also, which either have 
a long characteristic-vowel in the stem, or lengthen the short 
characteristic-vowel of the stem in forming the tenses, have the 
same formation, viz. 

aKovcc, to hear, Aor. Pass. ■riKov-tT-Srnv, Put. Pass. ctKov-cr-^aofxai, Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, tfnov-ar-ixai, Plup. rjKoi-cr-fjL-ni/; ivavco, to kindle; KeAeuw, to command; 
the Deponent Sicnra/ja/ceAew/icu, to arouse; Kvalco, Kvf]ca, to scratch (i{4Kvcu-cr-[Mai, 
k4kvi\-ct-ix.cu, iKvcu-cr-Srnv , invh-a-Sryv) ; KvXico,to roll; Keico, to stone (e'Aeu-a-iSbji', 
Perf seems to be wanting) ; £uco, to scrape; iraico, to strike; iraXalco, to wrestle 
(4ira\ai-ff-$rnv) ; irAe'co, to sail; irpict), to saw ; Trralco, to strike against, to stum- 
ble; paico (poetic), to destroy ; creica, to shake; vca, to rain, Aor. Pass, v-cr-^rjv. 
I was rained upon, Perf. Pass, v-a-jxai (i(pv-ar-/x4vos, X. Ven. 9, 5), Fut. u<ro/*oi 
(instead of v-ar-^7]-cr-ofiai) ; <pp4cv, to send (only in compounds, e. g. do~<p., 
iK(p., to lead in), Fut. epprjerw, etc., Mid. <pp-f}croiJ.cu, Aor. Pass. 4cppi}-cT-^rnv ; %6co, to 
heap up (/cexw-(r-^a£, ix<*>-o-&yi') ; xp« w ) to 9* ve an oracle ^xpfi-cr-fxai, ixpv-C' 
bTjv, § 129, Rem. 2) ; XP' W > t° anoint [§ 130, (a)] ; ij/auco, to touch («tycu»-(r- i u.at, 
Hippocr.). 



J 131.] VERBS. AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE WITH CT. 15U 

3. The following vary between the regular formation and 
that with a- : — 

y e v a, to cause to taste, Mid. to taste, to enjoy, Perf. Mid. or Pass, yeyev/xai (Eurip.); 

but Aor. Pass, probably iyev-ar-frnv. Comp. yev/ia, but yev-a-reoy. 
dpdu, to do, Fut. opdaw, etc.; Perf. Se'Spd/co; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Se'Spd/xcu and 

Sedpa-ar-fxai (Th.) ; Aor. Pass. iSpdaSyy (Th.). Verbal adjective Spa-<r-r6s, 

Spa-ff-reos. 

frpaiw, to break in pieces, Perf. Mid. or Pass. T&pav-a-ixcu (Plat. r4&pav/j.cu) ; 
Aor. Pass, i&pai-ffr&qy. Verbal adjective ^pav-<r-r6s. 

KXaiu), Att. Kkdca, to weep, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKXav/xai and KenAav-a-fxai. 

KXetw, to shut, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKXeificu commonly, KeKXei-cr-fiai Aristoph.; 
KeKtyixai Tragedians, Thu., sometimes PI., rarely Xen. ; Aor. Pass. e/cAet- 
<r-Srr]Vi Attic £K\r)-(T-frr)v (Th.) ; Fut. Pass. KAci-<r-frf)<roiJ.ai. Verbal adjective 
kAsi-<t-t6s, k\t)-g-t6s. 

koKoiki), to maim, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeK6\ov/j.at and KeKoAov-cr-fiai ; Aor. 
Pass. iicoAov-G-frnv and iicoAov&r)v. 

Kpovw, to strike upon, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKpov/xai and (seldom) Ktupov-a-ficu 
(X. H. 7. 4, 26) ; Aor. Pass. iKpov-ff-frny. 

v4w, to heap up, Fut. j/^o"a>, etc. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ydyn/xcu (y&rj-tr-fjLai doubt- 
ful) ; but Aor. Pass. £vi}-(T-Srr\v (Arrian). Verbal adjective vnr6s. 

vlw (collateral form vf)&o}),to spin, Perf. Mid. or Pass. v4v7]-<T-fiai ; but Aor. 
Pass, ivfariv. Verbal adjective vr}r6s. 

iJ/cStt, to rub, Perf. Mid. or Pass, eif^at and ^7j-<r-fj.ai ; Aor. Pass. £ipr)&n v an d 
ty-i)-<r-2triv (instead of which the Attic writers use ^\prjy/xai, ty-iix&nv from 

4. The following verbs assume o- in the Aor. Pass., but not 
in the Perf. : — 

/jufivf}<TK(o (MNA-il), to remind, Pf. fxefiv^/jLat, I remember, A. P. ipy-fi-ff-frriv 
irvea, to blow, ireiryvfiai (poet.) iirvev-cr-frnv 

Xpdofiai (xp&H- al ): utor 5 Kexpyftai ixp^-o'-^W 

Traiw, to cause to cease, to finish, ireiravfiai £irav-<r-&r}v 

and iTravfr-nv, Trav^a-o/xa. Ion. and Th. Verbal adjective irav-cr-rios. 

5. The following verbs, though they retain the short charac- 
teristic-vowel in the Perf. and Aor. Pass., do not assume o- : — 

Svccy &va, \v<a [§ 130 (b), 2], i\da> [§ 130 (c)], alvew, aipea, Sea [§ 130 (d), 2]. 
apow [§ 130 (e)], x«o [§ 154, Rem. 1], <reva>, to excite ($ 230) 



160 



UNCONTRACTED AND CONTRACT VERBS. [$$ 132-134 



Paradigms of Pure Verbs. 

A. Uncontracted Pure Verbs. 

$ 132. (a) ivithout o- in the Mid. and Pass. 



kwXvw, to hinder. ACTIVE. 


Pres. 


K(o\v-b) 


Perf. 


K€-KC0-\v-Ka 


Put. 


Kb}\v-<XU3 


Aor. 


£-K<x>\v-tra 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 


KooKv-ofiai 


Perf. 


K€-K<&\v-fiaL 


Put. 


K<t)\v-(TOfJ.ai 


Aor.* 


i-Kw\v-<rd- 


PASSIVE. 




Aor. 


i-Ka\v-frriv 


Put. 


KW\D -frflffOfJUU. 



133. (b) with a- in the Mid. and Pass. (§ 131). 



Perf. S. 1. 


/ce-/ceAeu -ar-jxai 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


Mid. 2. 


/ce-KeAeo-<rat 


Ke-Kehev-tro 


Ke-tfeAeO-tr&cti 


or 3. 


/ce-zceAeu-cr-Tcu 


Ke-KGAev-a&u) 


Participle. 


Pass. 1. 


K€-K€\ev-(T-{Xedr01/ 




Ind. D. 2. 


K€-KeAev-oftov 


/ce-KeAeu-trdw 


K€-KeAev-(r-[j.zvos 


3. 


Ke-KeAev-cr&ov 


Ke-Ke\sv-cr&u)V 


Subjunctive. 


P. 1. 


Ke-K€\ev-cr-fjt.e^a 




Ke-Kekev-ff-fievos & 


2. 


Ke-/ceAet>-(T&e 


/ce-zceAeu-cfre 




3. 


Ke-Ke\ev-(T-uevoi el<ri(v) 


Ke-KG\ev-(T&w<ra 


/ or K€-K€\eV-<T&00f] 


Plupf. Q . 
Mid. or b ' i" 
Pass. i- 
Ind. 6 - 


4-K€-K€\ev-(T-iJ.r]v D. e-/ce-/ceAet'-<r- i ue3w P 


e-/ce-/eeAeu-(T-jU,e&a 


4-Ke-KeXev-cro " e-Ke-xeAeu-irSw " 


e-/ce-/ceAeu-(r^e 


£-Ke-Ke\ev-<r-TO " i-Ke-KGXev-a&yv " 


Ke-zceAeu-c-ueVot ^<rc»/ 


Opt. 


/ce-KeAeu-tr-jUej/os €1771' 


Aorist Pass. 


£-Kt\ev-(r-&7iv Future Pass. /ceA 


6u-o'-i^7j(ro y uai. 



B. Contract Pure Verbs. 

§ 134. Preliminary Remarks. 

1. The characteristic of contract pure verbs is either a, e, or (§ 127) ; these 
are contracted with the mode-vowel following. The contraction, which is made 
according to the rules stated above (§ 9, 1.), belongs only to the Pres. and 
Impf. Act. and Mid., because in these two tenses only is the characteristic- 
vowel followed by another vowel. The Paragogic v in the third Pers. Sing, 
Impf. Act. disappears in the contraction. On the tense-formation, see §§ 
129-131. 



? 134.] PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 16.J 

2. The contract forms of verbs in -«o> in the Indicative and Subjunctive are 
the same ; contracts in -6co have the same form for the second and third Pers. 
Sing, in the Indie. Opt. and Subj. viz. -o?s, -c?. 

3. The contracted Infinitive of verbs in -dw, which, in our editions of the 
classics, is more commonly written with an Iota Subscript, is without that letter 
in the ancient inscriptions, being contracted from -aev, e. g. Ti,uai/, not n/x^u. 

4. If only one syllable follows the parenthesis in the paradigm, the termina- 
tion of the uncontracted form is the last syllable in the parenthesis, and the 
syllable after the parenthesis is the termination of the contracted form, e. g. 
rifx(a-(a)ca = Tijxdw, Tt/icD, ri/j.(d-eiy)au = ri/xdeiv, ri/xau) but if more than one 
syllable follows the parenthesis, the syllable, or syllables, after the last hyphen 
is the common ending of the contract and uncontracted forms, the uncontracted 
word embracing all the letters of the form except the vowel after the paren- 
thesis : the contract, all without the parenthesis 



14* 



178 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



[* 13d 



$135. Paradigms of 



ACTIVE. 


m .2 




Present. 


Characteristic o. 


Characteristic e. 


Characteristic o. 


Indica- 
tive, 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


TLfx(d-u)S), to honor, 

rifj.(d-eis)§s 

Tiix{d-ei)3. 

t ifj.(d-e)a-r ov 

TLfi(d-e)a-TOU 

Ti/j.(d-o)w-/j.ev 

Ti i u(a-e)a-T6 

Tiix(d-ov)u-(Ti(v) 


<$>i\{4-(a)S), to love, 

<pi\{4-eis)t7s 

<pi\(4-ei)e7 

(pi\{4-e)e7-rov 

(j)i\(4-e)e7-roy 

<piA(4-o)ov-/j.ev 

<pi\(4-e)e7-7e 

cpi\(4-ov)ov-(ri(v) 


•u<r&{6-Q))w f to let, 
fii<r&(6-eis)o7s 

/.uo-&(6-<e)ov-tov 

/Al<r&(6-€)0V-T0l' 

/j.i(T&(6-o)od-/j.ei/ 

/j.ia&(6-c)ou-Te 

uicr&(6-i)v)od-(ri(i') 


Sub- 
junc- 
tive, 


8.1. 

2. 

3. 

D.l. 

2. 
3. 
P. 1. 
2. 
3. 

"sTT 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 2. 

3. 


Ti/i(o-a>)<2 

Ti/j.(d-r)s)as 

Tijx{d-ri)i$ 

Tl/J.(d-7))a-T0V 
Tl/J.(d-7j)a-T0V 
Tl/J.(d-(l})0J-fJ.€V 

Ti / u(a-77)a-T€ 
Tifj.{d-w)5s-(ri{v) , 


CD 

CD 

Si 
g_ 
3" 
J 5 


<piX(4-(t)}w 

<pi\(4-ris)ijs 

(pi\(4~r))r} 

(pl\[4-7})r\-TOV 

(piX(4-rj)rj-T0v 
(pi\(4-ci})w-/xev 
(piA(4-r))rj-Te 
(pi\{4-<i>)u>-<Ti(v) 


fj.i(T&(/t-r)s)o7s 
/j.KT&{6-ri)o7 

iXlf:.!b{6-T])S)-T0V 

ij..(T&(6-r))a-Tov 
lxicr&{6-w)ob-<ri{v) 


Impera- 
tive, 


ri/j.(a-e)d-Tco 
ri/x(d-e)a-TOU 

Tljx{o.-4)d-T0iV 

Tifj.(d-e)a-T€ 
Tifj.{a-e)d-Tcc(rav, or 

T lll{a-6)w-VTO)V 


<JnA(e-e)€t 
<piA(e-4)ei-T0} 
<pi\(4-e)e7-TOP 
(piX{e-4)ei-Twp 
(pi\(4-€)e7-re 
(pi\(e-4)ei-Too(ray or 
<pi\(e-6)ov-vTO)v 
(piX(4-eip)€iy 


/.ua&(o-e)ov 
jjLicr&{o-4)ov-T(a 

IXl(T&{6-e)0V-T0V 

fj.i<r&(o-4)ov-T(ov 

/JLl<T&(6-€)0V-T€ 

/AL<T&(o-4)ov-Too(rav 
or fu<r&(o-6)ov-vTwv 
[Ai<r&(6-eu')ovi/ 


Infin. 




ri/x(d-eLj/)av 


Partici- 
ple, 


Nom. 
Gen. 


rifi(d-wv)wv 

riix(d-ov)co-cra 
Tifx{d-ov)S>v 
ri/x(d-o)w-vros 
Tiii{a-ov)d>-<rris 


tyi\(4-<av)6bv 

(pi\(4-ov)ov-cra 

<pi\{4-ov)ovv 

(pi\{4-o)ov-vros 

(pi\(e-ov)ov-(rris 


[xi(r&(6-(>)v)G>* 
(xi(T&{6-ov)ov-cra 
jAicr&(6-ov)ovv 
Iai(X&{6-o)ov-vtos 
(jLi(r&( o-ov)ov-<rrjs. 


Imperfect.. 


Indica- 
tive, 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


iTi(x(a-ov)wv £<pi\{e-ov)ovv 
irifx{a-^s)as i<f>i\(e-es)eis 
iriix(a-e)a e<jt>tA(e-e)et 

eTLfj.(d-e)a-roy <i(f>i\(4-e)e7-TOJ' 
iriix( a-4)d-T7)V £<pi\{t-4 ) ei-rnv 
4TL/j.(d-o)w-/xeu \i(f)i\(4-o)ov-iA€i/ 
6TJ|u( a-e)a-Te [e$iA(e-e)e?-Te 
iTifj.(a-ou)ooy 4tyi\{e-ov)ovv 


ifj.icr&-(o-ov)ow 
'i/j.i<r&(o-es)ovs 
'ifj.ia&(o-e)ov 

i/xi(T&( 6-e)ov-rov 
j £fju<T&(o-4) OV-TTjV 

\£fxi<r§r{6-o)ov-[xev 

\i/j.La^(6-e)od-T€ 

\ijxicrt$r{o-ov)ovv 



* 135. 



TARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



163 



Contract Verbs 



MIDDLE. 



Present. 



Characteristic, o. 



Tilx{d-o)S>-imi 

TLfx{d-r))§ 

Tijj.{d-€)a-Tai 

Ti/j.(a-6)d!)-/j.e&oi/ 

Tifj.(d-e)a-<T&ov 

Tifjt.(d-e)a-(r&ov 

Tifi(a-6)co-iJ.e&a 

rtfiid-^a-ffSre 

Tifi(d-o)S>-urai 



Tifx(d-u)u-fjLai 
rin(d-r))q. 

Tl/J.(d-T))a-TCU 

rifj.(a-d!) ) (x>-/xe&oj/ 

Ti/j.(d-r))a-(r&ov 

Ti[x(d-y))a-aSov 

Ti/j.(a-d[>)(i>-/jLe&a 

Ti/j.(d-r))a-cr&€ 

TlfJ.(d-Ct))6o-VTCU 



TJjU(a-ou)< 
ri/x(a-4)d 
Tt,}i(d-s)a~ 
Ti(x(a-4)d- 
Tiju(a-e)a- 
tiix(<x-4)6.- 
rijx{a-4) 



■cr&<a 
<r&ov 
■ttr&ccv 

■ar^aaav, or 
d-<r&wv 



Ti/j.(a-e)a-(r&cu 



rifji.{a-o)ca- 
Ti/j.(a-o)co- 



/xevos 

/M€J'OU 

/x4uov 

fJ.4l/7]S 



Characteristic e. 



<f>ik(4-o)ov-/xai 

(pik(4-r))rj 

$tA(e-e jet-Tat 

(piA(e-6)ov-fAs&ov 

<piA(4-e)e?-(r&ov 

<jt>iA(e-e)et-o-3w 

C[)l\(€-6)0V-fA€&a 

(pi\(4-e)€?-<r&e 
<piX(4-o)ov-vrai 



<pi\{4-to)G)-iiai 
<pi\(4-r})rj 
<pi\(4-i])r}-7 ai 

<pl\(4-T))T)-G&0V 

^tA(e-7j)^-(r3-€ 
(pih(e-a)G)-vTcu 



<pi\(4-ov)ov 
<piA(e-4)et-(T&ei) 
<piA{4-e)e?-o~&ov 
(pi\(€-4)ei-(T&a)v 
<pi\(4-e)e?-(r&e 
<pi\{s-4)ei-(T&a)<Tav, or 
<£tA(e-e)ei-<r3-a>z/ 



</)tA(e-e)e?-cr3-at 



(pi\(e-6)ov-/xei/os 
(piX((L-o)ov-ix4vr) 
<piA{s-6)ov-[Aeuov 
</>t A ( e-o ) ov-fi4vov 
<pi\(e-o)ov-/i4vris 



Characteristic o. 



fiicrSr(6-r))oi 
fu<T&(6-s)ov- 
lxioS(o-6)ov- 

fucr&(6-s)ov- 
/j.icr&(o-6)ov- 
jttto-^(^-e)oi)- 

fAl(T&( 6-0) IV- 



fxai 

rat 

/nefrov 
a&ov 
a&ov 

o&e 



fiicr&(6-r))o? 

Iai<tS{6-t))Gi-tcu 

{jucrS{o-to)d)-IAe&ov 

/j.ia&(6-ri)o0-cr&oi> 

/M<T&(6-r))a>-(r&oj' 

IJ.icr&(o-<i))d!>-iJ.e&a 

IxktS{6-w)5>-vtcu 



fxi(r&(6-ov)ov 
[u<r&(o-4)ov-cr&co 
lu.icr&(6-€)ov-<r&oi' 
fii(r&(o-4)ov-<r&tov 
fju<r&(6-e)ov-cr&e 
lxicr$t(o-4)ov-o , &o)<Tav, or 
/j.ht&( o-4) ov-cr&oov 



fxiaSr ( 6- e ) u-o-&ai 



IAia&( 0-6 ) ov-jxevos 

IAKr&(o-o)ov-/ji4vr) 

[j.ia&{o-6)ov-lisvov 

IxutS(o-o)ov-[x4vov 

fxioS(o-o)ov-[i.4vT}S. 



Imperfect. 



iTijx(a-6)<lo'iJ.7]v 

iri/j.(d-ov)(a 

4Ti/xid-e)a-T0 

iTiix(a-6)ci>-/j.e^ov 

eTifi(d-e)a-<r&ov 

4ri/jL(a-4)d-(T^r]u 

Criy.( u-u ) u>-[j.e&a 



e(j)i\(e-6)ov-fJi.T}v 

i(pi\(4-ov)ov 

e0tA(e-6)et-TO 

4(pi\(e-6)ov-H€&oi/ 

i<piA(4-e)e?-cr&ov 

£(pi\(s-4)ei-o-&riv 

i<piK(e-6 ) ov-fiefta 

e^)tA(e-e)et-o"3'e 

i(pt\(4-o)ov-i/TO 



ifii.<r&(o 
ifiio~&(6 
i/xi<r&(6- 
£lAio~&(o 
£fiio-&(6 
i[uo-&(o 
ilAi(T&(o 



6)ov-/xr]U 
-ov)ov 
e)ov-70 

6)0V-/J.6&0P 
€)0V-0~&0V 

4)ov-<r3rr)v 
6)ov-(Ae&a 
e)ov-<r&e 
o)ov-vro 



164 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



[* 136 



o g « 




Opta- 
tive. 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P.I. 

2. 

3. 


Attic 
Opta- 
tive, 


S.I. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 




Perf. 


Indica- 
tive, 


Plup. 




Fut. 
Aor. 




F.Pf. 



Imperfect. 



Characteristic a. Characteristic 



Tijx{d-oi)^-fxi 
Tifj.{d-ois)<ps 

Tl(A(d-Ol)<p 

Ti/^(a-oi)w-Toy 
t i/x(a-o()cp -Tf\V 
Ti/j.(d-oi)<p-fAej/ 
Ttyu(a-ot)o3-Te 
ri/j.(d-oi)q)-€i/ 



Ti/x(a-oi)cp-rju 

Tifj.(a-o()(x}-r]s 

rifi(a-o()cp-r] 

Tifx{a-oi)a)-7iTov 

Tijj.{a-ot)(a--i]T7]v 

ri/j.(a-oi)ef-7)Te 
Tijj.(d-oi)$-ev 



T€TlfX7]Ka 

ire(pct)pa.Ka 






TllX7\<T(i) 



"xapaffa 



iTifirjca i(pwpa<ra 



(pi\(e-oi.)o7-fiL 
<ptA(e-ois)o7s 
<pi\(e-oi)o7 



(pi\(e-oi)o7- 
(pt\(e-oi)oi- 
(pi\(e-oi)o7- 

<pi\(e-oi)o7- 



rou 

T7)V 

re 



(piA(e-oi)oi 
<pi\(e-oi)oi 
(pi\(e-oi)ot 
(pi\(e-oi)cl 
<pi\(e-oi)oi 
(piA(e-oi)oi 
<pi\(e-oi)ot 
<pi\(e-oi)o7 



7}V 

ys 

V 

r\rov 

7]T7]V 
7JT6 

-ev 



•7T6</' Krjica 



€it^(ptKr]Keij/ 



<pi\y](Tca 



e(pi\rj<ra 



Characteristic o. 



fiKr^(6-oi)o7-/j.i 
(At<r&(6-ois)o7s 
ui<r&(6-oi)o7 

p.icrb{6-oi)o7.Tov 

(MG&(o-Ol)oi-T7}V 
IAL(T&{6-Ol)o7-IXSV 

fj.t<r&(6-oi)o7-Te 
/j.i<r&(6-oi)o7-€v 



fU(T&(o-oi)oi-7)v 
/j.i<r&(o-oi)oi-rjS 
jii(TSf{o-oi)oi-7] 
lxi<r^r(o-oi)oi-riTov 

fjU(T&( O-Ol) Ol-'fjTTJV 

/jU<r&(o-oi)ot-7)fj.ev 

/J.l(T&(o-oi)oi-T)T€ 

/j.i(T&(6-oi)o7-ev 



/xe/.uo'^WKa 



ijX^IXKT^doKSlV 



fAKT&ctxrei) 



ifiia^uffa 



PAS 



Aorist, | iriii'(]Sf7]v i<pa>ps£rr)v \ i(pi\T}^r)v 



i/juoftdbfrr)!/ 



Verbal adjectives : TifiTi-reos, -Tea, -t4ov, <poopa-Teos, -Tea, -TeW, 



$ 136. With short Vowel 



ACTIVE. 



Tenses. 



Present, 

Imperfect, 

Perfect, 

Pluperfect, 

Future, 

Aorist, 



Characteristic 



(nr(d-ca)w, to draw, 

ecrir(a-ov)cw 

ecr-irana 

£<nra.Kziv 

(Tiraaa) 

eWatra 



Characteristic 



TeA(e-to)(5, tocom- 
eTe\(e-oy)ovp[plete. 

irereXiKeiv 

reXu 

ereAetra 



Characteristic o. 



ap(6-a»)w, to plough, 

¥ip{o-ov)ovu 

ap-fyoKa 

ap-r)p6Ktiv 

apScrco 

fjpoara 







PAS 


Aorist, 


f icrird-<r-&7}v 


[ iTeAe-<r-&r}v \ rjpo&rjv I 


Verbal adjectives : <rira-<r-Tios, -Tea, -reov. 



* 136. 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



165 



1 


Imperfect. 


Characteristic a. 


Characteristic e. Characteristic o. 




rifj.(a-oi)ef-fj.7]i' 

Tl/A(d-Ol)(f-0 
Tl{x{d-Ol)cp-TO 

TLfj.(a-oi)cf-/xe^ov 
rifi(d-oi.)(j>-<r&ov 
Tin(a-oi)cp-<rfrr)v 
rifi(a-oi)(f-fi^a 
Tiiu.(d-ot)(j)-<r&e 

Tlfl(d-Ol)^-VTO 


<pi\{€-oi)oi-jX'qv 
<piA(4-oi)o7-o 
<pi\(4-oi)o7-ro 
<piA(e-oi)ol-fji.e&ov 

(pl\(4-Ol)o7-(T&OV 

(pi\(€-oi)ol-(r&7]v 
<pi\(e-oi)oi-[J!.e&a 

<pl\(4-Ol)o7-<Trit€ 
tpl\{4-Ol)o7-VTO 


/Mff&(o-oi)oi-/j.'r)j/ 

fJLlff&(6-Ol)o7-0 

uu(r&(6-oi)o7-To 

IAi<r&( o-oi)oi-fj(.e&ov 

(U(r&(6-oi)o7-(T&oj/ 

IAi(r&(o-oi)oi-<T&y)v 

fiKr^(o-oi)oi-/j.€^a 

fJU<r&(6-oL)o7-<r&e 

/j.icr&(6-ot)o7-vTo 




■ 








Terifirtfiai 
Tre(pdpdfiai 


iT€<pi\r)fMai 


/xefiia^wfjiai 




i-irecpapdfiriu 


iire(pi\r]iJ.T)j/ 


£(jLefj.icr&d>ixr)}/ 




Tt/jL-ftaoiAai cpcapdaofxai 


(piX-fiao/Acu 


fx.i(T^ci)(rofj.ai 




iTi/xrj(rdfj.r)v i<poopa<rd}xriv 


i(pi\7](rdfj.7]v 


i/XKT^(aad/uLr}U 




rerifx-ijaofxai iretpuipdaoixai 


Tre(piX7}crofj.ai 


f/.e[U(7&ct)(rofAai 


SIVE. 


| Future, \ Ti/j.r)&ri<roiJ.ai <po}pa^ri]COfiaL j <pi\7)^<ro/j.aL f /xi(r&a)&ri<ro[xcu 


<Pi\t]-t4os, -Tea, -t4ov, /Attrdw-Teos, -Tea, -t4ov. 



in forming the Tenses. 



MIDDLE 



Characteristic a. 



ffTr{d-o)S>-fiai 

iaTr(a-6)(i-firjv 

effira-a-fiat 

ia"rrd-cr-fji.r]u 

aTrdcrofiai 

ecrira(rd[jL'r)i' 



Characteristic e. 



Te?t.€-o)ov-fiai 

iT£k(e-6)ov-fir]v 

T€Te'A.e-cr-yuai 

eT€Te\4-(r-fji.7)P 

reXov/xai 

eVeA-ec-a^v 



Characteristic o. 



ap(6-o)ov-/j.ai 
i]p(o-6)ov-fir]v 
ap-"f]po[iat 

ap-7ip6fA7]V 

apSffoficu 
7\pocrdfii]V 



SIVE. 






| Future. 


<rira-<T-&'n<roix.ai | TeAe-er-d-^ao/iat 


| apofrf}<ro[icu 


TcAe-tr-Teos, 


-4a, -4ov, apo-r4os, -4a, -4ov. 





166 REMARKS ON THE CONJ. OF CONTRACT VERBS. [f 13') 

Remark. On the formation of the Perf. and Aor. Pass, with a, see'§§ 130. 
131 ; on the omission of the <r in ap-fipo/xai, ripofrnv, see § 131, 5 ; and on the Attit 
Reduplication in ap-ripo/xm, see § 124, 2. The further inflection of eo-7ra-(r-/«», 
t<nra-<r-[A7\v, T€T4Xe-o--/xai, iTercX4-o--jX7]v, is like that of Ken4xev-cr-/Acu, § 133. Oil 
the Attic Put., riX4o-ca = Te\5, -els, etc., TeAeVo^at = reXov /xai, reA?? [el], 
etc., see § 117. 

$ 137. Remarks on the Conjugation of Contract 

Verbs. 

1. The Attic dialect omits contraction only in the cases mentioned under 
§ 9. Rem. 3 ; but verbs in -eo> with a monosyllabic stem, e. g. 7rAew, to sail, irv4w, 
to blow, &4co, to run, etc. are uniformly uncontracted, except in the syllable -« 
(from -eet or -ee), e. g. 

Act. Pr. Ind. irX4w, 7rAe?s, 7rAe?, TrX4ofxev, 7rAe?Te, ttX4ovo'i (v), 

Subj. irX4w % irX4ys, irX4y, irX4wiiev, irX4r]Te, 7rAew<rt(»'), 

Imp. 7rAe?. Inf. irXeiv. Part. it X 4 a v. 
Impf. Ind. eirXeov, eirXeis, eVAei, iirX4o /xe v, eirXeTre, ZirXsov. 

Opt. irX4oi/xi, irX4ois, etc. 
Mid. Pr. Ind. TrX4ofiai, ttX4t}, TTXeirai, TrXe6pe&ov, TrXeia&ov, etc. 

Inf. TrAetb-dw. Part. TrXe6fMevos. Impf. e 7r A e J /i tj y. 

2. The verb Sew, to 6*W, is commonly contracted in all the forms, particu- 
larly in compounds, e. g. to Sow, rov Sovvtos, Siddov/xai, Kar4dovy. But SeT, i* 
?s necessary, and 8 4o/xai, to need, follow the analogy of verbs in -4a, with a 
monosyllabic stem, e. g. to SeW, 84o/acu, SeTcr&cu ; uncontracted forms of Seo/tai 
occur, instead of those contracted into -e i, e. g. SeVrat, SeW&at, eSeVro, Xen., 
and sometimes also forms of other verbs belonging here are uncontracted, e. g. 
etrXeev, X. H. 6. 2, 27 ; ir\4ei, Th. 4, 28 ; <rw4x^v, PL Rp. 379, e. 

3. Several verbs deviate in contraction from the general rules, e. g. 

(a) -ae, -aei, -ay, are contracted into -rj and -y, instead of into -a and -a, e. g. 
C{d-a^ w, to live, (ys, -(rj, -£t?toj/, -Cf/re, Inf. ^jv, Imp. (rj, Impf. e^, -7?s, 
-y, -r\TOr, -TjTTjy, -f/Te ; — 7reii/(a-o>) w, to hunger, Inf. Treii/Tjj', etc.; — St^- 
(a-co)cD, to ^/i/rst, Sii^j/s, etc. Inf. diiprjw. — Kv(a-)G>, to scratcli, Inf. kvt\v ; 
— o- i u(a-o)(S, to smear, Inf. o-^^; — i|/(a-a>)a>, torwfr, Inf. rf^j/; — xp (<*-°) 
w-fxai, to use, xPV-> XPWai, XPV^ca j s0 a-rroxp^H-ai, to have enough, 
aTToxpvcrScu ; — a-jroxpy (abridged from a-n-oxpy), it suffices, Inf. airoxpyv, 
Impf. air4xpv ; — xp(«- w ) 5 ) fo 9™ e an oracle, to prophesy, XPV S > XPV> XPW- 

b) -oo and -oe are contracted, as in the Ionic, into -w, instead of into -ov, and 
-6y into -£, instead of into -o?, e. g. /S t-y (<J - &>) eD, to freeze, Inf. pz7<£j» 
(Aristoph., but piyovv, X. Cy. 5. 1, 11), Part. G. piywuros (Aristoph., but 
piyoivTav, X. H. 4. 5, 4), and piyaxra (Simon, de mulier. 26), Subj. piyiZ 
(PL Gorg. 517, d.), Opt. piy(fV (Hippocr.). 

Remark 1. The Ionic verb l8p6a>,to sweat, corresponds in respect to con- 
traction with piy6a>, to freeze, though with an opposite meaning: Idpwcri, 
ihpcpr\v, ISpwffa, ISpwvTcs. 



$ 138.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF IMPURE VERBS. 167 

4. The following things are to be noted on the use of the Attic forms of the 
Opt. in -t\v (§ 116, 8), viz. in the Sing., especially in the first and second person, 
of verbs in -e« and -6w, the form in -olnv is far more in use than the common 
form, and in verbs in -dca it is used almost exclusively ; but in the Dual and 
PL the common form is more in use. The third Pers. PL has always the 
shorter form, except that Aeschin., 2. § 108, Bekk., uses 5oKoln<Tav. 

5. The verb A o u co, to wash, though properly not a contract, admits contrac- 
tion in all the forms of the Impf. Act. and of the Pres. and Impf. Mid., which 
have -e or -o in the ending, e. g. eAou instead of eAoue. iXodfiev instead of i\ov- 
o/xcv, Mid. AoS/icu (Ao€t, Aristoph. Nub. 835. according to MSS.), Aoutch, etc., 
Imp. \ov, Inf. \ov<t&cu, Impf. iXovfjLvy, eAou, iXovro, etc., as if from the stem 
AOEI2 ; still, uncontracted forms are found, e. g. Xoiofiai, iXo/oi/To (Xen.). 

Rem. 2. On the change of the accent in contraction, see § 30, 2. 



II. Formation of the Tenses of Impure Verbs. 

§ 138. General Remarks. 

Pure and Impure Stem. — Theme. 

1. Impure verbs (§ 127, II.) undergo a variety of changes m 
the stem. In the first place, the stem of the verb is strength- 
ened : — 

(a) Either by an additional consonant, e. g. rvir-T-a, stem TTTI ; upd^-a, stem 
KPAr ; (ppdfa, stem <i>PAA ; and even by inserting an entire syllable, e. g. 
afiapr-dv-u, stem 'AMAPT ; 

(b) Or by lengthening the stem-vowel, e. g. <pevy-w, stem <i>Yr; A^-w, stem 
AA0 ;. T-fiK-ot, stem TAK ; 

(c) Or secondly there is a change of the stem-vowel in some of the tenses; 
this change may be called a Variation (§ 16, 6), e. g. k\4ttt-w, i-KXa-rr-qv, 
Ke-K\o(p-a ; comp. Eng. ring, rang, rung. 

2. The original and simple stem is to be distinguished from 
the strengthened stem ; the first is called the pure stem, the 
last, the impure. The Pres. and Impf. commonly contain the 
impure stem ; the Secondary tenses, when such are formed, and 
specially the second Aor., contain the pure stem ; the remaining 
t enses may contain either the pure or the impure stem, e. g. 

Pres. tutt-t-w, to strike, Aor. II. Pass, i-rvir-nu Put. Act. Ttfyco (tv-k-gw) 



Aei7r-a>, to leave, 
<T<pd(-u>, to kill, 
(palv-<o, to show, 



Act. e-XXir-ov " " Aetyca (Aet7r-(rco) 

Pass. £-<r<p ay- t\v " " atydlpi (acpdy-eco) 
" 4-<pav-r)u " Mid. (p a v-ov/jlcu 



<p&etp-w, to destroy, " " 4-<p&ap-r}i' " Act. <f> S e p - a. 



168 IMPURE VERBS. STRENGTHENING OF THE STEM. [$ 13 f J 

3. When a form of a verb cannot be derived from the Pres. 
tense in use, another Present is assumed ; this assumed Pres. 
may be termed the Theme (#e/xa), and is printed in capitals, 
to distinguish it from the Pres. in actual use ; thus, e. g. <£evyw 
is the Pres. in use, <£YrO is the assumed Pres., or the Theme, 
designed merely to form the second Aor., Z-cpvy-ov. 



\ 139. Strengthening of the Stem. 

1. The stem is strengthened, first, by adding another conso- 
nant to the simple characteristic consonant of the stem, e. g. 

TU7TTC0 ( tvtt) , to strike, Aor. II. Pass, e - t v -k - 77 v 

tolttci} (ray), to arrange, " " i-ra.y-r}u 

Kpdfa (Kpay), to cry, " Act. %-Kpa.y-ov. 

2. Yet the strengthened stem is found only in the Pres. and 
Impf. ; in the other tenses the simple stem appears, e. g. 

Pres. rvTTTO} Impf. irvmov Aor. II. Pass, irvirrjv Put. Ti>ipa> (Tvir<ru). 

Remark 1. The characteristic of the pure stem, e. g. ir in TTI1-H is called 
the pure characteristic ; that of the impure stem, e. g. ttt in tvttt-w, the impure 
characteristic. 

3. The stem of many verbs is strengthened also by length- 
ening the short stem-vowel in the Pres. and Impf. ; this short 
vowel reappears hi the second Aor., and in liquid verbs, in the 
Fut. Thus, 

o is changed into 77 in mute verbs, e. g. (e-\a&-ov) \^a 

a " at in liquid verbs, " (<pav-a>) (paivca 

6 " ci in liquid verbs, " (<p&zp-w) <p&dpa> 

X et in mute verbs, " (e-Xiir-oj/) Aenr» 

t " f in mute and liquid verbs, " (i-r ptfi-7)v) rptfia) 

v v in mute and liquid verbs, " (i-<t>pvy-7)v) (ppvyco 

v eu in mute verbs, " (e-(pvy-ov) (pevycc. 

Rem. 2. This strengthening of the stem distinguishes the Impf. Ind. and 
Opt. from the same modes of the second Aor.; likewise the Pres. Subj. and 
Impf. from the same modes of the second Aor., e. g. %Kpa£ov ittpayov, Kpd(oi/j.i 
Kpayoi/xi, Kpd(ca updyw, Kpd£e Kpdye ; — (\enrov zKiirov, Xs'nroifxi \tjroifJU, \etV« 
Kt-TTO}, A.et7re AtTre. 



? 140.] VERBS. CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEI. 169 

$ 140. Change or Variation of the Stem-vowel 

1. The change or variation of the stem-vowel [$ 138, 1 (c)], 
occurs only in the Secondary tenses, with the exception of a 
few first Perfects. 

2. Most mute and all liquid verbs, with a monosyllabic stem, 
and with € as a stem-vowel, take the variable a in the second 
Aor., e. g. 

rpeir-w, to turn, Aor. II. Act. i-rpair-ov 

KAeV-T-oj, to steal, " Pass. i-KXair-Tju 

Tp4<p-u>, to nourish. " " i-Tpa<p-vy 

<TTpe(p-ci}, to turn } " " £-<tt pa<p-nv 

Ppex-co, to wet, " " i-fipax-W 

84p-<t),toJlay, " " i-odp-vu 

erreAA-&>, to send, " £-<TTa\-7]v 

cnreip-ca, to sow, " " i-o"irap-riu 

<p&elp-w, to destroy, " e-cp&ap-nv 

Ttfiv-w, to cut, " Act. e-Ta.fj.-ov. 

The second Aor. iTafiov (from re^i/a, to cm£), is very rare in Attic prose (Th. 1. 
81. Tdfj.wfj.ep) ; regular erefiov] the second Aor. ifipexrjv (from Ppix ** to wef), is 
poetic and late ; common form 4fip4xSrr\v. The first Acr Pass. 4Tp4(p&t}v (from 
TptiTra}), ifrpecpfrrjv (fr.rpe<pa), icrTpecpfrrjv (fr. aTpecpw), belong more to poetry than 
prose : £ick4<p&nv (fr. k\4tttq>>) Ionic and Eur. Or. 1575 (ic\e(p&eis). A4pa, cire'ipoi, 
and (p&etpcc, have no first Aor. Pass. The variable a does not occur in polysyl- 
lables, e. g. tfyyeXov, 7jyy4Xr]v, HxpeXou, i]yep6fj.vv. 

Remark 1. As this variable vowel distinguishes the Impf. from the second 
Aor. Act., e. g. irpexov (Impf), eTpairou (Aor. II.), in some verbs of this class 
(2, above), whose second Aor. Act. is not in use, the variable vowel does not occur 
in the second Aor. Pass., because that tense cannot be mistaken for the Impf, 
see § 141, Rem., e. g. fixiirw, to see, Impf. e-f3\e-jr-ov, second Aor. Pass. £-f3\4ir- 
7]u (first Aor. Pass, is wanting) ; \4ya>, to collect (in compounds), second Aor. 
Pass. KaTe-\4ynu, avv4\zyr}v (more seldom Aor. I. <rvve\4x&r]v, i^Xix^W j "with 
the meaning to say, always eAe'xSrjz/) ; so also \4tt-co, to peal, t-\4ir-nv (first 
Aor. Pass, wanting) ; tt\4k-q}, to braid, usually i-irXaK-rii/, but also £-irk4K-vv 
riat. (first Aor. Pass. e7rAe'x^7jz/, Aesch. Eum. 259) ; <p\4y-w, to burn, 4-<p\4y-nv 
(more seldom £<p\4x&w) 5 $4yco, to censure, i-\p4y-7jv, first Aor. Pass, wanting. 

Rem. 2. The verb ir A 4\ r t (a, to strike, when uncompounded, retains the 77 
in the second Aor. and second Put. Pass., but when compounded, it takes the 
variable &; thus, £-ir\-f)y-rii>, TrXnyhcrofjai, Qz-TiXdy-nv, KsxTC-irXay-nv, iK-irXayfj- 
aoficu) (T777TW, to make rotten, and t^jkco, to melt (trans.), also have the variable a; 
hence Perf. <re<77j7ra, I am rotten, second Aor. Pass, iadirriv, second Put. Pass. 
erairTjcrofiai 5 Put. r-fj^cc, Aor. eTn^a; second Perf. t4tt\ko., lam melted; second Aor. 
Pass. iTaKfiv; also first Aor. Pass. iT-f}x&nv, PI Tim. 61. b., Eur. Supp. 1033. 
15 



170 VERBS CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEL. [J 140 

3. Liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and with e for a 
stem-vowel, take the variable a, uot only in the second Aor., but 
also in the first Perf. Act., in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and the 
first Aor. Pass., e. g. 

(TTeAAoj, to send, Put. <rre\-u> Pf. e-craA-zca e-crraA-ucu Aor. i-ard\-^r}v 
(pd-dpa, to destroy. Put. <p&ep-u.< Pf. %-(p&ap-Ka e<p^ap-fj.ai. 

The first Aor. Pass. eVTciA&Tyi/ is poetic ; the first Aor. Pass, of Sepw, a-n-eipco, 
(p&zlpca is not in use ; but instead of it the second Aor. Pass., thus, iSdp-nv, 
io-irdpyrii>, icpSrdp7jv. The variable a does not occur in polysyllables, e. g. 
ijyyeXKa, Tjyy4\frnv from b.yy4Wa>, ay7]y€pp.ai, T]y4pfrnv from ayeipcv. Comp. 
No 1. 

4. Mute verbs, which have e in the final stem-syllable of the 
Pres., take the variable o in the second Perf. ; but those which 
have ei, take ot; liquid-verbs, which have e or et in this syllable, 
take o, e. g. 

d4pK0fj.cu (poet.), to see, Sedoprta d4pw, to flay, Sedopa 

rp€(po>, to nourish, rerpo<pa iyeipw, to ivake, iyprjyopa, I awoke, 

Ae;7rco, to leave, \4\onra (nrelpoc, to sow, iairopa 

«retfr<y, to persuade, TreVoj^a, I trust, (p&eipec, to destroy, ecp&opa poetic, ( e^frap/ca, 
prose). 

Ee3i. 3. Here are classed the following anomalous second Perfs. ; eda 
(Epic), tfoo&a instead of e?d-a, to be wont, ela&evcu, elw&ws, Plup. elw&eu>; — 
'EIAH, video, olda, I know; — 'EIKfl, fot/ca, to be Wee, to appear, Plup. ewKtiv;—* 
zXirco (poet.), to cause to hope, eo\ira, I hope, Plup. iaXireiv, I hoped ; — 'EPm, to 
do, eopya, Plup. iwpyeiv: — p-fiy-vv/ju, to break, efipcoya, I am broken (but on o-f]irw. 
see Bern. 2). 

5. The following take the variable o in the first Perf. also, 
contrary to the rule in Xo. 1. 

k\4tttw, to steal, first Perf. /ce/cAo^a, but Perf. Mid. or Pass. Ke/cA e^u/Mit (very 

rare and only poet. KeKKajifuu). 
\4yw, to collect, first Perf. arweiXoxa, e|eiAoxa; but Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

owelXeyficu. 
venirw, to send, first Perf. it 4 it o ft <p a : but Perf. Mid. or Pass. ir4irefi{iai. 
rperv, to turn, first Perf. rerpocpa (like the second Perf of rp4<pu, to nourish), 

and r4rpa(pa ; still, this last form is rare ; the more usual form is r4rpo(pa. 

The variable a in the Perf. Act. is not found elsewhere, and is probably 

here used only to distinguish it from T4rpo<pa, Perf. of rp4<pw. 

G. The following mute verbs with a monosyllabic stem, and 
with c for a stem-vowel, like liquid verbs (No. 3), take the 
variable a in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. ; still, the a is not found in 
(he first Aor. Pass., as is the case in liquid verbs, e. g. 



$ 141.] VERBS. REMARKS ON THE SECONDARY TENSES. 171 

<TTp4<pa), to turn, Pf. Mid. or Pass. ea-rpa/jL/xat, but first Aor. Pass. 4<TTp4<pfrnv 
Tpeirw, to turn, " " t4t pa/xfj-ai, " erpty&Tiv 

Tp4(pu>, to nourish, ' ; " ri^pafiixat, £&p4(pfrni'. 

On kA67ttc<j, see No. 5. 



5 141. Remarks on the Secondary Tenses. 

1. The Secondary tenses differ from the Primary, partly in -wanting the 
tense-characteristic, and consequently in appending the personal-endings (-ou, 
•ofx-nv, -t]v, --110-oij.cu, -a, and -eiv) immediately to the pure characteristic of the 
verb, e. g. i-Xiir-ov, second Aor., but £-Tral8ev-<r-a, first Aor. ; partly, in being 
formed throughout from an unchanged pure verb-stem (except the Perf. which 
prefers a long vowel, see No. 2), e. g. AeiVw, z-Wir-ov, <pevya> Z-<pvy-ov; and 
partly, in taking the variable vowel, e. g. o~rp4<p<a £-<TTpa<p~i}v CTpacp-Tja-o/xai, 
but i-<TTp4cp-frnv (§ 140, 2). 

2. The second Perf. either lengthens the short stem-vowel i into r, a into -n, 
and, when it stands after other vowels or p, into d, e. g. 

Kpd£w, to cry out, second Aor. %-Kpay-ov second Perf. /ce-/cpdy-a 

<pplo-(T<0, to shudder, stem: $PIK (I) " ire-cppiK-a 

3-aAAw, to bloom, Put. &aA-<£ " Te-d7jA-a; 

so, irecp-nva, \4\7)&a from <£AN-a>, AA0-w ; or it retains the long vowel or diph- 
thong of the Pres., e. g. Tr4<pevya from (pevya (but second Aor. Act. ecpvyov), 
T€T7j«:a, <r4a-riTra from TrjKw, (Ttjtt&j (but second Aor. Pass. 4to.kt]v, iaairriv, see 
§ 140, Rem. 2) ; a short vowel occurs only in the cases referred to in § 124, and 
5 140, 4. 

Remark. Those verbs whose second Aor. Act. could not be distinguished 
from the Impf, or at least, only by the quantity of the stem-vowel, have no 
second Aor. Act. and Mid., but only the second Aor. Pass., since this last form 
has a different ending from the Impf, and could not be mistaken for it, e. g. 

ypa(pa> Impf. eypacpov A. I. eypatya A. II. Act. want. A. II. P. eypucp-nv (A. I. P. does 

not occur in classical writers). 
kXTvu " eKXIuov " %K\lva " " A. II. P. iKXivnv (A. I. P. e/cA/f - - 

frnv in Aristoph). 
\pi>XM " Ztyvxov " €\j/v^a ' ; " " £\pvxw, Plat, (epvyqu 

Aristoph. Nub. 1 52 [with the variation \pvxzi<rn] and often in the later writers ; 
A. I. &fix&W, Pla t-)- 

3. The following points, also, are to be noted: (a) There is no verb which, 
together with the second Aorist, forms the three first Aorists; (b) There is no 
verb which has in use at the same time the second Aor. Act. and Mid. and the 
second Aor. Pass. ; but all verbs, which form the second Aor. have either the 
second Aor. Act. and Mid. only, or the second Aor. Pass. only. A single 
exception, in regard to both the particulars specified, is seen in the verb TpeVw, 
to turn, which has three first Aorists together with three second Aorists : eTpanov 
(Ion.), irpairS/jL^u, eTpairriv, erpeipa (the common form in Attic), 4rp^6.)xr)v 
(transitive, e. g. Tptyaa&ai els <pvyi\v, to put to flight), 4Tp4<p^7]i/ (used more by the 



i72 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE-VEKBS. [$ 142 

poets, see § 140, 2) ; but in compounds, e. g. iirtTpe<p&T)i-cu, Antiph. 4. 12G, 4 
127, 5). 

There are but few exceptions to the statement under (b), since the second 
Aor. Act. and Mid. and the second Aor. Pass., occur but rarely, and mostly 
in the poet, dialect, e. g. ztvitov Eur., and iTvinjv ; t/dtrov and eA&njv ; e\ei<p8rr)v, 
and very seldom i\nr6/j.r)v. 

4. It is rare that a verb has both Aor. forms ; where this is the case, the two 
forms are used under certain conditions, namely : — 

(a) The two Aor. forms of the Act. and Mid. have a different meaning, i. e. 
the first Aor. has a transitive meaning, the second Aor., an intransitive. The 
same is time of the two forms of the Perf, where they are constructed from the 
same verb. See § 249, 2. 

(b) The two forms of the Aor. belong either to different dialects, or differ- 
ent periods, or to different species of literature, prose or poetry. Still, in some 
verbs, both forms occur even in prose, e. g. ain)KXax&riv, and usually iTTTjWayTju, 
&Ka.<p&nvcu and frXaffivat, both for ex. in Thuc. Several verbs in p jetry have a 
second Aor. Act., which in prose have commonly a first Aor. only, e. g. ktgivw, 
to hill, Aor. prose, eKTeiva, poet, ztciavov and iKTav. 

(c) The two Aorists stand in such a relation to each other, that the forms 
of one Aorist take the place of the forms of the other not in use, and in this 
way each supplies, respectively, the place of the other, as will be seen under 
the verbs Tifrr)p.i and Sidafju. 



A. Formation of the Tenses of Mute-Verbs. 
§ 142. Classes of Mute Verbs. 

Mute verbs are divided, like mute letters, into three 
classes, according to their characteristic ; in each of these 
classes, verbs with a pure characteristic in the Pres. and 
Impf. are distinguished from those with an impure charac- 
teristic (§ 139, Rem. 1) : — 

1. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Pi-mute (/3, ir, $ pure 

characteristic; ttt ([§ 24, 1] impure characteristic), 
e.g. 

(a) Pure characteristic : irepuir-w, to send ; TpiP-a, to 
rub ; ypd(f>-co, to write ; 

(b) Impure characteristic : twjtt-cd, to strike (pure char- 
acteristic it, pure stem TTII) ; pXairr-w, to injure 
(13, BAAB) ; piirr-co, to hurl (<j>, e PI$). 

2. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Kappa-mute (k, j, x 



* J43.] MUTE VERBS. REMARKS ON THE CHARACTERISTIC. 173 

pure characteristic ; era or Attic tt [§ 24, 1] impure 
characteristic), e. g. 

(a) Pure characteristic : ifkeic-w, to iveave ; ay-co, to 
lead; revx-a, to prepare; 

(b) Impure characteristic: fypiaa-u), Att. (pptrr-o), to 
shudder (pure characteristic k, pure stem $PIK) ; 
rdae-co, Att. rdrr-co, to arrange (y, TAT) ; (Brjacr-w, 
Att. ftrJTT-co, to cough (%, BHX). 

3. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Tau-mute (r, 8, ^, 
pure characteristic ; J [§ 24, 1] impure characteristic), 

e ' g * 

(a) Pure characteristic: avvr-co, to complete; a8-co, to 

sing ; 7ret^-o), to persuade ; 

(b) Impure characteristic : cj>pd^-co, to say (pure charac- 
teristic S, pure stem $PAA). 

§ 143. Remarks on the Characteristic. 

L The following mute verbs in -tttw and -(raw (-tto>) form the Secondary 
tenses, especially the second Aor. Pass., and have for their characteristic : — 

7r: /cA.e7TT-ctf, to steal; kSttt-w, to cut; riirr-a, to strike (second Aor. Passive 
e-K\air-r)v, etc.). 

/8: fiXaTTT-a), to injure, and Kpvirr-a, to conceal (second Aor. Pass. i-fiXa^-rjv 
and £fixd<p&r]v, £-Kpv^--nu and iKpixp&rjv). 

<p : j8a7TT-co, to tinge; Srdivr-<a, to bury; Spvirr-w, to break; pdirr-ca, to sew to- 
gether; piiTT-cc, to cast; atcd-xT-a, to dig (second Aor. Pass. £-fSa<p-riv, 
£-ra.(p-T)v, 4-Tpv<p-7)v, £p-pa<p--nv, 4p-pt(p-7]v and ifip'upfrnv, i-crica<p- 
rfv). 

k: (pptaau, to shudder (second Perf. ire-cpplic-a). 

y: aAAa<r<ra>, to change (second Aor. Pass. aXXay-rjuai, first Aor. Pass. 
a\Aax&wah poetic), /xdaacc, to knead {jxay-rivat), opvaaco, to dig (opvy-rjuai 
and bpvx^wai), TrXyaaa, to strike (i-irX7)y-T]i/, e£e-'jrAd'y-7ji/), Trpaaaw, Att. 
TTpaTTw, to do {iri-irpay- a), acpdfa (Attic mostly acpaTTw), to kill (£-a(pay- 
i\v, rarely, and never in Attic prose, iacpdx&w), rdaaw, to arrange (-rfryefc, 
Eur., elsewhere erdx^-nv), (ppdaaw, to hedge round (£<ppay-7)i/ and icppdxfrriv) ■ 

2. Two verbs strengthen the pure characteristic k by t, like verbs with the 
impure characteristic ttt : — 

•7T6KT-W (commonly ireKrew, also irefaco), to shear, to comb, Put. 7re|«, etc. , 
still, Keipeiv is commonly used for irinTeiv with the meaning to shear, and 
KTeviC^i-v and ^aivziv with the meaning to comb; 

r'iKT-ca (formed from tl-t4k-o>), to beget, Put. re^o/xai, second Aor. Act. 
ere/coi', second Perf reroKa. 

3. The following verbs in -a aw, -ttw have a Tau-mute, not a Kappa 
mute, for the pure characteristic: apixSrTw (non-Attic ap/xoCw), to fit, Put. 
-6aw; — /3A/tt«, to take honey, Put. -law; — fipdaaw (non- Attic /3joa£o>), to 
shake; — £p4aaw, to row, Put. -4a<a\ — rrdaaw, to scatter, Put. -daw, — Tr\da- 
ffu, to form, Put. -daw; — ir t £ <r <r a>, to husk, Put. -law ; — and Poet, l/xdaaw, to 

15# 



174 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. J$ 144 

whip. Fut. -d(T<a y kvwcto-w, to sleep, Fut. *waw ; A e v a a w, to look, Eut. Aef/erw : 
Kiao-o/xat. (poetic, especially Horn., also XiTO(xai),to pray, Aor. iXio-dfirju, 
€\it6/x7]]/ ; viacofiai, vela" ff o y.ai, to go, Fut. veio-Oficu; ko pvo-ffw, to equip 
(Epic Peif. /ce- k 6 p v & -jxai). 

Here are classed derivatives in - w r r w : Xi/xwrTw,to hunger ; oveipwTTw, 
to dream ; vttvwtt w, to be sleepy. 

4. The following verbs in -a<rw vary between the two formations : vdcrcrw, 
to press together, Eut. vd^w, etc. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, vhao-fiai ; verbal Adj. yaaros ; 
— acputrcrw (Poet.), to draw, Fut. -v£w, Aor. tftpvau, rj<pv(rdiJ.7)v. 

5. Of verbs in -£a>, whose pure characteristic is a Tau-mute, commonly 8, 
there are only a few primitives, e.g. '4 ^o fiat, Poet., Ka&4£ofiat, prose, / seat 
myself, 7£a>, commonly ko&ICw, to seat; erxt^co, to separate; %e^&>, alvum 
dejie'ere; yet there are very many derivatives, namely, all in -d(ca and most in 
-i£w, e. g. i&i£w, elicdfa, etc. 

6. Verbs in - (w, whose pure characteristic is a Kappa-mute, commonly y, 
are mostly Onomatopoetics, i. e. words whose sound corresponds to the sense ; 
the greater part of these denote a call, or sound, e. g. ald£w, to groan, Eut. 
edd^ca; aXaXa(w, to shout (avSd^aa^rat, to speak, Aor. wanting in Her.); ypvfa, 
to grunt; ko'c(w, to squeak, to grunt (like a swine), Fut. k<h£w ; Kpd(w, to 
scream, Aor. eicpayov ; Kpdt>£w, to caio, to croak; fiao-ri^w, to whip; 6?>d£w, to 
scratch ; olfiw £w, to lament, Fut. olfiw£ofiai ; bXoXv (w, to cry out, to shout ; pva- 
rd£w, to drag about; ard^w and araXa^w, to trickle; (TTevo^a, to sigh, 
orT7ipi£<»>, to make firm; ari^w, to mark, to p'ick ; crvpi^w, to whistle (Fut. 
cvpi^oixai, etc.; avpicw, etc., later, and not Attic) ; o-<pd£w (Attic mostly crepdr- 
7w),to kill ; <r<pv £w, to throb ; rpi (w, to chirp (rirplya, Ion. and poet.) ; <p X v (w, 
to bubble, and the Poet. f3 d £«, to prate, Fut. j8a£«, third Pers. Perf. Mid. or 
Pass. ^ejSa/cTcu ; f3pt(w, to slumber (fip7£ai) \ 8 at £eo, to divide, to kill ; iXeXl(w, 
to whirl, to tumble; ivapi £w, spolio ; p 4£w, to do (eopya). 

7. The following verbs in - £w vary between the two modes of formation : 
/3 a a t d (w, to lift up, to support, Fut. -daw, etc., Aor. ifiaardx&W ; — oktt d £w, 
to doubt, Surrao-co, from which the verbal Subst. hurray fi6s and SicrTaans ; — vvtr- 
r d £w, to nod, to sleep, Eut. -daw, Aor. ivixrracra, in the later writers vvard^w, 
etc., e. g. Plut. Brat. 36 ; — irai(w, to jest, Eut. irat^ovfiat and irai^ofiat, Aor. 
Att. zircuaa (in later writers eirai£a, Triircuxa), Perf. Mid. or Pass. Att. ir4irato-fiat 
(in later writers ir4iraiyfxai, iiraix^Tfv) ', verbal Adj. iraiGTeos ; — apird (w, to rob, 
Att. apirdaofiat, 7ipira.<ra, etc. (but in the Epic and Common language apird^w and 
-daw, etc., second Aor. Pass, rjpirdy^v) ; — fiv £w, to moan, has II. o, 20. 4ir4ftv^av, 
but in Hippocr. efivaev. 

8. The following verbs in - £w have 77 for a pure characteristic : KXa £«, to 
sound, to cry, Perf. K€-KXayy-a, Eut. KXay£w, Aor. enXayl-a ; — irXd£w (poet.) to 
cause to wander, Eut. irXdy^w, etc. Aor. Pass. iTrXdyx&r}" 5 — <raXiri £w, to blow a 
trumpet, Eut. -iyl~w, etc. (later also -(<rw, etc.) 



§ 144. Formation of the Tenses. 

Mute verbs form the Fut. and the first Aor. Act. and 
Mid. with the tense-characteristic a, and the first Perf. and 
first Plup. Act. with the aspirated 1 endings -a and -elv, when 
the characteristic is a Pi or Kappa-mute ; but with the 

1 The Perf. Act. of all verbs properly ends in net,, but where k is preceded by 
a Pi or Kappa mute, that mute combines with k and is changed into the cor- 
responding rough. On the contrary, a Tau-mute before k is dropped, e. g. 
rervTiKa = rervepa ; irtirpayKa = 7reVpdxa 5 but 7re7rei/ca instead of Treirei^Ka. 



$ 144.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. 175 

endings -/ca, -iceiv, when the characteristic is a Tau-mute ; 
though the Tau-mute is omitted before tc (§ 17, 5). 

Remark 1. For the change of a Tau-mute into <r, before /x in the Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, see § 19, 1 ; for the change of a Tau-mute into <r before t, see § 17, 5, 
but this <t is omitted before <r of the personal-endings, e. g. ireiret<r/xai, -<tt<m, 
irecppacfxai, -<nai ; but second Pers. ireirei-crai, irecppa-tfai instead of 7re7retcr-<r<u, 
Tr4<ppa<r-<rai. The vowels a, i, v are short in verbs which have a Tau-mute as a 
characteristic before endings with the tense-characteristic <r and k (-/ca, -Keiv), 
e. g. <ppd&, <ppa<rto, ecppaaa, ire(ppa.Ka ; 7rAa<rcr«, to form, irXaaca 5 vofx'i(ja, to think, 
iv6fxi<ra ; k Xv£w, to wash, KXv<rw, etc. ; in like manner, short vowels remain short, 
e. g. apfxofa, ripixoKa. 

Rem. 2. On the changes which the mutes undergo by the addition of the 
endings beginning with <r, £-, /x, or t, and before the aspirated endings -a, -elu, 
pee §§ 17, 2 and 3. 19, 1. 20, 1 ; on the lengthening of -e into -e£ before a- of 
verbs in -eudoj or -ev&ca, e. g. aW^S-co, Put. (a"irev5-(r(v) (Tireicrco, Aor. ecnreiffa, 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. eanreio-fxai, see § 20, 2 ; on the omission of <r in endings 
beginning with aS", e. g. KeKpvcp&ai. instead of KeKpty&ai {KeKpv<p<r£rai), ireirXex- 
S-cw instead of ireirXeftai, see § 25, 3 ; on the endings of the third Pers. PL 
Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., -arai and -cito instead of -vrai, -vto, see §§ 18, 
1 and 116, 15 ; on the variable vowel in the Secondary tenses, and in some first 
Perfects and Perfects Mid. or Pass., see § 140 ; on the Att. Put. of verbs in 
-d£c»>, and -ifa, e. g. /3i/3ct£ia, ^ u t- fiifi&ffco, fii$G>, -as, -a, -arov, -5>fxev, etc., KOfxlfa, 
Put. Ko/jucrcD, KOfuv, -ie?s, etc., see § 117. 

Rem. 3. When \x precedes a Pi-mute, which is the characteristic of the 
verb, e. g. in irefxir-w, the fx is rejected in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, before endings 
beginning with fi; thus, irefxir-w, to send, ire-ire fi-jxai (instead of ire-irefxir-fxai, ire- 
ire fxfj.-fj.ai), ireirefxtyai, ireirefiiTTai, etc., Inf. ireirefx<p&aL, Part. ireirefxfjevos ; SO 
KafiTTT-w, to bend down, Ke-Kafj.-fj.ai (instead of Ke-Ka/xir-fxai, /ct Kaixfj.-fj.ai). Also 
when two gammas would stand before /*, one 7 is omitted, e. g. a-cplyy-co, to tie, 
e-ffcpiy-fxai (instead of e-trcpiyy-fxai), ecrcpiy^ai, eacpiyKTai, etc., Inf. eacpiyx^ai, 
Part. e<r<piyfxevos ; SO QeXeyx®, to convince, e£eXi'iXeyfxai (instead of e|eA7?Ae7XA"»> 
i^eX-fiyy/xai), i£eX-qXey£ai, etc. Both the fx and y are here dropped to prevent 
the concurrence of three consonants 



176 



PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 



[i 145 



Paradigms of Mute Verbs. 
* 145. A. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Pi-mute 

(A *■* <£•) 

(a) Pure Characteristic, j3, -k , <p (Put. -ipco). 
rpifia, to rub. 



ACTIVE. 



Pres. 
Impf. 
Perf. 

Plup. 
Fut. 
Aor. I. 



Ind. rpip-w Subj. rptfi-co imp. rp7fi-e Inf. rpifi-eiv Part, rpip-w 

Ind. e-Tpi/3-oi/ Opt. rptfi-OL/xi 

Ind. (re-Tpip-a) re-rplcp-a Subj. re-rpi<p-ca Imp. not used. Inf. re- 

Tpl<p-evai Part, re-rplcp-cos 
Ind. (i-Te-Tpifi-etv) i-re-rpfy-eiv Opt. Te-Tpixp-oifii 
Ind. (rpifi-cra) Tpfyw Opt. Tptyoifxi Inf. iptyeiv Part, rptyav 
Ind. e-Tp4' a Subj. rptyca Opt. vptyaipai Imp. Tp7\poi/ Inf. rp ' fat 

Part, rptyas. 



MIDDLE. 



Pres. 
Impf. 



Ind. Tpip-opLcu Subj. TpifS-uixai Imp. rpifi-ov Inf. Tpifi-ea&ai Part. 

rpr/3-o / uej>os' 
Ind. i-TpIfi-o/xriv Opt. rpI/3-olfji.riv 



Perf. 



Ind. 


S. 


1. 




2. 




3. 


D 


1. 




2. 




3. 


P. 


1. 




2. 




3. 



(re-TpLfi-jAcu) 
re-rpi/x-fiai 
re-rpixpai 
Te-rpnr-Tcu 
re-rpifM-fxe^rou 
Te-Tpicp-frov 
Te-rpicpSov 
Te-Tpijx-iAe&a. 
t e-TpL(p-&6 
Te-rpLu-fieuoi elcn(i') 
or T6-T pi<p-a.Tai 



Imperative. 
(re-Tpifi-ao) 
Te-rpiipo 
Te-Tpi<p-&(o 

Te-rpi<p-&oi> 
Te-rpi<p-&a,v 

re-rpicp-Sfe 
T6-rpi(p-&o}(rav 
or Te-Tpi<p-&Gov 



Infinitive. 
(Te-Tp?/3-d-cu) 
Te-TpI^-ftku 

Participle. 
7^-Tpifx-y.evos, -7j, -ov 

Subjunctive. 
re-rpifA-fJievos 5 



Plup. 
Ind. 

Opt. 



S. 1. 

2. 
3. 



i-re-Tpifj.-[j.7]u D. i-Te-Tpi/x-fxe^ov P. i-T€-rpifj.-fie^a 
i-Te-rpnpo e-re rpi<p-$rov i-rs-rpicp-^e 

i-Tt-TpLTT-ro i-Te-Tpi<p-$rr}V re-TpiiJ.-/x4voL f,(Tav 

Te-rpL/JL-jiiEuos etrjv [or i-re-rpup-aTO 



Eut. 
Aor. I. 

F. Pf. 



Ind. rptyofxai Opt. Tpi^OL/jniv Inf. TptiJ/ecrS-ai Part. rp^S/xevos 

Ind. i-Tpi\\idfj.riv Subj. Tpi\pw(j.cu Opt. rpL^aiixriv Imp. rptyai Inf. 

rptyaa&ai Part. TpL^ajxevos 
Ind. Te-TptyojAai Opt. re-Tpt\poifJ.fjv Inf. Te-Tptyecd-ai Part. rc-rp^J- 



PASSIVE. 



Aor. I. 

Fut. I. 
A. II. 
F. II. 



Ind. {t-Tpi$-frr]v) £-Tp'i<p-Srnv Subj. Tpi<p-&co Opt. Tpicp-^reiriu Inf. 

Tptcp-frrjvaL Imp. rpi(p-&r)Ti Part. rpi<p-&eis, (instead of I. Aor. 

Pass., commonly II. Aor. Pass.) 
Ind. rpLcp-^-fiffo/xai Opt. Tp^p-^Tjaoi/xTju Inf. rpup-frriaeaSai Part. Tpi(p- 

Ind. e-rpt)8-7?j/ Subj. Tptfi-S> Opt. Tptfi-eiriv Imp. rpifi-ri&i Inf. rpTjS- 

tjz/cu Part. Tp~ifi-eis 
Ind. Tp?P-7i<ro/j.ai Opt. rpi^-rj(Toijxr]v Inf. Tplfi--r)crecrSai Part, t/ji^- 

7](r6fX€V0S. 



Verbal adjective: (Tpii8-T^s) rpnr-rSs, -r), -6v, rpnr-reos, -4a, -iov. 



to 146, 147.1 



TARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 



177 



§ 146. (b) Impure Characteristic, irr in Pres. and Impf. (Fut. -pw). 

KOTTTO}. tO CUt. 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. | PASSIVE. 


Pres. 


KOTTT-CO 


KOTTT-O/AUl 


Perf. I. 


(K6-/co7r-a) Ke-KO(p-a 


Ke-KO[x-/xai, like ri-Tpiix/xai 


Perf. II. 


Ke-Koir-a (Horn.) 




A. I. i-K6<(>-&7)v 


Put. 


(k6tT-(TCi)) KOlj/Cti 


KQ^IOfXai 


F. I. KO(p-frf}(TOfjl.CU 


Aor. I. 


6-K0\pa 


i-Kotyd/j.r)v 


A. II. £-k.6it-7\v 


Put. Pf. 




K6-K6\pOfJ.CU 


P. II. K0TT-7j(r0/JM.l 




Verbal adjective : kott-tos, 


-1fJ, -6v, /C07T-T60S, -Tea, -T60J\ 




Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 


icduir-T-ci), to bend down (/ce/ca^-^cu for K4Ka/j.^-/j.ai, § 144, Rem. 3). 


Ind. 


S. 1. 


KeKafifiai 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 




2. 


KCKapipai 


KeKa/x^/o 


iceicdfx<f>&ai 




3. 
D. 1. 


/ce/ca/rn-Tai 
KeKdn/j.c&Oi' 


KeKd[A<p&(0 


Participle. 




2. 


Kenafxip&ov 


KtKafX^OU ^WW>* - V , -ou 




3. 


KeKafjicp&ov 


K€Kdfj.<p&a)v I Subjunctive. 




P. 1. 


KeKoififxe^a 


j KeKafifievos & 




2. 


KeKa/JKp&e 


Keicafup&e 




3. 


KeKafifievoi el(ri(v) 


Keicd[i<p&oi}(ra.v, 01 Keicdfj.(p&<i)v] 




Verbal adjective : Kay.Tnr6s, 


-7], -6v, KafJLirreos, -Tea, -reov. 



$ 147. B. Verbs, ivhose Characteristic is a Kappa- 
mute (y, k, x)- 

(a) Pure Characteristic, y, k, x- (b) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and 
Impf, era; Att. tt, rarer (. 

7r\e/c-w, to weave. Put. -|a>. Taaraca, Att. tott&>, to arrange. 



ACTIVE. 



Pres. 
Perf. 

Put. 
P. Pf. 



7rAe/c-tw 
(ire-ir\€K-a) 
ire-irAex-a 
(7rAeK-(T«) 7rAe|o> 



MIDDLE. 



irXzK-ojxai 

(iri-TrKeK-jiai) 

ire-TrXey-fiai 

ir\e£o/J.ai 



ACTIVE. 



TCMTC-GJ 

(Te-Tay-a) 

Te-Ta%-a 

(rdy-aco) Ta|co 



MEDDLE. 



rdffff- 



ojxai 



re-Tayfiai 

rd^o/Liai 

T6-to|ouoi 



PASSIVE. 



Aor. I. 
Put. I. 
A. II. 
F. II. 



(i-ir\4K-frnu) i-Tr\4x-&W 

irAex-d^ (TOfxai 
i-ir\dK-7]v and i-ir\4K-r]v 
ir\aK-^]crofiat 



( i-rdy-hr\v) i-rdx-Srnv 

Tax-fryo-o/xai 
i-rdy-rfv 
Tay-r)<rop.ai 



Verbal adjective : tt^ktSs, -t), -6v ; 7rAe/c-Teos, -Tea, -reov ; tclkt6s, rct/creW. 



178 



PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 



[$ 148. 



Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 




Tacraa), to arrange, and acpiyyco (§ 144, Rem. 3), to bind. 


Ind. S. 1. 


Terayficu 


€<r<pLyfxai 


Imperative. 


2. 


T6Ta|at 


e(T<piyl-ai 


rera^o 


e(r<piy£o 


3. 


TeraKTcu 


tacpiyitTai. 


reVax^o) 


iatpiyX^fb} 


D. 1. 


TeTayfxe&ov 


iacpiy/j.e&oi' 






2. 


Terax&ov 


eo-cpiyX&ov 


reraxSov 


iacpiyX&ov 


3. 


reTax&ov 


ecrcpiyx&ov 


TeTax&wv 


iacpiyX&ow 


P. 1. 


TeTayfxe&a 


£<T(piyfx&a 






2. 


TeTa%i^e 


ecr<piyX&e 


rerax^e 


e(T<i)<7X^e 


3. 


Teray/xeVot etct(i'), 


iacpiyfievoi tiffi[v) 


TeTax&(*>o'ctv, 


i<r<piyx^(>}<Tau, 




or T€Ta%drat 




or TeTax^w*' 


or £<r<piyx&ooy 


Inf. Terax^at 


iacpiyx^ai Part, tgt ay fievos 


£<r(piyfx4vos. 



Remark. The student will observe particularly the changes which take 
place in the inflection of the Perf. Pass, of these verbs : r4Tpifj.-fji.ai (instead of 
TeTpifi-fiai), $ before [x being changed into^u; Tirpvtyai (instead of TtTpnr-aai), 
ir and <t forming \p ; reTpiir-Tai, the characteristic it remaining unchanged ; 
TerpHp-bov (instead of Terpnr-&oi/), the characteristic ir being changed into <p, to 
be of the same order as the 3- following (§ 17, 2) ; so others similar. In like 
manner, Teray/xai : rera^ai (instead of TeTay-<rai), y and a forming £ ; reraKTai 
(instead of Terayrai), y being changed into k, to be of the same order as the 
t following ; TtraxSov (instead of rerayfrov), y being changed to correspond 
with &. 



§ 148. C. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Tau- 
mute (8, t, S). 

(a) Pure Characteristic, 8, t, &. (b) Impure Characteristic in Pres. and Impf., 
£ rarer <r<r. — Fut. <rw. 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 


ipev5-(c, 


ipevS-ofiai, 


<ppd(-a>. 


<ppd£-ofxai, 




to deceive. 


to lie. 


to say, 


to think, 


Impf. 


e-\J/eu5-oi> 


£-ypevS-6fxrjp 


e-<ppaC-ov 


4-<ppa(-6fxr)v 


Perf. 


(e-tyevd-Ka) 


(e-xl/evd-fiai) 


(ire-(ppaS-Ka) 


(ire-cppad-fxai) 




e-tyev-Ka 


t-ipevcr-fj-ai 


ir4-(ppa-Ka 


ire-<ppacr-fj.ai 


Plup. 


£-\p€v-Keiv 


£-\pevcr-fj.r)j/ 


e-ire-typa-Keiv 


£-ire-(ppd(r-fj.7]i> 


Fut. 


(ipevB-au)) 


(\p€uS-(TOfj.ai) 


(<ppdS-<rca) 


( <ppa8-ffofxai ) 




ipev r-w 


i^eu-coyuat 


<ppa-(T(a 


(ppd-aofxai 


Aor. I. 


e-^/eu-ca 


e-tyev-crdfJ.Tii' 


e-<ppa-o~a 


£-cppa-(rdfi7ju 


F.Pf. 




i-^ev-aofxai 




ire-<ppd-<rofjiat 


PASSIVE. 


Aor. I. 


(£-i^/evd-^riv) 


£-\peiKr-&r]v 


(£-(ppdd-&7iv) 


£-(ppd(T-&r)v 


Fut. I. 




ypevc-^rjcrofiai 




<ppa<T-frf)<rofiaL 


Ver 


bal Adj. : (\J>evS-T 


tos) \|/€UCT'-TeOS, -T6 


%, -t4ov ; (ppaff-rec 


)S, -Tea, -t4ov. 



'49.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. 



179 



Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 



Tnd. S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



eipev(r-(iat 

e\pev-aai 

e\pevcr-Tai 

erpev-o &ov 
ityevff-jxivoi el(ri(u) 



Imperative. 



Infinitive. 

Participle. 
i-ipev(r-/j.evos, -7], -ov 

Subjunctive. 



tyev-aSaxrav, or etf/ev-crdwj/] 



Remark. 2c6£«, to save, has in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, a-ea-cc-fiai from trdxa 
(Attic), and (reVcoo-jUcu, but Aor. iod>&7]u, verbal Adj. (rwcrreos. 



§ 149. Form ati o n or the Tenses of Liquid Verbs. 

1. Liquid verbs (§ 127, II. B.) form the Flit Act. and 
Mid. and the first Aor. Act. and Mid. without the tense- 
characteristic a (§20, 3) but the Perf. Act. with the tense- 
characteristic k, e. g. 

<T<pah\o) (stem 2<*>AA), Fut. cr(pah-G), first Aor. e-cr07jA-a, Perf. e-c<paA »«. 

Remark 1. The endings of the Put. in liquid verbs, namely, -<y, -ov/jlcu, are 
formed by contraction from -ecru, -icro/xai after the rejection of <r (§ 20, 3). The 
inflection of these contracted endings is like that of contracts in -ecu in the 
Pres. Act. and Mid.: <pi\-S>, <pi\-ov/xcu (§ 135) ; <r is omitted in the Fut. of liquid 
verbs, to prevent the harshness occasioned by the combination of that letter with 
the preceding liquid. The Fut. Perf. is wanting in liquid verbs. 

2. The Present tense of Liquid verbs, with the exception 
of a few whose stem-vowel is e, is strengthened, either by 
doubling the characteristic \ or by inserting the liquid v 
after the characteristic ; also, by lengthening the short stem- 
vowel, as in all verbs in -ivco, -vvco, -vpco, or by changing it 
into a diphthong (§ 16, 3), e. g. aj>dX-\-co, re^i-v-w, /cpiv-co } 
ajjLvv-eo, tcreiv-w, <j>aiv-(o (stems %$AA, TEM, KPIN(l), 
9 AMTN(v), KTEN, $AN) ; but ph-to, vifi-to with a pure 
stem. 

3. Except the Pres. and Impf. the tenses are formed from 
file pure stem, but the final vowel of the stem is lengthened 
in the first Aor. Act. and Mid. (see No. 5), e. g. a^dW-ai 
{%$AA), Fut. a<f>aX-co, second Aor. Pass. e-a(j>d\-7]v, first 
Perf. Act. €-a<f>aX-Ka, first Aor. Act. e-o-<br)\-a. The second 
Aorists Act. and Mid. rarely occur, and scarcely at all in 



180 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. |$ 149 



prose ; on the contrary, the second Aor. Pass, is more in use 
than the first Aor. ; the first Aor. is wholly wanting in many 
verbs. 

4. In liquid verbs with an impure characteristic, the 
ground-form of the stem is not borrowed, as in the case 
of mute verbs, from the second Aor., but from the Fut., 
since only a few verbs of this class form a second Aor. Act. 
and Mid. 

5. Liquid verbs are divided into four classes according as 
the stem- vowel of the Fut. is a, e, l, or v before the ending co. 
In the first Aor. Act. and Mid. a is lengthened into v, e in+o 
u, l into l, v into v (§ 16, 3). Thus : — 

I. Class with a i.i the Future. 

Pres. Fut. Av.r. 

acpaXA-ca, to deceive, <r<paA-ca e-acprjA-a 

Ko.'fX.v-(a, to labor, Ka/j.-odfxai wanting 

reK^aip a>, to point out, rsK[xdp-u> i-TeKfj-Tjp-a 

(paiu-co, to show, <pav-<a %-<p7)v-a. 

II. Class with e in the Future. 
jxiv-ui, to remain, /j.ev-a> 
ayyeW-a, to announce, ayye\-S> 
t iixv-bi, to cut, re/A-a 
ve/j.-a>, to divide, i/e^-cD 

KTe'lV-b), tO kill, KTfzV'U> 

lfieip-a, to desire, l/xep-w 

III. Class with i in the Future. 
tLA\-w, to pluck, TiA-w i-rZX-a 
Kpiv-o3, to separate, KpXv-w %-K.plv-a. 

IV. Class with v in the Future. 
ado-a, to draw, avp-co e-avp-a 

a/xvy-o}, to defend, a/xv v-u> tfjxvv-a. 

Rem. 2. The following verbs in -cuvw of the first class take u in the Aor. 
instead of 77, namely, laxvcdvca, to make emaciated (laxvo-va, icrxvauai) ; Kepdaivw, 
to (jain (itcepMva, KepSavai) ; KoiXaivw, to hollow out (inoiAava, KOiXavai) ; Xevxaivui. 
to whiten; hpydivw, to enrage; ireiraivca, to ripen; also all verbs in -paivw, e.g. 
■rrepaipw, Fut. irepavw, Aor. eirepava, Inf. irepavai (except TeTpcuVw, to bore, irerprir 
va, rerprivai), and all in -icdvta, e. g. iriatvw, to make fat, iiriava, inavcu (except 
uiaivco, to stain, fiirjuai, rarely fjuavai). — The verbs <rr]fj.aiyoo, to give a signal, and 
ica&alpa), to purify, have both at]p.y\va.i (which is usual among the Attic writers), 
Kabr\pai, and (T-njxavai, Kc&apai. Also a'ipw. to raise, and aWofuu, to leap, are 
formed with a: apai, aXacr&ai, but in the Ind. the a is changed into 77 on account 
:i' the augment, e. g. fya, 7]\a.{xr)v (second Aor. riXS^v is not used in the Ind 
and very rarely elsewhere). Comp. on e, § 16, 7 (a). 



e-fiEiv-a 

tfyyziX-a 
wanting 
%-veiix-a 
e-KTetu-a 
'i/xeip-a 



T 149. J FORMATION OP THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. 181 

6. The first Perf. Act. of verbs with the characteristic v 
(according to § 19, 3), must end in -<yica, e. g. fie/nlay-K^ 
Plut. (from jjaaivco instead of /jue-fiiav-Ka), 7re(fiay/ca, Dinarch. 
(from (palvco), irapod^vyica, Polyb. (from irapo^vvoi, to excite). 
But the form in -ytca is found only among later writers. The 
best writers endeavor to avoid it, sometimes by dropping the 
v, e. g. fcifcpi/ca, /cefcXctca from Kpivco, kXlvco (so also Kefcep§dfca y 
among later writers, also /ceicipSay/ca, but fcefcepSrjfca, Dem. 
56, 30. from icephalvw) ; or also, as in Kretvco, by using the 
form of the second Perf., e. g. aTretcrova, in the sense of the 
first Perf. (eKTayica, eicTaica, from the time of Maenander), 
or, as in the case of verbs in -evw, by not forming any Perf., 
as, e. g. in /nevco, by forming it from a new theme, as ^e/xe- 
vqica from MENEI2. 

7. The three following verbs with the characteristic v 
drop that letter, not only in the Perf. and Plup. Act., but 
also in the Peif. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, and in the first 
Aor. Pass. : — 

Kptvw, to separate, KeKpixa KeKp1.fj.ai eKpt^rjv 

kXiuu, to bend doivn, k4k\Xko, k4k\X/acu e/cA.feiji/ (the 2d Aor. eK\ivriv is rare), 

vKvvca, to wash, {ireirXvKa) ireirKvfiai iirKv&rjV (Hippoc.) 

Rem. 3. Teivcc, to stretch, and Krelvw, to kill, form the above-mentioned tenses 
from new themes, viz. TAfl, KTANH, KTAft, thus : — 

TCTana reTa/jLcti eTa&r}v 

%kto.ko. (and e/crcry/ca) eKTa.fj.ai 4icTa&r)v [eKTavSriv among the later writers) ; 

yet the forms of Kretvco here presented, are not Attic. The Attic writers use 
eKTova as the Perf. Act. (see No. 6), and instead of eKTa.fj.cu and e.rra&Tj?/, sub- 
stitute Te&vrjKa and aireSavov in passive phrases with vn6 and the Gen., or 
avriprijj.ai and avrfp£&r}v, without a preposition. 

Hem. 4. Kpivco, Khiva, irXvvto, and KTeivw, among the poets, often retain v in 
the first Aor. Pass, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. eKXlvdnqv, 
£iv\vvSrr}v ; in prose, these forms seem to be doubtful, yet ko.t€kAIv&7) is found in 
X. Hell. 4. 1, 30, in all the copies. 

8. On the formation of the Perf. Mid., the following 
points should be noted: — 

Verbs in -aivco and vvoo, usually drop the v before the endings beginning with 
fi y and insert <r to strengthen the syllable, e. g. <pa(v-a irecpa-cr-fiai ire-cpd-cr-fj.e&a', 
vcpalva) vcpacrfcai; fj.epa.ivoo fxe^dpacrfiai (Luc.) ; crr]fj.aivw crecrrifj.acrfj.ai; irepaivca irewe- 
pacr/iai 5 paivca eppacrfxai ; iraj(yvco TreTraxvcrfiai ; t)Zvvco ^vcrfxai ; Xeirrvvca AeAeV- 
rvafxai; b\vvca &%vcrfj.ai; &y}\vva) re^Kvcrfiai (Luc); inaivca ireiria<rixcu\ rpaxvvui 

16 



182 



PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. ^ 150 



Terpa.xvcrfj.ai (Luc.) ; Xvjxaivofiai XeXv/xacrfxevoL el<ri(u) ; [xiatvoo fx^lafffiai ; but 
some verbs of tbis kind assimilate tbe v to the following fx, e. g. ^paiv-a, 
i^pafx-fiai instead of i^pav-fxai (also e^-fipafffiai), Trapo^vvw, 7rapw^vfx./j.ai, al<rxvv-a 
jfaxtwicu (Homer) ; a very few verbs drop ;/ among tbe later writers, without 
substituting a strengthening a ; the vowel, however, is made long. e. g. rpaxw-w, 
to make rough, re-rpa.xv-/xaL also rerpaxva-fxai and reTpd.xvfMfji.ai. It is evident that 
in the personal-endings, except those beginning with /x, the v remains, e. g. 
7T€(pa<r-jj.ai, ire<pav-<rcu, Tre-<paurat, i^ipafi-fiat, -avaai, -avrai, foxvfMfMaL, -vvcrcu, 
-wren, -ifi-jx^ou (see <paiv-(a and typaiva, § 151) ; still, it is to be noted that the 
form of tbe second Pers. Sing., in -vaai, is rare ; instead of it the Part, with 
cl is used, e. g. irecpacrfxeuos el, etc. 

Rem. 5. On the omission of tr in endings beginning with <r&, see § 25, 3 ; 
on the variable a, in the first Perf. Act. and Mid. and in the first Aor. Pass,, and 
also in the second Aorists of liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and the 
stem-vowel e, see § 140, 3 ; on the Perf. of ayeipa, and iyeipu with Att. Redup., 
see § 124, 2 (b). 

9. - ! the second Perf. (which, however, belongs only to 
a few verbs) the short stem-vowel before the ending -a, is 
lengthened, as in the first Aor. Act., except in verbs with € 
in the Fut., which take the variable o (§ 140, 4), e. g. (fxiiv-co, 
first Aor. e-cprjv-a, second Perf. irk-$r)v-a ; but airelp-w, Fut. 
airep-w, second Perf. e-airop-a. 

Rem. 6. Second Aorists Act. and Mid. are rare in liquid verbs, e. g. efiaXov, 
£f3a\6(A7)v, eKavov, eirrapov (doubtful in prose) from fiaXXoo, Kalvw, irraipcc, tcrel- 
voi ; Aorists are also formed from some irregular verbs ; a few verbs, also, have 
a second Aor. Pass., e. g. those with monosyllabic stems, as 8epa>, ehdp-nv, (p&ei- 
pco, areXXu, (paivw, fiaivca, kXivw, etc. 

§ 150. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs. 

ayyeAAaj, to announce. 



ACTIVE. 


Pres. ayyeXXu Perf. I. tfyyeX-na Perf. II. e-<p&op-a, perdidi, from (pSreip-ta 


Fut. Ind. 


S. 1. 


ayyeX-S> 


Opt. ayyeXoifxi or ayyeXoirjv 




2. 


ayyeX-eis 


ayy eXo?s " ayyeXoi-ns 




3. 


ayyeX-e? 


ayyeXo? " ayyeXoir) 




1). 2. 


ayyeX-etrov 


ayyeXcnrov '' ayyeXoir)rou 




3. 


ayyeX-etrov 


ayyeXolr-nv " ayy eXoi4}Tnv 




P. 1. 


ayyeX-ovfxe > 


ayyeXoifiev " ayyeXolrjfieu 




2. 


ayyeK-elre 


ayyeXolre " ayyeXoirjTe 




3. 


ayyeX-ovcri{ ') 


ayy eXoiev " ayy eXoiev 






I J 


f. a->"\eXe?v Part, ayyehwu, -ovaa, -ovv 


Aor. I. 


tfyyeiX-a, ayyeiXw, 


ayyeiXaifu, dyyeiXou, ayye?Xai, ayyeiXas 


Aor. II 


Illd. ijyyeX-ov Sul 


']. ayy eXco Opt. ayyeXoipn Imp. ayyeXe 


(rare) 


Inf. ay7eAeiz/ Part. a.yye\a>v, -ovcra, -6u. 



* 151.] 



PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 



183 



MIDDLE. 


Pcrf. Ind. 


S. 1. 


^lyyeK-jxai 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 




2. 


ijyyeX-(rai 


tfyyeX-cro 


yyy4h-&ai 




3. 


tfyyeX-rai 


j]yy4\-&(i) 


Participle. 




D. 1. 


i)yy€\-fu.&ov 




^yyeA-ueVos 




o. 


tfyyeX-frov 


¥iyye\-&ov 


Subjunctive 




3. 


ijyye\-&ov 


T]yy4\-&u>i/ 


^yyeX-fxevos £> 




P. 1. 


i]yy4\-fj.e^a 








2. 


^yyeA-fre 


tfyye\-&e 






3. 


r]yy€\-fi4voi elffi(v) 


riyyet&axrav, or r/yyeA-frwi/] 


Plup. Ind. 


TjyyeA 


-fj-Wi ■< ro » " T0 5 -peSoy, 


-&ov, -&r)v, -iJ.€&a, -fre, riyye\jn4voi iicrav 


Eut. Ind. 


S. 1. 


ayyeX-ovfiai 


Opt. ayye\-oijxriv \ Infinitive. 




2. 


ayyeX-rj, or -el 


ayye\-o7o 


yye\-e7<r&ai 




3. 


ayye\-e?Tai 


ayyeX-olro 


Particip'e. 




D. 1. 


ayye\-ov/xe&oi/ 


ayyek-oifie&ov 


ayye\-ov/j.tvos 




2. 


ayye\-e?a&ov 


ayye\-o7<r&ov 






3. 


a.yye\-e7<r&ov 


a,yys\-oi<T&7)v 






P. 1. 


ayyeX-ov/xe&a 


ayye\-oi[ie&a 






2. 


ayy€\-e?<r&e 


ayye\-o7<r&e 






3. 


ayye\-ovuTcu 


ayyeX-oilvro 




Aor I. 


liid. r)y r yei\-d l U7}v, etc. 




Aor. II. 


Ind. riyyeX-ofx-qv Subj. a.yy£\-<t>[xcu Opt. ayye\-oi(j.riv Imp. 


(rare) 


ctyyeA-oD Inf. ayyeK-e 


<r&cu Part. ayyeX-6/xevos. 


Verbal adjective : a.yye\-Teos, -Tea, -reov. 



$ 151. Shorter Paradigms, arranged according to the 
stem-voivel of the Future. 

(a) with & in the Euture: ff<pdx\ca, fallo; cpaiva, to show, Mid. 

to appeal-. 



ACTIVE. 



Pres. 
Perf. I. 
Perf. II. 
Fut. 
Aor. I. 



(r<pd\\-(o 
%-<T<pa\-K.a 

(T(f)d\-u, e7s, e? 
(=-<r<pT\\-a. 



MIDDLE. 



(T<pa\X-ofxai 
e-(T(pa\-(ji.cu 

(TcpaXov/xa: 
wanting: 



ACTIVE. 



MEDDLE. 



(paiv-ca 
(ire-cpay-Ka) 
Tr4-(pr]wa, 1 appear, 
<pav-G> 
%-<pf]u-a 



(paiv-o/xai 



au-ovfiai 
i-<f>W.v-d l ur)v 2 



1 I shall appear, awocp., I shall affirm. 2 Prose airefy., it was affirmed by vie. 



PASSIVE. 



Aor. I. 


i-<rcf>d\-frr)v (poet.) 


£-(pdi/-&7]v, I appeared, 


Fut. I. 


<r<pa\-^r](rofiai (poet.) 


<pav-^](TOfxai 


Aor. II. 


e-cr<pa.\-T]v 


i-(pa.v-i)v, I appeared, 


Fut. II. 


<T<pa.K-i](TO[xai 


<pav-i]<To^ai, I will a >nea . 



Verbal adjective : ar(pa\-7eos, -rea, -reV, (pav-reos. 



184 



PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 



[M 152,153 



Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of 
(paiv-co, to show ; £-r)palp-w, to dry, and reip-w (§ 149, Rem. 3), to stretch. 


Ind. S. 1. 
2. 
3. 
D.l. 
2. 
3. 
P. 1. 
2. 
3. 


ir4-<pa<T-ixa.i 

Tre-cpav-crcu 

■]r4-<pav-Tai 

ire-<pd(T-iAt8nv 

ir4-<pa.p-&op 

ff4-(pap-&op 

ire-(pdo'-/xe&a 

ire-<pai'-be 

ire-<paa-fxzvoi eUri(y) 


£-£r}paiA-/j.ai 
4-\r,pav-(Tai 
4-^iipav-Tai 
e-^7]pd/x-/xeSf0P 
i-^-fjpav-^rop 
e-h,T)pav-&ov 
i-^r]pdjj.-iJ.e^a 
i-^ipav-^e 
i-l-7]pafi-ix4poi €ici(p) 
( e-^-iipav-ffo) 
i-£ripdj/-&<i> 
i-£rip<xv-&ov 
i-\r)pdv-&wv 
e-tfipap-Sre 
i-!;Tipdp-&wo~ap, 01' 
i-^rjpdp-^wp 


r4-rd-/xai 

r4-ra-aaL 

re-ra-rai 

re-ra-jxe&op 

r4-ra-a^op 

r4-ra-o~&op 

re-ra-/x^a 

r4-ra-o~&e 

r4-ra-prai 


Imp. S. 2. 

3. 

D.2. 

3. 

P. 2. 

3. 


[ire-(pav-Go) 
ire-<pdp-&<a 
Tre<pav-&ov 
ire-(pdv-&oov 
ir4-ipau-&€ 
ire- <pdv-&cocrap, or 
7ce-<pdvSwv 


Te rd-o~o 

re-rd-a^w 

r4-ra-o~Sop 

re-rd-o~&a>p 

r4-ra-a^e 

Te-rd-(T&a(rap, or 

re-rd-a&wp 


Inf. 


Tre-(pdv-&ai 


i-^r)pdv-^ai 


Te-rd-a&ai 


Part. 


ire-(pa<T-iJ.4vos 


i-^7]pa/x-/x4pos 


re-ra.-jj.4p os 



§ 152. (b) with e in the Future: 'ljieip-a (Ion. and Poet.), to 
desire, and ar4xX(a, to send. 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. ; i/xeip-u 
Perf. I. 'i/xep-Ka 
Fut. ijxep-a 
Aor. I. 'iixzip-a 


Ifxeip-ojxai 
'ifxep-fxai 
l/xep-ov/xai 
l/xeip-d/xTjP 


ar4xX-(a 
e-araX-Ka 

crreX-w 
e-areiX-a 


o-r4xX-o/xai 
e-o-raX-[xai 

areX-ov/xai 
i-o~reiX-d/x7)p 


PASSIVE. 


Aor. I. 
Fut. I. 


ifj.4p-&7)p 
i/x€p-&-fiaojxai 


i-crrdx-frr]P 
crraX-&r)o-o[x 


A. II. i-o-raX-7]P 
at F. II. o-rdX-^a-o/xat 


Verbal Adj. Ifxsp-ros, -r\, 
Remark. The inflection 


-op, l/xep-r4os, -Tec 
of the Perf. Mid. 


t, -r4op, araX-ros, o~raX-r4os. 
or Pass, is like tfyyeX-/xcu. 



§ 153. (c) With t and v in the Future, 
(a) rixX-u, to pluck; avpu>, to draw ; fxoXvp-u, to defile. 



Pres. 


r'iXX-00 


atp-a 


(JLOXvP-h) 


Perf 


riXX-Ofxcu 
r4-riX-Ka 


avp-o/xai 
o-4-ffvp-K.a 


fxoXvp-o/xai 
(/xt-fx6Xvy-Ka) 


Fut. 
Aor. I. 
A. I. P. 
F. I. P. 

Aor 


r4-riX-p.ai 

riX-S} rXX-ovjxai 
e-rtX-a i-rlX-dfxrjp 
i-riX-&T)P 
riX-drtcrofxai 
. II. and Fut. II. P. 


ffe-o~vp-/xcu 

aijp-cc cvp-ovfxai 
%-evp-a i-avp-d/jrip 
i-crvp-^rjp 
o-vp-&r]o-ofxai 
s-o~iJp-7)p, o~vp-r;o~oixai 


fj.e-/x6Xvo'-/xai 

/xoXiip-u fxoXvp-ovjxai 
4-jxoXvp-a i-ixoXvp-d/xyp 
£-jxoXvp-$rr)p 

fxoXvp-^Tjao/xai 


Verbal Adj. riX-r6s, riX-r4os, crvp-ros, cvp-r4os, 


/xoXvp-r6s, /xoXvp-r4os. 


Remark 1. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or P 


ass. of r4-nX-/xai, o-4-ffvp- 


fxai, is like jjyyeX-fxcu, and that of /xe-/x6Xvo--ixai like 71 


■4-<pao--fxcu, that of rjo-xvf-- 


ixai (from cuVxuj/-a>, to shame), like i-£r)paix-fxcu. 





$ 154. 



PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. 



185 



(P) KXiu-Wy to bend down; irXvv-a, to wash, with v dropped (§ 149, 7). 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 
Perf. 
Fut. 
Aor. I. 


KXiv-ca 

Ke-KX?-ica 

kX"iv-o!> 

e-nXlv-a 


KXTv-0/j.ai 
Ke-KXl-ficu 
KXiv-ovfAai 
i-KXlv-dfi7]i/ 


irXhv-u) 

iri-nXv-Ka 

irXvv-5) 

Z-irXiiv-a. 


TrXvv-oficu 
ire-TrXv-fxcu 
irXvv-oviJ.ai 
i-irXvv-dfj.r}v 


PASSIVE. 


Aor. I. 
Aor. II. 


i-KXi-&T]v Put. I. nXi-^a-o/xai 
i-KXiv-7)v Put. II. KXtu-yjaofxai 


£-irXvSriv 


TrXv-^7}<T0jj.ai 


Verbal Adj. kXl-tos, -4), -6v, kXi-t4os, -Tea, -reou, ttXv-tqs, ttAu-tcos. 
Rem. 2. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. /<e-/cAi-/,iat and Tre-irXv- 
ixai is like Te-ra-pai, and corresponds with that of pure verbs. 



$ 154. Special Peculiarities in tlie Formation of 
single Verbs, both Pure and Impure. 

1. The Future of very many Active verbs is in the Middle 
form, e. g, olkovcd, I hear, Fut. aKovo-o/xat, I shall hear, Aor. rjKovcra, 
I heard. See $ 198. 

2. The following verbs in -atw or -aco and -coo, whose stem 
ended originally in -av ] and -eu (aF, e.F), resume the v in the 
Aorist and Future ($ 25, 2) : — 

Kaico (old Attic Kaca seldom, and without contraction), to burn, Fut. Kavcrw ; Aor, 
eKavcra ; Perf. KeKav.ta : Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKavfiai ; Aor. Pass. e/cavd7]j/ : 
Fut. Pass. Kav&'fio-ofjicu] verbal Adj. Kavcrreos, kuv(Tt6$, ko.vt6s] but second 
Aor. Act. iKarju, T burned, Intrans., in the Ion. and later writers. 

KXaica (kXuco seldom, and without contraction), to weep, KXavao/xai or KXava-ov/xai 
(No. 3), KXavcroi) late ; first Aor. Act. cicXav<ra, etc. ; Perf. Pass. Ka<Xavfxai ; 
Aor. Pass. iKXaixrStrjv late. See § 166, 18. 

3-e'w, to run, Fut. Sretxrofiai or &ev<rodjjLcu (No. 3), ^va-oo late; the other tenses 
are wanting. See rpex®, § 167, 5. 

veco, to swim, Fut. vevcroixai or vzv<rovix.ou (No. 3) ; Aor. ivev<ra; Perf. vivevKo.. 

7rAew, to sail, Fut. TrXeva-o/xai, usually TrXevaov/xai (No. 3) ; Aor. iVAeucra; Ferf. 
ireirXevKa. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ireTrXevo-fxcu ; Aor. Pass. iirXeva^u ; verbal 
Adj. TrXevcTTeos. 



1 The v in the Fut. of these verbs is occasioned by the reappearance of the 
Digamma (F) softened into the vowel v. The Digamma would regularly 
stand in the Pres. before the personal-ending a, but is omitted where it comes 
between two vowels : it appears, however, in the Fut., as it there stands before 
the consonant <r. This is analogous to the disappearance, in the Pres., of some 
aspirate, perhaps h (comp. veho), in the Latin verbs fluo, struo, and the reap- 
pearance of the same in the Perf. before s. with which'it combines and forms x, 
16* 



186 PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. [$ 154 

iryeta, to blow, Put. Trvevcrofxai or irvevcrodfiai (No. 3); Aor. eirvevaa ; Perf 

ireirvevica ; late Put. Trveixrw, and Aor. Pass. s-kvsxhtStiv. 
peo>, to yfou;, Fut. pevo-ofuu; Aor. eppevara; both forms extremely rare in the 

Attic, which uses instead of them pvrjo-ofxai, ippv-nv (§ 192, 7), and so also 

the Perf. ippvrjKa. 

Remake 1. The verb x^ (x e '^ w > X 6 ^ w )> to P our out i differs from the pre- 
ceding verbs: Put. %ew; Put. Mid. xeo/^at (see No. 4); Aor. ex €a > Subj. x«"> 
Inf. x e ' a '» Imp. x* 0,/ > X € " Ta, » etc 5 Aor. Mid. ix^d/xrjv (see No. 7); Perf. Act. 
Ke'xS/ca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Kexfy"" 5 Aor. Pass, exfohjj/; Put. Perf. x v ^I^o/j.m 
(§ 223, E. 2). The forms with eu belong only to the Epic; Put. x e ^5 ^ or - 
exewa. 

3. The circumflexed Fut. in -ovjxat which properly belongs tc 
liquid verbs only, is used by the Doric writers with other verbs 
also, whose Future would regularly be in -o-co or -aojxai, e. g. 
rvij/w, -ets, -et, -ovjxev, -cire, -ovvrai ; TV^j/ovfiat, etc. ; this is called the 
Doric Fut. and is in common use in the following verbs, yet 
only in the Middle form, with the signification of the Fut. 
A.ct. : — 

(pevy-ca, to flee, Put. <pev£ov/j.ai and (pev£op.ai 

iral£-<0, to sport, " irai^ovjxai " iralj-ofiai 

xK- u i alvum exonerare, " x e<ro ^/ ual 

ir'nrT-oo, to fall, " Treorov/xai (IIETH) 

irvv&a.vou.ai, to inquire, " irevcov/xai, usually Trev(rQ-/j.at, 

and also in those mentioned under No. 2 : K\aiw, irAeco, irvew, vew, 

4. Future without the tense-characteristic. The Fut. of the 
following verbs, being without the Fut. characteristic <r, and 
having the inflection of the Present, takes entirely the form of 
a Present, viz. : — 

€&-&>, Epic, usually eVd-ieo, to eat, Put. eS-o/iat; iriv-w (HID.), to drink, Put. it'v 
opal ; x e ' w > io P our out i ^ u t- X^* X e '*> X e *> etc - j Fut. Mid. x 6 ' /* " ( see Eem. 1 ), 

5. Also two mute verbs take the Future form of liquid verbs 
in -ovfxai without o- : — 

fxdx-ofJ.cu, toflght, Put. f^ax-ovfj-ai (formed from the Ion. /xax-4(roixai). 
e^o/iai ('EAfl), to sit, Put. (ed-ov/xat) K<z&e5-ov[/.cu. 

6. The Fut. Perf. of the following verbs has an Act. form: — 

&vf)(rKu, to die, Perf. Te&vyica, lam dead, Put. Perf. reSfvfj^a} or -^ofxai, I shall 

be dead ; 
%<ttt}ixi, to station, Perf. eo-Tjj/ca, / stand, Fut. Perf. kairi^w or -£o/acu, I shall 



4 155-] VERBS. SYNCOPE. 187 

stand. 'E<rT7)£c0 and T&vhfy are old Attic ; kcrr^ofxai and r^vi}h,ofiai are 
only in the Attic, X. Cy. 6. 2, 17. 

7. The three following verbs, though not liquid, form the 
first Aor. according to the analogy of the second Aor., without 
the tense-characteristic a- : — 

eiveiv (second Aor.), to say, first Aor. e77r-a; <pepca ('EriCQ), to bear, first Aor. 
tfveyn-a (second Aor. tfveytcov) ; x e ' w > *X ea ( see Rem. 1). 

Rem. 2. In the second Aor. sirea-ov, from IIET-w (ir'nrr-a), to fall, the a is 
not the tense-characteristic, but belongs to the stem, the r having here been 
changed into <r (Dor. everov). The first Aor. eweo-a, is late ; in Eurip. Ale. 471 
and Troad. 294, the readings are not sufficiently confirmed. 

8. The following pure and impure verbs form the Perf. Subj. 
and Plup. Opt. Mid. or Pass, without the aid of the auxiliary 
e«/u ; the impure verbs by assuming an e as their characteristic 
in forming the tenses, become analogous to pure verbs : — 

tcrd-ofxai, I obtain, Perf. /ceVrT^cu, I possess, Subj. kgkt5>/j.o.i, -rj, -r\T<xi; Plup. 
iKeKT-fifiT}!/, I possessed, Opt. KeKTrjin)v, kskttjo, KeKrjjio or KeKTcpf.iTii', -$o, 

•CpTO. 

HifAvflffKa) (MNAH), to remind, Perf. /j.4fxvr)fj.cu, I remember, Subj. fieiivw/juu, -rj, 
-TJraL ; Plup. ifj.efj.vriiA'nv, Opt. fj-efivf/xr]]/, -fjo, -fJTO or /xefivcpfxriy, -wo, -$to, and 
in X. An. 1. 7, 5. fj.4y.voio (in all the MSS.). 

pdWw, to throw (BAA), Perf. fie^Xrifxai, second Pers. PI. Perf. Subj. 5ia/3e- 
P\rja&e, Andoc. p. 22. § 24. 

KaAew, to name, Perf. ke/cAtj^cu, I am named; Plup. e/ce/cA?^^, Opt. tcefcX^fnjv, 

-?70, -fJTO. 

Rem. 3. iKTeT/j.7)o~&ov may be found in PI. Rp. 564, c ; at present, however, 
the right reading is iKTeT/j.-fjaeor^oi/, according to most MSS. 



$ 155. Syncope. 

1. A few verbs, in some forms, suffer Syncope (§ 16, S). 
E. g. the following words in prose : — 

TreTOfj.nl, to fly, Aor. iirrSfiriv, TrreaSrat, Put. TTT-fj(rofj.ai (e syncopated). 

eyelpa, to wake, second Aor. r)yp6fxr)v (also the Inf. eypeofrai with the accent 
of the Pros.), I awoke (ijyep^rju, I was awake), (ei or t syncopated.) 

epxofj-ai, to go, second Aor. t)A&oi/, Inf. i\&e?v, etc., from 'EAEYQCL (u synco- 
pated), (§ 167, 2.) 

ol/iat, to suppose, instead of oiofxai, ^/xtjv instead of cp6ij,r]v. 



188 VERBS. METATHESIS [$156 

2. This Syncope occurs most frequently after the redu« 
plication ; thus, e. g. 

a. In the Present : 
ylyvofiai, to become, instead of yt-y4i/o/j.at, stem TENfl. 
/xifivw, to remain, Poet., instead of ixi-fj.4va>. 

TriirToo, to fall, instead of -ki-tz4to}, stem nETfl. 
mirpd<TKco from irepdca. 

b. In the Perfect: 

verduuv/xi, to spreaa out, ir4irra{juu ] TreTrrcaKa (from U.ETD.), tc fall. 

§ 156. Metathesis. 

1. Metathesis (§ 22) occurs in the formation of the tenses 
of several verbs, most frequently in the Perf., Plup., first 
A.or. Pass., and first Fut. Pass, (seldom in the second Aor. 
Act.), sometimes also in the Pres., both for the sake of an 
easier or more euphonic form, and, in poetry, for the sake 
of making a syllable long by position. 

2. In the Common language, the fohowing verbs are 
subject to Metathesis : — * 

/SaAAco, to throw, Fut. /3aAw [paAA-fjo-w, Aristoph. Yesp. 222); Aor. efiaAou; 

Aor. Mid. i^6.x6jxr]v\ BAA: Perf . j3e/3A?i/ca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. fie/SAy 

/.ui: Aor. Pass. ifiA-rj&riv; Put. Pass. fZA.r)&f]<To/*cu ; Put. Perf. fSe$\T}<rouai. 
Sa/xdoo, usually $a/j.dfe, to tame, Put. da/j-aaco ; Aor. i5dfia<ra; AMA: Perf. 5eS- 

yU77/ca: Perf. Mid. or Pass. deSfirifiai ; Aor. Pass, idjxij^rju, £§dp.-nv. 
Be/jtw, to build (mostly Poet, and Ion.) ; Aor. Act. e5et/ta ; Aor. Mid. iSeL/j.dfX7}v ; 

AME : Perf. 5 e 5 fj. 77 k a ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 5 4 5 /j. 77 fi a t. 
&vt)(j tew, to die, Aor. a.ire&ai'ov; Perf. t4&v7)ko.. 
& p co a k a>, to leap, Aor. %&opoy. 

KoAe'co, to call (Poet. KtKA-fjcr km, like Svr,<TK(e), Put. koKw; Perf. k4 KA77 k<x. 
Ka/xi/ca, laboro, Aor. %Kajxov; Perf. KeKfA.7) ica. 
oTceAAaj, axekeco, to make dry, second Aor. ecr/cA7jj/; Perf. ecr/cATj/ca; Put. 

cr/cA7?cro/x.cu. 
Te/iua}, to cut; Aor. eTe/xov; Perf. t 4t /xrjKa. 
T\i](rofj.ai, I will bear ; Aor. e t A 97 v ; Perf. t e t A 77 «■ a, from the stem TAAA. 

Remark. When the stem of the verb is dissyllabic, then the vowel trans- 
posed by Metathesis coalesces with the following vowel ; (a) In inflection : — 

Kepd-vvvyn (Poet. Kepd-u), to mingle; Put. Kepaacc ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, /ceKpd 

fiat instead of ne-Kpia-iiai ; Aor. Pass. iicpa&T}i'. 
mrpda-KW, to sell (instead of 7rt7repacr/ca>, TMrpedvKO)), from irep&w (hence Put 



M 157, 15 R ' VERBS IN -co WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 189 

irepaa-w) : Perf. 7r e ir p d k o, ir e tt p dfu. ; Aor. Pass, i-n-pd^ajy; Fut. Perf. 

we7r f /acro/.ta£. 
aropi-uvvjxi, to strcu, ; secondary form, gt pwvvi) pi (instead of crrpeouyv/xi) ; 

Put. arpd a- « ; Aor. Icrpoxra; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ea-rpcouai: Aor. 

Pass. £<tt p <{> &tjv. 
ireXafa, appropinquo, to bring to, ireXd&a), irAa&a; Aor. Pass. iireXaar&riv ; 

Poet. Att. e'7rAd3-77v; second Aor. Att. iirXafi-np; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

Att. 7re7rAdjUo:. 
(b) The same holds also in the stem of the verb Sparra), to disturb (formed 
from rapdrru, rpadrrw), an Attic form of rapderffa)] Aor. t&pai;a. 



$ 157. Verbs in -co zy^A Z/^e Stem of the Present 
strengthened. 

1. It has already been seen ($$ 138-140), that the stem of 
many verbs is strengthened in the Present ; but this strength- 
ening remains only in the Present and Imperfect. Besides the 
modes of strengthening already mentioned, by r (ttt, kt), <t (aa, 
£), and by lengthening the stem-vowel, there are others, which 
will now be specified. 

Remark. All the forms which are assumed for the sake of constructing the 
tenses in use, are indicated by capitals (§ 138, 3). The abbreviations, D. M., 
signify Deponent Middle, and D. P., Deponent Passive (§ 102, 3). The p i, placed 
in parenthesis, shows that the form standing before it, is analogous to the con- 
jugation in -/j. i, to be treated below. See § 191. 

( 158. I. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the 
Pres. and Impf. by inserting v before the ending. 

Preliminary Remark. Balvco lengthens the stem-vowel a into at ; iXavvco, 
a into av ; 8w« and tttuoi, v and t into "v and I. 

1. Batvw, to go (BA-), Fut. /3?jo-o/mi; Perf. jge/^/ea (§194, 2); 
second Aor. efirjv (/xl, § 191); the Pass, occurs in compounds, 
e. g. ava/Satvoixat, dra/3e/3a/zat, 7rapa/3ef3aixaL, avefiaSrjv, TrapefiaS-qv 
[§$ 130 (c), and 131, 5]. Verbal adjectives, /5aros, fiareos. 

Remark. First Aor. Act. efirjera, and Fut. fifoa, are transitive, I b-ought, 
will bring, and belong only to the poetic, Ionic, and later writers 

2. Sww, to go in, to go under, to put on. The unstrengthened 
verb Svu> (Kareouu)) has in the Pres., in the Fut oucrw and first 
Aor. Act. e'Svo-a, a transitive signification, to ivrap up, to immerse, 



190 VERBS IN -w WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [\ 158 

to sink; (so also Perf. in X. An. 5. 8, 23, airoMtivKtv ;) Aor 
Pass. iSv&rjv; Fut. Pass. 8v&q<ropai [$ 130 (b),2]. But the Mid. 
dvofxat, SiSvfiat, Svcrofxai, eSucra/x^v, signifies to wrap, up one's self, to 
go into, or under, to clothe one's self; likewise the Perf. Uhvua 
and the Aor. cSw (fu, § 191), have an intransitive signification, 
like Svo/xai. Verbal adjectives, Surds, oVreos. 

3. iXavvoy, to drive (secondary form iX5>, -as, etc. poetic, yet 
also in X. Cy. 8. 3, 32. oureXa, Imp.) ; Fut. iXacrw (in later writers, 
though also X. An. 7. 7, 55. eAdWras), commonly Att. cAw, -as, 
a, Inf. iXSv ($ 117); Aor. rjXao-a; Pe:f. iXrjXaKa; Mid. to drive 
from me, Aor. rjXaadfjiTjv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eA^Ad/xai ; Inf. eA.77- 
Xao-^at [$ 124, 2 (a)] ; Aor. Pass. rjXaSiqv [a in the tense-forma- 
tion, § 130 (c) ; without o-, § 131, 5]. — Verbal adjectives, cAoro's, 
iXarios (X. Hipparch. 2, 7). 

4. &wa and &i5&> (poet.), to rage, Fut. &v(rw, etc.; second Aor. Part, frufxevos 
(fit), raging. 

5. ttlvo), to drink, Fut. 7rfo/xat (§ 154, 4), among the later 
writers inov^ai, but also, in X. Symp. 4, 7. 7n.eia-#e ; second Aor. 
ariov, Inf. 7rteti/, Part. 7tiojv, Imp. 7ri^t ($ 191), poet., and seldom 
prose 7rU; HO- Perf. iriir^Ka ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7re7ro/tat; Aor. 
Pass, ctto'^v, Fut. Pass. Tro^o-opxi f$$ 130 (c), and 131, 5]. 
Verbal adjectives, 7totos, 7tot£os. 

C. r<Voo, to ^?<a^, to expiate, Fut. rio-to ; Aor. eVicra ; Perf. Act. 
reriKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. rerto-/>cat, Aor. Pass. iTiaSrjv ($ 131). 
Mid. jtvofj.at, to get pay from, to avenge, to punish, Ticro/tai, ei-Io-a- 
yu.?7i/. Verbal Adj. ncrrkov. In the Pres. and Impf. the penult is 
long in Epic, short in Attic ; in the other tenses, it is long in all 
the poets. 

Tico, to honor, riacc, erlcra, rcTi/xai, Poet. 

7. cjiSava), to anticipate, Fut. (f>3r](TOfxcu, more rarely </>Jao-a>, e g. 
X. Cy. 5. 4, 38. 7. 1, 19; first. Aor. €<£#do-a, and (in prose more 
seldom) second Aor. ify&rp (/ju, § 191) ; Perf. e^aKa. In Pres 
and Impf. d in Epic, d in Attic. 

8. (p&tuw (poet., rarely prose and only in the Pres., e. g. PI. Phaedr. 246, c. 
Symp 211, a.), to perish (seldom to consume), Fut. <p&iaa) and Aor. eQ&tffa, trans. 
to consume. — Intrans., Fut. (p^iffofxat ; Perf. ecp^/xai, e<p&ivrai ; Plup. and second 
Aor. i<p^tjuvu, Suhj. (b&iwixai, Opt. (p^fljxriv, <P&?to, Imp. <p&l<r&a, Inf. <p&i<r&at, 



$ 159.] VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 191 

Part. ^Siifxeuos, e. g. X. Cy. 8. 7, 18. tocs (pfrifievois, the dead (fxi, § 192). Verbal 
adjective, cp&n6s. 

Here belong also three verbs, whose pure stem ends with a consonant : — 

9. 8di<vu, to bite, Aor. Eolkov ; Fut. S^ofxai (late S^co) ; Perf. 
Aor. SeS?7x a ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. SeS^y/xat; Aor. Mid. eS^d/xrp 
( Hippoc.) ; Aor. Pass. i&rjx^W '■> Fut. Pass. S^X"^ 7 ? " ^ 011 - 

10. KajAvai, to labor, to be iveary, Aor. e/<a/zov; Fut. kol/jlovixcu ; 
Perf. K€Kix7)Ka ($ 156, 2). 

11. rijxvoi, to cut, Fut. reftco; Aor. erefJiov (eVa/xoi/, § 140, 2); 
Perf. rer/x^/ca (§ 156, 2) ; Mid. to cut for one's self (something) ; 
Aor. Mid ere/xoft^ ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, rer/^/xai (Subj. rer^o-- 
£ov, § 154, Rem. 3); Aor. Pass. erpj^v; Fut. Perf. reT/xTJo-o/xat, 
Verbal Adj. rixyyvo^, T\M\Tko<$. 



$ 159. II. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the JPres. and Impf. by inserting the syllable vc 
before the ending. 

1. fiv-vea),tostopup,~Fi\t. (3va-o); Aoy. Zfivara; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
/3e/Wfuxi ; Aor. Mid. Iftva-ajx-^v, Aor. Pass. IfivcrSrjv ($ 131). 

Pres. fSvo), not used by the Attic writers. 

2. LK-viofjicu (the simple is seldom used in prose, e. g. Th. 5, 
40. PI. Phaedr. 276, cl., the compound being generally used 
instead of it), d(£iKV€o//,ai, to come, Fut. a<j>i£ofxai.; Aor. acfilKoixrp/, 
d<£tK£cr$ai ; Perf. dc/u/y/xai, d</>t)($ai ; Plup. d<f>iyfjLy]v, dcjfriKTO. Verb. 
Adj. uctos. 

3. Kvv-4o), to kiss, Fut. kvo-w: Aor. eVvo-a [$ 130 (b)]. But 7rpos- 
Kvveo), to worship, Fut. TrposKvvrjcra) ; Aor. TrpostKvvrjo-a (also poetic 
7rooseKi5cra, Inf. 7rposKvaat). 

4 . vin(Tx~ v *- l xai (y7TL(rx-ofjLaL Ion.), strengthened form of v-n-exofxai, 
propeily, to hold one's self under, to promise, Aor. v-rrecrx'Oixrjv, Imp. 
vir6(rxov ; but Fut. VTrocrxfjcropLaL ; Perf. VTriax^^OLL. So, afXTriaxyoV' 
(xai or d/x7re)(o/xat, to clothe (from d/x7re)(w, to surround), Impf. d/x7ret- 
Xov, Fut. d/x<£e£co, Aor. r)inn.o~x ov > d/>wrKr)(6U', Fut. d/x^e^o/xat ; Aor. 
i)fA,7riorx°/ J 'l v &nd fji*Tre(TXQI x W 126, 1). 



192 VERBS WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 1G0. 

$ 1G0. III. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Imp/, by inserting the syllable av, 
more rarely aiv, be/ore the ending. 

a. a.v or aiv is inserted without any change. 
Preliminary Remark. All verbs of this kind form their tenses from a 
tnreefold stem, viz. the Pres. and Impf. from the strengthened stem, the second 
Aor. from the pure stem, the Fut. and Perf. from a third stem, consisting of a 
pure stem and an assumed e, which is changed in the inflection into 7? ; hence 
the Fut. and Perf. are formed like the same tenses of verbs in -£a>. — The a in 
the ending -dvco is also short in Epic (except in the three verbs, Ikovu, <pSavu, 
and Kix&vcti) ; but long in luavw in Attic. 

1. aloS-av-o/jicu (seldom ato-$o/>uu), to perceive, Aor. rjcrS-oiArjv, 
aio-$e<x$ai ; Perf. ^0-^77/xat ; Fnt. ato-^cro/xai ; verb. Adj. ato-^Tos. 

2. a/mpravto, to miss, Aor. 7//xapTCV (late -rjfidpTrjcra) ; Flit, afxap- 
Trjo-ofxaL {aixapTTjcriii, only in Alexandrine Greek) ; Perf. rj/jidpTTjKa; 
Perf. Pass, r^dprrjixai', Aor. Pass, ^[xaprrj^r/v (X. An. 5 9, 21. 
Vect. 4, 37). Verb. Adj. a/xapr^Teov. 

3. a.Trex$a.vop\ai, to be hated, Aor. oltt^^o^v (poet. r)x$°l X7 ] v ) 5 
Inf. d7rex#eo-#ai with irregular accent ; Put. aTrey$W l xai \ Perf. 
aTTiq^T] p.ai, I am hated. 

4. av£avw (and av£a>), to increase, Fut. co^o-to; Aor. -qv&jcra; 
Perf. rpj^yjKo. ; Mid. and Pass, to thrive, Perf. ^v^fxai ; Fut. avfrfj- 
crofxai and av£r]d~q(rop.ai ; Aor. ypj^rj^rjv. 

5. (Skacrravoj, to sprout, Aor. efiXaarGV (later IfiXdcrrrjcra) ; Fut, 
j3\.ao-~7](T(D ; Perf. ifiXdaTTjKa and fief3XdcrTr)Ka ($ 123, 2). 

G. SapS-avo), commonly in composition, KaraS., to sleep, Aor. 
KareSapS-ov ( KaTaSapSevra, Aristoph. Plut. 300) ; Fut. KaraSap^ao- 
fxai\ Perf. KaraSeSap^Ka. 

7. i£avco and KaS^t^dvo), secondary form of t£w, ko&'&d. See 
$ 166, 16. 

8. KXayydvoi, used of dogs, a secondary form of /o\.a£co, to cr?/ 
0WZ, Fut. K\dy£a) (KeKXay^o/xat, Aristoph. Vesp. 930) ; Aor. eK\ay£a, 
acKayov, Eur. Ipli. T. 1062 ; Perf. KtKXayya (old form KeKXrjya). 

9. cl&dvo), clSacvw (also olSdo), otSeo>), to si#e//, Fut. oiS^o-to ; Perf. 
todrjKa. 

10. oA.to-^avw (oAto-^atVco used by later writers), to s/zp, Aor. 
wAio-#ov ; Fut. oAto-J^cra; ; Perf. wXCo-SirjKa (first Aor. wXio-Srjo-a 
later). 



$ 160.] VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 193 

1 1. 6cr</>patvo/xat, to smell, Aor. oicrcf>p6p,rjv ; Fut. 6cr<ppr}(ropL(u. 
Pres. b(T<ppa(T^ai was a rare Attic form 5 Aor. oDO-^prja-dfjLrjv and ocrcppav&iji'cu 

late. 

12. o^XuTKavo) (rare Inf. 6'^Aciv, Part. ocpXcvv), to be liable to a 
fine, to incur punishment (the double strengthening l<tk and aj/ 
is to be noted) ; Aor. axpXov (wcpXyjcra, Lys. 13, 65. and by later 
writers) ; Fut. dcpXrjcra} ; Perf. uxpXrjKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
axfiX'rjfACU. 

b. av is appended to the pure stem, and v is inserted before 
the Characteristic-consonant. 

Preliminary Eemark. The short vowel in the middle of the pure stem 
is changed into a long one, in inflection. The v is subject to the usual changes 
before the Pi and Kappa-mutes (§ 19, 3). 

13. ipvyyavoy (instead of ipv-v-yavot), ructo, Aor. rjpvyov , Put. 

£p€v£ofJLCLL. 

14. #iyyava>, to touch, Aor. ZSriyov; Fut. Stgofiai. 

15. Xayxavco, to obtain by lot, Aor. oVa^ov; Fut. X^ojuat; Perf. 
etXrjxd (rarely AcA.oyx a from AErX-, comp. 7re7rov#a, 7raS-eLV, Trkv- 
Sos) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. dXrr/pai ($ 123, 4) ; Aor. Pass. iXrjx^v v - 
Verbal Adj. XrjKTtos. 

16. Xaixfiava), to take, Aor. eXafiov, Imp. Xdfie and Attic Xafie 
[$ 118, 3 (a)] ; Fut. X^op-at; Perf. elXr}<f>a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
tiXypLpuLi ($ 123, 4), (XiXrjpLOLL Aesch. Ag. 876) ; Aor. Mid. iXafiofx-qv ; 
Aor. Pass. iXr)<pSr)v ; Fut. Pass. XrjcpSyjo-opcu. Verbal Adj. X-qTrro^ 
Xr)TTTio<s. 

17. Aav^ttvoo (poet, and also X. O. 7, 31, also XrjSa)), to be con- 
cealed, Aor. eXa%v (I. Aor. eA^o-a late in simple words) ; Fut. 
Ar/crco; Perf. XeXrjSa, I am concealed; Mid. XavSavopLon (Ion. and 
poet, also Xri§op.ai), in prose €7nA. (seldom e7rA.), to forget, Fut. 
Xiyo-ojuai; Perf. X(Xr](r p.at (§ 131) ; Aor. iXaSojxrjv; Fut. Perf. AeArj- 
rro/^at, Eur. Ale. 1981. 

18 XipLiravoi, rare secondary form of Acutco, 

19. fiavSoivu), to learn, Aor, e/xa^ov; Fut. /xa^o-ojaat ; Perf. 
fjLepidSrjKa. — The a remains short, and the Fut. and Perf. are 
formed from the stem MA©E, according to No. a. Verb. Adj 
liaSrjTOS, /vta^reos. 

20. 7rw#avouai, to inqivire, to perceive, Aor. l-nvSo^yiv ; Perf. «■«• 

17 



194 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM [$ 1G] 

irva-fxat, Trimo-ai, etc. ($131); Fut. 7rcv<ro {jlcu (very rarely ncva-ov* 
/utai, § 154, 3). Verb. Adj. ttcvcttos, ir^vcrrios. 

21. ruyx^^ ^ happen, Aor. eruxoi'; Fut. revgo pai (TEYX-) •, 
Perf. TCTvxnKa (TYXE- according to No. a). The transitive of 
this verb is the poetic reu^w, paro. 

22. cjivyyavay, secondary form of (fmvyoi, to flee, Fut. <f>€v£ofxa.i 
and -^ovfiai (§ 154, 3); Aor. e<f>vyov; Perf. 7T€&evya. Verb. Adj 
favKTos, -rios. 

23. ^ai/Savco, fo hold, contain (spoken of vessels), Aor. e^aSov ; 
Perf. with a Pres. signification /ce^avSa; Fut. ^eio-o^ai (stem 
XENA-, comp. €7ra$ov, Tretcro/xat) . 

$ 161. IV. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Imp/, by annexing the two conso- 
nants, <tk or the syllable ktk. 

2k is annexed, when the stem- characteristic is a vowel, and ktk, when it is a 
consonant ; Ku-'i'or/cco and xp?7-"rK0/-"" are exceptions. Most verbs, whose pure 
stem ends with a consonant, form the Future, etc. according to the analogy of 
pure verbs, in -aw, -ecu, and -6a, e. g. evp-icrKa, Fut. evprj-aa from 'ETPE- ; aixfi\i<r- 
na, Fut. aix$\&-o-ca from 'AMBAO-. Some of these verbs, in the Pres. and Impf, 
take a reduplication also, which consists in repeating the first consonant of the 
stem with i, and may be called the improper reduplication. Most of these verbs 
correspond to the Latin Inchoatives in sco : yi-yvaafca, yfido-Ka, yrjpdo-Ka. 

1. ak-to-K-ofiai, to be taken, to be conquered, with this meaning, is 
used as the Pass, of atpew, Impf. ^Aio-ko/x^v ; ( e AAO-) Fut. dAwo-o/xat ; 
second Aor. rjXmv, Att. e<LW and tjXwv (fxt, § 192, 9), Iivas taken, 
Perf. rjXwKOL, and Att. eaA<o/<a and ^Aw/ca, I have been taken (Aug , 
$ 122, 4 and 6). The Active is supplied by alpeiv, signifying, to 
take captive, to conquer. Verb. Adj. oAcdtos. Xen. uses both 
laXoiv and r)\wv, An. 4, 4. 21. ; Thu. only kaXwv and kaXuKa : Plato 
also only iaXuKa. 

2. afxftXLo-KQi (seldom ap.(3X6u), to miscarry ('AMBAO-), Fut 
a/jfiXdxno ; Aor. rjixftXwcra ; Perf. ^Sauko, ; Perf. Pass. rj/x/jAw/mt ; 
Aor. Pass. ^/3Aw^v. 

3. ava^uoaKo/xai, (a) to recall to life, (b) to live again, Aor. 
av€(3L(x)a-dfir]v, I recalled to life ; but second Aor. avefimv (fit, $ 192, 
10), J lived again. 

A. avaXiCTKiQ (also avdX6a>), to spend, to consume, Impf. avrjXca-Kov 
(avdXow without Aug.) ; Fut. dvaAu>o-a> ; Aor. avyXuxra and ava- 



* 161.] VERBS IN -CO WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 195 

\cocra, Karr/vaXtocra ; Perf. di/^XtoKa and draAtoKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
dv^ko)fxaL and avdXwjxat ; Aor. ava\<i)$r]v, dvqkdiSyjv ; Flit. Pass. 
avaXuSrjo-ojAai. Thu. and the Tragedians preferred the unaug- 
mented forms ; Plato and the orators, the augmented. 

5. dpia-KO), to please, Fut. dpco-to; Aor. rjpeaa [§ 130 (d)] ; (Perf. 
aprjpeKa in Sext. Emp. ;) Mid. with Accusative, to appease, to 
satisfy, Fut. apla-o/uu, Aesch. Suppl. 654 ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, rjpea- 
fiat; Aor. Pass. rjpto-Srjv, Soph. Ant. 500. Verbal Adj. dpecrros. 

6. fiiftpaHTKa), to eat (Fut. Att. e'So/xtu from eo-^iw, second Aor 
tydyov), Perf. PefipioKa; Part. fiePpfe (§194); Perf. Mid. or Pass 
pippoifxat (Aor. Pass. IppdiS-qv, and Fut. Pass. /fyw^o-o/Aai non 
Attic; instead, the forms of io$La> are used). 

7. ycywv'HTKa (mostly Poet.), to call, to make known, Put. yeywvf}<rw ; Aoi 
iyeywvTjcra; Perf. yiywua, with a Present signification; — further, yeywyetTw, 
Xen., yeywveiv, Poet., seldom prose, e. g. PL Hipp. M. 292, d, from the Prim. 

ramNEn. 

8. yrjpdcrKu) (or yrjpdw), senesco, to grow old, Fut. yrjpdo-ojxai (sel- 
dom yrjpda-oi Plato) ; Aor. iyrjpdaa (in Aesch. Suppl. 901., Trans. 
to cause to grow old), Inf. yrfpaa-ac (instead of it yrjpdvat, from an 
old second Aor. lyrjpdv, was preferred by the Attics, pa, § 192, 1) ; 
Perf. yey-qpaKa, I am old. 

9. yiyvwo-Ko) (ylvuxTKUi), cognosco, to know (rNO-), Fut. yvdxro- 
ficu; second Aor. lyvw (ju, § 191); Perf. cyvw/ca; Perf. Mid. or 
Pass, eyvoxxfiat ($ 131) ; Aor. Pass, eyvoxr^v; Fut. Pass. yvaxrSrj' 
vofmi. Verbal Adj. yvuxrros (old form yvooros), yvoicrrios. 

10. SiSpdo-Ko), to run away (only in compounds, e. g. d7ro8., 4*8., 
8ia6\), Fut. Spdaopai; Perf. SeSpdica; second Aor. ZSpdv (jii, $ 192, 

11. evpca-Koi, to find, second Aor. evpov; Imp. cvpi [$ 118, 3 
(a)]; CEYPE-) Fut. efynjo-w; Perf. evp^ica; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
ivp-qpiai; Aor. Pass. cvpiSrjv [$ 130 (d)] ; Fut. Pass, eup^^o-o/xat ; 
Mid. to obtain, Aor. evpopirjv (Aug. $ 121, Rem.). Verbal Adj. 
tvperos, evprrrios. 

12. fjftdo-KU), pubesco, to become marriageable, Fut. fjftrjcrui; Aor 
rjftrjo-a; Perf. rjfir)Ka (rjfido), to be young, but dvrjftdiOy to become 
young again). 

13. Sviqo-Koi, commonly d7ro^v^o-Kco, to c&e (Metathesis, $ 156, 
2), (®AN-) Aor. diri^dvov (Poet. eSavov; -JWwv, oi ^ai/oVres, £&6 



196 VERBS IN -to WITH STRENGTHLNED STEM. [$ 161 

dead, aiso in prose) ; Fut. airo^avovfjiat (Poet. Savovixai) ; Perf. 
ri^vrjKa (not aTroTeSvrjKa) both in prose and poetry, refhdfiw 
($ 194), etc., Inf. reSvdvai; Fat. Perf. rdkrfgto (I 154, 6), and 
among later writers TeSvrjiofiai, I shall be dead. Verbal Adj. 
'%r)To<;, mortal. 

14. ^pwo-Kw ($ 156, 2), to spring, to leap, Aor. ZSopov; Fnt. 
Sopovfiai ; Perf. ri^opa. 

15. lAdo-KOficuj to propitiate, Fut. lAacrojuai; Aor. I. IXdcrd/x-qv; Aor. 

Pass. ikdvS-qv. 

16. ixeSvo-KO), to intoxicate, Fut. /j.e$vcrui; Aor. i/xtSvo-a. But 
(jl€$v(d, to be intoxicated (only Pres. and Impf), borrows its tenses 
from the Passive, e. g. e/AeSvo-Srjv ($ 131). 

17. fjLifjLvrjo-KO), to remind (MNA-), Fut. pwrjcno ; Aor. ejxvrjo-a ; Mid. 
to remind one's self, to remember, also to mention ; Perf. /^e/xi^/xat, 
memini, I remember, I am mindful (Redup. § 123, Rem. 1), 
Subj. ix€fjLva)fxai, -fj, -tjtoll ($ 154, 8), Imp. p,€(jLvr)cro ; Plup. ejue/xvTy- 
ja^v, I remembered, Opt. fiejxvp/jirjv, -fjo, -fjro, or ixtfAviopvqv, -a>o, -<3ro 
($ 154, 8) ; Fut. Perf. fxepLv^cro/xat, I shall be mindful (among the 
Tragedians also, I will mention) ; Aor. ZpLvrjorSrjv, I remembered 
(ifxvrjo-dfjLrjv Poet); Flit. fJLvr)cr$r)croiAai, I shall remember {o.tto^viq- 
o-ofjiai, Th. 1, 137). 

18. Trdoyu* (formed from 7rd$<TKu>, by transferring the aspiration 
of $ to k), to experience a sensation, to suffer, Aor. en-dSov , 
(IIEN0-) Fut. ireta-ofiai ; Perf. 7rc7rov£a. Verbal Adj. irafhfrm. 

1 9. ttlttlo-ko), to give to drink, Fut. 7rto-to ; Aor. enicra. 

20. Trnrpdo-Kio, to sell, rare in Pres. Act. (Fut. and Aor. in the 
Common language expressed by dTroSdjo-o/xat, d7re86p,r)v) ; Perf 
7rc7rpa/ca ($ 156, Rem.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Trk-Kpa.p.o.1 (Inf. ircTrpaa- 
Scll, often instead of the Aor. ) ; Aor. £7rpd$-qv ; Fut. Perf. Trexpd- 
aopLCLL in the sense of the simple Fut. TrpaSrjo-ofjLai, which is rare 
and not Attic. Verbal Adj. Trparos, irparios. 

21. c-TeptaKUi (seldom crrepew, dfrocrripovvra^, Isoc. 12, 243, 
according to the Ms. Urb.), to deprive of Fut. o-Teprjano ; Aor. 
((rripyaa ; Perf. io-ripyjKa ; Mid. and Pass. o-TepLaKojxac, aTepov/xcu, 
privor; but crrepo/tat, lam deprived, Fat. a-Teprjcro/xai, rarer orep^- 
SrjaofJLai (tt7roo-repcto-^€, Andoc. My st. 149); Perf. io-reprjixai; Aor. 
Zo-TeprjSrjv. The simple occurs most frequently in the middle 
form ; in the Act., the compound dTroo-repto-Kw is more frequent 



§§ 162, 163.] verbs in -a> with strengthened stem. 197 

22. rtrpcoo-Ka), to wound, Fut. rpwcro) ; Aor. erpwaa ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, rerpoifjiai, Inf. TerpucrSai, Part. Tcrpoyiei/o? ; Aor. irp^S~r]V \ 
Flit. Tp<D^-q<TOfxaL and rp^aopiai. Verbal Adj. towto's. 

23. (fido-Ku, to say, to think (Ind. and Imp. very rare), Impf 
<L<f>acrKov; Fut. ^cro; Aor. cetera. — (Pass. icpdarKCTO, S. Ph. 114). 

24. x^o-ko), to gape (XAN-, among the later writers x^™), Aor. 
egavoy ; Fut. xavovficu ; Perf. icexrp/a, to stand open. 

Remark. In 5i8a<r/e«, doc-eo, the /c belonging to the stem is strengthened 
by <r prefixed ; hence the k remains in forming the tenses, Fut. 5i8a|&> ; Aor. iU- 
5a|a; Perf. SediSaxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 5e8idayp.ai ; Aor. Pass. iStSdx^vv. 
Verb. Adj. 5t8a/cT<fc, -reas. The same usage is found in the Epic and poetic 
verbs, a\frr]<ri«i>, a\v<rica>, Aa<rica. See § 230. 



$ 162. V. Verbs which have a Secondary Form in -#a>. 

Several verbs, particularly in poetry, have secondary forms in -dw, e. g. 
<p\€ye&eiv, poetic (instead of (p\4yeiv), to burn; Tiyepe&ovrai and rj€p4- 
bovrai, Epic, instead of ayelpovrcu and belpovrcu. Here belong also the end- 
ings -c&ov and -d&oifu of the Impf, and -d&eiv of the Pres. Inf., which are used 
even in Attic prose, e. g. &\e|w, to ward off", tragic Inf. etAKc&eu> (stem 'AAK) ; 
afjLvvo), to ward off, afivj/d&eiv, Impf. T)/xvua^ov ; — 8icS/c&>, to pursue, Stw/cci^etv, 
Impf. i8u&Ko&ov, also prose ; — eftcw, to yie/d, Impf. eif/ca&oj/, elicd&otp.i ; — efyryw, 
to s&itf wp, Impf. and Aor. etpyc&ov; — ex&j, to fatye, <rx& eit/ ( m Homer (rxe&eW 
as Aor.). 



$ 163. VI. Fer&s, ivhose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Impf. by prefixing a Reduplication. 

The reduplication consists in repeating the first consonant of the root with 
the vowel i. In the Epic and poetic dialects, there are also verbs, which take 
the Attic reduplication, i. e. they repeat the first two letters of the root ; see 
aKaxl&i aira<pi(TKw, apaplcrKO), § 230. 

1. /?i/3a£o), to make go, to convey, Fut. Att. /?i/3a>, -as, -a (still 
also Pipdo-wy X. An. 4, 8, 8. 5. 2, 10). Verbal Adj. pipcurrios. 

2. yiyvopai (ytvopiai) instead of ytyevopLai ($ 155, 2), to become, 
to be, (TEN-) Aor. Iyc.v6p.rjv (late Attic iyevrjSrjv) ; Fut. yeyrjcropLou. 
(PL Parm. 141, e. yev^o-erat, fiet, and moreover yevc^rjo-crat, efficie- 
tur); Perf. yeyevrjp.a.1, I have become, f actus sum, exstiti, and yeyova 
with a present signification, lam, implying lam by birth; iyevo- 
urjv and yeyova are also used as preterites of tlpcc, to be. 

3. 7TL7TTOJ (instead of 7rwrera), $ 155, 2), to fall, Imp. Triirrz', 
(HET-) Fut. 7T€o-oD/Aat ($ 154, 3) ; Aor. hrto-ov (very seldom first 

17 # 



19R VERBS IN -W WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [§$ 164, 163 

Aor. e7rc<ra), § 154, Rem. 2 ; Perf. 7r€7n-a)Ka with irregular variable 
Vowel (Part. 7re7TTU>s, ttctttiotos, Poet $ 194, 5). 

4. TLTpdo), to bore, Fut. t/d^o-co; Aor. 'drprjaa. More usual the 
secondary form rerpaivw, Fut. rcrpuvw; Aor. ererp^va ($ 149, Rem. 
2) ; Perf. TerprjKa, rerp^cu. Verbal Adj. rprjros. 

Several verbs of class IV (§ 161) belong here, as yiyvdtxnco), and several verbs 
in -/xi, as didw/AL. 



$ 164. VII. Fer&s, ivhose Pu e Stem-vowel a is 
strengthened in the Pres. and Impf. by i. 

Here belong the dialectic verbs, mostly Epic and poetic : ayaiofxcu, to be in- 
dignant; Scuco, to divide and burn ; uaio/j.ai, to rage; valeo, to dwell. See § 230. 

§ 165. VIII. Verbs, whose Pure Stem assumes e in the 
Pres. and Impf. 

1. yapLeu), to marry (of the man), Perf. yeya/x^/ca; but Fut. 
yafxu>; Aor. eyrjixa, yrj/xai (eya/x^o-a first in Menander, then in 
Lucian. ; yafirjaeias with the better reading ya/x^o-eias in X. Cy. 
8. 4, 20). Mid. yap.ov^ai (with the Dat), to marry (of the 
woman, nubo), Fut. yapLovficu ; Aor. iyr)p.dpLT)v ; Perf. ytydp-ypLCU. 
Pass, hi matrimonium ducor, Aor. iyafirjSrjv, etc. [§ 130 (d), 2]. 

2. yqSeoi, Poet., usually Perf. yiyrjSa (also prose), to rejoice, 
Fut. yy]$i)(rtj>. 

3. Sokgco, fo seem, videor, to think, Fut. So'lw (SoK-^ao) poet.) ; 
Aor. e8o|a (iSoK-qo-a Poet.) ; Aor. Pass. KaraSox^cts, Antiph. 2. 116, 
2; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Se8oyp,ou (SeSofo^cu, Ionic and Eurip.), 
visus sum. 

4. KTvirib) (Poet.), to resound, Fut. -fjarw, etc. : second Aor. e/cnnroy (Epic and 
S. 0. C. 1450) ; first Aor. e'/cr^o-a (ib. 1606). 

5. p.apTvp£a), to hear witness, Fut. p-aprvp-^ao), etc. But pLaprvpo- 
fjicu, Dep. Mid. fo ca# as witnesses. 

6. £vpeu), to shear, to shave, Mid. £upo//.ai; Aor. k^vpdpvqv, but 
Perf. i£vp7]p:ai. 

7. a)#€a), to ^>ws/£, Impf. €a>$ow; Fut. wcrw and a^o-oo; Aor. 
ccoo-a, wo-at ; Perf. tWa late, Plut. ; Fut. Mid. wo-c^at ; Aor. eooo-a- 
p.rjv; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ccooyxai; Aor. Pass, zwo-S-qv, Fut. Pass. 
ui<r$r}o-op.ai (Aug. $ 122, 4). Verbal Adj. wotos, -tcos. 



$ 166.] VERBS IN -G> WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 19 l J 

$ 166. Verbs, whose Stem is Pure in the Pres. and 
Imp/., but which assume an e in forming the 
tenses. 

This change has taken place in the formation of verbs in -ecu, partly from 
necessity, as is the case with verbs whose characteristic is |, ^ ; partly for the 
sake of perspicuity, that the root may not wholly disappear by the introduction 
of consonants, as in verbs whose characteristic is <tk, x& ; and partly from mere 
choice or the desire of euphony, as in verbs whose characteristic is 5, t, £, A, 
p-> *"> k> X-> a ? al > € j 0i - The e is changed into 77 in inflection. Exceptions : 
jLido/j.a.1, &x&o[Aai, and /iaxo^cu [§ 130 (d)]. 

1. cuSojxat, to feel shame, to fear (Pres. and Impf. old poetic, in the Common 
language alSeofiai), Impf. ald6/j.7}v without Aug.; Fut. alSetfo/jiai and --fjo-o/xai 
(iircude(r&7)<rofiai,~Ewr. Iph. A. 889); Perf. ■pSea'/xeuos, Dem. Aristocr. 646, 1; 
Aor. y8e<Td;j.7iv (with Ace), as a law-term in Attic prose, signifying to pardon a 
suppliant ; but also in poetry, signifying to be ashamed of to fear ; but in this 
sense r}S4<x^r]v is commonly used. 

2. aXi^w, to ivard off, Act. seldom in prose, X. Cy. 4. 3. 2, dX£$- 
ew ; Fut. akc$rj<r<0 ( Aor. rjXifycra, Horn. ) ; Mid. to ward off from 
one's self, Fut. dAe£*7o-o/xai (aXf^o/xat as Fut. of 'AAEK- is rare, 
e. g. S. Or. 171. 539. X. An. 7. 7, 3) ; Aor. rjXeidfxrjv (^Ae^o-d/^v, 
Horn, and X. An. 1. 3, 6. in all the best MSS.) (Inf. second 
Aor. dA/cd-W, used by the Trag., § 162.) 

3. av^os, to increase; see av£dva), § 160, 4. 

4. axSofxai, to be vexed, Fut. d^eo-o/xat, and in prose usually 
dx^^o-^a-ofxat (both with the same signification); Aor. rrx&zcr&riv 
131). 

5. (36o-Kui, to feed, Fut. /Socr/oyo-o) ; Aor. ifioencqera ; Mid. intrans. 
to feed, to eat. Verbal Adj. fioros, ySoo-K^re'os. 

6. fiovXofxai, to ivish (second Pers. fiovXei, § 116, 11), Fut. /3ou- 
X-qa-ofxai ; Perf. fiefiov\r)}xai ; Aor. i(3ovX^r)v and rjfiovXrjSrjv (Aug., 
\ 120, Rem. 1). 

7. Sew, to want, to need, usually Impers. Set, it is wanting, it is 
necessary ($ 137, 2), Subj. 8%, Part. Sew, Inf. Se«/; Impf. e'Set, Opt 
Se'oi; Flit. Seiyo-ei; Aor. eSe'Tyo-e^) ; Perf. SeSe^Ke^) ; Mid. Seo/xai, to 
need, Fut. Saja-ofwu; Aor. eSe^^v; Perf. SeSe'^ai. 

8. e^e'Aco and #e'A.co, to ivitt, Impf. r/deXov and ZSeXov ; Fut. 
iSeXrjo-u) and $eXi](T<D ; Aor. rjSiXyjo-a and iSeXrjcra ; Perf. only 
^eArKa. 



200 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 166 

9. ei'Aa>, eiAAto, i'AAo), also eiAeco, to press, to shut up, Flit. eiA^crw, 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. et'A^at; Aor. Pass. elXrjSrjv. 

10. cAko), to diraw, Fut. e'A^w (which is preferred to the othei 
form cAkuo-w from 'EAKYO) ; Aor. eiA/oxra ($ 122, 3), cAkixtcu 
(more common than e!A£a) ; Perf. ciA/oka; Mid. to draiv to one's 
self, iXKvaofxac, dXKvo-dpaqv ; Aor. Pass., Fut. Pass., and Perf. Mid 
01' Pass, only d\KvcrSr]v, £\KV<T$rj(ropLai, eiAKixr/x-ai. 

11. 'EIPOMAI, Aor. rjpo/xrjv, I inquired, ipeoScu, epco/xai, ipoi/xtjv, 
ipov, ipofievos ; Fut. ep^o-o/^cu. The other tenses are supplied by 
ip(DTav; but the Aor. ^pwrr/o-a is rejected. 

12. eppw, to go forth, Fut. ipprjcro); Aor. rjpprjcra; Perf. rjppy]Ka. 

13. €v8(d, commonly KaSevSw, to sleep, Fut. Ka^evSyao; Aor. rare 
and late; Perf. wanting (Aug., §) 121, Rem. and 126, 3). Verb. 
Adj. KaSevSrp-eov. 

14. e^w, to /We, to hold, Impf. et^o? ($ 122, 3) ; Aor. ecr^ov 
(instead of e-o-e^ov), Inf. cr^eti/, Imp. o-^e?, 7rapacr^e§ according to 
verbs in /u (in composition also cr^e, as Karaoke, irapavx*), Subj. 
cr^ov-175, 7rapao-^w, TtapdcrxflS, etc., Opt. cr\oir]v (/xt, § 192, Rem.), 
but in compounds 7rapao-^oi/xt, etc., Part, o^w ; Fut. e£a> and 
tr^cro) ; Perf. £(r^>y/ca; Aor. Mid. ecr^o/x^i/, Subj. (r^aj/>tat, Opt. cr^ot- 
p/^v, Imp. or^ou, -irapaoypv, Inf. crx^oSm, Trapacr^ecr^atj Part, cr^op:evos ; 
Fut. egopicu and o-^crop,ai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ecr^/iou ; Aor. Pass. 
i<rx€$r)v (not used in good Attic). Verbal Adj. ckto?, and oftener 
poetic cr^ero?, -reos. 

15. ei/'co., to C06>&, Fut. iij/rjo-oi (Flit. Mid. ixf^aofiai, Plat. Rp. 372, 
c.) ; Aor. yjij/rjo-a; Aor. Pass, rjxj/^rfv; Perf. Mid. or Pass, rji/^/xai. 

Verbal Adj. ecpSos, or e\f/r)TO<s, iifrqreos. 

16. t^o) (Plat. Symp. 196, 6), commonly KaS-^w, to seat, to sit, 
Impf. IkolSl^ov, old Attic kolTi&v; Fut. Ka#uo (117, 2); Aor. 
bKaTtara, old Attic KaSlaa ($ 126, 3) ; (Perf. zce/ca^uax ;) Mid. JseaZ 
myself Fut. KaSitficrop.ai ; Aor. e/ca-Wap^v, I seated for myself I 
caused to sit. But Ka#e£op,ai, J seatf myself, I sit, Impf. iKa&e^op-rjv ; 
Fut. Ka$eSo£'p.ai. 

17. K^Sw, to wza&e anxious (Act. only Epic), Fut. Krj&rjau) ; Perf. 
KeKrfia, I am anxious ; Mid. /<y/Sop.ai, to 6e anxious, in prose only 
Pres. and Impf. ; in Aesch. S. 138, is found Imp. Aor. Mid. 

•crySecrai. 

18. kAcuoo, to weep (/cAaa) seldom, and without contraction), 






$ 1G6.J VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 201 

Fut KXavo-ofxai (i<\av(rovfA.ai, $ 154, 2, in Aristoph.), rarer (in 
Dem.) Kkairj(r<ii, or KXdrjara) ; Aor. tKAavcra; iKXavo-dfJLiqv, S. Trach. 
153; Perf. K€KXavfxai, and later K&cXava-fuu ($ 131, 3). Comp. 
$ 154, 2. Fut. Perf. K€KA.auWai, Aristoph. Nub. 1440. Verbal 
Adj. /cAaucrro? and kXclvtos, KXavcrrtos. 

19. fjLaxo[j.cu, to fight, Fut. ixaxpvfxai, $ 154, 5 (Epic and late 
prose fxayrfo-ofxai) ; Aor. kfxa^o-dfxrfv ; Perf. /^e/xa^/xat ; Aor. Pass. 
ifxax^o-^v late. Verbal Adj. /xa^ereos and /^a^reo?. 

20. fxeXXo), to intend, to be about to do, hence to delay, Impf. 
"fxcXXov and rj/xeXXov ; Fut. fxeXXrjo-ai ; Aor. ifxiXXrfaa ; Pass. fxiXXea- 
#ou, to 6e j^ o^ delayed. (Aug., $ 120, Rem. 1.) Verbal Adj. 
fAtXrfTeov. 

21. /xeAei /xoi, curae mihi est, it concerns me, I lay it to heart 
(rarely personal fx£Xu>), Fut. /xeX^o-ei; Aor. lfxiXyfo-e(y) ; Perf. 
fx€fiiXyfKi{v) ; Mid. fxiXofiai, commonly hnfxkXofLaL (and i-n-cfXiXovfxai, 
but Inf. probably iTrifxiXeo-Sai) ; Fut. €7nfxeXrfo-ofxaL (sometimes 
ZTnfAtXrfSrfo-ofxai) ; Perf. i7rifJL€fj.iXr}fxaL ; Aor. €ir€fxzXri$rfv. Verbal 
Adj. iTrifJLeXrfTeov. 

The compounds, e. g. /xeTa,u.4\€i, poenitet, are used as impersonals only ; sel- 
dom /j.eTa/x4\o(xai, to repent (Thuc), Aor. jueTe^ieA^Tji/ (late) ; fxeixr]\<os, caring 
for. 

22. fu5£co, to sz£c&, Fut. fxv&fo-u), etc. 

23. o£co, to smell, i. e. to emii an odor, Fut. 6£?jo-o> ; Aor. contra 
(Perf. oSwSa with the meaning of the Pres. in Homer and the 
later writers, § 124, 2). 

24. oiofxai and oTfxai,to think, second Pers. ol'et ($ 116, 11); 
Impf. (pofirfv and ^fxrjv ; Fut. olrj&opLai ; Aor. iprjSrfv, olr]$f)vai ; Perf. 
wanting. (Aug., $ 122, 1.) Verbal Adj. ofyreos. 

The abbreviated forms, ol/xat, yfi-nv, are used in prose as a mere paren- 
thetic expression, like the Lat. credo, and hence are often employed in an 
ironical sense; oiofxai, on the contrary, has such a sense, only when it is a 
governing verb ; still, this difference of usage is not fully observed even by the 
best Attic writers. 

25. otxo/jtat, I am gone, have gone (with sense of Perf), abii, 
Impf. <*x°M v (sense of Aor., also Plup.), I went away, had gone , 
Fut. olxrjo-ofxai ; Perf. $xW aL > commonly as a compound, e. g 
7rap(axr)fJLai, X. An. 2. 4, 1. in the best MSS., Ion. and Att. Poet 



202 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 166 

oJ^coKa (so originate, ot^a, oiK-ar^a, oi^-wKa, comp. the Epic oKcu^q 
from e X oi, § 230). 

26. dfaikio, to oive, debeo, I ought, must, Put. ofaihqo-oi ; Aor. 
bifaCk-qaa ; Perf. w^eiX-^Ka ; second Aor. w^>eA.ov, -es, -e(v) (first and 
second Pers. PL not used), in forms expressing a wish, utinam. 

27. 7rato), to strike, Put. 7raurco (Att. secondary form ttcu^cw in 
Aristoph.); Aor. en-aura; Perf. TriiraiKa (the simple late); Aor. 
Mid. €7rato-a^v; Pass, with o- ($ 131, 2) ; yet instead of 7re7raur- 
aat and eVaicr-S^v, iirXT^yrjv and 7ri7r\rryfj.m were commonly used 
Verbal Adj. muoreos. 

28. TripSoi, usually 7r€o8o/x,ai, emitter e flatum, Aor. hrap&ov ; Fut. 
7rapSrjcroixaL ; Perf. 7re7roo6a ($ 140, 4). 

29. TrtTojAcu, to fly, Fut. (irerridoixat, Aristoph.) commonly tttt;- 
a-opai; Aor. commonly in prose and in the Comic writers, e7rro- 
/xryv, TTTcarSai (rarer iTrra.prqv ; errTrjv, tttw, 7TTai.y}V, Trrrjvac, 7rras, poet, 
and in the later writers ($ 192, 2) ; Perf. ^en-or^ai (Aristoph.). 
— Syncope ($ 155, 1). 

30. o-KeAAw (or <TKe\£o>), to dry, Aor. la-Kk-qv (§ 192, 4), and Perf. 
€(TK\r)Ka, and Fut. o-K\rjcrop.ai } intrans. fo c&"2/ up, to ivither. — Met- 
athesis, § 156, 2. 

31. TV7TTO), to strike, Fut. Attic Twrnjon> (rvxf/a), Homer); (Aor. 
I. irvTrnja-a late; ervi^a, Horn. ; Aor. II. hmroVj Eur. Ion. 779; for 
the Aor. of this word, the Attics use en-dYa^a, en-aura ;) (Perf. 
T€TV7rrr)Ka, Pollux) ; Fut. Mid. rvn-Trja-ofjiaL, Aristoph. Nub. 1382. 
Pass, blows will be inflicted; Perf. reru/x/xai, Aesch. (rervirT'qp.ai. 
late); Aor. Pass. irv7rr]v {IrvTrrri^riv late). Verbal Adj. Tircrr^Teos. 

32. -^atpo), to rejoice, Fut. x aL PV (T0> (x a PV (TO f JiaL late) ; Aor. c^apiyv 
(/At, $ 192, 8); Perf. Kexo-pV Ka (Aristoph. and Herod.), I have 
rejoiced, and K^ap^ai (poet.), lam glad. Verbal Adj. ^a/mfc. 

Remark 1. Of the preceding classes, there belong here verbs in -dva> (§ 160), 
and {nrurxvtonai, of those in § 159. 

Rem. 2. With these verbs several liquid verbs are classed (§ 149, 6) ; still, 
t ley form the Put. and the Aor. regularly, e. g. 

fieua, to remain, Put. /iei/w; Aor. e/iewa; Perf. fie/xzvriKa. Verbal Adj. 

fisverSs, fievereos. 
pffiw, to divide, Put. vefioi] Aor. euetfia; Perf. v€v4fn]Ka; Aor. Pass. ev€« 
nil&7)v. — Mid. vdfiofxai, Put. vefiovfiai ; Aor. iveifidfnjv ; Perf. Mid. of 
Pass, j/ e ye/x 77/x, at. Verbal A.dj. vefiTjreos. 



fr 167.] VERBS WITH TENSES FROM i IFFERENT ROOTS. 203 

$ 167. Verbs, ivhose Tenses are formed from different 
Roots, and which are classed together only in 
respect to Signification. 

1. aipioi, to take, to capture, e. g. a city, Impf. ypovv ; Ful 
ulprjo-a); Perf. rjpyjKa; Aor. (from e EA) elXov, iXelv; Aor. Pass. 
XlpiS-qv; Put. Pass. alptSrjo-oiAai [$ 130 (d)]. — Mid. to choose, Aor. 
elAop^i/ ; Fut. atpTJo-o/xat ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. rjp7)(j.ai; Fut. Perf. 
pp^o-o/xat, PL Prot. 338, "b. Verbal Adj. aipero's, -reos. 

2. epxojxai, to go, to come (only the Indie, of the Pres in use in 
Attic, the remaining modes and the participials being borrowed 
from et/xi ($ 181) ; thus, epypixai, I'to, IS-l, Uvai, low), Impf. rjp^ofxrjVy 
commonly $W and rja, Opt. tot/xc; Fut. el/xt, I shall go (r/£w, I shall 
come ) ;_('eAEY®-) Perf. ZXjXvSa [$ 124, 2 (b)] ; Fut. eAeuVopm 
almost exclusively poetical and later prose, still also Lys. p. 
165, §11; Aor. rjXSov, eX&o, &#oip,i, ZXSi [$ 118, 3 (a)], iXMv, 
l\$uv. Verbal Adj. /JLtTeXevareov. 

"Epxo/xai has in common the signification of to come and to go ; the idea of 
corning commonly belongs to the form from iT^teiu, and the idea of going to that 
of ejfii. But in compounds, each of these three verbs expresses both ideas, and 
only the preposition limits it to the one or to the other signification. 

3. icrSia), to eat, Impf. tjctSloV, (e'Sco, Ep.) Fut. eSo/xou, ($ 154, 4) ; 
Perf. £8rj8oKa ; Aor. tyayov, <£ayeiv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eS^Seoyx-ai, 
($ 124), 2; Aor. Pass. rjStoSrjv. Verbal Adj. eSecrros, eSeo-reos. 

4. 6pdo), to see, Impf. iojpojv; Perf. ewpa/ca (Poet, also eopd/ca, 
Aug., § 122, 6) ; Aor. (from 1A-) elSov, tSoj, i'Soi/u, 184, $118, 3 (a), 
iSetv, iSojv. (On the second Perf. olSa, I know, see $ 195.) Fut. 
(from 'On) oxj/ofiat (2. Pers. ctyei, Hi 6, 11). — Mid. or Pass. 6pw- 
pu; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ewpd/xcu, or w/^/xat, wi/^ai, etc. ; Inf. S<££ai; 
Aor. Mid. eiSop/^v, iS«*#ai, tSoi) (and with the meaning ecce, iSou), 
as a simple only Poet. ; Aor. Pass. ui^S-qv, o^rjvat ; Fut. 6<j>$r}<r- 
o/mi. Verbal Adj. oparos and 6Vtos, 6ttt€o<s. 

5. rp€x<o, to nm, (APEM-) Fut. SpapLovfxai ; Aor. cSpa/xov; Perf. 
SeSpdpiyjKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. e7rt8e8pap^p,at (X. O. 15. 1). Verb. 

A.dj. 9peKT€OV. 

^rp^ofji.ai, e&pe£a, rare and poet. — Second Perf. only Epic SeSpo/xa (APEMH). 

6. 4>(pQ) (only Pres. and Impf.), to bear, ('OI-) Fut. ol'o-w (Aor. 
Imp. oto-e, oio-crw, 6rm£\ in Aristoph., see $ 230, under <£epw) ; — 



204 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -pi. U 16S 

(EYKQ, or 'ENErKfi) Aor. II. tyzyKov (rarer Aor. I. ^ica'), -e* 
-e(v), -opev, -ere, -ov (and -a/*ev, -are, -av), (f 124, Kem. 2), Opt. 
h/iyKoifu, etc. (rarer -cu^i, etc.), Inf. iveyKeiv, Part, eveyxcov (rarer 
ei/ey/cas), Imp. e/ey/ce, -era), etc. (and -ctrcu, etc.) ; — ('ENEK-) Perf. 
brqvoxa (j 124, 2) ; Mid. to cam/ o# c/z/r^ azray, w, Fut. oto-o- 
uat; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Ivrjvcypai (-yfai, -y/crai, or eV^em-ai) ; Aor. 
Mid. rjveyKaprjv, eveyKOU, -aaSai, -dpevos; Pass, (a) to 6e 6orae, 
carried, (b) to 6mr owe's se^ to hasten; Aor. Pass. rjvix^W) Fut 
ivexSrjo-ofiat (rarer olrSrjcropai). Verb. Adj. oio-ros, otoreos (Poet. 
<£eproV). 

7. <£??/« (§ 178), to say, Impf. £077v with the meaning of the 
Aor. also <f>aviu and </>as ($ 178, Rem. 2);— ('En-) Aor. €wrov, 
ewro), znroipi, ciTre [$ 118, 3 (a)], (the other forms of the Imp. are 
rarely or never used, compound TrpoWe), ehrew, diruiv (first Aor. 
etTra, not very frequent in Attic writers, more frequent eiTras, 
very frequent enrare, rarely drrav, Imp. dirov rarely, very frequent 
ei7rara), ct7rarov, elirdrow, and always ct7rare ; all other forms want- 
ing in the Att). From the Epic Pres. eipa), come Fut. ipw, Perf. 
etpYjKa, Perf. Mid. or Pass, ctprjpat ($ 123, 4) ; — ('PE-) Aor. Pass. 
ipprjSrjv (ipp&hp appears not to be Attic), prj$r}vcu, poet's; Fut. 
Pass. pTjSrjaopicu and elprjo-opai. — Mid. only in compounds, Fut. 
airtpovpai, and first Aor. avei'ircur&ai, to efem/, to 5e wearied out, to 
give up, like ajrenruv. Verbal Adj. pyros, prp-eos. 

Instead of the Pres. <pr}ixi, other words are sometimes used, particularly in 
composition. Compare airayopevw, I forbid, aireiirov, I forbade ; avriXiyca, I 
contradict, avTsiitov, I contradicted, the compounds of elireiy in the Aor. being 
more frequent than airriySpevo-a and avrtAe^a. So, ayopevw riva k<xkS>s, I speak, 
ill of one, but avreiirov KtXK&s, 

§ 168. Conjugation of Verbs in -pa. 

1. Verbs in -pa, the number of which is small, differ from 
those in -co, principally in taking different personal-endings 
in the Pres. and Impf., several also in the second Aor. Act. 
and Mid. ; and also in omitting the mode-vowel in the Ind. 
of the above tenses. The formation of the remaining 

1 The first Aor. is preferred to the second, in the first Pers. Sing. Indie, when 
the next word begins with a consonant ; also in the persons of the Imp. which 
'nivo a: hence eueyice, but iueyKdrw. 



$ 169.] DIVISION OF VERBS IN -fXl. 205 

tenses is like that of verbs in -g>, with a few exceptions. In 
omitting the mode-vowel, these verbs are analogous to those 
in -dco, -eco, and -oco. 

2. In the Pres. and Impf., most verbs in -fu with a mono- 
syllabic stem, take a reduplication (§ 163) ; this consists in 
repeating the first consonant of the stem with i, when the 
stem begins with a simple consonant or a mute and liquid; 
but, when the stem begins with err, irr, or with an aspirated 
vowel, l with the rough breathing is prefixed to the stem. 
These verbs are the following : — 

2TA 'l-ffTTj-jxi nPA irl-fi-* tr)-fx.i 

XPA KL-XPy-f" AE (U-dri-fii) Si84ourt(v) 

BA (pl-&7i-(ju} fiiPds 0E Tl-^rj-fii 

nTA "-Trra-fiai 'E '{-7]-/xi 

nAA irl-iJ.-Tr\r]-/xi AO Si-5w-/u. 

Remark. Most verbs in -/xi do not follow this conjugation throughout in 
the three tenses above named, but only in some particular forms ; four verbs, 
rt^rj/it, to put ; fornfttu, to place ; StSwjUi, to give, and 'Irj/xi, to send, have thia 
conjugation most full, though even these have forms in use borrowed from the 
conjugation in -w, together with several forms* of the inflection in -fit. See 
§ 172, Rem. 8 

§ 169. Division of Verbs in -/ui. 

Verbs in -fit are divided into two principal classes : — 

1. Such as annex the personal-ending to the stem-vowel. 
The stem of verbs of this class ends : — 

(a) in o, e. g. 'l-ffrr)-(xi, to place, Stem 2TA- 

(b) " e, " ri-frri-ni, to put, " 0E- 

(c) " o, " Si-dw-fii, to gire, " AO- 

(d) " i, " elfu, to go, " 'I- 

(e) " c, " el/xl, instead of i<T(x.(, to be, " 'E2-. 

2. Such as annex to their stems the syllable -vvv or -vv, 
and then append to this syllable the personal-endings. The 
stem of verbs of this class ends : — 

A. In one of the four vowels, a, e, i, o, and assumes -vvv 

(a) in a, e. g. tr/ceSa-wO-jUt, to scatter, Stem 2KEAA- 

(b) " €, " Kope-vvv-fii, to satisfy, " KOPE- 

(c) " i, only ri-uj/v-fii, to atone, " TI- 

(d) " o, e. g. (yrpeb-vvv-fu, to spread out, " 2TPO-. 

18 



206 VERBS IN -fit. STEM OF THE PRES. STRENGTHENED. [§ 170 

B. In a consonant, and assumes -vv. 

(a) in a mute. e. g. de'iK-vv-fii, to show, Stem AEIK- 

(b) " liquid, " ofx-vv-fjn, to swear, " ! OM-. 
Remark 1. When a diphthong precedes the final consonant of the stein 

that consonant is omitted before the -w, except it be a Kappa-mute, e. g. 

cu-vvjxai Stem 'AIP (comp. ctip-u>, ap-vii/xai) 

tial-vvfu " AAIT (comp. Sous, 5atr-6s) 

Kal-vvfiai " KAIA from KAA (comp. Perf. KeKad-fxcu, KeKcurfiat) 

KTcl-vv/xi " KTEIN from KTEN (Put. Krev-S>) ; but 

Sdn-vD/xi, eipy-vv/xi, £evy-vv/j.i, o'ly-vv/ju.. 
Rem. 2. Verbs of the second class, — those in -v/xi, — form only the Pres. 
and Impf. like verbs in /u, and even in these tenses, only a part of the forms 
are in -v/ii, the others in -too; in the Sing. Impf. the forms in -uw are predomi- 
nant, and in the Pres. Subj. and in the Impf. Opt., these are the regular forms. 
The verb a^e-wv-fxi, from the stem 2BE-, is the only verb of this class which 
forms the second Aor., namely, e<r/3riv ; several verbs in -co, form their second 
Aor. according to the analogy of these verbs, e. g. Suco, eSw. 

$ 170. Characteristic-voivel and Strengthening of 
the Stem of the Present. 

1. In verbs of the first class, trie short characteristic-vowel 
of the stem, a, e, o, is lengthened in the Pres., Impf, and 
second Aor. Act. : — 

& and e into rj, and o into w. 
Still, in verbs in -e and -o this lengthening extends only to the 
Ind. Sing, of these three tenses ; but in verbs in -a, to the Dual 
and PL Ind. also, and likewise to the entire Imp. and the 
second Aor. Inf. Act. In the second Aor. Inf. Act. of verbs in 
-€ and -o, e is lengthened into ei, and o into ov, e. g. #et-i/ai, Sov- 
vat. But in the same tenses of the Mid., the short character- 
istic-vowel remains throughout. 

2. Verbs in -v/u, whose stems end in a vowel, and hence 
annex -vw, retain the short characteristic-vowel, except those 
whose stem ends in -o, e. g. o-Tpu-vwfjLi (STPO-) ; but verbs 
whose stems end in a consonant, and hence annex -io;, are 
strengthened in the stem of the Pres. by lengthening the stem- 
vowel, namely, 

a becomes 17, as in vfiy-vv^i, second Aor. Pass. Ha.y-t]v 
a " ai, " aX-vvfxai instead of apvv/xai, stem 'AP, 'AIP 
e " ex, " SeiK-vv/jLi, stem AEK, hence Ion. ede£a 
v " eu, " (evy-vvni, second Aor. Pass. i(vy-riu. 



H 171, 17?.] VERBS IN -/u. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 207 



$ 171. Mode-vowels. 

1. The Ind. Pres., Impf., and second Aor. do not take the 
mode-vowel ($ 168, 1), and hence the personal-endings are 
* ' »>exed immediately to the stem of the verb, e. g. 

'i-crra- fj.ev e-Ti-S-e-jue;/ e-So-ftey 

i-arrd-fxefra 4-ri-&e-iJ.e&a i-pS-fieSra. 

2. The Subj. has the mode-vowels <*> and rj, as in verbs in -o> ; 
but these vowels coalesce with the characteristic-vowel and 
form one syllable ; this coalescence differs from the contraction 
of verbs in -<d, as follows : — 

6.T) and dy coalesce into rj and rj (not, as in contracts in -dec, into a and <j), 6y 

coalesces into <£ (not, as in contracts in -6w, into oi), e. g. 

l-ffrd-w ==7 1-<tt£j l-crd-ris == I-ctttjs i-ard-rj-rai = i-arrrj-rai 

ard-ai = area <TTa-r}s == ctt^s 

Tt-^6-o> == Ti-i^w Tt-3-e-Tjs = Ti-frf}s ti-&4-(i)-/acu = ti-&£>-/acu 

5t-8^-w = $i-S<£ 8t-So-7?s == 5f-8£s $i-d6-r) = 8i-8<£. 

Remark 1. This form of the Subj. of 'l<TTr)fxi and riSrrnxi is like the Subj. 
of the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs, e. g. tv<£&w, -??s, -7?, etc., rvir-a>, -77s, -77, 
from TU7T-TW, <rra-&cD, -77s, -77, from 'larrj^i. 

Rem. 2. The Subj. of verbs in -vfii is like that of verbs in -vco, e. g. Set/ci^w, 
-i5t7s, etc. 

3. The Impf. and second Aor. Opt. have the mode- vowel c, 
which is annexed to the characteristic- vowel, and with it forms 
a diphthong, e. g. 

Impf. Opt. A. l-crra-i-rju = i-crrai-riv Aor. II. A. arai-rju Impf. M. i-ffral-firjy 
ri-&e-i-r)i> = Ti-frd-r)v ^ei-rjv Ti-frd-w 

5t-5o-i-r)v — 5i-dol-r}v Soi-rjv 5i-doi-/Mrji/. 

Rem. 3. The Opt. of verbs in -e (t&ij/m) is like the Aorists Opt. Pass, of 
all verbs, e. g. a-ra-^ei-rju, rv<(>-&ei-nv, rvir-ei-rjv. 

Rem. 4. The Impf. Opt. of verbs in -v/xi, like the Subj. Pres., follows the 
form in -o>, e. g. SeiKvvoifMi. The few exceptions will be considered below. 

§ 172. Personal-endings. 

1. The following are the personal endings for the Act. .— 
(a) For the Indicative Present, 

Sing. 1. .p.1 'l-ffrri-fii 

2. -5 (properly -<ri) '/-cttj-s 

-<ri{v) (properly -ti) 'i-<nr\-<ri{v) 



208 



VERBS IN -fU. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 


12. 


•TOP 


'i-crra-Tou 


3. 


-top 


'i-ara-rov 


•. 1. 


-/xep (properly -pes) 


'i-ara-fiev 


2. 


-re 


1-(TTa-T€ 


3. 


[-p<ti{p)] (properly -vti) 


[t-CTTO-J/Tt 'i-o~Ta-(ri{ r)]. 



[U72 



The ending of the third Pers. PI. -v(ri(v) is changed into -dai(p), and then 
is contracted with the preceding stem-vowel of the verb. Still, the Attic dia- 
lect admits contraction only in the stems ending in -a, thus : — 
from 



X-(TTa-v<n is formed 


l-<TTcL<n 




(i-o~Td-ao~i) 


Ti-3-e-vcrt " 


Ti-beiffi 


Att, 


Tt-^e-dtrt 


dt-8o-vo-i " 


di-Sovai 


" 


St-So-dct 


SeiK-pv-pcrt " 


SeiK-yd(ri 


" 


5e«c-vu-&r». 



Remake 1. The uncontracted form in -eWt, -6d<ri, -va<ri, is the only one 
used in Attic prose, though it also occurs in the Ionic dialect ; the contracted 
form in -e?<n, -ovo~i, -vtrt, is the usual form in the Ionic writers, very seldom in 
the Attic poets. But from "ripi (stem 'E), to send, this Attic form iaci (con- 
tracted from l-i-dai) always occurs. 

(b) The personal-endings of the Subj. Pres. and second 
Aor. do not differ from those of verbs in -co. 

(c) The following are used for the Impf. and second Aor. 
Tnd.: — 

Sing. 1. -v Impf. 'L-(m\-v i-ri-frrj-v 

2. -s X-ffrri-s i-rl-Srri-s 

3. - 'l-GTt) i-rl-frr] 
Dual 2. -top A. II. e-oT7j-Toi' %-&e-rov 

3. -TTji/ i-(TTr}-Trji/ i-be-Trjv 

Plur. 1. -fjLtv (properly -/xes) e-o-rrj-fiev e-&e-/uev 

2. -T6 e-ffTTj-re tf-fre-re 

3. -(raj/ z-o~TT}-(Tav %-&e-<rav. 

Rem. 2. The Ind. of the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs is like the second 
Aor. zo-T7}v, e. g. irvTr--t]v, i-ara-^qv, -77s, -77, -7}top, -77x771', -y/J.ep, -777-e, -riaav. 

(d) The personal-endings of the Opt. Impf. and second Aor. 
(except the first Pers. Sing.) differ from those of the Opt. of 
the historical tenses of verbs in -co, only in being preceded by 
77 ; comp. the endings of fiovXevoifju, /SovAevcrai/u, etc. with those 
of 

0TCU-77V, l-ffTat-7)v &ei-r)v Ti-&et-7)P 801-771/ Si-5ot-rjp. 
Rem. 3. In the Dual and PI. Impf. Opt., the -77 is commonly rejected in the 
Attic dialect, and the ending of the third Pers. PI. -770-cw is almost always 
shortened into -ep, e. g. 

Ti&d-r)fjLeu = T&e?fj.ev liTTai-rjTe = IffTalre 

T&e(-n<rau = Ti&etev SiSol-Tjffcw = StSoie^ 



} 172.] 



VERBS IN -/U. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 



205 



Sing. 2. 

3. 

Dual 2. 


-TO) 
-TOV 


3. 
Plural 2. 


-T00V 
-T€ 


3. 


-rworav 



(rl-fre-Zn) 


(M-Bo-fri) 


Ti-3-e-rw 


8l-d6-T6) 


ri-Se-rou 


St-do-TOV 


rt-Se-rwu 


Sl-86-TWV 


Ti-Se-re 


dl-So-re 


ri-Se-raaav 


Si-SS-rwcrav 


TlSzVTWV 


Si-Soutcov. 



The same holds of the Opt. Pass. Aorists of all verbs, e. g. ircudev&e'n}(xev = 
irai8ev&-e7/j.ev (wholly like T&elyv). — On the contrary, in the second Aor. Opt. 
Act. of '{(TT71IJ.I, T&r)ixi, didcc/xi, the abbreviated forms are very rare, except the 
third Pers. PL, which is commonly abridged. 
Eem. 4. The forms didcprjv and S^V also occur. 

(e) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Imp. are: — 

(t-<rr a-Si) 
i-crrd-Tta 

'i-CTTCL-TOV 
l-GTa-TQW 
"-(TTa-T€ 

l-crrd-Tucrav 
or 1-cTTavTtoP 

Rem. 5. The second Pers. Sing. Imp. Pres, rejects the ending -£h, and, as a 
compensation, lengthens the short characteristic-vowel, namely, a into 77, e into 
et, into ov, v into v, 

'(-(rTa-&i becomes '/-ottj riSe-Si becomes rlSei 

Si-doSi " fil-dov SetK-vvSi " SeiKVv. 

The ending Si is retained in the Pres. only in a very few verbs, e. g. <pdSi 
from (prifjii, foSn from elfii, fth from elfii, and some others ; it also occurs in cer- 
tain Perfects of verbs in -w, e. g. re&va&i. 

In the second Aor. of ri^fii, %u, and Sidw/xi, the ending Si is softened into 
s ; thus, S4-Si becomes S4s, %-Si = '4s, 86-&1 = 86s ; but in the second Aor. of 
'(aT7),ui, the ending -Si is retained ; thus, ctttj-Si ; also in the two Aorists Pass. 
of all verbs, e. g. Tinrrj-Si, TratSevSyTi (instead of irai8zi>Sri-Si, § 21, Rem. 3). In 
compounds of o-ttjSi and fir/Si, the ending -rjSi is often abbreviated into d, in 
the poet, dialect, e. g. Trapatrrd, anrScfTo., 7rpo/3d, Kardfia. 

(f ) The ending of the Pres. and second Aor. Inf. is -you. 
This is appended in the Pres. to the short characteristic- vowel ; 
but in the second Aor., to the lengthened vowel (a being 
lengthened into y, e into u, o into ov, § 170, 1) ; thus, 

Pres. l-crra-vat ri-S4-vai 81-86-vai deuc-vv-vai 

Second Aor. OTr\-va.i Sei-vai 8ov-vai. 

Rem. 6. The Inf. Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like <nr\va.i, e. g. rimy-vat, 
BovAevSrj-vai. 

(g) The endings of the R.es. and second Aor. participle are 
~vts, -vTcra, -vt, which are joifl 3d to the characteristic- vowel 
according to the common rules ; thus, 

l-GTa-VTS == i-crrds, 1-crTacra, l-arav 
ti-S4-vts — ri-Seis, -€?<ra, -4v 
81-86-vrs = bi-8ovs, -ovaa, -6v 
8cik-vv-vts = SeiK-vvs, -vera, -vv. 

18* 



eras, crracra, crrav 
Sets, Se7cra, S4v 
8ois, -ovcra, -ov 



210 VERBS IN fu. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. [$ 173 

Eem. 7. The participles of the two Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like tin 
Part. riSfeis, or d-eis, e. g. rvir-eis, -e?<ra, -eV, fiovXevSr-eis. 

2. The personal-endings of the Mid. are like those of verbs 
in -w, except that uniformly, in the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and 
almost always in the Impf. Ind. and in the Imp., the personal- 
endings retain their full form, -o-ai and -cro. Still, the following 
points are to be noted : — 

(a) The second Pers. Pres. Ind. of verbs in -a (as tW^t, Bvva/j.ai), is only -aacu 
in Attic prose ; the contracted form is found, from the earliest period, only 
in the poetic dialect, e. g. i-Kiara. from iiriarafiai in Aesch., Sivy (from the Ionic 
ending -eat) instead of Swa, in Soph, and Eurip. — In the second Pers. Imp. 
and in the Impf, 'Icrrca seems to be only poetic 5 but, iiriffra, Tjiria-Tw, Svvw, 
rjSvvu, are the regular forms in good prose, and the uncontracted forms 
scarcely occur except in the poets and later writers. 

(b) In verbs in -e, the contract forms in the Imp. Pres. are poetic and rare, and 
in the Indie. Impf. not at all in use; thus, Impf. iri&eo-o, Imp. rifreo-o (rifrov) ; in 
the second Aor., both of verbs in -e and -0, the contract are the regular forms, 
e. g. Indie, e&ov, Imp. &ov ; e5ou, Sod. In verbs in -0 also, the uncontracted 
forms seem to be the usual ones in the Impf. and Imp. : i$l5o<ro, 8i8o<ro. 

(c) The contracted forms are uniformly employed throughout the Subj.; in 
the Opt., as in verbs in -a, the c is always omitted, yet the form remains 
uncontracted. 

Eem. 8. The Sing. Impf. Act. of ri^fjn, is ir(^r)v, 2 Pers. iri&eis, 3. iri&ei 
(from TI0EH), trlbeis and eWdei being more frequent than iri^s, irlSri ; on 
'irifii, see § 180 ; the Sing. Impf. Act. of Sida/xi is always iSiSovu (fr. AIAOQ), 
iSidovs, etc. (X. An. 5. 8, 4. is to be read iSlSovs instead of idiSws, according to 
the best MSS.) In verbs in -v/xi, the forms in -ta are usual throughout the Pres. 
and Impf., especially in third Pers. PL Indie. Act., e. g. 8cikuvovo-i(u), and 
the only forms in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., e. g. Set/cww, 6/xvvc», o-vjAjxiy- 
vvco, together with SelicyUfM, o/jLvvfu, crv/xfxtyj/vfxi. — In Attic poetry, there are also 
contracted forms of ti^/jll and 'fyfii in the second and third Pers. Sing. Pres. 
Ind. Act., e. g. r&els, U?s, rife?, k?. — But the Middle admits the formation in 
•vw only in the Subj. and Opt. 

Formation of the Tenses. 
§ 173. I. First Class of Verbs in -ixi. 

1. In forming the tenses of the Act., the short characteristic- 
vowel is lengthened, both in the Fut. and first Aor. Mid., 
namely, a into rj, e into rj ; also in the Perf. Act. of rudy/M and 
irjfu, c is lengthened into e£ and o into w ; but in the remaining 
tenses of the Mid., and throughout the Pass., the short charac- 
teristic-vowel is retained, with the exception of the Perf. and 
Plup. Mid. and Pass, of rtSijjxi and iiy/u, where the et of the 
Perf. Act. (re^ctKa, re^ei/xai, el/ca, el)uai) is retained. 

2. The first Aor. Act. and Mid. of ti^/u, hjpi, and Siow/u, has 
k for the characteristic of the tense, no*, o-; thus, 

«-&7}-K-a, fy-/c-a, c-8a>-K-a. 



$174.] VERBS IN -fJLl. -FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 211 

The forms of the first Aor. Act. 'dS-rjKa, rjKa, and eoWa, however, 
are usual only in the Ind., and generally only in the Sing. ; in 
the other persons, the Attic writers commonly used the forms 
of the second Aor. ; in the other modes and the participials. 
the forms of the second Aor. were always used. 

Examples of the first Aor. in the PL Ind. are : ifrfjicanev, X. C. 4. 2, 15 
HAica/iev, X. An. 3. 2, 5. O. 9, 9. 10. eS^/care, Antiph. 138, 77. edooxav, X. Cy 
4. 6, 12. ibriKau, H. 2. 3, 20. SuffiKav, Cy. 4. 5, 14. 

Also the forms of the second Aor. Mid. of rt^/xt, Irj^i, and 
oYSoo/u, are used by the Attic writers instead of the first Aor. ; 
f)K<ifjLr)v from itj/ju occurs, though but seldom. On the contrary, 
the forms of the second Aor. Ind. Act. of ti^/m, Zr)iu, and oYSayu 
(e'^v, rjv, 'Soiv), are not in use. 

3. The verb umjfu forms the first Aor. Act. and Mid., like 
verbs in -co, with the tense-characteristic o-, e. g. 'i-cmq-cr-a, e-<m?- 
cr-dfirjv. The second Aor. Mid. eo-ra/^j/ is not used. Some 
other verbs, however, have a second Aor. Mid., e. g. iirrdfMjv, 
hrpia.px\v. 

Remark 1. The second Aor. and the second Put. Pass, are wanting in these 
verbs, also the Put. Perf., except in 'Iffrrnii, the Put. Perf. of which is kffr^w 
and fa-T-fj^ofiai, § 154, 6. 

Rem. 2. On the meaning of the verb "aTy/Ai, the following things are to be 
noted : the Pres., Impf, Put., and first Aor. Act. have a Trans, meaning, to 
place ; on the contrary, the second Aor., the Perf. and Plup., Act. and the Fut. 
Perf, have a reflexive or Intrans. meaning, to place one's self, to stand, namely, 
t(TTr\v, I placed myself, or I stood; scmriKa (with present signification), / have 
placed myself, I stand, sto ; lor^/cet^, stabam ; Ict^o), etTT^o/xai, stabo (a^ecHJIw, 
I shall withdraw). The Mid. denotes either to place for one's self to erect, to stand, 
zonsistere, or to place one's self; Pass, to be placed. "Eo-ttjko. and ecrTfiKeiv usually 
take the place also of the forms eo-Ta/icu and e<ndfxr}v, which occur but rarely. 

§ 174. II. Second Class of Verbs in -fit. 

There is no difficulty in forming the tenses of verbs of the 
second class (§ 169, 2). All the tenses are formed from the 
stem, after rejecting the ending -vvvpa, or -vv/jll. Verbs in -o, 
which in the Pres. have lengthened the o into o>, retain the w 
through all the tenses, e. g. o-Tpw-wv-pa, ^-wv-pu, pu-wv-pu, Fut. 
a-TpM-ao), etc. But verbs, whose stem ends in a liquid, in form- 
ing some of the tenses, assume a Theme ending in a vowel, 
e. g. opL-vv-pu, Aor. w/x-o-o-a, from 'OMOQ. The second Aor. and 
the second Fut. Pass, occur only in 9 few verbs, e. g. ^vy-vv-pn 
See * 182 



212 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN 



-fit. 



[* 173. 



$ 175. Paradigms of 











ACTIVE 






a 

w 


14 

■a 


111 


2TA- to pface. 


©E- to put. 


AO- to give. 


AEIK- to show. 


CD 


g 


* £ 














S. 1. 


!-<jTT\-y.i 


ri-frn-ixi 


5i-5a>-/xi 


deiK-vv-fii l 






2. 


e i-CTT7]-S 


ti-Stj-s 


di-Scc-s 


Sei/c-^u-s 






3. 


'l-(TTT)-<Tl{v) 


Ti-3-7j-(rt(j/) 


5i-5w-(Ti(y) 


Seta-i/O-c^v) 




* 


D.l. 














2. 


i-OTa-TOJ/ 


riSe-rov 


Si-do-roy 


deiK-vv-TOV 






3. 


?-crra-Tov 


riSe-rov 


dl-do-roy 


Zc'ik-vv-tov 




P. 1. 


"-ara-jxev 


ri-&e-/Aev 


5i-8o-/xey 


5e'iK-vv-fJ.€U 




2. 


i-<rra-Te 


TI-3-6-T6 


Sl-5o-T€ 


5ei/£-w-re 






3. 


i-(TTa-(Ti(l/) 


rt-(5-e-da'i(j') 


5i-SJ-d(n(j/) 


8et/c-w-do't(»') 








(from lard-dcn) 


and Ti-&eto-i(j>) 


and di-dov<ri(y) 


and deiK-vvci(w) 






S. 1. 


I arw 


Ti-iS-W 


Si-8w 


5eiK-vv-to 






2. 


t-(TTT)-S 


Ti-i^-S 


5i-5£-s 


SeiK-pv-ris 




1 


3. 


1-&TT) 


Ti-^77 


Si-S^J 


etc. 




D.l. 










s 


2. 


l-ffTTl-TO; 


TL-&7)-TOt 


Si-ScD-roj/ 




1 




3. 


L-crrr)-Tou 


TI-&TJ-TOV 


Si-Sw-TOt' 




P. 1. 


i-arw-fxev 


Tl-&a)-/J.€V 


Si-SaS-^tej/ 








2. 


l-arri-re 


Ti-S-Tj-re 


8i-8a>-Te 








3. 


L-(TTW-(ri{v) 


Ti-^a>-(n(v) 


St-Sw-o-^f) 








S.2. 


l-(TT7J 2 


Tt-fret 2 


Si'-Soi; 2 


de'iK-yv ' 2 








(from ttrrdSj) 


(from Ti^e^t) 


(from BtSo&i) 


(from Sei/cw^t) 




g 


3. 


i-(TTa-Ta) 


Ti-iS-e-TO) 


8t-5o-Tct> 


Sei/c-w-rw 




« 


D.2. 


C /-CTa-TOZ/ 


ri-&e-Tov 


Si-So-rov 


SeiK-vv-Tov 




1 


3. 


i-ara-ruy 


TI-&4-TOSV 


Si-S^-Tajy 


deiK-vv-rwv 




P. 2. 


i-ata-re 


TI-3-6-T6 


8/-5o-Te 


deiK-vv-r* 




3. 


l-(TTa.-Taxrav 


Tt-id-e-Toxrav 


Si-So-Taxrav 


SeiK-vv-Twcrav 








and l-aravrwi' 


and Ti-&evTwv 


and di-SovTew 


and SeiK-vvvTwv 




Injin. 


l-crrd-vai 


Ti-&e-vai 


St-So-j/cu 


hziK-vv-vai 




Part. 


l-crrds, aaa, ay 


Ti-freis, eicra, 4v 


8i-8ous, oucra, 6v 


deuc-vvs, vara, tv 




G. 6.VTOS 


G. evros 


G. (Wo. 1 ? 


G. VVTOS 




S. 1. 


%-(TTT)-V 


i-ri-frnv 


i-Si-Sovy 3 


i-SeiK-uvy 






2. 


i-CTTTJ-S 


i-ri-freis 3 


i-Si-Sovs a 


i-de'iK-vvs 






3. 


t-CTr; 


e-ri'-frei 3 


e-Si'-Sow 3 


i-SeiK-vv 




| 


D.l. 












? 


2. 


i-crra-Toi/ 


i-Ti-&e-Tov 


e-5i-5o-Toi/ 


i-SeiK-uv-TOU 




a 


3. 


i-crTa-Trji/ 


i-Ti-&4-rriv 


i-8i-86-rr)V 


i-deiK-vv-Tnv 




P. 1. 


'l-aTa-fiev 


i-rl-Sre-fLev 


i-Si-do-fxey 


i-SeiK-vv-fiey 


! 

ft. 




2. 


'i-ara-Te 


e-ri-id-e-Te 


e-8/-8o-Te 


i-de'iK-vv-Te 




3. 


"-crra-aav 


i-ri-&e-<ray 


e-5i-8o-ircw 


i-beiK-vv-crav 




S, l. 


i-arai-riv 


Tl-tSrt'l-TlV 


Si-Joi-Tji' 


heiK-vv-oifxi 


09 




2. 


l-(TTal-7}S 


Ti-id-et-7?s 


di-doi-7)S 


dein-vv-ots 






3. 


i-(TTai-7] 


Ti-3-6i-T7 


8i-Soi-7j 


etc. 




s 


D.l. 












e 


2. 


l-(JTCU-TOV 4 


Ti-&e7-rov 4 


Si-SoT-TOj/ 4 






& 


3. 


t-ffTcd-T1}if 


Tl-&ei-TT]U 


Si-Soi-TTJI/ 






r. i. 


l-(TTCU-/J.€V 


Tl-&e?-fJ.€V 


5i-5o?-[X€v 








2. 


l-(TTCU-TG 


Ti-&e7-re 


Si-do7-re 








3. 


i-crrat-ev 


Ti-&e7-ey 


di-do7-ey 





1 And SeiK 
-fc(v), and tl 



v-Q), -eis, etc., especially deiKvvovcri(v). Also Impf. ideittyvov, -ves, 
e Part. usually $eiKvb-wy,-ovaa> -ov (§ 172, Rem. 8). 2 § 172. Rem. 



§ 175.] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fXl. 

Verbs in -yn. 



213 







MIDDLE. 






2TA- to place. 


0E- to put. 


AO- to give. 


AEIK- to show. 




'{-ffTOL-fJUU 


ri-^e-fxai 


8t-8o-jxai 


d€lK-VV-/J.CU 




'(-<TTa-<rcu 


ri-&e-<rcu 


8l-8o-o~cu 


deiK-vv-aai 




'(-(rra-Tai 


rt-^e-rat 


Si-Bo-rai 


SeiK-vv-rai. 




l-<TTO.-[X^OV 


ri-&4-/u.e&ov 


Si-So-fjie&ov 


o*eiK-v$-/jie&ov 




'{-<rTa-<T&oi> 


Ti-Sc-erfroj/ 


8t-8o-o~&ov 


SeiK-vv-a&ov 




'(-<TT<X-(r&OV 


Tt-3-e-o-^oj/ 


8i-8o-o~&ov 


SetK-vv-cr&ov 




l-<rTa-/j.€&a 


Ti-&4-/Jie&a 


8i-86-fis&a 


SeiK-vfi-fie&a 




7-oTa-(T&e 


Tl-&€-<T&G 


Sl-So-o-fre 


deiK-vv-ofte 




'(-ffra-VTai 


Tl-&e-VTCU 


8i-8o-vrai 


SeiK-vv-VTCu 




1-CTTW-fJ.ai ° 


Tt-&w-(icu 


5t-8w-/XCU 


felK-VV-ajjACU 




l-crrf) 


ri-Sni 


8i-8<£ 


Seuc-vd-ri 




l-CTTrt-Tai 


Ti-frrj-rat 


8i-8w-rai 


etc. 




l-<TT(I)-IXe&OV 


t l-&Cti-/jL€&OP 


St-8c6- j ue&oj' 






l-OTTI-O&OV 


Ti-&rj-o~&ov 


8t-Sa>-(Ti8-o» 






l-ffTrt-crbov 


Ti-^rj-cr^ou 


8i-8a>-o~&ov 






i-(TT<&-fie<$a 


Tt-&<a-/J.e&a 


8i-8w-/j.e&a 






i-o-TTJ-adre 


Ti-&rj-<r&e 


8i-8w-a&e 






l-<TTCO-UTat 


Ti-&G>-vTai 


8i-8w-vtcu 






'i-ara-oo and 


rlSe-ao and 


Si-So-ao and 


SciK-vv-ffo 




'l-GTW 


TI-&OV 


Si-Bov 






l-(TTa.-(T^03 


Tl-&4-(T&0t 


St-S^-cfrw 


8etK-vv-o~&w 




'l-<TTa-(T&OV 


Tl-&6-(T&0V 


8t-8o-o~&ov 


SeiK-vv-a^ov 




l-CTTOL- cr&oov 


Tt-&4-o~&tov 


8i-86-o~&odv 


8eiK-vv-o~&wv 




7 <rTa-<r&e 


Ti-&e-<r&e 


8i-8o-ofre 


deiK-vv-a&e 




l-cTTa-aSaxrav and 


TiS4<r&03(Tav and 


8i-86-(r&a><rav and 


b'eiK-vv-a&wo'av 




i-<TTd-<r&a}i> 


Ti-&4-o-&av 


8i-86-o~&cov 


and deuc-vv-o'&ctiv 




'l-cra-abai 


Ti-&€-<r&ai 


8i-8o-cr&cu 


8eiK-vv-o~&cu 




i-ara-nevos, rj, ov 


Ti-S-d-fievos, 77, ov 


8i-86-fj.evos, rj, ov 


8eiK-VV-/A€VOS, 7], 

ov 




I <T7a-fjL7]U 


4-Tl-&4-fX7)V 


4-8t-86-/xr]v 


4-8eiK-VV-/A7)V 




'l-aro.-<ro and '1-arw 


i-rt-fre-o-o 


4-8i-8o-o~o 


4-8eiK-vv-o~o 




'{-(TTa-TO 


6-TI-&6-T0 


4-8i-8o-ro 


4-8eiK-vv-T0 




l-ffTOrUeffroir 


i-Ti-^-fie^ov 


4-8i-86-/j.g&ov 


4-8eiK-vv-fji.e&ov 




't-ffTa-cr&ov 


4-tI-&c-o-&ov 


4-8i-8o-a&ov 


4-8eiit-vv-(r&ov 




l-<TTa-<T&r)v 


4 Ti-&e-a&7iv 


4-8i-8o-cr^r}v 


4-8eiK-vv-<r&r]v 




l-a-ra-fxe^a 


e-Ti-3-e-^e^a 


4-8i-86-/xe&a 


4-8eiK-vv-/j.e&a 




"-(TTa-CiS-e 


6-TI-&6-0-&6 


4-8l-8o-a&e 


4-8eiK-vv-o'^e 




'[-(TTa-UTO 


4-rt-^e-vro 


4-Si-So-vro 


4-8e'iK-vv-VTO 




i-crrai-fi-qv 6 


Tl-^oi-flT]U 7 


Si-8ol-fj.T]v 7 


8eiK-VV-Ol[AT]V 




l-OTOU-0 


Tl-&0?-0 


8i-8o?-o 


8eiK-vv-oio, 




l-GTCU-TO 


Tl-&0?-TO 


8i-8o?-to 


etc. 




i-CTai-fie^ou 


Tl-&ol-IJ.e&ov 


8i-8ol-[xe&ov 






l-GTtxi-a&ov 


TI-&0T-0-&01/ 


8i-8o?-o~&ov 






i-crrai-ffShfju 


Tl-&o(-(T&7)V 


8i-8o(-a&riv 






i-ffTai-fie&a 


TL-&oi-fA&a 


8i-8oi-fJt.e&a 






t-GTcu-crd-e 


Tt-3-o?-<r&e 


8i-8o?-o~&e 






l-<TTCU-VTO 


Tl-&0?-VTO 


8i-8o?-vto 




5. 3 § 172, Rem. 8. 


4 § 172, Rem. 3. 


5 On the irreg. ac 


cent of ^7rt<rTa/«u» 


etc., see § 176, 1. 8 


On the accent in e 


nicrTcuo, etc. see § 1 


76, 1. 7 § 176, 2 



214 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -/XL. 



[§ 175. 



ACTIVE. 


i 


i 

n 

a 




111 


2TA- to place. 


0E- to put. 


AO- to give. 


AEIK- to sAow. 


1 


& 


a 


£ Ph 
















S. 1. 


e-(TTr]-i/, I stood, 


{H-bn-v) ) A. I. 


(e-Sw-v) ) A. I. 










2. 


e-arrj-s 


(e-^-s) > used 


(e-8w-s) > used 










3. 


t-<TTt\ 


(e-^7j) ) for it 


(e-5w) ; for it 








.» 


D.l. 














8 


2. 


i-<m\-Tov 


e-Sre-tdv 


e-5o-Toj/ 


wanting. 






^s 


3. 


£-<TTT)-TT}V 


4-&4-T7)V 


4-56-ttjv 








^ 


JEM. 


6- ff T 7] -/J.GV 


e-&e-/j.ei/ 


e-So-(xeu 










2. 


e-<TTrj-T€ 


€-3-6-T€ 


e-do-rs 










3. 


s-<TTT)-crav 


e-&e-crav 


%-ho-ffav 








S. 1. 


<ttG> 1 


ft*- 1 


Sw l 










2. 


(TTtjS 


&i)-s 


8^j-s 








w 


3. 


err} 


*» 


5<£ 








I 


D.l. 














2. 


(TTrj-TOV 


&7J.-T0& 


Sco-toi/ 








S» 


3. 


(TTTJ-TOU 


^rq-rov 


Sw-toj/ 








^0 


P..1. 


(TTW-fieV 


&G)-/J.GJ/ 


Sco-fxep 










2. 


CT7J-T6 


&rj-Te 


Sca-re 






.* 




3. 


<7Ta>-(Tl{v) 


&6>-<ri(v) 


Sw-cri(v) 








S.l. 


<TT<xi-7)V 


Stei-ijv 


8oi-7]V 






£ 




2. 


(Trai-rjs 


d-ei-Tjs 


Sol-tjs 






^ 


t 


3. 


(TTai-r] 


&ei«n 


Soi-7] 








D.l. 














e 


2. 


(TTai-7]T0U 2 


&€l-7]T0U 2 


8ot-r)TOU 2 








* 


3. 


GTai-T)TT)U 


&€1-t)t7)1/ 


Soi-'fjTTJV 










P. 1. 


ffrai-rifiev 


^et-rj/xeu 


Soi-rii-ieu 










2. 


CTai-Tjre 


bei-Tyfe 


doi-rjTe 










3. 


oTcu-ev 


&e?-ei> 


8o?-eu 








S. 2. 


(TT7?-&i 3 


&es (fre'&t) 4 


86s {86fri) 4 








93 


3. 


(TT7J-Ta) 


i^6-tw 


d6-T(a 










D.2. 


(T T 7} -TQV 


&6-T0V 


86-rov 








g 


3. 


CTTT) -TWV 


Sre-rau 


86-TOOV 








1 


P. 2. 


(TTTJ-Te 


&e-re 


86-re 








3. 


<r t i) -TCtitrav 


Se-Ttoaav and 


86-T(ti<rav and 












and (rrdvrcov 


i^evTcoi/ 


86vT(av 






Infin. 
PaH. 


<ttr\-vai 
<ttcLs, aaa, av 


(\yei-j/ai 


dov-vai 






frets, etca, eV 


Souy, ovcra, 6v 








Gen. <tt&vtos 


Gen. &4vtos 


Gen. 86utos 






Future. 


(TtJi-itco 


&"f)-<ra> | Sco-<ra> 


8e£|a> 




e-(TT7j(ra, / 


e-&ri-Ka | e-S«-/ca 


e-5et|a 






[placed, 


Instead of these forms, the 2d Aor. is 








used in the Dual, PI. Ind. and in the 










other Modes and Participials, § 173, 2. 






P 


erfect. 


€-(TT7]-Ka, b sto, 


re-fret-zcci | Se-Sa>-Ka 


Se'-Setxa 




P 


J uperfect. 


e-<rT7)-K€iv and 


i-Te-frel-Keiv 


e-Se- 5 d> -Keiv 


e-Se-Se^e"' 






ei-o-nrj-zceii/ 










Fut. Per/. 


e-o-n^wold Att.| wanting. wanting. 


wanting. , 




PAS 


^1 


jr. I, | i-ara-Snqv 1 e-r£-fri\v 9 j i-86-frr]u 1 i-tielx-byv 




' The compounds, e. g. awoarco, e'/c^w, 8ia5<2, have the same accentuation as 


the simples, c. g. airoaruan, £k&tjtoi/, 5ia8a>/jLev. 2 See § 172, Rem. 3. 3 In 


composition, irapdcrr^i, irapAffTa ' air6(TT7]Sn, airScTTa, § 172, Rem. f>. * In 


composition, wepfoes, ev&es; anSSos, eVSos: irepi&e're, e/cSo-re, $118, Rem. 1 


* See § 176,3. 6 ire^rfv and re^cTo/juii instead of telbriv and &efrf)<rofj.ai, 





* 175.] 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -jXL. 



215 





MIDDLE. 




2TA- £ > place. 


0E- to J9U*. 


AO- to give. 


AEIK- to s/iou;. 




(4-ard-fjLr]]/ does 


i-^re-fxrjv 


£-86-/j.r)v 






not occur, but 


e-3-ov (from e^ea-o ) 


e-dov (from e8o<ro) 






i-TTTa-fMrju 


e-id^e-TO 


e-8o-TO 






i-Trpid-/J.rjv) 


£-&4-/xe&oi/ 


£-S6-fie&ov 








€-&G-(T&OV 


e-do-ff&ov 


wanting. 






£-&4-(T&r]v 


£-S6-a^rjv 








£-&4-fie&a 


e-So-fie&a 








e-^e-o-^e 


e-5o-<rfre 








e-.d-e-j/To 


i-do-vro 






(arrw-fxai does not 


&0O-fJLCU 7 


Sa>-fxat 7 






occur, but irp'ua- 


&7) 


S<£ 






H<u, -77, -rirai, 


^rj-rai 


8a>-Tcu 






etc.) 


frde-fAedroj/ 

&7)-<r&oi' 

3-77-o-^e 


da-a&ov 

8a>-ar&e 
8S)-VTai 






(aiai-jxrjv does not 


&0i-/J.7jV 8 


doi-fx.7]v s 






occur, but irptat- 


3-oT-o 


SoT-o 






fji.r}t/, -aio -euro, 


^•or-To 


Soi-TO 






etc.) 


&o7-o~&oi/ 
&ot-(r&r)v 

&0?-VTO 


doi-fxe&oy 

86l-0~&OI/ 
8ol-(T&7)V 

So?-vro 






(<ttc£-<to, or CTW 


&ov (from &4o~o) 9 


Sov (from S6<to) 9 






does not occur, 


&4-oSr<a 


$6-<r&oo 






but Trpia-ao, or 


&4-0&0V 


S6-cr&ov 






?r0ia>) 


&4-CT&00V 

&4-cr&<acrav and 
&4-<r&o)v 


So-a&av 
56-oSfe 
56-<r&a)<Tav and 

86-(T&OOV 






(<TTa-(r3-at) Tcpiacr. 


^e-cS-at 


86-<r£rai 






((rrd-fj.€uos) Trpia- 


&4-{xevos t -rj, -ov 


86-ftevos, -77, -ov 






fxevos 










CTi]-(rofx.ai 


&J)-(TOIAai 


5(&-0~0fjLCU 


dei^oficu 
£-dei£dfxr)V 




£-<TT7)-CrdlJ.7)J' 


(£-&TJ-Kd-fl7}v) 


(i-du-Kd-ixrju) 






Instead of these forms 


the second Aor. Mid. is 








used by the Attic write 


rs, § 173, 2. 






e-fTTa-jiiai, U-S.R. 2. 


T6-,9-€i-/iat 


S4-do-uai 


S4-8€iy-uai 




e-a-ra-fjirjv, § 173, 


i-TG-frei-lAr)]/ 


£-8g-S6-/jl7]v 


4-Se-Seiy-firjv 




Rem. 2. 










e-crTTj^Oyuai, l0 


wanting. 


wanting. 


wanting. 


SIVE. 


1 


i^W. /. | o-Ta-fr-iio-ufxai \ re-fr-fjo-o/xai 6 


8o-£r>i<roficu | deix-frycro/iai 


§ 21, 2. 7 Also in composition, iuSrcv/, 


101, -77, -77Tot, etc.. airo^rcifxai, -77, -77TCK, 


etc., iKd(l)fjt.cu, -$, -5>rai, etc., d7roSw/xat, 


-a?, -wTat, etc. 8 See § 176, 2. 9 In 


composition, Kardfrov, airSfrov ; irepidov, 


aTTo'Sou ; /caTctfrea-fre, Trepldoar&e ; £j/&eo*- 


&e, Trp6do(T^€ . but fj'^Voj", f/\<Vo>~ : irooSo? 


;. <=V5W. $118. Rem .1 ,0 $ 1 54. 6. and 


$ 1 73. Rem 2 





216 SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -[U. [$$ 176, 177 



§ 176. Remarks on the Paradigms . 

1. The verbs Svixxfiai, tobe able; iiriarajxai, to know, and xpe^a^uat, to hang, 
have a different accentuation from c io-Ta/j.ai, in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., 
namely, Subj. o~vvuy.cu, iTriarw/xaL, -77, -t)tcu, -tjct&oi;, -T)a&€, -owtcu: Opt. 8vvalfir)v, 
eTTiaTai/j.r]u, -aio, -airo, -aicrfrov, -aur&e, -olivto; so also di/aifirjv, -aio, -ollto (§ 177, 
4), and iirpid[XT}v (§ 179, 6). 

2. The forms of the Opt. Mid. Impf. and second Aor. in -oi, viz. Ti^oi/xrjv, 
i^otuTji , "were preferred to those in -ei, viz. ri^ei/x^y, -e?o, -e?ro, etc., &ei[ir)v, -e?o, 
'c7to, etc. In compounds, the accent remains as in simples ; thus, iv&oiurjv 
(iv&durjv), iv&o7o (eVfreib), etc. ; so also in compounds of Soi/ir}!/, e. g. 8ia8oiu.T)v, 
8ia8o7o, etc. 

3. On the abbreviated form of the Perf. and Plup. : e-o-rd-rov, e-o-ra-uej/, 
e-ara-Te, %-<TTa-ai{v), see § 193. 

4. Verbs in -vfii, as has been seen, form the Subj. and Opt. like verbs in -vw. 
Still, there are some examples where these modes follow the analogy of verbs 
in -fit: ottos p.)) 8iao~Ke?idvvvTai (instead of -vtitcll), PI. Phaedon. 77, b. \pvxon6 
re kcu ireyvvTo (from -vito, instead of -volto), Ibid. 118, a. 

5. In the later writers, e. g. Polybius, a Perf. and Plup. are found with the 
Trans, meaning, / have placed, namely, eo~Tdna, e <r t a k e i *>. 

Summary of Verbs in -p.i. 

1. Verbs in -/xi which annex the Personal-endings immediately 

to the Stem-vowel. 

§ 177. (a) Verbs in -a (t-a-Trj-fii; 5TA-): 
1. KL-xprj-fu, to lend, to bestow (XPA-), Inf. Ktypavai, Fut. XPW *, 
Aor. exp-qaa. Mid. to borrow, Fut. xpw ^ - 1 - (Aor. ixprjcrdix-qv in 
this sense is avoided by the Attic writers.) To the same stem 
belong : — 

2. XPV-, & 2S necessary, oportet (stem XPA- and XPE-), Subj. XPV> hif. XP*l val * 
Part, (to) xps&v (usually only Nom. and Ace); Impf. ixpy") or XPV V (with 
irregular accent), Opt. XP*' 17 ) (from XPE-) ; Put. xp?°" rat m Soph, (but not 
Xp7j<m) 

Inf. XPW> a-TtoxpW, in Eurip., by contraction from xpaei*/. 

3. air6xpy, it suffices, sufficit; the following also are formed regularly from 
XPAfl: aivoxp<*>o-i(v), Inf. arcoxpw; Part, airoxp^s, -wcra, -wv ; Impf. aTrexpV ; Put. 
o7roxpV 6i j Aor. d7rexp7j(re(y), etc. Mid. aTroxp&V-ai, to abuse, abutor, or consumo, 
Inf. diroxprjo-^ai, is inflected like xP^°P- a h § 129, Rem. 2. 

4. ovivrjjxL (with Attic reduplication instead of ovovq^i), to ben- 
efit, ('ONA-) Inf. Svivavai; Impf. Act. wanting, <5<£e\ow being 
used for it ; Fut. ovqcrw ; Aor. uvqera, Inf. ovrjaau (for it ovqvai, like 
arrival, in PL Up. 600, d.). Mid. ovLvaix.a.1, to get benefit, be bene- 
fitted, Fut. ovrjo-ojAai ; Aor. (hv-q/jL-qv ((hvdfxrjv later, but also in Eur. 
wvaaSe), -rjao, -rjro, etc., Imp. ovqero, Part, ov^evos (Hom.), Opt. 
bva.ip.-qv, -cuo, -aero ($ 176, 1), Inf. ovaaftai; Aor. Pass. wv-qS-qv rarer 



178.] 



SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -/it. 



217 



instead of wvrjpL-rjv. The remaining forms are supplied by 
kxpeXew. 

5. TTL-fi-7rXr]-fXL, to Jill, (ELAA-) Inf. 7np.7rXavai ; Inipf. tTrlpvirX-qv ; 
Fut. irXrja-oi ; Perf. TrirrX-qKa ; Aor. hrXrjo-a ; Mid. to fill for one's 
self, 7rt(A7rXa[jLai, Inf. 7U/A7rAacr$ai ; Impf. lTrtp,7rXapvrjv ; Aor. eirXyjo-a.- 
{Lt]v\ Fut. 7rX^o-o/xat; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7re7rA^o-/xai ; Aor. Pass. 
i7rXr}<r$7]v ($ 131); Fut. Pass. 7rXrjo-$r)o-op,ai ($ 131); second Aor. 
iTrXiqix-qVy Poet. Verb. Adj. TrXrjcrTeos. 

The ju in the reduplication of this and the following verb is usually omitted 
in composition, when p. precedes the reduplication, e. g. i/xirlir\afj.ai, but iveiri/j.- 
trxd[xf]v. Contrary to this rule, however, forms with and without p. are both 
used by the poets, according to the necessities of the verse. 

6. Tri/jLTrprjjxi, to burn, Trans., in all respects like TripjTrXr\p.i : irpr)- 
au), hrprjcra, TreTrprjKa, Trirrprjcrpiai, iTrprjoSrjV, 7rpr/oSi'](TopLai, 7re.7rpricrop.ai. 

7. TAH-ML, to endure, Pres. and Impf. wanting (instead of 
them v7rop,£v(D, dve^o/xat) ; Aor. erXrjv, (tAco,) rXatrjv, rXrj^i, rAas 
(i-Aao-a) ; Fut. rA^cro/xat; Perf. r&fXrjka. Verbal Adj. tXtjtos. (In 
Attic prose this verb is rare.) 

8. <f>rj-pLi, to say (stem 3>A-), has the following formation: — 

h 178. 



Present. ACTIVE. Imperfect. 


Indi- 
cative 

Subj." 
Imp. 

Inf. 
Part. 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


(py/xi " 

(p-ps 

(p-qo-i(v) 

(parou 

(pdr6v 

(pajxev 

(pari 

(pacri(v) 


Indi- 
cative 


S.l. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


%(pf]V 

€(pr)s, usually tyna&a 

tyn [(Mi6,2). 

e(pdrou 

i<paTT]v 

e(t>afj.ev 

G(pare 

e(pdcrav 


(pw t <prjs, (pi), (prjrov, (pufiev, 

<p r )7€, (pU(Tl(v) 

(pabi, or <po£ri (<rv/u<pa&i), (para, 
(parou, (parcov, (pare, tparrco- 
ffav and <pdvT<oj/ 

(pavai 

((pas, (patTa*, (pdv 
G. (pdvros, (pa<rt}s) 


Opt. 


(pairjv, (pa'n\s, (pair), (pairjrov 
and (pa7rov, <pai-if\Tnv and 
(palrrjv, (pairifMev and (pa?- 
fiev, (pair)re and (pa7re, (paTev 


Eut. 
Aor. 


(pT)0~(t) 

%<pt]<ra. 


MIDDLE. 


Perf. Imp. -n '«ba<r&(o (PI. Tim. 72, d.), let it be said. Impf. Ind. ecpauro, Lys. 
Eragm. 3. [X. Cy. 6. 1, 21, is a false reading] ; Inf. (pda&ai, Aesch. Pers. 
687, in chorus. Part, (pdjxevos (rare), affirming. 

Verbal adjective, (par6s, <partos. 



1 In composition : avr [(prj/JLi, (Tvjxfprnxi, avTi<prio-i(v), (rv/j.(pri(ri(v), etc., but avn~ 
<pijs (accent on ultimate), avails, and. Subj. avrupw, avTupfjs, etc. 

19 



218 DEPONENTS BELONGING TO VERBS IN -pit. ($ 179, 

Remark 1. In the second person ^77 s, both the accentuation and the Iota 
subscript are contrary to all analogy. On the inclination of this verb in the 
Pres. Ind. (except (p-ps), see § 33, a. 

Rem. 2. This verb has two significations, (a) to say in general, (b) to affirm, 
(aio) to assert, to assure, etc. The Fut. <py<rot, and Aor. e<pr}aa, have only the 
last signification. The Part, (pas is not used in Attic prose ; still, ^ PL Ale. 2. 
139, c. (pdvres. 

Rem. 3. With (prj/xi the verb iifxi, inquam, may be compared, which, liko 
inquam, is used in the spirited repetition of what had been said ; the imperfect 
jjv, ?i is used in the phrases l\v S 5 iyu, said I, $ 5* '6s, said he, to describe a con* 
versation. 



§ 179. The following Deponents also belong here. 

1. aya/xai, to wonder, Impf. rjydpaqv', Aor. rjydcrSrjv (rjyaadfJirjv, 
Epic and Dem. 18, 204) ; Fut. dydao/xaL. Verbal Adj. dyao-Tos. 

2. hvvafxai, to be able, second Pers. §wao-ai [ from the Ion. 
Sweat, tragic and later, $ 172, 2, (a)], Subj. oww/acu ($ 176, 1), Imp. 
Swao-o, Inf. Svvacr^ai, Part. Svvdfxevos ; Impf. iSvvdfx-qv and rjBvvd/jirjv, 
second Pers. eSiW (not e§wao-o, § 172, 2), Opt. Svvaifxrjv, Swaio 
($ 176, 1) ; Flit. Swrjcro/xai ', Aor. iSwrjSrjv, rjSvviqSrjv and eSvvdoSrjv 
(not rjSvvdo-Srjv), the last Ion. and in Xen. (Aug., § 120, Eem. 
1) ; Perf. SeSwry/xat. Verbal Adj. Swards, able said possible. 

3. iirto-TafjLcu (like lo-Ta/mi), to know, (properly, to stand upon 
something, to be distinguished from e^io-ra/^at), second Pers. 
zTTLo-TOLcrai (eVto-ra seldom and only Poet.), Subj. hrumayucu. (II 176, 
1), Imp. hrurrw [seldom and only in the poets and later writers, 
hrurraxro, k 172, 2 (b)] ; Impf. ^Trttrra/x/jyv, rjTricrrto [seldom and 
only in the poets and later writers, ri-n-io-raa-o, § 172, 2 (b)], Opt. 
i7riaratjxrjv, liricrTaio ($ 176, 1) ; Flit. eVicmyo-o/xat, ; Aor. r)7TL(TTrj^r]V. 
(Aug., § 126, 3.) Verbal Adj. cTrio-r^To's. 

4. epafxoLL, to love (in the Pres. and Impf. only poetic, in prose 
ipdoy is used instead of it) ; Aor. rjpdaSrjv, I loved; Fut. IpaaSrj- 
cro/xaL, I shall love. [Pass, epw/xai (from ipdoi), I shall be loved.] 
v erbal Adj. epao-ro'g. 

0. Kpi/xajxat, to Jiang, be suspended, pendco, Subj. Kpepaop:cu 
($ 176, 1), Part. /cpejaa/xevos ; Impf. eKpe/zapv^v, Opt. Kpep.aipvrjV, -aio, 
-airo ($ 176, 1), (Arist. Vesp. 298, KpepLocaSe, comp. fidpvaficu, 
& 230, and fxep.voip.rjv, § 154, 8); Aor. iKpejxdo-Snv ; Fut. Pass 



\ 180.] 



VERBS IN -y/,1. 



219 



Kpe/xaa^a-oixac, I shall be hung; Fut. Mid. KpefXrja-o/xaL, pendebo 
I shall hang. 

6. Trpiacr&u, to buy, iirpidp^Vy second Pers. en-pup (an Aor. Mid., 
and found only in this tense, which the Attic \vriters employ 
instead of the Aor. of divio/xai, viz. io>vrjordfjL7}v, which is not used 
by them, .$ 122, 4), Suhj. n-ptw/xat ($ 176, 1); Opt. .Tpiaipvrjv, -aio, 
-atro (§ 176, 1); Imp. irpioi) Part, n-piap-cvos. 



§ 180. (b) Fer&s zw -e (r/-^-ftt, ©E-) 

I-17-/U (stem e E-), to smd. Many forms of this verb are found 
only in composition. 



ACTIVE 



Pres. 



Impf. 



Ind. '/fyjUt, i7?s, r /7j(Tt(i/) ; '/eToi'; le/nev, '/ere, m<n(j/) [ietortf?)}; 

Subj. ieo, 777s, ■/#•; irJTOv) iu/xev, Irjre, iwai(v) ; a(pi£), atpijis, ac/xj?, 

etc. 
Imp. let, teVco, etc. — Inf. Uvai. — Part. Uls, leTaa, ley. 



Ind. low (from 'IEfl), a<piow (rarer ijfiovy, rare Vet*/, irpoteiv, ty'iew), 
iets, '/et, d<£tet (rarer 7]<plei) ; Urov, Utt\v ; hfiev, '/ere, tWcw, 
acf)ie<rav (rarer rj^ietrau). 

Opt. teii7j/ (second Pers. PL aQiotrc, Plat.; third Pers. PI. acptoiev, 
. X. H. 6. 4, 3). 



Perf. 
Aor. II. 



ef/ca. — Plup e r //cetj/. — Fut. fro*. — Aor. I. rjKa (§ 173, 2). 

Ind. Sing, is supplied by Aor. I. (§ 173, 2); Dual efrov, d^er-rov, 

€ r iT7)v ; Plur. el/iey, Ka^eTfxeu, elVe, aveire, e<rav, commonly 

eTcrav, a<pe7<rav. 
Subj. a>, fis, a<pu>, htyrjs, etc. 
Opt. eiV> e%y> e'tv] 'efroj/, acpe'iTOi/, ehrju] eftxej/, a<pe7/x€j/, eiVe, d^e?- 

re, efer, acpeiev. 
Imp. es, #0es, eVw ; eVoj', ^eTov, eVwi/; ere, bi^ere, erooaav and evroov, 
Inf. efj/at, cujfeiva'C—'P. e'/j, cTffa, afaTcra, eV, d^eV, "Gen, %vtos, e'l(rr)s, 

aipivTOS. 



Remark 1. On the Aug. of a<f>lrifu, see § 126, 3. 

Rem. 2, The form of the Impf. 'Lt\v is very doubtful, and the forms tys, '(i\ 
are very rare. The form 'Uiv has the ending of the Plup., like the Impf. of d/xi, 
to go ; it is Att. and Ion., a secondary form of 'low. 



220 



VERBS IN -{XL. 



[i 181 



MIDDLE. 



Pres. 



Impf. 



Aor. II. 



lud. 'Ujjuxi, iWcu, tercet, etc. — Subj. iwjxai, acpicc/xaL, Ifj, oupifj, etc. 
Imp. 'Ucro, or 'lov. — Inf. tW&cu. — Part. Ufxevos, -77, -ov. 



Ufj.r]u, 'Uao, etc. — Opt. leifx-qv, Att. loI/jltju, tolb, acpiolo, etc. 



Ind. ei/j.r]v Subj. w/xai, acpu/xai, y, a<pf, fjrai, acprJTcu 

ef<ro, a<pe7ao Opt. Trpooi/xriv, -o?o, -olro, -oi/xe^a, -o?cr&e, 

€IT0, CL(p€lTO -01VT0 {irpoiiTO, Trpoe?<r&£, irpouvTo 

eV^o, etc. are rarer forms) 

Imp. ov (a<pov, -n-poov), second Pers. PL 
ecr&e (acpetr&e, irp6e<r&z), e<r&a>, etc.). 
Inf. eVid-eu. — Part, e/xevos, -17, -ov. 



Perf. eT/xai, fi&e7fxcu ; Inf. elcrSai, f.ie&€7cr&ai. — Plup. elfxiqv, cio-o, acpeiao, etc. 
— Fut. Ifjtrofiai. — Aor. I. TjKdfxrjv (rare, § 173, 2). 



PASSIVE, 



A. I. e'l&yv, P. k&i)vai, etc. — Fut. efrfjo-o/icu. — Verb. Adj.eT<fo, ereos (&/J€tos). 



Rem. 3. Besides the two verbs rl^rj/xi and fyfii, only the following dialectic 
verbs belong here, viz., 'AH-MI, AI-AH-MI (AE), (though di8ea<ri{v). from the 
last is found in X.) ; Sign/mi and AIH-MI. 



§ 181. (c) Verbs in -1, only ct/tt ('I), to go. 

Preliminary Remark. The verbs cl/xi, to go, and si pi, to be, are pre- 
sented together (though the last, on account of its stem 'E2, does not belong 
here), in order to exhibit to the eye the agreement and disagreement of the two 
verbs in their formation. 





PRESENT. 


Ind. S. 1. 


fifii, to be 


Subj. S> 


Ind.l. 


elfxi, to go 


Subj. Xa> 


2. 


el 


V s 


2. 


el 


Xys 


3. 


icrri(v) 


v 


3. 


dffi{v) 


*v 


D. 2. 


4ctt6v 


■f\TOV 


D.2. 


Xtou 


Xt]TOV 


3. 


icrrSv 


■t\TOV 


3. 


Xrov 


Xtjtov 


P.I. 


£o~fi4v 


Si/xev 


P. 1. 


Xfxev 


Xw/XGV 


2. 


eVTe 


^T€ 


2. 


Xre 


Xf]TG 


3. 


elo~l(v) 


S)O'l(v) 


3. 


Xaffi(v) 


Xcaai(v) 


Imp. S. 2. 


fcr&i 


Inf. elvai 


Imp. 


£3ri, irpSsi&i 


Inf. I4vai 


3. 


IVtco 






(seld. irpSset) 




D. 2. 


iffiov 


Part. &v, ovo~a, 


3. 


%Tto 


Part. Idov, lov- 


3. 


icTwv 


6v 


D.2. 


Xtov, ivp6snov 


<ra, I6v 


P. 2. 


£<TT€ 


G. OVTOS, OVCTT\S 


3. 


Xtwv 


Gen. Uvros, 


3. 


iarwo'av 


(irapwv, Trapov- 


P. 2. 


ire, TrposiTe 


loVO~T)S. 




(rare eo~Twv) 


aa, irap6v, 


3. 


Xrwcav, or 


(nap idov, ira.pi- 




tivroov, Plat. 


G. irap6vros) 




lovrwv (Xtwv 


ovo~a, irapi6v, 




Legg.879,b.) 






Aesch.E.32.) 


G. irapi6vros). 



* 181.] 



VERBS IN 



-/At. 



221 



IMPERFECT, 



Ind. 


Opt. 


Ind. 


Opt. 


S.l. 


?iv, I was 


di\v 


S. 1. 


fjeiv or pa, / went 


jfojjut or 
lolrjv 


2. 


>)cr&a(§ 116,2) 


dt\s 


2. 


rjeis and rjei<r&a 


fois 


3. 


fiv (from tfe-v) 


d v 


3. 


fa 


hi 


D.2. 


■f\<TTOV (fJTOv) 


drjTov 


D.2. 


rjeiTou, us'ly proj/ 


"lOLTOV 


3. 


¥l<TT7]V (^T7]V) 


elr)T7]v 


3. 


TJeiTT}]/, " JIT7JJ/ 


lo'lT7]V 


P. 1. 


■f](TfJ.ev 


draxev (seldom ei/xev) 


P. 1. 


fjeifxev, " 7?^^ 


XoifJL^V 


2. 


VTe (fare) 


d^re (seld.poet. etre) 


2. 


fjeire, " ^tc 


fc>tT€ 


3. 


■t\<row 


d-qcrav and dev 


3. 


pecroj'(7;oroi/poet.) 


fatey 



Fut. earo/nai, I shall be, e<n/, or e<r«, eo-Tctf, etc. — Opt. i(Tol/x7]u. — Inf. ecreo"3-at. 
— Part. 4<r6fjLevos. — Verbal Adj. £<tt£ov, crvvzariov. 

Middle Form : Pres. Upcu, tecrai or in, Utcu, etc., Imp. Uao, Inf. fea&ai, 
Part. Ufxeyos'. tlie Impf. U/xrjy, fe<ro, etc., signifying to hasten, ought 
probably to be written with the rough breathing, which is strongly 
confirmed by the manuscripts, and to be referred to "nfn. — Verbal Adj. 
It6s, iTeov, rarer IrrjTeov. 



Remark 1. On the inclination of the Ind. of d/x(, to be (except the second 
Pers. el), see § 33 (a). In compounds, the accent is on the preposition, as far back 
as the general rules of accentuation permit, e. g. napei/xi, irdpei, irdpe<Tri{v), etc. 
Imp. trdpiaSn, £vvi<r&i ; but iraprjv on account of the temporal augment, irapeo-rai 
on account of the omission of e (irapecreTai), irapduai like infinitives with the 
ending -vai, irapu, -rjs, -fj, etc., irapdre, irapdev, on account of the contraction ; 
the accentuation of the Part, in compound words should be particularly noted, 
e. g. irapcbv, Tvapov<ra, irapdu, Gen. irap6vTos (so also irapiwv, Gen. irapiouros). 

Rem. 2. The compounds of d/ii, to go, follow the same rules as those of 
elfit, to be ; hence several forms of these two verbs are the same in compounds, 
e. g. irdpei/xi, nape i, and irdpei<ri(v) (the last being third Pers. Sing, of dpi and 
third Pers. PL of eifd) ; but Inf. irapievcu, Part, irapidv. 

Rem. 3. The form €?e v, esto, be it so ! good! shortened from €477 and strength- 
ened by a v, must be distinguished from the shortened form dev instead of 
dn<rav of the third Pers. PI. Opt. Impf. — A secondaiy form, yet critically to be 
rejected, of the third Pers. Imp. ^to instead of earo?, is found once in PL Rp. 
361, c, with the varying reading e<xTo>. — The form of the first Pers. Impf. is 
often ^, among the Attic poets, and sometimes also in Plato ; the form ij/xrjv is 
rare (Lys. 7, 34, X. Cy. 6. 1, 9). — The form of the second Pers. Impf. %s is 
found frequently in the later writers, and rarely in lyric passages of the Attic 
poets. — The Dual forms with <r are preferred to those without <r ; on the con- 
trary, fjre is preferred to fare (Aristoph.). 

Rem. 4. The form of the third Pers. Sing. Impf. ^eiv instead of fjei, from 
dfii, sometimes occurs, even before consonants, Ar. Plut. 696. irposrieiv (in 
Senarius) ; PL Grit. p. 114, d. (in the best MSS.) 5 rjetv, PL Crit. 117, e! (in the 
best MSS.) 5 irporjeiv, PL Tim. 43, 6 ; ainjeiv, ib. 60,'c ; obi-pew, ib. 76, b. 

Rem. 5. The Ind. Pres. of dfii, to go, has regularly in the Attic prose- 
writers the meaning of the Fut. I shall or will go or come ; hence the Pres. is 
supplied by ipx'^ai (§ 167, 2) ; the Inf. and Part, have likewise a Pres. and 
Fut. meaning. 



222 



VERBS IN -pi. 



'* 182. 



II. Verbs in -fit which annex the Syllable vvv or vv to the 
Stem-vowel and append to this the Personal-endings. 

$ 182. Formation of the Tenses of Verbs whose Stem 
ends with a, e, o, or with a Consonant. 

A. Verbs whose Stem ends with a, e, or o. 



Voice. 


Tenses. 


a. Stem in a. 


b. Stem in e. 


c. Stem in o («). 


Act. ..... 


Pies. 


(TKehd-VVV-fJ.1 - 


KOp4-VVV-fJU X 


aTp&*vvvcfu.i - 




Impf. 


i-cwehd-vvv-v } 


e-Kopi-vvii-v 


i-arpw-vvv-v l 




Perf. 


e-C/ce'Sd-zca 


Ke-Kope-Ka 


e-crrpu-Ka 




Plup. 


e-c/ceSa-Ketf 


4-K€-KOp4-KClV 


i-arpd-Keiv 




Fut. 


<r/ce5a-o*co 


Kop4-<ra>, 


<TTp(ti-ff<a 


. 




Att. (TKeSa, -as, -a 


Att. Kop&>> -e?s, -e? 






Aor. 


i-(TKe8a-(Ta 


e-Kope-tro 


e-ffrpw-ffa 


Mid. 


Pres. 


(XK^d-vvv-fxai. 


Kop4-j/uv-fiai 


arpdo-yyv-ixai 




Impf. 


i-(TKeSa-vvv-/j.r]v 


i-Kope-vvv-/j.r]v 


i-a-Tpco-vvv-firjv 




Perf. 


i-&ic48a-(r-fj.cu 


Ke-ic6pe-(r-[xai. 


e-crrpw-fiai 




Plup. 


i-CKeSd-a-firfu 


i-Ke-K0p4-(T-fJ.T]V 


i-ffrpco-firju 




Put. 




Kop4-(T-o[xai 






Aor. 




i-Kope-ff-dfirjV 






r.Pf. 

Aor. 




Ke-Kope-a-ofxai 




Pass. 


i-(TKefid-<r-&7ii> 


£-Kop4-<xSr)v 


4-(TTp(t>-frr)v 




! Put; 


tr/ceSa-tr-fr^cro^ucu 


Kopz-<rSr\(roiAai 


o'Tp<a-Sr'i)<roixai 


Verbal Adj. 


crKeda-(T-r6s 


K0pe-(T-T6s 


ffTpca-r6s 




<rice5a-(r-T4os 


Kope-<r-T4os (Trp(a-r4os. 
- Kope-vi/vw, 4-Kop4-vvvov — (rrpco-vvvw, e- 


1 And aiceSa 


•uvvu, i(TKedd-uuvov — 


o-Tpco-vwov (v a 


I ways short). 









B. Verbs whose Stem ends with a Consonant. 




Pres. 


oA-Av-ym, 1 perdo, 1 SA-Av-pai, pereo, 


6fM-VV-fll l 


fifx-vv-fiai 


Impf. 


&A-XV-V 1 1 0}\-\v-fJL7]V 


&fi-vv-v * 


wfjL-vv-ixriv 


Perf. I. 


6A-cvAe-/ca ('OAEn), perdidi, 


o/JL-d>fji.o-Ka 


ofi-dcfio-fiai 




§ 124, 2. 


('OMOn) 




Perf, II. 


oA-coA-a, perii, 


§124, 2. 




Plup. I. 


oA.-cwA.e-/reu/, perdideram, 


bfx-oix6-Keiv 


bfl-(HfX,6-fir\V 


Plup. II. 


oA-ct>A-eiv, perieram, 






Fut. 


oA-a>, -ety, -e? . ,1 oA-ovjxai, -et 


ofi-ovfjiai,, -et 




Aor. I. 


#Ae-cra | A. II. u\-6fn}v 


&fxo-ffa 


a)/j.o-(rdfn]u 






A. I. P. wfio-(T- f 


^7jf (et wfx6frr\v) 






F. I. P. ojuo-cr-d 
'>lxyv-oy (always 


{]o~Qfx.ai, 

3). 


i 


And oAAv-w, &AAv-ov — bfivv-w, & 



Remark. "OAAvfxi comes by assimilation from oA-vvfxi (§ 18, Rem.). For an 
example of a stem-ending with a mute, see UUviifxi above, under the para 
digms (§ 175). The Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass, of 6/xvv/xi is o/iw^ocr^eVos. The 
remaining forms of the Perf. and Plup. commonly omit the <r among the Attic 
writers, e. g. 6fx.dfA.orai, ofidofioro. 



f 183.] SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN -fJLL. 223 

Summary of the Verbs belonging here. 

The Stem ends, 

A. In a Vowel and assumes -vvv. 

k 183. (a) Verbs whose Stem ends in a. 

1. K€pd-vvv-iAi (poetic secondary form Kipvdu), Ktpvy][xt; Epic and 
poet. Kcpaoo), to mix, Fut. Kepaaio, Att. KepG> ; Aor. lK.ipo.aa) Perf. 
KeKpaKa; Mid. to mix for one's self, Aor. iKepaa-d/xrjv ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass. KeKpafxat (KCKepacr/xat, Anacr. 29, 13; Inf. K€Kepa<r$at., Lnc. 
Dial. Meretr. 4, 4) ; Aor. Pass. iKp&Srjv, Att. also iKepdo-Srjv 
(Metathesis, $156, Rem.). 

2. Kpefxa-vvv-pLi, to hang, Fut. Kpep,aGw, Att. Kpe/xC) ; Aor. iKpifid- 
<ra ; Mid. or Pass. Kpefiavvv^ai, to hang one's self, or 5e te»' (but 
KpijxafjuxL, to hang, § 179, 5) ; (Perf. Mid. or Pass. Ke/cpe/xa/mi in 
later writers;) Fut. Pass. Kpe/xao-#?jo-o//,ai ; Aor. iKpe/xda-^v, I ivas 
hung, or I hung. 

3. 7rera-wi5-/xt, to spread out, to open, Fut. Treraaw, Att. 7rerco ; 
Aor. e7rerao-a (Perf. Act. Tre-rriraKa, Diod.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
Tr€TTTdfiat (§ 155, 2) (Tre-riTao-fiai, non- Attic and Luc.) ; Aor. Pass. 

€7T€TaCT»9^V. 

4. o7ce8a-wu-/w, to scatter, Fut. o-KeSaa-co, Att. o-KeSco ; Aor. eo-Ke- 
8eo-a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eo-KeSacr/xai ; Aor. Pass. eo-KeSao-^i/. 

$ 184. (b) Verbs whose Stem ends in e. 

Preliminary Remark. The verbs evvvfii, cr^euyvfii, and also tywOfii 
(§ 186), do not properly belong here, since their stem originally ended in <r, 'E2- 
(comp. ves-tire), 2BE2- (comp. &<r{ie<r-Tos), Zn5- (comp. fyff-r-qp, (axr-rpov, (dxx- 
rrjs, fy<r-T6s) ; but by the omission of the <r, they become analogous to verbs in 
-e and -o. 

1. e-vvv-pu, to clothe, in prose apL<fu£vvvp,i, Impf. dpL(pLevvvv with- 
out Aug. ; Fut. apLtpiio-a), Att. dfxfpiui ; Aor. rjfKpiea-a ; Perf. Act. 
wanting ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ^u</>ieo-pu, rjfKpUa-ac, ^(ptWrat, etc., 
Inf. rjpLcpiio-Sau ; Fut. Mid. a/updo-ofim. (Aug. $$ 126, 3. and 230.) 
The vowel of the Prep, is not elided in the Common language, 
hence also i-micao-SaL, X. Cy. 6. 4, 6. 

2. li-wv-fxi, to boil, Trans., Fut. ^eo-w; Aor. e£eo-a; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, e^ecr/xac; Aor. Pass. i^ea-Srjv. — (£ew, on the contrary, is 
usually intransitive). 



224 SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN fit. [§§ 185-187 

S. Kope-vvv-fju, to satiate, Fut. Kopiam, Att. Kopco; Aor. eKopeo-a; 
Aor. Mid. iKopaadfxrjv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Ke/<opecrp,ai ; Aor. Pass 

iKop£cr$7]V. 

4. o-fie-wv-fxi, to extinguish, Flit. o-/3ecrco ; first Aor. 2or/?€cra, J 
extinguished; second Aor. eor/fyv, J ceased to burn; Perf. eafirjKo., 
Ihavs ceased to burn. — Mid. cr/Sivvvp-ai, to cease to bum, intrans. 
Fut. o-firjaopLai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. co-fieo-pai ; Aor. Pass, iafiza- 
Syv, Fut. Pass. o-peo-Srjcrofiai. No other verb in -vu/u has a 
second Aor. Act. (§ 191, 2). 

5. orope-wv-fUj to spread out (shortened form cnopvvp.i, Poet, 
and X. Cy. 8. 8, 16), Fut. crropia-w, Att. crropco; Aor. eo-Topecra ; 
Mid. to spread out for one's self. The other tenses are formed 
from arpiowvfjii ; ia-rpojo-dp^rjv ; ecrrpiopLai, £<jTpu>$7)v, crrpcoros (non- 
Att. ecrropecrp-at, icrTopioSrjv, and icrToprjSrjv) . See § 182. 

$ 185. (c) Fer&s ivhose Stem ends in i. 

Ti-vvv-fxi (TI-), to pay, to expiate, Mid. rl-wv-fiou, to get pay, to punish, to avenge, 
secondary Epic form of rhm and rtuo/xai. — In Attic poetry, the Mid. is often 
found, and with one v, rfvvficu. 

§ 186. (d) Verbs in o, with the o lengthened into to. 

1. tfli-wv-p-i, to gird, Fut. £<6ctcd; Perf. Z^wKa, Paus. ; Aor. e£<ocra; 
Mid. to gird one's self, Aor. Mid. e£,uxrdpLr)v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
t£a)crp,ai (j 131). 

2. pw-wv-pa, to strengthen, Fut. pwo-aj; Aor. Ippaxra; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, eppup-ai, Imp. eppwo-o, vale, farewell, Inf. ippuaSai ; Aor. 
Pass. IppwaS-qv ($ 131); Fut. Pass. puxrSrjcropLai. 

3. arpw-wv-pLt (j 182), to spread out, Fut. arpwcro); Aor. ta-rpoi- 
ara, etc. See crropewv-pu (j 184, 5). 

4. xpu-wv- pa, to color, Fut. xpcxro) ; Aor. e^pwcra ; Perf. Mid. oi 

Pass. Ke^poocr/xat ; Aor. Pass. ixpwoSrjv. 

B. Verbs whose Stem 3nds in a Consonant and assumes -j/t). 

$ 187. (a) 2fe a iJfwZe. 

1. ay-vv-pii, to break, Fut. g&d; Aor. ea£a, Inf. a£<u (Part. Lys. 
100, 5. Kared^avres with the Aug.) ; second Perf. cdya, J a?fl 
broken; Mid. to break for one' s self, Aor. la^dpyv ; Aor. Pass. 

Iayip> (Aug., § 122, 4). 



f 187.] SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN -fU. 225 

2. SetK-vv-fu, see § 175. 

3. €Lpy-vv-fJLL (or etpyco), to s/m£ in, Fut. eip£<o; Aor. eip|a, Inf. 
ctp£u, Part. Ip^as (PL Polit. 285, b.j, irepieplavres (Til. 5, 11), 
£wep£avTos (PL Up. 5. 461, b), Subj. Ka^ap^s (with the variation 
ica^ep^s), PL Gorg. 461, d; Aor. Pass, elpx^V; Perf. etpyp,at. 
(But eipyoo, eip£o), €ip£a, &.py-kqv s to shut out, etc.) 

4. £evy-vv-fii, to join together, Fut. £ev£o> ; Aor. c^ef^a ; Mid. to 
join to or for one's <self Fut. ^evijojxai ; Aor. i^ev^dfu-qv ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass e^fjLyfxat ; Aor. Pass. i£eux$w» an( l m o r e frequently 
k£$yr\v. 

5. fxty-vv-fxt, to mix (fit ay o>, secondary form), Fut. /u'£(i>; Aor. 
c/xt^a, p,t£ai; Perf. /xe/xl^a (Polyb.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, aifuy/iaij 
fjLefjuxS-cu ; Aor. Pass, ifiixdyv, and ifuyrjv ; Fut. Pass. fii^^a-p/wi ; 
Fut. Perf. /A€/xi£opu. 

6. oiy-vu-p-t, usually as a compound: (The Attic use of the 
form olyvvjxL is not certain) avotyvvfu, Siotyvv/xi (but instead, 
dvotyw, SioCyto, are more frequently used in the Pres. and aviwyov 
always in the Impf), to open, Fut. avoi^a ; Aor. wew^a, di>oi£ai (in 
X. Hell, ^votyov, rjvoi|a, signifying to put to sea, to weigh anchor) ; 
first Perf. dvea>^a, I have opened; second Perf. dvewya, J stand 
open, instead of which Att. dveuy/Mu; Impf. Mid. avewyoprp/ ; Aor. 
Pass, avetpxfhjv, avoL^qvai. (Aug. § 122, 6.) Verb. Adj. dvoiKrios. 

7. 6fx6py-vv-fxi, to wipe off, Fut. dp,op|<D ; Aor. wfiop^a ; Mid. to 
w^e o^ ^om ewe's se^V Fut. dp,op£op,ai ; Aor. o)/xopidfxr)v ; Aor. 
Pass. <Jofi6px&r)v. 

8. Tnfjy-vv-ixi, to jix, fasten, freeze, Fut. 7nj£w; Aor. hrr\£,<x', first 
Perf. Trkmrxa., 1 have fastened ; second Perf. Triinqya, I standfast, 
am frozen ; Mid. 7rrjyvvfjLai, I stick fast ; Perf. Triiajyixai, I stand 
fast; Aor. Pass, liray^v (more seldom hrfp^qv) ; second Fut. 
Pass. 7ray^cro/x(H. Verbal Adj. tttjktos. 

9. prjy-vv-pL, to rend, Fut. p^|co; Aor. eppr]£a; second Perf. 
4^po>ya, Jra rm£ ($ 140, Rem. 3); Aor. Mid. ipprjidfjLrjv; Aor. 
Pass, ippayrjv (zpprjX^W rar ^) ; second Fut. payrj(rop.ai. 

10. cppdy-vv-fxi (commonly </>pdo-o-u), (ftpdrroi, § 143, 1), to 6rea& 
Impf. typdyvvv (Thuc. 7, 74. S. Ant. 241); Fut. <jf>pd£a>; Aor. 
e</>pa£a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7re$payp,ai ; Aor. Pass, l<f>pdx$rp 
(typayrjv first used among the later writers). 



226 verbs. -«— iceifuu ajnd rjfxai. [$$188, 189 



$ 188. (b) Verbs ivhose Stem ends in a Liquid. 

1. &p-vv-p.ai (Epic and also in Plato), to take, obtain, secondary form of atpo- 
fiat, and used only in particular phrases, to obtain, to acquire, namely, a reicard, 
spoils, etc. Impf. Tjpyvixrjy. The remaining forms come from cupo/xai. 

2. KTtC-vv-fu, commonly written ktiWv/u in the MSS., to put to 
death, Att. prose secondary form of ktciVw, is used in the Pres. 
and Impf. The stem is KTEIN-, lengthened from KTEN-. 
The v of the stem is omitted on account of the diphthong ($ 169, 
Rem. 1). 

3. SX-Xv-jxt (instead of SX-w-pu), to destroy. See h 182, B. In 
prose, only in compounds. 

4. ojA-vv-fu, to sivear. See § 182, B. 

5. op-vv-[u (poet), to rouse ($ 230). 

6. crrop-vv-fJLL, to spread out. See crropevvvpu, § 184, 5. 

$ 189. Inflection of the tivo forms of the Perf. kci/acu 
and rjp.ai. 

Preliminary Remark. The two forms of the Perf. /cel>cu and Jj/iai, 
are so essentially different, in then- formation, from the other verbs in -ju t that 
they require to be treated by themselves. 

a. Kci/acu, to lie. 

Ket/xat, properly, I have laid myself down, hence I lie down; 
then Pass. I have been laid down, I am lying doivn (e. g. dvaKci- 
fuu, I am laid up, i. e. consecrated, avyKtvrai, it has been agreed 
upon, compositum est, constat, but o-wrc'^ctrat vtto twos, it has 
been agreed by some one) ; this verb is a Perf. without reduplica- 
tion, from the stem KEI- 'contracted from KEE-). 

Perf. Ind. k€?/mxi, ke?<rat, /cen-cu, Kelfi&a, /ceTcr^e, kCivtoli ; 

Subj. Kiu>fj.ai, Key, Ke-nrai, etc. 

Imp. Ktiao, KeiaSw, etc. ; — Inf. /cetcr&cu ; — Part. Keifxevos. 
Impf. Ind. iKeifiTju, eKeuro, eitciTo, third Pers. PI. e/ceijro. 

Opt. Keol/xrjv, k£oio, kzoito, etc. 
Fut. KeiffOfxai. 

Compounds avdicei/xai, Kara/fciyuot, Kara/ceio-cu, etc. ; — Inf KaraKeic^ai ; — Imp 

KaT&Keuro, iyiceuro. 



M 190, 191.J VERBS IN -to WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -/U. 2'W 

$ 190. b. ^Rfjcai, to sit. 

1. ^H/xai, properly, I have seated myself, I have been seated, 
hence, I sit (Ion. and poetic, also used of inanimate objects, 
instead of iSpu/xai, I have been fixed, established?) ; this verb is 
a Perf. of the poet. Aor. Act. eto-a, to set, to establish. The stem 
is e HA- (comp. ^tr-rat instead of ifS-rai, according to f 17, 5, and 
the Lat. sed-eo). 

Remark 1. The active Aorist-forms of zTcra are dialectic (§ 230) and poet., 
but the Mid. signifying to erect, to establish, belongs also to Attic prose, d(rdfir)v; 
Part, elcrdfxevos (Th. 3, 58, ecradfxeuos) ; Imp. ecrai, '4<rcrcu (ecpecrcrai) ; Put. poetic 
eaofiai, eWo/icu (ityeorcroficu). The defective forms of this verb are supplied by 
Idpvca. 

Perf. Ind. i-j/xai, T\(xai, rj<TTai, rjfAe&a, ija&e, r\vTai ; 

Imp. ?i<ro, ri<r&a), etc. ; — Inf. ri<T&ai ; — Part, tuisvos. 

Plup. V/j.7]v, ijcro, rjcTTO, ^e&a, ?ioSe, i\vro. 

2. Iii prose, the compound Ka^^ai is commonly used instead 
of the simple. The inflection of the compound differs from the 
simple in never taking o- in the third Pers. Sing., and in the 
Plup., only when it has the temporal Augment : — 

Perf. Koforificu, Ka^crai, k d £• 1] rai, etc.; — Subj. Kabupcu, Ka&{}, Ka&p- 

rot, etc. ; — Imp. kc&tjo-o, etc.; — Inf. Ka&n<r&cu ; — Part. ko&Yj- 
fievos. 
Plup. iKd^7ifir]v and Ka^]fn\v, ckc&tjo-o and koStjo-o, e k d fr tj to and 

KaS?i(TTO, etc.; — Opt. Ka^roi/xr}U, icd&o?o, KafroiTO, etc. 
Rem. 2. The Opt. forms : Kafrtjfiriv, -??o, -777-0, etc. are doubtful. — The 
defective forms of rj/xai are supplied by e£eo-&ai, or 'i£e<r&eu (prose Ka&4(e<r&cu, 
Kc&t&aScu). 

VEEBS IN -«, WHICH FOLLOW THE ANALOGY OF VERBS IN -[XI, IN FORMING 
THE SECOND AOR. Ad. AND MlD., THE PRES. AND PERF. Act. 

§ 191. I. Second Aor. Act. and Mid. 

1. Several verbs with the characteristic a, e, o, v, form a 
second Aor. Act. and (though rarely) a second Aor. Mid., ac- 
cording to the analogy of verbs in -fxi, — this tense being without 
the mode-vowel, and appending the personal- endings to the 
stem. But all the remaining forms of these verbs are like 
verbs in -<o. 

2. The formation of this second Aor. Act., through all the 
modes and participials is like that of the second Aor. Act. of 



228 



VEUBS IN -to WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE *-N 



191 



verbs in -/u. The characteristic-vowel, with some exceptions, 
is lengthened, as in earrjv, viz. a and e into rj, o into w, X and v 
into 7 and v. This lengthened vowel remains, as in 'iarrjv, 
throughout the Ind., Imp., and Inf. The third Pers. PI. in -rjcrav 
(Char, a) and -vvav shortens the vowel, when the poets use the 
abridged form in -v, instead of -o-av, e. g. tfiav, e'Sw. The Snbj., 
Opt., and Part., with some exceptions, which will be noticed in 
the following tables, are like verbs in -/jll, e. g. fSai-qv (a-Tai-qv), 
cr/3eir]v (Seirjv), yvovqv (Soi^v), yvovs (Sol's). The Imp., like arrjS^L, 
in the second Pers. Sing., takes the ending -&, and the stem 
vowel remains long through all the persons ; in compounds of 

(3aLV(o, fir)&L is also shortened into /3d, e. g. KaTaySd, 7rpd/3d, ei's/Sa, 
e/x/3d, €7ri/3d instead of /cara/fy^i, etc. 



Modes ja. Characteris. a 


b. Characteris. e 


c. Characteris. o 


d. Character, i; 


and 


BA-n, /3cuVa>, 


2BE-X1, <r/3eVuut, 


TNO-fl, yiyvctxr- 


?*"-co, 


Persons. 


to go. 


to extinguish. 


kb, to know. 


to wrap up. 


Ind. S. 1. 


H-firj-v, I v:ent, 


eafi-qv, I ceased to 


iyvmv, I knew, 


e50i/, I went in 


2. 


e-firi-s 


€afir]s [burn, 


iyvws 


e$vs [or under, 


3. 


i-$i\ 


607377 


eyuoo 


edv 


D. 2. 


e-firj-rov 


eafirjTov 


eyj/wTov 


edvTov 


3. 


Z-$7\-Tt)V 


iafi7]T7]V 


iyvooT'nv 


idvTTjV 


P. 1. 


e-firj-iJ.ei' 


ecrfirj/j.ei' 


eyvco/jLeu 


thvfAtV 


2. 


e-@r)-re 


ecrfirjre 


eyvwre 


eSi/Te 


3. 


e-fi-q-crav 


iafi-r\(Ta.v 


iyvuKTav 


eSvaau 




(Poet, efiav) 




(Poet, iyvoav) 


(Poet. eSvv) 


Subj. S. 


fS5>, fifjs, Pfj l 


crfiw, fjs, f) ' 


yvw, yv£s, yy<$} 


Svw, rjs, y x 


D. 


firiTov 


(rfirjrov 


yvwrov 


5vr)Tov 


P. 


$WUeV, 7JT€, 


crfiwfAej/, rjre, 


yuu/xev, aire, 


dvw/xeu. 




G)(Tl{v) 


S}<Tl{v) 


S)<ri{v) 


7JT6. a>(Tl(v) 


Opt. S. 1. 


fiairjv 


crfieirjv 


yvoin]v 2 




2. 


fiairjs 


<j{Seiy)s 


yvoir\s 




3. 


pair) 


crfieir] 


yvo'iT) 




D. 2. 


@air)TOV Ct cutov 


afiel-qrov et zltov 


yvoir)Tou et o'itov 




3. 


&air\T7)v et airt]v 


0-fiei71T7]V Ct €LT7)U 


yj/oi^rrjy et olttju 




P. 1. 


jSai-qjAtv Ct a7p.eu 


afieirj/j-ev et e7/xev 


yyoirifj.ei' et cZfjiev 




2. 


fiairiTe Ct cure 


cr/3ei7jTe et etre 


yvoirjTe et o7re 




3. 


ficueu (seldom 
/3 cut? crew) 


crfie7ev 


yuo7ev (rarely 
yvoii)<rav) 




Imp. S. 


&7J&1, 7}TO> 3 


crfir}&i, 'f)TW 2 


yvw&i, dbrW* 


SCi^J, VTU 3 


D. 1. 


firJTOv, rjruy 


afS7)TOV> rjTCtiP 


yVU>TOV, CtiTOW 


dvroy, vtuv 


P. 2. 


)8f)T€ 


crfirJTz 


yvune 


8Dt6 


3. 


firiToxrav and 


afi-r]TW(rav and 


yv&TwGav and 


ovToxxav et 




f}di>Tco>> 


(Xf&ivTWV 


yvovTM 


SvyTW^ 


Inf. 


fir)vai 


(rfirjvcu 


yvoivo.1 


Svvai 


Part. 


fids, affa, av 


o-fieis, e7aa, ev 


yvovs, od<xa, ov 


fivs, v<ra, vv 




G. fiavTos 


G afieuTOS 


G. yvovros 

o-fiw ; ZiayvS) ; ava 


G. hvvros. 


' Compo 


unds, e. g. avafiob, avafifjs, etc.; aivo 


2 Aesehyl. Suppl. 230 (215) ffvyyviit] ; but i 


a the Mid. form a 


yyyj/0?TO. 


ii 3 Compounds, c. g. avafSydn* av6.fir\T^ ; im6a\. 


37j&t ; Sidyvoo&i ; a 


'ClSOiQ-f. 



M 192, 193. | VERBS IN -CO LIKE VERBS IN -(XL. 229 

Remark. The Opt. form Svrjv (instead of Svirjv) is not found in the Attic 
dialect, but in the Epic (§ 227). 



§ 192. Summary of Verbs with a second Aor . like 
Verbs in -ya. 

Besides the verbs mentioned above, some others have this form : — 

1. SiSpdaicw, to run away (§ 161, 10, Aor. (APA-) %Spav, -as, -a, -afiev, -are, 
^.aav (eSpdv Poet.), Subj. Spu>, Spas, Spa, Sparov, Spco/xei/, Spare, Spwcri(v), Opt. 
Spair\v, Imp. Spa&i, -area, Inf. Spavai, Part. Spas, -a<ra, -dv, Gen. Spdvros. 

2. ireroixai, to fly (§ 166, 29), Aor. (I1TA-) itrr-nv, Inf. -mr\vai, Part. ittoLs ; Aor, 
Mid. iTrrdfiTjv, -nrda^ai. 

3. irptaa&ai, see § 179, 6. 

4. ovceAAco or (T/ceAeo), to dry, second Aor. (2KAA-) iaKX-qv, to wither, Intrans., 
Inf. (TKXTJvai, Opt. (TKXairjv. 

5. cpSd-vw, to come before, to anticipate (§ 158, 7), Aor. ifyb-nv, (pfrrji/ai, <p&oLs, 
<p&<£, <p&air\v. 

6. Katoo, to burn, Trans. (§ 154, 2), Aor. (KAE-) iicdriv, I burned, Intrans. ; but 
first Aor. etcavo-a, Trans. 

7. pi<a, to flow (§ 154, 2), Aor. ('PYE-) ippvr]u, I flowed. 

8. x« £ 'p w » t0 rejoice (§ 166, 32), Aor. (XAPE-) Zx&PW- 

9. aAicTKOfiat, to be taken, Aor. ('AAO-) vjAwj/ and iaXau (§ 16', I), a\5>vai, 
aha, -<Ss, -to, etc., akoiriv, aXovs (always d, except in the Ind.). 

10. /3io'oj, to live, Aor. ZfSiwv, Subj. fli£j, -cps, -$, etc., Opt. $iu>t\v (not f3toir]v, 
as yvoi-nv, to distinguish it from the Opt. Impf. fiioirjv), Inf. ^iwuai, Part. jStous 
[oi/o-a, ow] ; but the cases of fiiovs are supplied by the first Aor. Part. Pititxras. 
Tbus: avefiicav, I returned to life, from avafiidoffKOfiai (§ 161, 3). The Pres. and 
Impf. of fii6<a are but little used by the Attic writers ; for these tenses, they em- 
ploy & ; besides these tenses, only the Fut. Qqcreiv was in good use among Attic 
writers ; the remaining tenses were borrowed from fiiSu) ; thus, Pres. £i£ ; Impf. 
%fav (§ 137, 3) ; Fut. Pidxroficu, more rarely <fV«; Aor. ej8iW (X. O. 4, 18. lias 
also ifitcacreu) ; Perf. fiefi'tooKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. PefilooTai, Part. /3e/3ico/ieVos. 

11. (pvoi (v or i>), to produce, second Aor. %<pvv, Intrans., to be produced, be born, be 
naturally, <pvvai, <pvs, Subj. <pixa (Opt. wanting in the Attic dialect) ; but the first 
Aor. £(pi<ra, Trans. I produced; Fut. <pv<rw, Trans. J will produce. The Perf. 
irc(pvKa, I am produced, also has an intransitive sense, so also the Pres. Mid. 
(pi/opai ; Fut. (pvcropai. 

Remark. Here also belong the forms o-%es and <rxoir]v of the second 
Aor. iax ov fr° m £x w > t0 nave (§ 166, 14), and ir?frt of the second Aor. Ztnov 
from irlvw, to drink (§ 158, 5). 



$ 193. II. Perfect and Pluperfect. 

The A'ctic dialect, in imitation of the Epic, forms a few Per- 
fects of pure verbs immediately from the stem, e. g. AI-O, to 
20 



230 



VERBS IN -CO LIKE VERBS IN 



-fll. 



[* 193 



fear, Be-St-a, then rejecting the mode-vowel, in the Dual and PL 
Ind. Perf. and Plup., and to some extent hi the Inf., e. g. Se-St- 
fxeu instead of Se-SC-a-fiei/. In this way, these forms of the Perf 
and Plup. become wholly analogous to the Pres. and Impf. of 
verbs in -/u, e. g. t-o-ra-/xey. The stem- vowel remains short, e. g. 
SiSX/xeu, rirXafxev, rerXavai ; but in the third Pers. PI. Perf, the 
mode-vowel a is not rejected, e. g. Se-St-do-i; with verbs in -aco, 
however, a is contracted with the stem- vowel, e. g. Te-TAa-uo-i — 
re-rXa-cri. 

Remark 1. Except the forms of AIH and 'lar-nfii, all the Perfects of thi9 
kind belong almost exclusively to poetry, particularly to the Epic. The Sing. 
SeSta is not Attic. 

Rem. 2. The Imp. of these Perfects is also in use, and, since it not only 
wants the mode-vowel, but takes the ending -d-i in the second Pers. Sing., it is 
wholly analogous to the forms in -/xt. So the Inf. Both append their termi- 
nations to the short stem-vowel ; SeSieVai is an exception. The Subj. Perf. and 
the Opt. Plup. of verbs whose stem-vowel is a, are formed like verbs in -p.i, since 
the Subj. Perf. admits the contraction of the stem-vowel with the termination, 
and the Opt. Plup. ends in -al-qv, e. g. kerrd-w, kerrw, -77s, etc., rerXai-nv. The 
Part, of verbs in -dec contracts the stem-vowel a with the ending -cos and -6s, 
e. g. terraces = kerrcos, eerra-6s = kerrcos and kerros, and also have a peculiar 
feminine form in -coera, e. g. kerrwera ; all the Cases retain the co, e. g. kcrranos, 
kerrcoer-ns, etc. 

Rem. 3. The form resolved by e is retained in some participles, in the Ionic 
dialect, e.g. kerrecos, standing firm; so from refrvnua, re&vews Cnever re&vcos) 
together with r&vnucos, is retained in the Attic dialect also. In these forms, 
« remains in all the Cases, e. g. 

kerrecos, kerrecoaa, kerrecos, Gen. eerrecoros, -(herns, 
re&vecbs, reSveccera, re&vecos, Gen. reSvecoros, -cberrjs. 

Befi-nKa and rerX-nKa never have this form of the participle. 





Perfect. 


Pluperfect. 


Perfect. 


Pluperfect. 


Ind. S. 1. 


Se-S/-a 


ihehteiv 


'E-2TA-A - 




2. 


oe-d?-as 


eSedteis 






3. 


8e-5i-e(j/) 


ededtei 






D. 2. 


Se'-Si-roi/ 


iSeSHrov 


e-erra-rov 


eerrarov 


3. 


de-dt-roy 


e8eotrr)i' 


e-erra-rov 


eerrarov 


P. 1. 


de-^-fiev 


iSeSi/xet/ 


e-erra-fxev 


eerrajxev 


2. 


5e-e>X-re 


ededlre 


e-errd-re 


ear are 


3. 


5e-dt-deri(i/) 


eded"ierau (eSedieerav) 


k-erra-en(u) 


eerraaav 


Imp. 


Se-St-^t, Sedtrco, etc. 


e-erra-Si, etc., 


3 Pers. PI. 


Subj. 


de-di-co, -77s, -rj, etc. 


eerrarcoerav an 


d -dvrcov 


Inf. 


oe-DX-euai 


e-erra-vai 




Part. 


deft-cos, -v?a, -6s, Gen. -6tos 


e-errcos, -coerce, 


-6s {-dsl) 






Gen. -cvTos, 


-C0CT7]S 


Subj. Pf. 


eerrco, 77s, -r}, etc. 






Opt. Plup. 


kerrai-nv, Dual earalrjrou and -cut 
etc., third Pers. PI. eerrcuev. 


ov, PI. eerralrn 


xev and -ai/xcv, 



?$ 194, 195.] VERBS WITH A PERF. LIKE VERBS IN -/*«. 23 1 

Rem, 4. The Opt. Plup. third Pers. Sing. StSienj, PI. Phaedr. 251, a. is re- 
stored according to traces in the MSS. The Plup. of iarript, in this form nevei 
takes the strengthened augment et. — The Imp. Perf. etrra&t, etc., and the Opt. 
Plup. €<rrai7]v, etc., are poetic only. But the Inf. kmavai is in constant use ; 
yet e«TT7j/ceVat is very seldom; also the Part, ecrrws, -aura, is far more frequent 
than 4o-TrjKc6s, -v?a; the neuter e<TTTjK6s, on the contrary, is more frequent than 
€<tt6s. Instead of the Inch Sing. Perf., Plup., and Part, of Se'Sfa, the forms 
of SeSoiKo, are more frequent ; besides the Indie. Perf. and Plup., particularly 
in the Sing., the Inf. and Part, were used. 



J 194. Summary of Verbs ivith a Perfect like Verb!, 

in -[XL. 

Besides the two verbs above, the following have this form of the Perfect : — 

1. ylyvofxai, to become, TErAA (stem TA) : Perf. (Sing, yeyova, -as, -e), 767a 
j.ev, 7670x6, y£yaacri(v), Inf. yeyaptv (Epic), Part. yey&s, yeyaxra, yeyevs, Gen 
ycy&Tos. 

2. fialvco, to go, Perf. /3e£i?Ka, BEBAA: PI. fiefiafjLev, -a/re, -aai(v), third Pers. 
PL Subj. Zv£efrSxn(v) (PI. Phaedr. 225, e), Inf. £e£dVcu, Part, fc^s (X. Hell. 
7. 2, 3), Pe&v?a (PeQaaa, PI. Phaedr. 254, b), fc&ds, Gen. £e£a>Toy ; Plup. etfe- 
8a(j.ev, -ut€, -avav. These abridged forms are almost wholly poetic and dia- 
lectic (§ 230). 

3. &j/t)<ti«i), to die, T&vriKa, TE0NAA : PI. r^yd/xey, re^yare, r&va<n(v), Imp. 
fe&vo&i, Part. Te&vTiK&s, Te&VTjKv7a, t&vi]k6s, or refrvectis, Te&vewcra (Lys. and 
Dem.), re&veSs, Inf. r&vavai (Aesch. r&vavai from re&vaevai) ; Plup. ireSrud- 
Tav, Opt. rebvatriv. 

4. TAAfl, to bear, Perf. r4r\TjKa, TETAAA: Dual t4t\o.tou, PI. rerXa/xey, 
t4t\o.t€, TerXci(ri(v), Imp. t4t\c&i, -are*, etc., Subj. wanting, Inf. TerKavai, but 
Part. T€TKi]K<los ; Plup. erer Aa/iey, eTeTAaYe, irdrXaa-au, Dual 4t4t\o.tov, ereTAa- 
T7)v, Opt. T€T\air]v. 

5. Here belong the two participles of, 

BLjopda-Kw (§ 161, 6), to eat, Perf. £e;8pa/ca, poetic fiePpcis, Gen. -wtos. 
iri-KTO) (§ 163, 3), to fall, ir4irT<tina, Att. Poet. Treirrdos (comp. § 230). 

Remark. There are also found, in imitation of Homer, Kticpayiiev and 
the Imp. Kefcpax&h from the Perf. Kenpaya (from Kpafa, to cry out) ; also the 
Imp. ireVejcr&i, from ir4wo&a, to trust (from irel&o), to persuade), is found in 
Aesch. Eum. 602. See § 230. The Perfects otSa and !Wa require a distinct 
consideration. 



§ 195. OTSa and loina. 

1. OT8o, Perf. from 'EI An (second Aor. elBov, I saw, Inf. lde?v, videre) 
properly I have seen, hence I know; for the syllable of, see § 140, 4; for the 
change of 5 into <r in %<ttov, etc., see § 17, 5; for the change of 5 into o* in 
tcrfiev, see § 19, 1. Its inflection is as follows: — ■ 



232 



OlSa AND loiKa. 



[* 196 



PERFECT. 



Ind 



S..1. 

2. 

3. 

D. 2. 3. 

P. 1. 

2. 
3. 



o?8a Subj. ei5& Imp. 

olo~&a A elSfjs fo&i Inf. 

oifSe(v) elBfi larto etSevat 

fcTTOj/, Icttov eldrjrov, -rjrou Xarov, tcrrwv 

ta-fxev dSebfMsv Part. 

1o~re etSfjre 5foTe eiScas, -uta, 

i<rd(n(i/) 6tS£(rt(j/) XcTTuxrav 



-6s 



PLUPERFECT. 



Intl. S. 1. 
2. 



fieiv 2 Dual ^ PUjj8eiit.fr (Poet, ^e^) 

^Sets and -etc&a 1 rjSenov, Poet, -pcrrov rjSeire ( " TjffTe) 
^Set^) -pdeiTriv, " fjffTrjv rjSeaav ( " rjaav) 



Opt. Sing. etSefyi/, -77s, -77; Dual eldeirjTov, -rjTrjv; PI. elSelrjfieu (seldom et'Set- 

/ief), eiSenjTe, ei'SeTei/ (seldom ei'Se^trai/). 
Fut. etcrojxai (Ion. e:57j<ra>, though Isocr. aweiSrjcreis), I shall know or 

experience ; sometimes also ei'Sewu, et5«, clSeiriv, have the same 

meaning. — Verbal Adj. l<rr4ov. , . / V," . 

,s - ^1 tic "-' 



2iW5a, compounded of o!5a, / aw conscious, Inf. aweidevcu, Imp. <ruj/io-&t, 
Subj. o-uveiSw, etc. 



1 4 116, 2, olSas scarcely occurs in Attic. 

2 First person 75577, second fjd-ncr&a, third $577, ar e considered . as Attic 
forms ; yet ijSeiv, fjdeia^ra (also f?5eis), rjSei, are found in the best Attic wri- 
ters. OtSa/ier, oiSaTe, oi5a<n(j/), instead of fo^te*/, etc., are rarely found in 
the Attic writers. Comp. X. An. 2. 4, 6. Antiph. p. 115, 3. PL Ale. 141, 
e. Eur. Suppl. 1047. X. O. 20, 14. olSas occurs in X. C. 4. 6, 6. The 
shortening of the ei into e in the Dual and PL of the Opt. -pdefiey, is poetic 
and rare. S. 0. T. 1232. 



Remark; The Perfect, I have known, is expressed by eyvwKa, and the Aorist, 
1 knew, by syvav. 

2. "EoiKa, I am like, I seem, Perf. of 'EIKH (of this the Impf. el/ce, is used in 
Homer), poetic dica instead of eoi/co, elKevai instead of iouc4vai y and (instead 
of eoiKaai) the anomalous Att. third Pers. PL e?£a(ri, even in prose (Plat.), Part. 
ioiKws, in the Attic writers only in the sense of like ; Att. sluds and euceVai 
(instead of ioiKus, £oik4vo.i) commonly in the dramatists, only in the sense of 
probable, likely, right; hence especially in the neuter et/cJs, as ws eln6s, as is 
natural; Plup. icpKeiv (§ 122, 5), Fut. e^w (Ar.). 

Here belongs the abridged form eoiynev, among the Tragedians, instead of 
ioiKaixev ; comp. 1(tu*v. The poetic Mid. forms ifeai (Eur. Ale. 1065), second 
Pers. Sing. Perf, and %ikto, third Pers. Sing. Plup., are constructed according 
to the same analogy. 

§ 196. III. Present and Imperfect, 

There are also some Present and Imperfect forms, mostly in the Epic dialect, 
which, according to the analogy of verbs in -/«, take the personal-endings 
without the mode-vowel. See § 230, under h>vu> y ravvu, ipvw, ffevw, e5a>, <p4pu • 
tluai (§ 166. 24). of the Common language, belongs here. 



♦ 197.] DEPONENT PASSIVES. 233 

$ 197. Summary of the Depcv.ent Passives 
102, 2, 3). 

"Ayafxai, to wonder, hivafxai, to be able, Kp4fj.afj.ai, to hang, 

al<S4o[jLcu, to reverence, *vsapeaT4ofxai, to be dissai- Xoi5op4ofxai, to revile, 

aXaofxai, to wander, isfied, (jaivofxai, to be mad, 

afj.iXXdofi.ai, to contend, ivavTioofxai, to resist, (ieTafx.4XoiJ.ai, to regret, 

avrioofxai (Poet.) adversor, iv&vfi4ofj.ai, to lay to heart, ftxaaTTOfiai, to loathe, 
cbiwoeo/xai, to be distracted, ivuo4o/xai, to consider, vefieadofiai (Poet.), to bi 

airopeofxai, to be perplexed, 47rifj.4Xofjai and -4ofxai, to justly indignant, 
apiaTOKpaT6o/.(.at., to have an take care, o'Cofiai, to suppose, 

aristocracy, Zirivo4ofiai, to reflect upon, oXiyapx4ofj.ai, to have an 

apveofxai, to refuse 4irlcrTafj.ai, to know, oligarchy, 

&x^op.ai, to be displeased, epafxai (Poet.), to love, Treipdo/xai, to try, 

fHovXofiai, to ivish, ev&vfj4ojxai, to be happy, irpo^vfx4ofxai, to desire, 

Ppvxdo/xai, to roar, evXaf34ofj.ai, to be cautious, irpovo4ofxai, to foresee, 

b*4ofiai, to icant, evvop.4ojj.ai, bonis legibus o , 4f3ofxai, to reverence (Aov. 

S4pKOfiai (Poet.), to see, utor, io-4$$rnv, PI. Phaedr. 

dr}/J.oKpar4o/j.ai, to have a evirop4ofxai, to be opulent, 254, b). 

democracy, rjSofxai, to rejoice, <piKoTijj.4ofj.ai, to be ambi- 

SiaX4yofiai, to converse, &4po/j.ai (Poet.), to become tious, 
b K iavo4o/j,ai, to think, hot, v7roToir4ofj.ai, to conjecture. 

Remark 1. The Aor. of several verbs have a Mid. as well as a Pass, form, 
e. g. av\l£ofxai, to lodge; koidop4o[xai, to revile; 6p4yofiai, to strive after; irpayfia- 
Tevojuai, to carry on business (Pass, rarer) ; <piXocppov4ofxai, to treat kindly. Also 
several of the above verbs belong here, yet they more seldom have a middle 
Aorist, e. g. dyajxai, Aor. Mid. in Dem. ald4ofxai, see § 166, 1, afiiXXaofiai, Aor. 
Mid. in later writers, apv4ofiai in Herod. Aesch. and in later writers, diaX4yofiai 
in non-Attic writers, eTrivo4o/j.ai in later writers, Xoidop4o/j.ai, Aor. Mid. in Isae. 
6, 59, ireipdojxai ofter. in Thu., irpovo4ofj.ai, Eur. Hipp. 683. Paus. 4. 20, 1. <piXo- 
TL^ofxai in Isoc. and Aristid. — Several of the above list of verbs have a mid- 
dle as well as a Passive form in the Put. : ald4o/j,ai, § 166, 1, 'dx&ofxxu, § 166, 4. 
diaX4yofiai, to converse with, 8iaX4£o/j.ai and rarer SiaXex^vaofxai, &iai>o4ofxat, to 
think, iirtfj.4xofj.ai, § 166, 21. TrpoStvfj.4ofj.ai, to desire. Trpo&v/j.7}crofxai and rarer irpo&v- 
fj.r}Srr]crofxai. Both t](jofj.ai, to rejoice, arid the poetic epa/xai, to love, have a passive 
form for their Put.: Tj^b^ffofiai, ipaa&T}o-ofj.ai, § 179, 4. 

Rem. 2. All the other Deponents are Middle Deponents, or are used only 
in the Pres. and Impf. 

Rem. 3. Among the Deponent Passives, arc very many Active verbs, which 
in the Mid. express a reflexive or intransitive action, but have a Passive form 
for their Aorist ; on the contrary, a Middle form for their Future, e. g. <pof34co, 
terreo, to terrify ; <pof3n&r\vai and (poPrjO-eoSai, timere, to fear. Here belong all 
verbs in -aiveiv and -vveiv, derived from substantives and adjectives, almost 
all in -ovv, and most in -i£eiv, C. g. evcppatveiv, to gladden, evcppavSrivai, ev<ppa- 
veicrbai, and evcppavS-hcrecr&ai, to be joyful, to be happy ; Treiraiveiv, to make ripe, 
ireTrav&r}i>ai, ireTraveia^ai, maturescere, to ripen; alcrx^veiv, to shame, alo , x vv &V val i 
alaxweloSrai (rarer alcrxvi'&iio'ecrSrai), to feel shame; ZXaTTovv, to make less, iXar- 
Tw&rjvai, iXXaTTcvaea&ai, to be inferior, to be conquered; xoXovv, to make angry, 
XoXw&qvai, x°^ < *> ~s <r & al i succensere, to be angry; fxaXaKL^eiv, to make effeminate, 
uakaKi<r&rjvai (rarer /xaXaKiaaa^ai), fiaXaKieia&ai, to make one's self effeminate, to 

20* 



?34 



ACTIVE VERBS WITH A MIDDLE FUTURE, 



[* 198 



be effeminate ; bpyifav, to make angry, bpyia^vai, bpyie?<r&cu, and bpyiafrfjaeaSaii 
succensere, to be angry ; there are very many others also, of which only those 
most in use will be mentioned here : — 

*Ay€iv (from dvdyeiv, come, avax^r\vai and avayayia&ai, signifying to be carried 
to sea, in mare provehi, but Fut. avd^ea&ai), ayeipeiv, ayvvvai, a&poi&iv, alax^veiv^ 
aviav, ctfpeiv, aXXdrreii/ {aKhayr)(roi.iai, often also aXXa^ea^ai), ap/j.6£eiv, aaxoXeiv, 
uv^dveiv, acpaviCeiv; — fiaXXeiv ; — Savavau, diairau ; — i&i£eiv, iireiyeip (f/Treix- 
frnv), eariay, eu«x 6 "' ? — wrav (F. 7)TT7}&ri<rouai and rarer r\TT-if\c>Qp.ai ) ; — idpvw, 
— KiveTv, KXiveiv, noipJav, KOjxi^eiv (KO/j-io^rrjuaL, to travel, but KOjxicraa&ai, sibi recu- 
perare, to recover for one's self), npivtiv, KvXivdeiv; — Xtyeiv, Xeiireiv, Xveiv, 
Xviztiv; — {ie&v<rKeLv, yayvvvai, fj.L/j,vf](rKeip ; — bpeyeiv (dpex&rjvcu, and rarer 
dpel-a<r&cu), dpjxav, oxeiV ; — ireifreiv (3Tut. ireicro/iai, I will obey, but TreKT^rjao/nai, / 
will be persuaded), irnyvvvai, irXavav, ttX4k€lv, ttXt]tt£lv, TroXireveip (also iroXiTev- 
craaSrai), iroyeveLv ; — p-qyvvvai, puvvvvca; — areteiv, cry-rreiv (crairrivcu, craTr-fiffea&cu), 
aKe8auvvj/ai, enzav, crtreipav, aireipeiv, (TTeXXeiv {(TraXrjvai, araX^cree^ai), arpecpeiu 
(ffTpcKpyvcu, arpacprjcrecrSfai), crcpaXXeiv (crcpaXrjvcu, acpaXricrea&ai, seldom <r</>aAe?cr- 
Srai), (T&£siv (o-co&TJvca, to save one's self, but crwowd-at, to save for one's self sibi 
servare) ; — Tapdrrsiv, Tepireiv, Tpeireiv (rpaTrrjj/at,, toturn one's self to turn, rpeij/aa' 
&cu, to put to flight), rpecpeiv; — cpaiveiv (cpavrjvai, <pavf)(rea8raL and (pavelcrSai, to 
appear, but (pav&rjvai, to be shown), (pavrd&iv ((pavraa^ricreo^raL) , <p4peiu (ivex^rj- 
vcu, ofoea&ai and ivex&fto'ecr&cu, rarer ola^rqaojxai), (p&eipeiv ((p&aprivai, <p&(zpr}<rea- 
&at [(p&epeii(r&ai, Ion. and poet.j, (pofielv (<poP-f)<re(r&ai and (j>o{i7)&7)(re(r&cu) ; — \pev- 
5eii/ (\pevafrrjvai, ipeva&'f}cro/j.ai, to deceive one's self, be deceived, but ^evaea^ai, ij/eu- 
aaa&ai, to lie) ; — x 6 "^ 



$ 198. Sit miliary 
a 

"AiSco (4'So>), to sing, 
olkovw, to hear, 
aXaXafa, to shout, 
hp-aprdvoi, to miss, 
diravrdw, to meet, 
airoXaixa, to enjoy, 
apirdfa, to seize, 
fia8i£a), to go, 
fiaiva), to go, 
Bioa, to live, 
Bxiirw, to see, 
Boda, to cry out, 
yeXaw, to laugh, 
ynpda-Kca, to grow old, 
yiyvwaKU, to know 
BaKUca, to bite, 
Zap&dvoo, to sleep, 
delo-cu, to fear, 
diairdw, to live, 
8i8pd(TKU), to run away, 
Siuku), to pursue, 
iyKwpudfa, to priise, 



of the Active Ve 
Middle Future, 

el/j.1, to be, 
iiraivea, to praise, 
iofrtoo, to eat, 
&avfj.dfa, to wonder, 
&e&>, to run, 

Srnpdw, frripevoo, to hunt, 
Siyydvw, to touch, 
&j/7)<tkq), to die, 
SpaxTKco, to leap, 
Ka/xvcx), to labor, 
nXalo), to weep, 
kXzittci}, to steal, 
Ktofxdfa, to revel, 
Xayxduu, to obtain, 
XaixBdvu, to take, 
Xixv-da, to lick, 
pLav&dvGo, to learn, 
v4w, to swim, 
veva>, to nod, 
oV$a, to know, 
olp.a>Coo, to lament, 
oAeA.v£», to howl, 



rbs most in use ivith 
§ 154, 1. 

oixvvjxi, to swear, 

opdw, to see, 

ovpew, nrinam redere, 

Tral(w, to sport, 

7ra<rx&>, to suffer 

7T7j5oco, to leap, 

■nivoo, to drink, 

iriitTw, to fall, 

irXew, to sail, 

ro/ecv, to blow (but tv/a 

irveiffco), 
Trviya, to strangle, 
Tro&4a>, to desire, 
irposKvviia, to reverence, 
pew, to flow, 
po<peo>>, to gulp down, 
G-iydco, to be silent, 
o-ico7roco, to be silent, 
<TK(&irT(ti, to mock, 
o-irovdd(ca, to be zealous, 
avp'iTTO), to whistle, etc., 
riKTco, to produce, 



6 199.] PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 235 

rpe'xw, to run, tco&c^oj, to rail at, X ( * a ' Ku i to 9 a P e > 

rpdya, to gnaw, <pevyw, tojlee, X*£ a i t° ease one's self, 

Tvyxdvw, to obtain, cp&dva, to come before, x«pew, to contain. 

Remark. Some have both the Active and Middle form for the Future ; the 
Middle, however, is preferred, e. g. adco {acrco non-Attic), apird(c», fSi6co, yypd- 
{<tk)u), f$XeiT<i), hidjKW, iyKca/Ludfa, iiraiveca, &av/J.dfa, k\4ttt(>>, pacpew, (TK&tttoo. 
tiktu, x co P* co - — toypdw, frripeva, Ko\d(co are also used with the middle form 
The following compounds of x<"P««> have an Active and Middle form in the 
Fut. : aTro-, <ruy- irposxoopea, but aua- and irpoxvpeo have only the Active form. 



CHAPTER VII. 

§ 199. Prepositions and Conjunctions . 

Besides the Substantive, Adjective, Pronoun, Numeral, 
Adverb, and Verb, there are also the two following parts of 
speech, viz. Prepositions and Conjunctions. On the forms of 
these nothing need be said ; hence these parts of speech are 
treated in the Syntax, so far as it is necessary. 



PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS 

PARTICULARLY OF THE EPIC DIALECT. 



A. ORTHOGRAPHY. 

$ 200. Digamma, or Labial Breathing F. 

1. The Greek language had originally, in addition to the Spiritus Asper (' ) 
and the Lingual Breathing <r, a Labial Breathing, 1 the sound of which corre- 
sponds nearly to the Eng.y^ or the Latin v. In accordance with its form (F), 
which is like one Gamma standing upon another, it is named Digamma (double 
Gamma) ; and as the iEolians retained it longer than the other Grecian tribes, 
it is called the JEolic Digamma. It has the sixth place in the alphabet, namely, 
between e and £ and is named Bav. Comp. §§ 26, 1 and 25, 2. 

2. This character disappeared very early ; but its sound was in some cases 
changed, in some of the dialects, into the smooth Labial /3, c. g. fita, vis, Fis 
(later is) ; in other instances, it was softened into the vowel v, and, after other 
vowels, coalesced with these, and formed the diphthongs av, ev, yv, ov, av, e. g. 
pads (vdFs), navis, x^ a {x*F<*) Mo\., fiovs (fi6Fs), bovs, bos, Gen. bovis; in 
others still, it was changed into a mere gentle breathing, which at the beginning 
of a word is denoted by the Spiritus Lenis, but in the middle of a word and 
before p is not indicated, e. g. Fis, vis, Is ; oFis, ovis, 6'is ; etAew, volvo ; Fpodov, 
p6Bop, etc. ; it was also changed, in the beginning of some words, into a sharp 
breathing, which is denoted by th*» Spiritus Asper, e. g. eairepos, vesperus; eyvvfii, 
vestio. 

3. In the Homeric poems, no character denoting the breathing F any longer 
exists ; but it is very clear that, in the time of Homer, many words were 
sounded with the Digamma, e. g. &yvvfii, &va^, avaaaa, avddua, Hap, ver, the 

1 " The Vau, or Digamma, an important agent in early Greek orthography, 
less, however, a principal than a subsidiary letter, retained much of its previous 
character of vowel-consonant, or, in the technical language of the Oriental 
schools, of quiescible letter. It was chiefly used as a liquid guttural, or aspirate, 
somewhat akin to our English wh, to impart emphasis to the initial vowel of 
words, and possessed the power, with certain limitations, of creating metrical po- 
sition. But these vague and indefinite properties, were not such as to entitle it to 
a regular or habitual place in the written texts of the popular Epic poems. It 
was retained by the Boeotian states in monumental inscriptions till the 145 
Olympiad." — Mure's Hist, of the Language and Literature of Greece, Vol. i, p. 85 ; 
vol. iii, p. 513. 



238 DIALECTS. [$ 201 

forms of 'EI AH, video; eWa, efcocri, viginti ; et/xa, vestis ; elireiu (comp. vocare) t 
<EKr\\os, euj/vfxiyVestio ; eos and os> suus ; ov, sui ; of, sibi ; eairepos, vesperus ; oIkos, 
vicus ; olvos, vinum, etc. ; this is obvious from the following facts : (a) words that 
have the Digamma cause no Hiatus, e. g. irpb e&ev (= irpb F&ev); — (b) hence 
also a vowel capable of Elision, when placed before a digammated word, cannot 
be elided, e. g. AiVev 8e 4 (= Se Fe), curb eo (= airb Fio) ; — (c) the paragogic v 
(§ 15) is wanting before words which have the Digamma, e. g. Sale ot (= Sate 
Foi) ; — (d) ov instead of ovk or oi>x, is found before the Digamma, e. g. eVel 
o& e&ev iiTTi xepetW (= ov F&ev) ; — (e) in compounds, neither Elision 
nor Crasis occurs, e. g. Siaenre/xev (= StaFenre/xej'), aayfjs ( = aFayrjs) ; — (f ) a 
digammated word with a preceding consonant, makes a vowel long by position, 
e. g. yap £&ev (where the p and the Digamma belonging to %&sv make a long 
by position) ; — (g) long vowels are not shortened before words that have the 
Digamma, e. g. /caAAef'Te o~Ti\f}wv teal el/xao-i (= icai Fei/xaari), II. ?, 392. 



§ 201. Interchange of Vowels. 

Preliminary Remark. The dialectic peculiarities in the change of vow- 
els, as well as of consonants, never extend to all the words of a dialect, but are 
uniformly limited to certain words and forms. 

1. The three vowels, e, 0, a, called (§ 140, 2 and 4) variable vowels (rpecpw, 
rtTpocpa, irpdcprju) undergo various changes in the dialects : — 

a is used instead of e (Ion.), e. g. Tpdwcc, rdfivaj, /j.4yc&os instead of rpeirco, 
rifivca, fieye&os ; so also Doric Tpdcpeo, o~Kiap6s, "Kprayns instead of Tpefyw, 
VKiepos, "ApTz/xis ; and in several particles, e. g. 3«a, roVa, irona. instead of 
cJt€, t6ts, Tr6re. 

e instead of a in the Ionic dialect, when followed by a Liquid, e. g. TeVtrepes, 
epo-rjv, v^Xos, fiip&pov (Ion.) instead of recro-apes, four, &p<rriv, a male, va\os, 
glass, fidpadpov, gulf; also in many verbs in -ow, e. g. (ponea, bpi<a (Ion.) 
instead of (poirdco, bpdw. 

e instead of (Doric), e. g. ejSSe^/coi/Ta instead of kf&ophKovTa. 

a instead of (Ion.), in appa>de7v instead of bppcodeiv. 

2. The following cases are to be noted in addition : — 

The long a is a special peculiarity of the Doric dialect, and causes, in par- 
ticular, the so-called Plateiasm (i. e. the broad pronunciation) of the Dorians, 
e. g. o/xepa, Kairos, advs, Aa/xdrrip. The older and the later Ionic have softened 
this grave d into 77. The Attic uses both the Doric a and the softened 77, (§ 16, 
7). Comp. Dor. a/xepa, Ion. rifxepa, Att. rifxepa (with the Ion. 77 and Doric a) ; Ion. 
cro<piri, Dor. and Att. <ro<pia] Ion. S-cfy?j£, Dor. and Att. &<*>pa£. — So, also, in 
the diphthong av, among the Ionic writers a is changed into 77: v-qvs, ypi)vs y 
instead of vavs, ypavs; likewise in the diphthong at in the Dat. PI. of the first 
Dec, ris and 770-1 (Ion.) instead of ais and ai<n. — Still, in certain wn-rts, the 
Dorians retain the 77, as the Ionians do the d. 

77 instead of a ( JEolic and Doric), e. g. <rapv(\ov, t?ivos, btfa, so the Infinitive, 
e. g. Aafiriv, KaKr\u, instead of o~T)p.tiov, neivos, b£e?a, A.a/Jetj', Ka\siv. 

cu instead of et (Doric), e. g. <p&alpco instead of Q&eipca. 



$$ 202, 203.] CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 239 

v often instead of o (iEolic), e. g. avcp6s, ovvfia instead of aocp6s, ovofia, so in 
Homer ayvpis instead of ayopd ; and in the Common language, eucoj/v/xos, -kov^ 
yvpis, etc. 

w instead of ov before a Liquid and c, and at the end of a word in the termi- 
nations of the second Dec, and in the stem of several words ; — oi instead of 
ov before the breathing cr in the third Pers. PL ohtl(v) instead of ovan(u), and in 
the participle ending -oicra instead of -ovcra, and in Mo?o~a and 'Ape&oiaa instead 
of Movaa, and 'Ape&ovaa ; the above use of o> instead of ov is Dor., yet not in 
Pindar; the use of oi instead of. ov is iEolic and Pindaric, e. g. 

Ta> icpdfSa) instead of rod icpyfiov, Sw (also Ion. and Pindar.) instead of ovv, 
SaXos instead of SovXos, wpav6s instead of ovpav6s, fia>s instead of $ovs ; — rvir- 
toio-i[v) instead of tvittovo~i(v), rvirroicra instead of rvTrrovcra, <pi\4oio~i(u) instead 
of <pi\ov<nv, %x ol<Ta instead of exovcd. 

Some other instances will be considered beloAV, in treating of the Declensions 
and Conjugations. 

§ 202. Interchange of Consonants. 

The change of consonants in the different dialects is according to the two 
following laws : — 

Coordinate consonants (§ 5, Rem. 4) interchange with each other; and cog- 
nate consonants (§ 5, Rem. 1) interchange with each other. 



§ 203. I. Interchange of coordinate Consonants. 

A. The Mutes : (a) The smooth Mutes 7r and k. The interrogative and 
indefinite pronouns, irws, tt6t€, tto7os, oiroTos, etc., are in Ion. kus, k6ts, etc. 

K instead of t : ir6re t vore, tre, Tore, dirore, aAAore, are in Dor. irS/ia, itok<L, 
'6kcl : t6k<x, ottSku (Poet, biroiaca), &AAo/ca ; so <$Ka (shortened from S/co/ca) instead 
of c 6rav. On the contrary, r instead of k : rrji/os Dor. instead of kg?i>os, £k€?j/os. 

ir instead of r (JEol. and Dor.), e. g. ire/nre instead of vivre. 

(b) The Medials and y, e. g. /3At7X wj/ (Att.), penny-royal, is in Ion. y\-r)x^v, 
fiXecpapov, eye-lash, is <y\£<papov. 

5 instead of 7 (Dor.), e.g. 8a instead of 77?; hence Atj^tjttjp instead of 
rTi/xJiTTip. 
5 instead of £ (Dor.), o8eA<fe instead of 6&e\6s. 

(c) The Aspirates & and cp, e. g. frrjp, beast, &AaV, &\lpeiy, ov&ap, udder, are 
in Dor. <pi)p, <p\av, (pxlfieiv, ov<pap (uber) ; <p-fip and <p\ifSeiv also in Homer. 

X instead of &: ftfyta is in Dor. Ixft-a, and opvi&os, etc. (from opyis) is opvixos, 
etc. 

B. The Liquids : (a) The Liquids interchange with one another: v instead 
of A before 3- and t, often in the Dor. dialect, e.g. fy&ov, $4vtuttos (Dor.) 
instead of fjT&ov, fiehrio-Tos; also (Ion. and Att.) irAevfiuu, pulmo, instead of 
TTvevfxcav, xlrpov instead of virpov. 

p is rarely used instead of A, e. g. npifravos, oven, Att., instead of K\i$avos. 



240 



DIALECTS. [§ 204. 



(b) The Liquid p and the breathing a in the later and often in the middle 
Attic : pp instead of the Ion. and old Attic pa; e. g. dpa-t]v and &ppw> a male ; 
Kopcrr) and Kopprj, back; but pp remains where the augment is used, and in com- 
position. 

§204. II. Interchange of cognate Consonants. 

(a) The Palatals y and k, e. g. Kvacpevs, fuller, is preferred by the Att. writers 
to the other form, yvcvpetis. 

k and % in SeKop.at (Ion.) instead of Se'xo^at. 

(b) The Linguals 3- and t, e. g. avns (Ion. and Epic) instead of av&is, again. 

Remark. In some words a change of the aspiration, from one syllable to 
the other, occurs, e.g. Ki£r<i>v (Ion.) instead of x iT( *> v -> wbavTa, hie, ev&evTev, hinc, 
(Ion.), instead of evrdv&a, evrev^ev; Kv&pr) (Ion.) instead of x^ T ? a -> P ot - 

cr and t, e. g. Uoreidau, eirerov, elKari, tv, t4 (Dor.) instead of Iloa-eidcav, ene- 
cov, etKO(ri, pit, are. The Attic forms tcvtXov, beet; Tr/Xia, sieve (from arjSrw), 
rvpfir) (from crvpa), turba ; rrip.epoy, to-day, and Tyres, this year (the two last only 
in the comedians, but in tragedians and in other Attic writers cr}p.epov, arjres), 
are in the Ion. and Common language arevrXou, o-rjXia, avpfir). 

co- and tt. Instead of a-a; employed in the older and the later Ionic, in old 
Attic and in most other dialects, — the new and often also the middle Attic 
in most words uses tt, e. g. Ta<rcr&>, yXuao-a ; but Att. tcittoj, yXwrra. (But 
when a-a- results from composition, it remains unchanged.) Yet the Ionic 
forms prevail, not only in the older Attic Writers, but are also found in other 
authors, some words always having ara; e. g. irda-ffca, to scatter; irT-fiaro-co, to 
crouch; fivaffos, a deep; irTio-acc, to husk; TrTvaacc, to fold; fipdaaoi, to shake; 
TTTwo-o-a), to cower; epeo-aw (epeTTco is rejected), etc. 

o- and v in the Dor. verb-ending -p.es, e. g. rvTrro/xes (instead of the common 
form TVTTTop.ev, see § 220, 6) ; also cues Dor. instead of alev. 

a8 instead of ( ( iEol., so also in Theoc.) but only in the middle of words, e. g. 
fxeXicrderai, p.eadwu instead of p-eXi^erai, fie£a)V or [xeifav, not at the beginning of 
words, nor if 3- precedes, or <r follows, e. g. p.ox&i-C OVTl i eirKp&vCoio-a. 

£and tt, Gvp'iTTeiv, app.6TTeiv (Att.) instead of o~vpi£eiv, appo^eiv. 
Here belong : — 

£ and <r and a-cr, e. g. £w (Epic and old Attic) instead of avv ; 8i£6s and rpi£6s 
(Ion.) instead of Sia-aos, rpia-aSs ; icXdj- Dor. instead of kXous (KXeTs) ; even in the 
Fut. and Aorists, the Dorians, and also Homer, in several verbs use | instead 
of a; see § 223, 5. 

(c) The Labials </> and tt, — the first Att., the last Ion., — e. g. aacpdpayos Att., 
aairdpayos Ion. So JEol. and Dor. tt, instead of <p, e. g. ap,iri (JEol.) instead of 
ap<pt ; hence in the Common language, ap.irexew, etc. 

p. and 7r, e. g. 7re8a (JEol. and Dor.) instead of p.erd. 

(d) The double consonants £ and ^, and the two single consonants of which 
they are formed, though transposed, in the JEol. dialect, e. g. <tk£vos, aird\is 
instead of ^ei/os, tyaXis, yet only at the beginning of a word. So a<p and ij>, 
e. g. ij/e Dor. instead of a-<pe. 



$ 205.J CONTRACTION AND DIAERESIS. 241 

Change op the Vowels. 

$205. Contraction. — Diaeresis. 

1. In the Dialects, the following contractions, which differ from those men 
tioned in § 9, are to he noted : eo and eov, sometimes also oo and oe arc con 
tracted into eu in Dor. and Ion. — not, as commonly, into ov; so ao, aov, and 
oov (Ion.) are contracted into eu — not, as usual, into a and ov, e. g. 0tA.eC from 
<pi\eov = </>tAoC ; 7rAeCpes from v\4oves ; 7rA7ipeCf tcs from irXrjpSovTes = ivX-qpovv 
res ; iducalev from idtKaloe = idiKalov ; elpdtrevv from elpwraov == eipdorccv ; *ye- 
AeCiro from •yeAc^ouo'a = *yeAci)o"a; 5tKateCo-t from StKatooCcrt = diKaiovcri. But 
commonly the Dorians contracted oe into w (instead of ov), e. g. rvpoevra — 
rup&yra instead of rvpovura, piyoov instead of piyovv. 

2. Ao, aov, and aco are contracted in the Doric dialect into d (instead of w), 
namely, in verbs in -da, in genitives in -ao and -dW, in substantives in -dW, 
Gen. -dovos, and in proper names in -Aaoy, e. g. (pvcraures, x«^-«o"'> yeXav from 
(pvo'dovTes, %a\ctouo"t, yeXdow] — ray tcopuv from -rdW Kopdcov = twv Kopwv; — 
noo"et§a>, -avos, Att. Yloare&tov, -wvos; — Me^eAds, 'ApKeatXds, Gen. -a, Dat. -ot. 

3. Ae and aei are contracted in the Dor. (but not in Pindar) into 77 and y 
instead of d and a, in verbs, e. g. i<poir7], (poirfis instead of i(poira, (ponas. See 
§222,111. (1). 

4. The Attic dialect is the opposite of the other dialects, particularly of the 
later Ionic ; since, while the other dialects often avoid contraction, and the later 
Ionic commonly, the Attic almost always admits it. The tendency of the later 
Ionic towards uncontracted syllables is so great, that it even resolves the long 
sounds (which are never resolved in the other dialects) into their simple ele- 
ments, e. g. (piXeeai instead of <pi\rj, which had been contracted from <pix4rj. 
Epic poetry often uses, indiscriminately, contracted and uncontracted forms, 
according to the necessity of the verse, e. g. de'/cwy and olkwu. 

5. On the contrary, it is a special peculiarity of the Ionic dialect, that while 
it delights to avoid contractions, it still, in particular cases, admits them, where 
the Attic dialect does not, e. g. Ip6s (t), Ipevs, lpev<ra<r&ai Ion., instead of lepos, 
etc., and especially the contraction of 077 into «, particularly in the verbs fioav 
and vouv, e. g. eficaora, zvwera {ayvdjcraCKev Horn, from ayvoiu), ivvhooKa instead 
of ifi6r)o~a, kv6f\o~a, £vvev6t)Ka ; so oyddoKoura in Homer, instead of oydo^Kovra. 

6. The opposite of contraction is Diaeresis (dialpeo-is), the separation of a 
diphthong into its vowels. Diaeresis is specially used in the JEol. dialect. 
The use of it in Homer, also, is not rare ; most frequently, in such words as 
separate the two vowels by means of the Digamma, namely, at in irais ; av in 
&vTH'f}, breath (from dF^fii) ; dvaraXios, dirty; e't in itffica, to make like, et'/rro, 
%'Cktov, Ukt^v] ev very often in the adverb iv ( = e3, well), e. g. iv tcpivas, ivtcrl- 
pevos ; when y., v, p, or <r follows iv in compounds then they are doubled, e. g. 
ivfifieXlrjs, ivvvt\ros, i'vppoos, ivo-ffeX/jLos ; o'i in fits (oFis, ovis), olofiai (comp. opi- 
nor), diffrSs, w'i£a, u>'i^au (from oKyvv/nt). 

21 



242 DIALECTS. [§ 206. 

$ 206. Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Paragogic, 
Hiatus. 

1. In particular instances the Dialects differ from the laws of Crasis stated in 
§§ 10 and 11 ; namely, in the Ionic dialect and in Pindar and Theoc, the o of 
the Article coalesces with d and forms o>, and with at and forms q>, e. g. rb &yaX- 
ua = r&yaXjia ; so rwX7)&es, tcd'jto, wvr)p, uvdpes, (avSptoiroi, cp7r6Xot, from to dA7j- 
bes, rb avr6, 6 arf)p, ol &vdpes, ol 'av&posTrot, ol anr6\oi. In Herodot. occur, tiptaros, 
avr6s, 3>XXot, with the smooth insteao. of the rough breathing (from 6 apurroi, 
6 avr6s, ol aXXot) ; Homer uses Crasis seldom, namely, only in &pto~ros, wvr6s, 
raXXa, oup.6s (instead of 6 ip.6s), rovueKa, ovveita (instead of ou eveita) ; Kaydo is 
doubtful. 

2. Instances of Crasis in Doric are : r&Xyeos, r&vrpa> instead of rod &Xyeos, 
rep cturpa ; so o and e = go, at and e — 77, e. g. 6 eXa<pos = &Xacpos, 6 e£ = «£, «al 
e/e = K7j/c> /cal e?7re = K??7re, /cat eaV or ^V = /ct>V, which last is also Ion. 

3. Ionic writers admit the common Crasis in ov, in the Masc. and Neut. oi 
the Art. and in erepos, e. g. ovrepos, rovrepov. 

4. The use of Synizesis (§ 12) is very frequent in the Homeric poems: — 

(a) In the middle of words, it is oftenest found in the following combination of 
vowels (the vowels over which the line is placed being pronounced as one 
syllable, whether consisting of two or more vowels) : ea, ea, eat, eas; so, 
eot, eou; eoo, eco; e. g. crrri&ea, r)p.eas, &eot, xpucreois, re&veSire ; much rarer 
in ae, ta, tat, itj, trj, to, e. g. ae&Xevoov, irthtas, 7r6Xtos; oo only in 
Sydoov) vot only in daKpuotat] r)t in StjIoio, drjiwv, drjioia., ijta; 

(b) Between two words in the following combination of vowels : 77 a, 77 e, 17 77, 
7) et, 77 ov, ri 01] et ov; 00 a, <a ov ; the first word is cither tf, 7), 8f), p-f), and 
eW, or a word with the inflection-endings, 77, w, e. g. 7), ov, $}) a<pvet6raros, 
u)) aXXot, elXairivr) 7}e ydp.os, aa/Bearcc ou5' vlov. 

5. Elision (§§ 13 and 14) is found very often in Homer, particularly as fol- 
lows : — 

(a) The a is elided in the PI. Neut. and the Ace. Sing, of the third Dec, 
rarely in the Aor. ending -era, e. g. aXerf ipte Od. ji, 200; commonly in 
the particle &pa: 

(b) The € in ifie, p.e, <re, etc. ; in the Voc. of the second Dec, in the Dual of 
the third Dec, in endings of the verb, and in particles, e. g. Se, re, rore, 
etc (but never in »5e). 

(c) The t in the Dat. PI. of the third Dec. ; much rarer in the Dat. Sing., 
and only when it could not be mistaken for the Ace, c g. x°"P 6 °*e r$ 
Zpv& 'OSvaevs, II. k, 277 ; in 'dptfit, v/xptt, and o-<pi ; in adverbs of place in 
-3-t, except those derived from substantives ; in eUoo-t ; finally, in all end- 
ings of the verb ; 

(d) The in euro', vir6 (but never in irpo), in Svo, in the Neut. of pronoun? 
(except ro), and in all endings of the verb ; 



^ 207. j LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OF VOWELS. 243 

(e) The at in endings of the verb /xai, rai, oSrai {<rai only in rjor' 6\iyr]7reXec >, 
H. o, 245. and ot in the Nom. of the first Dec. in o£e? bdvvai, II. A, 272) ; 

(f ) The oi in fxoi, to me, and in the particle, roi. 

6. The v paragogic (§ 15) is commonly rejected in Ion. prose, e. g. irao 
e\e£a. 

7. The Hiatus (§ 8) is admitted by Homer in the following cases : — 

(a) In long vowels or diphthongs either in the Arsis of the verse, e. g. 
aj/Tt&e | w '05u I 0-77* ; or in the Thesis, in which case the long vowel or 
diphthong is considered short, e. g. oXkoi e | <rav ; 

(b) When the vowel does not admit Elision, or but rarely, e. g. iraidl fywev, 

(c) When two words are separated by a punctuation-mark, e. g. aAA 5 hva, el 
/lefxovds ye ; 

(d) In the Fern. Caesura (i. e. the caesura succeeding a short syllable) after 
the first short syllable of the third foot; — as this caesura here divides the 
line into two parts, it is opposed to the close connection which would 
arise from eliding the final vowel, e. g. 

Keivr) ] 5e rpv<pd | Xeia || a/i \ eWe-ro \ x el pl ff « I X^Vi H. 7, 376. 
tu>v ol | e£ eye | vovro \\ e\v\ /xeyd \ poici ye | ve&Aii, II. 6, 270 ; 

(e) In the metrical Diaeresis, 1 after the first and fourth foot of the verse, e. g„ 

e7X 6 ' 1 ' I 'Ido/xevrjos ayavov AevKaXidao, II. /x, 117. 

wefvpai eV 'ArpeiSri ' ' Ay ajJ.efj.voyi | ovXov 'Oveipov, II. /3, 6. Comp. £ 422 5 

(f ) Where the first word has the apostrophe, e. g. SeVfye' e&aWev ; 
fg) Sometimes in proper names ; 

(h) Words, which have the digamma occasion no Hiatus (§ 203, 3), e. g. 
oi) I 5e ovs I iraidas e \ affxev (= ovde Fovs). 

$ 207. Lengthening and Shortening of Voivels. 

1. The following vowels are lengthened : — 

A in Homer is sometimes lengthened into ai ; this occurs in aleros, ate/, 0701- 
o/xcu, instead of aer6s, etc. ; so also irapal (also Karaifiaial), in the tragedians 
dial, and analogous to these, viral, instead of irapd, did, vtt6. 

a into i\ in Homer, in riepebovrai, riyepefrovrai, i,ve/j.6eis in the Arsis, conse- 
quently on account of the metre. 

d into at before <r (iEol.) in the Ace. PI. of the first Dec. ; also in LieAats and 
rd\ais instead of fieAas, rdkds, ra?s instead of rds, Ka\a?s instead of koaCs ; in 
Pindar, in the first Aor. Act. Part., e. g. rtyais, -aica instead of -as, -cwra ; but 
always ircis. 

Av into &>i) (Ion.) in rpavpa, Sav/ia and its derivatives : rpwvfxa, ^'vfia, 
&avfx.dCw ; and in pronouns compounded with avr6s into wv, e, g. ecovrov, <rea>v- 
rov, efiewvTov instead of eavTov, etc. ; so also tcovt6 instead of ravr6. 

E into et in the Ion. writers before a Liq. in a number of words, e. g. efre** 
(also in Attic prose), Keiv6s, £e7vos, areivSs, elpwrdw. Homer lengthens e intw* 

1 Metrical Diaeresis, is Avhere a word and a foot end togethei . 



244 DIALECTS. \j 207 

ei according to the necessities of the verse, in other words, also, which in Ionic 
prose have e, e. g. etV, iireip, ire7pas, end, cppeiara (from (ppeap, a well) ; also befora 
vowels in adjectives in -eos, e. g. xpucretos j m substantives and pronouns, e. g 
crireios, 4fjie?o ; in verbs in -e«, e. g. reXelco, irveico, also in e'/ws instead of ews, 
«w^7; sometimes also in the Augment and Reduplication, e. g. elXTjXov&a, eloi- 
kvIcu, SeiSta, Set5e%aTOi. 

E into 7i (Horn, and Dor.), in the Dec. of substantives in -cJ?, e. g. fiacriXevs, 
Gen. -Tjoj, etc.; farther (also Ion.), in adjectives in -eios, e. g. PaanXrj'ios, royal; 
likewise in single woi'ds, e. g. KXif'is, KX-niSos (Ion.), etc., instead of K\ds, and 
in very many substantives in a of Dec. I., e. g. aX^xrrj'tri instead of aXrj^eia. 

H sometimes into en (iEol.), e. g. &val<TKco instead of SrvfjcrKco. 

O into oi (Ion. and Horn.) before a vowel in several words, e. g. iroirj, ttoivizis, 
Xpoii), poii], etc. ; in the Gen. of the second Dec. in Homer, e. g. &eo7o instead 
of &eov, and in cpoivios, x°P 0lTV '' v ' ir }i oBoiirSptov, ayicoivr)cri(i') , and 7]yyolr]cre(v). 

O is changed into ov (Ion. and Horn.) before a Liq. or Sigma, still only in a 
certain number of words ; and, in the Dor., before a Liq. into w, e. g. 

K.6pos Ion. Kovpos Dor. Kcopos fx6vos Ion. fiovyos 

ovofAa " ovvofia " tovo/xa "OXv/xttos : ' OvXvjxivos ; 

also in the oblique cases of 5 6pv and yovv. — But substantives, which have the 
variable vowel o, cannot be thus lengthened, e. g. irovos from tt£vo[j.cu, 56/xos from 
Be/ico. 

O into co in Homer, on account of the verse, in Aicbvvcros, K-nrcosis, rpcoxdeo, 
TrccTcLofAai (and also rpoxdeo, irordofxai). 

T into ov often (Dor.), e. g. ^ouydrrjp instead of frvydr-np. In Homer, in 
el\r}\ov&a. 

2. The Epic dialect can resolve contracted syllables, when necessary, 
namely, d into act, a into <ra : 77 into erj, en], 7777 ; co into oco, coo, coco ; particularly 
in the inflection of verbs, e. g. dpdas instead of dpys, ttpfavov instead of Kprjvov, 
opoco instead of opco, yeXcoovres instead of ysXcovres, 7]J3cococra instead of yficotra 
also cp6cos instead of cpws, light (from cpdos). and proper names in -epeov, e. g. 
ArjfAocpocov. 

3. Another mode of lengthening a vowel in the Epic dialect is by resolving 
an original Digamma or a Spiritus Asper into a vowel, e. g. etiicnXos and UktjXos 
(FeicnXos), ovpos instead of '6pos, bound; ovXos instead of oXos, rjeXios instead of 
77A10S; eicros instead of Itros ; elxitrcrco instead of ixlcrcrco (comp. volvo) rjcos instead 
of ecos. In the Ionic, and sometimes in the Epic dialect, the co v ' contracted 
from ao and oco), is resolved by e, e. g. (IkItco) i/cereco instead of ikstcw, irvXecoi 
instead of irvXticov. 

4. The following vowels are shortened : — 

Ai into & before a vowel, often in the iEol. dialect, e. g. apx&os, 'AXk&os 
instead of apxouos, ^AXkcuos ; in Homer, in erapos, erapr), eTapl(ecr&ai. 

Et into e before liquids (Ion. and in Horn.), in the forms x e P<k> X*Ph from 
Xet/j, hand, so also Att. x e P°"'> X 6 / 50 " 1 '; a l so (I° n - and Dor.) before a vowel, in 
Proparoxytones in -eios, and in Properispomena in -e?a ; in Homer, only in a 
few Fern, adjectives in -vs, e. g. 



|207. 1 LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OF VOWELS. 245 

iiriT-fjSeos, -677, -qov Ion. instead of -eios witea instead of a>Ke?a from wkvs 
reXeoSy -e'77, -eov " " -eios /3a&e?7 " fia&<-?a " fia&vs 

evperj from evpvs •'• " -e?a oa<r4f) ' ; Sc^reTa " Scktus ; 

so also in Horn. 'Epfxea instead of 'Ep/xela:, also et in Ion. is shortened into e, 
when two consonants follow which make the vowel long by position, e. g. 
air65e£is instead of aTr6Sei^is, p4(wv instead of ftdfyv, Kpecra-wv instead of Kpel<r- 
guv ; finally (Doric) in forms of the verb, e. g. aei'Ses instead of aeiSeis. 

Remark 1. In the iEol. dialect, e* before a liquid is very often shortened 
into e, and the Liq. is doubled, e. g. kt4pvo>, o~ir4ppw % wreAAa, instead of Kreiveoj 
<nre/p«, «TetA^. 

H is changed into e in Horn, in apyen, apy4ra, from apyris, -rjros, shining, and 
in the Subj. ending -ere instead of -tjtc ; also -o/xev instead of -afiev, e. g. etSeTe, 
bcapii^ofxev. 

Oi into o often in the Dor. and iEol. dialects, e. g. irow instead of ttoiu. 

Ov into o in Horn, in the compounds of irovs, e. g. a.eAA6iros, apriiros ; often 
in Theocritus in the Ace. PIT of the second Dec, e. g. t&s Avkos instead of robs 
Kvkovs ; also iEol. f36AAa instead of fiovA-f) ; so too in Horn. pSAerai, £(fAecr&e 
from fiovAouat. 

5. On the Ionic- Attic interchange of the vowels, see § 16, 5. 

6. The use of Syncope (§ 16, 8) is frequent in Homer, particularly in forms 
of the verb, as will be seen below ; he also has riirre instead of r'nroTe, yAaKTo- 
(pdyos instead of yaAaKrocpdyos. 

7. Apocope (aTTOKoivf]) is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word 
beginning with a consonant. It is employed by the Epic and Doric poets, 
sometimes also by the Ionic, and in a few single forms even by Attic prose 
writers. It occurs with the prepositions, c. g. avd, Kara, napd, rarely with air6 
and vir6, and with the (Epic) conjunction dpa. The accent is then thrown 
back; dv before /3, ir, (p, /a, is changed into d/j. (§ 19, 3), e.g. apt /3o>yUor<n, 
a/xfiaiuew, ap. ireAayos, ajj. <p6vov, ap.fi.4vw, the t in K.dr is always assimilated 
to the following consonant, except that the corresponding smooth mute stands 
before a rough mute (§ 17, 4), e. g. ko8 ovvapiv, kcltc <pdAapa, ko,k KecpaArjs, Kay 
y6vv] examples of a-n-6 and vir6 are, ainreixipei, vfSfSdAAeiv (Horn.); examples 
from Attic prose, auPdr-ns, dfifioAds, X. Cy. 4, 5, 46. 7. 5, 12, dpircoTis. 

Rem. 2. In the concurrence of three consonants, assimilation is omitted, and 
the final consonant of the preposition is rejected, e. g. nd/crave, /o&rxe&e, apva- 
<ret, instead of ndfacTave, Kd<rcrx*& e > a/j.fivd\rei. 

8. Prothesis (§ 16, 10) occurs in Homer, in a<TTepoirrj (a-repo-Tr-fi), 4&4Aa> (&eAa>), 
4kzivos (kc7vos), ipvofxaL (pvofiai) ; Homer also often resolves the i^into the vowel 
€, namely, 44 pari, eeSj/a, 4eiKOO~i, e'icros, eenrov, 44Adofxai, 4epfx4uos. 

9. Sometimes, for the sake of the metre, Homer inserts e, e. g. a.SeA(pe6s, 
K*ve6s, instead of aSeAcpos, news; so also in the Gen. PI. Fern. avr4wv, 7rpa>TeW. 
To prevent the accumulation of short syllables, he inserts in several compound 
words an 77 in place of the short vowel, e. g. TavriAey4os, 4Trr)fioAos, 4irrieTau6s 1 
oA<77j7T€A€o>, iAa(prjfi6Aos, instead of towA., iirlp., e7rteT., oAiyoir., 4Aa<pof36Aos< 

21* 



246 DIALECTS. [$203. 

An t is inserted in Homer after 01 in d/xolios instead of 'dfxoios, and in the Dual 
■ouu instead of -oiv. 

10. The later Ionic, also, sometimes inserts e before a long vowel : (a) in 
some genitives of substantives and Fern, pronouns before co, and in ovros, tcu- 
ovtos, and avros before long inflection-endings, e. g. avfipiwv, x^j/eW, e/cej^eW, 
ToureW, avTkwv, avrecp ; (b) in some forms of the verb before a long vowel, e. g. 
lareaai, ouvewfxcu, SweWrcu ; (c) some verbs in -co have forms as if from -eco, 
e. g. ]8oAAw (TVfxfiaAAeSfxevos, vTrepfiaWeeiv ; Trie^ca iriefev/xei/os (also in Horn. 
wiefevu instead of iiriefeov) ; also e^ee, eVei'xee, co^Aee, from eij/co, eVe'xco, SxpKou ; 
finally, the three following forms of the Perf. in -ee instead of -e : otx&>/ree, 
oirdoiree, eco&ee. 

§ 208. Change of Consonants. 

1. In the Ion. dialect, the rough breathing has no effect on the preceding 
smooth mute, e. g. &7r' ou, iirrj/xepos, ovk ocriws, etc. 

2. In the Horn., Ion., and Dor. dialects, a S or & "remains before fx in certain 
words and phrases (contrary to § 19, 1), e. g. od/xr] instead of 6<r[x-fi, ffifxev, opxyb- 
ij.6s, iireirL^/xey, KeKopvbaivos ; also in the Horn, dialect, the v remains before a 
(contrary to § 20, 2) in wards, avo-x&stw, irav<rvoiri instead of Tra<r<rv8ir) : 
finally % before /x (§ 19, Rem. 1) in attaxfJ-evos, acute. 

3. The Metathesis (§ 22) of p often occurs in Horn, and in other poets, e. g. 
Kpaoiri instead of napo'ia, heart, Kaprtpos and Kpdrepos, strong, KapTurros, fSdpoKrros 
(from fipadvs, slow) ; also in the second Aorists eTrpa&ov, eopa&ov, eSpcutov (from 
-irep&w, to destroy, Sap&dvw, to sleep, oipKojxai, to see) ; here belongs also ^ix^porov 
instead of rj/xparov ( = ri/xaprov, according to § 24, 2). 

4. Homer doubles a consonant (comp. § 23, Rem.) after a short vowel, 
according to the necessities of the verse in the following cases : — 

(a) The liquids and Sigma on the addition of the augment, mostly when 
there are three successive short syllables, e. g. eAAafiov, ejUjuadw, ei/veov, 
ecrcreva ; 

(b) In compounds also, the liquids and Sigma are doubled, e. g. veSAAovros 
(from vios and Aovca) ; a/x/xopos, (piAofx/xeldris ; avvecpeAos, ivupryros] jSa^up- 
poos ; eiJcrcreAjUOS' ", 

(c) In the inflection of the Dat. in -ai, and of the Fut. and Aor., e. g. yewo-ai, 
b~a>/xa<ro-i; /caAecrcra, 6/x6(rcrai, (ppd(r<ro[xai, i£elvi(r<ra; 

\Ci) In the middle of several words, e. g. '6o-aov, t6(to-ov, biriao-u), irpSo-a-uo, 
fx4o~<ros, vefxeccra, ve/XG0-<T7]&els, &v(T<Tav6eis. 
Homer doubles the mute -k in Interrogative pronouns which begin with Sir, e. g. 
37r7rcoj, etc.; — k in TreAeKKov, ireAe/c/cctco ; — t in otti, ottgo, brreu; — o in eSSeicre, 
TrepiSSeicracra, dSSee's, aodrjv. 

Remark. The doubling of p, which always takes place in the Common 
language when the augment is prefixed, and in compounds when a short vowel 
precedes, may be omitted in the Epic dialect, according to the necessities of the 
verse, e. g. epe(ov from pefa, xP vcr ^P vros ' -^ or ^ ne sam e reason, one of the 
tonsonants, which is elsewhere doubled, is omitted in the Epic dialect, though 



$ 209.] quantity. 247 

rarely, e. g. 'Oduaevs, 5 Ax*Aeus, (pdpvyos, instead of y 08v<r<revs, Ax^tevs, 
(pdpvyyos. 

5. Homer often places a consonant before a short syllable, to make it long 
by position, namely, a v in v&vv\xvos, aTraAa/xvos, ISpvv&r], afAvvv&ri, inre/j.wf]fxvKe ; 
a t after ir in trroAeixos, irroXis, inoXi&pov ; a 3- after x m x^O/waAos, SiX 1 ^? 
t^x^, rerpax&d, and after A or p in /j.aA&aKos, iyprjySp^acri ; or he places a 7 
before 8 in ipiydoviros, ey8ovirr]<re, and a ar before /* and «r in oyu/cpcfc (also Att. 
$ 24, 4), (TKeSdi/uvfj.1 (comp. kiSj'tj^j), (Tfioyepcos (comp. [xoyepoos), fffxepdaAeos. 
Here belongs also the Epic prefix of \i (= r, according to § 24, 3), before /3po- 
tos in composition, so as to strengthen the long syllable and give fulness to the 
word, e. g. dfifiporos, T€p^/ijj,fiooTos, and in aix<pa<riri instead of a<pa<riq. 



$ 209. Quantity . 

Preliminary Remark. Only a few general rules will be given here ; the 
quantity of particular words, not embraced in these rules, may be learned from 
rules previously given, or by observation. 

1. A syllable which has the vowels e or 0, followed by another vowel or a 
single consonant, is short by nature, e. g. tgkos, beds, /3ot]. 

2. A syllable which has the vowel 77 or a, or a diphthong, is long by nature; 
so all contracted and circumflexed syllables are long by nature, e. g. "fjpws, 
ovpav6s, &K0W (instead of aeKcov), eri/m (from exi/ide), trees, <t7tos, i//Cxos, vvv. 

3. A syllable which has a doubtful vowel (a, 1, v), followed by another vowel 
or a single consonant, or at the end of a word, is short by position, e. g. 'ael- 
SovTes, Saifiovtr], (pvri, p.ax'0, <pt\os, apyvpeos. 

4. A syllable which has a short or doubtful vowel followed by two consonants 
or a double consonant, is long by position ; e. g. Ik£<t&cu, l/ca-r^S??, 8l£dcr3-cu, 
*X& a ' TO s> <pvWov. 

Exceptions to No. 3. 

(a) a of nouns of the first Dec, which have the Gen. in -as, is long in all the 
Cases in which it occurs, e. g. y\^pa, <pi\ia, -as, -a, -av, etc. (Comp. § 45.) 

(b) a in the Dual of all nouns of the first Dec, is long, e. g. Nom. Sing. 
\4aivd, Dual AeasVd. 

(c) a is long in the Gen. Sing, in -ao and Gen. PI. in -dW, e. g. 'Arpei'Sdo, 
ayopdeau. 

(d) the ending -as of the first Dec. is long, both in the Nom. and Gen. Sing., 
and in the Ace PI., e. g. Nom. rafiias, Gen. ovads, Ace PL 5o'£ds. 

(e) a of masculine and feminine participles in -as is long; so also other words 
in -as where vr or v have been dropped, e. g. anovaas (aKovaavrs), a.Ko6- 
crdcrcc, IcttcLs, /3ds; yiyas {yiyavrs), fxiXas (fxeXavs). 

(f ) a in the third Pers. PI. Perf. Ind. Act., e. g. Terixpaa-i. 

(g) v is long in the Sing, of the Pres. and Impf. Ind. Act. of verbs in -vfu, 
also in the masculine and feminine Sing, of the participle ; e. g. BdKvvfit, 
iSelicvvv, deiwvs, deiKi>v<ra. — Other exceptions may be learned by obser- 
vation. 



248 DIALECTS. [$ 209 

5 In Epic poetry, a mute and a liquid (§ 27, Rem. 2) commonly make a 
syllable long by position ; the vowel is shortened, for the most part, only when 
the form cannot otherwise be suited to the verse, e. g. reix^o-lTrX7jra. 

6. The final syllable of a word in verse, is uniformly long by position: (a) 
when it ends with a consonant, and the following word begins with a conso- 
nant, e.g. kcLSi | adv Tpw | as] also (b) when the final syllable ends with a 
short vowel, but the following word begins with a double consonant, or with 
two single consonants, which are not a mute and liquid, e. g. a8fir) | T7]v, V | 
qvttco v | 7ro £vybv \ riyayzv \ avr,p, II. /c, 293. But a mute and a liquid in this 
case, always make the syllable in the Arsis long ; on the contrary, the syllable 
*n the Thesis, may be either long or short according to the necessities of the 
verse ; e. g. yA\ p.oi | 5a>p' epa \ to. irp6<pe \ pe XP V I v* 7 ! 5 'A0po | §1x775, II. 7, 64 5 
on the contrary, in the Thesis, avrap 'o \ irX-qo-iov \ iarr] \ /cet, II. 5, 329 ; but 
(ivSpa. I &vr}Tov £ \ ovra, ird | Xai 7re | -Kpca^iivov j aiay, II. it, 441. 

Rem. 2. In the names ^Ka/xaudpos, Zolkw&gs, ZeXeta, even <tk and ( do nol 
make a syllable long by position in Homer; so also ear \ end <tk4 \ irapvov, Od 
e. 237, occurs. 

7. A long vowel or a diphthong at the end of a word, in Homer, commonlj 
becomes short before a word beginning with a vowel, when it is in the Thesis, 
but it remains long when it is in the Arsis, or Avhen the following word has the 
digamma, e. g. rjfxevrj \ eV /3eV \ Srecrcrii/, II. o, 358. wes, 6 \ jj.ev Kred \ tov, 6 5' 
&p 5 I EvpvTov I ''AKTopi I covosi II. /3, 621. avrap 6 \ eyvti \ yo~ii/ £ \ v\ <ppeo~l | (pdovt) 
I a4v re (fjcriv = Ffja-Lu). But sometimes a long vowel in the Thesis is not short- 
ened before Avords which do not have the digamma, especially in the fourth foot 
of an Hexameter, e. g. rep /jlt] | jxol irari \ pas 7ro,y 6 \ fioirj | ev&eo | Ti/xfj, H. 5, 
410, and before a punctuation-mark, e. g. Keloftal, | dAA' eVa | pvi/ov, II. e, 685. 

8. A long vowel or a diphthong in the middle of a word before another 
vowel is but seldom shortened by the poets, and for the most part, in certain 
words and forms; thus, e. g. in Homer, eVetTj ("""), efxiraios ("""), ohs (""), )8e- 
/3A.7JCU ("""), and often in the Iambuses of the Attic dramatists, e. g. otos, tto7os, 
toiovtos, -rWsSe, otei (from o'lo/j-ai), iroie?Vj and always before the demonstrative 
/ in pronouns, e. g. rovrovi, avrau. 

9. In Epic poetiy, a short syllable in the Arsis is usually considered long, 
if it stands at the beginning of a word, e. g. aa-rriSos \ "anafxa \ rou irvp, II. e, 4 ; 
or at the end, in which case it is followed either by a liquid (A, /.t, j/, p), or a <r 
or 5, the sound of which is easily doubled in pronunciation, or by a word with 
the digamma, e. g. nai 7re5t | a Aa> | revvTa, II. /u. 283. frvyare \ pa f t v (= Frjv), 
II. A, 226. 

Rem. 3. A syllable in itself short, may be used as long or short in the same 
word, according as it is or is not, in the Arsis, e. g.^Apes "A | pes fiporo \ Xoiye; 
— avBpes rf i | aaariv and irXeiova \ ''iffacriv. 

10. Not unfrequently in Homer, from the mere necessities of the verse, 
a short vowel is measured as long in the Thesis, when it stands between 
two long syllables. This occurs in the middle of a word, and oftenest with 
t, e. g. Z0-& vtto I Se|r | 77, II. 1, 73. rjert irpo \ Stv/jll \ yen, II. 3, 588 ; this is rarely 
the case at the end of a word, C. g. irvKva \ pcayaXz \ rji/, Od. p, 198. tj7 8' eirl | 
iikv Too I 701 BXoov I puirls | £(TTe<bd I vwm Tl X 3^ 



2 J 0, 211.] FIRST DECLENSION. 249 



B. DIALECTIC FORMS. 

§210. Homeric Suffix </Si (<jav). 

1. In the Homeric dialect there is, besides the Case-inflections, a Suffix <pi(v), 
which properly and originally denotes the indefinite where, like the local Dat. 
(see the Syntax) ; it is also used to express other relations of the Dat., as the 
Dat. of the instrument, and with prepositions (such as in Lat. govern the Abl.), 
it expresses those relations of the Gen. which in Latin would be denoted by 
the Abl. 

2. The Suffix (pi is found with substantives of all the declensions, and is 
always annexed to the unchanged stem of the word : — 

I. Declension only in the Singular: (a) Dat. aye\rj-<pi, ayXai-qty. (in the 
herd), &vpr}(pi, before or without the door (in several ancient editions ycpi is 
incorrectly written with an Iota Subs. ri<pi) ; (b) Gen. (Lat. Abl.) airh 
vevprjcpiu laXXeiv (to shoot an arrow from the string), e| evvTJcpt &ops?v (to spring 
from bed), Kparepri<pi $i-n<pi, II. <p, 501 (with great force), &[i t)o7 <paivo[i4v7]- 
<piv, Od. 8, 407 (as soon as the morning dawned). 

H. Declension both Singular and Plural. All these forms, without respect to 
the accent of the Nom., are paroxytone (-6<piv) : (a) Dat. hanpv6<piv (with 
tears), war up araXavros ^6<piv (an adviser equal to the gods) ; — (b) Geni- 
tive (Abl.) airb or e/c ira<T<ra\6(piv (to take from the pin), e'/c &e6<piv (through 
the gods), air' daTe6<piv (from the bones). 

ILI. Declension almost exclusively in the PI. $iv is here used with not a large 
number of neuter substantives in -os (Gen. -eos), also with kotvK^wv and 
vavs, e. g. irpbs KOTvA.7]5ov6<pi(v} (with the union-vowel o), to the arms, vav- 
<pi(v) (at the ships) ; in words in -os, the ending -os must always be restored 
to its original form -es, since <pi is always annexed to the pure stem ; thus 
6x €<r< P l i i, )i °~t"' $X e<r< t >L ( t/ )i KOLT ^ opeacpi(v), airb, Sia, e/c o~Tr}&eo~<pi(v). 

§211. First Declension. 

1. (a) The Epic and Ionic writers use tj instead of the original long a (which 
the Dorians use) through all the Cases of the Sing., e. g. rt^ct, -as, -a, -iv 
(Dor.) ; o-ocpir], -rjs, -77, --nv, hvpT\, -77s, verjvlrfs, -77, -r]v (Epic and Ion.) : so Urjue- 
Xoireirjs, Tlrii/eAoirelr) , from Tl-qveXoireia, (pprjTpi], Boperjs, Boperj, Bopi-nv. 

Exceptions in Homer are d-ed, goddess, -as, -a, -av, Naixn/caa, $eia, also Ah/etas, 
Avyeids, 'Ep/xelds, and some other proper names in -as pure. The Voc. of vvpupnn 
is vv/x(pa instead of vvfxcpri, II. 7, 130. Od. 8, 743. 

(b) In substantives in -e*a and -01a, derived from adjectives in -77s and -ovs, af 
also in some other feminines, the short a in Attic is also changed into 77 in 
Ionic, e. g. aA-n^eli], avaiSeirj, evirAotr], Kviao-n instead of aX^eia, avaiHeia, 
evirXota, Kviaffa. 

(c) The JEol. and some other dialects have -a instead of -77s, as the Masc 
ending in the Nona. Sing., like the Latin. The Epic also uses this form, accord- 



250 DIALECTS [J 212 

ing to the necessities of the verse, in a great number of words, particularly in 
•to, e. g. iirir6rd, atXA"jTa, Kvavoxoura, vecpeXriyeperd, tTnrr]XdTa, iu.7]tUtol, cvpvoTra. 
The Yoc. retains the ending -& in all these words. 

2. The Gen. Sing, of masculines in -77s and -as originally ended in -do , -do 
was then contracted into -co (Dor. into -d). In Horn, both the uncontracted 
and contracted form is found; he also resolves the -co, originating from 
-ao, by means of e (comp § 207, 3) ; it is further to be remarked, that the -co 
in respect to accent is considered short (§ 29, Eem. 7) and the e is always pro- 
nounced with the Synizesis; -ea> becomes -co when a vowel or p precedes (still 
Alveieco, II. e, 534). Thus there occur in Homer, 'Ep/neias, Gen. 'Ep/ieiao and 
'Epjxsico : BoperjS, Gen. Bopeao and Bopeco ; 'ATpeiSrjS, ArpeiSdo, and ^ArpeiSeco, 
iKerao and iKereco ] ivfxfx^xico, 'Acrtco. In Homer, then, the Gen. endings of nouns 
in -as or -77s, are -ao, -co, or -ecu (not -ov). The Gen. ending -eco, becomes, in 
the Ion. writers, the usual ending, e. g. iroXiTeco, 'ArpsiSew. 

3. The Ace. Sing, and PL of masculines in -77s is commonly formed in the 
Ion. dialect like the third Dec., e. g. rbv SecnroTea, robs SzcnroTeas from Seo-Trorrjs, 
-ov, MiAridSea from MtA-ndS?^, -ov. 

4. The Gen. PI. of all the endings was originally in -dcov ; -dcov was after- 
wards contracted into -3>v (Dor. in -av). Homer uses both the uncontracted and 
contracted forms, e. g. &edW and &e<£i/, irapeidcov and irapeicov. He can also, 
as in the Gen. Sing., again resolve, by means of e, the -wv originating from 
-dW; the ending thus becomes -eW, which is commonly pronounced with 
Synizesis, e. g. irvXicov, dvpicov, ayopecov. The Gen. ending -eW becomes in the 
Ion. writers, the common form, e. g. MovcreW, rifxecov. 

5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in -aio~i(v) ; this ending is found in the Dor. 
writers, in the Att. poets, and even in the older Att. prose writers ; in the Ion. 
writers, -aio~i was changed into -riari(u) and -77s; and in the Att. and Common 
language, -aio-i was shortened in -cus. In Homer, the Dat. PL ends in -770-i, -ys, 
and -ats, yet the last is found only in beats and d/cra?s. 

6. The Ace. PL, in -ZEoL, ends in -ais (as in the second Dec. in -01s instead 
of -ovs), and in Dor. in -as (as in the second Dec. in -os instead of -ovs), e. g. 
Tats Tip.ats (-ZEol.) instead of rc\s Tifxds (but Dat. PL rijxaio-i) ; iraaas Kovoas 
(Dor.) instead of 7rdcrds novpas. 

§ 212. Second Declension. 

1. Nominative Sing. Proper names in -Xaos are changed in the Dor. dialect 
'litO -\as (Gen. d, Dat. a), e. g. MeveAds instead of Mevehaos, Ni/coAds, 'Apueai- 
Kas. 

2. Genitive Sing. Homer uses both the common form in -ov, and that in -010 ; 
jhe tragedians, also, in the lyric passages, use the ending -010. Theocritus has 
the Dor. ending -co and -010. 

3. Genitive Sing, and PL Some genitives are formed according to the 
analogy of the first Dec. (a) Herodotus has some Masc. proper names in -os 
with the ending -eco in the Gen. Sing., e. g. Bdrreco instead of Bdrrov, Kpoicrew, 
KAetyi/JpoVeco, Mefjifihidpeco, and some Masc. common nouns with the ending 



♦ 213.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



251 



-eW in the Gen. PL, e. g. Tretro-eW; (b) The ending -dwv instead of tl e Ion, 
-eW belongs to the Dor. (comp. alyav instead of alydoov from a?£, § 213, 5). 

4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect ends in -ouv instead of -oiv., 
e. g. &IXOUV instead of iopoiy (§ 207, 9). 

5. The Dat. PL originally ended in -oiai{v). This form, as well as the 
abridged form in -ois is found in Homer and in all the poets, and in Ion. prose 

6. The Ace. PL ends, in the Dor. writers (except Pindar) in -cos and in -os 
(like -os in the first Dec, § 211, 6), e. g. tois . 6/j.ws, v6y.os, so also rebs Kay6s, the 
hares ; JEol. in -ois, e. g. ivacraaXois instead of -ovs. 

7. Attic Declension. The Gen. Sing, in the Epic dialect ends in -<2o, instead 
of -w, in Tlr}veXewo (II. £, 489 ; though most MSS. have Ur}ve\4oio) from nrjve- 
Keoos, and in Uerecoo from ileVews. — In yaAas, sister-in-law, "Abas and K<2s, the 
w originating by contraction, is resolved, in the Epic dialect, by means of o; 
hence yaXScos, 'A&ocos, k6ojs, Gen. -6o). On the words yeXcos, ISpws, epais, see 
$ 213, 7. 

8. Contracted forms of the second Dec. are rare in Homer, namely, vovs only 
Od. k, 240 (elsewhere v6os), x^^dppovs, II. A, 493 (but v, 138. xei/iappoos) and 
X^appoi, II. 8, 452. also Tldv&ovs, ndV&ou, ndv&cp. Homer does not contract 
other words; in words in -eos, -eov, he either lengthens the e into et (§ 207, 1), 
or employs Synizesis, as the measure requires. 

$213. Third Declension. 

1. In the Dor. uialect the long a here also takes the place of 77, e. g. u&v, 
fxavos instead of \x-r\v, fxrjvos, etc., "EAAdy, "EAAd^es, iroi/xau instead of iroi/xrii', Gen 
-4vos, veSras, -dros instead of vg6tt)s, -tjtos. 

Alfrfip, frhp, Sijpcs, and all names of persons in -r-fjp, are exceptions to this 
Dor. usage. 

2. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, on the contrary, 77 commonly takes the place 
of the long a, as also elsewhere, e. g. &cfy>7j£, ofy£, '/p7?£ instead of 3-c6pd|, tepd£. 

3. The Dat. PL in the Epic dialect, ends, according to the necessities of the 
measure, in -<n{v), -0o~i{v), -sffi{v), and -e<r<ri{v). The ground-form is -eo~i(j/) 
and the strengthened form is -eo~cri(v). This ending is always annexed, like 
the other Case-endings, to the pure stem, e. g. Kuv-eao-i (from kvcou, Gen. kw-6s), 
veKv-e<ro~i (from v4kvs, -v-os). The ending -eo~i(v) is found in Homer only in 
tveaiu, o'teo-i, xetpecn, and avdicT-ecriv (from &Va£, avctKT-os). In Neuters, which 
have a radical <r in the Nom., the <r is omitted when it stands between two 
vowels (§ 25, 1), e. g. iire-eao-i (instead of ivec-ecai from rb cttos), Seird-eo-criv 
(from to SeTras). In stems in -av, -ev, -ov (aF, eF, oF), the v (F) must be 
omitted, according to § 25, 2 ; thus, jSJ-etrci instead of fi6F-earcri, linrr)-eo-cri 
instead of iirir^F-eaffi. The ending- (ret is annexed almost exclusively to 
stems which end in a vowel, e. g. v4kv-(T(ti from viicvs -v-6s ; but also Xpi-aai 
from Jpis (-idos) and commonly iroco-i from irovs (irod-6s). The Dat. form in 
-ao-i never admits the doubling of <r. — The ground-form -e<n is very common 
in the Dor. poets and prose-writers ; also the Ionic prose has this form fre 
quently in stems ending in -v, e. g. fi^v-eo-i. 



252 DIALECTS. [$ 213 

4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect, ends in -onu (as in the 
second Dec, § 212, 4), e. g. irodcniv, ^iprivouv. 

5. The Gen. PL in the Ion. dialect often ends in -4av, e. g xw^i avdpda* 
(§ 207, 10). Theocritus has rav alyav (instead of rcou alywy) from t\ cu£, a goat 
after the analogy of the first Dec. 

6. The Epic dialect sometimes forms the Ace. Sing, of words in -vs (stem v) 
in a instead of v, e. g. evpea irovrov, Lx&va, via from vows. 

7. The words y4\oos, laughter; Idpws, sweat ; epws, love, which properly belong 
to the third Dec, in Homer folloAv the Attic second Dec. in some of the Cases, 
e. g. ISpw, IBptS instead of IZpooTa and idpam; yi\u and y4\wv, y4\a>, instead of 
yeXcora and yeXcori, %pa> instead of epcori. 

8. Words in -is, 1 Gen. -iSos. The Horn., Ion., and Dor. dialects often 
inflect these substantives, particularly proper names, in -ios, e. g. /xrjvios, Horn., 
Qe/xios, Herod., Qenos, Dat. Qerl, Horn. Those ending in -is, -idos, in the Epic 
dialect have the Dat. only in -i instead of -Si. Substantives in -77'f's, -rjidos, 
ai-e sometimes contracted in the inflection, by the poets, e. g. iraprjis, Trapjjdos 
(instead of iraprj'iSos), N^prj'/'s', NrjpfjSes. See § 54 (c). 

9. Tbe Neut. ovs, aros, ear, is in Dor. 3>s, aros, etc, and in Horn, ovas, Gen 
ovcltos, PI. ovaTa ; tbe Neuters, areap,fat; ov&ap, udder, and irelpap, end, have 
-aTos in the Gen., namely, arearos, ov&ara, ireipara, ireipa.cn. In the words 
repas, Kepas, upeas, the Epic writers reject t, e. g. repaa, -doiv, -deaai(u) ; Kepq 
Dat.; PI. Kepa, xepdoov, -at(T(Ti(v), and -ao-i(v) ; PL Kpea, Kpedcov, Kpeuiu, and Kpeiajv, 
Kpeaai(i>). Among the Ionic writers these words, like fiperas, etc. (§61, Rem. 
1), often change the a into e, e. g. K€psos, Kepea, /cepeW, to. repsa, Kpeecrcn(v). 
See § 54 (c). 

10. In the words irarrip, \xt\ti)p, etc., Homer either retains or rejects the e 
through all the Cases, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. avepos and 
auSpos, avipi and avSpi, etc., but only apdpcoi/, avdpdat, and -ecrai] yaarrip, ya<r- 
repos, -epi, and yaarpos, yatrrpi, ya<TT€pa,ya<TTepes; A7),ur]Tr)p, -r)Tspos, and -Tjrpos, 
ArjuriTepa] Svydrrip, -ripos, and -rp6s, etc., SvyaT4pea~o~i{v), but ^vyarpwv ; fJ-WVP 
and Trarrip, -repos, and -rp6s, etc See § 55, 2. 

11. In Homer, the word Ix^p, blood of the gods, has in the Ace «x<£ instead of 
j'x%)a, and kvkccov, 6, mixed drink, has in the Ace kvkcco or kvxelu>. See § 56, 
Pvcm. 1. 

12. In -avs, -evs, -ovs. Of ypavs, there are found in Homer only the Nom 
yprjvs and yp-qvs, Dat. yprfi and the Voc yp-qv and yp-qv. In the Ion. dialect, 
also, the long a is changed to 77 ; thus, Gen. yprjos, PL yprjes ; this also appears 
in vavs, navis, see the Anomalies. — The word &ovs is regularly declined in 
Her., hence Nom. PL p6es, Ace. fiovs ; in the Ace PL Homer uses both $6as 
and fiovs. On the Epic Dat. fi6e<r(TL, see No. 3. In Doric, the Nom. is fiws, 
Ace fiSiv, Ace PL fiws. This form of the Ace Sing., occurs also in the II. 77, 
238, in the sense of bull's hide, a shield made of bull's hide. See § 57. 

1 The student may consult the first part of the Grammar, where similar 
words are declined; references to the particular section will be given at the end 
of the paragraphs here 



^ 213. J THIRD DECLENSION. 253 

13. In common nouns in -evs, and in the proper name 'AxtAAeus, rj is used in 
the Epic dialect, instead of e, in all the forms which omit v (F) of the stem, 
this is done to compensate by the length of the vowel for the omitted v (F) ; 
thus, Qaaihevs, Voc. -eO; Dat. PI. -even (except ap«rri\eLTcn{v) from apicTTevs), but 
£a<nA.7}OS, -i,i, -vjd, -yes, -r}cov, -rids. Yet the long a in the Ace. -ea, -eas of the 
Attic dialect, again becomes short. Among the proper names, the following 
are to be specially noted : 'OSvo-crevs, Gen. 'OSvo-crrjos or 'Odva-rjos and 'OSvcrcreos, 
also 'OSucreCs (Od. co, 398), Dat. 'OSuarji and 'Odvae?, Ace. 'Odvcraria and 'OSvcr- 
oe'a, also 'Odvarj (Od. t, 136) ; IbjAeus, IItjAtjos and nrjAe'os, II?jA^t and I^Ae'l', 
nrjA.T?o; the others, as 'Arpevs, Tvdevs, generally retain the -e and contract -eos 
in the Gen. by Synizesis, and sometimes -ea in the Ace, into -rj ; thus, Tudeos, 
-ei", -ea, and -7). — In the Ion. of Herodotus, the inflection with 77 in common 
nouns is very doubtful ; in proper names, the e is regular, e. g. Tlepaios, Acopiees, 
Qcoaecov, AloKeas. 

14. In -77 s and -es, Gen. -eoj. In Homer, the Gen. Sing, remains uncon- 
tracted. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, both the uncontracted form -ees, and 
the contracted form -eis is used for the Nom. PI. The Gen. PI. remains uncon- 
tracted (except when a vowel precedes the ending -ecov, e. g. £axpt]cov from 
(axpyew) ; so also the Ace. PL ending -eas. "Aprjs has in Homer "Aprjos and 
"Apeos,"Ap7)i or *Apr),*Apei,"Ap7i and *Apr)v, II. e, 909, ? Apes and "Apes (§ 209, 
Rem. 3). See § 59. 

15. In proper names in -kXtjs, the Epic dialect contracts ee into 77, e.g. 
'KpaK\4T]s, -K\r)os (instead of /cAe'eos), -Tji", -77a, Voc 'Hpa/cAeis; but in adjectives 
in -erjs it varies between -ei and 77, e. g. ayaK\er]s, Gen. o^cik-Atjos, but e'i)/cAe?as 
( Acc. PI.) from im\er)s, ivppe-fjs, Gen. ivppelos. The Ion. and Dor. writers, and 
sometimes the poets for the sake of the verse, reject an e in these words, e. g. 
TlepiicXeos, -ei, etc.; so also in Homer, 8vsK\ea, U. /3, 115, and virepSea, II. p, 330. 

16. In (a) -cos, Gen. -coos. In Homer, the contracted forms, tfpea Dat., and 
Mtvco Acc. occur. — (b) -cos and -co, Gen. -<fos. Words of this kind even in the 
Epic and Ion. writers, as well as in the Attic, always have the contracted form, 
except xpds an d its compounds, e. g. XP 00 ' S > XP '^ XP^ a - — The Ion. dialect fre- 
quently forms the Acc. Sing, in -ovv instead of -co, e. g. 'Ic£, 'low, tjcos, r\ovv. — 
The iEol. Gen. Sing, ends in -cos, e. g. aXZcos, ^dircpcos instead of aldovs, ~Xaircpovs , 
thus, in Moschus, ras 'Ax&s. See § 60. 

17. In (a) -as, Gen. -00s. In Homer, the Dat. Sing, is either uncontracted 
or contracted, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. yfjpdt and yvpa, 
SeVa, o-eAa. But the Nom. and Acc. PI. is always contracted, e. g. Seira. — On 
those in -as, Gen. -eos, see § 61 (a), and Rem. 1. 

(b) In -os, Gen. -eo s. The Epic dialect, according to the necessities of the 
verse, has sometimes the uncontracted and sometimes the contract forms, 
except in the Gen. PL, which is always uncontracted. The Gen. Sing, is also 
uncontracted, except in some substantives which contract -eos, as in the Dor., 
into -evs ; thus, 'Epefievs, &dpo~evs, yevevs, &dp.f$evs, &epevs ; Dat. Sing. &epei" and 
bepei, /caAAei' and /caAAet. Nom. and Acc. Plurals in -ea, commonly remain 
uncontracted, but they must be pronounced with Synizesis, i. e. as one syllable, 
e. g. veUea, /3e'Aea. — The Ion. dialect is like the Epic. — In <nr4os, KAeos, Seos, 

22 



254 DIALECTS. [$ 214. 

Xpeos, the Epic dialect lengthens e, sometimes into ei, sometimes into 77 ; thus, 
Gen. <nreiovs, Dat. cnrr}i, Ace. ctt4os and crirztos, Gen. PL a-rreicov, Dat. airiaan[v) 
and <nrr)ecrcri(v) ; XP 60S an d XP e ^ 0S ; K^ e 'a and n\eia. 

18. In -is, Gen. -Ioj; -us, Gen. -Cos. The Epic dialect contracts those in 
-vs in the Dat. Sing., e. g. oi'£i;7, 7rAe&iu, v£kvi; the Ace. PL appears with the 
contracted or unconnected forms, according to the necessities of the verse, 
though more usually contracted, e. g. Ix&vs instead of Ix&vas, Spvs ; venvas is 
always uncontracted ; the Nom. PL never suffers contraction, hut is pronounced 
with Synizesis. The Dat. PL ends in -vavi and -tWo-t (dissyllable), e.g. Ix&ixr- 
aiv and Ix&veaaiv. See § 62. 

19. In -ts and -*, Gen. -tos, Att. -eo>s; -vs and -v, Gen. -vos, Att. -ews: — 

(a) The words in -Is, Att. Gen. -ecus, in the Epic and Ionic dialect, retain 1 
of the stem through all the Cases, and in the Dat. Sing, always suffer contrac- 
tion, and usually in the Ace. PL in the Ionic writers, and sometimes also in 
Homer (-« = -I, -las = -Is), e. g. ttSAis, tt6Aios, ttoAI, ttoAiv, iroAies, iroXicw, itSAkti, 
irSkias, and rroAIs. In the Dat. Sing, however, the ending -ei" and -et is found 
in Homer, e. g. irocrei and irSaei from iv6cris ; in some words, the 1 of the stem is 
changed into e in other Cases also, e. g. iirdx^eis instead of iiraA^ias, iTrd\£e<n(v), 
especially in iroAis, which, moreover, according to the necessities of the verse, 
can lengthen e into 77 ; thus, Gen. ttoAlos, iroAeos, and iroXrjos, Dat. 7roAei', 7roAet, 
and ir6\r)'i, Nom. PL 7roA.ees and iroArjes, Gen. -noXiwv, Dat. izoXUcrffi, Ace. izoKias, 
ir6\eis, TroXrjas; from 6'is, ovis, Dat. PL bU<r<ri{v), oie(Ti[v), 6z<ri(v). See § 63. 

(b) The words in -vs, whose Gen. in the Attic ends in -ecos, in the Ionic 
make the Gen. in -eos, e. g. Trr\x^os, except eyxz^vs, Gen. -vos ; in the Dat. Sing., 
both the contracted and uncontracted forms are found in Homer, e. g. evpi'i, 
TTT)X e h n^are?. I n the Nom. PL, the form can be either contracted or uncon- 
tracted ; in the Ace. PL, the uncontracted form in -eas is regular, which, when 
the verse requires, can be pronounced as a monosyllable, e. g. TreAeneas (tri- 
syllable). 

$ 214. Anomalous and Defective Words. — Metaplasts. 

1. V6vv (to. knee) and S6pv (to, spear, § 68, 1), are declined in Homer as 
follows : — 

Sing. yovvaros and yovvos Bovparos and Bovpos Zovpari and Sovpi 

PL Nom. 70 vuara " yovva dovpara " Soupa — Dual dovpe 

Gen. yovuwv dovpav 

Dat. yovvaffi(v) and yoweacn(v) 5ovpacri{v) and §ovptcrcn(v). 
The form yovvaaai (II. i, 488, p, 451, 569) has critically little authority. 

2. The following forms of nap a (to. head, § 68, 6) are found in the Homeric 
dialect : — 

Sing. Nom. Rap-n Gen. Kaprjros Kapr}aros Kparos Kpdaros 

Dat. Ktip-qn Ka.prja.Ti Kpari Kpdari 

Acc. Kapr) (toj/ Kpara, Od. &, 92, and iirl nap, II. it, 392). 



$ 215.] ADJECTIVES. 255 

PL Nom. Kapa KapT\ara ; secondary form icdp-nva 
Gen. Kpdruv " Kapr)v(i>V 

Dat. npacri(v) 
Ace. Kpdara " icdp-nva 

3. A«as (6, sfo?ze, Horn., instead of Aas), Gen. Aaos, Dat. Aai', Ace. Aacw, Gen. 
PL Aoco//, Dat. \ae<rcri{v). 

4. Mel's (o, month), Gen. /^jvo's, Ion., instead of yd\v, -6s, but also in Plato. 

5. NaDs (^, s/u'p) is inflected in the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects as 
follows : — 

S. Nom. Ep. and Ion. vnvs vr L p Dor. vavs 

Gen. vn6s (also Tragic) ve6s va6s (also Trag.) 

Dat. vrfi va'i 

Ace. yijo vea vavv and paV 

D. Nom. Ace. Voc. vrje vae 

Gen. and Dat. veoiv vaotv 

P. Nom. vijes vies vaes 

Gen. vn&v (vavepi only Ep.) vewv vaSiv 

Dat. y^uci (j/au^iOnlyEp.) j/^ecro-^i/), veeacri(v) vavcri(v) 

Ace. j/?}as peas races. 

6. "Opvis (6 7], bird), Gen. ooz/Z^-os, Doric op^x-os, etc. (§ 203). 

7. Xetp (r), hand), Ion. x e P<fc, X 601 '; X e P a ) Dual xetpe, x e P°^ v (poet, also x^'po**'), 
PL x*P es i X e P^ v i X e P <Tl { v ) (x e 'P €(7t ( I/ )> an ^ -eo"o"i(i') in Homer), x e 'p as « 

Remark 1. Metaplasm (§72) occurs in Homer in the following words 
aXu-ti, rj, strength, Dat. a\i<i (from Nom. 5 AAH) ; 'Aftfys, -ou, 6, Gen. aiSos, Dat 
d'iSi ('AI5); 'AvTKpaTrjs, -ao, 6, Ace. 'AvTicpaTija fANTI4>ATET2 ) j lec kt), r), pur- 
suit, Ace. tw/ca ('IHE) *, vcrfxivr], r), battle, Dat. vcrfxivi (verbis) ; — UarpoKXos, Gen 
na-rpo'/cAoi/ and -k\t)os, Ace. -kAo^ and -/cA^a, Voc. -/cAets (ITATPOKAH2) ; aW 
ttoSov, to, slave, Dat. PL cb'8pa7ro'o'ea'0'i(z>) 5 irposcoirov, to, ^/ace, PL irposccTrara 
Trposcoiratri; vtos, 6, son, has from 'TIET2 and 'TI2 the following forms : Gen 
uieos and ulos, Dat. vie? and uft, Ace. iuea and via ; Dual ufe ; Nom. PL wees and 
vle?s and ufes, Dat. vidtri, Ace. w'eas and uTas 5 — Old'nrovs, Gen. Oi5i7rd'8ao 
( 5 OIAinOAH2). 

Rem. 2. The following are defective in Homer : Am Dat. and to. \?ra, linen ; 
\?s and \?v = AeW and Xeovra ; p-dari and ydcmv = pdcrriyi and -a ; o-Ti%^s, 
aTixes, (TTt'xas, row ; oWe, toj, Nom. and Ace. Dual, both eyes ; ocpeXos, advantage, 
and r)dos, pleasure, in the Nom. only; i)pa, something pleasing, and de/xas, form, in 
the Ace. only ; fjAeo's, infatuated, Voc. ^Ae' and rAee ; finally, 8<2, «/>?, *oA(pt, as 
Nom. and Ace. Sing., from which come the forms Sw/xa, house, Kp&ii, barley, 
&\<pirov, dried barley. 

§ 215. Adjectives. 

1. Some adjectives in -us, -eia, -v, have sometimes in the Homeric dialect, 
the feminine form -ea or -erj ; viz. wicea (instead of wKe?a), fiafrea (instead of 
Pa&eia) ; Gen. jSa&eV (and Pafrei-ns) , Ace. jSafreV ; so also in Herodotus, -ea, 
seldom -eia, e. g. fia&ea, -erj and -e?a, fiapea, evpea, iSvs, -ea and -eta, &r)\ea (from 
&r)\vs), 7)fj.icrea. 

Remark. In Epic and Doric poetry, some adjectives of this kind, and also 
some in -6eis and -ye is, are of the common gender, i. e. they have but one 



256 DIALECTS. [§ 216 

termination for the Masc. and Fern., e. g."Up7i &t)Kvs £ov<ra, II. t, 97 ; so T/Sbs 
avT/A-f], Od. fi, 309, and the irregular iroXvs: iroAw icp' vyprjv, II. k, 27 ; so ^u«- 
3^ets, ai/fte/xcfets, apyivSeis, iroirjeis, agreeing Avith feminine substantives. — The 
Epic ivi or rjiis, Neut. yi (iv and ev only as an adverb), wants the feminine 
form ; in II. w, 528, is found Sdopcov ola SiSwcri nanwv, erepos Se 4dcov (sc. Scipav), 
therefore idcav as the Gen. PI. Neut., unless perhaps from hApoiv the cognate 
Sotre&w is to be supplied for idcav to agree with, as in darripes idau sc. docrewy ; 
the Gen. Sing, is irjos. 

2. Adjectives in -7jeis, -fieao~a, -/jey, are often found in Homer in the contracted 
form -fjs, -rjcrcra, -rjv, e. g. ti/jl^s (and rifii'isis), Ti/xrjvra ; those in -oeis, -o'ecrcra, 
-oej/, contract -oe into -eu, e. g. TreSict AcoTewra. 

3. In the Epic dialect, iroAvs is regularly inflected in the masculine and 
neuter, viz. Nom. iroXvs and irovXvs, Neut. iroKv, with the secondary forms 
iroAh6s, tto\\6v, Gen. iro\4os, Ace. ivoXvu and irovKvv, iroXv and iroWov ; Nom. 
PI. 7roAees and 7roAets, Gen. iroXioov, Dat. iro\4ci{v), iro\eao~i{v), and TroAeecnn^), 
Ace. 7roAeas and 7roAe?s. — The Ionic dialect inflects 7roAAos, -^, -^, regularly 
throughout. 

4. Compound Adj. in -os (comp. § 78, 1.) often have in Horn, a feminine ending, 
viz. -7], e. g. afravdrri, a<rfi4(TT7i, iro\v<p6pfir), apityXi) (but also apiQnXoi airyai, II. 
X, 27), afJicpL^poTri, ayxtdhi), apyvpoirtfa, afxcpipvTT] ; on the contrary, k\vt6s as a 
feminine is found in II. /3, 742. Od. e, 422, from the simple kAvtos, -i), -6v. Also 
the ending -os of the superlative is sometimes found as feminine, e. g. bhocararos 
oSfxr], Od. 5, 442. Kara irpwriaTov oirwir-f)]/, H Cer. 157. Comp. § 78, Rem. 1. 

5. Compound adjectives in -irovs, -tow, Gen. irodos, in the Epic dialect, can 
shorten -irovs into -iros, e. g.^Ipis deAAoiros, II. &, 409. rpiiros, II. x> 443. 

6. 'Epirjpes from ipi-npos, epvadpfiares and -as from ipvadpfiaros, are examples 
of Metaplastic forms of adjectives in Homer. 

§ 216. Comparison. 

1. In the Epic dialect, the endings -urepos and -c^Taros are used for the sake 
of the metre, even when the vowel of the preceding syllable is long, e. g. 
d'i£vpct)Tepos, 6'i£vpd!>TaTos, tcaiw^ewuTepos, Xapwruros. — 'Avrnp6s, troublesome, has 
the Comparative avi-npiarepov, Od. /3, 190, and dxapis, disagreeable, axapiarepos, 
Od. v, 392. Comp. § 82, Rem. 6. Adjectives in -vs and -pos, in the Homeric 
dialect, form the Comparative and Superlative in -low, -iov, and -taros, -tj, -ov, 
sometimes also regularly, e. g. iXaxvs, little, i\dxio"ros, y\vnvs yXvKicov, fla&vs, 
fid&icrTOS, Kvdpos, Kvdiaros, olnrpSs oIktictos and oiKTpoTaTos, iraxvs irdx^Tos, 
irpeafivs irpeafiio'Tos, wkvs wklo'tos. 

2. Besides the anomalous forms of comparison mentioned under § 84, the 
following Epic and dialectic forms require to be noticed : — 

ay a^r 6 s, Comp. apeiwu, Xw'iwv, AauYepos (Ion. Kpio-ffuiv, Dor. Kappwv), Sup. 

KapTltfTOS. 

kcik6s, KaKcarepos, x ei poTepos, xepeuui/, %epei($repos (Dor. x e PV wv i Ion. 'iffffoov), 
Sup. ^kio-tos (II. i//, 531, with the variation i]Kiaros, which Spitzner prefers). 

6\lyos, Comp. d\i(wv (6\i(oves faav, populi suberant statura minores, II. <r, 
519); fXTjuu, Bion, 5, 10. 

PriiSios, Ion., Comp. fairepos (Ion. prf'top), Sup. p-niraros and ^'iarros. 

&pa8vs, slow, Comp. /SpoVow, Sup. fidpdtcrTos (by Metathesis). 

uaKpos, long, pidaawu; — iraxvs, thick, irdaawu. 



f 217.] 



PftONOUNS. 



257 



Remark 1. The positive XEPH2 (x^PVh X*PVa, X^PV^s, x e P? a ) found in 
Homer, and belonging to x € P*' L< *> v ) always has the signification of the Compara- 
tive, less, baser, weaker. The PL 7rAees and (Ace.) 7rAeas are found in Homer 
from the Comp. ivxiwv. 

Rem. 2. In the Epic dialect, the forms of the Comparative and Superlative, 
in many instances, are derived from Substantives ; some of these forms have 
been transferred to the Common language: 6 fiaaiAevs fSaaiXevTepos] rb 
ic4p8os, gain, ic4p5iov, more lucrative, Kepditrros ; rb 'd\yos, pain, aKylwv, more 
painful, 'd\yi<TTos; rb plyos, cold, plyiov, colder, more dreadful, plyitrros ; rb Krj' 
5 os, care, k4\8uttos, most dear ; 6 t\ kv&v, dog, KvvTepos, more shameless, nvvraTos* 



§ 217. Pronouns. 



l.S.N. 


iyd> and (before a vow- 


<rv Epic ; tv Dor. and 






el) iya>v Epic ; eyw 


Mol. ; TvvTj Epic 






and eywv ^Eolic 






G. 


ifi4o, ifiev, fiev (fiev) 


ret) Dor.; cr4o (creo), 


eo (eo), eS (eu) Epic 




Epic and Ion. 


crev (<rev), Ep. and Ion. 


and Ion. 




e/j.e'io Epic 


<re?o and reo?o Epic 


elo Ep. ; ee?o later Ep. 




ifi4&ev Epic 


a4&ev Epic 


e&ej' (eSev) Epic 




efievs, e/xovs Doric 


revs, reovs Dor. 


lous Dor. 


D. 


efj.ol,fxol (fj.oi),efj.oi Mol. 


aoi Epic 






ifrip Doric 


tiv Dor. ; rdv Dor. et 


fr Dor. (usually or- 






Ep. (usually Orthot.) 


thotone ) 






tol (toi) Ep. and Ion. 


4o?, oT(ol) Ep (Reflex.) 


A. 


i/j.4, fie (fie) Epic 


a 4 (ere) Ep. ; re Dor. 


ee, e (e) (as Neut. 11. 






rv (tv) Dor. 


a, 236.) 






tiV in Theocritus 


vlv (viv) Dor. (and Att. 

poet.) (him, her, it) 
fj.lv (fj.iv) Ion. (him, her, 

it; seldom PI.) 
a<pe Dor. et Att. poet. 


D.N. 


vui 




(rtyGo'i'v (crcpw'iv) 1 




G. D. 


vuiv 


■Epic 


«$$r, o^fr 1 E . c 


(Tcpw'iv, ffcpco'iv } 


A. 


VOi'C, VU3 




crepwi, acpw J 


ffcpooe, o~<pwe > Epic 








<r<pob, (TCpO} ) 


P.N. 


rjfiels Epic ; -/jfi4es Ion. 


fyielV Ep. ; u/xees Ion. 






a/xes Dor. ; dfiues Epic 


fytes Dor. ; v/xfjees Ep. 




G. 


r)fi4cov Ion. and Epic 


vfxeoou Ion. and Epic 


a<p4cov (crcpecw) Ion. 




Tjfielwv Epic 


vfielwv Epic 


and Epic 




dfifi4cav JEolic ; afiwv 


vfifiewv Mol. 


cr</>«i> Epic 




Doric 




o-cpeiwv Epic 


D. 


fjfitv, rifJ.iv, r\fxiv Epic 


bfiiv, vfiiv, vfj.lv Epic 






dfifii(v) Mo\. and Ep. ; 


vfifii(v) Epic 


<r^)i (o"</n) Ion.; <r<pl- 




afiiv and hfiiv Dor. 




o~i(v), [crcpi(ri(v)]. atplv, 




dfifi4ai(v) Mol. 




(<j<pi.v),(r<pl (crepi) Ep. ; 
&<r<pi Mol. 


A 


rifxeas Ion. and Epic 


u/ieos Epic and Ion. 


acpeas (acpeas) Ion, 
and Epic 




?lfxas, rifj.ds Epic J vfias, vfids Epic 


crcpas, a<pe?as Epic 




dfifie Epic ; au4 Dor. 1 Vfiue Epic ; v/j.4 Dor. 


((T<f>e)Epic(Il.T,265.) 






5tible of inclination are 


a(r<pe Mol. 
those written without 


Remark. The forms susce 


an accent. 





22* 



258 DIALECTS. [$ 218 

2. The compound forms of the reflexive pronouns, i/xavrov^ aeavrov, etc., are 
never found in Homer: instead of them, he writes the personal pronouns and 
the pronoun ai)Tos separate, e. g. e/x abr6v, ifxol abra, ifxev avTrjS, % avr^u, 61 
avrfj. When the pronoun avros stands first, it signifies himself, herself itself 
even. But the Ion. writers use the compound forms iueoovrov, (rewvrov, ewvrov, 
etc. Comp. § 207, 1. 

3. Possessive pronouns : re6s, -77, -6v Dor. and Epic, instead of c6s ; eus, ~4\.. 
-oV, and os, 77, ov, situs. Epic ; a/x6s, -77, -6v Dor. and Epic, 'dix/xos, afx/x4repos iEoL, 
instead of rj/xerepos; vairepos, of us both, Epic; v/x6s, -77, -6v Dor. and Epic, 
V/x/xos -ZEol., instead of vfxerepos ; <r(pm'Tepos, of you both, II. a, 216; <r(pos, -77, '6v 
iEol. and Epic, instead of c^e'repos. 

4. Demonstrative pronouns : (a) 6 77 to (Dor. 'd instead of 77) ; Gen. tu> Dor., 
to7o and reu Epic, tcls Dor. ; Dat. tS. Dor. ; Ace. rdv Dor. ; PI. rot and rax Dor. 
and Epic ; Gen. rdcou Epic, rau Dor. ; Dat. to?o-j, tcwo-i, 7-7707, and ttJs Epic ; 
Ace. T(t>s, tos Dor. 

(b) o5e: Epic Dat. PI. TO?sSeo-i and ro7sdeo-(ri instead of roisde ; Epic Dat. 
roio-iSe instead of To?sSe is found also in the Tragedians. 

(c) ouros and clvtSs: an e stands before the long inflection-endings in the 
Ion. dialect (§ 207, 10), e. g. rovrdov, TavTzys, rovTea, rovreovs, avrdrj, avreow. 

(d) iiceivos is written in Ion. and also in Att. poetry kwos, iEol. ktjvos, Dor. 
rrjvos. 

(e) On the Ion. forms wvt6s, tcqvt6 instead of 6 avrSs, to clvt6, see §§ 206, 1, 
and 207, 1. 

5. Relative pronouns : Dor. and Horn., instead of os ; ofo Ion. and Epic ; 
oov Epic seldom, erjs II. tt, 208 ; rj<ri and tJs instead of a?s. Besides '6s, $7, the 
other forms of the pronouns are supplied, in the Dor. dialect, by the forms of 
the article, e. g. t6 instead of '6, rod instead of ou, ttjs instead of ^s, etc. The 
Epic dialect uses both forms promiscuously, according to the necessities of the 
verse. In the Ion. dialect also, the forms of the article are frequently used 
instead of the relative. 

6. Indefinite and interrogative pronouns: (a) rls,rl: Gen. re'o (reo) Epic 
and Ion., rev {rev) Epic, Ion., and Dor., Dat. t4u> (rew), rep (rep) Epic and Ion. ; 
PI. &(Tcra Neut., G7r7ror &o-<ra, Od. r, 218, Gen. TeW (rewy) Epic and Ion., Dat 
reouri Epic and Ion. (rolcri, S. Trach. 984). 

(b) ris, ri : Gen. t4o Epic and Ion., Ted Epic, Ion., and Dor., rica Ion. 



(c) ostis: Nom. otis, Neut. oTt,oTriEp. 
Gen. 6Veu Ep. and Ion.,oTeo, 

orreo, OTTeu Epic. 
Dat. SVew, otw Ep. and Ion. 
Ace. '6riua Epic, Neut. otz, 

qtti Epic. 



Neut. PI. Uriva Iliad. 
orewi/ Epic and Ion. 

oTeoio-i Epic and Ion., bririo-L Her. 
ttTivas Epic, Neut. 'driva and 'dffaa Epic 



§ 218. The Numerals. 

The iMoh and secondary form of /xia is '/a, Xn]s, %, 'tap ; also t<£, II. £ 422, ig 
mstead of kvi. Avo and 8ita are indeclinable in Homer : the secondary form? 



$ 219.] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 259 

are Soica (indecl.), Solol, Boiai, doid, Dat. 8oio?s, 8oio?o~ , Ace. Sotdb (indeel.), doiovs, 
•ds, -d. — Tliaupes, -a -ZEol. and Epic, instead of recaapes, -a. — Avcadeica and 5vo- 
KaiSeica Epic, also 5w5e/ca. — 'EeiKOffi Epic, instead of ei/co<n. — ""OyScoKovia and 
ivvi]KOVTa Epic, instead of by?io4\KOVTa, evevhttovTa. 'EvvedxtXoi and SeKax^Xot 
Epic, instead of evvaKisx^ 101 and fivpioi. The endings -dKovra and -o.k6<tioi in 
the Epic and Ion. become -iiKovra, -7}k6(Tloi. The Epic forms of the ordinals 
are rpiraros, rerparos, efifiofiaros, 6yd6aros, evaros, and etvaros. 



The Verb. 

$ 219. Augment. — Reduplication. 

«. All the poets, except the Attic, may reject the augment, according to the 
necessities of the verse, e. g. ADcre, o-relXavro, &eo~av, oparo, eXe. The Ion. 
prose, as well as the Epic dialect, may omit the temporal augment : it may also 
omit it in the Perf., e. g. 'dfj.fj.ai, epyao-fiai, o'lK-tyxcu, which is done by the Epic 
writers only in &vuya and epxarai from ei'pya. 

2. On the omission of the Epic dialect to double the p when the augment is 
prefixed, e. g. epe£as, and on the doubling the liquids, e. g. eaaeva, see § 208, 
4, and Rem. 

3. a in the Dor. writers is changed into a by the augment, and ai suffers no 
change, e. g. ayov instead of fiyov, dlpeov instead of rfpeov. 

4. Verbs which have the Digamma, in Homer take the syllabic augment, 
according to the rule, e. g. avddveo, to please, Impf. edvfiavov, Aor. e&Hov , — etdo- 
fiai, videor, iaa-dfxrjv, also in the participle ieiad/xevos. On account of the verse, 
the e seems to be lengthened in eloiicv7a, evaSe (eFaSe) from ai>8dvu. 

5. In Homer, the verbs oluoxoew and avMvoi, take at the same time both the 
syllabic and temporal augment, viz. iwvoxoei, II. 8, 3, yet more frequently cpvo- 
X.6ei ; e-nvdave and rivdave. 

6. The reduplication of p is found in Homer, in pepvirwfievos, from pvirSa, to 
make dirty. On the contrary, the Epic and poetic Perfects, efx.fj.opa from fj.eipofj.ai 
and earo'vfj.ai from o-evw, are formed according to the analogy of those beginning 
with p, i. e. by Metathesis ; hence efj.fj.opa, etc., instead of fie/xopa. — The Epic 
and Ion. Perf. of KTaofiai is eKT7]fiai. A strengthened reduplication is found in 
the Horn, forms Seidexarai and SeiSe/cro. 

7. In the Epic dialect, the second Aor. Act. and Mid. also often takes the 
reduplication, which remains through all the modes. In the Ind. the simple 
augment e is commonly omitted; thus, e. g. Kafivw, to grow weary, Subj. Aor. 
KeKd/j.<a] KeXofiai, to command, eKeKX6fj.y]v; kXvco, to hear, Aor. Imp. KeKkv&i, 
KeKXvre; Xayxdvca, to obtain, XeXaxov ; Xafifidvta, to receive, XeXa$eo~&ai; 
Xav&dvw, lateo,to escape notice, XeXaSov ; -irei&cc, to persuade, ireizi'Hrov, ireiri&6- 
fjfr\v\ rep-Koo, to delight, reTpairSfirju ; rvyxduw, to obtain rervKe?u, rervKea^at] 
<f>EN,Q, to murder, eirecpvov, irecpvov; cppd£o>, to say, to she* ireeppadov, etre<ppadov. 
Aorists with the Att. reduplication (comp. § 124, Rem. 2) commonly take the 
augment: 'APfi, to Jit, ijp-apov; 'AXH, to grieve, tfK-axov ; aXej-w, to ward off, 
VjX-aXKov, aXaXKelu ; opvvui, to excite, iop-opou ; eviirra), to chide, ev-eviirov. Two 



260 DIALECTS. [§ 22G 

verbs in the Aor. take the reduplication in the middle of the word : viz. iy'iimc, 
rjv-iiraTreu, and i pitta, to restrain, rjpv-KaKov, ipvKaneeiv. Comp. the Presents, 
ovipjjfJLi, ariTciAAw, dirnrreva). 

8. In the Dialects, there are still other forms of the Perf. and Plup. with the 
Att. reduplication (§ 124); thus, e. g. alp 4 a, to take, Ion. ap-alpr)Ka, ap-aip-q/xai] 
aKaofxai, to wander, Epic Pcrf. with a Pres. signification a\-d\7]/xai ; J APX5 
(apapio-Kw). to Jit, Poet, ap-apa, I Jit, (Intrans.), Ion. &p-npa; 'AXfl (<xKaxiC w )> & 
grieve, Epic and Ion. aK-rix^^h at-dxw al 5 'ENEKX2 (cpepw), to carry, Ion. eV- 
rji/eiyfxai ; ipe'iira, to demolish, Poet, ip-rjpnra, Epic ip-epnrro : ipi^ai, to contend, 
Epic £p-7ipi<T[xcu. 

§ 220. Personal-endings and Mode-vowel s. 

1. Eirst Pers. Sing. Act. The original ending -p.t of the first Pers. Sing., is 
found in the Epic dialect in several subjunctive . e. g. ktz'ivu>iju, aydyw/xi, tvx^i, 
'ikw/jli, i&eAoofju, X^ci}[xi. Comp. § 116, 1. 

2. Second Pers. Sing. Act. In the Dor., and particularly in the iEol. and Ep. 
dialect, the lengthened form -trS-o is found (§ 116, 2). In the Ind., this 
belongs almost exclusively to the conjugation in -fj.i, e. g. ri^na^a, (pTJcr&a, 
Sidourfra, TraprjaSia. In Homer, this ending is frequent in the Subj., e. g. i&etya- 
&a, dirria&a, more seldom in the Opt., e. g. K\aloi<r&a, fid\oi<T&a. 

3. Instead of the ending - cls, the Dor. frequently has the old form -es, e. g. 
Tvirres instead of rvirreis ; so in Theocritus <rvpl <r8es == o-vpi(eis. 

4. Third Pers. Sing. Act. In the Epic dialect, the Subj. sometimes has the 
ending -<ri (arising from -tl) appended to the usual ending of the Subj., e. g. 
i&eAr)cri(v), &yr}(Ti, aAaXKycri; the Opt. only in Trapa(p^alr]cn. 

5. Instead of the ending -et in the Pres. Ind. of the Dor. dialect, the form -rj 
is used, though seldom, e. g. 8t5a<r/c7j instead of SiSdcncei. In the second and 
third Pers. Sing. Perf*. Act., Theocritus uses the endings -tjs, -?j instead of -as, 
-e, e. g. Trenovfrris, birdm-i) instead of TriirovSas, u7r«7re. 

6. First Pers. PI. Act. The Dor. dialect has retained the original ending 
-pes, e. g. TVTTTOfxes instead of rv-KTOfxev (§ 204). 

7. The third Pers. PI. Act. of the principal tenses, in the Dor. dialect, ends 
throughout in -vri, e. g. tvittovti (instead of rvirTovari), tv^ovti, tvtttcouti 
(instead of tvtttuxti), rerixpavTi, iiraiviovri, H-aTraTwvTi. In the -ZEol. and Dor., 
this ending in the Pres. and Fut. is -okti instead of -ov<ri, e. g. Trepnryeoi(Ti(u), 
vaioi(Ti{v). 

8. Personal endings of the Plup. Act. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, the 
following forms occur : — 

First Pers. Sing., -ea the only Epic and Ion. form (-77 old Att. ; § 116, 6), e. g- 
eTe^777rea, fjSea, 7re7rot&ea instead of iTefrfjireiv, etc. 
Second " " -eas, c. g. irefrfjireas, Od. a, 90, instead of eTefrfjireis. 

Third " " -ee(v), e. g. iyeySvee, /caTaAeAonree, efiefipwKeev (not Horn.). 

Second " PL -eare, e. g. (Tu^Seore, Her. 9, 58. 

Remark 1. The third Pers. Sing. Plup. Act. in -ei, as well as the samo 
Pers. of the Impf. in -ei, is found in Homer before a vowel with the j/paragogic; 



220.] TEESONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. 2Ci 

thus, kcTT-rjKsiv, IL \p, 691. PePArixeiv, H. e, 661. Sr, 270. £,412. SeSetirvf)K€iu t Od. 
p, 359 j — iarifeiy, 11. 7, 388. 

9. The second and third Pers. Dual of the historical tenses are sometimes 
exchanged for each other. Thus in Homer, the forms -tov and -afrof (second 
Pers. Dual) stand instead of -rrjv and -<r&r}v (third Pers. Dual), e. g. SiwkztqV) 
II. k, 364. AaQvao-eTov, II. <r, 583. &a>p7)<r<re<rSov, II. v, 301. On this inter- 
charge in Attic, see § 116, Rem. 

10. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Ind. and Subj., Impf. Ind. and Opt. Mid. 01 
Pass., the first Aor. Mid. Ind., after dropping c, remain uncontracted in the 
Ion. and often in the Epic dialect, e. g. iinTsWeai 5 Homer uses either these 
forms, e. g. AeiVeai, AtAcueat, a^t/CTjat, epucrcreai, iTravpijai, fore- vcrao, iyeivao, or 
the contract forms, -77 (from -ecu), -eu (from-eo), -co (from -ao), e.g. en-Aeu, epx^v, 
(ppd&v, iKptfj.00. When the characteristic of the verb is e, it is very frequently 
omitted in the Ion. dialect, before -ecu and -eo, e. g. <pi\4ai instead of cptAe'ecu, 
<pt\eo instead of cpiKeeo ; so in Homer, e'/cAe", II. to, 202, yet with the variation 
e/fAe' from /cAe'o^cu. Comp. § 222, P> (3). — The ending -eo in Homer is 
lengthened into - e 1 o, e. g. epeio, o-7re?o, and the ending -e'ecu is contracted into 
-e?ot, in verbs in -4a, e. g. fiv&elai, veiat. Homer sometimes drops cr in the 
second Pers. Sing. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, also, viz. /xe/xv-nai (and fie/Apy), 
BcfiATjai, icrffvo. 

11. The Dual endings -riqv, -(T&rjv, and first Pers. Sing, -firiv, in the Doric 
are, -rdu, -cr&dv, -p.dv (§ 201, 2), e. g. 4(ppa(rd/xdv. In the later Doric, the 
change of 77 into d is found, though seldom, even in the Aor. Pass., e. g. irv-irdv 
instead of 4tvttt)v. 

12. The personal-endings -fie&ov, -fiefra, in Epic, as well as in Doric, Ionie, 
and Attic poetry, often have the original forms -fxea-^rou, -/xeaba, e. g. rinrTo^tr- 
bov, TU7TTo7ieo-fra. 

13. The third Pers. PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., in the Ionic and Epic 
dialect, very generally ends in -otcu, -aro, instead of -vrai, -vto, e. g. 7re7ref- 
Scltcu, TreiravaTai, ifiefiovAeva,To, i<TT<i\aTo; very often also the third Pers. PI. 
Opt. Mid. or Pass, is -oiaru, -aiaro, instead of -oivto, -aivro, e. g. tvitto'loto 
instead of tvtttoivto, aprja-aiaro (Homeric), instead of ap^aaivTo. Also the 
ending -opto, in the Ion. dialect, has this change, though the o before v becomes 
e, e. g. ifiovAeaTo instead of 4fiov\ovro. In verbs in -aco and -e'co, the 77 in the 
ending of the Perf. and Plup. -tivtcu, -i)vto, is shortened in the Ionic into e, e. g. 
oiKearai instead of &kt\vt<xi from ot/ce'co, iTeTLfj.4a.ro instead of iTeri/j.T]vro from 
TifAda. Also instead of -aurai, the Ionic dialect has -e'cnrcu (instead of -darai), 
e. g. TreirTectTcu instead of TreirTavTcu. ''Airiicarai, in Herodotus, from the Perf. 
tiujuyfiai (Pres. a<piKi/4o/j.ai) is the only example in which the rule stated § 116, 
5, is not obsei'ved. 

Rem. 2. Two Perf. and Plup. forms are found in Homer with the ending 
-Sarai, -5 aro, from verbs whose characteristic is not 5, viz. iXavva (ixda) 
cA^Acuiou 4\7]\d5aro, Od. 77, 86, and aKaxK 00 aKTjxe/icu aKrix^Sarai, II. p, 637 ; the 
5 seems to be merely euphonic ; yet it is to be noted, that the reading is not 
wholly settled : the forms ippdSaTcu and ippdSaro (from paiva) must be derived 
from the stem 'PAZQ. (comp. pdcrcraTe, Od. v, 150). 



262 DIALECTS. [$ 220 

i l. The third Pers. PL Aor. Pass. -f\<rav is abridged into -ev, in the Doric, 
and also frequently in the Epic and poetic dialect, e. g. rpdcpev instead of irpd- 
(prpav. In the Opt. this abridged form is regular in the Common language 
\'\ 116, 7), e. g. Tvcp&eTev instead of rv(p&dri<Tav. 

15. The third Pers. PI. Imp. Act. in -rwcrav, and Mid. or Pass, in a&axrav, is 
abridged in the Ionic and Doric dialect (always in Homer) into -vtwv and -cr&wv 
(§ 116, 12), e. g. tvktovtoov instead of rvirTercocrav, TreTroi&6i/Tccv instead of ireiroi- 
&4r<a(rav, TVTvr4(T&a>v instead of TVTrT4a&to(rav. 

16. The long mode-vowels of the Subj., viz. u> and 77, are very frequently 
shortened in the Epic dialect into and e, according to the necessities of the 
verse, e. g. tofiev instead of Ycc/xev; <p&i6/xe<r&a instead of -do/xe^a] <TTp4(pzrai 
instead of -r\Tai (§ 207, 4). 

17. The first Aor. Opt. Act., in the ^Eolic dialect ends in -eia, -ems, -ete, etc., 
third Pers. PI. -eiav, instead of -cu/m, -ais, -01, etc., third Pers. PI. -cuev. See 
§ 116, 9. 

18. Infinitive. The original full form of the Inf. Act. is -/xevai, and with 
the mode-vowel, -ifxevai, which is found in the Epic, Doric, and iEolic dialects. 
This form is sometimes shortened into -y.ev {-4fj.ev) by dropping at, sometimes 
into -vat by syncopating fxe (e^ae). But in the Epic dialect, the ending -etv also 
is found, formed from -4/xev, and in contract verbs, and in the second Aor., also 
the endings -4etv and -e?v. The Pres., Eut., and second Aor. take the mode- 
vowel e and the ending -jxev, hence -4(J.ev, e. g. Tvirr-4-jxev, Tvty4jj.ev, elir4fjtev. — 
Verbs in -aw and-ew, as they contract the characteristic-vowel o and the 
mode-vowel e of the Inf. ending -4/xevai, have the form -r] fie vat, e. g. yor)fievai 
(yodw), cpiX'f]/xevai ((pi\4co), (popr)fj.€vat ((popeco). — With the ending -r)fi€vat corre- 
sponds that of the Aorists Pass., e. g. rvirr] l uevat instead of rvirrjvat, aoXXtff 
&r)/j.evat ; so always in the Epic dialect ; but the Doric has the abridged form in 
-Vfieu, e. g. TVTvrnxev. — In the Pres. of verbs in -fit, the ending -/xev and -pevat is 
appended to the unchanged stem of the Pres., and in the second Aor. Act-, to 
the pure stem, e. g. Ti&4-/j.ev, Ti&4-fi.£vai, l(TTd-/xev, Icrrd-iizvat, dido-fiev, Sid6-/Acvai, 
deiKvv-iLLej/, deircvv-fxevai:, &4-/j.ev, &£-p,€vcu, 56-fj.ev, So-p-evai, so also in Perfects 
derived immediately from the stem of the verb, e. g. re^vaptev, fiefiduev. The 
following are exceptions, viz. Ti&r)[xevai, II. \p, 83 (with which the forms of the 
Pres. Part. Mid. ri^^evos, Kix^p-evos, correspond), StSovvai, II. co, 425, also the 
Inf. second Aor. Act. of verbs in -a and -u, which also retain the long vowel 
(§ 191, 2), e. g. <TTr)-fxevai, fi-f)-/j.evai, dv-fj.evai, instead of arrival, ovvai. 

19. Besides the forms in -4/j.evat and -4/iev, the Doric dialect has one in -ev 
abridged from these, e. g. dyev instead of dyetv ; Eut. ap/xSaev instead of apfx6- 
<reiv: second Aor. I54v instead of lde?v, \a$4v instead of Xafle?v, etc. In the 
Doric of Theocritus, the JEol. Inf. ending -r\v is found, e. g. x a ' l PW> second 
Aor. Xafiriv, instead of x a ' l P* lv -> Xafietv. 

20. The Inf. ending of the Aor. Pass. -r)[x.evat, -r)/j.ev, is abridged into i\v in 
the Doric writers, yet only after a preceding long syllable, e. g. y.e&vcr&riv instead 
of Si\vai. The Inf. ending of the Perf. Act. varies between -r/v and -etv in 
the Doric and JEolic writers, e. g. re^ecop-fjicriv, yeyoveiv instead of refreaf yuevcu, 
yryovdveu. 



§§ 221, 222. J CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION JN VERBS 263 

21. Participle. The iEolic dialect has the diphthong oi instead of ov before 
tr in participles, and ai instead of a, e. g. Tvirrav, rvTrroicra, tvtttov, A-a/3o7era, 
Kiirciiaa instead of -ovo*a; Tv-tyais, -cucra, instead of rvxpas, -acra (§§ 201, 2, and 
207, 1). The Epic dialect can lengthen the accented o into a in the oblique 
cases, e. g. (xefxaaros, irecpvuras. — The Perf. Act. Part., in the Doric dialect, 
sometimes takes the ending of the Pres., e. g. TrecppiKovres instead of -rrecppiKdres. 



§ 221. Epic and Ionic Iterative form. 

1. The Ionic and particularly the Epic dialect, and not unfrequently, in 
imitation of these, the Tragedians, have a special Impf. and Aor. form with the 
ending -ctkov, to denote an action often repeated, or continued. This is called 
the Iterative form. It is regularly without the augment. 

2. It is generally found only in the Sing, and in the third Pens. PL Ind. of 
the Impf. and Aor., and is inflected like the Impf. ; for in the Impf. and 
second Aor. Act. and Mid., the endings -ctkov, -vices, <rfce(v), -(TkS^tjj/, -cncov(eo, ev), 
-ctksto, preceded by the union-vowel e, are used instead of -ov, -6fxr)v, and in the 
first Aor. Act. and Mid. the endings -olgkov, -a<ric6ixr)v are used instead of -o, 
-d^v, e. g. 

(a) Impf. Sivev-ecncov, freA-eovces, e7r-ecr/ce(j/), 7reA-ecrKeTO, fSoGK-icricovTO. In 
verbs in -da, -decricov is abridged into -acricov, which, according to the necessities 
of the verse, can be again lengthened into -dacricov, e. g. vucdorKonev, vcuerdacr- 
kov. Verbs in -4a have -4ecrKov and -sencov, e. g. K-aAe-eaTce, j8ov«:oAee(r/ce ; oXxv^ct- 
kov, 7rcoAecr/feTo, /caAeV/ceTo ; when the verse requires, -4ecricov can be lengthened 
into -elecncov, e. g. veucetecricov ; verbs in - 6a do not have this Iterative form 
among the older authors ; verbs in -jxi omit the mode-vowel here also, e. g. 
rl&e-cricov, SiSo-o-kov, Sdicw-cricov ; in some verbs the ending -acricov has taken the 
place of -sctkov, e. g. p'ncr-acricov, Kpiirr-acricov, from p'nrra, Kpvirra. 

(b) Second Aor. eA-eovce, jSaA-eoyce, cpvy-ecrice ; in verbs in -jai, without a mode- 
vowel, e.g. crrd-crice (= etTTTj), icapefidcrice (= Trap* fir)), Socr/re, Svavce; also an 
Iterative form of the second Aor. Pass, is found, viz. epdvecrtee instead of icpdvrj, 
II. A, 64. Od. fi, 241, 242. 

(c) Eirst Aor. iKda-acwzv, avdrja-acrKev, acr-acrtce, /jLvrjcr-dcriceTO, ayvc&cr-affice 
(instead of ayvo-ficracricG from ayvoea). 



$ 222. Contraction and Resolution in Verbs. 

I. The Epic dialect. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -da, -4a, -6a, are subject 
to contraction, but by no means so generally as in the Attic. The contraction 
is made according to the general rules, with a few exceptions, as will be seen in 
the following remarks. 

A. Verbs in -da. (1) In these verbs, the uncontracted form occurs only in 
certain words and forms, e. g. ir4paov, KaTscriciaov, vaieTaovcn ; always in vKaa, and 
in verbs which have a long a for their characteristic, or whose stem is a mono* 
syllable, e. g. tivty&av, ireLvdav, expae, ixpdere (from %P« W > to attack) 



264 



DIALECTS. 



1$ 222. 



(2) In some words, o is changed into e, viz. peyoheov from ^vowdw, jjrrco* 
from avrdu, o>o'/cAeoj/ from 6/j.0K\da>. Comp. § 201, 1. 

(3) Instead of the uncontracted and contracted forms, the contracted syllable 
is resolved, as often as the measure requires it ; this is done by inserting a simi- 
lar vowel, commonly shorter, more seldom longer, before the vowel formed 
by contraction ; in this way, a is resolved into dd or dd, and a into oa or wot 
(§ 207, 2). The short vowel is used here, when the syllable preceding the 
contracted one is short, e. g. (6pa>) 6p6w ; but if this syllable is long, the long 
vowel must be used on account of the verse, e. g. yi&woocra. The resolution does 
not take place with the vowel d before a personal-ending beginning with t, 
e. g. Spa-rat, Spu-To. Thus : — 



(opdets) 


6py.s 


6 pacts 


(opdco) 


Spec 


Sp6co 


(opdtcr&at) 


bpao~Sat 


S paacr&at 


(opdovcra) 


Spcoaa 


dpouxra 


( t uevoipdei) 


fxevoiva 


[j.ei/ot.vcLa 


(fiodovcrt) 


fioaxrt 


/3 o6w(Ti 


(idr;s) 


ias 


iotas 


[opdoLfju) 


bpapu 


SpScp/nt 


(ixvdecr&cu) 


/j.vacr&ai 


lxvo.acr&ai 


{hpaovai) 


dpcocri 


dpC&CO(T l. 


Remark 1. 


In Od. ij, 


343, the form oprjat 


(from opdeat 


i occurs 


instead of tl 



bpriai, which Eustath. cites. In the following Dual forms, ae is contracted into 
7j : Trposavd-fiTTiv, o~v\i\Tr)v, avvavT-nrrju, <poiT7]rr]i/ instead of -drrjv : so also in the 
two verbs in -eco, Sp.apT7]T7]v, cbreiA^TTji/ instead of -eirr]v. 

4. When vr comes after a contracted vowel, a short vowel may be inserted 
between vr and such a contracted syllable, e. g. r)fiuovra instead of fjfiwvTa, 
yeXdoovres, iiv&ovto ; in the Opt. also, the protracted -wot instead of -cp is found 
in Tj/Udboi/xi (instead of rj^dotpu = r)fi<2p.t). The following are anomalous forms: 
vaierdwaa (instead of -6wcra), craw, second Pers. Imp. Pres. Mid. and third Pers. 
Sing, Impf. Act. from 2AH, to save. 

Rem. 2. On the Inf. in -fi/xevat of verbs in -dca and -ea>, see § 220, 18, and on 
the Epic-Ionic contraction of or\ into a, see § 205, 5. 

B. Verbs in -eco. To this conjugation belong also all Futures in -4<s> and 
-4o/xai, all second Persons in -eo, -ecu, and -tjcw, second Aor. Inf. Act. in -eew, 
and the Aor. Pass. Subj. in -4a and -eto>. 

(1) Contraction does not take place in all forms in which e is followed by the 
vowels a, a, 7}, 7), ot, and ov, e. g. (piAea/u.ev, <pi\£oijju, etc. ; yet such uncontracted 
forms must commonly be read with Synizesis. In other instances, the contrac- 
tion is either omitted according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. cptAe'et, 4p4a 
Fut., OTpvv4ovo~a Eut., Pa\eeu/ second Aor. Act., irece'ecrd-cu Fut. Mid., /xty4aart 
second Aor. Subj. Pass. ; or contraction takes place, and then, when eo is con- 
tracted, it becomes eu (§ 205, 1), e. g. alpevpirju, avrevv, y4vev ; except avepp'nrTOvv 
and eTr6p&ow. 

(2) Sometimes the open e is lengthened into et (§ 207, 1), e. g. ireXeiero, 
ireheioy, irXeietv, OKveia ; — daptela instead of 5ap.a, fityeiy instead of p.tyrj 
(second Aor. Subj. Pass.). 

(3) In the ending of the second Pers. Sing. Pres. Mid. or Pass., two Epsilons 
coming together are either contracted, as in the third Pers., e. g. fiu&e'-ecu 
= /jLv&eTcu, like pLvfrelrat, velat, like i/eircu, or one e is elided, e. g. fxv&eai, 



§ 222.] CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS. 265 

irw\4ai. This elision commonly occurs both among the Epic and Ionic writers, 
in the second Pers. Impf. and Imp. Pres. Mid. or Pass., e. g. <po$4o, om4o, cureo, 
ifryeo. In such cases, the accent is on the penult, whether the word ends with 
-ecu or -eo (§ 220, 10). 

Eem. 3. On the irregular contraction in the Dual, see Rem. 1 ; on the Inf. 
in --fjfievai, see § 220, 18. 

C. Verbs in -6 a. These verbs follow either the common rules of contrac- 
tion, e. g. yowovixai, yowova&ai, or they are not contracted, but lengthen o into 
a, and then the forms of verbs in -6a resemble those of verbs in -da, e. g. 
Wpdoura, ISpcoovtra, virvdoovrus (comp. 7]Pd>ovTa, 4 above) ; or they become wholly 
analogous to verbs in -da, since they resolve -overt, (third Pers. PI. Pres.) into 
-6 a<r i, -ovvro into -6avro, and -o?ev into -6asv, and consequently suppose a 
contraction like that of verbs in -da: (ap6ovo-i) apovcri apSacri (comp. bp6ao~i), 
(Srj'iSouTo) Stjiovvto drj'iSavTO (comp. bpoavro), (Sri'iSoiev) Sr^ tfiv dr]i6a€V (comp. 
6p6aev). But this resolution into -6a or -ao is confined to such forms as admit 
it in verbs in -da ; hence, e. g. the Pres. apo?s, apo?, apovre, and the Inf. apovv, do 
not admit this resolution. 

II. Ionic dialect. (1) In the Ionic dialect, only verbs in -aw and -6a suffer 
contraction ; verbs in -4a commonly omit it, except the contraction of -eo and 
-eou into -ev, which frequently occurs (§ 205, 1), e. g. (pi\ed/j.eu instead of cpi\4o- 
fiev = <pi\ovpi.£V, £<pt\evy instead of £<p'iXeou = 4<piXovv, <piAeu instead of <piX4ov 
= <piXov. 

(2) The uncontracted forms exhibited in the table (§ 135) of the second 
Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf. Mid. or Pass, in -4rj, -dy, -6rj, -4ov, -dov, -6ov, e. g. 
<piX4-p, rifxdri, fiicr^r), <pix4ov, n/xdov, fii(r&6ov : etc., are found in no dialect, and 
are presented merely to explain the contraction. Por even the Ionic writers 
use here the contracted forms of verbs in -da and -6a, e. g. rifia, fiiofto?, ti/j.&>, 
fj.i<r&ov, etc. ; but of verbs in -e'w, as also in barytone verbs, they do not use the 
endings -77, -ou, but -ecu, -eo, e. g. rinrr-eai, irvirr-eo, <piX4-eai, £<piX4-eo. — On the 
elision of e in the ending -e'eo, see above, No. 1, B (3). 

(3) Verbs in -da follow the common rules of contraction; but in the uncon- 
tracted form, the a is changed into e, e. g. 6p4a, op4o/j.ei/ instead of opda, xpe'eTaj, 
Xp4ovtcu instead of xp<* era h etc - Comp. § 201, 1. 

(4) Ao in the uncontracted forms is frequently lengthened into 4a (§ 207, 3), 
e. g. xp4avTcu, eVreWTO, opeWres, Treipecc^euos instead of {xpdovrai) x?^ VTal i 
etc. 

(5) The change of the a into e, as in 6p4a, explains the usage among the Ion. 
writers of sometimes contracting ao and aov, and also eo and eou in verbs in 
-e'w, into -eu (§ 205, 1), e. g. dpdorevu instead of dpdoTaov, yeXevffa instead of 
yeXaovva, ayairevvres instead of aycnrdovres. So also in the Doric dialect, e. g 
yeXevvrt instead of yeXdovo-i. This contraction into eu instead of ov is often 
found even in verbs in -6a, e. g. StKcueOcn instead of (Si/ccuoWn) Zikcuovo-i, 
Smcuevv instead of Slkcuovv, ifiiKaiew, crrttyauevvTai from crrecpauoa. 

(6) In Ionic prose, the Epic resolution is found but seldom in verbs in -efo, 
e. g. KOfi6a(Ti, riyop6avTO, Her. 

23 



266 DIALECTS. [$ 223 

HI. Doric dialect. (1} Contrary to the common usage of the Doric, ae and 
aei are contracted into 77 and rj (§ 205, 3), e. g. Ti/xrjTe instead of ri/xdere = 
t^Ste, (poirfjs instead of <poiras, bpr\v instead of Spay. The Inf. is written 
without an 1 subscript, as the uncontracted form originally ended in -aiv 
Comp. also II. 5, also § 134, 3. 

(2) The Inf. of verbs in -e&> has a double form, either the abridged form in 
-4v instead of -eiv, e. g. izotev instead of iroielv, or according to the analogy of 
verbs in -doo, a form in -rjv (from -ir\v), e. g. (pi\?iv instead of <pi\4eiv = <bi\e?v, 
KOG-fxyv instead of KO(T/xe?v, (ppourju instead of (ppoveiv. 

(3) In the Doric and iEolic dialects, -ao, -aov, and -aw are contracted _nto d 
(§ 205, 2), e. g. TTeivap.es instead of ixeiv5i\xev (ireivdofxei/), ireivavri instead of 
Tftv(d-ov)a-(Ti, yeXav instead of ye\(d-(ov)(oy, (pvaavres instead of <pv<r{d-o)G}-vTzs. 

Rem. 4. On the contraction into -ev instead of -ov, see § 205, 1. — A striking 
peculiarity of the Doric dialect, especially of the later Doric as used by The- 
ocritus, is, that it frequently has a long a even in the inflection of verbs in -ea>, 
c. g. enr6va(Ta instead of iir6i>ri<ra from nwew, itylXava instead of £<pi\T)<Ta from 

§ 223. Formation of the Tenses. 

1. Besides the verbs mentioned (§ 130), the following also in the Homeric 
dialect retain the short characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, viz. Korea, to 
have a grudge ; veiKew, to quarrel ; raviw, to stretch ; ipvoo, to draw. On the con- 
trary, eircaveoo, to approve, has eTTyvt}<Ta. 

2. In the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid. of pure verbs, which retain the 
short characteristic- vowel in forming the tenses, and in the same tenses of verbs 
in -fa, -crffco (-tt«), the <r can be doubled in the ending, in Homer and other 
non- Attic poets (§ 208, 4), e. g. eyeXacrae, KOTeara'dnevos, d/Jt.6<T<rai, erdvv<rae, 
Sucdvcat, k6iamt(T€. 

3. The form of the Attic Fut. (§ 117) occurs in the Homeric dialect in verbs 
in -Ifa, e. g. KTepiovo-i, ayXaieTafrcu, together with the common Futures bpidacro- 
fxev, ncnrpicrcrovTes, Kovicraov(n{v). From verbs in -eca, -da}, -vca, Horn, forms 
Futures which are similar to the present of these words, viz. in verbs in -eco, he 
often uses the ending -e'w instead of -eV&>, e. g. Kopeei, H. 3-, 379. nopeeis, H. v, 
831. fiaxeovrai, H. j8, 366 ; — in verbs in - aw, after dropping <r, he places before 
the vowel formed by contraction, a corresponding short vowel, e. g. avri6u, 
i\6a<rt, oap:da; — in verbs in - va>, ipvovcri and ravvovai are found. 

4. In the Doric dialect, all verbs in - ^0 take £ instead of <r in those tenses 
whose characteristic is a", i. e. in the Fut. and Aor., e. g. Sued fa, §iKa£w, e'5i/ca£a, 
instead of diKdaee, idiKaaa. But the other tenses of verbs with the pure charac- 
teristic S, follow the regular formation, e. g. i8iKdcr&r)v, not iSiicdx&rjv- This 
peculiarity of the Doric appears even in certain verbs in -da, wbich, in forming 
the tenses, retain the short a, and in this respect are analogous to those in -fa, 
which likewise have a short vowel, c. g. yeXdco, eyeXafa instead of eyeXaoa, yet 
not vikom, vlko-ISi, but vik6.(tS) (Att. viKr\<rca). In Doric poetry, the regular form 
of all these words can be used, according to the necessities of the metre. 

5. The following verbs in -fa have, in Homer and the Ionic dialect. £ instead 



$ 223 J FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 261 

of <r, through the whole formation, viz. afipoTdga, to wander ; a\ air a Ceo, to 
empty, Eut. a\cnrdl;a), etc. (so also Xenoph. An. h 1, 29) ; SvoiraXiCa, to shake; 
5 at £«, to divide, to put to death ; iyyvaXiCco, to give ; iv apt (a, to spoil a dead 
enemy; &pvA\l£a,to break in pieces; /j,ep/j.7ipi£co, to reflect; ire\e[xi£a», to 
shake ; iroXefxi (<a, to contend ; GTvepsXi £u>, to smite. 

6. Liquid verbs in -alvw, which in the Attic dialect form the Aor. with the 
ending -ava instead of -7)m (§ 149, Rem. 2), have d in the Doric, and t\ in the 
Epic and Ionic. The following liquid verbs, in the Epic and poetic dialect of 
all periods, form the Eut. and first Aor. with the ending -ceo and -<ra, viz, 
/ceAAw, to land (ic4\ara,i, comp. /ceWai from k€pt4cc, to goad) ; dXu>, to crowd 
together (Zxcxcu) ; Kvpca, to meet, to fall upon; apapiaKw ('AP-H), to Jit ('fjpo-a, dpcrcu) ; 
op-vvfj.1, to excite (opera, dbpera) ; Siacp&eipco, to destroy (SLacp&epffai in Homer) ; 
Keipco, to shave (eicepaa in Homer, but first Aor. Mid. iKeipdfir]v) ; <pipw, to mix, to 
knead ((pvpaw, zepvpo-a, irefyvpcrojxai, Epic and old poetic; second Aor. Pass. 
£<pvpT]v in Lucian, who also has the poetic Perf. ir4(pvp[iai, while in prose, the 
verb (pvpda, icpvpaaa, ireepvpa/xai, etc., is used). The Opt. 6(p4x\eiei/, Od. fi, 334. 
II. ir, 651, is formed according to the usage of the JEolic. 

7. To verbs which form the Eut. without the tense-characteristic <r (§ 154, 4) 
belong the following forms of the Epic dialect : fiiojxai or fielopm, second Pers. 
&4r), I shall live, perhaps from fiaivw, to go, to live, also from AAH, to know, to 
learn, and KEIH (tceTfAcu, to lie down), Stjw, Sfeis, Sr)o/j.€v, S^ere (I shall view, find)) 
and /cetw or /cew, Keie/xej/, neioov, k£wv. 

8. To verbs which form the first Aor. without the tense-characteristic a 
(§ 154, 7) belong the following forms of the Epic and poetic dialect: x«u, to 
pour out, e%euo (Homer; Att. e%ea) ; aevw, to shake, ccro-eva and io-ffeudfx.-rjv 
(Homer), a\4o/j.cu and a\evo[xai, to avoid, yXevaro, etc. (§ 230) ; Kalw, to burn, 
€KT)a, eKeia Epic, eicea Tragic (§ 230). 

9. To verbs which have an active form for the Fut. Perf. (§ 154, 6), belongs 
also the Epic K^xaprjcrco (with K^x a P'h (TO t iai )-: I shall be joyful, from %aipa>. 

10. The exchange of the endings of the second Aor. with those of the first 
Aor. (§ 154, 7) is somewhat frequent in the Epic dialect, e.g. /3alvw, to go, 
ifi-f](T€To, Imp. /3^<reo ; Svofiat, toplunge, iSvcrero, Imp. dvcreo, Part. SvaSfievos ; 
&yco, to lead, a£*Te, a£4/j.ev ; iKveoficu, to come, t^ov; 4x4yji.T)v, I laid myself down 
to sleep, Imp. Ae£o, Ae|eo ; opvv/xi, excito,Imj>. op a 1 eo, tipcrev; (pepco, to bear, 
olae (olo-e is also Att.), oftreTe, olairu, olaovruv, olcrefiei/, olffepei/cu ', de/5«, to 
sing, Imp. oeiireo. 

11. Several second Aorists, in Homer, are formed by a Metathesis of tne 
consonants (§ 156), in order to make a dactyle, e. g. ehpanov instead of edapKov 
(from h4pKop.ai), eirpa&ov (from ir4p&w), edpa&ov (from Sap&dvu), ^fiPporov 
(instead of ^fxaprov from afxaprdvoo). Eor the same reason Homer syncopates 
the Stem (§ 155), e. g. aypSfiePos from ayepeoftai (ayelpcc, to collect) ; eypero, 
eypeo (Imp.), eypoiro, eypeoftai (with the accent of the Pres.), iyp6/nevos from 
iyepeofircu (iyeipw, to wake) ; TTT6/xr}u, inrrdfiTiv, iTTeo'&cu, '/rrofieuos (ireTOfiai, to 
fly) ; 4k4k\€to, /ce/cAe-ro, K€K\6y.evos (k4\o(icu, to summon, excite) ; ir4<pvov, zire<pvov 
(*ENn, to kill). 

12. In the first Aor. Pass. Homer inserts a v, aceording to the necessities of 



268 dialects. [$ 223 

the verse, not only as other poets (§ 149, Eem. 4) in Kplvco and kXUv (Siclkpiv- 
&7jTe, Kpiv&ets, iK\iv&ri), but also in tSpvw, to establish, and 7rj/ea>, to Wow (IfyiVdij* 
and idpvfrnv, afnrvvv&i)). 

13. Homer forms a first Perf. only from pure verbs, and such impure verbs 
as in the tense-formation assume an e (§ 166) or are subject to Metathesis 
(§ 156, 2), e. g. xaipw Kexdpr]Ka (from XAIPE-il), /3aAAo> ySe^ATj/ca (from BAA). 
Except these, he forms only second Perfects (which belong commonly to 
intransitive verbs, or have an intransitive signification) ; but even in pure verbs 
and in the impure verbs mentioned above, he rejects the k in certain persons 
and modes, and regularly in the Part. ; in this way, these forms become analo- 
gous to those of the second Perf. These participles either lengthen a and e into 
77, e. g. PefSap-ndos, burdened (from BAPEH), Ketcopiqws, satisfied (from nopi-vvvfii), 
KeKOTrjws, enraged (from kot£w), rerirjcis, troubled (from TIEfl), tetXtjws, enduring 
(from TAAH), KeKacp-nws, gasping for breath (from KA$En), KeKfirjas, wearied (from 
Ka/AVto), 7reTTTT]u>s (from TTTr,<Tcroi>, to shrink through fear), re&vncas, K£kt7]6ti, Ksx a ' 
D7]u)s (from x a ' l P a ) i — or ^ey retain, though more seldom, the stem-vowel without 
change, e. g. fie/Satis (from fiatvco, BAH), inyeyav7a (from yiyvo/icu, TAD.), Seddws 
(from 5t5a<TKa>, AAA), ire<pvvia (from <pvu), ecrrdws (from i<rTi}fu, 2TAX1), fie pads 
(with fiefiacbs and fiefiaores from MAO). The accented of the oblique cases 
can, in the first instance, according to the necessities of the verse, be lengthened 
into w, hence re^vrjoros and -wtos, re&vr)OTa and -Sir a, KeKfirjOTa and -wto ; but 
when the Nom. has a short penult, a is always used (except in earadYos), e. g. 
fiefiawros. The ending -as, formed by contraction, is resolved by e in ireirreuTa 
(from iriirrw), reSbvewri, and according to the necessities of the verse, e can be 
lengthened into et, e. g. re&i/eiwros. The feminine form -vera, is found only in 
fiefiao-a, Od. v, 14 ; in some feminine forms, the antepenult, which properly would 
be long, is shortened on account of the verse, e.g. apdpvTa (Fern, of ap-npds from 
apapi<Tita>), fiefiaicvTa (of fi€fir}KCt>s, from firjicdofiai.), re^rd\v7a (of refrnXcvs, from 
ftoAAw), AeAa/cuTa (of XeXrjKws, from Acmttcw). ireira&vut (from 7racrxco). 

Remark 1. The form resolved by e, in the Ionic dialect, has become the 
permanent one with some participles, e. g. iarews; so Te£h/ecfo (never tc&vws) 
and Te&j/7]Kc6s from refrvnKa, remains even in the Attic dialect. In these forms, 
the a> remains through all the cases, e. g. 

ecrrews, eareuaa, ecrredes, Gen. earearos, -d>ar]s 
renews, re&ve&ffa, re&vews, Gen. Te&ve&Tos, -uxtt]s. 

Be&7)Ka and rirXriKa never have these forms. Comp. § 193, Rem. 3. 

14. Some verbs, which in the stem of the Pres. have the diphthong eu, 
shorten it in the Epic and poetic dialect into v. in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and 
in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. 

vevfrofiai, to ask, ireirva- fiat ; rrevw, to shake, Mid. and Pass, to hasten, ea-av- 

fiat, first Aor. Pass, icravdr-nv: revxo) (poet.), paro, Perf. rervyfiai, Aor. 

iTvx&V "'i (pevyw, to flee, Perf. irecpvyfievos. 

Rem. 2. Xe'co (formed from x^ w i X e " w )> to pour out, follows the analogy of 
these verbs, in the forms Kexi>Ka, Ke'xfyxai, ix"^V v ; these forms have been trans- 
ferred to the Common language also (§ 154, Rem. 1). Contrary to the analogy 



$ 224. CONJUGATION IN -fit. 269 

just stated, the v is long in the Homeric form ir4irvvfj.ai from irvsw {icviFw), to 
blow. 

Eem. 3. In Homer, Od. <r, 238, the third Pers. Opt. Plup. \e\vro instead of 
\e\viTo is found, according to the analogy of irriyvvTo, Scuvvto. 

Eem. 4. The Homeric Perfects aKaxvp-evos, aAaA^ej/os, apripe/xevos, iAr)\dp.<z- 
vos. andxyoSah aAdATjo-3-oi, have the accentuation of the Pres. 

§ 224. Conjugation in -jxl. 

1. On the lengthened form of the second Pers. Tlfrnofra, Sidoiofta, see § 220, 
2; on the Iterative forms in -o-Koy, see § 221 ; on the Inf. forms in -/j.evai, -jue/, 
see § 220, 18. 

2. In the Epic, Ion., and Dor. writers, some verbs in -fit in the second and 
third Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf, frequently have the contracted forms of verbs 
in -ew and -o« (§ 172, Eem. 8), e. g. t&zis, r&e?, di$o?s, StSo?, eVfSrei, iSiSovs, 
idldov, 'lei ; — contracted forms of 'Io-t7)/j.i are very rare, e. g. Io-tS instead of 
icn-Tjcn, Her. 4, 103. In the second Aor. Opt. Mid. the Ionic writers have the 
resolved form &eolfj.T)v, as if from 0EX1, e. g. irpos&eoiTo, irpos&4oio-&e. 

3. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -v/ju form an Opt., not only in the Mid., as 
sometimes in Attic writers, e. g. Saivvro, E. a, 665. (comp. AcAuto, § 223, Eem. 
3), from Satpv/xai, but also in the Act., e. g. e/cSS^ey (instead of e/cSuf?7 i uej') from 
e/cSucw, <pvrj (instead of (pvirj) from <£ua>; so <p&?o, <£&?to Opt. of £<p&iin)v from 

4. The third Pers. PI. Impf. and second Aor. in -e-ffav, -t\-oolv, -o-<rav, -u-ffav 
-v-crav, are abridged in the Epic and Dor. dialects into -ei/, -dv, -ov, -iiv, e. g. 
erifrei/ instead of iTi&e<rav, efrev, 3-eV instead of e&e<rav ; eo-Tav, gtcLv instead of 
€0-TT}<rav, <p&av instead of e<p&7]<rav, e.Bav, $du instead of %$T\aa.v\ ediSov, StSov 
instead of iSiSoo-av, eSov, dou instead of eSoaau ; e(pvv instead of zcpixrav. 

5. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Imp. Act. has in Horn, the common form 
i'o-TTj, but II. i, 202. Ka&lo-Ta ; Trori&ei in Theoc. instead of Trorlfres or irpSs&ts 
from TI0EH. — In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and second Aor. Mid. Imp., 
Homer rejects the a and admits the uncontracted form even when it could be 
contracted, e. g. Saiwo, fidpvao, <pdo, avu&eo, ev&eo. — In the Ion. dialect, the first 
o of the ending -aaai. second Pers. Mid. or Pass., is changed into e, after the 
rejection of the cr, e. g. tiricrr ecu, Suvecu, instead of iirlo-Tao-ai, dvvacrai) hence 
the contracted forms iTr(<rrrj in the Ion. poets, and also Svurj (§ 172, 2) in the 
Tragedians. 

6. The short stem-vowel is sometimes lengthened before personal-endings 
beginning with p. and y, according to the demand of the measure, e. g. r&riixe- 
vos ; SiSovvai ; so also MSooSn, '{\.r}&i instead of 'l\a&i. 

7. The third Pers. Sing. Subj. has often in the Epic dialect the ending -<ti 
(§ 220, 4), e. g. 8£<ri and Swricri (instead of S£), jue&fyc*. 

8. The contracted Subj. of verbs with the characteristic a and e, is sometimes 
resolved by e in the second Aor., Epic dialect, and regularly in the Ion. 

(a) Verbs in -a (Xcrrrifit) : — 

(toTa-* ?<ttw Ion. to-T€-<a, iV-re-ps, iCTTe-Wjuev, -e-7/Te, -£-uai 
(<TtcJ-) (Ttu " crTe-w, cri-ris, are-w/xev, etc. 

23*' 



270 



DIALECTS. 



f$224 



Remark 1. So also in Herod.: irpoeariaTs and eo-reaoi, iarews, instead of 
•cfam, -acis, Gen. loTeah-oy, Neut. icrreus, Fern, eorewcra. So also in the Att 
renews (with Tefrvrjudtis), Te&veaxra, re&vews, Gen. Te&veuros. 

(b) Verbs in e (-rid-Ti^i) : — 

Tifrw Ion. Ti^e-O), Tl&4-T)S, Tl&e-WIJLZV, -€-7JT€, -i-uai 

Ti^SofxaL " T&i-ufJ.cu, ri&e-r), etc. 

<&« " &e-co, i^e-r^s, fre-wfAev, etc. 
&£>/Aai " bi-oofxai, etc. 

Rem. 2. Here also the two Aorists of the Pass, of all verbs are like th& 
verb Ti^r)fj.i, e. g. 

tvttu), -fjs Ion. Tvireca, -eys, -ea/mey, -eriTe 

Sa,ua>, -ps " 8a/J.4a, -4rjs, -ew/jiev, -erjre 

evpe&a, -fjs " eupe&ea>, -e^s, etc. 

(c) Verbs in o (SiSw^t) ; the contracted second Aor. Subj. is "esolved in 
Homer by means of a, e. g. Sdwai instead of 8w<n. 

9. In the Subj. second Aor., Homer uses the following forms, according to 
the nature of the verse : — 





Contracted, 


Resolved and lengthened forms, 


Sing. 1. 


CTW 


o"rea>, (TTeicc, /3eiO£U» 


2. 


CTrjs 


arrjris 


3. 


(Try 


<TT->]7), i/xl3rjr), <?%, (pfr/]r] 


Dual. 


(TTrjTOV 


TrapcrTTieTov 


Plur. 1. 


CTUfiet/ 


(TTewfj-ev (dissyllable) (TTetofJ.€V, Karafieloiiev 


2. 


(TTTJTe 


(TTTjeTe 


3. 


(TT(t)Gl{v) 


(Trea>cri(y), irepiaTrjcacri, 11. p, 95. 


Sing. 1. 


&a 


&ew, 3-eioj, 8ap.ei(a 


2. 


bits 


beys, fr-hys, and &elrjs 


3. 


a$ 


Srer), 3-77??, avi)r], and /xcfreir) 


Dual. 


&7JT0V 


S-eieTov 


Plur. 1. 


frufAev 


frewfAev, SeiojAev 


2. 


&TJT€ 


da/xeiere 


3. 


&wcri(v) 


&4wcri{v), &€iwai(i/) 


Sing. 1. 


Ba 




2. 


8$s 




3. 


8$ 


8ct>r)(n(v) and 8d>r) 


Plur. 1. 


Swfiev 


SdlOfJLeV 


2. 


Sane 




3. 


8w(Tl(j/) 


8a>(f}(Ti(v) 



Rem. 3. The resolution by means of e is found in verbs with the stem- 
vowels o or c; the e is commonly lengthened, (a) into ei before an o sound, 
(b) into 7) before 77 in verbs with the stem-vowel a; (c) sometimes into et, some- 
times into 77 before rj, in verbs with the stem-vowel e. Verbs with the stem- 
vowel are resolved by 00. 

10. The Imiif. erid-Tjy, or commonly £tiSovv, has in the Ion. the form iri&ea 
(like eTeTvcpea Ion. instead of ireTvcpeii/, § 220, 8), eW&ees, -ee, etc. 

11. In Homer, a shortened form of the first Aor. iarr\(ra.v, is found, namely, 
eoraaav, they placed, II. /x, 56. Od. 7, 182. <r, 307 5 also eoTTjTe (with the variation 
&TT7jTe), II. 5, 243, 24G, instead of eVrdTe (eVT-qKaTe). 



H225, 226.J CONJUGATION IN -fXL. El/Xl, TO BE. El/U, TO GO. 27l 

12. In the third Pers. PI. Mid. or Pass, the v before the personal-endings -rat 
and -to is regularly changed, by the Ion. writers, into a (§ 220, 13), c. g. 

TtS-eaTcu, SiSSarcu, eSeinvvaTo Ion., instead of ri&evTcu, etc. 
But when an a precedes the v, the a is changed into e, and v into a, e. g. l(rreo.rat 
Ion., instead of 'iaravTai, larearo Ion., instead of 'lo-ravro. 

13. The third Pers. Sing, in the Doric is ~n : e. g. un-cm, rlSrr]Ti, §i5am, 5e//c- 
wTt, and the third Pers. PI. ends in -vn, e. g. /a-TaWi, Ttd-eVrt, SiSoVr*, Sei/c^iWi. 

14. The forms of the first Aor. Mid. e^KOLfx^v and iSuKa/xiju and the Part. 
KfrjKcLixevos are found in the Ion. and Dor. writers ; on the contrary, the Att. 
writers use here also, the forms of the second Aor. Mid. The remaining 
Modes, as also the Part. Sccitdfxeyos, are not found. 

15. From SiSovfu, Homer has a reduplicated Put. diddoa-ofieu and $i5a>o~eir. 



225. Ei>i ('E3-), :o be. 



PRESENT 



S. 1. 

9 



Indicative, 
efifii ^Eol., instead of itr-fil 
ia-ai Epic, also Eur. Hel. 1250. 

eh Ion. 
evri Dor. 

elfieu Epic and Ion. 
icr4 regular 
ea<ri(v) Epic and Ion., evri Dor. 



Inf. efievcu, efx.fx.evai, e/xev, efxjxev Epic 
^Ifxev or tffx.es, elfxev or elfies Dor. 



Subjunctive. 

1. eta Ep. and Ion. fxereita Ep. 

2. erjs Ion. 

3. ey, ij)cri(v), ycn(v), efy Epic, e?? 
Ep. and Ion. 

PI. ewfxev, eVre, iWi Ep. and Ion. 



Imperative. 
S. 2. eWo JEol. and Epic 
P. 3. eovrwv Ion. 



Participle, 
ec&v, eovcra, iov Ep. and Ion. 



IMPERFECT. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



la (comp. irlSta), tfa, eov, IVkoi> Epic and Ion. 
er)(T&a Epic, las Ion. 

IV Ep. and Ion. tfrjv, l\ev, eo-Ke(v), Ep., tfs Dor. 
Tj'trTT]!/ Epic 

^uej/ or -f] fx.es, elfxev or elfj.es Dor. 
eare Ion. 

eVaz/ (eireaav) Epic and Ion. 5 etsro (instead of 
rjUTo) Od. v, 106. 



Optative. 

eois 

eoi Epic and Ion. 



e?Te Epic 
elev Epic 



.Firf. effofxai. and eatrofiai, etc. Epic, according to the necessities of the verse, 
2. eVeca. 3. ecrerai, eVerrai. 



§ 226. ET/xt ('I-), to go. 

Pres. Ind. S. 2. eTcrS-a Epic, e?s Ion. Subj. Sing. 2. Pers. 'tyo-fra Epic 

/n£ 'ijxevai, ffxev Epic 

imjo/] The?, S. 1. f/ia (and pW) Epic and Ion., ^'i'oj/ Epic 

2. ^'tes (and yeis), Yes Epic 

3. ¥fie (and pet) Epic and Ion., rfie{v) Epic, ^e(v), fc(j') Epic 



272 DIALECTS. [§ 227 

P. 1. I rjofjiep 

3. ij'iov Epic, ij'iiray and ytrav Epic and Ion., Kaav Epic 
D. 3. fr^ Epic 
Opt. S. 3. foi Epic, Uir) II. t, 209. (eV and ei^ II. o, 82. a, 139. Od. |, 496 

come from ci/jlI}. 
Fut. and Aor. Mid. efooftai, eiVaTO, third Pers. Dual hicru<y£rr)v, II. o, 544. 



Verbs in -&>, which in the Pres., Perf., and second Aor. Act. and 
Mid., follow the analogy of Verbs in -p.i. 

$ 227. (1) Second Aor. Act. and Mid. 

In addition to the Aor. forms mentioned (§§ 191, 192), the poetic and 
especially the Epic dialect has the following : — 

A. The Characteristic is a Vowel. 

(a) Stem-Vowel a {ifrqv, BA-) : 

jSaAAw, to throw. Epic second Aor. Act. (BAA-, e/3A7?j/) ^vpL^X-nr-nv, Od. <p, 15, 
Inf. %v/j.fiA7]/xei/ai. (instead of -tjvcu), II. <p, 578 ; Epic second Aor. Mid. (e/3A7j- 
p.-r\v) '4fS\7)To, £v{xfi\7ivTo, II. £, 27, Inf. fiXricr&cu, Part. flXi]p.evos, Suhj. £vp.[iXr)- 
rai, p\-f)<ETai (instead of fiXri-nTcu), Od. p, 472, Opt. /BAetb (from BAE-, comp. 
TrifjL-KX-riiJLi), II. y, 288. Hence the Eut. fiAJitrofiai. 

yripdco, or ynpaa-Ka, to grow old, second Aor. third Pers. Sing, ey-hpa, II. p, 197, 
Kareyripa, Herod. 6, 72, Inf. (Att.) y-npavcu, Part. (Epic) y-npds. The d in 
iy-flpa, etc. is used instead of 77 on account of the preceding p. See didpda-Kw, 
§ 192, 1. 

KTeivcc, to hill, Epic and poet, second Aor. Act. (KTA-) '4kt6.v retains the short 
vowel ; thus, eKrap.ev, e/cTdre, third Pers. PL also eKTav instead of inTaacu/, 
Subj. kt£) (first Pers. PI. kt4co^v Epic), Opt. Krair/v, Inf. Krdvcu, (Epic KTdp.ev, 
Kra/xeuai), Part, tcrds; Epic second Aor. Mid. with Pass, sense, cbreVraTo, 
KrdoSai, KaraKTap-euos. 

ovTaa), to wound, Epic second Aor. Act. odra third Pers. Sing., Inf. ovrd/j-ei/at, 
ovrdp-ev (the a remains short as in Xktolv) ; Epic second Aor. Mid. ovTdfxeuos, 
wounded. 

jreXdfa, to approach, Epic second Aor. Mid. iTrXrjp.'nv, (Att. iirxdp-qv), 7tAtjto, 
ttXt)vto. 

n\7)&a) (7rip.7r\Tjp.i), to Jill, Epic second Aor. Mid. eirXrfTO and ttXtjto, ZirX-nvro 
also in Aristoph., who uses the following forms also : Imp. irAyjao, Part. ip.7rX'n- 
fievos, Opt. ep.TcX^p.'nv with the variation ip.TvXdp.7ju, as x/ 36 ' 7 ? from %p7}(aaj) and 
fiXeTo from i/3X-np,r]v (BAA-). 

TTTi]craoo, to shrink with fear, Epic second Aor. Act. (I1TA-) (eW^i/) KaTaTVTT\Tr\i 
third Pers. Dual. 

<pbdv(o, to come before, Epic second Aor. Mid. cp&dp.svos. 

Remark. From e/3-nv (fiaivw) are found in Homer the forms fiar-nu (third 
Pers. Dual) and vnepPaaav (third Pel's. PI.) with the short stem- vowel. 



$ 227.^ VERBS IN -CD LIKE VERBS IN -/>U. 273 

(b) Stem- Vowel e (&r0ip, 2BE-): 

AAA, Epic, stem of SiSaor/cw, to teach, second Aor. Act. (AAE-) iddrjv, I learned, 
Subj. Saw, Epic Saeico, Inf. Sa^vai, Epic da-fj/xevai. 

(c) Stem-Vowel :: 

<p£,i-va>, to consume and to vanish, Epic second Aor. Mid. icpSt/xriv, (pfriofrcu, <p&i' 
/ao/os, <p&lcr&a, 'P&Im/j.cu, Opt. (p^ifxrju, (pfrtTO. 

(d) Stem-Vowel o (^yiw, TNO-) : 

(3il3pcib(TK<ti, to eat, Epic second Aor. Act. efipwv. See § 161, 6. 
7rAww (Epic and Ion. secondary form of irhea), to sail, Epic second Aor. Act. 
eTrXwv, e7rA.w J uei', Part. irKcas, Gen. ttXwvtos. 

(e) Stem- Vowel v (edvv): 

uAvoo (poet.), to hear, Epic Imp. second Aor. Act. k\v&l, /cAure; and k4k\v&i, 

Ke/cAure (§ 219, 7). 
Kiw, to loose, Epic second Aor. Mid. A'jto, AiWo. 
ttv4w, to breathe, Epic second Aor. Mid. (I1NT-, from irveFw, irvevco) afinvvro 

instead of aviirvvro, to breathe again. 
oreva, to shake, Epic second Aor. Mid. icravfj.'nv, I strove, ecrcrvo, avro. 
Xe«, to pour out, Epic second Aor. Mid. (XT-, from x 6 '^* X 6 ^ w ) X^ yT0 > X"^ vos ' 



B. The Characteristic is a Consonant. 

aAAo^tat, to leap, Epic and second Aor. Mid. a\<ro, akro, iirdkfievos, iirtd\ixevos f 

Subj. oAijtch. 
apaptcTKco ('AP-), to Jit, Epic 'dpfAevos, fitted, 
yevro, to take, Epic, from F4\to, the Digamma being changed into y and the 

radical A before r into y (§ 203, B). 
yiyuoy-ai, to become, poet, eyevro, yivro. 
Sexo/xai, to take, Epic eSe/cTo, Inf. Se'x&at, Imp. 5e|o. The first Pers. Sing, 

ideyfMTju and the Part. Siypevos have, like the Perf. deSey/xai, the meaning to 

expect, await. 
eAeAi£a>» to w/uW, Epic eAeAi/CTO. 

iKveo/jLcu, to come, Epic f/cro, "kjasvos and 1lk(j.€vos, favorable. 
AEXX1, to Jte etoww, Epic iAey/xTju, eAe/cTo, to /ay one's self down (same sense as 

i\€^dfxr]j/), Imp. Ae|o. — Ae7«, to collect, to chouse, to count, Od. i, 335. £\ey/ji.i)p l 

I counted myself, Od. 5, 451. Ae/cro apibfiov, he counted the number. 
iwxivw, to soil, Epic (iidv&Tjv (third Pers. Dual, instead of ifj.idv-cr&'nu). 
uiffyo) (fxiyi/v/u), to mix, Epic [xikto. 

bpvvo) (6pi>v/xi), to excite, Epic S>pro, Inf. 6p&cu, Imp. opffo, t>p<reo, Part, opfievos. 
ird\\w, to brandish, Epic 7toAto, he sprang. 

irepfrw, to destroy, perdo. Homer uses irep&cu instead of irepfr-afrou. 
ITHrXl (irriyvvfii), to fix, Epic tt^kto, Karitrt\KTo. 



274 DIALECTS. [$ 228. 

$228. (2) Per/, and Plup. Act. (Comp. §§ 193, 194). 
(a) The Stem ends in a Vowel. 

yiyvofxai, to become; TErAA, Stem TA : Perf. (Sing, yeyova, -as, -e) Epic and 
poet, yeya.fj.ev, -are, -ddai{v), Inf. Epic yeydfiev, Part. poet, yeyus, yeywax, 
yeycas, Gen. yeyccros : — Plup. Epic inyeydrrfv. 

Baivcc, to go, Perf. /3eBr]Ka, BEBAA: Epic and poet. PI. f3ef3a.fj.ev, -are, -do-i(v), and 
Be/3dd(ri{v) ; third Pers. PL Subj. efxf3ef3a<ri (PI. Phaed. 252, e), Inf. f3ef3a.vai, 
Part. Epic f3ef3aas (also Attic prose f3ef3ws, Xen. Hell. 7. 2, 3), -via (f3ef3a><ra, 
PI. Phaed. 254, b), Gen. fiefiawros (Att. f3ef3uros) ; — Plup. ef3ef3a.fj.ev, -are, 
-aa'cw. 

Sei8a>, to fear ; besides the forms mentioned (§ 193). the following Epic forms 
are to be noted: Setdi/xev, SeiSn-e; Inf. deidi/xev instead of Sedievai; Imp. 
SeiStSn, define; — Plup. iSeidifiev, idsiSiaav. 

EpxofJ-ai, to come, Perf. Epic elX-fiXov&a instead of eXiiXv&a, PI. elX'f)Xov&uev. 

bvr)<TK<i), to die, Perf. reSrvrjKa, TE0NAA : PI. rebvdfxev, TeSvdre, reSrva<n(v), Imp. 
Te&va&i, Part. Te&vr)K.d>s, Te&vquvla, Te&vrjxSs or re&veds (re&vewcra. Demosth. 
40, 24), re&veas (Epic re&vr}cos, -cotos, -tjotos), Inf. reSrvavai (Aesch. reSrvavai 
from re&vaevai, Epic TeSrvdfxev, -dfxevai) : Plup. ere&vdcrav, Opt. re^va'ir\v. 

TAAfl, to endure (second Aor. erXrjv), Perf. TerXrjKa, TETAAA: Dual rerXdrov; 
PL TerXdfxev, TerXdre, reTXdai(v), Imp. TerXd&i, -area, etc., Subj. wanting, 
Inf. TerXavai (Epic rerXafxev), but Part. Epic rerXyjcos ; Plup. Dual ere-fXdrov, 
eTerX&TTjv, PL irerXajxev, ererXdre, ererXdaav, Opt. rerXairfV. 

MAil, to strive, Perf. /xe/xova; MEMAA : Epic /xe/xdfxev, -drov, -are, -ddai(f), Imp. 
fxefxaru), Pai't. fxe/xdws, Gen. fxe/xdu>7os and fj.ejxd.oTos, third Pers. PL Plup. 

Here belong the two participles of 
Bifipdo-Kw, to eat (second Aor. efipwv), Perf. BeBpccxa, poet. f3eBpws, Gen. -wtos; 
7rnrTO>, to ^/aZ/, ireTrrcoKa, Epic 7re7rrec6s, Att. poet. ireirTws. 

(b) The Stem ends in a Consonant. 

It is to be observed in respect to the formation, that when the consonant of 
the stem comes before a personal-ending beginning with t, the t is changed 
into 3-, and thus these forms assume the appearance of a Mid. form, e. g. 
vetfrw, to persuade, ireiroi&a, to trust, Epic Plup. iireTri&jxev, Imp. in Aeschyl- 

Eum. 602, TreTreioSri (instead of ireTria&i). 

Remark. Thus the Epic form Treiroa^re, stem I1EN0 with the variable o 
(nON0), instead of TreirouSfare from ird(rx<» '-, from ireirov^are by dropping the 
connecting vowel a, comes ireVo^Te; and hence as a Tau-mute before another 
Tau-mute is changed into c (§ 17, 5, comp. 'Hi-re = tare), ireirov&Te becomes 
ireTra va&e, and as v is dropped before a, ire-noo-re ; finally, this form, as has been 
Been, assumed the appearance of the Mid. form (&e) and so became ireirov&e. 



Perf. Ind. S. 

D.2. 

3. 



KeKpdya, -as, -e(v) (upafa, to bawl) Plup. eKenpayeiv, -eis, -ei 
neKpayaTov Kenpax^ov eKeupdyeiTOV etcexpaxSov 

nenpayarov fcenpax&ov eKeKpayeirrfv eKeKpdx&W 



$ 229.J VERBS IN -0) LIKE VERBS IN -/Xl. 275 

P. 1. KeKpayay-eu KsKpayfxev iKefcpdyeifxev iiceKpayfiey 

2. kg repay are Kenpax&e iKeupdyeire iictKpax&e 

3. KeKpayaaiiv) iKeKpayeierav, -effav 
Imp. KeKpax&h -dx&<>>, -ax^ e > etc - I nr "- i^xpayivai. Part. KeKpaydbs. 

So the Epic Perf. ai/a>7a with the sense of the Pres. I command, dvooyas, dvaye, 
PL duay/xey: Imp. dvceye and Sywx&i, dvcoyeTco and ai/ct>x&a>, dvcayere and 
& z/ co % & e ; Subj. dvwyiy, Inf. dvcayefxev ; Plup. r]va>yea, rjvcoyei ; Opt. ayafyots. 

iyeipco, to awaken, Perf. iyprjyopa (stem 'ErEP with the variable 0), Jam awalce; 
from this, Homer has the forms: Imp. iyp-fiyopfre instead of iypriySpare, Inf. 
iypriyop&at. (as if from iyp^yopfxai) and ey/rjjy^pfrcur^j/) instead of iyprjySpa- 
<xl{v) third Pers. PI. 

oTSa, I know, the regular forms o'tda/xei/, oiScrre, o'idaai(v) are found hut rarely in 
the Ion. and Att. writers (§ 195, 1), second Pers. oTSas in Horn, and Ion 
(rarely Att. § 195, 1). The form yd-fxev is Epic, Ion., and Doric. Inf. 'fi/xwai 
and ffi/j.ev Epic, Subj. tSe'cw Epic instead of et'Sw (Ion. ei5ea>), Part. j5u?a Epic 
and elBvTa. 

Plup. 1. Pers. Sing. fjSea (hence the Att. rfSt}) Epic instead of rjdeiv 

2. " " yeiSeis and ijdSrjs Epic instead of ijdeis 

3. " " f?et5ei and 776/877, #5ee(j/), Epic instead of r^Set; — fciSe, 

Herod. 
3. " PL icrav Epic instead of fjSecray. 
Eut. etSTjcw Epic and also efoofiai. 
ioiKa, lam like, Epic, eitcrcv (Dual), iiicrriv (Plup. Dual) ; hence in Plup. Mid. 
or Pass. ei'/cTo. 



$ 229. (3) Present and Imperfect. 

Finally, there are certain forms of the Pres. and Impf. mostly in the Epic 
dialect, which after the analogy of verbs in -fxi, take the personal-endings with- 
out the Mode-vowel. Thus : — 

duvca, to complete, in Theocritus: Impf. dvv-fi.es (instead of fjvvofiev), &vv-to (instead 

of ijvueTo). 
ravvoi, to stretch, to span, II. p, 393. rdvv-Tai (instead of ravverai). 
ipva, to draw, epvrai, ttpvTO, ipvro, epvao, pvcr&ai (§ 230). 
<revo3, to shake, Epic Pres. <revrai and (by variation) covtou, Imp. aovao and 

abridged <rov, cova&e, couirdw (to move one's self, to hasten). The Imp. has 

passed into the common colloquial language. 
$$(o, commonly ia&lw, to eat, Epic, Inf. ed/xevai. 
<pcpa>, to carry, Epic Imp. <pepre instead of (p^pere. 



276 DIALECTS. [j 230 



$ 230. Alphabetical List of Verbs in the Dialect* 
to be specially noted. 

kaua [dFd<a),to hurt, to deceive; Horn. Srrjvcu; the Att. Tragedians use the 
has the following forms : Aor. aaaa following forms : dWcs and do-<r&>, 
and a<ra ; Pres. Mid. darai, Aor. aaad- ?J|a, a£cu and ^£a, a£cu. 
\x-nv, Aor. Pass, ddadr-nv. Verb. Adj. dto> (Ep.), to hear, only Pres. and Impf 
aar6s (d-daros). aiov. Comp. eVa'/'w. 

kyaiopcu., Epic and Ion. prose (§ 164) d/cax'C a ' (Epic), to trouble, stem 'AXH, 
and aydo/jLai (Ep.), to be angry at, and second Aor. jjnaxov, Fut. d/tax^o-co, 
in the Pres. Epic also to grudge, to first Aor. y\K.dxr\aa ; Mid. d/axxiCoM« £ ! 
e?2V?/, Fut. aydao/xai ; Aor. r\y<x<rdpr\v. &xopcu or ^pi^cm, to 6e sao?, Aor. 

dydpw, to collect, Epic second Aor. Mid. rinaxopw (§219, 7) ; Perf. dicrixepai 
ayepoVTO, Part, dypopevos (§ 223, 11); (§ 219, 8, comp. dp-hpzixai, opcopepai) 
Plup. dynyeparo ; Aor. Pass, dyep&r/, and d/caxtyuo", third Pers. PI. d/cTjxe- 
third Pers. PI. ayep^ey; Epic Pres. 8<xtcu (§ 220, Rem. 2) and aK-nxearai, 
i)y epe&o/xcu (§ 162). Part. dfCTixtpevos and dxaxyfJ-evos, Inf. 

071/060?, to 6e ignorant, Ep. Aor. 'nyvoirjcre d/cdx^o-S-cu (§ 223, Rem. 4); Plup. 
(§ 207, I), ayuanraa-Ke (§ 205, 5). Epic aKax^aro. 

&yi/v/j.i, to break, Aor. Epic ?3|a instead dKaxp-evos (Epic), sharpened, pointed, 
of ia£a ; third Pers. PI. Aor. Pass. from 'AKH, acwo, instead of dtcdyixei'os 
ayev Epic instead of idyrjcrau. (§§ 19, Rem. 1, and 208, 2). The x 

&ya>, to /ead, Epic second Aor. Imp. comes from the Perf. Act. 

a|eTe, Inf. d\ep.€vtxi, d^e/xeu (§ 223, aKrideco, to neglect, Aor. a.Kide(Te(u}. 

10) ; first Aor. Mid. a£a.(T&e, d\avro. dxdopai, to wander about. Ep. Perf. d\d- 

dei'Sco (prose d'8a>), to S2??<7, Epic second Xrjpcu (§ 219, 8), aXaX-fipevos, dxdx-qv 
Aor. Imp. daVeo (§ 223, 10). 3-ai (§ 223, Rem. 4). 

de/pco (prose aipca), to raise, Epic first dxSaivco, to make increase, Epic Aor. 
Aor. Act. azipa, Mid. deipapr) v, Pass. 7?A.5a^e(i/). 

depSrnv ; Epic second Aor. Mid. dpo- dXe£w, to &eep o/fj Epic second Aor. 
p-qu from aipa ; Epic Plup. dccpro rjXaXKou (§ 219, 7), (from 'AAKH) 
instead of tfpro with the variable dXaXKe?v, dXaXtcwv ; Fut. dXaXK^aco. 
vowel, and transposition of the aug- dXeopai and dXevopai (Epic), to shun, 
ment ; Epic Pres. T)epe&opcu (§ 162). Aor. ? nXevdp-nv, Subj. dXerjTai, Opt. 

'AHMI, ('AE-.) to Wow; in Homer, are: dXecaro, Imp. dAeW&e, Inf. dAetW&a/ 
Part, dets, devjos; third Pers. Sing. and dXecur&ai (§ 223, 8). 
Impf. 07?, dei, Sidei fAEH) ; in the dA^tr/co), dAS-iV/cco (Ion. prose), to heal, 
other forms, the 17 remains contrary Fut. dA&e|o>, etc. 
to the analogy of riSripi (§ 224, 6): dAn-cuVo) (Epic and poet.), to sm, Fut. 
&r)Tov, dr\uai, di)pevai ; Mid. and Pass. dXiTrjcno ; Aor. ijXirov, dXLr6pr)U, aXi- 
d-npai, to blow, v6pevos teal dyixevos, recr^ai ; Perf. dXn-hpevos, sinful (§ 223, 
drenched with rain and beaten with the Rem. 4). 
wind; Impf. Mid. cnjTo. aXXopai, to spring, Epic second Aor. 

cuSopai and aldeopcu in Homer, to oe Mid. SAcro, etc. (§ 227, B). 

ashamed, to respect, Epic ald-^cropai, dXvKrew, to 6e zn trouble, Epic Perf. dAa- 
??5eV^-77v and rfieadp-qv. XvKT-npai (§ 219, 8). 

aiuvpi (Ep.), to take (instead of a'l'ppvpcu, dXixTKai (Ep.), to escape, aXv£w, ^'Au|o. 
§ 169, Rem. 1), only Pres. and Impf. aXcpaiva (Ep.), to find, Sec. Aor. dXcpeTu. 

alpeco, to take, Ion. Perf. dpaipr)Ka, dpai- dp-aprdveo, to miss, Epic Aor. jjpfiporov 
pnpai (§ 219, 8); Epic second Aor. (§§ 223, 11, and 208, 3). 
Mid. 7eVTo instead of eXero (§ 227, dp.irXa.Ki<TKca (Ep. and poet.), to err, Fut 
B). dfjLirXa\cq(T0i} ; Aor. ^fxivXaKov. 

tuaacc, Epic (d, but virai^i, II. <p, 126; dvSdi/cc (Ep., poet., and Ion.), to please, 
I) instead of acro-w, to rush, Ep. forms : Impf. kdvoavov (Herod.), i-fji/S. and 
#i'|a. Subj. dt|o), Part. d'i"|as ; Aor. Jjj/8. (Ep.) ; Aor. eaSoj/ (Herod.), aoo* 
Puss, iflx&yf (also in Plat.), Inf. dtx- (Ep.) ; Inf. d5el>; Perf. edSa; Fut 



J 230. j LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 277 

ad-fiffw. — Aug., § 219, 4, 5. In The- Mid. Trans., to lead, Zfaoa, ifiritrd- 

ocritus ed5e ; Ep. Aor. evador (§§ 219, ixt\v ; second Aor. Mid. ip-ho-ero, Imp. 

4, and 207, 3). iirifirja-eo (§ 223, 10). Ep. secondary 

uvnvo&e, to spring up, Ep. Perf. with form : fiifido-fruv, to stalk, strength- 

Att. Reduplication and the variable ened secondary form from $aiv<a ; 

o (§§ 219. 8, and 140, 4), from also fii/3a, fiifi&vTa, fiifiwo-a and (from 

'ANE©n. ' BIBHMI) &t$as; finally, Imp. /3d<rice, 

avrdco, to meet, Epic Vjvreov [§ 222. A and Inf. iirifiao-Ke/j.zi'. 

(2)J ; <svvavT-i\T-t]v (§ 222, Rem. 1). /3aAAw, to throw, Ep. second Aor. i$\-nv, 

avva, to complete, Epic Impf. in Theoc. i^X-n/x-qv [§ 227, A (a)], Eut. fix-hao- 

dvvp.es, dvxiTO (§ 229). p.ai ; Ep. Perf. PePoX-n/xai (used of the 

dvcoya (Ep. and poet. Perf), to command, mind) ; but $i$\r\\xai (of the body). 

dvwyp.ev, Imp. duaix^h etc. (§228); fiapeta (Ep.), to beheavy, fiefiap-ndbs (§ 223, 

Plup. Tjvwyea (§ 220, 8). In certain 13). 

forms this Perf. is changed into the f}efip<v&ois (Ep.), to eat, instead of £i- 

inflection of the Pres., e. g. third Pp&o'Kois. 

Pers. Sing, dvcioyei, Impf. r\vu>yov and fieo/nai and fieio/xai, I will go, will live, 

di/ooyov; Eut. avdc^co ; Aor. ijucc^a. Ep. Eut. 0677, fie6p.e(r&a (§ 223, 7). 

famvpdo) (Epic), to to&e away, Impf. fiidofxai (Ep.) instead of /> i(op.ai, to 

dir-nvpwv, -as, -a ; first Aor. Act. Part. jforce, i^Lr,craro, fiefi(r]K5. 

dirovpas ; first Aor. Mid. dirnvparo, Pi/3ptib<rKa, to eat, Ep. Aor. I'/Spwv [§ 227, 

Part, dirovpdfievos. A (d)] ; Perf. Part, fief3pws, -tiros 

airatpiaKa (Ep.), to deceive, Fut. diracprj- (§ 228). 

crw, second Aor. Act. tfivayov, Opt. /3Ac6a7c&> (Ep. and poet.), to 90, instead 

Mid. aird(poiTO. of juActJcr/cco (§ 18, 3), Aor. ep.oAov, 

airei\4co (Ep.), to threaten, aTveiX-hr-nv fioXeiy, jxoXuv (also X. An. 7. 1, 33, 

(§ 222, Rem. 1). /j.6\coo-iu) ; Perf. / ueV/8Aa>Ka( instead of 

a.ir6epo-e, an Ep. Aor., 7ie hurried off, fxefxeXcoKa) ; Eut. fiohovfiai. 

Subj. airoepa-n, Opt. diroepcreie. fSodw, to cry out, Ep. Aor. e/3axra instead 

dcttto), to j'om to, Ep. Aor. Pass. kd<p&-n, of ifiS-ncra (§ 205, 5). 

jfe// em. PovAofxai, to will, Ep. /3oAeTcu, fioAea&e 

%papi(TK(a (Ep.), tojfa, stem APil, first (§ 207, 4), irpo$4fiov\a, I prefer. 

Aor. ■jjpo'a, cipcrcu (§ 223, 6) ; first Aor. fipvxdop.ai, to roar, Ep. Perf. fiefipvxa, 

Pass. &pfrei' instead of rfpfrr)o-av ; sec- with the sense of the Pres. 

ond Aor. tfpapov (§ 219, 7; also In- Tafieco, to marry, Ep. Eut. yajueov ; Ep. 

trans, to 6e adapted, to please), more Eut. yap-ecrcreTai, II. j, 394, will give in 

usual than the first Aor. ; Perf. &pu- marriage. 

pa (Ion. dpypa) (§ 219, 8), I am fitted, ydvvfxai (Ep.), to 6e g7ac/, ydvvrai; Eut. 

Intrans., Ep. apapv?a (§ 223, 13), Perf. 7<wiWeTcu. 

Mid. or Pass, dpiipefxai, dpripepevos TAD,, Ep. Perf., ytya/xev, to have become, 

(§ 223, Rem. 4) ; Aor. dp/xevos, adapted etc. (§ 228). 

(§ 227, B). yiyaova Ep. and poet. Perf. with the 

'APAfl, apdo/.iai, to pray, Epic second sense of the Pres. to en/ owf; in Horn., 

Aor. apji/xevai, Od. %> 322. third Pers. Sing, yeyui/e (also with 

dpw\iai, to gain (§ 188, 1 ). the sense of the Aor.), Part. yzyw&s, 

'An, Ep., (a) to blow, see dr)p.i; (b) to Inf. yeycoi/efiw, Plup. iyeytopei. Erom 

s/eep, Aor. &ecra, &<rap.ev; (c) to saft's- the Perf. a Pres. has been formed of 

fy (also Intrans. to 6e satisfied), Inf. which there are in Horn. : Inf. 7670;- 

"ap-evai instead of dep-evai ; Eut. dcrco ; ye?*/, Impf. iyeyojvevv. 

Aor. cwra, &cracr&cu. Verb. Adj. daros, yelvop.ai (Ep.), to be born, to be produced, 

dros. Aor. Mid. to 6e^rf, to 6ear, Subj. 7et- 

BatVw, to walk, to go, Ep. forms : Perf. veat instead of yeivrjai. 

Pefia/xev, etc. (§ 228); second Aor. yivro, to seize (§ 227, B). 

Dual fidr-riv, third Pers. PI. virepfia- y-npdoo, to grow old, second Aor. iyfipa, 

cav (§ 227, Rem.), third Pers. PI. etc. [§ 227, A (a)]. 

i$av, fidv (§ 224, 4), Inf. /3^/xeuai, yodca (poet.), to wail, Ep. third Pers. PI. 

Subj. besides fiw, etc. : /3eia>, p-hy, /3ei- Aor. y6ov. 

opei/ (§ 224, 9); first Aor. Act. and Aaivvpa (Ep.), to entertain, to feed (in 

24 



278 DIALECTS. |j 230. 

stead of dair-uv/xi, § 169, Rem. 1), ere, to await (e. g. an attack, a wild 

Fut. Sato-ca ; Mid. daiw/xai, to feast, to beast), in the following forms : 5ex a ~ 

consume, second Pers. Sing. Impf. Iud. tcu instead of dexovrcu (§ 220, 13), 

5a ivv (Saivvo instead of etaivvao, II. fj., 147, Perf. Sedey/xai with the 

§ 224, 5), third Pers. Sing. Opt. dcu- sense of the Pres., Put. 5e8e|o,ua£, 

vvto instead of -viro, third Pers. PI. excipiam, second Aor. Mid. eSe/rro, 

Scuvvaro; Aor. iSaicrdixr/v. etc. (§ 227, B) ; Perf. Mid. SeSo/crj.ue'- 

Scuct:, Ep., (a) to divide (§ 164), Fut. vos, awaiting, harking, II. o, 730. 

5d<rofAcu; Aor. (also prose) edao-djxr]v; Seuco (instead of SeFw), Ep. instead of 

Yerf.Fa,ss.Seda<rixai,amdivided,broken, Seco, to want, from which come idevrj- 

deda.ia.Tai. ; (b) to burn, to inflame, Perf. <re, he wanted, dricrev, he was in want 

dedrje, he burnt; Mid. to burn, blaze, of; Mid. devo/xai, to be wanting, Fut. 

Intrans., second Aor. Subj. dd-nrai. devr)<ro/j.ai. 

SafLvdw and dd/xvyfu, Ep. secondary AIAHMI (AE-), Ep. and older Ionic- 
form of da/xdw, to subdue, from Att. (Xen.), secondary form of dew, 
which come third Pers. Sing. Pres. to bind, SiSe'acn (Xen. An. 5. 8, 24) ; 
da<xva ; third Pers. Sing. Impf. eddfxva Impf. 8i8r) instead of e5i'5?7, II. A, 105. 
and dd;xva, ddjxvacrice; second Pers. di£r)/j.ai (Ep. and Ion.), to seek; it re- 
Sing. Pres. Mid. dap-va; — dd/xurjcn, tains the 77 (contrary to § 170, 1, 
ddp.vaiJ.ai, etc. comp. 'AH MI) : 4Sl(tjto, i?'(r)VTO, di- 

dap&dvca, to sleep, Epic Aor. edpa&ov Crjcr&ca, dt,£'f]pevos (in Herod.) ; di(r)ai 

(§ 223, 11). (Horn.), d((eai (Theoc.) ; Fut. diftao- 

dareopai, Ep. secondary form, used in pat ; Aor. idi&o-dfA-nv. 

the Pres. and Impf., from daiopai, to AIHMI ( AIE-), of the Act. only ivdiea-av 

divide. (third Pers. PL Impf), II. c, 584, they 

AAXi (Ep. and poet.), (a) to teach (= drove away; Mid., to make one run, to 

Si5d<TKco), (b) to learn (= SiSdaKo/xai); make free, oftener to scare, to chase 

to (a) belong the Ep. second Aor. (specially with the Inf.), dievrai, II. 

dedae (Horn.), edae (Theoc. and $, 475, diecrfrai, II, p., 304, Subj. 

Apoll.); to (b) 5e5aws (Horn.), SeSa- di-nrai, dioovrai, Opt. dioiro (comp. 

acri (in other authors); Ep. second ri&oiro). 

Aor. Act. idd-nv, I learned [§ 227, A dice (Ep.), to fee, die, Seftie, diov, I fled. 

(b)], from which Ep. dahaopai, dedaf)- Sou7rea> (Ep.), to sound, Perf. 5e5ou7r<fTos ; 

/ca, dedarjpei/os. From the Perf. a Aor. edovirr](ra and eySouTTTjca (from 

new Ep. Pres. has been formed, SeSa- TAOTIl-, comp. tvtttco and Krvireea). 

aar&cu, Inf. Here belongs also the Suva/nat, to be able, second Pers. Ion. 

Ep. Fut. dr)co (I shall find, meet with), Sweat; Aor. Ep. edwdafrnv and idwrj- 

drjeis, df)opev, dyere (§ 223, 7). adpvv (§ 179, 2). 

SeWo (Ep.), & seemed, Aor. SoacrcraTo, Suco, to go in, to wrap up, Ep. dvpevai in- 

third Pers. Sing. Subj. dodcro-eTai stead of dvvai from e5w ; Ep. second 

(instead of -rjrai). Aor. Mid. dvaero, Suceo, Syor^eyos 

Sei'Soj, to fear, the Pres. occurs only in (§ 223, 10). 

the first Pers., Fut. deiaopai ; Aor. 'Eyeipca, to awake, Ep. Aor. eypero, he 

eSeia-a, Ep. eSSetaa (as is probable awoke, etc. (§ 223, 11); Ep. forms of 

originally edFeicra), Perf. Ep. deidouca Perf. iyprjyopa are eypr\yop8re, etc. 

instead of Se'Soi/ca, and SetSta Ep. (§ 228). From the Perf. has been 

instead of Se'Sia (§ 228). formed the Pres. iyprjyopowu, watch- 

deixviipi, to show, Ion. (AEK) 5e'|a>, ede£a, ing, Od. v, 6, as if from iyp-nyopdw. 

etc.; Mid. deUvvpai in the Ep. dialect e8&> and eVd-w (Ep.), to eat (= eVd-uo), 

has also the sense, to //reef, to welcome, Inf. edpevai (§ 229) ; Impf. eSoi/ and 

to rfn'/it to ; so also in the Perf. del- edecrxov ; Perf. id-ndus ; Perf. Mid. or 

deypai with the sense of the Pres., Pass. iSrjBorai. 

deidexarat. third Pers. PI. ; Plup. dei- 'E0n, from which come the Ep. e&wis, 

Se/cro, to welcome, deidexa.ro. ivont, accustomed, and the Perf. efa&a 

depxopai, to see, Ep. second Aor. edpaxou (§ 140, Rem. 3). 

(§ 223, 11). 'EIAH, 'IAH, Aor. eldou, I saw, Ep. ?Sov, 

$4xo/j.ai, to receive, Ion. Se/co/wu; in Horn. Inf. Ideeiu, Subj. i'SwiUi ; Ep. Pres 

this verb signifies also, to take, excip- Mid. etSeTai, ?'f seems, el86p.evos, ap- 



$ 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 279 

pearing, making like; Fut. eftrojttcu ; eVeVw or tvviirco (Ep.), to say, to tell) 

first Aor. eladfiw and ieiad/xrjv, elad- Impf. with the sense of the Aor. 

fxevos and ieHrd/xei/os (§ 219, 4) ; sec- eueirov, evueirou, Aor. evurirov (comp. 

ond Aor. 186/xrjy, I saw. ea-TrS/xrjv from eVo/xcu), Imp. zviarirts, 

SIKH, third Pers. Sing. Impf. el/ce, it Subj. ii/io-rra, Opt. iylairoi/j.i, Inf. eViC- 

appeared, II. c, 520 ; Perf. tWa, I am irtlv, Put. eVtyco and ivio"irr)o~oo. 

like, Ep. third Pers. Dual %'Cktov and ivyvo&a, Ep. Perf. from 'EN@n or 'EN- 

Plup. 4iKT7]v (§ 228), Part, eoi/cws and E©n with the sense of the Pres. and 

II. (p, 254. ei/ccos, ei/cincc and II. <r, 418. Impf, 4Tr<Eu-f)vo&e, to sit on, II. j8, 219. 

eloiKvTcu ; Ep. Plup. Mid. %'Lkto and to fre on, II. Cer. 280. Comp. b.vi]vo' 

e'iKTo, it was like. fre above. 

tlAvco (Ep.), to cove?-, envelop, etAu<ro>, iviirru (Ep.), to chide, second Aor. eV- 

€t\\>ixai, third Pers. PI. elAvarai; from evlirov, -hv-TTrairep (§ 219, 7). 

eAuw comes Aor. Pass. 4\voSt)v. eWujtu, to clothe, Ep. and Ion. eiVu/xf ; 

e?Aa>, to press, to drive, from which in Ep. Put. eWco ; Aor. eWa and eVa, 

Horn, only ciXofxevos ; in the same kaad^v, eeWaTo, ccracd-at ; Perf. 

author, etAe'a, eetAeov ; the rest are effect, efecu (and eWcu), elrcu, etc., 

from 5 EA, e. g. eAa"cw, Inf. eAcrat and el/xevos : second Pers. Plup. eWo, 

ie\(rcu, Part. eAcras (§ 223, 6) ; eeAjuai, third Pers tWo and eeffro, third Pers. 

eeAjUeVos ; second Aor. Pass. id\r\v Dual eVdij> , third Pers. PL efaro ; — 

(from eAAa>), third Pers. PL ^Ae^, on leWa-ro, eWro, comp. § 219, 4. 

&A7]fcu and aXrifiv/ai, aAeis. eouca, lam like, § 228. Comp. 'EIKft. 

elfj.i, to be, § 225. eVa'/'cu, to understand, Aor. iirififfa (i), 

tl/u, to go, § 226. Herod, and Apollon. (§ 130, Rem. 1 ) ; 

etpyo, to shut out, Ep. Impf. epya&ov the poet, aiw is found only in Pres. 

(§ 162). Comp. ep70j. and Impf. 

elpojxat. (Ep. and Ion.), to ask, Impf. iiravpio-Ko/j.ai (Ep. and poet.), to receive 

e\p6/xr}v ; Fut. ilp-fiaofiai ; second Aor. advantage or injury from a thing, Aor. 

T}p6fJLr]V, Subj. epw/jLt&a, Opt. epoiro, iirr)vp6/xr)j/, iiravpeofirai (first Aor. en^u- 

Inf. epeofrat in Horn, with the accent pa^*/ in Aeschyl. and in the later 

of the Pres. ; — Ep. secondary forms writers ); Put. iTravp^ao/xai. Of the 

of the Pres. (a) ipeofxai, ipeear&cu; Act. in the sense to touch, to injure, 

Impf. ipeovro; (b) e'peco, Subj. ipecb- Homer uses, second Aor. Subj. eVau- 

fxev, Opt. ipioifxeu, Part, epeW. py, Inf. iiravpeTv, iiravpeixev. 

'EIPTMI, see ipvw. i-jriaTa/xai, to know, second Pers. eTriVn?, 

eipw, Ep. and Ion., sero, to arrange in a Ion. poet. 

row, to string, first Aor. i£eipas, exse- eVco, as a simple, in Act. only Ep. in 

rens, Herod. 3, 87 ; Ep. Perf. Mid. or the sense tracto aliquid, to take care of 

Pass, eepficu, iepfi4uos (in Herod, ep- (II. (, 321); generally used as a 

fievos), Plup. eepTO. compound, e. g. irepieira:, die-iru, etc., 

etpw, to say, Pres. only Ep., Put. ep<2, second Aor. Act. iairov instead of 

Ep. epe'eo. e<r-e7roy, in Homer iirea-rrov, iirio-ireTv, 

eftra, Ep. Aor., I placed, from the stem emo-nAv ; Put. e\|/&>, Ep. icptyeis ; Mid. 

'EA- (comp. sed-eo), Opt. av6<rai(j.i, also as a simple, generally signifying 

Imp. eTaov, Part. e<ras (avercu/Tes ; to follow ; Impf. Ep. eir6/j.r]i/ instead 

vireiffas, Her. 3, 126. 6, 103), Inf. icpecr- of e'nr6fxr]v ; Eut. fyo[xai ; second Aor. 

<rof, Aor. Mid. ecrd/xrjv and eeWaTO, Mid. eo-nSfxWi cnrea&cu, crnov (eVicT- 

Part. i<pe<ro-d/xcvos (Her. 1, 66. dcrd/xe- ttov); Ep. forms: o-7re?o, ea-ireaSfw, 

voi), Imp. e<peao~cu ; Put. i<pecrcreo-&ai. Subj. eo~ira)/j.a.i, Opt. ccnvoi/j.-nu, Inf. 

iXavvca, to drive, Pres. e'Aaco, Ep. e'A<ta ; eo-Tre'cd-at and (nrecr&cu, Part. !er7r<fyie- 

Impf. Ep. eAcoj/ ; Fut. Ep. i\6axri vos. Herodot. has from irepUiru) also 

instead of £\S>o-i; Ep. Perf. e'A^jAa- irepiecp&TJvcu and 7repte^/eo'3ai instead 

/uej/os (§ 223, Rem. 4), third Pers. of Tripiecp^ffeoSfai. 

Sing. Plup. eATjAaSoTo (§ 220, Rem. ep7a>, commonly iepya, Ep., instead of 

2) ; Ion. Perf. iK^Kao-jxai and Aor. e2p7«, to s/iw£ in and shut out, with the 

Pass. T]\do-3rnv. secondary forms iepyvv/xi, ipydfou, 

eAeAi£a>, to wAiW, Ep. second Aor. Mid. iepyd&w, Aor. ep|a; Perf. Mid. or 

e'Ae'Ai/cro (§ 227, B). Pass. tepy/j.ai, third Pers. PL epxarau 



280 DIALECTS. [* 23^- 

third Pers. PL Plup. Upxo.ro and Attic Redup.) ; Ep. Plup. iirc&xaro 
epxa.ro ; Aor. Pass, ipx&eis. they were closed, II. /x, 340. 

epSoo and pefa (Ep.), to do, Fut. pe£«, t H/«m, to sit, eartu, earo (Ion.), and e"a- 
Aor. eppe^a and epe£a, or ep£a>, ep|a ; rai, e'/aro Ep., instead of ijvrai, fjvro. 
Perf. 4opya, Plup. iapyeiv (§ 140, ^uw (Ep.), to sink, Perf. vTrefxvf}fxvKe, to 
Rem. 3), Perf. Mid. or Pass, 4epy/x4- let the head sink, II. x-> 491. T lie 
vos, Aor. Pass, pex^is, fex&wcu. above form has the Att. reduplication 

epeiSco, to prop, Ep. Perf. iorfpedarai ifx-rjfxvKe (^ 219, 8), and is strength- 
(§219,8). enedby v (§ 208, 5). 

epeiVco (poet, and prose), to throw down, ©4po/xai (Ep.), to warm one's self, Fut. 
Ep. Plup. ipepiirro (§ 219, 8). &4p<TOfxai (§ 223, 6): Aor. i&4pyv, 

iptfiaiva (Ep.), to fight, Aor. Mid. epiST?- Subj. d-epew. 

(rao-a-cu. (S-TjXew (Ep. and poet.), to sprout, Fut. 

e/>££&>, to j^Ai, Ep. 4pt£ofxai, Perf. Mid. S^Atjctw, etc. ; Perf. re^Aa (red-dAum 
ipr)pio-/Aai (§ 219, 8). Ep. § 223, 13) ; second Aor. 4&aAov. 

eppca, to wander about, Ep. Aor. epcrcu, to ©Hnft (Ep.), to staw, Perf. TeSuriwa ; 
hurry away (§ 223, 6). Plup. erefriiirea] second Aor. (from 

£pv&a,iv<a (poet.), to redden, Fut. ipv&rjcrcc. TA<i>,Q) eracpov. 

ipvKco, to keep off, Ep. second Aor. Act. SrvrjaKw, to die, Perf. reSrvnica, PL re&va- 
Tipvuaicov, ipvKaKeeu/ (§ 219, 7). juey, etc. (§ 228). 

epuco and etpyco (Ion. and Ep.), to c?raw, frpd!>crK<a (Ep., Ion., and poet.), to spring, 
Fut. ipvcrci) (o'er) and Ep. ipvovcri; Aor. e&opov ; Fut. &opovfxai, Ep. &ope- 
Aor. epv<ra (<r<r) and e'/pvea; Fut. o/iat; Perf. rebopa. See § 161,14. 
Mid. ipvo-0/j.cu and Ep. epvecr&cu ; Aor. 'iSpoco (Ion.), to sweat, ISpwai, idpavres, 
4pvadj.i.T]u {era) and elpuad/x7]v ; Perf. iBpwcra, ISpwriv (§ 137, Rem. 1). 
Pass, third Pers. PL elpvarai, II. £, t'77^, to serco? (Ep. and Ion.), Aor. eV<a : 
75, and Plup. eipvvro, II. (T, 69. eipu- Fut. V», hut Od. <r, 265, di/eVet ; in 
oto, II. 0, 654 (of ships drawn to the Ep. and Ion. dialects, there are 
land, long in the Arsis) ; Plup. several forms from the theme 'ID., 
Mid. eipuTo (epderyavov, had drawn the e. g. dz/fet instead of avi-ncri Her., 
sword, v long in the Arsis), Od. Xi £vviov instead of £vvieorav Horn., 4fxe- 
90. — Secondly, the Mid. in Horn. rtero and fxep.sTifx.4vos Herod., instead 
and poet, takes the sense to save, to of fxe&Uro, fxe&6ifx4vos. 



ir (from danger) ; in this sense lK.v4ofj.ai, to conne, Ep. Pres. "ku> and 
there are the following forms : 4pvao, Impf. Tkov; Ep. Aor. l£ov (§ 223, 10) 
dpvro and epvro, which are to be arid Tkto, etc. (§ 227, B). 
regarded as syncopated forms of the 'IAHM1 (instead of 'IAA). to be merciful 
Impf. — The two following Mid. Of the Act, only the Ep. Imp. 'Ixy&t, 
secondary forms have also the sense be merciful (in addresses to the gods) 
of to guard: (a) Ep. 'EUTMI, Inf. instead of 1\o&i ($ 224, 6), as in 
eipvfxevai, Hes. Opp. 816, Mid. to Theoc. 15, 143, Subj. Ep. l\r)Kr)(ri ; 
guard, e'lpvarai instead of e'lpvvrai, Plup. Opt. Ep. iAtjkoi ; Mid. poet. 
Inf. epvo-&ai, e'tpvcr&cu ; — (b) Ep., r t\a/xai, to appease. 
poet, and, though very rare, Attic taafxi (Dor.), to know, Icr-ns, 'io-olti, foafxev, 
prose pvofxai, Inf. pvcr&ai instead of Part. 'iaas. 

pveabai; Impf. third Pers. Sing. Kaivvfxai (Ep.) instead of Kaiovvfxai 
epvro, was watched, Hesiod. Th. 304, (§ 169, Rem. 1) from the stem KAA, 
third Pers. PL pvar instead of ipvov- to excel, Perf. K4icao-fxai ; Plup. e/ce- 
ro (they protected) ; Aor. eppvo-dfXTjv ttdcrfx-qv. 

and Ep. pvcrdfxrjv (but II. 0, 29. pverd- Kaioo, to burn, Ep. Aor. tK-na (Trag. 
fxr]v). enea), Subj. K-hofxsv instead of -auev, 

epxofxcu, to go, Ep. Perf. €l\r)\ov&a, first Opt. third Pers. Sing. K-fjai, third 
Pers. PL elx-liAov&fxev] Epic Aor. Pers. PL Kfaiev, Inf. kyjcu (in the 
i]Av&ov. Odyss. also tce7ai, nelofxev, Keiavres) : 

€X«? to have, Ep. Aor. 4o-x&ov, cx4&ov Aor. Mid. eK-qd/x-nv, K-ndfxevos (in the 
and icrxov (\ 162) ; Ep. Perf. ox^Ka Odyss. Keid/xevos, neiavro) ; second 
(for oKwxa., k and % being trans- Aor. Act. iicdrjv (I burned, In trans,), 
posed, and the word having the Inf. /ca^erni. 






9 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 281 

<d/xuo, to weary one's self, Ep. KeKfxrjus, KAdfa, to sound, Ep. Perf. with the sense 
-wtos, -6tos (§ 223, 13), Ep. second of the Pres. KtKX-nya, KeKX-nyds, PI. 
Aor. Subj. KeKOL/xco (§ 219, 7). KeKXriyovres (as if from /ce/cA^yco) 5 

K€?/j.cu, to lie, in Horn. Keovrai, as if from Aor. eKXdyov. 

Keofxai ; Ep. and Ion. Keerai, Ke'ecd-cu; /cAeico, to shut, Ep. and Ion., KXrjiu, Aor. 
second Pers. Sing. Ke7<rcu and Ke?c«, eKXyfio-a (t), KX-nlaar, Perf. Mid. or 
third Pers. PI. Kelvrai and Ep. xeia- Pass. KeKXififiai (third Pers. PI. /ce/cAe- 
tcu and (Ion.) Kearai, Snbj.Kewfj.ai, arrai instead of KeKX-fjarai) ; Aor. Pass, 
third Pers. Sing. Kyrai ; Impf. /cearo iKX-rjia^-nv ; from the Ion. kAtj'/'w come 
and Keiwro Ep. instead of e/cen/To; the forms often found in the Att. 
KeoTceTo ; Ep. Fut. /ceico, /cew, Keicov, writers, viz. kXtjco, eKXrjaa, KeKXrifxai. 
k£wv, KeUjxev. kX4u (Ep.), to celebrate, of which only 

Kdpco, to shear off, cut off, Ep. Kep<rw, KXeofiai, Impf. 4kx4o instead of e/cAeeo 
e/cepffa (§ 223, 6), but iKeipafx-qv. (§ 220, 10). 

KeXXoe, to drive, Ep. e/ceAcra (§ 223, 6). /cAuw (Ep.), to hear, Imp. KAue, KXvere ; 

KeXofiai (Ep. and poet.), to ur^e, Eut. second Aor. Imp. kXv&i, KAure; and 
Ke\rjcrofj.aL, first Aor. iKeXrio-dfj.T]v ; k4kXvSh., /ce/cAirre [§ 227, A (e)] ; the 
second Aor. iKeKXofx-nv. etc. (§ 223, Impf. %kXvov is used instead of the 
11). Ind. Pres. 

Kevreca (Ep.), to prick, stimulo, Aor ( kotttcc, to strike, second Perf. iceKoira in 
/ceWcu (§ 223, 6). Horn., instead of Ketco<pa. 

Kepdvviifxi, to mix, Ep. Kepdoo (Kepa>vras) Kopevvvfii, to satisfy, Ep. Eut. /copeco and 
and Kepaiu (Imp. /cepcue), Ktpvdco (i<ip- Kopicrca, Perf. KeK6pr}fiai, to which the 
vas, Impf. tKipva) and Kipinj/xi (Impf. Part. KeKop-q&s (§ 223, 13) in respect 
eKipv-n, Kipvds) ; Ep. Mid. Kepwvrai (as to its meaning belongs, 
if from Kepafxai) ; Impf. Kepowvro Ep. /cotc'co and Koreofxai (Ep.), to 6e angry, 
instead of iKepwvro from Kepdw. first Aor. Part. Korecras ; Perf. Part. 

KepSaiuw, to gain, in Ion. and later wri- KeKor-ndos (§ 223, 13) ; Mid. Eut. kotc- 
ters: e/ctpS^tra; KepZ4)o-eo-&ai and /cep- <ro,ucu (cc); Aor. iKoreo-dfxr]v (crcr). 
Sa.v4ofj.ev in Herod. /cpa(o>, to 6au?Z, en/ oitf, poet. Perf. /ce/epd- 

Keufrco (Ep.), to conceal, Eut. Kevaw, Aor. 7a, Keicpayfj,ev, etc. (§ 228) ; Eut. /ce- 
eicevo-a ; Perf. Ke'/cevd-a ; second Aor. Kpd^ofiai, Aristoph. 
£kv&ov, kv&ov, Subj. KeKv&co (§ 219, Kpaivca (Ep. and poet.), to complete, ac- 
7) ; Mid. only Pres. and Impf. complish, Ion. commonly Kpaiaivw, 

h rjdec, to make anxious, in the Act. only Impf. ixpaiaivov ; Ep. Eut. Kpavea: 
Ep. Eut. /ojStjo-co ; Perf. KeKrjda, I am Aor. eKprjva and Ep. eKp-^-qva, Imp. 
anxious ; Ep. Fut. Perf. KeKaS-f\o~ofj.ai, Kprjvov and Ep. Kp^vov, Inf. Kpr\vai 
II. fr, 353. and. Ep. Kp-qrjvai ; Ep. Perf. Pass. 

nib'vafj.ai, Ep. secondary form of <77ce8dV- KtKpdavTai (Eur. KeKpavrai) ; Ep. Fut. 
j/fjucu, to scatter, only Pres. and Impf. Mid.. Kpaviofiai. 

Kivvfxai (Ep.) instead of Kiveofxai, to stir KTeivw, to kill, Ep. Fut. urevea) (Ep. 
ewe's se//j to 6e moved, Pass. Kivv/xevos. Part. Kraveovra, KarraKTaviov(n{v) and 

Kipvdo) and Ktpvrjfii, Ep. secondary form KaTaKraveeaSe with the variable a ; 
of Kepdvvvfxi, to mix, from which comes Aor. Ep. and poet, eicravov ; Ep. 
the Part. Kipvds, Impf. iKipva and second Aor. Act. eKrav, etc. [§ 227, 
Kipj/77. A (a)] ; first Aor. Pass, third Pers. 

ffiX^w and Kixavofxai (Ep. and poet.), PI. eKTabev Ep., instead of e/crcftbj- 
to reac/i, meei wMA, Aor. eK/xov, Fut. ow. 

Kixho-ofxai, other forms not found in /cvpew, rarely /cupw (Ep. and poet.), to 
the Att. poets; but Ep. Impf. e/ct'xa- ./i«e/, to reach, Aor. eKvpaa (§ 223, 6), 
j/oj', second Pers. e/ax«s (from and more seldom iKvp-ncra, Fut. Kvpaa 
KIXE-) ; second Aor. Subj. «ix^ anc ^ an( ^ more seldom Kvp-^cru ; Perf. zce/cu- 
KixtM-i Opt- Kixeirjv, Inf. /ax^a^ p^/ca. 

Part. KiX e ' s an< ^ Mid. Kixyn-evos ; Aor. AayxdVw, fo partake, Ion. Fut. \d£ofj.ai. ; 
Mid. tKix'ho~a.TO. Ep. Aor. Subj. AeAax« (§ 219, 7), 

ria> (Ep.), to #0, only Pres. and Impf. Trans, to make partaker in the phrase 
The Part. kiwj/ is accented like ic6z/ ; &cwoVra 7rup<fc, to (7^ the dead the 
Aor. fxereKiadrov (§ 162). Ao?2or of fire, i. e. ?»a£e A»?i partake? 

2±% 



282 DIALECTS. [$ 230 

of; Perl x4xoyxa Ep., instead of MAri (Ep.), to strive for, Perf. with the 

etXTjxa [Od. A, 304. AfAoyx^ "'] • sense of the Pres., in Sing. fj.4fxova 

AAZTMAI (= \d(ou.cu. to take), Epic (comp. yeyovavrith TErAA), fj.4jj.aTov, 

iXa^vro. fj.4fj.afj.ev, etc. (§ 228). 

Kau^dvu, to receive, Ion. xdixi\/ofj.ai, AeAa- fxeipofiai (poet.), to obtain, Ep. efj.fj.ope 
fiyxa, x4Xa.fj.uai, XeXdu<p5ai, ixd/j,<pSrnv, third Pers. Sing. Perf. (and II. a, 
Xa/xTrreos: also Dor. XeXa$r)Ka, but 278), third Pers. Sing, second Aor. 
x4xd.fj.uai, XeXacp&ai : in Dramatists Act. (Augment, § 219, 6) ; Perf. Pass. 
AeA^uucu: Ep. Aor. AeAa/3eVdxu (§ 219, e'lfiaprai, it is determined (§ 123, 4). 
7). yueAw, commonly Impers. jtieAe*, & co?i 

Acw&dVw, Ep. oftener A-^d-co, to 6e hidden, cerns, Hay it to heart, Ep. Perf. ^^77- 
concealed; Ep. second Aor. Act. Ae, Part. fxefi-nXus ; Ep. Perf. Mid./ie,u- 
Subj. AeAa^-o) and Mid. XeXabofi-nv fiXerai and Plup. /j.4fj.fiXero instead of 
(§ 219, 7); Perf. Mid. x4Xa.ajj.ai. : in fj.efi-i]Xrirai, efxeuriX-nro, conip, fiXacr- 
Theoc. Xao'&riixev (= \7]o-&rjvcu) in- /cw ; vet these forms were more 
stead of Xa§4o-&ai : iiriX-fi&Q> and properly considered as a Pres. and 
eKX-f}$co, to caz/se to forget* Ep. Aor. Impf. 
eireX-naa; eKX4x5.§ov. fievoivdw, fievotveov, § 222, I, A (2). 

xdcrKco (Ep. and poet.), Aor. eXS.Kov, fx-nK.dojj.cu, to bleat, Ep. Perf. fj.4fj.7jKa with 
Ep. Perf. AeATj/ca (poet. AeAd/ca and the sense of the Pres., uefiaKvTa 
e/cAeAa/ca even in Demos.) with the (§ 223, 13); Aor. fiaK<av; irom the 
sense of the Pres. ; Ep. Part. AeA7j- Perf. the Impf. efj.4fj.r)Kov is formed. 
k6s, XeXaKvTa (§ 223, 13) ; Fut. XaK-fj- fiiaivw, to stain, Ep. second Aor. fxidv- 
0-o/j.ai; first Aor. poet. eXaK-nva, Ep. frnv (§ 227, B). 
Aor. Mid. XeXaKovro (§ 219, 7). fiiyvvfii, to mix, Ep. Aor. (Uikto (§ 227, 

AEXfi (Ep.), to cawse to lie down, eAe|a, B). 

iX€^d,a7]v, I laid myself down, I lay, I fj.vKaofj.ai, to roar, Ep. fj.4jj.vKa, Aor. 
restoc^Ep.Aor.eAey^Tjv.etc. (§ 227,B). e/j.vKoy. 

Xova, to wash, Ep. Aoew, Xov4oo, Impf. Natw, Ep. and poet., to efw;eZ7, first Aor. 
eXoveov, eXoeov: Aor. Inf. Xo4acrai, evaacra, I caused to dwell; Mid. with 
Part. AoeVcras; second Aor. Act. Pass. Aor., to settle down: vdo-ao/xai, 
eXoov, third Pers. Sing. Xoe Od. k direvao'crdij.'qv, evdoSrrjv. 
361, x6ov; Mid. Pres. Inf. Xoveo&cu. veiK4m (Ep., poet., and Ion.), to quarrel, 
and AoDcr^-at; Eut. Mid. Xo4o'o~ofj,ai; Put. veiK4aca , Aor. iveUeaa (§ 223, 
Aor. Mid. Inf. AoeVo-acrdcu; Part. 1). 

Xoecrcrdfievos ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. i/t^«, to zrasA, Pres. and Lnpfi; the other 
X4Xovfj.au tenses are formed from vI-xtm, which 

Xvca, to hose, Ep. second Aor. Mid. among the later writers came to be 
Auto, Xvvto [§ 227, A (e)] ; Ep. Plup. used in the Pres. and Impf. also; 
Opt. AeAO-ro (§ 224, 3). thus, Eut. vtyeo, Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

Maivouai, to rave (eK/xatva, to make veviuaai, poet. ; Aor. Pass. ev'upfrnv, 
raving, also Aor. e/x-nva, Arist. ; doubt- Hippocr. 

ful X. H. 3.4, 8) ; second Perf. fj.4fj.-r)- viao-ouai (Ep.), to go, Eut. vlaouai (the 
va (Soph.), / am ravnig (Theoc. 10, form veiao-ofj,ai is rejected). 
31. fj.efidv-nfj.ai) : the Put. is fj.avovfj.aL 'OAT2SOMAI (Ep.), Aor. o&vo-dfxrqv, to 
in Herod. (fiavrjaofiai in the later be angry, odvo-duevos ; Perf. 65a>dvo-fj,ai 
writers). with the sense of the Pres. (§219, 8). 

fiaiofiai (Ep.), to seek, Fut. fidcrofiai olda, to know, § 228. 

(iirifidcro-eTai) ; Aor. efj.ao-dfiri v. oXouai, to think; Ep. oXw, o'iw, o'iouai, 

fjjzvdrdvco, to learn, Fut. in Theoc. flawed- w16<j.t)v, oIolto ; Aor. Mid. b'iadfx-nv : 
fiat (like fj.axovfJ.ai). Aor. Pass. Mo-b-nv, b'La dels. 

fj.dpvafj.ai (Ep.), to fight, only Pres. and ovouai (Ep. and Ion.), to blame, uvocrai, 
Impf, like Svva/xai, but Opt. /xapvoi- third Pers. PI. ovovrai, Imp. ovoao ; 
fj.-nv, Od. A, 513. Impf. wvofi-nv, Opt. ovoifxrjv, bvono; 

uAxofiai, to contend, Epic fxa.x4ovTai, Fut. ovocrofxat : Aor. avoadixriv and 
fj.axe'iTai, /xax4oiTo, fxax4oivTO, Part. avoaSf-qv : Ep. ovvea&e (comp. ovX6fj.- 
fxaxeiSfievos and fiax^ovfievos : Ep. ei/os), II. e», 241, instead of ovecr^-* 
Fut. fj.axvo'oij.ai and ,uax4ao^.ai; Aor. and this instead of ovoaSe from 'ON-,- 
cuoxecra,iX7]j/. Ep. Aor. Mid. uvaro. 



f 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 283 

6 pace, to see, Ion. 6p4a>, Epic 6p6w, Impf. first Aor. eirepcra (§ 223, 6) ; second 
wpeov-j Ep. second Pers. Sing. Pres. Aor. Zirpa&ov (§ 223, 11) ; Ep. second 

Mid. 6p?iai, third Pers. Sing. Impf. Aor. Mid. Inf. vep&ai (§ 227, B). 

dprjro ; Ion. Perf. oircoTra. tt€to[x.cu, to Jit/, second Aor. iTrrSfir)!/, etc. 

'OPErNTMI, from which Ep. bpeyvvs, (§ 223, 11). 

stretching out ; bpeyw, to stretch; Mid. irev&ofiai (poet, instead of Trw&dyo/xai), 

to stretch one's self, to reach after, Ep. Ep. second Aor. Mid. Opt. ireTrv&oi- 

Perf. Mid. opt&peyfuu, third Pers. PI. to; Perf. Treirvcrfxai (§ 223, 14). 

dpccpexarcu (§ 219, 8), Plup. third iriepvov, iizztpvov, Ep. second Aor. Act. 

Pers. PI. opwpkxaro. of 4>ENH, to kill (§ 219, 7), Part, irecp- 

upuvjj.1 (poet.), to excite, Fut. oparv, Aor. vu>v with irregular accentuation ; Ep. 

dipo-a (§ 233, 6); Ep. Perf. Litrans. Perf. Pass. Trecparcu, irs<pa<r&ai : Eut. 

opojpa (§ 219, 8), Subj. bpwprj, Plup. Perf. ivecpriaoj-LaL (comp. SeSVo/.iccj 

bpcopei and copwpei: Ep. Aor. uvopev ; from Se'Se^cu). 

Mid. 6pvvfj.aL, to rouse one's self to stir, ir'fiyvvfj.ai, to fix, Ep. Aor. tttjkto, kut4- 

Ep. Fut. opeTrai, Aor. cop6fMr)n ; Ep. ittjkto (§ 227, B). 

Aor. Mid. dSpTo, etc. (§ 227, E) ; Ep. "iriXvafx.ai, Eq. secondary form of 7T€Aa^co, 

Perf. dpcvperai, Subj. bpwprjrai I'. 219, to eZraiy neo?-, only Pres. and Impf. 

8). irifMirXri/uLi, to fill, Ep. Aor. Mid. 7tA?]to, 

•.o-cppaivo/Acu, to smell, Ion. Aoj. Mid. etc. [§ 227, A (a)]. 

6<T(ppavTo. iriiTTca, to fall, Ep. ireTTTeas (§ 228). 

ovTo.cc, to icouncl, Ep. Aor. e/*/./., etc. irirvdco and ■Kirvrnxi, Ep. secondary form 

[§ 227, A (a)]. of ireTdwvfii, to spread out, from 

btpeiXw, to owe, be under obligabc. ought, which come Impf. it'ituo, instead of 

wiwsf, Ion., poet, (except jr. fho dra- 4-kItvo., and Part, irirvds. 

niatic dialogues of Att. writers), and fT\i\(T(To), to strike, Ep. second Aor. Act. 

in late prose ocpsXou, -e;, -e, Ep. iirtTrXrjyov, TrdirXriyov and TreirXTjySfxrjv 

iocpeXXou, ocpeXXov, in iC/M3 which (§ 219, 7). 

express a wz'sA. 7r\a;co (Ion.), to sazY, Ep. second Aor. 

bcpeWco (Ep.), to increasz, only Pres., Act. eirXcov, etc. [§ 227, A (d)]. 

Impf, and Opt. Aor. bf/xX'-iev, Od. ir^e'co, to breathe, in Horn. Peif. -Keirvvfiai 

£, 334. (§ 223, Eem. 2), to 6e animated, intel- 

UaXXw, to shake, Ep. second Aor. Act. ligent; second Aor. Act. Imp. tt/xTr- 

afxTreiraXcbv (§§ 207, 7, and 219, 7) and we, second Aor. Mid. ct/xirvvTo [§ 227, 

second Aor. Mid. irdxro (§ 227, B). A (e)] ; Aor. Pass, hinrvvvfrn instead 

TracTx®, to suffer, Ep. Perf. Part. Tveira- of aixTruvSrn (§ 223, 12). 

3-u/t?, as if from rceira&a ; Ep. Perf. irr-ricraco, to crouch, shrink from fear, Aor. 

TreiroaSre (§ 228, Rem.). eirrril-a ; second Aor. KaTcnrTaKcbv, 

■jrareofj-aL (Ion.), to taste, to cat, Aor. Aeschyl. Eum. 247; Perf. enr-nxa, 

iirao-d/jir)!/ ; Perf. ireiracriActi. Part. Ep. 7re7rT7jccs, wtos (§ 223, 13); 

Tret^-w, to persuade, second Aor. Act. Ep. second Aor. KaTaTTTrjrTjv [§ 227, 

tirihov, Aor. Mid. iir&ofiyv, only poet. A (a)]. 

in the Att. writers (tt&ov is a false Valvu, to sprinkle, regular Aor. Zppava ; 

reading in Plat. Phaed. p. 117, a) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, eppacrfxai. In 

Ep. second Aor. Act. iriinSov, Subj. Horn, ippddarai (§ 220, Rem. 2). 

ireiri&w, Opt. Trez iSroi/jLi. Inf. ir€Wi&e7i/, pe(<a, see epSca. 

Part. Tre7rt&wj/, Imp. ireiri&e (§ 219, 7) ; p^eoj (Ep. and poet.), to shudder, Fut. 

second Aor. Mid. iiri&ojji-nv, to trust, pLyrjccc ; Aor. ippiynaa ; Perf. Ep. 

Opt. TreTri&oLTo ; from the second Aor. epplya. 

come TTifrhtrx, to be obedient, iretn^crca, ~2a6cc, crcoco and o'occ (Epic), to saye 

to be convinced, Tufrfja-as, obedient; on (= ad>(cc) ; from o-ao'co Fut. (ractxrw , 

e7re7Ti3-jU€z/ and TreVcio-^i (see § 228). Imp. Pres. Act. craco [§ 222, I, A 

T«Aa(w, to rfraiu near (Trag. 7reAa^o», (4)] ; third Pers. Sing. Impf. Act. 

7rAa$-a>),Fut.7reAacrcu, poet, sometimes cdov and ccico instead of iadoe ; Aor. 

ireXcl> ; E]3. Aor. Pass. iiteXda^r)u, trrdcocra. ; Fut. Mid. aaacrojxai, Aor. 

poet. -Alt. i^a/jr]! , Mid. Ep. tirXiiix-qv, Pass. icradoS-qv ; from o-aS« Part, o-w- 

etc, Att. 'irAa/xjjr [§ 227, A (a)]; o^Tes and Impf. cwecr/coi/ ; from o-dw 

En. Parf. ir(:iv7^riiJ.4v n )S, Att. iriirXaixai. Subj. Pres. cot?, trdj;.?, trdoxn. 
Wpd« (poei.), <c/ destroy, Fut. irep<rco: <revco (poet.), to ;>«i »i violent motion 



284 DIALECTS. [$ 230. 

Mid. to haste, Ep. Aor. iacreva and cpeiSo/xai, to spare, Ep. second Aor. Mid, 
aeva, ia(Tevd[jLT)v and <revd/j.r}v (§ 223, irecpiSoiiATiv, -n-ecpidea^rai (§ 219, 7) , 
8); Perf. eaavfxcu (§223, 14); Plup. from (peiSouai comes irecpidrjaoixai. 
i(r<rv/u.7)v ; second Aor. Mid. iaav/nrju, <pepco, to carry, cpepre Ep. instead of 
etc. [§ 227, A (e)]; Aor. Pass, iacrv- (pepere (§ 229); Ion. and Ep. formg 
fry!/ Soph., i£eo-v&7iv Horn. — On the are : Aor. ^Vej/ca, eVe?/cc«, etc., fyeind' 
Ep. aevrcu, (rovrai, etc., see § 229. fja/jv ; Perf. iv-nvsiyixai ; Aor. Pass. 

a-KiSva/jLai, to scatter, Ep. secondary form riveix&nv; — Ep. second Aor. Imp. 
of <tk eBdwvjj.a.1, only Pres. and Impf. olae, Inf. olaefxeu (§ 223, 10); first 

oTepeo), to rob, first Aor. Inf. <rrep4<rai Aor. avScrat, Herod. 1, 157 (comp. 
Ep. instead of crrepjccu. 6, 66. av&Caros instead of avfricrros). 

(TTvyeb), to fear, to hate, Ep. second Aor. <pevyw, to flee, Ep. Trecpvy/xei/os, escaptc 
%<TTvyov\ first Aor. earv^a, Trans., to (§ 223, 14). 
mahe fearful. <p&di>w, to come before, anticipate, Epic 

TAm, Epic second Aor. reTaycav, (pfrd/Aevos [§ 227, A (a)]. 

seizing. (p&eipca, to destroy, Ion. Fut. diacp^apeo/xat 

TAAAH, to endure, Ep. Aor. irdkacra, instead of <p&aprj(ro[jt.aL ; Aor. dia<p&ep- 
Subj. raXda-aca; second Aor. erX-nv crai (§ 223, 6). 

(§ 191, 4); Perf. verX-qica, TirKa^v (p&iva), to vanish, and Ep. (p&ta>, to con- 
(§ 228), Fut. r\7)(To/j.a!.. sume, and sometimes to vanish, perish 

ravvca (poet.), to stretch, Ep. rdvvTcu (Ep. first Pers. long), Fut. (p&icru: 
(§229). Aor. ty&Io-a; Mid. to perish, Fut' 

Tupdaaw, to disturb, Ep. second Perf. (p&to-o/xcu ; Perf. ecpSfl/xai ; Plup. icpfri 
TerpT)xa, I am disturbed. /.trju; Ep. Aor. i<p^i/xr]v, etc. [§227, 

TEMn, to reach, overtake, Ep. Aor. erer- A (c)] ; Ep. Aor. Pass, third Pers. PI. 
fiov (§ 219, 7). a-rrecpSn&ei'. 

Tepirco, to delight, ~E\).iTdp<p&7)v, irdpir-qv, (piXiui, to love, Ep. Aor. i<plXd/xr]u (<pi 
irpdrnqv, Subj. first Pers. PL rpaTreio- Xwvtcu, (plXcu). 

/xev ; second Aor. Mid. irpaTro/xrji/ and (ppd(oo, tc speak, Ep. Aor. irecppaSov 
Terapironw (§ 219, 7). (§ 219, 7). 

revxco (poet.), to make ready, to obtain, <pvpoo, to knead, in prose, forms its tenses 
Fut. rev^ca ; Aor. erev^a, Perf. Ep. from (pvpdca, e. g. (pvpdcra), etc., Aor 
Terevx&s, having obtauied; Fut. Mid. Pass, icpvpdbni', Plat. Theaet. 147, c. 
Teu|o,ucu ; Aor. Mid. rev^aa&cu ; Perf. (but £<pvp&r)i>, Aesch. Ag. 714); yet 
rervy/xcu (§ 223. 14), third Pers. PL Perf ire(pvp/j.ai, and in Aristoph. ire- 
Ep. TerevxaTcu, Inf. TSTi>x&ai ; Plup. (pvpafiai ; Fut. Perf. Trecpvpo-ecr&at 
ireTvyfxt]v, third Pers. PL Ep. ireTev- Pind., Epic and poet. <pvpcrco, etc 
Xaro ; Aor. Pass, irvx&yv ; Fut. Perf. (§ 223, 6). 

rerev^ofxai ; — Ep. second Aor. TeTu- <pva, to produce, Perf. Tre<pvKa, Ep. third 
Ktiv, T6Tvkovto, TervKecr&ai (§ 219, 7). Pers. PL irefpvacri, Part. 7re^)ua;Tas, 

TIEfi, Ep. Perf Act. Teri-ndos, -6ros, irecpvvTa (§ 223, 13); Impf. Ep. eve- 
anxious, and Pei*f. Mid. /am anxious, (pvnov. 

second Pers. Dual reTi-naSrov, Part. Xafoucu (Ep.), to retreat, yield, Aor. Mid. 
TeTiTjyUeVos. Ke/ca5<wTO (§ 219, 7); Aor. Act. K6«:o- 

Tivvvjxai, Ep. secondary form of rivofxai, 8ov and Fut. KeKa5-f)<rco, Trans., to de- 
to punish ; in Att. poetry with one prive of rob. 
v, rtuv/jiaL (§ 185). X aL P 0l) i to rejoice, Ep. Fut. KexapVw, 

Tfxriyct), Ep. secondary form of re/xucc, K^x a P'h <T0 l xal I nrst Aor. Mid. xvpo-To ; 
to c«£, first Aor. T/x-q^as ; Aor. Pass. second Aor. Kexdpovro, Kexapoiaro 
third Pers. PL Tfxdyev. (§ 219, 7); Ke X apv^s (§ 223, 13)- 

rp€<poo, to nourish, Ep. second Aor. Perf. /cexap/ieVos, Eur.; Verb. Adj 
erpacpou, I nourished, Perf. Terpoqxi, x a P T ^ s ' 

Intrans.; Aor. Pass. irpd<pr]u, third x ai/ Sduco (Ep.), to hold, to contain, Aor 
Pers. PL rpdcpev. ix a ^ ov '■> ¥erf. with the sense of the 

^aivcc, to show, Ep. cpaeivwv, enlightening ; Pres. /ce'xa^Sa; Fut. x*' L(T0 l xal ( com P 
Ep. Aor. Pass. z<paduSnv\ Perf. Mid. Zira&ov, ir^icrofxai). 
or Pass, ire^aa-fiai, third Pers. Sing. x e ' w > to F> w? " °"^ Ep., Fut. x € ^ w ! Aor 
irecpavrcu : Fut. irecp-hcrofxca ; second ex eua 5 second Aor. Mid. x^ to j X^e 
Aor. (pdveaneu, II. A, 64. vos [§ 227, A (e)]. 



$ 231.] FORMATION OF WORDS. 285 

SECTION III. 

FORMATION OF WORDS. 

(231. Primitive words. — Stems. — Derivatives. 

1. Words are formed, (a) by derivation, and (b) by composition, in accord- 
ance with certain laws. 

2. Those words, from which other words are der ved, but which are them- 
selves underived, are called primitives (vocabula prwiitiva). Primitive words 
are either verbs (which constitute the greater part), substantives, adjectives, or 
pronouns. A primitive has two parts, the root and the inflection-ending, e. g. 
Tpe(p-a), ypd<p-w, (pep-w, Xey-ca, \i&-os ; Ka\-6s ; e/x-e. 

3. The roots, i. e. the forms which remain, after the rejection of the inflection- 
endings, are all monosyllabic. Still, the roots do not always appear pure in 
the primitives, but often with a strengthened form, e.g. Sdx-v-a, ln-pi-ofxai, 
av^-dp-co, rv{y)x-o-v-w, a\-io~K-op.ai, iri-irpd-CKco. Comp. §§ 139, and 157, 1 
Yet these strengthened forms extend only to the Pres. and Impf. 

4. Words which are derived (vocabula derivata) from primitive words, are : — 

(a) Either Stems, i. e. such words as are formed from primitives by merely 
assuming another inflection-ending, which is without any special signification. 
To these indefinite endings belong several of the third Dec, e. g. the gender- 
sign s (o yty, % &ty, 7] /3t?£, t] 7ttv|, 7] pav-s, 6 7] fiov-s, 6 7] 7rcu-s, instead of ttcuS-s; 
in many words the s is omitted, see § 52, 1) ; the endings -is (t) o-irdp-is, want, 
7) 6\7r-is), and -vs (6 ardx-vs, t) to"x-us) ; also the endings of the first and sec- 
ond declensions, e. g. -7], -a, -os, -op {pik-t), Xvit-t], pi(-a, 7r\ovr-os, v6<t-os, p6d-op) ; 
finally, several adjective-endings, e. g. -os, -tj, -op (cptx-os, -tj, -op), -i's, -em, -v 
(y\vK-i>s, -eia, -v), etc. ; 

(b) or Derivatives, i. e. such words as are formed either from primitives, 
or from stems, by assuming a special derivation-syllable with a special 1 sig- 
nification, e. g. xpva~-o-M, to make golden, to gild ; pfi-roop, orator ; ypa.<p-iK.6s, skilled 
,'n painting. 

5. The root is often lengthened . in demotion (§ 16, 3), e. g. A^d-w (from 
ha&-e?p), xw (from xav-elV) ; or it takes the variable voAvel (§ 16, 6), e.g. rpe<p- 
cc, rpo<p-7), rpocp-6s, rp6(p-i/xos, rpa<p-ep6s. A strengthening consonant (§§ 139, 
1, and 157, seq.) may also be added; or the final consonant A be doubled, e. g. 
KaKKos from KaXos ; some stems also take a reduplication, e. g. cnr-unr-i), e'S-coS-^, 
ay-^y-os, ^i-o-v<p-os (from 2E$-n, comp. (ro<p-6s). Other changes also may be 
made in the root, as has been shown in § 16. 

6. The change of e into o (seldom into a) and of et into oi (§ 16, 6) requires 

1 By comparing the examples under (a) and (b), it will be seen that the 
terminations of the former are not significant, while those of the latter are. 



286 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 232 

special attention. It occurs, (a) in Oxy tones of the first Dec, in tj and d of 
more than one syllable, e. g. rpocp-r}, nourishment (from rpecp-co) ; ^ov-77, a remain- 
ing (from /x4u-co) : <pop-d, a carrying (from <p4p-u>) ; ahoicp-rj, salve (from aAei<£- 
a,); — (b) in dissyllabic Barytones of the second Dec, wbich denote what is 
done, or the result of an action, e. g. Xoyos, word (from \4y-co) ; <pov-os, murder 
(from <J>EN-n, comp. eirecpvoit) ; vo/xos, a law (from v4/x-w) ; — (c) in dissyllabic 
Oxytones of the second Dec. in -fx6s, and in dissyllabic oxytone adjectives of the 
second Dec. in -os, which, for the most part, denote an active object and often have 
a substantive meaning, e. g. irXox-p-os, plait of hair (from "ita4k-u) ; o-ToA-fios, 
garment (from areAA-co) ; tto/att-os, attendant (from ire/xir-ca) ; aocp-os, wise (from 
5E$-f2, sapio); rpocp-os, nourishing, nourisher (from rpecp-w) ; — (d) in monosyl- 
labic substantives of the third Dec, e. g. </>Ao£, flame (from <p\4y-eo) ; 86p£, 
antelope (from 5 epK-0/j.ai) ] — (e) in oxytose substantives in -eus and adjectives 
in -as, which, however, have sometimes a substantive sense, e, g. rpocp-evs, nour- 
isher (from rp4<p-oo) ; airop-ds, scattered (from o-irep-elv) ; \oy-ds, chosen (from 
\4y-a>) ; dpo/x-ds, running (from APEM-H, comp. dpa/x-eTp) ; — (f ) in all derivatives 
of the forms mentioned, e. g. in substantives in -a/xos, adjectives in -i/xos, verbs 
in -die, -ea>, -oca, -euco, -t£iw, e. g. irAox-a/xos; rpScp-i/xos ; <p&ov-4ca (from cp&ov-os), 
Scajx-dw (from do/x-os, and this from de/x-00), etc. 

Remark. The change of e into a (comp. § 16, 6) is found only in a few old 
poetic derivatives, e. g. rpa<p-ep6s. 

Rem. 2. Words derived from verbs are called verbals; those derived from 
substantives or adjectives, denominatives. 



A. Derivation. 

§ 232. I. Verbs. 

1. All derivative verbs end in -dw, -4<a, -ico, -6w, -va, -evw, -d£o), -/£«, 
-6£o), -v(co; -aivw, -vvoo, -aipa, -eipca. All these verbs must be considered 
as denominatives ; for though the stem-substantive for several verbs of this 
kind is not in use. yet the analogy of the other verbs requires that a substan 
tive should be assumed as the stem of these also. Many of these derivative 
verbs, especially many in -4<o and -dec, supply the place of obsolete primitives, 
e. g. cpi\4w, rijxdw. — On the formation and signification of derivative verbs the 
following points are to be noted : — 

(a) Verbs in -dca and -d£a>, which are mostly derived from substantives of 
the first Dec, and those in -Ifa which are derived from substantives and 
adjectives of all declensions, are partly transitive, partly intransitive, since 
they denote either a condition or the exercise cf agency or activity, e. g. roX/xda), 
to be bold, from T6X;xa, boldness ; %oAao>, to be angry, from x°^? gall; yodea, to 
weep, from y6os ; hindfa, to judge, from 81*17 J e\iri(w, to hope, from eA7rts ; 6pl(a>, 
io limit, from opos ; alrlfa, to beg, from curns, beggar ; sometimes those in -aw 
denote fulness, abundance, e. g. xoAaa>, to be full of bile, have much bile. — Verbs 
in -d£w and -i(a> formed from proper names, express the effort to resemble 
6ingle individuals or whole nations, in custom, nature, language, sentiment. 



5 233.] DERIVATION OF VERBS AND SUBSTANTIVES. 287 

Such verbs are called Imitative verbs, e. g. Zapidfa, to be a Dorian, i. e. to speak 
or think as a Dorian, Aapievs ; kWrivifa, to personate the custom or language of a 
Greek, to be a Greek in custom, etc. ; fArjSifa, to be a Mede in sentiment. 

Remark 1. Verbs in -i(w often signify to make something into that which 
the root denotes. See (c). 

Rem. 2. Verbs in -6(a and -vfa are very rare, e. g. ap[x6(a, to Jit ; kpnvfa, to 
creep. — By the ending -d(w also, verbs are formed, which denote the repetition 
or strengthening of the idea expressed by the simple verb ; these are called 
Frequentative and Intensive verbs, e. g. pnrrdCa, to throw to and fro, jacto, from 
piirrw.jacio ; crrevdCa, to sigh much and deeply, from crrivco, to sigh ; eiicdfa, properly, 
to liken again and again, to compare on all sides ; hence to infer, conjecture. 

(b) Verbs in -ecu and -ei>co are derived from substantives and adjectives of 
all declensions, and commonly express the intransitive idea of the primitive, for 
the most part, the being in a condition, or the exercise of agency, the practising of 
that which is signified by the primitive ; but they are sometimes transitive also. 
"When the stem ends in -es, which is the case, e. g. in adjectives in -rjs, -es, the 
es is omitted, and when it ends in -ev, the eu is omitted before the ending -eva, 
e. g. (piXioi, to be a friend, to love, from <pi\os, aTuxe'co, to be unfortunate, from 
arvxhs (stem cVru%es), euSat/^oj/e'co, to be prosperous, from ei)dai/j.ap (stem evdai/xov), 
ayopevw, to speak in public, from dyopd, market, Kocrfiea, to adorn, from Kocrfios, 
fiacnXeva, to be a king, from fiacriXevs. 

(c) Verbs in -6 a, which are mostly derived from substantives and adjectives 
of the second Dec, those in -aiva, which are commonly derived from adjec- 
tives, more rarely from substantives, and those in --bva, from adjectives only, 
generally denote the making or transforming something into that which the primitive 
word signifies; in like manner several in -i£a, see Rem. 1, e. g. xpucnfa, to 
make golden, to gild, from xpucros, dvA6a, to make evident, from 5f/Aos, ayvifa, to 
make pure, from ayvos, irXowrifa, to make rich, to enrich, from ttXovtos, KoiXaiva, 
to make hollow, from koIXos, Aeu/catVw, to make white, from Xsvk6s, fiapvva, to 
burden, from fiapvs. 

Rem. 3. From the Fut. of several verbs, are formed verbs in -ere tec, which 
denote a desire for that which the primitive word signifies ; these are called 
Desiderative verbs, e. g. yehacrelec, to desire to laugh, from yeXaa, to laugh, rroXe- 
jUTjo-eiw, to desire to engage in war, from TroXefxifa, irapaSacreia, to be inclined to sur- 
render. There are also other Desideratives in -da and -tow, e. g. dravarda, to 
ivish to die, fxa&r]Tida, to wish to become a disciple. 

Rem. 4. Some verbs in -otcco have an inceptive sense (beginning to be), and are 
called Inceptive or Inchoative verbs, e. g. ynpdcrita, to begin to be old, to grow old; 
yeveidcrna, to begin to have a beard ; yfidenta), pubesco. 

§ 233. II. Substantives. 

Substantives are derived : — 
1 From verbs and substantives, and express — 

a. A concrete idea, i. e. the idea of an active person (concrete nouns) : 
(a) With the endings -eus (Gen. -e'ws) for the Masc, -eta or -icraa for the 
Fern.; -ttjs [-e'-njs, -Sr-ns, -rnjs, -dl>Tr]s\ (Gen. -ov) (mostly Paroxytones), -rijp 
and -rap (Paroxytones) for the Masc, -rpid (Proparoxytones), -rpis, -rts, 



288 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 233. 

and -is (Gen. -idos), -rsipa (Proparoxytone) for the Fem. ; -uv for the Masc, 
-aiva for the Fem.; -us for the Masc, -wis and -a'Cvri for the Fem., e. g. 
iepevs, priest, Fem. Uptia, from hpos; av\rjTr)s and -rip, flute-player, Fem. av\ri- 
rpia, avXrjrpis, from auAeco ; crcorrip, deliverer, ccoreipa, from o~a>(& ; woXlttis, 
citizen, tto\?tis, from ttoAis ; prjTcop, orator, from 'PE-fl ; Srepairwy, servant, &epa- 
iraiua, from &4pa\p ; 0i/ceT7js, a s/ave, from oucos ; Zruxor-ns, one of tlia people, from 
£77,1*05 ; oirXiTrjs, a hoplite, from oivXov ; GTpaTi&Tns, a soldier, from a-Tparid. 

(/3) With the ending -o's (Gen. -oO), seldom, and only from verbs with the 
variable vowel [§ 231, 6 (c)], e. g. Trofnros, attendant, from Tre/u.Trco ; 6 77 rpo<pos, 
nourisher, nurse, from Tp4(pa> ; Cipro's-, aw a//?/, from aprjyoo. 

b. They express the abstract idea of action, i. e. action or energy apart from 
the person who manifests it. These are abstract nouns : — 

(a) From verbs : 

(a) with the endings -<ris (Gen. -osas) and (more seldom) -<rla, substantives 
which denote the transitive or active idea of the verb, e. g. Trpa£is, actio, an acting 
from irpaTTco ; iroirjcris, a making, from iroLea ; SoKifxaaia, a proving, from §0Ki[xa£<a ; 

(£) with the ending -fx6s (Gen. -ov), such as denote the intransitive idea of 
the verb, e. g. bdvpjj.6s, weeping, from odvpofxai ; 

(7) with the ending -fxa, such as denote the effect or result of the transitive 
action of the verb, e. g. 7rpay/j.a, something done, /jLVTjfxa, monumentum, iroi-n/xa, 1 the 
thing made or done ; 

(8) with the endings -^77, -77, -a (all for the most part Oxytones), and (from 
verbs in -evcc), -eia, such as denote sometimes a transitive relation, and some 
times the effect of that relation, e. g. to/at], a cutting, from ri\xvw ; 010*577, song, 
from aetSco, (p&opd, destruction ; iraideia, education ; 

(e) with the endings -os (Gen. -ov), -ros (Gen. -rov) and-os (Gen. -ous) 
such as denote, generally, an intransitive relation, also a transitive, and partly 
the effect of the action of the verb, e. g. \6yos, word, from xiyca ; kwkvt6s, 
lamentation ; to ktjSos, care. 

(b) From adjectives (and substantives, which are sometimes used in an 
attributive sense) : — 

(a) with the endings -id, from adjectives in -os, and some in the third Dec, 
e. g. ffofla, wisdom (from <rocp6s) ; evdaifiovia, happiness (from evdaifMwu, Gen. 
-ov-os) ; 

(/3) -to, (Proparoxytones) from adjectives in -77s and -ovs, whose stem ends in 
e and 0, with which the t of the ending coalesces and forms et and 01 (thus -eta, 
-otd), e. g. a\ri&tia, truth (from aXr/S^s, Gen. -e-os), evvoia, benevolence (from 
evvo-os, evuovs) ; 

(7) -crvvri mostly from adjectives in -wu (Gen. -ovos) and -os, e. g. crwcppo- 
o-vvn, modesty (from ffdixppeav, Gen. -ov-os) ; diKaio-crvvn, justice (from Slkcuos) ; 

(5) -ri)s, Gen. -ttjtos (commonly Paroxytones) from adjectives in -os and 

1 Nouns derived from the first Pers. Perf. Pass, denote the result of the action 
of the verb, e. g. (evprjuai), evprifia, the thing found, the discovery ; those from the 
second Pers., the abstract act, e. g. (evprjacu), evpe&is, the act of finding ; those 
from the third Pers., the agent or doer, e. g. {<$pr\Tai), cupe-r^s, the discoverer. 



$ 233.] DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 289 

~vs, e. g. 'ktSttis, Gen. -ottjtos, equality (from fcros) ; iraxvTTis, thickness (from 

(e) -os, Gen. -eos = -ovs, from adjectives in -vs and -77s, and such as have 
the forms of comparison in -ioau and -kttos, e. g. rdxos, to, Gen. rdxovs, swift- 
ness (from Ta%ys), i/'eSSos, to, Gen. -ous, falsehood (from i^euS^s), aTcrxos.- tJ, 
baseness (from atVxpo's, ahrxiay) ; 

(^) -as, -aSos (only in abstract numeral substantives] e. g. 77 juoj/as, unity. 
Ivds, duality ; Tptcfc, a frw?. 

Eemaek 1. In abstracts in -tio, which express both a transitive and intran- 
sitive relation, from compounds in -tos and -ttjs (Gen. -ov), the t is commonly 
changed into 0-, e. g. a&\o&6Tia and -o-ict (ddAofreTT/s), d3-cw/acn'a (a&dvaTOs), d/ca- 
3-apo-ta, o|u)8Ae^ia, etc. So also with adjectives in -tos, e. g. Mi\i]aios (MiA-qros), 
iviavo-ios (ii/iavrSs). Comp. §§ 17, 6, and 234, Eem. 2. 

Rem. 2. The older Attic poetry sometimes makes the o long in the endings 
-em and -oict, e. g. avcuSeid, irpovoia. 

2. From substantives alone, the following "lasses denoting the names of 
persons and things, are derived : — 

(a) Gentile nouns, i. e. the names of persons derived from their country, in 
-eus (Fern, -is, -iZos), -hrjs (Fern, -ins), -arris (Fern. -arts), - tjttjs, -doTrjs, e. g. 
Accpievs (a Dorian, one from Doris), Aupis, ~Zv^apiTns, -7tls, 'ZirapTi.a.T'qs, 'Aiyiirfj- 
ttjs, 5 H7T6£pwT7js. Comp. § 234, 3 (g), etc. 

(b) Patronymics, i. e. the names of persons derived from their ancestors, with 
the endings -1877 s (Fern. -Is, Gen. -180s) ; also -iciStjs 1 ; but substantives of the 
first Dec. in -77s and -as, and many of the second and third Dec. whose stem 
ends in 1, and some others, have - C$877 s (Fem. -ds, Gen. -dSos) ; these endings are 
appended to the stem, and where the stem ends in e, this e and 1 of the ending 
-i§v,s combine and form a diphthong, as in Il77A.ei&77<r, e. g. Upiafx-td-ns, Fem. UpiafM-is 
from Hpiafi-os, Ur)\eiSr]s from Hr)\evs, Gen. IT^Ae-eos, KeKpoiridrjs from KeKpoxp, 
Gen. -ottos, Tlav&olSris from Tldis&oos, -ovs ; TeXajxcov-idd-ns from TeXafxuv, Alved- 
877s from AiWas, ©eo-rta877s, Fem. ©eari-ds from (diarios. 

(c) Diminutives (frequently with the accompanying idea of contempt) with 
the endings -toy which is the most usual, -apiov \-acriov\ (seldom) and soma 
few with the endings -vKKiov, -vXXis, -vZpiov, -xxpiou (-dcpiov) (which 
belong mostly to the language of the common people and to comedy) ; — - is 
(Gen. -iSos and -?8os), -tSiou (formed from -is); 'ktkos, -ia/cr) {-io-kiov, 

i-yvr], -ix vl0V ) j idtvs ( but only of the young of animals), e. g. ixeipaKiov, youth, 

from fie?pa.£j -aK-os, Traid-iov, a little child, from 7rcus, ttcuS-o's ; — iraid-dpiov ; -daiov 
instead of -dpiov only in Kopdaiov (from icSpa, young woman) on account of the 
preceding p 5 fxeipaic-vXXiov, aKav&-vXXis from anavfra, thorn, i/rjo'-vdpioi', islet ; 
$ui-<piov, little animal ; XP V0 '-& ( P L0V from xP v0 ~6s ; -s» Tr{va,K-is, little tablet, from 
n-iua^; a/xa^is, little wagon; v7]o--i^iov, islet, from i/rjcros ; ape&biov (instead of 
-<f8iov) from np4as, oIktSiov (instead of oIki-ISiov) from olicia; — veavi-GKos, vzavi- 
«TK77 from vtavias ; -IffKiov seldom, e. g. kotvXio-kiov from kotvAtj] ->-X v1 \i 

1 This form is used, when the syllable preceding the Patronymic ending is 
long, otherwise the word would not be adapted to hexameter verse, since one 
short syllable would stand between two long syllables ; thus, TlrjXfj'td^s^ 

25 



290 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 234 

-ixviov only in TroXixvn, iro\lx viov from. ir6\is, KvXix^Vi K-oXixviou from kvXi1~\ 
— Xay-idevs, young hare, from Kayus ; aeT-i5eus-, young eagle, from aero's-. 

(cl) Designations of place, with the endings -iov (in connection with the 
preceding vowels -aiov, -eiov, -<£ov) and -eiov, which denote the abode of the 
person designated by the primitive word, or a place consecrated to a divinity 
or hero ; -uv (Gen. -uvos), seldom -edov, and -(avid, which denote the residence 
of persons or a place filled with plants, e. g. ipycurr-fip-iov, workshop, from ipyaar 
TT]p, and so others in -rrjpiov from -7-f]p or -r-ns ; sometimes also this ending is 
used with reference to vessels, e. g. Tror-fjpiov, drinking vessel; novpeTov, barber's 
shop, from Kovpevs, -4-us (several in -iov [-eiov] have another signification, c. g. 
rpocf>e7ov, wages of a nurse, from rptxpevs) ; OrjaeToy from Qrjaevs, -4-u.s, 'A&rjvouov, 
MovcreTov ; — avdpuv and yvvainuv, apartments for men and women; Iwirdv, stable 
for horses ; podwv and poduvid, bed of roses ; TrepiCTepedv and TrepicrTep&v, dove- 
cote. 

(e) Substantives which denote an instrument or a means of accomplishing 
some object, with the endings -rpov and -rpa, e. g ^varpa, curry-comb ; &.&a/c- 
rpov, tuition-money ; Xovrpov, water for washing ; Xovrpov, bath ; also to designate 
place, e. g. bpx'hfTTpa., dancing-room, instead of the ending -rv,piov. 

$ 234. III. Adjectives. 

1. From verbs are derived adjectives with the following endings: — 

(a) "With the ending -os, which is annexed to the stem of the verb. These 
adjectives express the transitive, intransitive, or passive idea of the verb from 
which they are derived, e. g. <pav6s, brilliant, from <paivu ; AonrSs, the remainder ; 
the verb-stem of many is not in use, e. g. ko.k6s. 

(b) With the endings -mos, -tj, -6v, and -ip.os, -ov, -ip.os, -rj, -ov of 
•ffifios, -ov, which denote ability, fitness, aptness. Of these, those in -ik6s have 
a transitive signification, those in -ifios both a transitive and passive, e. g. 
ypacp-itcSs, fit or able to paint ; rp6cf)-ip.os, nutritive; la.-crip.os, curable. 

(c) A few with the ending -v6s, -77, -6v with an intransitive or passive 
signification, e. g. Bei-v6s, frightful (AEIH), <rep.-vos, honored, honorable (o-ej3op.ai}, 
crvy-v6s, hated, hateful (2TYr\Q), iro&eivSs (iro&eu), desired. 

(d) A few with the ending- A 6 s with a transitive signification, -u\6s, -4?, 
-oV and (from verbs in -dec) -r)\6s, -y, - 6v with a transitive and intransitive 
signification, e. g. 5ei-\6s, timid ; etciray-Aos (instead of iKir\ay\6s from iKTrA-fjcr- 
(rw), frightful ; <pei8-u\6s, sparing; aiy(]K6s, silent; airarr]\6s, deceitful. 

(e) With the ending -ap6s, -d, -6v (from verbs in -du and -aivu) with an 
intransitive signification, e. g. %aA.apos, slack; fj.1S.p6s, stained; also in cp&nvep6s, 
envious; voo~np6s, diseased; oiKrp6s, pitiable. 

(f) With the ending -p.uv, -p.ov (Gen. -ovos) with an intransitive significa- 
tion, e. g. p.vf}-puv, mindful, manor (MNAH), vo-fipuv, intelligent (voiu). 

(g) With the ending -77 s, -es (Gen. -eos), e. g. 7rAr]pr)s, plenus. 

(h) With the ending -as (Gen. -dSos) with a transitive, intransitive, or pas- 
sive signification, e. g. (pop-ds, bearing (<pepu) ; §pop.ds, running (APEMX1) ; Aoyds, 
chosen (\eyu). 



$ 234.] DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 9-91 

(i) With the endings -ros, -t^, -Tov y and -t4os, -rea, -riov (verbal 
adjectives) ; those in -ros denote either a completed action like the Perf. Pass. 
Part., e. g. Ae/c-rJs (from \4yco), dictus ; or the idea of possibility = English 
termination -ble, which is their usual signification, e. g. opa-To's, capable of being 
seen, visible. In their formation, most of these follow either an existing or an 
assumed Perf. Pass., e. g. 

fiov\ev-u> fSe-fiovhev-Tcu jSouA.eu-To's, -t4os 

Ti/xd-ea re-Tt/iTj-Tcu Tifx-n-rSs 

tywpd-v Tre-(p(*>pa-Tcu (pupd-reos 

<f)t\4-oo ire-<piAr)-Tcu (piXrj-Tos 

tt\4k-u) iri-irXeK-rai ttAsk-tSs, -t4os 

\4y-co Ae-Ae/c-Tcu Ae/c-Tos 

<rTe\-\-(o e-crraA-Tai gtoX-t4os 

relv-w (TA-H) re-Ta-rai ra-Teos 

Si-Scc-fii (AO-H) Se'-So-Tcu 8o-tos, -t4os. 

Remark 1. Very many verbal adjectives, however, follow the analogy of 
other forms of the verb, not according to any definite rule, but take precisely 
such a form as suited the ear of the Greeks. Thus, for example, a considerable 
number followed the form of the first Aor. Pass., e. g. alpe-cc, yp4-&7)v, alpe-rSs ; 
nav-a), i-rrav-cr-Sriv, irav-<r-T6s, -Teos; X9°-'°l xal i s^py-v &Wi XP 7 ?' '"' 7 ' '^ -t4os: 
arp4<p-(a, 4-<rrp4(p-^r]v, <TTpeTr-r6s ; ToeV-w, £-rp4(p-&r]v i Tpeir-r4os ; rp4<p-a:, £-&p4(p" 
Stjj/, i&-pe7r-T€oy ; '{-(TT-n-fxi, iaTa-frqis, (Tra-rSs, -t4os ; £iraiv4-(a, 4irriv4-^T)v, iircuvt- 
tos ; — some the form of the second Aor. Act., e. g. ex«, %-o-xe-Tov, o-xe-To's ; 
alp4a>, e'ikz-Tov, ehe-r6s ; 'hifii, 4-tov (commonly efroj/), ct(p-e-Te'os, eV-e-To's; t'i^t]- 
ixi, 4-&e-Tov, fre-ros, -Teos; — some the form of the Pres. Act., e. g. \i4vw, fi4w 
€toi>, /J.eve-r6s, -t4os) 41/j.i, 'l-tov, 1-t4os; so cbr-euxe-TOs from 'ETXE-TON (e#x° 
/xai) ; 8vj/o.-t6s (8vvaf.uu) ; #77,111, <pa-rou, <pa-r6s. 

2. Adjectives are formed from substantives and adjectives : — 

By the ending -tos (in connection with the preceding vowel of the stem 
-ouos, -eios, -otos, -q>os, -vtos) and -ik6s (which, when v precedes, becomes -k6s 
and when 1, often -cutis). These adjectives have a very great variety of mean 
ings. They frequently indicate the mode or manner of the adjective idea, 
often also in a very general manner, that which proceeds from an object and is 
connected with it or related to it, e. g. ovpdv-ios, heavenly, pertaining to heaven ; 
Ka&dp-ios, cleanly (but Ka&ap6s, clean); iAev&4pios, frank, liberal, liberalis (but 
eAeud-eoos, liber) ; ayopcuos, belonging to the market-place (ayopd) ; &4peios, summer- 
like [&4pos, -^-os), aldoTos (al8a>s, -6-os), fjpcSos and r,pwos ; rpvxiixvios ; SovAt/co's; 

&7}\vk6s, /J-aUldKOS. ' 

Rem. 2. In some words the ending -cuos also -icuos occurs, e. g. xepo"o?os, 
iTKOTaios and gkoticuos. In several words the ending -aios (§ 17, 6) is used in- 
stead of -T-ios, e. g. (piXoT-f](Tios ((pi\6rrfs, -tjtos), eKovatos (e/cwj/, -6vtos). 

3. Adjectives are formed from substantives alone : — 

(a) With the ending -e 10 s (mostly Paroxytones), which are formed from 
words denoting persons, especially from proper names ; but in respect to their 
signification they are like adjectives in -u<6s, e. g. aj/Spelos, belonging to a man, 
manly, ywatnuos, av&pc&Treios, 'O/x^peios. 



292 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 2S5. 

(b) With the endings -eos = -ovs and -"tuos, which denote the materia] 
of which anything is made, like the English ending -en, e. g. xpu<r-«os == XP V ' 
<rovs, golden ; ^ciA/ceos = %aA.KoOs, brazen ; £vA-u/os, icooden ; (tkvtlvos, made of 
leather, leathern. 

(c) With the ending -Xv6s (seldom -ivos), derived from substantives. These 
express certain relations of time ; sometimes, also, an abundance or fulness, 
e. g. e<nrep-iv6s, vespertinus ; p^ec-iv^s, hesternus ; opeivSs, mountainous (opos, Gen. 
•e-os). 

(d) With the endings -eis, Gen. -euros (always preceded by a vowel, 77, 
when the substantive from which the Adj. is formed, is of the first Dec, and o, 
when it is the first or second); -pos, -ep6s, -tip 6s, -dXeos, which denote 
fulness or abundance e. g. vX-f)-eis, woody; irupo-ets, fiery ; alax-p^s, base; vos- 
ep6s, and vo<r--qpos, unhealthy ; pa>fi-a\eos, strong. Exceptions to those in -eis, 
are devdprjeis from SeVSpor, x a p' Leis from x°-P LS ' 

(e) With the ending -^pios, which have the transitive sense of verbal sub- 
stantives in -rip and -77s, e. g. awrripios, preserving, that preserves. 

(f) With the ending -c£8 77 s, Neut. -tides (formed from -o-efi-fis from eTSos, 
form, quality). These adjectives denote a quality or resemblance, but often 
also a fulness or abundance, e.g. (pAoycafiris, resembling flame, fiery ; ttoic&Stis, 
abounding in grass, grassy. 

(g) With the endings -los (Fern, -id), -k6s, -ikos (ifem, -k4\, -ikt}), -riv6s 
(Eem. -771/77), and when 1 or p precedes, -dv6s (Fem. -dv-i}), -luos (Fem. -tVrj) ; 
these are Gentile adjectives, which are also frequently used as substantives, 
particularly those in --nu6s, -dvos, -7uos, which are formed only from names 
of cities and countries out of Greece, e. g. Kopiu&-ios, -ia, 'ASrnvcuos, -ata, X?os 
(instead of -iios from Xios), 'ApyeTos (from"Ap-yos,-e-os) ; AaKeSaifiop-iKos ; Ku£i/c- 
tjv6s, -t]vr\ (Kv£ikos), ^,apSi-av6s, -avr) (SapSety, Ion. Gen. -i-wu), 'AyKvpav6s 
("AyKvpa), Tapavr-tvos, -ivrj (Tapas, -avr-os). 

§ 235. IV. Adverbs. 

1. Adverbs are formed from verbs : — 

With the endings -8 77V or, when the primitive has the variable o,-dSrjy, 
which denote mode or manner, e. g. Kpvfih-nv, secretly (KpvTrra>) ; ypd&-dr)v, by 
writing, scribendo (ypd(pw) ; o-irop-dS-nu, scatteredly, sparsim. 

2. From verbs and substantives : — 

With the ending - 5 6v or - a 8 6v, - 77 5 6 v (mostly from substantives). These 
also denote manner, or, when derived from substantives, the external form, e. g. 
avcKpavMv, openly, aperte ; ZiaKpiBou, distinctly; fiorpv56v, grape-like, in clusters 
((SSrpvs), l\aS6v, in troops, catervatim ; ay e\r)S6u, in herds, gregatim ; Kvvr)86v, 
like a dog. 

3. From substantives, pronouns, and adverbs, adverbs are foi'med to denote the 
three relations of place, viz., whence, whither, and where, by the endings -§ev, -8e 
{-(re), and -& 1, e. g. oi>pav6-&ev,from heaven ; ovpav6i/-8e, into or to heaven, ovpav6« 
&t, in heaven; &\\o-&ev, from another place, aliunde, 'd\\o-<re, to another place, alio, 
&\?.o-&i, at another place, alibi. — Rules in respect to the accent of those in. &ej> 



} 236.] DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 293 

and -&i : (a) Dissyllables are either Paroxytones or Propeiispomena, e. g. 
wp6<rSr€v, yv&ev, av&i; (b) polysyllables are Paroxytones, when the penult is 
short by nature, e, g. Aeo-fi6&ev from AeV/3os, Kvirp6&ev from Kvirpos, oi>pav6&(=v, 
ovpav6Sn from ovpavos; exceptions: ofeo&ev, o?ko&i, tvSo&ev, evSo&i, irdvro&ev, 
tfAAo&ei', 4/cao-To^ei/, and some poetic words ; (c) polysyllables whose penult is 
long by position, are without exception Proparoxytones, e. g. evroa&ev, bxicr^ev ; 
(d) polysyllables whose penult is long by nature, are Proparoxytones, when the 
primitive was a Barytone, e. g. Qco&ev (e£a>), eTepw&ej/ (eVepos), 'Afrfjvn&ep 
('A&TJvai) ; but Properispomena, when the primitive was an Oxytone, e. g. 
Tlv&w&ev (riw^w), ®pif)&ev (®pid). On the accent of those in -Se (-(re), see § 34, 
Rem. S. 

Remark 1. Words of the first Dec. retain their a or 77 before -&ev; those 
of the second, their ; and those of the third, the of the Gen. ending, e. g. 
*0\v(ATrld&ev, ^.irdpTq-^v, otico-bev, tiWo-bei' ; but the vowels a, 77, and o are 
often exchanged with each other, e. g. pi(6-&ev from, pifa: Meyap6&ev from 
Meyapa, rd. 

Rem. 2. Adverbs in -«, and also others, append the endings to the un- 
changed vowels, e. g. dvw-bev, Karw-frev, e^oo-bev, £ice?-&ev, iyyv-frt, eVSo-frej/, 
evdo-h-i. Some forms of the comparative in -repos lengthen into &>, e. g. 
afx(poTepa-&ev. In some of the above forms, co can be shortened into in poetry, 
and then rejected entirely, e. g. e£o-&ei/, Trpocr-frev (instead of e|«£rej/, irp6<ra>Sev), 
and in imitation of Doric usage, a is often omitted before $-, e. g. oiri&ev, e/cro- 
&ev (instead of omoSev, eKTocr&ev). 

Rem. 3. The ending -Se is commonly appended to substantives only, and to 
the unchanged form of the Ace, e. g. aAaSe, to or into the sea (d\s), nud-wSe (from 
Tlv&w), o!k6vS€ only Epic, elsewhere ofaaSe (from the stem 'OIH), as <pvya8e (from 
<i>YE) instead of ^vyfjvSe which is not in use, 'EAevalvdde). In pronouns and 
adverbs, -<re is appended instead of -Se, e. g. eKe?-<re, #AAo<re, eTepwce, ovda^ae, 
T7j\oo-e ; more seldom in substantives, e. g. ofrcocre. — In plural substantives in 
-as, <r8e becomes £e, e. g. 'A^TjwCe, ®f)@a£e ; but some substantives in the singu- 
lar, also, follow this analogy, e. g. 'OAypria^e ; so the poetic adverbs, &vpaCe, 
to the door,foras, *pa£e, x a ^"C e » t0 the ground, humum (from the obsolete sub- 
stantives, epa, X ^") earth). 

Rem. 4. Instead of -Se or -tre, the Epic dialect has - S t s also, e. g. xa^aSis 
instead of x«M«C e ) &AAuSis instead of ftAAotre, and oUadis, domum. 

Rem. 5. Several pronominal forms with the usual suffix, have, between the 
stem and the suffix, the syllable ox? which is to be accounted for by the ending 
-aKis coming before the aspirated relative, e. g. Tro\\-ax-6^ev (from rroWaKis 
and o&ev), iravT-ax-6<re ; this occurs also in most pronominal adverbs of place 
in -77, -ov, -01, e. g. aAA-ax-ov, alibi, iroW-ax-ov, iravT-ax-rj, iroXK-ax-r), Tto.VT-o.x-oi. 

§ 236. B. Compounds. 

1. Every compound consists of two words, one of which explains the other 
more definitely. The explanatory word usually stands first, e. g. vav-fiaxia, 
sea-fight, as is usual in English in composite words. The word which is explained 
by the other, shows to what class of words the compound belongs, i. e. whether 
it is a substantive or verb, etc. ; thus, e. g. vav-/x.ax(a is a substantive, vav-fj.axe7v 
a verb, vav-/j.dxos an adjective. 

Remark 1. The explanatory word takes the second place in the compound 
but seldom, and mostly in poetic words, e. g. Seuridaitiwv, i. e. SetVas robs 8ae 
iiovas. 

25*' 



294 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 23? 

2. Both words stand either in an attributive relation to each other ( = a substan- 
tive qualified by an adjective or by another substantive in the Gen.), e. g. /cox' 
e|ia (= Ka.K7] e£is, bad condition) ; crKiaypcxpia (= cwias ypacpr)), painting in light and 
vhade; iirir-ovpis (= 'iTnrov ovpd), horse-tailed ; or in an objective relation ( = a 
verb, adjective, or substantive with the Case of a substantive in the relation of 
an object, or with an adverb in the same relation), e. g. hnroTpo<psiv ( = '{rnrovs 
rp4<p(iv), r nnroTp6<pos ; vavfxax^ (i- e. vavo\ fidxecr^ai) , vavixdxos, vav/xaxia : 
sbrvxtiv. ei)Tvx^ls ', dvurrduou, dudararos, avdcTTaais. 

3. The verb can be compounded with prepositions only, c. g. diro-, <=*-, olvtl-, 
vpo-, ifx-, dia-, Kara-, irapa-, irpo<r-$<xiveiv ) comp. § 237, 5 ; the substantive and 
adjective, either with substantives and adjectives, or with prepositions, or with 
separable and inseparable adverbs and prefixes, e. g. aoDixaTo-tyvXat,, rfiu-Xoyos ; 
irepi-cTTa<ris, Sid-XevKos ; ev-rvx'h-, av-airios ; the adverb, with prepositions only, 
e. g. irepi-araSou. 

Rem. 2. All other compounds are formed by derivation from words pre- 
viously compounded, e. g. ev-rvx^v and ev-Tvx&s from €v-rvxr]s. 

Rem. 3. (a) Separable adverbs are su«A as are used alone, as well as in 
composition, e. g. eu, well; irXrjv, except; d/j.a, at the same time; &yxh near; apri, 
now. recently ; dyav (a-ya-), very; irdXiv, again; TraXat, long since; Sis from duo, 
bis, or the same as 5ix&, dis, separately ; ttuv, wholly ; evrvx^y, euTi»x7js, prosperous ; 
irX-n/x/xeXiis (ttXtju, /xeXos), violating harmony; TTXTifx/xeX^v, irX^jxix.^Xiqo'Ls ; A/xccTpo- 
xdct), to run together, a/xarpoxia ; ayxtPare?]/, to go near to ; ay xfodXaa a os, mart 
propinquus; dpTL&aXr}S, now blooming ; dyaarSrei'rjs, dydppoos, dydvvupos, very snowy; 
iraXiixfSXcxrTos, that buds again ; TraXatcpvTos, planted long since ; SisxiXioi, two thou- 
sand ; di<p&oyyos, having a double sound ; irdvaocpos, all-wise. 

(b) Inseparable adverbs arc such as are used only in composition. They are 
as follows : — 

(a) v/xi; half, semi, e. g. 7]ju.l<pXeK7os, half-burned, semiustus. 

()8) Svs- expi-esses difficulty, adversity, or aversion, and is often the antith- 
esis of ev, e. g. dusrvx^f and eiruxejV, dusBou/uovla. misfortune ; 

(7) a Privative (usually au- before a vowel) has the force of the Latin in, and 
expresses the negation of the idea contained in the simple word, e. g. 
daotyos, unwise ; arifiia, dishonor ; dirais, childless ; avainos, innocens. 

(5) a Collective and Intensive, like the Latin con in composition, expresses com- 
munity, equality, or a collective idea, and hence also intensity, e. g. (commu- 
nity, especially in the names of kindred and companions) dSeXcpSs, brother, 
from SeXcpis, womb ; (equality) drdXavros, of the same weight ; &Tre8os, even ; 
(in a collective sense) d&p6os, collected (Spew, frpeo/xai, to cry aloud), doXX-fts, 
collected (from dxi)s or aXr)s), ayeipoo, dyeXr) ; (intensity) aTewrjs, intent, in- 
tentus ; demos, very shady ; djBpo/xos, making a loud noise. 

Rem. 4. The Euphonic a (§ 16, 10) must be distinguished from the Collec- 
tive a, e. g. (TTaxvs and dcrrax^s, an ear of grain ; arepoirr] and a.<nepo-ni), lightning. 



§ 237. Formation of Compounds. 

1. When the first part of tbe compound is a verb (§ 236, Rem. 1), the pure 
(sometimes also the strengthened) stem of the verb remains unchanged, if the 
following word begins with a vowel, e. g. (pep-avyrjs, irei^-dpxeTu ; or the final 
vowels e, 0, 1, also the syllables <n, e<r, eai, ao, are annexed to the stem of the 
verb, if the following word begins with a consonant ; cr also is annexed wheu 



$ 237. J FORMATION OF COMPOUNDS. 2V>5 

the following word begins with a vowel, e. g. SaK-e-Srv/xos, tutt-o-tcikttjs and Xein 
o-TaKTns, repir-i-Kepavvos, iyep-crl-yeXoos, 0ep-eV-/3ios, rafj.-e<ri-xp<»>s, eAtf-€tri-7re7rAos, 
{.u^ofidpfiapos (= (j-iy-tfo-fi.), ptyaairis ( = p(Tr-o~-ao~7ris), iT\r,£nnros (= ivXi]y-(T- 
tTnros). 

2. When the first part of the compound is a substantive or adjective, the 
declension-stem of the substantive generally remains unchanged, e. g. (first 
Dec.) vi>crj-<p6pos, ayopa'V^(j.os $ (second Dec.) Aoyo-ypdcpos, la-'fj/xepos (by Elision), 
KaKovpyos (by Crasis), AayoofioAos (Xayws) : (third Dec.) acrrv-vofAOS, 7)dv-\6yos, 
0ov-<popfi6s, vav-fiaxLoL ; irvp-cpSpos, /xeAo^-xoAia, Traurjyvpis ; in some, the union- 
vowel is annexed to the stem, e. g. crojjxaT-o-cpvXal, (pv<ri-o-\6yos, SaSovxos (by 
Crasis, instead of SaS-o'-exos) 5 m neuters in -os, Gen. €-0$, the e is elided before 
0, e. g. £i(p-o-<p6pos, or the declension-stem in -es [§ 31, (b)] is retained, e. g. 
T*Aes-<p6pos ; so also in other neuters, e. g. nepas-fZ6\os, <pws-(p6pos. 

Remark 1. In the first Dec, however, the union- vowel is often found 
instead of the decler«ion-stem, e. g. 8iK-o-ypd(pos (Si/ctj), Koyx-o-(p6pos ; so also 
the ending -77 or -a is annexed even to words of the second and third Dec, e. g. 
§aya.T7)-<p6pos, ao~Tridr)-<p6pos; neuters in -os (Gen. -eos, PI. -77) frequently vary 
between the and 77, e. g. £i<po<popos and Etcpr)(p6pos, <TKevo<p6pos and o-nev-nipSpos. 

Rem. 2. In some words of the third Dec, more seldom of the first and 
second, t is annexed to the pure stern, as a union-vowel, e. g. irvpiirvovs, alyi- 
06rr]s ; /j.vamr6\os {p.vo-rr\s), ^vpiirvovs. In several words a euphonic a (<n) is 
inserted, e. g. {Aoyo-cr-Totcos, &eo-<r-ex&p' lCf <> together with the regular S-eoex&p'a s 
vav-vl-iropos. 

3. When the first part of the compound is an adverb, only those changes 
take place, which arise from the general rules respecting the change of 
consonants. 

4. Respecting the second part of the compound, it is to be noted, that the 
words begiuning with a, e, 0, in composition regularly lengthen these vowels 
(if the last part of the compound is a simple) into 77 and a>, e. g. (a) evrjve^os 
from 'dve/xos, CTpaTrjyos from aya, ev-qvap from awftp^ (e) Svs7ipeT/j.os from iper- 
/j.6s, SvsriAaTos from iAavuco ; (0) auco(pe\i)s from o^eAos, iravuiX&pos from oWvpa, 
auet>vvfj.os from 6vof.ia. 

5. In relation to the end of the word, the following points should be noted : — 

A. In the Greek language, as has been seen (§ 236, 3), a verb can be com- 
pounded only with prepositions ; but if it is necessary to compound a verb with 
another part of speech, this is never done immediately, but by means of a 
derivation from a compound word either actually existing or assumed. Then 
the derivative-ending, commonly -ea>, is regularly appended to this compound 
word : e. g. from 'Iinrovs rpecpeiu, to keep horses, the derivative is not iTriroTpecpeLv, 
but by means of the compound substantive tinroTpocpos, it is !inroTpo(pea> ; so 
beoaefieco from freocrejSTjs, vav^ax^v from vavfxdxos, ei>Ti»x<?« / from evrvx'fts. 

B. The compound is an adjective or noun: — 

a. The second part is derived from a verb, and has the following endings : 
(a) Most frequently -os, -ov, c g. Sr]poTp6(pos, nourishing wild beasts, &7]p6rpo- 

<pos, nourished by wild beasts. See § 75, Rem. 4. 
(0) -77s (-ttjs) or -as (Gen. -ov), -r)p (-rr}p), -rap, commonly used a3 

substantives with a transitive signification, e. g. evepy4T7)s, benefactor; 

i/ofio&eT7)s, legislator;. fMvpoircoArjs, opvi&o&jjpas, 7rcu$oAeTa>// , 



296 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 237 

(y) -r)s, - e s, commonly with a passive or intransitive signification, e. g, 
&eo<piA7]s, beloved of God; evfxa&r,s, quick to learn, docilis ; evirpeir-fis, 
becoming ; 

(5) -s (-£), e. g. ^ev$6fj.apTvs from MAPTTIi, vo[xo<pv\a.l. 

b. Or the second part is a substantive : — 

(a) An attributive relation exists between the two parts of the compound, the 
first containing a more definite explanation of the last. The substantive 
remains unchanged. The first part is an adverb or preposition, sometimes also 
a substantive or adjective, e. g. dfiodovXos, a fellow-slave ; fiovhipos, excessive hun- 
ger, bulimy ; aKpoiroKis, citadel. 

(b) An objective relation exists between the two parts of the compound, the 
last denoting the object of the first. This division includes a large number of 
adjectives, the first part of wbich consists either of a verb, or, though more 
seldom, of an adjective, of a separable or inseparable adverb, or of a preposi- 
tion used as an adverb, e. g. deiatdai/moov = 6 tovs Sa't^ouas Selects, i7rix ai P^ KaK0 ^ 
= 6 rols KctKoTs iirixaipwv, Ka.Ko§aip.wv = 5 Koacbv Sai/xova ex°° v > Svsepccs, one who 
has an unhappy love, ev&eos = o rbv &ebv iv eavrct) ex&tj/, 'airoutos = 6 curb rov 
cXkov a>v, a-Kous = 6 noiSus ovk ex^v. In all these examples tbe form of the sub- 
stantive remains unchanged, 1 where the substantive has a form whicb is appro • 
priate for the Masc. or Fern, of the adjective, but where this is not the case, the 
substantive assumes a corresponding adjective-ending, viz. -os (Gen. -ou), -cos 
(Gen. -w),-7]s (Gen. -ovs), -is (Gen. -idos), -oov and (when it ends in -v) -s, e. g 
(TvvZenrvos {Seiirpov), a fellow-guest, ev&vdiicos (5i/c?j), 6,ti[mos [tijjlt]), dexv^pos 
(rj/xepa), (pi\oxpVH-aTOS (xp?lf-<-a, XP'hl x ' XTa )i olctto/jlos (ar6fxa), evyeoos (yv), having a 
fertile soil; Aenr6i/ea>s (vavs), one who deserts the ship ; aua<f>e\r]s (rb 6(pe\os), &va\- 
kls (aAfrij), axpi][J-(>}v, aSaKpvs, Gen. -vos (rb Sdapv). 

c. Or the second part is an adjective : — 

The adjective retains its form, except that those in -us commonly take the 
ending -7js ; the first part consists either of a substantive or an adverb, e. g. 
aaTvyetrau, near the city, urbi vicinus ; iravaocpos or irdaaocpos, -ov, very ivise; av6- 
fjioios, -ov, unlike ; Trp687}\os, -ov, a.r)5r)s from 7]8vs, irodwK7]s from ukvs. 

1 For example, SeiCiScuVwy is an adjective of two endings, the ending -urn 
being both Masc. and Fern., therefore the substantive dal/j.oov is not changed in 
composition ; but avj/Senrvos takes a regular adjective termination, as the sub- 
stantive Seiirvov has neither a Masc. nor Fern, ending. 



SYNTAX 



SECTION I 
SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE 



CHAPTEE I. 
Parts of a Simple Sentence c 

\ 238. Nature of a Sentence. — Subject. — Predicate. 

1. Syntax treats of sentences. A sentence is the ex- 
pression of a thought in words, e. g. To poBov ^raXkec) 6 
av^pco7ros ^vtjtos iaTLv. The conceptions of the mind are 
related both to each other and to the speaker. The con- 
ceptions or ideas themselves are expressed by Essential 
words (§ 38, 4) ; their relations to each other, partly by 
inflection and partly by Formal words. 

Thus, e. g. in the sentence Tb Ka\bv p6Sov &d\\~et iv tgS rod irarp-bs K^tr-a, 
there are five essential words : Ka\6s, pSSov, &d\Aeiv, irar^p, ktjttos ; their rela- 
tions to each other are expressed partly hy their inflection and partly by the 
Formal words r6, eV, t<£, rod. 

2. Every sentence must necessarily have two parts, a sub- 
ject and a predicate. The subject is that, of which some- 
thing is affirmed ; the predicate that, which is affirmed of the 
subject, e. g. in the sentences, to poBov^rdWec — 6 av^pcoiro^ 
St^to? eariv, to poBov and 6 av^pcoTros are the subjects, ^d\- 
\ei and ^vtjtos icrTiv, the predicates. 

3. The predicate properly contains the substance of the 
sentence ; the subject is subordinate to it and can be 



298 SYNTAX. [$ 23& 

expressed by a mere inflection-ending of the verb, e. g 
diSco-fiL, (J) give. 

4. The subject is a substantive or a word used as a 
substantive, viz. a substantive pronoun or numeral; an 
adjective or participle used as a substantive ; an adverb 
which becomes a substantive by prefixing the article ; a 
preposition with its Case ; an infinitive ; finally, every word, 
tetter, syllable, and every combination of words can be con- 
sidered as a substantive, and with the neuter article com- 
monly agreeing with it, can be used as a subject. The 
subject is in the Nom. 

T b p 6 8 o v &aAAei. — 'Ey k ypdcpoo, a b ypd<peis. — Tpe?s ?)A&ov. — 'O aocpbs eu- 
haijxwv eari. — Ol (p&ov ov vt e s fiKTovvrat. — O i it d A a i at/hpetoi 1\<ra.v. — O I tr e p I 
M xAt iddrj u KaXSiS ep.ax^o'a.uro. — X. Cy. 8. 3, 42. Ovtoi oStws tjSv iari rb 
* X e ' v Xp4/* aTa » & s o-viapbv rb airofiaWeiv. — Tb 8 i 8 a cr « e iv kolK.6v eariv. 
— X. R. L. 9, 2. eirerat tt? aperf) cc6£e<r&at els rbv irXeiu yjpovov pJaXkov, ^ 
rfj /ca/cuj. — To e t (TtVSeoy^s earw. — Tb -fi t a /xanpdv ecrriv. — Tb yvw&i <reaw- 
rbu KaXov effriv. 

Remark 1. In the construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive, the 
subject is in the Ace, as will be seen § 307, 3. In indefinite and distributive 
designations of number, the subject is expressed by a preposition {els, -Kept, (card) 
with its Case, e.g. Els rerrapas ^Adw, as many as four came (with round num- 
bers els also signifies about, at most). X. Cy. 8. 3, 9. ecrraaav irpwTov fieu rcov 
5opv<p6pwv els TerpaKisxi^'iovs {about four thousand stood), efxwpocr&ev Se tup 
irv\G}v els r ea <r a pas, 8is%tAiot Se eKaTepco&ev ruv irvXwv. X. H. 6. 5, 10. 
eepvyov els AaKeSai/JLOva ruu irepl ~2,Td<Tnrirov Teyearuu ire pi okt aKOff iovs. 
So ko& endarovs, each one singly, one by one, singuli ; Kara, e&vr], singulae gentes. 

5. In the following cases the subject is not expressed by 
any special word : — 

(a) When the subject is a personal pronoun and is not particularly emphatic, 
e. g. rpdepoo, ypdcpeis, ypdcpei; 

(b) When the idea contained in the predicate is such, that it cannot appro- 
priately belong to every subject, but only to a particular one, the subject 
being, as it were, implied in the predicate. Thus, olvoxoevei in Horn. 
ipo. o olvox^os, the cup-bearer pours out the wine ; &vei in Her. sc. 6 &vTr\p. 
X. An. 3. 4, 36. eirel eyiyvaffKOU avrovs ol "EW-nves fiovXofxevovs airievai KaX 
SiayyeWo/xeuovs, eicfipvj-e (sc. 6 /C7jpi>£) TO?s"EAA-n<ri irapaaKevdaaa&cu. So 
(TTfixaivet tt? <rd\ir lyy i, e<r d\tz iy£e v, sc. 6 craATn/cTr'/s {the signal is 
[was] given by the trumpet). So we must explain words which denote the 
state of the weather or the phenomena of nature ; as v e i, it rains ; vlcpet, 
it snows, fipovTa, acrr pdirrei, sc. 6 Zeus. Th. 4, 52. e<rei<re, there was 
an earthquake. X. Cy. 4. 5, 5. a-va-Kord^ei, it is dark; 

(c) The subject is easily supplied from the context ; thus, in designations of 
time, e. g. i\v eyyvs r]\iov Sva-fiwu (sc. r\ 7jfj.epa). ^Hu afupl ayopav ir\^ov<rat 
and the like ; irapex ei H- 0l > sc - Kaip6s, it is time, it is allowed, one can = licet, 



$ ktfii SUBJECT. PREDICATE. COPULa 299 

e. ^ ler. 3, 73. rjfuv irape^ei avaadxTaffSui ttjv apxh v - * n tn i s wav tue 
w«i\v * &eos is very frequently omitted in certain phrases, e. g. wp ov.)- 
pal* i, sc. 6 &e6s ; irpoxope'i f*oi ( sc. to irpdyp-aTa), things prosper to me, 
I succeed, comp. Th- 1, 109. In such expressions as (p a <rt, Ae yov <rt, etc.. 
the sulject 'dpfrpociroi is regularly omitted, as it is readily apparent ; 

(d) Sometimes the subject is supplied from some word of the sentence. Her. 
9, 8. rlv 'la^fiby ireix^ov Kai acpi i t v irpbs reAei", sc rb Te?x os y ^ey 
walled the Isthmus, and the [wall] was, etc. X. Cy. 2. 4, 24. 7ropev<xo/xai 
ev&vs npbs r a /3o<ri\eia, Kai %v ixkv aubiffr^Tai, sc. 6 /3a<nAeus. So also 
other Cases as well as the Nom. are thus supplied, e. g. PL L. 804, d 
iraioia xpvfyievos, ouSeV 7ra> tm tolovt wv (sc iraidcou) oiacpepow ; 

(e) With the third Pers. Sing, of the verb, in a subordinate clause containing 
a general idea, and in definitions, the indefinite pronoun t I s is sometimes 
omitted. PL Criton. 49, C. ovre avradiKelf Se?, ovt€ kolkSis Troie?i/ cvoiua 
av&p&irwv, ovo" hv otlovv it da XV " 7r ' avr£>v, not even if any one should 
suffer from them ; so often Avith 'the Inf. ; but if a participle stands in 
connection with the Inf., e. g. Eur. M. 1^18. Kovcpeos 4>4peiu xpv frvvrbv 
out a (ru/j.(popds, the participle must be c nsidered as the subject. 

Rem. 2. Such expressions as 8e?, xp~hi 8o/ce?, Trpexet, ^o-tl(v), eVSexerat (it is 
possible), KaAws, ev e'xe:, ex?J \6yov (consentaneum est), Xeyercu (it is said), etc., 
the Greek language always considers as personal, the following Inf. or substan- 
tive sentence being regarded as the subject of these verbs. 

6. The predicate is a verb, an adjective, participle, ad- 
jective pronoun or j:umeral, or a substantive with the 
Formal word ehai ; elvai, in this relation, is usually called 
the copula, since it connects the adjective, substantive, etc. 
with the subject, and forms one thought, e. g. 

Tb pooov &d\\e„ — 'O frvfrpwius &v>it6s iariv. — 'A&dvar oi elaiv oi 
beol. — 'H apeTTj KaXi) scttiv. — 'Ay a &rj Trapaicpaais iarii/ eraioov. — Kvpos 
r)v j8a<r cXevs. — To vto to Trpayjjid effri t6o*. — 2v ?)0'&a TrdvTwv irp&Tos. 
— Oi frvSpes ri (T av t pels. 

Rem 3. The finite verb denotes both the thing affirmed (id quod praedicatur) 
and the relation of the affirmation to the subject and speaker ; the relation to 
the subject, is denoted by the personal-endings of the verb ; the relation to the 
speaker, by its Modes and Tenses ; e. g. the ending of the verb Xeyco shows 
that its subject is in the first person, and its being in the Ind. mode Pres. tense, 
indicates that the speaker asserts something directly, at the present time. But 
if the predicate is expressed by an adjective or substantive with eli/ai, the 
affirmation is denoted by the adjective or substantive, and its relation to the 
speaker by elvai, e. g. €voaifj.6w el/xi = evSaL/j.ove-w, evZaipicav el = evSatfxoue-ets, 
evSat/jLoues ioovTai = ev8ai/j.ovr)-o-ovtriu, though there is a difference between the 
two modes of expression. 

Rem. 4. It is necessary to distinguish between the use of elvai, as a Formal 
and as an Essential word ; in the former relation, it is merely a copula, con- 
necting the subject with the substantive or adjective, etc. (§ 238, 6); in the 
latter, it has the idea of being or existence, being in a certain condition, etc., e. g. 
€<rn &e6s = &eos ivTiv &v (there is a God, God exists), as in Her. 3, 108. tov 
Sieiou r) irpovoif] e (tt\ iovcra ffocpr). 



300 syntax. [$239 

Rem. 5. In order to give greater emphasis to the predicate, the simple idea 
expressed by the verb, is resolved into the participle and copula ehai. This 
mode of expression, however, is more usual in poetry, though it is found also 
in prose, particularly in Herodotus, comp. jRem. 3. Eur. C. 381. irS>s S> raXai- 
iro>p\ tfre lidcrxovr e.s rdSe ; Id. H. 117. i\v cnrevScov. Her. 3, 99. awap- 
ve6fxev6s e (XT i. Id. 9, 51. rj vrjaos icrri a-rrb rod 'Ao'cvirov SeKa (TTaSiovs 
airexovcra. PI. E. 860, e. el ravia ovrcos exovrd 4ariv. Dem. 01. 3. 
(v. 1.) 11, 7. raur av eyvtvK ore s i\vav, they would have been convinced of these, 
things. 

Rem. 6. The copula eTvai is sometimes omitted, though commonly only in 
the Ind. Pres. ; eTvai is sometimes omitted, even when it is not a copula, but 
properly a verb. This ellipsis is most frequent in the following cases : — 

(a) In general propositions, observations, and provei'bs. Eur. 0. 330. 6 fj.eyas 
oXf3os ov fj.6vi.ij.os iv f3poro7s. X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. arpanct yap 7] picTTt] (65os) 
raxio-TT] ; 

(b) Very often with verbal adjectives in -reos, as also with other expres- 
sions denoting necessity and duty, e. g. a v a yK-n, xpt&v, &e/xis, elicos, 
also with Ktxipos, &pa and the like. Dem. Ph. 3. 129, 70. rifiiv y virep T? t s 
eXev&eplas aycovLareov. Id. Cor. 296. 205. arifxias — iv dovXevovar) rf} 
ir6Aei cpepeiv dvdyicri] 

(c) Often with certain adjectives, e. g. eroijxos, irp6Srvfj.os, oTosre, Swa- 
t6s, padiov, x a ^- e7r of, StjXov, a£iov, etc. PI. Phaedr. 252, a. (rj 
ipvxb) SovXeveiv eroi/j.7}. Dem. Ph. 1. 48, 29. iyw irdo-x*w oriovv eroi- 
fxos. X. C. 1, 1, 5. drjXov ovv, on ovk av (Soj/cpaVr/s) irpoeXeyev, el fxrj 
iiricrTevev aX-nbevo-eiv. Comp. ib. 2, 34. Here belong also the expressions 
Savjxao-rbv baov, it is very wonderful (= mirum quantum), a^xavov ocrov, it 
is quite impossible, inconceivable (= immane quantum), see § 332, Rem. 10. 
On ovSels ostls ov (= nemo non), see § 332, Rem. 12. 

Rem. 7. The Ind. Impf. is but seldom omitted, e. g. Aeschin. Ctes. § 71, vb£ 
ev Lieaco (sc. -fjv) Kai Traprj/mev rfj varepaia els ttjv eKKXrjaiav ; the Ind. Pres. also is 
not very often omitted after conjunctions, e. g. SirSre, ivei (comp. X. C. 1, 46); 
on the contrary, very frequently after otl and ths (that), e. g. X. C. 1. 2. 52. 
Xeycav, as obSev ocpeXos. The subjunctive is but seldom omitted after the rela- 
tive bs av, and especially after conjunctions, e. g. PI. Rp. 370, e. £>v av avro7s 
Xptla (sc. fi). The ellipsis of the Opt. when av belongs to it is more frequent, 
e. g. X. Cy. 1.4, 12. ris yap 'av, ecpacrav, gov ye ixavwrepos Tveiaai (sc. elr]) ; Ib. 2. 
3, 2. r)v fj.ev rjixels vLKafxev, SrjXov, otl o'l re iroXe/j.LOL av rifxerepoL (sc. eitfaav). The 
ellipsis of the Imp. is very rare, e. g. S. 0. C. 1480. "iXaos, 3> Sai/j-wv. X. An. 3. 
3, 14. ro7s ovv &eo7s X®-P LS ( sc - eo~rco), otl ov crvv iroKkrj pco/j-v, aXXa o~vv oXiyois 
-TjASov. The participle is very often omitted, especially after verba intelligendi 
and declarandi, e. g. X. S. 3, 7. 5rjx6v ye, otl cpavXos (sc. wv) (pavovjxaL, but else- 
where also, e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 15. droira Xeyeis Ka\ ovSafxcbs irpbs aov (sc. ovra), et 
nullo modo tibi convenientia ; even in such cases as Th. 4, 135. x eL l x ^ v0 ^ reXevTcvv- 
tos Kal -rrpbs tap %8r) (sc. ovtos). The Inf. is often omitted after 5oice7v, r)ye7o-- 
&cu, vopLL&LV and the like, e. g. Th. 7, 60. (3ovXevrea eSo/cet. X. Cy. 1. 6, 14. 
atviovra fxe ineXevaas ro7s o"t paTrjy lko7s (sc. eTvai) vo/xL^o/xevois avdpdcn diaXeyea- 
d-ai. 

$239. Comparison. — Attribute and Object. 

1. When the predicate belongs to the subject in a higher oi 

lower degree than to another object, this relation is denoted by 

ae Comparative, e. g. 'O 7ra.Tr/p /ici(wv io-rlv. ?} 6 vi6<;. — 'O 



$ 239.J COMPARISON. ATTRIBUTE A«D OBJECT. 30 1 

crocjibs fxaXXov \atp€i rfj apzrrj, t) rots )(pyp.acnv. And when the 
predicate belongs to the subject in the highest or lowest 
degree, as respects all other objects compared, the Superlative 
is used, and commonly takes with it a partitive Genitive, e. g. 

~2,U)KpaT7)<; 7T0LVT0jV HWrjVOV (T O <p <x>T (XT O S T]V. O CTO</)OS TTOLVTixlV 

fxaXiara kiri^v /xet rrjs aperr}?. 

Remark 1. The Comparative is strengthened or more definitely stated in 
the following ways : (a) by en, still, even, etiam, e. g. fteifav en, still greater ; 
(b) by jx ate pip, bxiyic, iroXXcp, eTi iroAAw, o a co, toltovtco; /xeya, 
bxiyov, iroXv, '6 a ov, to gov to, which show how much more or less of the 
quality expressed by the adjective is intended, e. g. iro A A<£ fieifav, multo major, 
far greater, it o XX $ eTi /j.ei(oves, multo major es etiam ; (c) sometimes by/iSA- 
Xov. Her. 1, 32. fxixXXov oXfSiwTepos effTL (far). 

Rem. 2. The Superlative is strengthened or more definitely stated in the 
following ways: (a) by icai, vel, even, e. g. /cat fj.dXio-Ta, vel maxime, very greatly 
indeed; (b) bywords denoting measure or the degree of difference, viz. iroXXcp, 
aaKpw, iroXv, irapa iroXv, oacc, t oa ovtco, e. g, ttoXXco apio~Tos, multo 
praestantlssimus, tlie best by far ; /laicpcp apio-Tos, longe praestantissi>nus ; (c) even 
by the Superlative: fxaXicTTa (7rAe to- top and /xdy lctt ov j oet.), e. g. S. 
0. C. 743. trXelffT ov dv&pctnrccv kolklctos. Th. 7, 42. jj.dXicr -a tzivoraTos; 
(d) by the relative: as 1 (oiras), otl and ^, oTos (§ 343, Rem. 2), e.g.as 
Taxio-ra, quam celerrime, otl /xaXiffTa, fi &pio~rov, e. g. PI. Apol. 23, a. iroXXaX 
p.ev airex&eial fxoi yeyovcuri kolL oTai x a *-* 7Z & TaTa - 1 Ka ^ &apvT<XTaL. X. An. 4. 8, 
2. x < *p' l0V olov x a *- €7r (i>TaToi' ; (e) by els, unus, e. g. Her. 6, 127. ^A&e ~2jj.lv- 
dvpiSrjs ~XvfiapLTi]s, ts ewl irXeTirTov Stj x At <^s e ^ s avfyp airi/cero. X. An. 1. 
9, 22. 5a>pa it X el lt to. els ye av^p cvv eXdfx^ave, he received the most gifts, at least 
considering the. fact that he was but a single individual (C. Tusc. 2. 26, 64. amplitu- 
dinem animi unam esse omnium rem pulcherrimam) : (f) a peculiar mode of 
strengthening the Superlative, is by joining iv to7s with it, in which case the 
Superlative must be repeated, e. g. 'O "Epcos iv to?s irpetr $vto.t6s etm 
(i. e. iv toIs irpeo-fivraTOLs oZctl), the oldest among those who are very old. Her. 7, 
137. tovt6 /J.0L ev toIcl &ei6Ta.T ov cpaiveTm yeveaSraL. PI. Symp. 173, b. 
~2.o3Kpa.Tovs ipaaTr]s &v ev to7s fidXuTTa tcvv TOTe. The construction with the 
Pern, is found only in Time, e. g. 3, 81. (o-toW) ev to7s TrpccT-n iyeveTo. lb. 
17. ev to7s irXe?o~Tai vvjes. In such instances, to7s must be considered 
as Neut. In like manner, the expression o/xoia (6/j.o?a Ion.) to?s was used 
with the Superlative. Her. 3, 8. aefiovTaL 5e 'ApdfiLOL -k'httls av^pcairwv 6(xo?a 
t otcr l /xdXi(TT a (sc. cefiojxevoLs), Wee those who respect very much, ut qui maxime. 
Th. 1, 25. XR^H-dTcov hvvdfxei ovTes kclt iiceTvov tov xp^vov '6/j.oiu t o?s 'EXX-f]vccv 
it Xovcr icoTaT ols. The Superlative is also intensified by joining a positive 
with it, e. g. 'Aya&av iirirewv KpaTiaTos, the best among the good horsemen = the 
very best. 

Rem. 3. The Superlative relation is often expressed more emphatically by 
negative adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, preceded by ov (Litotes), 
instead of positive adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, e. g. oi>x tikio-to., 
not the leasts especially, ov naKio-Tos, ovk iXdxio-T~os, stronger than /xd< 
Xlo-tcl, $eXTL(TTos, /xeyiaTos. Sometimes, also, it is expressed antithetically, e. g 
oi>x ^\Ki(TTa, a A A a fidXicTTa. 

1 'D.s, '6tl are not in themselves intensive particles, but merely connect some 
part of Svva/j.a.L understood, and in that way may be said to give intensity to 
the Superlative. Sometimes Svvafj.ai is expressed, e. g. aevoQwv avio-TaTou 
eaTaXfievos eirl ir6Xe/j.ov cos edvvaTO klxXXlltto.. 

26 



302 SYNTAX. f $ 24C 

2. A sentence consisting of a subject and piedicate may ba 
extended by defining the subject and predicate more exactly. 
The word or words which define the subject more fully, is 
called an attribute, or attributive. The subject is more exactly 
described, therefore, (a) by the addition of an adjective (attrib- 
utive 1 adjective), e. g. to k<x\ov pooov; (b) by the Gen. of a 
substantive (attributive Gen.), e. g. 6 tgv fiao-ikeus tajx-os, 
regis hortus (= regius hortus) ; (c) by a substantive in the same 
Case as the word which is more definitely described, e. g. 
Kv/oo5, 6 fiao-iXevs. The explanatory word is here said to be in 
apposition with the word explained, and may be called an 
appositive of that word. The predicate (which is termed the 
object), is more exactly described, (a) by a Case of a substan- 
tive ; (b) by a preposition with a substantive ; (c) ":>y the Inf., 
(d) by an adverb, e. g. c O o-o<f>bs ttjv aperrjv dcr/cei. lie pi rrjs 
n-arptSos fxa^o/xed^a. 'A7rtevat e7rtS^vjxu). K a A. cos y/oa<£eis. 

$ 240. Agreement. 

1. The finite verb agrees with the subject hi Person and 
Number; the adjective, participle, pronoun, and numeral, in 
Gender, Number, and Case. The substantive, as a predicate, 
agrees with the subject only in Case; in Gender, Number, and 
Case, only "when it denotes a person, and hence either has a 
particular form for the Masc. and Fern., or is of common gender. 
The same principle applies to substantives in apposition ($ 266, 
1). But when the substantive denotes a thing, it agrees with 
the subject only in Case, e. g. 

'E-yw ypd(p(t}, o~v ypdcpeis, ojtos ypd<pei. — 'O &v$rpu>ivos 8rvi)r6s iariu. — 'H apery 
Kakr) io~nv. — To irpdyixa alaxpov eo~riv. — Of "EXA^es Tro\e/xiKdi>TaTOL tfaav. — 
'O Ka\bs irais, '(] aocpr) yvvr\, rb p.iKpbv tIkvov. — 'Eyevecrdvv rw dvdpe tovtco 
(Kpirias Kai 'AAKifiidSns) (pvcrei (piXoTijuLordrca irdvruu 'Afrrivaiwv, X. C. 1.2, 14, 
• — Kvpos ^u fixaiKevs. — Toixvpis i\v fiaaiAeia. — Kvpos, 6 fiao-tAevs, To/xvpis, r) fiaal 
Aeia. On the contrary, t$)v Svy ar epa, deiu6u ti KaWos kcu /J. eye 
&os, i^dycDV wSe elirev (his daughter a wonder in beauty and size), X. Cy. 5. 2, 7. 

1 When the adjective merely ascribes some quality to the substantive with 
which it agrees, it is called an attributive adjective, but when it belongs to the 
predicate and is used in describing what is said of the subject, it is called a 
predicative adjective, e. g. in the expression 6 dya^bs dv-hp (the good man), dya- 
$6s is attributive, but in 6 dvi'ip etrri dya$6s (the man is good), it is predicative. 



{ 240.] AGREEMENT. 303 

2. The predicative adjective or substantive agrees with the 
subject as above stated, when the folloAving and other similar 
verbs, which do not of themselves express a complete predicate 
sense, have chiefly the force of the copula : — 

(a) The verb virdpxew, to be the cause of, to be, to exist ; 

(b) Verbs signifying to become, to increase, to groiv, e. g. yiyvo- 
fxai, ecpvv, av^dvo/xai ; 

(c) The verbs fxevw, to remain, and Kariarr-qv, to be established, 
appointed, to stand; 

(d) Verbs signifying to seem, appea- shoio one's self, e. g. 
eoiKa, (fiacvo/xai, SrjXovfxai ; 

(e) Verbs signifying to be named, e. g. KaAovpxi, oVo/x,a£o/x<u, 
XiyofjLGLL, clkovu), to be called (like audire) ; 

(f) Verbs signifying to be ajypointed to something, to be chosen, 
to be named, e. g. atpovfxai, dTroSet/cw/xai ; 

(g) Verbs signifying to be regarded as something, to be recog- 
nized as something, to be supposed, e. g. vo/u.i£o/xai, k/hVo- 
//,ai, vTroXa/jifSdvofJiaL ; 

(h) Verbs signifying to be given as something, to be received as 
something, to be abandoned, cast off, and the like, e. g. 

Kvpos eye veto fiacriAevs rwv Tlepcrwv. — Tovtois 6 $iAnriros fxeyas Tjvj-ri&T} 
(Dem.). — 'AAKi&idd-ns rjpe&r) aipaT-qyos. — 'A^rl <piXo)v k<x\ ^evcav vvv n6\aKes 
kcu &eo?s ex&pol aKovovffiv (audiunt), they hear themselves called flatterers, etc., 
Dem. Cor. 241. 

Remark 1. When the verbs mentioned under (e), (f ), (g), (h), have the 
active form, they take two accusatives (§ 280, 4). 

Rem. 2. Several of the verbs above named, are also joined Avith adverbs, 
but they then express a complete predicate sense ; e. g. ^ccKpar-ns i\v (lived) del 
arvv Tots veois. K a A cos, KaKcas eo~riv (it is well, etc.). Aeivws eo~av ev 
<pv\a,Krj(ri ol BafivA&vioi (diligenter versabantur in custodia), Her. 3, 152. 
Mdrriu ehcu, to be in vain. Elvai, as well as the verbs ylyvecr^ai and irecpv 
tcevai, is very often connected with adverbs of place and degree, of which 
the corresponding adjective-forms are not in use, as §ix a i X w P ' s i e k a s, /xaic- 
pdv, tt6 ppco, eyyvs, Tr\T]o~iov, dfxov, a\is, fiaAAov, ju a A t <r t a, e g. 
1 o?o~i 'A&rjvaiwv arpaTrjyoTai eyivovr o Zi%a aX yva/Acu (sententiae in diversas 
partes discedebant), Her. 6, 109. 

3. When a Demonstrative, Relative, or Interrogative pronoun, 
either as a subject or predicate, is connected with a substantive 
by the copula civai, or one of the verbs mentioned in No. 2, 
the Greek commonly, as the Latin regularly, put the pronoun 
by means of attraction, in the same gender and number with 



304 SYNTAX. [$ 241 

the substantive to which it belongs. So too, when the pronoun 
is in the Ace. and depends on a verb of naming, e. g. 

Ovr 6 s iffTLV 6 avhp. — A u t 77 icrrl ir-ny)] Kal apxh navTiav twv KaKcov. — 
Ovtol 5?j y P£rr)vouoi ye o'ikt\u clvt^v koKovctiv, a\Xa ypacpyv, PL Eutyphr. 
princ. — Ilapo rwv Trpoyeyewn/Aevcov uavfrdvere • avT7] yap api or ttj 5 idatr Ka- 
\ia, X. Cy. 8. 7, 24. — T i s ecrri ir tj y $] rrjs aperris ; — Tidvres ovroi v6/xoi 
elcriv, oiis to TtArj&os CTwe^bv Kal SoKifj-daav eypatye, X. C. 1. 2, 42. — 'Ecu/ Tts 
cpi\os ixol yevojxevos ev Troielv e&e'A?;, ovr 6s {xoi fiios icrri (this is my means of 
life, hie mihi est victus) 3. 11, 4. 

Rem. 3. Yet the Greeks not unfrequently put *he pronoun in the Xeut. 
Sing., e. g.*Eo-Ti Se tovto rvpawis, PI. Rp. 344, a, where in Lat. it would 
be, Est autem haec tyrannis. Tovto icrriv r) S iKaiotrvvr), ib. 432, b. Tovto 
Trrjyr) Kal apxh (cwdjereeiw, Phaedr. 245, c. The Xeut. PL is sometimes used 
instead of the Xeut. Sing. "Eycoye <pr)/A TavTa y.\v (pKvapias diuai, X. An. 
1. 3, 18. See § 241, Eem. 3. The neuter pronoun denotes the nature of an object ; 
on the contrary, the pronoun that agrees with a noun, denotes the quality of the 
object. Hence there are cases where the two forms of expression cannot be 
interchanged, e. g. Ti iarn <p&6vos; quid est invidia? (what is its nature?) 
and Tts- icrn cpbovos; quae est invidia? (ichat is envy ?) The neuter demon- 
strative is also always used, when it is more fully explained by a Avord in appo- 
sition, e.g. Ov tovt r,v evdaifxovia, cos ioiKe, KaKov airaWayr,, PL Gorg. 478, c 



$241. Exceptions to the general rules of Agreement. 

1. The form of the predicate in many cases does not agree 
with the subject grammatically, but in sense only (Constructio 
Kara o-uveo-iv). Hence, after a collective noun in the Singular, 
when it is used of persons, as well as after the names of cities 
and countries, used for the inhabitants, and also with abstracts 
which stand for concretes, the Plural is used, and such a gender 
as belongs to the persons denoted by these words. 

Her. 9, 23. to ttAtj&os kizs$oi\hr\ <x av. Th. 4, 32. 6 d\\os CTparbs 
air ifiatvov. 5, 60. rb o~r p ar SireS o v avex^povv. 2, 21. iravrl Tpoircp 
avr\pe&io~To r\ tt6\ls Kal rbv YltpiKXea iv bpyrj elxov. "With attributive adjec- 
tives, this construction is rare and only poetic, e. g. E. x> 84. cpiAe t4kuov (Hec- 
tor) ; but it is very common in prose with a Part, which stands in a remotci 
attributive relation, e. g. Th. 3, 79. iirl ttjv tt6Kiv iiriirKeov iv iroAAp rapaxy 
Kal <p6j$u> ovTas. X. Cy. 7. 3, 8. S> aya&i] Kal tvicttt) fuxi otxv ^ c\tto\i- 
ttwv Tinas. X. H. 1. 4, 13. 6 4k tov dareos ox^os 7]&polcrfrn rrpbs Tas vavs> 
& avfid(ovTts Kal I8e?v fiov\6p.evoi tov 'KXKi^idZ-nv. It is very frequent 
with the pronouns, Th. 1, 136. (pevyet is Kep Kvpav chs avTwv (sc. KepKvpal 
ccv) evepyeTTjs. 4, 15. is tt\v ^irdpTTjv cos rjyyeT&n to. yeyeurj/xiva Trepl TlvXoy, 
eSo^ev avTols (sc. to7s 'ZirapTiaTais). X. Cy. 3. 3, 14. avyKaXiaas irav to ctt pw 
t i cot iko v e\e|e ivpbs avTovs ToidSe. Also with the relative pronoun ; see on 
adjective-sentences, § 332. 5. 



$241.] EXCEPTIONS TO THE E.ULES OF AGREEMENT. 302 

Remark 1. When the suhject is expressed by the Neut. article t6 or 7 a in 
connection with a substantive in the Gen. PL, the predicate is commonly in the 
PL, being conformed to the attributive genitive ; the predicative adjective or par- 
ticiple takes the gender of the attributive genitive. S. Ph. 497. t a t a> v SiaicS- 
voiv rbu o"lkoS' fjireiyov crroXou (fjireiyov which has the Neut. PL rd for its 
subject would regularly have been in the Sing, according to No. 4, but is con- 
formed to the plurality in SiaK6uwv). PL Ep. 8. 563, c. rb rcav frypioov 
iXev&epdrepd iariu (the Sing, iariy is used on account of the Neut. PL 
iXev&epcoTepa, according to No. 4, while iXevSrepwrepa is conformed to the idea 
of fr-qpia contained in frnpiow). 

Rem. 2. Closely related to the construction just stated, is the following. 
When a substantive subject with an attributive substantive in the Gen. PL 
expresses periphrastically a substantive idea, as \pvxv Teipeaiao, the Participle 
which stands in a remoter attributive relation to the subject, agrees in Case 
with the subject, but in Gender and Number with the substantive in the Gen., 
which expresses the principal idea of the periphrasis. Od. A, 90. ^A&e 5' iirl 
ipvxv @7}fiaiov Teipeaiao xputreoj/ vKYjiTTpov e%coi/, the shade of the Theban 
Teiresias came, having a go/den sceptre (here %x av agrees in number with ^xh-, 
but in gender with Teipecrlao). 11. /3, 459, bpvi&aiv ireTerjcwi' e&rea iroXXd, 
ev&a Kal ev&a iroTuvrai ayaXXofievai trrepvyeaaiv. 

2. When the subject is expressed, not as a special and defi- 
nite object, but as a general idea, the predicative adjective is 
put in the Neut. Sing, without reference to the gender and 
number of the subject. 

(The English sometimes uses the words thing, or something. Sometimes the 
pronoun t1, or the substantives xp?7/" a > Trpay/xa, are connected with the 
adjective. When the adjective is in the Superlative, the English uses the 
article the). 

II. /3, 204. ouk aya&bv iroXvKoipavi-r) (a multiplicity of rulers is not a gooa 
tiling): efs Koipavos £<tto3. Eur. 0. 760. SeLvbv ot iroXXoi, tcaicovpyovs otov 
tx 0301 irpoardTas. Id. M. 329. irX^v yap tskvcov ep.oiye (piXrarov tc6Xls. Id. II. 
E. 1295. at /xerafioXal XvinripSv. Her. 3, 82. ^ jxovvapx'i-'n Kpanarov (a 
monarchy is the best thing, or most desirable). PL Rp. 2.364, a. KaXbv ixkv i) 
aw(p poavvn re /ecu 8 ik aio cr v v 7], x a ^ €ir ^ v P-zvtqi koi iir ittuvov. Also 
in abbreviated adjective sentences, e. g. Her. 3, 108. r\ Xeaiva, ibv lax^o6 
rarov ical S paavr ar ov, airal; iv tS> fSia) tlkt€L eV. PL Rp. 4. 420, C. oi 
6(p&aXfj.o i, KaXXiar ov ov, ovk offTpeico ivaX7]Xiixix4voi elffiv. Her. 3, 53. 
wpavph xPVP- a <T(paXep6v. PL Th. 122, b. <rvjj.fiovXri lepbv xPVf JLa - Eem. 
01. 1. 21, 12. anas p\v X6yos, ay airfj ra irpdy^ara, fxaraiSv ri (paiuerai Kal 

X < V 6 V. 

3. When the subject is an Inf. or an entire sentence, the 
Greeks usually put the predicative adjective in the Neut. PL 
instead of the Sing., where the English uses the pronoun it, 
e. g. it is pleasant to see the sun. This occurs most frequently 
with verbal adjectives in -tos and -t£o<;; with those in riot 
and many in -tos, the Inf. is implied in the word itself, e- g. 

26* 



1306 SYNTAX. [§ 241 

dfwvrea ecrrt tlvl, some one is to be helped; ttujto. eari rois <jSiAois, 
friends are to be trusted. 

Her. 1. 91. tV nevp(a}xevr\v fxoipav dovvar a iari (it is impossible) airocpvyeeii' 
kcu Se<S. 3, 83. orjXa, oti Set eva 76 Ti^a i\p.£<av fiaaiXea yevea&ai. Th. 1, 86. 
ous oy rapaSoTea toIs 'A&rjvaiois early, ovoe Kal Aoyots 8 iaKp it ea, aAAa 
t itioi pr)T ea ev Tax et - 4, 1. aSufaro fy ev tw irapovn rovs Aoicpobs dfxv- 
vea&ai. 

Rem. 3. In like manner, the Greek very often uses the PI. ravra, rdSt 
(sometimes also e/celVa), to express an idea in its whole extent or in the most 
general manner, the plural bringing before the mind all the particulars involved 
in the idea, Th. 6, 77. ovk ''laves rdoe elaiv, ovd' 'EWrjsiroi'Tioi, aAAa Atopics, 
it (this) is not Ionians, etc. Aeschin. Ctes. p. 55. ovk eari ravra apxh ["US is 
not an office). Id. Leg. p. 50. ravr' eariv 6 Trpo8orT)s, this is the traitor. PL 
Phaedon. 62, d. 6 av6rjros dv&pwiros rax °- v olrj^eir) ravra, (pevKreov elvai d-rrb 
rov oe(nr6rov. In the English these plurals are generally translated by the 
singular, as this, that. 

4. The subject in the Neut. PL is connected with a verb in 
the Sing., inasmuch as a plurality of objects in the neuter, was 
regarded by the Greeks as one connected whole, the individual- 
ity being lost sight of. 

Ta C& a T P*X el - — Ta ir pay fiar d eari KaXa. X. Ven. 12, 11 avv rfj 
iroXet <r a> (era 1 Kal airoWvrai to. ot/ceta etcdcrrov. Eur. M. 618. Kanov yap 
di'b'pbs Swp' ovr,aiv ovk ex 61. 

Rem. 4. Also in adverbial participial phrases, a neuter plural is joined with 
a participle in the singular, e. g. oo^av ravr a, quum haec visa, decreta essent. 
X. An. 4. 1, 13. o6£av Se ravra, eKtipv^av ovtco iroieTv, when these things had 
been agreed upon, orders were given, etc. Yet, X. H. 3. 2, 19. oo^avra 8e rav- 
r a Kal rcepap&evra, ra /xev arparevfxara dirrjX&ei'. 

Rem. 5. There are some exceptions, however, to the rule just stated ; most 
of them may be referred to the following cases : — 

(a) When the subject in the Xeut. PI. denotes persons or living creatures, 
the verb is very often put in the PL in accordance with the Constructio 
Kara avveaiv. Th. 4, 88. rd reXrj (the magistrates) rS>v AaKeoi/xoviccy 
6 /j.6a avr a Bpaaioav e£ eirf^ a v. 7, 57. roadoe jxera ^ASrqvaiwv 
e id- vn e ar par evov. PL Lach. 1 80, e. Ta jxe 1 p an 10. o laXeyo fie v 01 
in 1 fie jj.vnvr ai ItCUKparous Kal a(poSpa eir aiv ova tv. 

(b) When the objects contained in the plural are to be lepresented individu- 
ally rather than collectively, or when the idea of plurality composed of 
several parts (which may also have relation to different times and places) 
is to be made prominent, 1 e. g. X. An. 1. 7, 17. ravrrj rfj rj/j-epa ovk e/xax^- 
aaro flaaiXevs, d\?C viroxwpovvT av (pavepd ^aav Kal 'imrcau Kal di/&pd>irav 
"iXVi\ TroWd (many tracks here and there). Cy. 5. 1, 14. rd fiox^VR^ 
avSp&iria iraaoov, olfxai, rcov eiri&vp.iuv d/cparr) iart, K&Treira epura alri- 

1 It will often, therefore, depend upon the view in the speaker's mind, whether 
the SiDg. or PL is to be used. 



f241.J EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 307 

uvn at, the singular iari is used here because mankind is referred to as a 
class, but the plural alri&vrai, to denote that each individual blames love, the 
charge being made too, in a different manner and at different times. Th. 5, 
26. e|co (praeter) tovtojv irphs rbv MavriviKOV Kal 'E-rridavpiov iroXe/xov Kal is 
oAAa a/j.<porepois a/j.apri]/j.ara iy evovr o, mistakes of each of the two, at 
various points and times. X. An. 1. 4, 4. fcac 5e ravra dvo reixv- 

' c) The non-Attic poets from Homer down, very often use the PI. simply on 
account of the metre. 

Hem. 6. The plural subject, masculine or feminine, is connected in the poets, 
though rarely, with a verb in the Sing. Pind. 01. 11. (10.) princ. /xeXi'ydpve s 
u/xvo. varepcov apxal \6ywv reWerai. This construction is very limited in 
prose-writers; it occurs with eari and tfv, but only at the beginning of a sen- 
tence (comp. il est cent usages), which then assume the character of impersonal 
expressions. Her. 1, 26. eari Kal /j.era£v ttjs re iraXairis ttSXlos Kal rov vr\ov eirra 
jrdSiot. PL Rp. 5, 462, e. eari Kal iv ra7s aXXais TroXeaiv apxovres re Kal Stj/aos. 
In like manner the Greeks regularly say eanv, dl, sunt, qui. See § 331, Rem. 
4. The construction mentioned § 242, Rem. 2, is very different from this. 

5. A subject in the Dual, as well as two subjects in the Sin- 
gular, very often have a predicate in the PL, e. g. Av'w a t para, 
dvex^ojprjaav. Ta>v avruv Seovrou Kal •>? yvv^ /cat 6 avrjp. The 
rule seems to be, that when the affirmation is made of each of 
the two separately, the Dual is used, but" when of both together, 
the Plural, e. g. Mi'vws kol AvKovpyos voftovs e'Jer^v (e:ich 
gave laws) ; fj&ovr} croi Kal Xvmq iv rrj 7roAa fiacnXevo-tTov. 

Rem. 7. The Dual is not used in all cases where two objects are spoken of, 
but only where two similar objects are mentioned, either naturally connected, 
e. g. iroSe, x 6 ^ e > ^ Te 5 or such as we conceive to stand in a close and reciprocal 
relation, e. g. two combatants, two friends, etc. 

Rem. 8. The Dual very often interchanges with the PL, especially in par- 
ticiples, e.g. II. X, 621. t oi ^ iSpa> air€^/vx°f ro X lTc ^ ua}J/ o~rdvr e irorl trvoir,v. 
PL Euthyd. 273, d. iyeXaadr -nv a(j.<pu $Xe\\/ avr es els aXXrjXa). 

Rem. 9. A subject in the PL sometimes has a verb in the Dual, when two 
objects mutually connected, or two pairs, are spoken of, e. g. D. 8, 452, sqq. cbs 
$' ore x ei f ia PP 0L Trorafxoi, Kar opeo~<pi p eovr e s, es /xtaydyKeiav a v fx. j8 a X - 
Xerov ofipif/ov vSwp, . . &s ruv fiiayo/jLevuv yevero laxv Te (p6fios re (two streams 
running on opposite sides are compared with two hostile parties). II. &, 185, 
?qq. sLdv&e re Kal av Tlodapye, Kal Afocav Adjxire re S?e, vvv /xoi ri\v ko/aiotjv air o- 
riverov, — 191. &AA' i(po jxapr etr ov Kal air eider ov (two pairs). 

Rem. 10. The following points also are to be noted in respect to the 
Dual: — 

(a) A substantive in the PL is very often connected with the Duals ova. 
oxio, but seldom with dvo7v. 11. e, 10. Sua vlees. II. i, 4. avefioi 
dvo. Aesch. Ag. 1395. dvo7v ol/xa>y/.iao- iv. PL Soph. 244, b. rcpos- 
^pw/xevot dvo7v ovofiao- iv. PL Rep. 614, c. dvo x°- cr l jLaTa ^X /" 6 " 
vu> a. XXr) X o iv ; 

(b) The Duals rdi, ro7v, rcade, ro7vde, rovrcc, rovroiv, avrca, avro7v, w, oTv, in 
prose are used both as masculine and feminine (i. e. they are of common 
gender), e. g. &iA(pci> ra iroXee — rcb yvva7Ke — a/j-epco rovroi rw r^epa — to7i 
yeveaeotv — rovrw ra rexva — rovroiv ro7v Kivnaeoiv — rw 65u. The Fern 



^08 syntax. 15 241 

form of the article rd, is extuemely rare, e.g. ra 5' ovv i<6pa, S. Ant, 
769 ; oftener the form. ra7v, X. H. 6, 4. 17. PL Tim. 79, d; so e* Talvde 
b* over a iv Trap&evoiv, S. 0. C. 445. Tavra occurs Av. Pac. 847, but 
t a v t a i v is more frequent, e.g. Tavra iv fxovaiv, S. 0. C. 859 ; e/c rav- 
raiv, 1149: ravraiv 8e t atv 8io&-iikcui>, Isae. 5, 15. Aura, S. Ant. 
570. Besides the pronouns mentioned, sometimes other attributives also 
in the Dual are used as of common gender ; the participle but seldom. 
PL Phaedr. 237, d. rj/xav iv iKaarcp dvo rivi iarov Idea dpxovr e Kal 
ayovre, oTv kir6fj.e&a — ■ toiJtb 5e k. t. X. 

6. When the predicate is a substantive connected to the 
subject by einu or any other verb having the character of a 
copula ($ 240, 2), the verb often agrees by means of attraction, 
as commonly in Latin, with the nearest predicative substantive. 

Her. 3, 60. to fxriKos tov 6pvy/j.aTos kirra or a 5 io'l elcri. 2, 15. ai 07j/3cu 
kXyvxTos i KaXier o. Th. 3, 112. icrrov Svw A 6 (pea 7] 'ldo/nivr) v^-nXu. 

4, 102. rb xcapiov tovto, oirep TrpSrepov 'Ej/ye'a 65ol iKaXovvro. Isocr. 
Paneg. 51, b. eo~Ti a px^Kurar a rwv ibvSiv Kal [xeyio'Tas dwaareias ix ovTa 
2/cud-cu Kal &pS.xes Kal Uepaai. So also in the participial construction, e. g. Th. 

5, 4. KaTaXa/j.fidvovo~i Kal fipiKtvvias, ov epv/aa iv rfj Aeovrivr). PL L. 735, e. 
tovs fxiyiara i^fxapr-nKoras, avidrovs 5e ovras, /j.ey iorr)v Se oZaav fiXafi-nv 
ir6Xea>s, airaXXdrrziv tfwSev (instead of ovras). So also Her. 3, 108. r) Xeaiva, 
iov lcrx v poTaTov Kal frpacrvraTov, aira£ iv t<£ fiia> ti/ctci eV, instead of 
iovcra. Comp. No. 2. A similar attraction occurs sometimes in sentences 
denoting comparison, e. g. rav koivwv tl dpa dievoovjxrjv, wv ovdev o~b pLaXXov. ij 
tis aXXos exei, PL Theaet. 209. a. (e%ei here agreeing with rts instead of o~v). 
In Latin this is much more frequent. 

7. A superlative connected with a partitive Gen. commonly 
takes the gender of the subject, more rarely that of the partitive 
Gen. 

II. </>, 253. (alerov) '6s& dfia KaprtarSs re Kal &kio~tos irereyvuv. x> 
139. KipKos, iXacpp6raros irere-nvuv. Her. 4, 85. 6 Uovtos veXayewv 
airdvTwv ireepvKe Sruivfiaa iwraros. Menandr. p. 193. (Mein.) vocruv xaXf 
irwTaTos (p&6vos. X. C. 4. 7, 7. o IfjXios tov irdvra xP& vov ^dvroiv Xapnrp6- 
raros bv diafMevei. PL Tim. 29, a. 6 koct/ulos KaXXurros ru>v yeyovoroov. 
Plutarch. Consol. 102. c tj Xvir-n x«^ e7r& > TC ' T7 ? wt&cm On the contrary, 
Isocr. ad Nicocl. extr. o-bfxfSovXos aya&bs xP 7 } (XL f JL ^ raT0v Ka ^ TvpavviKco- 
raTov aTrdvTwv kttj fxdrwv iari (the Superlative here taking the gender 
of the partitive Gen. KTrifidrav). 

Eem. 11. When the idea of personality in general is to be expressed, the 
Masc. form may be used, referring to words denoting females; (in this and 
other similar irregularities, less regard is had to strict grammatical principles 
than to the general idea to be expressed,) e. g. ^weXrjXv^atriv ws e^e KaraXeXeifj.- 
fxevai aSeXcpai re Kal aSeXepiSa? Kal avetytal ToaavTai, S>sr dvai iv ttj ohcia T€<r(fa- 
pesKuioam tovs iXev&epovs (free men), X. C. 2. 7, 2. 'H o*Te?pos ovcra ixoaxos 
ovk avefcTai TiKTovTas 6,XXovs, ovk ex ™ a " T ^ reKva, she cannot endurt 



? 242. | AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 309 

that other persons (Masc.) shculd bring forth young. Eur. Andr. 711. So also the 
tragic poets use the Masc., when a woman speaks of herself in the PL, e. g 
S. El. 391 (Electra says of herself) Treaovfj.e^' , el XPV-> narpl rifiapoifiei/oi. 

Eem. 12. Sometimes the first Pers. PL, or the Pers. pi-onoun first Pers. PI 
is used, for the sake of modesty, instead of the Sing., the speaker representing 
his own views and actions as common to others. This usage, which is very 
frequent in Latin, is rarely found among the Greeks in the Common language. 
"*Q. 'A\Kifiid$ri, Kal r) fie is rrjAiKovToi ovres Sewol ra roiavra ^fiev (I also was at 
that age sharp in these matters). X. C. 1. 2, 46. 'Evi/oid not? 7ifi?v iyepero (the 
thought once occurred to me), Cy. 1. 1, 1. TJepl fiev ovv ru>v irpax&tvTuiv ev t<£ 
irap6vTi tout etx°l X€V etVeu/. Among the poets, particularly the Tragedians, 
this use of the PL is more frequent, and a transition from the Sing, to the PL 
often occurs, e. g. Eur. H. F. 858. "HAiov fxaprvp6fiea^a Spaxr, a dpau ob 
0o6\ofiai. Hipp. 244. alSovfxeSa yap ra \e\eyfxeva fJtbi. 

Eem. 13. In an address directed to several persons, the Greek has several 
peculiar idioms : — 

(a) The Imp. Sing, e lire and some others, which denote an exhortation or 
animating call, e. g. &ye, <pepe, 18 e, is frequently connected in the Attic 
writers with a Voc. PL, or with several vocatives, e. g. PL Euthyd. 283, 
b. elire /not, & 'ZcaKpares re Kal v/j.e?s oi aXXoi. Dem. Chers. 108, 74. elite 
fxoi, fiovAevecr&e. 

(b) In an address directed to several persons, the predicate in the PL oiten 
refers to a Voc. which denotes only one of the persons addressed ; this is 
done for the purpose of making the principal person prominent. Od. £, 
310.'Avt'ivo\ oviroos ecrriu virep(pid\oiai fxe^ vfitv dalvva&ai. fi, 82. vya 
l&vver e, (paiSi/j.' 'OS v (rcrev. X. H. 4. 1, 11. It, ecpr}, vfieTs, Si 
'lip lit tt id a, Kal 8 i8d<T Ker e avrbu fSovXri^-quai airep 7][xe7s • oi fieu St) avaa- 
rdvres eSiSacncov. An interchange of the Sing, and PL often occurs 
among the Tragedians, when the chorus is either addressed by others, or 
speaks of itself, the poet having in mind, at one moment, the whole 
chorus, at another their leader, e. g. S. 0. C. 167. £etvoi, fn) 8t)t' aducri- 
&a cro i Triarevaas. 

(c) The second Pers. Imp. instead of the third, is sometimes connected with 
the indefinite pronoun rls or iras tis, or even with a substantive and 
rls ; this idiom, which is not common, occurs mostly in the Attic dia- 
logue, e. g. Ar. Av. 1186. x^P el (instead of x^peirw) Sevpo iras virnpe- 
tt\s (every servant come hither) : r6£eve (instead of To^everco) iras tis 
(every one use his bow). Hence, also, the transition from the third Pers. to 
the second, e. g. Em*. Bacch. 327. (345.) cretxeT o> tis cos rdxos, eK&cbv 
5e Sdxovs rovsS', 'Lv oloovoo-Koirel, fiox^-ois rpiaivov tcavaT petyov efnraKiv, 
Kal — /xeSes. Comp. Larger Grammar, § 430, 2 (7). 



$ 242. Agreement when there are several subjects. 

1. When there are two or more subjects connected together, 
there is a double relation to be distinguished : — 

(a) The subjects are regarded as expressing multitude, and 
the predicate is referred to all the subjects equally ; then 
the predicate is in the Plural, and when there are but two 
subjects, in the Dual or even in the Plural (comp. $ 241, 



310 SYNTAX. [$ 242 

5); the gender of the predicative adjective is determined 

according to the following rales : — 

(a) With words of like gender denoting persons, the 
adjective has the same gender; with words of dif- 
ferent gender denoting persons, the gender of the 
adjective is conformed to the masculine subject, 
rather than to the feminine or neuter, and to the 
feminine rather than the neuter; in both cases the 
adjective and verb are plural. 
(/5) With words of like gender denoting things, the 
adjective is either in the same gender and in the 
plural, or is in the neuter plural; with words of 
different gender denoting things, the adjective is in 
the neuter plural. 
(y) When words denoting persons and things stand in 
connection, the adjective is plural and takes the 
gender of the words denoting persons, when the 
persons are to be considered as the more prominent 
idea, or the things are to be viewed personally ; but 
when both are to be viewed merely as things, the 
adjective is in the neuter plural. 

Kai Xi)^rt] 8e Kai a&vfiia /cat SvsKoXia Kai /xay la iroWaKis ttoWoTs Sia 
r\)v tov (Tu>fiaTos Kax^iav eis t))v diduoiav £ fxirlirT ovo~ iv, X. C. 3. 12, 6. 2a>K/)a- 
Tei 6 fii\r]T a yevo/j.ei'U) Yip it las re Kai 'AXKifiiddj) s 7rAe?crra Kana ttjv 
tt6\iv i ico i t\ <r a t i\ v, ib. 1. 2, 12. 'Hpa(fA.i}S Kai Gricrevs fx6voi twv irpoye- 
yevrj/xevuv inrep rod fiiov tov twv au&p&iruv a&\r)T al Kar 4o~T7] o~av, Isocr. 
Pan. 212. Kai y\ yvvrj Kai 6 avrjp ay a&o I daiv, PL Men. 73. Aj Se ttov 
-i] /iter e p ai r' 'aXox 01 Ka -l vir\-K la t 4kv a etaT 5 ivl fxeydpois tt ot id ey /mevai, 
II. /3, 137. 'fls eT5e irarepa re Kai [xr)r4pa Kai ad e\<pov s Kai tv,v eavrov 
yvvalKa a 1'xftoA. (*>to v s y ey e vr) jx4 vovs, ed&Kpvcrev, X. Cy. 3. 1, 7. 'H 
6 p y ?7 Kai ■?? affvveffia dal k a k a I. — ^dofiaros Kd\\os Kai i a x v s SeiAw Kai 
KaK'jj ^vv oiKovvr a tt peirovT a cpaiverai, PL Menex. 246, e. Evyeveial t« 
i<al Suj/a/ne is Kai t i/xal S^A.o icrriv aya&a vura, PL ~*Hv rj ay op a Kai to 
irpvTa. vq'io v TIapica Ai&w i] a k t) fj. e v a, Her. 3, 57. Ai&oi Te Kai Trhiv&ot 
Kai |vAa Kai Kepapos araKTws e ppifi/x4ya ovdev x P "h ff l H- d iffrip, X. C. 
3.1,7. 'H tuxi Kai 4>tAi7T7ros i\Gav ruv tpywv Kvpioi, Aesch. 'H Ka\' 

\iffT7] TTOXlT eia T6 KO.I 6 K O.W I ff T S CL V 7) p AotTTCt Uv 7)fl7v eft? 8ieA&e«', 

1 up aw is re Kai rvpavvos, PL Pp. 562, a. 

(b) Each subject is considered sejiarately and by itself; then 
the predicate is confined to one of the subjects and 



$242] AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 311 

agrees with it. This construction is also used when one 
of the subjects is to be represented as more prominent 
than the others. There are here three positions of the 
predicate: (a) before all the subjects; (b) after all the 
subjects ; (c) after the first subject. 

PI. Lys. 207, d. </>iAe? <re o Trarfyp Kal i) ^nqp. Her. 5, 21. etirero a<pi 
Kal oxiJiuaro Kal frepdiroi'Tes Kal r) tvaaa ttoWt) irapaffKevT). X. R. Ath. 1, 2. 
ol ir4v7]T€S Kal 6 Sri [a os tt\4ov e%et. PI. Symp. 109, c. al Ti/xal avTols Kal to. 
le pot. ra Trapa twu av&p&irwv 7)<pavi£eT o. Th. 8,63. ol iu rfj MiA^tijj Kal 6 
'Ao-tuo%os . . . £&dpor7)o*e. Th. 3, 5. MeAeas A&koov a<piKV e ?t ai Kal 
'EpfjL€ih>vdas ©rjficuos. X. An. 2. 2, 1. <J>aAiVos ^ero i<al ol avv ai>T<p. 

Remark 1. Sometimes the verb, though it follows different subjects, agrees 
with the first subject, the remaining subjects being then represented as subor- 
dinate, e. g. X. An. 1. 10, 1. jSactAeus 8e Kal ol vvv cu>t<£ SidoKuv elsTriir- 
Tei. So also with the attributive adjective, e.g. X. An. 1. 5, 6. k-nTa. o/3o- 
\ovs Kal rnxio[$6xiov 'Att ikovs (the adjective here agreeing with dfioXovs 
rather than ruuofSSMov). Th. 8, 63. 'Acrrvoxos iTrv&ero rbv 2t po jtt/JtxfSij v 
Kal r as vavs OTreAijAv^ora, 

Rem. 2. The verb sometimes stands in the Sing., if several nouns in the 
PI. denoting things precede, when it is intended to represent those nouns as 
making up one whole, as a condition, state, etc., e. g. PL S. 188, b. Kal irdxvai 
Kal % a A a £cu Kal ipvcifiai e/c irXeovz^ias Kal aKOCfiias irepl ^AA7jAa twv toio0~ 
Tcav yiyvzrai ipwrucay. 

Rem. 3. When the subjects are connected by ij — rj, aut — aut, Kai — Kai, 
et — et, ovre — ovre, neque — neque, the predicate agrees with the subject 
standing nearest to it, if each subject is to be regarded separately and by itself, 
e. g. r) outos, 7) eKeTvos aA-nfrrj Xeyei, aut hie, aut illc vera dicit; but when the 
subjects arc not considered separately or as independent of each other, but as 
expressing plurality, the predicate is in the PI., e. g. Dem. Aph. 817, 12. & 
ArjiAocpwi' v) ®ripnnri§7]s ex ovo ~ 1 ' 

Rem. 4. The attributive adjective commonly agrees with the substantive 
nearest to it, e. g. 'ApcpoTepois ol avrol fpKOi Kal |v n/j.axia KaTeffTr), Th. 
But where perspicuity or emphasis requires it, the adjective is repeated with 
each substantive, e.g. Trdvres &vdpes Kal irao-ai yuvat/ces; or the con- 
structions stated under No. 1 are observed, e. g. 'HpaKXrjs Kal 7jcrevs /ji6i/oi. 
TlaTfyp Kal ix7)rrip Kal adeAcpol cu'xjiiaAwTOi ye-y e vr\ /jl ivoi, etc. See 
examples under No. 1. 

2. When several subjects of different persons have a com- 
mon predicate, the verb (which is commonly plural) is in the 
first person rather than the second or third, and in the second 
rather than the third. 

'Eyob Kal ab ypd<poixsv, ego et tu scribimus. — "Eyk Kal eKelvos ypdtyopev, ego et ilk' 
scribimus — 'Eycb Kal av Kal iKelvos ypdcpo^v, ego et tu el Me scribimus. — 2i> ko\ 
£k€?vos ypa~<peTe, tu et Me scribitis. — 'Eych ko.1 e/ceTj/ot ypdcpcfisv, — 2u Kal eKelvoi 
ypd(peT€. — 'H/j.<z?s Kal iKttvoi ypd(pofj.eu. — 'Tenets Kal iKeTvos ypdcpere. 

Rem. 5. Sometimes also for the sake of a more foi-cible contrast, the person 
of the verb agrees with the subject nearest to it, e. g. X. C. 4. 4, 7. ireol roi 



312 SYNTAX. [$243. 

SiKatov irdw olfxcu vvv ex eiJ/ swziv, irpbs a ovre av ovt av 'aXXos ovSels $v- 
vo.it avrenreiv. PL Phaedon. 77, d. op.cos o4 p.oi doKeTs av Te Kal 1,ifxp.ias 
Tjdews av kcu rovrov hiairpayp-arevaaa^ai (pertractare) tov Xo^ov. X. An. 2. 1, 
15. av re yap"EXXriu el Kal Tj/xeTs. Comp. Rem. 4. 



k 243. Remarks on certain Peculiarities in the use 
of Number . 

( The Sing, has sometimes a collective sense and takes the place of the 
Pi ; thus in the poets : oaKpvov, c\kt'is, Gray 6 v, ardxvs, harvest, etc. •, 
in prose: Kv/xa, ifffr-fis (like vestis), Xi&os, ttXiv&os, a/xireXos, rj 'lir- 
ir os, cavalry, rj a a iris, a body of troops, etc. 

2. Entire nations, that live under a monarchical government, are sometimes 
designated in prose, by the Sing., e. g. o II 4 par] s, the. Persians, 6 ""Apd^ios, 
6 Avoos, 6 'Aaavpios, etc. This rarely occurs in respect to nations that 
have a free government, e.g. rbv "EXXrjva <piXov irposSrecr&cu, Her. 1, 69. Also 
the words arpariwr-ns, TroXe/juos and the like, are sometimes used in the Sing, 
instead of the PL 

3. The PI. properl} 7 belongs only to common nouns, not to proper names, nor 
to the names of materials, nor to abstracts : still, even such nouns in certain rela 
tions take the PL, namely, when they express the idea of a common noun : — 

(1) Proper names : (a) to denote several individuals of the same name, e. g. 
Svo KarvXoi; (b)to denote persons that possess the nature or the qualities 
of the individual named, e.g. PL Theaet. 169, b. ol 'Hpo/cAees re Kal &tj- 
<r4es, men like Hercules and Theseus. 

(2) Names of materials occur not seldom in the PL, since either the single 
parts, which make up the material, or the different kinds of a given material, 
are contemplated, e. g. aXes, salt ; \pdfia&oi, sand; rrvpol Kal Kpi&ai; dve- 
fxos Kal vSara, olvoi iroXvr eXets, olvoi iraXaioi: £i>Xa Kal Xi&os, 
etc. 

(3) Abstracts in the plural have a concrete signification, since the plural is 
used when the separate kinds or circumstances or relations of the abstract idea, 
are denoted, or the manifestation of the abstract action, as repeated in different 
places or times : hence also when the abstract idea relates to several persons, 
e . g. Herod. 7, 158. vfuv fxeyaXai oe<psXiai re Kal itr av p 4 a e is yey6vaai. 3, 
40. ifiol at aal /xsyaXai evrvx'ia.1 ovk apeaKovai. So e % 3- 77, inimicitiae ; ard- 
a e is, seditiones ; <p iXiai, raXanrcc piat, aerumnae ; &dvaroi, mort.es ; ^/i>xv 
Kal SaXirr], &vfiol, animi ; <p6{loi, (p povijae is, reflections; air e'x&e ia 1, 
a. v 5 p 1 a 1, brave deeds ; vyieiai Kal ev e£iai rwv awjxdrwv, like valetudi nes. 
etc. ; 7r 1 a r e 1 s t testimonia ; evvoias Sovvai, to show acts of kindness ; % a p 1 t e s, 
presents; in many cases, the PL denotes a plurality of parts, e. g. irXovrot, 
treasures, divitiae (ttXovtos, riches, abstract) ; yd pi 01, nuptiae; vvktcs, the hours 
or watches of the night, horae nocturnae ; ra<pai, funera, etc. So, e. g. in Eng- 
lish, How long these nights are ? when one night is meant. 

Remark. The Greeks commonly use the PL of Abstracts as well as Con- 
cretes, when they refer to a PL Adj., the idea contained in the abstract term 



$ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 313 

being then applicable to several persons, e. g. kcikoI ras ij/uxaj; Ka\ol rh 
vca/xara; dpiffroi ras (pvo~eis) nal rats yuw/xais ko.1 rots a coy. an 
a<paXk6^voi, X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. 

4. When neuter adjectives, pronouns, and numerals are used as substantives, 
the Greek, like the Latin, always employs tbe PL, when several individual 
things, individual relations or circumstances, a whole which is represented as 
consisting of single parts, are to be understood by these words : the English often 
uses the singular here, as this, that (ravra, iicetva). ' Comp. § 241, Rem. 3. The 
Sing, of adjectives used substantively is put in the Neut., when an abstract idea, 
a whole as such, is to be expressed, e. g. rb koK6u, the beautiful in the abstract, 
rb KaKov, the bad. The PL, on the contrary, denotes a concrete idea, i. e. the 
different parts, classes or conditions which are implied in the abstract, e. g. rh 
Ka\d, res pulchrae ; ra icand, viola, the evil deeds, things, etc. 

§ 244. The Article. 

1. The subject as well as every substantive, takes the 
article, when the speaker wishes to represent an object as 
a definite one, and to distinguish it from other objects of the 
same kind. The substantive without the article denotes 
either an indefinite individual, or it represents an abstract 
ideo in the most general manner, without any limitation. 

"Av&p wiros: (a) a man, as an individual, i. e. some one of the race of men; 
(b) man, a man, as a species; 6 tkv&p<i)icos: (a) the man, as an individual, the 
man whom I have in view and consider as an individual distinguished from 
other men ; (b) the man, as a class or species, as I think of him as something 
definite and limited in respect to his entire nature or constitution; — yaXa, 
milk, rb yaXa, the milk (as a particular substance) ; o~o<pia, ivisdom, r\ aocpla, 
the wisdom (viewed as a definite property or particular kind of wisdom) ; <pi\oco<pia, 
philosophy in general, 7} <pi\otro<pia, as a particular science or a particular branch of 
philosophy. When the Inf. is to be considered as an abstract substantive, it has 
the article, e. g. r b ypd<peiv. But the abstract noun takes the article when 
it expresses a concrete idea, e. g. rj ard<ris> the (particular) sedition; rb 
tt pay fi a, the (particular) deed; hence also the PL ot <rr acre is, ra, Trpdy- 
Hara. 

Remark 1. From what has been said, it follows: (a) That the substantive, 
as the subject of a sentence, may stand with or without the article, according 
as it is intended to be represented, either as a definite or an indefinite object ; 
(b) on the contrary, that the substantive, as a predicate, must be generally with- 
out the article, since the predicate does not denote a definite individual, but only 
the abstract idea of a quality in general. Her. 1, 103. vb£ i] rj/xepa iysvero, the 
day became night. Isocr. Nicocl. 28, a. \6yos aX-n&rjs Kal io[xi[xos /cat 8'iKaios ^vxns 
aya^yjs Kal iricrrrjs e^SwAdj/ iari. But when the predicate denotes a definite, 
a before-mentioned, or a well-known object (No. 6), it of course takes the 
article. Her. 1, 68. trvvz&dWsro rbv ''Opicrrriv rovrov elvai, he concluded that 
this teas the Orestes, namely, the one before-mentioned. 5,77. ol S 1 'nrirofSSrai 
sKaAeopro ol irax^s, the rich bore the name of (before-mentioned) iinro{i6rai. Ir 

27 



314 syntax. [$ 244. 

passages like X. Cy. 3.3, 4. o [xev ravra elwcbv trap^Xacrev • 6 Se 'Ap/j.evios ffvfj.' 
iroovirefxire Kal oi aXXoi irdvres av&pwiroi, dvaKaXovvres rbv ei) 6 py errjv, rbp 
dvSpa rbv ay a&ov. An. 6. 6, 7. ol 5e aXXoi oi irapovres rwv arpariwratp 
eirixeipovcn fiaXXeiv rbu Ae^mirov, avaKaXovvres rbv irpod6rr]v, the article 
denotes, that the ideas expressed by benefactor, honest man, traitor, point to a 
definite action either before named, or well-known. — When the predicate is a 
superlative or a substantive with a superlative, the article is not used in Greek ; 
the English, however, uses it here. Oi $ao-nX7rai elai it ovnp6r aroi dv&panrwv 
Kal adiK&Taro i (the most wicked, etc), Dem. 25, 2. 'AvSpl KaXo} Kaya&<£ epya- 
<ria KparicTt] earl yeoopyia, X. Oec. 6, 8. Corop. § 241, 7. 

2. Hence the article is used to denote the whole compass of 
the idea, everything which can be included under the term 
used; one object is here considered as a representative of the 
whole class. 

'O av&peoiros frvyrSs eari, men (i. e. all men) is mortal. Xpl) -i avrb <p&4y 
yeoSai rbv pr\ropa Kal rbv vSfiov, Aesch. Ctes. 16. 'H dvopeia KaX-f) 
eanv, i. e. eveiything which is understood by the idea of dvdpeia. Tb ydXa 
7]dl> io~riv. 

Rem. 2. Where the English uses the indefinite article a or an, denoting 
merely a class, as a man, or an individual of a class who is not distinguished 
from the others, as some man, it not being determined what man, the Greek 
omits the article ; hence dvHrpa-rros in both instances. 

Rem. 3. Common nouns sometimes omit the article, where, accoi'ding to the 
statement in No. 1, it would be inserted. This is the case: (a) In appellations 
denoting kindred and the like, where the particular relation is obvious of itself, 
or is sufficiently definite from the connection or the context, e. g. iraW/p, fj-^rrip, 
vlos, adeXcpSs, ira7oes, yove7s, avr\p, husband, yvv-fj, wife, etc. Comp. the expres- 
sions, Father has said it, Mother comes ; (b) When two or more independent sub- 
stantives are united, forming one whole, e. g. ira7des Kal ywa7Kes (like English 
wife and child, horse and rider), tt6Xis Kal o'lKiai (city and houses), Th. 2, 72; (c) 
When common nouns are, at the same time, used as proper nouns ; these being 
definite from their nature or from usage, do not need the article, e. g. tjXios, obpav- 
v6s, ao-rv, used of Athens, ir6xis, of a particular city, known from the context. 
yrj, of a particular country, PaaiXevs, of a particular king, commonly the king of 
Persia, etc. ; other like expressions are dve/xos, SaXao-o-a, etc. The article is 
often omitted also with words denoting time, though this is generally the case 
only in connection with prepositions, e. g. aft r,{iepas, /.cexpi wktos, dfj.a op&pca, 
irepl rjXiou fivo-fxds, /j.erd 'IXtov aXcco-iv. The omission of the article is altogether 
natural when a common noun has an abstract signification, or expresses an 
action, or the manner of an action, most frequently in connection with prepo- 
sitions, e. g. 7iye7a&ai &eovs, to believe in gods. 'Eirl 5e7irvov eX&e7v, to come to 
supper, to a feast, X. C. 1. 3, 6. 'Ecp' 'lttttov levai, horse-back. 'Eirl £rf)pav e^ievat 
(i. e. ad venandum). X. Cy. 1. 2, 9. Ylorepov eivio-rdfj.evov r,viox^7v eirl £evyos 
Xafie7v Kpelrrov, ^ /j.7] eTriard/Jievov (ad vehendum), X. C. 1. 1, 9. 'EttI vSwp levai 
(aquatum ire), Her. 3, 14 

Rem. 4. The names of the arts and sciences, of the virtues and vices, often 
omit the article, even where they occur in a definite relation, since, as well- 
known appellatives, they have come to be used as a kind of proper names, e. g 
Xldvra /xev ovv e/.ioiye 80/ceT ra KaXa ical rd aya&d aaK-nrd elvai, ov% r\Kio~Ta Si 
ffaxppoavvr}. X. C. 1. 2, 23. *Eirel olv rd re diKaia Kal rd aXXa KaXa re Ka\ 
&ya&d iravra aperfj -rrpdrrerai, SqXov elvai, Sri Kal § iKaioavvt] Kal r) &XXr) iraaa 
iperr) aocpla iarl, 3. 9, 5. 'E ir 1 a r 4] Li 17 dpa trocpia earlv, 4. 6. 7. MaXiara -yc^j 



$ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 315 

efjiefi-nX^Ket outc? iTririKTJs, Cy. 8. 3, 25. The omission of the article is natural 
also, when an abstract is to be represented actively, e. g. 'Ei> (ptXocrocpla (cocnv, 
in philosophizing (in philosophando), PL Phaed. 68, c. But where a particular 
art or science, etc. is to be distinguished from another, the article is used, e. g. 
7) p-ni opiK-n, 7] api^fxr,TiK7}. The substantives fieyc&os, 7rXrj&os, v\j/os, e I - 
oos, pd&os, yevos and the like, are very often found in the Ace. or Dat. 
without the article, as they are to be received as a kind of adverbial expression, 
e.g. iroTafxhs KvZuos 6f0fia, evpos Svo TrXe&pwv, two plethra wide, X. An. 1. 
2,23. 

3. The article is very often used with common nouns to 
denote what belongs to an object or is requisite for it, what is 
due to it. 

X. Cy. 3. 3, 6. 'Ei/ofil(s yap, el eKacnos rb fiepos a^Uiraivov iroiT]<reie, rb oXov 
avrcp koXcos exeti/ (partem, cui praeest; centuriam suam). 8. 3, 3. veifxas Se tovtcov 
(twv cttoXcou) rb ftepos eKacTTco rwv 7jye/u.6vcov, eKeXevceu avTovs tovtois Koc/j.e?u 
tovs avTwv cpiXovs (partem debitam). An. 7. 6, 23. aXXa, ipai-nTe dv, edei ra 
iv ex v P a t6t€ Xa/3e?v, as fxr]Sh el ifiovXero idvuaro av ravra i^airarav (the meas- 
ures requisite to guard against deception). 5. 6, 34. ot (rrpaTLwrai rjirelXovv avT$ 
el Xi)ipovTcu aTTodidpaaKovTa, on tt)v Dlkt]v eirifrfjcroiev (the due, deserved pun- 
ishment). 

4. Hence the article very often takes the place of the posses- 
sive pronoun, when it is connected with such substantives as 
naturally belong to a particular person, mentioned in the sen- 
tence. In such cases, the English uses the possessive pronoun. 

Ol yoveis to reKva tTTepyovaiv (parents love their children). 'O cnpaT-nybs 
to its err par i cot as eVi tovs TroXepiovs dyei (leads His soldiers). Kvpos re 
KaTaTrr)8i)cras airb tov dpfxaros rbv Stop a tea eveSv ko\ avafShs eirl rbv 
Xttttov Ta. iraXTa. els tc\s x e ?P as eAa£e, X. An. 1. 8, 3. 

5. As the article may make one object prominent, by indi- 
vidualizing it and presenting it apart from others, it is often 
used, when an object is to be represented in a distributive rela- 
tion to the predicate of the sentence. 

HposaiTovcri Se /Aitr&bv 6 Kvpos vincrxvelrat Scocreiv o.vt\ dapeiKov Tpla rjfxiDapeiKa 
tov fxr}vbs Tcp o~TpaT icottj (singulis mensibus singidis militibus, three half- 
Darics a month to each soldier, comp. English so much the pound), X. An. 1. 3, 21. 
(comp. 5. 6, 23.) Aapeucbv enatTTos oltrei tov fxr]vbs ifxcov (each of you shall 
icave a Daric each month), 7. 6, 7. 'O Se crvve&itr&els rbv eva tyco/xbv evl 6\pu 
rrpoire/ATreiv, 8>e /xtj irapeir} iroXXa, SvvaiT av aXvircos t<? evl XP 7 ) ^ - 1 (singula panis 
frustra, to dip each morsel into the different sauces), Id. C. 3. 14, 6. 

6. The article is properly and originally a demonstrative 
pronoun, and is still often used in a demonstrative sense. This 



316 SYNTAX. [$ 244. 

is particularly the case in Homer, where the article almost uni- 
formly has a pronominal relation. Comp. $ 247. 

The simplest use of the article as a demonstrative, is as follows : An object 
not before described or referred to, when it is first mentioned as an indefinite 
individual, does not take the article ; but when it is repeated, it takes the article, 
because it has been already referred to and is known, e. g. ElSov 'avSpa. • 6 5s 
avrip iaoi e\e£ev. Hence tbe article is also used Avhen the speaker points to an 
object, e. g. $epe fxoi, d> 7rcu, rb /3 ifi\lov (the book = this or that book). In this 
relation, the article may be used with material nouns, e. g. Aos /jlol rb yd\a (the 
milk, which had been pointed out) ; and even when a part only of the material is 
referred to, the article is employed, tbough material nouns elsewhere are always 
without the article, as they contain no idea of individuality, e. g. Uiva rod 
oXvov (of this wine). The article is often used in speaking of persons or' things 
known and celebrated, where the Latin uses the pronoun Hie, e. g. 6 naXbs -ir<us, 
that beautiful boy ; this is very frequent with proper names. See No. 7. "Ore 
aep£r)S ayeipas tt)V avapi & pr) r ov err pariav rjx&ev eVi r)\v 'EAActSa (that 
numberless host), X. An. 3. 2, 13. 

7. Personal proper names as such, i. e. so far as they in them- 
selves denote merely individuals, do not take the article. But 
they take it, when they have been already mentioned, and 
are afterwards referred to (No. 6) ; or even when they have not 
been before named, if it is intended to designate them as well- 
known and distinguished (No. 6). Plural names of nations, 
and also the names of countries, districts, and festivals, are 
both with and without the article. 

ZZoucpdrr) s ecpT]. So also where an adjective is joined with a proper name, 
e.g.(TO(pbs "2 & k par 7) s, the wise Socrates. ""Ev'iKrjcrau ®r)fiaioi AaKedaifio- 
viovs. 'AfipoKO/j.as ov tout e-iroir)<rev, ctAA 5 e7rel fjnove Kvpov eV KiAi/c/ot 
ovra, avcurr petyas £k Qoiv liens irapa ficuriXea a.Trr)\avvev, X. An. 1. 4, 5. Kv- 
pov 5e /jLeraTre/jLireTcu (Aape7os) . . avafiaivei ovv 6 Kvpos, X. An. 1. 1, 2. 'Airb 
rov 'IAicrcroG Xeyerai 6 Bopeas r)]v "Tlpei&vi av apirdacu, PI. Phaedr. 229, b 
(as well-known names). 

Rem. 5. When a noun in apposition, accompanied by the article, follows 
a personal proper name, the proper name does not take the article, e. -g. 
Kpo7aos, 6 ra>y Avdwv fia<ri\evs. But yet when the article is used, e. g. 
6 Kpo?<ros, 6 Ttov AvUtov /3acnAeus, it has a demonstrative sense, and desig- 
nates the proper name as one already mentioned or known. The noun 
in apposition is accompanied by the article, when it serves to distin- 
guish the person or thing mentioned from others of the same kind, or 
when the person or thing named is to be pointed out as one known, e. g. 
~2,toKpa.Tr)s , 6 <pi\oao<pos ; ^ZtoKpdrr)s, 6 'A&rjucuos, Socrates, the philosopher, the 
Athenian; Xeipiaocpos, 6 AaKe8aiix6vios ; on the contrary, the noun in apposi- 
tion does not take the article, when it expresses merely an adjective attribu- 
tive, e. g. Her. 1, 1. 'HpoSoros 'AXumpvaaaevs, Herodotus of Halicarnassus. Th. 
1, 1. &ovKvdi8-ns 'Afrnvcuos, Thucydides an Athenian, or of Athens. KXedvcap 
'Opxo/xeyios, Cleanor of Orchomenus, X. An. 3. 2, 4. The names of rivers are 



$ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 317 

commonly placed as adjectives between die article and the word iroTa.ij.6s, e. g 
6"A\vs ttotu/jlos (the river Halys), Her. 1, 72. 6 \AxeA<£os- irorauos, Th. 2. 102 
iirl r'ov ^,dpov ttotoijov, iirl rov Tlvpajjov ttgto.ij.6v, X. An. f . 4, 1. iirl tov Evcppd- 
ttjv iroTaixov, 11. Trpbs Tbv "" Apd%r\v TroTa.jj.6v, 19. Examples like the following 
are more seldom: iirl t<5 7T0Ta,uw Kaxvirdpei, Th. 7, 80. iirl tov TTOTo.ij.bv tov 
^Epivsov, ib. S2. Sometimes the article is wanting: iirl ^tdpov TroTa.fj.6v (accord- 
ing to the best MSS.), X. An. 1. 4. 1: iirl "Apiracrov irora/xov (according to the 
best MSS.). ib. 4. 7. IS : 7T0Ta.fj.bs SeAtz/ous, 5. 3. 8. The names of mountains, 
islands, seas, cities, etc., are also placed between the article and the noun, when 
thev are of the same gender or, at least, of the same declension as the nouns to 
which they belong, viz. 777, aKpov, opos, vr\aros, etc., e. g. eTrt -3-771/ SoAiryetai/ KWfj-nv, 
Th. 4, 43 ; T6> *Zovvlov aKpov, ?; QeairpoiTls 777, 7? Arj\os vrfcros \ tov 'ZKOfj.fSpov opovs, 
Th. 2, 96 ; tov A'ifxov opovs, Th. 2, 96 (<5 AT/jos) ; 77 BoA/fy Xlfivrj, Th. 1, 58. 4, 
103; i) MecSq iroXis, Th. 4. 130. But if the gender (or declension) is not the 
same, they must be regarded as in apposition with the nouns to which they 
belong, and are placed before or after them, e. g. t<£ opei ttJ Tepaveia, Th. 4, 70 ; 
Tijv aKpav Tb Kvvbs (Ttj/jjx, 8. 105 ; Trjs*Idris tov opovs, 10S ; 77 ArjKvkros ri> cppov- 
piov, 4, 113 : Tb x a> p' LOV a ' L "Ewea 6§oi, 1, 100 ; ttjv ttoXlv tovs Tapaovs, X. An. 1. 
2, 26. The' article is seldom omitted, e. g. airb "Afidiipwv TroAews, Th. 2, 97. 

8. When adjectives or participles are used as substantives, 
they regularly (according to No. 2) take the article. The Eng- 
lish here either employs an adjective used substantively, as the 
good; or a substantive, as the speaker {=the one speaking); 01 
resolves the participle by he who, they icho, that which (=to the 
Lat. is, qui). This usage is very frequent in Greek with all the 
participles. 

'O aocpos, the icise (man), a wise (man), ot ayaSoi, ol kcucoI, ol SiKafyvres (those 
who judge), the judges ; ol Aeyoires, the orators; Tb ay a&ov, Tb /caAoV, to. nakd, 6 
fSovXojievos, quivis ; 6 tvx&v, whoever happens. 'O TrXelaTa uxpsX&v Tb Koivbv 
ueyiaTav tiuwv a^iovTai. 'O ir\e7o-Ta u <p e A 77 eras Tb k. jx. t. &£iouTcu. 'O TrAet- 
cra a<p ehr) o~ & v t. k. jx. t. a^iai&iicreTai. — 'O apeTyv %x <av ""Aoi/ret \x\v ovtwv 
<pi\<DV ttoTO^wv, irXovTei 8e /cat aXXcav f3ov\ofj.ivwv yevea&ai /cat eu fxkv TrpaTTCvv e%6t 
robs o-vvT\o-^ri)o'OfX€vovs, iav Se tl o-(pa\fi, ov cnravi£ei twv fiori&ri a 6v- 
rav, X. An. 7. 7, 42. But when the adjectives and participles are designed to 
express only a part of a whole, the article is omitted, e. g. aya&ol, good men ; 
(piXoaocpovvTes, /xaSovTes : kokcl /cat alo~xp& (Trpa^ev. 

9. Participles also take the article, when definite individuals 
are spoken of, in the sense of those, icho ; a participle with the 
article is very often appended to a preceding substantive, in the 
form of apposition, in order to give prominence to the attribu- 
tive meaning, somewhat in the sense of eum, earn, id dico, qui, 
quae, quod, or ct is quidcm, qui. 

Her. 9, 70. irpuToi is?;\&ov TeyerJTai is Tb Te7xos, teal ttjv o-kt\vt]v tov Mapdov'iov 
oZtoi ecrav ol 8 t apTT acr avT e s (and these are theytliat robbed, etc.). X. C. 2. 6, 18. 
ov fx6vov ol iStwrat tovto iroiovcriv, aXka. na\ iroAets a I twv Te KaXwv jxaXicrTa 
iTifj.e\ovfj.evai, Kal ra cuo-xpa 77/cfTTa tt posi4(j.€vai 7roAAa/cts TToAe^tt/cwi 

27* 



318 SYNTAX. [$ 245. 

€X 0V(TL irpbs a\\-f]\as. 3. 5, 4. Boicorol fiev, ol Trp6<r&ev ovb° *v rfj kavrwv tpX 
fxavres 'A&rjvalois &vev AaKedaifioviwv re Kcd twv &X\c*v TIehoTrovvr)<ria>v avriT^kt 
Tta&at, vvv airei\ov(nv avTol Ka& eavTobs i/j.fia\e?v els tt\v 'Attik^v. 

10. The Greek may convert adverbs of place and time, more 
seldom of quality, into adjectives or substantives by prefixing 
the article. In like manner a preposition with its Case may b* 
made to express an adjective or substantive meaning. 

H &vw Tr6his, the upper city. 'O /xira^v tottos, the intervening place. Ol eVfraS 
&v&pcoiroi. or ol ev&a8e. 'O vvv jSacriAevy. Oi iraXat aocpol dvSpes. Ol t6ts, th« 
men of that time. 'H avpiov (sc. rj/xepa). 'H e|ai^/7js ntTa<nacns. 'O ad, an im- 
mortal. So rb and ra vvv, now, i. e. at the present time; rb iraXai, formerly, in tli+ 
former time ; rb npiv, rb ahr'uta, immediately. Ol irdvv tuv o-TpaTKorwv, the best oj 
the soldiers. Tb ndpTa tyvxos. 'H dyav a/meXeia. 'O SfioXoyovfidvcos SovXos. Th 
6, 80. ttjv aKivhvvws dovXetav. So also rb irdfXTrav and rb irapdirav, omni?io, ri 
Kapra, rb irapairoXv used adverbially. Even : 'H tojv yecpvpwv o v 8id\vo~is, tht 
not destroying of the bridges. e O irpbs robs Uepaas ir6\e/xos. Ol irepl <pi\o<ro<piav, 
the philosophers. Ol iv 'darei. 'H iv Xeppovfjcrca Tvpavvis. 

11. The neuter article to, may be placed before every word 
or part of speech, when the word is not considered in relation 
to its meaning, but is used only as a form of speech, or when 
a preceding word is repeated, without regard to the structure 
of the sentence in which it is repeated. The Greek, by prefix- 
ing the article, may give even to whole phrases the form and 
meaning of an adjective or substantive. 

Tb TV7rrw, rb tvtttgis. Dem. Cor. 255, 4. v/j.e?s, 3) iivdpes 'A&rjvcuot • rb 5* 
v/xe7s otov et7r&>, t^v it6\iv \4ya>. PI. Rp. 352, d. ov irepl tov iiriTvx^VTOS (de T4 
levi) 6 \6yos (corn/), rWa, irepl tov ovriva Tpoirov XP^ Cv v » 

$ 245. Position of the Article. 

1. The article is sometimes separated from its substantive by 
intervening particles, e. g. p.iv, Se, ye, re, ydp, &rj ; by the indefinite 
pronoun ns (in Herodotus veiy often), and by avrbs iavrov. 

Tbv [x\v &v8pa, rrjv 8e yvvaata. When a preposition stands before the article, 
the prose-writers say either: irpbs Se rbv avSpa, or irpbs rbv avSpa 5e, but not irpbs 
rbv 8e dvSpa. — Tuv tis Uepcreoov, Her. 1, 85. To7s avrbs avrov TT-fi/xao-i Qapiiverat, 
Aeschyl. Ag. 845. 

2. When several substantives are connected by koll or re — 
kul, there are two Cases: (1) the article is repeated with each; 
then the separate ideas expressed by the substantives are con- 



* 245.] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 31f 

sidered independent of each other, or they stand in contrast 
or (2) the article is not repeated; then the separate ideas ax ft 
considered as forming one single conception. 

1,WKpa.Tf]s irdvra yye'iro &eobs eideuai, rd re Xeyofxeva Kai Trparr6/xeua Kai Td 
tnyfj (SovXevofxeva (the first two members form a whole, but the last is contrasted 
with them), X. C. 1. 1, 19. At padiovpyiai Kai 4k rov irapaxpvpa •qSoj/cu, 2. 1, 20. 
At iirL/xeAeiai ru>v KaXwv re Kaya&wv epycov, ib. Td re cv/xcpepopra Kai Kexap"T- 
p.eva, 2. 2, 5. Of arpart\yoi Kai Xoxayoi, An. 7. 3, 21. Tb p-eyaXoTrpeires re Kai 
iXev&epioj; Kai rb raireiv6u re Kai aveXeteepov (here the first two and also the 
last two form one single conception), X. C. 3. 10, 5. Tobs aypobs robs eavrov Kai 
oiKias, Th. 2, 13. Ot iraldes re Kai yvvawes (so many MSS.), PL Up. 557, C. 

3. When a substantive having the article has attributive 
expletives joined with it, viz., an adjective, participle, adjec- 
tive pronoun or numeral, a substantive in the Gen., an adverb 
or preposition with its Case ($ 244, 10), then the article has a 
different position according to the idea to be expressed, as will 
be seen from the two following cases : — 

(a) The attributive is joined with its substantive to express 
a single idea, as the wise man = the sage, and is designed to 
contrast the object denoted by its substantive with other objects 
of the same kind. In this case, the attributive stands either 
between the article and the substantive, or after the substantive 
with the article repeated ; or the substantive stands first without 
the article, and the attributive follows l with the article. 

O ayaSrbs avrip or 6 avrip 6 aya&6s or avrjp 6 aya&os (in contrast with the bad 
man). See Eem. 1. Ot ttXovctloi iroX7rai or ol TtoX7rai ol irXofoioi (in contrast with 
poor citizens) . 'O 4/j.bs TTari)p or 6 irarrjp 6 4/xos. Ot rpe?s dvdpes or ol dvdpes ot rpeis. 
'O rS>u 'Afrnvaiw 5rjjj.os or 6 8rifj.os 6 ruv ''A^vaiav (the Athenians in contrast with 
another people). Ot vvv 'dv&pwiroi or ol &v&pu>ivoi ol vvv. 'O irpbs robs Uepcras 
TtSXejxos or 6 ivoXejxos 6 irpbs robs Uepcras (literally the against the Persians tear, i. e. 
the war against the Persians, in contrast with other wars). 'Airb &aXdo~crns rr)s 
'Idbvoov. Tvpavvis i) 4v Xeppovrjcrcp. 'H eV 'SaXapuvi irpbs rbv UepcrrjU vav^a%la, the in 



1 Where the attributive expletive consists of several words, or where the 
expletive is itself qualified by another expletive, it is usually placed after its 
substantive, otherwise too long a phrase would intervene between the article 
and its substantive ; such expletives involved the idea of some such phrase as, I 
mean, etc., e. g. rjvXia&ricrav ev ra?s Kcbpiais ra7s vnep rod Tredlov rov irapa rbv 
Kevrpirrjv irora/xov (they encamped in the villages [I mean] those above, etc.). Here 
Kcifj-ais is qualified by virep irediov, and this by ivapa Kevrpirrjv, etc., X. An. 4. 3, 1 
Tpiros /nacrrbs Xoiirbs r)v, . . . 6 virep rr)s eirl rep ivvpi KaraXr}<pSreio , 7]S (pvXaK7Js rrjs 
yvKrbs virb rwv 4&eX6vrwv, here 6 vwep and what follows qualifies the word jJ.a(T' 
r6s, X. An. 4. 2, 14. 



320 syntax. [$ 245 

Salamis against the Persian sea fight, i. e. the sea-fight in Salamis against, etc. These 
last examples show that a substantive with its Case has an adjective force. 

Remark 1. In the first position (6 ayaSrbs avftp), the emphasis is on the 
attributive, e.g. Ae? iraideias kolpcops7p to &rj\v yepos rjpuv t£> tcop appepcop 
(yeuei), PI. L. 805, d. But in the second position (6 aprjp 6 ayabos), the idea 
expressed by the substantive is represented as a definite one or one already 
mentioned, or is contrasted with that of another substantive ; in the third posi- 
tion [avr,p 6 ayastos), the idea expressed by the substantive is represented as in- 
definite, but in contrast with another. Ti Siacpepei ap&pcoiro s aKpaTTjS Srrjpiov 
rod ajeparecTaTou, X. C.4. 5, 11. 'H aperi] avpeaTi p.ep 3-e o?s, cvpeaTi 5e 
avdpcbiroLS to7s ay a&o?s, 2.1,32. Tb apiarov ov tovs p6p.ovs 4o~tip lax 1 '' 
eip, ctA\' apSpa rbv peTa <ppoP7\o~ecos fiaai Klkop, PL P. 294, a. AioucovpTai at 
uey tv paw iS e s Kal oXiy apx' ia - 1 T0 <s t poirs ' s twp i<peo-T7]KOToop, at Be 
•iroAeis (republics) ai dTjpoKpaTovpepai toispo/jlois to?s Keip.ePOis y 
Aeschin. 3, 6. To 'nnriKbp to iKeipcop (sc. reap ^kv&cop) ovtco pax^Tai, rb 
§e 6 7r A i t t k b v to ye t co p 'E A A 7] v oo p, cos iyib Aeyto, PL Lach. 191, b. 'Eyco 
pep otp eiteipovs tovs apdpas (pTjpl ov popop tup a co paT cop t Co p 7) peT e p cop 
iraTepas elvai, aAAa Ka\ ttjs i\ev&epias tt)s Te -i)p.eTepas Kal ^vp.irdpTcop, 
tup ip Tjjde Trj 7)ireipcp, PL Menex. 240, e. Aie^epxoPTai tcLs Te ervpepopds tols 
4k tov iroAepov t ov tt pb s ctAA-jjAous Tjptp yeyePTjuepas Kal ras co<pe- 
Afias Tas 4k tt\s o~ t paT eias r 7) s 67r' e Kelp op 4 a op. 4 pas, Isocr. Paneg. 
43, 15. Sometimes the position varies in the same sentence, e. g. Tas p.eyd- 
Kas 7)$ op as Kal to, aya&d r a p.eyaXa 57 TreiSco Kal 7) icaprepia Kal 01 ip 
tgj Kaipw ttopol Kal kipSvpoi irapexoPTai [great pleasures and advantages), X. Cv. 3. 
3, 8. Tlcos 7roTe ■)] aKpaTOS d iKaio ctvpt) Trpbs adiKiap ttjp &k paTOP 
!x« ; PL Rp. 555, a. Then the second position does not differ from the first. 

Rem. 2. With a verbal substantive, the attributive expressed by a preposi- 
tion and its Case, is often placed after its substantive without the repetition of 
the article. So also, when an attributive explanation comes between the article 
and the substantive : 'H avyKopi&i i;< tup dypcop is to aoru, Th. 2, 52. 'H pvp 
vpeTepa opyr] is MtTvX7]Paiovs, 3, 44. Tt)s tcop yvpaiKoop cpiXias irpbs tovs apdpas, 
X. Hier. 3, 4. Also the more definite expletives of an Inf. Part, or adjective, 
frequently are not placed between the article and these words: Typ crocpiap 
tovs apyvpiov t<2 fiovXopepco ircoXovpTas crocpio-Tas aivoKaXovo lp , X. C. 1. 6, 13 
(instead of tovs t^v aocpiap . . . ircoAovpTas, in order to make prominent the idea 
in T7]P cro<piap). 

(b) The attributive is joined with its substantive not to 
express a single idea, but is to be regarded as the predicate of 
an abridged subordinate clause ; then the attributive is not con- 
trasted with another object of the same kind, but with itself; it 
being designed to show that the object to which the attributive 
belongs, is to be considered, in respect to a certain property, by 
itself, without reference to another. In this case the adjective 
without the article is placed either after the article and the 
substantive, or before the article and substantive. 

'O a.Pi]p ay a St 6 s or aya&b s 6 apr)p, a good man (— ayabbs &p, the man who 
is good, inasmuch as, because, if he is good). Oi 'apfrpcoiroi picrovai top apdpa Ka- 
k6p or KaKbp Tbp apSpa, thetj hate the bad man, i. e. they hate the man, inasmuch 
as, because, if he is bad. ( On the contrary, Tbp KaKbp dpSpa or Tbp apdpa Tbp 
k,zk6p % the bad man, in distinction from the good ; hence, tovs pep ayadovs ap- 



& 245. 1 POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 321 

i&pc&irovs ayairufiev, rovs Se kixkovs /u.iGovfxev.) 'O )8«trt\ei/s riSeus x a P l C €Tai ra « 
iroXirats aya&o7s, good citizens, i. e. if or because they are good (on the contrary, 
ro7s aya&oh iro\irais or rois icohirais rois ayabols, good citizens, in distinction 
from bad citizens). 'O &ebs rrjv ^t>xV Kpar lorrrjv rw av&panrq) eve(pvcrev (a 
soul, as it is the most excellent), X. C. 1. 4, 13. Ot virb tov r\\iov KaraKafxiroixevoi 
ra xp&F- aTa /xeXavrepa exov<riv \ a Slacker skin ; the blackness of the skin is 
the consequence of the KaraXafXTreaSraL iiirb tov rjXiov), 4. 7, 7. 'Eveirp^adv re ras 
iric-nvas e prjfxovs Kal ra. xp4 tiaTa ^^p^curav (quia deserta erant), Th. 1, 49. 'A|teD 
{postulo) robs frepafrovras e/xol fxev &(p&ova ra eirir'nBeia irapao~Kevd£eiv, airrovs Se 
(xrjdevbs rovrwv aTrreoSrai (== &sre avra acp&ova elvai), X. C. 2. 1, 9. 

Rem. 3. If a substantive having the article has a Gen. or a preposition and 
its Case connected with it, the position under (a) occurs, only when the sub- 
stantive with its Gen., etc. forms a contrast with another object of the same kind, 
e. g. 6 rav 'A&rjvaiwv Stj/xos or 6 orifxos 6 rwv ^A^rnvaiwv (the Athenians in contrast 
with another people) ; the emphasis here is on the Gen., e. g. Ovk aXXorpiov rjyeirat 
elvai 6'A^njvaiwv 8 77 fxo s rbv Qrj fiaiwv Srj fxov, avafxi/xv-fiGKerai Se Kal ras 
rwv irp oy6vwv rwv eavr ov els rovs QrjfSaiovs tt poyovovs evepyeaias, 
Dem. (Psephism.) 18, 186. 'E&avarwfrn vTrb r£>v ev rrj 'Xirdprr) reXwv, X. 
An. 2. 6, 4. On the contrary, the Gen. without the article, is placed either before 
or after the other substantive, when that substantive denotes only a part of that 
expressed in the genitive ; the emphasis is then on the governing substantive, 
e. g. 6 Stj/jlos , h.^r\vaiwv, or ' ASrrjvaiav 6 Srjjxos, the people and not the nobles. 
Hence, with this position, a partitive and not an attributive genitive is used ; 
the Athenian people is not here considered in contrast with another people, but 
a part of the Athenian people is contrasted with another part of the same, viz., 
the nobles. Compare further, y\ HwKpdrovs (piXo&ocpia or 77 (piXocrocpia rj ~2,wKpdrovs, 
i. e. the philosophy of Socrates, the Socratic philosophy, in contrast with the 
philosophy of another, e. g. Plato's, the Platonic, with 77 (piXoao<pia ^wKpdrovs or 
'SwKpdrovs 77 <piXocro<pia, i. e. the philosophy of Socrates and not something 
else of his, e. g. his life, "flsirep olicias ra Karw&ev (domus infimas partes) 
lxrx v P°'' TaTa elvai 8e?, ovrw Kal rwv ir pd£ewv ras a px as Ka ^ T «* viro&e- 
<rets aXrj&eis Kal SiKaias elvai irposr}Kei, Dem. 2. 10. Tovrov ev e&peipe Kal eiral- 
Sevffev, ws 80/cet 'A3- 77 vaiw v t £ ir Xr]&e 1, to the multitude, not to the intelligent, 
PI. Menon. 90, b. Tb elSos rod iratSds (contrasted with to vvoua rov irai- 
86s), PI. Lysid. 204, e. 

Rem. 4. When the genitive of the substantive pronouns, is used instead of 
the possessives, the reflexives ifxavrov, o~eavrov, etc. are placed according to (a), 
e. g. Tbv ejxavrov varepa or rbv irarepa rbv e/xavrov, etc. 5 but the simple personal 
pronouns jxov, gov, etc. stand without the article, either after or before the sub- 
stantive with the article, e. g. 6 irar^p fxov or /xov 6 irarTip, 6 irarr,p gov or gov 6 
var-hp, 6 irarijp avrov (avrrjs) or avrov (avrrjs) 6 irar-ftp, my, thy, his (ejus) father, 
6 7TOT7jp 7]jmS>v, v/xuv, v<$v, avTwv, or t)/awv, vfxav, vtipv, avT&v o irarTip, our, your, 
their (eorum) father. But when the substantive has another attributive joined 
with it, these pronouns can stand between the substantive and that attributive, 
e. g. 'H 7ra\ot 71/j.wv (pvais. In the Sing, and Dual, the enclitic forms are always 
used ; these never stand at the beginning of a sentence ; but in connected dis- 
course they can stand before the substantive which has the article. The Gen. 
of demonstrative and also of reciprocal pronouns, have the position of (a), e.g. 
6 rovrov (eKeivov) -irari'ip or 6 irar^p 6 rovrov (eKeivov). T77 aKk-nXiav evvoia. The 
demonstratives ai-e sometimes also found without the article after the substan- 
tive with the article, e. g. Ot avayKaioi eKeivov, Isae. 9, 10. Ta iepa eKeivov, ib. 
36. Tov irarpbs rovrwv, 1C 3. Tp vvv vfipei rovrov, Dem. 4, 3. 

Rem. 5. The difference between the two cases mentioned is very manifest 
with the adjectives et«pos, (xea-os, iaxo-Tos. When the position mentioned 



322 SYNTAX. [$ 245. 

under (a) occurs, the substantive with its attributive forms a contrast with 
other objects of the same kind, e. g. t) /j.4<rn tt6\is or ir6\is r) ix4o-n, the middle city, 
in contrast with other cities ; 7) iffx^ Tr l vt)o~os, the most remote island, in contrast 
with other islands. 'Es rb iax aT0V epy/ua rr)s vi)o-ov (in contrast with other ipv- 
(uuri)) Th. 4, 35. When, on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b) 
occurs, the substantive is contrasted with itself, the attributive then only defin- 
ing it more fully. In this last case, we usually translate these adjectives into 
English by substantives, and the substantives with which they agree as though 
they were in the genitive, e. g. eVl t$ opei 'dupco or e7r' aKpca ra> opei, on the top 
of the mountain (properly on the mountain where it is the highest) ; eV /near) rfj 
ir6\ei (seldom iv Tp TroXei /x4o-n), in the middle of the city; iv iaxarr] rfj vr)acp 
T iv vfjffea rfj eVxaTr?, on the border of the island. 'Ef fxiaois rols iroXeixiois 
aire&ave, X. H. 5. 4, 33. Kara fxeaov rbv kvkXov, Cy. 2. 2, 3. Oi Uepaai irepl 
&Kpais rats X e P^ X el P'^ as Sao-etas exovariv, &• 8, 17. 

Rem. 6. In like manner, the word fi6vos has the position mentioned under 
(a), when it expresses an actual attributive explanation of its substantive, e. g. 
6 fx6vos irals, the only son; on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b), 
when it is a more definite explanation of the predicate, e. g. 'O irals fx6vos or 
/x6vos 5 irais Trai(ei, the boy plays alone (without company). Movqv rwv av&pcoTrav 
(y\S>rrav) iiroir)<rav (oi S-eol) o'tav ap&povv rrjv <peovr)v, i. e. 7) ruv av&p. y\a>rra 
fi6vr] iff rip, %v iiroiycrav o'iav k. t. A., they made the human tongue only, capable of 
articulating sounds, X. C. 1. 4, 12. 

Rem. 7. When a substantive has two or more attributives, one of which 
limits the other (§ 264, 2), one position maybe as an English, e.g. Oi aAAot dya- 
&ol dv&pwrroi, the other good men ; or the limiting attributive with the article either 
stands first, and the second follows with the article and substantive, or the 
limited attributive with the article stands first, and the limiting attributive fol- 
lows with the article and substantive. 'O vaxnuths 6 rwv fiap fidpwv arpa 
r6s. At ciAAai at Kara rb ffw/xa rj 8 oval, the other bodily pleasures, PI. Rp. 
565, d. 'Et> ro7s &\\ois ro7s ifiois x a p' l0l5 i ^J^- 281. (When 6 aKXos is 
joined with an adjective used substantively, the article is commonly repeated, 
e. g. -raAAa ra iroXiriKd, X. Hicr. 9, 5. Oi aAAot 01 Traparvyx&vovres, X. Apol. 
11.) 'H ovx r)Ki<TTa fSXatyaaa 7) Xo ifxdSrj s v6ffos, Th. 1, 23. 'Ev rfj rod 
At by rfj fjieyicrrp eoprfj, Th. 1, 126. 'Es ai/rbv rbv iir\ r§ crS/xari rod Xifievos 
rbu erepov irvpyov, 8, 90. 'Ev rfj apxaia rfj 7) /xer e pa tpoovfj, PI. Cratyl. 
398, b. Tb iv 'Ap/caSia rb rod Albs iepov, Rp. 565, d. The limiting 
attributive can also stand between the substantive and the limited attributive ; 
in this case the article is used before each of the three parts, e. g. ra relxv 
ra eavrav ra fxaKpa airereXeo-av, Th. 1, 108. (But the article is omitted with 
a limiting demonstrative standing between the substantive and the limited 
attributive, e. g. TV rovrov ravrrjvl rr)v &av/*a<TTr)V Ke<paXi)v, PI. Symp. 213, e.) 
Finally, if the limiting attributive with the article is placed first, the limited 
substantive and its attributive follow, both without the article, e. g. Tlpbs ras 
irdpoiSe o~v fx<popas evdai/xovas, Eur. Hel. 476. ToAas iy& rrjs iv fiaxv 
£vfAfio\r) s fiapeias, Ar. Acharn. 1210. 5 A7rb rwv iv rfj EvpAirr) rrSXeav 
'EWrjvidccv, X. H. 4. 3, 15. Tds virb rfj ©pa/cr? oiKovaas iroXeis 'EWtjvi- 
5 as, 4. 8, 26. 

Rem. 8. When an attributive participle has a more definite expletive belong- 
ing to it, their relative position is as follows : — 

(a) 'O irpbs rbv irSXefiov alpe&els err parrjySs. 

(b) 'O o-r paryybs 6 irpbs rbv TrSXepov aipeSreis. 

When there are two of these more definite expletives, one stands either 
after the substantive or after the participle, e. g. TV irpbs EvfiovXov yivojxivnv 
wiffriv vfx7v, Aeschin. 3, 25. Tuv Ka& v/xas Treirpayfi4vwv na\G>v rfj 7r<JA€t, 
Dem. 18, 95. T7js vvv \mapxovfft\s ai/rip Swdpews, 4, 4. Tds irap' iin&v wry 
\oiffas avrcp ri^ids, 20, 83. 



$ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 323 

(c) 'O aipafjels irpbs rbv ir6\efx.ov err p arrjy 6 s. Tfyv virdpxovaav rfi 
ir6\€L 5vuafj.iv, Dem. 8, 10. 

(d) 'O ulpsdrels (T r p arrfybs irpbs rbv ir6\tfj.ov. Ttjv irpos ova av aSo|- 
iav t&5 irpdyfx.aTi, Dem. 6, 8. 

(e) 'O irpbs rbv iroXe/xov (TTpaTrjybs atpeSeis (this position is most fre- 
quent, when the participle has two more definite expletives). Tas virb 
tovtov fiXaacpr) fiias ei pr) /a 4 v as, 18, 126. Al irpb rod CTOfnaTos vrjes 
v avfiaxovcai, Th. 7, 23. Tb irpbs Aifivrjv fi4pos r er pafifi4v o v, 58. 
When there are two or more explanatory words belonging to the partici- 
ple, they are either placed between the article and the substantive, e. g. 
T^jv r6re QrjfSaioLS pcafi-nv Kal o6%av vir dpxovar av, Dem. 18, 98; or 
they are so separated, that one is placed either before the participle or 
after it, e. g. Oi irapa. tovtov \6yoi totc pr]&4vT€s, Dem. 18, 35. 
Tai>Ti)v t\\v airb tov t6itov ao~(pa\siav virdpxovo'av tt} ir6\ei, 19, 84. 

Rjim. 9. When a participle used substantively has predicative expletives 
joined with it, these are placed between the article and the participle. Thus, 
for example, irpoTepos, irpuTos, vcrTepos, vo-TaTos (he came first, etc.), becomes : 
6 irp6Tepos (irpG>T os, vo~Tepos, vo~TaTOs) a<piK6fi^vos (he who came 
first); 'aKwv afiapTavei becomes: 6 &kq>v afiapTdvcav; dvdpeTos vo/xi^eTaf. & 
avSpetos vo/j.i£6fxevos; avTbs aSt/cet: 6 avTbs clSikuv (one doing wrong of 
his own accord); toiovtSs £o~tiv: 6 r oiovros &v; fi6vos £o~t'iv : 6 fj.6vos &v. 
When the predicative expletive consists of an adjective and substantive, the 
substantive is usually placed directly after the participle, e.g. irp&Tos TtTay- 
(4.4 vos Ta^iapxos (he who had been placed as the first centurion). 

$246. Use of the Article with Pronouns and Numer- 
als, with and without a Substantive. 

1. The article is sometimes used with personal substantive 
pronouns in the Ace, either when the personality is to be made 
prominent instead of the person merely, or, what is more fre- 
quent, when a person previously mentioned is referred to. On 
6 nolos, see § 344, Rem. 3. 

Tbv kavTbv 877 \4yav fid\a ffsfivG>s Kal iyKwfMidCw (his important person), PL 
Phaedr. 258, a. Aevpo 5tj, if S 5 '6s, evfrb ijfxuv. Ho?, %<pT)v 4ydi>, \4yeis, Kal irapa 
Tivas tovs vfj.as(i.e. Kal tIvcs elalv ovtoi, ovs \4yeis ^uSs), PL Lys. 203, b. 

2. The article is used with a substantive which has a pos- 
sessive pronoun belonging to it, 01 the Gen. of a personal or 
reflexive pronoun ($ 245, Rem. 4), when the object is considered 
as a definite one or as relating exclusively to possession ; the 
possessive is placed between the article and the substantive 
[I 245, 3 (a)]. 

'O e/xc»? iraT-fjp, 6 o~bs \6yos, thy word (a definite or particular one), o ifibs ira?s, 
my son (a definite one of several, or even the only one) ; also 6 \6yos crov; Tbv 
creavTov iraTepa or rbv iraT4pa Tbv aeavTov ; on the contrary, the article is omitted 
when it is to be denoted, that the object named belongs to the possessor in 
common with others of the same kind, or when the substantive with the posses* 



324 syntax. [$ 246 

sive is a predicate or in apposition : 4/jhs aSeXcpos or aSeXcp6s fxov, a brother of 
mine fit not being- determined which); i/xbs irais or ircus fiov: outos io-Ti(v) 
aZeXcpbs cros or d5eX<pos o~ov : ovtos, ah'eXcpbs iuos or aoeX$6s /xov. 

3. A substantive to which one of the demonstrative pronouns 
ovtos, oSe, iKelvos, and even air 6s, ipse, is joined, regularly 
has the article. As these pronouns are not considered as at- 
tributives, but either as substantives (he, the man), or are taken 
in a predicative sense (the man, ivho is here), they stand either 
before the article and the substantive, which is then in apposi- 
tion with the pronoun, or after the article and substantive [comp.' 
\ 245, 3 (b)]; thus: — 

ovtos 6 ai/r)p or 6 av^ip outos (not 6 ovtos b.vi\p), 
?j5e 7] yvwiAT] or r) yucopa] 7JSe (not r) r]de yvu[ir)\, 
iiceTvos 6 avrip or 6 aurip eKelvos (not 6 iiceTvos avr)p). 

clvtos 6 BaaiXevs or 6 BaaiXevs euro's (but 6 avrbs BaaiXevs [seldom (6) Baai- 
Xevs 6 avros] signifies idem rex, the same king). 

Remark 1. The substantive docs not take the article: — 

(a) When the pronoun is used as the subject, and the substantive as the 
predicate (§ 244. Rem. 1), e. g. avT-n icrrlv audpbs apeWj (this is the virtue of 
a man), PL Men. 71, e. Avtt) eWco Iko-v)] diroXoyia, Apol. 24. b. Kivrjais 
avTT) /jLeyio-rrj drj To7s cl EXX7]aiu eyevero (this icas the greatest agitation), Th. 
1,1; hence a distinction must be made between toutw t<2 diSaaKaXas 
XpavTai (they have this teacher), and tovtw Sidao-KaXw xpahrcu (they have this 
man for a teacher). Tenfi-opiq) tovtw xP®l JLev0S (which signifies tovto ecm 
reKj-L^piov, a> ixprJTo), X. C. 1. 2, 49. TavT-qv yvwjx-nv ex<a (which signifies 
avTr) early t) yvujjLT), %v exw), An. 2. 2, 12. If, however, the predicative 
substantive is to be represented as a definite object or one before-men- 
tioned, it takes the article, e. g. 'Oirore (Scox-par^s) tl t£, X6ya die£ioi, dia 
t&v p-aXiara bfJioXoyovfxeuoiV iiropeveTo, vofxifav TavTTju r ■)] v aacpaXeiav 
eZvai Xoyov (hanc esse firmam Mam disputandi ration em, viz. such a mode 
as had been clearly shown by previous examples), X. C. 4. 6, 15. 

(b) When the substantive is a proper name, e. g. oZtos, inelvos, avrbs ~2,u>Kpd- 
T7]s. EvSvdruLios ovroa'i, X. C. 4. 2, 3. ~Nucr)pa.Tov tovtov, Symp. 2, 3. 
Xapfiidrfs ovroai, 2, 19. Avrbv Mevava, An. 1. 5, 13 ; or when a common 
name is used instead of a proper name, e. g. Avtov fiaaiXews, An. 1. 7, 
11. *EttI yr}v T-i]voe rjX&oixev (with the variation iirl rrju yr)v r.), Th. 2, 
74. The article occurs but seldom, and then with a demonstrative force. 
Ti o7]r inelpov rbv QaXr)> &avfj.d£o/j.ev. Ar. Nub. 181. ToVSe rbv 
'linrirju p.eTeire/j.\l/d/xe^a, Her. 5. 91. Comp. 8, 27. 

(c) When the idea of an object is to be expressed absolutely, the substantive 
without the article is joined with the pronoun avrSs. Comp. § 244, 1. 
Ai'tt? deairoTeia avrris SovXelas, PL Parmen. 133, d. Avrrjs iirio-Tr)' 
fjLrjs ov uerexofJ-eu, 134, b. Ovk avrov Seair6rov Stittov, o eari Seo"rr6Trjs, 
eKeivov oovXos iariv, 133, d. 

(d) When outoj a vr)p is used to denote emotion, especially scorn or con- 
tempt, instead of the pronoun av. Ovroal avrip ov iravaerai <pXvapu>v, 
Elire fioi, S> ScoKpares, ovk aiax vi/ V bvoiiara ^rjpevwu: ( = blockhead, why dont 
yon cease ?) PL Gorg. 489, b. Ok ol5' drra Xeyeis, & S^/cpares, aAA' dXXop 
rivh. ipura. 2. Outos aj/^p o»x vTro/xeyei wcpeXov^uos (= ypu, oh man 
can you not l>ear to be benefited ? lb. 505. c. 



♦ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 325 

(e) In passages like Outoi, ovs Spare, fSdpfiapoi iroXe/Luwrepoi rifuv effovTat, X, 
An. 1. 6, 16, the relative clause supplies the place of the article. But 
there are few passages like : 4>epe Xafikv x iT & vas y-ev tovtovoi and the 
following rovsSe x 4 ™""^ X. Cy. 8 - 3 > 6, where the demonstrative is 
used like a deictic (that ichich points out) adverb (here, there). The poets 
very often omit the article where the prose-writers must use it. 

Rem. 2. When the pronoun ovtos or iKe?vos belongs to a substantive having 
the article and an attributive, then these pronouns are often placed between the 
attributive and the substantive, e. g. At tuv UeXoTrovvrjoiuv avrai vriss, Th. 8. 
80. 'H (TT6f7? aur t] 686s, X. An. 4. 2, 6. 'O Aifibs e/ceicoj AeW, Ad. H. A. 
7, 48. So 6 avrhs ovtos irSXe/xos, Luc. de hist, conscr. c. 14. So also Avith the 
genitives pod, oov, avrov, etc. (§ 245, Rem. 4) ; likewise with 7r£s, oAos, e. g. 6 
aya&os /xov irarrip ; r\ tS>v 'A&rjvalwv iraoa (o\r)) irSXis. 

4. A substantive with which toiovtos, tolosSz, roo-ovt os, 
ttjXlkovtos, are joined, takes the article placed according to 
$ 245, 3 (a), when the quality or quantity designated by these, 
is to be considered as belonging to a definite object, one before 
mentioned or known, or as belonging to a whole class of objects 
previously named. 

TAp' ovv dvvaio tov toiovt ov d/j.e[xirTov <pi\ov vofii^eip ; (i. e. tale?n, qualis antea 
descriptus est), X. Cy. 5. 5, 32. n<Ss av ovv 6 toiovtos dvi]p diacp&elpoi robs 
v4ovs (i. e. talis vir, qualem descripsimus Socratem), C. 1. 2, 8. TcSj/ too ovtuv 
Kal t o iovt wv dya&wv vfuv Kal to?s aXXois 'A&rjvaiois exovTes X^P IU ( m relation 
to what precedes), Dem. Cor. 327, 305. 'Opuv robs ttjXikovtovs <pvXar- 
Tovras /idXiOTa ras ywaiKas (relating to the preceding yepaiw, but at the same 
time designating the whole class of the yepcuot), X. R. L. 1, 7. So also when 
taken substantively : 6 toiovtos, to. Toiavra. On the contrary, the article must 
be omitted, when the object is indefinite : any one of those who are of such a 
nature, or are so great, e. g. Toiovtov avBpa ovk av £iraivoiit)s. 

5. "When iras, irdvTes, o'Aos belong to a substantive, the 
following cases must be distinguished : — 

(a) When the idea expressed by the substantive is considered 
as altogether a general one, the article is not used. 

Has avSrpoDTros (seldom 'avfrpwiros 7ras), every man (i e. every one to whom 
the predicate man belongs ; irdvTes 'dv&pooTroi, all men. So also oXt} tt6\is, a 
whole city, tt6xls o\'o, a ichole city. Then iras in the singular signifies each, 
every. lias may often be translated by mere, or utter, e. g. 'O "Epas iv irdov dvap- 
%ia Kal avoixia £oov, PI. Rp. 575, a. Uavra dya&a Kal KaXa direpydCovTai, Polit. 
284, a. 

(/?) When the substantive to winch 7ra<s, Wi/res belong, is to 
be considered as a whole in distinction from its parts, it takes 
the article, which is placed according to $ 245, 3 (a). Here 7ra9, 
trdvres are emphatic. 



326 syntax. p 245 

'H no. ja yrjj the whole earth; ol irdvres rroXTrai, all citizens without exception. 
This usage is more seldom than that under (a). This construction occurs also 
with '6\os, hut it is still rarer than with iras, e. g. t) oX-n tt6Xis, ttSxis i) oX-n, the 
whole city. Here the singular iras always has the sense of whole. Ueipa<r^ai 
(XPV) Koivfj crca^LV r)]V it a cay ^LKeXiav, Th. 4, 61. v ESo£ej/ avrois ob robs 
vap6vras p.6vov airoKreivai, aXXa Kal robs airavras MiTuA.rjvai vs, 3, 36. Tb 
oXov avdyKt] ratrdvr a ^e'pjj elvai, PL Theaet. 204, a. 'Av&punroicr 1 yap rots 
iracri Koivbv rov^aixaprdveiy, S. Ant. 1023. 'Ekc'ivus /lloi (paiverai, wsnep ra rov 
TrposcvTTOv jxopia e%ei irpbs rb oXov it p6sonrov, PL Prot. 329, e. Hence it 
signifies, in all. nepirovcri xiAious touj it auras 6 it Kir as, a thousand hop- 
lites IN all. 'SuveirAripafrrio-av yr)es at iraaai Se/ca fiaXicrra Kal eKarov, Th. 3, 66. 

(y) When the words 77-as, 77-ai/Tcs, intended merely a& a more 
definite explanation, without any special emphasis, belong to a 
word denoting a definite object and hence having the article, they 
are then placed according to § 245, 3 (b). This is by far the 
most frequent use of iras, Travres. The word 6'Aos also is usually 
constructed in the same manner, in connection with a substan- 
tive and the article. 

Ol orparicvrai elXoy rb or par oir eS ov airav or array rb ar par 6ire?>ov. 
Ol <rr par itvrai wdyres or irdvres ol err p ar iwrai KaXws ipax^cravro. 
Aia rrjv ir 6 A iv oXrjy or dia oXijv r)]v tt6Xiv (simply through the whole 
city, whereas Sta rr\v oXifv rrSXiy, through the whole city). AiafZaivovai rrdyr es 
els rb Bv£dyr tov ol ar par ia>r at, X. An. 7. 1, 7. El inrb rr)s 'EXXados 
7r do"t\s a\iots irr' aperfj &avp.d£ec&ai, rr]v 'EXXada iretpareou eu iroieiv, X. C. 2. 
1,28. 

6. When eWo-To?, each, every, belongs to a substantive, the 
article is omitted, as with 7ms in the sense of each, every, when 
the idea expressed by the substantive is considered as a general 
one ; but when the idea contained in the substantive is to be 
made prominent, it takes the article which is always placed 
according to § 245, 3 (b). 

Karcis rr)v rj/iepav kKaar-nv, Dem. Cor. 310, 249, or Ka& kKaar-nv tt)v 
7)ij.4 pay, every single day, but ovk bxiya iarl Ka& kKaar-nv r)/j.4pav (quotidie, 
each day, every day, general) roiavra bpav re Kal aKoveiv, X. C. 4. 2, 12. A A 
eKaarn rjXiKia irposreraKrai iroiziv, SivyriaS/xe^a, X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. Ivpavvovv- 
rai irwb Seita avSpwv, o'i/s Avaavdpos Kar4or-nazv iv eKaarn it 6 A e 1, H. 3. 5, 13 ; 
but "O ri au iv r rj yfj e Kaarn KaXbv 7) aya&bv y, p.ejxvi)aovrai, in every single 
land, Cy. 8. 6, 6. Kal r)yep.cov pev r)v 6 Seairbrrjs 4 Kaar-ns rrjs ot/c/as, An. 
7. 4, 14. 

7. When e/carepos, each of two, a/xc£a> and apLcporepos, both, 

belong to a substantive, the article is always used, since here 



$ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 327 

only two known, therefore definite objects can be spoken o?. 
The article is here placed according to § 245, 3 (b). 

'EttI tui/ irXevpurv e k arepav, X. An. 3.2, 36, or iirl etcar epav twv 
vXevpav. To S>ra ap.<p 6r epa or antyorepa to cDto. 'A/xcpoTi/ toIv 
X ep olv or rotv x e P°? v o-jx(po7v. Ka& eKarepof rbv isir\o£i, Th. 
4,14. Ty wrl karepy, X. Ven. 5, 32. 

8. In respect to the pronoun avros and the indefinite pronouns 
or numerals aA.A.09, erepos, 7roAus, 7rAeicov, TrAetcrro?, the 
following points are to be observed : — 

(a) 'O out 6 s signifies the same, idem, e. g. 6 avrbs 8.v&pooiros, idem homo ; rav 
t6, the same; but 6 avSpwiros avr6s or avrbs 6 frvfrpcairos, homo ipse. 

(b) "A A Ao s = alius, another, in contrast wit 1 ipse (avr6s) ; 6 oAAos = reliquui 
the other ; oi aAAot = reliqui, certeri, the rest, e. g. ^ oAA7? "EAAos, reliqua Graecic, 
the rest of Greece, in contrast with some part before named ; oi aAAot fofrpwrroi 
the other men or the others, in relation to definite individuals, ^n 'Apia?* Kal o - 
&\\ot oVcn ^Te Kvpov <pi\oi, Ariaeus and the rest. But 'O YKovs eir^dvn fx.tr 
&\\<i>v, Glus appeared with others, in contrast with himself; — erepos = one 
of two (it not being determined which), or it forms a contrast with 6 avr6s and 
denotes difference or contrast; — 6 erepos = the other, i. e. the definite one of 
two, e. g. 7] krepa x^P T V * T *P a XPV ral 'i °i erepoi in reference to two parties. 

(c) The following cases of iro\vs, iroAAot are to be distinguished: (o) 
When ttoXvs, iroWoi belong to a substantive without the article, as tto\vs ttSvos, 
itoAAtj o-irovSr), tto\vs \6yos, 7roAAol &v&p<airoi, an object is denoted as an indefi- 
nite one, e.g. TLoXvv exovaai ir6vov are\e?s rrjs rod ovros freas airipxovrai 
(having much toil), PL Phaedr. 243, b. no Wo I fri/drpairoi rod ttKovtov bpi- 
•yovTcu (many men, general) ; (fi) but if the object is represented as definite, or 
one previously mentioned or known, the article is used with the substantive, 
and ttoXvs is then placed : (1) as an attributive between the article and the sub- 
stantive, e. g. 7j troW^i (TirovSr] rb a\rj&elas iSeiv ireSiov (magnum illud, de quo 
dixi, studium, that great zeal, of which I have spoken), PI. Phaedr. 248, b. 'tlv irepi 
rbv iroXbv \6yov eiroieiro ' 'Ava£ay6pas (multum ilium sermonem, e scriptis ejus 
satis cognitum), 270, a. 'Ev rats irok\a?s yeveffecri (among the many genera- 
tions mentioned), Phaedon. 88, a; oi ttoWoI &v&p<tiiroi signifies either the 
many men named or a multitude of men belonging together, in opposition to the parts 
of the whole, hence also oi iroWoi, the many, the multitude, the populace, plebs, 
or even the most, the majority (in contrast with the separate individuals), e. g. 
"Oo~a oi 6\lyoi rovs iroWovs [xr] ireiaavres, aAAo Kparovvres ypdcpov&i (what the 
few prescribe to the many [the majority] not by persuasion but by force), X. C. 1. 2, 45 , 
rb ttoXv, the greater part, e. g. Tuv n-oAe/uW rb [x\v iroXv efxevev, fi4pos 8' av- 
twv air-fjvra ro?s Kara, to &Kpa (most of the enemy remained), X. An. 4. 6, 24. What 
is true of the Positive, is true also of the Comparative and Superlative. 'Eov 
$i\ovs i) ir6\iv wcpeXeiu Set), "iror£pq> r) irXeioiV o'XoXt] tovtwv (Tri/xeXeTa^at, 
t$ ws iyib vvv, % r$ ws av fiaKapifas diairufxev^ (the greater leisure, considered 
as a definite thing, or as a definite whole), X. C. 1. 6, 9. El 48l8ov, iirl tovtq 



228 syntax. \J 246 

hv edidov, faces ifiol dobs jxetov [ify airodoir) vjxiv rb irXe?ov, An. 7. 6, 16. "Ettctcu 
rfj apery o~Jj£e<T&ai els rbu irXeica \povov fxaXXov, tj rfj Katcta, R. L. 9, 2; ol 
irXeiovs or rbTrXeov signifies the majority in opposition to the minority ( ol eAdV- 
crovs), therefore a definite whole; ol irXeTcrr ot, the most, rb it A el arov, the greatest 
part, also to be considered as a definite whole. — Or, (2) troXvs is joined with 
the substantive having the article, and is placed according to § 245, 3 (b) ; 
itoXvs is then to be taken in a predicative sense, e. g. 'E7rel ecvpa iroXXh ret. 
vpea (when he saw the flesh that it was much, the flesh in great abundance), X. Cy 
1.3,6. ~2(ptcn toXXcl rd airopa i-vfifiefiriKora (sc. opcavres), Th. 1, 52. IIoA- 
\tyv t)]V air lav elxov (they had censure in great abundance, i. e. were very 
severely censured), 6, 46. 

(cl) 'OXiyoi,feiu, e. g. bxiyoi (zv&pwTroi ; ol bxiyoi, the few, i. e. either the 
few mentioned, or to he considered as a definite whole, viz., emphatically the 
Oligarchy, considered as a whole, in opposition to oi iroXXol, e. g. Upeo-fiets 
ol M-ftXioi irpbs /J.ev rb ttXtj&os ovk fiyayov, ev 8e reus apxais KaL roTs oXiyots 
Xeyeiv eiceXevov, Th. 5, 84 ; but when only an indefinite idea is expressed by the 
word bxtyos, the article is omitted, e. g. TlpoSo&rjvai tV voXiv vn bxiycav (by 
oligarcJis, not by the Oligarchs). 

9. When a cardinal number belongs to a substantive, the 
article is omitted, if the idea expressed by the substantive is 
indefinite, e. g. rpets avSpes r/XSov ; but the substantive takes the 
article which is placed : (a) according to $ 245, 3 (a), when the 
substantive with which the numeral agrees, contains the idea 
of a united ivhole ; hence also, when the number of objects is to 
be represented as a sum-total, after the prepositions ap.(j>i } Trept, 
cis, vrrip ; but the article is here used most frequently, when a 
preceding substantive with a cardinal number agreeing with it, 
and without the arti He, is referred to. 

Oi Twv /3c«nAeW olvoxdoi Sid6ao~i ro?s rpio~\ 5 aKrvXois bxovvres r^v 
(pidx-nv (with the three fingers, i. e. the three generally used), X. Cy. 1. 3, 8. ^Rv, 
8re ereXevra, afxtpl ra irevr^Kovra err) (he had reached about the sum of 
fifty years), X. An. 2. 6, 15. 'I7r7re?s ej's robs r er paKtsx^'^ov s avveXe- 
yovro avrcf, Kai ro£6rai els robs fivpiov s, Cy. 3. 2, 3. To7s Kepttvpaiois rebv 
eXKoai veS>v ob Tvapovcxwv (referring to the preceding words ol KepKvpaToi 
e'iKOO'i vavo~\v o.vrobs Tpetya.fx.evoi, Th. 1, 49). 

(/?) But the article is placed according to § 245, 3 (b), when 
the numeral without any emphasis, is joined with the definite 
object, merely to define it more definitely, and when the nu- 
meral had not been previously mentioned, e. g. 'Efxax^a-avra 
ot fxera JlepiKXiovs orrXXraL ^fXtot or ^lXlol ol fxera II. OTrAirai, the 
hoplites with Pericles, a thousand in number, fought. 



$ 247. J ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. 329 

Rem. 3. The article is frequently omitted "with substantives which have an 
ordinal number joined with them, as the ordinal in a measure supplies the place 
of the article. Tpirov eros rep iro\t/j.a) ireXevra (he died the third year), Th. 
2, 103. Comp. 3. 25, 88. 

$ 247. The Article as a Demonstrative and Relative 
Pr ono'un. 

1. The article 6 77 r6 had originally the sense both of a demonstrative and 
relative pronoun. 

2. In the Homeric poems, the pronoun 6 rj r6 has almost wholly the sense 
both of a substantive and adjective demonstrative pronoun, which refers to an 
object, and represents it as known or already spoken of, or brings it before the 
mind of the hearer, e. g. II. a, 12. 6 (he) yap ^A&e Sroas eVt vrjas 'Axaiwv. 29. 
r)] v (her) 5' iyw ov Xvaca. Od. k, 74. ov yap p.oi &4/j.ls icrrl K0/u.i{4p.€V ov8' aTrov4fi- 
ireiv av8pa tov (that man), bs /ce Seoiaiv airex^TTrai jxaKapeaaiv. Hence, in 
Homer, the substantive is found in very many passages without the article, 
where later writers, particularly the Attic, would use it. Comp. II. a, 12 seq. 
with PI. Rp. 393, e. Yet there are, in Homer, evident traces of an approxima- 
tion or agreement of this apparent article with the real article, which was not 
fully developed before the time of the Attic writers. Thus in Homer, as in 
the Attic writers, it gives the force of substantives to adjectives and participles, 
e. g. 6 apicrros, 6 viK-ftcras, 6 yepaiSs] so also, rb irpiv, rb irpSa&ev (prius) ; it is 
found in connection with a substantive and an attributive adjective or adverb, 
the attributive being placed between the article and substantive, e. g. Twv irpo- 
Tipav eVeW, II. A, 691. Tbv 8e£ibv 'Ittttov i//, 336. Oi evepSe 3-eot £, 274. Tb abv yepas 
a, 185. Tb abv /x4vos a, 207 ; so it is used in case of apposition, e. g. Od. A, 298. 
Kal AtjStjv sioov rrjV Tuv8ap4ov irapaKoniv. Od. £, 61. 'avanres ol v4oi; further, 
"AvTvyes at irepl 8i<ppov, II. A, 535. 'Avdpcov tcov tots i, 559. Th?s ol AoXioio, Od. w, 
497 ; also with the demonstrative, at kvvss cu5e t, 372 ; it also takes the place 
of the possessive pronoun, e. g. II. A, 142. vvv p.\v §77 tov irar pb s aeacea TicreTe 
X<i>fii}u (of your father), and denotes what belongs to an object, e. g. Od. o, 218. 
iyKoa/AsiTe to. T6u%6', IraTpoi, vrft jxeAalvn (the Tevxea belonging to the ship). 

3. The use of the article as a demonstrative adjective, is not unfrequent in all 
the post-Homeric writers (§ 244, 6) ; but as a demonstrative substantive pronoun, 
it was retained, in certain cases, through every period of the language ; thus : — 

(a) Tb 8 4 (id autem, or on the contrary), very frequently at the beginning of a 
sentence; 6 \i.4v (is quidem), 6 34 (is autem), ol 8 4 (li autem) very fre- 
quently at the beginning of a sentence; irpb tov (it p or ov), formerly ; 
often Kal t6v, ttjv, et eum, et earn, at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. 
X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. Kal tov KsXevo-at Sovvai. In connection with Kal, the 
Greek says in the Nom. : Kal os, Kal % Kal o'l (§ 334), but in the Ace. ko\ 
rbu, Kal T-nv ; seldom t 6 ye, id quidem, r £, ideo, and the like. 

(b) In such phrases as, rbv Kal tov, rb Kal t 6, this man and that man, this 
thing and that thing ; to. Kal to., varia, bona et mala. 

(c) It is used immediately before a sentence introduced by '6 s, ocros or oTos, 
which sentence expresses periphrastically the force of an adjecthe, oi 

28* 



330 syntax. [$24b 

especially, an abstract idea. This usage is confined mostly to Plato. 

PI. Phaedon. 75, b. opeyerai rod '6 iffriv tffov (= tov iffov ovtos), he reaches 

after thai which is equal. Prot. 320, d. e« yys Kal irvpbs fii^ai/Tes Kal tup 

off a irvpl Kal yfj Kepduvvrai. Soph. 241, e. etTe fj-i/j.-n/xaTav, efre (pavrafffid- 

tosv avTuv $j Kal irepl t^xvuiv r <£ v, off at irepl ravrd elffi. 

(d) In such phrases as, 6 jxiv — 6 Se', oi pey — ol Se', the one — the other, 

some, the others. Isocr. Paneg. 41. els fxkv tovs vfipifrvres, to?s Se SouAerW- 

res, treating some imth contempt, and being slaves to others. Very frequently 

rb fiev — rb Se, tcii fxev — ra S e, partly — partly, rfj fiev — rfj Se', 

on one side — on the other side. 

4. In the Homeric language, the demonstrative 6 t\ to, is frequently used in 

place of the relative. II. a, 125. aKha Ta jxev iroKicav el-en pd&ofxev, ra SeSacrrcu 

(quae ex urbibus praedati sumus, ea sunt distributa). The relative use was 

transferred from Homer to the Ionic and Doric writers also ; so the Tragedians 

take this liberty, though very rarely. Her. 3, 81. t a fieu ""Orav-qs eljre, AeAe'x&w 

ko.jj.qI ravra' ra S' is to ttXtj^os avcoye (pepeiv to Kpdros, yv(j}\ii\s T7js apiffTrfS 

yju.dprr)Ke. Comp. Larger Grammar, Part II. § 482. 



§248. Classes of Verbs. 

In relation to the subject, the predicate can be expressed 
in different ways. Hence arise different classes of verbs, 
which are indicated by different forms : — 

(1) The subject appears as active, e. g.'O irals y packet, 
to az^o? ^dWei. — But the active form has a two-fold 
signification : — 

(a) Transitive, when the object to which the action is 
directed, is in the Ace, and therefore appears as pas- 
sive or as receiving- the action, e. g. Tvirrcd tov iralha, 
<ypdcf)co tt]v iTTLGToXr)v, — Transitive verb. 

(/3) Intransitive, when the action is either confined to the 
subject, as To av^ros ^dWet, or when the verb has an 
object in the Gen. or Dat., or is constructed with a 
preposition, e. g. 'ETrfov/jbco t??? dperfjs, %aip(ti rfj cocjjia, 
/3a$it(o ek rrjv iroXiv, — Intransitive verb. 

(2) Or the subject performs an action which is confined 
to, or is reflected upon itself, e. g. TvirTopuai, I strike my- 
self ; ^ovkevofjuav, I advise myself, or I deliberate ; tvttto- 
(xat rr/v icefyaXrjv, I strike my own head; fcaraarpe^o/jLac ttjv 
yrjv, I subjugate the land for myself : diivvovuai tovs TroXefil' 



$249.] CLASSES OF VERBS. ACTIVE FORM. 33 1 

of?, I keep off the enemy from myself, — Middle or Reflex- 
ive verb. 

Remark 1. When the reflexive action is performed by two or more subjects 
on each other, as Tvtttovtcu, they strike each other ; Sta/ceAeiWTcu, they exhort each 
other, it is called a reciprocal action, and the verb, — Eeciprocal verb. 

(3) Or the subject appears as receiving the action, i. e. 
the action is performed upon the subject, e. g. 01 o-TparicoTcu 
wto Twv 7ro\€fiicov iBcay^rna-av, iv ere pursued, — Passive verb. 

Rem. 2. The Act. and Mid. have complete forms. For the Pass., the 
Greek has only two tenses : the Fat. and Aor. All the other passive forms 
are indicated by the Mid., since the passive action was considered as a reflexive 
one. 

Remarks on the Classes of Verbs. 

$ 249. A. Active Form. 

1. Many active verbs, especially such as express motion, 
besides a transitive signification, have an intransitive or reflex- 
ive sense. (So in English, as he leads, the birds 'move, the car- 
riage breaks, the snow melts, which have also a transitive sense ; 
so the Lat. vertere, mutare, declinare, etc.) 

*Axep(>>v iroTa.fj.os i s fidk\ei is t)]v Kifiunv, Th. 1, 46. 'H B6\^t] \t/j,vri ii-lr)- 
aiv is &d\ao~o~av, 4, 103. 'Eyyvs ^yov ol a E\\i}ues (comp. to draw near), X. 
An. 4. 2, 15. So also avdyeiv, to go back, to withdraw; 5 i ay e iv, perstare, to 
continue, are found in prose. — 'EA.aui'eii' or iXavveiu i7r7rw (X. An. 1. 8, 1), 
to ride; irposeXavveiv, adequitare, to ride up to. — Many compounds of f3d\\<-ii>, 
e. g. i/xfidWeiv and elsfidWeiv, to fall into, to empty (of a river); iicfid\- 
Keiu, to spring forth, to put forth (of plants, etc.) ; /xer afidWeiv (like mutare), 
SiafSdWeiv, to cross over ; it po s /3c$AAe iv rivi, tc make an attack upon ; o~v/i- 
iSoAAeic rivi, manus conserere, to engage in combat with ; iir i^aXXeiv, to fall 
upon ; virepfidWeiv, to exceed, to be prominent. — K A t v e i v and its com- 
pounds, e. g. iirtK\(veiu, to incline to something ; airoicXiveu/, declinare. — T peireiv, 
like vert ere; iTrirpiireiv, se permittere, to entrust one's self to. — ^rpecpeiv (like 
mutare) and its compounds. — Tlraleiv, to strike against, to stumble; vposTrraieiu, 
as /xeyaAws it poster aiaav, they suffered a total shipwreck (Her. 6, 95). \A.7raA- 
A d t t e t v, to get off, escape. — Compounds of 8 i 8 6 v a i, as it/SidSvat, to discharge 
itself (of a stream); iiri8i86vai, proficere,to increase, advance. — Compounds of 
livai, e. g. aviivai, to relax, be remiss; icpievai (sc. kavrhv) lcrx v P c P 7eA»Tt (indul 
gere), PL Rp. 388, e. Compounds of /xio-yeiv, fxtyvvvai, as <rv{j.p.icyeiv, 
commisceri ; irpos[uyvvvai, to fight with, also appropinquare, e. g. irposefxi^av t&5 
reixet, Th. 3, 22. Klpeiv, to get under way, set out (of ships, to weigh anchor), 
also compounds, e. g. ol pdp&apoi airrjpav e/c rrjs Ar)Aov (to set sail), Her. 6, 99 ; 
iurraipeiy (sc. xelpas) tiv'i, to fight with, to withstand. — ^vvdirr etv, manus con- 



332 syntax. [* 249. 

serere. — "Exeiv, to land; ix* iV two's (desistere), Th. 1, 112; ex* lp with adverbs, 
as ev, koXws, kolkoos, like bene, male habere ; '4%eiv a/j.<p( ti, in aliqua re occupation 
esse; irposexeiv (sc. vovv), attendere, to give one's attention to, or appellare, to land; 
Trpoe'xei*/, praestare ; i-irexeiv, se sustinere, or expectare, in mente habere, e. g. e7rei- 
%ou oTpareveo-frai ; Karex^tv, se retinere, also to land; itap^x^Vy e - S- frj ixov<riKfj y 
rmisicae se dare ; &7re%et j/, to be distant from ; ayrexeiv, resistere. — IT p d t t e i v with 
adverbs, e. g. eS, Kaxws, or with the Ace. of adjectives, e. g. /caAa, /ra/ca, to fare 
well or ill. — A i ar p i fi e i v (consumere), versari, to employ one's self. — Compounds 
of cpepeiv, as diacpepeiv, to be different, differre; virepcpepziv (eminere) ttAoutw. — 
'AvaKafifidi/eiv, refici, recreari. — OlneTv, administrari, e. g. iroAis oIkz? (the 
state is managed), Plat. — TeXevrau, to end, to die. — Karopfro vv, to succeed. — 
NiKav, to prevail, e. g. eVt/ca r\ x e ' l P uv ^oov yvwfxioiv (like vincit sententia), Her. 
6, 109. 'E A A. e i ir e i v, officio suo deesse ; aTroXe'nrtiv, to remain behind, fitc. 

2. Several active verbs with a transitive signification, which 
form both Aorists, have in the first Aor. a transitive, but in the 
second Aor. an intransitive sense : — 

dva>, to wrap up, first Aor. edvaa, I wrapped up, second Aor. edvu, I ^.nt in, 
1o~Tn\j.i, to place, " earrio-a, I placed, " eo-T7)v, I stood, 

<piw, to produce, " eepvera, I produced, " ecpvv, I was produced, 

cr/ceAAw, to make dry, " (e<ricr}\a, poet. I make dry), " ecr/cAi?;/, I withered. 

So several active verbs with a transitive signification, which 
form both Perfects, have in the first Perf. a transitive, but in the 
second an intransitive sense : — 

iyelpa, to wake, first Pf. iyriyepKa, I have awakened, see'd Pf. iyp-fjyopa, lam awake, 
oXKvjxL, perdo, " oA^Ae/ccc, perdidi, " 6\wXa, peril, 

TrelSraj, to persuade, " rciireiKa, I have persuaded, " iri-rroiSra, I trust, 
avoiyui, to open, u aveq>Xa, I have opened, " avewya, I stand open 

(§ 187, 6), 
irpdrra, to do, " 7re7rpa%a, 7 ftaye cfone, " ireirpaya (sc. eu), / 

Moreover some second Perfects of transitive verbs, which do 
not form a first Perf, have an intransitive sense : — 

o.yvvfj.1, to break, second Pf. eaya, lam broken, 
fi-fiyvvpi, to tear, " eppwya, lam torn, 

T'fjKOt}, to smelt (iron), " TeTTj/ca, I am smelted, 

Tr-fjyuv/xL, to fasten, " Treir-nya, I am fastened, 

a-h-trw, to make rotten, " aeffrjira, I am rotten, 

tyaivw, to show, " ir£<pr}va, I appear. 

Remark 1. The Pass. kxicrKofxai, to be taken, has an active form in the 
Perf. and Aor., viz., eaAco/ca, Ilxave been taken, kdhw, I was taken (§ 161, 1). 

3. Intransitive active verbs are sometimes used in 1he p ] ace 
of the passive. 



$ 260. 1 CLASSES OF VERBS. M jDLE FORM 333 

This is particularly the case with Trdo-xeii', ir'tirr* iv, <pevyeiv, ev, na- 
nus dKoveiu, Srv-fjo-Keiv, more seldom reXevrav. These active verbis 
with virb and the Gen. are very commonly used instead of the passive of such 
verbs as aStKeli/, pnrTtiv or fiaXXziv, 8i<£>Keiv, ktsIvziv ; &vr)<TKeiv in certain forms 
is always so used (§ 161, 13). Me7aAa ir<-<r6vTa (eversa. icere destroyed by) 
irp-qyiAOLTa virb i\o-o- ovwv, Her. 7, 18. Aeivdrtpov 4v6ni£ov elptti Katc&s virb rSiv 
iroXnwv aKoveiy (audire, they thought it worse to be evil spoken of by the citizens), 
f KaXSis virep ttjs irSXevs airoSvho-Keiv, Isocr. Paneg. 56, 77. So eKiriirTeiv vir6 
rivo s, expelli ab aliquo ; very often (pevyeiu vtto twos, fugari ab aliquo, to be put 
to flight by some one, or in a judicial sense, accusatum esse ab aliquo, e. g. ao-efidas 
(pevyeiv viro r tvos, to be accused by some one of impiety. Ei, kclkois it d 9 x <" 
vir6 gov, I am benefited, injured by you. 'ETeXe^TrjGav rr' 'Ab-nvaluv 
{interfecti sunt), Her. 6, 92. 

Rem. 2. It will be seen (§ 279, Rem. 5) that intransitive active /erbs are 
frequently used in poetry in a transitive sense, e. g. aarpdirTeiv o-eXas, fiaivetp 
7roSa. 

Rem. 3. The transitive active is not ^infrequently used, when the subject 
does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be performed by another ; 
yet this usage is admissible, only when it is evident from the context or from 
the nature of the case, that the subject does not itself perform the action. X. 
An. 1 . 4, 10. Kvpos rbv irapd8ei.Gov i | e k o ty e na\ Ta fiaaiXeia ko.t4 k avast/, caused 
to be cut down. So frequently airoKTeivsiv, Sairreiv, oIkoSo/x€?v and similar exam- 
ples ; often also didaGneiv, Ttafizveiv (comp.Pl. Prot. 320, a. 324, d. Menon. 94, b). 

$ 250. B. Middle Form. 

1. The Mid. denotes an action, which is performed by the 
subject, and is again reflected upon it or is confined to it. Two 
cases are here to be distinguished : — 

(a) The Mid. denotes, first and most frequently, an action 
which the subject performs upon an object within its own 
sphere, i. e. upon an object belonging to the subject, connected 
with it, or standing in any near relation to it. In English, this 
relation of the Middle voice is expressed by a possessive pro- 
noun, or by the preposition to or for with a personal pronoun. 

TviTTOfxai, iTvypd/jLTjv t)]v KccpaXrjv, I strike, I struck my own head (tvtvtsiv k., to 
strike the head of another) ; Xovaacrfrat rovs ir6Sas, to wash one's own feet (Xoveiu r. 
ir., to wash the feet of another) ; airoicpv\paG&ai ra eavrov, to conceal one's own 
affairs ; irepipp7i£aG&ai x iT &va, suam vestem, to rend one's own garment (irepipprj^ai, 
alius, that of another) ; irapaGxeo-frai T: > to 9 lve something from one's own means, to 
furnish of one's self as vavs, hence also to shoiv, e. g. ztivoiav irapex^G^ai ( on tne 
contrary irap^iv rivl irpdy^aTa, (p6fioi>, etc., to cause trouble, fear, etc., to some- 
one) ; — airodci^aG&ai ti, e. g. epyou, yvw/.ir)v, Svvafiiv, to show one's own work, etc. ; 
iirayyeiXa<r&a( ti, to promise ; in a reciprocal relation : vdixaGbai ti, aliquid inter 
se partiri, to divide something with each other, so /AepiGaG&ai ; — iroi-fiaaa&at ti, to do 



334 syntax. [$ 2-50 

or make something for one's self, e. g. eipyirnv, cnoudds {iroieiv, to do or accomplish), 
•rrotyjo'acr^ai it6\€/jlop, to carry on war ; iirifj.4\eiav, to use care ; &yea&ai yvvaiKa, to 
lake a wife for one's self to marry ; eXea&ai m, sibi sumere, hence to choose, prefer ; 
dpaafrai ti, to take up for one's self, to lay on one's self (a'ipeij/ ti, to take up something 
in order to lay it upon another) ; ahrjcracr&ai ti, to ask for one's self {aiTtiv, to ask) ; 
irpd^aff^ai xpi\p.aTa Tiva, sibi ab aliquo pecuniam exigere ; /j.ia&a><ra(rfrat, conducere, to 
hire for one's self (but /xiafraxrai, locare, to let out) ; /xeTa7T€/x\paa^ai, to cause to come 
to one's self, to send for ; KaTaoTptyaffSai, Karab'ovXuxra.o'&ai yrjv, sibi subjicere ter- 
ram ; avapri]cra<xbai Tiva, sibi devincire, to make dependent on one's self; airoXvo-aoftai 
nva, to free for one's self to ransom; -rropicracrSrai ti, sibi aliguid comparare {rropi^eiv 
rl tivi, alii aliquid comparare), KOjxio-aafrai, 3 g. TIXaTaiels iraidas nal yvvaiKas 
iKKeKOjj.iajj.euoi ? t <rau is Tas'A&7]vas, Th. 2, 78; KTi](Tacrbai, irapaaKevdcracr- 
§ai ti, sibi comparare ; beoSai and ypdtyaa&ai v6/xovs are used of one who makes 
laws for himself, or of a law-giver, who is himself, also, subject to the laws 
which he has made for others ; on the contrary, frelvai and ypdtyai vofiov are used 
of one who is not subject to the law which he has made, or generally of one 
who gives laws to others, without expressing any further relation, e. g. "Exois 
av elireiv, '6ti oi &v&pu)irot tovs aypdcpovs v6/xovs %&evTo; ^yw /xev freovs oi/xai 
tovs v6/xovs tovtovs to7s av&pcairois &e?vai, X. C. 4. 4, 19 ; — dfivvaffSfai tovs iro\e- 
fiiovs, propulsare a se hostes, hence to defend one's self against any one (a/xiveiv, 
properly to ward off, then to help) : Tifiup-fiaaa^ai ti, to revenge one's self on some 
one, to punish him (Tifxwpeiv tivl, to help one) : Tpeipao-frai, to put to fight ; airaxrcuT' 
&ai KaKa, a se propulsare mala ; airoirifxtyacr&ai Tiva, a se dimittere ; airoceicao'^ai 
ti, a se depellere ; TrapaiT7](ra<T£rai, deprecari ; oia8re(r&ai, aTroo6o-&ai, to sell; airo- 
Tptyao-frai, airofiaXea&ai, anoKpovcrao-&ai. Several Deponent Middle verbs also 
belong here (§ 102, 3). 

(b) The Middle denotes, second, but much more seldom, an 
action which the subject performs immediately on itself, so that 
the subject is at the same time, also, the object of the action. 
The English here uses the active verb with the Ace. of the 
reflexive pronoun, e. g. tvttto fxat, I strike myself; iTvij/dfjLrjv, I 
struck myself. Here belong particularly the following verbs: — 

'Airdy£ai Tivd, to strangle some one; air dy^aaSai, to strangle one's self; 
Tvtyaa&ai, Koipaa&ai, to strike one's self; Kiftyaa&ai, to bend one's self 
down; oIkio- acr& at, migrare; iir ifia\4 aSai, to apply or devote one's self to 
something ; irapao-Kevdo-ao-^ai, se parare ; Td£a<r&ai, to place one's self in 
order of battle, e. g. ovtco /mev KepKvpaioi e'r dj-avT o, Th. 1, 48 ; [but also to fix or 
establish for one's self according to No. (a), e. g. Ta£acr&ai cpopov, to agree to pay 
tribute;] it po s&eo~&ai, se adjungere, to agree with; 'lo-Taa&ai (ffTrjvai, io-Tdvai) 
and its compounds, to place one's self [but also according to No. (a), sibi ponere, 
to place for one's self, e. g. Tp6iraiov] ; opp-icr ac&ai, Ka&op /x(<raa &ai, to land 
(comp. Th. 4, 15) ; kv KActxracr&ai, to encircle (comp. Th. 5, 72), but kvk\o>&?i- 
vai, to form a circle or place one's self in a circle; Tpairea&ai [not Tpfyaa&ai, 
leeNo. (a)], toturn one's se//*(Th.5. 29, 73) ; iyyvf}<ra<r&ai, to pledge one's self < 



250.] CLASSES OF VERBS. MIDDLE FORM. 335 



Trava- atrial, to cease (from iraixa, to cause to cease) ; 8ei£curdai, to show one's 
self; particularly verbs which express an action performed by the subject upon 
his own body, e. g. \ova ao~&ai, vi-tya<r&ai, aAeii// acr&ai, xp' L<Tao ~& al > 
{Jxracr&ai, yv [xvaa a<T&ai, KaXvty ao-&ai, ko crp.4}ara<rSai, ap.<pi4ara<r- 
frai, iv8vo-a<T&ai, i K8vffa<r&ai, neipacr&ai, air ojxo p^affSai, se abster 
gere; airo/j.v£acr&ai, se emungere ; airoipricr a<r&ai, se abstergere ; o~Te<pa- 
ydocraa-^ai; err si\aa&ai, to get ready, to Jit one's self out; also some few 
verbs which in the Mid. express internal, mental action, e.g. <pv\d£ao~&ai, to 
be on one's guard, to be cautious (but (pvXaTreiv rivd, to guard some one) ; tyn<pi- 
(raa&ai, to determine or decree by vote (but yprjcpiCeiv, to put the vote) ; fSov\ev- 
o-ao-frai, to deliberate, to advise one's self (but fiovXeveiv rivi, to advise some one) ; 
y*v(Ta(r&ai, to taste ( yeveiv, to cause to taste, to give a taste of) ; r ifieop-fi&ac- 
Srai, to avenge; the reciprocals oiaKaTa\v<ra<T&ai irpSs riva, to be reconciled 
to any one ; o-vv&ea&ai, to bind one's self, to agree with any one ; (nreio-aff&ai, 
to make a treaty, peace with; aiTocx* c^ui, to restrain one's self, to abstain 
from; several compounds of '/77/tt, e.g. i<pieo-&ai, to strive; ixpieo-frai, to 
yield, be remiss ; /j.e&ieo-&ai, to neglect, be remiss ; clvt nr ir]cracr^ai rivas, to 
strive for something; avr i\afi4<T& ai nv6s, to lay hold of something. Here 
belong, also, most Deponent Middle verbs (§ 197, Rem. 2). 

Remark 1. This immediate reflexive relation is expressed also: (a) by middle 
verbs with a Pass. Aor., e. g. SiaXveiv, to separate, SiaXv&rjvai, SiaXvvecr&cu, to 
separate one's selfdiscedere (see § 197, Rem. 3); (b) by the active form, e. g. 
HerapaWeiv, to change one's self (see § 249, 1) ; (c) by the active form with the 
Ace. of the reflexive pronoun, e. g. iiraivsiv eavr6v, avaprav kavrSv, to attach one's 
self to, to make one's self depend on any one ; airoKpinrTeiv kavrov, i&l£(:iv iavr6v, 
irapex €lv eavrSv, airoXveiv kavrov, to free one's self, airoacpaTTeiv kavrov, airoKrei- 
veiv kavr6v ; the Mid. then has the signification of the Pass. ; thus, 4iraive?o-&ai, 
kiroKreivec&ai, an 00 (pdrr ecr&ai, laudari, interfci, jugular i ab alio, and has for its 
Aor. and Put. a Pass. form. Sometimes the active form with the reflexive 
pronoun is used, even when the verb has a middle form. This mode of expres- 
sion is very natural in antithesis or contrast, e. g. 'Efrfjpevev airb '[-Kirov, 5ir6re 
yvp.vd.Gai kavrov re Kal robs 'Ittttovs, X. An. 1. 2, 7. 

Rem. 2. The Mid. in the same manner as the Act. (§ 249, Rem. 3), can be 
used, when the subject does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be 
done by another. There is this difference, however, in the two cases, that in 
the Mid. the action always refers, in some way, to the subject. 'O irarrjp robs 
Tra7Sas iSiSd^aro (eVaiSevcraTo), which signifies either, the father educated the chil- 
dren for himself, or, if it is clear from the context, he caused them to be educated 
(as X. C. 1. 6, 2 ; on the contrary, 8i8d<rKeiv, iraideveiv are used without referring 
back to the subject, § 249, Rem. 3) ; Keipatr&ai, to shave one's self or to get shaved. 
'Apye?oi crcpecov eluSvas it irj adp-evoi (having caused to be made) dve&earav is 
£e\(povs, Her. 1, 31. Havcravlas rpdire^av Tlepo-iKTjv Traperi&ero (caused to be set 
before him), Th. 1, 130. Ol AaneSai/movLoi K-fjpvKa ire^avres robs veicpobs Sicko- 
p-iaavr (caused to be removed), 4, 38. 

Rem. 3. The reflexive relation of the middle to the subject, is often so 
slight, that in our mode of considering it, it almost disappears, and sometimes 
consists only in a very gentle intimation, that the action will be completed to 
the advantage or disadvantage of the subject, e. g. R. 0, 409. ovre irore Tp&es 
Aavawv iSvvavro <pd\ayyas p7]^dp.ev o 1 (in suum commodum) KXiairjcri /xiyrip-avai. 
Hence the reflexive pronoun is not seldom used with the middle', particularly 
in antitheses, in order to bring out emphatically the reflexive sense which 
exists in the middle only in a general and indefinite manner, e. g. a.cvo<pa>r 



336 SYNTAX. [$ 251. 

fiovXeverai kavrw ovofxa koX Svva.fj.iv ire p nro lti a acr&ai (to gain a name and 
power for himself ) X. An. 5. 6, 17. 'ETreSei|a vro rds avrwv dperds, Isocr. 
Paneg. 58, 85. 'Pd&vfj.oi' avro7s Kar eo-T-fjcravT o rbv fiioi; 63, 108. TV 
4/j.avTov yvu>fj.r]y air ocpaiv 6 fie v os, Id. Permut. 309, 22. 

Rem. 4. In many verbs, the active and Mid. appear to have a similar sig- 
nification ; but on a closer investigation, the difference in the meaning is 
obvious ; the active expresses the action absolutely, or objectively, without any 
accessary idea; the middle, on the other hand, expresses the same action in 
relation to the subject, or subjectively. Hence, the middle is employed when 
the literal meaning is changed into the figurative, e. g. hioineiv of an outward 
arrangement, dioine?(r&cu of mental ; 6pi£eiv literally, 6pi(ea&ai figuratively ; 
<TTa&fjLav only in a literal sense, to measure, but crTa&fj.d.<rSai also in a figurative 
signification, to weigh or measure in one's mind, aliquid secum perpendere ; o-kotzsIv, 
to look at something, GKoireicrSai, to look mentally, to consider; so in derivative 
verbs in -eva> and -evo/xai, the active form is used absolutely, to be in a certain 
state ; the middle, on the other hand, signifies, to act the part of that which is 
indicated by the root, to show one's self as such, to have the tendency or habit, to act 
as such, e. g. irovnpevw, to be bad, irovnpevojAai, to demean one's self badly : iroXi- 
reva, to be a citizen, iroXirevofxai, to live and act as a citizen ; Tafxievco, to be a 
manager, rafj.ievofj.ai, to conduct business, to arrange, especially in a metaphorical 
sense, e. g. robs vofiovs ; crrpaTevca, to undertake an expedition, used of a general or 
a state, (TTpaTtvofxai, to engage in an expedition, used of the soldiers. Derivatives 
in -i^ofiai correspond in sense to those in -evo/xai, e. g. dard'Cofiai, to demean my- 
self as a citizen ; x a P levT ' l C°/ xa h to act in an agreeable maimer. Still, derivatives 
in -Ifa, from names of nations, reject the middle, e. g. dopifa, to demean myself or 
to speak like a Dorian. 



Rem. 5. Several verbs which in the active have a causative sense, in the 
middle have a simple intransitive sense, though some of them are constructed 
with an Ace, e. g. (pofirjcrai, to cause to fear, <pofi'f)(racr&ai, to fear ; aiffxvvai, to 
make ashamed, aicrxweiaSai, to be ashamed, to feel shame ; iropevcrai, to cause to 
go, to convey, iropev<raaSai, to go ; irepaiwaai, to cause to pass over, nepaiwcreoSai, 
to pass over; Koifirjcrai, to cause to sleep, lull to sleep, Koifx-qaacrSfai, to sleep; iravcrat, 
to cause to cease, iravaaa^ai, to cease; TrXay^ai, to cause to wander, irXdy^ecr&ai, 
to wander, etc. 

Rem. 6. The middle form, as already stated (§ 248, Rem. 1), is often used 
to express reciprocal actions. This is particularly the case with verbs signify- 
ing to contend, vie with, converse with, embrace, salute, to make an agreement or com- 
pact, e. g. fidxecrSai, to fight with ; afiiXXaaSrai, to contend with ; dyowifcad-ai, to 
strive ; SiaXeyea&ai, to converse with ; ao-irdfecr&ai, to salute ; ravra (TvvTiSea&ai, 
mutually to agree on these points ; o-nwSas cnrevSecrSai or Troiaa&ai, to make a treaty 
{(TirovZas ttokhv signifying to make a libation). So also, where the action is not 
strictly reciprocal, but where the idea expressed by the verb necessarily sup- 
poses two persons or two parties, as in questions and. answers, e. g. irw&dvea&ai 
and epea&ai, to inquire; diroKpivecr&ai. and dira l uelfieo-&ai, to answer; crv/xfiovXev- 
eo&ai, to consult with one, ask his advice, and avaKoivovaSai, to consult one (avaaoivovv 
being especially used of consulting oracles). 

§ 251. C. The Passive. 
1. From the reflexive signification of the Middle, the Passive 
is derived. Here the subject receives the action from another 
upon itself, — permits the action to be performed upon itself. 
Hence the subject always appears as a passive or suffering 
object. 



$251.] CLASSES OF VERBS. THE PASSIVE. 337 

Maffnyov/xaiy (Tj/xiovfxai (vtt6 twos), I receive blows, punishment, I let myself be 
struck, punished = I am struck, punished (by some one] : ^Aairrofxai, aSiKov/xai, 
I suffer injury, injustice; 5iddo , Ko/xai, I let myself be instructed, I receive instruction, 
I learn, hence vtt6 twos, from some one = doceor ah aliquo; ire&o/xat, I persuade 
myself, or I permit myself to be persuaded, vt6 twos, by some one = / am per- 
suaded. 

2. Yet, there are but two tenses, the Fut. and the Aor., which 
have special forms to express the passive sense of an action ; 
the remaining tenses are expressed by the Mid. 

3. Hence the following rule : The Fut. and Aor. Mid. have 
a reflexive (or intransitive) sense only; but all the other tenses 
of the Mid. serve at the same time for the Passive also. 

Remark 1 . Still, the Fut. Mid. has sometimes a Pass, sense also. The reason 
of this may be found in a great measure in the shorter form of this Fut. compared 
with that of the Fut. Pass. This passive use of the Fut. Mid. is found most 
frequently with Pure verbs ; much more seldom with Mute verbs, and very sel- 
dom with Liquid verbs (probably not at all in Attic prose). Macr iy6<reT at, 
GTpefiXctiGeTai, SeS^creTcu, iKKavfr-fjaeTcu Tacp^raX/xca, tzXzvtSiv irduTa /ca/cA 
ttc&ow ai/ao-KLvSvAevfrfjo-eTaL, PL Pp. 361, e. Tfj t&v xPV^tcov airdvei kwXv- 
<rovT<zi, Th. 1, 142. "Uu tls f3ov\r]Si} Kaxbs yevea&ai, Ko\aoSrrjo-sTai Trj irpsirovcrri 
Cyfiia,' ol Se aya&ol t Lfi'fj a ovTai tols TrposrjKovcrw ol&Aols ttjs apeTrjs (but the 
brave shall be honored ivith the befitting rewards of valor), 2, 87. Tlepl twv <r<£eTe- 
pau (ppovploou, ws tTrifSovXzvo'oixtvccv, TtoWaKis TTpdyjxaTa eTx°^> X. C. 6, 1. 
10. Elp£6fie&a (includemur) , X. An. 6. 6, 16. 'H yrj ev <pvhd£eTai virb tu>v 
(ppovpovuTcov. Ovk ayvoovvTes, oti iveSpevcroiVTO virb t&v TroXzfAwv, H. 7. 2, 
18. Very commonly a S lk r\ cr o fx ai, &p£ofiai (from 'dpx°>i impero), /3Aa^o- 
fiai, & peij/ofiai. So always aAdoaoixai. Some verbs have both forms 
of the future, as, e. g. u<peAelv, (rjfuovi', aTepeiv, (po/3e?v, ayew ; then the Mid. 
form seems to denote a condition, the Pass, an action received. But in very 
many instances, the Pass, sense is only apparent, e. g. 'H ir6\is Ppaxea 7?crdwa 
/meyaAa (r] p ,<aa er ai, shall suffer great loss therefor, in contrast with fipaxea 
■>]<r&., Th. 3 40. 2oD £wvtos, fieATiov SpiityovT ai Kal ir aid ev a ovTai (they 
shall grow up better and educate themselves), PI. Crito. 54, a. 

Rem. 2. The use of the Mid. Aor. instead of the Pass, is, in all instances, 
only apparent ; so Od. £-, 35. Kovpca 5e Svca Kal irzvT-r\KOVTa KpiudcSrcov KaTa 
5rj/j.ov, means, let them select for themselves (on the contrary, 48. Kovpco de Kpiv- 
frevTe bvw k. ireuT., the selected). Hes. Sc. 173. Kairpoi doiol airovpa/xeuoi xf/v- 
xds, they had deprived each other of life. PL Phaedr. 244, e. tw dp&as fxavivTi Kal 
k <xt a o~x ° /* * v <$•> " in fine frenzy " and in ecstasy. 

Rem. 3. It has been shown, § 197, and Rem. 3 (comp. § 250, Rem. 1), that 
the Aor. Pass, of very many verbs is employed by the Greeks to denote a 
reflexive and intransitive action, e. g. fiovAo/xai, I ivill, i/3ovAr)^r]v, I willed; 
tvtppaivui, T. gladden, cheer, ev(ppawojj.ai, I am glad, eu <p pdvTfnv, I was glad. In 
a few verbs, the Pass. Fut. is used in the same way, c. g. ^do/xai, I rejoice, 
H\a$rr)Vi I rejoiced, rja^riao/jiai, I shall rejoice. See § 197, Rem. 1. 

Rem. 4. The author or cause of the passive condition or state is generally 
expressed by the Prep. vir6 with the Gen., e. g. Ot a-rpaTiwTai virb t&v 7roA« 
sfiicay iSid>x^vo-au. Instead of vivo, irp6s with the Gen. is used, when at the 
same time a strong and direct influence of a person, or of a thing viewed as a 
person, is to be expressed, e. g. 'ATi/.idCeoSai, adiKs7o-&ai irp6s tivos. Bavav 

29 



338 SYNTAX. [f 251. 

07/cal T6%j/ai €Ik6toi)s ado^ovvTai Trpbs tg>v iroXeccv, X. O. 4, 2; also 7rap<i 
with the Gen. is used, when the author is at the same time to be represented us 
the person from near whom, or from whose vicinity, or through whose means 
internal or outward, the action has proceeded ; hence used specially with ttc/*- 
TreoSrai, SidooSai, w(pe\e7cr£rcu, avWtyecr&ai, Aeyecr&ai, 6p.o\oys7cr^aL ) crrip.aiveGSai, 
iTTiSeiKwcr^aL (demonstrari) , e.g. 'O ayyeXos in eficp&ri Trap a jSaff l\4ws (sent 
both by and from near the king). 'H fxeyicm) eiVux/a tovtw t<£ avSpl Trap a 
b-eav 5 eSorai. IIoAAa xp^wara Kupca irapa tcov cpiXav o~vve iXey \iiv a 
*\v. Ta 8<£pa ire /XTrerai it apa rod fiatf lAev out o s, Her. 7, 106. Ta irapa 
t £ v Sreoov aripLai v6fxe v a, X. Cy. 1. 6, 2. Tiapa. ir dvr <av 6 wo \oye7r ai, 
An. 1. 9, 1. Ofjucu yap p.e irapa aov aocplas ttXt] p 00&7) a e cr& ai, PL Symp 
175, e. 3 Ek is still stronger than Trapa^used especially with verbs of giving ; yet 
it is seldom used by the Attic writers, e. g. 'EkcIvco avr-n r\ x^P a * K J3a<ri\4a>s 
eSo&Tj, X. H. 3. 1, 6: in Her., however, 4k is very often used instead of biro 
simply. The use of ko with the Dat. is almost wholly poetic, e. g. Ba/xrivai 
vtt6 t i v i ; in Attic prose only in certain connections, e. g. vlbs inrb t $ tx ar p\ 
Te&paijL/J.4vos, PL Pp. 558, d. Tvyxdvei vtrb Tratd ot pi fir; aya&<£ TreTraidev- 
p.4vos, Lach. 184, e. When the passive condition is not caused by persons, but 
by things, the Dat. is commonly used (— Lat. Ablative), e. g. 'H ttSAis iroAAaTs 
a v ix <p opals e7rie£eTo, the city ivas distressed by great misfortunes. — The above 
usa«-e corresponds with that of the Latin, the voluntary agent with a passive 
verb being put in the Abl. with the preposition a or ah, the involuntary agent 
in the Abl. without a preposition. 

Kem. 5. The Dat. of persons, however, is very often used, particularly with 
the Perf. tense, and regularly with verbal adjectives. The Pass, has in such 
instances an intransitive or reflexive sense, and the Dat. indicates the person by 
whom the action was performed, or for whom it was performed. While vtto 
with the Gen. denotes merely the author of the passive action, the Dat., at the 
same time, denotes that this action stands in relation to the author, e. g. "D.s 
uoi irp6repov SeSrjXccraL, i. e. as the thing has been before pointed out by me, and for 
vie now stands as pointed out, Her. 6, 123. 

4, It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that the Act, not merely 
of tiansitive verbs with the Ace, may be changed into the per- 
sonal Pass., like the Latin, but also the Act. of intransitive 
verbs with the Gen. and Dat. 

$8rov ov p.aL vtt6 twos (from <pSove7v nvi, invidere aliciu), i. e. I experience 
envy from some one, am envied (in Latin, on the contrary, invidetur mild ab 
aliquo). X. Conv. 4, 29. Kpe7rrov icrTi ir io-t ev eo-&ai inrb ttjs irarpiBos fiaWov, *r\ 
air io-t elo-Sai (from Tncrreveiv and aiu<rTt7v tivl), I am trusted, lam distrusted. 
Th. 1, 82. 7){J.e?s vtt 'A&rjvalav iir i j8 ouAe v 6 p.e&a (£iri$ov\eveiv tivl). PL Rp. 

3. 41 7, b. Ka\ iiriflovAevovTes, xal e it i /3 ov A e u 6 /j.s v o l did^ovcri irdura rbi/ fiiov. 
8. 551. a. ao-tce'irai 8;? rb del Ti/xd/xevov, a/xe\^7rai Se rb aTip.a(6/j.zvov. X. S. 

4, 31. ou/ceVi air eiKov/JLai, dAA' r,8r) aireiXco aAAots. So apx&VV*; apart)- 
& rival, 7]ye fAOuevSrrjvai, tear a<p pov-r)&r)vai vir6 tivos (from ap%eiv y icpa- 
TelV, iiyeaoyeveiu, Karacppoue7u tivos), e7r £% e ipv&y vai (from i-Kix^petv tivl). 
On ic67TT0fjiaL t)jv KecpaArjv, eVn-peVo^cu tt\v (pv\aKr)v, see § 281, 3. 

Rem. 6. The Greek may form a Pass, from other intransitives also, yet, for 
the most part, only when the subject is a thing, particularly a Xeut. pronoun, 
or a Part, used as a Neut. substantive, e. g. Ka\ puKpa ajxapT-qSrivT a (vet parva 
peccata), X. An. 5. 8, 20. 'Arwx^f vr cav (rerum infeliciter gestarum), Dem. 
Cor. 298. 212. 'EttI tovtols eyeb a\7]Sr e v o fxe v o ls St&cW <roi t?V iurjv 8e^a» 



$$ 252, 253.] tenses and modes. 339 

(ea conditioner ut haec vere dicantur), X. Cy. 4. 6, 10. 'Ej/ kv\ avdpi iroW&v dpe- 
tos Kivdweveo-frai (in periculum vocari), Th. 2, 35. Ov padiov ra. virb iroXKuu 
KivSwevfrevra v(f kvbs prj^yvai, Lys. 5, 112. 



. § 252. Remarks on the Deponents. 

It has been seen above (§ 102, 3) that Deponents are simply verbs which 
occur either in the Mid. only, or in the Mid. with a Pass. Aor., and have a 
reflexive or intransitive signification : and, also, that they are divided into Mid. 
or Pass. Deponents, according as their Aor. has a Mid. or Pass. form. The 
reflexive sense of many Deponents is so slight, that they seem to be, in our 
mode of regarding them, merely transitive verbs, e. g. Se^o^ai n, I take (namely, 
to myself) something, ipyd£ojj.al n, fiidCo/xai riva, etc. Such Deponents are often 
used in a Pass, sense, particularly in the Perf. and in the Pass. Aor Examples 
of the Pres., Impf, and Put. in a Pass, sense are very rare, and are found only 
in such Deponents as have in single examples an active form, e. g. £ia£«r&cu, 

Tldvra air el pya<rrai t<£ &ea>, PI. L. 710, d. Mefxiixr]fj.evos (ad imitatio' 
nem expressus, madelike), Her. 2, 78. Ev ivTefrvfM-nfjLevov (well-considered), PI. 
Crat. 404, a. N^es ovk ixpy c&'>1<t 'o-v (adhibitae sunt), Her. 7, 144. 

Remark. Several Deponents have both a Mid. and Pass. Aor. ; the Pass. 
form has then a Pass, sense, e. g. id e^dfi-nj/, excepi, i8e x&vv> exceptus sum ; 
ifiiacrdfji'nv, coe'gi, ifSid<r&r)v, coactus sum; itcr^a djx-nv, mihi comparavi, 
€KT7)&r) v, comparatus sum (I was gained); 6\o<pvpa<r&ai, to lament, 6\o- 
<pvp&?ivai, to be lamented; aKecraa&ai, to heal, aKea-^rjvai, to be healed; 
air oKpiuaaSrai, to reply, air ok p iSri vai, to be separated. In a few verbs only 
are both Aorists used without distinction of meaning (§ 197, Rem. 1). 



§ 253. Tenses and Modes of the Verb. 

(a) Tenses denote the relation of time expressed "by the 
predicate, this being designated either as Present, Future, or 
Past, e. g. the rose blooms, ivill bloom, bloomed; 

(b) Modes denote the relation of what is affirmed in the predi- 
cate to the subject; this relation being denoted either as an 
actual fact, as a conception or representation, or as a direct 
expression of the will. The mode which expresses a fact, as 
the rose blooms, is called the Indicative ; that which denotes a 
conception, as the rose may bloom, the Subjunctive ; that which 
denotes the direct expression of the will, the Imperative, as 
give. 



310 syntax. [$$254,255 



$ 254. A. More Particular Vieiu of the Tenses. 

1. The tenses are divided, according to their form and mean* 
ing, into two classes : (a) into Principal tenses, which, both in 
the Ind. and Subj., always denote something present or future; 
(b) into Historical tenses, which in llie Ind. always denote 
something past, in the Optative, something present or future. 

2. The Principal tenses are : — 

(a) The Present: (a) Indicative, e.g. ypdcpo/xw, scribimus ; (/3) Subjunctive, 
e. g. ypdcpcofMev, scribamus ; 

(b) The Perfect: (a) Indicative, e.g. yeypdcpafxev, scripsimus ; (£) Subjunc- 
tive, e. g. yeypdcpw^eu, scripserimus ; 

(c, The Puture Indicative, e. g. ypd-tyojxev, scribemus, we shall write; Subjunc- 
tive wanting ; 

(d) The Puture Perfect Indicative, e. g. jScjSouAeuo-o^at, I shall have advised 
myself, or I shall have been advised ; Subjunctive wanting. 

The Subj. Aor. also belongs here, e. g. ypdtyw, scripserim or scribam. See 
| 257, 1 (a). 

3. The Historical tenses are : — 

(a) The Aorist : (a) Indicative, e.g. fypatya, I wrote; (/3) Optative, e.g. 
ypd^ai/JLi, I might write, or I might have written ; 

(b) The Imperfect: (a) Indicative, e.g. eypcupov, scribebam ; (£) Optative, 
e. g. ypdcpoifxi, scriberem ; 

(c) The Pluperfect : (a) Indicative, e.g. iyeypd<petv, scripseram; (£) Optative, 
e. g. yeypdcpoifu, scripsissem ; 

(d) The Optative of the simple Future, e. g. ypdtyoi/xi, I would write, and of 
the Put. Perf, e. g. fie^ovXeva-oifirju, I would have deliberated, ox I would have 
been advised, when in narration (and consequently in reference to the 
past), the representation of a future action, or of one to be completed at 
a future time, is to be expressed, e. g. 6 fryyehos ekeyev, on ol voKeftuit 
viK^ffoiev, the messenger said, that the enemy would conquer ; eAeyeu, on 
irdvra vivo rov arpaT-qyov ev fie fiovkev o-o it o, he said that everything 
would be well planned by the general. 



$255. (a) Principal Tenses: Present, Perfect, Future. 

1. The Present Indicative represents the action as taking 
place in time present to the speaker. The Present i». often 
used, in the narration of past events, for the purpose of a more 
vivid and graphic representation ; past time is then viewed as 
present. This is called the Historical Present. 



? 255] PRINCIPAL TENSES. 34] 

Tavr-nv r)]v rd<ppov PacriXebs /xeyas ir o i e? avrl ipv/xaros, eVeiS^ irvvb aver a. 
Kvpou irpone\awovra, X. An. 1. 7, 16. ^Hv rts HpiapiSwu j/edoraros UoXvSapos, 
'Endfiris ttous, bv ere Tpolas ipol iraryp SiSwo' i Upia/xos ev So'uois rpecpeip; Eur. 
Hec. 1116. The Hist. Pres. is sometimes used even in passages which in them- 
selves, aside from adverbs like irore, iraAcu (poet. irdpos), are considered as 
involving past time, e. g. Zu>vr elsaKoixras TrcuSa, %v eKard)£ei it or e, Eur. EL 
419. 

Remark 1. An action is often viewed by the language as present, which 
belongs, indeed, to the past, but at the same time extends to the present, or in 
its results reaches to the present. In this manner, the following verbs particu- 
larly are used: (a) verbs of perceiving, e. g. & re o v o>, irw&dvo pai, alff&d- 
vofj.ai, yiyycixTKcc, fj.avSrd.vw (like Lat. audio, video, etc., and Eng. to hear, 
to see, to perceive, to observe), when the object of these verbs is to be represented 
as still continuing in the present ; (b) <p e vya, I have given myself to flight, and 
I am now a fugitive, hence to live in exile; vikGi and re parti (I am a victor, 
hence have conquered), rirrti/xai (lam vanquished, have been vanquished), aStrew 
(lam in the wrong, have done ivrong), yiyvojxai (I am descended), etc.; (c) in 
poetry: <poveva> (I am a murderer, have murdered, e. g. S. Ant. 1174), frvfjcrKw 
(lam dead, have died, S. El. 113), t'iktw, yevvu (lam a father or mother, Eur. 
Ion. 356. Her. 209), etc. This usage extends to all the Modes and Participials 
of the Pres. as well as to the Impf. ®e/j.LcrroK\ea ovk anoveis 'dvdpa aya&bv 
yeyov6ra; PI. Gorg. 503, c. Udura irvv&avo /xevos 6 KpoTcros eirepne es ^.irdp- 
rr)i> ayyeXovs, Her. 1, 69. Ti Se; orb ineTvo cucf)Koas, '6ri Mvaol real UicriSai ev rfj 
fia<ri\eais X^P a Karexovres epvfxva irdvv x<a/»'a Sbvavrai Cw iXeifrepolj — Kal rovro 
y', ecprj, olkovui, hast thou heard ? aicovoo, yes, I have known of it, X. C. 3. 5, 26. 
'ATrayyeAeTe 'Apjatw, on yjxeTs ye viK&ixev /3a<nAea, nai, ws Spare, obSels 7]/mp 
en fidxerai, An. 2. 1, 4. Tav v iKccvrcov earl ical ra. eavrwv o-<a£eiv Kal to ruv 
qrrw (xevtov \afxfidveiv, 3. 2, 39. Aapiov Kal Uapvo-drib'os iraldes yiyvovrai 
Uo, 1. 1, 1. 

Rem. 2. O'txofiai and ',)kw, with Pres. forms, are often translated in Eng. 
by Perfects, namely, o^x°l J - ai i I have departed, and vjrew, I have come; yet 
ojfxojitai, properly means, / am gone, and ^ku>, I am here (adsum), e. g. Mt) 
Avttov, on 'Apdcriras o%x* Tal eis T0V ^ iroXe/xiovs, that Araspas is gone, has 
departed (= transfugit) to the enemy, X. Cy. 6. 1, 45. "Ukw veKpwv Kev&ixwva 
Kal o-k6tov irvXas Xnrtiov, Eur. Hec. 1 . 'T/ae?s [x6Xis acpiKveicbe, ottoi 7]fj.e?s iraAai 
%KO(iev, X. Cy. 1.3, 4. 

Rem. 3. But the language often considers an action as present, which is not 
yet accomplished, but is either actually begun, or is begun in our mind, or pur- 
pose ; such an action is virtually future, though considered as present. Com- 
pare the English : I go to-morrow, i. e. I shall go, I intend to go, and the like. This 
usage also belongs to all the Modes and Participials of the Pres. and the Impf. 
It specially holds of the Pres. of e J/x i, which, in the Ind. has regularly the mean- 
ing of the Eut., / shall go; the Subj. includes a Eut. meaning in itself (§ 257, 
Rem. 4) ; but the Inf. and Part, have both a Pres. and Eut. meaning. "Eire it a 
rd re vvv ovra ev rq> Trapadeiorcp &ripla 5i5wjj.i o~oi, Kal &Wa iravrodaira cuA- 
Ae£a>, X. Cy. 1. 3, 14 (BiSwfii, I offer). "EKacrrSs rts eirei&ev aevocpaivra 
virocrrrivai r^v apxw (persuadere studebat), X. An. 6. 1, 19. MirvAr]va?oi inl 
M^v/xvav as Trpod i Sop evt) v io-rpdrevcrav (putantes parari ibi proditionem), 
Th. 3, 18. In like manner often the Pres. Part, after verbs of motion, e. g. 'H 
irdpakos is ras 'ASrhvas eirXevcrej/, air ay y e Wow a ra yeyov6ra (for the purpose 
of announcing), X. H. 2. 1, 29. Kal rep piyei divw \ A vfxe&a, Kal X l ^ v ■"■Aeurrrj 
i\v (we expected to perish), An. 5. 8, 2. — Ovk eb&bs acp^o-co abrbv, ouS' dnsi/xt, 
oaA' ip-fio- o jnai abrbv Kal i £ e r d ff w, PI. Apol. 29, e. y Eirel 7] MavSdur} trapea- 
KevdCero ws amovcra iraKiv irpbs rbv dvSpa, iSe7ro abrrjs 6 'Affrvdyrjs KaraKvirei* 
rbv Kdpov, X. Cy. 1. 3, 13. 

29* 



342 syntax. [$ 255. 

Rem. 4. But also actions or events wholly future are sometimes indicated 
as present, by the use of the Pres. tense, when in the view of the speaker 
the action or event yet future is vividly apprehended, or when he is so firmly 
convinced of its occurrence, that it appears already present, e. g. 'Ev jxiS. paxv 
TTji/Se ti-ju x&pav tt p o s KTaa & e Ktxl exelv-nv /xaWov eAev&e povT e (you gain, 
v: ill gain, and free), Th. 4, 95. *Hi> Sravijs av, ircus oS' e Kcpevye i popov • gov S" 
ov £)6\ovo->is Ka.TSo.ve7v, roV5e ktspu), Eur. Andr. 381. 

2. The Perfect (Indicative) represents a past action in time 
present to the speaker ; the action appears as already accom- 
plished at the present time. Hence the Perf. represents not 
only a past action, but its present effects or results. 

Teypacpa ttjv eiriGTo\'t]v, I have weitten the letter, the letter is now WRIT? 
ten, whether written now, or some time ago ; the writing is the past act, the 
letter is the result still present. 'H ttoAls eKTio-rai, the city vr as built (in past 
time), is now built, and there it now stands built. 'AGTvdyns rcov ev Mt]5ols irdvTam 
deGiroTTjv kavTOV ireiroi-nKev, X. Cy. 1 . 3, 18. OvSev iavi nepdaAewrepov roi 
viKav ' 6 yap KparSiv a/xo iravra Gvvr\ piraK e, /:at robs avdpas, kclI ras yvvcuKas, 
4. 2, 26. 

Rem. 5. Since the Perf. brings past time into close connection with the 
present, the Greeks in many Perfects contemplated less the peculiar act of 
completion, than its result as exhibited at the present moment; and hence they 
used the Perf, in order to indicate a present condition or state that was occa- 
sioned by the completion of the action. As such a use of the Perfect does not 
belong to the English, Ave translate many Greek Perfects by our Present, where 
the present condition is more prominent than the past act ; the Plupf. of such 
verbs is then translated by our Impf, e. g. T&v-nKa (I have died), I am dead 
(Eur. Ale. 557. t e&vaG iv oi Sravovres, those ivho died, are dead); Kenr-n/xai (I 
have acquired), I possess ; Te^avjxaKa (I have been wondering), I am astonished ; 
&efiov\ev/j.ai (I have taken counsel with myself ), .1 am determined; Trecprjva (I 
have shown myself), I appear ; oloa, novi (I have seen), I know : TednjXa (I have 
blossomed), I bloom; ireiroi&a (I have convinced myself), I trust ; [iefi-nKa (I 
have taken steps), I am going ; /jLe/nvn/xai, memini (I have called to mind), / am 
mindful, or remember; Kh\r]ixai (I have been named), / am called, etc. The 
Pres. and Impf. of many verbs, especially such as express the idea of to sound, 
to call, are not used at all, or but very seldom, so that the Perf. and Plup. seem 
to take entirely the place of the Pres. and Impf., e. g. KeKpaya, I cry, properly, 
I am a crier ; /xefxvKa, I roar. 

Rem. 6. The transition from the completed action to the condition or state 
produced by it, is more obvious in the Pass, than in the active. Comp. ^ &vpa 
KeicXeiGTai, the door has been shut, and it is now shut. So particularly the 
third Pers. Sing. Perf. Imp. Pass, is often used, when one would command with 
emphasis, that the thing spoken of should remain fixed and permanent in its 
condition, i. e. not only that the action should be performed, but particularly 
that the result should continue, e. g. to ayicvpiov avea^daSw, let the anchor be 
drawn up and remain so ; XeheicpSw, reliquum esto, let it remain permanently ; ireirei- 
pdo&co, let it be tried ; vvv Se tovto TeroXixr\Gb(a elire?v. So the Inf. in the Oratio 
obliqua. X. H. 5. 4, 7. e^iovTes be elirov, ti]v Svpav KenXeiGbai, that it he shut, and 
remain shut. 

Rem. 7. The Perf. is used with special emphasis, even of future actions, the 
occurrence of these being affirmed with the same definiteness and confidence, 
as if they had already taken place. II. o, 128. biecp&opas! you are lost, will be 



$ 255.] PRINCIPAL TENSES. 343 

lost. So okwAa, like perii, interii, actum est de me. it's all over with me, will b§ 
etc. PI. Phaed. 80, d. rj ^vxh airaWarTOfievri rov o-co/xaros, ev&bs 8 lair e<pv ffrf 
rai Kal aizoKwXev. 

3. The Future (Indicative) denotes an action as future in re* 
Lation to the present time of the speaker. The Greeks very 
often use the Fut. Ind. in subordinate clauses, even after an 
Hist, tense, to express that which shall, should, must, or can be, 
where the Latin employs the Subj. ; the other forms of the 
Fut., particularly the Part., are also so used. 

Nofxovs inrdp^ai Set tolovtovs, Zl £>v to?s piev ayaSrdis evrip.os Kal eAev&epos 6 filos 
Trapa(rKeva<r&->](reTai (should be obtained), t oils Se nanols rcnreivSs re Kal aA- 
yeivbs Kal aPiooros 6 alwv eiravaKeto-erai (should be imposed upon them), X. Cy. 
3. 3, 52. Ol els rr\v fiao-iXiKrjV rexvrjv iraiBev6/xevoi ri Siacpepovai tuiv e| avdyKrjs 
KaKOTra&ovvTow, et ye ir e ivr) ar ov <r i Kal dnpr) a ova i Kal p lyw cover i Kal a 7 - 
pvKvi)o~ovai (if they must hunger, etc.), C. 2. 1, 17. v E8o£e rep 8r)p.G> rpiaKovra 
&vBpas e\e<r&ai, ot tovs irarpiovs vojxovs %vyy paty ov o~ 1, ko& ovs it o\it ev a ov<t 1 
(who should draw up laws, according to which they should live), H. 3. 2, 3. 

4. The second person of the Fut. Ind. is often used to express 
commands, exhortations, admonitions, entreaties, and, in con- 
nection with the negative ov, prohibitions ; here the accomplish- 
ment of what is affirmed is not demanded, as is the case in the 
Imp., but is left to the choice of the person addressed, and is 
only expected. This differs chiefly from the Imp. only in being 
a milder form of expression. On the contrary, the Fut. is used 
with the negative ov, interrogatively, when, in a strong and 
indignant tone, the accomplishment of the action is expected 
necessarily. 

"Op a ovv Kal irpo&vp.ov KanSeTv, eav teas irporepos ep.ov f5??s, Kai /jloi cp pa- 
ce 1 s (you will communicate it to me = communicate), PI. Kp. 432, c. *Q.s ovv 
ir 1710- ere Kal -rrei&eo-Sre /xot (you will do thus, etc. = do thus), Prot. 338, a. 
Ov opdaeis rovro, thou wilt not do this, as I hope = do it not ; but ow 8 p d c e t s 
tovto ; wilt thou not do this? = do it. Ov Travar] Xeyccv ,• non desines dicere? 
instead of desine dicere. PI. Symp. in. ov Trepip.eve?s ; wilt thou not wait ? Dem. 
Phil. 2, 72. ov (pvAd£eo-&\ e<pr]v, ottws p.r) SecnrSrriv evp-qre ; But "when in this 
manner, a negative command is to be expressed, the negative /xr) is to be used 
with ov ; and when two sentences of this kind, one with an affirmative meaning 
and the other with a negative, follow each other, ov stands in the first sentence, 
ur) in the last. Ov p.r) (p\vapr)(reis ; Ov |U7j \aXr)aeis, aAA 3 aKo\ov&r)o~e is 
ifioi, Ar. Nub. 505 (instead of fxr] (pXvdpei, fxr] \d\ei, aAA' a.KoAov&ei\ PL Symp 
J75, a. ovk ovv KaXets avrbv Kal lit) a<pr)aeis. 



344 SYNTAX. [$ 2^6 

•5. The Future Perfect (Indicative) represents a future action 
els past (completed) in relation to another future action; hence 
a future prior to another future. Such an action is future with 
reference to the present, past with reference to another future. 

Kal Tolai /xefjri^sTai eVdAa KaxQlaiv [the good shall have been mixed icith evil), 
Hes. Op. 177. 'H 7ro\iT€ia reAe'cos k e ko cr fx'f]a et ai, iav 6 toiovtos avrrju iiruT- 
Koirfj cpv\a£ 6 tovtwv k-KiGTT\p.o>v, PI. Rp. 506, a. As the Greek Perf. frequently 
denotes the ■present condition or result of a completed action, so the Put. Perf. 
frequently denotes the future condition or result of a completed action. Hence 
the Put. Perf. of those verbs whose perfects are translated by the present tense 
of other verbs (see Rem. 5), must be translated by the simple Put., e. g. ix^jxvt]- 
crofiai, meminero (I shall have reminded myself), I shall be mindful, shall remember 
(but i^v7]ao/j.cu, I shall remind myself) ; KCKTrjcro/j.ai (I shall have acquired), I shall 
possess (but KT-fjaouai, I shall acquire), etc. 

Rem. 8. Tbe Put. Perf, like the Perf. (Rem. 7), is used instead of the sim- 
ple Put., to express a thing emphatically. Here as in the Perf. used for the 
Put., the speaker looks upon the action as already accomplished ; hence the 
Put. Perf. often denotes the rapidity and certainty of the action, the process 
or progress being left wholly out of view, e. g. &pdQe, kcl\ it eir pd^er ai [and it 
shall be [certainly, immediately] done), Ar. Plut. 1127: (pi\os 7]fx7v ovdels 
\e\ei\p€Tai (no friend will [certainly] be left us), X. An. 2. 4, 5. So also in 
the Inf. Avo7v -/j rpiwv 7]fj.epS>u ravra ireirpdi-€(r&aij P>em. 1 9, 74. In the Act. 
the periphrasis fiefiovXevicoos zcroixai is found. 

Rem. 9. The Fut. Perf. is used in Greek only in principal clauses, and in 
subordinate clauses introduced by otl and ws (that), by e I used instead, of on, 
and by &st€ (so that), all with the Ind. In all other subordinate clauses, the 
Aor. Subj. (more seldom the Perf.) is used instead of it, in connection with a 
conjunction compounded of dv, as idv, indv, iweiSdv, orav, irp\v dv, esr dv, is 
dp, etc., e. g. 'Edu rovro Ae£r? s (si hoc dixeris), d/j-apTTjcrrj. 



$256. (b) Historical Tenses: Aorist, Imperfect, and 
Plup e rfe c t . 

1. The Aorist (Ind.) expresses past time, in a wholly indefi- 
nite manner, with no other relation, e. g. typo^a, Iicrote, Kvpos 
■n-oXXa ZSvr) evUrjaev. It thus stands in contrast with the other 
tenses which express past time ; still, so far as it indicates past 
time indefinitely, it may be used instead of either of these 
tenses. 

2. Both the Impf. and Plup. (Ind.) represent an action as 
past, but always as having relation to another past action. But 
the Impf. expresses the action as contemporary with this other 
past action ; the Plup. expresses the action as already past 
before this other past action. 



$ 256.] HISTORICAL TENSES. 345 

'Ev 3 o~v eirai£es, iycd eypa<pov, while you were playing, I was writing. *Ore 
iyyvs "hoav ol fidpfiapoi, ol"E\\7)V€s i/xdxouro. "Ore ol fidpfiapoi iire\7]\v- 
&e<rav, ol "EWrjves ijxdxovTO. Tore (or ivravry ttj na% v) 0L "EAA^res 
&ap , pa\G<t>Ta.Ta i fiaxovr o. 'EttciSt; oi "Ehk-nves iTreArjXv^eo'au, ol Tro\4p.ioi 
aw ex ecpevyeo-av. "Ore ol av/xuaxoi e 7r A. 77 <r i a £o j>, ol 'A&yvcuoi tovs Tlepffas 
iveviK-ftKscrav. 'l'.yeypd<p€iv t^v Hio~tq\t\v, I had written the letter {before 
the friend came). 

Remark 1. It is to be noted that the Greeks freely use the Aor. instead of 
the Plup., when the l elation of the past time to another past time can be easily 
inferred from the context, and no special emphasis lies in this relation, e. g. 
^Eiretd')] ol "EAAirjves iirrj\&ov (quum Graeci venissent), ol tvo\4jxiol aireTrstyevye- 
crav. The Aor. is often employed even instead of the Perf., when the relation 
of the past time to the present need not be expressed emphatically. 

3. Hence the Aorist (Ind.) is used in historical narrations, in 
order to indicate the principal events, while the Impf. (Ind.) is 
used to denote the accompanying circumstances. The Aor. 
narrates, the Impf. describes. Hence in the narration of past 
events, the Aor., which introduces the principal facts, is very 
often interchanged with the Impf, which describes and paints ; 
often, also, with the Hist. Pres., which, like the Aor., relates the 
principal events, and places them vividly in the present ; not 
seldom, also, with the Plup., sometimes with the Perf. By this 
interchange of the tenses, the narration has the greatest liveli- 
ness of representation, and the finest shades of expression. 

^H/xos y 'Ea)S(p6pos elcri <p6ws ipeuv inl ya7av, ttj/xos irvpKa'C)] ifiapatuero, 
iravaaro 5e <p\6£ {the fire upon the funeral pile began to abate, and the flame 
ceased), II. ty, 228. Tovs irtXrao-ras ZSe^avr o ol {Sdpfiapoi Kal e i u"X 0J/T0 * 
eVei 5' iyyvs fiffav ol OTrXirai, er pdirovro- Kal ol TreXracrTal cv&bs e'lirovro 
{the barbarians withstood the peltasts and continued to fight with them; but when the 
hoplites drew near, they fled, and immediately the peltasts set out in pursuit), X. An. 
5. 4, 24. Ewe #77 tcS a8oKT)Ta> Kal i£aTrtv7)s a/j.(poT£pu>&ev tovs 'Afrnvalovs &opvfir}- 
Svjvcu' Kal to jxkv evwvvfiov tcepas avTa>v, oirep $)/ /cat 7rpo/cexwp7j/cet, ev&bs 
airopoayeu e<pvye' /cat 6 BpaaiSas, virox^povvTOS 77877 avTov, iirnrapiinu tu> 8e|ia>, 
TiTpcoffKerai' Kal 7re<r<Wa axnbv ol fj.1v ' ' Afrqvaioi ovk a I a S dv o v t a i, ol 8e 
7r\r]criov dpavTes air^veyKav Kal 6 fxkv KAeW, ws to irp&Tov ov 8 icvogito 
.usueiu, ev&vs (pevywv, Kal Kara\.7)(p&els vnb MvpKivtov ive\Tao~TOv, airo&vrio'Ke i • oi 
5e avTov £vffTpa(p4vTes cwX?Tai t\\jlvvovt o k. t. A., Th. 5, 10. 'O ney Tr6Xefj.os 
arrdurasv rjuas twv ^\pt\p.iv(xv aire o~ Tepr) kg • Kal yap toi ireueaTepovs ireirolrjKe, 
Kal iroWovs Kivdvvovs iirofxeveiv T)vdyKao~e, Kal irpbs tovs "EW-qvas 8ia/3e/3A7j- 
K-e Kal irdvTa Tpoizov rer aAanr co p-n Kev rjfias, Isocr. Pac. 163, a. (The 
Perfects denote the result, the Aorist .the event.) 

liem. 2. Inasmuch as the Aor. Ind. represents a past action independently 
and absolutely, uncon leeted with any other past time, while the Impf. Ind. 
represents a past action as always connected with another past action, being, 



34G syntax. [$ 256. 

consequently, employed in exhibiting an action in its duration and progress, ami 
hence used in description ; accordingly the Aor. expresses a moment or point of 
time, while the Impf, denotes duration or continuance. The Aor. therefore 
describes a momentary action or a single action ; the action, however, described 
by the Aor. may be a continued or protracted one, but the writer in usiug the 
Aor. presents no such view of it, communicating merely the fact of the occur- 
rence. The Impf., on the other hand, describes an action in its continuance 
and progress, — not merely a single act, but a series of acts. It often depends on 
the choice of the writer whether the Impf. or Aor. is used. An action graphi- 
cally presented in its duration and progress by the Impf., can be stated histor- 
ically as a mere past act, by the Aor. And so, many actions stated in the Aor. 
might be more vividly described by the Impf, if the writer wished it. 

4. On the use of the Impf. and Aor. lnd., the following things 
are to be noted : — 

(a) The Impf. appeal's sometimes to stand instead of the Pres , since an 
action which continues into the present time, is referred to a past time in which 
it occurred, or was known to the speaker. Kvpos e^Aawei — iirl rbu Xd\op 
iroTa.fj.6v, oura rb evpos ir\4&pov, irAripr) 8' Ix&vwv fieyaXwv Kal irpaewv, ovs ol ~2,vpoi 
freovs ivo/j.t(ov /cal aSucew ovk eXwv {which the Syrians consider as gods, 
namely, as I then saw), X. An. 1.4, 9. "AcpiKovro irpbs rb Myopias Kakovfxevov 
re?xos • — a7r e?x e 8e BafivXuvos ov ivo\v, 2. 4, 12. Trj Se irpdoTr) i]fJ.4pa a<p'iK0VTO 
iirl tov TTOTafxou, os &pi £e t V T6 raiv MaKp&vuv [x&>pai/| koX ttju twv ^.kvSivwv, 
4.8,1. 'Arap, ct> troupe, ap" ov t65s ^ v rb Sevdpov, i<p' OTrep tfyes rifxas ; PI. Phaedr. 
230, a. Ovk ftp' aya&bs to iroMTiKa YlepiK\?is i\v e/c tovtov tov Koyov (namely, 
when he so appeared to us, consequently = ovk up'' aya&Ss io~Tiy, ws icpalvero, 
he is not therefore distinguished, as he then seemed to be), Gorg. 516, d. — From the 
idea of duration or continuance contained in the Impf. several other relations orig- 
inate : (a) The beginning of an action, e. g. iirel iyyvs iyevovTo, i£<nrivns oi fxeu 
avrwu iro^evov, some of them began to shoot their arrows ; — (/3) habit or custom, 
e. g. avrbu o'lirep Trp6s&ev irpo s e kvv ov u, Kal Tore irposeKvurjaau, those who were 
before accustomed to do obeisance to him, did it then also ; — (7) wish, endeavor or 
attempt, e. g. irpaJT os K\eapxos tov s ai>Tov aTpaTiwTas i /3 ia(er leval, Clearchus 
endeavored to compel his soldiers to advance. 

(b) The Aor. is often used in general propositions which express a fact bor- 
rowed from experience, and hence what is customary ; here a single fact which 
has been observed to be time in many instances, but not established as universal, 
is stated to be generally true, — the truth frequently observed in regard to a 
single event, is considered as holding in the case of other similar events. In 
such cases the Aor. is usually translated into English by the present, or by the 
verb is wont, is accustomed, with the Inf. II. p, 177. alei re Aibs Kpeiao-cou v6os 
aly 16x010, 6'sTe Kal IxKkijxov avSpa cpofiz?, Kal a <p e I \ e t viK-nu pr)'idicos ( who 
inspires the brave man with fear, and bears off the victory). X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. al /xev 
yap ir\tio~Tai Tr6\eis TrposTarTovai to7s iroKirais fj.r) KXtirTeiv, fXT) apirdfeiv, Kal TaWa 
ra roiavTa oosavTws' %v Se tis tovtwv tj irapafiaivn, (rjfimj avTois in 4&tcrai> 
(were accustomed to impose a penalty upon them). Dem. 01. 1(2). 20, 9. '6tov in 
w\eove£las Kal irovripias tis, Sosirep ovros ($i\nriros), lo~xvo~ri, y Trpwrr) npdcpaats 
la\ piKpbv 7TTa?<r/u.a diravTa a v e x a i t l a e Kal 8 1 4 A. v <r e v. 



{ 256.] HISTORICAL TENSES. 347 

Eem. 3. When the idea of being wont to do, as found in the Aor., is to be 
made prominent, or when a native habit is to be expressed, the Greek uses the 
verbs cpiXelv and e&eXeiv. Her. 7. 10, 5. cpiXee i yap 6 &ebs rd virepexovra irdvra 
KoXoveiv. 157. tgj ev fiovXev&evri irpi)yfxari reXevrrj cos to eitiirav XPV°" T V e&eXet 
eiriyiveff&ai. 

(c) Hence in poetry, the Aor. is often used in comparisons, instead of the 
Pres., since comparisons contain facts that are known and founded on often 
repeated experience. II. y, 33 — 36. cos 8' ore ris re opaKovra locov iraXivopffos 
an ear 7] oVpeos ev firjffff-ns, iiro re rpofjos e XX a fie yv?a, aty r dv ex& pt)tT ev, 
£>xpds T * l jLlv efAe irapeids ■ &s air is Ka& ftfiiXov eov Tpcdcov dyepcox&v (sc. Ylapis). 
II. it, 482. tfpiire 8', cos ore ris opvs tfpiirev. 

(d) The Tragedians often use the Aor. in dialogue as an impassioned or 
emphatic expression of a decision or determination, which has respect, indeed, 
to the present time, but which the speaker wishes to represent as having been 
previously established and settled in his own mind. The English often trans- 
lates such Aorists, in a very imperfect manner, by the Pres. Here belong 
especially verbs expressing strong feeling or passion, e. g. direirrvffa (I do 
abhor), eyeXacra (I cannot help laughing), eir-p veffa, tpfj.co£a, eSrav/jaffa, 
a ir co ,u o <r a, rjff&rjv. S. Phil. 1434. a 8' dv XajSys ffb ffKvXa rovSe rov crrparov, 
r6£cov ejj.au fivnfieia, irpbs irvpdv ejj.)]v K6(ju£e • na\ ffol ravr, 'A^iAAecDS reKvov, it a- 
prf ve era, this I counsel thee, this 1 have counselled thee. Eur. Med. 223. XPV °* 
l-evov fxev Kapra irposxwptw ( se accommodare) irSXei ouS' dffrbv if veer', osns 
av&d8r)s yeycos iriKpbs iroXtrais ear\u a/maSrias vtvo (nee laudo, nee unquam laudavi). 
Hec. 1276. Polym. : Kal ffrjv y avdyK-n ircuSa Kaffdvdpav &ave7v. Hecuba: aireir- 
Tver a, this thought I do abhor — a thought which I have abhorred. 

(e) With like effect the Aor. is often used by Attic winters, apparently instead 
of the Pres. in urgent appeals or commands, expressed in the form of a question 
introduced by r i ovv ov or ri ov. The speaker wishes, as it were, to see the 
desired action already accomplished. X. Cy. 2. 1, 4. ri ovv, ecpy 6 Kdpos, ov koI 
T7]v 8vvafj.iv eXe£ds jxoi [quin igitur mihi recenses ? why hast thou not yet told me of 
the forces? ins.*^ad of tell me forthwith !) 5. 4, 37. ri ovv, ecpr), 3> Taodra, 
oi>xl fa f.Lev reixv (pvXaicfj ix v pd eiroir) cr as (why therefore have you not made 
the walls strong by a guard ? = at once make them, etc.) ; PL Phaedon. 86, d. e: olv 
ris vfiav eviropcorepos ifxov, ri ovk direKpivaro,- (is quam celerrime respondeat, 
let him answer at once) . The Pres. is also so used; yet the expression is then 
far weaker, e. g. Ti ovv, i\ 8' os, ovk e peer as; (stronger than ipcara, but 
weaker than Tt ovv ovk ypcor-ntTas or tfpov;) PI. Lysid. 211, d. Ti ovv ov 
CKOTTOVfXeV, X. C. 3. 1, 10. 

(f) The Aor., like the Perf. (§ 255, Eem. 7) is used, when the speaker confi- 
dently considers a future event as already taken place. II. 8, 160 — 162. e'iirep 
yap re Kal avr'iK ''OXvfj.irios ovk ereXeffffev, eK re Kal tye TeAel, ovv re /aeydXeo 
hirer iff a v ffbv crcpfjcriv KecpaXrjffi yvvai^i re Kal reKeeffffiv (then have they paid a 
heavy penalty, then shall they pay). Eur. Med. 78. air to X 6 /a e ff & tip, el KaKov 
irposoLffOfxev veov iraXaLcp (then ice shall perish, if, etc.). 

(g) The Aorist is very often used in all its forms to denote the coming into a 
condition; this the Ind. alwsys represents naturally in the past. BairiXevw, 1 



343 syntax. [§ 257. 

urn a king, i fiaa iAevcra (not I ivas a Icing, but) I came to be a king, ivas made a 
king, /3 a <r tA ever as, having been made king, rex j "actus. BovXevo), I am a senator 
(X. C. 1. 2, 35), fiovXeixras, having been made a senator, senator /actus (ib. 1. 1, 
18). Sou a-rpar'nyrjcravTOS, te duce facto (ib. 3. 5, 1). 'lax^u, lam strong, 
la- xvcus, having become or been made strong, potens J actus (Th. 1,3). Awn- 
3-ets, polentiam nactus. 'A crd-ez/Tjtrai, to have become sick, in morbum incidisse. 
Kdpos Tiyacr^rr] avrov (KAeapxo//), X. An. 1. 1, 9. Cijrus came to admire him, ejus 
admiratione captus est. 



§257. Subordinate Modes. 

1. As the Aorist Indicative expresses a past action as inde- 
pendent and completed, having no relation to another past ac- 
tion ; while the Imperfect, always representing a past action in 
relation to another past, and being nsed in describing and paint- 
ing, presents the action in its duration and progress, so the 
same distinction holds in regard to the subordinate modes of 
the Aorist and Present : 1 The subordinate modes of the Aor. 
(Subj. Opt. and Impr.) together with the Infinitive and Partici- 
ple, are used, when the speaker wishes to represent the action 
by itself, as completed ; the subordinate modes of the Present 
together with the Infinitive and Participle, and also the Imper- 
fect Opt. are used, when the speaker, considering the perform- 
ance of the action, wishes to represent it descriptively in its dura- 
tion and progress. In this way the following modes stand in 
contrast with each other : 

(a) The Subjunctive and Optative Aorist with the Subjunctive Present and the 
Optative Imperfect, e. g. $vy<tip.ev and (psvyu/xev, let us flee. "With 
(pvycapev, the idea of fleeing itself is urged and is had in mind ; with 
(psvytojjLzv, I rather have reference to the performance and progress of 
the action ; the Aor. expresses the action with more energy, as it denotes 
an instantaneous, momentary act. The same distinction exists in all 
the following examples. Ti iroi7)<roo/Aev and iroiu^ev ; what shall we do ? 
Aeyw, 'lva p.d&ri s and 'lva /j.av&dvr) s, ut discas ; eAzyov, 'lva /j.d&o is 
and 'lva navSdvois , ut disceres. The Greek Subj. always refers to the 
future, and hence is never used, as in Latin, of the present and past, e. g. 
Laudat puerum. quod diligens sit or fuerit, because he is or has been. In 
subordinate clauses with %s aV, zav, orav, etc. [§260. (a)], the Subj. Aor. 
corresponds with Latin Put. Perf. (§255, Eem. 9). 'Eav tovto \4yns, 
kixapTrja-r] (si hoc dices or quotiescunque hoc dicis, errabis). ''Ea.v rovr 



1 The subordinate modes of the Imperf. are supplied bv those of the Prey 



> 257.] SUBORDINATE MODES. 349 

Ae| p s , afiapT^arj (si hoc dixeris, if you shall have said). Comp. the exam- 
ples under §§ 333, 3. 337, 6. 339, 2, II. (b). The Impf. and Aor. Opt. hag 
the sense of the present or future in clauses which express a supposi- 
tion, conjecture,*or undetermined possibility, in prose commonly with aV, 
in hypothetical clauses with el ; the Opt. in this sense is found in clauses 
denoting a wish, in final clauses, and in direct interrogative clauses, 
particularly in deliberative questions. Tovto padlas av yiyuoiro or 
yevoiro, this might easily be done. See §§ 259, 3 and 6, and 260, 4. Ei 
tovto \4yots or A e £ e t a s , a/xaprdvo is or a /xdpT ois &v, if you 
should say this, you would err. See § 339, II, (a). Ex&e tovto yiyvoiro 
or yzvoLTo, that this might be! See § 259, 3. (b). "EXeyov, 'Iva 
fiav&dvois or /xd&ois , ut disceres. See § 330, 2. Tis ToiavTa viroXap.- 
fidvoi or vir o\d$oi; who would suppose such things ? See § 259, 3, (e). 
Ovk elxov, oivoi rpeir oi/j-n v or t pa.Troi/j.Tii' , I knew not what I should 
do. See § 259, 2. The following case also belongs here : When the 
subordinate clauses in §§ 333, 3. 337, 6. and 339, II, (b), arc made to 
depend on an historical tense, and the Opt. without av takes the place of 
the Subj. with bs av, oTav, eVeiSaV, eav, etc., the Opt. has a future sense. 
Ovs av tdoi! to. Ka\a 4TriT7]devovTas, tl/xtjctoj (quos videro). *E<pr)v ovs 
XSoifJii to. KaAa 4TriT7]BevovTas, Tifir]creiv (quos visurus essem). 'Err e id a v 
av fiovXri 8ia\4yea£rai, ao\ diaXQo/xai (si or quotiescunque vis). "Ecprjv, 
4 7r eidr) av fioi/Xoio SiaAeyea&ai, aol SiaAel^ea&mi (si or quotiescunque 
velles, of the futxtre). In other kinds of clauses, the Opt. of the Impf. and 
Aor. has apast sense, so that it corresponds with the Ind. of each of these 
tenses. Tiaaa(p4pvr]s diefiaAe tov Kvpov, cos iirifiovXevoi avTtp (that he 
was plotting against him). "EAelcw, on Kvpos airo^dvoi (that C. was 
dead). 'Ott6t€ oi "EXK-nves tois iroKejxiois 4irioiev or iireX&oiev, a.Tr4- 
<pevyov, quotiescunque impetum faciebant). 'AvafSiobs eXeyev, a 4ne7 
18 oi (what he had there seen, a dependent question). Comp. No. 2, (b). 

{h) The Imperative Aorist with the Imperative Present, e. g. $vye and 
<j> € v •) e flee. Aos and SiSov p.oi to fiiP\iov, give. Mr) &opv /3 e It e , S> dvSpes 
'A&7]va7oi, &AA' 4 fifie ivaT 4 fioi, oTs 45er)^7]v v/xobv, fii) Sopv&e?v 4(p > oTs h.v 
\4ya (the principal fact is here 4/jL/xelvaTe, the more definite explanation 
&opv{SuTe) PL Apol. 30, c. ^Eireiddv diravra aKOvarjTe, npivaT e , p.r) ivp6- 
Teoov TrpoXafxfidveT e. Dem. Ph. 1. 44, 14. 'AAA 1 , d> ^.wKpaTes, eri tea) 
vvv ifj.01 Trei&ov Ka\ a do St 7] t i PL Crito 44, b (= 4p.ol TreL&6p:evos aw&7]Ti t 
i. e. by a process of persuasion, save yourself). In precepts respecting 
the rules of life. etc. the Pres. is the natural and usual tense. Tovs fxev 
&eobs <po fiov , tovs Se yove?s Tip. a, tovs 8e (pihovs al a %v <v o v , to?s 
8e v6p.ois irei&ov, Isocr. Demon. 16. Comp. § 259, 4. 

(c) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Present, e. g. 'Ed-eAco (pvyelv 
and cpevyeiv, I ivish to flee. 'Iicav6s elp.i tx o trj a ai and iroielv rt. 
('H yeoopyta) p.a&e?v re pdaTT] 4SoKei elvai /ecu ydlaTri 4 pydXeo-&ai, X. 
Oec. 6, 9. AipeTdoTepov 4ctti /caAais a.7ro&av €?v , fj £rjv alaxp& s i Isocr. 
Pan. 95. Ov to fj.1) A a/3 e t v tc 0170^01 outco ye xaAeTroV, c5s7rep to \a&6vra 

30 



350 SYNTAX. [$ "257. 

srepri&iivai \virrjp6u, X. Cy. 7. 5, 82. KeXevu ere Souvai and 5 id 6 v a* 
fioi rb fiifixiov. KaX4cras 6 Kvpos'Apdo'7rr]u MrjSov, rovrov e/ceAeucre 5 lacpv* 
Xd*ai avr<£ rr]v re ■yvvcuK.a kcH r\]v <TKr]V7]v, X. Cy. 5. 1, 2, with which 
compare in 3. following: ravrrji/ ovv eKeXevcrev 6 Kvpos SiacpvXdrreiP 
rbv 'Apdcrwriv, ews av uvrbs AayS?; (to continue to guard, the subordinate 
clause necessarily implying duration in diaepvXdrreiv). In the oratio obliqua 
after verbs of saying and thinking, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. is frequently 
used to denote what is past ; then the Inf. Aor., like the Ind. Aor., is used to 
denote the principal events, the Inf. Pres., like the Ind. Impf, to denote the 
accompanying subordinate circumstances, e. g. 'ASx-nvaioi x4yovcri, Sucaicos 
i l-eXacrai (robs HeXacryovs)' KaroiKTifMevovs yap robs HeXacryovs vrrb rw 
'T/M7]crcr(d iv&evrej/ 6piiecofx4uovs, d 5 i k 4 e i v rdde ' cpoirau yap alel ras 
acperepas frvyarepas re Ka\ robs ira75as in vSccp ' ov yap elvai rovrov rbv 
Xpovou enpian ku> oltc4ras ' okcos Se eX&oiev aurai, robs TleXacryobs vnb vfipios 
fiiaaSrai crcpeas k. r. A. (Oratio recta: i^xdcrafiev ol yap UeXaayol 
r\D'iKovv rdde ' icpoiruv, etc.) Her. 6, 137. The Inf. Aor. has a 
past relation only after verbs of saying or thinking, and in the construction 
of the Ace. with the Infinitive with the article. "Evrav&a \4yerai 
'Air6xXcav i k § e tjo ai Mapavau /cat rb Sep/xa k pe fidffai iv tw dvrpco, X. 
An. 1. 2, 8 (cutem detraxisse — suspendisse, to have flayed, and hung up). 
Comp. No. 2, (c). Qavixacrrbv (paiverai /jlol rb 7re icr&rivai rivas, us 
~2,wKpdrrjs robs v4ovs 8i4<p&eipev, X. C. 1. 2, 1 (persuasum esse quibusdam, 
that certain individuals had been persuaded). Tb /xede/j-iau ruiv iroXeccv 
a.Xu>vai TroXiopKia, fi4yio~r6v ecrri cry]\xe1ov rod dia rovrovs it e icr&4 vr as 
robs <p«/ceas ravra ira&e?v, Dem. 19,61. (But when by the Ace. 
with the Inf. with the article, a purpose is expressed, the Inf. Aor. has 
naturally something of a future relation, e. g. 'EirefieX^Srrjy rod Siddcr- 
KaX6v jxoi riva yev 4a&ai , I took care that I might have some one as a 
teacher, X. C. 4. 2, 4.) In all other cases the Inf. Aor. has the relation of 
present time. 

(d) The Participle of the Aorist with the Participle of the Present ; comp. 
Active <pvyd!»i with XavSave (pevyav. TLepieirXccoj/ ~S,ovviov, fiovXS/JLei/oi cp&rjvai 
air i k 6 fiev o i is rb acrrv (wishing to come into the city sooner) Her. 6, 115. 
Tobs av&pwTTous Xrjcro/xev iir itt ecr 6ure s ( will secretly attack) , X. An. 7. 3, 43. 
In all such examples the Aor. does not express the relation of past time, 
but merely the action of the verb taken by itself; the time is denoted by 
the finite verb with which the Part, is connected ; the Aor. Part., there- 
fore, denotes only that the subordinate action (expressed by the Part.) is 
contemporaneous with the principal action (expressed by the verb). Yet 
it is to be observed, that the Aor. Part, is commonly used to designate 
past time, C. g. Tavr eWoov aTrefSr] == ravr el-ire /cat airefirj. — It may be 
added here as a general principle, that while the Aor. Part, generally 
denotes past time, the subordinate modes of the Aor. and Present, of 
themselves denote no relation of time, the Aor., however, designating a 
momentary, the Pres. a continued action. 



fr 257.] SUBORDINATE MODES. 351 

2. The subordinate modes and participials of the Aonst, form 
a contrast also with the subordinate modes and participials of 
i lie Perfect and Pluperfect; the former denote an action abso- 
lutely, as past or completed; the latter, on the contrary, in rela- 
tion to the subject of the finite verb; by this relation the sub- 
ordinate idea of the duration of the result of what is denoted by 
the verb, is naturally derived. In this way the following forms 
St Liid in contrast with each other: 

(a) The Subjunctive Aorist with the Subjunctive Perfect, e. g. 'Eats airou^dt 
y4vu>vrai, a^ovcriu (iicelas), ev&ev e£ou<n ra emrriSeia (if a treaty shall 
have been made), X. A. 2. 3, 6. & Oi> av yvc&pifxoy (kiW t'S 77), ao"rrd£erai, kclv 
jiiTjSej/ irdeiroTe vir' avrov aya&bv -KUTrovSri (whomsoever he recognizes, he 
greets, even if he shall have received no favor from him), PI. Pp. 376, a. 
'A7rexeo-(d-e rwv aXKorpiuiv, %v ao*<pa\4o~rspov rovs o'ikcvs robs v/xerepovs avruiv 
KeKTrjar&e, Isoc. Nic. 49. (Comp. § 255, Rem. 5.) It has already been 
stated No. 1. (a) that the Greek Subj. always refers to the future. 

(b) The Optative Aorist with the Optative Pluperfect, e. g. Ol 'ludol eke£av, 
<Lti irijx^€L€ <r<pas 6 'ludciu jSacnAevs (had sent), X. Cy. 2. 4, 6. "ESeiaau, 
/at] Xvrra ns fcsirep Kvalu -qjxSiv e jxtt eirr w ko 1 (that some madness had 
fallen upon us, the effects still continuing), X. An. 5. 7, 26. 'AyrjcriXaos 

eSeTj^Tj rrjs w6k€(as acpeTvai avrbu ravrrjs rr\s arpar-nyias, \4ya)v, on rep irarpl 
avrov iroWa viv-q p err) k 01 7? rwu Mavrivewv ir6\is iv ro?s Trpbs Mzo~o~'i]wnv 
iro\4fiois, H. 5. 2, 3. In what instances the Opt. Aor. is used of the 
present or future, and in what of the past, has been stated in No. 1, (a). 

\k,) 'The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Perfect; comp. a-rroSaveiv with 
T<=&v7)Kevcu. Harpbs Kvpos \4ysrai yev 4 cr&ai Kafx^vaew, Tlepawv fiaai- 
A4cos X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. A4yerai 'dvSpa nva. rS>v MtjSqcv e KTreirXrJx&cu 
iroXvu 877 Tiva xpovov i-irl rw KaWei rod Kvpov (stood or continued amazed), 
ib. 1. 4, 27. Comp. § 255, Rem. 6. 

(d) The Aorist Participle with the Perfect Participle ; comp. airo&avdov with 
re&urjKdos, Plut. Aem. Paul. c. 36. extr. Ilepcreus jxkv e%et teal veviK-n- 
/xeuos (even though vanquished, in the condition of one vanquished) tovs 
iraiSas, AlpiiXios Se robs avrov (sc. iraTSas) viking as air4fia\€i/ = vevinfirai 
fiev — e%et Se — , £vlicri<re fj.4u — air4fia\e Se. Perseus even though conquered 
still has his childre'n ; Aemilius in his otherwise successful war, lost his. 

Remark 1. From the above explanation, it is evident why the Aor., though 
an Historical tense, has besides an Opt. a Subj. also : the Aor. Subj. stands in 
contrast, on the one hand, with the Subj. Pres. ; on the other, with the Subj. 
Perf. The Greek Put. has no Subj. as in Latin (e. g. Gaudet, quod pater ven- 
turus sit), because the Greek Subj. of itself denotes future time. But the Aor. 
has an Opt., which stands in dependent sentences after an historical tense, and 
consequently, in direct discourse, takes the place of the Ind. Future, e. g 
"KyyeiAev, on ivoK4fjaoi v tK-fja iev (that the enemy would conquer). X. An. 7. 
I, 33. tXeyev, on '4roip.os eify T^eTtr&at avrois els rb AeATa Kakovjxevov, ev&a TroAAck 



352 SYNTAX. [$ 258, 

icai dyaSrd \-ntyoivro (where they would receive). X. Cy. 8. i, 43. eirLfxeXeira 
'6wccs \xnre dffiroi, fx-hre tinroToi irore ecro i vr o . (But eirifj.eXe7TaL, owais .... effov- 
tou). X. An. 4. 1, 25. €$77 elvai axpov, t el jxi\ tis it p o kclt a\i]\\i o it , ddvvarov 
tO'ea&ca irapeA&e7v. ( ratio recta : el TrpoKara\r]^/eTai, dSuvarov earai 7rapeAj&e?j/.f 

Rem. 2. Verbs of willing, refusing, delaying, entreating, persuading, com- 
manding, forbidding, hindering, of being able, and unable, expecting (irpos- 
doKu, iirido^os elfxi, elicSs icrriv, it is likely, to be expected), when they relate to a 
future object, are sometimes connected with the Put. Inf., sometimes with the 
Pres., sometimes with the Aor. The Put. Inf. is used, when the idea of futurity is 
to be made specially prominent, e. g. a condition continuing in the future ; the 
Inf. Pres., to denote a continuing or permanent condition, the idea of futurity, 
evident of itself, being left out of sight ; this Inf. is also used to denote the 
immediate occurrence of the action ; the Inf. Aor., when the idea of the action 
itself is made prominent. In English all three forms of the Inf., when the subject 
of the Inf. is the same as that of the governing verb, are translated by the Pres. 
Inf. : MeAAw ypdtyeiv, ypd<peiv, ypdyai (I am now about to write, intending 
to write). 'Advvar oi el<r iv iwi/j.e\e7s e&ea&ai (unable to become and continue 
careful), X. Oec. 12, 12. 'AdvvctToi el civ els eirifxeAeiav r&v Kar dypbv epyuv 
Traidevecrdrai, ib. 12, 15. 'ASvvar 1 rjfxiv ecrovrai ravr-nv ttjv eirifxeKeiav 
d iSax&V vai, ib. 12, 13. 'AvafidWerat it v 4) <r e t v to deovra, P)em.31, 9. 
'A&r)vcuoi due fidWoi/T rb irdv fj.-nxo.vi] a a o" 3- a i, Her. 6, 58. 'YLXivi^ei 
padiws uuds i l-air o,tt) ere iv, Dem. 860, 54 (he hopes to deceive you) . 'EXnldas 
Trape'xerat rj/xas evdal/xovas tt irj ffct 1, PI. Symp. 193, d. (he gives hope that he 
will make us happy). With verbs of willing or being able, the Put. Inf. is more 
seldom than the Aor. or Pres. After verbs of saying, promising, sAvearing, 
thinking, the above threefold construction (Inf. Put., Pres., Aor.) is used, but the 
Inf. Aor. regularly expresses something past (see No. 1), seldom what is future, 
e. g. Ol UXaraLrjS ev6fxio-av eiri&ejxevoi paSicos KpaT7Jaai, Th. 2, 3, (se victores 
fore). 'AirSupivai, & 'Ay6pare' ov yap ol/xai ae e^apvov yevecrgnxi, a evavriov 
' A&T]va.i'j>v dirdvTcav eiroirjcras, Lys. Agor. § 32 (credo te negaturum). After verbs 
of saying, thinking, hoping, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. with dv, is often used in 
nearly the same sense as the Inf. Put. without dv. See § 260, (5), (a). 

$258. B. A more particular Vieiv of the Modes. 

The Indicative, the Subjunctive (Optative) and the Im- 
perative Modes \h 253, (b)], are distinguished as follows : 

(a) The Indicative expresses a direct assertion, an actual fact 

Tb podov IbrdWei. 'O irarrjp yey pa<pe ttjv eTTiaroXijv. Oi iro\4fxioi 
a it e (p v y v. Ol iroXlrat robs Tro\efxiovs v 1 kt\ a ov a iv. 

(b) The Subjunctive denotes a supposition, conception, or 
representation- The Subj. of the Hist, tenses is called the 
Optative. 

"Iw/xev I camus ! — Ti iroiwp.ev ; quid faciamus ? what shall we do ? Ovk e% w > 
oVoi t pdirw/xai, nescio, quo me vertam. Ovk e?xoy, ottoi r pairoi[X7]v, nescie- 
bam, quo me verterem. Aeyca, 'iv eldrjs, dico, ut scias, in order that you may know 
it. "EAe^a, 'Iv eldeins, dixi, ut scires, in order that you might know it. 

(c) The Imperative denotes the immediate expression of the 
will, being used in commands, entreaties, etc. 



$ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 353 

Tp&tyov and ypdcpe, twite. BpaSeW jxkv (piXos yiyvov, yej/6/j.evos Se ireipu Sia/xe- 
i/eiv : Is. Dcm. 7. Tpatydrca and ypafperu, let him write (§ 257, 1. b). The com- 
mand expressed by the Imp. is not always to be understood as a strong com- 
mand, entreaties, exhortations, and counsels, being also expressed by the Imp. 

Eemaek. The Modes exhibit the relation of an expressed thought to 
the mind of the speaker. Hence they denote nothing objective, i. e. they never 
show the actual condition of an action ; the Ind., in itself, does not denote 
something actual ; nor the Subj., in itself, something possible; nor the Imp., 
something necessary ; the language represents these ideas by special expres- 
sions, e. g. aA-n&ws, 5wa<r&ai, Se?, xpv> etc - T ne modes express subjective rela- 
tions solely, i. e. the relations to the mind of the speaker, showing how he 
conceives of an action. A mental operation is either an act of perception, an 
act of supposition or conception, or an act of desire. The Ind. expresses 
an actual perception ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents 
as a reality, whether an actual, objective fact, or a conception ; even the future, 
which, in itself is something merely imagined, can be conceived by the speaker 
as a reality, and hence is expressed by the Put. Ind. The Subj. expresses 
a conception ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents as a 
conception, whether it has an actual objective existence, or is a mere mental 
conception. The Imp. expresses desire ; it denotes what the speaker conceives 
and represents as something desired, whether it be an actual objective necessity 
or not. 



$259. Use of the Subjunctive, Optative and Im- 
perative. 

1. The Subj. of the Principal tenses, the Pres. and Perf., as 
well as the Sub. Aor., ahvay relates tofuturetimQ [$ 257, 1, (a)], 
and is used in Principal clauses : 

(a) In the first Pers. Sing, and PL in exhortations i and warn- 
ings, where the Eng. uses let, let us, with the infinitive ; the 
negative is here /«}. 

(b) In the first Pers. Sing, and PI. in deliberative 2 questions, 
when the speaker deliberates with himself what he is to do, 
what it is best to do ; here also the negative is /my. 

"Iayier, eamus! let us go, suppose we go ! M-)? tco/xev. "Kye (cpepe, ea) tw/nev. 
4?epe /fSw (come noiv, let me see), Her. 7, 103. <£epe 877, -rj §' os, it e 1 pa&£j -rrpbs 
vfxas a.iro\oyr\ffa(r&ai, PI. Phaedon. 63, b. Such an exhortation is very often ex- 
pressed in the form of a question preceded by fiovtei; yet in this case, the 
subjunctive is a subordinate clause dependent on fiovXa, e. g. BovXei ovv, Sm 
dSr] &w pity irei&ovs ; (do you then loish that we propose two kinds of persuasions == 
let us propose), PL Gorg. 454, e. Tt iroi^fievj quid faciamus ? what shall we 
do? Ei-ircofieV) v) (Tiycifiev; Eur. Ion. 771. In no? ris cppouridos eA&y; S- 

1 This use of the Subj. is called Conjunctiva adhortativus. 

2 Conjunctivus deliberativus. 

30* 



354 syntax. [$ 259 

3. C. 170, tis is used instead of the first Pers., where shall one go? ( — izol eA&c* 
or eXStojj.ev, like irot typevtov eA&w; 310). M77 epto t uai ; shall 1 not ask? X. C. 1 
2, 36. "Oca 0: oXiyoi tovs iroWovs p^] ireio'avTes, aAAci KparovyTes ypdtyovai, 7tot- 
e/joy )8tW (ptofxeu, 7) ,ur? cpto/xeu elvaij 45. So also in indirect discourse, 
and in all persons. Oi»;< ex&>, oitol t pdirto/x^v (I know not, whither I shall turn 
myself, what I shall do). Ovk e^ovariu eiceivoi, oitol (pvywcri, X. An. 2.4, 20. Ovk 
oT5' el 8 to (to eKTrw/xa), I do not know whether I shall give the cup, Cy. § 8. 4, 16. 

Remark 1. In the second and third Pers. the exhortation takes the form 
of a command or wish, and hence is expressed by the Imp. or Opt. Od. %, 77. 
eA&co^ei/ 8' ava lxcttv, fior] 8' cokhtto, yevoiTo. Yet there are also passages 
in which the second Pers. Subj. stands in connection with aye and <pepe instead 
of the Imp., e. g. $ep, to TeKvov, vvv koX tott\s v'(\(tov pd bv s, S. Ph. 300. 

Rem. 2. On the use of the second Pers. Subj. with ^77 to express a prohibi- 
tion, e. g. /X77 ypdty-ns, ne scripseris, do not write, see Xo. 5. 

Rem. 3. A wish is very seldom expressed by et&e with the Subj. instead of 
the Opt. Eifr 3 al&epos dua iTTtoKades o^vtSvov dia iruevfjLaTos eAcocri fi (0 si 
aves me sursum in aefherem per auras stridentes capiant), S. Ph. 1094 (without varia- 
tion). Comp. Eiid-e Tives evual SiKalcou v/j.euaicou ev "Apyei (pavtoVi TeKVOicriv 
Eur. Suppl. 1028. Eid-' — alcrxiou eJSos clptI tov kolKov \dfito (in some MSS. 
\a&£v), Hel. 262. 

Rem. 4. In the third place, the Subjunctive is somewhat frequently used in 
principal clauses, in the Epic language, instead of the Eut. Ind., though with a 
slight difference of meaning. Both express a present conception of a future 
action ; but the Eut. Ind. represents what is still in the future as known and 
certain in the view of the speaker, while the Subj. represents what is future as 
merely a concession or admission of something expected. II. £, 459. /ecu 
7tot6 tis elirrj a iu (and one may sag, it mag be expected or conceded that one will 
sag). II. 77, 197. ov ydp t'ls fxe fiiw ye eKwv aeKovTa 81-nTai (one icill not force me 
away = I will not admit that one will, etc.). a, 262. ov ydp ttoj to'lovs Xhov dvepas, 
ovfie ? 8 a p a 1 (na do I expect that I shall see such men, nor am I to see ; ov8e 
6\po/xaL, would mean, I certainly shall not see). Od. £ 201. ovk eoS' ovtos h.vr\p 
Siepbs fipoTSs, ob8e y evr\T ai. it, 437. ovk ecr& ovtos cavrip, ovS' ecueTcu ovdh 
yevr\Tai (nor is it to be expected that he will be). The frequent use of the Subj. 
with ovSe n't] in the Attic writers, is wholly analogous to the principle just 
stated. See under § 318, 6. 

2. The Opt. Impf. and Aor. is also>used in principal sen- 
tences, to denote deliberative questions (i. e. snch as express 
doubt and propriety), but differs from the Subj. in such ques- 
tions in referring to past time. 

Theocr. 27, 24. ttoXXo'l p epvwovTO, voov 5' epbu ovtis ea8e ' — kcsI tl, (piXos, 
p e^aijJLi; ydfj.01 ir\i]drov(Tiv aulas, i. e. quid pacerem 1 sc. turn, quum multi nup- 
tias meas ambiebant, sed eorum nuUus mild placebat, what could I then do ? The 
deliberative Opt. is very frequently used in indirect questions, in relation to an 
historical tense in the principal clause. 'EirrjpeTo 6 2ewhjs Tbu Trai8a, el iraiaeiev 
*vt6v, X. An. 7. 4, 10 (whether he should put him to death). Oi 'ETTiSd/xuioi irep- 
tyai>Tes is AeXcpobs TtV Sebv eirripovTO, el tt apa8 otev Kopu/friois t)]v tt6Xlv, Th< 
1, 25 (whether theg should surrender the city). 



$ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 355 

Rem. 5. In the principle given in No. 2, the act of supposition or conception 
belongs to the past, and this is the common use of the Opt. (the Subj. of the 
historical tenses), in subordinate clauses. But the Opt. is also used, where the 
act of supposition or conception is a present one. When a present conception is 
expressed by the subjunctive, e. g. Icc/xev, eamus, rl eX-Kcofiev ,■ quid dicamus ? 
then the realization of the conception may be assumed or expected from the 
present point of time. But when a present conception is expressed by the 
Opt. (Subj. of the historical tenses), the speaker places himself back, as it 
were, out of the present and the vivid connection, which exists between the 
present and the actual accomplishment, and represents the conception as one- 
separate from his present point of time. Hence a present conception expressed 
in this way, very naturally suggests the subordinate idea of uncertainty. Thence 
arises the following use : 

3. The Opt. Act. and Impf. (Subj. of the historical tenses), 
is used, in principal clauses, of present or future time in the 
following cases : 

(a) To express, in a general manner, a supposition, a present 
or future uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, presumption 
or admission. The prose-writers here commonly use the modal 
adverb av with the Opt., $ 260, 2, (4), (a), but the poets very 
frequently use the Opt. without av. A negation is here ex- 
pressed by ov (ovk). 

*0 8e avrb ai/Tcp av6/xoiov efy /cat Sidcpopov, o~x°^V ye irov to> aWcp 0/j.oiov $) (plXov 
yevotro (that would scarcely be like or friendly to another, as one would readily 
admit), PL Lysid. 214, d. 'Airo\o/j.€V7]s 8e ttjs tyvxrjs tot ijdr) t)]v (pvcrtv ttjs 
ao-&evetas en iSeiicvvo l Th ffwjxa /cat Tax" oraTrev SioixoiTo (animo exstinctc 
turn vero corpus imbecillitatem suam ostendat et intercidat, it is natural to suppose or 
assume, that the body would give signs of iveakness), Phaed. 87, e. 

(b) To express a wish. A negation is here expressed by fxr> 

II. %■> 304. fj,T] fxau aairovbi ye /cat a-KXeitos air o\oi /xr] v, may 1 not perish! S. 
Aj. 550. 3) iral, yevoio irarpbs evTvxecrTepos, to. 8' aAA 5 '6[xolos ! /cat yevoi av ov 
k<xk6s, may you be more fortunate than your father, but in other things like him ! then 
you would not be wicked. X. Cy. 6. 3, 11. 'AAA', S> Zed /xeyuTTe, Xa&etv fxoi 
yevono clvt6v, cos eyu> /3ovAo,uat, may I be able to take him. The wish is com- 
monly introduced by ei'd-e, d ydp (in the poets also by et alone). Od. y, 205. 
el yap ifxol Tocrcrf)v?>e &eol Svuafj.iv irapa&e7ev! X. Cy. 6. 1,38. et yap 
yevoiTo! (In poetry ws is used like Lat. utinam. Eur. Hipp. 407. a> s 
a 7r 6 X o t r o ivayKaKws ! ) 

B,em. 6. When a wish is expressed, which the speaker knows cannot be 
realized, the Ind. of the historical tenses is used, e. g. Etd-e tovto eyiyveTo ! 
eiSe tovto eyeveTo ! utinam hoc factum esset ! O that this were done, or had been 
done ! So axpeXes ypd^/ai ! O that you had written ! ( but I know tha t you have 
not). X. An. 2. 1, 4. ctAA' &<pe\e [xev Kvpos (j\v ! O that Cyrus were still alive! 
(but I know that he is not). Also ef&e, et ydp, a>s dxpe\ov, e s, e(v) with 



366 syntax. [$ 259 

the Inf.. particularly in poetry. On the wish expressed by ttws dv with the Opt, 
see § 260. 2. (4), (d). On the infrequent use of the Subj. to denote a wish, sea 
Rem. 3. 

(c) A command is also expressed in a milder way, in the 
form of a wish. 

Od. £, 408. Tctx'0"T<£ fj-oi eydov eraipoi elev, let my companions come within. II. 
rf^puf tis ol %ttolto yepaiTepos, let some herald follow. Arist. Vesp. 1431. 
epdoi tis %v eKaaTos elSeir} Texvnv. X. An. 3. 2, 37. el fiev ovv &\Xos ris 
(SeXTiov opa, dhXws 4x* Ta ' e * $* hV> Xeipiaocpos fxev 7)yo?ro. 

(d) The Optative is used to express a desire, wish, and 
inclination, in a general manner, without expecting the realiza- 
tion. A negation is here expressed by fir}. 

Theocr. 8, 20. ravrav (t)]v o-upiyya) k aT be it] v (1 would be willing or desire 
to place)' to Se too irarpbs ov Karafrnaw. Her. 7, 11. /at) yap eirjv e/c Aapeiov 
yeyovws, jj.$i Ti/j.(ap-ncrd/j.evos AStjv aiovs, I should not be descended from Darius, 
unless, etc. 

(e) In direct questions the Opt. is used, when a mere admis- 
sion or supposition is expressed. 

(a) In Homer the interrogative clause then forms, in a measure, the protasis 
to the conditioned clause, i. e. to the clause depending on the condition ex- 
pressed by the question. II. 5, 93, seq. ^ pd vv /xoi ri irl&oio, Avudovos vie 
Sai'cppov ; TActiTjs k ev MeveXaa eiriirpoefxev Taxvv lov, iraffi 8e Ke TpMeacri x° L P LV 
kcu kvBos apoio, ic ill you now listen to me, i. e. if you will, you would dare, etc. (the 
same as el ri p.01 iri&oio, rXairjs Kev, etc.). Here iri&oio, etc. is the in- 
terrogative clause containing the condition, and rXairjs, etc. the conditioned 
clause depending on the preceding. When the question has two members, the 
first, expressed by the Opt. without dv, contains the condition, the last, ex- 
pressed by the Opt. with dv, contains the conditioned clause. II. £, 191. ^ pd 
vv fxol r fl&oio, <pi\ov t4kos, otti Kev elirco, r,e Kev n p v 7] <r a 1 o Kore(raa/j.evn Toye 
Svix& ; will you be persuaded by me, — or will you refuse ? (/8) In the Attic writers, 
the Opt. is also used in a question without reference to a conditioned clause. 
These questions, however, always imply a negative. Aesch. Choeph. a\\' 
virepToXjxov avopbs (pp6vr]/j.a rls \eyoi; who could describe? — no one, i. e. who 
can you suppose could describe ? S. Ant. 604. redv, Zed, Svvaaiv ris avSpcov virep- 
fiaaiq. Kar dcrxo i; who could restrain? i.e. who can be supposed to restrain? 
Arist. Plut. 438. ava£ "AttoWov koI &eot, ttol tis <pvyoi, where could one fly ? 
Dem. Pliorm. 921, 1. Kal ocra jxev elire fxera ttjs h.\r\Seias, (J.fy xP^^be TeK,uT]plcp \ a 
b' e\pevcraro to xxnepov, iricrTSTepa Tav^ virohaflon e elvai ,- haec vos veriora 
existimaturos quis putet ! PL Pp. 437, b. ap ovv — irdvTa to. ToiavTa tuv ivavTioov 
aW-f)\ois beirjs ; can you consider all such things to be opposite to each other ? i. e. 
can I assume that you, etc. 



§ 259.J SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 357 

Rem. 7. The deliberative Opt. (No. 2) differs from this. 

Rem. 8. All the cases mentioned under (a) (b) (c) (d) (e), are to be regarded 
as elliptical sentences, which have originated from a conditional sentence like 
el ti exois, 5 oirts dv [§ 339, II, (a)], if you had, you would give. 

(4) The following points in addition are to be observed 
respecting the Imp., [$ 258, 1, (c)] : Though the Imp. always 
refers to time present to the speaker, yet the Greek has several 
Imp. forms, viz., a Pres., Perf., and Aor. These forms, how- 
ever, do not express a different relation of time, but only the 
different condition or circumstances of the predicate. The dif- 
ference between the Imp. Aor. ypdxf/ov and the Pres. ypd<p€, has 
been explained, § 257, 1, (b). The Imp. Perf. has always the 
sense of the Pres., with the accompanying idea of the perma- 
nence or continuance of the result, e. g. fxifxvrjcro, memento, be 
mindful, remember ; i) Svpa Ke/cActo-^co, let the door be shut 
(and remain shut). See $ 255, Rem. 5. 

5. In negative or prohibitive expressions with \xy) (ne), the 
Greek commonly uses only the Pres. Imp., not the Aor. Imp. ; 
but instead of the Aor. Imp., the Aor. Subjunctive is used. 

Ma? ypd<pe or (xy ypdtyrjs (but neither /xt] ypd(pvs, nor /xt] ypdtyov). M77 
ypacpirw or firj ypd\pT), ne scribito (but neither llt) ypdcprj, nor fxr] ypatydrco). 
Mr) fj.01 avTikeys or fir) /xoi olvt iK4^ri s, do not speak against me (but 
neither fir] avTiXiyns nor /xr] avriXe^ov). Isoc. Dem. 24. M 77 e v a <pi\ov ttoiov 
Trplv av i^rdcrvs, Trios KexP 7 !™ 1 T0 ^ rrpSrepoi/ <pl\ois. 36, 29. /xr]oevl crv/xcpopas 
oueid lays' koivt) yap r) rvxn xal to jxzWov a6parov. Th. 3.39. KoXaa-^rjraxTav 
5e Kal vvv apices tt)s aoucias, /cat [x 77 to7s fiev oXiyois r) atria ir po st e&fj, tov d\ 
or\jxov airoXv(rrjTC. 

Rem. 9. Yei: sometimes in the Epic poets, though very seldom in othe/ 
poets, /xr) is found with the second Pers. of the Aor. Imp., e. g. II. 5, 410. rep 
/.ir) fxoi Trarepas nob' dfxoir) e r&eo frv/i<p. The third Pers. is frequently found 
even in the Attic prose writers. X. Cy. 8. 7, 26. /xrjSels IS era. 

G. The third Pers. Imp. is very often used (the second more 
seldom), to denote that the speaker admits or grants something, 
the correctness or incorrectness of which depends upon himself 
This is called the concessive Imp. 

Ovtws e'xeTa, ws av \4yeis (admit that it is as you say), P. Symp. 201, c. 
'Eoi/ceTw 87/ (7? ^vxh) tvixtyvrw Svvd/xzi vrroTrrepov (evyovs -re Ka\ r)vi6xov (grint 
that the soul is like, etc.), Phaedr. 246, a. Aey4Tw vepl avrov, &s UnaffTO* 
ytyvwaicei (admit that each one speaks of it), Th. 2, 48. 



358 SYNTAX. [$ 260 

Rem. 10. In the interrogative formula of the Attic poets: cucrd- 1 b Spacrov , 
— oT<t& ws iro'n)<rov ; (do you know what you are to do ?), the Imperative is to be 
explained as a transition, easy to the Greeks, from the indirect to the direct 
form of speech. It is also explained by considering it the same as Spaaov, 
oT<t& o ; do, — do you know what? The formula is a softer mode of expression 
than the Imp. opaaov or iroi-ncrov. The use of the third Pers. Imp., not only 
in dependent questions, but also in other subordinate sentences, is according to 
the same analogy. Her. 1, 89. vvv 3>i> iroi-naov oooe, e'/TOi ctpeV/ce*, ret iyca Xeyw 
KOLTiaov twv dopvcpopuv iirl irao-nci rfjcri irv\rj<Ti (pvXdtcovs ot Xey6vT<av — , &s 
acpea (sc. xPVH- aTa ) avayKaicos e'xei oeKaTev&rjvcu rep Ai'i (ot Xeyovrwu = fca\ 
ovroi XeySvrwv, who should say, or and let them say). Th. 4, 92. Select, 
or i — Kardo-^waau, they might obtain ! 

Rem. 11. On the transition of the third Pers. Imp. to the second, see § 241, 
Rem. 13, (c) ; on the use of the Put. instead of the Imp., see § 255, 4, and on 
the Opt. with av in the sense of the Imp., § 260, 2, (4) (b). 



§260. The Modes in conne^iion with the Modal 
Adverb av (k4, k£v). 

1. The Modal adverb av (Epic k4{v), Doric k<x, kulv), denotes the 
relation of a conditioning expression or sentence to a condi- 
tioned one ; indicating that the predicate of the sentence to 
which it belongs, is conditioned by another thought either ex- 
pressed or to be supplied. By the particle av, the realization 
of the predicate is made to depend upon the realization of 
another predicate. Therefore, where a predicate is accom- 
panied by av, the predicate is represented as conditioned by 
another thought ; av always refers to a condition. 

2. A complete view of the use of av cannot be presented 
except in connection with conditional sentences. Yet, as it 
is used in all kinds of sentences, it is necessary to explain 
its construction here. It is connected : 

(1) With the Fut. Ind. The predicate expressed by the 
Fut. Ind., seems to the speaker, at the time then present, 
always to depend on conditions and circumstances. Whenever 
this idea of dependence is to be made specially prominent, av 
(Epic k4) can be joined with the Fut. ; yet this construction is 
rare in the Attic dialect. 

Od. p, 540. ei 5' 'OBvaevs eAfroi — , alipd «e o~vv £ ircub'l fitas airor Ifferai 
avdpcov, he would punish. II. £, 267. ctAA' i'fr', iyk 84 k4 toi Xaptrcov jxiav 
dirXorepdccv ddxru) dirviepievcu, dabo, scil.sitibilubuerit. X. Cy. 6. 1,45. vjipicrr^v ovp 
vo/j.i(cov avr6v, ev oT5' on aa/j.evos av Trpbs dvSpa, olos au el, air a A Xayl) a er a i 
(so the MSS.). 7. 5, 21. brav Se /cat a'iaSoovTat rj/xas evdov ovras, ttoXv Sc en /xaXXov, 
J) vvv, axpe7ot iaovrai virb tov iiareirXrixSai (&v is wanting in only two MSS.). 



i 260.] MODAL ADVERB dv. 359 

Remark 1. With the Pres. and Ferf. Ind., dv is not used. For that which 
the speaker expresses as a present object, cannot at the same time be expressed 
as something, the realization of which is dependent on another thought. In 
those passages where dv is found with the Pres. or Perf. Ind.. either the reading 
is questionable, or dv must be referred to another verb of the sentence, e. g. Ovk 
o78' av el ireia-aifit, (instead of el ireio-cu/jU dv), Eur. Med. 937 : so often vo[x.i(a) dv, 
oifjLai dv and the like followed by an Inf., where dv belongs to the Inf. ; or it is 
to be considered as an elliptical mode of expression, as in X. S. 4, 37. iyoo he 
o'jtw TvoXXa exo>, ws /xoXis avra nal eyco a v avrbs evpiaKoo, I have so many things 
that I with difficult y find them, indeed if I should seek for them myself I should not 
find them. Nor is dv used with the Imp. For what the speaker expresses as 
his immediate will, cannot be considered as dependent on a condition. The 
few passages referred to in proof of the use of dv with the Imp., are all, criti- 
cally considered,, questionable and prove nothing. 

(2) "Av is used with the Ind. of the historical tenses : the 
Aor., Impf. and Plup. : 

(a) To denote that something might take place under a cer- 
tain condition, but did not take place, because the condi- 
tion was not fulfilled. The condition is then expressed 
by et with the Ind. of the historical tenses. 

El tovto eXeyes (eXej-as), fj/xdp raves (% p.apres) dv, i. e. if you said this, 
you were wrong, or if you had said this, you would have been wrong, but now I know 
tha*t you did not say it, consequently you are not wrong; Lat. si hoc dixisses, 
e?rasses (at non dixisti ; ergo non errasti). Ei" ri e\'xo/J.ev, ediSofxev 
(eSopev) dv, if we had anything, we would give it to you, or if we had had any- 
thing, we would have given it to you ; si quid habuissemus, dedissemus. Also with- 
out an antecedent clause, e. g. ixdp-ns dv, laetatus fuisses (scil. si hoc vidisses). 

Rem. 2. Here belong also the expressions, cp 6 u.t\v dv, eyvca ns &v, 
■p cr 3- e t o Tij dv, (per6 tis dv, and the like, as in Latin, putares, crederes, diceres, 
cerneres, videres, you (one) would think, or you (one) would have thought. Here et 
irapriv, el eXeyev, el eiSev, el iSvvaro, and the like, as conditioning antecedent 
clauses, are to be supplied. "Ev&a 877 eyvic 7 is av robs ojxotlixovs TreTraiSev/ue- 
vovs, ws 8e? (turn ver<$ videres, then one might see, were he present), X. Cy. 3. 3, 
70. "Ev&a S77 671/ w ns dv, oaov d£iov e'ir] ?b <piXe?cr&ai dpxovra virb tccv apxofJ-e- 
vwv, 7. 1, 38. Ev&bs avv tovtols elsTT7]dr\(TavTes els rbv irrjXbv Suttov, 7) &s tis av 
Sero, [JLereapovs e'|e/cc> / uicraj' ras a,uct|as (celerius, quam quis crederet), An. 1. 5, 8. 
'Eireppdtxr&r) S 1 d v ns KaKeiva ibwv (one might be encouraged if he saw those 
things), Ag. 1, 27 

Rem. 3. With the Ind. of the historical tenses, dv is often omitted. Then 
the speaker has no reference, in his representation, to the condition contained 
in the protasis or antecedent, on account of which the action expressed in the 
apodosis or conclusion could not be completed, but he emphatically represents 
the predicate 0s an actual fact. X. An. 7. 6, 21. Efaoi S77 tis dv' Ovkovv alaxvvn 
ovtco jxcopoos e^aTvardifxevos ; Nal /J.a Ala 77 cr X vv ' & t x ' ( \ v p-evroi, el virb iroXejxiov ye bvros 
i^r)waT7i^r7]v " (piXcp 8' ovti i^airarav atax^ov jxoi doKe? elvai, 7) e^airaraa^ai. Lycurg. 
Leocr. p. 154, 23. el fxev ovv £a>v ervyxavev 6 'A/xivras, eKelvov avrbv irape ix<$- 
fj.7]V vvv 8e vfiiv KaXS> robs crweiSoTas. The ellipsis of dv is most frequent in 
expressions which denote the idea of necessity, duty, reasonableness, possibili- 
ty, liberty, and inclination, e'. g. xpv v i edei, &cpeXov; with verbal adjectives 
va tcos; with irpo 57) k e, icaipbs 7) v, eitebs $ v, KaXbv % v, alffxpbv $ v, 



360 SYNTAX. [$ 260. 

a^iov %v, KaX&s e?x e,_ e| 7} j/, virripx^v, e/j.eXXev, e/3 o vX6/j,t]v. Lys. 
123,3. XP^v Se ere, et7rep ^crd-a XPVO'TOS, iroXv (mXXov ixt)vvtt,v yeveoStai' vvv Se 
<rov ra epya (pavepd yeyevnrai k. t. A., you ought or you ought to have been 
(oportebat). X. C. 2. 7, 10. el ftev roivvv alffxpov tl efxeXXov ipyao~aoSai, Srava.' 
tov avr avrov irpoai per e ov %v' vvv 5' a jxev Soke? KaXXiaTa kcu TrpeTvccSecrrepa 
yvvaiQv elvai eiricTTavrai, &s eoiKe k. t. A., mors praeferenda erat. So also with 
the Inf. X. C. 1.3, 3. ovTe yap &eo?s e<p7] KaXas ex €LU i el tcus fxeyaXais 
S)-vo-iaLS fxaXXov -/) reus cr/uLiKpcus exaipov, for he said it would not be proper for the 
gods, if, etc. Very often without an antecedent sentence, e. g. alaxpov fiv 
TavTa iroie'iv, turpe erat, it would be base, icould have been; i^rjv ravra iroielv 
licebat, it icould be lawful ; KaXw s elx e • Comp. with the above the use of the 
Ind. in Latin, where the Subj. might have been expected, in such expressions as 
aequum, justum, rectum est, it icould be proper, longum est, it would be tedious, and 
the participle in dus in the conclusion of a conditional clause, as Si JRomae 
Cn. Pompeius privatus esset, taraen is erat deligexdes. 

Rem. 4. In all the above expressions, however, &v can be used ; so also in 
Latin, the Subj. is sometimes found instead of the Ind. Dem. Phil. 1. 40, 1. 
el yap 4k tov irpoeXTjXv^oTOS x?°' vov T " SeovTa ovtol avve^ovXevaav, ovdev av 
vjxas vvv eSei flovXev ecr& ai. So also in Lat. the Subj. is used instead of the 
Ind. 

Rem. 5. The Pres. tense of xp"h-> 5e?, irposriKei, KaX&s ex<=£, etc., is used of 
things which can yet take place. Comp. possum commemorare, which implies 
that I still can do the act, and poteram commemorare, which implies that I 
cannot do it. 

Rem. 6. "Av is very naturally omitted, if in the apodosis there is an Ind. 
of an historical tense of the verb klvSv vve iv, to be in danger, to seem, since 
the verb by itself implies that the action expressed by the Inf. connected with.it, 
did not take place ; for what is only in danger of occurring, actually does not 
occur. Th. 3, 74. 7] ttoXls i Kivdvvevffe iracra Sia<pbapr\vai, el dvepios eireyevero 
rfi <pXoy\ eiritpopos is avrr]v, the whole city was or would have been in danger 
of destruction, if Aeschin. c. Ctes. 515, R. el lit] opofxep lioXis Qecpvyoixev els 
AeXcpovs, e k ivSwevaa/xev airoXeoSrai. So if in the apodosis, bxiyov, 
I* ik pod, raxa,. «em%, a/»!osf, are joined with the Ind. of a historical tense 
in the concluding clause ; for what only nearly takes place, actually does 
not take place, hence the Ind. without av is appropriate in both these" cases. 
Plat. Symp. p. 198, C. eyeeye evSvij.oviJ.evos, on avrbs oi>x olos t' eaotjaL ovS' iyyvs 
TovTcuv obSev KaXbv elirelv, vit" 1 alffx&viis bxiyov air oS pas o5 x 6 /J. 7} v, et ttk] eJxov, 
I had almost fed for shame, if. Without a protasis, e. g. X. Cy. 1.4, 8. Ka'i irecs 
diaTTTjb'oiv avT<5 6 'lttttos Triirrei eis yovara, KaX fiiKpov Ka.Ke7vov e |er paxv A i- 
c e v. Comp. the Lat. prope (paene) cecidi, I came near falling. 

(ft) To denote that an action takes place (is repeated), in 
certain cases, and under certain circumstances. The his- 
torical tense in the principal clause is then commonly the 
Impf. The condition under which the action is repeated, 
is expressed by a subordinate clause with et, ore, etc. and 
the Opt. ; the condition, however, is often omitted. 

Elirev av, he was accustomed to say, he would say as often as this or that happened, 
as often as it was necessary, and the like. X. C. 4. 6, 13. el Se ris airy ivepi tov 
avT iXeyo i, eirl ttjv vno&eaiv iw avrjyev av irdvT a tov x6yov, as often as 
one contradicted him, he would (he was accustomed to} carry back the whole argument 
to the original proposition. 1.3,4. el Se ti S6£eiev avT§ ('SuKpaTei) arifxalveo-' 



§ 260.] MODAL ADVERB dv. 361 

&ai irapa twv &eu>v, tjttov av eTrela&r] irapa ra o-ri/j-aivofxeva Troirjaai, T] et ri. 
avrbv eTre&ev ooov AafieTv rjyefx.6va TvcpXbv — olvt\ fiSXeirovTOs. An. 2. 3, 11. eX ru 
ai/T$ doKoir) twv trpbs tovto TeTay/nevcov fiXaneveiv, e irate v dv, he would beat 
him. 1. 5, 2. oi /j.ev ovoi, eVei ris Sicokol, Trpo5pa/x6vTes av ear atfav, as often as 
any one pursued them, they would stop (the Plup. having the sense of the Impf. 
$ 255, Rem. 3). 3. 4, 22., 6it6t€ Se dido'xoiev at irXevpal rod -KXaiffiov, tq fieffop 
tlv e^eirifiiiXao'av. 

3. With the Subjunctive, to represent the future conception, 
which the Greek expresses by the Sub. [$ 257, 1, (a)], as con- 
ditional, and depending on circumstances. The following cases 
are to be distinguished : 

(a) The deliberative Subj. \k 159, 1, (b)], takes dv, though but 
seldom in direct, more frequently in indirect questions, when 
a condition is to be referred to. 

Ti iror av ovv Aeycc/xev; ( what shall we therefore say, if the thing is so 1 ) 
etc. PI. L. 655, c. ey& yap tovto, 5 HpoTay6pa, ouk ^^.-nv SidaKTbv elvai, o~ol Se 
KeyovTi ovk ex« forcws av airiffTco (i. e. ei av Aeyeis), I know not howl could 
disbelieve it, if you say so, Prot. 319, b. *Av 5' av rj/j-eTs viKwfxev, \e\vfxevrjs tt\s 
yecpvpas oi>x e^ovaiv eicelvoi, ttirov av (pvycoa iv, X. An. 2. 4, 20. Et Se aoi fify 
So/ce?, aKetyai, eav (i. e. et av) T^Se aoi jjlciKXov ape a Ktj, C. 4. 4, 12. 

(b) The Subj., which is often used in the Homeric language instead of the 
Put. Ind. (§ 259, Eem. 4), is frequently found with 'av, which is to be explained 
in the same manner as with the Put. Ind. [No. 2, (1)]. Et Se' «:e fx^ dwuaiv, e'yw 
Se Kev ai>TOs e\ca/j.ai II. a, 137, then I myself will [without doubt) take it, less 
direct than the Put. Ovk dv toi xpaL°~F-V xifrapis, II. y, 54. 

(c) In subordinate clauses. In this case, dv usually stands 
with the conjunction of the subordinate clause, or combines 
with the conjunction and forms one word. 

In this way originate edv (from el 'av), endv (from eVel dv), orav (from ore dv), 
dirSrav (from SirSre av), irp\v dv, ev& 'av, o&i dv, ov dv, oirov av, 61 'dv, '6ttol dv, rj 
&v, oirn dv, o&ev dv, 6ir6^ev as, etc., l bs dv (quicunque or si quis),6tos dv, oirolos 'dv, 
(Laos dv, oiroaos dv, etc. In all these expressions, a possible assumption is de- 
noted ; it is assumed that something is possible in the future ; the future occur- 
rence of it depends upon the assumption of the speaker, i. e. the speaker 
assumes and expects that it will be, e. g. eav tovto \eyns, if you say, shall say 
t/iis (viz. according to my assumption, or as I expect you will), a/j-apT-fiav, you 
will be wrong. 

(4) With the Opt., but not with the Opt. Fut. 
(a) The Opt. with dv must always be considered as the principal clause of a 
conditional sentence, even if the condition is omitted, e. g. ei tl exois, Sot^s &v t 

31 



362 syntax. [$ 260. 

if you had anything, you would give it (you may perhaps have something, and 
then you may give it to me). The Attic "writers in particular, use this mode 
of expression, to denote firmly established and definite opinions and views of 
anything, and even to denote actual facts with a degree of reserve, moderation 
and modesty. A negation is here expressed by ov(k). Her. 3, 82. avSpbs hbs, 
tov apicrrov (i. c. et dpiffTos elrj) ovDev &/jLeivov av (pave in, nothing would seem 
better than. 7, 184. &v$pes av elev iv avroTcri recraepes /xvpidBes teal eiKocri, there 
may have been two hundred and forty thousand men. 5, 9. yevoiro S' av irav iv 
tw p.fxKpca xpova>, all might happen. X. Cy. 1, 2, 11. frnpuvres ovk av apiar-fi- 
paiev, while hunting they would not breakfast = they do not breakfast. 13. 
e7re idav ret, rrevre ical (Hkoctlv %tt) BiareXecroicnv, etnerav fiev av ovtoi irXei6v n 
yeyovores 7) TrevTrjKOVTa %rr\ arrb yzveas. PL Gorg. 502, d. Arj/j-vyopla apa ris 

i<TTLV 7] TTOIVTIKT]. Call. QaiVeTCU. SOCT. OvKOVV 7J p7]T0piK7j Zr]jX7]yOpia O.V 6i77. 

By the Opt. with av, Homer [§ 339, 3, (a) (£)] and Herodotus often denote a 
supposition respecting something that is past. Her. 9, 71. ravra /j.ev nal (p&6vcp 
av elvoiev, they might have said these things from envy. 1, 2. slyjcrav IT at 
oZtol Kprjres, these might have been Cretans. 

Eem. 7. If the Opt. is used without 'av, as § 259, 3, (a), the action is ex- 
pressed with greater emphasis and definiteness, since the speaker has no refer- 
ence to the conditioning circumstances, which might prevent the realization of 
the thing conceived. Comp. p e?a &e6s y i&eXcov Kal rriXo&ev avBpa cradxrai, 
the propitious deity, I think, can save, Od. y, 231, and aaaxrai civ, could, 
might save, if he wished. Hence the omission of av in the freer language of 
poetry, is far more frequent than in prose, which has more regard to the actual 
relation of the things described. 

(b) So also the Opt. is used with av, as a more modest and 
mild expression of a command or request, since the thing de- 
sired is represented as dependent on the will of the person 
addressed and is thereby made conditional. Here also a nega- 
tion is expressed by ov(k). 

PL Phaedr. 227, c. Xeyois &v instead of X4ye (properly, you may speak, if you 
choose). Tim. 19, o. aKovoir av tJSt} ?a fiera ravra Trepl rrjs iroXneias, you 
might hear then, instead of hear then. S. El. 1491. x^P ? 5 & v -> y ou might go. II. 
/3, 250. with a degree of irony, Qepcrlr — i'cr^eo — .' ob yap iya> cr4o cpn/j-l x e P ei ^- 
repov {iporbv uXXov e/JL/JLevai — ' tb ovk av fiaaiXrjas ava cttojx ex w!/ ayopei- 
01s, no! crcpiv ovelded re Trpocpepois, v6crrov re cbvXacrcr is! instead of ^77 
ay 6peve, etc., you should not harangue, nor be heaping up reproaches, etc. In the form 
of a question, X. Hier. 1,1. ap av /.loi i&eX-hcrais, 3> 'iepcov, o~L-nyr,cracr&ai, a 
cIkos eldivai ce £4Xtiov i/xov ; would you be inclined, Y\z.,if I should ask you. With 
ov in the form of a question, II. e, 456. ov k av 877 rove? dvSpa fiaxv^ ip vera 10 
p.eT€XSd>v ; might you not, could you not restrain the man, instead of, restrain him. 
In a sharper and more urgent tone as an exclamation, II. w, 263. ovk ov Si) 
p.01 dfxa^av icporrXicrcraiTe rdxt-orra, ravrd Te iravT iiri&elre, "va 7rpji<r<r<*- 
uev 6B0I0 ; would you not get ready the chariot, if I commanded it ? 



} 260.] MODAL ADVERB <xV. 363 

(c) The Optative with aV has the same force in interrogative 
as in other sentences, and may commonly be translated by the 
auxiliaries can, could, would. 

II. w, 367. e'/ t'ls ere ?8olto . . , ris hu d-f) roi v6os efy ,- how would you then feel f 
II. t, 90. aXXa tI kcv p el-ai/xi; what could I do ? S. Ph. 1393. rl 57jt av r}/xe?s 
Spwfiev; Dem. Phil. 1, p. 43, 10. Xeyerai tl Kaiv6v; yivoiTO yap &v ti Kaivd- 
repov, $) Maicedcbv avrjp ' A&nvaiovs KaTarroXe^wv ; can there be any stranger news 
than — ? 

Rem. 8. Comp. iroi ris cpevyti ,- whither does one flee ? Arist. Plut. 438. troi 
tls cpvyoi ; whither may one flee ? (more definite than with &v). Eur. Or. 598. 
■no? tis 'av <pvyoi ; whither would one flee ? whither could one flee ? where in the 
world could he flee ? S. Aj. 403. trot tis ovv <pvyp ; whither shall one flee or is one 
to flee ? 

(d) The Dramatists, particularly, often express a wish, in the 
form of a question, by 7reos and the Optative with aV, it being 
asked how something might, could, would take place under a 
given condition. 

Soph. Aj. 338. 8> ZeO, — it as av tov aljJLvXdoTaTov . . oXeacas t4Xos &6.voi/Xi 
kovt6s ; how might, could, would I die ? instead of, that I might die ! Eur. Ale. 
867. Trias av oXoifj.nv; PI. Euthyd. 275, c. tt&s av KaXcas coi 5 inyncal- 
finv ; how can I appropriately describe to you ? that I could! 

Rem. 9. But the Opt. in itself, as the expression of a wish, does not take 
the conditioning adverb av [§ 259,3, (b)]. II. £, 281. &s k4 ol av&i ya?a x^" 01 
is not properly expressed as a wish, but as a doubtful condition, thus (&s = 
ovrcas) the earth should then open for him. 

(5) The Inf. and Part, take av (zee), when the finite verb, which 
stands instead of the Inf. and Part., would take it : 

(a) The Inf. with &v after verba sentiendi and declarandi, consequently the Inf. 
Pres. and Aor. with &v, instead of the Ind. Pres. and Aor. with &v, or instead of 
the Opt. Impf. and Aor. with &v in direct discourse ; the same principle holds 
when the Inf. is used as a substantive. The Inf. Perfl with &v instead of the 
Ind. and Opt. Plup. with 'av, is more seldom. The Inf. Fut. with av is rare in 
Attic ; instead of it the Inf. Aor. or even the Pres. with &v is commonly used. 

E? ti elxev, tcpn, Sovvai 'av ( Oratio recta : e'/ ti e?xov, eSco/ca 'av), he said that 
if he had anything, he would have given it, dixit, se, si quid habuisset, daturum fuisse. 
Ei ti ex°h £(£77, Sovvai av (Or. recta : e?Ti '4xoip-i, Soiyv &v), dixit, se, si quid haberet, 
daturum, esse. 5 E7c\> SokSj deicaKis a v Kara, ttjs yr\s KaTaduvat y'lSiov, $) oc/>fr?}- 
vai ovtw TaireivSs, X. Cy. 5. 5, 9 (Or. recta: Senatcis av airo&dvo i/.u r)8iov, fj 
6<p&ztwv), methinks I would rather sink ten times beneath the earth, than to be seen in 
this humble condition. 'Hyodfj.ai . . ovk av aKpirovs avrovs aivcaXoX4v ai, aXXa 
tV irposrjKovcrav Sikvv SeScu/c 4vai, Lys- 27, 8 (Or. recta : ovk av cWoAcoAe- 
G av — e&eSco/cecrai/ ci p) . Olfxai yap ovk av axapiaTcos fxoi e. £ e i v, I think you 
mould not be unthankful to me, if I entreated the king, etc., ( Or. recta : ovk av dx«* 



364 SYNTAX. [§ 261 

piaTws fxoi e'xoire or (r%o 177x6, but not e£on-e, see No. 4). "Ooq> yap fielfa 
Svvafiiv e^ei >? apxhi roaovTca /xaWov av 7]yf)(raT0 avrrjv Kal Kar airX'h |e iv robs 
iroXiTas, R. L. 8. 3. Uws exets irphs rb e&e\eiv av ievai &k\t)7os eVl helirvov; 
(the same as ?ra>y ex e ' s Ttpbs tovto Sn i&e\ois av lei/ai <xk\7)Tos iirl Seiirvov',) 
PI. Symp. 174, b. Et oi>v Xeyoifii, ev oils', on drifi'nyope'iv dv fie <pal*)S, PI 
R. 350, e. 

Eem. 10. In Latin the conditioned Inf. is expressed as follows : 
ypdcpeiv dv = scripturum esse, yeypa<pevat dv = scripturum fuisse, 
ypd^iat av — (a) scripturum fuisse, or (b) as Pres., scripturum esse, 
ypdipeiv dv = scripturum fore. 

(b) The Participle with dv after verba sentiendi, or when the Participle takes 
the place of an adverbial subordinate clause. The same principles hold here 
as with the Inf. The Fut. Part, with dv is rare in Attic Greek (the reading is 
commonly doubtful when it occurs) : instead of the Fut. Part., the Aor. or 
even the Pres. with dv, is generally used. 

Her. 7, 15. evpiaKco Se ude av yiv6fieva ravra, el \dfiois tt]V ifirjv (TKevi\v 
(reperio, sic haec futura esse, si sumas vestes meas). X. C. 2. 2, 3. al iroXeis 
eVl ro7s jxeyicrrois dZiK-r)fxao~i {rifiiav frdvarov TreTroi7]Ka<rtv, o>s ovk av fiel£ovos KaKov 
<p6fiq> r\fv aZtKiav Travaovr e s [existimantes se non gravioris mali metu injuriam 
COERCITUROS FORE, thinking that they could deter from crime by the fear of no 
greater evil). Th. 6,38. ovre ovra, ovre av yevSfieva Xoyoiroiovci. i. e. a 
otfre io*Tiv, ovr av y evo it 0, they fabricate what neither is nor will be). Isocr. 
Phil. 133. ES I0S1 firjdev dv fie rovrcav eir ix GL P'h ~ avr & cre Trs'&ti-v, el Svvao~- 
reiav fiovov Kal ttXovtov eccpoov e| avrwv yevnaofievov (= on eir e xeipV °~ a dv). 
PI. Phil. 52, c. SiaKeKpifie&a X 00 ?^ Tc * s T6 ^a^apas T]5ovas Kal ras crx^bv aKct&a/>- 
rovs op&cas av Aex^6io-as(= Kal at ffx^bv aKafraproi op&a>s av \ex&e7ev). 
So, also, with the case absolute : X. An. 5. 2, 8. eo~KOTre7ro, izSrepov e'l-n Kpe7rrop 
airdyeiv Kal robs Siafiefin^Tas, 7) Kal robs oirXiras o~iaf3if3d£eiv, ws d\6vTOS av 
rod x Cl >P'- ou ( — vofxifav, on rb x (a P L0V a\olr\ dv). 



$ 261. Position and Rej^etition of av. "Av luithout a 

Verb. 

1. With the combination mentioned in 260, (3), c, as os dv, irplv dv, small 
particles like Se, re, fiev, yap, sometimes come between, e. g. hs 8' dv. 

2. As dv represents the predicate as conditional, it ought properly to be joined 
with the predicate, e. g. Xeyoifii dv, eheyov dv ; yet it commonly follows that 
member of a sentence which is to be made emphatic, e. g. PI. Crito. 53, c. 
Kal ovk oXei do-xVf^ov av <pave7a&ai rb rod 'XcoKpdrovs irpayfia. Hence it is 
regularly joined to such words also as change the idea of the sentence, viz., to 
negative adverbs and interrogatives, e. g. ovk dv, ou8' dv, ovttot dv, ovSeTror dv, 
etc. — ris dv, ri dv, ri 8' dv, n S7JV dv, ttws dv, ttcDs yap dv, &p dv, etc. ; — also 
to adverbs of place, time, manner, and other adverbs, which, in various ways 
modify the expression contained in the predicate and define it more exactly, 



262.] 



ATTRIBUTIVE CONSTRUCTION. 



365 



e. g. ivrav&a av, r6r dv, cIkStus dv, ftrwsr dv, rdtf dv, jxaMo'T dv, 7jkio~t dv, /x6\is 
dv, crxohfj dv, paUws dv, paar dv, rdxicrr dv, <r<po$p dv, ydews dv, icdv (instead 
of Kal dv, ctiam, vel), etc. 

Remark 1. In certain constructions, the dv belonging to the Opt. is re- 
moved from the dependent clause, and joined with the principal clause ; thi8 
is particularly the case in the phrase, ovk oIS' av el. PL Tim. 26, b. iyk ydp, 
a fjiev x^ s tficoucra, ovk av ailda el Svvaifxrjv divavra iv fJ-v-fifxr) iraKiv \af$e?v. 

Rem. 2. In certain parenthetic sentences, the dv belonging to the Opt. is 
placed first; thus particularly, dv tis e"ncoi, <pair}. PI. Phaed. 87, a. ri ovv (,) air 
(pair] 6 \6yos (,) en dmo-rels ; 

3. "Av is very often repeated in the same sentence (/ce very seldom). The 
reason of this is two-fold : 

(a) It is used once at the beginning of the sentence, in order to show, in 
the outset, that the predicate is conditional. This is particularly the case, 
when the principal sentence is divided by intervening subordinate clauses, or 
when several words precede the conditioned verb to which dv belongs. #st' 
dv, el aSevos Xa^oifxi dr]\d!)0~aifi av oT' aureus <ppovu, S. El. 333. 

(b) The second reason is a rhetorical one. "Av is joined with the word 
which requires to be made emphatic. If the rhetorical emphasis belongs to 
several words in one sentence, dv can be repeated with each. But besides this, 
dv can be again placed after the conditioned verb to which it properly belongs. 
PL Apol. 35, d. (Tac/>ws yap dv, el Trei&OLfAi v/xas, freobs av StSdcrKoifii fify 
7)ye?o~&ai vfxas elvai. Eur. Ti*oad. 1244. a<pave7s av ovres ovk av v/j.v7]&e?fjiey 
av Movo-ais. 

Rem. 3. Homer sometimes joins the weaker k4 with dv, in order to make 
the conditionality or contingency still more prominent. II. v, 127, sq. Xo-ravro 
(pd\ayyes . . , as ovt dv Kev "Aprjs ovdaairo fxere^ccv, ovre k\ 'A&yvair]. 

4. "Av is very frequently found with a conjunction or a relative without a 
verb, when the verb can be easily supplied from the context ; thus especially 
&s dv, & strep dv el, irws yap dv, irws 5* ovk dv, '6 sire p dv and the 
like, ^ofiov/xevos, &sirep hv el Tra?s (i. e. ibsirep av <poj3o?TO, el irats efy), PL 
Gorg. 479, a. 



CHAPTER II. 

§262. The Attributive Construction. 

Attributives serve to explain more definitely the idea 
contained in the substantive to which they belong, e. g. 
to k a X 6 v poBov, 6 \x e 7 a 9 7rat?. The attributive may be • 

a. An adjective or participle, e. g. to kclXov po&ov, tq 
& a \ X v aifeo? ; 

31* 



366 syntax. l J 263 

b. A substantive in the genitive, e. g. ol rod SivSpov 
Kapirol) 

c. A substantive with a preposition, e. g. rj tt pbs tt)v 
it 6\lv 686$ ; 

d. An adverb, e. g. ol vvv av^ipcoiroL ; 

e. A substantive in apposition, e. g. Kpolaos, 6 /SacrtAev?. 



§ 263. Ellipsis of the Substantive to which the 
Attributive belongs. 

When the substantive which is to be mor« fully explained by the attributive, 
contains a general idea, or one Avhich can be easily supplied from the context, 
or is indicated by some word of the sentence, or, by frequent usage in a particu- 
lar connection, may be supposed to be known, then the substantive, as the 
less important member in the attributive relation, is often omitted, and the 
adjective or participle becomes a substantive. Substantives which are often 
omitted with attributive adjectives, are : du&pwiros, 6,i>&pwiroi, avf)p, auSpes, ywr), 
yvvcuK.es, xp^i"oc, XP'hl JLa - Ta > ^pay/Atx, irpdy/JLara, r)/J.epa, yr), %a>pa, fxoipa, o$6s, %ei/>, 
yvccfx.7], tyrjcpos, rixvn, 7r6\efios, etc. ; those omitted Avith the attributive genitive are : 
var-ftp, /j.rjT7)p, vlos, ircus, ^rvydTnp, a8e\(p6s, avr)p (husband), ywr) (wife), olicia, 
6!kos, x^P a > 7V (land). The substantive is omitted with the following classes 
of words : 

a. The attributive adjective, adjective pronoun, and participle. 

(a) Such as denote persons : ol $7/771-01, mortales; ol o~o<pol, ol yeivd/xevoi (instead 
of yovtis) '. ol exovres, the rich; ol <pv\d.TTOVTes (cpvXaKes) ; ol ducdCovres, judges ; 
ol XiyopTts, orators, etc. 

(/3) Such as denote names of things : (a) appellatives : to. fjfisrepa (xpr)ixaTa), res 
nostrae ; ra ifxd, res meae, everything which relates to me ; to. KaXa, res pulchrae ; t& 
icaicd, mala (§ 243, 4), 77 vcrrepala, 77 iiriovo-a, r) irpcarr), SevTepa, etc. (rj/j-epa) ; 7] 
iroXtfxia (x<*>pa), the enemy' 's country ; 77 (ptXia, a friendly country ; 77 oiKOv/xevn (77?), 
the inhabited earth; 77 dvvdpos (yr\), a desert; 77 ev&e?a (586s); rrjv raxicrriv, quam 
celerrime ; ttjv Kar\v (ixotpav) airodidovai ; 77 Treirpa/Aej/ri (/xo?pa) ; 77 8e£id, 77 apio-repd 
(%eto); r) viK&cra (yva>i/.r)) ; ttjv ivavriav (rpr)(poy) Ti&ea&cu) 77 prjTopiKr) (rexvn). 

(b) Abstracts: to KaX6v, to ay c&6v, or Taya&Sv, the beautiful, the good; to 
£vtvx*s, good fortune ; to avaiaSrriTov, want of feeling ; to koiv6v, the common 
wealth ( e. g. tu>v 'S.ajxiwv) ; to Srapaovv, confidence. 

(c) Collective nouns denoting persons: to svolvtiov, the enemy ; to viv-nKoou, 
the subjects. Adjectives in - ik6u especially belong here, e. g. to -koXitlkov, tlu 
citizens; to ottXitikov, the heavy armed; to oIkctikov, the servants; to 'EXXtjulkop, 
to PapPapucSv, Tb Ittttik6u, etc. The plural of adjectives of this ending is often 
used to denote a number, collection, or series of single events, e. g. to Tpcai'icd, 
the Trojan war ; to 'EXXrjvucd, the Grecian history; to. vavTiicd, naval war. but also 
naval affairs. 



$ 264.] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 367 

b. The attributive genitive also is used without the governing substantive, 
e. g. 'AXe&vopos, 6 QiXiirnov (vl6s), Mcua fj ''ArXavros (frvydrrip) ; then with the 
prepositions iu, els and e/c with the Gen. of a person to denote his abode, e. g. 
ev adov {o'lko}) elvai; els qdov (oIkov) eAd-elV ; els StSacr/cciAcoz/ (poiruv, to go to the 
t< etcher's ; els YlXdrcavos (poirau, ireiiireiv, to go or send to Plato's ; eK didao-naXow 
airaWarreaSrai, PI. Protag. 326. c. to leave school; els rrju Kvpov (yr)v) eA&eiv; 
to. rr)s tu%tjs, the events of fortune ; ra rrjs ir6\ecos, the affairs of state ; ra rod 
TroKefiov, the whole extent of the war ; ra 'AS-nvaioov (ppoveiv, ab Atheniensium par- 
tibus stare; ra rrjs opyrjs, ra rrjs ep.ireipias, to t&v eTri&v/j.ia>i> (that which pertains 
to anger, the nature or essence of anger, etc.) ; rb rap iraidcop, the custom of boys; 
rb roop aXiewv. 

c. The attributive adverb is used without a substantive, e. g. ol vvv, oi rore, ol 
nd\ai, ot ep&dde ('dpfrpairoi), ra o'ikoi (irpdy/nara), res domesticae, r) e£r)s, (yfiepa), 
the following dag, etc. 

d. The attributive substantive or substantive pronoun with the preposition 
jy which it is governed, e. g. ot /cafr' Tinas, ol i<t> y r)p.5iv, our contemporaries ; — oi 
afi(pi or irepl riva, e. g. Tixdrwpa, signifies (a) a person with his companions, 
followers, or scholars ; ot afx(pl Xleio'lo'rpa.rov, Pisistratus and his troops ; ot a/jupl 
®aXr)p, Thales and other philosophers of his school ; T Apa Xeyeis rrjv roov &eap 
KplffLV, 7]v ol irepl Kenpoira 5t' aperrjp inplvav, which Cecrops and his tribunal 
on account of their excellence, decided, X. C. 3. 5, 10. — (b) more seldom the com- 
panions, followers, or scholars alone, without the person named. — Further, ol 
<tvv rivi, ol [xerd ripos, the followers, etc. of any one ; ol vir6 ripi, the subjects of 
any one ; ol airo rivos, asseclae, or descendants of one ; oi ev 'dcrrei ; ot irepl (piXoao- 
(plav ; ot irepl rrjp &r)pap ; oi a^<pl rbv irSXefiop, etc.; — ra 7iapd ripos, intelligence 
respecting any one, or commands of any one; — rb tear 4/j.e, rb eV ifie, as far as in 
my power, as far as in me lies. 

§ 264. a. Attributive Adjective. 

1. The attributive adjective (participle, adjective pronoun 
and numeral), expresses a quality which belongs to an object, 
as the beautiful and blooming rose, On the agreement of the 
adjective with the word which it defines, see k 240. 

Remark 1. The participles Xey6^epos and KaXov/nepos are used, where the 
Latin has qui dicitur, vocatur, quern dicunt, vocant, etc., and the English the 
phrase so-called, as it is called, are called, etc., e. g. AaKedaifiopioi rbv lepbv KaXov- 
fievou irSXefiop iarpdreucrav (the Sacred war, as it is called, or the so-called Sacred 
war), Th. 1, 112. 2/co7iw, ottccs 6 itaXov fiepos vwb rwv aotyiaroop Koa/xos e<pv 
(the k6o- (jlos as it is called by the sophists), X. C. 1. 1, 11. 

Rem. 2. It has already been stated (§ 245, Rem. 5), that the adjectives 
tfucpos, |UeVos, e<rx aT0S > must in certain cases be translated into English by 
substantives. 

Rem. 3. Many personal nouns which denote an employment, station or 
age, are treated as adjectives, and the word avi)p is joined with them, if the 
man is to be considered in relation to his employment, station or age ; but 



368 syntax. r$ 264, 

the word avrjp is omitted, if the man is considered as merely performing 
the duties of a particular office or employment. Thus avrjp jxavris signifies a 
man who is by profession a prophet, and itavTis without avrip, a man who, for 
the time being, acts as a prophet ; thus av s np fiao-iXevs, av7]p rvpavvos, au^p ttoi- 
utjp, av^p prjTcop, av)]p TrpzcrfivTns, av^p veavias, ypavs yvvrj, etc. ; also in the 
respectful form of address among the Attic orators and historians, e. g. avdpes 
SiKaa-rai, 'avdpes arpariwrcu. So likewise with national names, e. g. avyjp 'A&tj- 
valos, 'ApS-npirris. This usage is still more extensive in poetry. See Larger 
Grammar, Part II. § 477. 

2. When two or more attributive adjectives belong to a sub- 
stantive, the relation is two-fold. The relation is : (a) coordinate, 
when each adjective is equally a more full explanation of the 
substantive ; then the adjectives are commonly connected by 
nut, re — ko.L\ where there are several adjectives, the con- 
nective is used only before the last ; (b) subordinate, when a 
substantive with one of the adjectives forms, as it were, a 
single idea, and is more definitely denned by another adjective. 
In this case there is no connective between the two adjec- 
tives. The subordinate relation occurs particularly when pro- 
nouns, numerals, adjectives of time, place, and material are 
joined with other adjectives. 

1,o0KC3iT7}s aya&bs Kai ao<pbs avr]p i\v. II o XX ol aya&ol tii/dpes or iroXXol 
aya&o* Kai aocpol avdpes. Ho XX a, KaXa. epya. 'O i fib s ercupos crocpds. 
Ovrr ; 6 aurjp hya&os. TpeTs aya&ol &vdpes. Tb Trpcarov KaXbu irpay/j.a. 
Od. i, 322, sq. Icrrbs vr\bs ieiKOcropoio fAeXaivr) s. 

Rem. 4. The numeral iroXXol is used in Greek, like multi in Latin, 
generally in the coordinate relation, and in this way the idea of plurality is 
made emphatic, while the English commonly uses the subordinate, e. g. iroXXa 
/ecu KaXa epya, multa et praeclara facinora. The Greek and Latin is many and 
noble deeds, the English commonly many noble deeds. 

Rem. 5. In the Greek, the attributive adjective very frequently takes the 
force of a substantive, and the substantive to which the adjective properly 
belongs, is put in the attributive genitive. Here the following eases are to 
be distinguished : 

a. The substantive stands with the plural adjective which takes the gender 
of the substantive, e. g. ol xpVO'Tol tu>v av&pdoTroou ; to. arrovSa7a ruu irpay^aTwu. 

b. The adjective which becomes a substantive is sometimes in the Neut. 
Sing., sometimes also in the Neut. PI. Th. 1. 118, ol 'A^vua?oi i-irl jx4ya 
ixwpyo'av Bvud/jiecos (= iirl fxeyaX-qv hvvafxiv), had attained a high degree of 
power. Thus many phrases with irav, e. g. els irav kclkov {in omne genus 
ailamitatis) a<piKveiarStai' } eV Travrl icaKov elvai] els irav irpoeXrjXv^e fxox^V p' ias - 
Moreover, the Neut. pronoun is very frequently joined with the genitive, espe- 
cially in prose. Th. 1,49. %vveireo~ou is tovto avay Kt] s, to this degree of 
necessity. X. An. 1. 7, 5. iu toiovto) rod kivSvvov. Dem. Ph. 1,51. eU 
r oi>& v fipe.us iXr]Xv&ev. 

c. The substantive is made to depend upon the adjective in the Sing, which 
takes the gender of the substantive which it governs, instead of being in the 



<i 264.] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 369 

Neut, e. g. 7] iroWr) rrjs IleXo-irovurjarov instead of rb ttoXv ttjs n. The word 
lflp.i(Tv s is most frequently used in this manner, often also iroXv s, ir\el<»v, 
ir\e?(rros and other superlatives, e. g. 6 rjuicvs rod xp^ov. iirl rfj t) u i a" e ( a 
rrjs yrjs. X. Cy. 4. 5, 1. ireuTrere rov cirov rbv t^/xicvv, ra>v &prav robs 
ijfMlaeis. Th. 7, 3. rr]V ir\eio~r7)v rrjs err par las irapira^e : so iroWr} rrjs 
X(*> pas, rbv ir\€t<rrov rod xp6vov. Th. 1, 2. rrjs yrjs r) apiar-n aei ras [xera- 
/SoAas ruv olKrjropcav eT^ey. 

3. The Greek, like the Latin, frequently uses the attributive 
adjective to define the subject or object, not by itself, but only 
in reference to the predicate. In this way the designations 
of place, time, number, also a reason, condition, and manner 
can be expressed by adjectives, which agree with a substan- 
tive in gender, number, and case. 

a. Adjectives of place and order. Od. <p, 146. T^e /xvxoiraros cuei in- 
stead of iv uvxoi.ra.Ta>. Also, irpcaros, rrp6repos (of two), vararos, vcrrepos (of 
two), uicos, reXevralos, irXayios, uerewpos, &Kpos, frvpalos, &a\d<r<rios, etc. S 
Ant. 785. (poiras vire pir6vr to s instead of virep rbv ir6vrov. Th. 1, 134. %vq 
ur) virai&pios raXanrupoir), that he might not suffer in the open air. Here belong 
also ir as, eKa<TTos, eicdrepos, &iA<pa, aucporepos, etc. § 246, 5, 6 and 7. 

b. Adjectives of time, e. g. 6\pios, opfrpios, ea&ivSs, eairepios, vixws, (xecovvKTios, 
bepivos, x& l C° s i ^apiv6s, x €l H- € P lv ^ s > eic -t especially those in -a To s, e. g. devrepalos, 
rpira?os, etc., XP^ V10S (after a bng time), etc. II. a, 497. ijepir) S 1 avefirj ueyav 
ovpavov instead of r)pi, she went early. X. An. 4. 1, 5. <r Kor talo vs 5ieX&e7v 
rb ireS'iov, to pass through the plain in the darlc. Terapralos, rreuTrraios acpi- 
Kero, he came on the fourth, fifth day ; XP° V l0S ^A&ep, after a long time. 

c. Adjectives of manner and other relations, e. g. d£vs, ra%"s, a'upvidios, 
fSpadvs, inroffirovSos, &cnrov§os, opKtos] zkwv, £&€Xovo~ios, 'olkwv, doxvos, £&eXovrr)s 
t\<tvxos\ ffvxvis, ttoXvs, a&p6os, ttvkvSs, (rirdvios, uovos, e. g. urr6o"rrovdo i airrje- 
o-av = vnb ffirovhals, they wend away under a truce. Th. 1, 63. robs venpovs 
vTToo"ir6vb*ovs air48oo-av roils Horidaidrais, they gave up the dead under the truce. 

Rem. 6. But when the qualifying words cannot at the same time express 
a quality of the subject or object, but belong solely to the predicate, the 
adverb must be used, e. g. koAws aSeis, you sing beautifully (not naXbs <j8eis, 
for the person who sings beautifully, is not necessarily beautiful). When the 
Greeks expressed such designations of place and time, as properly belong to the 
predicate, by adjectives, it is to be explained as resulting from their vivid mode 
of conception. For example, erirepios r)x^e, vespertinus venit, he came (as it 
were) enveloped by the evening. 

Rem. 7. The distinction between irpwros (irp6r epos, var epos, vara- 
ros), Trpcarrjv [ir por epav, v ar epav, vardrn) v), and irpcorov (irpSre- 
pov, vo~r e pov, vffraTov or vffrara), u6vos, uSvyv and /x6vov rrjv 
ewurroXriv eypa^e, appears when the sentence is analyzed; irpcoros, uovos 
mean, / am the Jirst, the last, the only one of all who has written this letter, like 
PRIMUS scripsi ; TrpojrrjV, bar dry v, fi6vr)v rr\v emo~ToXr)v eypa-ty a, this letter 
was the first, the last, the only one I have written ; the adverbs it poor ov, irp6repov, 
etc., on the contrary, are used in stating several actions of the same subject, in 
the order in which they occurred, e. g. 'O irais rrpwrov uev rr\v eirto-roXrip 



370 syntax. [$$ 265, 266 

eypatyep, en git a eiraicey, vcrrara Se airy si) or irpwrov, vcrraroy, for tht 
first, last time; so the adverb fxovov places the predicate in opposition to 
another px-edicate, \i.6vov sypatya tt]v iirto-ToArjv, I have only written the letter, 
(not sent it). 



§ 265. Attributive Genitive. 

The attributive genitive will be considered in treating the 
genitive, $ 275, Rem. 5. 

§ 266. c. Apposition. 

1. A substantive is said to be in apposition, when it is put 
in the same Case with another substantive or with a substan- 
tive personal pronoun, and even with a personal pronoun implied 
in a verb, for the sake of denning these words more fully ; if 
the appositive denotes a person, it is also put in the same gen- 
der and number, as the word which it defines, comp. $ 240, 1. 
An appositive referring to two or more substantives is put in 
the plural, when it is a common noun. 

Kvpos, 6 fiacriAevs. TS/xvpis, 77 fiaffiKeia. 'Eicelvos, 6 fia<r lAev s. X. Cy 
5. 2, 7. tt]v frvyarepa, Seivov ri ttaWos Kal fieye&os, il-dyav £>8e elirev. Th. 
1, 137. ®€(ii<XTOK\rjs ifiKw irapa <re, 7", Themistocles, have come. Luc. D. D. 
24,2. 6 Se Mai as ttjs "AtAclvtos 5ta/f ov ov/aai avrols (instead of iyib 6 
Malas sc. vi6s). 

2. When a substantive is in apposition with a possessive 
pronoun, it is put in the Gen., since the possessive pronouns 
take the place of the Gen. of the personal pronouns. 

'E/j-bs (= i/xov) tov a&Aiov flios, the life of me, wretched, a&Alov being here in 
opposition with i/x6s. Tafia ( = ra. i/xd) tov 8vo~tt)vov nana, the evils of me, un- 
happy one! 2^ ttjs KdWi&rris ev/xopcpta, thy gracefulness, most beautiful one! 
In English, as the examples show, such a Gen. with the possessive may be 
often expressed by an exclamation, e. g. 'EXeaipco top abv tov a&Xlov fiiov, 1 
pity thy life, wretched one ! or by an accessary clause, e. g. I pity thy life, thou who 
art so miserable. So too the Gen. is put in apposition with adjectives which stand 
in the place of the attributive Gen. PI. Ap. 29, d. 'ASr-nvalos &u Tr6\eus 
TTJs ixeyi(TT7]s (instead of 'A&7)i/a>v, Wacois), tt6A£oos being here in apposi- 
tion with 'A^TjvaTos which is equivalent to 'A&rjvwv. On the expressions d 
^jLteVepos, vfj.eT€pos, a<ptTepos avTuv iraT7]p, see the remarks on the pronouns. 

Remark 1. On the ellipsis of the words vlos, ira?s, frvyaTrjp, ywii, etc. in 
apposition, see § 263 ; on the use of the article in apposition, see § 244, Rem. 6. 
In the phrases ovo^d iari fioi, ovofia rlShjfii (ribenal) tivi and the like, the name 



' 2G6.J apposition. 371 

itself, as an apppsitive, is put in the same Case, e. g. "Ovo/xd i<rri /xoi 'Ayd&av^ 
my name is Agathon. 'O irais zXeyev ovofxa elvai iavrcp 'Ayd&eva. 'Evrav&a l]i> 
irdXis [AeyaArj, 6vo/j.a 8' avTrj Kopawr^, X. An. 1. 5,4. ib. 2. 4, 13 and 25. Tavr-p 
rrj twoiKia i&efie&a -iroXiv ovo/xa, PI. Rp. 369, c. (to this community we gave 
the name city, called it a city). 'AvripTrevrjs Kal dyy-OTiubs e/cTTjcaro t\\v fiao-iXiKwrd- 
rnv Kal freiordrnv irposyyopiav, rbv At Kaiov, Plut. Ar. 2. (received the 
surname,the Just). (The Gen. also is used in the same phrase : ^cck'lwv iKr-ija-aro 
rty rod Xprjarou Trposrjyopiav, Plut. Ph. 10. The Nom. also occurs: 
'Avyp yevSfxevos TrposeiXr)<pe tt]V rcov irovvp&v koiv^v iircavvfj-iav <rv KO<pdvr 7] s, 
Aesch. f. 1. § 27.) See 269, Rem. 3. 

Rem. 2. A substantive in the Nom. or Ace. sometimes stands in apposition 
with the whole sentence ; in the Nom., when the appositive expresses a judg- 
ment on the whole sentence ; in the Ace, when the appositive denotes a thing 
accomplished, a result, a purpose, or object, e. g. Eur. Or. 496. iirel yap il-eirvev- 
(rey 'Aya/xe/xvcov fiiov, irXriysls Svyarpbs ttjs i[xr)S (caesus a filia mea) virep Kapa, 
— a1(T x iffT ov epyov! II. oo, 735. tf ris 'AxaiSov (avrbv) ptyei %etp&s eXcov 
a-rrb irvpyov, Xvypbv oXe&pov. Eur. Or. 1105. 'EXevnv Krdvcafxev, MeveAew 
Xvirr)v iriKpdv (i. e. &sre dlvai \v-rrr\v iriKpdv). Aesch. Ag. 225. erXr] &v77)p 
yev ecr&ai &vyarp6s, iroXe/xoov apcoydv i&sre elvai apuydv). In like manner, a 
Part, or adjective is sometimes added as a clause in apposition to a whole sen- 
tence, e. g. Tlei&ei ('AttSxXqov) 'Opecrr-nv /xTjTep', t) <T($> iyeivaTO, KreTvcu, irpbs 
ovx airavras ei/'/fAeiai' <j>4pov (a deed that brings no fame), Eur. Or. 30. 
Kal Srj irapelrai (solutum est) aa>[xa, aol /xev ov cpiXov Suppl. 1070. 

Rem. 3. The Inf. also is sometimes used as a clause in apposition with a 
word, especially with demonstrative and relative pronouns, so as to define 
more exactly an idea before expressed in a general manner. Ov yap inl 
towtw K.d&T)Tai o St/cacTT^s, e7ri t ef k a t a x a P ' C e °" & a l T « 8'iKaia PL Apol. 
35, c, the judge does not sit for this, viz., for the purpose of compromising justice for 
favor. *A S77 irposreTaKTai ttj /xavTiKrj, in ia kott e?v rovs ''Epwras Kal iar- 
p eue iv, Symp. 188, c. 

3. With a substantive, expressing the idea of plurality, one 
substantive or even several substances denoting the parts of 
that plurality or whole, are often put in apposition, instead of 
being in the Gen. according to the natural construction. This 
may be called distributive or partitive apposition. Here belong 
especially the words e/cao-To?, eKarepos, 77-as [every one), 61 /xeV— 
ol Si, aAAos aWov [alius alium, one this, another that, one another, 
or mutually), a\\os akXoSev (alms aliunde, one from one place, 
another from another, or one on one side, another on another). The 
subject, which denotes the plurality or whole, maybe implied in 
the verb. This kind of apposition is used when the whole is to 
be expressed with the greater emphasis, while with the Gen 
the p arts are to be made more prominent. 

Od. a, 424. h)] r6re KaKKeiovres efiav 6!k6u5s eKaffTos (in suam quisque 
domum sese contulerunt, they went each one to his own house). Her. 3, 158. e/xevov 
iv T7? ecovTou Ta£t %Ka<rros (in suo quisque ordine manserunt). Th. 1, 89. olitiai 
at [x\v iroXXal (= twv oiklwv iroXXal) iireirTtioKeaav, oXiyai 8e irepirjaav. X. 
R. L. 6, 1. iv ra?s dXXa/s irSXeffi rwv kajjrov sKaffros Kal iraidwv Kal oIkgt&v k<£ 



372 syntax. [$ 267. 

XpriixaTcav &pxov(T iv (suis quisgue liberis imperant). Cy.3. 1, 3. 8te8i8pa<r ko* 
f?§77 eKaCTos eVl ra kavrov, f3ov\6p.€voi to ovtu iKiro8av Troie?cr&ai. C. 2. 7, 1. 
ras airoptas ye roov (pthwv Tcts fj.lv Si' dyvoiav iireipuTo (~Zu}KpdTt]s) jvco/at) 
a.Ke'tO'&ai, rxs 8e 8f ev8eiav 8i8daKcov Kara 8vva.jj.iv a\\r]hoLS iirapKelv. PL 
Charm. 153, 6. /ecu /.le &s elSov elsi6vra e£ airposSoKrirov, ev&vs ir6pptoSev r) aird- 
(ovro dhhos aWo&ev (they welcomed me one from one place, another from 
another). Still, in this case the verb sometimes agrees, not with the appropri- 
ate subject, but with the words eKacrros, was. X. An. 1. 8, 9. wdvres ovtoi tcarh. 
%&vn eV ir\ai<riq> w\7]pei av&pwircov eKacrrov e&vos iwopev ero. The parti- 
tive appositive is often accompanied by a participle. X. Cy.3. 1,25. evioi 
tpoPov/xevoi, /lit] \-n(p&evres airoxrdvwaiv, iirb rod (pofiov Trpoairo&v7)<TKov(riv, ot fxhv 
p tirrovvr e s eavrovs, ot 8e awayxo/J-evoi, ot 5 e airoo'cpa.rToiJ.evoi. 
Her. 3, 82. avrbs eKacrTos @ ov\6 fxevo s Kopvcbcuos elvai yvu/xrjcri re vinav, 
is ex&ea fxeyaXa a\A7j\oicri aw ik v 4 o vr ai. Here belong those passages, in 
which, after the principal subject, there is another subject in the Xom. with a 
Part, connected with it ; the latter subject, however, making a part of the prin- 
cipal subject. Th. 4, 73. (ot 'ASyvaToi) T]o-i>xaCov, hoy i£6[x.ev o t koI ot 
eKeivoov ctt part)yo\ /j.^ avriwaXov eivai a<pt<n rbv klv8vvov, the Athenians kept 
iiler.ee, since even their generals, nanid.li), of the Athenians, supposed that, etc. 

Hem. 4. In the same manner in poetry, especially in Epic, but very seldom 
in prose, two objects (commonly in the Ace.) are joined to one verb ; the first 
of these denotes the entire thing, the other, that part of it to which the action 
of the verb is particularly directed, both being in the same Case. This figure 
may be called o~xv /" a Ka& oXov na\ ixepos, i. e. a construction by which 
the part is put in apposition with the whole, instead of the word denoting the 
whole being in the Gen. and governed by the word denoting the part. If the 
whole expresses a plurality, a distributive apposition may take place, Uol6v 
ere twos <pvyev epKos b86vru>v, Od. a, 64, what a word escaped thee, thy lips! 
where ep/cos the part is in apposition with ere, the whole. Up was 8e rp6/j.os 
alvbs vw}]Xv&e yv7a e/eacfT ov, II. v, 44. 5 Axato?cr iv 5e fxeya a&evos €,itj8a\' 
e/cacTTa? KapSiri &XX7)ktov woXefxi^eiv 7)5e /^a^ecrd-cu, II. f, 152, sq. 



CHAPTER III. 

§ 267. The Objective Construction. 

A.s the attributive construction (§ 262) serves to define 
the subject, or in general, a substantive idea, more fully, so 
the objective construction serves to complete the predicate, or 
define it more fully. By object, is to be understood here 
everything which, as it were, stands over against (objectum 
est) the predicate, i. e. everything which stands as the com- 
plement of the predicate and defines it more fully : (a) 



f 268. J THE CASES. 373 

the Cases, (b) Prepositions with their Cases, (c) the Infini- 
tive, (d) the Participle, and (e) the Adverb. 

Eemakk. The object completes the idea of the predicate, when the predicate 
necessarily requires an object, e. g. 'ETn&v/xaj ttjs apeTrjs. BovAojxai ypdcpeiv. 
The object defines the idea of the predicate, when the object is not necessarily 
required, e. g. Tb podov ai/&e? iv t$ K7]ira>. The predicate is thus defined by 
the specifications of time, place, degree, means, manner, and instrument. 



§268. I. The Cases. 

1. All the relations, which the Greek denotes by the 
Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, were originally consid- 
ered relations of space. 

2. The action of a verb, with which the substantive 
object is connected, is contemplated under the idea of 
motion. In this manner the object of the verb appears in 
a three-fold aspect : first, as that from which the action 
of the verb proceeds ; secondly, as that toicards which 
the action of the verb tends ; thirdly, as that by or ivith 
which the action of the verb takes place. In this way 
three Cases originate : the Genitive, denoting the motion 
or direction ivhence, the Accusative, ivhither, and the Da- 
tive, ivhere. 

3. The relations of time were viewed in the same man- 
ner as those of space. Thus the Gen. (the whence-case) 
denotes the time from which an action is conceived as 
proceeding ; the Ace (the whither-case), the time to which, 
or over which the action is conceived as moving ; and the 
Dat. (the where-case) the time in which an action is con- 
ceived as existing. 

4. The relations of causality, also, were regarded as 
relations of space. The cause (the ground, the origin, the 
author), was conceived as a local outgoing of an action 
from an object (Genitive) ; the effect (the result, the con- 
sequence), as a motion towards an object (Accusative) ; 
the means (the instrument), as the resting of an action 
with or in an object (Dative). 

32 



374 syntax. [$$ 269, 270 



$ 269 Remarks on the Nominative and Vocative 

1. The Nom. and Voc.. so far as they do not express objective relations, 
cannot be considered as Cases ; the Nom. is the form for the subject, and the 
Voc. is the form which is used in calling to or in a direct address to a person 
or a thing. But also the predicative adjective or substantive, which is joined 
to the subject by the copula eiyai, is expressed, as in other languages, accord 
ing to the laws of agreement, by the nominative ; and even the objective rela 
tion of an effect or insult with the verbs mentioned in § 240, 2, is viewed in the 
Greek and Latin as a relation of agreement, and is expressed by the nominative. 

Remark 1. With the verbs buofxd^iv, 6vo/ji.d(ecr&ai and the like, the Inf. ehai 
is often added to the Nom. or Ace, and thus in some degree the relation of 
tbe effect or result is indicated. Her. 4, 33. ras bvoiid&vai ArjMoi elvat 
'Tirtpoxw Te xal AaoSi/cTjf. 5, 99. (TToar^'yovs aKKovs a7re'5e£e (instead of cbre- 
5a|e) Mi\r]aiwv elvai. 

Rem. 2. On eluai, and yiyveafrai with an abstract word, see § 284, 3 (9). 

Rem. 3. Since the Nom., as the Case of the subject, denotes an object as 
independent, the Greeks use it not only in the case mentioned in § 266, Rem. 
1, but even with verbs of naming in the active. Her. 1, 199. Mi/Aitto Se 
KaKiovai t)]v 'Kcppohirriv 'AcravpLoi, the Assyrians call Aphrodite, Mylitta. 

2. Sometimes the Nom. seems to stand instead of the Voc. in a direct sum- 
mons or call; but in all instances of this kind, the Nom. contains an explana- 
tory exclamation, which takes the place of a sentence. Here belong particu- 
larly the following instances : 

(a) Ovtos either alone, or in connection with the Nom. of a proper name, 
is ofteJ used when one calls out to another, in the sense, ho there ! heus tu : PL 
Symp. 172, a. 6 $a\7)pevs, e(p7j, ovtos 'A7roAAo5 w po s, ov irepifxei/e?s: 
which means, see ! this is that Apollodorus, the Phalerean, who comes there ! 

(b) Very often in this way, the Nom. with the article, is joined as an apposi- 
tive to a call or direct address. 

PL Symp. 218, b. ol Se oIk&tcli, Kal tf tis d\\os io~r\ fi4t5-r)\6s re Kal aypo?- 
kos, irvKas irdvv [xeyaXas ro?s aalu £iri£re(T&e (the same as, fyte?s 8e, oIkctcii ovres). 
X. Cy. 4. 5, 17. ?&l fiev ol>v av, e<p-q, 6 it pe cr 13 v tot o s (instead of av, bs el irp.). 



$ 270. (L) Genitive. 

The Gen. is the Whence-case, and hence denotes : (a) in a 
local relation, the object or the point from which the action of 
the verb proceeds, e. g. eUetv 6Sov, cedere via, to luithdraiv from 
the way ; (b) in a causal relation, the ground, origin, or author, 
in general, the object, which calls forth, produces, excites, occa- 
sions the action of the verb, e. g. lTri$vp,oi rr}<s aperi)? (§ 268); 
ap€Trj<s is here the object which calls forth, etc. the desire ex 
pressed by l-mSv^S). 



271.1 LOCAL RELATION OF THE GENITIVE. 375 



$ 271. A. Local Relation. 

1. The use of the Gen. expressing purely local motion is 
rare and only poetic, e. g. Ei fir) ToVSe 7reicraj/T€s Aoya> ay olv to 
i/r}<rov (ab insula ab due erent) S. Ph. 613; this relation is com- 
monly indicated by prepositions with the Gen., e. g. an 6, from, 
Ik, out of, 7rapd, from near an object, etc. 

2. But the Gen. very often expresses the relation of separa- 
tion, namely, with verbs denoting removal, separation, loosing, 
abstaining, desisting, ceasing, freeing, depriving, differing from, 
missing, deviati?ig from. Genitive of separation. 

Prose words of this kind are : irapax^peTv, inro^wp^iv, tXntiv and vireiKtw, 
viravivTCUTSai and i£lo~Taa&at, voo~(pi£eiv, x cti P L C 6ll/ > 8iopi£eiv; acpievai, a<piea&ai, 
a7re%eij/, air4x£<T&0Li, iraveiv, Travea&ai, KooXveiv, iprjTveiv, etpyeiv, Xveiv, iXev&epovv, 
airaX\a.TT€LU, (TTepsTv, anrocTTepeiv CTepecf&ai, x 7 )P°^ Vi > 4p7]fxovv, Siacpepeiv, a/xapTd- 
veiv, ccpdxXecr&ai, iJ'euSecr&cu, etc. ; Sie'xetz/ and o.tt4x^ lv i t° be distant, etc. 

Her. 2, 80. ol uewrepoi avTecov ro?<ri irpeafivrepoKTi crvvTvyx^vovTes elKovai 
tJjs 65 ov {withdraw from the ivay). X. Cy. 2. 4, 24. viroxupdv T °v 7re 
St'ou (to retire from the plain). Hier. 7, 2. irapax^o e?v odov. Symp. 4, 31. 
inravicrT aurai Se jxoi rjSr} Kal frdiccov ko.1 odaiv i^iaravTai ol irXevcrioi 
(rise up from their seats and turn aside from the road). Vectig. 4, 46. dxexei 
i 5>v apyvpeiwv r) iyyvTCLTa ttSXis Meyapa iroXv ■nXe'iov twv irevTaKoalccv crra- 
Slav (is distant from the silver mines). PI. Menex. 246, e. iirio-T^fir] x (a P l C°- 
\i4vn SiKato vvv-qs (knowledge apart from justice). Havofxai x^ov (1 
cease from anger). Ava, aira.XX6.TT 03 Tiva Katcwv (I free one from evils). 
Her. 3, 81. yv6fir]s tt)s apiffTns i) fxdpTrjKe (he has mistaken the best view). 
5, 62. Tvpdvvccv 7)X*v'?€pct>&r] crav. X. Hier. 7, 3. So/ce? fj.01 tovtco 8ia<p4- 
oe iv avrjp t&v &XXwv £(&a>v, t<$ Ti/xrjs opdyea^ai (to differ from other ani- 
mals). — ipevdo/xai, (T(pdXXo[i.ai iXirlSos, 8 6£r)s, ti>xv s (t° be cheated, 
to be deprived of hope, etc.). 'A (pi rip I Tiva ttjs aWias. J Air oq-t e pa> Tiva 
tuv ayaSwv. Trjs fiatriXelas eVr e pr} fiai. Comp. § 280, Rem. 3. 

Remark 1 . Many of these verbs are often constructed also with the prepo- 
sition air6, e. g. iXev&epovv, airaXXaTTeiv air6 (of persons, as eXev&epouv t\\v 
'EXXaSa airb t&v Mf)8av), Xveiv, efyyetv, aneipyeiv, 4pr)Tveiv. 

3. In like manner, the Gen. of separation is joined with ad- 
jectives, adverbs, and substantives which express the same idea as 
the above verbs, e. g. eAct^epo?, piovos, KaSapos, kcvos, 'iprjfxos, yvpvos, 
oo<£avo?, i/aAo's — Stdcpopos, aAAorpio? (with the Dat., disinclined) 3 
dAAotos, hepos; with many adjectives compounded of a priva- 
tive ; with avev, X^pfe) TrArjV, e£(ji>, ckcxs, 8t^a, iripav, etc. 



376 syntax. [$$ 272, 273. 

S. El. 3S7. at Se adpKes at Keval <ppeva>v aydXjxar ayopas zlaiv (bodies without 
minds). Her. 3, 147. anab^s KaKuv (without suffering evils, i. e. free from). 
Th. 1, 28. cpl\ovs iroie'icr&ai erepovs tu>v vvv ovrav (to make friends other 
than, different from the present ones). X. C. 4. 4, 25. irorepov robs &eovs vyr} t& 
SiKaia vofxo&ereiv, ^ &X\a to>v S iKaicov. Cy. 3. 3, 55. aTraidevros fiov 
<tikt)S (uneducated in music). So &TI/J.OS eiraivuv. Avffis, iXev&epia 
KaK&v. Her. 6, 103. irip-nv rrjs 6 Sod (on the other side of the way). Dera 
Phil. 1. 49, 34. rod iraax^iv avrol KaK&s e|a> ■yeWjaeo'i&e. 

4. Here belong verbs of beginning and originating, e. g 
ap^ecrS-at, ap-^tv, VTrapyzw, Karapyeiv, e^ap^etv. 



v A/j%€tr3-oi rivos, e.g. rov TroXe/xov, means simply to 
without any other relation: 2w ro7s &eo?s ct-pxeabai xph tto-vtos zpyov (to 
begin every work with the gods) ; but Spx«" / > virapx^i-v, Kar apx*tv have a 
relation to others beside the subject, i. e. they signify not merely to begin abso- 
lutely, but to begin before others, to do something first or before others, to begin first, 
hence to be the cause or author: Tovs iSreXovras (pvyrjs ftpx*'" ""<>*•" Kpelrrov 
vvv Tots TroXefj-iois rarTOfxevovs, 3) iv rfj rj/xeTepa rd£ei, opav (it is better to see those 
disposed to begin the fight [set the example of fight] in the enemies' ranks than in 
ours), X. An. 3. 2, 17. 'H j]fx4pa to?s "EXX-ncri /xeyaXcav KaKwv &p£ei (will 
begin, be the cause of great calamities), Th. 2, 12. 'T7rapx et,/ o.Sikwv epyuv, 
evepye&tas. 

Rem. 2. "Apx^o-^ai a7r<£ twos (or irohiv) means, to proceed from a thing 
and to begin with it, e. g. &pxecr&at airo ruv aroix^iov, to begin with the first prin- 
ciples. 

k 272. B. Causal Relation. 

The Gen. in the causal relation signifies, also, an outgoing, 
but not, as in the local relation, a mere outward relation, but an 
inward m\A activ one, since it expresses the object by whose 
inward power the action of the subject is called forth and 
produced. 

$ 273. (a) The active Genitive, or the Genitive as the 
general expression of Cause. 

1. The active Genitive stands in the first place, as the Gen. 
of origin or author, and is connected with verbs denoting to 
originate from, spring from, produce from, be produced from, 
e. g. yCyveo-Sai, fpvew, <}ivvai, elvat. Genitive of origin or author. 

Her. 3, 81. apto-rcov avSpwv olubs dpicrra fiovXevfiara ylyvea&ai (it is 
reasonable that the best designs should originate with, from the best men, the av$pit> 



♦ 273.] CAUSAL GENITIVE. 377 

being active in, o: the cause of the result). X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. irarphs /xlv 8^ 
Keyercu 6 Kvpos yevicr&ai Kafifivo- ov, Hepawv fiaaiXews (to be the son of 
Camhjses)' 6 be Kafifivo-ns ovtos tov Tlepcreibcov yevovs i\v (sprung from the ract 
of Persidae)' (j.r}Tpbs he ojxoXoyeiTai Mavbdvns yeveo~$rai. PI. Menex. 
239, a. fiias fJt,7)Tphs irdvres abe\<pol (pvvres. Attributive Gen.: 'O toZ 
Ba<r iXe'w s vlos, i. e. 6 (e/c) tov fiaffiXeais yevvn&els vl6s. Ta twc av&pc&irww 
TrpdyfiaTa. 

Remark 1 . Commonly the preposition 4k, more seldom air 6, is connected 
with the genitive. 

2. The active Genitive stands, in the second place, as that 
object which has gained another, made its own and possesses 
it; the Gen. therefore denotes the owner or possessor. This 
Gen. stands : (a) with the verbs elvai, yeveo-Sat (to belong to), 
TToieto-Jai, to make one's oivn; (b) with the adjectives i'Sios (also 
with Dat), oiKetos (with Dat, inclined), Upos, Kvpios. Possessive 
Genitive. 

Antiph. 5. 140, 92. rb fxev aKovcriov a[xdpT7]fxa ttjs tvxvs io~ri, to be 
eKovviov tt\s yvwp.i]s (an involuntary fault belongs to fortune, a voluntary one 
to our own will). Lys. Agor. 135, 64. eyeveTo 6 Evftdp-ns ovtos N ikokXgovs 
(belonged to Nicocles, was his slave). Th. 5, 5. iyeveTo Meo-o"f)vn Aoicpav two. 
Xpovov (belonged to the Locrians). Trjs avTrjs yvcajx-qs elvcu (ejusdem sententiae esse). 
'EavTov eivou (to be one's own master). Dem. Phil. 142, 7. rjv v/jlwv avTa>v 
i^e\rjo-r]Te yev eo-&ai (to be your own masters), non ex aliis pendere. Also elvai 
twos, alicujus esse, alicui addictissimum esse, to belong to some one, to be earnestly 
devoted to something, e. g. elvcu QiXiittcov ; elvcu tov JSzXtIo-tov (studere rebus optimis). 
X. Ages. 1, 33. tV 'Aaiav eavT&v iroiovvTai. (they bnng A. under their 
power). Isocr. Paneg. 46, 29. rj iroAis rj/xav Kvpia yevop.evn toiovtuv aya- 
&wj' ovk i(p&6vT]o~e to?s &A\ols (having become the possessor of such advantages). X. 
An. 4. 5, 35. 'rjKovaev clvtov (tov "ttttov) lepbv elvcu tov 'H\iov (sacred to 
the sun). 5.3, 13. 6 iepbs x&P 0S T V s 'Apr e /xib os. Dem. 01. 1. 26,28. ol 
Kivdwoi t&v i<peo~T TftcS tcov (ducum) idiot, /jua&bs S J ovk. eGTiv. 2.32,16. 
TavTTjs Kvpios rrjs x^P as y^aerou. In the attributive relation: 'O 
tov fiao- iXeus KTJiros. 'H ~2,WKpdT ovs apeT-f], YlctTTip N eoinoKe jj.ov . 

Rem. 2. The Gen. is connected with \eyeiv, (pdvcu, vofxi^eiv, 7iyeio-&cu, Kpiveiv, 
vTvo\aixf$dveiv, as it is with elvcu. Dem. 01. 2. 34, 21. biKaiov itoAItov k pivot 
ti]v t&v TrpayfiaTccv cruiTTipiav c\vt\ ttjs iv TtS Xeyeiv %aptTos alpe?o-&cu. 

(c) Hence the Gen. with ehac denotes also: (a) the charac- 
teristic, peculiarity, habit, etc. of a person or thing, the charac- 
teristic, peculiarity, etc., being commonly expressed by an Inf. ; 
(/?) a property or quality, viz., price, measure, number, time, space v 
etc., also what is requisite for a tiring. Genitive of quality. 

32* 



378 syntax [$ 273 

'A »/ S p6s £ emu a*} a&ov ev iroieiv robs (pikovs. In English this Gen. is 
:ranslated in various ways, e. g. it is the business, manner, custom, peculiarity, duty, 
mark of a brave man ; it becomes a brave man ; it bespeaks a brave man ; a brave 
man is ivont, and the like. Dem. Phil. 1, 54. KaKovpyov 4 err I Kp&ivr diro- 
bavtiv, <r t parny ov Se jxax^evov ro?s iroXefxiois (it is the characteristic of a 
criminal to die being sentenced, but of a general to die fighting, etc.). 01. 1. 18, 2. 
eCTi tm alaxpuv (Neut.), [xaKKov Se t&v al(rx' l(TTU}V i ^bXecoy, «? i\p.£v 
7TOT6 Kvpioi, {palve(T&ai. irpo'i6fj.4uovs. Chers. 102, 48. Sokc? ravra km Sair dmjs 
fj.eyd\r\s Kal tt6uuv iroW&v Kal it pay fxar el as elvat (this seems to be 
the mark of great expense, much labor). Aphob. 1. 814, 4. i/xh eirr erSiv ovra 
(of seven years, i. e. seven years old). X. An. 7. 4, 16. 'S.iXavbs MaKecmos, ircov 
oKTcoKaideKa &v, (T7]/J.aivei tt? aaXiriyyi. 1. 4, 11. 6 Ev<ppa.T7]S iroTafibs rb 
tvpSs icm rerrdpeav (rradicov (of four stadia in width = four stadia wide). 
Attributive Gen.: 5e/ca fxvwv xupiov, Isae. 2, 35 (a place of [costing] ten 
minae). The Gen. is but seldom used to denote other qualities, e. g. rrjs avrrjs 
yva>[jL7)s eTvai, ejusdem sententiae esse, to be of the same opinion. ( A\Ki/3id8r)s) a\- 
Aot6 aXKwv earl Xoywv, PI. Gorg. 482, a (is of different words at different times, 
uses different ivords, etc). 

Rem. 3. Here belong also the expressions fiye?ar&ai, iromcr&ai, frewai irok- 
\ov, 7tA6icttoi/, bxiyov, e^axicrou, etc. (to considei of great importance, 
etc.), the worth of a thing being considered as a property Usually, however, 
the preposition irepi is joined with the Gen. 

3. The active Genitive stands, in the third place, as that ob- 
ject which embraces one or more other objects as parts belong- 
ing to it; the Gen. represents the 'whole in relation to its 
parts. Genitive of the whole, or the partitive Genitive. This 
Gen. stands : 

(a) With the verbs, elvai and yiyveo-Sai (to belong to, to be 
of the number of, to be numbered among) ; n^e'vat, Ti#eo-$ai, 
tto tela Sou, yyeto-SoLL (to reckon or number among), and with 
many others. 

Tk. , 65. «al avtbs ^&eAe t £>v jxevourwv elvai, to be one of those remain- 
ing. X. An. 1. 2, 3. -f\v koI b ^o}Kpdrr\s twc afxpl M[\7]tou err par evo/nevcap 
(was among those who carried on war around Miletus, crpaTevofxeucav here denoting 
the whole, of which Socrates is a part). Cy. 1. 2, 15. oil av av iv rois TtXeiois 
(avfipdai) 8iay4vtovrai aueivix-nTrroi, ovtoi tS>u ye pair e pay yiyyovrai (are 
reckoned among the elders). Dem. Phil. 3. 122, 43. 7) ZeXeid iari r 9j s "Aalas 
(belongs to Asia, is a part of). Plat. Phaed. 68, d. rbv Sravarov r t yovvTai irdvres ol 
a\\oi Toiv ixeyia-Twv KaKwu e? vai (among the greatest evils). PL Rp.376, e. 
uou<r iKrj s 8\ eliroy, rt^rjs \6yovs ; ad musicam refersne sermones ? Phileb. 
60, d. <pp6uvfiu Kal d\ri&rj 86%av rrjs avTrjs Ideas ri&efiai ( I consider prudence 
and true glory as of the same nature, ad eandem ideam refero). Ilp. 8. 567, e. iroi • 
tlarfrai riva rwv Zopv<p6 pwv. Her. 7, 6. KareAeye tuv xP lf } (T l J -& v ( re ' 



$ 273.] PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 37 1 " 

citabat vaticiniorum sc. partem). So refxveiv 777 s (devastare terrae, sc. partem) 
iinBaiveiv rv,s yr\s, to set foot upon. 

Rem. 4. "With the partitive and attributive Gen., two cases are to be distin 
guished : the Gen. denotes the whole either as a plurality in relation to the indi- 
vidual parts, as UoWol ruv av&pdmwv : or as a unity in relation to a certain 
qrantity, e. g. rieVre rd\avra apyvpiov. This last partitive Gen. may be called 
t 1, », Gen. of quantity. Both these genitives occur very frequently : 

^a) With substantives, e. g. ^rayoves vSaros (vSaros expressing the whole, 
and aray6ves the parts); crci>/j.aros jxipos ; if with the name of a place, 
the country where it is situated is mentioned, the name of the country 
as denoting the whole, stands in the Gen., and usually befoi*e the name 
of the place denoting the part, e. g. 'O arparbs acpiicero rr\s ' At tiktjs 
is OlvSrjv (into Oenoe, a part or city of Attica), Th. 2, 18 (never es rrjs 
'Attlkyis OIvqtjv). 

(b) With substantive adjectives, in the positive, comparative, and superlative, 
when it expresses the highest degree ; with substantive pronouns and 
numerals : ol xpjCTot rSiv avSpdmav, ol ev <ppovovvres rwv av&pcairuv (the 
useful, well disposed part of men) ; — iroXKoi, okiyoi, rives, Trhetoves, 7rAe?<rroi 
rwv av&pwiroov (many, few, some, etc. among or of men). In addition comp. 
above, § 264, Rem. 5. On the contrary, ol Svyrol avSpcoiroi, since the 
property of mortality belongs tc the race ; ircWol or 6\iyoi av&pamoi. ex- 
presses a whole consisting of ma/iy or few (a great or small number of 
men) : voWoi or bxlyoi avSrpcoircov denotes the many or few as a part of 
the whole ; so rpe?s ^fxeTs ^ficu, i. e. we were three in all, there were three of 
us ; rpzis 7]fj.wu ?,o-av, i. e. there were three of us (three out of our whole num- 
ber) there; 

(c) With adverbs : (a) of place, e. g. irov, ttov, iri), iro&ev, ov, i], ovSafiov, irav- 
raxVi ^ppw, and irpoaw (further), etc. Her. 2, 43. ovSa/J.7] AlyvTrrov 
(nowhere in Egypt). PL Rp. 3. 403, e. etSeWt, '6 ttov yrjs icrri (where 
intheworld). 'EyraO^a ttjs 7)\iK(as (at this age) ; ivrav&a rod \6yov 
(to this point in the discourse or argument). 'Opart, oTirpoe\r]Xvbev affeXyeiaS 
(what a degree of insolence he has reached, quo intemperantiae progressus sit), 
Dem. Tlavraxov rrjs yr\ s, ubivis terrarum. Tloppoo o-o<pias £\av- 
veiv or rjiceiy (to advance further in wisdom). — (/3) of time, e.g. diph 
rrjs Tj/xepas, rod x?® vov -> T *J * T)~KiK.ias (late in the day, late in life). 
Tpls r-Tjs Tifispas. UoWaKis rrjs 7](iipas. 

Rem. 5. By means of an abbreviation of the expression (comp. § 323, Rem. 
r f , the partitive Gen. stands also with a superlative which belongs to the predi- 
/ate. Her. 7, 70. ol e/c rr/s Aifivys Al&io-rres ovK6r ar ov rpix^l^-OL ex ovo ~ l 7r «* / - 
toov a v & p <*> ir <*) v (properly instead of ov\6rarov ruv rpix^jJ-drwv a irdvres 
frvfrpooiroi ^xovaiv). X. Cy.3.1,25. irdvroov rS>v Seivwv 6 (poBos /j.d\io~T « 
/caTa7rA7jTTei ras i|/u%as. 

(b ) With words which signify : (a) to take part in, partici- 
pate in, share in, e. g. /xere^etv, /xereo-Tt fxoi, SuSovat, /xeraSiSoVcu, 
TrposSiSoVai, StaStSovat, Koivoivelv, koivov<t$cu, iTrapKetv (to give a share 
of), crvvepyos, a/xotpo?, etc. ; kolvos and iaos, which commonly, 
however, govern the Dat. ; — ((3) to touch .(both physically and 
intellectually), to lay hold of, to he in connection with, to border on 
e. g. #iyyai/e«', if/avew, airrecrSaL, SpdrTeaSat ', Aa^u,/5avecr^at, uera-, 
avXXajjLJSdvetv, e7ri-, dvriAa/x/3aveo~»9u{, ; avvacpeaSai ; e>/eo~<3ui (to ad' 



380 syntax [$ 273, 

here to, be next to, to border on), avr-, irepie^crSaL, yXt^ecr^at, 
e7rt^coptos, dSeAc^os (seldom with Dat.), StaSo^o? (often also with 
Dat.), e£}?, e<£e£>}s (more rarely with Dat.), 7rpoo-#ev, Ip^vpoa-^ev, 
o-mcrSev, fxera^v, and many other adverbs ; — (y) to acquire aiK 1 
attain, e. g. ruy^ctveti/ (to acquire and hit), Aay^aveiv, e£-, icpcKvei- 
o-Soll, KXrjpovofjLelv (with Gen. of the thing, to inherit; with Gen. 
of the person, to be the heir of some one ; with Ace. of the 
thing and Gen. of the person, to inherit something from one), 
7rpo<5rjKu (fioi rtvos, I have to do with something, have part in) ; 
— (§) to strive to acquire something, e. g. ooeyeo-^ai, icpUaSac, 
avTL7roL€Lcr$ai, IvrpeireaB-at (to turn one's self to something, to give 
heed to, to respect); o-To^a^eo-^at {to aim at something). Most 
of the words included under this rule have a partitive idea. 
Besides the Gen. several of the above verbs take also a Dat. 

Dem. 24, 49. rols &kovo~iv ajxaprduovai fiereari cvyyvd fxr) s (those icho err 
unwillingly obtain pardon ) . PL Pol. 322, a. 6 oLv^pcairos Sreias fxereax^ fioipas 
(participated in divine destiny ). X.E. L.1,9. rod p.ev yevovs Kal rrjs dvud- 
uecos KOLvoovovcri, tup 8e xp' n f jLa ' TU}V ovk avr iir o tovvr at (who share 
in the same origin and power, but do not lay claim to their property). Cyr. 7. 5, 78 
sq. &d\Trovs fxev Kal tyvxovs Kal crlrcav kcu ttot&v Kal virvov avdyKt) 
Kal ro?s SovXols jH€Ta5i5o'yai, it o Ae jxikt) s 8' e it i <rr 7) fir) s Kal fA.e\err] s 
ov /xeraS or eov (to share heat, cold, etc.). C. 1. 2, 60. IcaKpdrns iraaiv afy&ovoos 
iirrjpKeL ra>v eavrov (shared his effects with). Cy. 1.3, 7. r<ov Kpeav Sia- 
8 i 5 6 v a t ro7s SrepaTrevrals (to distribute the flesh among the servants). PL Phaedr. 
238, b. ra rovrcov aSeAia (horum similia). Hel. 4. 4, 6. (a%i6v ecrri) raiv 
ye KaXXiffr a>v Kal fieyi frcov aya&a>v opeyo/ievovs a^ieiraivord- 
rns reXevrr) s TuxelV (that they, desiring to obtain the most noble and val- 
uable acquisition, should meet a most honorable death). 4. 8, 18. %» 6 Qepaavopos 
ov jjlovov av\7]Ti]s aya&6s, aAAa Kal aXKrjs avr eiro ie?r o (ad fortitudinem eni- 
tebatar). Th. 1, 8. e <pie jxevo i ruv Kepdcov oi Jiacovs virefxevov rr]v r&v 
Kpetacrovuiv SovXeiav (the inferiors desirous of gain, etc.). Cy. 1.2,3. irovnpov 
tiuos r) alaxpov epyov e(pteo-&ai. 3.3,10. ewaivovo'i Kal ao-ird£ovrai oi 
ToiovTot (avfj-txaxoi) robs 6/u.olovs, vop.i(ovres o~vv epyovs ai>Tobs elvai rod koi- 
vov ay a&ov (thinking that they are coadjutors in the common interest). PL Symp. 
181, c. v^peas 6,/u.oipos (without sharing in insolence). Menex. 241, c. epyov 
Kotvhv AaKeSai/xovicov re Kal 'A&vvaioov (common to the Laced., etc., like 
communis alicujus rei). "Airr ojxai r?isx €t P^ s ' Her. 1, 93. \i/j.vr) e%eTa* 
rov o-JijAaros /xeyaXi] (borders on). 3, 72. epyov e% <£/**& a (opus aggredia- 
mur). Uepiexo/xai rivos (cupide aliquidamplector). Th. 1,140. rrjs yvw/u-ws 
rrjs abrqs ex^iJ-ai (I hold to the same opinion). 4, 10. avSpes oi ^vvapd^evoi 
rovde rod Kiydvvov (who have taken part in this danger). PL Pp. 2, 362, a. 
%\T\Seias ix^H-^vou (cum veritate conjunctum). Dem. 01. 1, § 20, ea>s earl kw 



? 273. J GENITIVE CASE. 381 

p6s, avr iAo/3ecr<$-e twv irpayfiaTow (capessere). Isocr. Xicocl. 22, b, (, iireiSh 
&vt)tou a ci!> y. a t o s ervx^s, afravdr ov 8e tyvxvs, ireipco rrjs tyvxys a&d- 
varov fj.vf]/j.r]v KaTaAnre?!/ (since you obtained a mortal body, but an immortal soul). 
Tvyxdveiu, Xayxdveiv XPVf^dTcnv, evrvx'tas — Tu%eiV TeXevrrjs, 6v6fjiaTOS, etc. X. 
C. 2. 1, 20. at Sia Kaprepias i-jri/xeAeicu (studia assidua) r wv naXwv re icaya- 
buv epywv £I;lkv s?(r&ai iroiovaiv (make them attain noble and illustrious deeds). 
Isocr. Paneg. 80, 187. ovk i<piKPod/j.ai rov /Jieye &ovs ran/ Trpay/xdrcoj/ 
(non assequor). P. Crit. 52, c. oijr e/ceiVous tovs Xoyovs alcrxvvri, ovre -rj/xcij/, 
tuv v6[x<av, ivTpeirr] (neither do ycu respect us, the laws). X. C. 4. 5, 11. 
8o/ce?s fj.01 Xeyeiu, ws avSpl rjTTOfi t&v dia toZ crca/xaTos ydovwv ird/xirav ovS e fit as 
apeTrjs irposT)Kei (that no virtue belongs to a man who is a slave to bodily pleas- 
ures). Dem. in Aristocr. 690, 14. ovroi k\t) povo ixovcr i r^s v^eTepas 
d6^7)s Kal tu>v vuerepav ayaS&v. PI. Georg. 465, a. rov f)b4oso~To- 
xd^erai dvev rov fieXricrTov. 

Rem. 6. With ve-bs expressing participation, sometimes the word denoting 
a part stands in the Ace, e. g. X. Hier. 2, 6. ot rvpawoi tuv fxeyio-Twu aya&wv 
n\e7o~Ta fie*r e'^ow cri. An. 7. 8, 11. 'iva f^ [act ad oteu to /xepos xpvpd- 
roiv. According to the analogy of verbs of touching, verbs of entreating and 
supplicating, are connected with the Gen., which denotes the person or thing, by 
whom or by which one entreats or supplicates, e. g. A.iWecr&cu, iKereveiu, iKveia- 
&cu, since the suppliant, touching the knee or the image of the divinity, utters 
his prayer. Od. /3, 68. Xiaa-ofiai r]/xhv Z-qvbs 'O\v/j.iriov 7?Se ®4/j.icttos (I supplicate 
Zeus). So Xio~o~eo-&ai irarpbs, tok-^ccv. Comp. II. k, 454 sq. 6 [j.iv [juv e/ieAAe 
yeveiov X el P^ ' Ira X ei V tydfxsvos Xiaarta&ai. 

Rem. 7. The poets connect many other verbs with the Gen., among which 
ai-e those mentioned under (b) ; so any verb may govern the Gen., when its 
action refers not to the whole of an object, but to a part only. II. 77, 56. /*e«r- 
o-ov Sovpbs kXcav (having seized the middle of the spear). Od. y, 439. fiovv b* 
ayerrju Kepdcov (took by the horns). II. a, 197. £av&?is Se ko/xtjs e\e 
Hr)\ei(i>va. In phrases, like Aafie7v yovvwv, aTTTecrSrai riva yevdov, etc., the knee 
and beard are conceived as the objects, on which the person who touches and 
lays hold, hangs, and, as it were, depends. Here belong, also, in poetry : 

(a) Verbs denoting both physical and intellectual tasting, grasping, reaching 
to, and hence of striving after an object, e. g. iirifialeo-frai crKoireXou, 
ddepuv, v6arov (to seek the rock, gifts, a return). 

(b) Several verbs, which properly express the idea of a hasty motion towards 
an object, and then metaphorically are used to express an intellectual 
effort, and longing, e. g. eVefyetr&af, 6pfj.acr&aL, iirifidWea&ai, iiraiao'eiv 
(rushing upon something, etc.). II. t, 142. iirc iy6 (iei/6s irep "Aprjos 
(hastening to, desiring the contest). II. |, 488. cbpp.7}&r) 8' ^Atcdnavros 
(he rushed upon Acamas). II. £ 68. /jltjtis vvv ivdpwv iirtfiaXX 6 ixevos 
[X€T6irio-&cv ixi[xveT(a. 

(c) Verbs signifying to take aim, e. g. ro^eveiu, aKovrl^Lv (in prose with els, 
and with the meaning, to hit, to wound, with the Ace). II. p, 304. "E/crcop 
8' ah-' Atavros o.k6vt 1a e dovpl cpaeivtp (aimed at Ajax). II. 1//, 855. 
^ s 6.p 5 kvcayei t 1 e v e 1 v. 

Rem. 8. According to the analogy of the above-named verbs of aiming and 
striving, so we find Kara x&ovbs o/j-fxara Trrj^ai (to fasten the eyes upon the ground) ; 
irXeiv iivl ~Xd/xov, to sail towards Samos, as if setting out for it (on the contrary, 
eirl ~2d/xov, to Samos). — The Gen. of aim accurs in the attributive relation, e. g. 
with o86s, v6aros tottov tiv6s (way, return to a place). 



382 syntax. [$ 273 

Rem. 9. There also being here : (a) the adverbs eudu (Ion. fov), straight 
forward to something, /u-exPh t°-> U P t° >' — (b) verbs of meeting and approaching, 
which, however, in prose, are commonly connected with the Dat. ; — (c) also 
adjectives and adverbs of meeting, approaching, nearness, e. g. avrlos, iuavrios 
(though in Attic, only with the meaning contrarius, opposed to), irapairK-haios, 
which, however, are oftener joined with the Dat. ; avriov, ivavriov {before, in 
the presence of) ; Zyyvs and irX-ncriov with the Gen. of local nearness, but in a 
metaphorical sense with the Dat. Her. 6, 95. %xov (dirigebant) ras peas lfri> 
tov 'E Wrj stt6ptov teal rrjs Qprjitcns (directly to the Hellespont). 2, 34. 
7] MyvivTos rrjs ope iv t\ s KiXinlas /xaXicrrd kt) aprir] Keerai (lies opposite to 
Cilicia). Dem. Ph. 3. 117, 27. irX-naiov Q-nficop ko). 'A.Sr)pS>p (near Thebes). 

4. In the fourth place, the active Genitive denotes the place 
where, and the time when, an action Happens. The action or 
event belongs, as it were, to the place and the time, proceeds hi 
a measure from them, and is produced by them ; hence the time 
and place are considered as causing or producing the action, or 
at least as the necessary condition of it. 

(a) The Gen. of place is almost exclusively poetic. 

II. p, 372. pecpos §' ov (paiuero irdtTTjs yalrjs, ouS' bpecap (not a cloud appeared 
on the plain, nor on the mountains). II. i, 219. avrbs 6° olptlop t(ev 'OSi/cnr/jos 
freioio roixov rod krepoio (by the other wall). Hence, especially, in Epic 
poetry, with verbs of going and motion, the space or way upon which the going 
or the motion takes place, and to which, as it were, this action belongs, stands 
in the Gen., e. g. II. £, 801. epxoprai ireSioio (go through the plain). %> 23. 
&eeip ireSloio. v, 64. 7re 8 I o i o diwueip opveov (to pursue over the plain). So 
the prose, lepai rod TrpAato (to go over the forward way, to go forward). 

Rem. 10. In this way are to be explained the adverbs of place, ov,irov, ottov, 
avrov, ov5ap.ov, aWaxov, etc. : and on the same principle also it is to be ex- 
plained that adverbs of place with the suffix 3-ej/ stand, apparently instead of 
adverbs of place with the suffix &i, e. g. epSoSrep, eyyv&ep, rr\\6&ep, eKroa&ep, 
e. g. II. p, 582. "EKTopa 8' eyyv&eu icrrajxepos wrpvpep ^AttoWcop. 

(b) The Gen. of time often occurs both in poetry and prose. 
Also the space of time withiv, ivhicli something happens, as pro- 
ducing the action, or the condition of it, may be expressed by 
the Gen. The Gen. expresses time indefinitely, denoting merely 
the period ivithin which or in the course of which the action takes 
place, whi]e the Dat. expresses definite time, a point of time. 

"hvS-n SaWei rod eapos, the spring is conceived as producing the flowers, and 
hence as the cause of them. Thus bepovs, in the summer time ; ^ei/wos, in the win- 
ter ; ritMepas, in the daytime, in the course of the day, by day ; pvkt6s, by night ; SeiATp, 
oircbpas; as Eng. of a morning, he did it of a fine morning ; also /xrjyos, per month, 
monthly ; ipiavrov, yearly, etc.; with attributives, e. g. tov avrov, rod irporepov, ei«i.o~- 
rov, eiovs, the same, the former year, etc. ; ~r\s abr?\s rj^spas, on the same day ; rys 
$jriovo'r\s vvkt6s : ~iv eniyiyvop.epov frepovf ' avrrjs rrjs f]/x4pas, in the course of this day 



$ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 383 

(but Dat. ravrr/ rfj ri^pa, in that day). Hence the adverbial expressions apxys, at 
the beginning, and rod Xolttov, for the future. Her. 4, 48. "larpos 'Zeros aet avrbs ica'vrS 
peei Kal &4povs ical x^ l l x ^ vos {always flows equal to itself in summer and 
winter). 6, 12. rov Xoittov [xt] Trei&a>(j.€&a avrov. PI. Phaed. 59, d. i^XSro/j.€v 
rod 8e(Tfj.coT7iplov e o*7re pas {at evening). Ov jxaKpov xP^ V0V i crvxvov, ttoXXov, 
irXziarov, bxiyov XP 0>V0V {^ n i 'within a short, long time) ; ttoXXoov 7)/j.€p£>v, irS>v 
{within many days, years), etc. Her. 3, 134. ravra bxiyov XP° V0V eo-Tcu 
reXevpeva. X. An. 1. 7, 18. fiacriXevs ov /xax^rai deica 7]/j.eqS)v. PI. Symp. 
172, c. tv o XX gov ircov 'Ayd^uv iv&dde ovk iTrtSe8i]fj.r}Kfv. 

Rem. 11. By the Gen. of time, the Gen. absolute may be explained, e. g. 
rod Kipov fSacr iXe v ovtos iroXXa re Kal KaXa, ipya virb ru>v Hepacov iirpax^V' 

Rem. 12. Prepositions are often used to define the relation of time more 
exactly, e. g. e/c ttoXXov xp^ vov i "#' 4o"ir4pas, iirl Kvpov, Cyri aetate, diet. ttoXXov 
Xp6vov, ivr6s or etrw ttoXXov xpovov. Comp. the remarks on the prepositions. 

Rem. 13. The Gen. as well as the Ace. denotes continued or protracted time, 
but with this difference, that the Gen. denotes the time within any part of which 
the action may take place ; whereas the Ace. of time implies that the action is 
in progress during the whole of the time mentioned, e. g. ravrrjv rrjv rifj.4- 
pav avrov T)bxi£ero, he encamped there during the whole of that day ; but with the 
Gen. the meaning would be, that, in the course of that day, sometime in that 
day, he encamped there. Comp. § 279, 6, in regard to the difference between 
the Gen. and Ace. of time and place. 

5. The active Genitive, finally, denotes the material of which 
anything is made, formed, and, as it were, produced, or the 
source from which something is drawn; the material being 
viewed to some extent as the cause of the result. This Gen. 
stands : 

(a) With verbs of making, forming, and the like. 

Her. 5, 82. x a ^ K °v iroi4ovrai ra ayaXfxara {are made of bronze) . 2, 138. 
earpw/jLevr] e'eri 6b~bs Xi&ov {is paved with stone). Th. 4, 31. epv/xa avroSti "f\v 
Xt&cov Xoyddrjv tt eir o it] /x4v ov. In the attributive relation : eKTrca/xa £ u A o u 
{a drinking cup [made] of wood) ; rpdirefa apyvpiov, (rr4cpavos vaKivfrovv. 

Rem. 14. This relation is very often expressed by the Dat. also, and more 
definitely by the prepositions e£ and air6, also Sid with the Gen. 

(b) With words of fulness and want, e. g. irX^etv, rrX-qpovv, 
7rtfji7r\avo.L, yipuuv, /3ptS€tv ', vacrcretv, crarrew, evTroptiv, etc. ; aTropuv, 
iriveaS-ai, SeioSai, Sa, cnravit^w, XP 1 ?' e ^ c> '■> ^Xios, TrXrjprj^, /xeo-Tos, 
tt\ov(tli<s, Sacri;?, etc. ; -rrivq^, evSejys; aAis (satis). 

X. Symp. 4, 64. ffeo-ay{x4vos irXovrov rr,v i|/vxV ecro/xai {shall be satisfied 
with riches). PI. Apol. 26, d. ra 'Ava£ay6pov fiifixla y4/xei r ovroov r a>v Xo- 
yav {are full of these sayings). 'EviropeTv, atropeiv, TTevea&ai, o-7ravl(eiv rwv 
Xp-nndroov {to abound in, to be destitute of means). X. Cy. 3. 1,3. Sia&eSvroov 
Kal iXavv6vrwv rb irediov fxecr 6 v {full of persons running about). An. 2. 4, 



384 syntax. [§ 273. 

14. da<rvs Sevdpwv (thickly set with trees). An. 1. 2, 7. irapddeitros f-ieyas, 
ay pi gov Sr-npicav irXrfprjs (full of wild animals). 1. 4, 19. ivrav&a ^<rav 
Kwfj.cu iroXXal fxeo-ral <rirov koI otvov. In the attributive relation, e. g. 
SeVas oXvov (a goblet of [filled with] wine). 

(c) With verbs signifying to eat, to drink, to taste, to cause to 
taste, to enjoy, to satisfy one's self, and in the figurative sense to 
have the enjoyment, use, and advantage of something; kcrSUiv, 
cbayexv, ctico^etcr^at, iriveiv, yeueii/, yevecrSai, KopicraoS^at ; carokavew \ 
ia-Ttav (to entertain), etc. 

'Ea&ieiv Kpeuv (to eat of flesh), Kopecracr&ai <popf3rjs (to satisfy one's 
self with food) , triveiv oXvov (to drink of wine). X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. avdyKi] o~oi 
air oyevecr&ai r ovr cav t S>v ir avr o 5 air a>v fipca/xaTajr (to taste the various 
kinds of food). 1.3,10. KalriSr], 5 Kvpe, raXXa fufiov/xevos rbv^aKav, ovk aire ftp 6- 
<p-naas rov 0% v ov ; (why did you not gulp down the wine?). C. 4. 3, W.airoXave iv 
irdvr wv t cav aya&uv (to enjoy all good things) ; but air oXav eiv r iv 6 s ri, e.g. 
ay a&d or Ka/ca, to receive good or evil from some one. X. C. 4, 3, 10. Tt &XXo (wop 
at y coy Te na\ b'icov na\ tG>v aXX<av (wwy t oar avT a aya&a airoXave 1, 
ocra dv&pooiroi ; (what other animal receives so many advantages from goats, etc., as 
man?). T evea&ai TifxrjS (to taste, enjoy honor); yeveiv riva Ti/xrjs (to 
cause one to taste or enjoy honor). 

Rem. 15. The Ace. stands with verbs of eating and drinking: (a) when the 
substance is represented as consumed wholly or in a great quantity; or (b) 
when the common means of nutriment is indicated, that which every one takes. 
Od. 1, 347. KvkXojx]/, rfj, irie olvov, i-rrel cpdyes avSpo/xea Kpea (drink wine, 
since you eat human flesh). X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. ovk Zkit iofxai avrbs rov olvov. 
1.3, 6. Kpea ye evooxov (enjoy your meat). 6. 2, 28. vdari /j.e/j.iyfj.evr]v a el 
r)\v jxdQav iafriet (always eats maize). Ibid, fxerd 5e rbv aTrov iav olvov 
4ir iirivco /xev, obSev jie'iov eX ovaa V ^ V XV avairavaeTai (spoken of a habit). So 
eo~&leiv Kpea and Kpewv, iriveiv olvov and otvov. Hence iriveiv olvov is said 
of those whose usual drink is wine, but iriveiv o'Lvov, is to take a drink of wine, to 
drink some of the wine. Hence the Gen. with verbs of eating and drinking has 
a partitive sense, like the English expressions, to eat or drink of something. PL 
Symp. 176, c. iroXvv iriveiv olvov. 

(d) With verbs signifying to smell, emit an odor of something, 
etc. ; irveiv, o^etv, 7rpos/3aA.Aea\ 

*0£eiv ioiv (to smell violets); fivpov irve?v (to emit the smell of myrrh) ; 
irpos fiaXXeiv [xvpov, -k v eiv rpdyov, o(eiv Kpo /xvuv. Ar. Ran. 341 . 
cos Tjdv fjLoi it pos eirvevae %oipe'i <x>v Kpewv (so sweet was the smell of swine's 
flesh to me). 

Rem. 16. In poetry many other verbs are constructed with the Gen. of the 
material, e. g. airoffri Xfie 1 v aXeicparos, (veKvas) irvpbs fxe iXicrae \xev, 
Xovecr&ai ivppeios TroTa/xolo. See Larger Grammar, II. § 527, Rem. 

(e) With expressions of remembering and forgetting : fxifju/rjcr- 
KOfzcu, to remember, //.i/^o-kw (rtva twos), to remind one of some- 



§ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 365 

thing, iwqiusV) afjLvrjfJLuv, i7n\av$dvojxaL, to forget ; hence also with 
\d$pa, Aa^ptws, and Kpv<j>a ; also with, expressions of being ac- 
quainted and unacquainted with, of experience and inexperience ; 
of ability, dexterity or skill in anything, e. g. e//,7ra/oos, airaposy 
iTTKTTrjpujiV, i7ri(TTapL€vo<s, aveincrTiqfiutv, Tpifiuiv, avyyva)pLU)v, d8a^?, a,7rat- 
8evTo<s, tStcor^s ; ajrup<x><$, ^evws e^co ; with adj ectives in - 1 k o s (derived 
from transitive verbs) which denote skill, aptness, etc.; also with 
7r€tpw/xat, to make trial of something. 

X. C. 2. 1, 33. Oi yepairepoi TjSews tojv iraXai&v irpd^twv /j.4 [xvnvTai 
(remember the past achievements). Antiph. II. a, 7. 'H iTn&vfxia tt\s Tijxwpias 
aixvrifxova twv kivSvvoiv ko&'hjtt) omt6v (rendered him forgetful of dangers). 
X. O. 16, 8. Tl6&ev ovv ySouAet &p^oofj.ai ere ttjs yetapyias vtto pi fivh cnceiv 
(to remind you of husbandry) . Cy. 8.3,3. Tov <p&6vov iireX iX-nffTo (had 
forgotten envy). Attributive: fj.vi]pvn, X^St? tojv Ka/cwv. (Me/xv-n fiai tl, to 
keep something in mind.) "Efiireipos or e ir 1 a r t\ fi 00 v elp.1 ttjs t^ciij (1 
am acquainted with the art). 'Airaid evr s apeTrjs, /xovctikt) s (ignorant of 
virtue, music). Her. 2, 49. ttjs frvcrlas ravr-ns ovk a8ar)s, aXX* e fin e 1 pos 
(not ignorant of that sacrifice, but acquainted with it). X. Cy. 6. 1,37. (rvyyvca- 
fiuv ru>v avfrponrivwv tt pay fiaT av (pardoning, not knowing, human errors). 
— 'Aireipwy ex^y Tavrrjs t 77 s r e % z> 77 s (to be unacquainted with this art). 
'Airoir <=ip£> fiai yvojfirjs (I make trial of an opinion). With the poets this 
use of the Gen. is still more extensive. II. 0. 411. t4ktovos, bs pa. tc irdcrns ev 
etS?; ffocpi'ns (who is well acquainted with all skill). X. 3. 1, 6. irapacr Keva- 
<rr ikov t Sou els tov iroXefiov tov arpaTrjybv elvai XPV Kc ^ 7r ° P io~tlkov tojv 
iiriTrjSeiojv to?s VTpaTiooTais (skilful in preparing what is necessary for war, and 
capable of providing provisions). PL Euthyphr. 3, c. 8 ib~ao~ KaXucbs tt)s avToZ 
crocplas (able to teach his own learning). PI. L. 643, a. t eXeios ttjs tov Trpdy/na- 
tos apeTrjs (as it were, showing one's self perfect in a thing). Attributive: e/.i7m- 
pia ttjs yeojfieTpias, etc. 

(f) With the words of sensation and perception: olkovciv, 
aKp oaaSai, alcr$av€cr$ai, ocr^oaivecr $<xi. 

'Akovco tQv Xoyojv, &opvfiov (I hear the words, the tumult). X. H. 4. 4, 
4. tt)s Kpavy9js rjcr&ovTo (they perceived the cry). An. 1. 1, 8. fiao-iAebs 
r/js irpbs kavTbv e7r ifiovXTJs ovk rjcr&dveTo (did not perceive the plot). C. 2 
1,24. t'ivojv ocrcppivo fievos Tjcr^ei-ns ; (what things would you desire to smell?). 
AKoveiv DiK-ns (to hear a case at law); alcr&dvecr&ai tjSovojv, o(r/if,j, 
^ropi j6ou, @0T)&elas. 

Rem. 17. The attributive Gen. has a much wider signification, e. g. ayeXXia 
ttjs Xiov, de Chio (tidings of or concerning Chios) ; ipdoTrjais tivos (a question about 
something), like the Latin quaestio alicujus rei instead of de aliqua re. 

Rem. 18. 'A.kov e iv, vir aKoveiv, xaTaicove iv often take the Gen. also 
in the sense of to obey, and according to this analogy irei&ecr&ai (seldom in 
Attic) and airei&elv; so also /cottjkoos, vttt)koos, take the Gen., more 

33 



386 syntax. [$ 273 

seldom the Dat. Her. 3, 62. irpoayopevei r)p.lv 2/uep8 to s j6a<rt/\7)os aicov 
eiv {commands us to obey king Smerdis). 101. Aapeiov # a<r iXrjos ovdafia 
v iv ?j k over a v (they obeyed king Darius nowhere). 1.126. vvv dv e/xeo irsi^o/xe 
vol yii ecr&e iXev&epoi (now therefore obeying me, be free). So Th. 7, 73. 

Rem. 19. The above verbs have the following constructions: (a) Gen. of 
the thing, as in the examples given. The Gen. denotes the material as a whole, 
of which one perceives, as it were, single parts, or the sense, the purport of which 
one perceives mentally. AloSfdvo/xai Kpavyrjs (I perceive, as it were, the single 
tones of the cry) ; X. H. 4. 8, 19. alo-&ecr&cu rr\s f$0T\&eias (I observe something 
of the help); — (b) Ace. of the thing; then it is denoted that one perceives 
the whole thing with his senses, or the thing in its totality. Th. 2, 94. 'Cls 
rjtr&ovTo tt]v fio-n&elav (when they observed the help approaching = saw with 
their eyes = ewpcav). The Ace. of the person seldom stands with alcr&dve<r&ai ; 
when it does, the verb has the sense of ddivai (to know). X. Symp. 4, 36. 
Alcr^dvo/xai rvpdvvovs t iv as, ot ovtco Treiyw<Ti xPW&tw (T. know some kings). — 

(c) Gen. of the person, which represents the person, as it were, as the source, from 
which the perception is derived. 'Akovo) ~Scok pdrovs (I hear Socrates, i. e. the 
words of Socrates). X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. Ovk aKpod>jxevo>. tov adovros oj{jlvvgtg 
cfSeiv dpicrra (not hearing the voice of the singer). Her. 1, 80. chs o <r (ppavro rd- 
Xio~ra ruv Kafx^Xcav ot 'Ittttoi Kal elSov avras oiziuoo avearpecpov (as soon as the 
horses got scent of the camels). So cr vviy\jxi (to undersold), with the Gen. of a 
person, e. g. Her. 1, 47. Kal Kacpov crwinixi Kal ov cpoovevvros aKovca (I under- 
stand a mute) ; but with the Ace. of the thing, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 6, 2. di epfx-qvewv 
t a s twv frecov o-v/xfiovXias trvviwixi ( I understand the counsels of the gods ). The 
verb ala&dveo-frai is not constructed with the simple Gen. of the person. — 

(d) Gen. of the person and Ace. of the thing : ''H/coucra ^cvKpdrovs r ovr ov top 
Xoyov (audivi e Socrate hunc sermonem, I heard this conversation from Socrates). 
So also rl x a ^ e ' 7ro ' / yo'&yo'ai rovpov fiiov ; (lohat have you perceived disa- 
greeable in my manner of life?) X. C. 1. 6, 4. 'Xvvi-q/j.i aov rbv \6yov. — (e) 
Gen. of the person with a participle in the Gen., or with a subordinate clause 
which takes the place of the Ace. of the thing. 'Akovco ^ooupdrovs StaAe- 
yo/xevov (I hear Socrates reasoning, nearly the same as aicovca ^coKpdrovs SiaAo- 
yov). X. H. 4. 2, 19. AaKeSai/xovioi, ovk TJa&dvovTO irpo s i6vr ca v rcav 7roAe- 
fxiaiv (did not perceive the enemy approaching, nearly the same as rja&dvovTo twv 
TToXefiicDV tt]v 7rp6sodov). The person is sometimes also contained in the parti- 
ciple, e.g. Th. 5, 73. rjcrSovro r e ixi^ovrw (they perceived them building the 
wall, instead of t}o~&ovto avrdv re i^i £6 vr o>v or oti Te(%l(o(6J'). X. An. 
1. 10, 4. fiaaiXevs ¥iKOvo~e T io~ a a<p e p v ov s, oti ot "EWrjves viiccpev (heard 
from Tissaphernes that the Greeks were conquering, like tfnovo-e Tio~aa<p4pvovs rijv 
rciiv 'EW-fjvoov viK7]v). C. 4. 4, 13. ovk alaSdvoixai aov, SttoTov v6fj.ip.ov ^ ivolov 
8'iKai.ov \4yeis (I do not comprehend you, what you call according to law or according 
to justice). 

Rem. 20. Likewise the Gen. of the person and Ace. of the thing, or the Gen. of 
the person with a participle in the Gen. or with a subordinate clause standing in 
the place of the Ace. [Comp. (d) and (e) Rem. 19], is used with verbs of seeing^ 
hearing, experiencing, learning, considering, knowing ; of judging, examining, and say- 
ing ; of admiring, praising, blaming : 6 pav, &eao~&ai, o~ kott etv, v-Trovoeiv, iv- 
iO€?v,yiyvci>o , K€iv, iiricTT affS ai, elSevai, i v&v [J.e7cr&a i, etc. ; irvv&d- 
vecr&at, fiav&dveiv, Kpiveiv, i^erd^tiv, Xeyciv, orjAovv, etc.: ano- 
Se'xeo-^-at (to receive the opinion of one, to agree in opinion with one) ; &yao-&ct i, 
§av[Aa(eiv, iirai v civ, jxi ficp € cr&ai, ty 4y e iv. The Gen. denotes the ob- 
ject (commonly a person) in respect to which one perceives, sees, obserres. 
knows, judges something, some action, external indication, or some single c'u- 



$ 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 387 

cumstance, etc. ; or of whom one learns, hears, affirms something ; or in whom 
one admires, praises, or censures something. 

X. C. 1. 1, 12. Tlpurov fx\v avTwv (~2,coKpdrr}s) iff kott e i, ir6repd irorr 
VOjAiffavTzs luavcos 7^877 rav^pdoTriva eiSeuai epx ( " /Tal inl rb rrepl roiovrcov <ppov 
ri£eiv, fj ra p.ev av&pwireia irap4vres, ra Sai/x6via 8e ffKOirovvres, rjyovvr ai ra 
wpos^Kopra irpdrreiv (he first considered in respect to them whether, etc.). An. 3. 1, 
19. 8 la&eui /j.evos avrdv, offrjv x c *>P at/ Ka ^ o'lav exoiev (attentively con- 
sidering with respect to them, what a country they had). Cy. 7. 2, 18. eyva kclI 
[xd\a aroira 4 pod iroiovvros (he perceived in respect to me, that I ivas doing an 
absurd thing, or eyvco 4 pod, '6ri aroira iroioiriv). PL Gorg. 463, d. ap" ovv av 
fxaSroLs airotc p ivafi4vov ; (instead of ap ovv av fxov jid&ois, a airoKpivQ/JLai , 
will you then understand my answer, i. e. learn from me what I answer ?). 465, e. A €- 
y out 6 s fxov ppaxsa ovk ifxdv&aves (you did not understand me when I spoke 
briefly). The Gen. of the person alone. Ph. Phil. 51, c. d pov fiav&dveis 
instead of ei' jjlov fxav&dveis-, a x4ya> (if you comprehend me, understand what I 
say). Th. 4. 6. iirvfrovro rrjs IlvXov nar e i\r) ixfx4vns, instead of 4ttv&. 
rrjs IlvAov, on KaT€i\r)fx/j.ev7) ^v (when they learned that Pylus was captured). 5, 83. 
ijff&ovro reixi-C<>VT(av, instead of rjff&. avra>v, Uri rsixK 0l * v (learned re- 
specting them that they were building the walls, i. e. learned that they were building, 
etc.). X. C. 3. 6, 16. 4vSv fxov rwv 'aWav, ir6repd ffoi Sokovctiv iirl rols 
roiovrois 4waivov paKXov 77 -ty6yov rvyx&veiv (observe respecting the others, whether). 
("E.v&vixe'iffSai with the Gen. of the thing, for example rrjs 8>pas, X. Ven. 8, 6., 
rS>v tSttwv, ib. 9,4, signifies to have a regard for something, and belongs to § 174, 1 
(b) ; 4j/&v[xe7ffSaL with the Ace. of the thing signifies to reflect upon, consider 
something, aliquid secum reputare.) PL Protag. 324, c. air oh 4 xo vrai oi ffol 

TTO\?TCU KCU %oAKf6)J Kot ff KVT OT 6jX0V ffVflfiovXtVOVrOS TO. TTOXlTllcd 

(receive the opinion of the brazier and shoemaker). Her. 6, 76. dyaff&ai rod 
'Epaffivov ov ir poS 106 vr s robs iroXi-firas ( to admire Erasin us because he did 
not betray the citizens). Th. 1, 84. rb fipadv teal peXXov, b p4fj.(p ov r ai paXiffra 
77 n&v, fii] alffxvveffhe (for which they chiefly complain of us). X. Cy. 3. 1, 15. « 
&yaffai rod irarp6s, 77 off a /3e/3ouAeuTat, '/) Off a it 4ir pax*? irdvv ffoi 
ffvfi^ouKeixa rovrov fxifi^ff^ai (if you admire my father either for the measures he 
has devised, etc.). Ages. 2, 7. rdd' avrov fryapai, on irapeffKevdffaro (1 ad- 
mire this in him). 8. 4. 4ycb Kal rovro 4iraiv5> 'Ayy cr iXdov, rb irpbs rb 
ap4ffKeiv ro?s "EXXi\ffiv inrepideTv rr\v f}affi\4oos £eviav ( I praise Agesilaus for this 
also). PL Men. 95, c. Yopyiov paXiffra ravra dya/xai (1 particularly ad- 
mire this in Gorgias, or Gorgias for this). Theaet. 161, b. '6 SfavpdCo) rov 
eralpov, r6de iffriv (what I admire in a companion is this) . Criton 43, b. cod 
irdXai &avy.d£a>, al ff&av6 pevo s, &s f)b'4oos Ka&evdsis. Pp. 383, a. Tr6\\a 
'Ofi-fipov iiraivovvres aAAa rovro ovk 4iraiveff6fj.^a (though ice praise 
many other things in Homer). 

Rem. 21. In themselves, the above verbs take the Ace, e. g. 6p5> nva or n, 
OKorcS) nva or ri, iiraivS), \\i4y<a, fji.4(i<po[xai, aya/xai nva or ri. 



$ 274. (b) Causal Genitive. 

The second division of the causal genitive includes the geni 
tive, which expresses the cause or occasion, i. e. the object, 
which calls forth or occasions the action of the subject. This 
genitive stands : 

1. With many verbs which denote a state or affection of the 
mind (verba affectuum), viz. : 



388 syntax [$ 274 

(a) Desire and longing for : lirtBvjxuv, ipav, ipoiTtm^ ev^v 01 
SiaKUcrSaL ; Sufnjv, 7reti/iyv ; 

(b) Care for, concern for, and the contrary : empLtkuarSaii 
tppovTi&iv, K-qSzaSaL, irepiopaarSai, irpoopav, virepopav {to despise), 
trpovoeLv, /zeAa, //,era//,eAa, djaeAetv, SXtyoipctv, <£€iSeo-$ai, ivSvpLeicrScn 
(to have a regard for, h 273, Rem. 20) ; 

(c) Pain, grief pity: oXocpvpeoSau, 7rei/-9x/ccos Zx eLV '> iXeeiv 
and oiKTecpeiv (with the Ace. of the person and Gen. of the 
thing) ; 

(d) Anger and indignation : Spyi&o-SaL (with the Dat. of the 
person and the Gen. of the thing), ^cuVcttcus cpepuv; 

(e) Envy : (pSoveiv (with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. 
of the thing), £7ricp$6vu)s SiaKeio-^cu ; 

(f) Admiration, praise, blame; 3avpLa£eiv and ayaoScu (with 
the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, sometimes 
also with the Gen. of the thing and the Gen. of the person, 
winch is governed by that thing, see Rem. 2) fyjXovv, et>&u//,o- 
vuQs.iv, hraiv&v, /xe/x</>ccr^at (all with the Ace. of the person and 
the Gen. of the thing). 

PI. Rp. 403, a. 6 op&bs epcas irecpvKe koct/xlov re Kal KaXov creoeppoveos re 
Kal fiovaiKws ipav (to love what is well ordered and beautiful). 438, a. ouSets 
ttotov iir i&v [M€?, aWa. % p 77 c t ov wot ov, Kal ov a ir ov, aXAa. % p 77 o" t v 
airov iravrts yap &pa twv aya&wv iir t&v p. ova" iv (no one desires drink, 
but wholesome drink, etc.). Symp. 181, b. 01 (pavXoi tojv avSp&irwv twv o'cof/.d- 
tu>v [laXXov, f) T<av Tpvx&v ipwaiv (love their bodies more than their souls). 
186, b. rb av6p.oiov avo/xoicoy iir ifrv/xe? Kal ipa (desires and loves what is 
unlike). 216, d. 'ZccKpar-ns ip<aT ikus 8 idice nai tSov Ka\5>v (is very fond 
of the beautiful). X. Cy. 3. 3, 12. (Kvpos) KaKetvovs iirotr)o~ei> ip<ar ik&s ex 6 ' 1 
tov tfSr) TroieTjs ti (made them desirous of doing something). X. 0. 13, 9 
Treivuai tov iiraivov oi>x t)ttov zviai tqov (pvaewy, 7} dXXai twv ctItwv re 
Kal ttotojv (thirst for praise not less than others for food and drink). Attribu- 
tive, e. g. epws, iTTi^v/ji.ia aper^s (amor, cupiditas virtutis, love, desire for virtue). 
Th. 6. 14. K-hdeo-frai tt)s iroXews (to be anxious about the city). Her. 3, 151. 
iiroXi6pKte (BafivXowtovs) (ppovri^ovras ovdeu rrjs iroXiop kit) s (having 
no concern about the siege). 3, 159. tov o'ltov irpoopav (to have a care for, 
to provide food). X. Symp. 8, 33. oi ip6yov acppovT ict el> idri£6/j.eyoi ovk 
alfrxvvovTai a\a\p6v ti iroieiv (those accustomed to be indifferent to censure). 
X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. riepaw v6p.oi (&pxovTai) tov koivov aya&ov iir 1 fie- 
Aovfxevoi (having a regard for the public good). MeAet fioi twos (1 
have a care for something, some one). PL Crito, 44, c. ti j)p.?i' ttjs twv ttoXXQp 
$6^r)s fie\ei; (why do we care for the opinion of the multitude?). 5. 1, 21« 



$ 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 389 

Toofipva ireipdao/Aai rroieiv p.r)irore p.er ap.e Xrj crai rrjs rrpbs ep.e 6Sov (that 
Gobryas shall not repent of his journey to me). Id. C. 1. 2, 9. virep opav errolet 
rav Ka& ear droop v6p.oov robs aw6vras (made his associates despise the ex- 
isting laws). Th. 4, 124. BpacriSas rrjs Mevorjs ir e p Lopw p.e vos (solicitous 
about Mende). X. H. 5. 4, 1. &eol ovre rd>v dfrejSouyrwy, ovre rwv av6tfia 
iro lovvrwv afie\ov(ri (are regardless neither of the wicked nor the profane) 
Cy. 8. 7, 15. eavrov Kr) Serai 6 ir povo 5>v a.Se\(pov (he who takes thought 
for a brother is anxious for himself). X. Ag. 7, 1. 'Ayr]<rt\aos, '6irov tp<t-(0 rr)v 
irarplSa n w<pe\r)o-eiv, ov xP' f ll xa ' T(av e(p elS ero (did not spare his wealth). 
Attributive, e. g. cppovrh rwv iraldcau (cura liberorum, care for children). So 
iirip.e\i)s rivos (caring for something). X. Cy. 5. 4, 32. 6 Kvpos aKovaas rov 
[xhv ird&ovs cpKreipev avr6v (pitied him on account of his suffering). 5.2, 7. 
rrju frvyarepa, irev&iK&s ex ov<rav T0 " a.8e\^>ov re&vr) kot s, H-dywv 
S/Se elirev (grieving for her dead brother). Symp. 4, 37. rovrovs oiKrelpw rrjs 
dyav %aA. ex^s v6o~ov (I pity them on account of the disease). Attributive, e. g. 
&\yos eralpuv (de amicis, for, on account of friends) ; moreover with adjectives 
also (though only in poetry), and especially with exclamations with or without 
interjections. Eur. Or. 413. olp.01 icoyp.a>i/, ots e\avi>op.ai rd\as! (alas the 
vexations!). X. Cy. 3, 1,39. <pev rod avSpSs (Oh what a man!). PI. Ep. 
509, c. "AttoAAoj/, oaipovlas virep&oArj s! X. Cy. 2. 2, 3. rrjs t u % 7? s, rb 
ep.e vvv K\r)Sevra Sevpo rvx^tv ! ( ill fortune, that lam called hither at this time !). 
Lys. C. Philon. 187, 11. Ka^eo-rrjKe ri e&os olxaiov iraaiy av&pctnrois, ruv avruv 
ad iKT](xdra}v fidkiara 6pyi£e&&ai rots pidXiGra 8vvap.evois, p.)} adiKeiu, rois 
§€ tt4vt)o~iv r) aSvpdrois r$ o~dip.an o~vyyua>p.r]u exe^, 81a. rb r)ye7a&ai duovras avrovs 
apiaprdpeiv (to be angry on account of the same ivrongs). (In poetry, the Gen. is much 
more frequent with verbs expressing anger, e. g. II. £, 266. 'Hpaic\rjos irep ix<*>' 
craro, iraidbs eolo (wasangry on account of Hercules, his son). Od. a, 69. (UoaeiSdoov) 
KvkXcottos K€X^ UTa h u ' / o<p&a\p.ov a\dwo~ev (is angry on account of the Cyclops). 
S. Antig. 1177. irarpl p. 77 via as <povov (having been angry with the father on 
account of the murder). Eur. Or. 749. laws croi frvyarepos frv p.ovp.evos). At- 
tributive, e. g. x^ os Ttyis (ira alicujus instead of de aliquo, anger on account of 
some person or thing). $&ove?v riui rrjs aocplas (to envy one on account of his 
wisdom). Th. 1, 75. &£iol iap.ev apxvs ye r)s exop.ev ro?s"E\\r]cri p.rj orSws &yav 
i7ri<p&6va>s oiaiceTa&ai (it is not just that we should be so much envied by the 
Greeks on account of our sovereignty). So also in poetry, p. e ya I p w, e. g. Aesch. 
Prom. 627. ov p. ey alp 00 rovSe aoi 8upr)p.aros (I do not envy you because of 
this gift). Attributive, e. g. <p&6vos riv6s (envy on account of something). X. Cy. 
2. 3, 21. rovrov ovv 6 Kvpos ayaa&els rrjs re ir pa6rr\ros na\ rrjs Stdaa • 
Ka\ias Kal rrjs eir ip.eXelas, exaXeae Ka\ ravrrjv rr}v rd\iv eiri rb deTirvov avv 
r<$ rai;idpx<!> (having admired him on account of his gentleness, education, etc.). 
Symp. 4, 45. £r}\c0 ere rov irKoirov (I envy you on account of your wealth). 
PL Symp. 194, e. SoKovai irdvres robs avSpooirovs evS aip.ovl£eiv ra>v ay a- 
&a> j/, Sjv 6 &ebs avrots aXrios (to consider men happy on account of the good things^ 
which, etc.). Ion. 530, b. iroKhdicis ye i(i)\w<ra vp.as rols patywdovs rrjs 
r *X yi l s ' Dem. Cor. 296, 204. rlsovKav aydcrairo rwv avSpwv enelvuP 

33* 



390 syntax. [$ 274 

ttjs apeTrjs ; (who would not admire the valor of those men ?). Lys. Simon.. 100 v 
44. &avfj.d£(a jxaMffra tovtov tt) s Siavoias (I admire his purpose). Id, 
Eratosth. 124, 41. £& avfj.ao~a rrjs r6\fMr}s tG>v hsyovTuv. So with ad- 
jectives, e. g. PI. Phaedon. 58, e. evSai p.cov [xoi 6 avrjp icpaiveTo Kal tou 
Tpoivov Kal twv \6yav, &s adea>s nal yevvaiws irsAsvTa (the man seemed to 
be happy on account of his habits and remarks). 

Remark 1 . The Gen. with the above verbs is often governed by preposi- 
tions, especially "irspi, e. g. iiriixeXeTcrSfai, <ppovTi(eiv irepi twos. Some verbs 
which denote a state or an affection of the mind, do not govern the Gen. ; thus 
iro&zlv (to long for, to feel the want of), always governs the Ace, and so 
<piAe?v, ayairav, arepyeiv (to love) ; the last two also in the sense of to be 
contented with, take the Dat. ( = Lat. Abl.). Several of the above verbs have also 
different constructions ; then they commoi ly express different ideas, e. g. 
(poouri^e iv tivos or irepi tii>os, X. C 1. 1, 11. 4. 7, 6. to be anxious for 
something, but (ppovTi^eiv r t, scrutari, investigare ; — irpovoelv, it poo pap 
n (to perceive beforehand, to consider beforehand); vir e po pav ri and tivos, 
despicere, in the same sense. In poetry, /j.4\ei sometimes takes for its subject 
a noun denoting a thing, in the Nom. ; but in prose, it takes only a Neut. 
pronoun in the Nom. The verb is then used personally : MsX-hvova iv b* 
ifiol 'liriro:, II. k, 481. TauTa fiev ovv &e£ (j.eAr)arei, PI. Phaedr. 238, d. 

Rem. 2. The verbs Sravjxd^ iv and &yaa&ai have the following con- 
structions : (a) the Ace. of the person or the Ace. of the thing alone, when the 
wonder or admiration extends to the whole person or thing, or to the whole 
nature of a person or thing, e. g. fravfidfa tov CTparnySv (I admire the general) ; 
Sravfxdfa tt\v aocpiav (I admire the wisdom) ; — (b) the Gen. of the person and the 
Ace. of the thing, when one admires something in a person (Rem. 20), e. g. 
&av/j.dfy HioKpaTovs ttjv o-ocpiav (I admire the wisdom in S crates, or the wisdom of 
Socrates) ; — (c) the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, when one admires 
a person on account of some quality, e. g. &avfji.d£w ^.wKpdTr] ttjs aocpias (I admire 
Socrates on account of his wisdom), see 1, (f ) ; — (d) seldom Gen. of the thing and 
the Gen. of the person depending upon it, when I wonder at the quality of a per- 
son, or admire the quality of a person, e. g. gravp.d(co ^uKpaTovs ttjs aocpias (1 
admire the wisdom of Socrates), see 1, (f ) ; — (e) the Ace. of the person, and in- 
stead of the Gen. of the thing, a preposition, commonly iiri with the Dat., e. g. 
&avfjt.d£(o HuKpaTTi iirl tj? cofyia (I admire Socrates for, on account of his ivisdom). 

2. With verbs signifying to requite, to revenge, to accuse and 
condemn. The Gen. represents the guilt or crime as the cause 
of the requital, revenge, etc. Thus with rijacopeio-^ai (with the 
Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), also with judicial 
verbs of accusing and condemning, e. g. alrtaaSai, iTrauriaaSai, Sioj- 
K€iv, dsdyeiv, vira.ye.iv, ypafaoSai, 7rposKa\eio-$ai (all With the Ace. of 
the person and the Gen. of the thing), hr^ikvai, iyKaXetv, eTno-Krpr- 
reo-^ai (all three with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. of the 
thing) ; <pe.vye.iv (to be accused) ; Si/ca£eiv, Kpive.iv, oXpexv, to convict 
(all three ivith the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), 
and akthvai, to be convicted. 

Her. 3, 145. tovs tiriKovpovs t iixcop-fio-ofiai ttjs iv&dde air i£ios (will pun- 
ish the allies on account of the invasion of this land). (Seldom t ifiwpelv tivi 






£ 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 39i 

rivos, as X. Cy . 4. 6, 8. r i fi a p 4) <r e i v <rot tov tr aidbs virtcrxvovuai, I avenge 
you for [the murder of] your son.) 'Ei a it lacrfral two. <p6vov [to accuse one of 
murder). Her. 6, 1 04. ( MiXTidSea) ot e%S-pol idico^aj/ Tvpavi/idos rrj s iv 
Xepo-ovrjcrco (prosecuted Miltiades for tyranny). 'Ewei-ievai rivl <p6vov (to pros- 
ecute one for murder). T pdcpecfrai riva irapavS [acov (to indict one for illegal 
measures). $evyeiv kAotttjs, cp6vov, acrefieias (to be accused of theft, etc.). 
Kplvecr&ai airejSeias. X. Cy. 1 . 2, 7. Heparcu 5 iicd£ovo~ i ual iyK\r]/xa- 
tos, ob evena itv&pcoivoi {.uaovcri fj.hu aWSjAovs fidXicrTa, diKa^ovrai Se 7//«crTa, 
axxoicrrias (condemn as a crime, ingratitude). C. 1. 2,49. Kara v6\xov (e^eari) 
irapavotas s\6vti kcu tov iraripa, S^crai (it is lawful for one convicting his 
father of madness). Dem. Aphob. 846. iir itr ktjttt e cr&ai tivi tcov tyevdo- 
fxaprvpiwy (to prosecute one for false witness). 861, 58. cpevyetu i|/eu8o- 
uapTvpicov iir 6 rivos. 'AAcovai kXotvtis (to be convicted of theft). 

Rem. 3. Also the punishment for guilt is put in the Gen., but this Gen. is to 
be considered as the Gen. of price (§ 275, 3), e. g. SavaTov npiveiv, npivecrScti, 
Sicokciu (to sentence, be sentenced to death). Sometimes the prepositions irtpi and 
ei/ena are joined with the verb, e. g. SicoKeiu nvh. 7rep2 <p6vov : and avri with 
TifAwpeTKT&cu. 'E-y/caA.e?*' besides the above, has the following constructions : (a) 
the Dat. of person and Ace. of thing, to charge something upon some one; — 
(b) the Dat. of person followed by a clause with '6ti or by the Inf. ; — (c) the 
Dat. of person alone, to accuse [§ 284, 3. (6)] ; — (d) the Ace. of thing alone, 
to bring as a charge. Kar-nyopeiv, to accuse, is construed : (a) with Gen. of per- 
son, sometimes with Kara, and Gen. ; — (b) with Gen. of person, and Ace. of 
thing, to lay something to one's charge ; — (c) with Gen. both of person and of thing, 
sometimes with irepi and Gen. of thing ; — (d) with Ace. of thing alone. 

3. Finally the Gen. of cause is also used in the following 
instances : 

(a) With tov fxri and the infinitive. See § 308, 2, (b). 

(b) With the adverbs e3, Ka\a>s, per picas, and the like, also with cos, 
it Sis, Sir cos, rj, oiTT], ovtcos, « 5 e, cosctvTcos, connected with the verbs 
ex**!' and %Keiv, sometimes also with eluai and other intransitive verbs, the 
object by which a condition is caused or occasioned, is put in the Gen. K a Aw s 
e%« irodcou (lam well in respect to my feet). Her. 6, 116. 'A&tjvcuol, cos tto- 
dcov e?xo^, rdx^crra ifiorj&eov is to &o~tv (as they were able with respect to their 
feet, i. e. as quickly as their feet would carry them). 5, 62. xpt]\xci.T cov ev tjkov- 
Tes (well off for, to have a plenty of, means). So tv, tcaKcos, [xeTplcos ^% eLV &' L0V > 
eppevcov, yivovs, Swd/xzcos (to be well off" as to the means of living). Ot "EWrjves 
ovtcos eTx°" ofiovoias irpos aXXr]\ovs. X. Cy. 7. 5, 56. ovtco TpSiroi, 
«X €tJ (y ou are thus in respect to circumstances, you are in suck circumstances). H. 
4. 5, 15. cos Tax ovs eKeurTos elxej/ (as each was able in respect to swiftness, as 
quickly as each was able). 



392 syntax. [$ 275. 

$275. (c) Genitive denoting ceitain Mutual 
Relations. 

The third division of the causal Gen., includes the Gen. by 
which certain mutual relations are expressed, e. g. the relation 
of the ruler to the subject. As a ruler necessarily supposes a 
subject, and a subject a ruler, an inferior, a superior, etc., the 
one may, in a measure, be considered the cause or occasion of 
the other. Hence the Gen. is used : 

1. With verbs of ruling, superiority, excelling, surpassing, sub- 
jection, inferiority : apyeiv, Kpareiv, Seo-7ro£eiv, rvpavvetv, rvpaweveiv, 
c-TpaT7ryeiv, i7riTpo7T€veiv, iirio-TOLTZLV, (SaatXeveiv, f)yep,oveveiv, rryuoSai, 
etc.; with the adjectives iyKparrjs, aKpanjs ; — also with ^poi^ecy, 
avk^iv, Trepielvoa, TrepcytyvecrSaL, TrpodTaruv, v7rep/3aW€LV, virepcpipew, 
7rpuoTeveLV, 7rpeo-(3evetv, irpoKpiveiv, TrpoTL/xav, ttX^ov^ktuv, etc. ; — rjTTci- 
a$ai, vcrrepetv, vcrTepi^eiv, iXarrovcrSai, pLeiovcrScu, juetoveKretv, varepov 
elvai, rjTTOva elvat, etc. 

Her. 7, 97. tov vavr ikov 4gt par-ny eov oi'Se (these had the command of 
the naval forces). 3,15. iirirp oire v e iv AIjvtttov (to be the governor of 
Egypt). Th. 1, 69. 6 Xoyos rod epyov eKparei (the report exceeded the 
thing itself). X. Cy. 1. 1,2. apxoPT es jxiv elcri Kal ol fiovKoXoi rwv fiouv, 
Kal ol imrtxpopfiot tu>v 'lirircav, Kal irduTts Se ol KaXovp.€voi vo/xe7s, <jou av iirt<r- 
tutwo- l (wtov sik6tois av &pxovT es tovtcov vofj.i£oivTo (all those called 
herdsmen might properly be considered the commanders of those animals of which they 
have the rule). 1. 2, 8. (ol Hepaai robs iraTSas) 8iddaKOvo~iv iyicpar els elvai 
yao-Tpbs Kal izorov (teach them to be masters of their belly, etc., temperate in 
eating and drinking). 4.1, 14. ipol Se 8o/cet rrjs /xeyio-Trjs 7)$ov%s tto\l» 
ndXtcrra av/xcpepeiv iyKparrj elvai (to be master of , able to control the greatest pleas- 
ure). 5.1,14. ra /jLOX&ypa av&pdnria irao~ uv, olp.ai, t S>v iiri^v/xiajv aKparrj 
io-Ti (depraved men are subject to, not able to control all their passions). Her. 6, 61. 
KaXXiCT ev o~e i to TraiSiov iracriav tS>v iu ^Trdprr) yvvaiK wv (wdl surpass 
all the Spartan women in beauty). Th. 1, 81. ro7s oirXois ahrCov Kal t<5 nX-rfcei. 
v7re p(p e pojxev (are superior to them in arms, etc.). X. Ag. 5,2. 'AynalXaos 
rjy g7to apxovT i Trpos-fiKeiv ov /j.aXaKia, aXXa. Kaprepiq, twv ISlwtwv irep ie?vai 
(that the commander ought to excel the privates, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 19. rdx^t ire- 
oieyevov avrov (you excelled him in despatch). PI. Gorg. 475, b. aKe^/w/xs^a, 
Apa Xvttt) virz p fiaXXe i to aSwelv tov ct$ t k e? a& a i, Kal akyovcri fxaXXov ol 
aStKOvvTts, f) ol adiKov/xevoi (the Ace. is more usual with virepfiaAkeiv). L. 752, 
e. TTpeo-peve iv t£>v ttoXXwv iroXtwv (to take the preceaence of many 
cities). So also av4x e<r & ai ri vos usually with a participle, to endure, per- 
mit, properly to hold one's self up over one). PI. Apol. 31, b. av4y <-<rfr it tQp 
oiKeiav ajxeXov n4va>v (to permit domestic affairs to be neglected) . lw 6 £4- o 



$ 275.] GENITIVE CASE. 393 

ouk acexeTat rod &\Aa Xeyovros. 'Hrrao'&at ruv £tti&v/j.iu>i/ (to be sub- 
ject to one's desires). Dem. Cor. 308, 244. ovda/mov r)rr7)&e\s airrjA^ou r up 
irapa &i\iirirov ir p e a j8 e u v (being overcome by or yielding to the envoys). X. C 
1.3,3. %uKpdrr\s frvtrlas frvoov fiiKpas airb jxiKpuu ovdev r)ye?ro fie iovo~&a t rut 
airb iroKKwv koli fieydhuv iroKka /cat fieyaXa Sfvovruv (did not think that he was 
inferior to those making many great sacrifices, etc.). Hier. 4, 1. fieyd\ov aya- 
&ov fie 10 veKre? (comes short of a great good). 'To-repeiv rr)s fidxv s (to come 
after the battle). 'Terr epl£e tv ruv naipuv (to be behind opportunities, to fail 
tousethem). "far epi^eiv ruv epyuv. X. Hier. 1, 18. ravrrj rfj eveppoavvn rrjs 
iXiriSos fieiove Krova i rvpavvoi ruv ioiuruv. 2, 1. fie love tcrovvras 
teal airuv /col iroruv koX 6\puv (coming short of food, etc.). 

Remark 1. 'Hyefioveveiv and r)ye?o-&ai in the sense of to go before, 
to show the way, with bh°6v expressed or understood, govern the Dat. ; Kparelv in 
the sense of to conquer, regularly governs the Ace, but in the sense of to be 
master of potiri, to rule, have the command of the Gen., e. g. Kpareiv robs iro- 
\efiiovs (vincere) ; Kpareiv rrjs xcSpas, rrjs ir6\eus, ruv evavriuv, ruv 
err t&v/iiuv, r ov opovs (all in Xen.). 

Rem. 2. That in which one excels another, in prose, is usually put in the 
Dat., but is often expressed by prepositions, e. g. ev rivi, eUs ri, icard ri, iirl 
tim. — With riTTaa&ai \>ir6 is often joined with the Gen., e. g. Th. 1, 62. rb 
o~rpar6iredov rjaaar o virb r u v 'A&rjvaiuv. 

2. The Comparative and adjectives in the positive with the 
force of the Comparative, e. g. numerals in -ao-tos and -ttXovs; 
Sevrepos, TrepvrTos, etc., take the object by which the comparison 
is expressed in the Gen. Genitive of Comparison. 

X. An. 7. 7, 41. ovdev vofii^u avdpl KaWiov elvai KTrjfia ovde \afiir par epov 
aperrjs leal oiKaioo~vvT)s ical yevvai6rr\r os (I do not think that man has 
any possession more beautiful than virtue, etc.). X. Cy. 7. 5, 83. ov 5r)irov rbv 
dpxovra ruv apxofievuv irovr)p6r epov irposr)K.ei elvai (it does not become a 
commander to be more base than his subjects). Eur. Med. 965. XP V<T0S ^e Kpelar- 
o~uv fivpluv \6yuv fiporols (is better than a myriad of words). Her. 7, 48. 
rb 'EA\r]viKbv arpdrevfia (paiverai iroK\air\r)cr iov ecrea&ai rod rjfierepov 
(that the army will be much more numerous than ours). 8. 137. 8 i tt \ r) <r i o s eyevero 
avrbs eu'vrov (he was twice as great as before). 6, 120. vareooi aniKojxevoi 
rrjs avfif3o\rjs Ifieipovro '6fius frer)aao'&ai robs Mr)8ovs (though they came later 
than the battle, after the battle). Ovdevbs devrepo s (second to, inferior to no one). 
OvSevbs v err epos . Tuv apicovvruv irep irra Krr)o~ao~&ai (to acquire more 
than 



Rem. 3. Sometimes the object of comparison is denoted, like a space-rela- 
tion, by irp6 and avri with the Gen., or by irapd and irpSs with the Ace. See 
prepositions. 

3. With verbs of buying and selling, e. g. wvcto-^ai, ayopa&w, 
irpiacr$aiy KroxrSai, 7rapaXa//,/3avea> ; 7r<D\eu', d7roStoW$cu, 7repiStoW#ai, 
SiBovat ; — also with verbs of exchanging and bartering, e. g 



394 SYNTAX. [$ 275 

dXXarreiv, aWaTT€(r$ai, SiafxeL/3€crSat, Xvecv, etc.; — with verbs of 
valuing, e. g. rifiav, TifiacrS'cu, 7roizi.cr$ai, d£iow, d^toGcr^ai, and witb 
the adjective a^tos. Genitive of price. 

Her. 5, 6. (oi QprjiKes) av 4ovt at ras yvvcutcas irapa tuv yov4uv xpVH-dr & 
p. eyd\ a v (buy their wives at a great price). X. C. 2. 1,20. r a> v ttovwv irwKov 
aiv r]jxiv irdvra Taya& oi &ecu (se# all good things to us for toils). Cy. 3. 1, 36 
av d4, 3> Tiypdvr), \4%ov fioi, Tr6aov av irpiaio, costs rf)v ywaiica airoXafiefr 
[what would you pay to regain your wife). 'Eycv pev, ecp-n, S> Kvpe, xav tt)s tyvxvs 
it piatpTjv, &sre f/.i]iroTe Xarpevaai ravr-nv (I would buy her at the expense of my 
life). H. Ci 236. reux e> dpei^ev, XP V0 ~* a X a ^ Ke ' luJ/ > eKarojx^oi ivveafioiav (was 
exchanging arms, golden for brazen, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 37. Ka\ av 8e, & AftueW, 
airdyov ri)v re yvvtuica /ecu avrovs iraioas pyfiev avrcov Karate is (nulla re pre 
iis deposita, having paid nothing for them). Ql aya&ol oiiSevbs av k4 poovs ttjv 
Tf/s irarpiSos iAev&epiav av r aWaj-aivro (the good would exchange the freedom 
of their country for no gain). II. X, 514. l-nrpbs yap avrjp rroWuv avrd^ios 
aXXwv (is worth as much as many others). Her. 3, 53. 6 Avicoippcov ovde av a- 
Kpicrios 7) 1 1 w ae rbv <p4povra tt\v ayyeXiriv (thought the one who brought the 
message not worthy of an examination). 6,112. ipdxovro a£icos \6yov (worthy 
of praise). J A£to vv riva riprjs (to consider worthy of honor). X. Cy. 2. 2, 17. 
€74076 ovb~\v aviaccrepov vopifa tuv iv av&poi>Trois elvai rov t S> v la (av t6v re 
icaKov Kal aya&bv a£iova$ai. Tipav rivl rivos and rivd tlvos, e. g. S e k a to- 
\dvruv, rod fravdrov (to fine one ten talents, to sentence one to death, to con- 
sider one worthy of punishment). So the Mid., used of the accuser : t maa&ai 
tivi apyvpiov, fravdrov, to impose a fine, or penalty of death upon one ; com- 
monly, however, Siktjv is here supplied. 

Rem. 4. With verbs denoting to barter, to exchange, the relation is usually 
considered like a relation of space, and is denoted by avri with the Gen. 

Rem. 5. The Gen. with substantives (attributive Gen. § 262, b.) expresses a 
much greater variety of relations, than the Gen. with verbs. For where two 
objects are immediately connected with each other, there is always a mutual 
relation between the ideas they express ; the one depends upon the other, seems 
united with it, to proceed from it or in some way to belong to it. Hence the 
rule : When two substantives are connected with each other, the substantive which 
completes the idea of the other and defines it more fully, is put in the Gen. As ad- 
jectives or participles are, in their nature, nearly related to the substantive, 
many adjectives also govern the Gen., when the verbs from which they are 
derived, take the Ace, e. g. Kpariarov irarpbs 'E\\f)vcav r pa<peis (sprung from, 
like natus alicujus), S. Ph. 3. 

Rem. 6. The attributive genitive is called the Subjective, the Objective, 
or Passive genitive, according to the mode in which it originates in the sen- 
tence : 

(a) It is called the Subjective Gen., when it originates from the subject of 
the sentence or from a Gen. depending on 4!vai and yiyveabai. It always de- 
notes something active (instead of passive), the cause, author, hence also the 
possessor, the whole in relation to its parts, e. g. oi rod 8 e v 5 p v Kapiroi (arising 
from to S4v5pov <p4pei Kapirovs), the fruits of the tree, the fruits which the tree 
produces. Tb rrj s a ocplas KaXXos ( arising from i) ao<pia irap4x el naXXos or 
t) ao<pia icaXi) iariv or KaXXos iarl rr)s a <pi as), the beauty of wisdom, the 



H 276, 277.} accusative case. 395 

beauty which wisdom causes. Ta tov 'Op-fipov iroi^fiaTa. 'O tov (3ao~ i\4at 
vl6s. 'H tov avdpbs aper-fr. 

(b) It is called the Objective or Causative Gen., when it originates from the 
object of the sentence, i. e. when it takes the place of the object of an intransi- 
tive verb, e. g. 7} rrjs (rocplas in i&v /xta, the desire for wisdom (iTrigrvna rrjs 
crocpias, the &o<pias being the cause of the iiri&vfiS>) ; 6 Trjs aperrjs zpus, vir- 
tutis amor, the love of or for virtue (ipca Trjs apeTrjs) ; evvoid tivos, good-will 
towards one (evvovs elfxi tivi) ; iiri/xeKeia t£>v ir t\e/j.iK(ov epyav, cura rerum 
bellicarum (iiri/j.e\ov/xai twv iroAtfUKtov epyccv). 'H tS>v UAar aieoov itrio'Tpa- 
vela instead of irpbs tovs II., the expedition against the Plataeans. Th. 1, 108. 
iv aTrofido-ei rrjs yr\s instead of iirl ttjs yrjs, in disembarking on the land. 

(c) It is called the Passive Gen., when it originates from the passive object 
of transitive verbs in the Ace, i. e. when it takes the place of the object of a 
transitive verb, and so denotes the thing affected or caused by the transitive 
action, e. g. r\ Tr\s -n-oAeccs kt'htis (from Krlfa tt\v ir6kiv), the city being that which 
is possessed. 'O rrjs iirio-ToXrjs ypcupevs (from ypdcpei iirio-To\r]v), the iiritr- 
ro\-n being the object acted upon. 'H twv Ka\<av epyoov irpa£is. 

Rem. 7. Sometimes one substantive governs two genitives expressing dif- 
ferent relations. Her. 6, 2. 'lo~Tiaios vireSvve twv 'latvwv t)]V riyefiovlyv tov 
wpbs Aapuov iro\4 fiov the command of the Ionians in the war against Darius. 

$ 276. (2) Accusative. 

The Ace. is the Whither -case, and hence denotes : (a) in the 
local relation, the goal, limit, or point to which the action of the 
verb is directed, e. g. aarv fxoXetv, to go to the city ; — (b) in the 
causal relation, the effect, consequence, object produced; also 
the object put by the action in a passive condition, i. e. the object 
on which the action is performed. 



§277. A. Local Relation. 

The Ace. in its local relation (Ace. of local termination), denotes the local 
limit, place, or object towards which the subject moves. Hence this Ace. is 
used with verbs of motion, going, coming, etc. ; yet this usage is found only in 
the poets, especially in Homer. Od. y, 162. ol fihv a.iroo'TptyavTes efiav vias 
aiKpieKto'O'as (they went to the ships). II. a, 317. Kviaat] S' ovpavbv f/ce (arose to 
heaven). Od. a, 176. iroKkoX icrav avepes TifxeTepov 8<2 (came to our house). S. O. T. 
35. do'Tv Kafytetoj' fioXeiv. Eur. Med. 7. MirjSeia ivvpyovs yr)S tirAeva 'IwAicias. 

Remark. In prose, and usually also in poetry, a preposition is joined with 
the Ace, which defines still more definitely the relation indicated by the Ace, 
e. g. ds, in, into, cos, to, Kcrra, downwards, avd, upwards, virep, over, eiri, upon, irspi 
and a/jupi, around, round about, fieTd, into the midst, after, irpos, to, into the presence 
of, irapd, near to, vtt6, under, e. g. Uvai is t^v ttSAiv, TrpoeA&eTv ws Tbv fSaaXea, 
irepi or &.fx<pl t)]V tt6\iv fiaiveiv — iiri Tbv &p6vov avafiaiveiv — i\&e?v fJieTa Tpuas 
— Uiai irapa fiao-iAia — Uvai npbs 'OXvpivov — Uvai imb yaiav. 



396 SYNTAX. [* 27S 

B. Causal Relation. 
$ 278. (a) Accusative denoting Effect. 
l.The Accusative denoting effect is used as in other lan- 
guages, e. g. ypd<fia) lirio-ToXrjv. The original and simplest form 
of the Ace. of effect (of the object produced), is where a verb, 
either transitive or intransive, takes the Ace. of an abstract 
substantive, which is either from the same stem as the verb, or 
has a kindred signification. An attributive adjective or pro- 
noun or an attributive clause commonly belongs to the Ace. 
This is often called the Cognate Accusative. 

PI. Symp. 181, b. ouros icrriv (b ipo>s),hv ol cpavXoi j&v avfrpwiraiv ipuxrip 
(which bad men love). PI. L. 680, e. fiacr iXeiav irac uv SiKaioTaTr/v fSacri- 
Aeuo fxevoi (ruling a kingdom). Prot. 325, c. e7ri/ie Xovvrai irdcrav iiri/xe' 
Xeiav (they care for with all care, bestow all care upon). Dem. Aph. 845,4 
deo/j.ai vja&v SiKaiav 5 4r]criv. X. An. 1. 3, 15. <r r par ■nyrjcr o vt a ifxl 
TavT-nv T7?v (rrpaT-nyiav (to be general of this command, army). 6. 3, 6. cvtv- 
X^crav tovto to ei>Tvxy V-a (were fortunate in this good fortune, obtained this 
advantage). Id. H. 7. 1, 5. irXeicrTovs Ka\ fxeyiarovs ay wv as yywv io-jj. 4 vot 
Kara bo.Xa.TTav iXax i(TTa ^ v a.iroTeTvx'hKaTe, irXeicrTa Se Karroop^wKare (having 
contended in the greatest contests). Andoc. Myst. 5, 31. apacrd/j. ev oi toss /xeyicr- 
Tas a pas vpuv. So KaXas irpd^LsirpaTTeiv) £pyd£ecr§ai epyov KaXov ; &px*w SiKaiav 
apxw '■> alo~xP au SovXeiav SovXeveiv j fieyav irSx^ixov TroXe/xeiv ] xaAe7T7j^ voaov vocreTv. 
'Ek5t]/j.ovs (TT paTeias i^yecrav (like e^oSov i£i4vai). Th. 1, 112. AaKedai/x6- 
vioi Tbv Upbv KaXoijxevov it 6Xe/xo v £ctt pa.T ev cr av (like o~TpaTelav CTpaTeveiv). 
So opKOvs bixvvvai, aoSevsiv voaov, £r)v fiiov. X. Hier. 6, 7. iroTov 54 Tiva virvov 
£kol/j.co. If the idea of the verb permits, the passive construction also can 
be used, e. g. 'O ot/ce?oy rjpuv tt oXe /xo s ovtws iwoXe (ati^t) (our intestine war 
zvas so warred, so managed), PL Menex. 243, e. KaXal irpd^eis irpaTTovrai. 
So also with adjectives, e. g. KaKol iracrav Katctav, PI. Pp. 490, d. In certain 
phrases, such as cpvXanas cpvXaTTtiv, excubias agere, cpbpov (cpbpovs) cpepeiv, tribu- 
turn solvere, iro/xiryv irofxireiv, pompam ducere, the substantive can stand without 
an adjective, because here the substantive is used in a special and pregnant 
sense. 

2. In place of the substantive from the same stem as the 
verb, or of a similar signification with it, an attribute of such 
cognate substantive, can also be used ; in this case, the verb 
frequently has a pregnant sense, since it contains, at the same 
time, an additional idea. 

II iKav jxaxyv = viK-qv p.dxns (to conquer a battle, i. e. to win a battle) ; so 
O X v pL ir i a (= 'OXv/xiriwv viK-nv) v iKav (to conquer in the Olympic games), Th. 1, 
!2G. "Nikuv vavfiaxias — v'iktjv vavpiax^v (to gain a naval victory), 7, 66. 



f 278.] ACCUSATIVE case. 397 

uncap yvdfATjj/, sententiam vincere, vinav oiicrjv (to carry one's opinion, one's 
suit, triumphantly); like frvpa &veiv is: ra iiriviicia (Upd or frvfxara), evayy4' 
Aio, oia^arrjpia, yev4&Xia, ra, Aii/cam, ydfiovs &veiv (to offer a 
sacrifice on account of victory, a festive offering, etc., i. e. to celebrate the victory, etc. 
by a sacrifice); rb Tlepainbv wp% e ' T0 (danced the Persian dance), X. An, 
6. 1, 10; ravra (crvv^ri^ara) crv v 3-e fj.€ vo i (having made these agreements); 
ravra ( = opicovs rovrcov) 6fj.6crapres (having taken these oaths) ; rapdrreiv 
TToXe/jLoy = rdpayfia ttoX4/j.ov (to stir up war, turbando bellum concitare, as it is 
said, bellum miscere), PI. Up. 567. a. Passively, iroXefios irpbs robs 'A/u.<pHrae?s 
eTapdx&y, Dem. Cor. 277, 151. 

3. The following constructions, likewise, mostly confined to 
poetry, deserve special notice ; in these, also, instead of the 
substantive from the same stem as the verb or with a kindred 
signification, the attributive of such kindred substantive is put 
in the Accusative : 

(a) Verbs signifying to shine, to burn, to flow, to pour, to shoot or spring forth, 
e. g. affr pdimiv yopycairbv a4Xas = aarpairTjv yop. cr4Xaos (to lighten a 
fearfully bright light, i. e. casting a bright and terrific light), Aescli. Pr. 356 ; 
& d A A € i v fiiov (germinating, producing the means of life), Pers. 617. 'Epe^u- 
vbv aT/x eoevaa (I poured out black blood), S. Aj. 376. 2 r d £e i v SaKpva, 
aT/xa, Xdfxveiv cr4Xas, pe?u yaXa (all confined to poetry). 

(b) Verbs which express sound, laughter, panting, and smelling ; here, instead of 
the substantive, commonly an adjective merely, or even a pronoun is used, 
e. g. <p&4yyea&ai acr&evis, raireivov = <p&oyybv aoftevf), etc. (to sound 

feeble, etc.); rjov (= rjdvv y4Xcora) yeXav (to laugh heartily) ; r)dv irve7v (to 
breathe sweetly) ; /x4v€a irveiovres ' Axcuoi breathing spirit); "Apea irve7v 
(Maiiem spirare); 6£eiv r)8v: Sepiv6v re tcai Xiyvpbv inr-nx*? (o roivos) 
rcj> rwv rerriywv x<W' (resounds summer, etc., with a summer-like and shrill 
sound, comp. Lat. aestivum sonat, vox hominem [= sonum hominis] sonat), 
PI. Phaedr. 230, c. 'A v e k d y% « & e ' Te y-dXa aapS6viov (burst into a sardonic 
laugfi), Ep. 337, a. 

(c) Verbs signifying to see, to look. Od. r, 446. ads irvp ( — 54py/xa irvp6s) b<p- 
SuX/xo'icn 8eoopKa>s ( looking fire, flashing fire ). So /3 A e 7r e i v, oepiee- 
<r&ai y 'Aprju = &x4/xfia "Apeos (to look war, terror) ; bpav aXufy (to look 
courage or boldness) ; Sep/ce<r3-at oeivou, (r/xepdaX4ov, ranepd (to look terri- 
bly, etc.); (p6^ov fix4ireiv (to look fury). II. a, 105. ndic b(rcr6fxevos 
(looking evil, with a threatening look, comp. Eng. looking daggers). £, 269. 
dxpeToj/ iSccp, looking foolish. PL Ion. 535, e. KXaiovrds re koX Seivbp 
ijxfSx4ir ovras. 

Remark 1. By this use of the Ace. numerous adverbial expressions can be 
explained, the place of the Ace. with its accompanying adjective being sup- 
plied either by a pronoun alone (rovro, rbde, ravra, rdoe, rl, ri, ovd4v, /xr)o4y, 
i, 2, etc.), or by a neuter adjective, e. g. Tavra Xvirtlcr&ai nal ravra. x a ' l P*v 

34 



398 syntax. [§ 279 

to7s iroWots (to giieve at the same things, and to rejoice at the same), Dem. Cor 
323, 292. ®av(j.ao-Ta e/orATjTTOj/Tcu (are wonderfully astonished), PL Symp 
192, c. Ta Kpdr icrra tfv&naaif (were most flourishing), Th. 1, 19. So fiaicpbt 
nXaieiv ; it a v r a evhaiy-ovetv ; axpeKeTv, ^KairTeiu, C-qfiiovv ueyd\a, fj-LKpd 
evepyerelv Ta fieyio-Ta, rjb'v yeKav, fj.eya or /.teydXa (ppoveiv, afxaprdveiv, 
8e7(r§cu, dia<pepeiu ti, etc. 

Rem. 2. Here also belong such adverbial expressions as : x<*-P lv (gratia, for 
the sake of), x^P lv ^"h v i °"h v (mea, t ua i gratia), Seeped? (gratis), SodtIvvv, irpo?Ka, 
iidrr\v (incassum). So also tovto, tovtcl (therefore) , ti (why), 6 (therefore). Eur. 
Hec. 13. vecoT-aTos §' f\v Tlpia{JuSG>v • b /cat p.e yyjs inre^eirefx^av. PI. Prot. 310, e. 
aAA' ah to. ravra vvv tjkco iraph (re (on this very account). 

4. The Ace. denotes also the effect merely arned at, the de- 
sign of the action ; yet almost always with neuter pronouns or 
adjectives merely, whereas with substantives a preposition, as 
e£s, 7rpos, i-n-t, is commonly used. The following verbs, in partic- 
ular, belong here : 

Xp-qo-frai tiv'i ti (originating from xpv^ai tivl xP^«.u),to use something 
for something; irei&eiv (originating from irei&eiv two, ireiaip), eiraipe iv, 
67TOT pipe iv, irpo K<x\e7(r&ai, avayic d£e iv r ivd Ti, etc. Ovk e%co, H ri 
XP'ho' o uai avrop. Ti orj xP^^^/Ae^a tovtoo ; (for what purpose shall we use 
him, what use shall we make of him?). Ty Kprfvn to. irXeiarov &£ia exP& VT0 
(ad res maximi momenti), Th. 2, 15. Tlei<r&rjvai t)]v avaxdpy<ri v, to be 
persuaded to a retreat (instead of the usual construction els r. avax&p-), ib. 21. 
ToCto (re eiroT pivot (I excite you to this) . 'ATrepxofiai, irplv virb Gov ti [x.e?~ 
£ov avayKaaS rjuai (before I am compelled by you to anything more severe), PI. 
Phaedr. 242, a. Tovto ovk eTrei&e robs $ojKcueas (did not persuade the Pho- 
caeans of this), Her. 1, 163 ; but eiroTpiveiv els /idxvv- 

Rem. 3. The Ace. of design or purpose, is transferred to the manner according 
to or in which something takes place. Here the fundamental idea is that of 
striving for an object. Thus Tp6irov, tovtov Tbv Tp6irov (hunc in modum, in this 
manner), irdvTa Tp6irov, t'ivo, Tpoirov, Uicnv (in morem, according to the manner of, 
like), Hfxoia (in like manner), emr-ndes (consulto), Taxos and kclto. Ta%os (celeriter). 
Commonly, however, prepositions are used with such adverbial expressions. 



§279. (b) Accusative of the suffering Object, i.e. the 
Object upon which the Action is 'performed. 

Only those verbs will be mentioned here, which, in Latin, 
take some other Case than the Ace, or are constructed with 
prepositions. 

1. The verbs ax^eAeiv, ovivdvac, dvivaoSai, /3Aa7rretv, dSiKetv, ivox~ 
Aetv (commonly with Dat), v/Spt^etv, Av/miVecr^ai, Ato/3ao-«9ai, crt- 
vtcrSai, AoiSopeiv (to chide) ; evae^etv, aaefBa-v ; Ao^ai/, iveSpeveiv ; tl- 
/xwpctcr^at ; #epa7r€ueti/, $opv<f>opeLV, iTrnpoircviLv (to provide with a 



$ 279.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 399 

guardian)] KoAa/ceueiv, 3<i>7r€vew (^co7rretv Poet.), 7rpo<sKvveiv ; ird 
#eiv; d/xei/3eo-#at (Poet, respondere) , remunerari; KpyXdrrecrSa^ 
euAa/3et<r^at ; /ujneio-^ai, £17X01)1/ (ta emulate). 

X. C. 1.2, 64. (2wk/)cSt77s) (pavepbs i\v Repair evwv robs Sreovs (evidently 
worshipped the gods). Aesch. Ctes. 618. rls av el-q S-n/xaycoybs roiovros, osris top 
(lev Sijfiov &<aireuo~ai dvvairo, robs 8e Kaipovs, ev ols fy ff&Qeo'&ai. r^v ir6\iv, 
air6SotTO ; (as would be able to flatter the people). Tlei&eiv rb ir\rj&os (to persuade 
the multitude). X. Hier. 4,3. oliroXlrai 8 opv<popovo~ i fiev aAA^Aous &vev piaStou 
(keep guard over each other). R. L. 12, 5. ^eracrparoireZevovrai ye (ol AaKeSaifxovioi) 
y^v irvKva Kal rod o* i v e o~ & a i robs iroAe/xiei s eveKa, Kal rov wcpeXeiv robs 
*pi\ovs (for the sake of injuring their enemies, and assisting their friends). C. 4. 3. 
1 5. eKeivo 8e a&vy.G>, '6ri /xot SoKe? raj roov heiav evepyecrlas 0118' av els irore av 
frpcoirav al-iais x&puriv a/j.ei /3eo~&ai. Her. 6, 138.e\6xv <? av ras rcav'A&r)valav 
yvvu'iK.as. Th. 1, 32. HKeiffr apxov, r b v AewviBov, our a fiacr iAe a Kal 
veov en, eirerp Sirevev (6 Uavaavias). X. H. 5. 1, 17. ri %8iov, $) /xySeva 
avfrpdirav KoXaKeveiv /utjtc "E A A 77 v a, fxijre fidpfiapov, e'lveKa /j.i<r&ov; — < 
TIpo SKwetv fiaffi\ea. PL Pp. 334, b. w<p eKelv jxev robs <pi\ovs (doKe?) 
rj Sucaioo-vvrj, fixdnr eiv Se robs ex&povs. 'ASiKelv robs <pt\ovs, 
itfSpi^eiv robs iralSas. TloWaKis Kal SovXoi r ifxwpovvrai robs oSt- 
kovs Seo-7ro / T as (take vengeance on their unjust masters). X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. ol 
(pvXaKes e\oid6povv abr 6 v (but the Deponent AotSopeitrfrai nvi, to reproach) . 

Remark 1. Some of the above verbs take a Dative or a preposition with 
its Case: (a) u<peXe7v nvi but very seldom, and then in the poets; (j8) 
aSiKeiv els, irpSs, and irepi riva) (y) ao"e/3eIV els and irepi riva; euo*e- 
(3e?v ets riva, irepi, irp6s riva ; (S) \v fiaive o-&ai nvi frequently; (e) \eofia- 
ff&ai nvi sometimes ; (() v$pi£eiv ets riva often ; (77) eiri rpoireveiv tiv6s 
somewhat frequently (§ 275, 1). 'Apeo-Keiv takes the Ace. only in the sense 
of to satisfy, but the Dat. in the sense of to please. 

Rem. 2. Acope7<r&al nvi ri (donare alicui aliquid, to present something to 
some one)., is the construction in Attic prose, not dapeTcr&at rivd tivi (donare 
aliquem aliqua re, to present one with something). 

. 2. Verbs signifying to do good or evil to any one, by word or 
deed, e. g. evepyeretv, KaKovpyeiv, KaKOiroielv ', evXoyeiv, KaKoAoyeiv '. 
ev, /<aAa>9, koikws Xiye.iv, ehrelv, aTrayopevew. 

S. Aj. 1154. frvfrpooire, pr) dpa robs re^vqKSras KaK&s (do nut injure the 
dead). X. Cy. 1. 6, 29. KaKovpyetv robs <pl\ovs (to harm one's friends). 
Eb epyere7v ri]V it arpida (to do good to one's country). X. C. 2. 3, 8. 7r<2s 8' 
a.* eya) aveTTio-T'fjiJ.aiv ett\v &SeA<£<£ xpr\ahai., etno'rd\>.ev6s ye Kal ev \eyeiv rbv ev 
Keyovra, Kal e5 iroietv rbv ev iroiovvra; rbv fievroi Kal \6ya} Kal epyzo 
ireipci/xevov efie aviav ovk av 5vvaifir]v ovr ev \eyeiv, ovr e3 iroieTv (know- 
ing how to speak well of one who speaks well of me, and to do good to one who does well 
to me ; but I should not be able to speak well of or to do good to one who, etc.) In- 
stead of the adverbs el and kukus with iroie?v, etc., the Greek uses also the cor- 



400 SYNTAX. [ $ 27i?. 

responding adjectives ; hence ica\a, naica iroieTv, Xeyeiv rivd (to do gooa 
or evil to one, to say good or evil of one). See § 280. 

3. Verbs signifying to persevere, to await, to wait for, and the 
contrary, e. g. p.kvaiv (like manere), rve.pip,kveiv, Sappexv, Kaprepelv ■ 
(pevyecv, a.7ro(p€vy€tv, cbroSiopacrKecv, 8pa7reTeveiv. 

Mt) (pevye rbv Kivdvvov (do not fiee from danger). QappeTre Srdvar ov (fdenti 
animo expectate mortem). X. An. 3. 2; 20. ras fiev fidxas &ap peire (bravely 
stand or endure the battles). Cy. 5. 5, 42. et rives ere rificco'iv, avracrird^ov kcl\ evd>x^ 
avrovs, 'tva ere kcu &ap p-fjffw a iv (that they may confide in you, ut fiducia te 
complectantur) . 'O oov\os air eo pa rbv o e cr it 6 r t\ v (ran away from his master). 
PI. Syrup. 216, b. o pairer eva> oZv avrbv teal <pevya> (I run away from him, 
etc.). Dem. I. Phil. 50, 37. ol rwv irpayfidrav Kaipol ov fievovo t r)]v 7} fieri - 
oav fipadvrrjra (do not wait for your sloihfulness). 

Rem. 3. After the analogy of c/> e v y e i v, other verbs also, which contain 
the idea of fleeing, e. g. those signifying to turn back from, to retreat from, to 
abhor, are constructed with the Ace, though but seldom, e.g. v it o % a p e 7 v rbv 
ox^-ov (to retire from the crowd) ; 4 k err r\ vai Kivdvvov (to shrink from, shun fear) ; 
eKrpeireo'^ai, vTreKrpeTrecr&ai, vire£ epxedd-ai, airo&Tpe'pecr&ai. 
Qap pe7v nvi signifies to have confidence in something (fidere aliqua re). 

4. Verbs of concealing and being concealed: XavSavew, Kpxnr- 
t€lv (celai'e), Kpvirreor$a.L; — also the verbs fpSdvetv (antevertere), 
Ae Lire iv, £7rtAet7retv (deficere) ; — verbs or particles of sivearing, 
the person or thing by which one swears being in the Ace. 

PI. Pp. 365, d. &eovs ovre \av&dveiv, ovre fiidcrao'&ai dvvarou (to escape 
the notice of be concealed from the gods). KpvTrreiv rivd ri (to conceal any- 
thing from any one), see § 280. Her. 6, 115. irepieirXwov 1,ovviov fSovXo/xevoi 
(p&rjvai rovs ""AStt] v aiov s aTritcSfievoi is to acrrv (wishing to anticipate the 
Athenians). 'E-rriXe lire i fie 6 XP^ V0S > V V^pa (fails me). X. An. 1. 5, 6. rb 
cr pdrev fia 6 <t?tos Sir e A lit e. "Ofivvfii irdvras &eovs (1 swear by all the 
gods). Hence fid, ov fid, va\ fid, v)f Aia. 

Rem. 4. Also the two impersonal verbs 5e? and xP 7 '/> in the sense of to 
need, are constructed with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing or person, 
of which or whom one is in need ; this construction, however, belongs only to 
poetry, c. g. Od. a, 124. fivfrnceai, '6rreo ce XP"h (y ou **B tell of what you are 
in need). Aesch. Pr. 86. avrhv ydp <x e Se? TIpo fi-n&eco s (you yourself need 
Prometheus). Aet with the Dat. of the person belongs to prose and poetry, e.g. 
PI. Menon. 79, b. oet ovv coi rris avrrjs ipeor-fjeeus (you need the same inquiry). 
In the sense of necesse est, opus est, with an infinitive, the Ace. of the person is 
common with both verbs, e. g. Set (xpv) &* ravra iroieTv : the Dat. is much more 
rare, and with xP"h seldom even in poetry. X. C.3.3, 10. el coi oeoi Siodatceiv. 
Comp. X O. 7, 20. S. Ant. 736. &AAo> yap % y fio\ xp"h 7 e T ^ s5 ' fy>X et * 
X.&ov6s. 

5. Many verbs denoting a feeling or an affection of the mind, 
e. g. <poj3eL(rSaL, Selaai, rpeiv ) aloyyv car $ai (fevereri), cuSetcr^cu; Sus- 
Xpouveiv ; €K7r\rjTTea9ai, Kara,Tr\r)TT<i<j$ai ; oXocpvpecrSai {miserari). 



?279] ACCUSATl £ CASE. 401 

X. Cy. 8.1,28. fxaWov robs aldov/xevovs aloovurai tuv avaioiav o 
ftv&panroi [respect the respectful). An. 1. 9, 6. Kvpos &pKrov wore i-KKpspo* 
fi4vr}v ovk eTpeffei/ (was not afraid of a bear). Cy. 3. 3, 18. (ol iroXipLioi) 
piaWov 7) /a as (p o j3 77 a out ai, '6rav aKOixroocriv, on oi>x wj (pofiovjAej/ot tttt} o~<r 0- 
fiev avrobs oYkoi Ka^rj/xevoL (toill fear us, hearing that we shall not crouch with 
fear on account of them). Aiffx^oftaj rov &e6v (I feel ashamed before the 
god). R. L. 2, 11. aldeTo- &ai robs dpxovr as. Cy. 1. 3, 5. kqI ce, a 
7ra7T7re, fxv o~ a t t 6 jxev ov r avr a t a fipu /xar a opw (I see that you are dis- 
gusted with, loathe this food) . PI. Symp. 173, c. robs kralpovs eAea). Dem. 
Cor. 290, 185. tear airXayrivai rbu $lXnnroi/ (to be panic-stricken by 
Philip). In poetry this use of the Ace. is much more extensive. 

Rem. 5. Verbs which express the idea of motion, sometimes take (as transi- 
tive verbs) the Ace. of the thing put in motion by them, as a passive object ; 
this construction is used in poetry, seldom in prose. The following- 
verbs especially belong- here, fiaiveiv, a'Cao-eiv, ircpau, irAe7v peTreiv, 
o~7revd e iv, etc. S. Ant. 1158. tvx'H «ar ap p 4tt e 1 rbu gvtvxov vt a 
(fortune sinks the fortunate man). 'EKfialve iv, iTra'ia a e iu iroda (to put out 
the foot, move the foot, quickly); aifftreiv x*P a (furiously to set or move the 
hand to) ; fi da iv, irooa tt e p a u, all poetic. Th. 6,39. k a. k a arrevde iv (ac- 
celerare). In this way, verbs expressing sound, in the pregnant sense of putting 
an object in motion and causing it to sound, are sometimes constructed with the 
Ace. II. A, 160. 'Ittttoi nelS o%ea KporaXi^ov ava. 7TTo\e/j.oio ye<pvpas (rattle 
the chariots, hurry off the chariots with a rattling sound). Her. 6, 58. Xe^rjra 
Kpor eovar t (rattle the kettle, strike it again and again). So also in a pregnant 
sense, the poets say, &ebv % p e u e t v, 4 A 1 cr a - e t y (deum choreis, saltando celc- 
brare). Comp. Larger Grammar, Part II. § 552. 

6. With verbs of motion, the space or icay passed over is put 
in the Ace, these being the objects on which the action of the 
verb is performed; so also the time during which an action 
takes place (in answer to the question, How long?), is put in 
the Ace, as being the object measured by the action; so too 
measure and weight (in answer to the question, Hoiv much?), 
are put in the Ace, these also being the objects on which the 
action of the verb is performed. 

Balveiv, it epav, e prre iv, 7ropeveo~&ai 606 v (to go the way, etc., comp. 
itque reditque viam). Eur. Med. 1067. aAA' gT/j.l yap Stj tXtj jxov ear drnv 
6 5 6 v (will go the way). X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. firjn to. dvsfiara Tropsvov, aXAa. 
/ceAeue trot robs i)ye/j.6uas t 7} v paari]v (ooov) r\y z Ted- ai (do not march over 
the difficult places, but command your guides to lead over the easiest road). An. 4. 4, 
1. eir opev&T] a av 01a Tr\s 'App-evias irediov atrav na\ Keiovs yr)ko<povs 
(marched over a plain, etc.). R. Equ. 8, 10. %v 6 [xev (pevyr) eir\ rov '{ttttov wav 
ro7a x°°p' ia (P er varia loca). Cy. 1.6, 43. &yeiv (arpanav) r) arevas t) 
ir\areias 68ovs. Dem. I. Phil. 49, 34. aywv Kal <pzpow robs irXiovras &«• 
Karrav (sailing through the sea). Xpovov, rbv xp^ y0v i f or a time, (different 
from xp° V( Pi v' 1 '" XP° u V-> ^h ty time, gradually), vvura, r\p.ipav (during the night, day). 
Her. 6, 127. i) ~2v/3apis y^Kpa^e rovrov rbv XP 0V0V P-dKiffra (was flourishing 
34* 



402 syntax. [$ 279 

during mis time). X. An. 4. 5, 24. KaraXaufidvei t^jv hvyarepa tov Kcc/xdpxov 
ivva.T7]v 7]jjl4 pav yeyaixrmevnv (who had been married nine days). Cy. 6. 3, 1 1. 
Kal x& es 8e Kal Tp'nr\v rj/xepav rb avrb tovto eirparrov. Dem. Phil. 3. 116, 23 
Xaxvcrav Se ti Kal ©7jj8a?oi robs reXevraiovs tovtovot! xp^vov s fx.era t)]v 
ii> AevKrpois /xcixw [during these last times). Her. 1, 31. aradtovs irevre Kal 
r ever epaKovra SiaKo/xiaavTzs airiKovro is rb lp6v (having passed over forty-Jive 
siades). 6, 119. cbrexeiz/ SeKa kcu 5 ir\ Koaiov s <tt adiov s (to be distant two 
hundred and ten stades). 6, 135. MiXridSris aireirXee Yldpov TroXiopKrjcras re $£ 
Kal el n o<T i 7}/j.€ pas. *E(pe<rov airex^i curb ^dpBecov rpiwv rj/xepcoy 6 8 6 v. X. C. 
3. 6, 1. ovdewci} eiKoaiv err] yeyovws (like viginti annos natus, twenty years old). 
Here belongs the Ace. with Svvaa&at, to be worth. Her. 3, 89. rb BafivX&viov 
rdhavTov hvvarai Evfio'tSas e j8S o fi'f] Kovra uveas (the Babylonian talent 
is worth [weighs as much as, amounts to] seventy Euboean minae). 

Rem. 6. In poetry, the Ace. of the local object is sometimes used even with 
verbs denoting rest, e. g. Kelcr&ai, o-Tr\vai, fjir&ai, ^dacreiy, Ka&iCeiv, etc. (instead 
of ev with the Dat., as in prose). Here also the Ace. represents the space as 
the object acted upon, or taken possession of, e. g. S. Phil. 145. (roirou -n-posidetv 
eSeXeis) ovriva Ke7rai (quemjacens occupatum tenet). Comp. Larger Gram. 
Part II. § 554, Rem. 3. 

Rem. 7. The following prepositions are joined with the Ace. to define more 
fully the extension in space and time, viz., avd,from a lower to a higher place, 
e. g. ava iroraubv irXelv, ava. vvKTa ; — Kara, from a higher to a lower place, e. g. 
Kara, Trora/j-bv irXeTv, Kara, rbv f&iov ; — aucpi and irepi, round about, e. g. fiaiveiv 
a/j.(pl (or irepl) ttjv ttoXiv, a/xcpl rbu x eLU **» /a i ' 7re P^ T " Mtj5i/c<x ; — vtv6, under, v<p* 
VjXiov, virb vvKTa, sub noctem ; — virep, over ; — irapd, near by, along, by the side of, 
e. g. irapa rbv iroraubv iropevecr&ai, irap oXov rbv jiiov ; — eiri, upon, e. g. eirl vara 
huXdo~o"ns irXetv, eirl iroXvv XP° V0V '■> — ^ tc *> through, e. g. 5ia Scauara fiaiveiv, 5ia 
vi)K.ra ; — fiera. ravra, postea ; — irpbs eairepav, towards evening. 

Rem. 8. Prom this use of the Ace. to denote space, time, and quantity, 
very many adverbial expressions have originated: (a) tt\v rax^rr\v (6S6v), 
celerrime ; rrjv irpdor^v, primum ; t V ewd-eTai/, recte, straightforward ; fiaKpdv, far ; 
aXXt]v Kal aXXrjv, sometimes here, sometimes there, etc. II. i//, 116. rroXXa 8 a v au- 
ra, Karavra, irdpavrd re, 86xu l °t- r ijXfrov (they passed over many up hills, 
down hills, straight and cross ways ; — (b) o-fjuepov, to-day ; avpiov, to-morrow ; apxv^j 
tV apxw, properly, at first, omnino ; reXos, rb reXevTaiov, finally ; veov, lately ; 
irpSrepov, TrpcoTou, rb Trpcorov, rb irpiv, rb avr'iKa, rauvv, rb iraXai, rb iraXaiov, rb 
Xonr6v, etc.; — (c) TroXXa, saepe; to. iroXXa, plerumque ; iroXv, /J.eya, fieyaXa, fxe- 
yiaTa, bxiyov, jxiKpov, uiKpd, «ru%i/a, uaKpd, Xcrov, roaovTO, iravra, etc. So also 
urJKOs, irXrj&os. 

7. Finally the Ace. is used with intransitive or passive verbs 
and intransitive adjectives of eveiy kind, to explain and define 
their meaning more fully. Here, also, the Ace. represents the 
object as acted upon or suffering, since it denotes the object to 
which the intransitive action of the verb or adjective, refers 
or is directed. This Ace. is used most frequently in specifica- 
tions relating to the body and the mind. This is called the Ace. 
of more definite limitation, sometimes the Ace. of synecdoche. 



9 280.] DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 403 

Her. 2, 111. Ka/xveiv robs 6<p&aAfj.ov s (to be pained in or in respect to the 
eyes). 3, 33. toj (ppevas vyiaiveiv (to 6e sound in mind). X. C. 1. 6, 6. ix\ye7i 
robs ir6das (to have pain in the feet). 4. 1, 2. (pavepbs ^\v ^wKpd-njs ov ruv to 
awfiara irpbs &pav, aXXa rwv ras ipvx&s irpbs aperrjv ed irecpvKorcov ecpiefxevos 
(that he was not desirous of those well-constituted in body for beauty, but of those well- 
adapted in mind, etc.). PI. Up. 453, b. Siacpepei ywr] avSpbs r^jv <pv<riv (woman 
differs from man in respect to her nature). 462, d. 6 avSpwiros rbv daKrvXov 
a.Xye7 (is pained as to, has a pain in, his finger). KaAos eari to 6fj.fj.aTa (is 
beautiful as to his eyes, las beautiful eyes). Ka/cos eVrt t^ ^x^. So aya&Ss, 
ao<p6s, <pp6vifxos, xpyvifJ-os, xpW^os, SUatos, etc., with the Ace. 'Aya&bs rexvnv 
r iv a. Her. 3, 4. Qavns Kal yvwfxr]v iKavSs, Kal to. it oXe fiia aXKifxos i\v. X. 
Cy 2. 3, 7 '. av£<TTT] QepavXas rb (Tafia ovk acpvijs, Kal rrjv ij/ux^ ovk ayevvel 
avBpl eoiKus. 8.4, 18. deivbs ravr-nv r\\v r exvt]v. So bavfxacrrbs rb fxe- 
ye&os, rb KaXXos (wonderful for his size and beauty, of wonderful size and 
beauty). The English commonly uses prepositions to express the force of this 
Ace, viz. in, in respect to, of; or when it stands with an adjective, the English 
sometimes changes the Ace. of the thing into a personal substantive, and 
makes the adjective as an attributive agree with it, e. g. aya&bs rix v Wi a 9°°d 
artist, comp. Eng. he is a good shot, i. e. marksman ; or the prepositions of or with 
are placed before the substantive denoting the thing, and the attributive ad- 
jective is made to agree with that substantive, e. g. veavtas KaXbs rrjv ^vxw, of 
or with a lovely spirit. 

Rem. 9. Sometimes the prepositions els, irpSs, Kara are joined with the Ace, 
in which case the relation is analogous to an Ace. of space, denoting direction, 
as b*io.<pepeiv e'/s ri, e. g. els aper^jv. X. C. 3. 5, 1. ivSo^orepa rj iroXis els ra 
iroXefxiKa. effrai. ~2o(pbs irpos ri. — On the Dat. see \ 285, (3), (b). 

Rem. 10. Erom this use of the Ace, many adverbial expressions have orig- 
inated. Thus the expressions of measure : evpos, vipos, fxeyefros, fid&os, p-rjKos, 
irXrjSos, ap&fiov \ also yevos, ovofxa, fj-epos, rb obv fiepos, irpoipaGiv, under pretence, 
rb aXrj&es, yva>fj.-nv e/j.rjv. Her. 6, 83. KXeavSpos yevos ecbv QiyaXevs air* 'Ap- 
KaSi-ns (being a Phigalian by birth). 7, 109. Xifj.vn eovcra rvyxdvei wsel rpirjKovra 
crraSioji/ r-ijv -jrepiodov (in circumference). X. An. 2. 5, 1. fxerd ravra a<pi- 
Kovro eirl rbv Zafiarov irora/xbv rb evpos rerrdpwv TrXeSpwv (four plethra in 
width). 4. 2, 2. ol fiev eiropevovro rb irXriSos ws Sisx'^toi (two thousand in 
number). — Moreover rovvavriov, ravavria, on the contrary ; raXXa, in respect to 
other things ; rb oXov, omnino ; a/j,<p6repa, rovro (ravra) fxev — rovro (ravra) Se; 
ovSev, in no respect; rl, in some respect ; iroXXa, irdvra, etc. — Tb eir e/xe, rovv 
ep.e, roviri ae, rb els efj.4, quantum ad me (te), as far as it relates to me, etc. 



$280. Double Accusative. 

In the following instances the Greek puts two objects in the 
Ace. with one verb : — 

1. When, in the construction given under § 278, 1, the verb 
has a transitive sense, as <£iAiav cfjiXelv, then the idea of activity 
consisting of the verb and a cognate substantive (with which 



404 SYNTAX. [§ 280 

an adjective usually agrees), being blended into one, may at 
the same time be extended to a personal object, e. g. <£iA<S 
yLzyaXrjv cfuXiav (== </)tAco) rov 7ratSa. 

Her. 3, 88. y dp.ov s robs ir pc&rovs iydp.ee 6 AapeTos Kvpov 5 v u &yya- 
re pas, *Ato(t<t&u re Kal 'kprvar&vnv {contracted very honorable marriages 
with the two daughters of Cyrus). 154. ewvrbv A«j3Stoi \&$t\v av4\Keo~' 
tov (maims himself with an incurable maiming, maims himself incurably). Th. 8, 
75. w ptcoxTav robs o~t par tuiras r ov s /xeyicrovs '6 pKovs (made the sol- 
diers take the most solemn oaths). X. Cy. 8. 3, 37. ep.e 6 irarrip rrjv rwv iratdav 
waiBeiav eiraiSevev (educated me in the education of boys). PL Apol. 19, a. 
MeXrfros /ie eypdtyaro ri]V ypacprjv ravrrjv. 36, c. eKaarrov evepye- 
T€?v rrjv fieyiarrfv ev epyeaiav. Her. 1, 129. hetirv ov to (== '6) flip 
ifroiviae. Th. 1, 32. rrjv vav fiaxiav an ewa a ixe&a Kopiv&lovs (like 
v'ikt\v vikav), we repelled the Corintlzans in the naval battle. PI. Gorg. 522, 
a. 7r o XX a Kal 7) 5 e a Kal iravrodank ev a>xovv vfias. Especially with 
verbs of naming, after the analogy of ovo/xa bvop.d(eiv rivd: X. 0. 7, 3. koAoS- 
ffi p.e rovro rb ovo/xa (they called me this name, by this name). PL Pp. 471, 
d. avaKa Xovvres ravra ra. ov6p.ara eavrovs. 

Remark 1 . Instead of the substantive denoting the thing effected, the Ace. 
of a pronoun is frequently used. X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. raXXa p.ip.ovp.evos rbv 
'S.aKav. An. 5. 7, 6. rovro v/uas e|a7raTfj<rot. This is especially the case with 
verbs of praise and blame, of benefit and injury, after the analogy of iyKdo/xiov 
iyKu/jLtd^eiv rivd and the like. PL Symp. 221, c. no XX a. fiev ovv dv ris Kal &\Xa 
ex 01 ~2ooKpdrr)v eiraiveaai (one could praise Socrates for many other things). 
Rp. 363, d. ravra 877 Kal dXXa roiavra iy kcc p.td(ov a 1 diKaioo-vvnv. 
MfyctAa, fxiKpd, irXeiw, jxei(a> wcpeXetv, fSXairr eiv, adiKe7v riva. 

2. Expressions of saying or doing good ox evil (which generally 
contain an Ace, or its equivalent in an adverb, of the thing said 
or done), take the object to which the good or evil is done, in 
the Ace, e. g. ayaSd, KaXd, KaKa 7rotetv, irpdrTeiv, epya£c- 
(r^ai, Aeyetv, et7retv, etc. tlvol (to do good, etc., to some one). 

X. O. 5, 12. 7) yrj robs dpiara & e pair e v o vr as avrrjv nXetar a aya&a 
avr in out (returns the greatest advantages to those who cultivate it best). Her. 8, 
61. t6t€ Sri 6 ®e[MO-roK\eris Ketvov re Kal robs Kopiv&iovs TroXXd 
re Kal KaKa eXeye (said much evil of him and the Corinthians). X. Cy. 3. 2, 15. 
ovdeTTdoiroTe inavovro iroXXd KaKa 7) p. as ir 1 v v r e s (never ceased to do much 
injury to us). 

Rem. 2. Instead of the Ace. of the object acted upon or suffering, the Dat. 
'13 sometimes used, which is considered as the Dat. of advantage or disadvan- 
tage (Dativus commodi or incommodi). Dem. Aphob. 855, 37. ri c 1 iroir)crwo-ip 
ol jxdprvpes ; (quid tui tibi prosint testes?) X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. irpoo-Koirei, ri a 01 
■Koi-naovoiv ol apx^vevoi (consider what your subjects will do for you) ; on the con- 
trary with ae (what they will do TO you). An. 4. 2, 23. ndvra iiroi-naav ro7s 
inro&avovo~iv (showed all honors to the dead). Cy. 7. 2, 27. r)v ravrd p. 01 
iroiijo-ns a Xeyeis (if you -perform for me what you promise). So also in the sense 
of, to do something with some one, as PL Charm. 157, c. ovk av exotp-ev, 6 ri noidl- 



$ 280. j DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 405 

fiev a- 01. But the Dat. often depends upon the adjective, e. g. Dem. Cor. 243, 
55. SiareXe? irpdrrcev Kal Xeyav ra f3eXr icrra rep Sr]fia< (continue to do and 
say what is best for the people). 

3. With verbs : (a) of entreating, beseeching, desiring, inquir- 
ing, asking : alretv, airavreLV, TrpdrreLV (to demand), elsTrparreiv, 
TrpaTTCcrSai ; ipwrav, ipiarSai, e^era^etv, laropeTv, avurropeiv ; — (b) of 
teaching and reminding : SiSacnceiv, TraiSeueiv, avauipivr)(rK€Lv, vtto- 
fALpLvrjo-Kew (with both of these the Gen. of the thing is more 
usual) ; — (c) of dividing and cutting into parts : SaUarScu, Sicu- 
puv, Tip.v€w, Siave/yieiv, Karave/xctv ; — (d) of depriving and taking 
aivay : (rrepeiv, arrocrrepeiv ; crrepLcrKeiv, avXav, arpaipeicrSaL ; — ( e) of 
concealing or hiding from: Kpxnrrew (kcvSclv Poet.) ; — (f) of put- 
ting on and off, clothing and unclothing, surrounding ivith : iv- 
8vclv, e/<Suav, d/A^tcwwai, TreptfiaXkecrSai. 

Her. 3, 1. irefityas Kafif3vo"r]S is AtyvTrrov tcfipvua a?r ee "A/iao-it- frvyarepa 
(asked Amasis for his daughter). 58. avrobs eKarbv rdXavra eirprj^av 
(demanded of them a hundred talents). X. C. 1. 2, 60. ovSeva iruirore fiio-frbv 
rrjs arvvovaias iir pd^aro ^wKpdrrjs (never demanded a reward of any one for 
his instruction). H. 4.1,21. 'KpnrirlSas aire? rbv 'AyncriXaov dirXiras 
re is SisxiXiovs Kal ireXrao-ras &XXovs roffovrovs (asJcs of Agesilaus 
about two thousand hoplites, etc.). Cy. 6. 2, 35. ra els rpocprjv Seovra i£erd- 
Cere robs v<p' vfiiv (inquire of those under you respecting the things necessary for 
food). Eur. Hipp. 254. iroXXa. 5tSa<r/cet ydp fi 6 iroXvs fitoros (teaches me 
much). Antiph. 5. 131, 14. 6 x?^ vos Kc ^ V efiireipia ra fir] KaXccs e%ovra 
e«8 id d(TKe i robs av^rpdnrovs (teach men what is not proper). Her. 1. 136. 
trai8evovo~i robs iraltias rpla fiovva (they teach boys three things only). 6, 
138. yXaxrardv re rr)V 'ArriKTfv Kal Tp6irovs ruv 'A&rjvatav eS iSao~Kov 
robs irouSas. X. An. 3.2, 11. av a fivi) a 1 a> v/ias Kal robs KivSvvov s(2 will 
remind you of the dangers). Hier. 1, 3. vire fivno~ds fie ra iv t<£ ISiwtik^ yStw. 
Her. 7, 121. rpe?s fioipas 6 Eep|7js Sao~dfievos iravra rbv ire^bv o~r pa- 
r6v (having divided all the land army into three divisions ). T e fiveiv, 5 la ipelv r i 
fie pr\, fioipas (to cut, to divide something into parts). X. Cy. 7. 5,13. 6 Kvp<>$ r b 
ar par evfia Kar eveifie ScoSe/ca fieprj (divided the army into twelve parts). 
PL Polit. 283, d. 8 teXwfiev avrrjv (rrjv fier prjr iktjv) Svo fiepr). X. Cy. 4. 
6,4. rbv fi6vov fioi Kal (ptXov 7rcu5a acpelXero r\\v y\ivx"hv (deprived my 
only child of life). Eur. Hec. 285. rbv irdvra 8' oXfiov r)fiap ev fi a<pel- 
Xero. Dem. Aphob. 839, 13. ttjv rifiifv airoffrepel fie (robs me of honor). 
Phil. 54, 50. ra. r) fie re pa rfftas air oar e pe? (5 $iXiiriros). Kpvirrco a e rb 
ari>xvf jia (I conceal the misfortune from you). Eur. Hipp. 912. ov fi^v <piXovs 
ye, k&ti fiaXXov t) (ptXovs, Kpvirr eiv 8'iKaiov o~ds, ivdrep, Sv sir p a^ias. X. 
Cy. 1. 3, 17. irais fieyas fiiKpbv %x^v xf-rwa, erepov 7ra?8a fiiKpSv, fieyav 
%X^vr a x^cova, i KSvcras avr6v, rbv fiev eavrov e« eiv ov t\ fi<pl eo~e, r)tv 8i 
iKtlvov avrbs iveSv (a large boy stripped another small boy of his large tunic and put 



406 SYNTAX. [$ 280. 

his own tunic on him). Her. 1, 163. tc?x os ^epil3a\eo-^at tt)v tt6\iv (tt 

surround the city with a wall). 

Rem. 3. Several of the above verbs are sometimes otherwise constructed, 
commonly, however, with some difference in the sense expressed ; thus, aire?v 
t i napd t iv os ; epwrav t iv a ire pi r ivos; with verbs of dividing and cut- 
ting into parts, not unfrequently the preposition els, sometimes also Kara, 
is joined with the Ace, e. g. rovs iroAiras eis e£ ixoipas SielXov ; or the word /xepos, 
etc., is governed directly by the verb, and the object to be divided is put in the 
Gen., depending on p.epos, etc., e. g. dvo p-oipas Av8a>v irdvruv 5ie?\ev (he divided ah 
the Lydians into two parts), Her. 1, 94; passively. 5c65e/ca Uepcrcov cpvXal diyp-nvrai 
(the Persians are divided into twelve tribes), X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. Verbs of depriving 
and taking away, have the following constructions : 

(a) air o(Tt e petv and d<paipe?o-&ai with the Ace. of the thing alone, e. g 
Has av ouroi i&ekoi r a aX\6r p la airoarepelv ; (how could he be willini] to 
take away the things of others?), X. Ag. 4, 1. Xd\a£ai ret, KaXws iyvixr- 
fxeva (provisa) koX it eir oir) p.ev a hep a i povvr at (take away, destroy 
the provisions), O. 5, 18 ; the Ace. of the person alone is but rarely found ; 
thus with acpaipeTo-fraL (to rob, take from), e. g. Andoc. 4. 32, 27. rots 
ttoKItcus ovk e| Xcrov xpV T <*h dX\d rovs fiev acpai po v fiev o s, tovs 5e 
TviTTcov ovdevbs d^iav t$)v dnp.OKpariav airocpaivei. 

(b) o~t epe?v, air oct ep e?v, err epicjKe tv, acpai p e?o~&al rtvd Tt very 
often. 

(c) crepetv, airoare pelv rtvd rtvos, like spoliare aliquem aliqua re, to 
deprive one of something, see § 271,2; but dcpai pe?o~&at very seldom 
has this construction, and indeed only in the sense of to restrain, to pre- 
vent. Ol 6^i(6p.evoi dcpaipovvTai ras jxev Kvvas tov evpelv rbv Aaya>, 
aiirovs 8e rrjs ucpeKeias, X. Ven. 6, 4. 

(d) a<paipe?(r&ai, d-rr ocrr e p e?v with the Gen. of the person and the Ace. 
of the thing ; they then signify to take something from some one, to withdraw 
something from some one. This is a more rare construction. Oi irXeoveicTai 
rwv dWcov acpai povp. ev o i X9"h l JLaTa ^avrovs Zokovcti irAovTi^eiv 
(taking their property from others, seem to enrich themselves), X. C. 1. 5, 3. 
2u |Ujuaxtas acpaipov fxevov rrjs TrdAecos (= tuv tto\itS>v) Dem. 
Cor. 232, 22. E? ri fiovXovrai eirirno'eveiv KaXwv, ovSevbs air ocrr epe'i 
(to, Kvvnyetria), X. Ven. 12, 8. "Ostis, fir] aWcav eavrbv diro o~t e pa>v, 
dcrcpaXeias 8e7rai (properly, aliis se subducens, i. e. ab aliis desciscens ; eavrbv 
is here to be considered as the Ace. of the thing), Th. 1, 40. 

Rem. 4. On the double Accusative with the verbs -n-el&eiv, eirorpvveiv, eirai- 
peiv, TzpoKaXelabai, dvayicd^eiv, see § 278, 4. 

4. Aii Accusative of the object acted upon, and an Accusa- 
tive of the predicate (which is often an adjective), is used with 
the verbs mentioned under § 240, 2, when they are changed 
from the passive to the active ; hence two Accusatives stand 
with verbs signifying to make, to constitute, e. g. 7roteti/, nSevou, 
reddere; to choose, to appoint, e. g. aipeicrSai, creare, etc.; to consider, 
represent, and regard as something, to declare, to knoiv, e. g. vo/xc- 
£civ, ^yeio-.^at, etc. ; to say, to name, to praise, to chide, e. g. Aeyctv, 
oVo/Aa£eiv, koXCiv ; to give, to take, to receive, e. g. -n-apaXa/Selv Si- 
\€<T&ai, etc. ; to produce, to increase, to form, to teach, to educate. 






J 281. j ACCUSATIVE CASE. 407 

Kvpos robs <pt\ovs eTroi-nce irXovalovs (made Ms friends rich) . Flat* 
5 eve iv r tv a aocpov (to educate one wise, i. e. make wise by education ). N ofii 
£etv, 7)ye7(r&ai rtva dvopa ay a&6v (tothink,regard,consider oneagoodman) 
Dem. Cor. 5,43. oi QerraXol Kal ©Tificuoi (piKov, evepyerrjv, aarrjpa rbv 
* / A. 1 7r 7r ov riyov vto. 'O */ o/x a £e t j/ r tva (To^ktt^v (to call one a sophist) 
Atpe?cr& ai rtva err parrjySv (to choose one a commander). X. Cy. 5. 2,14. 
rbv Tec fipv av (tvvS etirv ov irapeXa^ev. Dem. Chers. 106, 6Q.Tr6\ews eycaye 
ttXovtov rjyov/xai o~v /j./j.dxov s, irl<rrtv, evvotav. Andoc. 3.- 24, 7 . t\ 
elprjvr] rbv 5 rj fx o v rwv 'A&rjva ttav v^f\\bv -f\pe Kal Kar iffTnc ev lcrxvp6v. 

Rem. 5. On the use of the Inf. el vat with the Ace, see § 269, Rem. 1. 



$ 281. Remarks on the use of the Accusative luith the 

Passive. 

1 As the Greek considers the passive as a reflexive (§ 251, 1), it follows that, 
on the change of the Act. to the Pass., the Ace. may remain with every transitive 
verb which in the Act. takes an Ace. of a thing as the object acted upon, e. g. 
(k6tttov<tl ra fxeraira), kottt ovrai ra fier wira, which may mean, either that 
they strike themselves on the forehead, they strike their forehead, or they let their forehead 
be struck, they are struck on the forehead ; Her. 7, 69. 'Apdfltot £etpas u7re£axr- 
fxevot e <r a v, Al&ioires 5e irapSaXeas re Kal Xeovreas evafx/xevot (the Arabians 
were girt with the zeira, but the Ethiopians were clothed with leopard and lion-skins). 

2. Hence, when the verbs mentioned under § 280, 1 and 3, which in the Act. 
govern two accusatives, are changed into the Pass., the Ace. of the person or of 
the object acted upon, is changed into the Nom., but the Ace. of the thing, or the 
effect remains, (a) Ovros fxevrot 6 eiratv6s ecrrt Ka\6s, b v crb vvv eiratve? vn 
avSpaiv a£lct)v mo-Tevecr&at (this is honorable praise by which you are now praised), 
PI. Lach. 181, b. Tpav par t<r&e\s iroXXd (sc. rpavfxaTa), (wounded with many 
wounds), Th. 4, 12. 'Qvojxa rb fiev irpobrov ZaytcXr) ~?jv virb rwv ^tKe\wv kAtj- 
^fiirtt (t) ~XtKe\ia), 6, 4 (was called by its first name). 'H Kpicis, ^v eKpl&ii 
(to which he was condemned), Lys. Agor. 134, 50. Ta \xeytara r i[A7]&rjv at, 
S. 0. R. 1203. Aea/xbv dvs e£-f) vv <tto v lAfrenu de&eis, Eur. Hipp. 1237. 
So w(pe\e?(r&ai, £Tifj.iova&ai /xeyd\a, fiXaTTTea&ai iroWd. — (b) MovtriK^jv iirb 
Ad/xirpov iratSevSeis, prjT op iktjv Se U7r' AvTupcovros (having been educated 
in music and rhetoric), PI. Menex. 236, a; so S td ax&'Ovat Te%vr)v vir6 rivos 
(to be taught an art by some one) ; epurri&r\vai r^v yvta/JL-nv inro rivos (to be 
asked an opinion). Trj ical olicfi<reis ra ana /uepTj 5 lave fxi) S^rca (be di- 
vided into the same parts), PI. L. 737, e. "Tirb fiaaiXeas ireirp ay fxevos robs 
<p opov s (having demanded the tribute), Th. 8,5. 'Acpatpe&ijvai, air oar epr]- 
Srjvai tt]v apxriv vtto rivos. Kpvty&rjvai r i (celari aliquid) . n e i<x Sr rj v at, 
t))v avaxtopr)V tv (§ 278,4). ^ AjxfyievvvcrSai x^rcova occurs only with the mean- 
ing to put a garment on onds selfbut not I let myself be clothed by another, the garment 
was put on me by another ; but ivdv&ijvat x iT ^a (to be clothed with a tunic) is in use. 

3 As the Greek may form a personal Pass. (§ 251, 4), of every intransitive 
verb, whicn has its object in the Gen. or Dat., e. g. a/u.e\oviu.at, y/xeXrifrnv, <pSov 



408 syntax. [$$ 282, 283. 

ov/iai, ecp&ovrifrnv ; so may it also with such transitive verbs as have, together 
with the Ace. of the thing, a Dat. of the person, the Dat. of the person being 
changed into the Nom., but the Ace. of the thing remaining. Th. 1. 1, 26. ol 
t&v 'A&rjuaioop eTrtTeTpa.fj.4vot ttjv <pv\aK7]V (quibus custodia demandata 
erat, those of the Athenians who had been entrusted with the guard, from eiriTpe-n-u> tlv\ 
t'})v (pvXaKi)v). 5, 37. ol Koplv&tot TavTa eir e ctt aXfxev oi b.vex&povv 
{having been commanded these things) ; 1, 140. el ^vyxoopyareTe, nal &XXo ti [xe?- 
£ov ev&bs eir iTax&V create (you will be commanded something greater). X. 
An. 2. 6, 1. ol o-TpaTrjyol air o t jx 77 & evTes toj KecpaXas eTeXevT-naav. 



§ 282. (3) Dative. 

1. The Dat. is the Where-case, and hence denotes : (a) in a 
local relation, the place at or in which the action of the subject 
occurs; — (b) in a causal relation, the object upon which the 
action of the subject shows itself or becomes visible — the ob- 
ject which shares in or is concerned in an action. — This object 
is : (a) a person, or a thing considered as a person, e. g. fioySw 
rots 7roAtrats or rfj 7roA.et; (/3) a thing, or an object considered as 
a thing, e. g. dydXXofxac ttj vlkt}. In this way the Dat. may be 
treated under three divisions. In the first, the Dat. is regarded 
as a local object, in the second, as a personal object; in the 
third, the object is a thing, and is called the Dat. of the thing or 
instrumental Dat. 

§ 283. A. Local Dative. 

1. The Dat., as a local object, designates the place in {by, 
near, at) which an action occurs. This use of the Dat. is al- 
most exclusively poetical ; in prose, prepositions are commonly 
joined with the Dative. 

II. 1, 663. avTap 'AxiXXevs evSe /xvxv KXtffli\s evirnnTov (slept in the corner of 
the tent), ?r, 595. 'EXXaSi oWia vaicav (dwelling in houses in Hellas). 0, 210. 
Kvjxa Tro\v(pXoicrf3oio fra.Xdo'o'rjs atyiaXw fxeydXco fipe/xeTai (roars upon the 
shore). S. Trach. 171. (ecpri) tt\v iro.Xaib.v (p-nyov avSrjaai rroTe AuSwvi (that the 
beech tree once uttered an oracle at Dodona). Here belong the Locative forms very 
common in prose, viz., MapaSoovi, 'EXevalvi, IlvSro?, 'lo-fr/xo?, oIlkol, 'Afrf]vri<rt, 
UXaTaiacri, etc. (at Marathon, etc.) ; also, TavT-n, TrjSe, here, 77, where. So also, 
Od. 0, 227. UvXioicrt jxey Qoxa ScvfxaTa valcou. 

2. Hence the Dat. is used also with the attributive pronoun 
<xuto<?, to express the idea of together with. 



§ 284.J DATIVE CASE. 409 

Her. 6, 32. ras ?r6\ias iveirlpLTrpaerav avro?criro?<ri lpo7cri {they burned 
the cities together with the temples — cities, temples and all). X. H. 6. 2, 35. at 
airb ~2,vpaKovejSov vrjes airaaai edkcocrav avrois avSpder iv (the ships were taken 
together with the men). 

3. The local relation is transferred to the time in which some- 
thing happens, and then from the time to the circumstances 
under which something happens. Hence the Dat. denotes the 
time (definite) and circumstances of an action 

In prose with r)p.epa, wkti, pL-qvl, erei, ivtavrep, &pa and the like, in connection 
with attributive demonstratives, ordinals, and adjectives, as Trp6repos, verrepos, 
iiridov, irapeASdcv and the like. The Dat. therefore usually expresses definite 
time. TfjSe rfj vvKrl, rairrj rfj r)p.epa, ine'ivr) rfj 7} fie pa, rfj avrrj 
vvkt'i, tv oX\o7s ereeri, rpirep /j.rjvt, rfj airfj (lop a,, rep iiriSvri erei, 
iiteivep r ep ere i, r ep vex re pep erei, rovrep rep iv lavrep, etc. X. An. 
I. 8, 1. rfj ir poor ri 7] p. e pet aepiKovro iirl rbv irorap.6v (the first day or on the first 
day). Also bo pa xfjuwwj (in time of winter), vovpvr\via (at the time of new moon) ; 
likewise, Tlava&rivaiois, Aiovvcrlois, rpaycvfioTs icaivcfis, at the time of the Panathenaea, 
etc. The preposition iv is joined with the Dat. : (a) when the substantive 
stands without an attributive, e. g. iv r)p.epa, iv wkti, iv &epei : often also when 
a demonstrative stands with it, e. g. iv rovrep rep iviavrep ; (b) usually, when a 
space of time is to be indicated ; hence with substantives in connection with 
cardinals and the adjectives bxiyos, ^pa%vs, p.wp6s, iroXvs, etc., e. g. 8ir)yayov 
iv rpialv r)/j.epais (in three days, in the space of three days), X. An. 4. 8, 8 
Od. £, 253. iirXeofiev Bopey avep.ee aKpae'i KaXep (with a good wind). II. a, 
418. rep ere Kaicy a'ierr) reKov iv p.eydpoicriv (under an evil destiny). Her. 6, 139. 
iireav ft o fey avep.cp avrrj p.epbv vrjvs i^avvcrrj e/c rrjs vp.erepr]s is rr)V rjpiereprjv^ 
rSre irapa^erop.ev (when a ship shall come with a north wind). 



§ 284. B. The Dative as a Personal Object. 

1. Both the Dat. of the person and of the thing denote an 
object, upon or in which the action of the subject shows itself 
or becomes visible ; both denote an object which participates 
in, or is concerned in, the action of the subject ; accordingly, 
the language regards the Dat. of the person and of the thing 
arc the same. The distinction is merely this, that the former is 
a personal object, or is considered as such, and consequently 
has the power of will ; the latter is a mere thing, or is consid- 
ered as such, and of course without will. As the idea denoted 
by the term ivhere, is intermediate to that denoted by whence 
and whither, so the Dat. (the Where-case) , when it is a p)erson s 

35 



410 SYNTAX. [$284 

stands in contrast with the Ace. (the Whither -cane) ; when it 
is a thing, in contrast with the Gen. (the Wlience-case). 

2. The Ace. denotes an object effected, accomplished by the 
action of the subject, or the object acted upon; the Dat. of the 
person, on the contrary, denotes an object merely aimed at by 
the action of the subject and sharing in it; the action of the 
subject is indeed employed on the object and becomes mani- 
fest in it, yet it does not make it a passive object, but the ob- 
ject itself appears in distinction from the subject as active; 
between the subject and the object a reciprocal action takes 
place. The Gen. denotes the immediate cause ; the Dat. of the 
thing, on the contrary, a mediate, indirect cause (the ground, 
the means, the instrument) ; the Gen. denotes an object as 
calling forth and producing the action of the subject; the Dat. 
of the thing, only such an object as exhibits in or upon itself 
the action of the subject. 

Remark 1. In poetry a local limit or object is very often considered as a 
person, and is indicated by the Dat. ; this sometimes occurs, though but seldom, 
in prose. II. o, 369. iraai dreoTo-iv x^P as aviaxovTes (raisiny up the hands to 
all tiie gods). So cCtpea&ai, i-iraipea&ai dopv rivi. II. e, 709. \lfxvr) KeK\i(j.4- 
vos Kr)<pL<ri$i (dwelling at the Cephisian lake), -n, 218. irpoKa\4<T<ra.To x^-PI^V (^ e 
challenged to the contest). Th. 1,13. 'AfxeivoKXrjs 5a piois ^T&ev. 3,5. avroTs 
MeAeas Ao-kcov atpiKveirai. 

Rem. 2. From this use of the Dat., the fact may be explained, why many 
verbs of motion compounded with the prepositions els, irpSs, iirt, etc., take 
their object in the Dat. ; also why most adverbs with the Dat. (or Locative) in- 
flection [§ 101, 2, (b)], may express both the relation of rest (local Dat.) and 
the direction whither (personal Dat.), e. g. x a /" ai '> humi, humum; so, likewise, the 
adverbs in -rj, e. g. oAA?? those in -a, e. g. 'dva, Karoo, etc. ; those in -o i, e. g, 
iredoi, humi, humum; ivrav&ji, hue and hie (but of, '6ttoi, ttoI, always denote the 
direction whither). 

3. Most verbs, which take the personal Dat, as the objec* 
sharing or participating in the action, express the idea of associa- 
tion and union, e. g. SiSoVai, TtapLyzw, V7ria"xyeia3ai, apiraXfiiv tl tlvl. 
The following classes of words, therefore, govern the Dative: — 

(1) Verbs expressing mutual intercourse, associating with, mix- 
ing with, participation. — Dative of communion, e. g. 6/xtAeti/, 
txiyvvvai, fxtyvv cr 3 at, kolvovv, KoivovcrSai, Kowoivelv, oV, KaraXXarretv 
(to reconcile), Si-, KaTaAAarreo-^ai (to reconcile one's self to), £evov- 
aSac, cnrivSeaSai or aTrovSas iroieio-Sai, TrpdrreLV (agere cum aliqud) ] 
elrreLV, Xeyetv, StaXiyea^at, ev^ecrSai, KarapacrSai, etc. ; also adjec- 
tives and adverbs, sometimes even substantives which express 



$284.] DATIVE CASE. 411 

a similar idea, e. g. kolvos, (rvvrpcxpos, <n'/x<£ou/o?, (rvyyevrjs, yoteratrio? ; 
many other words of a similar signification, compounded with 
avv and /xera, also with Iv, irpos, and irapa. 

'Op.iXei rots aya&o?s avfrpAnois [associate with good men). Her. 3, 
131. 6 AepoKr)dr)S HoXvk pdr e'C wptXrio~e. 6, 21. ir6Xi€s avrai paXtara aX- 
Xr)Xr) <ri e|e ivAS-nffav [cultivated hospitality with each other) . — Ev xopai 
toTs &eo?s (I pray to the gods). X.H.2. 2, 19. <rirev8e cr&a i 'Afr-nvaiois [tc 
make a treaty with the Athenians). 3.2,20. aXXi)Xois o-irovoas iiro ir)crav- 
to [they made treaties with each other). Isocr. Paneg. 42. 9. at irpd^is at 7rpoye- 
yevrip-ivai KoivaX iraa iv 7]p7v KareXe'ub&rio'ai' [common to us all). On the 
Gen. with koiv6s, see § 273, 3, (b). 

(2) Verbs of contending, litigating, vying ivith, e. g. ipc^m^ 
uaxecrSau, 7ro\epL€tv, dycovi'£ecr#ai (usually 7rpos two), SiKa^ecr^ai, a/A- 
<pL<sf3r)T€Lv, arao-ia^iv, etc. ; also of going against, encountering 
meeting and approaching, and the contrary, as those of yield- 
ing, e. g. viroSTYjvai and ij<£iaTacr#ai ; airavrav, inravrav, vTravTia&w, 
TrXrjo-iat.ew, 7reAa£eiv, iyyt^etv, etc. ; eUeiv, viretKCLV, ^copetv, Trapa^oypeiv, 
etc. ; the adjectives and adverbs TrXiqcrLos, eravrtos, 7reAas, etc. 
(seldom eyyus). 

Ot"EXXr]ves auSpeias to Is He pa ais i p.ax^o' aur o [fought bravely with tlie 
Persians). Mr? ei'/cere rots iroXepiois [do not yield to the enemy). Xpr] 
to is ix&P°?s rr)srjperepas [x&pas) ir apax<» PV & at, Isocr. Archid. 118, 13. On 
the Gen., see § 271,2. 'T-rrocrrrivai avroTs [Tlepffais) 'Afrrivcuoi roXpr)- 
aavres, iviK^ffav avrovs [having dared to encounter them), X. An. 3.2,11. 'Tcpiar- 
ratr&ai |u pcpopa?s, Th. 2, 61. "Opoiov opoica del 7reAa£et [like always 
draws to like), PI. Symp. 195, b. "l^ovro avrioi roiai AaKedaipovioKTi [encamped 
opposite the Lacedaemonians), Her. 6, 77. Tvpavvos airas ix&pos iXev&epiq kclI 
v6fiois kv avrios. On the Gen., see § 273, Rem. 9. 

(3) Verbs of commanding, entreating, counselling, inciting, en- 
couraging; of following, accompanying, serving, obeying and diso- 
beying, trusting and distrusting, e. g. TrposrdrreLv, hnrajTTi.iv, no.pa.i- 
vuv, 7rapa.KeAeueo-$ai, etc. (but KeXcvecv with Ace. and Inf. ) ; lirco-Sai, 
aKokovSdv, StaSe^ccr^ai (to succeed to, take the place of) ; rruSecr- 
#ai; v7raKov€tv, OLTreiSeiv, itiareouv, 7r€7roi#erai, etc.; the adjectives 
and adverbs aKoXovSos, (IkoAou^ws, iiropLevois, StctSo^o?, e£r)<s, i<j>e£rjs. 

X. Cy. 8. 6, 13. rovrwu wv (instead of a.) vvv vp.lv rrapaK eAeuo pat ovdhv 
rols SovXois ffpojTOTTw [I enjoin upon the slaves none of these things which 
I now command you). Her. 3, 88. 'Apdfiioi ovSapa Karri Kovffav iirl dovXoavvr) 
Yl4po-rio-i [never obeyed, were never subject to the Persians). 6,14. ivavpdx*oi> 
ivr]KOV(rTr)<ravT€S ro?(Ti <rrparr)yo?<ri [they fought in disobedience to their 



412 SYNTAX. [$ 284 

commanders). X. Cy. 1. 1, 2. ras ay4Xas ravras iooKov/j.ev bpav fxaXXov ibeXovaai 
it e i&ecr&a i to?s vo/.ie vo~ i v, rj tovs av&pwirovs ro7s dpxov o~ l (more uniting 
to obey their shepherds, than men their rulers). 8.6, 18. t£ rjixepu/ip oyyeAa/ 
((pa<j\) tou vvKTepivov d ia.5 4x* °~ &ai (that the night messenger succeeds the onefo) 
the day). PL Rp. 400, d. evXoyla dpa kcu evap l uoo'Tia k<x\ evcrxnjJ-oavvn Kal evpvfr- 
uia *vr]&eia a.Ko\ov&€?. Eur. Andr. 803. kolkov KaKcp SidSoxof. PL 
Phaed. 100, c. o-xoirei otj to. e|7js iicetvois (consider the things next in ordei 
to those). 

(4) Expressions of similarity and dissimilarity, of likeness 
and unlikeness, of agreement and disagreement, e. g. koiKtvai, 
ofAOLovv, 6fJLOi.ovcr3-ai } ofJLOLO<s, 6jU.ota)5, tcro?, Lcrcjs, e/x<£epryg and 7rpos<£e ( o^s 
(similar}, 7rapa7r\r}aLos, TrapaTrA^crioo?, 6 avrds (ideni), apa) §id<£opos 
(discordant, hostile), 8xicf)Qivos; and very many words compounded 

Witfa OfXOV, (TVV, fACTOL, C g". 0[JLOVO<UV, OjJLOyXlOTTGS, OfJLWWfJLOS, O~U/A0OOVeiJ/, 
O~vp.(j>0iV0<5, (TVV(0$6<S. 

Her. 1, 123. ras 7rad-as ras Kvpov Tfjai kco'vTov 6 po iov jxsvos (likening, com' 
paring the sufferings of Cyrus with his own). 6, 23. 6 'V-nyiov Tvpavvos 8 idcpopos 
(fy) rolai ZayK\atoiai (was hostile to the Zancleans). X. Cy. 7. 1, 2. wir- 
Xlo~/j.4uoi irduTfs i](Tav ol irepl rhv Kvpov ro7s avTols rep Kvpw oirXois (were 
furnished with the same arms as Cyrus). 5. 1,4. d/xoiav rats oovXais eTx€ 
T7/j> ia&rjTa (Tldv&eia). 7. 5. 65. 6 ai$T]pos aviaot tovs aa&eveis ro?s lo*x v ~ 
po?s iv t$ TToXefjLw (makes the weak equal to the strong). Isocr. Paneg. 43, 13 
XaXtTrov icrnv tcrovs tovs Xoyovs tcS fj.ey4&<~i twv epywu i^evpuv. Th. 1, 49. 
7] vavjxaxio. ir e £o /x ax^y t p o cr <p 4 p-ns (?iv). 

Rem. 3. On the Comparatio compendiaria with expressions of likeness and 
similarity, see § 323, Rem. 6. On the Gen. with iyyvs, irX-naiov, § 273, Rem. 9. 
The coordinate copulative particle nai, is not seldom employed with adjectives 
of likeness and similarity instead of the Dative. Her. 1, 94. AvSol v6,uoi(ri p.ev 
TrapairXrio'ioio' i xP^ 0)VTai Ka ^ "EAAipres (= ,/ EAA7j<n or to7s 'EXX-nvoiv) , the 
Lydians and Greeks have similar laws,- instead of the Lydians have laws similar to 
the Greeks. So 4v 1o~w, Yo~a, 6/xoiws, cosavTus, kclto. TavTa kul, etc. PL Ion. 500, 
d. oi>x 6/xoicas Tre-rroi-hKao-i Kal "Ofxrjpos. Comp. similis ac, atque. There also 
occur, particularly in Attic prose, the particles of comparison, &s, cisirep with 
Xaos, 6 o.vt6s. Dem. Phil. 3. 119, 33. tov clvtov Tp6wou, cosirep, k. r. X. 

(5) Expressions signifying to be becoming, suitable, fitting, 
to please, and the contrary, e. g. Trp4rcs.iv, ap/xoTTetv, 7rpos^/ceiv (with 
an Inf. following), 7rpe7r6Vr(os, d7rpe7TGJS, etKos 1<jtiv, cikotoo?, apecrKeiv 
(di/Savetv Ion.). 

PL Apol. 36, d. ti ovv 7r p 4 it e t avdpl ir4vr}Ti; (what then is becoming a poor 
man?). Her. 6,129. cuivtw apeaTcos 6px4eTo (he danced pleasing himself '). 
X. Cy. 3. 3, 39. ap 4a /ce iv vp.7v ircip&vTai (they endeavor to please you). 

(6) Verbs signifying to agree ivith, to assent to, to reproach, to 
be angry, to envy, e. g. bfxoXoydv, etc.; /j,e/x^>eo-^ai (to reproach, 



$ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 413 

fjLe/jL<fi€cr$aL nva means to blame), AoiSopeicr^ai (to reproach), eiriTC- 
fxav, ey/caAeiv (tlv'l tl), liriKoXeiv (tlvl tl), lTrv7rXrjTTG.lv, 6Vei6Y£av, ivo^Xew 
(more seldom with the Ace.), etc. ; SvfxovcrSai, ppLp,ovo-$a.L, x.aAe- 
7ratv€iv, etc. ; cpSovelv (tlvl twos, $ 274, 1, more seldom tlvl tl), 
f3ao-Ka.LV€Lv (to envy ; fiao- ko.lvc.lv tlvol, to slander). The Ace. of 
the tiling very often stands with the Dat. of the person. 

Her. 3, 142. iyk to. (=&) t$ Tr4\as £ir nrXrjcro-a, avrbs Kara Svvajxiv oh 
Tvoir](T<a (wliat I rebuke in my neighbor I will not do myself). Th. 4, 61. ov to?s 
LxpX^v 0ov\o p.4vois [x4 fx (p p. a 1, aWa r o?s virattovsiv It illot 4 po is ovffiv 
(I do not reproach those wishing to rule, but, etc.). Deni. 01. 2. 30, 5. ^i/^xAet 
7]/x?v 6 $i\nnros {gave trouble to us). X. An. 2. 5, 13. Alyv7TTiovs, oTs fidXiCTa 
v/jicis vvv yivwGKGo Te&v/j.oofXGvovs, K0\d(re(r&e (ivith whom I know you are angry). 
Cy. 1. 4, 9. &e?os avT<£ i\o iSope?T 0, t^jv &pa(TvTWTa bp&v [reproached him). 
4. 5, 9. Kva^dpns e/3 p t/xovr t cj> Kvpq> Kal to?s M-ndois r§ KaraXnr6vras 
avT0v ipT\\iov o^x^^ al ( was wroth with Cyrus, etc.). 

(7) Verbs of helping, averting, and being useful, e. g. aprjyeLv, 
dfJivv€LV, aXi^uv, riftcopeii/, /Sor/SeLV, lirLKOvpelv, aTroXoyeloSaL, Xv<tlt€- 
Xglv, €7rapKeLV, xpaioyAeiv and the like (bllt ovLvdvaL and dicpeXelv 
with Ace. § 279, 1.) ; also several verbs compounded with 
crvv, e. g. o~v[Acf>ip€LV (conducere), crvpvirpdTTtLV, crvvcpyeLV, etc., and 
many adjectives of the same and similar significations, and 
the contrary, e. g. xprjo-Lfxos, fiXafSepos (but fiXa-mew with Ace. 
$ 279, 1.), (pi'Xos, expo's, 7roX£pLLos, etc. 

X. R. L. 4, 5. aprjl-ovai ry iroXei iravTl a&evei [they assist the city with all 
their strength). Cy. 3. 3, 67. (ai ywcuices) iKeTevovffi trdvTas p.r) (pevyeiv KaTa\nr6v 
Tas, aA.\' ap-vvai Kal avTals, Kal r 4kvo is, Kal crcpicriv avTots (to de- 
fend them, their children and themselves). 4.3,2. tovtois yap (pacriv audyKTjv 
efoai irpo^vp.ws a\4£eiv (they say it is necessary to defend these). Eur. Or. 922. 
COpecrTris) ri&4\riff€ t ificape7v irarpl, KaK7}i> yvvaiKa Ka&eov KaTaKTavdov 
(wished to help his father). PI. Ap. £8, c. et t i/xu pr]cr e is H aTpoKXco t$ 
€Taipc{) tov <p6vov (if you sJiall avenge the murder of your friend Patroclus, i. e. 
if you shall avenge for him). 

Hem. 4. The words cpiAos, ex&pJs, TroX4p.ios are also used as sub- 
stantives, and govern the Gen. X. An. 3. 2, 5. tovs eKeivov ix&icT ovs 
(his bitterest enemies). Hence the Dative stands, in general, with verbs and ad- 
jectives of all kinds, when the action takes place for the advantage, favor, honor, 
harm, disadvantage of a person, or an object considered as a person (Dativus 
commodi et incommodi), where the English uses the prepositions to or for. Here 
belong particularly the rites performed in honor of a divinity, e. g. opx^or^ai 
•rois &eo?? (to dance in honor of the gods) ; <TTe<pavov(r&ai 3-ew (to crown one's self in 
honor of the gods). Her. 6, 138. 'A p t 4 p. i 8 i opTriv 'dyeiv (to keep a feast in honor 
of Diana). The Dative with KXveiu (Poet., especially Epic), is also to be re- 
garded in the same way : k\v&1 jxoi, listen to me favorably. Here belongs, also, 

35* 



414 SYNTAX. [$ 284 

the phrase, mostly poetic, Se'xecriW tl vivl, to receive something from some one, 
since it involves the additional idea that the reception of the thing will be re- 
garded as a relief, as agreeable, etc. to tbe person. Od. 7r, 40. &s dpa (pcav-qa-as I 
e5e£ccTo %^ K ^ 0V *7X 0S (received from him [as a favor to him] the brazen spear). 
See Larger Gramm. Part. II. § 597, Rem. 3. 

(8) Verbs of observing, finding, meeting with something in a 
person. 

"TiroXafx.^dueiv Be? rep toiovto), oti evrjfrns ris av&pwiros (scil. eVTiV),Pl. 
lip. 598. d. "Erepa S-f], &s eoine, ro7s (pvXa^iu ev prj icafiev, 421, e. ®ap<rov<rt 
naXicrra ivoX4p.ioi, orav to?j ivavriois irpdyixara kolL ao"%oAtas TrvvSdvwvTai 
(when they perceive troubles and hindrances in those opposed to them), X. Hipp. 5. 8. 

(9) The Dative stands with ecrrt(v) and ela-c(v), to denote 
the person, or tiling considered as a person, that has or possesses 
something. The thing possessed stands as the subject in the 
Nom., but the verb is translated by the English have, etc., and 
the Dat. as the Nom. So also with yiyveo-^ai and virap-^iv (to 
be, exist), also with tStos and dAAor/nos. 

Kvpu) i\v fieydXr) fiaffiXeia ( Cyrus had a great kingdom ). — To? 5 trXovciois 
iroXXd Trapa/jLv^id <pa<riv elvai, PL Rp. 329, e. "^H creep Kpoiffcp 5vo 7rcu8es, 
Her. 1, 44. When the above verbs are connected with a predicative abstract 
substantive, they may be translated to prove, to serve. Xcupicpoiv ipol Cm*' 1 a 
fxaXXou, t) vepeXe id ivuv, X. C. 2. 3, 6. (Ch. mihi detrimento potius est, quam 
emolumento, is an injury, proves an injury rather than a benefit). 

Rem. 5. The possessive Dat., or tbe Dat. of the possessor, is to be distin- 
guished from the Gen. of the possessor (§ 273, 2). The Dative is used, when 
it is asked, what the possession is (what has one ?), and the possession desig- 
nated is contrasted with other possessions, e. g. ¥Lvpa> i\v [xeydx-n fiaaiXeia, 
Cyrus had (among other things also) a great kingdom ; the Gen. is used, when it 
is asked who the possessor is (whose is this ?.), and the possessor is contrasted 
with other possessors, e. g. K vp ov l\v /xeydx-r) ficxriXeia, to Cyrus (and not to 
another) belonged a great kingdom. The Dative describes the person as one to 
whom the possession has been imparted, divided, given, and under whose con- 
trol it now is ; the Genitive, as one who has gained possession, from whom the 
possession has proceeded. 

(10) The Dat. is used universally when an action takes place 
in reference to a person, or a thing considered as a person, so that 
the person in some way shares or participates in it. Here be- 
long the following instances : — 

(a) In certain formulas, the Dative designates the person to whose judgment 
consideration, or estimate, an idea is referred, and thus it first gains a definite 
authority or value ; i. e. the assertion is made in view of the judgment, etc. of 
the person to whom the matter had been submitted. This Dat. therefore shows 
when and under what circumstances the assertion is true, e. g. Her. 1, 14. aA.7j&et 5) 



§ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 41t> 

Acfyw x/>€co/ief a> ov Kopip&lwp rov Z-nixoaiov £<n\v 6 Srnxxavpis (recte aestimanti hid 
thesaurus non est Corinthiacus, in the judgment of one estimating the matter correctly, 
it is not the Corinthian treasury). Th. 2, 49. to e^co^ey airr o fie pa o-wp.a ovk dyap 
&ep/j.bp i\v {the external part of the body, when one touched it, in the view of one touching 
it, was not very hot). Here belong especially the Datives elspdprt, QiSvtl, avafiai/Ti, 
threpPdyTt. and the like, with local specifications. Her. 6, 33. airb ""lupins airaXXao-o-6- 
fxepos 6 pavriubs ffrparbs ra eif apiarepa e sir Xe opt i rov 'EXXtjsttSptov alpee irdpTo. 
(the naval force subjugated all parts of the Hellespont, upon the left as one sails into it, 
or with respect to one sailing into it). X. Cy. 8. 6, 20. (Kvpos) Xeyercu KaracrTpe\paa^ai 
irdvTctTa e&p-n, oaa %vpia.v elsfUdvri olne? fiexpl epv&pas &aXdo-o~r)s {which dwell as 
one enters Syria [from the entrance of S.] to the Red Sea) Also the expression dis 
<rvpeX6pn elireTp, to speak briefly, to say in a word, prDperly to say it when one 
has brought the whole together into a small compass, has comprehended the whole, e. g. 
*Avev apxovTwu ovhep Up ovre KaXSp, ovre aya&bp yepoiro, cos fxep avpeX6pT t 
elirelp, ovdauov, X. An. 3. 1, 38. 

(b) So also the Dat. of the person often stands in connection with £>s, in 
order to show that the thought which is expressed, is not a general one, but 
has its value only according to the opinion of the person named. X. C. 4. 6, 4. 
6 ra ivepl robs &eobs p&fiifia eldccs op&ws ccp 7] fi7 p evcrefitys cvpio'p.epos e'lrj (nos- 
tro judicio, in our opinion). S. O. C. 20. [xaKpap ydp, cos yepopri, irpovo-rdx-ns 
6d6p {you went forward a great way, for an old man, as an old man would view it). 
Ant. 1161. Kpecop yap r\v ^r\X(ar6s, co s i/xoi, ivore {in my opinion). PL Soph. 
226, C. raxeTcw, cos ifiol, anetyip eirndTTeis. Her. 3, 88. yd/xovs robs Trpcbrovs 
eyd/xee Uepo-rjcri 6 Aapelbs {matrimonia ex Persarum judicio nobilissima, con- 
tracted very honorable marriages, in the judgment of the Persians). Altogether 
usual in the phrase &£i6s el/xi tiv6 s r iv., or even without the Gen., a £ i 6 s 
el [ii t ipi {I am of value in the estimation of some one). X. C. 1. 2, 62. 4/j.ol fxep 
877 ~XwKpaTr]s toiovtos &>u eSdicei Tt/xrjs ct £ 1 s elpcu rrj tr 6 A e 1 fiaXXop, 7) frapdrov 
(rather merits honor than death, in the estimation, in the view of the city). PL Symp. 
185, b. outos eo~rip 6 rr,s Ovpapias &eov epcos Kcd ovpdpios nai ttoXXov &£ios na\ 
tv 6 X e t Kai Id id) rot. is. 

(c) Here belongs the use of the Dat. of a person with /3ouAo/xeVco, ^So^eVco, 
aa/xepco, iXTTofxiuw, d%^a,uei/a>, TrposSexo^euw and the like, in connection with 
verbs, most frequently with elpai and yiypec^ai. Such a participle gives 
definiteness to an otherwise indefinite assertion. El ravrd <roi fiouXo/xepa} 
ear lp (if this is to you wishing it, if this is your wish). Ovtos (xoi ^So/xepw 
aTTi)pTr](rep (he met me to my joy). Her. 9. 16. 7780 fiepo io~ ip r][x7p 01 x6yoi ye- 
y6pacrt. Th. 6, 46. t£ Njki'oi tt po sSexofiepco -t\p to izep\ tccp ^Eyearamv 
(were as Nicias expected). PL Pp. 358, d. aAA 1 ftpa, eX <roi $ov Xo [x4p a (sc 
io'Tiv), a x4yco, whether what I say pleases you). 

(d) The Dat. of the personal pronouns, first and second persons, is often 
used, not because they are really necessary for the general sense, but to show 
that the statement is made in a familiar, humorous, and pleasant manner. This 
is called the Ethical Dat. (Dativus ethicus). X. Cy. 1. 3, 2. opwp S77 rbp k6o-/xov 
•rod Trdinrov, iuflXeTrcap avrcp, eAeyey (6 Kvpos)' ^£1 (J.rjrep, ws kclXos [aoi 6 ndir 



4:16 SYNTAX. [$ 284, 

7ros (0 mother, how beautiful grandfather is, in mt eyes). 15. %v Se jue KaraKiTrrn 
iv&dSe, Kal (xa^rw linreveiv, oiav fxkv iv Tlepaais S>, olfxai aoi eKeiuovs robs aya&ob* 
ra irefrna padicas viK'fjcreiu (to gratift YOU, / think I shall easily surpass those 
skilled in foot exercises). 

(11) The Dative often stands with the Perf. Pass, (rarely 
wi1h other tenses of the Pass.), to denote the active person or 
agent. The Pass., in this case, expresses a state or condition, 
mid the Dat. represents the author of this condition at the same 
time as the person for whom this condition exists, while by v-xo 
with the Gen., the author merely is expressed. 

Her 6, 123. %s [xoi irporepou S eS-f}\ufr at (as has been before shown by me). 
Dem. Aphob. 844, 1. Se? 8177777 (raa&ai. ra, tovtco it eir pay fxev a irepl rj/xaiu (it is 
necessary to describe what has been done by him). 01. 1. 26, 27. ri tt 4-irpaKT at 
to?s &\\o is : (what has been done by others ?). In this way a Perf. Act., which 
is wanting, may be supplied, e. g. ravrd fxoi AeAe/crat (I have said this). 

(12) So also the active person or agent stands regularly in 
the Dative with verbal adjectives in -tos and -rios, [§234, 1, (i)], 
both when they are used, like the Latin verbal in -dum, im- 
personally in the Neut. Sing. : -tov, -t£ov, or PL -rd, -ria ($ 241, 
3.), or when they are used personally, like the Latin participle 
in -dus ; those d3rived from transitive verbs, i. e. such as govern 
the Ace, admit both the Impers. and the Pers. construction ; 
but those dem 3d from intransitive verbs, admit only the im- 
personal. The impersonal verbal Adj., in addition to the Dat. 
of the agent, governs the same Case as the verb from which 
it is derived. 

Tb <TTpdT€v/j.a evewi&erov i]V kvTavha ro7s TroAefiiois (could be easily 
attacked by the enemy), X. An. 3. 4, 20. 'Ao-ktjtcoj/ (or -r4a) icrri <roi t\\v 
aperrju (you must practise virtue or virtue must be practised by you). 'Ettl&v /xi) • 
r eov icrrl rols avS panrois rr\s aperris (there must be a desiring by men, men 
must desire vhiue). 'E7rtxetp77Teoj/ lar'i a 01 r$ epyw (you must attempt the 
work). <p7]fAl §77 /3o7j&?]T60j/ ehai ro?s irpdyixaaiv v^lv (I say that you must 
render assistance), Dem. 01. 1. 14, 17. Ko Aavr 4ov iarl <roi rbv duSrpwn-ov 
(you must punish the man). % ko~ kt)t 4a icrri cr 1 tj apeT-f). 'Q,<pe\r)Tea a 01 77 
ttoAls iariu, X. C. 3. 6, 3. So the Deponents (§ 197), e. g. /j.i/xt)t 4ov iarlu 
■qnlv tovs ayaSovs (from fiL/Ae'ioSai riva) or /xifi^T 4 1 elalv rifxlv oi aya&ol 
[you must imitate the good). 

Rem. 6. The verbal adjectives of those verbs whose middle form has a Pass. 
as well as a reflexive or intransitive sense, have, likewise, in the impersonal 
Neut. form with tari, a two-fold signification ; and when an object is joined 
with them, a two-fold construction, e. g. Treiar 4ov £<tt\v r]a7p abr6v (we must 



9 285".] DATIVE CASE. 417 

convince him) from irti&w nvd ; and ireicrr 4ov icrrlu r^itv to7s v6[xols {we must 
obey the laws, obtemperandum est a nobis legibus) from ireifro/xai tivl, obtempero 
alicui ; air aWaKT 4 ov icrrlu y\\uv avrhu tov KaKov (we must rid him of the evil) 
from airaWaTTeiv Tiva tov kixkov ; and airaWaitT 4ov i<n\v rjfjuu tov av&pdlmov 
(we must get rid of the man) from a7raAAaTTeo-frai rivos (to get rid of something). 

Rem. 7. Not unfrequently, however, the verbal adjectives in -re 6s, among 
the Attic writers, take the active person or agent in the Ace. also, as these ver- 
bals have the force of the impersonal verb 8 e 7 with the Inf., e. g. PI. Gorg. 
507. d. rbv fiov\6 fj.ev ov evdaifiova elvcu o~w<\>poavvr\v d iojkt 4 ov k<xL ao~K7)- 
reov (whoever ivishes to be happy must seek and practise sobriety). Often, also, 
the construction of verbal adjectives is changed into the Inf. ; in this case the 
agent must necessarily stand in the Ace. X. C. 1. 5, 5. ipol ixku 5o/ce7. . . eAeu- 
b4pa avSpl evKTbu eluai [J.)] rvx^iv Soi\ov toiovtov SouA.euocTO 5e... 
Ikgt eveiv tovs freovs k. t. A. 



$285. C. The Dative of the thing (Instrumental 
Dative). 

1. The Dative of the thing expresses relations which in 
Latin are denoted by the Ablative. The relations expressed 
by this Dat. are : 

(1) The ground, reason, or cause, e. g. <f>6f3io a.7rr)\.9-ov } . evvota, 
aSiKta, </>o7?o), v(3p€t 7roietv tl ; especially with verbs denoting the 
state of the feelings, e. g. ^aipetv, ^Secr^ai, aydWeoSai, hvaipsar- 
$ai } \v7T€icr$aL, aviacrSai, aAyetv, Ik-, Ka.ra7rA-^TTeo"<$ai ; $avjxa£uv \ 
IXttl^lv ; crrepyew and dya7rav, ap£<jK€.cr$ai ) apK€?<T$ai (all four : to 
be content, to be pleased with something) ; ayavanreiv, ^v^epaivuv. 
X<xAe7rcos, /3ap€(i)<s <jfrepeiv, a^-^eo-^at ; alaxyvecrSaL, etc. 

X. C. 1-3, 1. ot &eol Tais irapa tSiv evai/Hso-raTaii' t ifj.a7s fj.d\i(TTa x ai f >vV ' 
a t v (are especially pleased with the honors from the most devout). Her. 478. 8 i a i - 
t?7 ovSa/xws 7) pe(TK€To ^tcv&iicfi (was by no means pleased with the Scythian 
mode of life). Th. 4, 85. &av/j.d£<t> r rj airoK\ei(rei fiov tuv irv\uv (I am 
surprised at the shutting of the gates against me). 3, 97. i\irt£eiv rrj tvx?) 
(to hope in fortune), ^r4pyco ro7s nap ova iv (I am content with the present 
things). 'Ayairw ro7s virdpxovcr iv aya&o7s. XaAeirw s (j>4ow ro7s 
■n-apovai irpdy fiaff i (I am troubled by the present state of affairs), X. An. 1.3,3. 
Alaxvyo/xai to7s ireir pay (*4vo i s (lam ashamed o?i account of what has been done), 
C 2. 1,31. PI. Hipp. maj. 285. e. cIk6tws aoi x a ^ ouvcr lv °' 1 AaKeSaifi6uioi, are 
iroWa ei56ri. 'Ay aWo/xai rfj vlicy. TIoWol ayavanTovtri t<£ Sa- 
vdra. A vsx^patuca ro7s \6yois. Dem. 01. 3. 13, 14. ayair-fi aas rois 
Treirpayfj.ej/oiS7i<rvxiai><Txy creu 'I tr%u ety to ?y c c6/xacri, X. C.2. 7, 7. So 
also with adjectives, e. g. lo-xvpbs x^P^v, raxvs irocriv, etc. 

Remark 1. The preposition iirt, on account of, at, is very often joined with 
the Dat. ; thus commonly, xaAe7r«s <p4peiv iiri rivi, &avftd£eiu iiri tivi ; 8 v sx e * 
paivco usually with the Ace, §279,5; we also find ayaTrw, arepyw, fiapews, 

XaAcn U>S (p4p(0 Tl. 



418 SYNTAX. [j 285 

(2) The means and instrument, by which an action is accom- 
plished. Hence the Dat. also stands with xPV a ^ aL (uti) and 
its compounds, and with vofilfceiv (to be accustomed to). 

V>dXXeiu Xi&ois (to throw with stones = to throw stones). 'Akovt'i&iv alxH-a7s 
(to hurl with spears = to hurl specws). X. Cy. 4. 3, 21. 6 fxev liriroicipTavpos 
hvotv b <p&aXjxo7v ■Kpoewpa.To Kal 8vo7v &tolv iJKOvev • iyca Se r err apo 
piev b(p&aX/no7s TiKfj.apovp.ai, r err apex i Se wcrl irpoaio'^'f)cro[j.ai • iroXXa 
yap cpaffL Kal 'tirirov au^pcanois to7s bcp& a A /j.o7 s irpoop&vra Zr}Xovv, iroXXa Be 
to?s wo~l irpoaKovovra a-rffiatvetv (the centaur saw with two eyes, and heard with 
two ears; but I shall see with four eyes, etc.). 18. irpovoe7u fxeu ye e£a> trdvTa 
rfj av&poiTT ivy yvc&fir], ra7s Se -fcepaXv dirXocpoprjaa}, Bica^ofxai Se tw %ir- 
7rw, tov S J evavriov avarpe^a rfj rov 'iitttov pwpLy. X. C. 4. 2, 9. at tS>v 
afybS* avBpwv yvapai apery irXovri^ovcn robs KeKTrj/xeyovs (enrich with virtue 
those who possess them). Her. 3, 117. ovroi 3>v, o'lirep efnrpoa^eu ew&etrav 
Xpav&ai t<£ vSari, ovk ex 0UTes avr^ xP" (r ^ al ) av/xepopi) fxeyaXri Si- 
aXpf'wi'Tai (those who before were accustomed to use the water, not being able to 
use it, experienced a great inconvenience). Dem. Cor. 277, 150. tcevfj irpocpdffe i 
r avTy naTaxpu. But Karaxpy && ai and SiaxRV^^ai in the sense of 
consumere, to kill, as transitive, govern the Ace. Comp. Her. 6, 135 ; Antiph. 1. 
113, 23. With xpy ff & al a second Dat. often stands, by means of attraction, 
or els with the Ace. or the Ace. of a pronoun or neuter adjective (§ 278, 4), 
to express the design or purpose, e. g. x/jw^cu <roi iricrTcp (plXa, as in the 
Lat. utor te fdo amico, I have thee for a true friend). X. An. 1. 4, 15. vjjliv 
it i a tot drois xpV°~ eTai Ka ^ e ' s <t>povpia Kal els Xoxaytas (will employ 
you as the most faithful both for guards and commanders). Her. 4, 117. <pcayy ol 
^avpo/xdrai vo/j.i£ov(ri 'Zkv&ikJ) (are accustomed to use the Scythian language). 
Th. 2, 38. ay&ai Kal &vaiais dieT^aiois v o/xl Cover i. 

Rem. 2. The Dat. is very often used without uiv in military expressions, 
with reference to a retinue or force, in order to represent this as the means by 
which something takes place ; this usage is found particularly with verbs of 
going and coming. Such Datives are CTpary, oroXw, -rrXr)&ei, vavo-'i(v), 'Ittttois, 
(TTpaTiwrais, etc. (In Latin the Abl. without cum, as viagno exercitu venire, to 
come with a large army). Her. 5, 99. ol 'A&r)va7oi. airiKearo elKoa i vnvari (came 
with twenty ships). Th. 1, 102. 'A&nva7oi rfXSov 7rA?jd-ei ovk bXiyw (with not 
a small number). 4. 39. ol IleXoTrovurjaioL avexu>pyo~av rep o~t pary eK rr\s TlvXov-. 
X. Cy. 1. 4, 17. abros ro7s 'tirirois irposeXdaas Trpbs ra rwu MtjSojj/ (ppovpia Kare- 
p.eivev (having rode up with the cavalry). An. 7. 6, 29. frappaXews r\\x7v icpeiTovTo 
ol TroXefj.ioL Kal 'nririKaJ Kal it eXr a err ik $. 

(3) The following relations also may be considered as the 
means, and are expressed by the Dat. : (a) the material of 
which (= with which) anything is made ; — (b) the rule or 
standard, according to which anything is measured, judged of, 
or done; hence the Dat. stands particularly with verbs of 
measuring, judging, inferring, e. g. aTaS/xaa-^at, yiyvoivKuv, eiKa- 



$ 285.] DATIVE CASE. 419 

£,eiv, Kpiveiv, TeK/xaipecr^at ; also in general, to express a more def 
nite limitation, to denote in what respect a word is to be taken ; 
thus, for example, with verbs signifying to be distinguished, to 
excel, to be strong and powerful, and the contrary ; also with very 
many adjectives (instead of the Ace. of more definite limita- 
tion, § 279,7); — (c) the measure, by, according to which an 
action is defined or limited, especially with comparatives and 
superlatives, as well as with other expressions, which include 
the idea of comparison, in order to denote the degree of 
difference between the objects compared; — finally, (d) the 
way and manner in which anything is done (Hoiu ?). 

Her. 3, 57. 77 ayoprj kcu to Trpvravri'iov Tlapico Xt&w rjcrK-n/j-eua ( r qu) {were decora- 
ted with Parian marble). On the Gen. of the material, see § 273, 5. Her. 2, 2. 
t oiqvt<p o-ra&fiTio-dfxev 01 ir p 77 7 /xar 1 (ex tali re judicantes, having judged 
from or by such a circumstance). 7, 16. rfj arj ia&riTi r eKp.aip6 nevov (ex 
tua veste judicium faciens). X. Cy. 1. 3,5. riui 877 <rv re K/xai pS/xevos, <*> 
nai, ravTa Keyeisj (judging by what rule, do you say this?). 3. 3, 19. at fidxai 
tcpivovrai jxaXXov ra7s ^u %<**$> ^ Tc " s t&v Gwixdrwv pa>p.ais (are decided 
more by courage, than strength of body). H. 7. 3, 6. ovroi irdvras avSpwirovs 
vir ep j8e /8A77 nacr 1 toX/at; re ko.1 pnapia (have surpassed all men in daring 
and brutality). C. 2. 7, 7. tVxuei;/ ro?s (rwfia<ri (to be strong in body). Cy. 
2. 3, 6. eyk ovre irocriv el/xi rax^s, ovre x e P (Tll/ lcx v P^ s - Hence t<£ 
ovti, rfj aXrj&eia, ?<£ xSyco, tw epyca (according to the nature of etc.) ; also yvufxv 
<T<pakrivcu, \pev<r&rjvai (to be deceived in opinion), Th. 4, 18, Her. 7, 9. Her. 1, 184. 
~2ep.ipaiJ.is yevefjai ir4ur e ir p6r ep ov ey4vero ttjs NirdoKpios ( was before 
Nitocris by five generations). So TroAAy, bxiyw, [xiKpw, rocovra, ocrca p.ei£(ov 
(greater by much, by little, by so much = much greater, a little greater, so much greater, 
etc.). Her. 6, 89. vcrr epicrav fjp.4pr) pif} rijs cvyKeip.4vris (a day later than 
was fixed upon, later by a day, etc.). 106. ir6Xi Xoyi/xri r) 'EAAas yeyove acr- 
Sevecrr 4 pin (has become weaker by [the loss of] a distinguished city). So with 
iTpo with the GeD., and perd (after) with the Ace, e.g. A 4 tc a ereai tv p b rys eV 
2aXap.7vi vavpaxias (before the battle of Salamis by ten years, i. e. ten years before, 
etc.). 'E £77 k 00- t<£ €Tet fxera 'IAiou aXccortv (sixtieth year after the sack of 
Troy). Here belong, also, ^ripnovv riva xtAicus dpaxp-atsfiavdr a> (to 
fine one [with] a thousand drachmas, etc.), and the like. Her. 6, 136. 6 $f)/j.os e£v- 
fiiucre (rbv MiXridSea) Kara rrju adudrjv it eurrjKO vr a r aXdvr ta 1 [Jined 
him, fifty talents). Th. 4, 73. t (5 fieXrlarai rod ottXitikov fiXacp&rii'ai (jactu- 
ram facere, to suffer defeat by [the loss of] the best portion of the heavy armed force). 
II. 7, 2. Tpwes ixkv KXayyfj r ivoirrj t Xcrav, opv&es &s (advanced with a noise and 
a cry). X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. (ol v6p.oi) irpocrrdrrovffi p.7] /3 i a els oiKiav irapievai (forbid 
to enter a house by force). So Sfopvfiw, upavyfj, fiofj 0-1777 iroieiv ri (to do something 
with a noise, etc.) ; Sikv, eirt/xeXeia, drj/xoaia (sc. 68:2), iSia (6S<£), ir4£r) (6d£), kolvv 
(&><£), in common, t<5 r poire? TotySe : Kop.i5rj, properly with care, hence, entirely. 



420 SYNTAX. ["$ 286 

quite ; (nrovSr), with pains, aegre, scarcely, hardly ; &Wrj, ravr-p, Sixfj, duplici modo 
eiKy, frustra. Comp. § 101, 2, (b). 



9 286. II. Substantive Object with Prepositions, or 
the Construction of Prepositions. 

1. As the Cases denote the local relations whence, whith- 
er, where, and the causal relations, which were originally 
considered as local relations, so the prepositions express 
another local relation, viz., the extension or position of 
things in space, — the juxtaposition of things (by the side 
of, over, around, with), or the local opposites above and 
below, within and without, before and behind. Prepositions 
therefore denote the relative position of the things described 
by the substantives which they connect ; and the relation 
expressed by them may be called the relation of position. 

2. The Cases connected with the prepositions, show in 
which of the local relations, whence, whither, where, the 
preposition is to be understood. 

Remark 1. Thus, for example, the preposition irapa denotes merely the 
local relation of near, by the side of, by ; but in connection with the Gen., e. g. 
fjh& e ira p a r ov /3acri\e<as, in addition to the idea of nearness, it denotes, 
at the same time, the direction whence (he came from near the king, de chez le 
roi) ; in connection with the Ace, e. g. rj e l Trap a rhv fiaaiXea, at the same 
time, the direction whither (he went into the vicinity or presence of the 
king) ; and in connection with the Dat. e. g., ea-rrj wapa t£ 8 act A et, it de- 
notes simply the place where (he stood near the king). 

3. Prepositions are divided according to their construction : 

(a) into prepositions which govern the Gen.: auri, before (ante), a ir 6, from 
(ab, a). 4 k, out of (ex), ir po, before (pro) ; 

(b) into those which govern the Dajt. : eV, in (in with abl.) and <rvv, with 

(cum). 

(c) into those which govern the Ace: avd, up, els, into (in with ace), as, 
to ; 

(d) into those which govern the Gen. and Ace: Sid, through, koto, doum 
from (de), virip, over (super), ixera, with; 

(e) into those which govern the Gen., Dat., and Ace: a/x<pl, about, iirl, 
upon, ir a pa, by, ire pi, around (circa), irp6s, before, and vtt6, under 
(sub). 

4. Prepositions are divided according to the relations of post' 
tion which they denote : 



¥ 287.] prepositions. — 'A.vtl, 7rp6. 421 

(a) into such as indicate a juxtaposition: irapd and afx<pl, near, iirl, a& 
and upon, avv and /xerd, with ; 

(b) into such as express local opposites : 4ir(, upon, avd, up, v ire p, over, 
and vtto, under, Kara, down (under), irp6, irp6s and avri, before, in 

front of, and the improper prepositions oiri<r&ev, after, behind ; ey and 
els, in, within, and 4 k, e|, from, out of ; did, through, and ire pi, around, 
outside ; So s, to, up to, and air 6, from, away from. 

5. The relation of position expressed by prepositions is trans- 
ferred to the relations of time and causality, e. g. 01 iroXipaoL 
a7ro tfjs TroAews a.7T€cpvyov. 'Avrb vvktos aTr7)\$ov (from 
night, immediately after the beginning of night). 'A no £v/x- 
/xa^tas avTovopLot elcnv (from, by virtue of the alliance). 

6. Each preposition has a fundamental meaning, which it 
everywhere retains, even when it is connected with two or 
three Cases ; but it receives various modifications according to 
the different Cases with which it is connected, because the 
local relation varies with each Case. Comp. Rem. 1. The 
fundamental meaning of prepositions is most evident, when 
they express local relations ; it is generally quite evident in those 
of time also ; but in the causal relations, it is often very obscure. 

Eem. 2. Originally all the prepositions were merely adverbs of place. See 
$ 300, 1. The prepositions enumerated in No. 3, may be called Proper prepo- 
sitions, inasmuch as during the cultivated period of the language, they either 
were not used at all, or but very seldom, as adverbs of place, without a sub- 
stantive ; accordingly, they have the regular functions of prepositions : they 
differ from the Improper prepositions : of these latter, the following classes 
maybe named: (a) both adverbs of place and other adverbs, which, though 
they regularly have the functions of adverbs, are sometimes, in connection 
with a substantive, used as prepositions, e. g. aiv6irpo&ev, dvev, Sixa, apa; — (b) 
substantives in connection with the Gen., e. g. diK-nv, instar, x&P LV i gratia, evena, 
on account of 



I. Prepositions with the Genitive only. 

$ 287. (1) 'Avtl and irp6 y before. 

1. 'Avtl (Lat. ante, before, in the face of, opposite, etc.), orig- 
inal signification : in the face of (before, over against) ( 1 ) in 
a local sense (in prose seldom) ; (2) in a causal or figurative 
sense: (a) in adjurations, instead of the common word 7rpos 
with the Gen.; — (b) with expressions denoting comparison 
(e. g. with the comparative), valuing, iveighing, requital; hence 
with words of buying, selling, bartering, value, worth, likeness or 

36 



422 syntax. [$ 287 

unlikeness, preference ; — (c) of the cause ox ground, when i< 
expresses the idea of making compensation, as in dv#' ov, SlvS-' wv, 
for what ? wherefore ? — (cl) of substitution, giving an equiva 
lent, etc. 

(1) (Tb yospiov icrrl) dacrv irirvcn SiaXenrovcrcus fj.eyd\ais, av& uv icrrT)K6rs$ 
6.vSpes ri av iracrxoi-zv t) virb twv (pepo/xevwv \i&wv, v) virb ru>v KvXivdov/jLevwv ; (be- 
hind which, since the trees stood before the soldiers), X. An. 4. 7, 6. (2) (a) 
'Avrl iraiSav rwvde . . . iKerevo/xev, sc. ere (for the sake of as it were standing 
before), S. 0. C. 1326. (b) (Avuovpyos Kareipydcraro) iv rfj iroXei alperc&r epov 
flvai tov KaXbv ShLvoltov avrl alaxpov fiiov (is better than, is preferable to a 
disgraceful life), X R,. L. 9, 1. Tr)v reXevry]v avrl rrjs tuv CAvtwv ffur-npias 
iiXXa^avro (exchanged death for the safety of the living), PI. Menex. 237, a. Tlarrip 
vtbv avrl irdvrwv ru>v dXXcov XP 7 ) l^dr uv Trpori/xa. So a!pe?cr&ai ri avri 
tivos, instead of the common tlv6s. Ttjv eXevSepiav eXoi/xrjv av avrl dou %x <a 
irdvrcav (in place of all which 2 have), X. An. 1. 7, 3. (d) AovXos avrl Setr- 
v6tov (a slave instead of a despot). 'Avrl r)/j.epas vv£ iyevero, Her. 7, 37. 
'Avrl tov juoxefl'^ai •irel&e&Stai e&eXei, X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. 'Avri is never used 
of time. 

2. lip 6, original signification: on the foreside {pro, prae, be- 
fore, figuratively, in behalf of), (1) local; — (2) of time; (3) 
causal and figurative : (a) in behalf of (for the good, for the 
weal) ; with expressions denoting comparison (hence with the 
Com. degree), valuing, estimation, like avrl, but always with the 
accompanying idea of standing before, preference ; hence it is 
used to express preference in general ; — (b) of an inward, 
mental cause, occasion, inducement (only Poet.) : on account of, 
prae, e. g. II. p, 667. vpb cpoftoto {prae metu, for fear, on account 
of fear). 

(1) Mivcoa r) vr)cros Kelrai ir pb M ey dp u> v, Th. 3, 51. (2) Up b r) jx ep as airriX- 
Sov. (3) Ila^Tes a£id>crovcri ere irpb avrwv flovXeveafrai (desire you to consult for 
them), X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. Mdxecr&ai, airoSaveTv irpb rrjs irar pido s, SiaKivSu- 
veveiv it jb fiaeriXews (for, in behalf of one's country), X. Cy. 8. 8, 4. Ai/caio- 
repov *>p.r}v Kal ndXXiov elvai t pb rod (pevyeiv re Kal air oS iS pder Ke iv vire- 
X^iv rfj irSXei Mkt)v 'i)vriv av rar~r) (1 thought it more just inpreference to fleeing, etc.). 
PI. Phaed. 99, a. Upb ttoXXov Troir)cracr&ai ri (to esteem before or above much, 
i.e. very highly ). Upb iroXXwv XPV p-drwv rijxr\cracrSai ri ( to value before much 
wealth). (Tovrov) irpb irdvrccv xPVI^-dr cav Kal ir 6 v uv irpiai^v av (piXov 
uoi elvai, X. C. 2. 5, 3. Tlpb rovrov rehvdvai av /xaXXov eXoiro (for him), PI. 
Symp. 179, a. 'EiraweTv tt pb 8 iKaioervv t] s aSuclav (to praise injustice before, 
'ather than, in preference to justice), Pp. 361, e. 

Remark. The reason that the prepositions avri and wp6 are not con- 
nected with the Dat, like prepositions of the same meaning in other languages. 



$288.] prepositions. — 'A-rro, iK. 423 

but with the genitive, is owing to the fact, that the Greek language regards the 
relation denoted, by before, in front of not merely as local, but implying action, 
a relation of dependence. The like holds of the prepositions virep, irp6s, 
Sid, a/xcpl, ire pi, iirl, vtto with the Gen., since the Gen. represents the 
place as the cause or occasion of the action, and hence likewise, a relation of 
dependence. See § 273, 4. 



§ 288. (2) \A.7ro, from, and i£, e/c, out of. 

Preliminary Remark. These two prepositions denote an outgoing, a re- 
moval, departure, but air 6 denotes a removal from the exterior of an object, while 
e/c (<= |), always implies a going out from within a place or object ; and in the 
causal relation, the former denotes a remoter cause, the latter, one more direct. 

1. 'A7ro (ah), from, denotes: (1) in a local relation: (a) re- 
moval from a place or object with verbs of motion, also of free- 
ing, and the like, e. g. \v€iv, iXevSepovv, also of missing (§ 271, 2), 
hence, cbro o-kottov ; then it is transferred to mental failures, as 
in air eA7rioW, airb yvw/jLrjs, aliter ac sperabam, putabam (as if 
aberrans ab exspectatione, ab opinione) ; (b) distance from a 
place or object with verbs of rest; — (2) of time, going out 
from a point of time : from, after ; — (3) causal or figurative : 
(a) of origin, as with eXvai, yiyvtaScu ; (b) of the whole in rela- 
tion to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it ; (c) of the 
author with Pass, verbs instead of vtto ($ 251, Eem. 4), but al- 
ways with the accompanying idea of on the part of; (d) of the 
occasion or cause; (e) of the material; (f) of the means and 
instrument; (g) of conformity. 

(1) (a) 'Airb rrjs ir6\.}0)S air4<pvyov ol iroAefiioi. (b) 'O \6yos ovk airb 
rov ffK oirov e8o|e»/ elprjafbju, X. S. 2, 10. (At iraXaial iroteis) airb ^aXdo-arjs 
luaAAov <pKi<r&7)<ra.v {at a distance from the sea), Th. 1, 7. (2) 'Airb Tairrjs rrjs 
rj/xepas, airb vvktSs, a<p* ecirepas; airb rSiv alrcav (after the meal) , X. R 
L. 5, 8. (3) (a) 'A it b 'A \ k fx. a I w v o s Kal our is MeyaKkeos lyivovro Kal Kapra 
Aa/xirpoi (very distinguished men sprung from), Her. 6, 125. (b) Tas rpi^peis, 
atirep ijcrav avrcp airb r G>v KaraXs i<pfreio~ &v ( which he had of those that were 
left), Th. 4, 9. T& airb rrjs Beipijs (ornaments for the neck, necklaces), Her. 
1, 51. So ol airb /3ou\tjs (qui sunt a consiliis, those who belong to the council) ; 
oi airb TLXdr avos (the pupils of Plato, the Platonics) ; ol curb rijs \A Ka 877 - 
fx'as, etc. (c) 'Eirpdx&V a 71 "' avrwv ovSev ipyov a^ioAoyov (was done by 
them, on the part of ), Th. 1, 17. (d) 'A7rb 8 ma io<riv-r)s (by, on account of), 
Her. 7, 164. T<£ airb twv iroAefxlcov <p6fia> (metu ab hostibus, fear of , from the 
enemy), X. Cy. 3. 3, 53. 'A(p' kavrov (from his own impulse), (e) TpeQeiv rb 
vavTinbv airb ir posoSwv (by revenues), Th. 1, 81. (f) ""Airb rwv vfarepwt 
vixiv iroXefiei ($l\tiriros) av/ifidx^^ (sociorum vestrorum ope), Dem. Ph. 1.49.. 



424 SYNTAX. [$ 288 

34 ; hence many adverbial phrases, e. g. curb arofxaros, airb yhdirr-ns dirsiv (by 
heart, by word of mouth) ; airb a-irovZris (zealously), (g) \A.7r' OvAt uttov ovpe- 
os KaXeovrai Ovkvixirtr)voi (are called from, derive their name from mount Olympus), 
Her. 7, 74. 'Airb ^vfxfxaxias avr6uo(xoi (by virtue of), Th. 7, 57. 

2. 'E£ Ik (ex), out of (opposite of iv, in), denotes (1) in a 
local relation: (a) removal either from within a place or object, 
or from immediate participation or connection with a place or 
object, with verbs of motion; hence an immediate succession 
of one object after another; (b) distance with verbs of rest: 
without, beyond (Epic), e. g. Ik /2eAeW, extra telorum j actum ; — 
(2) of time, immediate outgoing from a point of time; then 
especially the immediate development of one thing from anoth- 
er, an immediate succession of two actions ; — (3) in a causal 
and figurative sense : (a) of origin; (b) of the whole in relation 
to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it, often with the 
accompanying idea of choice and distinction; (c) of the author 
with passive or intransitive verbs, instead of vtto, almost ex- 
clusively Ionic, used particularly by Herodotus, seldom in Attic 
prose; (d) to denote the occasion or cause; (e) of the material, 
(f ) of the means and instrument ; (g) of conformity : according 
to, in consequence of, by virtue of, after. 

(1) 'E/c rrjs ir6\ea>s airyjA&ov, e'/c ryjs /xdxvs e<pvyoy (out from the city, 
out from the battle, while airo would merely signify away from); 4k yrjs evav- 
\xa.Xr\aa.v (out from the land). PL Polit. 289, e. ol Se ir6\tv e/c ir6\eoos a\\dr- 
Torres Kara baXarrav Kai ire(r} (changing from city to city). Apol. 37, d. Ka\bs b\v 
HOL 6 filos e[n aXX-r\i- .'£ &AAr)s irSXecos afieifiofievcti (comp. ex alio loco in alium 
migranti). (2) 'E £ r t[ j.epas (ex quo dies illuxit, as soon as it ivas day) ; e/c roi- 
rov (sc. xp6" ov ) immediately after this; e'/c vvkt6s or e'/c vvkt£>v\ e/c irai- 
8 ay (from very childhood) ; e £ vffr e p ov (subsequently) ; e/c rov Aonrou. 
Her. 9, 8. e'| Tj/xeprts is rjfxeprjv avafiaWo/xevoi (ex die in diem, delaying from 
day to day, day after day). 1,87. e/c 8e al&plys re Ka\ v-qvefxi-qs aweSpa- 
fxeu i^airlvns ve<pea (immediately after fair weather, etc.). Th. 1, 120. e'/c fxev 
elpT)V7\s TroXefxelv, e'/c 8e iroAefxov ttolAiv ^u/xfirjvai (to go to war after peace, 
etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 17. 6 abs narrip iv rfjde rrj /xta rj/xepq e£ acppouos C(a(j)p(ay 
yeyevnrai. (3) (a) Elvai, ylyvea&ai e/c rivos (to be descended from some one, 
e'/c indicating more direct descent, while airo may be used of one more remote), 
(b) 'E| 'ASrjvatoov ol &purroi (the best of ). (c) Her. 3, 62. ra. ei/reraX/xei/a e'/c 
rod Mdyov (the things commanded by Magus). lb. irpoSedocr&ai e'/c Hpn^daireos (to 
be betrayed by), (d) 6, 67. e<pevye An/xdp7]ros e/c ^irdprris e'/c roiovSe bvei' 
Seos (on account of '). So e/c iravrbs rov vov (with all the heart) ; e'/c /3fas 
and the like. Her. 2, 152. c'/c rrjs otyios rov bvelpov (in consequence of), (g) 



$289.] pkepositions. — 'Ev, (tvv. 425 

PI. CritOll. 48, b. e/c twv 6pLoXoyovfji.ev(av tovto ffKeineov (in accordance 
with ichat has been admitted). So bvoixd^eo&cu e k t iv os (to be named after or for 
some one, like virtus ex viro appellata est, is called or takes its name from vir). 
'Ek tov ; why ? 

Remark. The adverbs which, in the character of improper prepositions, take 
the Gen., have been already considered, in treating of the Gen, Besides these 
adverbs, the following substantives, as improper prepositions, take the Gen,: 
a. SIktjv (8 e/xas, Poet. ) , instar ; — b. % d p i v, gratia, for the sake of commonly 
placed after the Gen., seldom before it. Instead of the Gen. of the personal 
pronouns 4/j.ov, aov, etc., the possessive pronoun, as an attributive adjective, ia 
regularly used with x^P lv -> e - £• e W> <rV X&pw, mea, tua gratia ; — c. evena 
(eveicev even before consonants, as eveKa even before vowels in the Attic writers, 
e'lvena and e'ivenev, Ionic, but not wholly foreign to the Attic dialect, ovveKa in 
poetry), causa, gratia. The Gen. more frequently stands before than after eveKa. 
It very frequently signifies, with respect to, concerning, in regard to. Her. 3, 85. 
^rdpaee t ovtov etVe/ce, with respect to this, be of good courage. It often denotes 
a remote reason, e. g. by virtue of, by reason of. PI. Rp. 329, b. el yap %v tovt 
airiov, Kau eyeb to, avra ravra eTreTrov&r] eve ted ye yf]pcos,i.e.by reason of old 
age ; — d. eK-nr i (poetic only), by or according to the will of (a god), Aibs e/op-i, 
Homer and Hesiod. In other poets it has the signification of eveKa. 



$289. 2. Prepositions with the Dative only. 'Ef 

AND <J V V {£vv). 

1. 'Ev {hi Poet., tiv and dvi Epic) denotes that one thing is 
in, upon, by or near another. In general, it indicates an actual 
union or contact with an object, and hence is the opposite of 
h. It denotes ( 1 ) in a local, relation : (a) the being in, inclosed 
in, encircled, surrounded by; used with reference to place, cloth- 
ing, persons : in, among, in the midst of, and with verbs of speak- 
ing, before, in the presence of {coram) ; then it is transferred to 
the external and internal state or condition in which one is taken, 
or is found, by which he is, as it were, surrounded ; — also to the 
business in which he is engaged, to persons, in whose hands or 
power something is placed; it also denotes (b) the being upon 
something, and (c) the being near a thing, particularly of cities, 
near which (in the territory of which) something took place, 
especially a battle ; — (2) of time (§ 283, 3) ; — (3) in a causal 
and figurative relation: (a) of the means and instrument ; (b) 
of the manner ; (c) to denote conformity : according to, in con- 
formity ivith. 

(1) (a) 'E^ rrj Tr6\ei, ev t?7 vhaca, ev ~2.iv dp tyi tovto eyeveTO. PI. Li. 
625, b. avdiravAcu ev to?s v-^r]\o7s SevSpecrlv elcri CKiapai. 'EC oirAois, 
iv t 6%o is 8iayoi)vi£eo~&cu ; ev eff&7)Ti, ev o~Te<pdvois (crowned): ev to7s 

36* 



426 SYNTAX. [$ 289 

avd ptairois {inter). Dem. Chers. 108, 74. Tt/J.6&e6s iror inelvos iv vp.?v cStj- 
uTjySp-qaev (in our presence). 'Ev iroXefxw, iv epya>, iv <5airi, iv <p6fia>, ip 
bpyfj etveu. PI. Crito. 43, c. Kal 'd\\oi iv roiavrais £v[j.(popu7s aXia- 
Kovrai (are taken in, involved in such calamities). Phileb. 45, c. iv toiovtoh 
i/ o a -f) /j. a (T iv ixo^evoi. Gorg. 523, b. iv Ttdar\ evdai/xovia olKelv (to live in 
the enjoyment of all prosperity). Her. 2, 82. ol iv iroir)aei yevopevoi (those who 
have been in poetry = poets). Th. 3, 38. ol iv -repay paai (those engaged in 
state affairs = the ministers). X. Cy. 4. 3, 23. ol fiev 5t) iv tovtois to?s \6- 
yois r\aav (were engaged in these discourses). PL Phaed. 59, a. iv (piXoao(pia 
elvai. Ol iv yeapyiais) iv t4% v V ^' /al - Hence various adverbial ex- 
pressions have originated, e. g. i v 'ia a> elvai (to be equal) ; iv ydovfj fioi ianv (it 
is pleasing to me)) so also with ex eiv and iroieiaSrai, e.g.iv o/xola), iv iXacp p<S 
iroieiabai (to esteem equally, to esteem lightly). 'Ev e/xol, iv croi icrri ti (penes me, 
te, it is in my power, etc.) ; hence the phrase iv eavrcf elvai (to be in one's senses, 
sui compotem esse) ; (b) iv opeaiv, iv 'ittttois, iv &p6vois ; (c) 'H ivMav- 
rivela fiaxv ( ine battle near). — (2)'Ei> tovtco t<$ %povw)iv § (while, 
during); iv irevre ripe pa is (during, in the space of). — (3) 'Opav, opaa&ai, 
iv 6(p&a\fio?s, Poet, (to see, be seen with the eyes) ; then in other connections 
among the poets, iv irvpl Kaieiv, iv oea/j.$ orjaai, iv xepct XafieTv, Horn, 
(to burn with fire, etc.). In prose, especially in Xenophon, iv is used to denote 
the means, in the expressions orjXovv, d?jXov elvai, arm-aiveiv ev rivi. X. Cy. 1. 
6, 2. otl /xev, Zi 7tcu, ol &eoi ae "keep re Kal ebfieveTs ireuirovai, Kal iv lepols St? - 
\ov Kal iv ovpavlo is arjfxeiois (is evident both by the sacrifices and the signs 
from heaven). 8. 7, 3. ia-n fj.r)v ar e fioi Kal iv iepo?s Kal iv ovpavlois 
o-rifxeiois Kal iv ol<avo7s Kal iv <pr){xais, a r ixpw 7roie?v Kal a ovk ixPW- 
, Ev SIkv, iv a Kaivfj. Th. 1, 77. ev rots dfioiois vofiois ras Kpicreis 
■Koielv (according to the same laws). So iv fxtpei (according to his part, in turn). 
'Ev i/.ioi, ev aoi, iv iKelvcp (Poet.), ex (according to) meo, tuo, illius judicio. 

2. %vv (£vv mostly old Attic) corresponds almost entirely with the 
Latin cum, and the English ivith; it always expresses the idea of 
union, participation and accompaniment : ( 1 ) in a local relation 
often of an accompaniment which implies help or assistance ; — ■ 
(2) in a causal sense to denote : (a) the means and instrument ; 
(b) the manner; (c) the measure or rule, by which the action 
of the verb is measured, as it were, or defined ; (d) conformity. 

(l)'O a-rpar-nybs avv rols ar par icot ais a.vex&P'no'ev. — ~2,vv &e<£ (with 
the help of God). 2,vv t ivt elvai or yiyveabai (to be on the side of one, of one's 
party). ~2,vv r iv i fidxeabai, to fight in company with one, to aid one in fighting 
(2) (a) X. Cy. 8. 7, 13. 77 KTTjcm avrwv (sc. iriarwv (piXcov) iariv ovSaficos avt 
tt) /3ia, aXXa. fxaXXov avv ttj evepyeaia (not by violence, but rather kindness) 
(b) Uoo'ievai avv Kpavyfj, avv yeXcori iX&e?p (with a shout, etc.). X. Cy 
3. 1, 15. ir6repa 5' 77777, £> Kvpe, d/xeivov elvai, avv t cp aw aya&w ras ri/j.<aptaS 
note7a&ai, § avv ttJ ay (r]fj.ia) (with, for your advantage, or for your injury) 



♦ 290.] prepositions. — 'Ava, cis, d)s. 427 

) 1. 3, 17. <t\)v t<£ yofjicp oZv ixeAevev del tou Swao-r^v t)]v ^rjtyov Tidea&ai 
to vote with, in accordance with the law), (d) ~2,vv r $ v 6/xa r\\v \prj<pov Ti&ecr&e- 
"Shy T(p § ik a ice. 

Remark. Of the adverbs used as improper prepositions, there belong here 
Hp.a (una cum), and several which are constructed also with the Gen., as has 
been seen, in treating of the Gen. and Dat. 



$290. 3. Prepositions with the Acc. only: 'Ava, eis 

AND a)S. 

1. 'Ava (on, up, upon) signifies from a lower to a higher place, 
and is directly opposite to Kara with the Acc, which signifies 
from a higher to a lower place ; the use of dm is more frequent 
in poetry than in prose. It is used (1) in a local relation : (a) 
to denote a direction towards a higher object; (b) to denote the 
extension from a lower to a higher point, from bottom to top : 
throughout, through, both with verbs of motion and rest; — (2) 
in a temporal relation, to denote continuance or a period of time : 
per (seldom) ; — (3) in a causal sense to denote manner ; then 
particularly in a distributive sense with numerals. 

(1) (a) Od. %, 132. S> (pl\oi, ovk av Sr] tls ay* bptro&vpriv avafialr) (up to 
the lofty gate). This use is rare and only poetic ; in prose only in the phrases 
ava rby Trora/xoy, ava p6ov irXsiv, up the stream (the opposite of nark, 
iroraixov, down the stream); (b) II. y, 547. ((p\ety) ava vara &4ov<ra Siafiirepes 
(ab infima dorsi parte usque ad cervicem) ; so ava Sw^a, ara arpariv, ava iiaxWi 
ava ofxiXov, ava dcrrv, ava &v[aov (through the house, through the army, etc.), 
all in Homer; Her. 6, 131. teal ouTco'A\Kfxaicovi5ai 4fia<r§r)<rav ava t )) v 'EA- 
\d8a (throughout Greece). X. Vect. 5, 10. aj>a ivaffav yrjv teal SrdXarT av 
elpijvn iarrai. Hier. 7, 9. ava arSfia ex 6a/ ( to nave continually in the mouth). 
(2) Her. 8, 123. ava rbv iroXefMOv tovtov (throughout). So ava iraarav 
r^\v 7] [i 4 pav, per totum diem (the substantive must here have the article; 
without the article ava iracrav rj/xepav, signifies daily, day by day, ava irav eros, 
every year, yearly, see No. (3) and § 246, 6), ava vvktu- (per noctem, ell night 
through). 7, 10. ava. x?& vov Hevpoi tis dv (in the time). (3) 'Ava. Kpdros (with 
all one's might) ; ava fxepos (by turns) ; dvd irav 4ros (quotannis). X. An. 4, 6, 
4. "EWtjvgs iiropv&ritTav eirra arTa&fxovs ava Tr4vre it apaa dyy as tt)s r]/j.4pas 
(five parasangs daily). 

Remark 1. In the Epic and Lyric languages, ava is constructed with the 
Dat. also ; instead of it iv is elsewhere used, e. g. ava <TK7\Tnpea, u>p.a>, Fapydpa 
&Kpa) in Homer. So eu'Set 8' az/a aKaimo Aibs alerts, Pind. 

2. Ets (es Ionic, Doric, and old Attic) is only a modified form 
of iv, and denotes the same relations of position as are ex- 



428 syntax. [$ 290. 

pressed by iv, but always in the direction ivhither; hence it is 
used of motion into t/ie interior of an object, up to, into the im- 
mediate presence of; in general to denote the reaching a definite 
limit. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote a local limit; (b) a 
limit in quantity : about, up to; (c) extension; (d) in the sense 
of before, in the presence of coram, but with the idea of the di- 
rection ivhither ; — (2) of time, to denote a temporal limit: till. 
towards; (3) in a causal sense : (a) of a mental aim, object or 
purpose ; (b) of the manner ; with numerals either in the sense 
of about or in a distributive sense ; (c) in general to express a 
reference to something : in respect to. 

(1) (a) 'IeVat els r-)]v ttoXiv; so also of persons with the accompanying- 
idea of their habitation or country. PI. Apol. 17, c. els v/xas elsievcu, i. e. 
els rb ZiKa.<TTt)piov elsievcu. X. An. 4. 7, 1. eiropevfr-ncrav els Ta6x<>vs (went 
into the country of the Taochoi). Among the Attic writers, also in a hostile 
sense: contra, in. Th. 3, 1. eaTpdrevaav es Tr\v 'At t ik4)v (into, against At- 
tica). With the verbs avXXeyetv, crwtxyeipeiv, a.xi£eiv and the like, the Greeks 
use els, where we say, to assemble at or in a place. Comp. § 300, 3. (b). Th. 
2, 13, twv TleXoirovvnffitov ^vXXeyo/x4uo>i/ re es rbv 'Icr&/j.bv Kal ev 6d$ ovrwv. 
Comp. 4, 91. 8, 93. So the Latins say: congregari, convenire, etc., in urbem. 
(b) Th. 1,74. vav s es ras rerpaKofflas. (c)'E/c &aXa(rcr7)s els &aXa<r<rav. 
PI. Gorg. 526, b. eh Kal ttolvv eXX6yt/j.os y4yovev els r ovs ct,XXovs' / EXX7)j/as, 
^Apicrreid-ns (among), (d) Aoyovs Troie?a&ai els rbv Syj/nou (to speak before, in 
the presence of the people). PI. Menex. 239, a. ol narepes iroXXa St? ko.1 KaXa epya 
air e<pT]vavTO els irdvras av&pwTr ovs (before all men). (2) 'E y 7)4Xiov k<x- 
Tadvvra (till sunset), Homer ; hence els e<r?r 4 pa v (towards, till evening, proper- 
ly to evening as a boundary) ; so in prose, els ttjv ixnepaiav (till the following 
day, on the following day ) ; els r pirrjv tj fx4 pay (till, on). ( 3 ) ( a ) ^Exp^ffaro rols 
XpruJ-ao-iv els t^v it 6 Xiv (for the city). Els tl; (for what?) ; els K4p8osT\ 
dpav (to do something for gain), (b) Els KaXbv %Keis (opportune); els Ta%os 
(quickly) ; els dvvafiiv, according to one's ability ; els e ttar6v (about a hundred 
or by hundreds, centeni), especially in the arrangement of soldiers, e. g. els Svo 
(two deep, two by two), (c) &avp.d(eiv, eiraiveiv riva eX s t i (to admire, praise one 
with respect to, on account of something) ; so diacpepetv tiuos els aperr\v, <pp6j/i/j.os, 
ev56Ki/AOS ets r i, els it dvra, in every respect; /3x4iretv, airofix4Treiv els ra 
tt pay /xar a, like irpSs. 

3. e Os (ad), to, does not like the other prepositions, denote the 
relation of position, but only the direction whither ; it is used 
only of persons or of the names of cities, when they stand for 
the inhabitants. 

Th. 4, 79. BpacriSccs acpUero wj TlephiKKXV Kal els rty XaXiciSiK^if (came to 



$291.] prepositions, — Aid. 429 

Perdiccas). Dem. Phil. 1. 54, 48. irpeo-fieis iriiroixtpeu as $ao i\4a. Th. S> 
36. H]kovtos as r)]v MiXrirov (ad Milesios). 

Rem. 2. This as is to be distinguished from that which stands with els, eirt t 
and irp6s with the Ace. (as els, as eVt, as irp6s riva). This latter as is not a 
preposition, but it expresses a supposition, just as when it is joined with the par- 
ticiple, and does not denote an actual direction to a place, but only one sup- 
posed, and hence intended. X. An. 1. 2, 1. afrpol(ei us iirl tovtovs rb 
(rrpdrevfia (quasi his helium illaturus, he collects as if against these). Hence this 
us also stands with the prepositions governing other Cases, e. g. Th. 3, 4. 
^KirXovv iiroi^cravro rav veav cos en I vavfiaxiq {as if for the purpose of fight' 
tng a naval battle). 1, 134. ol Se ironjerdfxevot x a ^ K0 ^ s avlpidvras Svo ws avrl 
Tlavcraviov avedreaav (quasi essent Pausaniae loco, as if in the place of Pau- 
sanias). 



4. Prepositions with the Genitive and Accusa- 
tive: Bid, Kara, virip, /xerd. 

$ 291. (1) Aid, through. 

1. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (2) to denote a mo- 
tion extending through a space or object and again coming out : 
through and out again, out of (Homer expresses this relation 
still more distinctly, by uniting the preposition e/c or -rrpo with 
Bid, e. g. Od. p, 460. Sick fxeydpoto ava^wpetv) ; (b) to denote CX- 
tension through something, but without the accompanying rela- 
tion stated under (a) of coming out of the object; on the Gen., 
see § 287, Rem.; — (2) of time, to denote the expiration or 
lapse of a period: after, properly to the end of a period, through 
and out; — (3) in a causal sense, to denote origin (rare) and the 
author (very frequent) ; (b) to denote quality (possessive Gen.) 
in connection with eivai and ytyveo-$ai ; (c) the means, both of 
persons and things; (d) manner; (e) worth (rare); (f) com- 
parison (rare). 

(1) (a) Her. 7, 8. fieXXa eXav crrparbv Stefc tt\s Evpair-ns iirl rrjv 'EXXafia. 
2, 26. 8 Le£eX&av 8ia irda-ns Eu pdirr] s. 7, 105. etfiXavve rbv (xrparbv 
Si a rrjs ©pri'ticns iirl tV 'EAAaSa. 3, 145. Siaiciipas Sib. rrjs yopyvpr) s 
(having crept out through the prison), (b) Od. ju, 335. 5m vl\<rov l<Z>v, 8ta ire- 
5/ou (per campum). X. Hier. 2, 8. 8ia TroXefiias iropeveffSca (to march through 
the enemfs country). Figuratively in the phrases, Sia Sinaio avvns lev at (to 
go in the way of justice, to go through justice, i. e. to be just) ; 8 ia rod StKatov 
•xopevecr&ai; 8ta <p6fiov epxe<r&ai (to fear), Eur. Or. 747. Aia (piXias levai 
rivi (to be friendly to one), X. An. 3. 2, 8. (2) Ai' erovs (through, for a year) ; 
diet, iroXXov, /xaKpou, bxiyov XP°' V0V (through, for a long, a short time) ; 
also St' oXiyov, Sia iroAAou without xp^vov, or 8ia XP^ V0V ^&* (fa 



430 syntax. [J 292 

came after a long time) ; Sia iravrbs rod XP°' V0V roiavTa o»k 4y4ve.t ) (daring 
the whole time)) Sia t) p. 4 pas, Sia vvkt6s (through, throughout the day, etc.). 
So also of an action repeated at stated intervals, e.g. Sia rpirov ctoi/s 
(rvvyeffav (every third year, tertio quogue anno, always after three years, through 
and out again); Sia Tr4fjnrrov erovs, Sia tt4vts 4tS>v (every fifth year, 
etc., quinto quoque anno) : 5 ta. rpirr)s 7]/m4pas. (3) (a) Aia /SatrtAeW Tre<pvKwi 
(descending from a continued line of kings, owing one's birth to kings), X. Cy. 7. 2, 
24. Tlavra Si eavrwv Trpdrrecr^ai (to accomplish everything by themselves); 
hi eavrov KTrio~acr&ai rt. (b) Aia. <p6{Sov thai, S ? ex^paj yiyvea&ai tivi, 
Si epioos, bpyrj s, a.(T<pa\eias elvai or yiyvecr&ai (to be in fear, to be hostile, 
to be angry with, to be safe), (c) Ai b<p&a\/j.£;v bpav (to see with the eyes) 
PI. Theaet. 184, C ^Koirei, cnroKpicris iror4pa bp&orepa, & opivixev, tovto eJvai bcp&aA* 
t-iovs, rj S i ov 6pa>/u.eu, ical § aKovo/xev, 3)Ta,tj St' ov aKovo/xey. (The Dat. denotes 
the means used, did with the Gen. the active means.) "Ex^iv riva St' bpyrjs (to 
be angry with) ; S la. x ei P<*> v *X eLV { io work upon, to be engaged in, to handle) , 
also of persons, e. g. "Eirpa^av ravra Si 1 Evpvfidxo v, Th. 2, 2. (d) Aia 
cnrovSrj s, S ta rdxovs iroieiv ti (with earnestness, earnestly, etc.) . (e) S. O. C. 
584. Si ovSevbs iroiela&ai (to consider of no value), (f) Her. 1, 25. &4t]s &£iov 
Sia. irdvrwv tSiv avaSr-n jxdr oov (in comparison with, among). 

II. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation to denote extension 
through a place or object: through, throughout (only poetic) ; — 
(2) of time to denote extension through a period of time, 
throughout ; — (3) in a causal sense : (a) to denote the reason, 
mediation: on account of ob, p ropier, by; (b) of the person by 
ivhose means something is effected. 

(1) (a) Eur. Hipp. 762. Sia -k6vtiov Kvjxa i-n-opevaas ifxav foacrcrav 
(through the wave of the sea). (2) Aia. v vara. (3) X. An. 1. 7, 6. eari fiev 
7][x\u 7] apx^] V irarpcpa Trpbs pXv jxea-rnx^piau p.4xpis °^ $ la Kav/xa ov Svvavrai 
oIkiTiu dvSpuTroi (on account of the heat). 4. 5, 15. Sia ras Toiavras olv 
avdyK as iivzAe'nrovTo T.ves twv crpariwrwu. (b) An. 7. 7, 7. Si rj/xas avv 
3-eoTs ex eTe i"hvS<= ttjv x°* > P av (ty y°u r means, mediation). KaKol SoKov/iev elvai 
Sia tovtjv (hujus culpd). 



$292. (2) Kara, from above, doivn. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (a) of motion from 
a higher to a lower place (desuper, deorsuni) ; (b) of a direction 
towards a place or object situated below : dou-n to, down upon, 
down under (on the Gen., see k 287, Rem.) ; (c) seldom of rest 
in, iqjon or at a place or object Q 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in a causal 
and figurative sense, to denote the cause or occasion. 



$292.] prepositions. — Kai-a. 431 

(1) (a) II. a, 44. $?) 8e kclt Ov\v/j.ttoio Kaprjvoov (down from the heights). 
pier. 8, 53. eppiirreou ecovrobs Kara rov reix^os k6.tu>. (b) Her. 7, 6. a<pa- 
vi(ecr&ai Kara ttjs Srakdcr o~-n s (to disappear down under the sea). 235. Kara- 
dtSvKevai KaTa. ttjs & a\dcr o~7] s. X. An. 7. 1, 30. evxo,uai {xvpias e/j.4 ye 
Kara yjjs opyvias yevea&ai. (to be sunk under the earth). So figuratively of a 
direction to a lower object, as To^eveiv Kara tivos, iraieiv kclt d tivos, to 
shoot at something, to strike at something (the preposition denoting the direction 
towards the mark, viz., down) ; tvtctziv Kara K6ppt)s, on the head (§ 273, 
Kern. 8); (c) Her. 1, 9. Kara vcarov yzv4o-&ai (to come behind, to be behind). 
Tb. 4, 32. Kara vwtov eivai (in the rear). 33. KaTa v&tov Ka&eo-T7)K4vat. 
(2) Aeyeiv Kard tivos (dicere de aliqua re) ; in this connection, the idea of hos- 
tility especially is expressed by the preposition, e. g. \4yeiv, \6yos KaTa tivos 
(against one). X. Apol. 13. tyevdeafrai kclt a tov 3-eou (to say anything falsely 
of or against the God) ; but also in an opposite relation, Dem. Phil., 2. 68, 9. o Ka\ 
/u.eyi(TT6v iffTi tcatf vfj.wv iyKca/xiov (in honor of you). Aeschin. Ctes. 60. 
ol KaTa Ay /xoo~&4vovs Ziraivoi. 1,K07re?v KaTd tivos (secundum, in respect 
to). Plat. Phaed. 70, d. p.)] (cot avS pcaircav 07C($7ret fiSvov tovto, aAAa kcu 
icaTb. £<i)wv irdvTwv ical <pvTcov. So also in Attic adjurations and oaths, 
e. g. evxeoSai, Ofivvvai kclt d tivos, for example, lepwv TeXelwv ( Th. 5, 47 ), 
to swear by unblemished victims (as it were holding the hands over them) ; so 
also evxeo~&cu na^r' eKa.Top.^-qs, KaTa. fio6s. 

II. Ill a local and temporal relation, Kara with the Ace. is 
directly opposite to dvd, hi respect to the point from whence 
the motion of the action begins ; but it agrees with dvd in de- 
noting the direction to an object and the extension over it. 
The use of avd is more confined to poetry, but Kara has no such 
limitation. (1) In a local relation : (a) to denote the direction 
of the action to a lower object; (b) to denote extension from 
above to beloiv, from a higher to a loiver object: throughout, 
through, over ; (c) in the historians in the sense of e regionc, 
over against, opposite to ; — (2) of time, to denote its extension 
or duration ; — (3) in a causal sense : (a) to denote purpose and 
design ; (b) conformity, and the respect in which anything is con- 
sidered, and hence also a reason: on account of; (c) an indefinite 
measure (about) ; (d) the manner ; hence also with the distribu- 
tive specifications of number. 

(1) (a) BaAAeiv KctTa yacrT4pa (to strike on the abdomen), and the like in 
Homer. Her. 3, 14. irap-peaav al irapS>4voi kclt a tovs tc <x.t 4 pas (to the fathen 
sitting) : then of the course of a stream, Kwra p6ov, down the stream (see avd). 
Her. 4, 44. (Scylax cum suis) eirAeov KaTa iroTaphv irpbs t\G> re Ka\ 7}\iov ava- 
roXas is baXaacrav. (b) Her. 3, 109. al Zx^vai KaTa. iracrav t))V yrjv e«n. 
Kara yrjv, Kara &aXao~o-av iropeveafrat (through, over, by), (c) Th. 2,30 



432 syntax. [§ 293. 

k€?tcu 7] Ke<paXX7ivla Kara, 'AKapvaviav (opposite to). (2) Kara rbv av- 
rbv xpovov, Kara, rbv ir por epov irSXepov (during the same time, etc.)' 
ot Kara riva (contemporaries of any one). (3) (a) Her. 2, 152. Kara X-n'i-nv 
iKivXwcravras (having set sail for the purpose of plunder) . Th. Kara &4av rjKeiv 
(spectatum venisse). Kara ri; why? ivherefore? (b) Kara vo/xov, Kara. 
*6yov (ad rationem,pro ratione,in conformity with, according to) ; Kara yvc6- 
\xi\v rfyv ifir]V. Her. 2, 3. Kara rrjv rpocpfyv rwv iraiSuv rocavra eXeyov 
(in respect to nourishing the boys). Her. 1, 85. Kara rhv Kprjrrjpa ovrcas ecx 6 - 
Kara r i (in some respect, quodammodo ) ; Kar o v 8 e v, Kar a ir dvr a (in no, 
every respect) ; Kara, rovro (hoc respectu, hence propter hoc) ; Th. 1, 60. Kara. 
(piXlav avrov o I ivXeiaroi e/e Kopiv&ov crrpariurai ZSeXovrai t t vv£o"Kovro (on ac- 
count of his friendship). Dem. Chers. 90, 2. ovs Kara, robs v op ovs i<p' vjxiv 
iariv, orav (iovXricr&e, KoXa£eiv (to punish according to thelaivs). Kara <pvo~iv 
(secundum naturam) ; Kara. Zvvap.iv (according to one's ability, to the best of 'one 's 
ability); Kara Kpdros (with all one's might), (c) Kara e^KOvra errj 
(about sixty years); Kara. fiiKpSv (gradually); Kar' oXiyov, Kara iroXv, 
Kara. iroXXa (by far), (d) Ka& 7)<rvx'iav (quietly); Kara, rdxos (quickly); 
avvrvx'iav (casu, by chance); Kara, rb l&xvpov (per vim, violently); 
Kara, pepos (in order, in turn). Her. 6, 79. &Troivd icrri Svo pveai Kar dvSpa 
(viritim, for each man) ; Kara Kcopas (vicatim, by villages) ; Kara firjva (sin~ 
gulis mensibus, every month, monthly); ica& rjpepav, eu Ka& eV (one after the 
other, one by one, i. e. singly) ; Ka& eirrd, septeni. 

Remark. Very many verbs compounded with Kara, are constructed with the 
Gen. to denote the person who caused the action, and towards whom it is directed, 
e. g. KardSiKafa, KarayiyvcotTKoo, KaraKp'ivus, Kara\pr]<pi£opai rivos, to give judgment, 
bring a charge, pass a vote against any one ; Karatyevdopai rivos, to lie against any 
one ; KarayeXai rivos, to laugh at, to deride one ; Kara<ppovu> rivos, despicio aliquem. 
An Ace. very frequently stands with these, e. g. Kar-nyopeiv ri rivos, to accuse 
one of something, Karayiyv&o-Kziv ri (as avoiav, kXott^v) rivos, KaraKpiveiv rivbs 
Srdvarov, Kara^iKa^iv rivbs bdvarov, KaratyT)<pi£eoSai rivos deiXiav. 



$ 293. (3) 'Yirip, super, over. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote resting, 
abiding over or above a place or object ($ 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in 
a causal sense : (a) for, for the good of; (b) to denote an inter- 
nal, mental cause, instead of the more usual viro with the Gen. ; 
(c) with verbs of entreating, imploring : jfor the sake of some 
eve ; (d) to denote cause; in connection with rov and the Inf. 
to denote purpose, which by the language is considered as the 
cause; (e) in general to denote in respect to, instead of the 
more usual 7rept with the Gen. 

II. With the Ace. : over, above and beyond, used in relation 
to space and time, and also to measure and number. 



§ 294.J PREPOSITIONS. Mcra. <l3£ 

I. (1) X. C. 3. 8, 9. 6 tjXios rov &epovs virep rjfxwv Kal ruv areywv tropev- 
ipevos aKiav avrwv irapex^i {passing over us and the houses). Her. 7. 69. 'Apafiiwt 
Kal Albioiroiv tuv virep Alyvirrov o'lK-npevuv %%e 'Apadjxrjs (who dwell above 
Egypt). 'Tirep &a\daari s olneiv (properly to dwell beyond the sea, i. e. on, by 
the sea). (2) (a) Mdx*a&ai virep rrjs ir'ar pioos (to fight in defence of some- 
thing, as if standing over it); o virep rrjs 'EWaSos frdvaros (death in behalf 
of , for Greece)] iro\iTevea&ai, ffTparriyeiv virep tivos (in alicujus gratiam) , 
virep t3)V ir pay par (av airovZd^etv,ZedoiKevai virep t iv o s (timer ealicui). (b) 
lirep irev&ovs (for, because of grief ). (c) II. co, 466. Kaip.iv virep irarpbs 
*al fxrjTepos 7]vk6/xoio Kiaaeo Kal t e k e o s (entreat him for the sake of his 
father, etc. (d) PI. Symp. 208, d. virep aper^s a&avdr ov Kal roiavTns 
o6%-ns evK\eovs iravres irdvra iroiovaiv (on account of , for the sake of imper- 
ishable distinction, etc.). Dem. Phil. 1. 52,43. virep rov prj ira&e?v KaKws 
vivo $i\iirirov (for the purpose of not suffering evil, etc.). — II. Her. 4, 188. ptirre- 
ova-i virep tov dSfiov (over the house). Seldom of mere extension, as to?s 
Qpa£l rots virep 'EW4\sir ovr ov oiKovai (the Thracians dwelling beyond the 
Hellespont, i. e. on the Hellespont); virep t^u f]\iKtav (beyond one's years, 
age); virep ovva/xiv (beyond one's power); virep dv&pwirov (beyond man, 
i.e. beyond what could be expected of him). Her. 5, 64. virep ra reaaepd 
Kovra err} (beyond, more than, forty years). 



§ 294. (4) Merd, with. 

I. Metci, allied to /^eo-og (in the middle, betiveeri) denotes the 
being in the midst of being among persons or things. With the 
Gen., fxerd denotes an intimate connection, a participation, a 
sharing in (comp. /xerex^v) ; the Gen. denotes the ivhole, of 
which the subject of the sentence constitutes a part; it conse- 
quently differs from avv with the Dat, which merely denotes 
the connection (association) of one object with another, with- 
out the one being considered a part of the other (comp. oW^eti/). 
It is used (1) in a local relation: in the midst, among; then to 
denote an active participation in aid of some one : with ; — (2) 
in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote the means or 
manner; (b) conformity. 

(1) Eur. Hec. 209. fxera veKpav Keiaofxai (to lie among the dead, and one's 
telf to bedead). PL Ep. 359, e. Ka&rja&at /xe ra ra v &\ A <av. Merd tivos 
fidx^abai (to fight in active participation with one). Dem. Phil. 3. 117, 24. fieTo 
rcov yd ik 7) jxev a v iroXey.e7v (to participate in carrying on ivar ivith those who had 
been injured). Elvai, arrival per a tivos (to be on the side of one) PL Ep. 467. 
e. aw&-f)aovrai, per a. irpea $vr e pcov r\y efx6v cov eirSfxevoi (they follow the 
older leaders, and as it were, hold fast to them ; wholly different from eirea&ai 
vuerd riva and aw tlvi). (2) (a) Th. 1, 18. perk kivovvuv ras pe\erai 

37 



434 syntax. [j 294 

iroiovfievoi (i. e. surrounded by, in the midst of dangers). X. C. 3. 5, 8. fier* 
aperrj y irpareveiv (as it were in an intimate connection with virtue). Dem.PhiL 
3. 130, 74. vfiiu ot Trpoyouoi rovro rb yepas eKr-^aavro KaX KareKi-wov /xera iro\~ 
\G>v KaX fieyaXoov kivSvvcov. (b) Isocr. Archid. 129, 66. robs v6fiovs, fie& 
a> v olnovvres evhaifiovecraroi rwv 'EXhyvav ^aav {agreeably to which, ruv vofiwv 
ix^fievoi, legibus quasi adhaerentes). PI. Ap. 32, c. fiera rod v6fiov icai rot 
fiainaiov ojfirju fiaXXov fie Se7v diaKivfivveveiv, t) fie& vfi&v yeveo~&ai fi)] Zinaia 
fiovXevofxevuv (in conformity with law and justice). 

II. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) (Poet.) to de- 
note a direction or motion into the midst of something, a striv- 
ing to be united with a person or tiling, in a friendly or hostile 
relation, and generally to denote a succession in space ; (b) to 
denote a local extension between two objects, in the prose 
phrase /xera ^ei/xis c^av n, to have something in hand; — (2) 
(prose and Poet.) to denote succession in time and in order: 
after, next to, next in order ; — (3) in a causal sense (only Poet.), 
to denote purpose and conformity. 

(1) 'iKecr&cu fie ra. Tpwas kou 'Axaiovs (to come into the midst of the Tr 
and Gr.). II. p, 460. aiffawv cost cdyviribs ftera xv vas (among the geese). 
Seldom used of things. II. £, 376. os fie fier airpijKrov s epiSas Kalveiicea 
fiaXXei (into the midst of contention). Brjvai fiera N e <r ro pa (to go to Nestor, 
properly into a connection with him) ; fir} 8e fier 'Idofievrja, (to go to Idomen. 
to follow after him, properly to go into the engagement or battle with him), II. 
v, 297. II. v, 492. Xaol eirov&, onset re fiera kt'iXov effirero firjXa (behind the 
ram). (2) Me-ret rbv rov vaiSbs bdvarov, X. (after the death). Mera 
ravra (after) ; the Ace. often nas a participle agreeing with it, e. g. Her. 1, 34. 
fiera ~2,oXwva olx^ fievov (after the departure of Solon). Me^ rjfiepav 
(interdiu, in the day time, properly after the break of day), X. An. 4. 6, 12. 
KolkcTvos eXa,8e fier e fie Sevrepos (second after me), Cy. 2. 2, 4. Yl6Xiv (eJx°v) 
rr\v TrXovo-icordr-nv ev rfj 'Aaia fiera BaBvXcova (the richest next to Babylon), 7. 2, 
11. (3) Od. a, 184. ir\e7v fiera xoA/c^ (ad aes petendum). Eur. Ale. 67. 
EvpvcrSeoos -rrefiipavros 'lirireiov fiera oxyt*<*> (for, after a chariot). II. o, 52. 
ru> Ke Yloaeib'dcov ye . . . atya fxeraarptyeie v6ov fiera abv koL ifibv Krjp t 
(agreeably to, according to, your desire and mine). 

Remark. MeTa is constructed with the Dat. only in poetry, particularly m 
the Epic, to denote merely local union or association in place ; in prose, ev and 
avr are used instead of it. It commonly stands with the plural, or with the 
singular of collective nouns ; the words with which it stands may denote per- 
sons, or things considered as such, and the parts or members of animate things, 
e. g. fier a&avdrois, with, among; fiera arparop ; fiera x € pc' l ,iToa', yevvffi, yafMpi)- 
Xa?s (in the midst of), between, fiera (ppetriv, in the mind, uera vnvffi, Kvfiaai; fieri 
wvotrjs aveuoio, Homer. 



$ 295. 7 prepositions. — 'Afjicf>i } TTcpL 435 

5. Prepositions with the Genitive, Dative, and 
Accusative: d/*,</>t, 7repi, £ttl, napd, 7rp6<s, vtto. 

$ 295. (1) 'A/x</>t and irepi. 

1. The prepositions Sl/x^l and ire/at express nearly the same 
relations of position: around, about; d/x<£t, on both sides, rrepi, 
on all sides; they also agree in their use, though the use of 
aficfii is rarer, and is more Ionic and poetic than irepl, which ex- 
presses a far greater variety of relations and has a more gen- 
eral application. 

2. 'AfjiffiL denotes in general the surrounding of something 
(on both sides), the being near and close to something. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote re- 
moval from that which surrounds (Poet.) ; (b) to denote dwell- 
ing or rest around something ($ 287, Rem.), though but seldom; 
— (2) in a causal sense, to denote the occasion or cause : about, 
for, on account of, though but seldom in prose, -rrepC with the 
Gen. being generally used instead of it. 

II With the Dat. (1) in a local relation (Poet, only), to de- 
note rest around, at, near, among ; — (2) in a causal sense (very 
seldom in prose, indeed not at all in Attic prose) : (a) to denote 
the cause or occasion, as with the Gen., with this difference, 
however, that with the Dat, the relation of causality is con- 
sidered as "wholly local; (b) to denote an internal and mentac 
reason (Poet.). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation, to denote local 
extension : about, around, on; — (2) to denote time and number 
approximately or indefinitely ; — (3) in a causal and figurative 
sense, to denote a mental dwelling upon an object, taking pains, 
and being employed about it. 

1.(1) (a) Eur. Or. 1460. ajx<p\ Trop<pvp4wv ire-rrXcoi/ £l<pri <rird<rauTes (from tin 
garments which were around the sword), (b) Her. 8, 104. afxcpl ravr^s oIkzovoi 
ttjs tt6\ios (dwell around this city). (2) Maxeo^c" b.fx<pi rivos (for, on account 
of some one, or something). X. Cy. 3. 1, 8. els Kaipbv T^iceis, oircas rrjs Si/ens olkov- 
<tvs Trapcbv ttjs apupl rod irarpSs (about, relating to your father). II. (1) Te- 
\auuv a.}x<p\ (rr^eao-iv (around the breast), II. /3, 388. y A/x(pl KXdSois e^ecrfrcu 
(to be surrounded by branches, to sit among). (2) (a) II. it, 565. hfj.<p\ v4kvi 
KaTarefrvnooTt fxdx^^at (about, on account of a dead body) . II. 7, 157. afj.<pl 
yvvaiKl &\yea ttdcxeiv. Her. 6, 129. 01 nv-niarripes epiv eixov apcpl /j.ovffiKfj. 



436 syntax. [$ 295 

62. <po/3r}&els afxcpl rjj yvvaiici (respecting). 3. 32. hfLtpl t a> Savarcf 
avTTJs Si^bs Xeyercu \6yos. (bj 'A/xcpl <p6$q> (prae melu, for, on account of); 
afjKpl &vijl$ (prae ira). III. (1) X. Cy. 6. 2, 11. (avXXeyerai) ib (rrpdrevpa 
afKpl rbv Tlaicr wXbv ttot a p. 6 p. 2. 4, 16. re&rjpaKa b.[X(pl ra '6 pi a 
(around, on the borders). Hence also of the persons around any one, as in ol 
a/xcpl riva, see § 263, d. (2) 'Apupl rbv x* l P-& va (about winter): ap.<pl 
heix-nv (sub vesperam, about twilight); afKpl tovs fxvpiovs (circiter). (3) 
v Exew a p. (pi ti (to be employed about something), e. g. hfupl 8e?7nw, ap.<p > 'lirirov?, 
&pp.ara. 

3. Ilept signifies all round, round, in a circle. 

I. With the Gen. ( 1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling ot 
rest around an object. This use of it is confined to poetry, and 
even here is very rare ; comp. § 287, Rem. — (2) in a causal and 
figurative sense : (a) to denote the cause or occasion, a respect, 
in a great variety of connections : about, concerning, for, on ac- 
count of, in respect to ; — (b) to denote a mental cause : for, from, 
on account of prae, though but seldom ; (c) to denote the rela- 
tion of a person or thing to that which belongs to them, which, 
as it were, surrounds them and refers to them (Geii.-^of the 
possessor) ; (d) to denote ivorth and superiority. 

(1) Od. e, 68. avrov rerdvvaro irepl aireiovs yXacpvpolo rj/xepls (there 
the vine was stretched around the cave). 130. rbv p.ev iycbv eadwffa it epl r p6ir ios 
fiefiaujra. (2) (a) MaxfC^a/, airoSravetv irepl rrjs irarpiSos (for, on account 
of) ; with verbs denoting a physical or mental perception, aicoveiv, elSevai, etc.. 
with verbs of saying and asking, e. g. Xeyeiu irepi twos, \6yos irepi rivos, with verbs 
of anxiety, fear, and such as express all other affections, e. g. <pofie7ar&ai irepl 
irarpidos, imfitl.ctff&cu, eirtpeXeia irepiriuos (to fear for one's country). Dem. Phil. 
1,52,43. 7] apxv rod iroXefiov yeyepryrai irepl rod t ifxw pri<r aff&ai QiXnrirov 
(with respect to taking vengeance on Philip), (b) He pi bpyr\s (prae ira, on ac- 
count of, because of anger), Th. 4, 130. (c) Ta ir e p i r i v o s (the affairs, fortune, 
circumstances of any one, etc.) ; ol ire pi nvos (those belonging to any one, asso- 
ciated with him, and as it were surrounding him). Dem. Phil. 1. 50. 36. ev rots 
irepl rod iroXe fxov Kal rfj tovtov irapaaKevij iiraKra airavra (sc. effTiv) (in 
matters pertaining to the war), (d) In the Common language, 7rept iroXXov, irepl 
trXeiovos, irepl irXeiffTov, irepl bxiyov, irepl eXarrovos, irepl eXaxio~rov, irepl ovdevbs 
iroieloSai or yyeloSai ri (to value high, higher, etc.) ; so also irepl iroXXov eartp 
7)fjuv (of great value). 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling 
or rest around or near something, with the idea of surrounding 
or encircling it (seldom in Attic prose) ; (2) in a causal sense : 
(a) like a/xcpL with the Dat., but much more frequently; (b) te 
denote an external or internal reason or cause (Poet.). 



$ 296.] prepositions. — *EirC. 437 

(1) Her. 7, 61. irepl Ty<ri KecpaAfj <r i iix ov Tidpas. PL Pp. 359, d. irepl 
rfj X €t P* xp vcr °v v ^olktvXiov tpepeiv. (2) (a) MaxeoSat irepi t iv i (for some' 
thing, some one), (Poet.), in prose especially with verbs of fearing: Th. 1, 60. 
Sedi6res ire pi tw x^P^V (fearing for the town). 4, 70. deiaas irepl IleAo- 
irovurjoi ois. 6,9. 7rept ra efxavrov o u> fiar i oppcaSai. PL Phaed. 114. d. 
Sappelv irepi tivi (to be of good courage about something), (b) (Poet.) Uepl 
XapfJ-ctTi, <p6@ci), cfreVei, oSvvrj (prae, for joy, fear, etc., as it were surrounded by 
them). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation: around, (a) to de- 
note motion round about something, into the circle or vicinity of 
an object (Poet.) ; (b) extension around, in or at, through some- 
thing, with verbs of rest; — (2) of time and number stated in- 
definitely or approximately ; — (3) in a causal or figurative sense, 
to denote a mental dwelling about an object, taking pains with 
it, being employed about it ; also in respect to. 

(1) (a) II. k, 139. irepi (ppevas rj\v^' lair], the clamor came round his mind; 
(b) Her. 3, 61. Kafifivor) xP ov/t -C OVTL "* e pi AKyvirrov eiravicrrearrai &v8pes Md- 
•yoi (round in Egypt). 7,131. 6 /xeu irepl n tepirjv Zierpifle fj/xepas avxvds. 
Th. 6, 2. <fK0vv QoiviKes irepl iraoav ttju ~2,iKe\iav aKpas re eirl rfj &a\dao"n 
airo\afi6uTes Kal ra eiriKel/xeva vncridia, (in Sicily around on all the coasts). 
Hence ol irepl viva, (those around any one, connected or associated with him) ; oi 
epl Tixdrava (§ 263, d). Comp. a/x(pi. (2) Th. 3, 89. irepl tovtovs 
ovs XP& P0VS (about). Ylepl fivpiovs (about). (3) Oi irepl fiover iktjv 
ovres, ol irepl ttjv yecafxerpiau Starpi^oures, cnrov5d(eiu irepi n (those oc- 
cupied about, with music, etc.). 'A/xehws exetp irepi r iv a. X. An. S. 2, 20. 
i^afJLapTdveii/ irepi riva (with respect to). 1. 6, 8. &diKos irepi riya. C. 1. 1, 
20. vauppoveiv irepl too s Seo vs. At irepl to aw /j. a r)5ovai ] ra irepl ttjp 
aperr)v (the essence of virtue, what pertains to it). 



§ 296. (2) 'Etti, upon. 

With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote rest upon 
a place or object, bordering on a place, the place being regarded 
as the point of support, that on which the action leans, hence : 
upon, at, near to ($ 287, Rem.) ; (b) a direction to a place (§ 273, 
Rem. 8) ; — (2) in a temporal relation to denote the time in or 
during which something takes place (§ 273, Rem. 12) ; — (3) in 
a causal and figurative sense : (a) with verbs of saying, swear- 
ing and affirming before any one (as it were leaning or resting 
on some one) ; (b) to denote the occasion or author, especially 
in the phrase, to be named after some one or some thing; (c) 

37* 



438 syntax. [$ 296. 

conformitvj, with verbs signifying to examine, to judge, to con- 
sider, to say, and to shoiv ; (d) dependence or resting on some 
tiling, a steadfast abiding by (oil) something ; (e) the manner \ 
(f ) the purjoose, which is then considered by the language, as 
the cause, with the verb ra^^vat, and the like, to be set over 
something, and in certain phrases. 

(1) (a) PL Menex. 246, d. ovt' iirl 777s, ov& virb yrjs. Her. 7, 111. t& 
\La.vTt)Cov tovto eCTi iirl twv ov peeov t wv vi\/t]Xot aToov. 6, 129. e7rl 
rrjs Tpairi^-ns dpxvvaTo {danced upon the table). 2, 35. to. &x& ea °' L f^ v 
&v5pes iirl tuv KecpaXeav (popeovat, at Se yvvaines iirl twv &fieov. X. 
An. 4. 3, 28. Uevocpwv ire/x^as dyyeXov KeXevei (avrovs) ai)Tov fieivou iirl tov 
1r0Ta.fj.0v (at,near the river), (b) Th. 1, 116. irXtiv iirl 2dfiov (to sail for 
Samos). X. Cy. 7. 2, 1. ctt! Zapdeav (pevyeiv. Dem. Phil. 3. 123,48. ava- 
X<*p£v iir 1 oXkov (to return homewards). (2) Her. 6,98. iirl A ape tov iyiv- 
cto irXeca nana ifj 'EXXadt (in the time of, during the reign of Darius). X. Cy. 1 
6, 31. iirl tuv 7] fiere pcov ir poy ovuv. So iir ifj.ov, ifi rjfiwv, i<p' 
v fiwv (mea, nostra, vestra memoria, in, within my memory, etc.). The Gen. often 
stands in connection with a participle, but always with the present ; hence iirl 
often denotes the duration of time, e. g. iirl Kvpov fiao-iXevovTos (during 
the reign of Cyrus). (3) (a) Aeyeiv iirl diKaaruv, iirl fiaprvpcop (before, 
in the presence of, properly, resting or leaning upon). Dem. Cor. iir(afx6ffavro 
iirl t&v arpaTyyuv (took an oath in the presence of the generals). Similar to 
the preceding is, Her 9, 11. iiirav iir' SpKov (said on oath, quasi substrato vel 
supposito jurejurando > waning or resting on the oath), (b) KaXeia&ai iirl tivos 
(to be called after one). Her. 7, 40. Nio-aloi KaX4ovTai "iriroi iirl rovSe (fortius 
reason). 74. iirl AvSov tov "At vo s io~xpv tt\v iiroiwixi-nv. T^\v iiruvvfilav 
iroieTo-frai iirl tivos (to be called, to take a surname from one) . 'Ecp 1 iavrov (of 
ewe's own accord, sua sponte) ; e7rl irpocpdoeas (simulatione, under pretext). A4yeiv 
iirl tivos (dicere de aliqua re). PL Charm. 155, d. iirl tov naXov x4ywv 
irai5 6s. (c) Z7)Te?j> ti iir'LTivos, Kplveiv ti iirl tivos, CKOireiv ti eiri ti- 
vos, X4yeiv ti iirl tivos, €7rt8eT|ai ti iirl tivos, etc. (to judge something accord- 
ing to a thing or person, as it were resting upon). PL Rp. 597, b. fiovXei ovv, %<pi)v } 
iir ah twv tovtwv tov /j.i/x7}Trjv tovtov ^T^crw/xej/, tIs itot idTiv ; (visne, aa 
fiaec ipsa imitatorem istum exigamus?) (d) 'h <p y kavTov, iavTwv, r)fj.wv av- 
tuv, 4 avTijs (by one's self, separately, of one's own accord, properly, resting or 
depending on one's self, independent of others). X. An. 2. 4. 10. ofEXXrjves 
vcpopwvTts tovs fiapfidpovs avTol i <p* eavTwv ix&pow r)y€/x6vas %x ovT * s (marched 
by themselves). Her. 5, 98. olneovTas t?js &pvylr)s x^P^ v T€ /ca * Kdfirjv iir iav- 
tS>v (by themselves). 4, 114. olKeoo/xev iir" r)/i4wv ah twv. Here seems to 
belong the phrase so frequently found in the Attic historians: 5 E^>' ev6s, 
iirl Tpioiv, t stt dpwv Terax^ot, ot^vck, one, two, three men deep or in file, 
properly to be placed or rtand on one, the row resting or leaning on one, 
etc.). Dem. Phil. 1.42,7. hv Kal v/xus iirl t r, s ToiavTTjS i&cXr)o-r)Te yev- 
fo&ai yvdfirjs (firmiter adhaerere huic rationi). 9. (QiXiiriros) oi>x oT6s t iffTiv, 



$296.] prepositions. — Eot. 43& 

€Xw & Karlcrpairrai, fiiveiv iirl rovrav (cannot remain with, satisfied with, 
those things which he has conquered). Phil. 2. 66, 3. KeoXvcratr ttv iiceTuov irpdr- 
reiv ravra, i<p* wv icrri vvv (quibus nunc studet). So fx^veiv eirl avotas. (e) 
Dem. Cor. 230, 17. ovre SiKcdeos, ovr 4 it aXrjfrei as ovSe/xias elpvfj.4va 
(stated neither with justice nor in adherence to the truth, as it were, resting on 
truth), (f) Her. 5, 109. eV ov 4rdx&r)ixev (cui rei praefecti sumus). Dem. Cor. 
266, 118. iirl rod fr e w piKov Karaerra&els (placed over the theatre-money). 
Hence at 4ttI roov irpayfidreav (those placed over business, those at the head of 
affairs). 

II. With the Dat, (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote the 
tarrying or resting upon, or (b) more frequently, at, by or near a 
place or object ; — (2) of time (mostly only poetic) ; — (3) in a 
causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote dependence : penes, 
in the power of; — (b) a condition under which something takes 
place ; (c) the purpose, design, or determination ; (d) the goal or 
limit ; (e) the reason, with verbs expressing an affection of the 
mind ($ 285, Rem. 1). 

(1) (a) Th. 1, 56. (HoriSaiarat) oIkovctiv 4tti rep 'lcr&fJLtp rrjs TJaWJivris. X. 
An. 7. 4, 4. Ol &pctKes ras aXooireictdas iirl ra?s k e<pa\a?s epopoveri nal ro7s 
w<rl, nal Ceipas fi^xpl rav ttoZSiv 4ir\ rwv 'iirirwv %%ov<nv, wear fox-shin caps on 
their heads and ears, and have cloaks reaching to their feet when upon their horses 
(iiri with the Dat. purely local, but e7rl roiv 'Ittttccv, inasmuch as the horses are 
considered as active), (b) Her. 7, 89. ol Qoivutes to irdkaibv oXkzou iirl ttj. 
'Epvfrprj &a\do-<rr) (upon, by). So also where one thing is said to be along 
with another, or in addition to it, e. g. eer^Uiv iirl rep erirea ^oy (to eat the 
tipov with bread) ; 4ttI rep (rircp irlveiv (to drink with one's food) ; 4ttI rrj kv- 
\iki qdeiv (to sing over one's cups). Hence, e7rl rovrois (upon, in addition 
to this, i. e. besides) ; finally it is also used to denote a succession of things in 
time and space. Od. 77, 120. oyx^n eV oyx"V ynpaerKei (pear on pear). X. 
Cy. 2. 3, 7. aviart] in avrep $epav\as (after him). $6vos iirl <p6vcp (murder 
upon murarr), Eur. (2) 'E7rl vvktI (II. &, 529), in, during the night, comp. 
§ 283, 3, (b). (3) (a) Dem. Chers, 90, 2. i<f? i>fx?u 4 cm (rovrovs) KoAaCeiv 
(penes vos, it is in your power, etc.). (b) 'Eirl rovrep, eV ovSevi (hac, nulla 
conditione, mdlo pacto, on this condition, etc.). Her. 3, 83. iirl rovrep {nre^io-ra- 
fiai rrjs apxysjiir' cpre vif ovSevos ifxecau dp^ofiai. Hence of price, e. g. iirl 
fiMT&cp (on condition of for, a reward) ; 4ttI fieyd\ois tokols davei£e(r&ai 
(to borrow on high interest) ; e w \ irocrep (at what price). ( c ) Her. 1,68. iirl kcckco 
av&pwTTov aiSripos avevprjTai (in perniciem hominis). So iirl rovrep (hoc con- 
silio, for this purpose, with this design). X. S. 1,5. Upwrayopct ttoXv apyvpiov 
848ecKas 4irl <ro<plq (ad discendam sapientiam). PI. Ap. 20, e. tyevSerai re 
leal eVJ SiajSoA?? rrj efifi \4yei. Hence ol iirl ra?s jUTj^avajJ (those 
placed over the machines) ; ol eirl rols irpdy p a cri (those intrusted with business); 
iirl rep SzeapiKep &v (charged with the money for the public shows). Dem. Cor 



440 syntax. [$ 297. 

264, 113. (d) Aeyeiv iiri tivi {to pronounce a eulogy on one)] vSjxovs deV&a. 
eiri tivi {for). And so bvoud£eiv or icaXetv tl 4-k'i tivi {nomen alicui impo- 
nere, to call a person or thing something). PL Pp. 470, b. 4irl /u.hv rfj rod olntiov 
%X&P a Gravis KeKXTjrai, 4tt\ Se tt7 rod aXXoTpiov iroXe/jios {to hostility at home, 
the name insurrection was given, i. e. hostility at home was called insurrection, thai 
abroad, uar). Also, against, in a hostile sense. Her. 6, 88. rb irav fi-nxavrjo-a- 
oSat €7r' Alyivr)rrjai {against the Aeginetans). Th. 1, 102. ttjv yevo/j.evnv 
4 ir I t<$ Mr) Sep £v/j.jj.axlcu'- (e) TeXav, fxsya <ppove7v, p-alveofi-ai, ayavanrelv, etc. 
4 it i t i v i {to laugh at, be greatly elated at, etc.). 

III. With the Ace, (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote the 
local limit, the direction or motion to or upon a place or obj ect ; 
(b) extension over an object: over, upon; — (2) of time : (a) to 
denote the temporal limit {up to, till), also the limit of quantity 
(about) ; (b) extension over a period of time {during) ; — (3) in 
a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote purpose, design; 
(b) conformity, manner ; (c) in respect to. 

(1) (a) 'Ava&alveiv icp' Ilttttov, 4irl &p6vov. PL Crit. 112, e. {ol 'A&nvcuoi) 
iirl it a a a v Ev pcvir-nv Kal 'A a I a v icard re awfxdroiv rcaXX-n Kal Kara rr\v twv 
tyvx&v iravroiav aperrjv iXX6yi[ioi rjcrav {over all Europe, etc.). 'E7rl Se|ia, e7r' 
apiarepd {upon the right, left, to the right, left). (2) (a) 5 E^>' kviripav {until 
evening); (b) 4ttI iroXXas 71/j.epas, e<^' T\\x£pav. Th. 4, 1. rb 'P-hyiov 4tt\ 
ttoXvv XP^ V0V £o-Tao~ia£s { for a long time) . 94. ol 5irX7rai iirl oktcI) irav rb 
arparS-iredor ird^avro {by eights, eight in file). 'EttI fxiya, iroXb, irXeov, /J.ei£ov t 
fiaXXov, f.iawp6v, 4irl t6o~ov, ifi ocrov (greatly, especially, much rather, etc.). Terdx- 
&ai iirl ttoXXovs {many in file). (3) (a) Her. 1.37. iirl &r)pav Uvai {venatum 
ire). 3, 14. iirl vdwp Uvai {aquatum ire). Hence e7r2 tI; wherefore? In a 
hostile sense, e. g. arparevso-^ai 4ttI AvSovs {upon, against the Lydians) ; 4Xav- 
veiv e7rl Il4p eras] (b) err' jcra {equally, in the same way). Her. 3, 71. rr)v 
4irixelpr]o-tv ravrrjv /xr] ovra cvvrdxvve ajSovXus, a XX' 4ttI to cr w <p po v£o~r e pov 
avTriv Xapfiave {more according to reflection, more considerately), (c) PL Pp. 370, 
b. Siacpepwv 4ttI nrpa^iv. Tb eV ip.4 {quod ad me attinet). 



$297. (3) liapa, by, near. 

llapa denotes nearness to something: by the side of, by, near. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation with verbs of going 
and coming, to denote a removal from near a person (Poet, 
also from near a thing) ; — (2) in a causal sense, to denote the 
author. 

{ 1 ) 'EA&eli/ irap a r ivos, like the French de chez quelqu'un {from near some 
*ne, from some one). (2) (a) yet almost purely local: Her. 8. 140. ayyeXirj %*** 



> 297.] PREPOSITIONS. — Ilaoa. 441 

ir a pit. fiacr iKrjos (comes from the king, with the accompanying idea that it was 
done by his direction). So -rrapd is regularly used of ambassadors, e. g. dyy e\oi, 
irp*<rf3eis irapd ticos, ayyiWt-iv irapd rivos, ra. irapd rivos (the commis- 
sion, command, etc., from any one) ; (b) with passive verbs (see § 251, Rem. 4) ; 
(c) with verbs of learning and hearing, e. g. p.avSrdvziv irapd tivos, clkovsiv irapd 
rivos; (d) nap' eavrov, eavruv (sua sponte, of one's own accord); (e) with 
verbs of giving and the like, e. g. irap' eavrov ZiZovat (from himself, i. e. from 
his own resources). 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote divelling 
or re^near a person (Poet, also near a thing) ; — (2) in a causal 
or figurative sense, to denote the possessor ; then also in relation 
to the judgment or opinion of a person. 

(1) ''Eo'ttj irapa. rip /3ao~ i\ei. (2) TJoWa. X9^ll JLara ^apa T <? /3a<TiA.t< 
%v. Her. 3, 160. irapa, Aapeia Kpirfj (judice Dario, in the opinion of). 1, 
32. irap ifiol (meo judicio, in my opinion). 86. robs irapa a(pio~i avrolai 
8oi<4ovras oXfiiovs. Dem. 01. 1. 18, 3. roaovrcp ^av/xaarorepos irapa iracri vo- 
uiQerai (6 $i\nriros). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote a 
direction or motion to a person so as to come beside or near 
(Poet, also of a thing) ; (b) a direction or motion near a place 
and by or beyond it : along, along by, by, beyond ; (c) extension 
near a place or object [along, per), generally to denote indefi- 
nite nearness (by) ; — (2) of time, to denote its extension 
(during) ; — (3) in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote 
dependence, the possessor (penes) ; (b) a comparison and estima- 
tion ; hence (c) conformity, with verbs of considering, showing, 
and the like ; (d) a reason or cause (wholly likepropter, by vir- 
tue of, on account of) 

(1) (a) Her. 1, 36. ~2,6K(av is Puyvirrov airiKero irapa 'Afxaaiv Kal Zrj Kai es 
2ap5/s- 7rapa Kpotorov. (b) Ilapa r\\v BafivXcava irapUvai (along, near, 
by Babylon). From this have originated various ethical expressions, e. g. irapa 
potpav (near fate and by it, i. e. against, contrary to fate) ; irapa. oo^av (praeter opin- 
ionem, contrary to. expectation) ; irap iAiriSa, irapa <pvo~iv, irapa. rb diicaiov, irapa robs 
opKovs, irapa. Zvvap.iv. (It is the opposite of Kara, e. g. Kara /xo?pav, Zvvap.iv, ac- 
cording to.) Hence it has also the signification of besides, praeter, e. g. irapa 
ravra ( praeter haec) ; (c) Her. 9, 15. 7rapa rbv 'Ao-(»ir6v (along the Asopus). 
Dem. 01. 1. 24, 22. 1} rvxn fapa irdvr' iarl ra. ruv avfrp&irwv irpdy uara 
(per omnes res dominatur). Her. 4, 87. ovros Kare\el<p&i) irapa rbv vn6v 
(near). Arrival irapd riva (and irapd rivt). (2) nap' f}(i4pav, iraph 
rhv it 6 \ e p. v (during) ; irapa. r)]v ir6ffiv (inter potandum, while drinking). 
60 also of single points of time, during which something takes place, e. g 



442 SYNTAX. [$ 298 

irap avrhv rbv icivdvvov (in ipso discriminis tempore, in the very moment of 
danger). (3) (a) Isocr. Archid. 126. wpo\oye?To Trap a tovtov yevea&at t?)i> 
aarnpiav avrots (constabat, in hoc iis positam esse salutem, that their safety depended 
on him). Her. 8, 140. Trvv&dvecr&G t\\v vvv irap' i/xe iovaav Svvaptv (is in my 
power, with me), (b) Her. 7, 20. qostg yu^Te rbv Aapeiov (o~t6\ov) tov iirl ^Kv&as 
■wap a tovtov (sc. tov (tt6\ov) pndev <palveo-&ai (in comparison with this). So 
irap' b\lyov Troieia&ai ti (to make of little account). Hap' bxiyov, irapa 
/xiKpov, fipax v t nearly, almost, irapa iro\v, by far, irap' ovSev Ti&eo&ai, 
(to make no account of) ; after comparatives and expressions implying compari- 
son, as &KXos, eTepos, 5id(popos. Th. 1, 23. i)\iov e/cAetyets ttvkv6t epai irapa 
to e/c tov irp\v xpdvov pvnuovevS/xeva (more frequent in comparison with those men- 
tioned informer times). PI. Phaed. 93, a. ovSe pty iroieiv ti, ouSe ti Trdax^v &\Xo 
Trap' a av ineiva t) iroirj rj irdo'xV' Hence of alternations: 7]/j.epa irap" rjpepav 
(one day in distinction from another, day by day, every other day, alternis diebus, also 
irap' rjfiepav alone). Often with the accompanying idea of preference, prae, 
praeter. X. C. 1. 4, 14. irapa to. &\\a ££>a, &sirep fceot, oi av&pwiroi fiioTev- 
ovo~i (in comparison with, beyond, other animals), (c) 'Opw, gkottoo ti trap' &X\o 
t i (to consider something in conformity with another thing, in comparison with it, 
properly, holding it near to something). Dem. Aph. 1.824,34. irapa tov \6- 
yov, bv airo(p4povo-iv, iiriSeil-w (in conformity with, properly, holding an object near 
to another.) (d) Dem.1.43,14. ovSh $t\nnros irapa ttjv avrov p co/xnu tovov* 
tov irrev^nTai, ocrov Trap a tijv 7]/jlct4 pav ajx4\e lav (on account of his own 
strength). So irapa tovto, propterea, irap' '6, quapropter. 



$ 298. (4) Up 6s, before. 

Tip os (formed from 7rpo), denotes before, in the presence of. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote a direction 
or motion from the presence of an object, especially from the 
situation of a place ; — (2) in a causal relation, to denote an 
active person, as it were an outgoing from the presence of a 
person exercising power, or of an object considered as a person, 
(a) of derivation ; (b) of a person or thing to whom or which 
something belongs {quality, peculiarity) [$ 273, 2, (c) (a)] ; (c) 
of th i author or cause, 

(1) Her. 3, 101. olneovcri irpbs v6tov av4fiov (toward the south, properly 
from the south). Comp. a meridie instead of ad meridiem. 107. irpbs peanp' 
Pplvs 'Apa^in iari (lies towards the south). X. An. 2. 2, 4. eVeo-fre t<£ r)yov/x4- 
vq>, to. fxev vrrofyyia Kxovtcs irpbs tov iroTapov (towards, on). (2) (a) Trpbs 
iraTpos, npbs pn]T p6 s (on the father's or mother's side), (b) Tlpbs yvvain6i 
eVrt (it is the manner of women) ; irpbs SIktjs Iot'iv (it is conformable to justice). 
X. An. 1. 2, 11. ovk r)v irpbs tov Kvpov Tp6irov, %x ovra H-h airodi56vai (was 
*ot in accordance with the custom of Cyrus). Antiph. 2. 121, 2. t) pkv 86£a tuv 



^298] prepositions. — IIoo's. 443 

TrpaxSrsvTGov irpbs tG>v \eyeiv dvuafJLeuwu iariy, i] 8e aA-fi&eia irpbs ra>t 
Siicaia koL '6<ria ir pa.o-(r6vT(av. Also, elvcu irp6s rivos (to stand or be on the 
side of one). Th. 4, 92. xph iricrrevaravras t$ &ew irpbs tj/awv ececr&cu, o^cre 
X<apy\(Tai ro?s iroXefAiois (trusting in God that he will be on our side). Hence PL 
Hipp. 1, 285, b. 5oK€ts fxoi rbu \6yov irpbs efj.ov Keyeiv (for my advantage). 
(c) to receive, to have something from some one, then with passive verbs (§ 251, 
Rem. 4), intransitive (§ 249, 3), and in phrases of a passive sense. Her. 2, 139. 
ko.k6v ti irpbs 3-e£y ^ irpbs av&p <air<av Xafifidveiv. X. An. 7. 6,33. ex^>v 
emuvov iroKvu irpbs v/xwu aireiropevS/xrjy (having much praise from you). Her. 
1, 61. aTt[id£e(T&ai irpbs Tieiar icr pdr ov. X. An. 1. 9, 20. <pi\ovs 6/j.o\oye?Tcu 
Kvpos irpbs irdvrwv Kparicros 87/ yevea&ai frepaireveiv (is admitted by all). Oec. 

4, 2. at Pavavaucal KaXov/xevai ado^ovurai irpbs r wv ir 6Xewv (are held in no esteem 
by the cities). Her. 1,73. ravra irpbs Kva£dpeca ira&6vres (from Cyaxeres). 7, 

5. arpar-nXdree iirl ras 'A&rjvas, 'iva \6yos ere exv "* pb s av$r pdoir <av ayaSios 
(ut lauderis ab hominibus, as it were, in the presence of men). With forms of swear- 
ing and protestation, e. g. irpbs &ea>v (per deos, properly, before the gods). 

II. With the Dat, to denote dwelling or rest near or by an 
object; also of being busily engaged in or with a thing; finally, 
in the sense of besides, in addition to (praeter). 

Th. 2, 79. is /J-dxw Ka^icrTavrai ofA&rjvcuoi irpbs avrfj ry ir6\ei. Eli/cu, 
ylyveaSai irpbs irpdyfiaai Tlpbs tovtco, irpbs tovtois (praeter ea). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation: (a) of the situation 
of a place : towards [where the Gen. also maybe used, see No. I, 
(1)] ; (b) of the direction to persons, or things considered as 
persons, sometimes also to places, both in a friendly and in 
hostile relation; (c) of extension; — (2) to denote time indefi- 
nitely ; — (3) causal and figurative : (a) to denote the purpose- 
ox object; (b) conformity ; hence (c) the reason or cause {prop- 
ter) ; (d) a comparison, for the most part with the accompanying 
idea of superiority ox preference (prae, praeter); (e) in respect to, 

(1) (a) Tlpbs /jL€<n){j).fipiai', irpbs ecrirepa* (towards). Th. 2, 55. (v yv) 
vpbs TleXoir6uvncrov bpa,. (b) X. An. 5. 7, 20. epxovrai irpbs t)/j.S.s (to 
us, properly, come before us). 7. 6, 6. v/xas irpwl &£op.ev irpbs avrovs. 5. 4, 5. 
8iaxra>&rjvai /3ovX6fj.e&a irpbs ttju 'EAAo8a(i.e. irpbs robs "EXXrjuas, to go in safety 
to Greece). Aeyeiv, ayopevew, e^erd^eiv t t irpos tip a (to speak before, to one) \ 
airovdds, (rv/xfAtzxiav iroie?o-&cu irp6s tip a (with one); pidx^cr^ai, iroXefxeiv irp6t 
riva (against one). These phrases everywhere imply the meaning to come 
into the presence of, before the face of any one ; also, Xoyi^ecr&cu, crKetyacr&ai, ctko- 
ireiv, i^v/j.e?cr^ai irpbs eavrov (secum reputare) ; likewise, (Scokp^ttjs f)v) 
vpbs x el l J -to va ' Ka ^ &epo s koI irdvras irSvovs KapTepucdoTaros (against)^ 
X. C 1. 2, 1. (c) 2w/fpaT7js ye /cat irpbs rovs &XXovs au& p&irovs k6<tuqi 



444 SYNTAX. [$ 299 

77; ir6xei 7rapet'x6 {among other men, etc. the preposition here extending the' idea), 
ibid. 61. (2) ripbs fifiepav (towards daybreak). (3) (a) Dem. Phil. 2. 71, 
23. 7rcwTo8a7ro evp-q/xeva reus ir6Xecri 7rp2>y <pvXa.K7}V Kal awnpiav (for a guard 
etc.); (b) Her. 1, 38. irpbs t)]V otyiv ravrrju tou yd/xoi/ rovrov iairevaa (in 
accordance with this view). So Kpivsiv ti irpos ri, Xeyeiv irpbs x°-? lv -> vpbs 
to 7i8v, irpbs Tb aya&6v. Also, irpbs (Slav (violently, against the will), 
irpbs cv a 7 kt\v, irpbs i}hovnv, irpbs aKpifie lav (accurately, in conformity 
with accuracy, etc.). (c) Tlpbs ravra (properly, in accordance with this, hence 
for this reason, therefore), (d) X. 3. 5, 4. i] t&v ' 'Afrnvalav So£a (reTairsiywrai) 
irpbs robs Boicer ov s (in comparison with the renown of the Boeotians). So 
also to denote an exchange, e. g. PI. Phaed. 69, a. rjSovas irpbs ijSovas Kal 
Xviras irpbs Xviras Kal <p6fiov irpbs <p 6 ft o v KaraXXaTTeaSrai, Kal /J.ei£ca irpbs 
iXaTTCi}, wsirep voixio-jxara (to exchange pleasures for pleasures, etc.). (e) 2ko- 
irelv, {SXsireiv irp6s ti (to consider with respect to something); diacpepeiv irpbs 
aperrfu, KaXbs irpbs 8pop.ov, irpbs iraX'ni'^ reXeos irpbs ap^T-nv. 



$299. (5) 'Y-n-o, sub, under. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote a mo- 
tion out from a loiuer place : forth from under, away from under 
(more obvious in the Horn. vtvIk with Gen.) ; (b) to denote a 
. quiet rest under an object ($ 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in a causal and 
figurative sense : (a) to denote the author with passive and in- 
transitive verbs (§ 254, Rem. 4) ; (b) an outward or inward 
{mental) occasion, influence; (c) a mere instrumental cause, 
means, manner. 

(1) (a) Od. i, 140. abrao iirl Kparbs Xi/ievos phi ayXabv vSwp, Kpi\vr\ virb 
enreiovs (from under the grotto). 77, 5. virb c.iri)vns Xveiv 'lirirovs (from under 
the chariot). X. An. 6.4,25. (s.evo<p£>v) Xa@wv (Sovv virb a/xd^rjs acpayiacrdjj.- 
ei'os ifiorjSei. (b) II. &, 13. eXdov fjav ptyca is Taprapov . . .i)X L Pa&iVTOv virb 
X&ov6s io-TL fiepe&poj' (under the earth). 'Tirb 777s oliteiv. (2) (a) KTejVecr- 
&ai i>ir6 Tiuo:, airoSraveiv vir6 rivos (to be slain by one), (b) X. An. 5. 1, 
15. A^iiriros aireSavtv virb NindvSpov. 7.7,23. /xeya (jloi Sokz7 ev aKoveii> 
■jirb av&pwiroov (to hear himself well spoken of by men). 3. 4, 11. airwXeaav 
r)\v apxV virb Uepo-wv M^Sot (lost the government by tlie Persians = spoliati 
.< nit imperio a P.). 7. 2, 22. alriav e%w inr6 rivos (= accusor ab aliquo). Her. 
"». 104. iiirb rov Kav/xaros 01 /xvpfjLrjKes cupavees yivovrai virb yrjv (under the in- 
fluence of the heat, on account of the heat). Th. 2, 85. virb avefxwv Kal virb 
airXoias ivBierpupzv ovk bxiyov %p6vov (on account of the winds, etc.). "Tir' 
avdyKi]s (from necessity). "Tirb /x4^r)s fialveaSrai, PI. 'Tirb piyovs. Her 
1, 85. virb 8 e ovs KaX ko. kov (pwv^v cpp7j|e (spoke from fear and grief ). So 
virb x a P" s J (p&ovov, bpyr]S, aire iplas, cr w<p p ocr v vt] s, a<p pocrvvris, etc 
'") Her. 7. 21. Hopvaaov virb p.aariy<av (dug under the lash, that being the 



$ bUO.] prepositions. — t Y7ro. 445 

means) ; also of persons : 9, 98. virb KijpvKos irporiy6peve (under the help of the 
herald, i. e. praeconis voce) ; particularly of the accompaniment of musical in- 
struments, e. g. Her. 1, 17. iaTpaTeveTO virb a aXiriyy (av. So vif avXov 
Xopevetv, virb cpop/xi yyav, virb t v jait dv cov, etc. 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote a quiet 
rest under an object ; — (2) causal and figurative : (a) to denote, 
the author (almost exclusively poetic, see § 251, Rem. 4); (b) 
to denote the means, as with the Gen., but only Poet. ; (c) to 
denote subjection. 

(1) 'Tirb yrj thai; with mountains, at the foot of, e. g. virb Tfi(i>\a> (at the 
foot of Tmolus). 'Tirb r <£ 'T fir) cr crw. (2) (a) Aa/u,^aL vir6 tivi, iriirretv 
vir6 tivi (to be conquered by one, etc.), Horn, (b) 'Tirb Papfiirca x°P*vsiv, 
v7r' avX§, etc. (to dance to or by the music of the lyre), (c) Tloielir ti vtt6 tivi 
(to subject something to one), and iroieTafrul ti v<p' eavT<£ (to subject something to 
one's self, sibi subjicere). Her. 7, 157. t\v 'EAXada inr' ewvraj iroi7)o~a<T&ai. Th. 
1, 110. A'tyviTTos virb fia(ri\ei iyevero (was under the power of the king). X. 
Cy. 8. 8, 1. Kvpos rovs iKp' eavrcp wsirep eavrou ircudas iri/xa (those subject to 
him). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote the 
aim, direction or motion toivards and under ; (b) extension under 
an object; — (2) of time: (a) in an indefinite specification of 
time (approach to a point of time) ; (b) extension in time 
(during) ; — (3) causal, to denote subjection. 

(1) (a) 'leW. virb yr\v (to go under). X. An. 1. 10, 14. virb avrbu (rbv 
\6<pov) CT^trcu; t6 (TTpareUjUa ire/j.irei Avkiov. (b) Her. 2, 127. vireari olKri/xara 
virb yr\v (art under the earth). 5. 10. ra virb t^v dpKTOv aoiKvra Soxeei 
elvcu (the parts beneath the north pole). X. An. 7. 4, 5. iv reus virb rb opos K&- 
fiais. (2) (a) 'Tirb vvkto. (sub noctem, towards); virb tt\v irpc&T-nv eireA- 
Sovo-av vvkto,; so also vir6 ti (aliquatenus, in some measure), (b) Her. 9, 51. 
virb T-)]v vvkto (during). (3) X. Cy. 1. 5, 3. (6 'Aaa-vptcov fia<riAebs) Sicnre/i- 
irei irpos t<= tovs x>($> eavTbv irdvTas, Kal irpbs Kpolffov. 6.2. 11. 6 cvXKoyos 
twu vnb /3 a a i A e a fiapfidpoov. 



$ 300. Remarks on Peculiarities in the use of the 
Prepositions. 

1. The proper prepositions were originally (except ws, to) adverbs of plac« 
(§ 286, Rem. 2), i. e. they denote the local relation of an action ; in this way 
nearly all are very often used in the Homeric language. This use is also fre- 
quent in Herodotus, but in good Attic prose, only irpbs 8e, k<z\ irp6s, praeterea 

38 



446 SYNTAX. [$ 300 

Od. £ 40. iroXXbv yap airb irXvuoi elci irSXrjos. t, 116 — 118. vr\ffos — rerd- 
vvarai vXrjecra, ev 8' alyes aireipecriai yeydacriv dypiai. Also in Her., e. g. 3, 39. 
ev 8e §)] Kal Aevfiiovs eTAe (among them, i. e. in lis). II. c, 562. fxeXaves 8' avb 
86rpves f)(Tav (grapes were thereon). Od. i, 184. irepl 8' auA^ vx^-nX^ SeS^ro /ca- 
rwpvxeecra-i Xi&oiaiv. a, 66. 'os 7r e p 1 ,uez/ j/<W eV-rl Bporuv (he is beyond, i. e. eminent 
above). £-, 44. to3 7ap pa fte&y we pi daJKev aotfirjv (in a special manner, especially). 
II. <r, 529. KTtivov 8' e7ri iir\Xo&oTripas (in addition, besides). Also not rare in 
Her., eiri 8 e (thereupon, tain); per a 8e (posfca), Her.; irpos ye, irpbs 8e 
very common from Homer downward, also in Attic poetry and prose. 

Remark 1. Sometimes two prepositions stand together in poetry, most fre- 
quently in Epic, the first of which always has an adverbial meaning, but the sec- 
ond may be connected as a preposition with the Case of a substantive. A to ir p 6 
(through and out) : II. p, 393. rdwrai Se re iraara (Boei-n) Sia irpo. 'A fxcp I ire pi 
(round about). Od. A, 608. a/xcpl irepl arii^eaaiv. 11. <p, 10. ox&cu 8' aficpl 
ire pi /j.eyd\' ?ax<>v. B, 305. a(x<pl irepl Kpjjvnv. UapeK (with the Gen. near 
to, with the Ace. near by, along by), e. g. Od. i, 116. irape k Xifievos. p., 276. 
&AAa 7rape| tt}V vrjerov eXavvere vrja fieXaivav. Hap eh, (as a Paroxytone) often 
in Her. with the meaning besides, e. g. 3, 91. irdpe£ tov apyvpiov. 'TireK 
(from under, out from under), in Homer; also Her. 3, 116. Xeyerai vireK tSov 
ypvwoov apird^eiv 'Api/naairovs (sc. rbv xP V(T ov). 'Air oirpb (pepeiv, II. ir, 669, 679. 
lie pi irpb. II. A, 180. irepl irpb yap eyx^X &vev (around and before) . 

Rem. 2. Also the improper prepositions e v e k a and x & P lv > though very 
seldom, are connected with the proper prepositions, as in Eng. on account of, for 
the sake of, airb fiorjs eveica (for the cry's sake). Lys. Evandr. 793. 7repi rS>v 
ev oAryapx'? ap^durwv ev e k e v . 

2. Since pi-epositions in composition retain their original meaning as ad- 
verbs of place, and as the older language habitually uses the prepositions as 
adverbs of place, it follows of course, that the ancient language often employs 
the simples, and separates the preposition as an adverb from the verb, where 
the Attic writers regularly use the compounds. The two following instances 
must be distinguished : — 

(a) Tliose instances where the preposition is separated from the verb. II. 7, 34. 
vir6 re rpSfios eAAa/3e yv7a. y, 135. irapa. 8' eyx^a H-o-Kpa ir e ir tj 7 e v. 8, 
63. e'7rl 8' etyovrai &eol &XX01. 8, 161. en re Kal otfe reAe?. &, 108. ovs 
('lirirovs) wot air Alveiav eXo^rfV (eXev&ai rivd ri, II. 7r, 56). 

Rem. 3. Here belongs, especially, an abridged mode of expression, where 
several sentences follow each other, which consists in using the compound, 
which should stand in each sentence, only in the first, while in the others 
the preposition merely is repeated, e. g. II. \p, 799. Kara, ixev SoXlx^otkiov eyxos 
3-^/c' is ay u>va (pepwv, Kara 8' acririda Kal rpvcpaXeiav. Often also in Her., 
e. g. 8, 33. Kara fxev e Kav<r av Apv/xbv irSXiv, Kara 8e Xapddp-nv (where, how- 
ever, the first may be taken as Tmesis. See Rem. 4). 

Rem. 4. In the later periods of the language, and particularly in the Attic 
writers, the prepositions are so closely connected with the verbs, that both 
mingle and form one whole. It is only from this time that there is what may 
be properly called Tmesis, i. e. the separation of a verb, by means of one or 
more intervening words, from the preposition in connection with which it forms 
one whole or one idea. The Tmesis of compound verbs is found somewhat 
often in Her. ; also in Pindar, and in other poets, seldom in the Attic poets in 
the lyric choral songs, and still more seldom in the dialogue ; but when it does 
occur, only a particle comes between the two parts of a word, so that the unity 



f 300.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF PREPOS TIONS. 44? 

of the idea is not destroyed. Her. 7, 15. Uepfrs dvd re eopape e/c rrjs Kolrrii 
Kai irepurei dyyeAov. 8, 89. dirb p.\v e&oct 6 aTparr]y6s. Eur. Iph. Aul. 1365 
Si 'dp' oAdoAapiev. The Attic prose remains free from this license, with a few 
special exceptions, e. g. Th. 3, 13. p.)] £bv kcikws iroielv avrovs p.er 'Ab-nvaiwv, 
aAAa £vve\ev&€povv (so as to make the contrast emphatic). PI. Gorg. 520, e 
avr' e§ 7T o i e? v and et e3 iroi'fjo'as ravrriv rrjv evepyeaiav avr ev irelceTot. 
PI. Phaedr. 237, a. £u/a p.oi \dfiecr&z rod p.v&ov (take part). 

(b) Those instances where the preposition is separated from the Case of its sub- 
stantive. Here also, throughout Homer, the preposition exhibits its original 
adverbial meaning, and belongs to the verb ; the verb and the adverbial prepo- 
sition together, form one verbal idea, and this, not the preposition alone, gov- 
erns the Case. II. e, 292. rov S" dirb p.ev yAaxro-av rdp.e (Gen. of separation), 
i, 382. irAe?0Ta 5 6 p. o is iv KT-fipara /ceZYai (lies within the house), o, 266. a p. (pi 
Se x°" Tal &P-ois crfatrovTou, on the shoulders about (local Dative), ir, 291. iv 
yap UdrpoKKos <p6fiou 7]Kev 'diracriv, he cast fear into all (Dat. of limit or aim, 
§ 284, Eem. 1). So the Ace. denoting local aim or object (§277). II. &, 115. 
T« 8' els d/Kporepw Aiop.T}Seos app.ct.Ta $i\Tt\v (entered the chariot). Ace. of the 
object receiving an action (§ 279): II. j8, 156. 'A & rj v a I rj v "Hp-q irpbs p.v&ov 
Henrev (addressed, spoke to Athene). 

Rem. 5. In the second case (b), a Tmesis is admitted only when mere par 
tides, like p.4\v, 8e, re, pd, ydp, dp, 8' &pa, come between the ;p reposition and the 
Case of the substantive, — a very frequent usage of the post- Homeric period, 
and even in the Attic writers. Comp. Rem. 4. 

3. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, particularly of the Homeric language, 
that it often connects prepositions followed by the Dat., with verbs which ex- 
press the direction whither ; and, on the other hand, prepositions followed by 
the Ace, with verbs whose signification presupposes a quiet resting in a place 
or object. This construction arises from' a blending of two ideas, since the 
speaker either conceives and expresses, along with the moment of motion, the 
moment of the rest which succeeds ; or along with the moment of rest, the moment 
of motion which precedes. Hence this may be called the pregnant Construction. 

(a) The wb of motion involves the idea of the rest which succeeds, when preposi' 
tions with the Dat. stand instead of prepositions with the Ace. The moment of 
rest (the relation to the continuing result of the action) must then be regarded 
as the predominant one. The principle above stated holds with the following 
prepositions : — 

With iv, particularly in the Epic language. II. e, 370. rj 8 5 iv yovracri 
7r I it re Aic&vns 8T 'Acppo^irr] (she fell on her knees, and then lay on her knees). Od. 
a, 200. iyk p.avrev(rop.ai, ws ivl &vp.q> aSdvaroi fidWovd. II. A, 743. 
yjpnre 8' iv Kovir\(Tiv (fell into the dust and lay there). In prose, n&evai 
iv x*P a '' lv like the Latin, ponere et collocare in manibus. X. H. 4. 5, 5. first: 
is 8e rb "Upaiov Kar4(pvyov y and then 01 8' iv rep 'Hpala KaTaireQevySres 
H-yeo'av (those who had fed and were then in the Heraeum). PI. Eutliyd. 292, e. 
iv rairrj rrj airopia iveireirr&Keiv. (Caes. B. G. 5, 10. naves in littore 
ejectas esse. Sail. Jug. 5. in amicitia receptus). — Also with dp. (pi and ire pi 
with the Dat. instead of the Ace. II. A, 17. Kvnp.7Sas p.hv irpoora ire pi Kvb prj- 
(Tiv HdnjKev (he put the greaves around his legs, so that then they set fast to them). 
Od. &, 434. dp.<pl irvpl (rrrjarai rplrroda. With iiri: 11. a, 55. i(p yho 



448 SYNTAX. [* 300 

iiri <Ppeo~\ &7)Ke $ea KevK(a\evos "Upr] (like iu <ppeo~\ &e7vai). With it pits' 
Od. t, 284. via (xev fxoi Karea^e TlocreiSdoov ivoaixSw, irpbs ireTprjo'i fSa\d'v. 
289. o~vv Se Svw /xdptyas, oSstc anvXaKas, ttotI yairj k6itt€. So fid We if 
irorl yalrj. — With iiiro, in prose, in the phrases, viro tivi yiyveffbai (to 
come under the power of any one, and continue under his power) ; -rroieiv t i vir6 
rtvi (alicui aliquid subjicere)] Troiela&ai v<fi eavTcp [sibi subjicere. § 299,11, 
(2) (c)]. 

Rem. 6. In the following and like examples from Homer, the Dat., without 
doubt, expresses the relation of aim or object: x^P as IdWeiv iiri aircv, ^/cot jSeAos 
iiri tivi, ire/Aipou bveipov iiri tivi, iXavveiv 'iirirovs iiri vrjvaiv, TiTaiveo~&ai r6^a iiri 
Tivi, aWeoSai iiri tivi, /xdxea^ai iiri tivi, ireTeoSai eV &v&eo~iv. See § 284. 
Rem. 1. 

(b) The verb expressing rest involves the idea of the motion which precedes, when 
the preposition e I s stands with the Ace, instead of the preposition i v with the Dat. 
The moment of the preceding motion must then be regarded as predominant. 

II. o, 275. itpdvi} \7s els 6 Soy (came into the road and appeared). Her. 4, 
14. (pavTJvai is TlpOKSvvno'ov. Eur. Iph. T. 620. aAA* els avdyKt]v nei- 
He&a (to come into and to be in). Her. 3, 62. irporjySpeve ffras is fiecov refc 
ivTeTaXfjiiva { placing himself in the midst and there standing). Very frequent in 
prose is irape7vai els tottov Tivd (to have come to a place, and to be present 
there) ; comp. " he is in church, in town, or on the land," in which the idea of 
previous motion is necessarily supposed. X. An. 1. 2, 2. irapriaav els 'Zdp- 
Seis (came to Sardis and were there). Her. 8, 60. is t))v 'S.aXafxIva vireic- 
KeiTat vfuv TeKva re kcu yvvouK.es (to carry to Salamis and leave there in safety). 
PI. Rp. 468, a. tov CcavTa els Tobs iroXefiiovs a.\6vTa, i. e. els tovs 
iro\efj.iovs irear6vTa a\ccvai. 

(c) Verbs signifying to hang, to attach to, to suspend, etc., as Kpe/xavvvvai, avap- 
tclv, in-, Kara-, avaSe7v, avdirTeiv, alwpe7o~&at, are connected with the prepositions 
air 6 and e/c (as in Lat. with ab and ex), in order to express, together with 
the idea of suspending anything to a place, the idea of hanging down from or 
depending from a place. 

Od. $-, 67. KaB 8' it ir ao~ o~ a\6<p i Kpe/xao~ev <p6pjxiyya \iyeiav (he hung the 
lyre on the peg, so tha^ it then hung down from it). X. H. 4. 4, 10. Uao-ifiaxos 
kolt aSrjaas airb devSpccv tovs 'Iirirovs fj.eTa twv i&eKovToov -pel ivavTiov to7s 
'Apyelois (having fastened the horses to the trees). X. C. 3. 10, 13. frebpaxes e« 
t 5>v &p.wv Kpe fxdfie voi (hanging upon the shoulders and depending from them ) . 
So avaprav ti etc tivos. Her. 4. lO. e/c twj/ £co o~tt) pa v (popelv <pid\as (on the 
girdles, so that the bowls hung down). In poetry, this usage is very widely 
extended. See Larger Grammar, II. § 622, (c). 

Rem. 7. Adverbs of place, as well as prepositions, are sometimes used in a 
pregnant sense : (a) adverbs denoting rest instead of those denoting the direc- 
tion whither. S. Trach. 40. Kelvos S' '6irov (instead of '6troi, quo) fie fir] Key, 
ovdels olSe (no one knows where [whither] he has gone). X. H. 7. 1,25. 6irov 
/3ovAr)&e?ev i£e\&e?v. — (b) adverbs expressing the direction whither, instead 
of adverbs expressing the relation where. Eur. H F. 74. iro7 iraT^p &ireo~T i 
yrjs ; 1157. iro? ko.kwv ipr)/j.iav evpos ; (quo me vertam, nt requiem inveniam?). 
Arist. Av. 9. '6iroi yr^s iff/xev ; (whither [where] are we?). Dem. Chers. 102, 50. 
tto? avaSvo/Ae&a; (quo nos vertamus, ut perniciem vitemus?). Phil. 1. 51, 40. 
6 irXrjyels ae\ Trjs TrXrjyris e^erou, Kay erepoxre iraTdty tis, i ice iff 4 elffiv at X*?P €S ' 

(4) A second peculiarity in the construction of prepositions is, when the 
article (alone or with a substantive) in connection with a preposition and it« 



$ 300,1 PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF PREPOSITIONS. 449 

Case, has a substantive idea, and when the preposition eV, which expresses the 
relation where only in the most general manner, should be used, this preposition 
is changed either into air 6 and i k or into e I s, attracted, as it were, by the 
verb, expressed or understood, which denotes either the direction whence or 
whither. This construction may be called the attraction of prepositions : — 

(a) 'Air 6 and e/c instead of iv, or tt a pa with the Gen. instead of irapd 
with the Dat. Ot e'/c rrjs ay op as dv^pwiroi airicpvyov (instead of ol iv 
r fj ayopif &v&pwiroi airecpvyov e/c ttjs ay o pas (those in the agora fled FROM it). 
X. H. 4. 6, 4. irdvres ol e'/c rwv aypwv ^AKapyaves ecpvyov is ret &o~T7} (in- 
stead of irdvres ol iv rots ay pots eepvyov e'/c rwv aypwv is to oVttj). Th. 
1, 18. ol e'/c rrjs aWrjs 'EWaSos (rvpavvoi) vnb AaKe^aifJ.ovlwv Kare\v- 
&r)<rav. 3.22. rjoSrovro ol e/c r&v -wvpywv (pvAatces (the guards upon the 
towers perceived it from the towers). 7, 70. ol airb rwv Karaarr pw/xdr wv 
rots aKovTioLS ixp&vro (those upon the decks used their darts from the decks). 
PI. Apol. 32, b. v(j.z?s robs 5e'/ca ar parriy obs robs ovk av e\o jjl iv ov s robs e'/c 
T7js vav jxax't-a-s i&ovXea&e a&p6ovs Kpiveiv (you wished to condemn all at once 
the ten commanders in the naval battle, who did not carry off the dead from it). 
Phaed. 109, e. ol e'/c rrjs &a\drrr}s tx&ves av aKvivrovr es (the fish in 
the sea coming up out of it). Pern. Phil. 3. 114, 15. robs e/c l,eppiov rel- 
Xovs arparidras e £e'/3 a \ev. X. An. 1. 1, 5. ostls 8' acpLKVolr o rwv trap a 
&ao~iAews irpbs avrov (instead of rwv irapa. fSao-iXel ovrwv irapa fiaa-i\4as 

(KplKVOlTo). 

Eem. 8. The same principle of attraction holds, also, with adverbs of 
place, e. g. iKelSrev and evSo&ev instead of e/ce? and evdov. Dem. 01. 3. 13, 15. 
ayvoei rbv e'/cei&ei/ Tr6\e/j.ov Sevpo rj^ovra. X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. 'Iva T\o~aov to oif/ca8« 
iro&oir). See Larger Grammar, II. § 622, Rem. 2. 

(b) Els instead of iv (far more seldom). Her. 2, 150. e\eyov ol iirixwpioi, 
&s is r^v ~%vprw r)]v is Ai^urjv i /cS i8o? r] Xifivr] avr-n virb yrjv (empties into 
the Syrtis which is in Lybia). X. H. 1. 7, 29. ""Epao-tvidris (iKeAevev) iwl robs is 
M irvK-hvnv iroKe/xiovs rr)v raxlo-rf\v irKeiv airavras (against the enemies in 
Mitylene). 

5. On the repetition and omission of prepositions, the following things are 
to be noted : — 

(a) In a series of coordinate substantives, the preposition is either repeated 
before each single substantive, when each single idea is to be considered sep- 
arately and is to be made emphatic, or when the contrast or difference between 
the ideas is to be denoted, e. g. PL Tim. 18, c. Kara re irSXejxov Kal Kara, tijv 
&A\7)v diairav ; or the preposition is placed only before the first substantive, and 
omitted with the others, when the ideas are meant to express one whole,, 
whether they are of the same kind or different, e. g. X. C. 1. 4, 17. ire pi rwt 
eVduSe Kal ire pi rwv iv Alyvirr w /cot iv 'SiKeXia (ppovri£eiv (instead of 
Kal 7repl rwv iv "XiKeXia). 2. 1, 6. ayv/j.vdo'Tws exew ir p 6 s re ipvxv xa\ 
§d\irr). X. II. 1. 1, 3. d7ro re t«i/ vewv Kal rijS yijs. PI. Phaed. 99, 
a. ^ 7rept Me'yapa ^ Bo iwrov s. 

(b) When a substantive connected with a preposition, is followed by a rela- 
ative pronoun standing in the same relation with the substantive, the preposition 
in prose is often repeated before the relative, but more frequently omitted : 
PL Symp. 213, c. air' e/cetVou rod xp^ov, a^ ov rovrov r\pdo-^T]i. X. Hier. 1, 

38* 



450 SYNTAX. [$ 300. 

11. ol idiwrai (cives) epxovTai els ir6\eis, as av fiovAwvTai, SreaixaWuv evena. X 
S. 4, 1. iv t$ xptvy, V "/*»*' wove*). (Comp. in Latin Cic. Fin. 4, 20. Zeno negal 
Platoncm, si sapiens non sit, eadem esse in causa, qua tyrannum Dionysium). 

(c) The preposition is very often omitted in questions and answers, e. g. PL 
Soph. 243, d. irepl Se tov fieyiffTov re teal apxnyov irpcbrov vvv ffKeitTeov. 
Theact. Tivos 57? \4yeis; X. S. 5, 5, olff&a ovv, e(prj, 6(p^a\fxuv tivos even a 
deopcefra ; AtjAoj', e<pi], '6tl tov Spav. 

(d) The preposition is commonly omitted with a word in apposition. X 
An. 5. 5, 3. ol "EWrjtes acplnovTO els KoTvccpa, iroAiv 'E A A 77 W 5 a. Comp. 4. 
8, 22. 5. 3, 2. 6. 2, 1. But when a greater emphasis rests upon the word in ap- 
position, as is particularly the case, when it is used to explain a preceding 
pronoun, then the preposition is regularly repeated. X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. (<pi\lav 
Xafiois av) irap eiceivcav, olfiai, e<pi), irapa tuv firfdeirore iroXefxtcov yeyevT]/j.e- 
vwv (you might acquire friendship from those who have never been enemies). PL 
Prot. 358, h. al eirl tovtov irpd^eis airaffai, eirl rod a\v7rccs £rjv teal ydeas, 
ap ov Kakai ; (all the actions pertaining to this, viz., the living without grief are they 
not praiseworthy ?) ; also in clauses expressing comparison, subjoined by ws, 
wsirep, the preposition may he either omitted or repeated. PL Rp. 330, c. 
ire pi Ta xp"ht xara ffirov8d£ovffiv, w s epyov eavTwv. PL it a p 7) pas <poiT^s y 
us nap a. <pi\ovs. But when the member expressing the comparison pre- 
cedes the other, the preposition stands with the first member only, if the parti- 
cle of comparison is ws ; but the preposition is repeated, if it is &sir ep. PL 
Rp. 1. 4, 14, e. 5e? as irepl /j.T)Tpbs ual Tpocpov rris x&P as o./xvveiv (i. e. irepl 
Trjs x^P as )- 2L Cy. 1. 6, 4. ws irpbs (piAovs ovTas fxoi toxjs Sreobs o\!>tw 
diaKeiixai. — PL Phaed. 82, e. (rj xpvxv avayKa(eTai) &sirep St' elpyfiov Sia 
tov cdifiaTOS fficoireTff&ai to. ovTa. 

6. The natural position for prepositions is directly before their substantive, 
or before the attributive belonging to a substantive, e. g. irpbs tov 'dvdpa, irpbs 
rbv o~o<pbv dvdpa. But this position is often changed in the following instances : — 

(a) When a particle follows the substantive, as ye, /xev, yap, fiev yip, 5e, oh, 
also fiev ovv, av, nai, etiam, toIvw, laws, also ol/xai used as an adverb ; these 
small words often come between the preposition and the substantive, e. g. It 
/xev elpr)vrj, ev /xev yap elprjvrj. 

(b) The preposition irp6s in oaths and exclamations is separated from ita 
substantive. Soph. O. C. 1333. irpSs vvv ffe Kp-nveav, irobs &e£>v 6/xoyvlwj, 
oItqi iri&eo-&ai. So in Latin, per te deos oro. 

(c) The preposition sometimes follows its substantive, though it then is sub- 
ject to anastrophe ; in Attic prose, this takes place only with irepl when con 
nected with the Gen., but here it is very frequent. PL Rp. 469, b. irpurov fxh 
avS pair oh iff ixo v ire pi; it is also separated by other words. Her. 6, 101 
tovtov o~(pi efxe\e irepl. PL Apol. 19, C. wv eyib ovdev ovre fxeya ovre ctuih 
obv ire pi eiraiu. See § 31, IV. 



W 301, 302.] pronouns. 45j 

CHAPTER IV. 

§ 301. The Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, At- 
tribute, and Object. 

The subject, predicate, attribute, and object are expressed 
by pronouns, when these members of a sentence are not 
designed to represent objects or qualities themselves, but 
when it is to be denoted merely, that an object refers either 
to the speaker himself, or to the person addressed, or to 
another person or thing. 

2. All the rules which have been given on the substan- 
tive and adjective, apply also to substantive and adjective 
pronouns ; still, some remarks are here subjoined on the 
use of the pronouns. 

$ 302. I. Personal Pronouns. 

The substantive personal pronouns, as the subject (in the 
Nom.) : eyw, arc, fjixds, etc., and also the adjective (posses- 
sive) pronouns, as attributives, e. g. i^bs irarrjp, are used in 
Greek, as in Latin, only when they are specially emphatic; 
hence particularly in antitheses, but also, for the sake of per- 
spicuity, e. g. Kat av ravra en-pa^as. Kat 6 cros 7rarr]p ajri^avcv. 
'Eyo> fxkv airtLfu, av Be fxive. But where this is not the case 
they are omitted, and the substantive pronouns are expressed 
by the endings of the verb, and the adjective (possessive) pro- 
nouns, by the article prefixed to the substantive, e. g. Tpd<fm), 
ypa<^et5. C H /xrjTrjp et7re /jlol (my mother). Ot yov€L<s arepyovai 
ra TtKva (their children). 

Remark 1. The distinction between the accented and the enclitic forms of 
the personal pronouns, e. g. ipov and pov, etc. (§ 87), lies in the greater or less 
emphasis with which they are pronounced in discourse. Thus, the accented 
forms are always employed, for example, in antitheses, e. g. i/j.ov fihu /careye- 
\aae, o-e Se 4iryt/e<rev. — The personal pronouns are often used instead of the 
reflexive (No. *2). On the use of the Gen. of the substantive instead of the 
adjective (possessive) pronouns, see Rem. 4. On an appositive in the Gen. 
joined with a possessive pronoun, e. g. rj/xeTepos abruv narrip, see § 266, 2. 

Rem. 2. The adjective personal pronouns more commonly have a subjective or 
*ct*ve sense, e.g. e^ PovX-f] (my counsel, i.e. one which I originate, not one which 



452 SYNTAX. [$ 30£ 

relates to me) but sometimes they take the place of the objective Gen. and then 
have an objective or passive sense. Od. \, 201. <rbs irSfros, a desire for the« 
(like Ter. Heaut. II. 3, 66. desiderio tuo instead of tui). X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. 
tvvo'ia Kal <pi\ia rfj gjxrj (benevolentia et amove mei, from good will and love TO me) 

2. The reflexive pronouns always refer to something already 
named, to the Subject or Object, since the person or thing to 
which the reflexive refers, stands in contrast with itself as an 
object or attribute: — 

(a) In relation to the subject : 'O crocpbs kavrov Kparei. 2u a eavr if ap'f- 
K€is. 'O irais eavrbv eiraivel. Ol yoveis ayair&ai rovs kavruv iraTdas. 
rV<£&i a eavr 6 v. Ouros b avrip irdvra 8i eavr ov fAe/AcL&rjKev. 'O o~rpari\ybs 
virb rwv kavrov arpaTiaruu aire&avev. 

(b) In relation to an object of the sentence : X. Cy. 1. 1, 4. Kvpos Sn^ey/ce 
Twv &Wwv fiao- 1\ ecov, rS>v apxas 5i kavrS>v KT-r\(Ta(j.4v(cv.- Ay. Nub. 384. 
hrb aavrov iyw tr« 8t5a|co (per te ipsum). 

(3) The reflexive pronouns may also be used in Greek, as in 
Latin, in the construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive 
and of the Participle ; also in such subordinate clauses as stand 
in a close relation to the principal clause, particularly in clauses 
expressing design, and in dependent interrogative clauses, as 
well as in all other subordinate clauses which do not contain 
the sentiment of the speaker, but the sentiment of the subject 
of the principal sentence. Also in this case the reflexive 
refers either to the subject or to an object. When the subject 
of the principal clause and the subject of the subordinate 
clause (or of the Inf.), are different, the reflexive may refer 
either to the former or to the latter, its particular reference 
being determined only from the context. In the cases men- 
tioned under this rule, the English often uses the personal 
pronouns him, her, it, etc. instead of the reflexive. 

'O t 6 paw o s VOfxlfa robs iroKiras vir-nperelv kavrcp. X. Cy. 1. 1, 5. Ta>v 
ehuoov ruvrcw i)p£ev (Kvpos) ov& kavrcp ojxoyKoorrwv ourrav, ovre ctAAVjAois. 
C. 1. 2, 8. eiricrreve (2 co k p a r rj s) rcov £vi>6vrwv kavrw robs airode£afj.evovs, 
tiiirep avrbs edoKi/jLa^ev, els rbu iravra fiiov kavrcp Te Kal a\\i)\ois (pikovs ayaSrobs 
eaecrSai. 52. 6 narriyopos ecpr) rbu 2ai k pdrrju avairei&ovra rovs veovs, ws avrbs 
elrf ao'panaros re Kal &AAovy iKavdiraros iroiriaai ffocpovs, ovrca diari&evai robs 
eavr to avv6vras, wsre /j.7)da/j.ov Trap' avrols robs aWovs eluai irpbs eavr 6 v (in 
comparison with him). Th. 2, 92. ra vavdyia, ova irpbs rfj kavriav (yrj) i\v, avei- 
\ovro (= Ta vavdyia ra irpbs rfj eavr wu yfj ovra). Her. 8, 24. oaoi gov arparoi 
rod kavrov i)arav veKpol e^ra^e. Comp. the examples in Rem. 3. 



«" 302.] pronouns. 4f53 

4. On the contrary, the oblique Cases of the pronoun avros, 
-Yj, -6. viz., anoS, -yjs, avrw, -rj, olvtov, r)v, -o, avTihv, or even 
those of a demonstrative pronoun, are universally employed, 
when an object does not stand in contrast with itself, but 
with another object, e. g. 6 irarr]p aura) {to him, the son) c'Scokc 
to /3l/3\lov. Srepyco olvtov {him). 'A7re^o/xat olvtov {from him). 
The pronoun avrov, etc. is merely the personal pronoun of the 
third person, but is much weaker than the demonstrative 
ovto?; wherefore, it does not, like ovtos, usually stand first in a 
sentence. 

Eem. 3. The personal pronoun ov, of, etc. has commonly a reflexive sense 
in the Attic winters (but, in the Ion. writers and in the poets, also the meaning 
of the personal pronoun). But it is regularly employed, only when the reflex- 
ive relation has respect, not to the nearest subject, but to the remoter one. It 
is in general much more freely used than the compound reflexive, since it is 
also employed where the connection with the principal clause is much looser, e. g. 
'O rvpavvos vofiiC^i tovs iroXiras vir-opzTziv ol (but not 6 Tvpavvos x a P' L C eTa ' 1 ol). 
X. An. 7. 5, 9. 'HpaKXcidrjs elsayayuv robs &XXovs o-Tparriyovs irpbs 'Snev&T]!' X4yeiv 
eweAeuef avrobs, '6ri ovZ\v av i)TT0V o~<pe?s aydyoiev i7\v crrparidv, % "Eevo<pS>u 
(SE ducturos esse). Th. 5, 73. ol 'A&r)va?ot us i^eKXtvep (6 "Ay is) enrb atpcop 
rb (Trpdrevfia, Ka& ^avyiav icrca&rjo'ap. 6, 32. j-vpeirei>xovTO Kal 6 &XXos, OfitXos, 
twu T€ ttoXitwp Kal e? Tis dXXos evpovs iraprjp acpicri. Even after ydp, e. g. X. II. 
1. 7, 5. oi crrpar-qyol fipax^a etccurros aireXoyrjo-aTO • ov yap Trpovre&r} a (pic i \6yos 
Kara rbv pS/jlop. But Thucydides and some later writers use it, also, in relation 
to the nearest subject, e. g. Th. 7, 5. 6 rvXnriros eretx'C 6 T0 ? s *-&ois XP^^ V0S ^ 
ovs ol 'A 3- i]v a 7oi TrpoTrapefiaXopTo cr<pio~iv. The forms ol, acplo-i and atpas 
have sometimes also the meaning of personal pronouns : of, him, her (e. g. X. 
Cy. 3. 2, 26) ; <r<pi<ri, to them (e. g. X. II. 6. 5,35) ; <r<pas, them, e.g. Th. 5, 49), 
when the object to which they refer, is more important in respect to the sense, 
than the subject of the sentence. Still, it is to be remarked in relation to the 
use of this pronoun, that in place of it with a reflexive sense, the compound 
reflexive k avrov, -rj s, etc. is commonly employed; and in place of it with 
the sense of the Pers. pronoun third person, the corresponding forms of avr6s 
are used by the Attic writers. The form ov (ov) is used in prose only in PI. 
Symp. 174, d. Ep. 617, b. 617, e.; e (4) 327, b. 617, e. Symp. 175, a. c. 233, 
b. ; ol occurs far oftener (seldom accented of), and o~<pe?s, cripeop, o~<pio~i, 
o-<pas, somewhat often. 

5. In the instances mentioned under No. 3, the correspond- 
ing forms of airo's are very frequently used instead of the 
reflexive pronoun ; this is always the case where a member of a 
sentence or a suborinate clause is not the expression or senti- 
ment of the person to whom the pronoun refers, but the senti- 
uent of the speaker (writer). 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. (Ot iroXe/xioi) tv&vs a<p-f]0~ovo-i tV Xeiau, ineidau %Za>ci rivas eV 
auToiij iXavpopras (contra Se). C. 4. 7, 1. TV eavrov ypcv/ATjp airecpaivero ~Xcok- 
odrrjs irpbs tovs dfiiXovpras a«rf Apol. 33. (twKpdrr}s) zyvw rod in (r)P rb 
r&vdvai avr <£ Kpe7rrop elvai. 



454 syntax. f? 302. 

6. In compound reflexive pronouns, the pronoun avros eithei 
retains its exclusive force, or loses it, i. e. it is sometimes em- 
phatic, and sometimes not. 

(a) Isocr. Panath. 16, 242. SiKaiov ecrn cpiXovs fxev iroieiabai robs dfxoiws ah- 
toj* re (or <r(f>i<ri re avroTs) Kal ro?s &XXois XP W I X ^ V0VS ^ (po/3e?o~&cu fie Kal 
SsSievai robs irpbs <r<pas fxev avr ovs (or e avr ovs) olKei6rara SiaKei/xevojs, 
npbs Se robs &Wovs aWorptws (se ipsis and se ipsos). Th. 4, 102. eiroiKons 
rcpwv re avrwv Kal rwv aXXwv rbv fiovXofxevov irep^avres. 1, 60. ire/xirovo-n 
eavrwv re e&eAovras Kal rwv aXXwv HeXoirovvno-'iwv jxurhcp ireiaavres. 8, 8. i(p' 
eavrwv dievoovvro aXXw aroXw irXeiv (soli per se). The Nom. avr6s is some- 
times added to strengthen this exclusive or emphatic force (comp. in Lat. Cut a 
se ipse interemit), e. g. PI. Phaed. 94, e. ofjre yap av 'Op.-f]pw o/xoXoyoi/xev, ovre 
avrol 7}fx?v avTols. — (b) Ot crrpariwrai irapelxov eavrobs (or <r(pas 
avrobs) avdpetordrovs (se). Th. 7, 82. irapedocav oi irdvres <r<pas avr ovs (or 
I avr ovs) (se). 

Rem. 4. The reflexive possessives are either t^wd alone, e. g. Dem. c. Nicostr. 

4, 1250. tu>v \pr\ii.dr'j}v col twv e/xwv Kixpyfu» c. Nausim. 11, 993. fiiKaiorepov 
8-fjirov ra i) /xerepa ijfxas eariv %X elv > % rovrovs. C. Boeot. 2, 1010. v/xe?s airav- 
res robs v/xer e povs iraiSas ayairare. Ot iroX7rai to o~<perepa trw^eiv eireipwv- 
ro; or with the addition of the Gen. of avr 6s according to § 266, 2; or in- 
stead of the possessives, the Gen. of the compound substantive-reflexive is 
used ; indeed in Prose, this is uniformly the case with the Sing, (mine, thine, his, 
thus 6 e fxavT ov, a eavr ov, eavrov iraryp, and not 6 ejxbs avrov, 6 o~bs avrov 
Trarrip, which last mode of expression is found only in poetry), and with the 
third Pers. PL, it is more frequent than the possessive : but the possessives are 
commonly used when the pronoun is plural (our, your), except in the third 
Person. Hence as follows : — 

5. rbv e/xavrov (o'eavrov, eavrov) irarepa not rbv e/xbv (o~bv) avrov it. 
ryv e/xavrov (o'eavrov, eavrov) [ATjrepa not r)]V efxyv (crjv) avrov (x. 
ro?s e/xavrov (aeavrov, eavrov) Xoyois not rots e/xo?s (croTs) avrov X. 

P. rbv y/xerepov avrwv irarepa very rare rbv e/xwv avraiv it. 

ri]v v/xerepav avrwv /xr/repa very rare ryv v/xwv avrwv /x. 

ra ij/xerepa avrwv a/xapr-fj/xara very rare ra rjfxwv avrwv a. 

rbv o~<perepov aviw / irarepa more frequent rbv eavrwv irarepa, but never 

rbv acpwv avrwv it. 

Here also the Pronoun avr 6s either retains its exclusive or emphatic force, or 
loses it: (a) 'O irals v&pi(ei rbv eavrov irarepa (suum IPSIUS patrem). 'T/xe?s 
v&pt(ere robs v/xer epovs avrwv irarepas (VESTROS IPSORUM patres). Oi 
7rou5es v&pi£ovo~i robs eavrwv irarepas (suos ipsorum p). X. Hier. 3, 8. iroXXovs 
5e Kal vm yvvaiKwv rcuv eavrwv rvpdvvovs Siecp^ap/xevovs (evprjareis) (a SUIS ip- 
sorum conjugibus). X. An. 6. 1, 29. (vo/xi(w) '6sris ev iroXefxw wv craaid^ei irpbs 
izpXovra, rovrov irpbs ri)v eavrov crwrypiav o~Taffia£eiv (contra SUAM IPSIUS 
salutem). In order to stx*engthen the exclusive or emphatic force, the Pronoun 
avr 6s is frequently added : avrbs rbv ep-avrov, etc. ; avros is also sometimes 
placed between the article and the reflexive of the third Pers., e. g. Aeschin. 
Ctes. 85, 87. KaraAehvKe ryv avrbs avrov Swacrreiav. — (b) Th. 2, 101, 
"2,rparov'iKT]v, rrjv eavrov a8eX(p't]v, didwo~i 'Sevfrp (SUAM sororem). Aeschin. 
fals. leg. 30, 40. irpbs rrjv ^ov\i]V rbv adehcpbv rbv e /xavr ov Kal rbv ade\(pib*ovr 
Kal rbv larpbv eire/x\pa. Th. 6, 21. iroAv airb rys -tj/xerepas avrwv /xeWcfiep 
w\«?p (a nostra patria). Lysias. riyovvrai ovKeri rols atyerepois avrwv o/top* 



♦ 302. J pronouns. 456 

l4llJ.a<Ti rbp povp v/ucis irape^eip. Her. 5, 87. [Xeyovcrip) elpccrap eKo.crrt\p avrecov 
(tup yvpaiKwv), okt] elt] 6 ewiiT^j apfip (ubi suus vir esset). X. H. 4. 4, 17. at 
AaKe§aip.6pioi rup eavrccp crvft/xaxw Karecpp6povp. 

Bem. 5. It is very rare in good classical authors, that the Gen. of Pers. Pro- 
nouns refers to the nearest subject, e. g. PL Lach. 179, c. alric&fic&a robs irare- 
pas fi/j.5)v, on Tj/xas jxkv eXcop rpvcpap (instead of robs r^ier epovs irarepas or 
robs 7] p.er e povs avrw v IT . ) . Antiph. 1, 1 14. iyk 8' vfxas virep rov irarpos /x o v 
Te&ve&ros alrov/xai (instead of virep rod efiavr ov irarpos). Th. 4,8. e7r: rets 
tp rfj KepKvpa pavs o~(pwp eire/j.\pap (instead of iirl ras iv r. K a (per 4 pas 
a^rSiv v. or ras eavrcop p.). 

Rem. 6. The pronoun abrbs with a reflexive meaning, regularly stands after 
l>otli the substantive and adjective (possessive) personal pronouns, whether its 
exclusive power be retained or lost, c. g. rj/xap avr&p, vp.7p avro7s, acpas avrois, 6 
bfxerepos avr&p irar-ftp, etc. In the Attic writers the exceptions to this position 
are extremely few, e. g. X. Cy. 6. 2, 25. pvp ra emr'f}8eia {v/nas) Set els r\\p 
bhbv crvcTKevd^ecrbai abrols re t}h7p, Kal oirScrois rerpdirocri x/><^ue&a. But in 
other writers, also, such exceptions are quite rare, e. g. Her. 5, 91. avyyipcctTKo- 
/xsp abrotai rjfilp ov iroiT\<racri bp&S>s. This position is never found with the 
third Pers. PL, consequently never avrobs crcpas instead of crcpas avrovs. 
But when the Pers. pronouns are used without their reflexive force, then avrSs, 
in its exclusive or emphatic sense, may either precede or follow the personal pro- 
noun: (a) avrov ep.ov [fxov), avrcp e/xoi (fioi), avrbp e/xe (/Ue), avrobs 7)/xas, etc., 
e. g. PL Phaed. 91, a. avrcp e/xol on /xaXicrra 86£ei ovrccs exeip. Symp. 220, 
e. crvpdiecrcocre Kai ra oirXa Kal avrbp e/xe. X. C. 2. 9, 2. f)5ews y &i> (sc. &pe- 
ipai/xi rbp &p$pa), ecpr], el (x$i (pofiol/xriP, oirws ^tJ e7r' avrop jxe rpdiroiro. — (b) 
ifxov avrov, ifxol avry, ere avr6p, tjjxuiv avrcop, etc., e. g. Dem. 01. 3, 36. irfoep 
aXXo&ep lo~x^pbs yeyopep 77 trap t}(xwp avrap $l\nnros; X. C. 3. 8, 9. rod 
Sepovs 6 t^Xios virep tj ficop avrap Kal reap areyevp iropevS/xepos ctkiccp irapex*i- 
Cy. 5. 5, 20. <re fxep avrbp acprjKa. 6. 1, 14. trreyat 7]/x7p avro7s elcrip. PL 
Apol. 41, a. efxoiye Kal avrcp ^avfxaarr] Up efy 77 diarpifi}} avr6&i. 

7. The reflexive pronoun is very often used instead of the 
reciprocal pronoun, in all the persons. 

Dem. C. Olympiod. 116a roS" t][x7p avro?s BiaXe^6fxe^a. PL Bp. 621, c. 
SiKaiotrvprjP fxera cppop-fitreas iravrl rp6ircp iirirrjSevcrofxep, 'iva Kal r] pJlp avrots 
cpi\oi Hfxep, Kal ro?s &eo?s. Bys. 114. eireib'av v/up €700 /.njpicrco, irpbs v/xas av- 
robs rpe\peo-&e Kaireira KO& epa eKacrrop v/j.?p avroTs airex&ycrecr&e. X. C. 
3. 5, 16. cp&opovo~ip eavrols fxaWop, f) ro?s &\Aois av&pwirois. 

Bem. 7. Both the reciprocal and reflexive pronoun is used when the action 
refers to an object that has been named. Both consequently express a reflexive 
idea, and are related like the species and genus ; since now the genus includes 
the species, so the reflexive may take the place of the reciprocal, in cases 
where it is readily perceived that several persons so perform anything together 
that the action appears as reciprocal. But when the reciprocal is antithetic to 
k avrbp eKacrros, but the reflexive used for the reciprocal, to &\\ovs, it is 
clear that the reciprocal must then necessarily stand, where the antithesis 
I avrbp eKacrros is either expressed or implied, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. ^aXXov 
XaipovcriP eirl ro?s aW^Xcov KaKo7s, 7) ro7s avrap ISiois aya&o7s (i. e. 7) iirl 
ro'is avrov eKacrros aya&ols), they rather rejoice in each other's evils, than in their 
own good, i. e. than each one in his own. PL Phaedr. 263, a. aixcpis^-qrovpiep aX- 
Xi'lXois re Kal y\p.7p avro7s. On the contrary, it is natural that the reflex- 
ive should be regularly used, where other persons (&XXovs), either expressly or 
by implication, are contrasted with the reflexive, e. g. Isocr. Aegin. 387. irepl 



456 syntax. [§ 303. 



rrXeovos ■}] /xas avrovs rry ovfj.e&a, 77 robs ad e\<pov s (we think more of our; 
than of [othe7~s] our brothers), de Pac. oi jxev (&erraXo\) <r (pi a iv avr ols itoXejxov- 
<riv (inter se, non contra exteros hostes). With the Nom. abroi added, e. g. X. M. 
1. 5, 9. (5e?) (TKOirelv oirccs rcov 'JLW-qvoov firjdeves iffx^pol &&iv, aXKa irdvres aa&e- 
ve?s, avrol iv eavrots aracrid^ovres. So ofj.oXoyelo'bai, ap.(pis&7)Te7o-&ai, 8V 
evex^rj ua h ivavriov elvai and irpdrreiv ccpiaiu avroTs or eavrois. But 
when neither the one nor the other antithesis exists, then the reflexive and the 
reciprocal are used without distinction, often in the same sentence, merely for 
the sake of variety, e. g. X. C. 2. 6, 20. (p&ovovvres e avrovs /mo-ovo-iv aXX-ft- 
Xovs. 7, 12. avrl vcpop&ixevcav eavrds rjdews aXXr) Xas edipcav. 

8. The reflexive pronoun of the third Pers. often takes the 
place of the reflexive of the first and second Person. The re- 
flexive then denotes not a definite person, but only confines the 
reflexive force to the subject; hence it has often merely the 
meaning of 1'Stos ; the particular person, to whom it refers, must 
be clearly denoted by the construction of the sentence. 

X. C. 1.4, 9. ovde yap r\\v eavr ov [= o~eavrov\ av ye tfu^V Spas (his own soul ; 
aeavrov is a false reading). 2. 1, 31. rod de irdvrwv rjdio'rov aKova/xaros eiraivov 
eavrrjs [= <ravTr)s], dvrjKoos el (self praise) . Andoc. de myst. avrbs, fiev avrbv 
dir&XXvov (instead of ifiavr6v). PI. Prot, 312, a. crv de ovk av alo~xvvoio els robs 
"EXXrjvas avi ov o~o(pio~rr)v Trape'x a>v 5 Isocr. Pan eg. diereXecafxev aarraffiacrroi Trpbs 
acpus avrovs. X. H. 1. 7, 19. evpr)crere o~(pas avrovs 7]fj.aprrjK6ras ra [le- 
yiara is &eo!<s. 

Rem. 8. In the Epic language, this usage occurs also with <r(pio~i and '6 s 
(suus). II. k, 392. >bv\iv fiovXevoire fiera o-cpio-iv (instead of fie& v/xiv). 
Od. 1, 28. ovroi e7''"V€ fjs yai-ns b'vva/j.ai yXvuepdorepov IxXXo lh*e<r&ai. 



§ 303. IT. The remaining Pronouns. 

1. OuTOS, OVTW5, TOLOVTOS, TOCTOVTOS, aild O 8 €, W 8 €, TOL- 

6<s$e, roaosSe, are commonly used with this distinction, that 
the first four refer to what immediately precedes, the others, to 
what immediately follows. 

Her. 6, 53. ravra (the foregoing)^ AaicedaifxSvioi Xeyovai — To5e (the 
following) Se — iyw ypd(pu. Th. 1, 53. oi /xev d}) (Kopiv&ioi) r oiavra eliroi' • 
— oi de 'ASrnvaloi roidde direKpivavro. 

Remark 1. Still, not seldom ovros, r oiovros, rortovros, ovrws 
refer to what follows ; far more seldom '6 8e, roiosde, r oo-Ssde, S»de refer 
to Avhat goes before. X. C. 1. 2, 61. Alxas ovo/xao-rbs iirl rovru> yeyove (by 
what follows). Th. 2, 34. wde fjiev SdirTovo-i (in reference to what precedes). 
But often ode, Side, etc., are so used that they represent an object as present, as 
it were before our eyes, e. g. X. Cy. 3. 3, 35. iyw de ifuv fiev irapaivaiv, Troiovs 
rivas XPV eTwM iv r<$ rotude, alo-xwoifxriv ^ (— w praesenti r«ram sfaiu), 
Regularly, however, ovros precedes the relative clause, e. g. svr6s ianv, 



$ 303.] pronouns. 457 

t>v elSes &vSpa. — "When ovtos and eKeTvos are used in opposition to each other, 
the latter refers to what is more remote, the former, to what is nearer, though 
the reverse is sometimes the case, as with the Latin hie and ille. 

2. The adjective demonstratives are often used in poetry, 
especially in Epic, and sometimes in prose, instead of the 
adverbs here, there, according to § 264, 3. 

Od. a, 76. aXA" 'dyeS?, 7]/xe?s o73e irepi<ppa(^iJ.e^a irdvTes [let us HERE deliber- 
ite). 185. vrjvs Se fxoi 77 8' eo'TrjKev eV dypov voo~<pi ttoXtjos (stood there in the field) 
Od.tr, 239. ws vvv^lpos eKelvos in avXeino'iSvprio'iv l](TTai (there). Th. I, 53. rj/xas 
tov s5e irpwTOvs XafSovTes xpVO~ao"&* ws TroKe/xiois (nos, qui HIC sumus). PI. P.p. 
327, h. 7]p6/xr)v, ottov eiV?. Ovtos, e<pi), oirur&ei/ irposepx^Tai (here he comes be- 
hind thee). Hence in the Attic poets av))p 6'Se instead of iyw, e. g. S. 0. T. 
1464, and ovtos in prose instead of orv, e. g. PI. Gorg. 489, b. ovroal avty 
ov iravo'eTcu (pXvapwu ; instead of cv ov iravarj ; 

Rem. 2. In the Epic language, where two sentences, whose subje< t is not 
doubtful, follow each other, the subject is often repeated in the second by o y e 
with a certain emphasis, in order to bring out prominently the identity of the 
subject for both sentences, e. g. H. f3, 664. aJ\pa 8e vrias etrrj^e, iroXvu S J Bye 
(idemque) Xabv ayeipas j8f) (pevywv iirl irSvrov. II. o, 586. ' ' KvtiXoxos 8' ov jxeive, 
kro6s nep ewu TroXe/xLaT^s, aXX' '6y dp eTpecre. So also in the Epic language and 
particularly in Her., far rarer in the Attic writers, when a series of actions fol- 
low each other, 6 Se is used with reference to the same subject, where we may 
translate 6 8e by, on the contrary, then, etc. Her. 6, 3. tt> f-^v yevofxevnv avTolai 
ahirju ov uaXa e^e<patve, b Se eAe7e <r<pi (on the contrary). X. An. 4. 2, 6. ol 8e 
. . . tvTav&a e/xevov, ws KarexovTes to tfacpou • ol 8' Ka.Te7x°v (iidemque). This 
usage very often occurs in Horn, and Her. in disjunctive clauses:^ — 7) oye. 
Od. /3, 327. ¥j Tivas e/c HvXov ££et dfivvTopas . . . , fj oye xai ~2,irdpT7)\rev. Her. 
2, 173. Xa&oi Uv r\ toi /xaveis, % oye a.ir6irXit)KTOS yev6jxevos. 

3. The use of the pronoun auros is as follows : — 

(1) Autos properly means av t6<s, again he, and then self, ipse, 
e. g. 6 vlbs clvtos or cdrros 6 mo?, the son himself. It can also 
refer to the person implied in the predicate, e. g. auros airifir). 
So avTo tovto or tovt civTo, hoc ipsum, this itself (not another) 
When used with e/cao-ro?, airos always precedes. Her. 7, 
19. SiXojv avrbs eKao-TOS ra 7rpoK€iju,eva Sa>pa \a(3eiv. 

(2) In the oblique Cases, it is used for the third person of 
the personal pronouns (§ 302, 4). 

(3) In connection with the article (6 clvtos), it means the 
same, idem (§ 246, 3). On the position of the article with 
o-vtos in connection with a substantive, see $ 246, 3. 

Rem. 3. Horn, and Her. often use o.vt6s in the place of the reflexive pro- 
nouns of the three persons. Od. 8, 247. &XXa> 8' avTbv (instead of kavTbv) 

39 



458 SYNTAX. [$ 303 

$wt\ KaTafcpuTrrccv zicrKev. £, 27. crol 8e ydfxos <rx^6v i<TTiv,'iia xph taXd fj.h 
avT7)i> (instead of <ravTT]v) evvva&ai. Her. 7. 10, 1. to 8e uvto'ktl ej/ecm 
beivSv, e/xe <roi St/ccuoV iari (ppd(etv (quid autem in nobis timendum insit). 

Rem. 4. From the exclusive or emphatic force of this pronoun, the following 
specific significations arise : (a) self in contrast with another, hence alone, solus 
(ipse, non alius) ; fj.6vos, on the contrary, in contrast with several. X. An. 4. 7, 11. 
dxXov ovZeva (irapaKaXecras) x^P^ avr6s (goes alone); (b) even andself like ipse, e. g. 
Autos 6 Soj/cooYtjs iZdupvasv (even Socrates, Socrates himself) ; so ical avr6s y 
ovS" avros, vel ipse, ne ipse quidem ; (c) self in contrast with foreign aid, of himself 
etc., sponte, like ipse ; (d) in Homer especially, o.vt6s often forms a contrast with 
another object, expressed or understood, this object being different from that de- 
noted by avr6s, as the soul in distinction from the body, or the body in distinction 
from the soul, e. g. II. a, 4. avro vs 8e eAcfyncc TeC%e tcvvevaiv (made them [their 
bodies, not their souls] a prey), or a man in distinction from his affairs, or asso- 
ciates, etc. Hence avros is sometimes used of a lord, master, e. g. avrbs i<pr] ; 
so also avro, id ipsum, often in connection with a following adjective-clause ; 
(e) it is used with a proper name and an ordinal from rpiros upwards, to de- 
note the number of official associates with the person named, who is generally 
the principal one, e.g. Th. 1, 46. Kopiv&ioov (TTparrjybs i\v "SevoKXeiS-qs Trefxirros 
avros (Xenoclides was the commander of the Corinthians with four associates). 

4. The indefinite pronoun tis when joined with adjectives, 
indefinite numerals, and adverbs, is used like the Latin quidam, 
to bring out distinctly the idea expressed by these words, some- 
times making them more, sometimes less emphatic, according 
to the meaning of the word or the connection of the discourse ; 
but with pronouns and cardinal numbers, it corresponds to the 
Latin fere {almost, about, somewhat). 

Meyas tis avr\p (some great man) , fiiKpSs tis, irasTis, eKacrrSsTts, ovfielsTis, bxiyoi 
Tives, irolos tis, irSaos tis, Ppaxv ti, iyyvs Tl, o"xe8oV ti, irdvv tl, TravTaTrcurl ti, ttoXv 
ti, ovdev ti, iraXcu ti, SiacpepSvToos tl. Asivfiv Tiva Xeyeis dvva/xiv ttjs apeTTJs 
elvai (incredibilem quandam vim, a hind of incredible power). X. C. 1. 1, 1. t? 
ypa<p$] kcit ai>Tov (%a>KpdTovs) ToidSe tis ■fiv (haec fere, ivas nearly, was for 
substance this). 3. 6, 5. xQov, it 6 a a i Tivis eltri (sc. at irpSsoSoi ttj irSxei), tell 
vie about how much the revenues are. So ovtoo ti, or ovtqo, «8e ircas (sic, fere, 
nearly thus) ; Tpsis Tives (about three, some three or so). 

Rem. 5. The regular position of the pronoun t I s, as an enclitic, is after the 
word to which it belongs, e. g. awt]p tis, ko.x6s tis dvrip. But sometimes, in con- 
nected discourse, it precedes, e. g. itrr-i to'lvw t i s ev^^rrjs x6yos. On the rela- 
tive and interrogative pronouns, see under adjective and interrogative sentences. 

Rem. 6. The indefinite pronoun one, any one, is usually expressed in Greek . 

(a) by t\s, e. g. Ouk 'dv tis evpoi dvSpa crocpdoTepov (one would not find t etc.) , 

(b) by the second Pers. Sing. Opt. with dv, and the Ind. of a historical tense 
with dv, when it is intended to represent the subject as indefinite, e. g. (pai-ns 
dv (dicas, one may, can say); vo/xi^ois dv (credas, one might suppose), €?8e s 
&v (videres, one might have seen); r)yf)<r(0 dv (putares, etc.). The English 
however, frequently translates the second Pers. by you, e. g. you may, can say. 



W 304 305.] pronouns. 459 

$ 304. Prospective and Retrospective Use of the 
Pronoun. 

1. The personal pronoun oo, 61, '4, fj.lv, and the demonstrative 6, r), t6, are fre- 
quently used in Homer to direct the attention to a following substantive, and 
as it were to prepare for it. II. v, 321. avri/ca t<£ fxev eireiTa tear b<pSaXfxS>v 
x4ev axXvv, IlTjXeiSri 'A%tA7)i'. II. <p, 249. 'lua jj.iv iravaeie t6volo, d?ov 
'Ax'A. A 77 a. 

2. In the same way, the Neut. of a demonstrative is used to prepare for a 
following substantive, or a following Inf. or entire sentence. PL Apol. 37, a. 
tovtov rifj.cafj.ai, ev irpvTaveiw cr iT7)<r e w s (lam deemed worthy of this, viz., a 
maintenance in the Prytaneum). X. Cy. 8. 7, 25. ri roirov fiaicapKaTepov, rod 
yfj fitx&rivat-; [what can be more blessed than this, to mix with the earth ?) ; PL 
Gorg. 515, e. aAAa ro8e fioi elire enl tovtco, el \4yovrai 'A&r)va?oi Sia 
TlepiKX4a f3eXTtovsyeyov4vat. Dem. Phil. 1. 41, 5. oiSev . . . rovro 
KaXws eKe?vos, 3 t 1 t avr a fj.4v ecrr iv airavra to. x w P ia a & A a t ov iro- 
\4fj.ov Keifxeva iv fi4crai. Comp. § 266, Rem. 3. 

3. On the contrary, a demonstrative pronoun, particularly avrSs, is fre- 
quently put in the same sentence after a preceding substantive or pronoun, 
partly for the sake of perspicuity, e. g. when between the Case and the verb 
which governs it, there is an unusually long intermediate clause, and partly for 
the sake of rhetorical emphasis. Such a pronoun again resumes the preceding 
substantive or pronoun, and either recalls it to the memory, or fixes the atten 
tion particularly upon it. Her. 3, 63. 6 Se fioi Mayos, rbv (= %v) KafifSvaris 
iir'iTpoTTov twv oIklwv a7reSe£e, ouros ravra ivereiXaro ( Magos, whom Cambyses 
appointed steward of his domestic affairs, he gave me these commands). Th. 6, 69. 
ai oik I at rod irpoacrTeiov iiraX^eis XctfifSdvovcrai, avrai vtttjpxov epvfia. So 
also with the personal pronouns, in which case the pronoun which resumes a 
preceding one, is regularly an enclitic form. Eur. Phoen. 507. ifiol fi4v, el «rol /4 
Ka& 'EXXijvwv x^va. Te^pdfifie^ (educati sumus), ciAA' ovv ^vverd p. 1 8one?s \4yeiy. 



CHAPTER V. 

The Infinitive and the Participle as an Object 
and Attribute. 

§ 305. A. The Infinitive. 

The Infinitive represents the idea of the verb as an abstract 
substantive idea, but differs from the substantive in the fol- 
lowing respects : 

(1) The Inf. without the article can be used only as a Nom. 



R, 



460 syntax. [$ 306 

(either as a subject, or in connection with «m(i/) as a predicate) , 
and as an object in the Accusative ; 

Subject :"E7reTcu t?7 apery cr (a £e a&ai els top irXeia) xpovov (xaWov, 3) rfj Katc'iCf 
(to be preserved for a longer time results rather from bravery titan cowardice), X. T* 
L. 9, 1. Predicate: Tb Siktiv 8ib~6vai irdrepov irdcrx^i-v tI etrriv, % iroie? 
PI. Gorg. 464, d. Object: BovXo/xai ypd<p€iv. See § 306. 

(2) Yet it so far retains the nature of the verb, as 

(a) It denotes, by different forms, the different circumstances 
of the action : duration, completion, futurity, and has active, 
middle, and passive forms. 

Tpa<peiv, scribere, yeypacpei/cu, scripsisse, ypdtyai, scripsisse or scribere (§ 257), 
ypatyeiv, scripturum esse ; fiovXevea&ai, to deliberate or be advised, /3efiov\ev<T&cu, 
to have deliberated or have been advised, fiov\evcra(T&ai, to have deliberated or to de- 
liberate, f3ov\ev&r)i>cu, to have been advised or to be advised, etc. 

(b) It retains the government of the verb, i. e. it governs the 
same Case as its verb, e. g. Tpdfaw liria-roXriv, i-n-LSv/xecv rf}<; 
apcTTJs, /xct^eo-^at rots iroXepAois; 

(c) It has an adverb for its attributive expletive, and not, as 
in the case of an actual substantive, an adjective, e. g. KaAoos 
aTroSaveLv (on the contrary, koAos Sdvaros). 

The Inf. will first be considered without the article, and then 
with it. 



$ 306. 1. The Infinitive, as an Object, without the 
Article. 

1. The Inf. is used, as the complementary 1 object in the 
Ace, to express something aimed at or effected: — 

(a) With verbs of willing and the contrary (verba voluntatis), 
e. g. j3ovXofxaL, i$£Xo), fiiXXo), l7n3vfxCi, ol^lio, Sikouco, <C\r\ru>, Trpo^vfxov- 
fjiai, 7rp6$vjA6s elpa, e7rt^etpo), 7reipw/£ai, j3ovXevop.ai } 7rapacrK£vdt,opaL, 
prj)(avioixo:t, roA/xto, vTTOjxevoy, eloiSa, etc. — Seo/xac (to entreat), iKerevu), 
irapaivk), 1-TnriXXoi, 7rapo£vva), 7T€t-9(o, <rv}xfiov\evoi, vov^erd), KtXevu), 
TrposToiTTU), etc. — eG), o-iryxwow, d/xeXQ), etc. — Se'Soi/ca, <f)of3ovfxai, 

1 The verbs which take an Infinitive after them, are usually such as do not 
express a complete idea of themselves, but require an Inf. or some other con 
struction, to complete the idea. The Inf., therefore, is the complement of the 
verb on which it depends. Other verbs take a Participle for their complement 
See § 309. 



$ 306.] INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 461 

cftevyo), dvafSdXXop.at, 6kv(o, etc. — &Trayoptvu>, Kare^a), kwXvo), etc. ; — - 
rjcrvyiav, Trpdyfiara, aoyaXtav, o^Xov Trapi^oi tlvl, l^ovaiav ScSovat, and 
the like. 

BovXo fxai y pd<peiv. : Ett i&v /xw Tropeveo~&ai. ToX/xca vtto /x4ve ip 
rbis ttlvSvvov. Hapaivw o~oi y p d<pe tv. 'AvafiaXXo /xal ffoi a Troup t vtff&ai. 
PL Gorg. 457, e. (pofiov/xat 8iG\4yx €l " <re - Phaed. 98, d. & /x e X S> ras ws 
aXrj^ws alnas X4yeiv. Dem. 01.3.16, 25. tis av abrbv eri /co>/\v<ret Sevpo 
/3oSi C*iv; X. Ag. 1, 7. 'AyrjcrtXaos xmicTt] ao~x<>Xiav avT$ (t<£ f3ao~iXe7) 
irape £eiv o-Tpareisiv £it\ robs "EXXrjvas. Dem. Chers. 102, 53. i) a v %t av 
•Koiovcriv itce'ivcc irpdrreiv, o ti fiovXeTai. 

Remark 1 . On the difference between the Inf. and the Part, with alo-xv- 
veo~&ai, aiSetcrdxu, irepiopav, &pxe<r&cu, rraveiv, iravTolov yiyvea&ai, irapacrKevd£eo~- 
&at, Treipaa&ai, see § 311. Verbs of preventing and hindering, and the like, have 
the following constructions: (a) (not very frequent) Etpyw <re airt4vai. Ob 
KwXvca (re am4vai. (b) (usually) Etpyw o~e jx)] airievai according to § 318, 
7: and after a preceding negation: 'Ao-Tvdyrjs, on S4olto ainov b Kvpos, obSev 
eStWro avr4x* iv f-V ob x a pK*°~& a h X. Cy. 1. 4, 2. according to \ 318, 9. 
(c) Tov 5 pairer eve iv (oi deciroTai tovs oIk4to.s) deo~/xo?s aireipyova, X. C. 
2. 1, 16. (d) Has ao-Kos dvo dvSpas e£ et tov /xt) ko.t ahvvai, X. An. 3. 5, 11 
(e) (seldom) M4xXo/xev tovtovs etpyeiv, &sre /xt] 5vvao~&ai fiXdirreiv i)/xas, 
ib. 3. 3, 16. (f) Tbv TrXetaTov o/xiXov twv ipiXwv elpyov to fxrj to, iyybs Trjs 
7r6Xews KaKovpy e?v, Th. 3, 1. according to § 308, Bern. 1. (g) very fre- 
quently after a preceding negation : Ovk aireixovTO obf? airb twv (piXwv Th 
fjLT] obx^ irXeoveicTeiv Trap aviwv 7reipao~&ai, X. Cy. 1. 6,32. according to 
§ 318, 9. 

Eem. 2. The verb irei&eiv,to persuade, regularly takes for its object a sub- 
stantive-sentence, expressed by the conjunction ws and a finite verb ; it takes 
the Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) more seldom. X. C. 1. 1, 1. iroXXaias i&av/xao-a, 
tic: 7TOT6 Xoyois 'A&Tjvaiovs eireiaav ol ypa^d/xevoi ~2uKpdTrjv, ws al-ios ett} 
fravaTov Trj jroXei. 

Eem. 3. In order to express more definitely the idea of something which 
is to be done, effected, etc., the Greeks sometimes join the conjunction &st€ 
with the Inf. governed by verbs of this class. Her. 7, 6. av4ireiffe Eep£ea, 
fijre iroi4eiv Tavra (to do this). Sometimes, also, in order to make the pur- 
pose or object more emphatic, Sn as, us with the Subj., Opt. or Put. Ind., is 
used. So in Attic prose, the verbs Trpo&vfxeTa&ai, SiavoeTcr&ai, /xrixavao-^ai, irapa- 
KeXeveoScu, diaKeXevecr&cu, Trapao~Kevd£eo~Sai., are connected with oiroos and the 
Put. Ind. 

(b) With verbs of thinking, supposing, saying, and the con- 
trary (verba cogitandi, putandi, et dicendi), e. g. Aoyt£eo-#ai, 
rjyeioSaL, vojjll^lv, eA.7ri£etv, ev^eo-^at, So/cetv, klvSvv€V€lv, etc. — Aeyetv, 
<pdvai, etc. — dpvetcrJai (to deny), aTncrTUV, etc. 

Nofii'ffti a/xapT e?v (I think [to have erred] that I have erred). 'EXTri^a 
evTvxy°~ eiv {I hope to be happy). Avtt] r) 5^|a KaXus So ne? e^et^. Th. 3 
74. r) ttSXls 4 Kivdvvevff e rraara 5 ia<p&apr) vat. A4yw 6 28 e van Tavra (1 
say [to Icnoiv] that 1 know this). 

Eem. 4. On the difference between the Inf. and Part, after the verbs 

S9* 



462 syntax. [$ 306. 

aKoveiv, eidevai, eTtiaracrSai., fxav&dveiv, yiyv&CKeiv, fJUfj.vf]<TKe(T&ai, Trvv&dveo'&ai, 
aio~&aveo~&ai) SeiKuvvai, airocpaiveip, driXovv, ayyeWeiu, cpaivea&ai, eoiKevai, seo 
§ 311. 

Rem. 5. It will be seen (§ 329), that, after the verbs above mentioned, the 
object may be expressed also by a complete substantive-sentence with us or tin. 

(c) After expressions denoting ability, cause, power, capacity, 
ox fitness (verba facultatis), e. g. Swa//,at, Swaro?, dSwaros, olos r 
ei/xi, e^co, (possum) — ecrnv, 7rdpe(TTW, eieartv, evecrrtv (licet) — 7rota>, 
SiaTrpaTTO/JLOLL Karepyd^op^at, KaracrKevd^o), etc. — Setvo? (powerful, 
capable, fit), iko.v6<z, iTnrrjftuos, kcikos, yrruiv, ainos el/XL, etc.; — after 
verbs of choosing, appointing, naming, educating, teaching. 

Avvafxat iroietu ravra. Her. 2, 20. ol errjcriai, auefiol elcri atrioi ir\-n- 
frveiv rbv irorap.6v. 7. 129. avoovv/xovs robs dWovs eTsai iroieei. 5, 97. 
o~rparr\ybv airod e\avr e s abrobv elvai MeXav&iov. Ol6s r' elfxl Troietv 
ravra. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. rls av aov ye iKav&repos irelo'ai ; 3, 18. Seiv6- 
r epos 5 iSdcr /ce iv. Ho iw ere ye\av. A iddcr kcc ae ypd<pe iv. 

Rem. 6. On Trote?*/ with the Part., see § 310, 4 (b). 

Rem. 7. The relation of the result, the thing to be effected, which is expressed 
by the Inf. with these verbs, is sometimes stated more definitely by adding the 
conjunction 8>sre. PI. Prot. 348, c. aSv var ov vfjuu, wsre IJpwraySpov 
rovbe aoepwrepov nva e \ecr&ai. So often in Plat. iKavbs cisre. X. Ag. 1, 
37. eiroii}cr ev (sc. Agesilaus), Sjsr 1 dvev <pvyrjs Kal Savarwv rhs ir6\eis Sta- 
re \e era t. 

(d) The Inf. is also used after the verb rre^vKivai, after the 
impersonal verbs and phrases TTpo^Kei, rrpiiret, crvpLJSaLvei, Set, XP1> 
avayKaiov, Slkcuov, ox^eAi/xoV ecrnv and the like ; after verbs of 
giving, taking, going, sending, and many others ; after adjectives 
of various significations, e. g. a£ios, oYkcuos (worthy, worth), f)&vs, 
pa&ios, xaAe7ros and many others ; after abstract substantives, es- 
pecially in connection with eivai and ytyvecrSai, as dvdyK-q, eX7rts, 
axoXrj, wpa Ictt'lv, to express a purpose or determination, a result 
or effect. 

Th. 4, 61. TrecpvKe rb avSp&ireiov Sia iravrbs dpx^ lv fxeu rov e"iKOvros, (pv* 
hdacreo-&ai Se rb eiriov {men are so constituted as always to rule those who yield, 
but to guard against those who assail). "H/co/iey pt.av^rdv e iv (ad discendum). 
Th. 2, 27. rots Alyiurjrais ol AaKeSai/xSuioi edocrav Qvpeau oIk€?v Kal rfy yr\v 
v e/j.e ff&ai. PI. Apol. 33, b. 6/j.oiws Kal irXovaiw Kal irevnri irapex^ efxavrbv 
epurav. X. An. 5. 2, 1. rb rj/jucrv rod crrparevfxaros Kar e\iir e "Eeuocpcop 
(pvXarreiv rb o~rpar6ireb'ov. "A.£i6s icrri &av(xd{e o*&ai. Her. 4, 53. 
Bopva&ei/ris ivivecr&ai r)Sicrr6s eari (dulcissimus ad bibendum). . 6, 112. recas 
■f]v roltn "E\\7)<tl Kal rb ovuofxa rb M^Scoj/ <p6/3os aKovcrai (a terror to hear). 

Rem. 8. Homer makes the Inf. depend on adjectives also, to express the 
same relation as is denoted by the Ace. of more definite limitation (§ 279, 7). It. /c, 



$ 306. J INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 463 

437. &el ei v 8' ave/xoitrii/ dfxoToi {'fairoi) {equal to the winds in speed). In a 
similar manner, the Inf. elvai in the phrase eKcbu etuai, must probably bo 
explained {willing so far as it depends on my being or nature, as far as depends on 
me, i. e. actually willing). Her. 7, 104. eK<av re elvai ovtf dv fj.owop.ax4o.ixt 
{could I have my own choice, or so far as concerns me, I would not fight even in 
single combat). PL Phaedr. 252, a. o&ev S77 eKovaa eTvai ovk aTroXeiirerai y 
tyvxh* This phrase is used but seldom in affirmative sentences. 

Rem. 9. As the poets say fradfxa itietrfrai {a wonder to see), so also in prose, 
the complementary Infinitive 6 pay, elsopdv and loe7v, are sometimes 
joined with verbs of appearing and showing one's self. X. Cy. 5. 4, 11. ere eirava- 
Sfeacro/xevos ya, 6tto76s tls (paivp lde?v 6 roiavr-nv tyvxw ^X 03V (^ came to see 
what sort of a looking person you are, you, who have such a soul). 

Rem. 10. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that, instead of the Pass. Inf., it 
commonly us-es the Inf. Act. or Mid., with the adjectives mentioned under (c) 
and (d), e. g. Swards, a^ios, etc., and with substantives e. g. Savjxa, <pofios, and 
with verbs of giving, etc. Such Infinitives, the English translates both actively 
and passively, e. g. Tavra pdoid iari /j.a&e?i/ {these things are easy to learn or be 
learned). Ka\6s ecrnu I Se?j/ ( pulcher est visu, he is beautiful to see or to be seen). 
Th. 1, 38. a£ios Sfavjxdo-ai. PL Phaed. Xoyos owarbs Kar av orj(T ai {capable 
of being understood). The active subject of the Inf. is easily supplied, in all 
examples of this kind, e. g. he is beautiful for us to see. A Dat. is often ex- 
pressed with such an Inf., e. g. PL Rp. 599, a. pddia iroieii> /xtji/ eldori rr]v 
aA'fi&eiav. So ^ooKpdrrfs irao'i irapeiyev havrbv epcardu {he yielded himself to 
all to question, i. e. he permitted all to question him). 

Rem. 11. Prom the use of the Inf. after verbs of willing, wishing, entreati-\g, 
and imploring and the like, the following peculiarities in the use of the Inf. i.re 
to be explained : 

a. The Inf. is very frequently used in the Epic writers instead of the second 
person Imperative, sometimes also instead of the third person ; instead of the 
second person, not seldom also in other poets, and even likewise in Herodotus 
and in the Attic prose-writers. The Inf. must then be considered as the object 
depending on the Imp. of a verb of willing, which is to be supplied, e. g. e&eAe. 
Hence when predicative expletives are joined with the Inf., these, inasmuch as 
they refer to the subject av contained in the omitted Imp., are put in the Nona. 
The Imp. is also often interchanged with the Inf. Od. a, 290, sqq. z/octttj- 
cras 877 eireira (piXrjv is irarpioa yaiav (rrifxd re 01 xeucu, Kal iirl Kr4pea Kre- 
p e i £ a 1 . . . Kal dv4pi p.r\T4pa oovvai {and then having returned to your dear father- 
land, heap up a mound, etc.). II. /3, 75. v/xe7s 8' &K\6&eP aWos epyrveiv iir4e<r<riv. 
II. £, 89—92. 77 8e . . oil- a era KXrfiSi Svpas lepdio So/xoio, tt4ivXov . . &e7vai 'A3t]- 
vaiws iirl yovvaaiv tjvko/jloio. Her. 6, 86. <xv 877 p.01 /cat ra xp-qjxara d4£ai, Kal rdde 
to. av/xfioXa o"<££e XafScav hs 8' dv %x< av ravra dirairerj, rovroo airooovvai {ei 
redde). Th. 5, 9. ab 8e, KAeaptSa, al<pvi8las rds iri/Xas avoil-as eireKdre7v 
Kal e it e 1 7 e c & a 1 ws rdx^ra £vjx/xi£ai. 

b. "When the Inf. refers to the third Pers., its subject as well as the accom- 
panying expletives of the predicate, are commonly in the Ace. This Ace. 
with the Inf. is to be considered as the object of a verb of willing, which is to 
be supplied, e. g. evxofxai, 80s, iroiei, or of a verb denoting what ought to be, must 
be, e. g. xPVi 5e?; so with ivishes, entreaties, precepts and compacts. II. 77, 179, sq. 
3>oe 84 ris elireaKev, looov els obpavhu evpvw Zev irdrep, 77 A'lavra Aax 6 *^ ^ 
TuSe'os vl6v, 3) abrbv /3 a crt A 77 a iroXvxpv<roio MvK-f)vr)s ! {grant or cause that 
either Ajax may obtain it by lot, etc.). Aesch. Suppl. &eol iroX7rai, pA] fie SovXeias 
Tuxetj/. X. Ven. 6, 11. rbu 8e kv vn-y 4r-n v ix^vra et > i4vai eXacppav 
evfrrjra eirl rb Kwny4(rioi', rbv 8e dp Kveapb v eiteG&ai. 

c. Hence the Inf. is sometimes used in reference to the first and second Pers., 
in questions denoting indignation. Her. 1, 88. 5 fiaffiAev, K^repou \4yeiv Trpbs 



464 syntax. [$ 307 

ae ra voewv Tiyxdvoo, rj ffiyav ev Tcp irape6vTi XP^V '■> [shall I speak or be si- 
lent?). Od. k, 431. d SetAot ir6a Xp.ev ; t'l kclkSiv IjxeipeTe tovtwv ; (whither to 
go, i. e. whither are you to go?). 

d. Finally, the Inf. is used instead of the Opt., with cCl yap, ei&e, as the ex- 
pression of a wish. Od. co, 375, sq. a? yap, Zed re irdrep . . , to?os e<av toi 
X§i-C os ev r,p.eT epot.cn Soixoiai, revxe' ex<»v &y.oio~iv, icpeffT dp.ev at nal afxvveiv 
avdpas futiffr^pas. (instead of ecpeo-rairjv k. ap.vvoip.i). 



J 307. Nom., Gen., Dat., and Ace. with the Infinitive. 

1 . Most verbs which take the Inf. have, hi addition to this 
object, also a personal object, which is put in the Case that the 
verb requires, e. g. Aeo/xou crou i\$€cv. ^,v fMJ3ov\evoi aoi 
cxaxppoveLV. *E>~orpvvio ere fjid^eaS^cu. 

Remark 1. So also KeXeveiv, which signifies to impel, to urge, hence to 
command (jubere), in Attic prose, is always constructed with the Ace. and the 
Inf., e. g. KeXevu ae ypdcpeiv (jubeo te scribere), 

2. When predicative expletives, consisting of adjectives or sub- 
stantives, and referring to the personal object of the govern- 
ing verb, are joined with the Infinitive, they are either put by 
attraction in the same case as the personal object, or in the 
Accusative without attraction. 

(a) Gen. with Inf. Aeop.ai crov irpo&vp.ov elvai (I beg you to be zealous). 
Aeojxcu aov it p6&vp.ov el vat. X. H. 1. 5, 2. Kvpov 
iSeovro cbs ir poSv plot dr ov irpbs tov ir6\ep.ov yeveo~&cu 
(begged C. to be as zealous as possible in the war). Her. 6, 
100. 'A 3- t] v a i wv iSerj^-ncrav acpio-i fiori&ovs yevecr&ai 
(requested the Athenians to aid them). If the Gen. is fol- 
lowed by the Inf. accompanied by a more definite ex- 
pletive, this expletive is always put in the Ace, e. g. 
Lys. 118. Seofxcu vp.wv KaTayp-ncpicracr&at. ®eop.vf]o~Tov, eV- 
&v fxov/xevov s, oaos p.oi 6 ay&u eo~Tiv (I pray you to 
condemn Th., considering, etc.). Th. 1, 120. avopwv ay a 
3-wj/ etJTiv, ad 1 kov fi ev ovs e| elprjPTjs iroXep.e'iv (it is tht 
characteristic of brave men, ichen injured, to exchange peace 
for ivar). 

(o) Dat. with Inf. ~2,v[xfiov\evw croi irpoSv p.u> elvai (I advise you to be zew* 
ous). '2,u/x^r>v\eva} croi ir po&v jxov elvai. X. An. 2. 1,2. 
e5o|€ Tois t£>v "EWtjvwv o~t p aT-ny o? s crvo-Kevaaap.- 
evois a elxov koX e | o ir A. i <r a p. e v o i s irpoievai. X. 
Hipparch. 7, 1. iravTl irpos^Kei dpx°vTi <ppovip.<* 
elvai (it becomes every ruler to be prudent). X. An. 1.2, 1 
£ e via 'i\Keiv irapiiyyeiXe \a$6 VTa tovs &v8oas (com? 



$ 307.] NOM., GEN., DAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 465 

manded Xenias to come, having taken men). 7. \, 21. vvv 
cr oi e|€(TTii/ avSpl yevea&cu (you can show yourself a man). 
X. Cy. 2. 1, 15. Qzgtip Vfj.'iv et fiovkea&e, Aa/3 6vr at 
07r\a ets Kivtivvov ifx^aii/eiu. 
(c) Ace. with Inf. 'Ett or pvva> o~ e ir p 6 & v p o v elvai. KeAevw a e irp6&v 
jj.ov eivat. 

Rem. 2. The ^.cc. in the examples under (a) and (b), may be explained by 
considering the object of the governing verb, e. g. Seofxcu vllwv, as being at the 
same time the subject of the Inf., i. e. this object stands in a two-fold relation, 
being both the object of the governing verb, and the subject of the Inf. (see 
Rem. 3), e.g. A 4o/xai vllojv \yLias\ fio-n&ovs yeveoScu (I beg you that you icillaid). 

Rem. 3. Verbs which take the simple substantive object, in the Gen. or 
Dat., sometimes take, in the construction with the Inf., this object in the Ace, 
the object of the governing verb and the subject of the Inf. being united in 
one. This construction is used when the whole action of a person and not the 
person himself, is made specially prominent. Lys. Fragm. S. 3, p. 144. 5eo- 
Hai ovv vfxas o-vyyvw/xriu exetv (/ beg therefore that you would pardon). Th. 4, 
97. Trpoayopevw avrovs 4k rov Upov air i6ur as airo<p4peo-&ai rd <r<p4repa 
avruv (instead of avro7s airiovaiv airocp.), I give orders that they, going out of the tem- 
ple, should carry their effects with them. So irapayy4\\w, airayy4x\(>>, irposrdrrco, 
StaKe\evo/xai ere atrievai. X. C. 4. 7, 1. ^coKparrjs avr ap/ce is iu ra7s irposrjKov- 
vais irpd^triv avrovs (robs 6 fj.i\ovvras avr$) eivai 4 it e ll e A e 7 r o. So also 
the verbs e I it e 7v, \4yeiv, <p pdCeiv, <p o> v e 7 v in the sense of jubere, are con- 
structed with the Ace. and the Inf., in the Attic poets. S.Ph. 101. \4yca a' iyw 
d6\co $i\oKrr)r-nv \a@ e7v. Also ir p o s rj k e i, irp 4ir et, ei-ecrrt, ffVLifiaivei, 
£vLi<pop6v io-r i with Dat. or Ace. with Inf., 8e?, xpv (§ 2 "9, Rem. 4). The 
Ace. is necessary, when the statement in the sentence does not refer to a 
definite person, but is altogether general in its nature. PL Ion. 539, e. ovk ai> 
irp4iroi ye iir i\4)o~ jxova eivai paipaSb v dvdpa (it would not be fitting that 
a rhapsodist should be forgetful). 

3. Besides the case already mentioned, the Ace. ivith the 
Inf. is used in Greek, as in Latin, in the following case also. 
When a subject with its predicate, as 'O ayaS6<s dvrjp evSaipLovei, 
is made the object of our thought or will, the subject is put in 
the Ace. (rov dyaSov avSpa) and the predicate in the Inf. (evSai- 
fxovetv, e. g. No/xt^co rov dyaSbv avSpa cvftaijxovelv (Ibelieve 
that the good man is happy). If the predicate is an adjective, 
participle, or substantive with etrai yiyj/eo-^ai, etc. (§ 240, 2), as 
c O ayaSbs avrjp evSaLfioiv io-riv, then these words also are put iu 
the Ace., e. g. No/ai^w rov dya$bv avSpa ev&aip,ova cTvai. 

4. But when the subject of the governing verb is at the same 
time the subject of the Inf. also, the subject of the Inf. is not 
expressed in Greek, as it is in Latin, by the Ace. of a personal 
pronoun, but is wholly omitted ; and when adjectives or sub- 
stantives stand with the Inf. as expletives of the predicate, 
they are put, by attraction, in the Nom. 



466 syntax. [$307 

OXofxai a{j.apTeli/ (I believe I have erred, or that I have erred, credo me errasse). 
OUi aiiapTstv (you think that you have erred). O'lerai afxaprelv. Ol6/i&a a^apr^iv. 
Otofiai evSai/xwv etvcu (I think lam happy, or that lam happy, credo me boatum 
esse} O/ei evSai/JLuv elvai. OUrai evSai/xcav elvai. Ol6y.&a evd alcoves 
elvai. 'O <TTpa.T7}ybs e<pr) ir p 6§ v jao s eivai iirifiow&e'iv. 

Rem. 4. If, however, where the subject of the governing verb and of the Inf. 
is the same, the subject of the Inf. is to be made emphatic, which is particularly 
the case in antitheses, then the Ace. with the Inf. is used, as in Latin, e. g. Her. 
2, 2. ol Alyvirrioi £v6/uu£ov e cdvt ov s irpcarous yeveo~&at irdvrwv av&pdoirwv (se, non 
alios homines). 1, 34. Kpo?o~os iv6jxi^ eccvrbv elvai iravrcov bK^Kararov. But 
instead of eavrSv, where there is a contrast between persons, avr6s (= se 
ipsum) is likewise used, by attraction. Her. 7, 136. Uep^-ns ovk ecpr] bfioios ecrecr&cu 
AaKedaL/JLOj/ioiaL' neivovs /jlcv yap cruyx^ai ra. irdvToov av&pc*>Trwv vofxifxa, airoK- 
reivavras KrjpvKas, avrbs (ipsum instead of se ipsum) 5e ravra ov Troi7)o~eiv. 
Th. 4, 28. KA.ewj/ ovk ecpt] avros, a\?C eKe7vov (Nucleus) arpaTriyelv. So also by 
means of attraction the personal pronouns iydo, av, ridels, vfxels, creels, are 
joined with the Inf. 'Etto/jlvvco cot. . . rf jxt}v £y& /3ou\e<r&ai av fiera gov (airo- 
&ave?v), I swear to you that I would rather, etc., X. Cy. 6. 4, 6. El ofeo-&s XuAkiS- 
eas r^jv 'EWaSa aaio'eiv, v/xe7s 5' a-Ko^pdaeoSrai ra. ivpdyixara, ovk bp&cis oUcr&e. 
Dem. Ph. 3, § 74 (if you think that the Chalcidians will save Greece, and that 
you will escape the trouble of it, etc.). (Ol iv ^d/xw e(pao~av) iv6\iv acpio-iv v-^dpx^v 
~Xd/j.ov ovk ao~Sevri . . kcu hwardorepoi elvai o-<pe?s . . iropl£eo-&ai to, e7rcnfj8eia 
tS>u iv tt) ir6\ei, Th. 8, 76. — Sometimes the enclitic pronouns are used without 
any special emphasis. PI. Pp. 400, b. ol/xai fx e aKt\Koevai. — When the governing 
verb has an object, and this object is at the same time the subject of the Inf. also, 
then the Inf. merely (without the Ace.) is used, but the predicative expletives 
are put in the same case as this object. OuS 5 av tovtois iiriarevov i fx- 
u6vois eo-ea&ai, X. Cy. 3. 3, 55 (I would not even trust these that they will be 
steadfast). OvSevl av&pcaircav ixpei/xriv av ovre (ZeAriov ov& riSiov ifxov /8e- 
fiioo k evai, X. C. 4. 8, 6 (to no one would I grant that he had lived better, etc.). 
When the object of the governing verb is also the object of the Inf., this also is 
used only in the first place, but is omitted in the second. ^coKpdr-ns, e<p-r) 6 
Karrjyopos, robs irarepas irpoiT7)\aKi£eiv idiSarfKe, Trei&wv jxev robs avvovras 
avTcp ao(pcoT€povs ir o i e?v rSiv irarepcav, X. C. 1. 2, 49 (persuadens discipulis suis, se 
EOS sapientiores reddere patribus). 

5. When the governing word is an oblique Case of a parti- 
ciple, the predicative expletives which are connected with the 
Inf., are put, by attraction, in the same Case as that participle. 

PL Apol. 21, b. ?)A&ov iiri riva twv Sokovvtwv crocpuv elvai (vei-iebam ad 
aliquem eorum, qui se sapientes esse opinabantur) . Her. 1, 176. tS>v vvv Avklcou 
cpafxevcov AavSiwv elvai ol iroXAoi elcri eir-hAvSes (eorum Lyciorum, qui se 
Xanthios esse dicebant). X. Cy. 6. 1, 34. (Kvpos aveyeKavev) inl ra Kpelro- 
vi rod epcoros <pdcr kovti eivai (at the one affirming that he was above the in flu 
ence of love. 

6. The Ace. with the Inf., like the Inf. alone, is used after the 
following classes oi verbs and expressions : (a) of willing and 
the contrary [§ 306, 1, (a)] ; (b) of thinking, believing, saying 
[$ 306, 1, (b)] ; (c) of causing, choosing, appointing, naming 



§ 307.] NOM., GEN., DAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 46^ 

[$ 306, J, (c)] ; (d) after impersonal verbs and expressions sig- 
nifying must, ought, should, it happens, e. g. Set, irposrJKei, TroeVei, 

t^ecrTLV, e7rtetKe?, ko\6v, KdKov (etc.) IcTTlV, (7Vfx(3aLVeL. 

'Affrvdyiqs jSouAo /xeuos rbv iralda &s rfiicrra oenrvelv nrpos^yayev avr$ 
Tvavro^arca fipdo/xara, X. Cy. 1. 3. 4. No^ui^w vfias ifxol elvai Kal irarpida Kal 
(piAovs Kal ffv/x/xaxovs, X. An. 1.3,6. 'EAirt^co eKeivovs eA&ezV npbs ffh 
luaWov, r) irpbs ifj.4, X. Cy. 2. 4, 15. Tbu /j.icr&bi> vir i (T% v elr o avroTs oAi- 
yew r)fj.epocv eKrrXewu ir ap4 ff eff&ai, X. An. 7, 5,9. Tbv jxkv Ka\bv kol- 
ya&bv 'dvo pa evSai/iova eluai <pr\ fii rbv Kal irovqpbv 'd&\iov, PI. 
Gorg. 407, e. Kpe7rrov (sc. effri) ffvv ttoAAo?s oikovvt a affcpaKoos apKovvra 
exeij/, r) {jlovov o iair <x> (xev ov ra rwv ivoXiruv eiriKivovvws irdvra KeKrrjff- 
&ot, X. C. 2. 3. 2. 

Rem. 5. With the impersonal verbs and expressions above mentioned, the 
Ace. with the Inf. is not to be regarded as the grammatical object, but as the 
grammatical subject of the sentence ; but logically, i. e. in respect to the sense, 
the Ace. with the Inf. must even here be regarded as the object, and the im- 
personal expressions as transitive verbs, e.g. Ao/ce? /toi {= vofiifa) Kvpov 
(ro(p(i)TaTOj/ yev4oSai. Thus it can also be explained why the Greeks and Lat- 
ins in quoting a phrase, e. g. evdaipova thai, felicem esse, fiaffiXea elvai, regem 
esse, use this construction. 

Rem. 6. The Greeks are fond of changing the impersonal construction into 
the personal, by elevating the object into a subject, making the impersonal 
expression personal, and referring it to the person of the subject. By this 
construction, the subject is rendered prominent ; while in the construction of 
this Ace. with the Inf. the whole idea of the sentence is made the principal 
thing. This is the case: (a.) with x4yer ai, ayy4xXerai, 6 /u.oXoye7r at 
and the like; (b) with SoKe7, it seems; (c) with avpL^aiv et, accidit ; where 
this last verb is used personally, the subject stands before it. while with the 
Ace. and the Inf., it follows the verb; (d) in the phrases oiKaiov, al-iov, 
i'lrioo^ov, o war 6v, afx-r\x avov i X a ^ elT0V 4<rriv, etc.; (e) in the phrase 
to(tovt ov o4w with the Inf. followed by 8>sre with the Inf. or Ind. (tantum 
abest, ut — ut) so far is it from, and iroXXov 5ew with the Inf. 

A4yerai rbv jSatriAea airo<pvye?v and A 4yerai 6 fiaffiXev s arrocpvyelv. 
X. Cy. 5. 3, 30. 6 "Affffv p 10 s eis r)]v x®P av ejAJSaXXeiv ayy4xXerai. Her. 
3, 124. eScf/cei oi rbv irar4pa XovffSai /xev vrrb rod Alos, xp' L€(r ^ ral °^ virb rod 
'VLXiov. X. An. 3. 1,21. XeXvff&ai /J.oi do kg? Kal 7] i-Keivcov v fi pis Kal r) ■>] /j. er 4 pa 
viroipia. PI. Phaed. 74, a. ap' ov v ov Kara irdvra ravra ffvjx^aivei r tjv avd- 
pLVT) ff i v elvai /xev acp" bjxoiwv ktX. 67, C k d&ap ff i s elvai ov rovro ^vfxfiaivei. 
— Ai Kaios el /a i rovro irpdrreiv instead of 8'iKaiov effri /j.e rovro irpdrreiv. A ( - 
Kaios eifx.i elvai eXev&epos. Her. 6, 12. eirldo^oi ravrb rovro ■xtiarea&ai elai. 
X. Cy. 5.4, 19. 'd^io i y4 e a fj.eu rod yeyevT)iJi4vov nvpayixaros rovrov airoAavcrai ri 
&70&M'. Isocr. Paneg. 76, 168. r off ovrov o4ovffiv eAeeTu, Sisre Kal fxaWou 
■Xaipovoiv iirl to?s aX\i)Kwv KaKoTs (so far are they from pitying, that they rather 
rejoice even, etc.). 

Rem. 7. The personal construction with the verbs SokcIv, ioiK4uai, \4yeo-frai 
and the like, extends also to clauses with w s, expressing comparison, as is the 
case in Latin with ut videor, ut videris, etc., instead of ut videtur. PI. Rp. 426, b. 
ovk iiraiperrjs el, ecp-nv eyca, ws eoiKas, rwv roiovrcci/ ai/dpwi/ {you do not praise, as 
it seems [instead of as you seem] such men). X. An. 1. 10, 18. ftffau §' avrai, ws 
e\4yovro, rerpaKocriai a/j.a£ai {these chariots were four hundred^ as it was said), 
6. 3, 25. ot iroKeixiOi 8e, & s y y)puu iS6Kovy, rovro Seurarres airrjAbov. 



468 syntax. [§ 308. 

Rem. 8. On the Ace. with the Inf. in exclamations, see § 308, Rem. 2. On 
'6ti and ws after verba sentiendi and dicendi, see § 329. 



f 308. II. Infinitive ivith the Article. 

1. The Inf. with the article is treated in all respects like a 
substantive, and, indeed, is such, since, by means of the article, 
it can be declined through all the Cases, and is capable of ex- 
pressing all the relations, which are indicated by the Cases of 
the substantive with and without prepositions. On the contrary, 
it here also, as in the Inf. without the article [§ 305, (2)], re- 
tains the nature of a verb. 

(a) Tb ypd(petu, to ypdxpcu, to yeypcKpeuai, rb yp&peiv. (b) Tb £itio~to- 
Xtjv ypdcpeiv, to rrjs aperris £iri&v/u.e?v, to to?s iro\e fiio i s fidxeo-&ai. 
(c) Tb Ka\ws ypdepew, to Kahcos aitobaveiv (honorable death). Yet pronouns 
in the Neut. Sing., as attributive adjectives, are joined with the Inf., e. g. Plat. 
aurb Tb hiroSviio-Keiv. By prefixing the article, whole sentences can be 
represented as one extended substantive -idea. 

2. When the Inf., whether as a subject or object, has a sub- 
ject of its own and predicative expletives, both the subject and 
expletives, as in the case of the Inf. without the article, are put 
in the Ace, because the Inf., even as a subject, is considered 
dependent ($ 307, Rem. 5). When, however, the subject of the 
Inf. is not different from the principal subject of the sentence, 
it is not expressed, and the predicative expletives are put, by 
attraction, in the same Case as the principal subject of the 
sentence, i. e. in the Nom. 

(a) Nominative (subject). X. Cy. 5. 4, 19. Tb afiaprdveiv av&pwirov s 
out as ovdev, olfiai, Srav^acfTov (that men constituted as they are should err, is not 
strange) ; here Tb a/xapTauetv which is the subject of cVti, has av^pdnrovs for its 
own subject, and opTas as its predicative expletive. 7. 5, 82. ob Tb fi r )j Aa- 
$e?u to. o.ya&a ovtw ye xaXeiroV, &sirep Tb \afi6vTO. o~t ep-qSrjv ai Xv- 
TT]p6v. 

(1)) Genitive : (a) as the object of verbs and adjectives or as an attributive 
jf a substantive. X. An. 1. 3, 2. KAeapxos fjaKpbv i^eepvye tov /xr] KaraireT- 
pw&TJvai (just escaped being stoned to death). Cy. 1. 4, 4. o>y 8e irpoijyev 6 
XP&vos avTbv (jbv Kvpov) crvv t<£ fj.eye&ei els 8>pav tov tt po sn) j8 ov yevecr&ai 
(as time advanced him to the period of [becoming a man] manhood) ; here the Inf 
yevecrdcu, which is used as an object in the Gen., has its predicative expletive 
"*4sri8ov in the Ace. 1.5, 13. ti ovv e<TTiv % tov aXe^acr^ai diKaioTepov, t 



f 308.] INFINITIVE WITH THE AKTICLE. 469 

"ov ro7s (piXois apriyeiv KaXXiov; C. 1. 2, 55. Scok/nxttjs irapeicaXei iirifieK' 
elerd-ai rov a>s <p pov ifi (ararov elvat ical w (peXifxdorar ov. Very fre- 
quently rod, rod fxi] is used to denote a purpose, object : in order that, in ordet 
that not [§ 274, 3, (a)], since by the language, as is frequently the case, that 
which calls forth the action, is substituted for that which is to be done, or for 
the result. Th. 1, 4. Mivws rb Xrjo-riKbv nafrppei e/c rrjs &aXdo~o~r)s rov ras 
irpos65ovs fxaXXov levai avrop (in order that his revenues might come in bet- 
ter). X. Cy. 1.3, 9. ol ru>v fiacriXewv olpoj^ooi els ri]v apiarepdv (oXvov) eyx*djxe~ 
voi Karafipocpodcri, rod drj, el (pdp/xaKa iyxeoiev, fx.ii Xvff ir eXe?v avro7s (in 
order that it may not be well for them, if they mingle poison with it). 6, 40. ro v /jlt/i 
5 ia<pevye iv rbv Xaycov e/c rwv Slktvcov aKoirovs Ka^iarrjs. (/3) With prepo- 
sitions, e. g. avri, instead of or in the sense of the Latin tantum abest, ut — ut, 
4 k, from, in consequence of, fx. era, in connection with, irp6, for, ire pi, in order that, 
sspecially eveaa and virep in connection with fi-ft, in order that not, in order 
not; also &vev and x w P LS > without, ftexpifj), until. Th. 1, 69. avrl rod 
eireX&e'tv (invadere) avrol a.fivveo'&ai fiovXefffre fxaXXov eiri6vras. X. H. 3. 
4, 12. 6 'AyrjaiXaos avrl rov iirl Kapiav lev at, ev&bs ravavrla airoarpe^as 
eirl &pvyias iiropevero. Hier. 4, 3. dopvcpopovo'iv eirl robs nanovpyovs virep rov 
fi 77 5 e v a roiv iroXircov fiialca 8ravdr<a air o& v 77 o~ k e iv. 

(c) Dative : (a) As the object of single verbs and adjectives, e. g. a-marw, 
irurreva, eoiKa, o/xoios, avavrios, very often as the instrumental Dat. X. Ap. 14. 
awKTrovo-i rw efxe r e r 1 fxrj cr &ai inrb 8aifx.6vwv (do not believe in my having been 
honored, that I have been honored). Pl.Phaed. 71, c.ru> Cv v eari ri ivavrtov, fcsirep 
ru} iyp7)yopevat rb Ka&evdeiv ; [is there something opposite to living, as sleeping 
is to waking). X. Hier. 7, 3. BoKeT rovra> Biacpepeiv avi]p rS>v dXXcuv £d>oi)v, r $ 
rifx.rjs op eyea&ai (seems to differ from other animals in this, that). (/3) With 
prepositions : e v, in, e ir i, on the condition that, in order that, because, ir p6s, 
besides. PI. Gorg. 456, e. irapeBoo'av eirl rep BiKaiws XPV °~& al tovtois 
(rots ottXois) irpbs robs iroXefilovs (they put them [arms] into their hands in order 
that they might use them aright). S. Aj. 554. iv r dp (pp ove?v — riBiaros fitos. 

(d) Accusative : (a) Sometimes as the object of transitive verbs. PI. Gorg. 
522, e. avrb rb airo&vr) criceiv ovBeTs cpo(3e?rai (no one fears death itself). 
(/3) With prepositions: iiri, els, irp6s, in order that, in order to, in relation to, 
Kara, in relation to, irapd, in comparison, especially Bid, on account of, because 
that. X. C. 1. 2, 1. ^wKparrts irpbs rb fierpiav Be?o~&ai ireiraiBev/xevos (?jv) 
(was trained to have moderate desires). Cy. 8. 1, 3. fxeyiarov ayabbv rb irei^apx^v 
(palverai els rb tear air pdrr e iv ra aya&d. With attraction : X. Yen. 12, 
21. 7/ aperi] iravraxod irdpecri Bia rb elvai a&dvaro s (on account of its 
being immortal, because it is immortal) ; here a&dvaros is attracted into the 
case of aper-f), instead of being in the Ace. Cy. 1. 4, 3. 6 Kvpos 81 a rb (piXo ■ 
ua&i)S elvai iroXXa robs irap6vras avnpcara, nal oo~a avrbs inr aXXcov (sc. avrj' 
oorra.ro), Sia rb ayx'ivovs elvai raxb airetcplvero (because he ivas fond of 
learning). 

Remark 1. Many verbs and verbal expressions, which are commonly con- 
structed with an Inf. merely, sometimes take also the Inf. with the article t 6, 

40 



470 SYNTAX. [$ 309 

even when they would have their object, if a substantive, in the Gen. The 
addition of the article gives greater emphasis to what is expressed by the Inf. 
X. C. 3. 6, 6. to ivkovaiooTepav ttiv it6\iv iroie7v avaf3akovfie&a. Th. 3, 1. 
rhv irkeiffTov ofxikov T&V lpik&v el p yov to fir) to. eyyvs ttjs rrokeoos Katcovp- 
yelv (etpyeiv two. twos). But when a preposition precedes an Inf., the article 
can never be omitted, because then the Inf. becomes an actual verbal substan 
tive. 

Eem. 2. As the Ace. of a substantive, so also the Inf. with the Ace. of the 
article, is used in exclamations and questions implying indignation. In poetry, 
however, the article is sometimes omitted with the Inf. X. Cy. 2. 2, 3. iice?i/os 
iravb avia&eis elite irpos eavT6u • Trjs tu%7js, Th ifie vvv Kkrj&evTa devpo 
t u% e iv ! (that 1 have just note been called hither !). Without the article : Aesch. 
Eum. 835. ifie ira&e7v Tade, (pev, 4 fie irakaioeppova kotol yav oIkcTv, arte' 
Toy, (pev, fivaos ! 

Rem. 3. There are many phrases, used as adverbial expressions, in which 
the article t6 is placed before the Inf. elvai which stands in connection with an 
adverb or a preposition and its Case. These must be regarded as adverbial 
Accusatives. See § 279, Rem. 10. The Inf. elvai denotes a state or condition, 
e. g. to vvv elvai, the present state, condition, and as an adverbial expression, 
with respect to, or according to the present state of affairs, pro praesenti tempcris 
conditione ; Th T-nfiepov elvai, pro hodierni diei conditions. X. An. 1. 6. 9. 
Th KaTa tovtov elvai (so far as he is concerned). H. 3. 5, 9 ~h fiev eir' 
eneivois elvai awokdokaTe (so far as it depends on them). 



$309B. The Participle. 

1. The Participle represents the idea of the verb as an adjective 
idea, and is like the adjective, both in its form and in its attrib- 
utive use ; for it has three genders, and the same declension as 
the adjective, and cannot, more than the adjective, be used in- 
dependently, but must always depend upon a substantive, and 
hence agrees with it in Gender, Number, and Case. The Par- 
ticiple denotes either an active or passive condition, but the 
adjective, a quality. 

2. On the contrary, the participle differs from the adjective, 
in retaining, like the Inf., the following properties of the verb : 

(a) The participle has different forms to denote the different 
circumstances of the action : duration, completion, and futurity \ 
e. g. ypdcjxov, writing, yeypa<pu>s, ypdif/as, one who has ivritten, ypdif/- 
cdv, one who will ivrite (§ 257, Rem. 3) ; 

(b) The participle has Act., Mid., and Pass, forms, e. g. ypd\\r- 
as, ypaiJ/dpLtvos, ypa<p£L<s. 

(c) The active and middle (deponent) participle governs the 
same Case as its verb, e- g. ypafav i-n-La-ToXyv, km^vp.(hv t^s 
ap€Tr)<5, /xa^o/xevos rots 7ro Aejutois. 



$ 310.] THE PARTICIPLE. 471 

3. The participle is used as follows : — 

(a) Either as an immediate attributive qualification of a sub- 
stantive, e. g. 6 ypd<fi(ov 7rcus or 6 7rcus 6 ypa<f>oiv, the writing 
boy ; or in connection with ekt, as a predicate ($ 238, Rem. 5), 
e. g. to pooW o,i/#ot5i/ lanv {the rose is blooming). 

(b) As the complement of the -verb, e. g. 'Opto rov iralda 
rpi^ovra. 

(c) To denote such an attributive qualification of the sub- 
stantive as is expressed in English by placing the participle 
after the substantive, or by the relative who, which, and the 
verb, e. g. Yvvrj ns opvtv ci^e koS iKacrrrjv rjpepav cow avrfj tlktov- 
aav (a hen laying, or which laid an egg daily). 

(d) To denote, adverbially, subordinate qualifications of the 
principal action, e. g. Kvpos yekiov et-n-ev (said laughing, or 
laughingly). 

Remark. As the use of the participle, mentioned under 3, (a), is explained 
in \\ 264, 1. and 238, Rem. 7, and as No. (c) has no further difficulty, only the 
usage mentioned under 3, (b) and (d) now remains to be considered. 

$310. 1. The Participle as the complement of the verb. 

1. As the participle is an attributive, and consequently ex- 
presses an action as already attached or belonging to an object, 
only those verbs can take a participle for their complement 
which require, as a complement, an action, in the character of 
an attribute, so attached or belonging to an object, that this 
object appears in some action or state. The action or state de- 
noted by the participle is, therefore, usually 'prior to that denoted 
by the verb with which it is connected, sometimes coincident. 

2. The construction is here evident. The Participle agrees 
in Case with the substantive-object of the principal verb, 
this object being in the Case which the principal verb re- 
quires. 'Akouco ^oiKpdrovs and rjKOvcra 7rore ^WKparovs 7repi 
(fiiXoiv SiaAeyop-evov. Xaipco cot and ^atpoy croi iX&ovrL. 
Opto av&pa)Trov and op co avS pa>7rov xp^ovra. 

3. But when the subject of the principal verb is at the same 
time its object also, as OtSa (e'yco) e/xavrov Bv-qTov ovra, then the per- 
sonal pronoun, which would denote the object, is omitted, and 
the participle is put, by means of attraction, in the same Case 



472 SYNTAX. f$ 310. 

as the subject of the principal verb, i. e. in the Nom. (Comp. 
§ 307, 4), e. g. oTSa Svrjrbs &v. For more examples, see No. 4. 

Remark 1. Yet the Ace. of the personal pronoun and participle, as the 
object of the principal verb, is expressed, when the subject as an object is to be 
made emphatic. Comp. § 307, Rem. 4. X. Cy. 1. 4, 4. oux, a icpeiTTaiv ijdei &>v, 
ravTa 7rpovKa\e?TO tovs ffvvouTas, aA\' 'direp ei> rjSei kavTbu r\TTOva out a, ravra 
i^rjpxe. 5, 10. irepieldov avrovs yfjpa adwdrovs yeyo/u,4vovs (they permitted 
to become enfeebled by old age). 



Rem. 2. With trvvoiZa, crvyyiyj/ctxr kco i/xavTcp, the participle can 
either refer to the subject contained in the verb, or to the reflexive pronoun 
which stands with the verb ; if the participle refers to the subject, it is put in 
the Nom., if to the pronoun, in the Dat., e. g. avvoiha (avyyiyvcao-Kta) ifxavry eS 
7roffiaas or avvoiBa £/j.avT<p ev iroirjaavTi (I am conscious that I have done well). PI. 
Apol. 21, b. iyk | u void a e /x a u t <£ a o<pbs &v (I am conscious that I am wise). 
22, d. ifiavry ^vvrjb'eiu ovdeu iiri err ajj.4 vcc. But when the subject is 
not at the same time the object, but is different from the object, then the object 
with its participle is either put in the Dat., e. g. avvotid <roi eu iroiT)<raPTi y — 
X. S. 4, 62. ti ,uoi a vvoio-fr a toiovtov elpyao-fx.4ucp; (quid me tale commisisse 
scis ?), or (though more seldom) the substantive is put in the Dat., but the partici- 
ple in the Ace, e. g. iyco a o i avvoiha evTroirjcrai/ra. X. O. 3, 7. iyd> a oi ffv- 
uo id a e7rt p.eu KOi/xaSuv &eav Kai irdvv irpcot a v io~t djiev ov, /ecu irdvv uiKpau 68bu 
/SaSi^ovra Kai ip.e av aivei&ovT a Trpo&v/j.ws o-vv&eav&ai. Also \ai&duco 
i/xavrbv ttoiwv ti (I conceal myself doing something,!, e. I do something secretly). 
X. An. 6. 3, 22 (ol tirireis) eAa^oy avTous iirl t$ \6cpu> yev6 pitvoi (reached 
the height unobserved). — With iomevai, to appear, to seem, to be like, and 
ojxoiov slvai, the participle in relation to the subject, sometimes stands in 
the Nom., though more frequently in the Dat., and with o/xoioy sivai, in the Dat. 
almost without an exception. X. H. 6. 3, 8. eoiicaTe rvpavvi<ri (iaWou 3) no- 
KiTtiais 7]56/j.evoi. An. 3. 5, 13. Zpoioi ^aav &av/j.d(o utcs. PL Menon. 
97, a. ofxoioi £o~fAev ovk op&as & [xoAoyn k6 a 1. Rp. 414, c. eoiKas, e<p7i, 
qkv ovvt 1 Xeyeiu. See § 311, 9. 

4. The verbs and expressions, with which the participle is 
used as a complement, are the following : — 

(a) Verba sentiendi, i. e. such as denote a perception by the 
senses or by the mind, e. g. opav, d/cWeiv, elSevai (to know), hrixr* 
TacrSac (to know), fxavSavew (to perceive), ytyvoicrKuv (to know), iv- 
$vp,ei(T$a.i (to consider), 7rw#aveo-#cu (to perceive), atcr#ai/ecr$ai, 
p.ipjvr](TK(G vdac, i-mXav^dvea^at, etc. 

Th. 1, 32. Tjf/.c'is abv vaToi opwpiev ovtcs irepiyevecrSrai (we see that we 
are unable, etc.). 'Opa> ere t pi%ovT a. 'Akovgii/ with the Gen. when one 
hears with his own senses, or with the Ace. when one learns by hearsay. 
X. C. 2. 4, 1. ^Kovffa Sco/cpa-rous irzpl <pi\a>u S ia\eyo p. evov (I heard 
Socrates discoursing concerning friends). H. 4. 8, 29. tficovo'e tov 0/joctu- 
fiovXov irposiovTa (he heard that Thrasybulus was coming). Cy. 1.4,25. 
Kap.fivo-r)S tftcovcrev avhpbs tfSrj epya 8 ia% * tp * (df* zvov Tbv Kvpov. 
OlSa &vr)Tbs &v (I know that I am mortal). OlSa &v& pwir o v frvnTbi 
ivTa. Her. 3, 1. 3> PaaiAev, 8 lafiefiAriiJ. 4vo s virb 'Ap-do-ios ov jiav&dveis 
[do you not see that you have been deceived?). 40. r]Sv irvv& a vea&a 1 &v$pa 



? 310.] THE PARTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OF THE VERB. 473 

<pi\ov Kal £ e TV o v e v it p-i\(r o~ ovr a. X. Cy. 1.1,2. frvfrpairoi iir ovSevas .uaAAojr 
avvicrravrai, 3) eVi toutous, o&s ac a tV <& co y t at apxeti/ avruv eTri^eipoupToj 
(whom they know are endeavoring to rule them). With the Gen. [§ 273, 5, (e)]. 
4. 4, 11. 77 o~&-no~ at o5j/ iranroTe llov lpevSofj-aprvpovvros 7) o~vkq <pav 
rovvios. 

(b) Verba dcclarandi, i. e. verbs which signify to declare, to 
show, to make clear, and the like, e. g. Sei/owcn {to show, to ex- 
hibit), Z-qXovv, SrjXov ttoiziv, (paiveiv (to show), cpaiveaSai (to shoiO 
one's self, apparere), SyjXov and cpavepbv eu/ai, iXey^eiv, e^eXey^civ, 
(to prove, to convict), dXio-Keo-^at (to 5e convicted), ttoluv (to rep- 
resent), evpi(TK€Lv (to find), etc. 

PI. Phacd. 101, c. t) -tyvxh dSrdvaros 4>ai vei ai over a (the soul appears to be 
immortal). Her. 6, 21. 'Afr-nvauoi drj\ov iir 01770- av vire pax&zo-&evre s rrj 
MtAi/Tou aA<*Scret (made it evident that they were exceedingly grieved on account of the 
capture of Miletus). Isocr. Evag. 190, d. ro7s iroir)ra7s robs Sreob s oT6v r iarl 
ir oirj a a t h al d laXeyo fxivovs Kal o'vvay&vi^o/j.evovs, ols av f3ov\i]§a>- 
<riv (the poets can represent the gods both conversing, etc.). Dem. Aph. 1. 819, 20. 
paSias eA67xS-^(T6Toi tyevd 6 (xevo s ( will easily be convicted [that he falsifies] 
of falsehood, or if he falsifies). 

Rem. 3. Instead of the impersonal phrases 877A0V iari, (pavepov eon, (palverai, 
apparet, the Greek uses the personal construction (comp. § 307, Rem. 6), e. g. 
$7)\6s el" i, cpave po s el /xt, <paivo/j.ai rrjv irarpiSa ev Trot 77 eras (I am evi- 
dent having done well, i. c. it is evident that 1 have done well for my country). X. 
An. 2. 6, 23. o~r i pywv (pavepbs fxev fj v ovdeva, ora> 8e (pair] (pi\os elvai, rovrw 
e j> 5 77 A s iylyvero i it t j8 ovKevtav (he ivas evident loving no one, i. e. it was 
evident that he loved, etc.). PI. Apol. 23, d. /caTaSyjAot yiyvovrai irpos- 
iro lov [xev 1 /xev elSevai, elSor e s Se ouSeV. 

(c) Verba qffectuum, i. e. verbs which denote an affection or 
State of the mind, e. g. ^atpeiv, rjSeoSai, dyaAAeo-#ai, ayairav (to be 
content), d^ecr^cu, ayavaKTziv, alhucrSai and ala-^yvea-^ai (to be 
ashamed) , p.erap.eXelcr3aL, /xera/xeXet, opyi^toSai, /3apvveor$ai, paSioos, 
^aAe7rtos (peptiv, etc. 

X. II. 6. 4, 23. 6 &ebs iroWaKis x ai P ei tovs fJikv fiiKpobs /.ceyd^ovs iroia>v, 
robs 8e fj.eyd\ovs fxiKpovs (rejoices to make the small great). Hier. 8, 4. 8 taKey 6 /x- 
€Uoi re ayaAAoVe&a ro7s irporeri/xriixevois fj.a\Kov, 77 ro7s iie rod Iffov tjluv 
ovai (we are proud to converse ivith those preferred in honor, etc.). Th. 1, 77. d 5t- 
kov /xevo t ol dv^pwivoi /xaWov opyi^ovrai, 77 /3 ta^o/xevo t (men are more 
indignant when they are injured than when they suffer violence). 4, 27 (oVP>J&T\vaioi) 
/xer efxeXovr o ras airovSas ov Se^d/xevot. 5.35. robs e/c rrjs vt)o-ov Secr- 
fiwras j.iere fxeXovr o a.7roS ed w k6 r e s. Eur. Hipp. 8. t t /x(t> [xevo t x ai ~ 
p v a j v (ol §eo\ ) b.vSpu>iru>v vtt6 (rejoice to be honored) . Xalp co o~oi 4\&6vr 1 
(I rejoice that you have come). PL Rp. 475, b. virb o~y..Kporeptov Kal <pav\orepa)i 
t ijxu fxevo 1 ay air w a iv. 

40* 



171 SYNTAX. [f 310 

(d) Verbs signifying to be satisfied ivith, to be pleased with, to 
enjoy, to be full of, e. g. TepTreaSai, epLTTLTrXaoSai, fxearbv elvcu, and 
the like. 

Od. a, 369. vvv fCev Saivvfxevo i r epird> fxe&a (let us delight ourselves in 
feasting). II. a, 633. iirel t a p ir t] a a v is aWrjkovs 6p6<avT es (when they were 
satisfied at looking at each other). S. 0. C. 768. fj.eo'Tbs i\v &v fiov/xevo s. 
Eur. Ion. 924. ov to: abv (3\eir(ov i fnriirXa fiai it p6 swirov. Her. 7, 146. 
eneav ravra &7)ev fxevo i eccai irA-np ees. 

(e) Verbs signifying to overlook, to permit, to endure, to per- 
severe, to continue, also to be iveary, to be exhausted, e. g. 7re.pt- 
Ka$- ets- icpopav, TrpoUoS-ai (to neglect, to permit), avi^ea^at Kapre- 
pelv, vTrofxiveiv, Xnrapexv (per sever are), Koipveiv, airwiveLV, etc. 

Her. 7, 168. ov irepioitT ctj ecrr: t) 'EAAas diroXXv fxevr] (Hellas is not to be 
permitted to be destroyed) . 1 01 . e: "E\Ar)ves viro ja eve ova i x^P as e ' uo ^ avraet- 
pofxevoi (will venture to withstand me). 9,45. Anr apeeTe fxev ovres (con- 
tinue to remain). 3, 65 (vfxiv iwiaKTiirToo) fx)\ TrepL'ioeTv rfyv rjy efxov irjv 
out is is M7jSous TrepieA&ovcrav (not to permit the hegemony to return again to 
the Medes). Isocr. Archid. 125, 47. aireiiroifxev av dKovovres tc Kal 
XeyovTes, el irdcras ras roiavras 7rpa|e:s H;eTa(oi[xev (we should be iveary 
of hearing and speaking). An. 5. 1, 2. aire'ipr] Ka tfSr] o'ver Keva£6 fxevos 
Kal j3 a 8 : £w v Kal t p e x u v Kal to oirXa <pe pen v Kal iv Ta£e: luv Kal (pvXaKas 
(pvAaTTuv Kal fj.axofJ.evos (I am weary of packing up, walking, running, etc.) < 
Th. 1, 86. tovs £u fj.fia.xov s ov ir e p :oi// 6fxe&a ad ikov fxe vov s (will not 
permit the allies to be injured). 2. 73.'A£rr)va7oi (paaiv, iv ovSevl rjfxas irpoecr- 
&aL aS iKovfievovs. PI. Gorg. 470, c. ^77 Ka/xrjs <pi\ov 'dvSpa ev epyercov 
(do not be weary of doing good to a friend). For ayexetrd-ai with the Gen., 
see § 275, 1. 

(f ) Verbs signifying to begin and cease, cause to cease, to omit, 
io be remiss, e. g. ap^ea^ai, vTrap^etv ', Trave.iv, TravearSai, Xrjyetv, 
SiaAA-arreii/, a7raX\<xTT€aSat ; /u,e#ie<r$ai, XetTrecrSat, eKAetVetv, e.7nXe(.- 

7re.1v, etc. 

Her. 6, 75. Kkeofievns irapaXafikv rbv o-iSrjpov, dp%eTO 4k t£>v Kv^/xeav 
eoovrbv Aw fi&fxevos (began to mutilate himself). Tlavca a e dSiKovvra (1 
cause you to cease doing wrong). Havofxai ae aoiK&v (I cease to do wrong tc 
you). X. 0.1,23. (at iirifrv/xlai) al k i£6 fxe v ai to acafxara twv avfrpdnrcav Kal 
ras ipvxas Kal tovs oIkovs ovirore Ariyovaiv, esT av &px<^o'iv avT&v (never cease to 
torment). Kal &\\a ye §77 fxvpia iir lAeiirw Xeywv (to omit in speaking). 'O 
aya&bs ovic iWetireraL ev ttolcov tovs evepyeTovvTas eavrSv (does not fail to 
do good to his benefactors). PL Phileb. 26, b. 186, b. 'dp^ofiai airb ttjs laTpiKrjs 
Key (a v. Menex. 249, b. tovs Te\evT7\aavTas Tifxcaffa ovSetroTe iliXeiirei 
\rj tt6\ls). 



! 310. J THE PARTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OF THE VERB. 475 

(g) Verbs signifying to be fortunate, to distinguish one's self, 
to excel, to be inferior, to do well, to err, e. g. tvrvyziv, vlkolv, Kpa- 
tuv, rrrraoSai, ev iroitiv, ap.apTa.vav, aStKelv, etc. 

Her. 5, 24. e3 eTroirjaas clttikS fievos (you did well in coming, that you 
came). Th. 1, 53. a 5 i k e It e iroXe/xov apxovr es koX crirovZas Xvovtgs (you do 
wrong in beginning tear, etc.). 2, 71. ov 5 inaia tto telY e is yr\v tt)v UXaTaiewp 
o~t parevoyres. 'A/xa pr a ve is ravra it o iu>v (you are in fault in doing this). 
PI. Phaed. 60, c. ev y iiroiricras a v a fj. v 77 <r a. s p.s (you did well in reminding 
rile). X. Hier. 11, 14 sq. irduras (robs (piXovs) Trzipto vikclv eu ttoiuj/- iav 
yap tovs (piXovs Kparfj s c5 iroi S>v, ov /at) aoi dvvoevrai avrix eLV 0<l noXeLiioi (to 
endeavor to excel all in doing good). An. 2. 3, 23. ovx 7] t rye 6 fie fra e3 
ttoiovi/t 6 s (we will not be inferior in acts of kindness). 

(h) The verbs 7reipao-#ai (especially ia Herodotus), to try 
or attempt something, 7rapao-/<ea;a£ecr#cu (usually with ws and 
the Fut. Part.), and the Ionic phrases -ttoXXos et/xt, ey/cei/xai, 
yiyvofxai, to be urgent about, to lay it to heart, to consider im- 
portant. 

Her. 7, 9. iireip-f]^rr)v iir e Xavv coy iir\ tovs avSpas tovtovs (I attempted to 
march against). PL Phileb. 21, a. iv vol Treipco/xe&a fSac avi^ovT es TavTa 
(let us try to examine these). Th. 2, 7. ol 'KS-nvatoi it ape o~ k<=v d£oi>T o us 
iroXefXT](TovTes (were preparing to wage tear). Without ws: 18 (ol UeXo-jroi/- 
vf)0~ioi) irposfroXas irapeCKevd^ovTO iroirjo'ofj.evoi. X. H. 4. 1, 41. irape o~ - 
Kevd^eTo iropevo-ofieu os. Her. 7, 158. 6 TeXoov iroXXbs iv 4 ice it o 
X4ywv (spoke urgently). 9,91. iroXXbs ij v Xiogq jxevo s 6 J~tivos (entreated 
earnestly, was all entreaties). 1, 98. AtjXSktjs i\v iroXXbs tnrb iravTbs avSpbs 
alve6fjievos (was much praised). 7. 10, 3. iravToto i iyivovT o 2/cifocu 
Se6 fjLevoi ''l&vuv Xvcrai Tbv ir 6 pov (earnestly entreated the Ionians to break down 
the bridge). 

(i) Certain expressions, mostly impersonal, e. g. it is fit, use- 
ful, profitable, good, agreeable, shameful, it is to my mind, and 
the like. 

ripe7ret /ioi aya&$ ovti and aya&$ elvai (it is proper for me to be good). 
Th. 1, 118. £irr\ptoT(i>v Tbv &e6v, et (sc. avTots) ir oXe fj.ov a iv d/xeivov ecrai 
(whether it will be better for them to engage in war). PI. Alcib. 1, 113, d. o-kottov- 
oiv, diroTepa awo'ia e t v pd\aa iv. After these expressions, however, the 
Inf. is more frequent, since the action of the dependent verb is not considered 
as already attached or belonging to the person, but as first resulting from the 
action implied in the above impersonal expressions. 

(k) The verb e'x et|/ > m the sense of to be in a condition or state, 
has an active, middle, or deponent participle joined with it, ir 



476 SYNTAX. [$ 310 

order to express the continued condition of the action (similar 
to the Latin aliquid pertractatum habere). 

Her. 3, 65. 5oA<p %x ox}(Tl «" T V ( T V vyepovi-nv) KTrjo-dpevoi (properly, 
they have themselves as those who have acquired the hegemony, i. e. they have acquired 
and still possess, comp. principatum tartum habent). X. An. 1. 3, 14. noXXa 
Xpvpara exofiey avn pix o.k6t es (we have plundered much property and still 
have it). 4. 7, 1. %(apia c?kovv Iffxvpa ol Tao%oi, eV oh /cal tr eViT^Seta Trdvra 
zlxov auaKCKOfxia- p.4voi ( into ivhich having conveyed all their provisions they 
had them there, or, as this idiom is more commonly expressed in English, into 
which they had conveyed their provisions). Dem. Phil. 3. 113, 12. teal $epas irpcpnv 
&s <piXos els QerTaXlav eX&uv ex el Kar aXafiwv. (On the contrary, e%w 
Xeyeiv, I can say). 

(1) Finally, the participle is used as a complement with the 
following verbs: (a) rvy^dvoi, to happen; (j3) \av$dvoj, to be 
concealed; (y) S iareXw, hiayiyvo fxai, Sidyoi, to continue; 
(8) ^Kvco, to come before, to anticipate; (e) ot^o/xat, to go 
away, to depart. In English, most of these verbs are often ren- 
dered by an adverb, and the participle connected with them, 
inasmuch as it contains the principal thought, by a finite verb. 

Her. 1, 44. 6 Kpolaos cpovea rod TrcuShs eXav&ave fS6<TK<av (Croesus nour- 
ished the murderer of his son unwittingly, without knowing it). Aidyw, 
SiareXca, hiayiy vopa i KaXa. iroi&v (I ALWAYS, continually do what is 
honorable). 1, 157. (?x eT0 <pevyav (he fled away). 6. ot'x.ojucu <p4pwv (1 
carry away). Th. 4, 113. ervxov birX7rai ev rfj ayopa. Ka&evdovr e s wj 
irevT-nKovTa (about fifty hoplites were then, just then sleeping in the agora, hap- 
pened to be, were by chance, sleeping). Tvyxdvco is always used, where an event 
has not taken place by our intention or design, hut by the accidental coopera- 
tion of external circumstances, or by the natural course of things. In English 
it can sometimes be translated by just, just now, just then, by chance; often it 
cannot be translated at all. X. Cy. 1. 3, 12. x a ^ irov fy aXXov (pSt&aai touto 
iroi7)<TauTa (it was difficult for another to do this before him, or to anticipate him 
in doing it). Her. 4, 136. e (pfrnffav ttoXXc? ol ~2kv&cu tovs Tlepvas i-rrl t\\v ye- 
<pvpav i-rr iK.6p.evo i (anticipated the Persians much in coming to the bridge, came 
to the bridge long before the Persians). Also the conjunction irp\v ^ (or ^ alone) 
with the Inf. can follow <p£tdveiv, e. g. Her. 6, 116. eepb-no-av aTriK.6p.evot, 
rrplv t) tovs fiapfidpovs rjKeiv (they arrived before the barbarians came). Oi> 
(pSrdveiv followed by /cat, Kal ev&vs, may be translated by scarcely — when, nc 
sooner — than, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. 58, 86 (ol AaKe8aip6vioi) ovk ecp&Tjoav irv- 
bopevoi tov irepl ttjv ""Attik^v ivoXepov, Ka\ irdvrwv to>v &XXcav apeXijcravTes 
t\kov i)plv apwovvres (the Lacedaemonians no sooner heard of the war in Attica, tJian 
they left everything to come to our defence, or they scarcely heard when, etc.). So in 
the phrase, ovk av (pSrdvots rroiwv r t (you should do nothing quicker, i. e. 
you cannot do it too quickly, or do it quickly). X. C. 2. 3, 11. ovk av <pSdvois 



$ 31 J.] INTERCHANGE OF THE PARTICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 477 

\4ycav; (you could not be too quick in speaking == speak quickly). 3. 11, 1. obn 
av cf>& avoir , '4<pT), aKoAo&ovvres; (ivill you not follow immediately ? — 
follow immediately ). ovk av (p&dvo is irepalvwv ; (= statim reliqua conclude ) . 

Eem. 4. With Xav&dvtiv and ^ai/e./ the relation is sometimes re- 
versed, the participles of these verbs being used as the complement of the 
governing verb. X. Cy. 3. 3, 18. (p&dvovr es ^'877 Syov/xtv rr t v iKeivav yr\v 
( we ravage their country, anticipating them = we anticipate them in ravaging their 
country). 6.4, 10. ^ Se AaSovffa avrbv cvv ecpeiirer (she followed unknown 
to him). 

Rem. 5. The Part, of the verb eTvai, connected with adjectives or sub- 
stantives, with several of the above named verbs, is sometimes omitted, even 
when dvai is an esserftial word ; thus after Verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g. 
Dem. Ph. 1. 45, 18. 6 Idios evrpeir€7s ipcis (knowing that you are ready). 54, 41. 
iav iv Xeppovrjaa 7rv&T)<r&e tythymcov (sc. ovra, if you should learn that Philip 
is in, etc.); very often with <paivofiai, not seldom also with rvyxdvw, 
5 a t e A w, 8 1 a y t y v p. a 1, c. g. X. C. 1 . 6, 2. avvirSS^ros re Kcd a-x^ocv 8 1 a t e A. e t s. 



$ 311. Remarks on the interchange of the Participle 
and Infinitive. 

Some verbs of the classes above mentioned are also constructed with the 
Inf., yet with a different meaning. 

1. 'A k o v e 1 v with a Part., implies both a direct perception by one's own senses 
and an indirect one, though certain and well-grounded ; with the Inf., it im- 
plies only an indirect perception obtained by hearsay, e. g. 'A k o 6 03 a v r o v 
SiaAeyofiev ov (i. e. ejus sermones auribus meis percipio). Kap:fZvo-ris 
i)Kov<re rbv Kvpov avSpbs 77877 iypa 8taj£e l P l Coftevov. See §310, 
4, (a). But X. Cy. 1. 3, 1. iSelv irre^ifxei 6 'Ao-rudyr}s rbv Kvpov, on ijKOve 
(ex aliis audiverat) Ka\bv tcaya&bv avrbv elvai. 

2.ElS4vai and iir io-raafrai with the Part., to know; with the Inf. tc 
know how to do something, to be able. Old a (iirio-ratxai) &eovs cre^ofx- 
evos (I know that I honor the gods) ; but Eur. Hipp. 1009. iiriar a/u-ai 
3-eous ffifietv (I know hoiv to honor the gods, I can honor the gods). S. Aj. 
666. el<r6fi€<r&a /.lev SeoTs *"iKeiv. — Also vofxi^eiv in the sense of 
to be assured, to know (el84vai), has a participle connected with it ; still this 
occurs very rarely. X. An. 6. 6, 24. v6pi(e 8', iav ipe vvv airoitreivns . . 
&vSpa Lya&bv a-rroKreivwv (be assured that, if you slay me, you slay a good 
man). 

3. Mav&dveiv with the Part., to perceive; with the Inf. to learn. Mavdd- 
vta ffotybs &v (I perceive that I am ivise) ; o-o<pbs elvai (I learn to be 
wise). X.. Cy. 4. I, 18. p a& 7) arovT ai ivavr iovo~&ai (rots TroAe/jiiois). 

4. r lyv (&o~Keiv with the Part, to know, to perceive; with the Inf. to learn, to 
judge, to determine. T lyvcda kco ayaSrovs ovras rots crrparidorais rovs 
ay w v as (I know, I perceive that the prize-fights are useful, but aya&ovs 
elvai, I judge that, etc.). X. Apol. 33 (ScokjOcittis) 4yvco rod 4ri £rjv rb 
re&vdvai aurcp tcpeTo-crov elvai (judged that it ivas better for him to die 
than to live longer). Isocr. Trap. 361, d. eyvcaffav Uaaicova ip.ol napadovvai 
rbv n-a?8a (they concluded to give up, etc.). 

5. Alo~&dveo-&ai with a Part, to p>erceive,to observe, to understand, to learn ; 
with the Inf. to think, to imagine (opinari). At a&dvo fiat <re fx4ya iraph 
fluo i\u Svvdfxevov (I perceive that you have great influence with the king) 



478 SYNTAX. [$ 311 

Th. 6, 59. alo-&av6fievos avrovs fieya irapa fiaciXe? Aapeico 8vva<r&ai 
5, 4. ovKeri iirl robs aXXovs epx^ai, aicr&6p.evos ovk av irei&eiv avrovi 
(opinans, se iis non esse persuasurum). 

6 TlvvSf dvea&ai with a Part, to hear, to perceive ; with an Inf. it is used 
with the same difference of meaning as in the case of aKoveiv. Tlvv&d- 
vofxai ae Xeyovra {I hear you saying). Lys. Nicom. 184, 17. irvvSfd- 
vo\xai re avrbv Xeyeiv, u>s aaefiw Ka.Tah.voov rds Svaias (ex ALUS 
audivi). X. H. 1. 4, 11. avyx&ri eirl KaraaKoirij tuv rprnpoov, as eirvv&dve' 
ro AaKedaifJ.oviovs avrd&i irapao~Kevd£eiv. Th. 5, 55. 7r v &6p.e • 
vol robs AaKedaifioviovs e^earpaTevcr^ai. 

7. Me/j.vr)cr&ai with a Part, to be mindful, to remember ; with the Inf. to con 
template doing something, to intend, to endeavor. Me/mv-nixai eZ irofnvas 
robs iroXiras (I remember to have done good) ; ev iroiyvai (I strive, wish, to 
do good). X. An. 3. 2, 39. p.e/xvn (r&oo avrjp aya&bs elvai (remember, 
strive, to be a man). Cy. 8. 6, 6 (ot aarpdirai) o ri av iv rfj yf] eKdxrrr) KaXbv 
r) aya&bv fj, p,e fivh aovrai Kal devpo air ore e p.rt e iv. S. 4, 20. p.e fivhar) 
diaKpi&rivai irepl rod KaXXovs (thou wilt prepare to contend with me). 

8. 4> ai veer 3- ai with a Part, to appear, apparere, to show (trie's self; with an Inf. 
to seem, videri. 'E<paiv ero KXaicov (it was evident that he wept, or in 
English we often use the adverb, evidently: he evidently wept; ecpaivero 
KXaieiv (he seemed to weep). X. S. 1, 15. Kal djxa Xeycov ravra airefivrrerS 
re (6 yeXojToiroibs) Kal rfj (poovrj aacpecs KXaieiv e<palvero (he seemed to 
weep, but did not weep). 

). 'E o i k e va i with a Part, in the Nom. to appear ; with a Part, in the Dat. to 
be like (§ 310, Rem. 2) ; with the Inf. to seem ; 'Eo'iKare rvpavviai /xaXXov, 
r) iroXirelais tjS 6 /ne vo i (you appear to enjoy, you evidently enjoy, etc.) (comp. 
No. 8). PI. Rp. 444, c. eoiKas okvovvti Xeyeiv (you are like one in doubt 
in speaking = you seem to speak like one in doubt). X. Hier. 7. 1. eoiKev 
e(pri, fxeya ti elvai -n tl/j.t) (honor seems to be something important). Cy. 1. 4, 
9. 7roi€i, oivoos fiovXei ■ crb yap vvv ye 7)p.5>v eoiKas fiacriXevs elvai. 

10 'A77eAAeij' with a Pai't. is used of the annunciation of actual events ; 
with an Inf. of the annunciation of things still uncertain, merely assumed. 
Dem. 01. 2. (3). 29. 4. air r\yy eX^rj $iXnriros vpTiv ev QpaKT) rpirov $) re- 
Taprov eros tovtI 'Hpa'iov Te?x os ToXiopK&v (a settled fact). X. Cy. 1. 
5, 30. 6 "Aaravpios els rrjv x^P av e fxfidXXe iv ayyeXXerai (whether he 
had made an actual irruption or not, is uncertain). 

11. AeiKvvvai and arrocp aiveiv with a Part, to show, to point out; with an 
Inf. to teach. "ESei^d <re dS iKrjo-avra (1 showed that you had done wrong). 
X. An. 2. 3, 14. acpiKOVTO els Koojxas, o&ev air ed e i£av ol r)yefx6ves X a/u. /Ha- 
ve iv ra. eiriT7)8eia (where they pointed out to them that they might obtain pro- 
visions). Dem. Cor. 271, 135. (tj fSovXli Alcrx^rjv) Kal ir p odSr-nv elvai 
Kal KaKSvovv bfuv air ecpaivev (docuit). But the Inf. is likewise user 1 
with ZeiKvvai, when the object of this verb is not to be represented as 
something perceived, but only as something possible, e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 17. 
KLvSvveixreis eir i$ et^ai, orb fiev XPV a " r ^ s Te Kal (piXadeX<pos elvai, eKe?vos 
Se (pavXos re Kal ovk a^ios evepyecrias. 

12. Ar)Xovv with a Part, to make evident, to show ; with an Inf. to say, to an- 
nounce, to command. ArjXci o e dS ikovvt a (I make it evident or show that 
you do wrong). X. Ag. 1,33. K^pvyp-ari eS-nXov, tovs fiev eXev&epias 
5 e o /xevov s ws irpbs av/j./xaxov avrbv nap e?vai (edixit, ut adessent). 

13. Uoie7v with a Part, to represent [§ 310, 4, (b)] : with an Inf. (a) to cause, 
(b) to suppose, to assume. Tloia> o~ e yeX&vr a (1 represent you laughing). 
Tloiu) a e yeXav (I cause you to laugh). PI. Symp. 174, c. aKXrjr op 
i-K oi-q a ev ('0/j.7]pos) eX&6vra rbv MeveXeiav eirl ttjv Soivqv (represent* 



J 311.] INTERCHANGE OF THE PA3.TICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 479 

Menelaus coming unbidden to the feast). X. An. 5. 7, 9. iroiw 8 1 v fills 
i ^airaT-n^e vt as Kal KaTayoT)Tev&evTas vtt i/xov r/Keiv els «!>S<nj 
( / will suppose, I will put the case, will assume, that you having been deceived 
come to Phasis). 

14. Aiffx^eir&ai and alde?a&ai with a Part, to be ashamed on account of 
something which one does ; with an Inf. to be ashamed or afraid to do something, 
to abstain from doing something through fear or shame, to be prevented from doing 
something by shame. Alcrx^vo (xai nana it p a tt co v rbu cpiXov (lam ashamed 
of doing evil, or that I do evil to a friend) : alcrxvvo fiai KaKa irpdrr e iv 
rbu cpiXov (I am prevented by shame from doing evil, etc.). X. Cy. 5. 1, 21. 
tovto fiev (sc. airodid6vaL X° L P lu A"? 7 ™ ^ dvvaa&cu) ovk alo~x v vo fiat Xe- 
y a v ' rb Se • 'Eav fievnTe Trap ifiol airoddoaco, tovto, ev icrre, on a I o~x vv oifir)v 
av ehreiv. S. Aj. 506. aXSeaai fiev ivaTepa Tbv o~bv ev Xvypip yhpa irpo- 
Xeiirav. X. S. 8, 33. tovtovs yap av ecpr] otecr&ai fiaXiaTa alS e?a&ai 
a.XXr)Xovs air oXe'nr eiv. 35. aldovvT ai tovs irapovTas air oXe'nr e iv. 
R. L. 9, 4. iras &u tis al(rx vu & e ' L ' n rbv Kaxbv (rvo~K7]vov it apaXafi eiv. 

15. lie p to pav [§ 310, 4, (e)] is sometimes, though seldom, constructed with 
an Inf. also, without any marked difference, as avyx&pe?v, eav, e.g.Th.4, 48. 
ovb* els tevai ecpaaav Kara Svvafiiv it e pi6tye a & ai ovdeva {they said they 
would not ■permit any one to enter). 'Ettit peire i v, to permit, is commonly 
connected with an Inf., rarely with a Part. X. An. 1.2, 19. ravT-nv tV 
X&pw eir 4t petty e d lapirdo- ai to7s "EXXrjaiv ( permitted the Greeks to plun- 
der). Isocr. Pac. r\ ttoXis avToTs ovk eir it peip e i Trapaf3aivovo~i rbv 
v6fj.ov. The verbs avex^o-bat and vtto [xeve iv with the meaning of 
audere, are constructed with the Inf. Her. 7, 139. KaTafieivavTes ave<r- 
Xovto Tbv hnovTa. eirl tt\v x^PV 8 e£ao~&ai (dared to withstand the enemy 
making an incursion into their country). 

16. "A px*o-Sai with a Part., when it has the meaning to be in the beginning of 
an action (in contrast with the middle or end of an action), or also when 
the way and manner, in which the beginning of an action takes place, is to be 
stated ; with an Inf , to begin to do something, to commence (something intended, 
aimed at),"K p£avTo to. Teixv olKoSo/iovvTes and oIkoSo fie? v. Th. 

1, 107. fjp^avTO Kal to. fxaKpd reixv 'A&rjvcuoi ol koS Ofxelv. X. Cy. 8. 8, 

2. 'dp^Ofiai 8 iddcr Koav en twv Seicov. C. 3. 1, 5. iro&ev t\ p£aT 6 <re 5 i- 
8do~Keiv T7)V CTpaTriyiav. 5, 22. 07r^Te iraXateiv rip^co fiav&dv eiv. 6,3. 
(Ittov rjfxiv, ex. tivos dp^ri tt\v ivoXiv eve py eT etv. 5, 15. 'A^rjvaloi airb 
tS)V irtxTepcav apx ovT ai kolt acp pov etv toov yepanepccv. 

17. Have iv with the meaning to hinder, is constructed with an Inf., e. g. PI. 
Pp. 416, C Tas oln-fio-eis Kal ttjv &XXr\v ovaiav ToiavT-nv avTo?s irapeaKevda^ai 
(Se?), TfjTis \jA\Te tovs (pvXaKas cos apicrTovs elvai Travcroi avTovs ktX. 

18. Tie i pao-&ai with a Part., to make trial of anything, to practise [§ 310, 4, 
(h)] ; still this construction is rare ; with the Inf. to attempt to do something ; 
irapao- Kevd(ec&ai is very often also connected with the Inf. The 
Ionic phrase iravT otov yiyv ea&a i, is constructed with the Ace. and 
Inf. Her. 3, 124. it av to it] eyeveTO fxr] air od-n /at) o~ai Tbv TloXvrpd- 
Tea (she used every expedient, etc.). 

Remark. By comparing § 306 with § 310, it will be seen that the Inf., as a 
complement of the verb, denotes something aimed at, intended, something ef- 
fected, while the participle, inasmuch as the idea expressed by it is prior to, or 
coincident with that of the verb with which it is connected, implies the actual 
existence of the idea designated by it. The participle, therefore, implies that 
the action denoted by it actually takes place, while the Inf. does not. 



•ISO SYNTAX. [$312. 

§ 312. The Participle used to express Adverbial cr 
Circumstantial Relations. 

1. In the second place, the Part, is nsed to denote such an 
attributive qualification of a substantive, as will, at the same 
time, define the predicate of the sentence more exactly. In 
this case, the Part, expresses the adverbial relations of time, 
cause, motive or purpose, condition and concession, manner. 

The English often uses a Part, in this case, e. g. he said laughing (yeXuv); 
the city, besieged by the enemy, suffered much distress (ttoAis v-nh tG>v 7roAe^iW 7r o 
\iopKovfj.4yn). Instead of the Part., the English often uses either a suhor 
dinate clause with the conjunctions when, after, while, since, because, as, inasmuch 
as, in order to, if, although, or a substantive with a preposition, e. g. Kvpos tV 
tt6\iu e\ibv av?ik&ei> (after Cyrus had taken the city, he returned, or after taking 
the city, etc.). 

2. In English we often translate the participle by a verb, 
connecting it with its own clause by one of the above-named 
conjunctions, using as a subject either the word with which the 
participle agrees, or a pronoun referring to it. 

Oi iroKefjuoi (pvyovTes invo twv ttoX^jj-iosv eSiwx^Tjcraj/ (when the enemy fled, 
they were pursued by the enemy, or the enemy fled and were pursued). To?? 
Tlep aais ets ttjv yr\v elsfiaXovaiv of'EWrjves rjyavricaStrjffav (when the 
Persians made an irruption into the country, the Greeks went out against them). 

3. In the examples given under No. 2, the participle always 
agrees with a substantive or pronoun which is connected with 
the principal verb, either as subject or in some other relation, and 
may then be called the dependent participle. But very often the 
substantive with which the participle agrees has no connection 
with any verb, but stands alone in the Genitive. This is called 
the Genitive absolute or independent, because it has no gram- 
matical connection with any other word in the sentence. 

X. O. 4, 2. t5>v ff ccfidr wv &T)\vv ofxewv, kol\ al ipvxal tto\v appcocrrSTepcu 
yiyvovTai (when the bodies are exhausted, the animal spirits become weaker). 

Remark 1. The Genitive absolute can never be used when the action refers 
to the subject ; in this case the participle must always be made to agree with 
the subject. It is otherwise in Latin, on account of there being no active par 
ticiples in the past tense ; the Latin must, therefore, use the Abl. Absolute, 
even when the action refers to the subject, e. g. oi a-rpaTiwrai tj)v iroKiv /ca&e- 
\6vt€s els rh <TTpar6ir^ov avtx u>pr\<x<xv (milites, urbe DIRUTA, in castra se re- 
ceperunt, after the soldiers had taken the city, they returned to the camp). In this 



$ 312.] THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PARTICIPLE. 481 

example, the actions denoted by the participle and the verb, both refer tc- 
arpaTLwrai, and therefore the Gen. Absol. could not be used. 

Eem. 2. The reason why the Greeks chose the Gen. absolute, has been 
seen in treating of the Gen., § 273, Eem. 11. Subordinate clausee also may be 
used instead of the participial construction, either for the sake of greater em- 
phasis, or for perspicuity. 

4. The Participle as described under 2 and 3, is used to 
denote : — 

(a) A specification of time, where the English uses subordi- 
nate clauses, with the conjunctions when, while, during, after, 
since, or a substantive with a preposition. 

X. C. 1. 2, 22. tcoXKoX ra xP'hl JLara avaXwaav t e s, u>v Trpoa&ev atretxovTO 
Kepfi&v, alo~xP a vo/xl^oj/res elucu, tovtcov ovk airexovrai (after wasting their money, 
after, when they had wasted). An. 'A k o v <r a o~ i raxna ro7s o-TpaT-qyoTs rb ij/bvfirjfia 
X^P^ eSo/ce? (when the generals heard this, on hearing this, after hearing this, they 
thought the device ingenious). So the frequent circumlocution with irot.r)<ras 
in the sense of thereupon. Her. 6, 96. iveirprjo-av teal to. ipa Kal ttjv it6Xiv • ravra 
§e iroir) (Tavre s iirl ras &XXas vrjaovs avdyovro (thereupon they set sail for 
the other islands) ; or with the repetition of the Part, of the preceding word. 
Her. 7, 60. iravras tovtu> tw rp6ivu> i£r)pl&fj.7i<Tav ap i& fir) a avr e s Se Kara 
edrea <Si4racr(rov (in this way they numbered all; thereupon they arranged the 
army by nations). Gen. absolute, X. H. 5. 1, 9, vavfi ax Las Tpbs ttjv o-eXrji/rjv 
ysvofiivns, rirrapas rpirjpeis Xafifidvei Toopyanras (a naval battle having been 
fought by moonlight). 4.58. virocpaivovros rod r)pos, ' AyrjcriXaos KXivoire- 
ri]s r\v (when the spring appeared). II. a, 88. ovtis ifiev £u>vtos Kal itrl x& 0i/ l 
dtpKOfievoio crol KoiXys irapa V7]v<j\ fiapeias x € ?P as i^oicrei (ivhile I live, as long 
as I live and look upon the earth). 

Eem. 3. The following participles, which may be sometimes translated in 
English by adverbs, also belong here : (a) apx<!>V-evos, in the beginning, origi- 
nally. Th. 4, 64. airep Kal apxo fi^vos el-rrou. (This is to be distinguished 
from ap^dfieuos air 6 tlvos, which may be translated, especially, before all. 
The Part, ap^dfievos agrees, for the most part, in Number, Gender, Case, with 
the substantive which is more exactly defined, e. g. PI. Ep. 600, e. ovkovv riStw- 
fiev airb 'Ofirjpov ap^afieuov s tt auras robs tto it) t ikov s fiifirjras eldco' 
Xcov apeTjjs thai, (that all the poets, particularly Homer, etc.). Sometimes, how- 
ever, the Part. ap^dfievos agrees with the subject of the sentence. PI. Symp. 
173, d. SokzTs /J.OL aTex v &s irdvras av&pcvirovs a&Xiovs rjyelcr^ai ivXty ~%(»>KpaTovs, 
airb <rov dp |a fiev o s, you seem to me to think all men unhappy except Socrates, 
particularly yourself '). — \fS) TeXevrav, properly ending, Jit tally, at last. Pi. 
Ep. 362, a. TeAeurwy iravra Kara ira&wv ava<rKii'8vXevfrr)o~€Tai. X. An. 6. 3, 8. 
T eXevTWVT e s Kal airb rod vdaros elpyou (robs "EXXrjvas) ol 0pa/ces (at last the 
'Thracians kept the Greeks from the water). — (7) AiaXt ttojp xP° V0V -> a fier 
some time, after a ivhile, subsequently, or SiaX. iroXvv, bxiyov xp., iir ictx^ 31 ' "xoxbv 
Xp^vov, p.iKp6v. PI. Phaed. 59, e. oi> ivoxbv ovu xp° vov * "" * °~ X ® v %**• 

Eem. 4. The Part, in the Gen. sometimes stands without a subject, when 
the subject can be readily supplied from what goes before, or when the subject 
is indefinite, where a demonstrative pronoun, or the words irpdyfiara xpVfJ- aTa ^ 
tv&pooiroi, etc., used in a general sense, may be understood. Th. 1, 116. Ilepi- 

41 



482 SYNTAX. [§ 312, 

kXy/s w'x 6T0 Kara rdxos iirl Kavvov Kal Kaplas, isayy 6 A 3- ivr oov, oti^oivhtctcu 
f^cs eV avTovs 7rXeovaiv (it having been announced that Phoenician ships were sailing 
against them). X. Cy. 1.4, 18. a ■*) p.av&evTo> v o\ tu 'AffTvdyei, on iroXepaoi 
eicriv eV t?7 %wpa e'|e/3o77&ei Kal auTos irpbs ret opia {it having been signified to 
Astyages), 3. 1, 38. S iacr kvv ovvtcov Se (sc. avT&v) fj.era rb delirvov, iiriipera 
6 ¥.vpos. Also in the Sing. Th. 1, 74. cra<p&s 8wXoo&4vtos, oti eV Tats vavcrl 
r&v "EXXyvoov to. irpa.yixa.Ta iyevero (it having been made very evident that). Core p. 
the Latin cognito, edicto, petito, etc., instead of postquam cognitum est, etc. 

Rem. 0. In order to define the time more exactly, the preposition iirl is 
frequently connected with the Gen., yet only when the Part, is in the Pres, 
tense, e. g. 'E^i Kvpov &acr iXzvovt o s (while Cyrus washing). See § 296, 

1, (2). The relation of past time is sometimes made more definite by the prep- 
osition /j. era, after, with the Ace. e. g. Her. 6. 132. /xera Se eV Mapa&wvt 
rpw/xa yevojxevov MtXTiddns cu>|eTo (after the slaughter made at Marathon). 
See § 294, II, (2). The relation of indefinite time expressed by about, nearly, 
is indicated by vir6 with the Ace, e. g. inrb t))v izp&T-nv iireX&ov aav 
vvKra [§ 299, III, (2)], the coincidence or contemporaneousness of one thing with 
another, is expressed by dpi a with the Dat., e. g. a p.* rjp.4pa 8 ia<pwff Kovo-rj 
(as soon as daybreak); d/xa re? a it &> aKp.d£ovT i (simulac frumentum adul- 
turn est). 

Pem. 6. In order to determine more exactly the relation of time, temporal 
adverbs are often used with the dependent participle and the Gen. absolute : 
avTiKa, ev&vs, i£ai<pvr) s, ^6Ta|», dp.a. PI. Pp. 328, C. eu&vy ovv p.e 
i5wc 6 KecpaXos 7icnrd(eT6 re Kal d?ev (simul ut me conspexit). Lys. 207, a. 6 
Meve^evos e/c T7js avXrjs p.eTa£i> irai^wv dsepx^Tai (while he played). Phaed. 
77, b. '6-koos p.r) dp. a air o& vt)<r k ovt o s tov dv&p&irov 8iao~KeodvvvTai 7] 
\pvxv (as soon as man dies). Her. 9, 57. Kal dp.a KaTa\a$6vT es irposeKeaTo 
trcpL (as soon as they had come up with the enemy, they pursued them closely). Th 

2, 91. £Traiccvi£6v tc a p. a irX4 ovtss (inter navigandum, while sailing). 

Pem. 7. In order to denote more clearly and emphatically the succession of 
time and a consequence or result, the following adverbs are very often appended 
to the predicate of a sentence: ivTav&a, ovtw(s), ovtoj S-n, wde. X. C. 

3, 10, 2. etc iroXX&v ff way ovt es tcc e| €Kao~Tov KaXXicrra, ovt as oXa to: 
cdt>p.aTa KaXd iroieiYe (paivea&ai (collecting from many the most beautiful features of 
each, in this way you make the entire forms appear beautiful). 

(b) A cause or reason, where the English often uses subor- 
dinate clauses with since, because, as, inasmuch as, or a substan- 
tive with a preposition. 

X. C. 1. 2, 22. ttoXXoI Td %p-if\p.aTa dvaXu>cravT€s, Siv ivp6cr&ev direlxovTO Ktpdwv, 
alffxpd vop.i£ovT es elvai, tovtuv ovk airexovTai (many having squandered their 
estates, did not abstain from those gains from which they before abstained, because 
they accounted them base). Tct eVtr^Seia %x oieu * K r V s X&? as i noXXrjs Kal dyc&rjs 
oft an s (they might obtain supplies from the place, since, because, inasmuch as, it ivas 
extensive and fertile). 

(c) A motive, purpose, or object, where the English uses the 
Inf. with to, in order to, or a finite verb with that, in order that, 
so that. Generally, only the Fut. Act. Part, is used to denote 
this relation; sometimes also the Pres. Act., (§255, Rem 3) 



$ 312.] THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PAETICIPLE. 483 

This usage occurs most frequently with verbs of going, coming 
sending. 

Her. 3, 6. rovro epxop-a-i- (ppdcruv (I have come to say this). 6, 70. is Aex 
cpobs xp7}<r6 p.evos tcS xP 7 i <rT VP l V t opever at (he goes to Delphi to consult t la 
oracle, in order to, that he may consult, etc.). X. C. 3. 7, 5. ere ye SiSd^ui. 
upp.-np.ai. Tiefxirw ere Xe^ovra (I send you that you may, to, in order to, say . 

(cl) A condition, where the English often uses a subordinate 
clause with if; or a concession, where the English uses a sub- 
ordinate clause with although, though. 

X. Cy. 8, 7, 28. robs (piXovs ev epyerovvres Kal robs ex&pobs Svvficrecr&e ko 
Xd(eiv (if you confer benefits on friends, etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 41, 2. ruv a&X-n- 
r uv Sis rooavrt]v p&pvnv Xaf$6vruv, ovSev av irXeov yevoiro rois &XXois, evb s 
he avSpbs ev <p povf] cravr o s, airavres av airoXavcreiav ol fiovX6p.evoi KOivuveiv ttjj 
eKeivov Siavoias. X. Cy. 3. 2, 15. us oXiya Sv udjxeuo i irpoopav dv&puiroi ivepl 
rod p.eXXovros iroXXd iirix^ipovp.ev irpdrreiv (although men can foresee little, yet, 
etc.). 

Rem. 8. When the Part, expresses a concession, the particles Kai (neg. ovSe, 
jmjSe), Kaiirep, Kal ravra, are commonly joined with it. X. An. 1. 6, 10. 
irposeKvvnvav COp6vrr\v) icaiir e p el 5 6 re s, '6ri em Sravdru dyoiro (although they 
saw, that). Eur. Ph. 1618. ovk av irpoSoirjv obSeirep irpdo~cruv KaKus. PI. 
Pp. 404, b. "Ojxt]pos ev reus ruv rjpuuv ecrridcfeffiv ovre Ix&vviv avrovs ecma, Kal 
ravra iirl fraXarrr) ev 'EXXrjsirovru ovras ( and that too, though they ivere, etc. ) . Tavra 
in such connections, may often be governed by the verb iroieu : and he did this, 
although they were, etc. The words op.us, elra, Kara, etreira, K&rreira, 
are often added to the predicate of the sentence. Her. 6, 120. varepoi Se airi- 
KSfxevoi rijs crvfj.fioXrjs Ifxeipovro op. us &e"f)cra<T&ai robs Mt/Sous (although they 
came after the battle, still they desired to see the Medes). PL Charmid. 163, a. vtt o - 
&ep.evos ffucppoffvvnv eivai rb Ta eavrov irpdrreiv, eireira ovSev <pr](ri KuXveiv 
Kal robs ra ruv aXXuv irpdrrovras eru<ppove?v. "O picas is often in poetry 
joined to a Part., e. g. Aesch. S. 712. ireiSov yvvai^l Katirep ov crrepyuv op. us, 
or (what also sometimes occurs in prose) is placed before the Part., e. g. PI. 
Phaed. 91, c. 'S.ip.p.ias (pofrelrai, p.r) f] tyvxh op- as Kal &ei6repov Kal KaXXiov ov 
rod aup.aros irpoaTroXXirnrai (that the soul, though more god-like and beautiful than 
the body, will nevertheless perish). 

(e) The manner and means, where the English sometimes 
uses a jmrticipial noun with a preposition. 

YeXuv eiirev (he spoke laughing). X. Cy. 3. 2, 25. X-n'i£6p.evoi C w <nv 
(raptu vivunt, they live by plundering). C. 3. 5, 16. irpoaipovvrai p.aXXov ovru 
Kepdaiveiv air aXX-fjXuv, t) arvvu<peXovvres avrovs ( prefer to gain some advan- 
tage J rom each other, rather than by assisting themselves). Isocr. Panath. 241, d 
robs "EXXrjvas eSiSai-av, ov rpoirov 8 to ikovvt es ras abruv irarpiSas Kal irpbs ovs 
noXep-ovvres p.eyaXr}v rrjv 'EXXaSa Troi-ficreiav. So often xp^p-evos with the 
Dat., where the English may use the preposition with, e. g. iroXXfj rexvn 
Xpd>p:evos robs iroXep.iovs iv'iK-^aev (conquered the enemy with great tact). 

Kem. 9. Here belongs the phrase X-npels ex^v, or in a question, ri 



484 SYNTAX. [$ 312. 

X 77 p e Ts i%u>v ; i.e. ?/om fceep trifling so, or w% cfo ?/ow /cet;/) trifling so ?, ex<w here 
expressing the idea of duration. PI. Gorg. 490, e. 7ro?a uTroST^uara cpXvapeTs 
epi/; (irtatf s/wes a?-e ?/o« always prating so much about ?). Here belong also the 
Part. <pe p6 /j.si> os, and <p£pa>v used intransitively, summo studio, maximo impetu, 
dedita opera, with verbs of motion. Her. 8, 91. '6kcos 5e lives tovs 'A&nvaiovs 
Siacpvyoiei/, <p e p 6 /xe v o 1 (cum impetu delati) iseiwrTov is tovs AlyiwfjTas (as often 
as they escaped the Athenians, rushing on violently they fell into the hands of the 
Aeginetae). 8,87. (uavs) Siumo/xewn vtto rrjs 'Attzktjs (pepovaa iveftaXe vrfi: (pt-Xirj 
(cum impetu aggressa est amicam navem, being pursued by the Attic ship, made a 
violent attack on a friendly ship). Aeschin. Ctes. 82. is tovto cpepwv TrepiecrT-nce 
ra irpdy/mTa (he designedly brought things to this state). Comp. ib. 90 and 146. 

Rem. 10. In like manner the Greek employs the participles ix<*v, dyu>v, 
(pep au, \a$wv, where the English may use the preposition with; %xav is 
used both of animate and inanimate objects, which may be in the possession of 
any one, dywv of animate objects, (pepwu of inanimate, Xafidov of both, e. g. X. 
Cy. 1. 3, 1. epx eTat V MavSdvq npbs rov iraTepa nal rbu Kvpou tov vibu exovcra 
(with her son Cyrus, etc.). So 6 Kvpos £i<pos (pepcov irposrjXao'ev, 'linrov dycou 
rfX&ev, lirireas Xafioiv tovs iroXefiiovs KaTedia^ev. The Homeric and Poetic 
language often connects the participles %x wv -> $*pu>v, Xafidiv, and dywu with verbs 
of giving, placing, etc., in order to present the idea of the action that preceded 
the giving and placing, graphically, as it were, before the eyes of the hearer. 
II.77, 305. Soke £i<pos apyvp6r)Xov crvv KoXecp re <p4poov teal i'vj-io-Tw TeXap.G>vi 
(bringing he gave, he brought and gave a sword studded with silver). 

5. Instead of the Gen. absolute, the Accusative is also used, 
but for the most part only when the Part, has no definite sub- 
ject, consequently where the verb from which the participle 
comes, is impersonal, e. g. e£ov (from e^eo-rt, licet), quum liceat, 
liceret, while, when, since it is or ivas allowed; or with impersonal 
phrases, e. g. alaxpov 6v {quum turpe sit, esset, while, because, 
since it is or was shameful.) The idea of extension in time, which 
is expressed by the Ace. ($ 279, 6), is, in this construction, trans- 
ferred to the state or condition of an object; the conjunctions 
while, when, express this corresponding relation. 

(a) Accusative absolute. PI. Menex. 246, d. rjfxiv i£bv (rjv ^ KaX&s, KaXws 
alpov/jLeSa /j.aXXov TeAevrav (since it is not in our power to live honorably). Protag. 
358, d. OTav avayKao~&fj Svo7u ko.ko?v to eTepou alpe?o~&ai, ovdels Tb fJ.e?^ov alp'f)0'€- 
tch, i£bv Tb iXaTTov (alpeTa&ai), no one will choose the greater, when it is in his 
power to choose the less. Her. 1, 129."Apra7os, irapehu avTw fHacriXea ysvea&ai, 
&XXw irepie&r)Ke to Kp&Tos (when it was in his power to become a king). 5, 49. 
napexov (quum liceat) ttjs Ao-'itjs Trdarjs dpx^iu ^ireTews, 'aXXo ti aip-rjereo-^e ; 
Th. 5. 14. (ol 'A3-77i>a?ot fxcTefxeXovTO, oti [asto, ra iv XlvXw (yevo/jLeva), KaXws ira- 
> a o~x & v, ov £wefir]o-av (when a favorable opportunity presented itself). So v tt dp • 
Xov, quum liceat, liceret; Ziov, quum opus (necess*) sit, esset ; 8 6 £av clvtois (quum 
iis visum sit or esset, when it pleased them, when they had decreed) ; don ovv (quum 
videatur, videretur) ; 7rpos77K:oj/ (quum deceat, deceret). Passive participles: 
Th. 1 125. 8 ed oy fxe vov Se avTois, ev&vs fxev dSvvaTa $\v iirixeipeiv airapcuT* 
kcihh , oIo-lv (and though they had determined, it was not possible for them, etc.). E t oij 



? 312.] THE PARTICIPLE. 485 

jievov (quum dictum sit, esset). Adjectives with 6v, e.g. SrjXov 6v (quum 
appareat, appareret) ; aSrjAov 6v, dvvarbv ov, aSvvarov ov. Also some* 
times without ov, Q. g. SrjAov, avay KaTov. 

(b) Accusatives absolute. Though the participles of impersonal verbs usu- 
ally have no subject joined with them in the Ace. Absol., yet a neuter pronoun. 
not a substantive, may be joined with them as their subject. Her. 2, 66 
ravra y iv6fiev a, rcev&ea fieyaXa robs Alyvirrlovs Kara\a/ifidvei (when this 
is done, the Egyptians are filled with great grief). Th. 4, 125. f/5?7 afi<porepois 
fiev Sokovv avax^peiv, kv poo&ev 8 e ovdev (sed quum nihil decretum esset), ex&* 
povv in oIkov. X. H. 3. 2, 19. 8 o £ a v r a Se ravra Kal irepav&evra, ra fihv 
o-rparevfiara cnrrjAbev (when these things had been agreed upon and accomplished). 

Rem. 11. The Genitives absolute, however, are more frequent than the Acc.,when 
a neuter pronoun is joined with the impersonal verb. X. H. 1. 1, 36. §6£a vros 
r o&t ov cpx eT0 {l mc re decreta, this having been agreed to, when this had been, etc.). 
7, 30 and 5. 2, 24. S o | a v r a> v rovru v. Cy. 4. 5, 53. r ovrov o~w$okovv- 
tos (acc. to the best MSS.). 4.5,53. r ovrov ovras ex ovT0S - Also 5o£- 
av ravra (from e5o£e ravra) occurs. X. An. 4. 1, 13. 86%av ravra, itch- 
pv^av ovra iroielv (when this ivas approved, they gave orders by the herald to do ac- 
cordingly). With such impersonal verbs as contain the subject in a measure 
in themselves, the Gen. is used, e. g. vovros, a-akiri^ovros [§ 238, 5. (b)]. 
Elsewhere the Gen. but very seldom occurs with impersonal verbs and phrases, 
e. g. X. Hipp. 4, 2. a 5 7] A ou ovros, el kt\. 

6. The particle of comparison w?, is connected both with the 
dependent Part. (§ 312, 3), and also with the Gen. and Acc 
absolute, when the idea expressed by the Part, is to be in- 
dicated as a representation, as a subjective view, opinion, o? 
purpose of the actor or speaker. This ws has the same signifi- 
cation as a Part, of a verb of thinking or saying, followed by 
an Inf., or Acc. with an Inf. The English can express this ws 
by the expressions thinking, intending, ivith the intention of, 
saying, or by as though, as if under the pretence that, because. 

(a) Simple Participle. X. Cy. 1. 1, 1. olrvpavvelv eirixeip-fio-avres, kav 6nro- 
covovv XP^ V0V 'dpxovres Siayevcavrai, &avfid£ovrai, ws ffo<pol re Kal evrvx^s ye~ 
yevrj jievoi (properly, as those are admired, who are wise men = pofii£6[ievoi 
<ro<poi re Kal evrvx^s yeyevrjafrai, thought or reputed to be wise). PI. Rp. 329, a. 
ayavaKrovGiv, Sis fieyaXuv rivcav air eorr e pr\ fievo i (i.e. T)yov fievo i fiey. r. 
aTTeo-repi\o-&ai (as if they had been deprived, thinking they had been deprived). X. 
An. 1. 1, 11. 'E/ceAevce (UpS^evov) \afii6vra avdpas on irXeiarovs irapayevev&cu, 
Sis is Ueialdas fiov\6 fievos (rrpareveoSfat ( pretending that, under the pretence 
that, saying that, he wished to march against the Pisidians). 'Cls is very often 
connected with the Put. Act. Part., Avhen a purpose in the mind of another 
is expressed. X. An. 1. 1, 'S.'Apra^ep^rjs o-vWafifidvei Kvpov cas airoKr evciiv 
(arrests Cyrus for the purpose of putting him to death). The writer here states the 
view or purpose as it existed in the mind of Artaxerxes, and not his own viev 
of the matter. So also very often with TrapaffKevd^eoSai, § 310, 4, (h). 

41* 



486 SYNTAX. [$ 312 

(b) Genitives absolute. X. H. 7. 5, 20. trapriyyeiAev avTo7s irapaGKevd^earSai. 
us fidxvs eaofxevns (i. e. Xeyuv p.dxw e<Te<rSai) (he commanded them to pre- 
pare themselves, because, as he said, or saying that, there was to be a battle). 5. 4, 9. 
eKTjpvTTOV e|ieVcu irdvTas @r]fiaiovs, us tuv Tvpdvvuv t e&ve&Tuv (quia tyranni 
rnortui essent, because, as he said, the tyrants were dead). Th. 1, 2. is 'luviav vcrre- 
oov, us oi>x iKavrjs ovarjs rrjs 'Attiktjs, airoiKias e^eirejxtyav (i.e. vofii^ovres 
ovx iKavw eivai) (afterward sent colonies to Ionia, thinking that Attica was not large 
enough). 

(c) Accusative absolute. X. An. 5. 2, 12. o Se ro7s ireXTao , Ta7s irucri iraprjy- 
yeXXe 8i7]yKvXufj.evovs Uvai, us, birorav o-n/x'fjvr], aKOvrl^eiv Serjaov (he com- 
manded all the peltasts to advance, ready to shoot, saying, that it would be necessary 
for them to hurl their javelins, etc.). PI. Pp. 425, a. to7s rifieTepois iraialv ev- 
vofxuTepov ev&bs iraiSias fxefreKTeov, us, ira.pav6jj.ov yiyvofj.evr]S avrrjs, ivvojxovs re 
Hal awovSaiovs dvSpas av£dvecr§at aSvvarov 6 v. Sows e|oV, us irapov, etc. 

(d^, Accusatives absolute. X. C. 1. 2, 20. Sib Kal robs vle7s ol iraTepes airb 
tuv irovypuv au&puiruv e'ipyovcriv, u s tt)j/ p.ev tuv xP' n0 ' Tai/ b/xiXiav do~K7]crtv 
ovaav tjjs aperrjs, tt]v Se tuv Trovnpuv KaTaXvffiv (assured that, knowing that, 
the intercourse with good men leads them to practise virtue). 3, 2. evx^To ~Zuk- 
parr/S irpbs robs &eobs airXus rayc&a SiSovai, us robs &eob s KaXXicrra 
elSSras (thinking that, convinced that, the gods knew what was best). This con- 
struction is very common, and is not limited to a pronominal subject, like the 
one mentioned in No. 5, (b). Perhaps this construction is not absolute, but 
depends upon a verb of perception to be supplied, indicated by us. 

Rem. 12. A peculiar use of the Gen. absolute, in connection with us, oc- 
curs with the verbs elSevai, eirlo-Tacr&ai, voe7v, %x* LV yv&p.T\v, Sia- 
<e7ahai rr\v yvtafir) v, <ppovTi£eiv, also sometimes with Xeyeiv, and the 
like verbs, with which, instead of the Gen. absolute, tbe Ace. of the substan- 
tive with a Part, or the Ace. with an Inf., would stand as the object. The 
consequence resulting from the action of the Gen. is commonly denoted by 
outu(s) joined to the predicate. X. An. 1. 3, 6. us ifiov ovv lovros, oirn av 
Kal i>jxe7s, ovru ?r)c yvdov-nv e%eTe (as if then I shall go, etc., seeing then that 
I shall go, so form your opinion, i. e. be assured that I shall go wherever you go, me 
iturum esse, quocunque etiam vos, statuite). Cy. 2. 3, 15. us ovu 4/j.ov ye Kal 
ayuviov/xevov Kal, oirolos dv ris u, Kara t^v d£iav p.e Ti/mav di-KocovTO s, 
ovrus, e<pr), & Kvpe, ytyva,crKe. PL Cratyl. 439, c. Siavorj^revr es us 
iovtuv re dirdvTuv oel Kal beovTuv ( reputantes, omnia semper ire et fluere ) . 

Pem. 13. Instead of us, & strep (quasi) is sometimes joined with the Part 
In order to bring out emphatically an objective (actually existing) ground or 
ieason, the particles are (are d-ft), seldom oTa, oTov (in the Ionic writers, 
also, u sre), in the sense of inasmuch as, because, quippe, are connected with the 
participle. Her. 6, 59. are ttvkvov i6vTos tov dkaeos, ovk &puv ol ivrbs 
robs e/cTe?: (because the grove was thick). X. An. 4.8, 27. are ^eu/xei uv 
tuv eraipuv, iroXXr] <piXoveiKia eyiyvero (because the hetaerae were looking on, 
there teas much rivalry). 5. 2, I. ol KoXxoi, are i kit e wt uk6tc s [e/c] tuv 
oIkluv, iroXXol f\aav dhp6oi Kal inrepeKab^vTo em tuv &Kpuv (inasmuch as they had 
been driven out of their houses, etc.). Th. 2, 5. i\o~av Kal dv^puiroi KaTa. tovs dypovs, 
ota dirposSoKr]Tov KaKov iv elp7]vv yevop.evov. PL Charm. 153, a. olov 5*ci 
Xpovov d(piyp,e vos acr/xevus fa eirl Tas £vv7)&eis Siarpifids. 



$ 313.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 487 

$ 313. Sjiecial peculiarities in the Participiciu con- 
struction. 

1. The Xom. of a Part, often refers to a preceding substantive in the Dat., 
Ace., or Gen., when the Dat., Ace, or Gen. in the preceding clause denotes the 
object in a grammatical point of view, but the subject in a logical respect, e. g. 
in So/ce? fxoi. — iyeb 7)yov/.iai, I think. This is a species of Anacoluthon 
f§ 347, 5). 

(a) Dative. Th. 3, 36. eSo^ev avrols (i. e. i\l/7)<picravTo, voted) ov robs ira- 
p6vTa.sp.6vov aTTOKrelvai, aXXa Kal robs airavras MirvXrivalovs, e7r lk aXovvr e s 
tV dXX-qv airoo-raaa k. r. X. (as Sallust. Jug. 102. populo Romano melius visum = 
rati). 6, 24. epas iveTreae iracriv ( = iire^v/xovv irdvres) 6/xoicos e/c7rAei/crcu • 
to7s fikv ir p €0" fivr epois ws . . KaTao-Tpe\pop.evois i(p' a enXeov, . .ro?s §' iv 
rjXiKla . . eueA7rtSes- ovres o-w&7)o-e<r&ai. — (b) Accusative. Eur. Hec. 970. 
aldus [A e%ei (= aldovjxai) iv ToJSe tt6tixu> t vyx&v 0U(r> '& 6f V' v vv. — (c) Geni- 
tive. Her. 4, 132. Aapeiov 7} yvw/x-n eyv (= iyiyvcoo-Kev) eiK&Qwv. Th. 4, 
23. ra ireol TlvXov vir ap.(p or 4 pav Kara Kpdros eiro A e/xe ?ro (=== ra irepl IT. 
a.fj.<p6repoi iiroXefxovv) , 'A&r) v a? oi p.ev . . rfyv vr\crov ire pt.tr A.eoj'TCJ.., ITeA- 
oirovvho- ioi Se eV rfj 'Hireipa a r par ott eS ev6 y.evo i (comp. § 266, 3). — 
Sometimes also the Ace. and Dat. of the Part, is constructed according to the 
sense of the preceding phrase or clause, and not according to its grammatical 
form, e. g. S. El. 479, sq. vireari p.ot frpderos a^virv6oov KXvovcrav apriccs 
oveipdrcov (instead of frpdo-os fx e%et KXvovcrav). Th. 1, 62. i\v yvcojxt] 
rod 'Apio-reoos (= e5o£e t^j 'ApiiTTe?) rb /xev fieSr' eavrov crrpar6iTe^ov 
%X 0VT l * v T< ? 'Io'&/ i( ? iiriTTipeiv robs 'A&rjvaiovs. 

Remark 1 . On the Xom. of the participle in the partitive apposition, seo 
§ 266, 3. — The Xom. of the Part, sometimes stands in a sentence alone, with- 
out a finite verb, so that the Part, apparently, but only apparently, takes the 
place of the finite verb. The finite verb must then be supplied from the pre- 
ceding or following sentence. Her. 1, 82. AaKeSaip-ovioi ra ivavrla rovroov 
€&evfo v6/xov ov yap ko fx&vr es irpb rovrov airb rovrov ko/j.5.v (sc. v6/jlov 
z&evro). So also conjunctions stand without a finite verb, e. g. d, idv, '6rav, 
etc. X. C 2. 1, 23. 6pw o~e airopovvra, Troiav 6§bv iirl rbv @iov rpdirrj • iav oi/v 
i/xh cpiXrjv tt o it] a- dpiev o s (scil. r^jv inl rbv fiiov odbv rpdvn). In very many 
passages, however, the Part, may be explained by inserting d/d. 

1 ■ The genitives absolute sometimes occur where the subject of the participle 
is not different from the subject of the predicate or an object of the predicate ; here 
it is to be noted, that the subject of the participle is often wanting, since it can 
be easily supplied (§ 312, Rem. 4). The reason of this peculiar construction 
is commonly found in the effort to express the member of the sentence with 
greater emphasis. 

Instead of the Nominative. Th. 3, 13. fioTi&yo'dvT cov v/xwv irpo&v/j.cos 
ir6Xiv TrposXr]^/eo-^€ {you aiding, you will more readily, etc.). 70. koX is Xoyovs 
tear aarrdvr eov (KepKvpaicov) itprjcpicravro Kep/cupcuoi (the Corcyraeans having 
had a conversation, determined). X. Cy. 1. 4, 20. ravra elir6vros avrov e5o|e 
ri (sc. avros) Xeyeiv r<2 'Aarvdyei. Instead of the Accusative. Her. 9, 99. ol 
'Sdp.ioi, air iko p.iv cav 'A&r]vaiav alxi J -ci.X(tira}V..TOvrovs Xvcrd/xsvoi irdv- 
ras aTToire/jLTrovo-i . . is ras 'Afr-qvas (when the Athenian captives had come, the Sami- 
ans having ransomed them, send all back to Athens). Instead of the Dative. Th. 
1, 114. Kal is avrfyv 5 La {SzfirjKor o s rfdr) H ep i k X eo vs . .TiyyeX&r] avrai 
(HepiKXe?) (when Pericles had crossed over into it, it icas announced to him). 

Rem. 2. These examples must be distinguished from those in Homer, where 
the Gen. of a Part, follows a Dat. of a pronoun, or the Dat. of a Part, follows 
a Gen. ; then instead of the possessive Gen., Homer sometimes uses the Dat 



488 syntax. [$$ 314, 31D 

Od. i, 257. i)\l1v 8 1 avre /care/cAoV^bj <pi\ov tfrop 8e t aavToiv (pboyyor re fiapvt 
avTov T€ ireXapov ( = ?? jjl £> v i]rop). 458, sq. r<2 k4 ol iyKecpa\6s ye b~ia aiveos 
&\Avdis aAA?7 £-6 ivo /.lev ov paiono irpbs ovSe'i. II. £, 140. 'ArpelSri, vvv 8-f) irov 
'A % f A Atj o s oAoby K?ip yrj&ei ivl o~T7)&eff(ri (povov /cat <pv(jxv 'Axaiav Sepnofievca. 



CHAPTEK VI. 
§314. The Adverbial Objective. 

The objective construction, finally, is expressed by adverbs 
Adverbs denote the relation of place, time, maimer, the quantity 
of a predicate or attribute, or of another adverb, e. g. iyyvSev 
yXSev, X "^ ^ s aTrefirj, k a X to s ojr&Suvei/, ttoXX&kls rjXSev ; adverbs 
are to be viewed in a measure as resembling the Cases of sub- 
stantives, since by these also, as has been seen, the relations 
just mentioned are expressed. Hence it is evident why most 
adverbs have a definite Case-inflexion, e. g. ov, where, avcn, kolto), 

61, OLKOL, TTTj, OTTY], etc. (§ 101, 2). 

[Remark. In addition to the above adverbs, the language has other adverbs, 
which do not, like those mentioned, define the predicate more exactly, but ex- 
press the relation of the predicate to the subject. These are called Modal 
Adverbs. They denote the certainty or uncertainty, the extension or limita- 
tion, the affirmation or negation of the proposition ; or they exhibit the propo- 
sition interrogatively. Several of them have been changed from adverbs to 
mere suffixes, and hence always depend on a particular word, which by them 
is made emphatic. The interrogative adverbs will be treated under the sub- 
ject of is :errogative sentences. Of the other adverbs alluded to, the following 
deserve a more particular consideration. 

§ 315. A. Arj, Srjra, Siqv, $r)$ev, hrjirovSev, Sat. 

1. A 7] is the abridged form of 77S77, being conformed to it in usage; but it 
can never, like ^7877, stand as the first word in a sentence (except in the Epic 
8)7 r6re, turn vero, 877 yap, jam enim), but is used only as a mere suffix (§ 314, 
Eem.). It denotes in general that which is certain, sure, settled, a reference to 
something known {already, now, even, precisely, exactly) ; it is not used of a par- 
ticular time exclusively, but may refer to any time. It is very often employed, 
in order to denote a consequence which follows of itself, nothing further being 
taken into the account. TavTa, a vvv 877 Xeyeis {just now, at this very time) ; tk 
vvv 877 eXeyes {just now, just then). X. Cy. 4. 1, 23. vvv 877 av d-nXwaeis, el 
a\77<y/7 eXeyes {now certainly). OvSev 877 kclkov ireirSv&afiev (nihil jam or nihil 
dum, thus far, as yet, up to this time). OvSev 877 kolkov Treia-o/xeSra (nihil jam = 
further). With an Imp. or hortative Subj., it signifies, now, then, now then, I pray. 
X. C. 1. 2, 41. dlda^ov 877 irpbs rwv bewv {now then teach, teach then, I pray). 



$ 3 15.] Ay, &rJTa, Srjv, SrjSev, Bywov^ev, Sou". 489 

"Iw/Aev S'fj (now then let us go, come now). After relatives, it often denotes a ref- 
erence to a thing which is known. X. Hier. 11,8. Kal irpurou /xeu eii&vs nareip* 
yaa/xevos au elvs to <ptAe?a&ai inrb ruu apxofAevav, ou St) <rv £iri&v/j.wv Tvyxdveis 
(quod, uti satis constat, expetis). Hence iireiSy (since now, quoniam, i. e. quum 
jam), because now, puisque, in respect to something conceded, known ; as 877, 
seeing that, quandoquidem, el St?, si jam, if now. In a series of sentences con- 
nected by /ecu, Sir? is placed after the word which is to be made emphatic. PI. 
Men. 87, e. vyUia, (pajxiv, Kal Icrx^s Kal KaWos Kal ttXovtos 87/. So Kal to 
Jtj \xiyiaTov ; further, &AAos re — Kal 877 Kai. Her. 1, 30. els AXjvtttov airiKeTo 
irapa "Afxao-iu, Kal St? Kal is ~2dp8is irapd Kpo7aov (and even also, and moreover 
also to Sardis). — Ti olv 877; (why therefore, I pray ?) TIus ovv 877, (how now 
then, how, I pray ?). 

2. In general, 8 77 is very often used in order to render emphatic and define 
more exactly, the word after which it stands : precisely, exactly, even (in English 
often indicated only by the tone of voice). X. Cy. 2. 3, 13. fj.4ya cppovovcriv, 
OTi 7re7raiS€vvTai 877 Kal irpbs \i/j.bv Kal Trpbs Siipav Kal irpbs pTyos KapTepeTv (just 
because they have been taught, because they have been taught, forsooth). PL Prot. 
320, a. SeSicbs irepl avTov, /at) diacp&api) 877 vir 'A\Kifiid$ov (lest he should be cor- 
rupted, forsooth). With adjectives and numerals, it has either a limiting or en- 
larging sense, according to the nature of the adjective or numeral, e. g. fx6vos 
8 77 (quite alone) , iv fipaxz? 877 (in a very short time), acr&eviis 877 (very weak), 
iroWol 877, TroWaKis 877, KpaTicrTOL 8 77 (the very best, confessedly the best). "With 
a pronoun, it expresses the distinction, importance, prominence of a person 01 
thiug as known, e. g. eKe?vos 877, that (well-known) man, <rv 8^7 TavTa 4t6 \/j.r)(ras , 
(did you especially, you of all others dare this ?) ; ovtw S-f], ivTavSa 8 77 ; so with other 
interrogative pronouns, X. C. 4. 4, IQ.koI iroTos 8770-04, ecpr), oZtos 6 Xoyos £<ttiv . 
(what kind of reasoning, I ask, I pray ?). Eur. Med. 1012. t I 877 KaT-n<pe?s 6/j.fia 
Kal daKpvppoels ; So Ti 877 Trore; (what then in all the icorld?). Tis 8)7 ovv,- 
(icho then now, who 1 pray ?). With an indefinite pronoun, it increases the in- 
definiteness, e. g. &A\oi 877 (others, whoever they may be), ocros 877, 6tt6<tos 877, ostis 
877 (some one or other, any one whatever, nescio quis), (jiv birooov 87) XP^> V0V (I know 
not how long). With conjunctions and other particles, it signifies : (a) even, 
precisely, e. g. ws 8 77, "va 877, indeed, just exactly, just even; (b) truly, assuredly, 
when a thought is to be expressed with assurance and decision, e. g. % 877, 7) 
jxdXa 877, Kal 877, 8 77 7rou, certainly indeed, assuredly, ov 87^ ttou, yet surely 
not at all, certainly not, yap 877, for surely. 

3. A 77 to, which is formed from 8 77, serves like 877, only in a higher degree, 
to render prominent, and more exactly define the word, which stands before it. 
It may be joined with all the parts of speech, in order to define them, whether 
it be to extend or restrict them. It is very often used after inten-ogatives, e. g. rt 
8771-', iireiSav touto ysvtyrai ; (quid tumdemum dicetis, quum hoc factum erit ?). It 
is also quite frequently employed in answers (even so, precisely so, certainly so). 
Also, 7) drjT a, yes, forsooth, ov Srjra (minime vero, no, by no means), ^77 drJTci 
\fiay, do not), e. g. /r)? 8 ?]t a Spdans Tama ; Kal 8 tJtcc (and forsooth, and truly). 

4. The enclitic &i\v is a Doric particle, but it also appears in the Epic Ian 



490 SYNTAX. [$ 3t6l 

guage. In Homer, &t)v has always an ironical sense, like the Attic Stjttov, 
without doubt, certainly. II. )8, 276, ov &t)v jxiu tt<x\iv aZris avfjcrei &v/xbs ayquuf 
veuteieiv /3actA?jas oveiSeiois iireeaffiv. 

5. A 77 d- ev (from 877 and &i)v) almost always expresses scorn, irony {scilicet, 
truly, indeed) ; it is very seldom used as a mere explanatory particle. X. Cy. 4. 
6, 3. aTreire/x^/dfxrju {rbv vlov), [x4ya (ppoveev, on St)^gv rrjs jiacnXiois frvyarphs 
o^ol/xtjv rbv i/xbv vlbv yajxirriv [because, forsooth, I should see my son the husband 0/ 
the Icing's daughter). 

6. A-nirov&ev (from Stjitov and &t)v), I hope so indeed, I suppose, certainly 
(nempe, ironically). X. Cy. 4. 3, 20. iyeb S\ t)v t-rnreusiv juc&o>, orav /xev iirl rod 
'linrov yeva>i*ai, to rod 'nnroKtvTavpov Stjttov&gv SiaTrpd£ofxai (I shall, as I hope, 
act the part of a centaur). 

7. Aai is a lengthened form of Si) (as vai of vi)). It is nsed only in the 
phrases ti Sal; ttws Sat ; it expresses the idea of surprise, wonder (what then? 
Jww so ? airt tu ? itane ? itane vero ?). 



§ 316. B. Confirmative Adverbs. 

1. M?)c (Dor. and Ep. pdv) expresses, like vero, confirmation, assurance, as- 
severation, truly ; often also, like vero, it is used aduersatively : still, but. But it 
cannot stand as the first word in a sentence, as it commonly depends on another 
word, and that the most important in the sentence, particularly on particles. 
Its use with particles is as follows: (a) ? H \xt\v, surely, certainly, hence used 
particularly with oaths, asseverations, or solemn promises. X. Cy. 4. 2, 8. ra 
■kktto. SiSuxTiv aurols, ?) /xtjv &s <pi\ois na\ ttktto'ls xpTiVecr&ai avTots (that he as~ 
suredly would treat them as friends). — (b) Ob /xr)y, /xt) jx-qv, truly, assuredly 
not. — (c) Kal (jiT)v,and indeed, yea surely, nay more. PI. Phaed. 58, e. Kal 
fiTfU eyarye frav/xdaia eTra&ov TrapayevSfxevos. Kal fx-fju is often used, when a 
new assertion is adduced to strengthen or corroborate the meaning. Od. A, 
582. Kal fxrju TdvraXov elseiSov ; so. often in the dramatic writers when atten- 
tion is to be directed to the entrance of a new person : and see ! and lo ! Also 
Kal fX7} v Kai, et vero etiam, and indeed too ; Kal /xr)i/ v S e, and indeed not even. 
— (d) 'AW a /xt)v, at, sed vero, but indeed, but assuredly. In a question, T< 
1X7] v ; tt&s fxi)v; quid vero? quid quaeso? what indeed ? what I ask? 

Remark. Instead of /xt)v, the Ionic Avriters employ the shorter form \x 4 v, 
which, as well as fxi)v and. \xdv, is found in Horn. also. Even in the Attic dia- 
lect, fx4v is sometimes used instead of \xt\v, e. g. in an answer. X. C. 1. 4, 4. 
irorepa yvdo/xris epya Kplveis ; Ilpe7rei /xh v ra iir cocpeXela yiyvofxeua yvco/XTjs epyu 
ehai. This confirmative /x 4 v, instead of [xt)u, occurs in the following con- 
nections : (a) M euro 1 expresses confirmation, surely ; very often in antitheses, 
like vero, to denote a limitation; thus, Kal (xevrot, ov fxevroi, oAAa (x4v- 
toi. — (b) Mevovv or fxcu oZv, sane quidem, quite certainly, yea indeed, is 
used, for the most part, only in replies, e. g. irduv /xhv ovv; very often when 
some correction is made. X C. 2. 7, 5. ol irapa col tovtwv ovShu iirlaravTai 
noielu; Tldvra /xev ovv (but do those with you know nothing of these things? 
yes, everything, immo vero omnia). So ov or (xt) fxevovv, immo non. — (c) 
VLtvSi) or p. ft> 87), quite certainly, yea indeed; always in the phrases 7) uei/Sfa 



$ 317.J EMPHATIC SUFFIXES Trip, ye, rot. 491 

ou /xevSr), d\Aa /xeud-f], nal fj-evS-n, ye fieu — Stj instead of ^ p^v di) t 
etc. On the concessive piv, see § 322, 3. 

2. ? H expresses confirmation (profecto). In order to strengthen it, jx-hv is 
often joined with it. ^H irov, surely indeed, often ironically. The Epic ^toi 
like ^, expresses assurance : surely, certainly. 

3. N v in Epic, expresses also an asseveration, but generally in an ironical or 
scornful manner (like the Attic drfirov), indeed, forsooth, certainly, nempe. 

4. N t], the Lat. ??ae, expresses an asseveration, but only in affirmative sen- 
tences, e. g. j/fy rbu Ala, in truth, surely. — Erom vt] is formed the lengthened v a i 
(as Sat from 817), which has the same meaning, and is often used with pd. — 
M a likewise denotes an asseveration ; in affirmative sentences : u a I /u.a rbu 
Aia ; in negative : ob p. a rbu Ala. But where pa Ala stands without a nega- 
tion, then a negative clause precedes or follows, or it is clear from the context 
and from an accompanying adversative particle, that the sentence is to be un- 
derstood as negative, like X. C. 3. 13, 3. 



§ 317. C. Emphatic suffixes Trip, yi, roi 

1. Hep is the enclitic, and hence the abridged form of the adverb -nipt, 
through and through (Lat. per). The radical meaning of irip is through and 
through [throughout), nip agrees with ye in that, like the latter, it gives empha- 
sis to the word with which it is joined, but it differs from ye, in making the 
emphasis extensive (consequently denoting the measure, size, the extent of the 
idea) ; ye, on the contrary, makes the emphasis intensive (consequently de- 
noting degree, the inward strength or force of the idea). In the Common 
Language, irip is not used alone, but in relation to another thought. Hence it 
is often connected with conjunctions and relatives, e. g. osrrep, throughout, en- 
tirely, the very saim who, oaosirep, altogether as great as, precisely as great, otos irep, 
entirely, exactly of such a character as, etc., ottov irep, just where, wherever, o&ev 
irep, just whence, whence soever, ecus irep, tip to the very time, as far as, until, eVet wep, 
since, eVeiSry irep, forasmuch, seeing that, whereas, ehtep, if indeed, if even. In Eng. 
the meaning of both particles is often given by merely emphasizing the word 
to which they belong. 

2. r e denotes intension, an inward force, certainty, assurance, and thus ren- 
ders an idea emphatic and distinguishes it from others ; it may be used either to 
augment or restrict the force of a word, e. g. ey<a ye (I indeed, I for my part, 
however it may be with others), <rv ye, ovr6s ye, 71-oAAa ye, bxlya ye, etc. It 
depends, like the enclitics, on the word whose meaning it renders emphatic. 
In connection with relatives and conjunctions, it serves to confirm or complete 
the preceding statement. Thus, osye, who or which indeed, icho certainly, qui 
quidem ; & sire p. ye, just as indeed ; e?y e, if indeed, if however, siquidem ; after 
adversative conjunctions: k air 01 ye, aWa ye, etc.. and yet indeed (like 
quamquam quidem, verum quidem), ye makes an antithesis prominent, since it 
defines more exactly, limits or corrects what precedes: X, C. 1. 2, 3. ko(t«« 



492 SYNTAX. [§ 318 

ye ov5e7rco7roT6 inre<rx eT0 SiSacr/caAos elvai tovtov ( certaixlt Socrates made hi\ 
pupils useful men, although, etc.). Te is very often used in replies and answers^ 
in order to indicate that they either confirm, augment, complete, limit, or 
correct, the thought contained in the preceding question. 

3. Tot (enclitic) means surely, certainly, certe, and serves also to render an 
object marked and prominent. It is often connected with pronouns, e. g. iyd 
roi, eycoye roi, I surely, I most certainly, rjfxeTs roi, ravrd roi. It is particularly 
employed in quoting general propositions and proverbs, since by it an assertion 
is referred to a general truth and thereby confirmed. Theogn. 74. iravpoi r o i 
•koWSiv ttlcttov exovcri voov. With adversative particles, e. g. Kairoi, tamen, 
quamquam (properly and surely), ixevroi, tamen (§ 316, Eem.), ardp roi, 
a A Act roi, but certainly. Also, ovroi (fjiTjToi), certainly not, yap r o i, for 
indeed, for certainly, tfroi — fj, still stronger 7/toi ye — tf, either indeed — or. 



§ 318. D. Negative Particles ovk and [K-q. 

1. Ov (like its compounds, e. g. ovde, ovre, ofr Sets, etc.) is an objective 
negative; jxi\ subjective, i. e. ou is used when something is denied absolutely, 
independently, by itself (objectively); fx-rj (and its compounds), on the contary, 
when something is denied in reference to the conception, view, or will of the 
speaker or of some other person (subjectively). Both are commonly placed before 
the words to which the negation is to be applied. On the position after the 
word to be negatived, see § 15, 4. 

2. Hence ovk stands : (a) in all sentences containing a direct assertion, wheth- 
er these are expressed by the Indicative or Optative ; hence also (b) in subor- 
dinate clauses with on and us (that); (c) in simple interrogative clauses, 
both direct and indirect ; (d) in subordinate clauses denoting time, with ore, 
iireiS-f}, etc.; (e) the ground or reason, with Sri, Stori, eirei, etc.; (f ) the 
consequence, with S>sre either with the Ind. or Opt. ; (g) in adjective clauses, 
with os, Ssris, etc., Avhich denote a concrete, objective attributive explanation ; 
(h) when an absolute negative meaning is to be given to a single word in a 
sentence, e. g. ok ayaSros, ov /ca/ccSs ; in this case ov sometimes changes the 
idea of the word to an opposite sense. 

(a) Tovto ov ylyverai, ovk eyevero, ov yevT]orerai. Tavra ovk av yiyvoiro. 

— (b) Ol5a, oil nravra ovk eyevero. "'EAeyef, ori tovto ovx ovrcas e?%er. — 
(c) Tis ovk alcrxvveTai (or ovk au alo~x vvOLTO ) «aKa Xeyap rbv aya&bv avdpa; 

— * Ap" ov fravjxd^eis top ~2,toKpdTn ; — Ob dpdcreis tovto; — Ov irepijxeue7s (§255, 
4). — <£??s, v) ov ; or <prjs, i] ov cpys ; — Ae^ov, el (whether) ovx ^ifxapres ravra 
Ae'lss. On the dependent double question, see No. 3. — (d) "Ore ovk tfASov 
ol iroKefxioi, ot "E\\f]ves rjavxa^ov. — (e) "On ot fidpfiapoi ovx wrJ)frn(rav, ol 
J E\\r]ves ra opy] ov KaTeXiirov. — (f) X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. raxv tk &ripta avnXwKei 
(Kvpos), costs b'AffTvdyns ovKer el^ef avrco cruAAe-vetf &rjpia. — (g) 'Ayfjp, 
hu ov k does. 'Aurjp, ov ovk av &av/j.d£ois. 

3. M h on the contrary, stands : (a) with commands, warnings ; hence with the 



$ 318.] NEGATIVE PAKTICLES OVK AND fit]. 493 

Imp. and with the imperative Subj.; (b) with wishes and exhortations; (c) in 
deliberative questions [§ 259, 1. (b)] ; (d) in clauses denoting purpose, with 'Iva^ 
etc. (also with ottos and the Indie. Fut.) ; (e) in conditional clauses, with el with 
the Indie, or Opt., edv, orav, iirdv, ews &v with the Subj., ore ye = siqui- 
dem ; so also in subordinate clauses which denote a repetition, whether they are 
introduced by a temporal conjunction, or by el, edv, or by the relative, etc. ; 
(f) in clauses denoting consequence or result, with &sre and an Inf.; (g) in 
adjective clauses with '6s, osris, etc., which imply a condition or purpose, in 
general when a subordinate clause contains an idea which is expressed only as a 
conception, supposition ; hence when the idea of a class or species as such is more 
precisely defined, and the sentence may be resolved by is, qui with the subjunctive 
(== ita comparatus, ut) ; (h) in the second member of a dependent disjunctive 
question {whether — or not), ov as well as ^77 is used. PL Phaed. 70, d. o'Keipw- 
pe&a, eiT apa ev adov elalv ai t/^X ^ TeXevTt\advTOiv twv av&pdnrwv, e'ire Kal ov. 
Cl'it. 48, b. (TKeivTeov, irSrepov hiKaiov epe eV&eV8e ireipaa&ai i^ievai, prj acpievTwv 
'A&rjvalav, r) ov diKaiov. PI. Pp. 339, a. el a\r]&es (0 Aeyeis), r) fir), ireipdaopai 
pa&e?v. Phil. 21, b. tovt avr6, el i) xaipeis, i) [XT] x a ' L P els > avdyKt] Si)irov ce 
ayvoelv, Kev6v ye tivra Ttdo"ns (ppovhaecos. Isae. 5, 14. ov Set vpas e/c twv tov k<i- 
rrjyopov \6ycov robs \6yovs KaTapav&dveiv, el Ka\u>s vp?v KeivTai, r) ^77, aAA.' e'/c 
tu>v vopwv robs tov KarrjySpov \6yovs, el op&ws vpas diSd^ovai 7b irpaypa, r) ov. 
But in those dependent questions, in which there is merely & distinction between what 
is, and what is not, pi) is used, when the predicate of the first member is not repeated, 
but must be supplied ; but v as well as p i), when it is repeated. Dem. Cept. § 142. 
\oyio~ao~&e irpbs vpas avTovs, ri re o~vpfii)creTai KaTetyrjcpto-pevots vp7v tov v6pov Kal ri 
fir]. X. C. 3. 6, 10. olcr&a, 6ir6ffat Te <pv\aKal etriKaipoi elcrt Kal oiroo-ai pi), Kal 6v6o , ai 
T€ (ppovpol LKavol elffi Kal 6tt6q-oi pi) elcri. Aesch. 1, 27. 6 vopo&eT-ns Stappi)Sr]v 
aireSei^ev, ovs xph $ypr}yope?v Kal ovs ov Se? Keyeiv ev tw Si)pco. — M^ is also used 
in direct and indirect interrogative sentences, which express fear, anxiety on the 
part of the inquirer, and hence require a negative answer ; (i) in forms of 
swearing, and not seldom when one swears that something shall not happen, but 
sometimes also, when one swears that something has not happened ; in the latter 
case, the feeling by which the denial or abhorrence is expressed, is denoted 
by u *., 

(a) Mr) ypdepe, pr) ypdxpys (§ 259, 5). — (b) E'foe p)] ypd<pois\ — Mj) tovto 
yevoiTo ! — M 7/ Xoopev ! — M 77 ypdcpeapev ! — (c) PI. Symp. 213, a. aWd poi \e- 
yeTe, elslai, 1) pi); o-vp-Kieo'^e, r) ov ; Pp. 337, b. ttws Keyeis ; prj airoKptvwpai ; 
(shall I not answer thee?). — (d) Aeya, 'tva pr) iroifjs. — (e) Et pr/ Xeyeis. — 
'Eav pr) Keyns. — "OTav Tavra pr) yevrjTai. PI. Prot. 345, e. os av pr) KaKa 
tcocfj eKc&v, tovtuiv cprjcrlv eiraiveT-ns elvai (as often as one does not willingly do evil, 
etc.). X. Cy. 2. 3, 20. el (oTe) pr) 'd\\o ti o"rrovhai6Tepov ivpaTTOiev, ravTrj ttj 
■7rai5/5 expwvTo (as often as, whenever, they were not engaged in more important busi- 
ness), — (f) PI. Phaed. 66, d. t2> oS>/xa r)fxas eVn-MjTTet &STe fxr) dvvacr&ai inr'' avrou 
KaSopav Ta\r)&es. — (g) PI. Ap. 21. a fxr] olda, ovde oXopai elh~evai (^ ei' Tiva fxij 
aiiSa). Hence '6 t 1 pi), unless, nisi (properly ovbev '6ti pi), then generally instead of 
ei ixi)), '6aoi pi), except those who not. Her. 1, 32. iv t$ paicpcp xP^ ur P noWa pev eVn 

42 



194 SYNTAX. [$318 

iSeW, to(=&) pr) tis 4&4\ei (multa, quae ita sunt comparata, ut, one can see manj 
things of such a nature that he would not wish to see). Andoc. 3, 41. iprjcpicrao-d* 
roiavra, e£ u>v pr/S 4 it or e vpuv p,eTapeAr)o-€i. — (h) M77 Te&i/rjKev 6 rrarrip ; 
(my father is not dead, is he ? = is it not to be feared that my father is dead ?) 
Qofiovpai, p.r\ 6 ttolt^p T4Si>T}Kev ; (I fear that my father is dead, I am anxious to 
know whether my father is dead). Mr? Spdtreis tovto; (you will not do this, will 
you?). Mr) Sei\ol eoS/xe&a ,- (we shall not be cowards, shall we? shall we be cow- 
ards?). Mr) voaeis ; ^Apa pr) vocrzis ; (you are not sick, are you?). — (i) Ar. 
Eccl. 999. pa T7)v 'AcppodiTrjv . . p.r) 'yea 0' a(pr)occ (I will not let you go, the thing 
shall not be). Aor. 194. pa. y rj v . . p. r\ '70b vonpa Kopip6repov r)Kovcrd irca, Beware! 
1 have not listened. Mr) is not unusual with the Inf. X. An. 7. 6, 13. bpvvw 
iplu &£Ovs airavras Kal irdaas prjdkt. 4pol Idia vtt4o'x^to 'Zev&rjs ^X eLJ/ ' 

Remark 1. In all the instances above given, except (a) (b) (g), ov is used 
when a single word in the sentence is to be made negative, e.g. Oi <pa>p,ev ; 
negemus? Isocr. Paneg. 71, 6. \af36vres 4£aKisx^i-ovs r5>v 'EWrjvwv, ot iv rous 
avTuv ovx otoi t r)oav Cr)v (nequirent) ; hence in the combinations ovdels 
Ssris ov; ouSevbs orov ov, etc. (§ 332, Rem. 12); so also in ovk e<r&' 
ir cos ov: for these expressions are, as it were, blended in a single word, like 
nullus non. El ov Soooet (recusabil). Dem. Cor. 320, 283, &sr y ov p.ep.vr)cr- 
&ai (= oblivisci). Moreover el can stand with ov, when the clause takes the 
place of a causal sentence. 

Rem. 2. Onokb Aeyois ravra, instead of pr) Aeye, see § 260, 2. (4) (b) ; 
on ov Spdaeis tovto (instead of pr) Spdcrrjs) and ov Spdaeis tovto; (= do this 
indeed), see § 255, 4. 

4. Mr) is regularly used with the Inf. But after verbs of thinking : otopai, vo' 
ui(a), viroAapfidvo), Sokw, as well as after <pripi and clkovw, ov is commonly used, 
since the Infinitive (Ace. with Inf.) in this case has the force of an affirma- 
tion ; much more seldom after other verba putandi et dicendi. When, however, 
these verbs are in the imperative, or in the imperative Subj., or in another con- 
struction which requires p.r), then pi] follows. 

PI. Theat. 152, b. elebs <xo<pbv dvdpa p. 7) Ar)pe?v. X. C. 2. 1, 3. rb p.)] Qevyeiv 
tovs ir6vovs. 1. 1, 20 &avpd£u), oirws ttot4 4 ir e ifffrn o~ au 'Afrnvaloi ~2.v>KpdT7)V 
7repi tovs hzobs p. r) »j><ppoveiu. An. 7. 6, 18. bpvvca vplv, pr)b" a 4po\ 15'itf 
inr4sx*TO ~2.ev&r)s eX 6 '*'' X. C. 1. 1, 19. (ol iroWoi) olovrai tovs &eobs to. p\p 
elSevai, to. 8' ovk eldevai. 2. 4. Tavrrju ttju e^iv (vivendi rationem) rrjv tt\s tyvxys 
4rnp.4\eiav ovk 4piroBl^€iv ecprj. 1. 15. moTevoov &eo7s ttu>s ovk eluai &eobs 
4vop.i£ev; X. C. 4. 8. 2. 6 p.o \oye?rai ovZ4va ira twv pvnpovevop4vwv av- 
bp&irwv KaKKiou bdvarov iveyKtiv. More frequently pr), as: Isocr. Phil. 109. 
wpoKoyovv prjdevbs irdnroTe toctovtov irpdyparos h'lapapTciv. Id. Dem. 22. 
vopi^e pr]S4v elvai twu avfrpooirivoov /8e/3atoj/. 

Rem. 3. When an abstract substantive or substantive adjective stands in- 
stead of the Inf., then either ovk or pr) may be used, according to the nature 
of the clause into which the substantive or the substantive adjective may be 
resolved, e. g. Ar. Peel. 115. Seivbv 8' 4<jt\v rj p.r] 4 pir e 1 p i a (=ei pr) t'is 4<t- 
tiv eprreipos). Th. 1, 137. ypd\pas t))V t&v yecpvp&u ov SiaAvciv (= '6ti Ol 
i>5 \lli<it\ at y4<pvpai ov dieAvidr,oai/). 



§ 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND fxrj. 493 

Rem. 4. With some verbs, e. g. <pdvai> oUo~&ai, al-iovv, viri'o-xve'io-' 
3- a i, the negative, which properly refers to the Inf., is usually joined with the 
finite verb, thus ov ty-nixi, like nego, I deny, refuse. X. An. 1. 3, 1. of arpariu- 
rai ovk ^ (pa a- ay Uvai rod ■Kp6<r<a (negaverunt se ituros esse). Th. 2, 89. £we/caA- 
ecra (v/xas), ovk a^iuv to. fii] Seu/a iv oppccdta exa^ (desiring that you should 
not fear what is not to be feared). 

5. "With the participle or adjective, /j.^ is used only when these can be re- 
solved by a conditional clause, or when they stand in a connection which 
requires yA\ ; in all other cases, o v is used. O v Svudfxevos, one who cannot, or is 
unable, ov {SovXoixevos, nolens, ovk avayKalov, unnecessary, ra ov KaXa fiovXev- 
uara, turpia consilia ; 6 ov 7no-reiW (one who does not believe, is qui non credit, or 
quum (since) non credit, or quia non credit) ; 6 < v (piKoaocpwv (is qui non philoso- 
phatur) ; 6 fi^j 7n<TTeiW (if one does not believe, si quis non credit). X. An. 4. 4, 
15. outos yap iSoKti Ka\ irporepoi/ iroXXa. ^877 aXyfreva'aL roiavra, ra ovra tc ens 
tivra, Kal ra [i)) ovra ws ovk ovra (if anything was not, he represented it as not 
being). So 'H aocpia ruv 8eiva>v Kal pr) Seivcov avdpela icrriv, PL Ol5a ce ravra 
v itovi\o~avra. "HyyeiAe r\\v tt6Xiu v iroXiopK7}^e?(rav. Protag. 360, d. used 
in philosophical definitions of an ideal assumption ; on the contrary to. ov Seivd 
objective, used of actual dangers. X. Cy. 1. 2, 7. ov au yvGxri dwdfiei/ou /xhu %°-? lv 
cwroSiSoVai, jit ^ airodidovrafih, KoXa^ovci rovrov lo~xvpol>s (= £dv Tiva ktX. ) (whoever 
they knew capable of repaying a kindness, if he did not repay it, they, etc.). 3. 1, 16. 
ri yap av . . xp^°" atT ' 'dv ris Icrxvpy $1 avdpeiw [x ^ o~oj<ppovi (= el fir] o'ctxppcov e]fij ) . 

6. When a negative sentence contains indefinite pronouns or adverbs, e. g. any 
one, any how, any where, at any time, ever, etc., these are all expressed negatively 
These negative expressions neither destroy nor strengthen each other, as they 
do not stand in an opposite relation, but each of them is to be considered inde- 
pendent. The negatives must be of the same kind, i. e. either compounded 
of ovk or fi'fi. Double negatives in Latin, English, and the modern languages, 
destroy each other, but not in Greek. 

PL Rp. 495, b. fffxiKpa (pvffis ovdev [x.iya ovS 4 it or e ovb~4j/a owte ISiojttiv 
oft re ir6Xiv Spat (a mean nature never does anything noble either for any private 
individual or for the State). Hipp. Maj. 291, d. (to KaX6v) o firiSeirore al<r- 
Xpov jjLfihafiov fj.rjdev\ (paveirat (which never anywhere seems to any one 
displeasing). Lysid. 214, d. 6 KaKbs oi/r ay a&c2, ovre /ca/co> ovSenore els 
aXn&rj <pi\iav epx^rai. In like manner the simple negative (ov, ^irj) v which in 
this case must always precede the other negatives, is so connected with its 
compounds that neither lose their force; hence ovk ianv obZiv (there is not 
anything, there is nothing) ; so also the negative parts are joined with the nega- 
tive whole, e. g. Oi Zvvarai out' eS Xeyeiv ovr eZ iroieiv robs (ptXovs, he can 
neither — nor ; in like manner also ovde, i^^Se, not even, ne — quidem, are used 
in a negative sentence, e. g. ov hvvarai ovde vvv ev iroieiu robs (piXovs (he is not 
able, not even now, to benefit his friends). 

Rem. 5. If the finite verb is connected with a participle, the negative, when 
it refers to both, is usually placed with the Part., though only when the Part, 
precedes the verb. Th. 1, 12. fxera ra TpcatKa 7] 'EXXas en fieraviaiaro Kal Kar- 
q>ici(ero, 8>sre fi)) y\o-vxd(Taa a av£r)&r)i/ai (i.e. &s7e /j.^ i]0~vx° LO ~ al Kc ^ M^ 



496 SYNTAX. [$ 318 

<iv£T)&rji>a.i). "Where the negative is so placed, it must be considered as belong- 
ing to the whole sentence, and not to a single word. 

7. Ov jxt) with the Subj. or Put. Indicative, is elliptical, since with o'ok «'i 
verb denoting anxiety or fear, which is sometimes also expressed, must be sup- 
plied, and (XT) must be referred to this verb. Hence ov /xr) is used, when the 
idea to be expressed is, it is not (ov) to be feared that (/xr)) something will happen, 
e. g. oh (<pofiovfxoi) fxrj yevrjTai tovto (non vereor, ne hoc fat, Ais certainly 
will not happen). PI. Crit. 46, c. ev faftt, on ov (xr) croi £uyxa>p7j<rco (be assured, 
that I do not fear that I shall make concessions, i. e. be assured, that I certainly shall 
not make concessions to you). In a question with the second Pers. of the Fut. 
Indicative. Ar. Nub. 505. ov /xt) AaX^acis, a\?C aicoAov&rjo-eis i/xoi : / shall not 
expect that you will talk = do not talk (§ 255, 4). 

8. After verbs and expressions of fear, anxiety, uncertainty, doubt, distrust, — 
denying, hindering, abstaining, — preventing, forbidding, contradicting, the Inf. 
with the negative llt) commonly follows instead of the Inf. without /xt), the 
Greek repeating with the Inf. the negative idea implied in these words, for the 
purpose of strengthening the negative view of the sentence. This use of fxi) 
is sometimes regarded as pleonastic ; but it is entirely in accordance with the 
frequent usage of the language in employing two negatives for the purpose of 
increasing the negative force of the sentence ; hence, when a negative was 
contained in a preceding word, it was not unnatural to join a negative with 
the Inf. that followed. 

KcoXva <re fxrj tovto. iroieiv (I prevent you from doing this). Her. 3, 128. 
Aapelos aTrayopevei tifxiv p. 7] b~opv<popeeiv 'Opoi'rea (Darius forbids you to act as 
a body guard to Oroetes). 66. 6 Tlpri^ao-irns e^apvos r) v 117/ o-koktzIvox ~2,fxep<5iv 
(denied that he killed Smerdis). Th. 3, 6. ttjs fxkv fraAaao-ns elpyov /xr/ xPVV&o" 
robs MiTvArjvaiovs. 5,25. ott ia%ovT ° pb ewi t\\v eKOTepwv yr\v CTpoTeDcaj 
(they abstained from marching into the country of each other). (But aiffx^vojiai 
fir] 7rote?j/ tl signifies, I am ashamed not to do something, X. An. 6. 5, 4.) 

Rem. 6. When expressions of fear, anxiety, doubt and the like, are followed 
by /XT) with -he Ind. or Subj. (Opt.), /xr) must be considered as an interrogative, 
numne, whether not, and may often be translated by that ;' e. g. SedoiKa, /xtj airo- 
bdvri (metuo, ne moriatur, I fear whether he ivill not die = that he will die) ; e'8e- 
hoUeiv, /XT] a-rroSfdvoi (metuebam, ne moreretur) ; §48olko, fxrj Te&wnKev (ne mor- 
tuus sit, I fear whether he has not died, is not dead = I fear that he has died, is 
dead). On the contrary, lit) ov with the Ind. and Subj. (Opt.), is used after 
the above expressions, when it is to be indicated that the thing feared will not 
take place, or has not taken place ; e. g. SeSouca, /ut> ovk awo^dvp (ne non mo- 
riatur, I fear that he will 7iot die) ; iSeSoiKeiv, (XT] ovk airo&dvoi (ne NON morere- 
tur, I feared that he would not die) ; SeSoiKa, /xrj ov Te^urjKev (ne non mortuus 
sit, that he is not dead). 

1 In expressions of fear, there is always a double idea in the mind, the fear, 
that something will take place, and the hope that it Avill not. This double idea 
both the Greek and Latin seem to indicate by using a negative after verbs of 
fear, the negative being referred to a verb of hoping understood ; but as the idea 
of fear only is expressed in English, the negative is rendered that. Hence Aedoi- 
<*, ny airo&dvr) (metuo, ne moriatur, I fear that he will die, but hope ilvit he will not) 



$ 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND {Jirj. 197 

9. Even when, instead of the Inf., the conjunctions on, us with the finit< 
verb follow expressions of doubt and denial, the negation is sometimes repeated 
m the dependent subordinate clause by ob. 

X. R. Ath. 2, 17 apv €?a&ai ro?s aWois, on ob uraprjv (to deny to others that 
he was present). PL Meno. 89, d. Sn §' ovk ecrnv iiriarr]pr], aKetyai, edv cot 
Soku eiK6rus amo-relv (but consider whether I seem to you justly to doubt that 
this is knowledge). Dem. Onet. 871, 14. us S 5 ovk eKe?vos iyeccpyei rrjv yr\v, ovk 
ydvvar dpvn&rjvai. (he could not deny that he cultivated the land). Isoc Archid. 
§ 48. obdels av ToAp.Tjo'eiev dvr e lively, us ob r^y ep.Treipiav paKkov tuv aXkuv 
exop.ev. 

Rem. 7. So even after ob p.dKXov (or when the clause in which paXXov 
stands, has a negative sense), ob is sometimes used, which in English is pleo- 
nastic. Comp. the Erench, where after a Comparative que ne is regularly 
used, e. g. II donne plus que vous rC avez donne, for the purpose of giving em- 
phasis to the idea of diversity (consequently a negative idea), which is contained 
in the Comparative (the gift of one is different from, not like that of the other). 
Her. 4, 118. rjKei 6 Heparjs ovdev ri uaWov eV Tjpeas, 7) ob kcl\ eirl vpeas 
(does not come against us more than against you) . X.H.6.3, 15. ti olv Set (= ob 5e?) 
iKelyoy rbv xpovov dvap.eveiv, ews by virb irXrj^ovs kcikuv dveiirup.ev, paXkov, 7) v x 
us Taxio-fct- tV elpr)vr)v iroirjaao-^ai ; in Th. 3, 36. the negation is contained in p.erd- 
void rts i\v abrols (they repented = they no longer approved). HXt}v ob is some- 
times used in a similar manner. X. R.L. 15, 6. edpas ivdvres vTravlcrravTai fiaaiXeis, 
ttK^v ovk e<popoi (all the kings rise from their seat, except the ephori). 

10. M77 ob with the, Infinitive is used instead of the Infinitive without nega- 
tion, with the expressions mentioned in No. 8., when the negative ob or 
another word which may be considered a negative, precedes pA) ob. M77 ob is 
here merely equivalent to the simple fify, and hence is not expressed in English 
where p.rj would not be (comp. No. 8, above). 

Obdev KuXvei ae p.7] ovk aivoSaveiv (nothing hinders you to die, from 
dying). X. An. 3. 1,13. el yevr]cr6p.e&a em fiao'iXe?, ri e p.iroSuv (= obdev ep.- 
iroSuy) p.7] oi>%i (i]pds) v/3pt(op.evovs dirobavelv (what hinders us from dying after 
being treated with insult); Vect. 3, 7. ov ovseXiris elp.i ib pA} ou^l irpo&v- 
ixus av robs itoXiras els rd Toiavra els(pepeiv (I am not without hope that the citizens 
would contribute for such purposes). Cy. 2. 2, 20. aiaxp° v ('— ob KaXbv) ov 
dvnXeyeiv, p.7] ou%i rbv ivXetara koX irovovvra Kal ucpeXovvra rb Koivbv, tovtov 
koI p.eyio'Tuv d£iovo~&ai. 

Rem. 8. It is seldom in this case that pi) is used instead of pa] ob with the 
Inf. With the real negative expressions, b dvvapai, ddvvaTos, obx olds 
t el/j.1, obde [j.ia p.7)X<x>v'n eo~ri (=oi» dvvar6v ecniv),ov irei&u, obx 
oo~i6v ea t iv, ovk z\k6s iff t iv (it is not pr'obable), ov <pr)pi, and the like, 
and also such as dvoia, av6t]r6v ecrrt, the following Inf. is actually made 
negative by the accompanying p.7] ob (sometimes also by ^77 alone), since the 
above expressions, when sepai-ated from the negative connected with them (or 
the a privative), have no negative force. Ob dvvapai p.7] ob TroieTv (non pos- 
sum non facere, I cannot not do, i. e. I must do). X. Apol. 34. ovre jxt] pepvyjadai 
ovvapai ovtov, ovre pep.vqp.evos p7] ovk eiraivelv (I must think of him, and if 1 
think of him I must praise him). PL Rp. 427, e. obdev Xeyeis' cv yap vireax " 
£r)TT}creiv, us ob % '6o~i6v aoi ov p. 7] b fior)&e?v SiKaiocrvvy els Svvap.iv iravr) 
Tpdwu (since it would not be right for you not to render assistance). Her. 7, 5. v » 

42* 



498 SYNTAX. [$ 319 

zIk6s 9<tti 'Afr-nvaiovs ipyaaa/xeyovs iroXXa tfdr) natch. Tlipffas, [ity ov Sovvcu Si 
teas, tuv (= wv) i-n-oi-qcray (it is not right that the Athenians should not atone for 
their injustice). PL Symp. 218, c. irduv b.v6r\Tov rjyodjxaL elvai croi /xr] ov nal 
tovto %apt£W&cu (non sanum judico tibi hoc non gratificari). Ov cp7][ju tovto u.\\ 
ovtws %x*w (stego id sic se non habere, I deny that this is not so). — Also after the 
expressions Seivbv elvai, a\ffxp6v, al(rx vvr l J ' zlvai, aiVxui'eo'&ai, 
which contain a negative idea, the Inf. follows with /xr] ov, when it is to he 
made negative. X. An. 2. 3, 11. usre ira.o~i.v a\o~xvvt]v elvai, fi)] 0U X % 
avo"irovdd(eii> (so that all were ashamed [= none were willing] NOT to be busy). — 
Sometimes jxt) ov occurs after negative sentences with participles also, in the 
sense of if not, except, instead of the usual ixj). PI. Sys. 212, d. ovk Zvti (pixoi, 
tS) (piXovvri ovShu p.)] ovk avricpiXovv (nothing is lovely in the eyes of the lover, 
except that which returns love). 



SE CTION II. 
SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 



CHAPTER VII. 
§ 319. A. Coordination. 
When two or more sentences stand in a close connection 
with each other, there is a two-fold relation to be distin- 
guished. They are either so related to one another as to 
exhibit a unity of thought, though each is, in a measure, 
independent of the other, e. g. Socrates ivas very ivise, 
Plato also was very ivise ; or so, that they are wholly uni- 
ted, the one defining and explaining the other, the one 
being the dependent member of the other, e. g. when the 
spring comes the roses bloom. The first kind of connection 
is called Coordination, the last Subordination, and the sen- 
tences Coordinate and Subordinate. . In coordinate sen- 
tences, therefore, the members are independent of each 
other, but in subordinate sentences, one member is de< 
pendent on the other. 

I came, I saw, I conquered. — Coordinate. 
Wlien I came, I conquered. — Subordinate. 



^ 320, 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 499 

Remark 1. The coordinate as well as the subordinate conjunctions are 
properly used only to connect whole sentences ; but when several sentences 
have single members in common, these common members are usually expressed 
but once. In this way the sentences are either contracted into one sentence, the 
subject or predicate common to the sentences being expressed but once ; or 
there is at least an abbreviation of the sentences, each sentence having its own 
separate subject, but the predicate common to the sentences being expressed 
only with the subject of one sentence. O I "E A A 77 v e s to?s iroXefiiots £ire& eu- 
ro Kal Ka\£)s i jxax^°' a VT 0. ~Zo}KpaTr]s Kal Yl^aruv o'ocpol i\aav. Ot fx\v "EA- 
kr\ves irapa.Tovirorap.6u, 01 Se Ylepaai eV opecriv iffTpaToire?>evo~avTo. 

Rem. 2. In respect to the grammatical form of connection, all coordinate 
sentences ai-e alike ; they are all treated grammatically as principal sentences ; 
but in respect to their meaning and logical relations, they may be different. 
For every thought which forms a complementary member of another thought, 
can be expressed in a coordinate sentence, as was always the case, in the ear- 
liest use of language, e. g. Tb zap i|A&e, Kal to. p6da av&e?, instead of ore to 
zap ^ A3- e, to. p. a. (the spring came and the roses bloom, instead of when the spring 
has come the roses bloom). 



$320. Different forms of Coordination. 
Coordination consists either in expanding, contrasting, or ex- 
cluding a thought. The first is called copulative coordination, 
the second adversative, the third disjunctive. Sentences alsc 
which stand in a causal relation to each other, may be coordi- 
nate, and are called causal coordinate sentences. 

§ 321. I. Copulative Coordination. 

1. A copulative coordinate sentence is one in Avhich two or more thoughts 
which are considered independent, are so united together, that the thought ex- 
pressed in the coordinate sentence, gives a greater extent to the thought of the 
preceding sentence. A copulative coordinate sentence is either annexive or 
enhansive ; in the former, a second thought or clause is merely joined to a pre- 
ceding one ; in the latter, the statement made in the sentence applies with more 
force to the second member than to the first. An annexive coordinate sentence 
is made : — 

(a) By Kai, et, and, more seldom in prose by the enclitic re, que, and; 
Kal and re have, in general, the same difference of meaning as et and que. 
Kai connects members of a sentence equally important, or those in which the 
one following is stronger than the one preceding ; hence it often strengthens or 
enhances the idea of the preceding member or is a more full explanation of it 
(ac, atque, et quidem) ; re appends some addition which belongs to the preceding 
member ; in prose, words are seldom connected by a simple -re, but sentences 
much oftener. — (b) in a more emphatic and definite manner by Kai — Kai, 
*t — et, both — and, not only — but also, more seldom by t e — re; the difference 
between the two in this case is, that with the former ( Kai — km) the single 
members appear more independent and forcible, than with the latter (re — t«) : 



500 SYNTAX. [§ 321 

hence the former is used, when the members are of different kinds or are anti 
thetic ; — (e) by t 4 — k a i, both — and, not only — but also, when it is to be indi- 
cated that the connected members stand in an intimate connection with each 
other; by the stronger k a i, the second member is emphatically joined to the 
first ; they often correspond with the Lat. quum — turn, when the discourse pro- 
ceeds from the general to the particular and more important. 

~2,a)KpaT7)S Kal Uxdrccu aocpol i\ffav. PI. Apol. 23, a. -q av&pwrrivr) (T0<pia bxiyov 
rii/bs a|ta Sari k a I ovdeuos. So ttoXXo. k a I irovqpd rroXXd k a I peyaXa ; hence 
/cat ravra, and that too. X. An. 3. 2, 16. dweipoi oures < wv TToXe/j-itov to t e ttXt)&03 
dperpov Sp&vTes, opws eToXp.j]craTe Uvai els avTovs. PL Phaedr. 267, a. Ticriav dh 
Topyiav t e edaopev evdeiv : — * Av&pwiroi k a I ayaSol k a I ko.koi (but not Kal kokoI 
k al Tvoviqpol) . K a I -nev rjTes k a I irXovaiou Kal xp'hl xa ' ra K a I dvSpes. Kal vvv 
Kal aei. Kai irpwra Kal varara. X. C. 1. 2, 4. (~S,coKpaT7)s) tov oSpaTos 
aifTos t e ovk f/,ueAei, tovs t apeXovvTas ovk iirrfyei. KaXos re Kal aya&os. In 
antitheses: 'Aya&a Te Kal KaKa. (the good as icell as the evil), xpwroi Te Kal 
•Kovqpoi, to. t e epya opoiccs Kal oi x6yoi. HoXXa t e k a I KaXa epya arreSei^aTO. 
Her. 6, 114. iroXXoi Te Kal ivvopatnoi. " ' hXXoi re Kal ~SwKpaTr]s (quum alii, 
tum, S.). Her. 6, 136. MiXriadea eo'x ov * v GTopaTi o" re aXXoi Kal fxaXiara 
zdvSninros. Hence & XX cos Te Kai (quum aliter, turn, not only in other respects, 
but also), especially (but dXXcas Te without Kai signifies praetereaque, adde 
quod, i. e. and especially). The connection is expressed still more strongly by 
Te — Kal St) Kai (quum — turn vero etiam). PL Rp. 357, a. 6 TXavKcov aei Te 
avdpeioTaros tbv Tvyxdvei ivpbs airavTa, Kal St) Kal ToVe tov &paavpdxov ttjv 
airSpp-ncriv (desperationem) ovk aireSe^aTo. — It is to be observed that, after a^ua, 
#57], ovirw, ov cpfrdvcc and the like, a coordinate clause with Kai or re — Kai often 
follows, instead of a subordinate clause with ore. X. An. 7. 4, 16. ^877 Te Sia 
tov bp6cpov ecpaiveTO irvp, Kal ^.iXavbs o-qpaivei rfj crdXiriyyi (the fire already began 
to appear through the roof, and [when] Sila?ius gives notice with his trumpet). Isocr. 
Paneg. 119 a p. a r)pets re tt)s apx^s direcTTepovpe&a, Kal to?s"EXXt)(Tiv dpxh tS>p 
KaKwv eyiyveTO. 

Remark 1. Kat has this strengthening, intensive force also, when it stands 
at the beginning of a question, where the interrogate/ takes up, with surprise, 
the remark of another, and from it draws a conclusion, which shows the nul- 
lity or absurdity of the other's statement. X. Cy. 4. 3, 11. aXX' etiroi ns &i>, 
otl ircuSes ovTes epdvSavov ; — Kat iroTepa Tra?Ses elai cppovLpcuTepoi, wst e pa&e7v Ta 
<ppa(6peva Kal heiKvvjxeua, 1) dudpes ; = ac multo minus prudentes sunt. So espe- 
cially Kal Trees; PL Ale. 1, 134, C. hvvano dv tis perahihouai, pr) t^et; — Kal 
ttcos : = ac mini me quidem. 

Rem. 2. If more than two numbers succeed each other, they are connected 
in the following manner: (a) with the first member the connective is omitted, 
and the other members arc annexed by Kai repeated; (b) Kai — Kai — Kai, 
etc.; (c) tc — Te — re, etc.; (d)rc' — Kai — Kai, etc. X. Cy. 1. 4, 7. dpKToi 
Te ttoXXovs f/877 TrXrjcndaavTas b~ie<p&eipai> Kal Xeovres Kal Kairpoi k al irapSaXeis • 
al Se eXacpoi Kal SopKaSes Kal oi dypioi uies Kal oi bvoi oi dypioi do~ive7s elcnv, (e) 
Te' — Te, etc., Kai (Epic.) Od. y, 413. 'Exe(ppcov Te ^Tparios Te Uepaevs t 
'AprjTos t e Kal avribeos @pa<Tv/j.r)5r)s. (f) t e — t e Kai — Kai, etc. (seldom) X. 
C. 2.2, 5.7111/^ virode£apevr) Te (pepei to (popTiov tovto, fSapvvofJLevq Te Kal KivSvvev- 
oua-a . . k a I . . k a i ktX. After k a i two members, considered, as it were, ona 



$.321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 501 

whole, can follow with re /cot. Her. 7. 1. (iir4ra£e eKaarotai) k a\ veas re 
Kal alrou ical irXola. X. An. 4.4,2. (kco/xt]) fxeyaXr) te i t v Kal fiaalXeiov re 
e?X6 tb (raTpaTrr?, Krai iivl ra7s ivXelo-rais olKiais rvpaeis i-n-rjaav. — But /cai — re 
are never used as corresponding particles, in Attic Greek ; where they arc 
found in this position, the member introduced by tc, is subjoined only as a mere 
addition to the preceding one. Th. 1, 54. Koplis&toi /j.hv Kpar^aavres . . Kal aV- 
opas exovres alxp-oCXcarovs ovk ixdo~ aovs %iAjW, vavs re ( praetereaque) KaraSv- 
cravres irepl e^8op.r(Kopra ear-no-av rpoiraiov. As infrequently, likewise, is Kal — 
r e used in the sense of etiamque. 

Rem. 3. As an enclitic, t e must always rest upon a preceding word, and indeed 
on that word, to which r4 specially belongs in the member to be connected. But 
where the article, the attributive genitive and prepositions are used, r4 commonly 
stands between these and the word it connects, e.g.rd r e 8S>pa, ire pi re elpfyys 
Kal iroX4/xov, 2w«poT ovs re ao(pia Kal apery. If Te belongs to the whole 
sentence, it is usually joined to the first word of the sentence. Her. 6, 123. 
o'irives e(pevy6u r e rhu irdura XP 01,0V tovs rvpdvvovs, 4k /j.t]X av y 5 * e rr\s rovrcau 
i£4Xiirov ot Heio-icrr parioai r))v rvpavvloa. It is, also, often joined to the predi- 
cate of the sentence, if that precedes, although it would stand after another 
word. X. C. 3. 5, 3. & (qua re) iroXXol iiraip6/j.evoi irporp4irovrai re apery's 
iirifj.eXe7<r&ai Kal &Xki[j.oi yiyveoStai (instead of aperrjs re in.). 

Rem. 4. In the Epic writers (and in imitation of these in the Lyric writers 
also, though more seldom in the latter, and in the Attic writers in only a few 
fragments), re is very frequently joined with conjunctions and relative pro- 
nouns, in order to represent, in a more definite manner, the mutual relation 
and intimate connection between the corresponding members (as well — as, 
as — so). This r4 either stands in both of the members, in which case the first 
re refers to the following member, anticipating it, as it were, and the second 
refers back to the preceding ; or more frequently it stands in only one of the 
corresponding members ; thus often eXirep re — re, or elite p — re; jx4v re 
— 84 re or aXXa r e, as on this side, so on that, ov /x4u — 84 re (aXXa re); 
fx4v re — 5e (ctAAa); also the whole of the first member can be omitted, and 
be supplied by the mind, from what precedes; thus 8 4 re, a A A. a re, also 
often without the corresponding fxev: 84 — r 4; r4 — 84; r4 — avrdp; then 
Kal re, atque, yet moreover, when the corresponding member is contained in 
what precedes (not only — but also). 11. i, 509. rhv 8e fx4y &vyrav, Kal r 4kXvov 
eb^afi4voio. Also osre, he, who (not only in the poets, but also sometimes in 
Herodotus), osris re, ol6s re, '6<ros re (= rolos, ohs ; roffos, oaos, of such 
a nature, so great, as much as), & s r e, so as, so that, us el re, are,yvre,oircos 
re, ore re, then, when, o&i re, 'Lva re, there, where. In Attic prose, the fol- 
lowing combinations still remain, viz., oT6s r 4 el m with the Inf., signifying 
I am in the condition, &sre (so that), wseire and esre (i. e. is '6 re), quoad. 
Moreover, i ire Ire, postquam, as used by Herodotus, should also be mentioned. 

Rem. 5. Kal is originally an adverb, also, even, etiam. But the idea of 
emphasis which is expressed by Kai, also, even, necessarily supposes a reference 
to another clause, e. g. Kal 6 ^coKpdrys ravra eXe£ev (sc. ov fx6uov ot aXXoi, or 
fcsirep Kal ot ctAAoi). According to the nature of the corresponding member to 
be supplied, the emphatic Kal may have either a strengthening (even, yet, entirely, 
etc.) or a weakening force (even only, only even), e. g. Kol KarayeXas pov (you 
even laugh at me). K al av ravra eXe\as (even you said this) ; — Kal fiaXXov (yet 
rather), Kal rpts, Kal Kapra, (very much), Kal irduv, Kal iroXvs (not much), 
Kal bxlyov, Kal puKpSv (but little), Kal iras — Kal iraXai (even long ago), Kal 
X&*s> ^al avr'iKa, Kal vvv or en Kal vvv — Kal ws, Kal ovrcos (vel sic), — 
Kal p.6vos, Kal els. With questions, e. g. Dem. Phil. 1, 53. rl xpy Kal irpos- 
Sokolu; (what is only to be expected even?) (= nihil plane expectandum. est) 
In Homer, after a temporal protasis, this k a I often introduces an apodosis, 
and may then be translated by immediately. II. a, 478, ^p.os 8 1 ypiy4veia 



SOfe SYNTAX. [$ 32. 

<pdvr) pododaKTvAos 'Hc6s, k a I r6r eTreir avdyovro fxera ffrpaibv evpvv Axatwv, 
The use of Kai in such concluding clauses, shows that the two clauses are co- 
ordinate, and kox may be said to have its usual connective force, though that 
force cannot well be expressed in English. 

2. If the annexive coordinate sentences are negative, they are connected: — 
(a) By o v 5 4 (/j.nS4), not — nor, when a negative member precedes ; (b) by 

' Ka I ov (/cat fi-ft), and not, when an affirmative member precedes; this is the 
regular form in Attic prose ; but in the Ionic and poetic writers obd4 or U7?8e 
can also be used here ; (c) in a more emphatic and definite manner by otfre 
— ovre (fi^re — fi^re), neque — neque (neve — neve), neither — nor; (d) by 
otfre — r'e (seldom k a I), neque — et, — on the one hand not — and on the other ; 
as not — so also. 

X An. 1 . 4, 8. o v k ey&^e avrovs Stereo, ovd' epe? ovSeis, ws eyu avrovs Katcws 
ttoico. C. 3. 7, 9. Ziareivov jxaXXov nrpbs rb cravrcp irpos4xeiv, Kal /j.^ cfyteAei ruv 
ttjs 7r6Xecos. Dem. Cor. 254, 85. (palvofiai iyco x^-P lT0S TiTV X r l Kas T ^ Te Kal ov 
(j.4/j.ipea>s ovSe ri/xccpias. Th. 3, 14. eirafivvare . .Kal /j.7] irp6't)cr&e rj/xas. PI. 
Lysid. 207, e. eucriv dpa ffe a fiovXei iroielv Kal ovSev eTrnvX-nrrova-iv, ovde 
diaK0t}\vov<TL iroieiv a>v av eTr&v/j.r]S. — Oi)T6 &eol, ovre avdrpancoi. — X. An. 2. 
2, 8. &ixocrav . . jxi]re irpod^ffeiv aXX-fiXovs crv/jL/xaxol re ecrecr&ai. 5. 1, 6. ovre 
ayopd ear iv licavf), % re x&pa iroXe/nla. Th. 1, 118. ol AaKeSai/x6vioi aloSo/j.- 
evoi ovre eKooXvov, el /xtj enl (Zpaxv, T\a-vx a ^°' v T e T ^ ^Aeoj/ rod xp^ov. 

Rem. 6. The following connective forms are more rare, and belong mostly 
to poetry, viz., oijre — ov, ov — ovre; re ov — r 4 ; ovre — re ov ; in the 
two last forms ov combines with the verb and forms, as it were, one thought. 
Th. 2, 22. 'EkkAtjctiW re ovk eno'iei . ., tt]v re ttoXiv efyvXaao-e (he called, no 
assembly and guarded the city); 1, 126. oire eKeivos en Karev6-n<re, r6 re 
aavretov ovk eS-fjXov ; ovre — ovd4, neither — and not, which is found often in 
prose also. 

Rem. 7. OvS4 expresses either an antithesis (but not), or it serves to con- 
nect a new clause (and not, not even). When oiide — ovd4 follow one another, 
they are not to be considered correlative particles and translated neither — nor, 
but are to be translated not even — and not. X. C. 3. 12, 5. ev yap ftrd-j, on 
o v 5 e ev aXXco ovdevl ay&vi, ovde iv irpa^ei ovde/jLia jxelov e£eis dia, rb fieXriov 
rb o-cofia TvapetTKevacrSai. Ov5e as a connective in negative sentences, corre- 
sponds to Kai in positive sentences, mentioned in remark 5, and signifies not 
even, ne — quidem, e. g. ovZ' 6 Kpk'.riaros iroXjuLrjcrev avr$ fidxea^ai — ovSe els 
(tie unus quidem), ou8' as (ne sic quidem), etc. 

3. An enhansive or emphatic coordinate sentence, as has been seen (Rem. 
5), is expresssed by the simple Kal, but more definitely by : — 

(a) ov /j.6vov or ov fxovov otj (also ov% or i \n6vov) or /at] oi i — 
aXXa. Kai, not only — but also. (Ovk on originates from oi Xeyw, '6ri, as 
Ixt) '6ri from fxr] X4ye, '6ri.) ^caKpdrrjs ov jx6vov croepbs ?jv, a A Act Kal aya- 
&6s. PL Symp. 179, b. virepaTro&vi)0-Keiv i&eXovcriv ol epwvres, ov fi6vov on 
avtipes, a A Act Kal yvvalKes. X. C. 2. 9, 8. ou% '6ri fxovos 6 Kpirwv ev tjo-vx'"} 
?/v, aXXa Kal ol (piXoi avrov. Cy. 8. 1, 28. fj.7] yap Sri 'dpxovra, a XX a Kal 
ovs ov (pofiovvrat, jxclXXov robs alSov[x4vovs alSovvrai rSiV avaidwv ol dv^pcotroi. 



$ 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 503 

Rem. 8. Ov fxovov — aXXd without /ecu is used, when the second mem- 
ber includes the first, whether the second is stronger than the first in extent or 
degree. Isocr. Phil. 5, 146. ov p.6vov eirl tovtwv avrovs 6^/ei ttjv yvebfj-nv rauT-nv 
tX°v ra Si kAA.' eirl iravrcav 6/j.olas. Panath. 37. ov fiovov av evpe&einv 
eV} 7 ols vvv Xeyofxevois TavT-nv ex w ttjv Sidvoiav, dAA' bfioicos iirl 7r dvT uv. 
X. C. 1. 6, 2. ln&Tiov i}fJ.<pieo~ai ov fi6vov (pavXov, a A A a to avrb frepovs T6 
Kal x^ j u<Sj / os. 

(b) Oi>x ottws — aXXa /cat, not only not — but even, or ovx ottws or fi)j 
'6tvu)s — a A A' ovSe,not only not — but not even. ('Oirws = hoiv, I say not or ( Imp. ) 
say not how, which involves the idea, I say not or say not, that not.) Also py tin 
(followed by &A A' ovSe) is used in the sense of not only not, when both clauses 
have a common predicate, and this stands in the last clause. Dem. Cor. 271,1. o b x 
finus X° L P iv <*vto7s (Tols'A&wvatois) ex^LS aXXa fxia^doaras aeavrbv Kara, rovrcovl 
iroXirevr} (non modo non — sed etiam). Dem. Phil. 2, 67. [robs Gnfiaiovs fjyelro) 
ovx ^ 7rcy ^ avriirpd^eiv Kal SiaKuXvaeiv, aAAa Kal o~vgt par evcreiv. Isocr. 
Plataic. 586. ovx otwj rrjs koivTjs eXev&eptas fj.erexofJ.eu, &AA 5 ovSe SovXelas 
fierplas 7i£L(&frnfj.ev rvx^v (non modo non — sed ne — quidem). X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. 
U7) '6 ir cas bpx^a^at ev pv&fjt.q>, a A A 5 ovfi' op&ova&ai eSvvaa&e (non modo non 
saltare poteratis, sed ne rectis quidem pedibus stare). Isae. 10, 1. eyb /x^ Sri 
iirep &XXov, a A A' ovSe inrep efiavrov irdtiroTe Slktiv 15'iav e'lprjKa (as in Latin: 
non modo de alio, sed ne de me quidem unquam causam dixi, instead of non 
modo non, the Latin using non modo — sed ne — quidem, instead of non modo 
non — sed ne — quidem, when both the clauses are negative, and the common 
predicate of both is in the latter clause). 

Pvem. 9. When ovx 8t* — dAA' ovSe has the sense of not only — but not 
even, the predicate of the first member contains a negation, or at least has a 
negative sense. Th. 2, 97. Tavrn (rfj Z£kv&wv tVxui") advvara (sc. icriv) e|- 
tarova&ai ovx '6tl ra ev tj? ~Evpctnrr), dA A 3 obftevrrj 'Acia e&vos. (Scytharum 
potentiae non modo Europae imperia exaequari non possunt, sed ne Asiae quidem 
gens). Dem. 702. ovx #ti tusv ovtwv air ear epi)fi'nv 'av, a. XX' ouS' av 
e(nv. (In airecTT epri/xvu is contained the idea: non haberem.) Also fit) or i 
followed by dAA' ovSe is used in a similar manner, since a negative precedes ^ 
on. X. C. 1. 6, 11. tt)V oiKiav t) &XXo ti wv KeKrrjcrai, vofiifav apyvpiov d^iov elvai, 
obdevl av fir] on irpoiKa doiws, dAA' ouS' eXarrov Trjs a£ias Xafiwv (you 
would not only not give your house to any one gratuitously, but not even for a less price, 
ijian it is worth ; properly you would give to no one, not to say, gratuitously, nay not 
eeen for a less price, etc.). 

(c) Ov(k) — aXXa Kal, not — but even; ov(k) — dAA 5 ovSe, not — nay 
*iot even. Dem. Mid. 24. ov irovnp6s, aAAa Kal irdvv xpvo"r6s. X. C. 2. 3, 8. 
rbv Kal \6yq> Kal epyw ireipdofievov ifie aviav ovk av dwaifinv ovt' ev Xeyeiv ovt 
ev iroielv, dAA' ovSe ireipdo-ofxai. An. 1. 3, 2. (SapeiKobs) Xafi&v ovk els rh 
fdiov Kare^e/j.r]v efxoi, aAA' ovSe Ka^r}5vird^r)cra, dAA' els vfxas eSairdvcav. 

(d) OvSe — p.)] '6ti, not even — not to say, much less (ne-quidem — nedum). 
X. Symp. 2, 26. Kal ovSe avairveiv, fxr] 8rt Xeyeiv ri 8vvricr6fj.e&a (we shall bf 
able not even to breathe, to say nothing of speaking, or much less to speak). 



504 syntax. [$ 322. 



$ 322. II. Adversative Coordinate Sentences. 

1. An adversative coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses that stand 
in opposition to each other, are united and form one thought. 

la) The opposition is of such a nature, that the thought expressed in the 
coordinate clause either wholly abrogates the thought of the preceding clause, 
since another thought is substituted for it ; this is done : (a) by placing the 
conjunction aXXd (but) in opposition to a preceding negative; (b) by placing 
the conjunction aXXd together with the negative ov in opposition to a pre- 
ceding affirmative ; in the last case, aXXd may be translated and, or be wholly 
omitted: (a) ov% ol irXovcnoi ev5ai[xov4s elcriv, a A A 1 oi aya&oi. (b) 'E/cel^ej/, 
a A. A.' ov k eVd-eVSe rjpTrdcrSfri (he was seized there, and not here, or not here). 

((8) Or the opposition is of such a nature that the thought in the coordinate 
clause merely limits or restricts that in the preceding clause. The limitation is 
expressed by 54, aXXd (but), clt dp (avTap, Epic), Kairoi, /x4vtoi, o/xccs. 

2. A e most generally has an adversative force, and hence can express every 
kind of contrast or opposition. In respect to its signification, it ranks, like 
the Lat. autem, between the copulative connectives (t4, Kal) and the adversa- 
tive (aXXd, etc.), since it contains both a copulative and adversative force, and 
hence either opposes one thought to another (adversative), or merely contrasts 
it (copulative). Hence it is very frequently used in Greek, where the English 
uses and. The new thought being different from the preceding, is placed in 
contrast with it. 

3. The mutual relation between the concessive and adversative clauses, is 
commonly expressed by the concessive /x 4 v, which, as it denotes concession 
and admission, points forward to the limitation expressed in the second member 
by 5 4. As 54 can denote both a strong and slight contrast, so the signification 
of fxiu is sometimes stronger and sometimes weaker. 

4. The original signification of (x4v (arising from fxrjv, § 316, Eem.) is truly, 
in truth; yet its signification is not always so strong as this ; indeed, in innu- 
merable places its force is so slight, that it cannot be translated at all into 
English. To jx e v u><p4Xiixov icaX6u, to 5 e fiXafSsphu alaxpo'v. Th. 3, 68. 5i4cp&ei- 
pau H\aTcu4c0V fihv abruv ovk ixdaaovs 5iaxo<rlav, 'A^vvaiwv 5 e ir4vTe ical 
ttxoaiv. 

5. Mev — S e are especially used in the following cases : — 

(a) With divisions of place, time, number, order, and persons, e. g. 'E^raCd-a 
fx4v — efce? 54, ZvSa fx4v — ev&a 5 4, Tore [x4v — rore 5 4, ttotg /x4v — 
iroTe 5 4, at one time, — at another, sometimes — sometimes, uXXotg jx4v — aX 
AoTe 5 4, a/xa fi 4 v — a/xa 5 4, sometimes — sometimes, irp&rov fx4v — %iri..,a 
5 4, to fx4u — t2> 5 4, to. \x4v — to. 5 4 and tovto fx4v — tovto oe, partly, — 
partly, on the one side — on the other, both — and, not only — '~)ut also, o fiiv — 6 
54, hie — ille. 

(b) When several predicates belong to the same object, and also, when sev- 



$ 322.] ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 505 

eral actions refer to the same object. S. Ph. 239. iyoo y4vos p.4p el/xi rrjs irep- 
ippvrov "SiKvpov, tvX4oo S' is oJkop, avSoofxai 5 e ttcus "KxiXioos NeoirrSXepos. So 
also in a principal and subordinate clause. Her. 1, 103. o l l is4/3aXop pep is rrju 
'Afflrjp, Kippepiovs iicfiaX6pres iic rr)s Evpojirrjs, rovroicri 8 e iiri<nv6p.evoi cpevyovcri 
ovroo is r\\p Mr)SiKrjP X&p-qv dniKopro. 

c. "Where the same or an equivalent word is repeated in two different clauses. 
X. C. .2. 1, 32. iyoo crvpeipi pep Seo?s, avpeipi S 1 dp&pdoTvois rdls dya&ois. 
1. 1, 2. ~2,toKpaT7)S Srvoop cpapepbs i) iroXXaK is pep o'ikoi, TroXXaKis 8e iirl 
tup koipwp rrjs iroXeas ficopobp. Yet this principle is not always observed. 
Me v is regularly omitted, when Se Kai follow, e. g 2. 8, 5. %oA6 7rbj/ ovrco 
ti vovqaai, Sosre prjdep apapretp, %aAe7rbj/ Se Kai avapaprr)rcos re Troiyaapra 
/j.}] dypoopopi Kpirfj irepirvx^v. 

Remark 1. When p4p stands in an adjective or adverbial clause, it is some- 
times repeated, for the sake of emphasis, in i4ie corresponding demonstrative 
or concluding clause. Her. 2, 121. Kai rbp (i. e. op) pep KaX4ovcri &4pos, 
rovrop fieu irposKvviov<ri re Kai ev iroiovai • rbp Se x el f jLWUa K - r - ^- So also, 
when, instead of the adjective clause, the Part, with the article is used. Isocr. 
Paneg. 52, 60. rap pep inrepepeyKSpri rrjp dp&pooTripriP cpvaip ('Hjoa/cAe?), . . tovtoj 
pep (Evpva&evs) ittirdrroop . . SieriXearep. So also sometimes two preceding 
jueVs correspond with two following Se' 's ; this always implies a strong emphasis. 
PI. Apol. 28, e. iyca ovv deipd av e'nj elpyacrp4pos, do dpdpes 'A&r]Pa?oi, el, ore 
p 4 v pe ol 'dpxovres erarrop, o'vs vpels etXecr&e dpx^v pov, Kai iv UoriSaia Kai ip 
*Apcpnr6Xei Kai iirl Ar\Xica, Tore p e v ov iKelvoi erarrop epepop — ical iicipSvpevop 
airo&ave'iv, r ov 8 e &eov rdrropros, cos iyca qpr\$r7)U re Kai vireXafiov, (piXoaocpovprd 
pe 5e?p £r,u Kai i^erd^opra ipa.vrbp Kai robs 'aXXovs, ivrav&a Se <pofir)&els r) 
bdvarop i) &XXo oriovp irpaypa X'nroipi rrju rd^tu. Yet this parallelism is but 
seldom found so regularly carried out. 

Rem. 2. On the position of p4p — Se, the following points are to be no- 
ticed : They are commonly placed after the words, which are opposed to each 
other ; yet they are often to be referred to the predicate or to the whole clause. 
X. C. 1. 1, 10. Kai eXeye pep (~ScaKpdrr}s) oos rb ttoXv, ro?s Se fiovXop4pois i^rjv 
OLKOveiv. An. 3. 4, 2. eira&e pep ovSev, iroXXa Se Kaicd iu6fjucre iroiTJcrai. 
When a substantive or adjective is connected with the article or a preposition, 
p4p and Se' are commonly placed between the article and the preposition, and 
between the preposition and substantive or adjective, e. g. irpbs pep robs cpi- 
Xovs — Trpbs 8' ix&povs ; yet this conformity is by no means observed in cor- 
responding members, e. g. X. C. 1. 1, 12. ra pep apSpuireia irapevres, rk 
Sai /j.6p i a Se o-Koirovpres yyovprai rd irpos^KOPra irpdrreip. 2, 24. Sto fxey 
KdWos — Sid Svpapip He. Or inversely, Isocr. Paneg. 64,114. ip r a?s ttoX- 
ir eiais fxev — ip Se rais o~vp&-f)Kais. 

Rem. 3. It is evident that any other adversative connective instead of 8 4, 
can follow /n4p, e. g. aAAa, drdp, etc. But in place of the adversative connec- 
tives, sometimes also the copulatives r4, Kai, are used, by a kind of anacoluthon, 
oi fee construction is enth-ely changed, no reference being had to the preceding 
tier. 

Rem. 4. The adversative connective which would be expected to follow 
(i4u, is sometimes omitted, although there is a corresponding adversative mem- 
ber. This is the case, when the word expressing the contrast is such, as of 
itself without Se', to make this contrast sufficiently manifest, as e. g. with 
iprav&a \x4p — e/ce?, and almost always with it poor op /j.4p — eireira. 
Secondly, even the clause, expressing the contrast, can be wholly omitted, iu 
which case, it must be supplied by the mind {p4p solitarium). Her. 3, 3. A.ty 

43 



506 SYNTAX. [$ 322 

erai 6'5e 6 A(fyos, e/iol ^ey ov iri&avos (to me improbable, perhaps probable to 
others ). 'Eyw fxev ovk olSa; ws fiev Xiyovffiv ; ravra fx\v r,fuv rfyy eiXe 
tls: oTj.i.a.1 fxiv, Tjyovfxai fief, So/cw fJ-ev, ovk oloa fiev and the like, I 
INDEED, CERTAINLY, think. 

Rem. 5. On account of its general signification, Se', like autem, frequently 
connects sentences even, which stand in a causal relation to each other ; then 
the hearer or reader can gather from the context the particular mode of con- 
nection. Thus Se' very often expresses the reason, and is used instead of ydp. 

Rem. G. In questions, Se has either an adversative force, when the interro 
gator gives vivacity, by omitting the concessive member, e. g. X. C. 2. 9, 2. tea. 
o 5. EiVe /.lol, e<pr], 3> Kpircov, Kvvas Se rpecpeis, 'Iva (Toi robs Xvkovs airb rcov irpo- 
SdroDu airepvicooa-t. ; (you are umvilling to support a man who could protect you 
from your enemies, and tet do you keep dogs ?). Or, Se' has a copulative force 
and continues the question which had been interrupted by the answer of the 
other, e. g. X. C. 3. 5, 2. ovkovu oloSa, e<py, '6ri irX'f]&ei jxev ovSev fxetovs elolp 
'A&rjvcuoi Boicarwi/ ; — Olda ydp, ecpr). ~S,wfj.ara Se aya&d Kal KaXd ivSrepov e/c 
Boiwtwu o'tei irXeici) av iicXex&rjvah p h e£ 'Afrrjvwy, The same principle holds in 
answers. 

Rem. 7. Koi — 8 e (in the Epic writers Kal 8 4 not separated), and, thougl 
more seldom, the negative ovd4 — Se, in which connection Se' has an adver- 
bial force, can be translated by and on the other hand, and also ; and on the other 
hand not. X. H. 5. 2, 37. o'L Te aXKoi Trpo&v/jLtos rep TeXevria V7n)p4rovv, Kal t) 
rut/ 0t?/3cuW Se irSXis Trpo&vfiws £vv4irefAire Kal oirXiras Kal linreas. An. 1. 8, 20. 
Kal ovShv ovSh rovrov ira&eiv ecpacrav, o v 8' aXXos S e rcov 'EXX-qvuv iu ravrr) rfj 
fj-dxv eira&ev ovSels ovSei/. 

Rem. 8. In the apodosis, as iu principal clauses, Se' has a double force, either 
adversative, or merely contrasting (copulative). Sometimes fx4v stands in the 
first member. 

a. The adversative Se' in the apodosis, denotes the contrast between that and 
the protasis. It is used: (a) after hypothetical antecedent clauses, though 
d.xxd also is often found instead of Se; (£) after relative antecedent clauses. 
and such as denote comparison, (a) X. Cy. 5. 5, 21. dxx' et p.-nde rovr, ecpr), 
fiovXei airoKpti/acr&ai, ah Se rovprevSrev Ae'ye (say on the contrary). (/3) 8. 5, 12. 
ws7rep ot dirXtrai, ovrco Se Kal ol ireXracrral Kal oi ro\6rai (so on the other hand). 

(b) After a temporal protasis, Se' commonly has a contrasting or merely copu- 
lative force, though sometimes adversative also (very often in the Homeric lan- 
guage, also in Herodotus, but seldom in the Attic writers) ; this Se' may often 
be loosely translated by then. Od. A, 387. abrap 4Ve2 ^u%as fxkv c^reo-zce'Saor' &X- 
Xvdis aXXrj ayvr) TlepaecpSveia yvvaiKwv heXvrepdwv, ^Ad-e S 1 lirl tyvx)) 'Ayafj.efj.voi/os 
'Arpeidao. So oeppa — r6cf>pa 8 e, 6ir6re — 8 e, ews — 8 e. X. An. 4. 1, 2. eVel 
Se acp'iKOVTO, ev&a 6 piev Tiyprjs irorapbs Travrdiraaiv airopos l\v Sia to f3d£ros Kal fi4- 
ye&os, irdpodos (transitus) Se ovk t)v . . , eSo'/cet Se rots crpa.rKarais Sja rail/ bp4<av 
Topevreov eivai (then, or on the contrary). As Se'is used after the protasis, so also 
in like manner after participles, which supply the place of a protasis. PI. 
Svmp. 220, b. Kai wore ovros rrdyov o'lov deivordrov, ical irdvrow . . eVeiAiy- 
;.• ivwv tovs -rroBas els -irlXovs ical apvaictSas, outos S' eV rovrois S^yei e%oou Ifxdriov 
. . oTSi/Trep ko.I irporepov etaSd-ei cpopeiv. X. C. 3. 7, 8. ^avjxd^w gov, el eKeivovs pa- 
Sicos xeipoiijueyos, rovrois Se fj.r)8eva rp/iirov o'let dvvrjo'ecr&ai ivposevex&W - 1 - 

6. 'A AAa (Ncut. PL of ^AAos), but (sed, at), yet, however, generally expresses 
difference and separation. It always stands at the beginning of the sentsnee. 
According to the nature of the preceding member, it either abrogates what is 
affirmed in that member (see No. 1), or it restricts and limits it (yet, however) 



f 322.] ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCED 507 

He is indeed poor, but brave — he is not brave, but cowardly ; (here the clause but 
brave restricts the one preceding, and but cowardly wholly denies or abrogates 
the idea of brave). Tovto to Trpay/xa w(p4Xi[xov [x4v £o~tiv, dAA' ov KaAou. The 
use of d A A a is very frequent in objections ( = at), also in questions, when the 
question expresses a contrast, or when an objection is introduced in the form 
of a question. Dem. Cor. ri yap Kal fiovA6/j.ei/oi /j.€Te7r4fj.ir€cr^' ai> aitTovs, 4irl 
ttju eipfynv, a A A' virrjpx^ airao'iv. 'AAA' iirl rov iroAefxov ; dAA J avTol ivepl 
eip7)vr]S iPovAevecr&e. Eur. Med. 325. \6yovs avaAols • ov yap av Treicrais ttot4. 
"'AAA' 6|eAas p.e, KovSev at'SeVot Airds ; " very frequently a A A' i) — ,• but 
really — ? X. An. 7. 6, 4. ical o'L elirov 'AAA' t) dn/J-aycoye? 6 avrjp robs avdpas ; 

Rem. 9. 'AAAa is used in negative, non-concessive clauses, when by it the gen- 
eral signification of the preceding negative clause is to be restricted by an excep- 
tion. Here dAAa is the same as irK-f]u or ei /j.-fj, nisi, and can be translated into 
English by except, than. In the first member, aAAos (eVepos) is commonly 
placed, e. g. ovSels 'aAAos, dAAa, and this aAAos points forward to the following 
dAAeJ, corresponding with it. X. An. 6. 4, 2. eV tw fiea-cp &AAtj jxkv ttoAis ovSe- 
/nia ovre (piAia, ovre 'EAAwvis, aAAa &paKes Kal Bi&woi (between there is no other 
friendly or Grecian city [there are none] except Thracians and Bithynians). 

Rem. 10. In the frequent combination of a A A' % after a preceding nega- 
tive, or after a question implying a negative, or even after the addition of 
dAAos, eVepos to the negative, consequently, ovk, ovShv a A A' tf; ovSev 6.A- 
Ao, a A A' ^'; ovdev erepov, a A A' 77 ; ri &AAo, aAA'fj; &AAo r i (with a pre- 
ceding interrogative pronoun), dAA' jj, — a A A' seems to be merely &AAo, but 
on account of its close connection with 77, it appears to have changed its ac- 
cent (aAAb ¥i) and to have lost it (dAA' ij). X. An. 7. 7, 53. apyvpiov fxhu ovk 
€%co, dA A' 7) fJLiKpSv rt. 0. 2, 13. ovre &AAos ttwttot4 jxoi irap4o~xz to, eavrov Sioi- 
Kelv, a A A 5 7/ crv vvvl i&eAeis irap4x^v. PL Phaed. 97, d. ovdev &AAo 07co7ret> 
Trpos'f)KGii/ av&pc&ira), a A A 5 7) to 'dpicTTOu Kal to jSeArjcrroy. 

Rem. 11. Also the following elliptical expressions are to be mentioned: 
ov fi^jv aAAa or ov /j. 4 vtoi aAAa, yet, veruntamen, ov yap a A Ad, then 
certainly, certainly. These must be completed by joining with the negative the 
verb of the preceding clause, or in place of it, such expressions as tovt iyevi- 
to, tout' iariv. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. 6 'liriros iriirrei els ySvara, Kal /xiKpov KaKeluov 
££eTpaxv^io'w ov /X7]u (scil. i^Tpax^Ata-eu) dAA' iTr4fietveu 6 Kvpos jj.6Ais ttcds, 
Kal 6 '(ttttos i£ai/4o-Tr). 

Rem. 12. 'AAAd* is, moreover, used to denote a transition to a different or an 
opposite thought ; this is the case in exhortations and exclamations, in general, 
when the discourse is suddenly interrupted, and something new is quickly in- 
troduced, e. g. dAA' ewTuxotTjs • (well then !) — dAA' &va (well now) — dAA' e?a! — 
also when one answers or replies quickly and decidedly, e. g. dAAd PovAo/xai, 
well, I will. 

7. Erom the adverb av, on the contrary, again, rursus, and Up a, igitur, have 
originated the Epic av t dp and the prose ardp. They always stand at the 
beginning of the sentence, and have the signification of Se or dAAa, but ; yet, as 
it seems, with this difference, that, on account of their composition with dpa 
(igitur), they are more closely and intimately connected with what precedes. 
— m4vtol has been already treated (§ 316, Rem.). Kalrot, yet, verum, sed 
tamen, atqui (§ 317, 3), is used especially, when the speaker wishes to correct 
something he had said; the Latins use quamquam in the same way, e. g. 
Ka'iToi t[ (prjfii ; (quamquam quid loquor?, and yet why do I speak?). "Ofiwt 



508 syntax. [$ 323 

(from 6fi6s, equal, like), nevertheless, yet, however, places the second clause, as an 
unexpected one, in opposition to the first. Th. 6, 50. Aa.fj.axos fiev ravra elir^p 
ifictis 7rposefre70 Kal abrbs rfj 'AAKifiidSov yvoifxrf. 'AAA 1 ofxws is Still stronger. 



$323. III. Disjunctive Coordination. 

1. A disjunctive coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses composing 
the entire sentence, are united into one whole, one of which excludes the other ; 
hence the one can be considered to exist only when the other does not. This 
disjunctive relation is denoted by : — 

"H, or, aut, vel, or more emphatically and definitely by 77 — 77, and when the 
first member is to be made emphatic, ¥jtol — 77, aut — aut, vel — vel, either — or ; 
etre — etre (with the Ind.) or idvre — idvre or 'dvre — 'dvre (with the 
Subj.), sive — sive, whether — or, when the speaker wishes to indicate, that he 
does not know whether he should decide for the one or the other ; on the mode, 
used in these hypothetical disjunctive clauses, see § 339. 

'O irarrip, $i 6 vlbs abrov aire&avev. — *H 6 irarrjp, 7) 6 vlbs abrov aire&avev. Th. 
4, 118. el 8e ri vfjuv elre KaKKiov, etr e 8iKaiorepov rovrcov SoKe? eivai, ISvres is 
AaKe8aifxova 8i8do-Kere. PI. Kp. 493, d. eJV iv ypa<pitcfi, eiV iv fiovo-irrj, etre 
877 iv -KoXiriKfj. Apol. 27, c. eXr ovv Kaivd, etre irakaid. 34, e. e?r od v 
aArjbes, eXr ovv \pevb~4s. Up. 453, d. dvre ris els KoAvfifi-n&pav fiiKpav ifxireoTi, 
& v r e els rb fxeyicrrov ireAayos fieaov, ojllws ye ve? ob8ev T\rrov. 

Remark 1. The following forms, also, are sometimes used: el — etre 
(si — sive); el re — el 8e (sive — si vero), when the second member contains 
something opposite to the first; ei're — tf; ij — el re (seldom and only Poet.) ; 
eXre but once (poetic). 

Rem. 2. The disjunctive connectives 77 — 77, in the Epic writers, very seldom 
in the Tragedians, are united with ;ueV and Se : T\\xev — 77 Se. In this case, 
they do not have a disjunctive, but like Kal — Kal, re — re, a copulative force. 
Instead of i]8e, I8e is also used according to the necessities of the verse. II. e, 
128. ocpp eu yiyvaxTKrjS rjfxev &eov, 77 S e Kal dv8pa, both — and, not only — but 
also. 

2. The particle 77 is not only used to denote the disjunctive relation, but also 
in expressing comparison, in which it does not exclude, or express the opposite 
of the preceding member, but only expresses separation or difference. As in its 
disjunctive relation, one fj corresponds with another, so here tf stands in rela- 
tion to a word, which expresses a difference, e. g. &AAos, ob8e\s uAAos, aAXoios, 
ivavrios, ?8los, 8ia<pepw, etc. ; also in relation to comparatives, as well as to all 
words which have the force of a comparative, e. g. SnrAaaLos, irplv, <pSdva>, etc. 
PI. Phaed. 64, a. obdev &AAo abrol iiriT7)8evovo~iv, 7) b.iro&vno'Keiv re teal 
re&vdvai. 

Rem. 3. The comparative ¥1 is sometimes used after the omitted fxaAAov or after 
a positive. This is the case after expressions of willing, choosing, and the like, 
because these contain the idea of preference ; thus after fiovAe cr'Stai, i&eAeiv, 
ai peTa&ai, a'ipeaiv Sovvai, ctt idr vfxe?v, 8 e x*o-&ai, £r)Te?v, Ave ire A' 
t7v ( = potius esse). II. a, 117. ftovAofi iyh Aabv cr6ov efx/xevai, i] &7roA.e<rd-a.. 



6 323.] DISJUNCTIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 509 

Lysias de aff. tyr. ±. CyTovari KepSaiveiv, % 7]fx.as ireiSeiv. X. Ag. 4, 5. ('Ayr;* 
triXaos) TJpe7ro Kal avv r<l) yevvatw /xeioveKre7v, rj avv rc$ aS'iKw irXeov %x elv » 
Andoc. Myst. 62. re&vdvai vofx'i(ov<ra XvaireXe7v, 7) (rjv. 

3. The other member of the comparison is joined to the Comparative by #, in 
the same Case as the comparative, and without a verb, when both members have the 
same verb in common. When this is not the case, the second member must stand 
as a complete sentence with its subject and predicate ; commonly, however, merely 
the subject is expressed, but the predicate omitted ; often also after the omitted 
copula, by attraction the same Case is used as in the first member. Instead of f\ 
the Gen. also can be used (\ 275, 2), most frequently for the Norn, and Ace, 
often also for the Dat. But the Gen. is avoided, when the use of it would occa- 
sion ambiguity ; it must be avoided when the time of the two clauses is different. 

Eur. Or. 1148. ovic ecrriv ovSev k pe7o , a ov, r) <p'iXos cracprjs, ov ttXovtos, ov tv- 
pavvis. 'O <piXoo~o<pos jxaXXov eiuSvfAe7 rrjS aocpias r) ruv xP r lt xa ' Tul '' Xapi£6[j.e&a 
/xaXXov ro7s aya$o7s $i ro7s ko,ko?s. $iXov[xev /xaXXov robs aya&ovs v) robs kcmovs. 
Isocr. Pac. extr. ToTsveeorepois Kal /j.aXXov a kjx drover iv, t) eyw (sc.aK/xd- 
£a)),Trapaivw. Th. 7, 77. 77877 rives ical e/c Se ivor e pa v i) roiwvSe eo~<a&r)0'av 
(from a more dangerous situation, than the present is). II. a, 260. tfSr] ydp ttot eyu} 
Kal apeloo-iv ijeirep vp.7v avS pder iv ujxiX'no'a (with braver men than you 
are). Her. 7, 10. av fxeXXeis eV avSpas arpareveaSrai ttoXv afxelvovas, 7) 
2/cui^as. Eur. Or. 715. marbs ev KaKo7s avi)p Kpelaaoov yaXi)v7]s vav~ 
riXoiaiv elsopav (instead of 77 yaXrjvn). Th. 6, 16. irpos-nKei /j.01 pciXXov ere- 
p <a v . . &px €ll/ (instead of I) erepois). 7,63. ravra ro7s oirXirais ou% r)aaov 
twv vavrcov TrapaKeXevo/xai (instead of r) to7s vavrais). Od. 1, 27. ovroi eyw-ye 
r\s yairfs Svvafxai yXv /ce pc&r e pou 'aXXo I5ea&ai. X. Cy. 2. 3, 12. e/xol SoKet 
Kvpos, ovsrivas av opS. ayabovs, <piXe7v ovSev r)rrov eavr o T (instead of 7) eav- 
rov). Her. 2, 134. MvKep7vos TTvpafiiSa aTteXiizero TroXXbv e> acrtrw rod irarp6s 
(instead of t) 6 Trarr)p, or properly instead of rrjs rod tratpSs). 

Rem. 4. With irXeicov, ixdrrcav, irXeov, eXarrov, jxe7ov, when they 
stand in connection with a numeral, jj is commonly omitted, without change 
of construction, i. e. the Case is the same as if there was no comparative in the 
sentence (comp. decern plus or amplius homines). PI. Apol. 17, d. vvv eyca irpa- 
rov iirl SiKaari)piov avafiefiriKa, err} yeyovks irXeiw efiSojxiiKOvra (annos plus 
septuaginta natus). X. An. 6. 4, 24. 01 '{mreis airoKTtivovai rwv avSpccv ov [xe7ov 
TrevTaKocriovs. Th. 6, 95. 77 Xeia eTrpd&r) raXavrccv ovk eXarrov irevre ical e5f/co- 
aiv. X. Cy. 2. 1, 5. limeas jxkv ci|ei ov /xe?ov dicr/xvplccv. With the Nom. and 
Ace. TrXeov, eXarrov, the numeral specification can also stand in the Gen., e. g. 
*'Ex« ov TcXeov (eXarrov) SeKa raXavrcav. The Greek can consequently say : (a) 
TvXeiovs (eXdrrovs, fxeiovs) $j SeKa ripLepai ; (b) TrXeiovs deKa rj/nepuiv] (c) nXeov 1) 
SeKa T)p.epai ; (d) irXeov SeKa rj/xepai. It will be observed from several of the 
above examples that irXeov, fxe7ov, etc. stand as mere adverbs in the Ace, with 
substantives of a different gender and number. 

Rem. 5. Sometimes, also, the particle rf is found with the Gen. Such exam- 
ples are to be explained in a two-fold manner. The Gen. either expresses its 
own appropriate relation, being wholly independent of the comparative, e. g 
PI. L. 765, a. fj.7] eXarrov vj rpiaKovra yeyovws ercov [just as the Greek saya 
ylyveoSrai rpiaKovra eru>v § 273, 2, (c)] ; or the Gen. is a preparative demonstra* 
tive pronoun, with which the clause introduced by ^ may be regarded as an 

43* 



510 SYNTAX. [$323 

appositive or explanatory clause. Od. (, 182. ov fx\v yap rod ye ipe7(r<rop 
Kal frpeiov, t) o& djuioippoyeouTe vorj/JLao-iv oTkov k'x r l T0V & V VP V$* ywrj ( = rov ore 
— ixqrov). 

Rem. 6. (Comparatio compendiaria). In comparisons, instead of comparing 
the attribute of one object with that of another, the Greeks often compare the 
attributive of one object with the other object itself to which the attribute 
would belong. In this case the Gen. is regularly used. X. Cy. 3. 3, 41. x^P av 
ex€Te ovSy j\rrov r\[i(av (instead of rr\s 7ifj.erepas) ivrlixov. Moreover, in ev- 
ery other comparison, this mode of expression is often employed, e. g. II. p, 51 
aifiaTi ol Sevovro K6fxai Xaplreo~o~iv 6fxo?ai (instead of rais rS>v Xapircay). 
Comp. the examples under § 284, 4. This mode of comparison, though not 
strictly correct, is frequent in English, e. g. he has an expression like his father, 
instead of like his father's. 

4. When two attributes or predicates (adjectives or adverbs), belonging to 
the same object, are compared with each other, then both are put in the compar • 
ative, and the last is annexed by %. 

©drrwv, f) ao<p(a7 e pos, celerior, quam sapientior (more smft than wise, or 
not so wise as swift). PL Pp. 409, d. TrXsovdias TrovnpoTs, rj XP 7 ! " 1 ' ?* ivrvyxd-vup 
potior epos, ?) afia^darrepos So^et dvai avrcp re Kal aWois. Her. 3, 65 
iiroir)<ra r a%vr e pa, ir) cocp&r epa (celerius, quam prudentius). 

5. The subject is compared with itself, i. e. the subject exhibits at some time 
a quality in a higher degree than usual. In this case, the Gen. of the reflexive 
pronouns ifxavrov, aeavrov, eavrov, is used with the comparative, and the pro 
noun a vr 6 s with the pronoun of the third person. The other mode of ex- 
pression by % is not admitted here. 

Be\r Iwv et/ju e fxavr ov. BeXr iwv el o~ e avrov. BeXricov ecrrlv av- 
rbs e avrov. Til. 3, 11. Ovuarwrepoi avrol avruv iyiyvovTO. In like man- 
ner, the superlative is used in connection with avros and the Gen. of the re- 
flexive pronouns, when the subject is to be represented, as, at a given time, 
exhibiting the quality belonging to it, in the highest degree (in a higher degree 
than at any other time). *Ap iffros avrbs eavrov. 'Apiary avrrj lav- 
rr\s. X. C. 1.2, 46. ej&e aoi, £> Tlep'iKXeis, r6re o , vveyev6jxif]V i '6 re Se iv6raros 
a avrov ravra fjoSa (when you surpassed yourself in these things, when you had the 
highest distinction in these things, higher than at any other time). 

6. The following is a peculiar mode of comparison : When an object in re- 
lation to some quality is compared, not with another object, but with a whole 
thought (sentence), this thought is compressed into one substantive idea, and 
this substantive is put in the Gen. depending on the comparative. Here, also. 
the other mode of expression by jj, does not occur. 

Her. 2, 148. %<rav at irvpafjiiSes \6yov fie(oves (oratwne majores, i. e. ma- 
jores,quam ut oratione explicari possit). Th. 2, 50. yev6\xevov Kpelaffov \6yov 
rb elSos rr\s v6o~ov (the nature of the disease being too severe to be described, severe 
beyond description). Ylpayjxa eXiriScoy Kpe?rrav (too great to be hoped for, 
beyond hope). Instead of substantives, participles are also used, e. g. deovros. 
PL Pp. 410, d. ol yvp.ua(rriKrj aKpdrfo xp'(\ad^.evoi ay p idr e po t rov Seovroi 
i.iroBaiuovo'iv. 



$ 324.] CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. 51 i 

7. When it is to be indicated, that a predicate or an attribute is in a highei 
or lower degree than could be expected, in proportion to another object, then 
the comparative is constructed with 7} Kard, or (though seldom) -J) irpos 
with the Ace. (= quam pro). 

Th. 7, 75. (ii6i(w 7) Kara ddicpva Treirov&a (I have suffered too much for 
tears). PI. Rp. 359, d. veicpbs fiel£<cv % nar dv^pwirou {a dead body greater 
than in accordance with a human being, greater than could be expected for a human 
being, too great for that of a human being). X. H. 3. 3, 1. ("Ay is) ervx* <re{jivo- 
repas § Kara & v 3- p co ir v racprjs. Comp. Liv. 21, 29. proelium atrocius, 
quam pro namero pugnantium, editur (more bloody than could have been expected 
considering the number). 

8. If the predicate or attribute is represented as being in so high or low a 
degree, that another cannot coexist with it, then the comparative is used with 
fl &st€ and the Inf., e. g. Kuko. fiei £00 ^v, % Sste KXaieiv, evils greater 
than one could weep for). X. An. 1. 2, 4. Tiyncrd/Aevos ehai $) ws £tt\ Ueialdas r)]v 
irapa<TKevr}i/ (having thought that the armament ivas too great to be [greater, than to 
be] against the Pisidians). 3. 3, 7 . Ppaxvrzpa t\k6vti£ov t) 00s i£itve?<r&ai ruv acpeu- 
dovrjTcov (threw too short a distance to reach the slingers). See § £41. 3, (a). 

Eem. 7. The comparative is frequently used without the second member of the 
comparison, and can then be translated by giving a strong emphasis to the 
positive, or more frequently by joining the adverbs too, pretty, somewhat, a little, 
right, to the positive. (Comp. English, too siveet, pretty, somewhat, a little warm.) 
This usage is found when the second member is evident from the connection 5 
but very frequently, also, when such thoughts as, than it was before, than was 
before, than was usual, proper, right, becoming, were more or less distinctly before 
the speaker's mind. Her. 3, 145. Maiav8pia> 5e t£ rvpdvpco i\v aSeA^eos vtto/j.- 
apy 6r epos (hebetioris ingenii, very dull of perception, a little crazy). 6, 108. 
7jfj.e?s eKaar 4 pea oi k 4 /xgv (we dwell too far, very far from you). So particu- 
larly the neuters &fieivov, fSeXriov (better than is right), KaXXiou, /xaXXov, x^poy, 
aiarxiov, KaKiov ; also vec&repov, more seldom Kaiv6repou,( since tcaivos is used synony- 
mously with vedorepos) and the like, especially with a negative, e. g. ov KaXXiov, 
ovk d/xetvov, ov Kaxiov, ov Kpeirrov, ov x^p ov ^ °" pS.01/ (not so easy, as it seems), etc. 
Her. 3, 71. iroieeu/ avriica jxol Sofceet Kal jj.t) virepfiaX4o-&ai' ov yap dp.eivov (for 
this would not be better, than if we did it immediately). PI. Phaed. 105, a. TrdXiv 
Se ava(xi[A.vr)crKov • ov yap x e ^P 0V "foKkdnis atcoveiv. Finally, also, when antith- 
eses are compared with each other, e. g. To; x e ' l P ova noXXols irXeia io-rl rfav 
a/x e t v 6 v a v (the worse is more in number than the better) . 



$ 324. IV. Causal Coordinate Sentences. 

1. Einally, those sentences are coordinate, the last of which denotes either the 
ground, cause, or consequence of the preceding sentence, or the conclusion from it 

2. The Greeks denote the ground or reason by yap, which is never the first 
word in a sentence, but is commonly placed immediately after the first word. 
T dp is compounded of ye and dp a, and hence denotes proof, confirmation, 
(y4, yes, certainly), and at the same time, an inference, or conclusion (dp a, igitur % 
now, therefore). Hence, according as the one or the other meaning prevails, 



512 SYNTAX. f$ 324 

ydp may express : (a) a ground or reason, (b) an explanation, (c) a confirmation 
or assurance; and hence it may be translated - (a) by for, (b) that is, for ex- 
ample, (c) indeed, certain It/. 

PL Phaedr. 230, b. vtj rr\v "Upav, KaXrj ye tj Karayooyi] • H] re yap rrXaravos 
aurif] /xaA 3 a/j.(piXa<pr}s re Kal vxprjXr] {yes, certainly =for). Tap has its explana- 
tory sense, especially after demonstratives and the phrases reK^piov de, fxaprv- 
piov Se, <T7]fX6?ov Se', 5/jXov 5e scil. 4o~ri, Ze'iKWjxi Se', eS^Aaxre Se, o~Ke\pao'&e 5e', and 
the like. It expresses confirmation or assurance, particularly in rejoinders and 
replies. X. C. 3. 5, 10. apa Xeyeis ry]v roov &ea>v Kpiaiv %v oi irepl Kenpoira 5i' ape- 
tV ettpivav ; — Aeyo; yap, yes, certainly. 10, 2. 4k ttoXXwv avvdyovres ra e| eKacr- 
rov KaXXivra, ovrcas oXa ra, acinar a KaXa iroielre cpaiuecr&ai; — Hoiovy.ev yap, 
ecpr), ovrws [certainly, we do so). — In addresses, ivishes, commands, and ques- 
tions, the meaning of yap, as denoting inference or conclusion, clearly 
appears. Arist. Kan. 251. rovrl irap' vjx&v Xafxfidvw ; Aeiva, yap ireio~6(j.e- 
&a! (ami so treated by you ? well! then we shall have hard things to bear ! ) Ka- 
kqjs yap 4£6Xoiol may you perish then! So, el ydp, e'tSt e ydo. X. C. 1. 7, 
2. otl 8' aAw&ri eXeyev, wde eSiSacr/cei/ * tv^v/j.d!>fxe^a yap, ecpy), eX rts fxi] thv aya- 
&bs av\r)T7]s ZoKetv jiovXoiro, ri av avrto iroirjTeov elrj ; (now then let us consider). 1, 
4, 14. ov yap iravv aoi KardSr]Xov, on Trapd ra aXXa £wa wsirep &eol av&pcoTroi 
Biorevovai ; is it not then clear to you ? (nonne igitur — ?). II. or, 182. ^Ipi &ed, rts 
yap ae 3-ecw efiol ayyeXov rjKev ; (therefore who then has sent you?). X. C. 2. 3, 
17. Kal 6 XaipeKpdrrjs eTirev 'Eau ovv, 4/j.ov ravra iroiovvros, eKeiuos fM7]Sev [SeXrioov 
yiyvnrai ; Tt yap aXXo, ecpr) 6 ^coKpdr-ns, r) Kivdvvevareis, k. r. X. ; (what else 
then will happen except that you will run the risk, etc.?) Dera. Ph. 1. 43, 10. 
yevoLTO yap av ri KaivSrepov, -jr} MaKeSwv av^p 'A&rjvaiovs KaraTroXe/ULUv ; (why, 
can there be a greater novelty ?). So, Ti yap; quid ergo? Kal rl yap ; and how 
then ? Has yap ,• and iro&ev yap; as an emphatic negative answer = by no 
means. Hu>s yap oil; (instead of it, ir6&ev Se ov is used with an antithesis) 
as an emphatic affirmative answer. X. C. 4. 4, 13. ovkovv 6 jxev ra Si/ccua irpdr- 
rwv 8'iKaios, 6 Se ra adiKa 'ddiKos ; IT cos yap ov ; (is he, therefore, who does what 
is just, just, but he who does what is unjust, unjust ? to be sure, how not?). 

Remark 1. The explanatory sentence with yap very often precedes the 
sentence to be explained, particularly in Herodotus, e. g. Her. 6, 102. Kal, ?iu 
yap 6 Mapa&oov 4irir7)de(*)raTov yjap'iov rys 'ArriKrjs evnrTvevaai, 4s rovro o~<pi Karr)- 
yeero 'iTriri-ns (and, for Marathon ivas the most suitable place in Attica for the cav- 
alrt/, Ilippias led them to this place). So especially with aXXa. ydp, at enim, but 
certainly, really, indeed, aXX' ov ydp. PI. Apol. 20, c. r]Bpvv6 l u-nv av, el rjirio'rdfXTjv 
ravra- &AA' ov yap eTriarafiai. (I should be proud, if I knew this, but certainly I do 
not know). 

Rem. 2. The two sentences, the preceding explanatory one with ydp, and 
the following one whose meaning is to be confirmed, are often so closely con- 
nected with each other, that the subject of the last is transferred to the first, 
and its government made to depend on it. Th. 8, 30. ro?s 4v rrj ~Xd/j.cp 'A&tj- 
vaiois ivposacpiyixevai yap iio~av Kal o'iKO&ev aXXai vrjes Kal arpar-nyot, Kal ras 
airb Xiov Trdaas Kal ras dXXas £vvayay6vres 4 /3 o v Xovr o, etc., instead of ot 
A&'qva'ioi — efiuvXovro, aureus yap, k. r. X. 

Rem. 3. Ka' ydp commonly means for also, rarely etenim, but sometimes 
the K%i corresponds to a following Kai, thus nam et — ct. 



t 324.] CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. 513 

3. The consequence or inference is denoted : — 

(a) By dpa {hence, then), which never stands as the first word in a sentence, 
though commonly near the beginning, also sometimes emphatically at the end. 
It expresses a consequence which comes as a matter of course, which is wholly nat- 
ural. In many passages, it hardly admits of translation into English, since it 
often implies only a very slight consequence, and merely refers to something 
mentioned, to something existing in the context, or only in the conception of 
the speaker, in conformity with which the thing is in the state in which it is 
affirmed to be. Hence it is very often used like the English indeed, as it seems, 
in such explanatory causes as more exactly define, or distinguish, something 
before said, or pointed out. 

Luc. Jup. trag. 51. el etorl fiwjJLol, elal Kal &eoi.' d\\a \i-nv elal ^wjxoi ehrlv dpa 
Kal &eoi (then there are, consequently there aregods also). X. Cy. 7. 3, 6. Tavxa aicovcras 
S Kvpos iiraiaaro dpa tou /xrjpou (when he had heard of the death of his friend, 
then he smote on his thigh, as was natural). It is often connected with an 
Impf, when, in consequence of a better view of the subject at present, one is 
undeceived in regard to a former opinion, e. g. 1. 4, 11. 8> ira7Ses, &s &pa 
e<p\vapovfiev, oYe rb. ev t$ irapadeiaca Srqpia. eSrnpco/xev • ofiotov efxoiye SoKel 
efrai, ofovirep e't tis SeSeo-fieua £wa Sfnpcf'H (now how childish we were then, as I now 
indeed see). 1. 3, 8. 2a/«x 8e, <pdvai rhv 'AffTvdynv, ra> olvox^, ov eyib jxaXiarra 
Tifxw, ovdev SiSws ," 'O Se 2a/cas 'dp a k<x\6s re &v eTvyyave, Kal ti/jl^v ix° iV irposd- 
yeiv tovs Seo/xevovs 'AcrTvdyovs (now the Sacian happened to be beautiful, the Sacian 
was beautiful, as it seems). 9. 3> 1,dKa, cW^AcoAas* e/c£aA<£ ere in ttjs ri/xrjs' ra re 
yap ctAAa, <pdmi, crov naWiov o\voxot\gu>, Kal ouk iKiriojiai avrbs rbv oivov • ol 5" 
&pa rwv /3acnAeW olvox^oi — Karappcxpovcri. Dem. Cor. 232, 22. eV^A/tcc Xeyeiv, 
Zos dpa eyw — iceKooAvKcbs d-qv ttjv it6\iv (t)]v eiprjurju) Troi-fiaaoftai (that 1 indeed, 
that I, as it seems). Hence the use of ydp and the strengthened form ya^ 
&pa. — E t dp a and e I n^ dpa correspond to the Latin si forte, nisi forte, if 
perchance, unless perchance, the inferential force of dpa being reduced to a men 
conjecture, and are often used ironically. X. C. 1. 2, 8. iru>s av ovu toiovto. 
dvrjp 8ia<p&elpoi robs veovs : el ^77 dpa y rrjs apeTTJs eVtyieAeia 8t.a<p&opd iamv 
(properly, that if such an excellent man can corrupt the young, then we must draw 
the conclusion that, etc.). So also, ei d p a, num forte, whether then, whether per- 
chance. X. C. 4. 3, 9. ckottoo, el dpa ri ecrri to?s &eo?s epyov, ?} avSpwtrovs &e- 
paireveiv (whether perchance, forsooth, the gods have any other employment than, etc.). 
''Apa stands very often in interrogative sentences. Aesch. S. 91. tis dpa 
bvaerai; ris 8' d p eirap*e<rei *tewv ; (quis igitur defendet 1 quis igitur arcebit ?). 

Rem. 4. "A pa seems to be derived from the verb 'APH, i. e. to be adapted, 
suitable, and hence to express the inward relation, the immediate connection 
of two thoughts, and in such a manner that one seems, as it were, to be en- 
tirely fitted to the other, — the one perfectly corresponding to the other 
(= precisely, exactly, just). In this sense it is used in Homer, e. g. II. t], 182. 
4k 8' e&ope K\r)pos Kwerjs ov dp' tf&e\ov avroi, precisely the one which, just the one 
which, rrj/xos dpa, just then, St dpa, just when, tot d p a, precisely then, el 
(i )/ dpa, if not precisely, us dpa, exactly so ; ovk — , d\\' dpa, not — but 
just; iirei pa, since just, ydp pa, for just. Homer uses dpa, in general, in 



514 SYNTAX. [$ 325 

oi-der to connect thoughts together, which are intimately related, and are do 
veloped from each other. 

Rem. 5. The lyric, tragic, and comic writers also employ the lengthened 
form apa instead of &pa. Thus el dip a, eir a pa, instead of el &pa, ef»* 
&pa. On the interrogative apa and on apa in a question, see § 344. 

(b) Ovv (Ion. 2>v), which commonly has the second or third place in a sen- 
tence, means, consequently, hence, therefore {ergo, igitur) ; it appropriately points 
out the effect of a cause, the necessary consequence of what precedes, and is ac- 
cordingly far stronger than apa, but is also used in a more general sense. 

Rem. 6. O v v is used as a suffix to pronouns and conjunctions, and in this case 
also, retains its conclusive sense : bans ovv, osirep ovv, oaoi ovv, fiev ovv, yovv, 6° oZv, 
a.W' ovv, efr' ovv, yap ovv. It expresses a conclusion, a setting aside of every- 
thing else, and a persisting in that which is affirmed ; hence it may express also 
confirmation and assurance. So o <r t t y ovv, osirep ovv, whoever he may be then, 
'6aoi ovv, how many so ever then, fxev ovv, yes indeed (§, 316, Rem.), yovv, cer- 
tainly, surely, ov k ovv, truly, certainly not, 6° oZv, oAA 5 ovv, arap oZ v, but 
surely, et re ovv, be it this or that, yap ovv, for surely, el 5' ovv, if then. 

Rem. 7. Ovkow, as a. Paroxytone, means: (a) non ergo, without interro- 
gation (consequently ovk in connection with the syllogistic oZv, ergo) ; still in 
this sense it is also written ovk oZv; (b) nullo moclo, nequaquam, by no means, 
without interrogation (consequently ovk in connection with the emphatic suffix 
ovv) most frequently in answers, e. g. X. 0. 1, 9. ovkow e/xoiye So/ce?. — Oi- 
kovv, as a Perispomenon : (a) in a question : nonne igitur ? nonne ergo ? X. C. 
2. 2, 12. ovkovv, e<p7) 6 2., Ka\ rep yeirovi fiovAei (fb apeaKeiv; — "lZyuye, ecprj. 
Also in this case it is written ok ovv, as well as ovkow; the latter has been 
adopted in modern times, yet it is to be limited to such questions as involve a 
special emphasis in the negative, and so ovkow is equivalent to nonne certe ; 
like S. Aj. 79. ovkow yeXccs rjSiffTos els ix^povs 7eA.S*' ; (b) without interrogation, 
ergo, igitur. X. C. 3. 6, 6. ov kov v, ecp-n, to jjiev TrAovo-iooTepav r^v woXiv iroieiv 
ava^aKov/xeSra. This last arises from its use as an interrogative, and ovkovv is 
in this case properly nonne igitur ? The frequent use of this interrogative form 
has caused a gradual weakening in the interrogative tone, and thus its sense 
has become obscure, e. g. is it not true therefore we shall put off'? (= conse- 
quently we shall put off). 

(c) To ivw, which never stands as the first word in a sentence, is derived 
from the Epic t $, therefore, and the slightly inferential or deductive vvv, now, 
which is derived from the temporal adverb vvv ; it is used : (a) to make 
a transition; thus especially, Ka\ toIvw, and now, en rot vvv, moreover 
then ; (b) to mark a conclusion, therefore now, so then. T otyap (from the Epic rcj>, 
therefore, and yap) corresponds to the Latin ergo, therefore, but is poetic ; still 
stronger is roiydproi, just on this account, -precisely so, and roiyapovv, on this 
account then. They commonly stand as the first word in a sentence. 



$ 325. Asyndeton. 

1. In certain cases sentences are connected without any conjunction (ao~vv- 
ierws). Only some of the more prominent instances will be mentioned: — 

(a) In pathetic and impassioned discourse, e. g. II. %> 295. (of Hector) art/ 
le KaTa(p{]cas, ouS' aAA' e%e p.ei\ivov eyxos • Ari'icpofiov §' e'/caA.et XevKao-irib'a, /ua/c- 
phv aiiaai jtee fj.iv d6pv p.aKp6v. — (b) Asyndeton is very common in explana 



$ 326.] PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 513 

tory clauses, which are elsewhere connected by &pa (therefore, then, that is) and 
yap. The second clause gives a more exact explanation of what was stated 
only in a general, indefinite, indistinct manner in the first. So particularly 
when there stands in the first clause a preparative demonstrative, e.g. tovto, r65e, 
ovtws, aiSe, etc. X. An. 3. 2, 19. 4 v I pAvcc irpoexovcrij/ tjixcls ol lirireTs' cptvyeiv avrols 
a<r<pa\4(TT€p6v ia-TLu, vj fjpuv. — (c) Eclated to the above is the asyndeton in the 
beginning of a discourse or new paragraph, which is intended to strengthen a pre- 
ceding thought. PL Phaed. 91, C. 'AAA' Iriov, tcpr}. Ylpurov pee inropcvrjcraTe 
t\ e'Aeyere, iav per] (pa.ivctifj.cu pLepcv-npilvos. — (d) The connecting particle is often 
wanting, but is, in a measure, involved in another word. This is the case es- 
pecially with demonstratives, e. g. ovtcos, t6ctos, to?os, etc., as in Latin with sic, 
talis, tantus, etc. — (e) Before ra roiavra. cetera, &Wa, ol &Woi in the 
enumeration of several objects, nal is very commonly omitted, as et before ce< 
teri, alii, reliqui, in Latin, when these Avords have a collective sense, i. e. when 
one would include in these expressions all which is still to be named in addi- 
tion to what has been already mentioned. PI. Gorg. 503, e. olou el fiovAei lde7v 
tovs faypdcpovs, tovs oIko56/j.ovs, tovs vavirrjyovs, tov s &\Xovs iravras S-qpaovp' 
yovs. — (f ) In antitheses, which are to be represented as taking place equally, 
and without distinction, the conjunctions are omitted. PI. Prot. 319, d. (rvfx- 
fiov\evei Ttepl tovtcov 6/u.oioos piku tcktcov, opcolcos Se x a ^ Kevs <tkvtot6/aos epcTropos 
vavK\r)pos, TrXovcrios irsvris, yevvatos ayevvns. In poetry, particularly in Epic, 
two or four adjectives, belonging to one substantive (of which each two 
form a whole), or even three, are often placed together, without a connec- 
tive, if they are merely ornate epithets which, as it were, paint and vividly 
describe the object. II. ir, 140 and 802. eyxos Ppi&v, pceya, o~Ti$ap6v, neicopw 
&p.ivov. Od. a, 96. /caAa 7re'5tAa, c\p.f3p6cria, xpvcreta. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

B Subordination. 

$ 326. Principal and Subordinate Sentences. 

1. When clauses, winch together present one united thought, 
are so related, as to their import, that the one is a dependent 
and merely complementary or limiting member of the other, 
then their connection may be expressed either by coordinate 
conjunctions, as /cat, Si, yap, apa, etc., e. g. to lap 7}\3e, to. Be poSa 
avSeZ (the spring came, and the roses bloom) ; or in such a man- 
ner, that the clause, which merely completes or limits the 
other, is manifestly in its outward form, a dependent, or a sim- 
ply completing or limiting member of the other, e. g. ore to 



516 SYNTAX. [$ 326 

cap rjXSe, ra, poSa dv^et. This mode of connection is called 
Subordination, and the clauses or sentences Subordinate. 

2. The clause to which the other as a complementary or 
limiting member belongs, is called the principal clause ; the 
complementary or limiting clause, the subordinate clause, and 
the two together, a compound sentence. Thus, for example, in 
the compound sentence, "Ore to tap rjXd-e, ra p68a avSe?, the clause 
ore to lap rjXSe^ is the subordinate clause, the other the principal 
clause. 

3. Subordinate clauses stand in the place of a substantive 
(substantive subject or object), or of an attributive adjective, 
^r of an adverb, and hence must be regarded as substantives, 
adjectives, or adverbs, expanded into a sentence; accord- 
ingly, there are three classes of subordinate clauses : sub- 
stantive, adjective, and adverbial clauses. 

Thus, for example, in the sentence, " The victory of Cyrus over the enemy 
was announced," the subject may be expanded into a subordinate clause, 
viz., " That Cyrus had conquered the enemy, was announced ; " further, in the 
sentence, " Sing to me, Muse, the far-wandering man," the attributive far- 
wandering, may be expanded into a subordinate clause, ' ; avdpa [xoi evueire, 
Movcra, TroXvrpoirov, os jxd\a iroXXa TrXdyx&v" {who has wandered far). 
Comp., " He announced the victory of Cyrus over the enemy," with " He an- 
nounced, that Cyrus had conquered the enemy ; " " In the Spring the roses bloom," 
with, " when the Spring is come, the roses bloom." 

Remark 1. The use of subordinate clauses in Greek is not so common 
as in English, since the Greek makes a much more frequent use of Participles 
than the English. Comp. " when the enemy had come," with twv iroXe/xiccu 
i\&6i/Twv ; " when he had done this, he went away," with ravra irp&^as airefir) ; 
" Cyrus, who had conquered the enemy, came back to the camp," with Kvpos 
tovs iroXe l uiovs t/iK-hcras sis rb (npaToirehov avriX&ev. 

Rem. 2. To substantive clauses belong also dependent, or indirect inter- 
rogative clauses ; for these form the object of the governing verb, e. g. " He 
asked me whether my father had returned, i. e. concerning, or in regard to, the return 
of my father ; " He showed, who had plotted the conspiracy, i. e. he showed the 
author of the conspiracy : " " He wrote me, when he should depart, i. e. the time 
of his departure," etc. Still, as the laws relating to dependent and to direct 
interrogative clauses, are often blended together, both will be treated in a 
special section in the sequel. 

Rem. 3. The subordinate relation of the dependent to the principal clause, 
is indicated in Greek by conjunctions, and also by the relative pronoun, which in 
an adjective clause has the meaning of an adjective. The conjunctions are 
correlatives, i. e. relatives which stand in a reciprocal relation to demonstra 
fives in principal clauses, e. g. Ovt6s Zcttiu 6av7]p,%v elSes. Tb p6§ou, % ai/&e7 it, 
to} K7]TT(t), k6.XXictt6v Zcttiu. ^EAf^e tovto, or i o 'av&panros aSavcuSs Zcttlv. 
r "'OJ — oios; '6 ace — t otrovTcp. 'Cls cAe£a, out cos iyeuero. Ovtoj ica 



f 327.] SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 517 

Xus irduTa eirpa^eu, &ST6 iiraivov fieyiarov a£tos i\v. "Ore b Kvpos ^AiSrf, 
t6t£ irdvTts p.eydXcos ixdpT}ffav. "E/xeive ^XP l tovtov, ov 6 fiaatXevs iirrjX' 
&ey. A substantive may also stand instead of a demonstrative correlative, 
e. g. iv Tovio) tw xp6 vc ?i 0Te (instead of t6te, ore). Still, when the reciprocal 
relation is not to be brought out emphatically, the demonstrative is commonly 
not expressed, e. g. ''EXe^v, '6tl 6 ai/SrpwTros afrdvaros icrriv. KaX&s irdura 
eirpa^eu, & s r e ktX. "O t e 6 Kvpos ^A&e, naures (xeyaXcas ixdpyffav. y E/*eij/e, 
/ue'xp' ov 6 fiaaiXevs iirriX&ei', etc. Even both pronouns may, in certain cases, 
be omitted, e. g."E{X€iv£, fxexpi o fiaaiXevs iirTJX&ev. 

Rem. 4. The form of the demonstrative, in the principal clause, either 
actually expressed or understood, determines the nature of the subordinate 
clause. The substantive demonstrative denotes a substantive clause ; the ad- 
jective, an adjective clause ; the adverbial, an adverbial clause. But the 
subordinate clauses themselves have special characteristics by which they 
may be distinguished from each other, viz., the introductory conjunctions and. 
the constructions connected with these. 



$ 327 a . Sequence of the Subjunctive Tensei in Sub- 
ordinate Sentences. 

1. For the use of tenses in subjunctive subordinate Iauses,ihe 
following general rule applies in Greek, as in Latin : — 

The tenses of the subjunctive subordinate clause correspond 
to those of the principal clause; i. e. a jwincii^al tense (Present, 
Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect) in the principal clause, is fol- 
lowed by the subjunctive in the subordinate clause, and an his- 
torical tense (Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist) in the principal 
clause is followed in the subordinate clause, by the Optative, 
i. e. the Subjunctive of the historical tenses. 

Tovto Xiyco, tovt6 jxol AeAe/cTcu, tovto Ae£«, 'iva yiyvca a k 77 s (71/0)5), 
hoc dico, dixi (Perfectum praesens), dicam, ut cognoscas. Tovto eXeyov, tovt6 
fxot iXeXe kt 0, tovto eAe£a, 'iva yiy v&a k 1 s (y vo ir) s), hoc dicebam, dix- 
eram. dixi (Perfect. Histor.), ut cognosceres. Ovk e%a>, o-ivoi Tpeiru fxai (rpd 
7ra> fx a 1), non habeo, quo me vertam. Ovk elxov, '6irot Tpiiroijxriv (Tpairui- 
fiyv), non habebam, quo me verterem. Oi iroxijjuoi irdvTas, otw av £ v t v x<* o 1, 
kt eiv ova iv. Ol iroXefiiot Travras, otco ivTvxoiev, e/cr e ivov. 

2. But it is to be observed that the Greek confines itself less 
regularly to the above rule, than the Latin, but has much 
greater freedom. Very often in lively narration, the Greeks 
refer the predicate of a subordinate clause directly to the 
present time of the speaker, without any regard to the principal 
clause, so that, therefore, an historical tense in the principal clause 
is followed by the same mode ( Subj.) and the same tenses whicl; 

44 



Ol8 SYNTAX. [$ 327. 

accompany the principal tenses. The dependent clause or dis- 
course then assumes the character of independent or direct dis- 
course (an objective mode of expression) ; the speaker, in hia 
lively conceptions, brings the past into present View ; the past 
becomes present to him. See § 345, 5. 



§ 327 b . Use of Modes in Subordinate Clauses. 

The use of modes in the different kinds of subordinate 
clauses, will be considered in treating these clauses each by 
itself. Here, only those characteristics will be noticed which 
are common to several kinds of subordinate clauses. 

1. There is very often an attraction of the mode, a subordi- 
nate clause which forms an intermediate member of another 
clause, taking the mode of this clause. 

(a) This occurs with the Indie, of the historical tenses in those subordinate 
clauses, which form an intermediate or accessory member of a hypothetical 
proposition with el and a preterite Indie, in the Protasis, and a preterite Indie, 
with av in the Apodosis [§ 339, 2, I. (b)]. X. C. 1. 4, 14. (avSpwwos) ovre (3obs 
av i%b)V (twiaol, av&pdoirov de yvcx>/j.r)v, eSvvar av irpdrreiv, a i fiovAer o (as in 
Lat. efficere posset, quae vellet). 3.5,8. et ifiovAo/xe&a x? 7 )l x ^ TU>v wv ol aAAot 
€?x o v avTiiroielcrbai (si vellemus expetere opes, qaas alii haberent). Isocr. Paneg. 
19. ixpyv {tovs pr]Topas) fir] irporipovivepl t&v 6fj.oXoyovfj.evcov (rvfj.(3ovAeveiv, it p\v 
irepl Tcov a/A(pisfir)Tovp.evc0v rj/nas ioioa^av (oportebat . . priusquam . . docuissent). 
PI. Gorg. 506, 6. rjdecas av KaKKiKXei tovtw en 8 i e A eyofxr) v, ecos ai>T$ . . 
awe own a (usque dum reddidissem). From this maybe explained the use of 
the Indie. Imperfect or Aorist in final clauses after an Indie, of an historical 
tense with or without av. See § 330, 5. 

(b) Very often with those subordinate clauses which are intermediate or ac- 
cessory members of optative clauses, i. e. clauses expressing a wish ; hence with 
adjective, adverbial, or final clauses, as members of a clause expressing a wish, 
or as intermediate members of an optative proposition expressed conditionally? 
II. p, 640. e?r) 8' ostis ercupos awayyeiAeie rdx^ra TI-nAelSy (0 that there 
were a friend to announce as quick as possible). Ar. Vesp. 1431. epSoi ris, r)v 
eKaaros e 1 8 e i tj rexvnv. PL Phaedr. 279, c. to xpverov ttXtj&os eXi] /xoi,'6(rot> 
/x'/jTe (pepeiv, {jlt)t dyeiv Svvair aWos, 3) 6 craxppoov. II. <r, 464, sqq. at ydp 
fxiv Savdroio ovsr\x*os £>8e dvvaifXTjv v6crcpiv awoKptyai, ore fi.iv fxSpos alvb^ 
ik 6. voi. — X. S. 8, 17. 'tis fjucreiv Svvair av, v<p y ou elSeir} na\6s re teal aya- 
&bs vop.i£6p.evos. C. 4. 6, 7. wws yap av rts, a ye fj,^] ewlar air o, ravra ao<pbs 
eX-n; PI. Phaed. 72, c. et air o&vr]<r ko i fiev wdvra, oca rod tfjv [AeraAdfio i, 
ewe id 7) 8e awob dvo i, jxevoi ev tovtci) rep (rxvp-ari to TeSveoora Kal /jlt) wd\iv 
*.v a/3 i(i) ff k o it o, op ou TroAAf) avdynr Te\ev7a>vra wdvra reStvdvai ica\ /j.r)8ev (rjv 



} 327.] MODES IN SUBORDINATE CLAUSES 519 

X. O. 1, 13. etris XPV T0 T § apyvpiw, wst€ kclkiov rb crw/xa %X°h "*&* &v * Tt 
rb apyvpiov avrq) wcpeXi/xov eir\ ; S. Ph. 325. &v[xbv yevoiro X 6 '^ -rXripwcral 
irore, Iv at MvKijvai yvo7ev..,oTixV ^xvpos avSpwv aXKi/xwv ixr)Tr\p ecpv. Eur. 
Troad. 698. n a?8a r6vhe ira&bs eK&pe\paLs <xv, Tpolas ixeyiarov axpeXrjfi, 'Iv ol 
wore e/c (rod yev6[xevoi iraihes *\Xiov naXiv tear o uciae tav Kal 7r6Xis yevoir en. 
X. An. 2. 4, 3. ovk eiricrTdfxe&a, o T i fiacriXebs r)fxas airoXeaai irepl iravrbs av 
w o it) o~ a it o, Xva Kal rots dXXois "EXXriai (bofios e?ri iirl ftacriXea /xeyav aroarev 
eiv (according to the best MSS.). Comp. 3, 1, 18. X. Cy. 2. 4, 17. el St) wet- 
rats eiraivelv ere iroXXovs, oir ws 8o£av Xaj3ois, dpTi ety]TraTr)Kws efys &v. Comp. 
2. 4, 17. But since the Optative in a clause expressing a wish as well as the 
Optative in hypothetical propositions, has a present signification (§ 259, 3), ac- 
cording to § 330, 2 the Subj. must properly follow after the final conjunctions, 
as is frequently the case. PI. Apol 28, d. avr'iKa r e&vairjv, 'iva fxrj iv- 
3xt5e uevw KarayeXacrros. X. An. 3. I, 38. o'iof.cai av v/xas jxeya ovrjcrai rb crrpd- 
rev/xa, el eiri/xeXri&eiriTe, oir ca s avrl tcov aizoXwXoTwv ws rdxtcrra (TTparrjyol 
avr iKar a err afrwtr iv. Cy. 3. 2, 28. xP^t xaTa irposyevec foai en av fiovXoi- 
fii)v r)/x?v, btrws ex w fxioSrbv a<pS6vws Sibovai. Also with fir] (whether not = 
that). An. 1.3, 17. eyw OKVoirjv jxev av els to, irXoTa e/xfiaiveiv, a 7]/x?v doirj, f.i7) 
fjuas avraxs reus Tpif)pe<ri k ar aSvcrr;, (pofioifx-nv §' av t<£ r\ye\xovi § doir) ewea- 
&ai, firi rj/xas aydyr), o&ev oi>x olSv re ecrrai el;eX&e7v. 

Remark. But in substantive-clauses with Sri or ws, that (§ 329), and in 
dependent interrogative clauses, after a conditioning or conditioned Ind. of 
the historical tenses, the Ind. of the principal tenses remains ; also after an 
optative principal clause, since these clauses have but a loose connection with 
the principal clause, and hence they readily assume the form of direct discourse. 
X. An. 5. 1, 10. el fxev rfir ictt d/xe^a aaepws, ore '/i^ei Xeipicrocpos, ovSev av 
edei wv /xeXXw Xeyetv. (So in the best and most of the MSS. instead of ^|ot.) 
Dem. 19, 40. ey paepov av Siapprjdrjv, rjXiKa v/xas ev w o ir) <r w, el ev rjdeLv Kal 
rrjv (Tvjxjxaxi-av fxoi yevrjcro/xevriv. — Dem. 16, 4. ovd* av eTs avreiwoi, ws ov 
(rvfx<pepei Trj ir6Xei, /cat AaKeSaifxoviovs aa&eveTs elvai Ka) ®7)fiaiovs. X. An. 3. 
2, 36. el vvv airo Seix& c '??> riva XP?) ^T^cr^ai (ducere) rod TrXaurlov, . . ovk 
av . . fiovXevecr&ai ri/xas deoi. 

2. The Subj. and Opt. are used in subordinate clauses to de- 
note indefinite frequency or repetition ; the Subj., when the prin- 
cipal clause contains a principal tense (Pres. or Fut), the Opt., 
.when the principal clause contains an historical tense (usually 
the Impf.). This relation in Greek is regarded as a conception, 
inasmuch as the idea of repetition arises from bringing single 
actions together in conception. The conjunction or relative of 
the subordinate clause is translated by as often as. 

II. )8, 391. ov he k iywv airdvev&e fxdx"ns iSeXovra vor)aw /xijxvd£etv Trapa 
vi)vff\ Kopwv'icnv, ov ot eivena dpKiov ecrereiTai (pvyeeiv Kvvas 7/5' olwvovs (as often as 
I shall observe). X. Cy. 3. 3, 26. oir 6 Tav (ol fidpfiapoi fiacriXeTs) o~t par owe • 
BevwvTai, Taeppov irepifiaXXovrai evirerws b*ia rrjv iroXvxeipiav. C. 3. 1, 1. '6 tj 
f**v (~XwKpdT7js) avrbs elSeir), irdvrwv irpoSv/xoraTa ebiSacTKei , otov he avrbs 



'"520 syntax. [ft 328, 329 

a.TT€ip6Tepos e'(r), irpbs robs imcrTa/xhovs i/yep avrovs. An. 6. 1, 7. oitotc o, 
"EW-nves to?s TroXe/xiois eirioiev, pqdicos airecpevyov. 4. 5, 30. oirov g,svo<bS}. 
it a pi oi KWfj.7]v, eTpeirero irpbs robs iv tclTs Kdo/xais. 1 . 9, 1 8. e X ris ye n Kvpa> irpos- 
-ra^avTi Kakas vivn perrjcr e lev, ovSevl irdoiroTe axd>pio~Tov e'larre t^v irpo&vuiav. 



$328. I. Substantive-Clauses. 

Substantive-clauses are substantives or infinitives expand- 
ed into a sentence, i. e. they have the force of a substantive, 
and stand as the subject, as^well as the attribute or object of 
a sentence. Comp. $ 326, 3. 



$329. A, Substantive-Clauses introduced by on o? 
cos, that. 

1. Substantive-clauses introduced by oft and to?, that, 

express the object of verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g. bpav, 

olkov€lv, voelv, ixavSaveiv, yiyvoxTKetv, etc. ; Aeyeiv, SrjXovv, SeiKvvvai, 

ayyiXXetv, etc., [§ 306, 1, (b)] ; in the second place, subordinate 

clauses introduced by on, express the object of verba affectuum, 

e. g. S^avjxa^etv, ax#eo-#ai, ayavaKTzlv, alcrxvveoSai, [AeLujieoScu, etc. ; 

on is also used to introduce a subordinate clause, which con 

tains an explanation of the principal clause, or of a single word 

in it. 

Remark 1. 'Hs, properly, how, differs from on, in expressing the thought 
more indefinitely and undecidedly, than on ; hence us is used particularly after 
verbs of believing, thinking, and after negative verba sentiendi and declarandi. 
— After verbs of believing, thinking, judging, hoping, promising, swearing, denying, 
the Inf. or the Ace. with the Inf. usually follows, very seldom or i or o> s ; after 
verbs of saying, mentioning, and the like, both constructions occur with equal 
frequency ; after verbs of knowing, showing, and the like, either otj or ws 
follows, or a participle, or, under certain conditions, the Ace. with the Inf. See 
§311. Sometimes, also, oircos and the Poet, ovveita., also 63- ovvena in the- 
Tragedians, are used nearly in the same sense with on, that. 

Rem. 2. When a subordinate clause refers to a Pass, verb or to an imper- 
sonal phrase with iarrlv, e. g. Srikov, deivov, oXo-%p6v i<rnu, and the like, it stands 
as the grammatical subject. 

2. The predicate of this substantive-clause may be ex- 
pressed : (a) by the Lid., (b) by the Opt. (c) by the Opt. with 
ox, (d) by the Lid. of Hist, tenses with av. 

3. The Lid. of all the tenses is used, when the statement ia 
to be represented as a fact, something certain or actual. Par 






$ 329.] SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 52\ 

ticularly is the Ind. used regularly, when the verb of the prin- 
cipal clause is a principal tense (Pres., Perf., or Fut). 

4. The Opt., on the contrary, is used, when the statement is 
to be represented as a conception or supposition, therefore, par- 
ticularly, when what is stated as the opinion of another is to be 
indicated as such {\ 345, 4). When the Ind. interchanges with 
the Opt., then one thought is represented as a fact, the other, 
as a mere thought or conception, something uncertain. 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 7. ot §' ekeyov, or t 'dpKTOt ttoKKovs ^7} TrArjcrtdcravTas dtecp&ei- 
pa v. Th. 1, 114. j}yy<sh&7i, <5ti Meyapa acpecrrr] /ce, Kal IleXoirovvfjaioi fj.4\- 
Aovatv isfidKketv is ttjv 'Att tK-fjv. Her. 3, 140. irvv&dveTat (Hist. Pres.) 6 2u- 
XooSiv, ws 7] fiaaiXri'ir) it e p te Ar]Av&o t is tovtov tov avBpa. X. An. 1. 1, 3. 
Ttcro-acpepv-ns StafUdAAet (Hist. Pres,) tov Kvpov irpbs rbv aSeAcpSv, ws iirtfiov- 
Xevot avTq. Cy. 1. 1, 3. c 6re fxkv 8/7 ravra ive&v/Jtov/xe&a, ovtws iytyvwffKOjxev 
trepl avTwv, ws av&pwirw Tre(pvK6ri irdvrwv rwv aXXwv paov el 77 ^oooov, v) av&pw- 
ttwv dpxetv. An. 2. 1,3. oZtol eXeyov, on Kvpos fxev t 4&vr) kgv, 'AptaTos 5e 
it ecpevyw s e'Lt) Kal Key 01, on Tavr-nv t)]V Tjfxepav Teptpeivetev av ai/TOvs. 

Rem. 3. When the Ind. Imp/, instead of the Opt. follows an historical tense 
in the principal clause, the mode of expression resembles the form of direct 
discourse, since the Ind. of direct discourse remains, e. g. Uevocpwv eXeyev, o t < 
opSrws tjt twvro Kal avrb to epyov avro7s jxapTvpoir], X. A. 3. 3, 11. (oratio recta : 
bp&ws ccIt iwvt at). See § '345, Pern. 5. But when the Ind. of the principal 
tenses follows an historical tense in the principal clause, then the subordinate 
clause assumes wholly the coloring of direct discourse (§ 345, 5). Hence it 
sometimes happens, that the form of the oblique discourse is either partially 
or wholly changed into that of the direct. X. Cy. 1. 4, 28. ivTav&a 8)7 rbv 
Kvpov yeXaffat re e/c twv irp6oSev daKpvwv Kal elirelv ai>Tcp airiSvTa &appelv, oti 
tt apecrr at avTO?s oXtyov xp6vov wsts opav crot i^iffTat Kav fiovXr) acrnap- 
Sa/xvKTei. Hence ort maybe used, when the exact words of another are quoted 
in the same form in which they were spoken by him, when in Eng., a colon or 
marks of quotation are used, e. g. X Cy. 3. 1, 8. el^e S\ oti- Els Kaipbv %Keis 
ecprj, he said: "you have come at the right time." An. 2. 4, 16. Upo^evos 
elirev, or t • Avtos ei/M, ov Cw^s. It is used even before the Imp., e. g. PI. Criton. 
50, C 1o~ws av e'tirotev (ot v6/xot), OTf ^Xl ~S,wKpaTes, /x^ &avfxa(e to. Xey6/xeva. 

5. The Opt. with av is used, when the statement is to be 
represented as a conditional supposition, assumption, conjecture, 
or as an undetermined possibility [§ 260, 2, 4, (a)]. 

X. An. 1. 6, 2. KaraXXayels 8e outos Kvpw, elirev, el ai>T(2 doir) tirireas %tA» 
ovs, o r i robs TrpoKctTUKaiovTas tTnreas 7) k <xt aicdvo 1 av iveopevcras, % ^wvrai 
ttoXXovs abrwv eXot, Kal kcoXvo- ete tov ndtetv iirtSvTas. Cy. 1. 6, 3. jj.e/ivr]/j.at 
aicovcras tzot4 gov, t 1 et/coTcus a v Kal irapa &ecov irpaKrtKdoTepos e i'77, ibsirep ko, 
irapa av&pct>Trajv, OSTts /x-f], ott6t€ iv airSpots e'/rj, ToVe KoAaKevot, a\\' ore to. aptcFTa 
frpaTTOt, t6tz /JtaXtcTTa twv &e£>v p.efxv(aT0 (osrts fir] kt\. instead of e% Tts frf, 
jtrA.). Dem. Aphob. 851, 22. oiSa, on fcdvres 'av 6 (ioAoyf)o~atT€. 

44% 



/>22 SYNTAX. [$ 329 

C. The Incl. of the Hist, tenses with av is used, when the 
affirmation is to be represented as a condition, whose actual 
existence or possibility is denied [$ 260, 2, (2) (a)]. 

Dem. Aphob. 830, 55. el p.ev 6 irarijp 7]Trlo~Tei tovtols, dr]\ov, ot i ovt av 
raWa eir er peirev, ovt av rav^r" ovtoo KaraXiircbv avTols e<ppa£ev. Lys. a 
Agor. 137, 75. ovdeiroTe 7relcreLS ovSeva av&pwircov, ws Qpvvixov airoKTetvas a<pei- 
& 7] s dv, el /j.7] p.eyd\a rbv drj.uov rwv 'A&rjvatwv Kal avrjKeo'Ta nana elpydcroo. PI. 
Rp. 1. 330. ©efuffTOKXris aireKplvaro, '6tl ovt' av avrbs ^eptcpcos cov bvop.ao-rbs 
i y e v e t o, ovt eicelvos 'A&rjvu'io? (wv). 

Rem. 4. Impersonal forms of expressions are often changed into those which 
are personal, the subject of the substantive-clause being transferred to the 
principal clause and the impersonal expression becoming its predicate. 
Comp. §§ 307, Rem. 6, and 310, Rem. 3, Th. 1, 93. Kal StjAtj rj olKodo/xla 
en Kal vvv icrTiv, otl Kara o-irovB^v eyevero. X. C. 4. 2, 21. (SoKeT 6 toiovtos) 
SrjXos v)] At' elvai, otl a opero eldevai ovk oldev. X. O. 1, 19. on itovqpoT- 
aToi elcri, ovde ere \av&dv ovaiv. 

Rem. 5. In the place of a substantive-clause introduced by oti or as, the 
Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) or the Part, may stand after verba declarandi and sen- 
tiendi. That there is a difference of meaning between the construction with 
the Inf. and that with the Part., has been seen in § 311 ; but the difference be- 
tween the construction with a Part, and that with otl or ws, is only in form. 
The difference between the construction with oti and cos with the finite verb 
and that of the Inf. (Ace. with Inf.) is, that in the former, the affirmation is 
more objective and definite (as a fact) ; in the latter, on the contrary, subjective 
and indefinite (as an assumption). Hence verbs which express a merely sub- 
jective meaning, as, oXecr^ai, SoKeTv, iXTri^etv, and also (pdvai (i.e. 
verbs which denote such a subjective view), are constructed almost exclusively 
with the Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.), very seldom with oti or ws. That the distinc- 
tion between the three modes of construction is very often unessential, is clearly 
seen from the fact, that examples are found in which the same thought is ex- 
pressed by the same writer in different places in each of the three forms, e. g. 
Her. o, 63. i^ayyeWeL, &s ol irats yeyove. 65. ore ot e^fyyyeiXe 6 oIk4t7js 
TratZa yeyovevai. 69. ore avTiS crv r]yyeKbr]s y eyevt] fxevos. 

Rem. 6. The verbs ixep.vnp.ai, old a, aicovco and others of similar mean- 
ing, are not unfrequently followed by an adverbial clause, introduced by frre, 
instead of a substantive-clause introduced by otl or a>s. This construction 
seems to have arisen from an ellipsis, as rod xpovov, e. g. p.epv -qpai (tov xp<^ou), 
oVe TavTa e\e£as, as in Eng. / remember very well when the war broke out. X 
Cy. 1. 6, 8. p. e p. v 77 p. a 1 Kal tovto, '6t e, gov XeyovTos, avveSoKei Kal e/xol vireopey- 
e&es elvai epyov rb KaAws apx^tv. Dem. Ol. 2(3), 29, 4. p. ep.vq a&e, '6t airijy- 
ye\&r] <bi\LiriTos irepiopKccv. Comp. mejnini, quum darem ; vidi, quum prodiret , 
audivi eum, quum diceret. 

Rem. 7. Verbs expressing emotion (No. 1 ), instead of being followed by a sub- 
stantive-clause introduced by oil or d>s, are often followed by a subordinate clause 
introduced by a conditional or interrogative el, if, whether, when the object of 
admiration, etc., is not to be represented as actually existing, but as merely pos- 
sible, or as still a matter in question, e. g. &avpd(a>, otl ravra yiyveraL and ei 
TavTa ylyveraL. Attic politeness, which often blends in its language a coloring 
of doubt and a certain indeterminate manner of expression, frequently employs 
this form even in settled and undoubted facts ; in this case el has the force of 
in. Aeschin. Ctcs. ovk ayaira, el p.^ 5'lkt]v e8u)Kev (he is not satisfied, that). 
PI. Lach. 194, a. dy avaKTco el ovrwal a vow p.)] oXos t elfxl elireiv. Rp. 348, 



$330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 523 

e. r6Se ifravpatfa, el ev dperr^s Kal (Tocptas rforjs pepei r)]v aSudav, ri/v Be Si* 
Kaiocrvvnv ev rois evavriois. Dem. Mid. 30, 548. ovk y c% vvS-n, el roiovro 
Kanbv endyei rep {that he brings such a calamity upon one). 

Rem. 8. Instead of on ovr cos, the relative &> s, that, is often used, and 
instead of 'Sri roiovros or or i r 6<ros, the relatives oTos, Saos. PI. 
Phaed. 58, e. ebBaip-cov fxoi 6 avrjp ecpalvero, cos aBeus Kal yevvaicos ereXevra {that 
he died so fearlessly, etc.). Her. 1, 31. al 'ApyeTai ifx.aKapi£ov rfyv /xrjrepa, o'Lcov 
tckvcov eKvp-ncre {that she is possessed of such children). 



$ 330. B. Final Substantive -Clauses, denoting pur- 
pose and result, introduced by ojs, lva, etc} 

i. The second class of substantive- clauses are those which 
denote a purpose, object, or a result. These clauses are intro- 
duced by the conjunctions lva, ws, oVws (o<f>pa, Poet), lva 

[Kr\, (OS {XTj, OTTOiS {XTj. 

2. The mode in final clauses is commonly the subjunctive 
or optative, since the purpose or object is something merely 
imagined or conceived. When the verb of the principal clause 
is a principal tense : Pres., Perf., Fut, or an Aorist with the sig- 
nification of the present [$ 257, 1, (a) and (b)], then the final 
conjunction, i. e. the conjunction expressing the purpose, etc., 
is followed by the Subj. ; but when the verb of the principal 
clause is an historical tense : Impf , Plnp., Aor., then the final 
conjunction is followed by the optative (but never by an Opt. 
Fut). 

Tavra ypdcpco, yeypacpa, ypdipco, 'lv eX&ys {ut venias, that you may 
come). Ae£ov (with the sense of the Pres.), 'Lv elSco (die, ut sciarn,that 1 
may know). Tavra eypacpov, eyeypdcpeiv, eypatya, 'lv eX&ois (ut ve- 
nires, that you might come). II. X, 289, sq. aXX' fobs eXavvere ficivvxas 'lirirovs 
Icp&ifuov Aavacov, 'lv vireprepov efyos ctpycT&e (ut gloriam vobis paretis) ; but, 
II. e, 1 — 3. ev& a3 TuBeiBv AiopL-fjBe'C YlaXXas 'A&rjvr) BcoKe /xevos Kal frdperos, 'Lv 
eKBt]Xos fiera, iracriv , Apyeloi<ri yevoiro, iBe KXeos ecr&Xbv 'dpoiro (ut clarus 
fieret et gloriam sibi pararet). r, 347. Jupiter said to Minerva, aXX* fot. oi veKrap 
re Kal afj.^pocri7]v eparetv^v trrd^ov (with the sense of the Pres.) evl trrr]&etrff, 
Xva fi-f] jxiv Xijxbs 'LK-nrai (ut ne fames eum occupet) ; but, 352, rj B' 'Ax^rji veK- 
rap evl crrriSecrcri Kal afxfipoairjv epareivr]V trrd£, 'Lva pd) fiiv Xi/xbs areprrfys yov- 
vafr 'LKOiro (ut ne occuparet). Dem. Cor. 239, 39. yeypacpa vpuv, 'Lva p.^ 
enl irXelov ivox^V <r&e irepl rovrcov. X. Cy. 2. 1, 4. rl ovv, ecpt] 6 Kvpos, ou 
n.al rr]v Bvvap.iv eXe^ds fioi [=Xe£ov fxoi, § 256,4, (e)], '6-ircos — fiovXevco 

1 For practical reasons both kinds of subordinate clauses are brought together 
here although they properly belong to adverbial clauses denoting purpose. 



024 SYNTAX. [$ 330 

ue&a, oncos av apiara dyojvi£olfx.e&a; 1. 2, 3. (e/c rrjs tccv TlepToov eXev&epas cvyo* 
oas KaXov/j.ev7]s) ra /xev covia Kal ol ayopaloi an e Xr\ XavTa l els &XXov tSttou, cos 
^h V-tyvvr)Tai 7/ tovtcov Tvpfir) rrj tcov nenaidevfxevcov evKoc/xiq,. 15. 'iva 8i 
cra(peo*Tepov dr)Xco&j} nacra t) Uepacov noXneia, [xiKpbv endve i/xi (paucis repe- 
tam). 4, 25. Ka/xj8u(T7}$ tov Kvpov an eKaXei, ottws to ev Tlepcrais emxcopia 
in iTeXoit].. PL Apol. 28, d. avTiKa TeSvai-nv (with the sense of the Pres.}, 
Iva /jltj ev&dSe fxevco KaTayeXacrTos. 

Remark 1. The Subj. often follows an historical tense : (a) in vivid nar 
ration, where past actions are regarded as present {objective manner of repre- 
sentation, § 327, Rem. 2); (b) when the purpose or effect is to be repre- 
sented as continuing in the present time of the speaker, (a) Her. 1, 29. ~2,6xcov 
aireSrifj-rfcre erea detect, 'iva or) ^77 Tiva tcov vojxcov avayKaa&fj Xvaai tcov 
(= av) e&ero (Solon icas absent ten years, in order that he might not be compelled, 
etc.). 7, 8. avXXoyov TJepcrecov tcov aptcrTcov eiroieero, 'iva yvco/nas re nv&rj- 
rai crcpecov Kal avrbs ev natri el Try ra &eXei. Th. 4 r I. Kal i s e /3 e jSAtj Ke o~ av 
a\xa is ttjv 'P-nylvcov ol AaKedaifj.6vioi, 'iva /XT) (01 'Pr)y?voi) in ifioT) & co o~ t to7s 
Mecra-nvlois. — (b) Od. A, 93. t'ittt air, co ovffT7)ve, Xincov <pdos f)eXioio ijXv&es, 
o<ppa 'iSv veKvas Kal arepirea x®P OJ/ - Her. 7, 8. Sib v/xeas vvv iyco crvveXe^a, 
'iva to (==&) voeco TrpyjaaeLV vn epS ecojxai v/mv. Dem. Phil. 3, 117,26. ras 
noXeis ai>Tcov naprjprfTai Kal rerpapx'ias KaT e t f)o~ ev, 'iva fir) fx6vov Kara n 6- 
Xeis, aAA.ec Kal Kara e&vv 5 vXevcoa iv. PL Crit. 43, b. eirhrjSes ere ovk eyei- 
pov, 'iva cos tjcWtcc 8 1 a y rj s. 

Rem. 2. On the contrary, a preceding principal tense, or an Aor. with Pres. 
sense, is sometimes followed by an Opt. : (a) when the present of the principal 
clause is an historical present, or when, in the use of the Pres., the speaker has 
at the same time contemplated a past action ; Eur. Hec. 10. noXvv 8e <rvv ifiol 
Xpvcrbv e kit e /j.ir e 1 Xa&pa naTi)p, 'iv , e'inoT 'IXiov relxv necroi, toIs £u>tTiv eir) 
natal fxr) crndvis fiiov. X. An. 4. 6, 1. tovtov 8' 'En itr&eve 1 . .napaotdootri <pv- 
XaTreiv, on ccs, el KaXcos yy-fjaaiTo, ex 03 " Kc ^ tovtov anioi. Ax. Ran. 24. avrbs 
/3a8i£co Kal novco, tovtov 8' ox&i, 'iva /J. 7} t aXan am co polT 0, fj.rjS' &x& os 
<p e p 1 (I let this one ride on an ass = I placed him on an ass, in order that he 
might not suffer hardship), (b) when the speaker adduces the intention or pur- 
pose which a person entertains, not as coming from his own, i. e. the speaker's 
mind, but from that of the person himself, so that the intention is indicated as 
one that had a previous existence ; PL Rp. 410, b. ap olv, r)v 8' eyco, & TXav- 
kccv, Kal ol KaSicnaPTes fJiovcriKfj Kal yvfxvacTTiKfi naiSevetv oi>x ov eveKa Tives otov- 
Tai Ka& itTTacr iv, %va Trj p.ev to crccfj.a frepanevo 1 vto, ttj he tt\v y^vxw; 
(the view of the lawgiver, i. e. his purpose). X. An. 2. 4, 4. foas Be nov (fia- 
aiXevs) r) anocTKanTei ti 7) c\noTeixK* l i <° s dnopos eir] 7) 656s (the view of the 
king), (c) when in the principal clause, the Opt. stands with or without &v 
m 259, 3, (a) and 260, 2, (4), (a)], then an Opt. commonly folloAvs, for the con- 
ceptions in the principal and subordinate clause are represented as separated 
from the present time of the speaker (§ 259, 3) ; still, a Subj. may follow by 
attraction of the mode, since the present sense of the Opt. is assumed. See 
§ 327b, 1. (b). Theogn. 881. elpr)vr) Kal nXovTos exoi n6Xiv, oeppa fxeT aXXccv 
k OfindCo l/u. 1. Soph. Aj. 1217, sq. yevoifJ.av,'iv'vXaev enecri n6vTov npofi- 
Xr)[M aXiKXvo-Tov — , tc\s Upas on cos nposeinoi/j.ev 'A&r)vas. 

3. When two or more final clauses follow each other, the 
Subj. sometimes interchanges with the Opt. The two clauses 
are then placed in a kind of antithesis to each other, the former 
representing the result of the purpose or aim as certain, 



$ 330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 525 

the latter, without this accessory idea, and consequently as 
uncertain, undetermined, or only derived from what precedes. 

II. o, 597, sq. "EKTopt. yap ol &v/j.bs ifiovXero Kudos ope^ai Tlpiatj.lb'r), 'iva vnvcl 
Kopwvicri freo-iu$aes irvp ifxfiaXr] aKd/xaroi', ©eriBos 5' i£aio~ioi/ aprju ivacrav iivi- 
Kpr\veie. Her. 9, 51. is tovtov St) tov x®P 0V i$ov\evo~avTo jxeracnrivai, 'iva 
Ka\ vdari ex^o~i xP& <r & al BXp&6v&, Kal ol lirirees o~(peas (at) <r i volar o. 8,76 
T«j>8e Se e'iveKev avr\yov (ol Tlepo~ai) ras vrjas, 'iva 877 rolai "E\\7}at. fj.r]8e (pvyeen 
4£jj aAA.' diroXaLMp&evTes iv rfj ~2aAa/x?vt So?ev rtaiv tu>v in 'Apre/uatca. 

4. The modal adverb av, referring to a conditioning clause 
(generally not expressed), is sometimes joined with the final 
conjunctions d»s and ottws (more seldom Iva). 

Od. 6, 167, sq. irefx^/w Se roi ovpov oirtcr&ev, ws «e fid?C aaK-fiSrvs o~r\v iraTptd? 
ya?av i'/c 77 at, aX /ce &eoi y e&eAoxrt. &, 20, sq. Kai jxlv LiaKporepov Ka\ irdo 
cova SrTjKe ISecrfrai, &s Kev ^air\Keaai (piKos Travreco-i yevono (sc. el irpbs rov\ 
QairjKas acpinoiTo). Her. 3, 44. iderjSrt], okus av Kal Trap' ecovrbv 7re/j.\pas is 2a 
llov deoiro ffrparov (ut, si opus esset, exercitum a se peteret). X. Cj. 5. 2, 21. 
5ta rr\s o~r\s x^P as d^eis 7)/J.as, oircos av eld u Lie v, are Set cpiXia Kal iro\e/j.ic 
vo/xl(eiv (in order that, when we set our foot on the land, we may know, etc.). H. 4. 
8, 16. edooKe xp^l jLaTa 'AvraXKiSq., '6ttcos &v, it A 77 p w& e uto s vavr lko u virc 
AaKedaifMOvicov, o'i re 'A&r]va?oi Kal ol av/j.uaxoi avrwv fxaXkov rrjs elpTjvrji 
irpo s 5 e ivr 0. 

5. The final conjunctions Iva and o>s (more seldom oVcd?), 
are connected with the Ind. of the historical tenses, when it is 
to be indicated that the intended purpose is not accomplished, 
or is not to be accomplished. In this case, in the principal 
clause, the Ind. of an historical tense stands both with and 
without av. See § 227 b , 1. (a). 

Ar. Pac. 135. ovkovv ixpv v °~ e Unyaffov £ev£ai irrepov, oircos icpalvov ro?s 
&eois t pay ikcct epos. PI. Criton. 44, d. et ydp &<peAov oloi re elvai ol iroWol ts 
iieyiara KaKa i£epyd(ecr&aL, 'iua olol re ?jo~av av Kal aya&a to. fieyio-ra, Kal 
KaA&s av 6?xe. Lys. Simon. 98, 21. i^ovKofxrjV b" dv 'Si/ji.oova ttju aurrjv 
yvoofxriv, ifx.ol ex^v,'iv a/xpoTepoou 7]/nS>u aKovaavres rahrj^rrj paSlojs eyueare ra 
diKaia. 

C. Verbs which express care, anxiety, considering, endeavor- 
ing or striving, effecting, and inciting, e. g. eTn/xeAeto-^cu, ^povn- 
t,€iv, SeSiemi cfivXarreLv, crKOTrelv, crKeif/acrd-ai, /3ov\€vecrSat, bpav, Trotetv, 
7rpdrT€LV {curare) , /jirj^avacrS^aL, TrapaKaXelv, TrapayyeWzw, Trpoenreiv, 
aiTCLo-Sai, d^tovv, dye {up then), and the like, are followed by the 
conjunctions 7rct>« (o7tojs ixrj), sometimes also by w?, either 



526 SYNTAX. [$ 331. 

(according to No. 2) with the Subj. and Opt., or with the Fut 
Ind., when the accomplishment of the purpose is to be repre* 
sented as something definitely occurring and continuing. 

X. Cy. 1. 2, 3. ol IlepcrLKol vSjxoi ei ifxi Kovt at, ottcos t^\v apxh v p.)) roiov* 
tol effoiTai ol ttoATtcu, 0T01 (= costs) irovnpov v) altrxpov epyou icpietrSai. 3. 2, 
13. w 9 6e KaAcos ei-ei ra vp-tTepa, $)v (pi\oi yewna&e, i/xol p. e A 77 <r e i. Dem. 01. 
1. 21, 12. lt k OTre?o~&€ tovto, co avdpes 'AStjvcuoi, ottcos /at) Aoyovs ipoutri 
u6vov ol irap' vfxcov irpecrfieis, aAAa Kal Hpyov ti SeiKvveiv e^ovtriv. PI. Ion. 530, 
b. &ye Srj, ottcos Kal ra Uava^r)vaia v iKi)o~ o /xey. The Put. Ind. also stands 
very often after an historical tense, according to § 327, Eem. 2 : far more rare 
in this case is the use of the Put. Opt. X. Cy. 8. 1, 43. iirefx.e\*?To 8' ottcos 
u^re atriroi, pA\T$ airoroi ttotg iaoivro. 

Rem. 3. Sometimes ottco s &v is connected witr the Fut. Ind., and is then 
to be referred to an implied condition. Her. 3, 1 J4. ol 'Ivdol rpSirai toiovtco 
Kal C € ^l et Xpe(a[xevoi £\avvovo~i iirl rbv XP V<T0V teAoyio~p.4vcos, Hkcos av Kav/xaTcoy 
tcou &epp.OTaTcov iourcvv %a out ai iv rfj apirayfj (i. e. '6rav Kav/mara ^epfj.6raTa ri). 

Rem. 4. "O7rcos or '6 wees p.i\ with the Put. Ind., sometimes refers to a 
word to be supplied, viz. op a, 5 pare, vide, videte. X. An. 1. 7, 3. ottcos oZv 
ecretrfre dpdpes a£ioi ttjs iAev&epias, (see) then that ye are men worthy of liberty. 
PI. Menon, 77, a. aAA 5 c 6tt cos p.')] ou% 616s t £o~op.ai TroXXa ToiavTa Keyeiv. A 
similar ellipsis occurs in the phrase, Set <r 5 (sc. o-kottsiv) ottco s in the Attic poets. 
Soph. Aj. 556. Se? tr' Uncos irarpos 8el'£ets iv ix&pois, oTos e£ o'lov \pd<pr)s. 

Rem. 5. Verbs expressing care, anxiety, are very often followed by ottcos 
(sometimes also by wj) &v with the Opt., in order to express the idea of anx- 
iety, solicitude how something might happen [§ 260, 2, (4), (a)]. In this case, 
ottcos and cos are clearly adverbs (how). X. Cy. 2. 1,4. j3 ov\€vo-6p.e&a > 
air cos av apicrra &7 co vi £o ip. e&a. 



$331. II. Adjective-Clauses. 

Adjective-clauses are adjectives or participles expanded into 
«\ sentence, and, like adjectives, serve to define a substantive 
oi substantive pronoun more definitely. They are intro- 
duced by the relative pronouns os, ^, o, osris, tjtis, o t-<, 
oto <?, etc. 

Ot iroAe/j.101, oi airicpvyov (= ol an ocpvy 6vt es iroAe/JUOi). Ta Trpdyfiara, & 
'AAe^avdpos eirpa^ev (ra virh 'AAe^dpo'pov irpax& *vt a irpdyp-aTa OX to. tov 'AAe|- 
AvSpov Trpdyp-ara). 'H ttoKis, eV fi 6 UeicrlcTTpaTOS Tvpa.vvos -f]v (= r) vtto tov 
TkeitritTTpaTov r v p a v v e vh e?tra tt6\ls). 

Remark 1. Homer often uses the pronoun os in a demonstrative sense. 
II. <p, 198. aAAa Kal bs SeiSoi/ce Albs p.eyd\oio Kepavvov. So also, o'l — o'/, these, 
those, the one, the other. In the Attic writers, as well as in Ionic prose, this usage 
is confined to the following instances: (a) Kal o s. Kal r'i, instead of Kal 
ovtos, ical avT-n. X. Cy. 5. 4, 4. Kal bs i^aTraTrjbels SicoKei ava icpaTOS. 4. 5, 



$ 331 ] ADJECTIVE CLAUSES. 527 

52. ical o'i yeKdcravres elirov. Antiph. 1. 113, 16. teal 77 xnrecrx^ro. In the ob- 
lique Cases the article (§ 247, 3), is used instead of it, e. g. kcu t6v, et eum. — ■ 
(b) bs ixiv — bs Se in Demosthenes, yet very seldom, often in later writers, 
and earlier in Doric writers, as well as in Hippocrates ; and it occurs not only 
in the Nom., but also in all the Cases of the Sing, and Plural. Dem. Cor. 
248. Tr6\eis 'EWrjuiSas as fxev avaip&v, els as Se robs cpfj.ya.Sas Kardywv. — (c) 
ts nal os, this and that, it not being determined who, any one that you please 
(very seldom). Her. 4, 68. ras fSa<n\r[ias Icrrias eiri6pK7]cre bs k al '6 s, exclu- 
sively in the Nom. (in the Ace. rbv /cat r6v, rb nal r6, see § 247, 3). — (d) in the 
phrase ^ S' s, $ S 1 H\, said he, she. 

Rem. 2. The reciprocal relation in which the substantive stands to an ad- 
jective-clause, and an adjective-clause to a substantive, is expressed thus : a 
demonstrative adjective pronoun or the article 6 77 t6 standing in a principal 
clause, refers to a relative adjective pronoun standing in a subordinate clause, 
and the latter, on the other hand, refers back to the former, e. g. ovros 6 
a.vf]p, bv eiSes, rb p6Sov, b av&ei. So also, r 1 ovr s, oTos, r ocrovr s, 
ocr os (§ 326, Rem. 3). But when the object, to which the relative refers, is to 
be represented as a general one, then the article is omitted, and the relative 
refers immediately to the substantive, e. g. avr]p, %s ka\6s ecrriv ( = avr\p xa- 
\6s). When the relative refers to a personal pronoun, then the relative takes the 
place of the demonstrative, e. g. eyco, os — av, 6s, etc. When the personal pro- 
nouns have no special emphasis, they are omitted, and the relative refers to 
the person indicated by the inflection of the verb, e. g. Ka\a>s eiroi-qcras, bs ravra 
eirpa^as. 

Rem. 3. The demonstrative, to which the relative refers,- is often omitted 
and not only when the Cases are the same, but when they are unlike, if the 
pronoun has no special emphasis ; hence especially when the omitted demon- 
strative denotes some indefinite object, and is equivalent to rls, some one, or 
when the relative os, osris, may be resolved into siquis. Eur. Or. 591, 3. ydixoi 
8' ocrois fxev ev ir'nrrovcriv fipor&v, (rovrois sc.) [xatcdpios aldiv • oh Se fx^ iciirrov- 
criv ed, (ovt 01 SC.) rd r evSov elcrl rd re &vpa£e Svsrvx^'is. Th. 2, 41. ovSev 
TTposSeo/xeyoi ovre 'OpA]pov eiraiverov, ovre (nubs SC.) 6sris eirecri fxev rb avr'iKa. 
Tep^/ei ktX. 

Rem. 4. When the relative is used substantively, i. e. when it refers to a sub- 
stantive pronoun, either expressed or understood, then the adjective-clause, 
like the adjective standing without a substantive, has the meaning of a sub- 
stantive, e. g. ^HA&ov o'i 'dpi err 01 tfcrav = -fjA&ov ol &picrroi (sc. &vSpes). — 
Here belongs also, the formula ecrriv, o'i, &v, oh, ovs, a. This formula has be- 
come so fixed, that commonly neither the number of the relative has any 
effect on the verb ecrri, nor does the tense undergo any change, when the dis- 
course relates to past or future time : thus it has assumed entirely the charac- 
ter of a substantive-pronoun (evioi), and also, since ecrriv may be connected 
with every Case of the relative, has a full inflexion, e. g. 

Nom. ecrriv o'i (=evioi) airecpvyov 

Gen. ecrriv 3>v (=evlcav) airecrx^ro 

Dat. ecrriv oTs (=eviois) ovx ovrcos eSo^ev 

Acc. ear iv ov s (= evio v s) direKreivev. 

The Nom. ecrriv o'i is rare, for example, X. Cy. 2.3, 18; in place of it, commonly 
el crli/ o'i. Th. 2. 26, K\e6irofXTros rrjs irapa&aAacraiov ear iv a eSywcre. So in the 
question, ecrriv o'irives; X. C. 1.4, 2. ecrriv ov sriv as dv&pwiroov re&ai>(x.aKas 
eirl crocpia ; in Xenophon i\v also occurs. An. 1. 5, 7. ? H v Se rovrwv rwv crra&- 
(xuv ovs irdw fxaicpovs ¥j\avvev (and some of these marches which he made, were 
very long, or he made some of these marches very long). H. 7. 5, 17. rwv TroXe/micov 
^v ovs inrocrirSvSovs aireSocrav (there was some of the enemy which they restored by 
truce, or they restored some of the enemy by truce). 



528 



SYNTAX. [§ 332. 



Eem. 5. In like manner, the following phrases, formed with icrnv, are 
used wholly as adverbs with reference to all relations of time. 

eariv '6 re = ivi6re, est quando, i. e. interdum, e. g. etrriv ore eXe^eul 

ecrnv %va or o7rou, est ubi, i. e. aliquando ; 

ecrnv ov or ei/&a, est ubi, someivhere, in many places ; 

oh k eir^' owov, nunquam ; 

ecrrtv r\ or ottt), quodammodo, in many places ; 

ovk etrriv ottcos, nullo modo, ovk etrriv Sir cos ov, certainly. 

etrriv o Trees; in the question. Is it possible, that? 



$332. Agreement of Hie Relative Pronoun. 

1. The relative agrees in Gender and Number with the sub- 
stantive or substantive pronoun (in the principal clause) to 
which it refers; the Case of the relative, however, depends on 
the construction of the subordinate clause, and hence is deter- 
mined either by the predicate, Cx Dy sorrio other word in the 
subordinate clause, or it stands as the subject m the Nom. 

'O aur)p, b v eldes, tp'iXos /jlov etrriv. 'H ctperr), t) s irLvres ol ayaSrol iTri&v/j.ov- 
triv, fxeya ayab6v etrriv. Oi arparicerai ols ifxax^trd/xeSra, avdpeiSraroi r)trav. 
^av^d^ofiev ^.ccKpctTT], ov i) crocpia fxeyitrrrj i\v. '"E.Tri&vp,ov\i.ev rrjs aperr)s, r) 
Trrjyr) eem rravrcev rcev KaXcev. 

2. The person of the verb in the adjective-clause is deter- 
mined by the substantive or substantive pronoun (expressed or 
implied) to which the relative refers. When the relative is 
connected with the first or second person, then the English uses 
the form, I am the one ivko, Iivho, Thou who, etc. 

'E7c6, b s ypdepec, trv, b s ypdtpeis, 6 avr)p or eKe7vos, bs ypdtpei. Th. 2, 60. 
e/j.ol roiovrqj ctvdpl opyifctr&e, bs ovSevbs olo/xai Tjtrtrcev elvai. Isocr. Paneg 
Trees ovk Tjdr) SiKatSv etrriv i)fias eiraiveTv, o'irives rrjV h.pxr\v Karatrx^iv 
rjb'vvri&TiiJ.ev; X. Cy. 5. 2, 15. Kal olicia ye iro\.v /j.el£tov r) v jxer e pa rrjs ifxrjs, 
o'l ye oIklo. xpyo-& e yfj re Kal obpavec. Hence after the Voc, the second per- 
son is regularly nsed, e. g. ctvSpceive, bs 7}fJ.as roiavra KaKa eiroi'ncras. 

3. When the relative refers to two or more objects, it is in 
the plural, and agrees in Gender with the substantives, when 
they are of the same Gender; often, however, it is in the neu- 
ter, when the substantives denote inanimate objects. Comp 
§ 242, 1, (a), (ft). 

Th. 3, 97. 7} fxdxf), SLcd^eis re Kal virayccyai, iv ols afxtporepois rjtrtrovs T)trav ol 
'A&r)va7oi. X. Cy. 1.3, 2. (Kvpos) bpwv (rbv Trdirirov) KeKOtr/xTjinevov Kal bcp&aXfiwv 
inroypacprj, Kal XP&fAaros evrpfyei ical icofxais irpos&erois, a 877 v6[xi[xa r)v ev Mr)Sois, 



$ 332.] AGREEMENT OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 529 

Isocr. Panath. 278, b. ravra elirov, ov irpbs r\v evae/3eiav, ovBe irobs ttjv Sikcuoctv- 
vt\v, ovSe irpbs tt]V <pp6v7)<riv airofiAetyas, & <rv SirjX&es. 

4. If the substantives are of different gender, then the rela- 
tive, when persons are spoken of, agrees in gender with the 
Masc. rather than the Fern., etc. ($ 242, 1) ; bnt when things 
are spoken of, it is usually in the neuter. 

Od. /3, 284. hdvarov Kal Krjpa jxeXaivav, bs St/ crcpi o~xed6v icrri. Isocr.de 
Pac. 159, a. ^KOfxev eKK\-ncrid(ovres irepi re iroXe/xov Kal elpr]vr)s, a \xeyiarr\v 4%ei 
dvvay.iv ev t<$ fiicp rS>v dvSpdnroov. Dem. Cor. 317, 273. ihiriScav Kal (r]\ov Kal 
rijxwv, & irdvra irposTJv ro?s rore irparrofAevois vir ep.ov. PI. Apol. 1 8, a. iv eKeivr} 
rfj (pavp re Kal r<$ rp6ivw 4v olsirep ire^pdjj./j.7]v. Sometimes, also, the rela- 
tive takes the gender of the last substantive, e. g. Isocr. 1. d. 163, a b. fjv Se r\v 
elp-!]Vi)v Troir](rct>/Ae&a, fierd iroWrjs do~<pa\eias r))v tvoKlv olK-^ffOfxev, diraXXayevres 
"KoXefxoov Kal Kivdvvoov Kal t apaxv s, els v? v vvv npbs aWrjXovs KarearTj/aev. 

5. The following exceptions occur to the rule stated under 
No. 1, respecting the agreement of the relative :- 

(a) Constructio Kara o-vveacv (5 241, 1), not often in prose 
with the names of persons, but frequently with collective nouns, 
or substantives which are to be considered as such. 

Her. 8, 128. irepiedpaye ofAlAos — , o! avr'uta rb r6^evp.a AafiSvres — ecpepov 
eirl robs arparrjyovs. Th. 3, 4. rb ru>v 'A&rjvaioov vavr ik6v, oi wpfiovv iv rfj 
MaXeq. PI. Phaedr. 260, a. TrXri&ei, o'inep SiKdaovcn. 

Remark 1. The following cases belong here : — 

(a) The substantive to which the relative refers, is in the Sing., but the rela- 
tive in the PL, when it does not refer to a definite individual of the class, but 
to the whole class, and in this way takes the signification of ohs. This usage, 
however, is more frequent in poetry, than in prose. Od. /n, 97. ktjtos, a fxvpta 
/SoV/cet aydarovos 'Apcpirptrr). PL Rp. 554, a. avx/J-Vp^s ye ris &iv Kal cnrb iravrbs 
irepiovo'iav iroiov/xevos, frrjaavpoiroibs dvf]p, ovs 5rj (cujusmodi homines) ical eiraivei 
rb ttXtj&os. 

(b) On the contrary, a relative in the singular refers to a PL substantive, 
when the relative has a collective signification, e. g. osris, bs 'dv with the Subj.. 
quisquis, quicunque. II. A, 367. vvv av robs dXXovs ewieiaouai (persequar), 
ft v ks Kixeicc. So in particular, irdvres, '6sris or bs dv (never irdvres o'inves, but 
always irdvres offoi or osris), e. g. Th. 7, 29. irdvras e£rjs, orco evrvxoiev, Kal 
iraldas Kal yvvawas Kreivovres. PI. Pp. 566, d. do-ird^erzi irdvras, & av 
irepirvyxdvy. 

Rem. 2. The relative is put in the Neut. without reference to the gender 
of its substantive, when the idea contained in the substantive is not to be con- 
sidered as a particular one, but as general (§ 241, 2), or when the relative is not 
so much to be referred to the substantive alone, as to the whole sentence. S. 
O. T. 542. dp' ovxl yoopov icrri rovyxeiprjixd crov, dvsv re irX^ovs Kal <piX<av rv 
q aw id a &r)pav, b xP'h^o'iv & aXiaKerai. 

46" 



530 syntax. [$ 332 

(b) Connection of the Dual with the Plural ($ 241, 5). 

Tcb xetpe, a? 6 $eos Zrn to avXka^avuv aXkrjXmv i7rotr]a£v } X 
C. 2. 3, 18. 

(c) When a predicative substantive, in the adjective -clause, 
is in the Nom. ($ 240, 2) or in the Ace. (■§ 280, 4), the relative, 
instead of agreeing in Gender and Number with its substan- 
tive, by a kind of attraction often takes the Gender and Num- 
ber of the predicative substantive, which is considered the more 
important. 

Her. 2, 7. rj Sobs npbs tjSj rpiiretcu, rb (= b) tcaAeercu U-nAovaiop 
ar6{xa. 5, 108. T7\v &Kp7)is, o'l koAzvvtcu iXrj'tdes rrjs Kinrpov. 7, 54. 
lie pa iicbv £lcpos, rbv (=t>v) an ivaKTjv KtAeovffi. PI. Phaedr. 255, c. 77 
rod 5ev/j.aTos ifcs'ivov 7777777, b v 'i/xepov Zeus TavvfxrjSovs ipuv coi/6<j.a<Te. Phileb. 
40, a. \6yoi elaiv eV endarois TjfMcoy, cis iATridas bvoixd^ofjiev. 

Rem. 3. So also, when the relative does not follow its own substantive im- 
mediately, but a predicative substantive, it sometimes agrees by means of at- 
traction with the latter, as being the more important, instead of agreeing with 
the former. PI. Xi. 937, d. na\ o'lkt) eV avfrpwirois ttcos ob Ka\6u,b Trdvra Tj/te- 
pwK e ra av&p&iriva ; Gorg. 460, e. ouq4ttot Uv ezVj 77 p 77 t p t k 77 doiKov tt pay- 
fia, 07' del TTepl oiKaiocruvT\s robs \6yovs iroKurai. 

6. When the relative would be in the Ace, and refers to a 
substantive in the Gen. or Dat, then, when the adjective-clause 
has almost entirely the force of an attributive adjective, the 
relative commonly assumes the form of its substantive, i. e. the 
relative takes the same Case as its substantive. This con- 
struction is called attraction. Attraction also takes place, when 
instead of the substantive, a substantive demonstrative ($ 331, 
Rem.), is used. The demonstrative, however, is omitted, when 
it contains no special emphasis. By means of attraction, the 
substantive is frequently transposed and stands in the adjective- 
clause. See No. 8. 

Th. 7,21. aycau airb r 5>v iroXecav a>v e7reiO"e (= rwv 7reicrfrei(rwu) arparidv. 
X. Cy. 3. 1, 33. crbv r o7s frrj Gavpots ol s 6 irar^p Kar4\iirev (= ro?s inrb rod 
irarpbs KaraX^KpSreio'iv). 2. 4, 17. oirore ob irpoe\rjAv&oir)S o~bv fj k'xois v v d fx e 1. 
3. 1, 34. iyeb viriaxvovfj.ai, ? l)u 6 frebs e5 8j8<£, aufr' S> v av i/xol daueio-ps &AAa ttAcio- 
vos a^ia ebepyer-fjcreiu (instead of avrl rovrwv^'d). PI. Goi'g. 519, a. orav ra ao- 
X<x?a irposairoWvuiai irpbs oTs eKrricravro (instead of irpbs rovrois, a). Phaed. 70, 
R. ( 77 x//v%77 ) aTT7]AAay/J.evr) rovrcov r&v KaKcov u>v o~v vvv 877 8177 A&e?. Isocr. 
Paneg. 46, 29. 5>v eXa/Bev airaaiu pLzreSwKtv (instead of rovrwv a). Evag. 198. 
roiovr 01s e freer iv o'iois Evayopas fj.ev zlX (iV ' Th. 5,87. ix ru>v irapSvroov 
koI u> v dpare (instead of Kal e'/c rovrwv, a Spare). The preposition is frequently 



$ 332.] ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE IRONOUN. 53} 

repeated, e. g. Dem. Chers. 96, 26. aft tov aye'ipei Kal irposatTci Kal Scwet^ieTai, 
awb tovtwv dLayei (instead of airb tovtwv didysi tov ayeipei or aft cat 
ayeipei — didyei without airb Tovrcau). 

Rem. 4. By attraction, the adjective-clause acquires entirely the nature of 
an adjective or participle, which combines with its substantive to form a single 
idea, and which also agrees with it in form, e. g. x^P^ ru?s iiv tar oAals 
aTs eypatyas (= x a 'P w T0 " s u7ro °" ^ ypacpeiffais iirHTToXals). The blending of 
the adjective-clause with its substantive by attraction, is still more clear and 
beautiful, when the adjective-clause is transposed and stands in the place of the 
substantive, e. g. %aioa> ats eypatyas i ir ktt oAcus. 

Rem. 5. When predicative substances or adjectives belong to an attract- 
ed relative, these also must be attracted. Dem. Cor. 325, 298. i/xh ovre icaipbs 
irposriydyeTO w v eKpiva 8 (Kal ay Kal ffv /x(p e po vt to v rfj irarpidi ovdkv irpodou- 
vai (instead of a ittpiva 8'iKaia Ka\ cru/xcpepovTa). Ph.2. 70, 17. ols ov<riv vfxer- 
epois (QiAnriros), tovtovs a.cr<pa\tos KeKTrjTai. 

Rem. 6. The Nom. and Dat. of the relative very seldom suffer attraction. 
Th. 7, 67. iroAAal (j'Tjes) pacnai is rb fiAairTecr&ai aft tov rjfuv irapeffKevaVTai 
(instead of a-rrb tovtojv, a). X. Cy. 5. 4, 39. tfyeTo Se Kal roov kavrov tSov re 
ttkttcuv, ots TjSeTo, Kal §> v (for eKeivtov, ols) r)iri(TTei ttoAAovs (i. e. secum duxit 
multos suorum, et Jidorum, quibus delectabatur, et eorum, quibus diffidebat). 

Rem. 7. Adverbs of place, also, sometimes suffer attraction, the relative 
adverb taking the form of the demonstrative adverb, or, when instead of the 
demonstrative adverb a substantive precedes the form which expresses the 
direction denoted by the substantive. Th. 1, 89. 8ieKo/xi(ovTo ev&vs (sc. iurev- 
&ei>) ofrev (instead of ou, ubi) vire^&svTo 7raidas. S. Ph. 481. iixfiaAov [x oirt\ 
freAets 'dytov, is avrAiav, is irp&pav, is ir pv jj.vt)v oxot (instead of ou, 
ubi) i)KiGTa /xeAAoo tovs irap6vTas aAywelv. 

7 . The relatives o To s, o o- o s, osnsouv, rjXtKos, are attracted 
not only in the Ace. bnt also in the Nom., when the verb etvcu 
and a subject formally expressed are in the relative clause, 
e. g. 0105 crv et, otos €Keti/o? or 6 %oiKparrj^ k<TTi {such as you are, such 
as he or Socrates is). This attraction is made in the following 
manner. The demonstrative in the Gen., Dat., or Ace, to which 
the relation refers, is omitted, but the relative is put in the Case 
of the preceding substantive or (omitted) substantive demon- 
strative, and the verb etvai of the adjective-clause is also omit- 
ted, and the subject of the relative clause is put in the Case 
of the relative. Such a blended or attracted adjective-clause 
has, in all respects, the force of an inflected adjective; the 
connection of the adjective-clause with its substantive is still 
more complete and intimate, when the substantive is placed in 
the adjective-clause ; for example, in the full and natural form 
of the sentence ^api^o/Aat avSpl tclovtio, oTos o-v et, by omitting the 
demonstrative tolovtw, to which the relative otos refers, by at- 
tracting otos into the Case of the preceding substantive avSpi, 



532 



SYNTAX. [$ 332. 



and by omitting el of the adjective-clause and attracting the 
subject av into the Case of the relative, we have the common 
form xapL^o/j-at. avSpl oito croc, or, by transposition, ^apt^o/xat oca) crot 
avSpL In English the above relatives may be translated by as 
or such as. 



Dat. 
Ace. 
Gen. 
Dat. 

Ace. 



epw o\ov cr ov avopos 
XapiCo/Liai o'lco crol avd pi 
iiraivS) oTov ere 'dvh pa 
ep<£ o'lcav v fxwv dvo pwv 
XapiCo^ai o'iois vp.7v dvopder iv 
iiraivu o'iovs vfjas avopas 



epco IOV cr ov 
Xapi^o/xai o'lca o~oi 
iiraivw oJov cr e 
ep<£ o'ioiv vfj.au 
Xo.piCofJ.ai o'iois vfj.7 
iiraivw o'lov s v fxds. 



Th. 7, 21. irpos avdpas roXfj-qpovs o'iovs Kal ^A&rjv aiov s (instead of oToi 
'A&7)i>a7oi elcriv). Lucian. Toxar. c. 11. ov cpavXov rb ipyov, dvSpl o'la> vol ttoX- 
f/xio-rrj fj.ovofiaxvo'cu- PL Soph. 237, C o'la ye efiol TravTairacriv diropov 
(sc. ecrri, instead of t<3 toiovtw, oTos ye eyu> elfii, diropov ecrriv). Her. 1, 160. 
hrl fj.io-&$ oau) Stj (mercede, quantulacunque est). PL Rp. 335, b. ecrriv dpa Sucaiou 
dvfipbs fixdirreiv Kal ovt iv ov v dv&pdnrwv (instead of av&pwirwv Kal ostisovp 
£<ttiv). X. An. 6. 5, 8. ecrr-qcrav 'direxovres ocrov TrevreKaioeKa crraSiovs 
(instead of roaovro, oo~ov elal ir. crrdSiot). 

Rem. 8. Attraction also takes place, when oTos or olos re, is used in- 
stead of wsre, and is constructed with the Inf., signifying, 1 am of such a net' 
ture, character, that (is sum qui with the Subj.), hence / can, am accustomed, am 
ready (§ 341, Rem. 2). Dem. 01. 1. 23, 19. (irepl avrbv $'iXnnros exet) toiov- 
tovs avSp&TT ovs o'iovs fiedrvcr& evr as 6 px*7 cr&a i. Luc. Hermot. c. 76. 
2twi/c^ t olovt q> o'lea fxvje Xvire7crSrai fxi\T bpyiCtcrSai. The demon- 
strative is commonly omitted. X. C. 1. 4, 12. fx6vr,v ttjv twv dvSrpwirwv 
(yXwTTav) eiro'n]crav [ol &eol) o'lav ap&povv re ttjv cpwvr]v, k. t.X. 

Rem. 9. When the adjective-clause has the signification of a substantive 
(§ 331, Rem. 4), the article is sometimes placed before the attracted oTos, 
tjX'ikos, and in this way, the adjective substantive-clause acquires entirely 
the force of an inflected substantive, e. g. 



Xom. 


1 o olos av dvrjp 


ol oioi vfiels dvdpes 


Gen. 


i rod o'lov crov avSpds 


TOiV o'lwV VfxS)V CLvfipOOV 


Dat. 


I t<5 o'lu> o~ol avdpi 


rols o'iois v/x7v avdpdcriv 


Ace. 


1 rbv oTov ere dvSpa 


robs o'iovs vfxas dvdpas. 



X. Cy. 6. 2. 2. ol oToi irep v/j.e7s dvo pes iroXXaKis Kal to. fiovXevofxeva Kara.' 
uavSdvovaiv (men like you). H. 2. 3, 25. yvovres rols o'iois o)fx7v re Kal 
vfj.7v x a ^ €W h 1/ iroXireiav elvat or)fxoKpaTiav (such men as we and you). Ax. 
Eccl. 465. eKeivo deivbv to7civ tjX'ikoio- i vSv (instead of ttjXikovtois^ tjX'ucoi 
ycf ia/xey). 

Rem. 10. A similar kind of attraction occurs also in such modes of ex- 
pression as Savfj.ao'Tbv ocrov Trpovy^p7\cre = Savfiao-rov ecmv oaov irpovx^' 
prjae (mirum quantum processit, instead of minim est, quantum processerit). 
Even in PI. Rp. 351, d. /xera idpwros & avfiacr ov oaov (instead of &avfj.ao-r6v 
i&riu iAe& ocrov). Hipp. M. 282, c. xPW ara eAa/3e bavfiao-Ta o or a (instead 
of *javfxaG'r6v 4o~tlv, oaa). Her. 4, 194. ol 8e (sc. 7riS7)K0i) crept dcp&o vol o cr o i 
iv ro7s ovpecri yivovrai. Also in the adverbs hav fiacrr ws us, &av fxacricas 
us, etc., e. g. Sravfxacrico s a> s a&Xtos yeyove (instead of Sravfidai6v 4cttiv, d>s &&Xios 
yeyove). PL Phaed. 66, a. i-rrepepv a> s ois aXrjSri Xeyeis. Symp. 173, C. 
inr € p <p v w j us xatpw, instead of virepepves icriv, ws yaipca. 



$ 332.] INVERTED ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE. 533 

Rem. 11. Sometimes an attraction takes place in the adjective-clause di- 
rectly the opposite of that mentioned under JSTo. 6, the substantive being 
attracted into the Case of the relative which refers to it, instead of the 
relative into the Case of the substantive. This is called inverted attrac- 
tion (Attractio inversa). This attraction occurs most frequently, when the 
substantive of the principal clause attracted by the relative, would stanc 
in the Nom. or Ace. S. Tr. 283. rdsS' (instead of aid') dsirep elsopas, H 
oAftioov aQr}Aov evpovo-ai fiiov, ^kovgi irpbs <re. Lysias pro bon. Arist. 649. t^/i 
ovaiav (instead of r) ovaia) %v KareAiire tw vie7, ov irAeiovos a£ia iariv. X. H 
1.4, 2. eAeyov, on AaKsdai/u.6vioi irdvrwv wv Seovrai ireir pay 6res elev irapa fia,- 
aiAecos. Sometimes the demonstrative pronoun is found in the principal 
clause, to supply the Case of the substantive which is attracted into the Case 
and into the clause of the relative. PL Men. 96, c. wp-oAoyfiKapiev, irpdy/xa- 
t os ov fi-qre SidaffKaAoi, {lyre fxa&v.ral ehv, rovro SidaKrbv fxrj elvai. 

Rem. 12. This inverted attraction is very common with ovdels osns 
ov after an omitted iffrlv. PI. Prot. 317, c. ovSevbs '6rov ov Tvdvrav av 
v\x.S)V ko& fjAiKiav Trarrip eXrjv {there is no one of you all whose father I might not be, 
considering my age). Phaed. 117, d. KAaicov Kal ayavaKrav ovSeva ovriva ov 
KareKAavae ruv irapovroov. Dem. Cor. 295, 200. irepl wv ovSeva Klvdvv ov 
ovnv ov% virefxavav oi irpoyovoi. In this way the phrase ovSel s osns ov 
appears as a pronominal substantive (nemo non), which can be declined through 
all the Cases, e. sr. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



oi/dels osris ovk av ravra iroi-fjO'eiev 

ovS evbs orov ov KareyeAaaev 

oud evl OTca ovk aireKpivaro 

oiideva ovriva ov KareKAavaev. 



Rem. 13. The inverted attraction is also found sometimes with adverbs of 
place, the demonstrative adverb taking the form of the relative. S. O. C. 
1227. firjvcu /cetd-ej/ o&ev rrep V et (instead of Ke?ae, o&ev). PI. Crit. 45, b. 
iroAAaxov ydp Kal aAAotre owoi av acpiKr}, ayairrjaovo-i <xe (instead of aAAaxov 
Siroi). 

8. The adjective -clause very frequently stands before the 
principal clause ; then, when the relative refers to a substan- 
tive, the substantive is transferred from the principal to the 
adjective-clause (though it is not generally placed immediately 
after the relative), and is governed by the verb in the adjective- 
clause. This change of the substantive into the adjective- 
clause is called transposition. When the attributive relation 
expressed by the adjective-clanse, is to be made emphatic, a 
demonstrative, referring back to the substantive which is joined 
with the relative, is supplied in the principal clause ; this 
demonstrative, however, is often used for perspicuity also. 
The substantive can also be transposed, when the demonstra- 
tive stands before the adjective-clause. 

d O s 7)p.as iroAAa aya&a iiroiiqaev, ovr os aire&avev, OV o s rj/xas iroAAa, aya&k 
eTToirjo-ev, aire&avev, or o tiros air&avev, os f]p.cis KrA., or aire&avev, bs KrA. — 
"Ov fISes 'dvSpa, ovr 6s iariv, or ovr 6s iariv, bv eTSes &vSpa. PI. Lys. 
222, d. iraAiv &pa, ovs rb irpwrov A6yovs a7rej3aA.(fytei\h* irepl (piAias, els rov- 

45* 



534 SYNTAX. [$ 333 

rovs elsTreTrT(iKaiJ.ev. Eur. Or. 63, sq, rjv yap /car oIkovs zXi<p\ '6r' es Tpolat 

hrXzi, Trdp&eu ov . . ravrt] yeyrj&e. 

Rem. 14. When attributive adjectives belong to the substantive, they are 
frequently separated from their substantive in the principal clause, and intro- 
duced into the adjective-clause, when they serve at the same time to explain 
more fully the adjective-clause or are to be made emphatic. Or the substantive 
together Avith the attributives is introduced into the adjective-clause. Some- 
times also the attributive adjective remains, while the substantive with which 
it agrees, is transferred to the adjective-clause ; then the attributive is emphat- 
ic. Eur. Or. 842. t?6tvC 'HAe/crpa, \6yovs &kov<tov, ovs croi Susru^eTs %Kca 
(pepwv (hear the words which I bring to you as sad, i. e. the sad words, etc.). Th. 6, 
30. to7s ottXois Kal oo"r\ &XX7] irapaffKevri ^vveiircro, irporepov elprjTO ktX. 
(instead of Kal rrj &XXrj TrapaaKevrj, oar]). Eur. H. F. 1164. ^kw £i/i> aXXois, 
o'l Trap' 'Aactiirov poas fA-evovaiv %voirXoi yr)s 'AShjvalwy Kopoi. Ar. Ran. 889. 
erepoi yap elo~iv, olaiv evx^fJ-ai freoTs; 

Rem. 15. A word in apposition with the substantive to which the relative 
clause refers, is sometimes attracted into the subordinate clause, and depends 
upon that clause for its government. In this case also, the transposed apposi- 
tive serves to explain more fully the adjective-clause. Od. a, 69. KvkXwttos 
Ace^AwTcu, o v bcp^raXjxov a.Xawo'ev avri&eov TloXixpT) pc v (whom Ulysses 
blinded, although he was the god-like Polyphemus). PL Hipp. Maj. 281, c. ti ttotg 
to oXtiov, on ol iraXaiol e/cetVot, &v ovoixara [xeyaXa Xeyerai iitl o~o(pia, 
HirraK ov Kal Biavr o s, (paivovrai cnrexofxej/oi tuv itoXitikuv irpa^wv ; 

9. When the adjective -clause has another clause subordinate 
to itself (or a participle used instead of such clause), the two 
are commonly united, the relative, instead of taking the con- 
struction of its own adjective-clause, taking that of the subor- 
dinate clause, i. e. the relative has the construction which the 
omitted demonstrative of the subordinate clause would have 
had; in such cases there is no relative connected with the ad- 
jective-clause. 

Isocr. de Pace p. 16, 168. avfrpwirovs af'povfXe&a rovs /u.ev airSXiSas, robs 8' avro- 
p,6Xovs, ols 6ir6rav ris irXziov a fAia&bv Si§<p, fxer' eKeivccv icp" rjfias 
aKoXov&r)(rovo~iv (instead of o'l, oiv6Tav tis avTols 8i8<f, a.KoXov&i)o~ovo~iv). 
PI. Rp. 466, a. on tovs (pvXaKas ovk ebSaifJiovas iroio7p.ev, oTs £l*bv iravra 
exeij/ tci twv ttoXit S>v, ovdev ex°' ej/ i (instead of o'l, ££bv avroTs — , obSev 
%Xoiev). Dem. Phil. 3, 128, 68. iroXXa av etVe?»/ e%oiej/ ""OXvv&ioi vvv, a t6t el 
irpoeidovT o, ovk av airwXovTO (instead of o'l, el ravra r6re irpoeiS., ovk av air.). 



S 333. Modes in Adjective- Clauses. 

1. The Indicative is used, when the attributive relation ex- 
pressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as actual 
or real, e. g. f] 7roAis, r) KtiZjetai, rj cktict^t;, rj KTicr^o-erai. The Flit. 
Tnd. is very frequently used (even after an historical tense, 



$333.] MODES IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES 535 

§ 327, Rem. 2), to denote what should be done or the purpose 
(§ 255, 3), e. g. orpavqyovs alpovvTCU, ol toZ <I?iAt7r7ra) 7roAe//.7;croi>- 
o-tv (^ey choose generals who should carry on ivar, or to carry on 
war). Also after negatives, the Greek employs the Incl., where 
the Latin has the Subj., e. g. irap i/xol ovSeis, osn? jxrj Ikclvos 
ia-Tiv tcra iroiziv ifioc {nemo, qui non possii). 

2. The Incl. is also used, as in Latin, in such adjective- 
clauses, as are introduced by the indefinite or generalizing rela- 
tives, e. g. ostls, quisquis, octtls 8rj, quicunque, Sons $rf 7rore, oo-os 
8r}, ooos ovv, quantuscunque, ottoo-os, birooosovv, etc. 

Her. 6, 12. SovXTji'-qv virofxelvai, t\tis % a r a t, qualiscunque erit. X. An. 6. 5, 
6. eSraiTTOv, 6tt6govs cir eXafifi avev rj arparid. Here the idea of indefinite- 
ness is denoted by the relative ; but it is otherwise, when this idea is contained 
in the predicate, see No. 3, and 4. 

Remark 1. The Fut. In d. with k4 (only Epic) is used, when it is to be 
denoted, that something will take place in the future under some condition 
[§ 260, 2. (1)]. II. i, 155. 4v 5' dvZpes vaiovcn iroXvpprjves, iroXvfiovTai o'i it 4 i 
hwTivriai &ebv &s r ifi-fjo- ov cr iv (who will honor him, if he shall come to 
them). 

3. The relative with av, e. g. os av, rj av, o av, osrts av, etc., is 
followed by the Subj., when the verb of the principal clause is 
a principal tense (Pres., Perf, or Fut), if the attributive rela- 
tion expressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as 
one merely conceived or assumed. Hence it is also used in in- 
definite specifications of quality or size, and also to denote 
indefinite frequency (as often as, § 227 b , 2). The adjective- 
clause can commonly be considered as a conditional clause, i. e. 
as one which expresses the condition under which the action 
of the principal clause will take place ; and the relative with 
av can be resolved into the conjunction idv "with rh or any other 
pronoun followed by the Subj. 

X. Cy. 3.1,20. ov s av ( = idv rivas ) fieXrtovs rivhs eavrobv r)yr\a~ tavr ai, tovtois 
ttoAAcLkis Kai 'dvev avdy kt]s i&4Xovoi Tret&ecr&ai. 1.1,2. 'dv&punvoi iir oi>B4vas /aaXXov 
ffwiaravrai, -/} iirl tovtovs, ov s av (= idv rivas) a'l a & oovt a i apx^w avrccv iiriX' 
eipovvras. 7. 5, 85. ov s av o pw to KaXa, Ka\ raya&a iiriTrfdevovras, tovtovs Tt/nij- 
crco, 8. 8, 5. d/xo7oi rives yap av oi irpoo'TdTai Set, roiovroi Kal ol vir avTovs 
ws e7ri to ttoXv yiyvovrai. Her. 6, 139. rj Tlv&ln o~cp4as (iteXevei) 'A^vaioicri dlitas 
SidovaL ravras, ras (= as) av avrol 'A&7]va?oi 8 lit a o~ co ct (QUASCCJNQUE — 
constituerint) . II. /3, 391. tv Se k iyebv andvev^e fiaxys i&4XovTa vorjo'ta 
HifjLvdfciv irapb. vnvo-\ Kopcavtcriv, ov ol eTretra dpKiov eVcetTat <pvy4eiv Kvvas i]& 
emvovs (as often as / peraive or shall perceive). 



536 syntax. [$ 333. 

Rem. 2. The Subj. is also used, when the adjective-clause forms a membe* 
of a comparison, viz. when the attributive idea expressed by the adjective-clause 
is the condition or assumption, under which the object to which the adjective- 
clause refers, belongs to the comparison. In this case, the principal clause 
may have either a principal or historical tense. II. v, 179. 6 S ! aZr eTrecrev, 
|UeAi?? ws, rj t' opeos Kopvcpy . . %aA/c<£ Tajj.vojj.ej/7i repeva x^ 01 ^ $uAAa it eAaa ay. 
p, 110. o>st€ Ats 7]vy4j/eios, ov pa Kvves re teal dvopes diro araxruolo Siccvrai. 

Rem. 3. The modal adverb a v is so closely united with the relative, as to 
form with it one word, as in orav, iirdv, etc., § 260, 2. (3) (d), and hence should 
be separated from the relative only by smaller words, such as Se. This dv is 
very frequently omitted in the Homeric language, often also in the Tragedians, 
and sometimes in Herodotus, seldom in the Attic prose-writers. 

4. The relative (without av) is connected with, the Opt., in 
the first place, with the same sign incation as when followed 
by the av and the Snbj. (No. 3), but referring to an historica,, 
tense in the principal clause. Hence it is used in general and 
indefinite statements; also in expressing indefinite frequency 
($ 227 b , 2), — in which case the verb of the principal clause is 
usually in the Imp/, or in the Iterative Aor. Here, also, the 
adjective-clause may be resolved by a with the Opt. 

Th. 7, 29. irdvras k^r)s 0T(p (=eiti«) lvrvx oiev i koI 7rcu3as Kal yvvalnas 
Kreiuovres. II. /3, 1 88. o v r i v a ( = e'L riva) [x\v fiaaiAija Kal 'i^oxov dvlpa Kix^it] 
rov 5' dyavols iweeaaiv e pi\r v a acr k e irapaards. 198. %v 8' av Sr)/j.ov r avdpa 
Jf Sot, poowvrd r icpevpoi, rbv aKrjirrpca eAacr aa k e. Th. 2, 67. irdvras yaf 
5/? Kar apx^s rod iro\efj.ov ol AaKedaipovioi, taovs (== ei rivas) AajSotep £p 
rfj ^aXaaarj, wj iroXe,uiovs diety&eipov. X. Cv. 3. 3, 67. Ixerevovai (Hist. 
Pres.), orca ivrvyx^vo lev, P% e ^7 etz/ - 

5. In the seco?id place, the Opt. (ivithout av) is used without 
reference to the tense of the principal clause, when the attrib- 
utive relation expressed by the adjective-clause is to be repre- 
sented as a mere supposition, conjecture, or assumption. Then, 
the adjective-clause is to be considered as an uncertain, doubt- 
ful condition \h 259, 3, (a)]. 

X. Cv. 1. 6, 19. rov fkv abrbv Aeyeiv, a /jlt) aatycos eldeir], (peiSea&ai Set (he 
must beware of saying anything, which he does not know, or if he does not know it). 
For examples of Optatives used by means of an attraction of the mode, see 
§ 327b, 1. Ar. Yesp. 1431. epSo t ris, t)v eKaaros etSet77 rix^nv (any one can 
practise the art with which he is acquainted (= if he is acquainted with it). 

6. The Opt. ivith av is used, when the attributive relation ex- 
pressed by the adjective-clause is to be represented as a condi- 
tioned supposition, conjecture, assumption, or undetermined possi- 
bility [$ 260. 2, (4) (a)]. 



? 334.] ADJECTIVE AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 537 

X. C. 1. 2, 6. 2<BKp«T7]s tovs ha/x^dvovTas ttjs bpuXias p.io-&bv audpairodia-Tas eavrwf 
a7re/caAet, Sid to dvayncuov avrols elvai dia\eye<T^ai, irap' av av Aafioiev to* 
p.iab6v {from whom they might or could receive a reward). PL Phaed. 89, d. ovx 
ecrriv '6 n &v tis p.e?(ov tovtov Kcucbv irdfroi (there is no evil which any one could 
experience greater than this). 

7. The Iiid. of the historical tenses is used with sLv, when it 
is to be indicated that the attributive idea denoted by the ad- 
jective-clause could exist only under a certain condition, but 
did not exist, because the condition was not fulfilled [$ 260. 2, 
(2), («)]• 

Od. e, 39, sq. ■n^AA' ocr' dv ovSeWre Tpoiqs i^-qpar 'OSucrcreuy, etirep airr\- 
\.iwv ^Afre, Xax&v cbrb Xrj'tdos alaau. Eur. Med. 1339. ovk ta-riv 7jTty tout' 
dv 'EAAyvls yvvr\ eTA7j (quae sustinuisset hoc). PI. Apol. 38, d. ols dv (\6yois) 
%Treura, el Sfirjv 8e?v diraura iroieTv k<x\ \4yeiv. On the Ind. of the historica] 
tenses in intermediate clauses of a conditional proposition, see § 327^, 1. (a). 

Rem. 2. On the Inf. in adjective-clauses, in the oratio obliqua, see § 345, 6. 



$ 334. Connection of several Adjective- Clauses. — Interchange oj 
the Subordinate Clause ivith the Adjective- Clause. — Relative 
instead of the Demonstrative. 

1. "When two or more adjective-clauses follow each other, which either have 
the same verb in common, or different verbs with the same government, the 
relative is commonly used but once, and thus the two adjective-clauses are 
united in one, e. g. dvnp, bs 7roAAa pXv ci/yaSxi robs (piAovs, iroWa 5e KaKa tovs 
iroXe/xtovs eirpa^ev — aurjp, os nap' rifjuv i\v /cat (os) virb irdvTcov e</>tAetTO — dvfip, 
bv edttUjUa^o/zei/ kolL (bv) iravres i<pl\ovv. But when the adjective-clauses have 
different verbs governing different cases, generally, the Greek either omits the 
relative in the second adjective-clause, or introduces, in the place of the rela- 
tive, a demonstrative pronoun (mostly avros), or a personal pronoun: in this 
way the relative clause is changed into a demonstrative one, and acquires the 
nature of a principal clause, (a) Od. t, 110. &/jnreAot, a'tre (pepovaiv oivov eptcr- 
rdcpvAov /cat (sc. as) ffcptv ( KvKXa>irzcro-i ) Aibs 6/xfipos ae|et. Isocr. Panath. rbv 
Xoyov, bv oXiyca fj.lv irpoTepov fiefr TjSovrjs dirjA&ov, fiiKpq} 5° varepoy ^ueAAe ue 
Avirrjo-eiv (and which was to grieve me). Lys. Dai'dan. 166. oTs v/xels xap'e"^ 
/cat (sc. ous) irpofrv/jLOTepovs 7ronjcreTe. Bern. Cor. 252, 82. clvtuv, ovs 7] flip 
ir6his ods ix&povs . . dirr)\ao'e, aol Si ijcav cpiAoi (sc. o'l). X. An. 3. 2, 5. 'Apicuos 
5e, bv 7]/J.e7s 7]^e\ofX€V /3acnAea /ca£ho"TaVaf /cat (sc. £)) iSa>Ka.fj.ev /cat (sc. irap' ov) 
eXa^Ofxev iriffrd . . , r)fj.d: robs Kvpov <pl\ovs /ca/ciSs iroieTv ireipaTat. — (b) PL Rp. 505. 
e. o Stj Si&Kei fxhv airaaa tyvxh xal tovtov evetca irdvTa irpdrTei. Dem. Phil. 3 
123, 47. Aa«e5atttoViOi, o$ 3-aAaTT7js fj.lv tpxov Ka ^ 7*? s airdaris, /SacrtAea 5e o-v/x/xa- 
Xov elxov, ixptaTaTo S 1 ovShv clvt ovs (instead of ovs ovdev v<piffTa.To, quibus nihil non 
cessit). X. Cy. 3. 1, 38. -rrov eKe?v6s £o~tiv 6 dvr\p, bs o~vv&r)pa ij/xiv /cat av p.oi 
ud\a e'SJ/cets Sav/j,d£eiv ccvtov. 

2. The adjective-clause frequently takes the place of other subordinate 
clauses, e. g. ©aujuacrToi/ Trotets, b s 7][x?v p.\v ovhlv diSus (in THAT or BECAtrSB 
you give us nothing), X. C. 2. 7, 13. The adjective-clause is very frequently used 






538 syntax. [$$ 335, 335 

instead of a hypothetical adverbial clause (corap. § 333, 3) ; so also instead of 
an adverbial clause introduced by wsre; the last case occurs : — 

(a) after ovtcos or <S8e. Dem. Chers. 100, 44. ou yap ovtco y ei"f)&r)s icrrlv 
v^xwu ovdeis, bs viro\ajj.fiavei [neither is there any one of you so simple, AS to 
suppose). X. Cy. 6. 1, 14. tls ovtcos iffX^pSs, bs Xi/xca Kal piyei. SvvaiT av 
ixax^^vos (rTparevecr&ui ; 

(b) after to iovto s, ttjXlkovtos, tovovtos. In most instances, these 
demonstratives are followed by the corresponding relatives oTos, oaos, 
which, like the adverbial clause introduced by &sre, usually have an Inf 
depending upon them. X. An. 4. 8, 12. ctAAa fioi 5o/cet r ogovtov x a p' L ' 
w Karacrx^ (sc. rjiuas), oaov e|w robs £o~x < * TOVS ^X ovs yev so~§ai tw? 
Tro\e/j.ici)v Keparcov (it seems to me best that we should occupy so much qround, 
as that, etc.). PL Apol. iy&) Tvyxdvca &v to lovr o s, olos birb rod &eov 
t{) 7ro'Aet SeSocr&ai. 

3. The relative pronoun serves not only to connect subordinate clauses with 
the principal one, but it is also used to connect clauses generally, inasmuch as 
it takes the place of a demonstrative which would refer to a word of the pre- 
ceding clause. This mode of connecting sentences belongs to the Latin as 
well as to the Greek, though it occurs very rarely in the latter compared with 
the former. Thus in Greek, e. g. it is altogether common for clauses to begin 
with ravra Se eliroures, ravra Se aKOvaavres, /j.era Se ravra, e'/c rovrov Se, ws dk 
-ravra iyevero, etc., where the Latin generally uses the relative qui. 



§ 335. III. Adverbial Clauses. 

Adverbial clauses are adverbs, or participles used adverbially 
($ 326, 3), expanded into a sentence, and, like adverbs, express 
an adverbial object, i. e. an object which does not complete the 
idea of the predicate, but merely defines it, e. g. ore to cap rj\$e, 
(to re) ra avSrj £aAAa. 'Os eAe^as, (ovt<os) eVpa^a?. 

§ 336. A. Adverbial Clauses of Place. 

Adverbial clauses denoting place, are introduced by the 
relative adverbs of place, ov, fj, owy, ottov, h$a (ubi) ; oSev, cV#ev 
(unde) ; 61, oiroi, rj, otttj (quo), and, like adverbs of place, express 
the three local relations, where, ivhence, and ivhither. The use 
of the Modes in these clauses, is in all respects like that in 
adjective-clauses (§ 333). 

Her. 3, 39. '6kov l&vcreie ffrparevea-^ai, iravra oi e'xcfyee evrvx^s (indefi- 
nite frequency). Th. 2, 11. eVeo-fre (e/ce?o-e), oiroi &v ris 7]yr\rai. X. An. 
4. 2, 24. p.ax^voi Se ol iro\4fiioi /cat, '6 tr-r\ elr] (rrevbv X^p' 10 ^ TrpoKardkafifr&vow 
res iKc&Xvov ras irapoSovs (Opt. on account of 4kw\vov). Cy. 3. 3, 5. ifrftpa 
'6irovirep e -Kirvyx^vo i ec h-nplois (wherever). PI. Apol. 28, d. ov &v ris 
tatrbv Tct|j7, ivTav&a de? ixevovTa KivSweveut. 



§ 337.1 ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 539 



§ 337. B. Adverbial Clauses of Time, 

1. Adverbial clauses denoting time, are introduced by the 
conjunctions ore, oirore, cos, rjvtKa (when), eV co, ecos (while) ; e7re4 
€7reiS?7 (postquam), eVeiS?) rd^Lara (77-pcoTOv), or cos TayicrTa (as soon 
as), i£ ov, i£ otov, also i£ &v, ex quo, and dt/>' ov (since) ; irptv, irplv 
rj (jpriusquam) , ecos, ecos ov, eis o, esre, ^XP l or ^XP 1 °^> ^XP l ° T0V > 
fie^pt (^7/, until). 

2. On the use of the modes, the following points are to be 
observed : — 

3. The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be represented 
as a fact; hence in speaking of actual events e r facts. 

Her. 7, 7. &s aveyudocrSfr] aep^rjs o-rparevear^ai iirl tt]v 'EAAaSa, iv&avTa 
(TTpaTrj'irjy 7roteerat (when Xerxes was persuaded, etc.). 1, 11. &s v^pV rdx^ra 
4yey6vee (quum primum, as soon as). X. H. 1. 1, 3. 4p.axovTo, fxexpis oi 
'A&rjvcuoi a vetvXe vtrav. An. 1.3, 11. kol\ ecos fj. e v o /a e v avrov, crKeirreov fioi 
SoKei efocu, oircos cos dcrcpaXea-rara fieyov/xev. 

4. The conjunction ecos (till), is followed by the Ind. of the 
historical tenses, when an object is to be represented as unat- 
tained or not to be realized. Comp. § 327 b , 1, (a). 

PI. Gorg. 506, b. rjSecos av KaXXiKXei rovrw en Si e Xey 6\xy\ v, ecos avrcp 
aireocoKa ( us que dum reddidissem ) . 

5. The Subj. is used, when the statement is to be indicated 
as a conception or representation, and must be referred to the 
predicate of the principal clause, the verb of which is in one 
of the principal tenses. In the Common Language, the con- 
junctions take the modal adverb dv, e. g. orav, b-rrorav, tjvlk dv, 
hrdv (lir-qv), e7raSdv, iv co dv, irplv dv, ecos dv, p.ixP L dv, ksr dv [§ 260, 
2, (3), (d)]. 

6. Accordingly the Subj. is used with the above conjunctions 
from orav to irplv dv, when the statement of time is also to 
be represented, at the same time, as the condition under ivhich 
the predicate of the principal clause will take place. But with 
the conjunctions which signify until, the Subj. expresses a limit 
expected and aimed at. The Subj. is also very frequently used, 
to denote indefinite frequency (§ 333, 3). 

PI. Prot. 335, b. 4 ire iS av av j3 o u A r; diaXeyea&ai, cos eyco Zvva[xai eirea&ai 
r6re trot 8 1 a A e £ o /x a i (whenever you wish to, if at any time you wish to discourse. 



540 syntax [$ 337. 

etc.). Th. 1,21. ol dv&panroi, iv S> dv iroAe/xaxri, rbv irap6vra iroXenov ae\ 
[xeyiarov KpivovcTLV. X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. iroXiv ouirca eu pan as dvnrarrojji.evr]P 
npbs tt6Xlv erepav, '/jtls, e 7r e id dv rjrrri&rj, Trapaxpv^ Tavrn dvrl rov /xd- 
Xeo&cu TrsiSea&ai i&eXei. 3. 3, 26. oirorav (ol fidpfiapoi BaaiXe?s) arparo 
ireB eva vr ai, rdcppov tt ep i BaXXovr ai evrrerus diet, r\]v iroXvxzipiav (as often 
as). Dem. Ph. 3. 128, 69. ews av a d> £rjr ai rb cudcpos, rore xP'h Kc ^ Tavrr)i> 
Kal KvBepvr\rr\v irpoSrvp.ovs elvai (dum servari possit). 

Remark 1. The Subj. is also used in the Epic language, when the adver- 
bial clause forms a member of a comparison, since a case is then supposed 
(comp. § 333, Rem. 2). II. |, 16. as o° ore it o p cp v p rj neXayos . . &s 6 yepav 
ap/u.aive. o, 624. iv 8' eirea, us ore KV[xa &ofj iv vrjt it e a y a i v. 

Rem. 2. On the Subj. after an historical tense instead of the Opt., and on 
c 6rav, i-xdv, ir p\v dv, etc. with the Opt. in the oratio obliqua, see § 345, 
Rem. 4. 

Rem. 3. The mode of connection by ore, Snore, irpiv, etc. without dv with 
the Subj., occurs only in the Epic language frequently, sometimes also in 
Ionic prose, and not seldom in the Attic writers with fxexpi an ^ Tpiv. 

7. The Opt. is used with conjunctions of time, without av, just 
as the Subj. is, but referring to an historical tense of the princi- 
pal clause. When the Opt. is used to denote indefinite fre- 
quency {h 327 b , 2), an Impf. or an Iterative Aor. usually stands 
in the principal clause, and the conjunctions ore, i-n-ec, etc. (ex- 
cept those which signify before and until), are translated by as 
often as. 

II. k, 14. avrap or is v?jds re tSoi Kal Xabv 'Axcuav, iroXXas e/c necpaXr/s irpo 
beXv/xvovs eXKero x a ' lTas { as often as). Her. 6, 61. oicas (= ore) eveineie 
7] rpocpbs (rb ivaib~iov), irpSs re rayaX/xa 'Lara Kal ixiffffero rr]v &ebv diraX- 
Act|cu rris dvs/xopcpirjs rb iraiS'iov [as often as). X. An. 6. 1, 7. on or e ol"EXX7]ves 
ro7s iroXe/xiois iirioiev, padtcos iir etpevyov (as often as the Greeks made an at- 
tack, whenever they made an attack). Od. e, 385. S> pae 8' iirl Kpanrvbv Boperjv, irpb 8e 
KVfxar ea^ev, has oye QairiKeo-ffi (piXriper/xoici fxiyelr] (but opvvcri Bopevv Kal 
dyvvai KVfxara, eccs av . . IJ-iyy)- PI. Phaed. 59, d. irepiejxevofxev eKacrrore, ecus 
avo ix& e ' 7 7 T0 Bea^iariipiov. 

Rem. 4. On dv in the principal clause, see § 260, 2. (2), (B). 

8. Moreover, the Opt. without av is used with conjunctions 
of time, without reference to the time of the principal clause, 
when the statement of time is to be represented as an uncer- 
tain and doubtful condition, as a mere supposition, conjecture, or 
assumption; also, generally, when the subordinate clause forms 
a part of a principal clause expressing a wish. 

PI. Amat. 133, a. 6ir6re rb (piXocrotpelv alaxpbv rjynar al\xr\v etvai, ovd' ai' 
dvSpojTTov vofiio-ai/xi i/xavrbv elvai (when I shall assume, if I shall ever assume). X. 
Cy. 3. 1, 16. was av r6re irXeiarov d^ioi yiyvoivr ol dv&paivoi, oirSre dSiKOvv- 



6 337.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 541 

res aAlffh.dU'To (when they are, if they are, convicted of acting unjustly) ; — II. 
it, 465. at ydp jxlv fravdroio Svstjx^os &>8e Svvaifxriv voacpiv airoKptyai, ore fi.iv 
Hopos cuvbs Ik 6. vol. 

9. The conjunction irpiv (irpoTtpov r/), besides the construc- 
tions already mentioned, is also followed by the Inf. The dif 
ferent constructions of rrplv are to be distinguished as follows : 

(a) When a past event, one that has actually occurred, is spoken of, the IncL 
of an historical tense is used (No. 8). The principal clause is negative ; yet it 
is sometimes also affirmative, when irplv signifies until ; thus often in the Tra- 
gedians and Thucydides (in the latter irplv 5r) and irplv ye 5f)). 

(b) When a future, merely conceived action is spoken of, which can be con- 
sidered as the condition of the principal clause, the Subj. is used, when the sub- 
ordinate clause refers to a Pres. Perf. or Put. in the principal clause ; but the 
Opt., when the subordinate clause refers to an historical tense in the principal 
clause (No. 5 and 7) ; yet only when the principal clause is negative, Cfc contains 
a question implying a negative. 

(c) But when v/e action is to be represented only as a conception, a conceived 
limit, not as an independent occurrence, but only as a subordinate matter, and a 
casual or incidental designation of time, the Inf. is used (= irp6 with the Gen.). 
Hence the Inf. can stand both for the Ind. of an historical tense, and for the 
Subj. or Opt., both after an affirmative and a negative principal clause, when it 
does not serve to define more fully the subordinate clause. 

Isocr. de Big. 348, b. ov irporepov eiravaavro, ir plv t6v re irarepa e/c roi 
TrparoireSov /xereire fx\pavr o, leal roov <pl\wv avrou robs fjtev aireKreivav, 
robs ft" e/c rrjs ir6\ecas ej~e fiaAov. X. An. 6. 1, 27. ov irpoa&ev eiravaavro 
iroAefxovvres, irplv eir ol-na av iraaav ttjv ir6hiv 6/xoAoye7v AaKedaifxoviovs 
kcu avrwv riyejxSvas elvai. — Eur. Med. 279. ovk direijxi irpbs 86/jlovs iraAiv, 
irplv 'dv ae yalas repfj.6va}V e|&> fid\ca (= idv /j.7) irporepov o~e e'/cySaAco ) . 
X. An. 5. 7, 12. /XTj aireAfr-nre, irplv av aKovvnr e. II. <p, 580. 'Ayr)vcvp 
ovk e&eAev (pevyeiv, irplv ir e ipr\crair 'AxiArios (= el fxr] irp6repov ireipr)- 
crano). X. An. 7. 7, 57. ot eTrirr)b~eiot ev t<£ arparoiredcp (avrov) eSeovro fii) 
direh&e'iv, -irplv airay dyo i to arpdrev/xa Kal Qifipcovi irap ad o ir]. — Her. 6, 
119. AapeTos, irplv \.Cev alx^aAarovs y eveo'&at robs 'Eperpieas, eVel^e' crept 
Seivbv xoAoi'. 7, 2. ecrav Aapelcv, Kal ir p6r epov -/) fiaa lAevcr at, yeyovores 
rpels ira?8es. X. An. 1. 8, 19. irplv ro^evfxa i£iKve?a&ai, eKKAivovcriv ot 
fidpfBapoi Kal (pevyovm. 10, 19. irplv Kar aXva ai rb o~rpdrev;xa irpbs dpicrov, 
fliacriAees icpdvn. 4. 1,7. eirl rb aKpov avafialvei Xeiplaocpos, irplv rtva cucr- 
& e a" 3- a i toov iroXefxlcav. Cy. 7. 1, 4. irplv bpav robs iroAe/xiovs, els rpls 
aveiravae rb crrpdrevfxa. 2.2, 10. iri&avol ovrws elalrives, (Lsre irplv ei8evat rb 
irposraffo-Sjxevov, irporepov ire&ovrai. With attraction (§ 307. 4) : ib. 5. 2, 9. 
(iroXXol &v&pu)iroi) airohvr)cntovo'i irpSrepov, irplv SrjAot y ev ecr&ai, otoi f,crav. 

Rem. 5. The Homeric irdpos, when it is not used as a mere adverb, is al- 
ways constructed with the Inf. II. cr, 245. is 5' ayoprjv ayepovro, irdpos o6piroi* 
ILeSea&ai. 

46 



042 syntax. [§$ 338, 339. 

C. Causal Adverbial Clauses. 

$ 338. I. Adverbial Clauses denoting Ground, Cause. 

1. Such adverbial clauses as express the ground or cause in 
the form of temporal adverbial clauses by the temporal 
conjunctions ore, otto re, a>s, liret, quoniam, puisque, because, 
since, zTrethr), quoniam, and oirov, quandoquidem. In these adver- 
bial clauses, the Ind. is the prevailing Mode ; but the Opt. with 
av may be used according to § 260, 2, (4) (a), and also the Lid. 
of the historical tenses with av, according to § 260. 2, (2) (a). 

11.0, 95. /xr) /ue Krelv, eirel ou% S/j.oydcrrpios"EKrop6s e 1 fx i (quoniam sum). 
X. An. 3.2,2. xa\e7roi ra vrapovra, SirSre avSpobv arpar-qyuv roiovrcov erre- 
pSfte&a kcu Xox&y&v KaX arpariwrwu (since we are deprived of such generals, etc.). 
Dem. 01. 1, in. ore ro'ivvv rav& ovroos e^et, izposr]KeL Trpo&v/j.ws i&e\eii/ aKoieiv. 
X. C. 1. 4, 19. ~2,ui k parr] s ov \xovov robs avv6vras eSoKei iroie?v, Snore virb rwv 
av&pwiraiv Spqvro airex ea & aL ra/v avoaiav re kcCl adiKccv, aAAa Kal Snore eV eprj/xicf 
eiev, eireiirep i}yt]0'aiuro /xij^ev &u Trore av irpdrroieu &eovs 8ia\c&e?v. — PI. 
Prot. 335, d. Seofxcu ovu cod Trapa/xe?yai tj/jUV, w s iycb ou§' c\ v evbs ifiiov c\kov - 
ffaifxi $j Gov. — II. o, 228. viroei^ev xeTpas e/xds, e7ret ov nev auidpwrl y' ire\- 
eaht] (since, if he had not escaped, the thing would not have been accomplished with- 
out effort). 

Remark. 5 E it e i also introduces interrogative and imperative clauses, 
where we must then translate it by for. Por the explanation of this use. see 
§ 341, Pern. 4. 

2. Such adveibial clauses as express the ground or cause in 
the form of substantive clauses by the conjunctions on and 
Sioti (arising from Sua tovto, on) and the Poet, ovvzkol (arising 
from tovtov eveKa, o) or oSovvckol (instead of orov eVe/ca, o). 
The Ind is here, also, the prevailing mode, when the statement 
is not conditional. 

PI. Euthyphr. 9, e. apa rb oo'iov, fri oo~i6v eari, <pi\elrcu virb rcou &eui>, ¥/, on 
<pi\e?r a i, ogi6v eari ; 

$339. II. Conditional Adverbial Clauses. 

1. The second kind of adverbial clauses are the conditional 
clauses, which are introduced by the conjunctions et and lav 
(rjv, av, which must not be confounded with the modal adverb 
av). The principal clause expresses what is conditioned by the 
subordinate clause, or the consequence and effect of the sub- 



$ 339. J CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 543 

ordinate clause. As the conditioning clause precedes the con- 
ditioned, the cause, the effect, the subordinate clause is called 
the introductory clause or Protasis, and the principal clause, the 
conclusion or the Apodosis. 

2. The Greek has the following modes of expressing condi- 
tionality : — 

I. In the first place, the condition is expressed as a reality or 
fact, as something certain, and hence by the Indicative. Two 
cases are here to be distinguished : — 

(a) The Protasis has et with the Ind., and the Apodosis, 
likewise the Ind. Then both tie condition and conclusion 
are considered by the speaker as a reality or fact, and hence 
as certain, whether the thing be so objectively or not. The 
result is very frequently a necessary one. If the Apodosis 
contains a command, the Imp. is used, and when this command 
is negative, the Subj. also 259, 5). 

Ei tovto Aeyeis, afiapT dv e i s. — Et &eos eoTi, ffocpos 4 ffr iv. — X. Cy. 
1. 5, 13. ei ravra iy& \4yca irepl v/xuv &AAa yiyv&o'Kiau, i/j-avrbu 4 ^airar w 
(here something is spoken of, which in his heart the speaker wholly denies). — 
E X ti e%ety, 8 6 s. — Ei tovto Trewolrjicas, iiraii'elo'&cu &£ios e J. Her. 3, 62. S> 84a- 
iroTa, ovk eo~Ti tovto. d\r]&4a, okois (= on) kot4 Got ~%p.4p8is d8eA<pebs 6 crbs iTcaveff- 
T7]Ke ' iycb yap aitTos e&aipd jxlv X e p°~l Tyo~i 4p.eoo'vTov • e i jx4v vvv oi T&vewTes aveo"- 
r 4 a a i, irpos84ice6 toi ko.1 'AffTvdyea tov Mr)8ou £irava.o-TT)a-eoScu ■ e t $' %q~t i, 55s- 
irep irpoTov, ov fir) ti toi £k ye eKsiuov vewTepov dvafiXao-Trjaei. (here in the first con- 
ditional clause, something is spoken of, the opposite of which the speaker is per- 
suaded is true). — Et ti e?xe, nal 48i8ov. — Et tovto iireiro f/7/ce is, £n/xias 
d^ios r)o~&a. — Et 4/3p6vTr]o~€, koX \)ot patyev. Et tovto Ae'£eis, afiap- 
T-fiarj. X. Cy. 2. 1,8. 6? rt TrelaovTai MrjSoi, 4s Il4pcras to Seivbv ?j£ei. 7. 
1, 19. et (p&daofiev Tobs iroXefiiovs KaraKTav6vTes, ov8e\s r)fi£>v dirofrave'i- 
t ai. 

(b) The Protasis has et with the Lid. of the historical 
tenses, and the Apodosis, also, the Ind. of an historical tense 
with av; then the reality, both of the condition and con- 
clusion is to be denied. This form is used only of the past, 
or where there is a reference to the past; here it is affirmed 
that something could take place under a certain condition, 
but did not, because the condition was not fulfilled. The 
use of the tenses is the same as in simple sentences. 
See $ 256. 

Here the negation of the reality is not contained in the form of Expression 



544 syntax. [$ 339 

itself, for the Ind. of the historical tenses necessarily always denotes a past 
occurrence or fact ; the negation is merely an inferred one, that is to say, it con- 
sists in this, that a conclusion or inference is drawn from the past and applied 
to the present, and a reality in the past is opposed to what is not a reality in 
the present. The past reality expressed in the conditional clause stands in 
opposition to another present reality (either expressed or to be supplied from 
the context), which contains precisely the opposite of that past reality, e. g. 
if the enemy came, we were destroyed, i. e. if the enemy had come, we should have 
been destroyed, but now the enemy has not come ; from this contrast it 
is now inferred, that the assumed fact if the enemy came, did not take place. 

Ej tovto eAeyej, r) \xdpT av e s 'dv (si hoc dixisses, errares, if you said this 
you erred, or if you had said this, you would have erred ; but you have not said it 
consequently you have not erred). PI. Apol. 20, b, c. rts, r)v 5' eyco, kcu TroSa- 
tt6s ; Kal tt6(tov SiddaKei ] Evtjvos, e(p7], d> H,a>KpaTes, Ildpws, irevTe llvuv. Kal iyia 
tov "Evrjvov ey.aKapia'a, el ws aXrj^cos e% 61 TavTTjv t\\v Texvw Kal ovrws e/xfxeXccs 
Siddo~Kei' eyii) yovv Kal avTbs e KaXXvv 6 [xrjv ts Kal i) /3 pvv6 (xr)V dv, ei 
f)iricrTdfX7]V ravra' aXX' ov yap £iri(rTap.ai, & 'dvSpes 'A&rjvaToi (here also 
something past is spoken of, as is evident from i/xaKapLcra). 31, d. el iyd 
irdXai e7re^etp77(ra irpaTTeiv ra iroXiTiKa irpdyfj-ara, irdXai av an oXcbXrj Kai 
ovt av v/xas w<peXi)K7), ovr av ifiavrdv. Th. 1, 9. ovk av oZv vfjcrcov iKpdret 
('Ayaixe/xvcov), fi fxr) ti Kal vavriKov elx ei/ (^ e would not have ruled over the 
islands unless he had a fleet ; but he had a fleet, consequently he could also rule 
over the islands). PI. Gorg. 516, e. et -ficrav avfipes aya&ol, ovk dv iroTe ravra 
eiracxov (if they — Cimon, Tliemistocles, and Miltiades — had been good men, 
they would never have experienced this injustice). X. Cy. 1.2, 16. Tavra ovk av 
idvvavT o (ol TLepo'ai) iroie7v, el fir] Kal dialr-p fxeTpia, ixP &vt o. 3.3, 17. ei 
fxev [xeifav tis Kivdwos e/xeXXev r)fx?v elvai e/cet (sc. iv rfj iroXefxia), •/) iv&d5e (sc. 
iv Trj (piXia), faces to aatpaXeararov r) v av atpereov • vvv 5e faoi /xev eKeivoi (oi 
klvSvvoi) effovrai, ijv re iv&d5e virofxevco/xev, rjv re els ttjv eKelvcov (io!>v TcoXe/xlcov) 
lovres viravTeo/Aev avrois (here also a past action is spoken of: as long as Ave were 
unarmed, and therefore were in greater danger in a hostile than in a friendly 
country, it was necessary for us to remain here ; but now, since we are armed, 
the danger here and there will be equal). 8. 3, 44. aXr)&r), e<pr), Xeyeis- el ydp 
tol to exetv ovtcos, wsirep rb Xa/x/3dveiv, i]Sv r) v, iroXv av S tecp e p ov evdai/.iovia 
oi irXovo~ioi tQ>v irev7}Toov (in reference to the preceding conversation). An. 7. 6, 
9. r)/xe7s fxev, fi> AaKedai/xovioi, Kal ivaXai av ij /xev irap vfx?v, el jxr] aevorpuiv Sevpo 
rj/xas neia'as dirrjyayev. Lys. defens. Call. 102, 1. et p.ev 7repl 'aXXov Tivbs v) 
tov aco/xaTOS KaXXias i)yccvi£eTO, el-TjpKei 'dv [xoi Kal to. irapa twv aXXoov 
elptjueva' vvv de fxoi 5 o k e t alo~xpbv elvai fir] f3o7]&7)<rai KaXXia. to. ZiKaia. Purg. 
sacril. 109, 15. el jiev alo'xpbv r)v fiovov to irpayfia, faces av tis tuv TvapiovTcci 
7]/xe X 7] cr e' v»v de ov -rrepl alo~x v vV s i dXXa Trepl tt)s fxeyio'T'ns Cv^ 1 ^ eKivdvvevov. 

Remark 1- On the omission of 'dv in the Apodosis, see § 260, Rem. 3. Or, 
the Ind. of the Hist, tenses in the intermediate clause of such a proposition, 
4 827b, 1. (a). 



9 339.] CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 54-5 

II. The condition is expressed, in the second place, as a 
conception or representation. The Greek has two different firms 
to denote this relation : — 

(a) The Protasis has et with the Opt., and the Apodosis, the 
Opt. with av. (The Fnt. Opt. is here not used.) By this form, 
both the condition and the conclusion are represented as a 
present or future uncertainty, as an undetermined possibility, a 
mere conjecture, assumption, or supposition, without any refer- 
ence to the thing supposed being real or not real, possible or 
impossible. 

Ei ti exots, 8oif]s dv (si quid habes des, if you had anything, you would 
give it ; here it is neither assumed nor denied that you have anything, but is 
merely a supposition. Et tovto Xeyois, a/xaprdvo i s av (if you should say 
this, then you would err). — PI. Symp. 175, d. eu av ex 01 ! et toiovtov e%r} r) 
(TOipia, u>st etc rod irX-npecrTepov els tqv Kevunepov pelv r)/j.wv, edv airT&fxe&a aXXi)- 
Xcav • et yap ovtccs e%et Kal rj erocpia, iroXXov Tijxapiai t)\v irapa erol KaraKXieriv. 
Lysid. 206, c. et p.oi e&eXf)erais avrbv irofqerai els Xoyovs iX&e?v, tcroos av Sv- 
vai\xi\v eroi 67rt5e?£at, a xph olvtw diaXeyecr&ai. Menex. 236, a. Kal ri av 
exois elireiv, el deoi ere Xeyeiv; Hipp. Maj. 282, d. et yap eldetrjs oerov 
apyvpiov e'lpyaerp.ai, ^ravjxder ais a v. Ion. 537, e. et ere epolfxr)v, el (whether) 
rfj avTT) Tex v V yvyv&erKop.ev rfj dpL^/xrjTUcfj rd avra eya re /cat crv, r) dXXrj, (pair] s 
av dr)irov rfj avrfj. 5. 6, 9. Kal 6 Tlap&evios ct/3aros • iep' bv eX&oire av, el top 
"AXvv StaySatrjr e. 6.2,21. et KaraXnrSvTes to, erKevt] ev t£ epv/xvca x^P'V 
ws els fxdxw TrxpeericevacrfAevoi foifiev, "eras av ra lepa /jlccXXov irpox^poir] 
rjfuv. (Of the assumption of something past, in Herodotus [§ 260, (4) (a)] 7, 
214. eldeir) &v ical ewv pr] MrjXievs ravTTjv ttjv arpairbv 'Ovf)TT)s, el rfj X&PV 
iroXXa w fit X ri koj s e'ir„ Onetes might have known this way , if he had been very 
familiar with the country). 

(b) The Protasis has lav (jjv, av) with the Subj., and the 
Apodosis also, the Ind. of a principal tense, commonly the Fu- 
ture (also the Imperative). By this form, the condition is rep- 
resented as a conception or supposition, the accomplishment of 
which, however, is expected by the speaker, and is regarded as 
possible. The conclusion resulting from the subordinate clause, 
is represented as certah) (necessary). 

Rem. 2. As the Greek Subj. always refers to the future, edv with the Subj 
almost wholly corresponds to e I with the Eut. Ind. ; the only distinction is, 
that by e I Avith the Fut. Ind., the form of the condition implies that the action 
will actually take place in future : but by edv with the Subj., the form of the 
condition implies that the actual occurrence of the action is merely assumed 
or expected by the speaker. The reason for the use of the Subj. is not to ba 
found in the conditioned relation itself which it is necessary to express, but in 

46* 



046 SYNTAX. [§ 339 

the fact, that, aside from this relation, it is used to denote a concession expected 
by the speaker (§ 259, "Rem. 4). 

'Ehv tovto Xey-ps, afiapr^crr}, if you say this, shall say it, you will err. 
(Whether yon will actually say this, I do not yet know ; but I expect, I as- 
sume that you will say it, and then it is a necessary consequence that you err.) 
— 'Eav tovto Xe£r)s, a p. a p r, r) a 77 {si hoc dixeris, errabis) . Deni. 2, 14. 'divas 
hoy os, av a.irrj to, izpdy\xaTa, fiaTaiov ti tpalveTcu Kal Kev6v. PI. Rp. 473, d. eav 
p.)] r) ol (piXScrocpoi fiacriXevcrao- iv iv tcus TrdXecriv, r) ol fiaaiXrjs Te vvv Xeyop.' 
evoi Kal SuvdaTai <p 1 X cr <p 77 cr a> a i yvncrim re Ka\ iKavus, Kal tovto els tovtov 
^vpLTT ear}, diva/xls Te ttoXltlkt] Kal cpiXoa'ocpia, ovkcctti KaKwv iravXa Tals ir6Xe' 
ol. Lysid. 210, c. eav (xev &pa aocpbs yevrj, 8> ira?, irdvTes croi (ptXoi Kal irdvTes 
aoL oiKeioi effovrai. X. An. 1. 8, 12. Kav tovto, e<prj, vLKcofxev -Kavb' r)fuif 
ireTrolr)Tai. 

Rem. 3. 'Edv with the Subj. and el with the Opt. are also used to denote 
indefinite frequency. Comp. § 327b, 2. In the place of idv with the Subj. ei 
with the Opt. occurs, when the conditional clause is made to depend on an 
Hist, tense. Still, see § 345, 4. On edv with the Opt. and el with the Inf. 
in orat. obliq., see § 345, Rem. 4, and No. 6. 

3. Besides the common forms of the Apodosis already men- 
tioned, which correspond to those of the Protasis, the Apodosis 
is very often found in a form that does not correspond to the 
Protasis. This interchange of forms gives great delicacy of 
expression. The following cases occur : — 

(a) The Opt. with ay in the Apodosis, very often follows el with the Ind. 
and edv with the Subj., when the conclusion as uncertain, doubtful, an undeter- 
mined possibility, is to be contrasted with a condition which is certain, or which 
is expected or assumed as certain. But the Greek, particularly the Attic dialect, 
very often employs this form of the Apodosis with a degree of civility, even 
when speaking of settled convictions [§ 260, 2, (4), (a)]. 

(a) Ei tovto X eye is, afxapTavois av {if you assert this, you would err). 
PI. 30, b. el piev oiv TavTa Xeyoou dia(p&elpca tovs veovs, tovt a v e1t\ fiXafiepd. 
Ale. II. 149, e. Kal yap av Seivbv e'er], el -n-pbs to. b*£>pa Kal tcls frvarlas airofiXeir- 
ov<r iv t)/awv ol &eoi, aXXa fxr] irpbs tt)v -tyvx'hv, av tls oq-los Kal hiKaios &v rvy- 
Xavri. X. C. 1. 2, 28. el ^coKpaTTjs owtppovwv 8 ict eXei, ttws av ZiKaicos tt)s 
ovk ivova-ns avTy Kaw as aniav e%oi; Til. 6, 92. el iroXep.L6s ye tbv <r<p6$oa 
efiXaTTTOV, Kal a v (plXos &v iKavws w <f> e X 1 7] v. 

(/3) X. Apol. 6. t)v 8e ala^dvufiai x e 'P a " / yiyv6p.evos Kal Karap-ep.- 
cpwp.ai ifiavT6v, irSis av eyeb av r)deas /3 lot ev l jii] PI. Menex. 239, C. ei» 
ovv r)fxe7s e-^ix * Lpcop.ev to. avTa Xoycp $iXcp Koajxelv. Tax av Seirepoi (paivot- 
fie&a {then we should be inferior). 

(7) E I with the Ind. of the historical tenses is used in speaking of the 
denial of a fact, and in the Apodosis, the Opt. with av is used in speaking of 
the past, instead of the usual Ind. of the Hist, tenses with &v. This use is not 



$ 340.] ELLIPSES OF THE PROTASIS. 547 

frequent, and is found only in Homer [§ 260, (4), (a)]. II. fi, 80. el fxev tis 
rhv oveipov 'Axaioov aXXos ev icnrev, \pevS6s Kev (paTfiev Kal vocrcpi^oifxt 
§a /xaXXov vvv 8' ISev, hs fiey' 'dpicrTos^Kxaioiv evx^Tai elvai (if another had 
told the dream, toe should pronounce it false, and not believe it). II. e, 311. Kai vv 
Kev «/&•' air6Xo it o 'aval; avdpcHv Alvelas, el /a)) dp' b£b v6rj<re Aibs SrvyaT^p 
'A<ppodiTr) (and JElneas would certainly have perished there, if Aphrodite had not 
observed it). Comp. § 388. p, 70. [On el with the Opt. in the Protasis and the 
Opt. with dv in the Apodosis, in speaking of something past, in Herodotus, see 
No. II. (a) at the end.] 

(b) On the contrary, the Ind. in the Apodosis sometimes follows el with the 
Opt. X. C. 1. 5, 2. el §' eirl reXevrrj rov fiiov yevSftevoi fiovXot/J.e&d tw 
eTTirpexpac fj Trcudas dppevas Trcu8ev(rcu, $) frvyarepas irap&evovs dia<pvXa^ai, $ XP^I' 
fxara hiacrwcrai, dp' a^iSiricnov els ravra rjyncrSfxe^a rbv uKpcnrj ; 

(c) The Ind. of the historical tenses with dv in the Apodosis follows: — 

(o) sometimes el with the Ind. of a principal tense, if the condition is re- 
garded as a fact or something actually existing, while the conclusion is consid- 
ered as not real or actual. X. Hier. 1, 9. et yap ovtw tovt ex*h "^Sis av iroX- 
Xol fiev eiredrv/jLOVv ivpavvetv . . , ttccs Se irdvres e^Xovv av robs rvpdvvovs ; 
(if this is really so, why should many strive after sovereignty, and all esteem tyrants 
as happy?) Eur. Or. 565, sq. et yap yvvaiKes is t6& ri^ovcriv &pd<rovs, dv- 
Spas (poveieiv, Karacpvyas nroiovfievai is reKva . . , irap ovSev avraTs ijv av oXXvvai 
irSffeis ; 

(fi) rarely idv with the Suhj. (PI. Phaedr. 256, c), but very often el with 
the Opt., when, in the Apodosis, an action is to be represented as repeated in 
past time [see § 260, 2, (2), (fi)], but seldom when the reality of the conclusion 
is to be denied, e. g. X. Cy. 2. 1, 9. el exoifii, &>s rdx^r av oirXa eiroiov- 
fi7}v ivaffi Tlepcrais ro?s irposiovcnv. PI. Ale. I. Ill, e. el fiovXTj&elr] [x ev elSe- 
vai jx)] fiSvov, iroioi dv&pooiroi el<Tiv, dXX y SiroToi vyiewol, ?) vo&codeis, apa iKavol a v 
•^ffav BiddaKaXoi ol iroXXol ; 

(d) The Ind. of a principal tense in the Apodosis, is sometimes contrasted 
with the Ind. of an historical tense in the Protasis: (a) affirmatively: Dem. 
Cor. 293, 195. el pera ruv &r]fia(cvv r^uv aywvi(ofx.evois ovrcas e'lfxapro (fato 
constitutum erat) irpa£ai, rl xph TrposBoKav; — (fi) negatively: Th. 3, 65. el 
[.Lev yap ij/xeTs avrol irpos re rr]v tt6Xiv eX&6vres efiaxdpe&a (pugnavissemus) 
Kal tV 777J/ edrjodfiev (devastassemus) &s iroXefxioi, aSiKodfiev el Se dvdpes 
vfxwv ol -KpSoToi . . eirefcaXecravTo (advocaverunt) , rl ddiKov/xev. 



§ 340. Remarks. 

1. Ellipsis of the Protasis. The Opt. with dv often stands without the 
conditional Protasis ; yet this is contained in an adjective-clause, or in a par- 
ticiple,, or, in general, in a word of the sentence which may be expanded into a 
conditional Protasis, e. g. in the adverb ouras, in a preposition, or it is indica- 



<54S SYNTAX. [$ 340 

ted in what precedes or follows. l, Os Tavra Xeyoi (— e? ris Tavra Aeyot), 
d/xaprdvoi dv ( whoever should say this, if any one should say this, he would err) , 
Tavra Ae'^as (= el av Ae£cus) djxapr dv o i s dv. OiItio y (= el ovrca ye 
izoir\aais) dv djxaprdvo is. Very often, however, the Protasis is actually 
wanting ; particularly, general Protases are almost always omitted, since they 
can be easily supplied by such phrases as : if one wishes, if it is allowed, if 1 
can, if circumstances should favor, e. g. B ovXoifiriv dv (scil. el dwaifi-nv) , velim 
'Hdecos dv aKovaaifii] often also, the conditioned Apodosis must be supplied, 
as the conditioning Protasis, e. g. Her. 9, 71. d\\a rat- t. p.ev ku\ <p&6vca av 
etvoiev (sc. el eUoiev). Comp. § 260, 2, (4), (a). So also, the Ind. of 
the historical tenses with dv is often used without a conditional Protasis, 
e. g. Tavra Ae'|as rifxapres &v. "Avev aeia/xov ovk av tovto awe fir). 
Efiov\6 fxrjv dv or i fiovA-fj &7)v &v (sc. el edvvdfMiqv), voluissem, vellem (differ- 
ent from fiovKoi p.r\v dv, as vellem from velim). "Ev&a 8t) eyvas dv (see? 
■jrapricr&a), turn vero videres. See § 260, Rem. 2. 

2. Ellipsis of the Apodosis. On the contrary, the Apodosis may be omitted 
in certain cases : — 

(a) In the expression of a wish, e. g. efd-e tovto yevoiro (sc. evrvxvs dv 
el-nv), that this might be! eXSr e tovto eyevero (sc. evrvxvs av ?jv), that 
this had been ! Comp. § 259, 3, (b), and Pern. 6. 

(b) Often in excited, impassioned discourse (Aposiopesis). II. a, 340, sq. eXirore 
5' avre XP €l ^ ^M^to yevrjrai deucea Aoiybv dfivvai ro?s dWois — . 

(c) When the Apodosis may be easily supplied from the context. This oc- 
curs in Homer in the phrase el 8' i&eAeis with or without an Inf. II. <p, 
487. el 8' e&eAeis TroAe/xoio darj/xevai (sc. dye, fxd%ov ijxoi) • o<pp ev elS-ps. 
Very often also in Attic writers, where two conditional clauses are placed in 
contrast by el {edv) /xev — el {edv) Se firj; in the first the Apodosis is 
omitted, since it contains a thought which can be easily supplied, and the dis- 
course hastens on to the following more important thought. PI. Prot. 325, d. 
Kal edv jxev ettwv Trei&rjrai (sc. /caAcos ex e * e * ^ e PVi — ev&vvovaiv cureiAaTs Ka\ 
■nXrjyais. 

3. A partial ellipsis of the Protasis occurs in the Homeric phrase el 8' dye, 
i. c. el Se fiovAei, dye. II. a, 524. el 8' dye toi Ke<pa\fj Karavevaofxat. Also 
when el oe or el 8' dye is used as an antithesis, where a verb must be sup- 
plied from the context. II. a, 302 ; i, 46. aAA 5 dWoi jxeveovai Kapr]KOfi6wvres 
'Axaioi, elsoKe irep Tpoi-qv dio.Ttepaofxev el oe Ka\ abroi (sc. p.)) peveovai), (pevyov- 
■~oav avv vnval (piArjv is irarpida yaiav. 

4. El oe instead of el Se pr) and el oe pi\ instead of el oe. When two 
Hypothetical clauses are contrasted with each other, el oe is often used instead 
of el Se prj, since the opposed or contrasted member of itself abrogates 
die first member. PI. Prot. 348, a. Kav /xev fiovArj en ipwrdv, eroipos el/mi aoi 
irapexeiv (sc. ipe) diroKpivopevos • edv Se fiovXrj, av ipol iiapdax* (f y ou wish to 
propose further questions, I am ready to reply, but if you do not wish, etc.). On the 
contrary, a negative clause is followed by el Se pr n i • " ad of el oe, this form 



$ 341.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 549 

being very common in abrogating or expressing the opposite of the preceding 
clause. X. Cy. 3. 1, 35. irpbs rS>v &eu>v, jxt] ovrca \eye • el Se /x-)] (otherwise), ob 
Sappovvrd [xe e^eis. 

5. When el /x-f] has the meaning of except, another el is sometimes sub- 
joined, thus el jx)] el, like nisi si, except if, unless, the predicate of el [xi] being 

omitted. PL Symp. 205. e. ob -yap to eavroov, oT/xai, eKacrroi ao-ird^ovrai, el /x^j 
c i ris to fxev aya&bv olKeiov KaXel. 

6. "Kv in the Protasis with el and the Opt. or the Ind. of the historical 
tenses. Sometimes 'dv is found, also, in the Protasis, so that it contains a con- 
dition for the Apodosis, but it is itself dependent on another condition, com- 
monly not expressed, but implied, e. g. el ravra XeyoLs dv means : If you should 
say this under circumstances (= in case circumstances require, in case an oppor~ 
tunity should present, in case one should ask you), etc. X. Cy. 3. 3, 55. robs 5' 
airaidevrovs rcavrdirao'iv aperrjs frav/xd^oi/x 1 dv, et" nivXeov av oj <pe\T) a e le \C 
yos KaXws pr)&els els avdpaya&lav, % robs a-rratSevrovs (xovo-ik?]s acr/xa /xd\a KaXus 
da&ev els /xovcriKTjv. PL Pro t. 329, b. eycb etirep aKKa> ra av&pcaTTtov irei&ol- 
Hyv 'av, ical crol rrei&o/xaL (si ulli alii, si id mihi affirmet, fidem habeam). 

7. When Kai is connected with el (edv), the hypothetical Protasis contains a 
concessive meaning, and the Apodosis, an adversative meaning : the Protasis 
denotes a concession; the Apodosis, often in connection with' ofxus, tamen, 
denies the expected consequence, and places another consequence in opposi- 
tion to that expectation. Kai either follows el, — el Kai or precedes it, — ical 
el — . In the first case, Kai means also, and refers not merely to el, but to the 
entire concessive clause, and el Kai means although. In the last case, Kai 
means even (enhansive), and refers only to the condition, and Kai el means 
even if, e. g. el Kai &vnr6s el/xi, although I am mortal (conceding what is actu- 
ally the case, Kai el a&dvaros l\v,evenifl were immortal (conceding what is 
not the case). S. 0. R. 302. ttoKiv fxev, el Kai /xrj fiXeireis, (ppovels 5' ofxcas, oXa 
v6o~a> £vvecrriv, etsi (quamquam) caecus es, vides tamen, quo in malo versetur civitas. 
Aesch. Choeph. 296. Kel /x$) Treiroi&a, rodpyov ear eypacrreov, etiamsi non fido, 
perpetrandum facinus est. To the el (eav) Kai, the negative el (eav) /xrjde 
corresponds; to the Kai el {edv), obo* (fxr]&) el (edv). 

Remark. Concessive clauses are far oftener expressed in an abridged form 
by the participle, either alone, or in connection with Kai, Kaiirep, etc., § 312, 4, 
(d) and Rem. 8. 



) 341. III. Adverbial Clauses denoting Consequence 
or Effect. 

1. Adverbial clauses, denoting consequence or effect, are 
adverbs of manner expanded into a sentence, and are intro- 
duced by the conjunction wsre (more seldom w?), which refers 
to the demonstrative adverb ovrco(s), either expressed or under* 
stood, in the principal clause, e. g. ovtw xak-U icmv, wsre Sav 



550 SYNTAX. [§ 341 

fxd^ecrSox ( = Sav fxaa to*? /caXos eoriv). Yet these clauses often 
have also the meaning of a substantive or J?2/\ in the Ace. and 
denoting an effect, and must then be considered as substantive- 
clauses. In this last case, the relative tosre of the subordinate 
clause corresponds to a demonstrative substantive -pronoun, 
either expressed or to be supplied, e. g. rovro, hi the principal 
clause, e. g. 'AveTreio-e Eep£ea rovro, a>sre 7rot€tev ravra (Her.). 

2. The Ind. is used in these clauses, when the consequence 
or effect, is to be indicated as a fact, something real and actual 
The negative is in this case (ov, i 318, 2). 

Her. 6, 83. "Apyos avdpwv ix'np^V ovtu, wsre oi SovXoi avTecov %<rx°v 
iravra ra Trp-fiy/xara. X. Cy.'l. 4, 5. Kvpos ra%b Kal rb. ly r$ TrapaSelaco frnpia 
ai/7]X<t)Kei, Sire 6 'Acrrvdyns ovKer' e?x ev avros crvXXe^~iv Srnpia. 15. ovrcos 
770-3-77 rrj r6re &7)pa (6 'Aarvdy7]s), wsre ad, Snore olov re etr], ffvve^riei r<a 
Kvpa>, kcu &XXovs re ttoXXovs ir ap eXdp. fi ave. 

3. The Inf., on the contrary, is used, when the consequence 
or effect is to be represented as merely a conceived or supposed 
one, infer red from the inward relation of things, ox assumed as 
possible. (On attraction with the Inf., see § 307, 4, and on the 
negative, §318, 2.) The particular cases where the Inf. is used, 
are the following : — 

(a) When an effect or consequence is specified, which results from or has its 
ground in the nature or condition of an object. X. C. 1. 2, 1. en Be vpbs rb fxer- 
picov de7o~&ai ireTraio'ev/j.evos fjU ^wKpar-ns ovrcos, oisre irduv fxiKpa, KeKry/xevos irdvv 
paBioos e%eiv apKovvra. Cy. 1. 1, 5. e§vvdo~&-n Kvpos iir&v/j.iav e/J-fiaXeTv roaav- 
rr\v rov irdvras abrS xapt^ecrS-a:, &sre ael rrj avrov yvwfjun a^iovv Kvj3epvdo~- 
&at. 2, 1. <pvvai 6 Kvpos Xeyerai (piXorip.6raros, £> s r e iravra \xkv tt6vov avar- 
Xrjvai, irdvra Be k'lvBvvov vtt o [xel va i rov eTraiveloSrai eveKa. For the same 
reason,-?) Ssre (quam ut) is used with the Inf., after a comparative. Her. 3, 
14. £ TraT Kvpov, ra fieu olKrj'ia -f]v pe(a> KaKa, f] 8>sre avaKXaieiv (greater than 
that any one can bewail, i. e. too great for one to bewail). X. C. 3. 5, 17. (pofiov/j.a; 
ael, fxy ri pei^ov rj usre (pepeiu Bv v a a Era l Kaxhv rfj ir6Xei o-vjxfifj. Hence 
Sst6 with an Inf. may also be used to explain a preceding clause, e. g. Th. 4, 
23. UeXoirovp-fjaioi eu rjj 7]Trelpw arparorreBevo-dfievoi, Kal TrposfioXas iroiov/xeuoi to) 
Tei'xei, cTKOiTovures icaipov, ei" Tis 7rapo7recro£, wsre robs dvBpas crucrai (watch- 
ing for an opportunity, if any should occur, by which their fellow-citizens could be 
saved). X. C. 1. 3. 6. 'o rots irXelcrrois ipywBearar6u eariv, &sre (pv\d£ao~&ai rh 
virep rbv Kaipbv i/.nr'nrXao~&aL, t^to pqBicus irdvv ~2,oiKparr)S icpvXdrrero. 

(b) When the consequence is to be represented as one merely possible. X 
An. 2. 2, 17. Kpavyriv ttoXXtjv hroiovp KaXovvres aXXrjXovs, Ssre Kal robs voXe/xL 
9vs aKoveiv (ut etiam hostes audire possent), &sre ol pikv iyyvrara twv jrcXe/ji- 



$ 341. J ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 551 

oov Kal ecpvyov (a fact's. 1.4, 8. ovre aTroirecpevyaffiv ' e%« yap Tpijipetr, So st « 
c Xe?v rb iKelvoov irXo?ov. 

(c) When the consequence or effect includes, at the same time, the idea of 
purpose or aim. Th. 2, 75. -n-poKaXv/xp-aTa e?%e deppeis Kal Sup&epas, &sTe rob< 
£pya£op.evovs leal to, £vXa p.7)Te irvp<popois d'icrroTs jSoAAeorS-ai, iv affcpaXela re 
elvai (so that those at work and the ivood might not be hit, etc.). Dem. Cor. § 81. 
fvoXXa p.ev av xP^P- aTa ^ooks $lXio~tL5tis, wst' %x* iv 3 &pe6v (ut obtineret 
Oreum). 

(d) When the consequence is to be indicated at the same time as a condition of 
the statement in the principal clause (under the condition, that, or it is presupposed, 
that). Dem. Ph. 2. 68, 11. i£bv avrols toov Xonroov apx^iv 'EXX^voov, & st avrovs 
viraKov eiv PacriXe? (quum possent ceteris Graecis ita imperitare, ut ipsi dicto 
audientes essent regi, since they could rule the rest of the Greeks, provided they 
themselves obeyed the king). X. Cy. 3. 2, 16. Kal tovto iirlcrToo, ecprj, 8> Kvpe, '6ti 
iyoo, So st e aireXdo*ai XaXdalovs anb tovtoov toov 'aKpoov s iroXXanXaffia av eSw/cct 
XP"hfACLTa, oov o~v vvv e%eis trap i/xov. 

(e) When instead of an Inf. alone, the Inf. with SosTe is used for the sake 
of emphasis. Th. 1, 119. (e'S e-f)frri av) knaffToov lUa, Sostg ty tj (p i a a cr £r a, i 
Tbv TToXefMOV. 2, 101. avaireifr GTai virb 'SevSov . . , So s t iv t&xsi aireX&eTv. 
6, 88. Kal ol Kopiv&toi zv&vs i\\/7)(picravT o avTol irpcoToi, oostg irdcrr) irpo^vfxief 
ap.vvs.iv ktX. X. H. 6. 1, 9. Kal 'A-fr^cuot Se ivdvTa Troirjo-aiev &v, Sjte 
0-vp.p.axoi rip-tv yeveo~&ai. 

(f) In general, when the speaker, without respect to the objective relation 
of things, apprehends, in his mind, solely the causal connection between the cause 
and the effect. In this way, a consequence actually existing may be expressed 
by Sosre with an Inf. X. An. 1. 5, 13. tfXawev iirl tovs Mevoovos (o~TpaTiooTas), 
Host eKeivovs i kit eirXrj x& « J Kal ai>Tbv Mevoova Kal Tp4x eLV ^ T ^ SttAo. 

(g) In oblique discourse. X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. (Tbv Kvpov) eb(Txnp.6v(os iroos irpose- 
veyKelv Kal evdovvai tt]v (piaXrjv tco irdivirai, &st e ttj p.7]Tpl Kal Tcp 'Aarvdyei ttoXvp 
yeXooTa irap aax^ v ' 

Rem. 1. When the Inf. connected with wstc depends on a condition, the 
modal adverb 'av is subjoined to the Inf. [§ 260, 2, (5), (a)]. Th. 2, 49. t« ivTbs 
ovtoos eKaieTO, So s t e rjSio-Ta av is vZoop i\ivxpbv o~(pas avTovs p I ir r e i v. X. An. 
6. 1, 31. Kai p.oi ol &eol ovtoos £v to7s hpo?s io-f]p.rivav, Sostc Kal lSid>T7}v av yvoo- 
vai, otl TavT-qs ttjs p.ovapxlas airex^cr^ai /xe Se? (i. e. Kai e'/ tis ldidoTt]s eft?). 

Rem. 2. Instead of &st€ with the Inf. or Ace. with Inf., a relative, particu- 
larly oTos, So- os, is very often used in connection with the Ace. with Inf., 
this relative corresponding to a demonstrative, particularly toiovtos, too-ovtos, 
either standing in the principal clause or to be supplied. PL Crit. 46, b. eyeb — 
toiovtos (sc. elfil), oT os toov ip.S>v /xrjdevl &XXcp tc e ih e a&ai, ?; Top X6yw. X. 
Cy. 1. 2.3. ol UepffiKol v6p.oi iirip.eXovTai, firoos tt]V apx^v p^ t o iovtoi eo~ovTat 
ol 7toA?tc», oT o i ivovripov twos t) aio~xpov tpyov icpiecr&ai. X. H. 6.5, 7. toiov- 
tos 6 Urdcrnnros ?jv, olos p.r) (Sov Xecr&ai ttoXXovs airoKTi vvvvai toov tto Xitoov. 
Th. 3, 49. f] p.ev ecpEraae r oo~ovtov, o a ov Hdx'HTa aveyvooKevai Tb i^/i]<pio-ua. 
\. 2. vefjiSfievoi to. ainoov eKaffToi, ftcrov airo^rjv (so far that they could live on 
them). On the attraction in this mode of expression, see § 332, Rem. 8. 

Rem. 3. Special mention must be made here of apparently independent 



552 syntax. [$ 341. 

parenthetic clauses, which often occur, and which are i/itrorlaced hy ws (seldom 
wsre) with the Inf. In this way the Inf., particularly of verbs of saying, think- 
: ng, judging, hearing, is used with ws for the purpose of expressing restriction or 
limitation. That, of which such a subordinate clause expresses the consequence 
or effect, must be supplied, e. g. roiovrw rpoirw. Th. 4, 36. ws /niKpbv fxeyaXw 
eiKaaai {to compare small with great). So &>s eiros elirelv (especially with 
was and ovSe(s), ut ita dicam, propemodum dixerim, ws avveXovr i elire'iv, ut 
pancis absolvam, ws ye juot SoKe7v, ut mihi quidem videtur, properly tali modo 
ut mihi videatur, ws ifie ev jne ixvr\<j&ai (as far as I well remember). ws ye 
ovrwcrl aKovaai (so far as ice hear). Such clauses are very often expressed in 
an abridged form without ws, e. g. o vrwal atcovcrai, 5 o Ketv e/xoi, ov ttoX- 
\q> x6yw elirel v, especially oXiyov, fiiKpov Se?v,ita ut paulum absit, and 
in the still shorter form, bxiyov, prope, paene. — According to the same analogy, 
o<rov, oa a, o r i connected with an Inf., are used instead of w s. (Rem. 2), e. g. 
'6<rov ye [i eiSevai, as far as I know, quantum sciam (properly pro tanto, 
quantum scire possim), o r i fx eldevai. In like manner, ws with the Inf. is 
used in Herod., in sentences which express a limitation. 2, 8. rb wv dr] airb 
tr .iXiovir6Xtos ovKeri TroXXbv x° i P' l0V -> as elvot Klyvirrov (ut in Aegypto, for 
Egypt, i. e. considering its whole extent). 

4. The Opt. ivith av is used when the consequence or effect 
is to be represented as a conditioned supposition or firesumption 
'J 260, 2, (4), (a)]; finally the Ind. of the historical, tenses is 
used with av, when it is to be stated, that the consequence 
would take place under a certain condition \h 260, 2, (2), (a)]. 

Isocr. Archid. 130, 67. els roffavr-nv a t ui^iav iX-nXv&ao-iv, iis r ol fxev KCKr-nne- 
voi ras ovaias r'jdiov av els r)]v baXarrav ra crcperep" avrwv e fifiaXXo lev, % ro7s 
Seo/xevois eirap K e a e i av. PL Menex. 236, d. croi ye 5e? x a p' l ( €(r & a h &sre 
Kav oXiyov, el /xe KeXevois airoSvvra opxyvacrSaL, %apicraiV 7 7 I/ & v - — Symp 
197, a. fxavriK^v 'AirSXXwv avevpev, 'Eiri8rvfj.ias KafEpwros r)yefxovev(Tavros, w sre 
Kal ovros "EpwTos av ely /ma^rr,*. — Dem. Cor. 236, 30. ovk av wptd(o[j.ev 
QiXiTTirov, wsre rrjs elprivns av 8 i-rj fj.aprT]Kei teal ovtc av afxcporepa el%e, Ka\ 
t)]v elpr\vr]V, Kal ra %a>pia. X. Ag. 1, 26. irdvres 7roXeu.iKa oirXa Kareo-Keva(ov, 
wsre rfyv ir6Xiv ovrws av f, 7770-0? iroXefxav ipyaarripiov elvai. 

Rem. 4. The Opt. without dv is used only in the case mentioned in § 227b, 
1, (b). When wsre is connected with the Imp., or the imperative Subj. [§ 269, 
l' (a)], the dependent discourse is suddenly changed, with rhetorical emphasis, 
into the Oratio recta. Dem. Phil. 3. 129, 70. ypd<pw 8e, wsre, av PovXya&e, 
Xeiporov-ho-are (I ask that you would decree, if you ivish, properly : decree, if 
you wish). So, likewise, wsre can be connected with a questioii. ^ Dem. Apbob. 
858, 47. el 6 irarrip rjiricrrei rovrois, SrjXov on ovr av raXXa eirerpe-wev, ovr Uy 
eKeiv ovrw KaraXiirwv avrois e<bpa(ev, wsre ir6^ev 'laaaiv: (ergo unde scie- 
runt ?) Comp. § 344, Rem. 6. 

Rem. 5. Instead of wsre with the meaning ita or ea conditione, ut, the post- 
Homeric language also uses e>' wre (more seldom i<p' $), which refers to 
the demonstrative inl rovrw in the principal clause, either expressed or im- 
plied ; either the Put. Ind., or the Inf. are here used^e.g. Her. 3, 83. ei! 
rovrw Se vTre^io-ra/xai rr^s apxys, eV wt€ vtt ovdevbs vjxewv 'dp^ojiai. X. 
H. 2. 2, 20. eiroiovvro elp7]vr}v, itf & rd re p.aKpa reixv Kal rbv Ueipaia. KaSeXSv 
ras AaKeZainoviois ever bat. 4, 38. ol Se drfjXXafrv, i<p' §re elp-fjvr]v %x* iv ' 



$ 342.] COMPARATIVE ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF MANNER. 



553 



D. Adverbial Clauses denoting Manner and 
Quantity. 

$ 342. I. Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting 

Manner . 

1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quality and man- 
ner, compare the predicate of the principal clause, in respect to 
quality and manner, with the predicate expressed in the adver- 
bial clauses. They are introduced by the relative adverbs, w?, 
<Ss re, US-rep, o7T<os, which refer to a demonstrative adverb, e. g. 
ovtcos, in the principal clause, either expressed or understood. 

2. The use of the modes in these adverbial clauses corre- 
sponds with that in adjective clauses ($ 333), e. g. Aeyets ovtms, 
obs <£povets (you speak as you thinlt). Zevs SlSoxtlv, 7ra>s iS-c- 
A.e6 or o7rw5 av £$e\r] (§ 333, 3), e/caora) (gives to each, as he 
wishes). Very often ws av or ws7rep a v is used with the Opt. 
($ 333, 6). PL Phaed. 87, b. ip.ol yap SokcX o/x-otco? Aeyeo-#cu 
T<xOra, wsTrep av ns 7rept avSponrov v<fidvTov 7rp€&/3vTov aTro$av6vTO<z 
A ey o i tovtov rbv \6yov. 

Remark 1. In comparisons, either the Present tense is used, since the com- 
pared object is placed in present view, or the Aor. [§ 256, 4, (c)]. In respect 
to the Modes, it is to be noted, that in Homer, the adverbs of comparison a s, 
lb sre, 77 vre, are connected either with the Pres. or Aor. Ind., when the com- 
parison is stated as an actual fact, or with the Pres. Subj., or commonly with 
the Aor. Subj. (§ 333, Rem. 2. ; the Aor. Subj. often retains the appearance of 
the Put. by the shortening of the mode-vowel). R. k, 183. ws de Kvves irepl 
firjXa 8vsa>p-h (Tovrai iu avXjj — , &s tS>v vrjdvjuLOS vttvos airb fiXecpapoiiv oXcoXei. 
p, 434. 5 st e <TT7j\i7 jxevei efxireSov, '/jt iirl Tvjxf5a> hvepos effT7)Kei. k. 485, sq. 
ws 8e Xewv /x^Xoiaiv a<rr)/u.dvToicnv eireX^wv cuyecriv 7) b'iecrcri Katca <ppovewv e v ■ 
pov<rri' ws /xev ®p7]'iKas avhpas £i^4x eT0 TwSeos vl6s (as it may happen that a lion, 
etc.). 

Rem. 2. Ovtws (&5s) — ws are used in ivishes or asseverations, the clause of 
comparison, introduced by ws, expressing the asseveration or protestation. 
Thus in. Latin, ita me dii ament, tjt ego nunc laetor, may the gods love me, as 
I rejoice, = may the gods not love me, if I do not rejoice, or as sure as I ivish the 
gods to love me, so sure I now rejoice. II. v, 825. el yap iywv ovtw ye Aibs ircus 
alyiSxoio e%t\v . . , ws vvv 7)fJ.epr) ?j5e Kaicbv (pepei 'Apyetoicri iracri fiaXa (would that 
J were the son of Zeus as truly as this day brings evil to all the Greeks). 

Rem. 3. In clauses introduced by bj, 8>sirep, &sre, an attraction of the 
Case sometimes occurs, particularly in the Ace. Lys. Accus. Agor. 492, 136. 
i>v$a[JLod ecrriv 'AySparov 'A&riucuov elvai w strep & p aav /3 ovXov (should be 
such as Thrasybulus is). But the Nom. is often found, for which a verb must be 
supplied from the context. Dem. Mid. 363. expw avrbv to. ovtcl avaXiaKuura 
S> strep iyw, ovtw p.eu acpaipelcr&ai t\\v viK-qv. 

Rem. 4. An appositive is often used with ws denoting comparison, as in 

47 



554 



SYNTAX. 



P 343. 

Latin with ut, for the purpose of explaining the predicate of the principal 
clause. This oo s, ut, expresses either comparison or limitation, and in the first 
case is to be translated by as, in the latter by for ; the former occurs, when it 
is presupposed that the object connected with as possesses in a high degree, 
the thing affirmed in the predicate of the sentence ; the latter, when it is pre- 
supposed that the object possesses only in a small degree what is affirmed by 
the predicate of the sentence, S. 0. R. 1118. Aaiov yap fy, direp ris aXXos, tho- 
t6s, &s voy.evs avhp {ut pastor, as a shepherd ; the fidelity of shepherds be- 
ing presupposed ) . But Th. 4, 84. 7> 8e ovdh aSvvaros, &s' AaKeSaifi6pios, 
elireTv (ut Lacedaemonius, for a Lacedemonian; it being presupposed of Lacede- 
monians as a thing known, that they were not great orators). 



$ 343. II. Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting 
Quantity. 

1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quantity, compare 
the predicate of trie principal clause, in respect to quantity or 
degree, with its predicate. The compared predicates are con- 
trasted either as equal or unequal to each other. 

2. The equality of the predicates is expressed in the follow- 
ing manner : — 

(a) The adverbial clause is introduced by the relative oo-w 
(oo-ov), which refers to the demonstrative roaovrto (too-ov- 
tov), in the principal clause. 

X. Cy. 8. 1, 4. toctovtov Sia<pepsiv y/xcis Set twv dovAwv, Saov ol p.ev SovAoi 
&kovt6s ro?s dscnrSrais inrrjperQvcriv (it becomes us to excel slaves as much as slaves 
unwillingly serve their masters). 

(b) The adverbial clause is likewise, introduced by oo-o) 
(o o- o v), which refers to the demonstrative too-ovti* (roaovrov), 
in the principal clause ; the predicate of both clauses, however, 
stands either in the comparative or superlative. 

X. An. 1. 5, 9. (Kvpos) vop-lfav, Screw p.ev av &a.7T0V eA&oi roaovrcv 
airapacrKevao-TOTepa) fiao-iXeT /j.dxe<T&ai (quo [quanto] celerius — eo [tanto] 
imparatior, thinking that the quicker he came, the more unprepared he would find 
the king to fight). 0. 7,42. ocrw av Ka\ £/j.o\ koivcdvSs, koL iraialv oXkov (pvAaj- 
ajxe'ii'av yivn, t octovt w koI t ifjuwri pa iv tw o1ku> %<rn (quo [quanto] melior 
- — eo \tanto\ honoratior, the — so much the). Hier. 1, 19. '6 c u> av TrXsica 7, is rra- 
pabr\rai ra irepnTa rS>v iKavoov, TOffoinw Srua&ov Kopos ifxiriirTei tt\s iSadrjs. 
Th. 8, 84. '6aa> /xaXiffra Kal eAeu&epot ijaav vavrai, roaovrca tca\ frpaav- 
rara TvposircaSvres rhv [ua&bv airrirovv. The Superlative may also stand in 
the first member, the Comp., in the last. Dem, 01. 1. 21, 12. oa-ca yap kroi~ 
u6rar' aire? (t<£ \6yoj) doKovp.ev ^prjcr&cu, r ocovr a> p.a\XQV airt<rTOv<ri 
rdvres avr$. 



§ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 556 

Remark 1. Sometimes too-ovtu is omitted, especially when the relative 
member of the comparison follows. PL Gorg. 458, a. fxel^ov yap avrb dya- 
&bv 7)yovfj.ai, oo'uTrep jxel^ov aya&6v ianu avrbu diraWayrivai kcckov tov fxe- 
yiarov 1) &\\ou airaXXdlai. Also after the omission of '6 (Tea — too-ovtu, both 
clauses may be blended into one, e. g. X. C. 4. 1, 3. at apiarai doicoverai thai 
(biurets fj.d\icrTa irai5e(as Seovrai. 

Rem. 2. A comparative clause, introduced by us, onus, fj (as), oo-ov, and 
expressing a possibility, often serves to strengthen a superlative. X. C. 2. 2, 6. 
iiri/xe\ovj/7 ai oi yoveis irdvTa iroiovvres, oirus oi TrcaSes avroTs yivuvTai us Svva- 
rbu j8e\T mttoi (as good as possible, quam fieri potest optimi). Cy. 7. 1, 9. y 
h.v dvi/co/xai rdx^o'Ta (as quick as possible). For the like purpose, also, 
oTos, or i are used in connection with elvai. X. C. 4. 8, 11. idSicei roiouros 
efoai, oTos av eiy api(n6s ye av)]p eudaifioi/ecrTaTos. The following 
elliptical expressions originate from the omission of the verb: us apto-Ta 
olov xaAeTrcijTaToj', on fidXio-Ta, etc. (§ 239, Rem. 2). In the same 
manner, the expressions us d\-n&us, in fact, really, us aTexvus, utterly, us trduv, us 
iirl to ttoAv, plerumque, are to be explained ; also us e/coo-Tot, i. e. e/caarcu, us 
eKaa'Toi ■fiffav. 

3. The inequality of the predicates compared, is expressed 
by appending to the Comparative a coordinate clause with the 
comparative particle r/. See h 323. 

Rem. 3. The relation of quantity is expressed by comparing the predicate 
of the principal clause, in respect to its magnitude or degree, with the conse- 
quence or effect of that clause, the consequence being expressed by a subordi- 
nate clause with u s t e and the Inf. If the degree of the predicate in the prin- 
cipal clause stands in an equal relation with its effect, then the predicate of the 
principal clause is in the positive, e. g. ovrus di/5pe?6s io-riv, &st€ &av- 
fj.d£eff&ai. But if the relation is unequal, i. e. if the predicate of the princi- 
pal clause is represented as one which exists in a higher degree than another 
standing with it, then the Comparative is used with 77 usre and the Inf., e. g. 
to Ka/cct fiet£u iffTiv, }} fcsre ay aicAaieiv (greater than that one, i. e. too great 
to be bewailed). See § 341, 3, (a). 



CHAPTER IX. 

§344. I. Interrogative Sentences. 

1. Questions are either independent of a preceding sentence 
or dependent upon it, e. g. Has the friend come ? and I do not 
know ivhether the friend has come. The first is called a direct 
question, the last, indirect. Both may consist either of one 
member, or of two or more members, e. g. Has the friend come, 
or Has he not yet come ? Do you not know ivhether he is come or 
whether he is not coming ? According as the question refers to 
an object (person or thing) or to a predicate, the questions are 
divided into nominal and into predicative questions, e. g. who 



5o6 SYNTAX. [§ 344. 

has done this? (nominal question), and hast thou written the 
letter? (predicative question). 

2. The nominal questions, i. e. those questions, hi which the 
inquirer wishes to receive an answer on a single word in the 
sentence (subject, attributive, or object), are introduced by the 
substantive, adjective, or adverbial interrogative pronouns, tis, 

7T010?, 7TOCTOS, 7T0Te/)0S, 7TU)?, 7Trj, 7TOV, TToSl, TToSeV, TTOCTe, etc. If the 

nominal questions are indirect, then they are introduced by the 
interrogative pronouns (§ 93, Rem. 1.) compounded with a 
relative : osri?, 07roios, o7r6(ro<s, oirorepos, 07rw?, oirrj, oirov, o7ro#ev, 
07roo-e, etc. 

Tis tfA&ev] — Tt iroieTs] — Tlo?6v ere eiros <pvyev epKos 6S6vtwv ; — IT ws Ae- 
yets ; — II 6 ere (pevyere; — Ovk oI5a, ostis eeniv. — Ovk olda, oireas tovto rh 
irpayjxa ewpal-ev. 

Remark 1. Often, however, the indirect question takes the character of 
the direct, and then the direct interrogative pronouns are used instead of the 
indirect. Sometimes, indeed, in clauses that immediately follow each other, 
the first clause takes the indirect interrogative, the last more seldom, the direct. 
Ovk olda, rls ravra eirpa^ev. X. C. 4. 6, 2. eiire fiot — ttoIov tl vo/j.i£eis eiiere- 
fieuxv elvcu; yet there follows immediately, e%ets ovv elireTv, oirotos tis 6 evere- 
/8tjs ierriv, Comp. Rem. 2. PI. Crit. 48, a. ovk &pa tj/jav ovrw (ppovrierreov, ri 
epoveriv ol iroKKol rifias, a.X\' o r i 6 eiraCwv irepl twv SiKalav Ktzl adiKCi>v. X. C. 4. 
4, 13. ov yap aler&avoixai erov, birolov i'6/j.i/j.ov, t) -koIov diKcuov Xeyeis. — In 
indirect questions, the simple relative is sometimes used, instead of the indirect 
interrogative, e. g. os instead of ostis, oTos instead of oirolos, etc. 

Rem. 2. The adverb wot e, like the Latin tandem, is sometimes appended 
to the interrogative, in order to express the impatience or desire of the inquirer 
for an answer, or to denote wonder, or emotion in general. X. U. 1. 1, 2. 
ttoIo) itot' expyo-avTo TeKfiripto) ,• {what proof , I pray , did they bring?) 1. iroA- 
XaKts iSavjAao-a, rtffi iroTe XSyois 'AS-qvaiovs eireterav ol ypa\pd/xevoi ^WKpaTrfv, 
&s a^ios eXt] &ava.Tov Trj ttoXei. R. L. 1, 1- i&avfj.aera, OTca iroTe Tpoircc tout 
iyeueTO. 

Rem. 3. The article is prefixed to the interrogative, when one of the speak- 
ers has mentioned an object or quality, in order to define it more exactly, while 
the other does not expect this more exact definition, but interrupts the dis- 
course, and, by means of the article referring to that general definition, asks 
"what that means." PI. Phaedr. 277, a. HooKp. Nvv Srj iKelva tf8r}, & $a?8pe, 
dvvd/j.e&a Kptveiv, tovtcov w/j.oXoy7i/j.eva>v. 4>. Ta irola; (in reference to the 
preceding e/cetVa). 279, a. 2a>Kp. Neos eVi, 2> Qcudpe, 'leroKpa.T'ns • b fxevroi fxav- 
Tevofiai kclt aifTov, Xeyeiv i&eXw. 4>. Tb irolov Sr] ; So Ta irota TavTa 
Xeyeis ; Prom this mode of expression, that is to be distinguished, in which a 
substantive with the article or a demonstrative follows an interrogative with- 
out an article. In this case, the inquiry relates to the nature or quality of an 
object already existing. II. tt, 440. -koIov tov fxvSrov eeiires ; which the 
Eng. translates by means of two sentences, " What is that word, that thou 
hast spoken? " The word is already spoken, and the other now asks Avhat it 
means. Her. 7, 48. Saifj.6vie avSpwv, KoTa (= irola) t<xvt a Xeyeis elvcu 8vo pot 
•n oXe^idn on a; (what are these two things which you say are most hostile to me?) 
PI. Gorg. 521. a. ht\ itot e pau ovv /xe irapaKaXels tt\v frepdireiav t?js Tr6\ew$ 
(= irorepa ieTTlu 7] frepdireia, e'0 1 H\v fie irapaKaXeis ;) 



$ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 557 

Rem. 4. In order to make the subject matter of the question emphatic, when 
there is an antithesis, or a transition in the discourse, the words which denote this 
subject matter are often taken from their own sentence and placed first with r 1 
8 e , and then the predicate of the proper interrogative clause is commonly placed 
with a second interrogative. PL Rp. 341, d. rl 8e Kvfiepvrir-ns ; 6 dp&ws kv* 
fiepvfiTTjs vavrSiv &px^v icrriv, ?) yavrrjs ; Gorg. 502, a. ti 8e 6 Tcarr]p avrov MeXrjs , 
i\ irpbs rb $4\riarov fi\4irwv idoKei aoi Ki&apcodelv ; 

Rem. 5. The expressions, rl fj.a&w'v, r I Tra&dbv, cur? why? always ex- 
press disapprobation or censure of that respecting which the question is asked. 
The former implies that the thing censured was done designedly ; the latter that 
it was done accidentally, e.g. T( fiaSwv rovro £iroir]<ras ; (what has come into 
your mind to do this, with what object in view did you do this?) Tl iradtuv rovro 
ivoi-naas ; (quid expertus hoc fecisti ? what happened to you that you did this ?) PI. 
Apol. 36, b. ti &£ios elp,t iraSelv, 3) airorta'ai, '6ri fj.a&cbv iv ry filco oi>x 7] <rv X iau 
fjyov ; (what punishment do I deserve, that /purposely have had no rest in my life?). 

Rem. 6. A rhetorical turn of the Greek language, of frequent recurrence, 
consists in suddenly changing a subordinate clause, introduced by a conjunc- 
tion, into a direct interrogative clause, yet in such a way that the earlier con- 
struction remains unaltered. In such a case, the Eng. changes the subordinate 
clause into the principal, and the principal into the subordinate. X. C. 1. 4, 
14. (TV 8e aficporepow ruv irXeiarov ai-iow TeTu%7j/cws ovk olei o~ov &eovs iTTifjLe\e?cr- 
&cu, oAA' or au ti it o ir) a u a i, vofxieis abrovs o~ov <ppovrl£eiv ; (but what must the 
gods do, to make you believe that they care for thee ?). Dem. Phil. I, 43, 10. ir6re 
'h xph v P&t* T * > e7T€t8o*' ti yevqrai; (but what must take place if you are to 
do your duty?). Hence the elliptical expressions, 'iva rl; us rl; (sc.y4wq- 
rai) to what purpose, for what object? '6ri rl; (sc. ylyvercu), on what ground? 
So also in the adjective-clause, e. g. PL Phaed. 105, b. ei yap epoi6 fie, § av r I 
iv t<£ crdb/jLari iyyeurjrai, &ep/j.bv e<TTcw, ov r^ju aacpaKrj <roi ipu> air6Kpi<riv (if 
you would ask in what condition of body he must be, so that it might be warm ?) So 
also tI ov is inserted in the midst of clauses without change of construction 
(nihil non). Dem. Cor. 241, 47. v/3pi£ofji.4vuv nal rl kclkov ovxl Trao'xSuruu 
iraaa t) oIkov/x4vt) /xearri yeyove irpoSoruv. 

Rem. 7. The Greek may place two, or even more interrogatives, without 
\cal, under one common predicate, e. g. Ilcos rl &p Up ayuvi^ol/xe^a ; (how and 
what?). [Comp. Eng. " what and what manner of time," TiVa % ttolov Kaip6v, 1 
Pet. 1:11.] PL Rp. 400, a. iro?a 8' SttoIov filov /iifirj^ara, ovk ex w \4yeiv 
(what imitations and of what life?). Dem. Cor. ris rlvos aXriSs io~ri; So 
also with the relative. Isocr. Archid. 124, 42. rls ovk o?8ev, e£ o'luv ^vfx<popuv 
ds '6o-r\v evSaifioviav Kar4o-77)crav. 

Rem. 8. Both the relatives and interrogatives in Greek are very often con- 
nected with a participle. Thus a great brevity in expression is effected ; the 
Eng. in this case changes the Part, together with the interrogative or relative 
belonging to it, into a principal clause, and the finite verb into a subordinate 
clause. X. C. 3. 7, 3. rfyu Se 4fid}V Svyafxiu, e<p7) 6 Xap/xiS-ns, 4v irolu epyw Ka- 
r afxadruv ravrd /xov KarayiyvuCKets ; (by what work hast thou learned my ability, 
so that thou couldst pass such a sentence about me?). The Greek may also insert 
an interrogative clause between the article and the participle belonging to it, 
and in this way blend the two questions into one. X. C. 2. 2, 1. KaTa/j.e/xd^rjKas 
ovv robs rl iroiovvras rb ovofxa rovro a.iroK<xXovo~i ; instead of Karafx^ixa^'nKas, 
rivas rb ouojxol rovro airoKaXovaiu, kcu rl iroiovcriv ouroi, otis rb ovofia rovro airoK- 
aXovoiv ; 

3. Predicative questions, i. e. those where the inquirer de- 
sires only an affirmation or denial to Ins inquiry, are expressed 
in English merely by placing the finite verb first and by the 

47 # 



5o§ syntax. [$ 344 

accentuation, e. g. Art thou sick? Hast thou seen thy friend . 
In Greek, also, the predicative question is indicated, in the first 
place, merely by the tone of the question and the position of 
the words, the word on which the stress of the question lies, 
being placed first in the sentence ; still this mode of expression 
is not very common; it is used most frequently, when the ques- 
tion involves a certain degree of emotion. 

Od. e, 204. ovtu St? diKovde <pi\f]v es TrarpiSa yatav ahr'uca. vvv eheXeis that , 
This is found very often with negatives, e. g. Ok ibeXeis Uvai; 

4. In the second place, the predicative question is introduced 
by certain interrogatives ; this is the more common usage. In 
indirect questions, these interrogatives are translated by whether. 
When the predicative question consists of more than one mem- 
ber, and of such a nature that one member is excluded by the 
other {disjunction, h 323), then one of the interrogatives stands 
in the first member, while 77, or (an), stands in the second and 
following members. 

5. The interrogatives in the predicative questions are the 
following : — 

(a)" 5- !! implies an asseveration (§ 316, 2), and hence is used when it is sup- 
posed that that which forms the subject of the question actually exists. X. Cy. 
1.4, 19. ^ ovrot, 3> Trdirire, TroXefXioi elertv, ot eepearrjKaai rots r)pep.a) HoKe/xioi fiev 
toi, %<pf\. PI. Rp. 341, e. t) bp&G>s eroi Sokw, e<p7}V, av eliretv ovrca Xeyeav, t) oft ; 
'Op&ws, ecprj. Very often used in connection with other particles, e. g. pA\v 
(§ 316, 1), H, H ttov (§ 315, 1, 2), b~r,ra (§ 315, 3), apa, ydp [§ 324, 2, 3, (a)], 
Kai, ttov (§ 316, 2), ttov dpa. X. 0. 4, 23. ri Xeyeis, 5 Kvpe; i) y&P <rv 
rats aats X e P a ^ tovtwv ri ityvTevaas ; (Now did you actually plant any of these 
with your own hands ?). ^U yap; (is it not true ?). PI. Hipp. Min. 363, c.r) ydp, 
& 'lTnria,£dv ri ipccrqcre ^wKpaT-qs, airoKpivet ;^H ttov; (surely? surely indeed?). 
PI. Lysid. 207, d. t) tto v, i\v V iya>, Si Avert, ercpoSpa (piXet ere 6 irar^p Kal i) pA]Tr\p\ 
Udw ye, r) S' '6s. Still, r) ttov is also used when the inquirer would express 
doubt whether the actual existence of a thing is to be admitted or questioned. 
Eur. Med. 695.^ ttov rerSXpriK epyov aXo'x ia ' TOV T0 '^ e •' (has Jason indeed, 
actually dared this thing ?). 

(b) ~*Apa (only post-Homeric) originates from the inferential &pa, igitur 
[§ 324,3, (a)], and hence implies the idea of consequence, effect ; by frequent 
use, however, the appropriate meaning (igitur), becomes weakened and ob- 
scured : hence the inferential particles a pa, ovv are sometimes added to a 
question introduced by apa. *Apa leaves it undecided, whether the inquirer 
expects an affirmative or negative answer. Hence, when it is to be definitely 
Kdicated, that either an affirmative or a negative answer is expected, then in 



$ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 553 

the first case, ap ov (nonne), is used; in the last case, dip a /xr) (num, whether? 
is it not ?) ; fxr) always expresses solicitude, fear. X. C. 3. 6, 4. ap ecpr] 6 Sco/cpaV^s, 
u>sirep, cpi\ov oIkov el av^rjcrai flovAoio, irXovo-idorepov avrbv ernxeipoiris av Troirjcrai 
Udvv /xev ovv, ecpr]. 10,1. dtp a, ecpr], 8> JJappdcne, ypacpiKr) ecrriv r) elKacrlo 
rwv opw/xevcav ; — 'AAr)&r) Xeyeis, ecpr], 2. 6, 16. ap* ovv olcrSrd rivas, oj dvw- 
cpeAeTs 6vres wcpeAlfxovs Svvavrai cpiAovs rroieTcr&ai ; Ma Af ov Sr)r ecpr]. 3.13, 
3. ap' odv, ecprj, ko.1 olKerai o~ov 'dx^ovrai iflvovris re avrb kcu Kovofxevoi avrcd , 
Ma rbv At', ecpr) (profecto non aegre ferunt). 4. 2, 22. &p ovv Sia rrjv rod x a ^~ 
Keveiv a/xad lav rod ovSfxaros rovrov rvyxdvovaiv ; Ou Stjto. 1.5,4. apa 7e 
a v x? >( ] TravTCL dvdpa, r)yr)crdp.evov rrjv eyKpdreiav dperrjs elvai KprjirTda, ravrr,v 
irp&Tov ev rrj ^vx? KaracTKevdcracrbai , (nonne certe). 2.6,34. a pa. /xr] diafid\- 
kecr&ai Sevens vrr e/xov ; 4. 2, 10. ti Se St] fiovAo/xevos dyaSrbs yevecr&ai, ecpr], & Ev- 

bvSrifxe, crvAAeyeis ra ypdjx/xara ; — T Apa /xr] laroos ; ecpr] Kal 6 Ev&vdri/xos • 

Ma Ai", ecpr], ovk eycaye. 0. 4,4. dp a p-r? ouff\vv^afieif rbv TJepcrcov fSacriAea 
ixt/xrjcracr&ai ; Double question : PL Euthyphr. 9, e. a pa to ocriov, '6ri ocriSv ecrri, 
cpiAe?rai virb rcav 3-eaV, fj, on cpiAe7rai, ocriSv ecrri ; (is then that which is holy loved 
by the gods because it is holy, or is it holy because it is loved ?) 

(c) Mav (probably originating from p.r) and the confirmative ovv, § 316, 
Rem.), corresponds entirely to the Latin num, is it not ? is it so ? whether ? and 
hence always leads one to expect a negative ansAver. For the sake of perspi- 
cuity, the particles ovv and /xr) are often added, e. g. pa) v ovv, /x£>v lit). But 
if the negative ov is added to paV, then the question is affirmative (nonne). PL 
Lysid. 208, c. aAA 5 opx el T ' s <*ov ; "05e iraib*aywy6s, ecpr]. Mcvv SovAos &v ; (but 
not a slave, is he ?) Eur. Hec. 754. ri XPVP- 1 * pacrrevovcra ; p G>v eAev&epov alcava 
frea&ai ; paftiov yap earl croi. Hecuba answered : Ou S^ra* robs KaKovs Se rip.cc- 
povp.evr] alcava rbv ^v/xiravra SovAevcrai &eA<a. Eur. Andr. 82. /xccv ovv doKels 
voi cppovrlcrai rlv ayyeKoov ; PL Phaed. 84, c. ri, ecpr], vfxiv rot, Aex&eVra ; p. civ 
ur] SoKe? evSews Aeyeo-&ai ; — 'Ev ols ri XP*I V Toielv epe; fxav ou% airep eiroiovv ; 
(nonne, quod faciebam ?) 

(d) There is the same difference between ov and fxr) when used without 
Ipa, as when used with it, see (b) : i. e. ov is used in affirmative questions, Lir) in 
negative. Ovk e&eheis levai; (non or nonne vis ire 1 do you not ivish to go ?) PL 
Prot. 309, a. ov crv /xevroi 'Oprjpov eiraiver-qs el ; (are you not in fact an eulogist? 
on {xevroi, see § 316, Rem.). On ovkovv (nonne igitur) and oVkow (nonne 
certe) in a question, see § 324, Rem. 7. X. C. 4. 2, 10. efcAAa [xr] apxireicrcav 
PovAei yevecrStai; Ovk olv eycay , ecpr]. 'AAAa [xr] yecc/xerprfs iiri&vfxeTs, ecpr], 
yevecrSrai aya&os ; OuSe yeauerp-qs, ecpr\ ktA. 2, 12. /xr] ovv, ecpr] 6 Ev^vdri/xos, 
ov SiWpcu eyca to rrjs diKaiocrirvrjs epya e£r)yr)crao'&ai ; (shall I not be unable, etc. 1 
the negative ov belongs to the single word Svvca/xai). This interrogative /xr) is 
used very often in an indirect question, after expressions of considering, ash- 
ing, inquiring, of solicitude and fear. It appropriately means, whether not, but m 
Eng. can be often translated by that. X. C. 4. 2, 39. cppovriCw, fxr] Kpdricrrov 
>7 fxoi <riyav (lam anxious whether it is not best). For more examples of fxr) and 
also for the construction, see § 318, Rem. 6. 

(e) Elra and e ir ei ra, and more emphatically kx ra, Karreira, introduce 



560 syntax. [$ 344 

questions of astonishment, indignation, and irony. They express antithesis ol 
contrast, and yet, since they show that an unexpected conclusion has been 
drawn from a previous thought (§ 312, Rem. 8). X. C. 1. 4, 11. e§ ?<r&i, e<py,. 
bri, el vo[xi^oLjxL Seobs dv&panrow ri (ppovTi^eiv, ovk dv dfxeXoi-nv avTuv. 2. "Eire: t' 
ovk oiei (ppovTi^eiv ; oi irpcoTov fj.hu /xovov tcov £a>oov avSpwirov bp&bv dvecT-no'av ktX. 
(and yet do you not think that they do care for men 1 ?). Cy. 2.2,31. Kit-ire it a 
toiovtov ovra ov <piXe7s a\n6v ; 

(f) UoTepou (irSrepa) — % (Homer f\ — ^) is used like the Latin utrum — 
an, in direct and indirect double questions. Uorepop is sometimes omitted in 
•he first member. X. C. 2. 3, 6. /cat 6 'Zwicpdr-ns ecprj' Hot e pa 8e, & XaipeKpa- 
Tes, ovdevl dpeaai ZvvaTai Xaipecpwv, 3) effTiv oTs koX irdvv apeffKei ; Cy. 3. 1, 12. 
ti Se, %v X9^lt xaJa ToAAa exy, € '? s "nXovTelv, T] TrevnTa Troiels ; C. 1. 4, 6. Tavra 
ovtco irpovo7)TiK£>s Treirpay/j-eva, hivopeis, iroTepa Tvxns, '/) yv&ixns epya icrriv ; 

(g) V A AAo ti r\ (arising from tiAAo ti etm or yiyveTai, r\ or yevoiT dv, %) and 
'a Wo t i, has the same signification as nonne. X. An. 4. 7, 5. dX Xo ti -if) ovSev 
KuXvei irapievai ; (does anything else than nothing hinder = does anything hinder ?) 
PL Hipparch. 236, e. dXXo ti ovv o'L ye (piXoKepdeTs (piXovo-i to Kepdos ; 

(h) y H, like the Lat. an, is properly used only in the second member of the 
question ; but often the first member is not expressed in form, but is contained 
in what precedes or may be easily supplied from it. "H can then be translated 
by -perchance. X. C. 2. 3, 14. iravT 'dpa crv ye to. ev avSpunrois (piXTpa eirio-Toifxe- 
vos iraXai aireKpvTTTOv • 7} OKvels, e(p-n, dp£ai, fJ.7) alcrxP os ^ >a - v V s, > ^ v ' ir p6Tepos tqv 
db~eX(pbv ev Troirjs ; (= i) dpa — direupvirTOV, 77 oKveis — ;) 

(i) Ei and edv [with the Subj., comp. § 339, 2, II, (b)], whether, is used only 
in indirect questions, and, indeed, properly only in double questions, and de- 
notes a wavering or doubting between two possibilities ; but often only one 
member is expressed, while the other is present in the mind of the speaker. 
Hence el and edv are especially used after verbs of reflecting, deliberating, inquir- 
ing, asking, trying, knowing, and saying. The connection must determine whether 
the interrogative sentence has an affirmative sense (whether — not), or a nega- 
tive one (whether). X. An. 7. 3, 37. o-Ke\pai, el 6 'EXXrjvwv vo/jlos KaXXiov ex«, 
(whether — not). C. 1. 1, 8. ovre t<$ aTpaTrjyiKcp drjXov, el (whether) av/icpepei 
CTparriyelv' oijTe to> ttoXitiko) SrjXov, el (whether) av/x<pepei ttjs 7r6Xews 
nvpoaTaTelv ovTe t<5 KaXrjV yr]fj.avTi, 'Lv ev<ppaivr)Tai, hr\Xov, el (whether — 
not) Sid TavT-nv dvido-eTai, ovTe t$ SvvaTobs ev Trj iv6Xei KrjdecTTds Xa/36vTi StjXov, 
el (whether — not) Sid tovtovs aTep-r]creTai ttjs -iroXews. C. 4. 4, 12. aKexpai, edv 
Tode aol fxdXXov dpecricr). PI. Apol. 18, a. deofuai vp.u>v tovto) tov vovv irpose- 
Xeti/, el Micaia Xeyca, % /at). — On el after verba affectuum, see § 329, Rem. 7. 

Rem. 9. Very frequently, especially in Homer, verbs which express some 
action, are constructed with this deliberative edv with the Subj. and ei with 
the Opt. (Epic et Ke, a'i /ce), in which case a verb like GKO-rrelv, ireipdaSraiy 
is to be supplied by the mind. Th. 1, 58. UoTihaiaTai etre/ji^av /xev Kal iraf? 
'ASrivaiovs npeafieis, ei ttccs ize'ia eiav (having sent envoys to the Athenians [to see, 
to ascertain] whether they could persuade them). II. v, \T2.yXavKi6wv S' l&bs (pepe- 
Tai jxevei, ijv Tiva tt ecpvn dvdpwv. 

(k) EtTe — eiTe are used in indirect questions like e* — ^', except tliat 



f 344. j INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 561 

by efre — e'lre the indecision and hesitation of the speaker between two possi- 
bilities, are made more pi'ominent. S. Ant. 38. Kal Sei^eis rdxa, etr eiryej/^s 
ire<pvi<as, etr ecr^Aav naK-f], The poets also say efare — tf, or €4 — eiVe, or they 
omit the first e'lre altogether. 

6. On the use of Modes in interrogative sentences, tae fol- 
lowing points are to be noted : The Ind. is used in direct and 
indirect questions ; it is also used after /jlyj in indirect questions, 
when the interrogator wishes to express his conviction, that 
that which is the object of his anxiety or fear actually exists. 
The Subj. and Opt. are used in deliberative questions [$ 259, 1, 
(b), and 2] ; but the Opt. also (after an Hist, tense), when the 
question is to be represented as the sentiment of another (§ 345, 
4), and also when the question depends on a clause expressing 
a wish ($333, 5). The Opt. with av and the Ind. of the histor- 
ical tenses with av, are used as in principal clauses, § 260, 2, 
(2) and (4). 

Tt Key e is; (Also in questions expressing wonder or astonishment, the 
Greeks use the Ind., e. g. irws old a; (how could I know?) — Etire, '6ti\4 
yeis; Th. 3, 53. (pofiov/Aefra, (x)} afupoTepoov rj fxapT-ftKa/nev. X. Cy. 3. 1,27. 
opa, fify eKeivovs av de-fjo-ei <re aoxppovi^eiv %rt. fiaWov, ?} ri/xas vvv e§ei\crev. Ti 
el-ira iiev; (what can we say, what are we to say f) — Oujc olda, o ti eiirafiev 
(I know not what we can, shall say). Od. €, 473. deidw, firj &-fipe<r<rii/ eAwp Kal 
Kvpfia yevafiat (that I shall become). X. C. 4. 2, 39. (ppovrifa, fi}) Kpamarov 
y poi ffiyav (whether it is not best). Ovk elxov, ottoi r pairoi/xr}v. PI. Rp. 614, 
b. avafiaiovs eAeyev, a e'/ce? X5ot (what hehad seen there). ^Apd /xoi e&eAri^ais 
av elireTv (sc. e% ffe epwTyrjv) j X. An. 6. 1. 28. eKe?vo evvow, fi)} Kiav av raxv 
(ruxppov to-&eir]V. C. 4. 2, 30. irpbs ce &7ro)8A.e7ra>, el jaoi £&e\T)o~ais av 
£!-riyfio-ao-&ai (sc. el (SovAoio). — **Apd ae eiretcra &v (sc. ei, ffoi ravra e\e£a) ; 
(persuasissemne tibi?) X. Apol. 28. ffb 8e, & (piATare 'ATroAAodoope, [taAAov av 
efiovAov fxe opav 5iKalws, $) &5t/ca>s airo&vho~KovTa ; (vellesne?) Ovk old eX at 
e ire i or a 'dv. 

Hem. 10. On jj.7] (whether — not) with the Opt. after a principal tense, see 
§ 345, Rem. 2. On the Ind. of the principal tenses, and also on the Subj. af- 
ter an historical tense, see § 345, 5. When the Subj. is followed by an Opt., then 
the latter, as in final clauses (§ 330, 3), expresses the more remote thought. II. 
7r, 650, sq. (ppd^ero &vfx.cp . . p.epixT)pifav, >r) ^877 Kal Keivov. "EicTwp x a ^ K <? $V 6°"$ 
euro t &[jlwv T6u%e e A 77 rat, 3) en Kal irAt\oveao~iv 6<peAAeiev irSvov alirvv. 

7. The answer made to predicative questions by yes, is com- 
monly expressed by repeating the word which contains the sub- 
stance of the question. The answer made by no, is usually 
expressed by prefixing ov to the word which contains the sub- 
stance of the question. Yes is also expressed by vat', vy %a* 



562 syntax. '$ 345 

Aia, irdvv, Kapra, ev and the like, <prjpii, cprjfi i^ w, eyw with- 
out (ftrjfiC; and no, by ov,oi; ^77/At, ok eyw. Commonly also 
strengthening adverbs are joined with the words which answer 
a question: yi ($ 317, 2), e. g. cycoye, ouk eywye; yap ($ 324, 2), 
rot 317, 3), ixivroi (§ 316, Rem.), oZv [§ 324, 3, (b)], fiev- 
ovv (§316, Rem.). The answer to nominal questions is made 
by naming the object respecting which the inquiry is made. 

Eur. Hipp. 1395, sq. Spas fxe, Zicnroiv, us ex«, rhv &&\iov; — 'Op Si. lb. 90. 
sq. oT(r& ovv, fipoTotaiv bs KabiaT-qK^v v6fxos ,• — Ovk o!5«. X. C. 4. 6, 14 
<py s av a/xeivw ttoXIttiu ehui, %v <rv iiraivels, 7) bv iydo ; — Qij/xl yap oZv. 



§345. II. Oblique or Indirect Discourse. 

1. When the words or thoughts of a person, whether the 
second or third person or the speaker himself, are again re- 
peated, unaltered, in precisely the same form as they were 
stated by us or another person, then the discourse or thought 
quoted, being independent of any view or representation 
of the narrator, is called direct discourse (oratio recta), e. g. 1 
thought: peace has been concluded. The messenger an- 
nounced: peace has been concluded, — or without a preced- 
ing verb : peace has been concluded. 

2. When the words are not repeated in the precise form in 
which they were first spoken, but are referred to the rep- 
resentation of the narrator, and thus are made to depend 
upon a verb of perception or communication (verbum sen- 
tizndi or declarandi), standing in the principal clause, the 
discourse is called indirect {oratio obliqua), e. g. We believed, 
that peace was concluded. The messenger announced, that 

PEACE WAS CONCLUDED. 

3. The principal clauses of direct discourse, to which also 
belong clauses introduced by coordinate conjunctions, e. g. 
kcu, B4, ydp, ovv, kolltoi, etc., are expressed in oblique discourse, 
when they contain a simple affirmation or an opinion, and de- 
note something which happens, has happened, or will happen : 
(a) either by the Ace. with the Inf. (§307, 6), or by ort and 
ws with the finite verb (§ 329), or even by the participle [§ 310, 
4, (a)J, e. g. 'E7nyyye(Ae tovs 7roXe/xtovs airo^vyilv — ot( ol 



i 345.] OBLIQUE Oil IxMDIRECT DISCOURSE. 563 

TtoXijxioi <x7rocf>vyoL€V — tovs 7roAe/xtovs aTrocjivyovTCLs; when 
they express a command, wish, or desire: (b) by the Inf. and 
in continued oralio obliqua by Setv, xfiV VOLL with the Inf., more 
seldom by the Inf. alone., (§306), e. g. J 'EAe£e rots o-rpariajTais 
ezri^eo-^at rots 7roAe/xiois (oratio recta, inc^eaSe) . 

Remark 1. Intermediate clauses of the oratio obliqua, and particularly such 
as are connected with the preceding by yap, although they are grammatically 
principal clauses, frequently stand in oblique discourse in the Opt. without any 
conjunction to introduce them ; commonly a sentence expressed by oti or &s 
with the Opt. or by the Ace. with the Inf. precedes. X. An. 7. 3, 13. Z\eyov iroAAol 
Kara Tabrd y '6ti iraPTos 'ch^'jx Aeyoi 'Xev&rjS • x ei / x ^" / 7 a P e ^Vt kclI ovre o'//caSe airoir\e?v 
T6J fiovAo/xevco Zvvarcv e'tr), k. t. A. H. 3. 2, 23. airoKpiva/j.ei'ooi/ Se tuv 'HAe'icou, 
6tl ov TroiTjaeiav iavTa' iiriAri'idas yap ex olev TasTr6Aeis' (ppovpau ity-qvav oi 
ecpcpoi. 

4. The subordinate clauses of direct discc irse, undergo no 
change in indirect discourse, except that, after an historical 
tense in the principal clause, they take the Opt. in the place of 
the Ind. and Subj., when the indirect discourse is to be repre- 
sented as such, i. e. when the statement contained in the sub- 
ordinate clause, is to be viewed as the opinion or sentiment of 
the person spoken of, and not that of the narrator. "Av, which 
is joined with the Opt. and Ind. of the historical tenses, still 
remains in indirect discourse. 

X. An. 7. 1, 33. (KoipaTad-qs) eAeyev, oti erot/xos etr) r)ye?<T&ai avrols . . , ev&a 
iroAAa Ka\ dya&d \t\i\ioivto (oratio recta: eT0i/j.6s el/xi . . , ev&a Afyecr&e ) . Ag. 1, 
10. Tiffffatpepvrjs ci/xoffeu 'Ay^ffiAdu, el ffireiffaiT o, koos eA&oiev, ovs ire'/i.- 
^eie irpbs /SacrtAea ayyeAovs, Siairpd^eff^aL avT<$ dcps&ijvai avTou6jxovs tols eV t{j 
'Kffia ir6keis 'EAAr]vidas (oratio recta : iau ffireiffrj, kevs av eA&aiffiv, ovs ire/x^ci} . . 
8iaTrpd£o(j.ai). 

Rem. 2. "When, however, the subordinate clauses of direct discourse would 
be expressed by the Ind. of an historical tense, the Ind. remains even in indi- 
rect discourse, because the Opt. would leave it undetermined, whether in direct 
discourse the Ind. of a principal tense, or the Ind. of an historical tense had 
been used. X. An. 7. 7, 55. ol ffTparicoTai eAeyov, us HLzvocpuv oXx OLTO Tpbs ~2ev~ 
Si]v oU^ffwu Ka\ a u7re(r%6To avrcp aTroArjipS/xevos (oratio recta: a. o?x eTO "T^s 
2. a vtt effx*TO a-jroArjrpofxevos). X. C. 2. 6, 13. tficovffa, oti TlepiKAris TroAAa? 
(iirwdds) iiriffTaiTO, as iirddccv ttj irSAei iiroiei avTT)v cpiAeTi/ avTov (oratio recta: 
n. iitiffTaTai, as . . ino'iei). But subordinate clauses with oti (quod, quia) fol 
low the principal rule (No. 4). X. H. 7. 1, 34. e?xe (UeXoiriSas) Aeyeiy, us Acuce 
oaifx6vioi did tovto iroAeii-fiffetav avTciis (to?s Qrifiaiois), oti ovk i fre At] era i e i 
uet 'Ayr/ffiAaov iA&etv in o.vt6v (tov fiaffiAea), oratio recta: A. did tovto 4tto- 
A€/j.7]ffau, '6ti ovk r)^€A7]ffai/. The reason why the Greek avoids the Subj. in. 
indirect discourse after a principal tense, is, that it always uses its Subj. only 
with reference to the Future [§ 257, 1, (a)]. But the use of the Opt. after a 
principal tense is inappropriate, because this, as being the Subj. of the histor- 
ical tenses, always accompanies the historical tenses. There are, however, a 
few single examples, in which the Opt. follows a principal tense. But then a 



564 SYNTAX. [$ 34A 

thought is quoted as the sentiment of another, who, at the moment of quota- 
tion, is to be represented as one no longer present. Her. 7, 103. op a, fir) fidrt)> 
K6fj.TTos 6 x6yos 6 elpnfievos elr) (whether the statement made was not idle boasting) 
X. Cy. 2. 4, 17. dv ns eKelffe e^ayyeiXy 871,00 s eyu fiovXoifinv fieydXrjv &i)- 
pav iroiTJtrai (if any one announces there, that /intended). C. 1. 2, 34. el fiev 
yap (rrjv rcvv Xoycov rexvnv) &vv rols bp&ws (Xeyofievois elvai vo/j.i(ovres aTrexzoSai 
KeXevere), dr)Xov on acpeKreov eln rov bpSoos Xeyeiv {if you mean that philosophy 
is not to be used in reasoning right, it is evident that it was tour view, that ice 
jnust abstain from reasoning right). Hence if the Greek, after a principal tense, 
wishes to represent a statement as the sentiment of another person, it must use 
the Ace. with the Inf. instead of on with the Subj. Thus. e. g. the English 
phrase, He says that we are immortal, is not to be expressed in Greek by Xeyei, 
OTi i)fie?s dhdvaroi ibfiev, or on r). a&. elfiev, but by Xeyei r)fids d&avd- 
t on e tva 1. — In hypothetical Protases with el and the Ind., the Ind. remains. 

Rem. 3. The oblique discourse is sometimes used even in the subordinate 
clauses of direct discourse, when the speaker wishes to bring forward an ex- 
pression or thought, not in his own person, but as the sentiment of another. Her. 
7. 2. io~rao~'ia£ov (ol rralSes), 6 fiev "Aprafia{dvr)S, Karon irpeafivraros re 6^77 irais- 
rbs rod yovou, Kal on vofii^Ofieva ei 7] itpbs iravroov dv&pumwv, rbv 7rpea/3vrarov 
r)jv apxw eX eLU ' Hep£ijs Se, cos 'Aroaans re irals elr], Ka\ on Kvpos eXn 6 Krno-dp.- 
evos roiai Tlepcryai ry\v iXev^npivv. 

Rem. 4. When the Opt. of oblique discourse is used instead of the Subj. of 
direct discourse, all the conjunctions may be connected with dv. Th. 8, 54. /cal 
i\p7]<pio~avro irXevaavra rhv Heicavdpov Kal Sena dvSpas fier avrov Trpdaceiv, oirn 
dv avrols Soko Irj dpiara e^eiv. X. H. 2. 4, 18. 6 fidvns 7rapr)yyeiXev avrols, fir) 
rrporepov e7nri&eo~&aL, tv plv av rwv acperepcov 7) tt e c 1 ns, 1) rpwSelr). 5.4, 
47. iiceXeve irpoKaraXa^elv re &Kpov Kal (pvXarreiv, ecus av avrbs eX&oi. 

5. Very often, however, in Greek the oblique discourse takes 
the form of the direct, since even after an historical tense in 
the principal clause, the predicate of the subordinate clause is 
expressed by the Ind. of the principal tenses and by the Subj., 
as in direct discourse. The actions and representations be- 
longing to the past, are thus transferred to the present time of 
the speaker, and assume a more direct and definite character 
than if they were stated in the form of indirect discourse 
($ 327, Rem. 2). 

X. Cy. 2.2,1. del fiev ovv eir e fieXer 6 Kvpos, 6-rr6re crvaK7]vo7ev, tt o> s evxapW' 
roraroi Xoyoi i p. ^XvSrr) a vrai. Comp. § 327, Rem. 2. H. 2. 3, 2. e8o£e r$ 
S'/?,ua! rpiaKOvra eXeoSai, o'l robs rrarpiovs vofiovs £vyypdipov<ri,Ka&' ovs tto~ 
\irevffovai. Her. 1, 1G3. eKeXeve rr)s eavrov x<fy"? s oUe?v, okov fiovXov- 
rai. Th. 2, 4. oi UXarair]s e fiovXev ovr 0, etre Kar o/cow cr ov a iv, wsrrep 
<LX 0V0 ~ LV i ep-TTpveravres rb olK7)fia, el re n &XXo xpy&ovrai. 1, 107. £So|e 8' 
avrols GKe-tyaoSai, or 00 rpoircp do-cpaXearara 8 lair pev aovr at. Hei\ 1, 29. 
opKioiai fieyaXoiai Kar eix°vr 'A&iivawi, Se/ca erea xpV cre<7 ^ c '' L v6fioi<ri, robs & > 
crept ~2,6\cov Sr r) r a 1. X. Cy. 4. 5, 36. robs linzeas eKeXevae (pvXarreiv robs aya- 
yovras, e 00 s dv ns at)fidvn. H. 2. 1, 25. Avaavdpos 8e rds rax'^ras rwv veut 
eKeXevcrev kireaSrai ro7s 'A&r,vaiois ' eireihav 8e eK$G>a 1, KandSi ras '6 Tl 
voiovaiv, drroiTXe'iv. On on, ws [that), see § 329, 4 and Rem. 3. 



$346.] ELLIPSIS. BRACHYLOGY. 565 

Rem. 5. The Imperfect (seldom the Plupf.) Indicative, referring to the his- 
torical tense of the principal clause, is sometimes used instead of the Pres. 
(Perf.), in a subordinate clause which is associated with other subordinate 
clauses in the Opt. X. An. 1. 2, 2. Kvpos robs (pvydSas e/ceAeixre crbv avrep o~rpa- 
revea&ai, vTTOffxoiJ-evos avrois, el Ka\a>s Karaivpd^eiev, e</>' a e arparev er o, pvq 
irpoofira/ Travaaa&ai, irplv avrobs Karaydyot ofcaSe. (Oratio recta: eav Harare paty, 
e<£' a. crrparevofxai, ov -rrp. iravao/xai, rrplv av v/xas Karaydycc). Bat the Ind. is also 
used in the subordinate clauses of oblique discourse, when the narrator intro- 
duces his own remai-ks and explanations into the statement or thought of 
another, or when the thoughts in the subordinate clause do indeed belong to 
the statement or idea of another, but are to be exhibited as definite facts or as 
general truths, or when the thoughts of the other are to be represented, at the 
same time, as those of the narrator. In oblique discourse, the Ind. and Subj. 
are often interchanged with the Opt. Then there is a mingling of the direct 
and indirect discourse in order to form a contrast between the certainty, reality, 
fact, and directness expressed by the two former, and the uncertainty, possibility, 
mere conception, and indirectness denoted by the latter. X. An. 2. 3, 6. eKeyov 
on et/coTa SoKO?ev \eyeiv ySacriAe?, /cat T^KOiev riye/uovas exovres, °^ avrovs, 
eav at airovZaX yevcovrai, & poverty, ev&ev e^ovai ra iirirrideia. 3. 5, 13. 
'6/j.otoi i)o~av &avud£ovres, oiroi irore r pety ovrai oi "EWrjves, Kal ri ev v<£ 
exoiev. 

6. The Greek can also use the Ace. with the Inf. instead of 
the finite verb, in every kind of subordinate clauses. 

Her. 6, 117. dvdpa ol SoKeeiv oirXir-nv avrio-rr\vai fxeyav, rod (instead of ov) 
rb yeveiov rr]v acnrifta iraaau (TKid^eiv. 6, 84. ~2,Kvbas (sc. (paai) robs vo/xdSas, 
eirel re o~(pi Aape7ov i s fia\e?v is rrjv x<*>pr]V, fxera ravra /xe/xovevai fj.iv rto'ao'- 
&ai (postquam invasisset). Th. 4, 98. oVh&r)va7oi ecpaaav, el fiev eivnrXeop Svvtj- 
& rival rrjs eKeivcov KparrjcraL, rovr av exeiv (si ampliorem illorum agri paiiem in 
suam potestatem redigere possent se earn retenturos). See Larger Grammar, 
Part II, § 849. 

Rem. 6. The spirited mode of representation among the Greeks, and the 
desire to make past events appear as present, often changes the indirect dis- 
course into direct, or the direct into the indirect. In the first case, there is of- 
ten an interchange of person, comp. § 329, Rem. 3. X. Cy. 1. 4, 28. ivravfra 
877 rbv Kvpov ye\do~ai re e/c twj/ Trp6crhev darepvav Kal elire"iv avrw aruovra frapp'e'iv, 
or i irapecrai avrois bxiyov xp^vov &sre opav cr o i e^earai, Kav fiovXr], acrKap- 
Safivtcrei. On the contrary, An. 7. 1, 39. eX&kv 8e KAeavdpos' Md\a /xoXis, e<pr) t 
Ziarrpaldjxevos rjKca • Xeyeiv yap 'Ava£i{iiov, on ovk eTnr7}5eiov elr), k. t. A. 



III. Special peculiarities in the construction of 

WORDS AND SENTENCES. 

j 346. Ellipsis Brachylogy {Zeugma). Contraction. 
Pleonasm. 

1. Ellipsis is the omission of a sentence or a part of a sen- 
tence which is logically subordinate, and hence of less impor- 
tance, but viewed grammatically, must necessarily be supplied 
in order to express an idea or thought. The idea of the omit« 

48 



066 SYNTAX. [$ 346 

ted woid can only be of a very general and indefinite nature, 
and is frequently contained in the idea of the qualifying word, 
as, e. g. ol SvrjToi (sc. av$pa)7roL), rj avpiov (sc. rjfxepa), or is evident 
from the context or frequent usage, as e. g. in eh 8i$ao-K.dA.ov 
ievai. Jii like manner, the omitted sentence must express a 
general idea, and hence one which may be readily supplied, or 
one which is indicated by the context. The single instances 
of Ellipsis have been noticed in the course of the Grammar. 
See Index under Ellipsis. 

2. Ellipsis is to be distinguished from brevity of expression 
or Brachylogy. In Ellipsis, there is an actual omission of an 
element, grammatically necessary to express an idea or thought; 
but hi Brachylogy, there is not a real, but only apparent omis- 
sion of such an element, that element being in some way in- 
volved in the sentence or in a member of it. The simplest 
instances of brevity of expression have already been presented 
($ 319, Rem. 1). The following additional instances may here 
be mentioned : — 

(a) One form of a verb must often be borrowed from another. Th. 2, 11. 
(a^iovai) tt\v ran/ irc\as {yiw) dyovv 7) r)]V kavTwv bpav (sc. dnovfxevnv). 

(b) In antitheses, one member must often be supplied from the other. Dem. 
01. 3. 30, 17. iirpd£a/j.ev r,ixeis (sc. irpbs e/cetVows) /cal insivoi Trpbs 7}jxas elp-f]vnv. 

(c) From a negative word, an affirmative one must often be borrowed; this 
takes place most frequently, when an antithetic clause is introduced by an ad- 
versative conjunction. Her. 7, 104. 6 v6/xos avayei Twvrb ad, ovk iwu (pevyeiu 
ov5ev ttXyj&os auSrpwTrau e/c /J.dx"ns d\\a (sc. avwycov) fx4vovTas iv rfj ra|ei iirLKpa- 
reeiu, '/) a.Tr6hAv(r&cu. PL Apol. 36, b. dfj. e A 77 a as, wu ol iroKkoi (sc. iTU/xeXovv- 
rai). So from obh'ds the idea of ds or eKaaros is to be borrowed, as in the fol- 
lowing sentence,from ouS 1 ds, the subject of the first clause, ds or eVao-ros is to 
be borrowed as the subject of the second clause. PL Symp. 192, e. ravra anov 
<ras ovd' au efs QapvriSdri, ak\ y arex^s olorf av dx-nKoevai k. t. A. 

(d) From a following verb with a specific meaning, a verb with a general 
meaning must be borrowed, e. g. Tloidv, 4pyd(tcr$ai, yiyveo&ai, eluai, o-vfxfiaiveiu j 
This is the case in the expressions, ri aAAo 77, — ovdhv &\\o f\ — 6.W0 
t 1 ¥1, instead of ri aKKo -woid or tariv or the like, % oti. Th. 3, 39. ti d\\o 
qvtol, % iire^ovKevcav : 4. 14. ol Aa/ceSai^oVioi &\\o ovSev % 4k yr\s 4vavfj.d- 
Xow. 

(e) When two verbs connected together have a common object, even if they 
govern different Cases, the Greek usually expresses the o^'cct but once, and 
makes this depend on the nearest verb. Indeed, the object of a clause is not 
unfrequently transferred and made the subject of the lollowing clause, without 



§346.] ELLIPSIS. BRACHYLOGY. ZEUGMA. 567 

its place being supplied by a pronoun. X. O. 4, 8. r ovr o is /Aeu x^P av r h v »*•' 
\r\u Trposri^rjcr i Kal Sdvpois Kocr/Aei (sc. avrovs). PI. Gorg. 460, c. ov Se'i 
to?s TraiSoTpifiais ey KaKe'iv ouS 1 eftj8ttAA€i v (sc. avrovs) 4k rwvirokeuv. 
Up. 465, a. TrpeafivTspo) v ear e pcav irduraiv dpx^ lv re Kal Kokd(eiv (sc. 
avrovs) irposrerd^erai. Th. 5, 54. ('ApyeToi) 4 s efiakov is rrjv 'Eiridav piav 
Kal iSyovv ( sc. avr-fju). This case occurs most frequently where a partici- 
ple is connected with a finite verb. Th. 1, 20, t<£ 'linrdpxv ryv Tlavadri]- 
va'iK^v irof-LTTTiv diaKO(Tfj.ovvT i air eKreivav (sc. avr6v) (while Hipparchus 
loas arranging the Panathenaic procession, they killed him). lb. 144. tovtois 
air oKp ivdiiev oi airoir e /a ty a fA e v (sc. avrovs). But sometimes the Case is 
made to depend on the more remote finite verb. Th. 2, 65. oaov XP° V0V 
irpovcrrr) (TlepiK\T}s) rrjs iroXews . . , ao-cpaXws 8ie<pv\a£ev avri\u, Kal 4yevero 
(sc. avrr\) eV eKsivov /Aeytcrrr]. X. An. 2. 5, 24. ravra (Tiao-a<pepi/ris) elircbv eSo^e 
t<£ KAedpxV a\r)&?i \4yeiv, Kal etneu (sc. 6 KAeapxos). 

3. An important figure of Brachylogy is Zeugma, i. e. a con- 
struction in which a verb, that in sense belongs only to one 
subject or object, is connected with several subjects or objects. 
The verb, however, must always be of such a nature as to ex- 
press an idea which may be taken in a wider or more limited 
sense. 

II. y, 326. px : ^xdo-rw 'Utcol aepcriiro8es Kal voiKiKa revx* eKeiro (to lie, as 
well as generally to be in a place, to be in store). Her. 4, 106. 4o-&r)ra de (pope- 
oval 7177 2ku3-i/c77 o/Aoirju, y\&aro~av 8e 15it]u (they wear garments like the Scythi- 
ans, but have or speak a language of their own). A compound verb is often 
used in a pregnant sense, since along with the signification of the compound, 
the signification of the simple is at the same time to be included. Th. 1, 44. 
ol ' 'Afrrjvaloi pier eyvwcrav KepKvpaiois ^v/A/Aaxiai/ /at) Troi-f}crao~&ai (instead of p.e- 
reyvoxrav Kal eyvaaav) changed their minds and determined not to form an 
alliance with the Corcyraeans. 

4. Contraction in coordinate clauses has already been spoken 
of ($ 319, Rem. 1) ; this is more seldom in subordinate clauses, 
though frequent with those introduced by os7rep, wsTrep. 

Eur. Med. 1153. (pi\ovs vo ja'i^ovo^ ovsirep av trScns creSev (sc. vo/Ai^n). PL L. 
710, d. tcdvra ax^bv aire ipyacrr ai t<£ &e£ direp (sc. airepyd(erai) orav /3ov 
Arj3r7 Sia<pep6vru>s ev irpal-ai riva nv6\iv. So also el or etrrep ris or &\\os tis or 
efaep irov, eforep irore, etc. Her. 9, 27. tj/aiu ecrri iroXkd re Kal ed exovra, el reoi- 
ffi Kal &W010-1 'EWr\vo3V. 

5. Pleonasm is the use of a word, which, in a grammatical 
point of view, is superfluous, the idea conveyed by it having 
been already expressed in what precedes, either by the same 



568 syntax. [$347 

or by another word. The desire of perspicuity or emphasis is 
commonly the cause of Pleonasm. 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. o'l, ?)j> eV eKelvovs 7]{xels iAawafxev, vwoTefAovvTai rj/j.as efcel- 
vol. 3, 15. irtipdaoixai rep it air it a> ayabuiv iirirewv KpaTioros &v iTrirevs o~v[X[x,a- 
X^if a v t cf. 

Remark. Grammatical Pleonasm is to be distinguished from the rhetorical, 
which consists in the use of two or e\en more words of a similar signification 
to strengthen an idea or make it more palpable (a) A verb with an abstract 
substantive, as ixdxw /J-dx^cSrai, ir6xep.ov iroXe/xei ; — (/3) A verb with a partici- 
ple, as (pevywv e<pvye, dirov \iycav : — (7) An adjective with an abstract substan- 
tive in the instrumental Dat., as /xey&ei jxiyas, -rXri&ei iroXKoi ; — (5) An adjec- 
tive or adverb with an adverb (mostly poetic) as olo&ev ohs {wholly alone) ; — 
(e) Synonymous adverbs, as eb&vs -rapaxpwa, irdhiv av&is. ael trvvex&s ; — (£) 
The part is very often joined with the whole by Kai or -re, for the purpose of 
making the part prominent, as "E/cropt jue*/ Kai Tpcoai (Horn.); Zed ko.1 &eoi; 
'Afrnvaloi Kai 'IcpiKpdrrjs ; (77) For the sake of emphasis, the same thought is 
often expressed twice, once positively and then negatively, or the reverse, as 
Ae|« Trpbs v/xas Kai ovk a-roKpvipOfxai (Dem.) ; II. a. 416. eVet roi a!o~a fxiuw^d irep, 
avTi jxdKa 8V {since your life is short, and not very long). See Larger Grammar, 
Part II. § 858. 



$ 347. Contraction and Blending of Sentences. 
Anacoluthon. 

1. In the contraction of a compound sentence, sometimes 
the verb which is common to the principal and subordinate 
clauses, is placed in the subordinate clause and made to 
agree with the subject of that clause; in this way the two 
clauses are much more closely united, than in the common 
mode of contraction (§ 319, Rem. 1). 

X. Cy. 4. 1,3. avrbs olSa, oTos ^v to. fxhu yap &\Xa (scil. iiroUi) oVa7rep, ol/xai, 
Kai irdvTes v/j.g7s e 7r o i e ?t e. 

2. When a participle stands in a sentence with the finite 
verb, the parts of the sentence are frequently blended with 
each other, by making the substantive which would be gov- 
erned by the participle, depend upon the finite verb, as the 
more important part of the sentence. Comp. Larger Grammar, 
Tart II. $ 856, b. p. 609—611. 

Soph- El. 47. #77ei\.A.e 8' '6pKco irposT&ets, instead of #77eAAe iroosTi&els opKov. 
X. Cy. 1. 6, 33. onus trvv toiovtco efret i&icr&ii>Tes TrpaoVepct i-o\7rai yevoiv 
to ; edet is here governed by avu and connected with yivoivio, instead of being 
in the Dat. depending on edj<r&eVrey, which would have been the natural con- 
etruction. X. Cy. 7. 1. 40. ovtoi 8e zireib'r) t]t-ooovvto, kuk\u> irdvToSev noir) 






$ 347.] CONTRACTION OF SENTENCES. 569 

ffd/xevoi, &sre dpaa&at ra, oirAa, virb reus ao"Ficriv ind^rivro (instead of kvkXov 
irofqffdfxevoi. iicd&r}vro). 2. 3, 17. ro?s 5' erepois elirev, '6ri (iaAAeiv Se^voi aval- 
povfxe vovs ra7s fi&Aois. 

3. A very common mode of blending the principal with the 
subordinate clause, in the manner of attraction, and one which 
belongs to almost all kinds of subordinate clauses, consists in 
transferring the subject of the subordinate into the principal 
clause, and making it the object of the principal clause. 
(Comp. nosti MarceUum, quam tardus sit, instead of quam 
tardus sit Marcellus). 

Her. 3, 68. ovros irpwros vir 6irrevo~e rbv Mayor, ws ovk efy 6 Kvpov 2,uep- 
8 is (he first suspected the Magian, that he was not Smerdis the son of Cyrus = sus- 
pected that the Magian was not, etc.). 80. eXSere r\v Ka/xfivaew vfipiv, eV 
oo- ov iire^rjX^e {see the insolence of Cambyses what a pitch it reached = see what 
a pitch the insolence, etc.). 6,48. ane-ire ipar o rwv 'E\K-f]vcav, '6 ri eU vw 
exoiev. Th. 1, 72. rrjv acperepav ir6\iv ifiovXovro ff7]p.atveiv, '6o~i] e'fy Svva- 
(xiv. X. Cy. 5. 3, 40. ol dpxovres avrcov iiri/xeKeio-froov, oirws avaKevao-ixevot 
Siai iravra. In the same way also, when the subordinate clause forms the ob- 
ject of a substantive in the principal clause, the subject of the subordinate 
clause is frequently transferred to the principal clause, and is put in the Gen., 
as the object of that substantive. Th. 1, 61. ^A&e Se teal rots "A8rr\vaiois ev&vs 
7] ayyshla rwv ir6\ecov, on a<ps<Traai (the report immediately reached the 
Athenians respecting the cities, that they had revolted = the report reached the Athe- 
nians, that the cities had revolted). 97. a/xa 5e ml rrjs apxys aw6detl;iv e^e: 
rrjs rwv 'A&rjvaicav, iv o'iw Tpoirw Kariart]. So also a substantive on which an 
Inf. depends is often attracted by the verb or substantive which governs the Inf 
Th. 3, 6. ttjs &aAdo~o~7)s elpyov fxr] XPV '^ 1 tows Mtrv\r]valovs. 5, 25. 
4iri&vp.ia rwv a.vh'pwv rwv e/c rrjs yr}o~ov Ko/xiaaa^ai. PI. Crit. 52, b. ouS' 
£iri&vp.la ce aWrjs iroKews, ouS' &Wwv v6/xwv eAafiev — et'SeVcu. 

4. The principal clause is frequently blended with the sub- 
ordinate clause, by making the former, as a substantive- 
clause introduced by ore or cos, or still more frequently, as a 
substantive-clause expressed by the Ace. with the Inf., depen- 
dent on the subordinate clause. 

X. An. 6. 4, 18. ws yap iyw ^Kovad rivos, ori K\eav8pos e'/c Bufavriov e.p- 
p-oar^s fieXXei ri^eiv (instead of ws iJKovaa, K\. (xsWei 5}|eu/), for as I heard 
from some one, that Cleandros is about to come, etc. = for Cleandros is about to 
come, as I heard from some one. Her. 1, 65. wj 5' avroX AaKefiai/xSvioi Xiyovai 
Avuovpyov iirirpoTrevaavra e/c Kprjrrjs ay ay e cr&ai lavra. 3. 14. ws 
5i \eyerat vir Alyvirricov, Sa/c pveiv [ikv Kpotc ov. 4.5. ws 8e 2/cuidaj 
\iyovffi, v ecir arov airdvrwv i&vewv elvai rb v<per e pov. 

48* 



O70 SYNTAX. [$ 348 

o. Anacoluthon (from a privative and aKokovSos, -ov,folloiving) 
is a figure used to denote a change in the construction. It 
takes place when the construction with which the sentence 
begins, is not continued through it, but changed into another, 
which grammatically does not correspond with the former, but 
logically, i. e. in relation to the signification and meaning, is 
like or similar to it. The cause of Anacoluthon may be attrib 
uted to the vivacity of representation among the Greeks, or to 
their desire of perspicuity, brevity, strength, or concinnity (pro- 
priety or keeping) of discourse. There are two kinds of Ana- 
coluthon: (a) grammatical, (b) rhetorical. There are also in- 
stances where it evidently originates from carelessness and in- 
attention. The grammatical Anacoluthon, which is, for the 
most part, caused by attraction, has been treated in several 
places in the course of the grammar. Only two instances of 
the rhetorical Anacoluthon, need now be mentioned : — 

(a) A very natural and frequent instance of Anacoluthon is, where the word 
/fhich gave rise to the whole thought of the sentence, is placed as the logical 
subject in the Nom. at the beginning of the sentence, but after the interruption 
of the sentence by an intermediate clause, is made the grammatical object of 
the verb of the sentence. X. Hier. 4, 6. usirep ol a&\7]Tal ovx, orav ISicaruv 
yevwurai KpeiTTOi/es, rovro avTovs evcppaivei, ctAA.' orav t&u avrayoiVKTTwv y'lrrovs, 
tovt at/robs aviS, (instead of tovtw eiuppalvovrai — avi&vrai), as the athletes, when 
they are superior to common men, this does not elate them, but when they are inferior tc 
their competitors, this gives them pain = as the athletes are not elated when, etc. 

(b) In order to make the contrasted ideas in a sentence prominent or em- 
phatic, they are often placed in the same form at the beginning of their respec- 
tive sentences, although the natural construction of each would necessarily be 
different. PI. Phaedr. 233, b. roiavra o epws iiriSe'tKVvrai • Svstvxovut as 
ueu, a /XT] KviT-nv to?s aWois izapex^h aviapa iroie? vofxifciv, ev.Tvxovuras Se 
Kal ra (XT) Tjdovrjs a^ia trap iKtivoov iiralvov kvayna^ei rvyxdueiu (instead of Trap 
evTvxovvTow 5e Kal ra. /at) 7]Sovt)s a^ia irralvov avayKa£ei rvyxo-v^v, or evTvxovvraj 

■e nal ra jxt) t)S. #|. iiraij/du auayKa(ei). 



CHAPTER X. 

$348. Position of Words and Sentences. 

1. The intimate relation between the members of a sentence 
ind between one sentence and another, and the connection of 



$348.] POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. £71 

these so as to form one thought or idea, are expressed as has 
been seen, partly by inflection, or by formal words (§ 38, 4) 
which supply the place of inflection, partly by the accent and 
position of the members of a sentence and of the sentences 
themselves. As the accent can be made prominent only in 
living discourse, and commonly agrees with the position, only 
the position needs to be treated. 

Remark. The position of particular parts of speech, as the pronouns, 
prepositions, etc., has already been stated, in the sections where these are 
treated. See the Index under Position. 

2. There are two kinds of position : the usual or grammati- 
cal, and the rhetorical or inverted. The first denotes the 
logical and grammatical relation of the members of a sentence, 
and of the sentences themselves to each other, and the union 
of these in expressing a single thought or idea; the second 
makes one member of a sentence, which is specially important, 
more prominent than the other members, by giving to it a posi- 
tion different from the usual or grammatical order of the words. 

3. The usual or grammatical position of the words in Greek 
is the following : — 

The subject stands first in the sentence, the predicate last; 
the copula el fit stands after the predicative adjective or sub- 
stantive ; but the attributive follows its substantive ; the object 
is placed before the predicate; the objectives, i. e. the qualify- 
ing statements or circumstances, are so arranged, that the most 
important one is placed immediately before the predicate, and 
the other objectives precede this, following each other in such 
order as they would naturally be joined to the first objective, 
the one suggesting itself last to the mind being placed before 
one already existing ; or in other words, the broader limitation 
usually precedes the narrower, the less necessary, the more 
necessary. 

Kvpos, o fiacriAevs, KaAoos aTri&avsv. Kvirptoi irduv irpofrv/ncos avry ffweaTpaTtw 
aav. Ileus fxeyas — avrjp aya&os — 6 irais 6 /xeyas — 6 av)]p 6 aya&os — 6 Trots 6 
rod Kupov — 6 iroA^fios 6 npbs robs Hepcras. But the Inf. or the Ace. with the 
Inf. and the Part, follow the governing word. See the examples under §§ 306. 
307, 310. Oi "EAArjves robs Ilepffas iviKf\aa.v. Ot "EXKt\vzs iu Mapodwi robi 
Ucpaas iviKt\aa.v. OVEAk-qves ravrij rfj rj/xepa iv Mapa&wvi robs Uepaas £viicr)o~av. 
Jxi this* way, the ad\ erb of place and time commonly precedes the causal ol> 



572 syntax. [$ 348. 

ject (t6t€ or Tavrtj rrj rnxspa tovs U. iviK7]o-av), the personal object orecedes 
that denoting a thing, so the Dat. the Ace. (rbv iraiha t\\v y pan/Mar ik)jv StSdV/fw 
— Tiif TratSt to fiifixiov 5l8co/xi), the adverb of time the adverb of place (tots of 
TavTj} T7j yfj-epa, iv Mapa&wvi tovs U. iviiaqcrav). The adverb of manner, even 
when another word is the principal objective, usually stands immediately be- 
forc the predicate, e. g. ol "EAAyves TavTT) rfj r]p.epq iv Mapa&wvi tovs Tlepcas 
KaAa s iviKTiaau. 

4. The position of subordinate clauses corresponds with the 
position of the words (substantive, adjective, adverb) whose 
place they take in the sentence, i. e. the adjective-clause, for 
example, occupies the place which the adjective would take; 
and so of the others. 

PI. Phaed. 50, e. 6 &vpwp6s, o strep tlw&ei viraicovz iv, eiire irepifxivziv. 
X. Cy. 3. 2, 3. o 8e Kvpos, iv cp a we Xeyo vr o, i&vero' iirel Se Kaka i\v 
Th lepa avTcZ>, avveKakeae tovs re ru>v Hepacov 7)ye/j.6vas kclI tovs to>v M^Swv. 
'ETret Se SfMov ^ffav, eAe£e ToiaSe. Yet the substantive-clauses, even when 
they express the grammatical subject, stand after the governing verb. Ibid. 1. 
4, 7. oi 8' eAeyoy, '6t i &p kt o i irokkov s ^8e ttKt] cr ida olvt as Si ecp&ei- 
oav. 

5. In the rhetorical or inverted 1 position of words, the predi- 
cate is placed before the subject, the attributive before the sub- 
stantive to be denned, but the objective, particularly the adverb, 
is placed after the predicate. 

'Aya&bs o h.vt\p. 'O /3a cr i Ae vs Kvpos. 'O -irpbs tovs Tl4po~as ir6\e/j.os. 
'E/j.ax£0~a,VT0 Kakus. Th. 2, 64. (pipeiv Te xph T£ * Te SoaptSvia av ay Kaico s, ra 
Te airb tcov irokefiioov a v S p e i a> s. 

6. When the subject is to be specially distinguished, it is 
placed at the end of the sentence ; and when two words in the 
same sentence are to be made emphatic by their position, one 
is placed at the beginning, the other at the end of the sen- 
tence, e. g. UaaCjy aperwv rrye/xwv iartv f] evcrefieLa. Gener- 
ally, both the first and the last place in a sentence is considered 
emphatic, when words stand there, which, according to the 
usual arrangement, would have a different position. 

7. Inversion is still more frequent in subordinate clauses 
than in the case of the words whose place they take, perspi- 
cuity often rendering such an inversion necessary. Snbstan- 

1 This inverted position is a species of Ilyperbaton, a construction by which 
the natural order of words and sentences is inverted. 



f 34 8.]- position of words and sentences. 573 

tive-clauses with on, <ws (that), and final substantive-clauses, 
are placed before the governing verb, when the ideas they 
express are to be brought out prominently. 

"On fieyas e/c fiiKpov 6 QiAtinros yvfyrai, irapaAeityw. — "iva. aa(p4crTepov 8r]Aa)$f) 
nacra r) Uepcrwu iroAirda, fjuupbv eVave^. The inversion of adjective-clauses 
(hv eides 'dvSpa, ovtSs iffnv) has been already treated, § 332, 8. Inversion is 
not used in adverbial clauses of time and condition, since these, according to 
the common position, usually precede the principal sentence. 

8. When a word in a subordinate clause is to be made more 
prominent than the others, it is sometimes placed before the 
connective word (relative, etc.) which introduces the clause, 
e. g. roiavr eort /cat raXA.a, irepi ifxov aoi 7roAAoi Xiyovcrtv. 

9. A means of rendering a word specially emphatic by posi- 
tion, is the separation (Hyperbaton) of two words which would 
be naturally connected together, as forming one thought, by 
introducing one or more less important words between them 
By this separation, only one of the two words is commonly 
made emphatic, though often both even, especially when botli 
stand in an emphatic part of the sentence. 

Dem. Phil. 3, 110. iroAAwv, & dvSpes 'A^Tj^aTot, A6yuv yiyvo/xeuoou. X. S. 1, 
4. ol/xai cilv ttoAv av r^v KaTacrnevfiv uoi AapLirporepav (pavfjvat (instead of rroAv 
ha/xirpoTepau.) This separation (Hyperbaton) very often takes place even in sen- 
tences as well as in case of words. This consists in placing the principal 
clause, as the one less important, within the subordinate clause, and thereby, in a 
logical point of view, making it secondary to the subordinate clause. PI. Prot. 
331, d. rb yap Aevubv t$ fxeAavi iffTtv oirr) irposeouce (instead of effriv yap ony 
rb XcvkSv, etc.). X. C. 3. 11, 10. (piAeiv ye [ifyv eu &TS' Sri iiriaTcurai (instead of 
eS o?S' otl (pihsiv, etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 53. &sTe irepl fiei/ -njs eV TO?s"EAAr](ri Suva- 
are'ias ovk o?8' ottoos &u tis o-acpeo-Tepov iiri8e?£cu Swn&elr). Dem. Phil, ouioi p.h 
yap &pxovTes ov iroAvs xpovos e| ou . . ^Afrov. 

10. Ideas that are alike or similar, or especially such as are 
antithetic or opposite, are made emphatic in their position, by 
being placed near each other. 

Thus ai/rbs ainov, etc. e. g. r] irdAis avr^ irap avrrjs Slicnv Xfyeiai. 
X. Hier. 6, 2. £vvrjv /xeu rjAiKiwrais 7]S6fxevos r]5o /xevo ts ejxoi. PI. L. 934, d. 
liaivovrai ttoAAoi woAAovs Tp6irovs. Hence, &AAos &AAo, alius aliud. 
&AAos &AA0&1, alius alibi, &AAos &AAo<re, alius alio, &AAos HAAofrev, 
alius aliunde, &AAos #AA.t?, alius alia (sc. via), etc., of which the English 
makes two sentences, the one did this, the other that, etc. 



APPENDIX A 



VERSIFICATION. 

§349. Rhythm,, Metre, Arsis and T.tesis. 

1. Rhythm (pvS-fxos) is the harmony produced by the alternation of 
long and short syllables, accompanied by the recurrence of an emphasis 
at intervals ; when the emphasis occurs at fixed intervals, the rhythm be- 
comes meter, each one of the intervals forming a metre or measure. 

2. The emphasis with which particular parts of a verse are pro- 
nounced, is called the Arsis, and the corresponding weaker tone with 
which the other parts are pronounced, the Thesis. The former implies 
an elevation of the voice with an accompanying stress (§ 29. 1.), the latter, 
a depression of the voice. The terms Arsis and Thesis are also trans- 
ferred to the particular syllable or syllables on which they rest, and 
hence the syllable on which the emphasis falls is called the Arsis. The 
Arsis is often called the metrical ictus, or merely the ictus. 

3. The Arsis is naturally on the long syllable of a foot ; consequently 
in the spondee ( — ) and the tribrach (~ ov -), the place of the Arsis can 
be determined only by the kind of verse in which they are found. In 
every verse, the original foot determines the place of the Arsis in all the 
other feet which are substituted for it. Hence, as the second syllable of 
an iambus is long, and as the Arsis naturally falls on the long syllable, 
the spondee in iambic verse would have the Arsis on the second syllable, 
thus — ' ; so also in anapaestic verse. But as the first syllable of the 
foot is long in the trochee and dactyl, the spondee in trochaic and dac- 
tylic verse takes the Arsis on the first syllable, thus - - . Again, as a 
short syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, and as in a long 
syllable the emphasis or ictus necessarily falls on the first of the two 
Units composing this long, it is evident that, in iambic verse, the tribracb 



! JJ-50.J VERSIFICATION. 575 

would take the Arsis on the second syllable, thus w u w ; and in trochaic 
verse on the first. So where the dactyl takes the place of the spondee 
with the Arsis on the last syllable, the arsis of the dactyl is on the first 

short, thus -- w ; but where the anapaest stands for the spondee (-' -), its 

Arsis is on the first short, thus - w — . 

$ 350. Metrical Feet. 

1. The portions into which every verse is divided, are called feet 

The feet are composed of a certain number of syllables, either all 
long, all short, or long and short together. 

A short syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, every short 
syllable being one mora or time, and every long one two morae. 

The feet used in poetry may be divided, according to the number of 
syllables, into four of two syllables, eight of three, and sixteen of four 
syllables. 

The dissyllabic feet are four : 

« « Pyrrhich 1 (tvttov) 

Spondee (tu7ttoo) 

" - Iamb (tvttwv) 
- u Trochee (rv-n-re) 

1 Derivation of names of feet. — Pyrrhich. This was so called from 
the celebrated war-dance (irvppixri). in which it was used, as being rapid and 
energetic. — Iamb. From idirrw, to abuse; because Archilochus the inventor 
used it in violent invectives. — Trochee. From Tp4x&, to run ; because of its 
running, saltatory style. — Tribrach. Tp\s Ppaxvs, because consisting of three 
short syllables. — Spondee. So called, because it was used iv reus cnrovdcus, in 
sacred rites, from its slow, solemn sound. — Dacti/l. 'Anb rod 8a.KTv\ov ; because 
it is, like the finger, composed of one long joint and two short ones. — Ana- 
paest. From avcaraiw, to strike back ; because the Ictus was contrary to that of 
the Dactyl. — Amphibrach. 'A/j.<p\ Ppaxvs ; becaxise the short syllables are on 
each side of the long one, (an$i) — Cretic Because much used by the Cretans. 
— Bacchlns. Used in the Dithyrambic Games in honor of Bacchus. — Antibac- 
chlus. The converse (avri) of the former. — Proceleusmatic. From KeXevapa, the 
boatswain's call or command; because rapidly uttered. — Paeons. Because 
used in the Paeonic Hymns. — Choriamb. Trochee or Choree -j- Iamb. — An- 
tispastus. 'Ai/THTirdoa, to draw to the opposite side ; because, being converse of 
the former, it appears to draw the Trochee to the other side of the Iamb. — 
Ionicus a majore, Ionicus a minore. Feet much in use with the Ionians ; a majore, 
when beginning with the long syllables ; a minore, when beginning with the 
short ones. — Epitrite. Most probably from iirl and rp?ros ; because, in addition 
to (iirl) the 3d syllable, it has a short one over. — The Diiamb is an Iambic 
tiyzygy, admitting the Spondee in the first place. — The Ditrochee is a Trochaic 
syzygy, admitting the Spondee in the second place. 



676 VERSIFICATION. f$ 350. 

The trisyllabic are eight : 

" u w Tribrach (zrvirov) 

Molossus (rwrco/Aat) 

•* w - Anapaest (reru<£tos) 

— ° ° Dactyl (rvTrrere) 

— - « Amphibrach (erv/rov) 

— w — Cretic (rv7TTOfxo.L) 
w — Bacchius (Tt)7r^T(jo) 

w Palimbacchius (rvTrr^Tc) 

The trisyllabic are sixteen : 

.. M v, - Proceleusmatic (erv7r€ro) 

Dispondee (Tvcf>3erfTr)v) 

'?.■**■■* — Diiamb (ervTrro/x^v) 

— * — * Ditrochee (rvTrrijuicrav) 
" " Antispast (irvcfySrjrov) 

— " w - Choriamb (ru7rTo/xei/ot;) 

" ~ Ionicus a minori (ercTtyx/x^j/) 

— w w Ionicus a majori (Tv\J/ai[jLc$a) 
_ ~ « v/ £ rs (; Paeon (ru7rro/xevos) 

~ - « w second Paeon (e-nJ7rTere) 
y w - " third Paeon (£t£tv\]/o) 
w w w - fourth Paeon (€Tt)7ro/x^v) 
w first Epitrite (ZTVxj/aoSrjv) 

— " second Epitrite (ai Ti>7rc{)o-ai) 

— w - third Epitrite (tik/^o-o/xcu) 
" fourth Epitrite (rvcfaSeLTjcrav) 

2. Simple metres are formed by the repetition of simple feet; com* 
pound, by combining the simple feet with each other. 

Simple feet consist of but one Arsis, and one Thesis, e. g. * ", ~ w «, 

***"", -^ — 4 ", etc. 

Compound feet consist of two Arses and Theses, of which one Arsis 
and Thesis, taken together, is considered as a single Arsis or Thesis, e. g. 



Of the simple feet, only those which have a long syllable in the Arsis 
and a short one in the Thesis, give natural variety, e. g. — ", - ■ w w , v — , 
*"-'. Hence the trochee and dactyl, the iamb and anapaest, are consid- 
ered as the fundamental feet of all rhythm. The other feet may be 



$ 351.] VERSIFICATION. 57? 

combined with these by resolving a long into two short syllables, or by 
contracting two short into one long syllable. 

4. Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic verses are not measured by single 
feet, but by dipodies, or pairs of feet, two feet being necessary to make 
an independent metre or dipody. Hence, four iambs make an Iambic 
dimeter, and six an Iambic trimeter. Dactylic verse, on the contrary, 
is measured by the single feet ; six dactyls, therefore, form an hexameter, 
and five a pentameter. 



§ 351. Caesura. 

Caesura (a cutting) is the separation, by the endng of a word, of syl- 
lables metrically connected, — or the cutting of a metre by the ending 
of a word, before the metre is completed. 

Remark 1. The design of the Caesura is to give variety and harmony to 
the verse ; for if each metre or foot terminated with the end of a word, there 
would be only a constantly recurring monotony. But the Caesura, by pre- 
venting a uniform coincidence between the ending of the metre or foot, and the 
ending of a word, promotes the variety, beauty, and harmony of the verse. It 
is not inconsistent, however, with the rhythm of the verse that the ending of 
the foot and the word should sometimes coincide ; this coincidence is called 
metrical Diaeresis. The principal Diaereses are after the first, second, third, 
and fourth foot. 

fiff&iov | avrap 6 | ro7<nv cupeiAero \ v6(ni\xov \ iuxap. 

There are three kinds of Caesura ; 

1. Caesura of the foot. 

2. Caesura of the rhythm. 

3. Caesura of the verse. 

(1) Caesura of the foot is where the word ends before a foot is com- 
pleted. 

Ni/07 | eras iSe J A.ct errvye | pi]t/ e/xe | ot/cao' | ay&sB- * 
In this line there is a Caesura of the foot after each of the syllables eras, 
ka, prjv, and /caS\ Only two cases of this Caesura can occur in a dac- 
tyl ; for the word either ends after the Arsis, - | w ", and forms the mas- 
culine Caesura, or in the Thesis, - v | v , and forms the feminine or trochaic 
Caesura. Thus the Caesuras after eras, A.« and p-qv are masculine, that 
after otKaS' is feminine or trochaic. 

(2) The Caesura of the rhythm is where the Arsis falls on the last 
syllable of a word, and thus separates the Arsis from the Thesis. In the 
line above quoted, the Caesura of the rhythm occurs after the syllables 
a-as, A.« and p-qv, the Arsis falling on each of these and being separa 

4 9 



578 VERSIFICATION. [§ 352 

from the following Thesis by the Caesura. This Caesura can take plac« 
only in such feet as have the Arsis on the first syllable. 

(3) The Caesura of the verse is a pause introduced to render the re- 
citation more easy. This is also called the Caesural pause, and divides 
the verse into two parts. 

In several kinds of verse this Caesura has a fixed place ; this is the 
cane in the Trochaic, Iambic, and Anapaestic tetrameter, which have their 
natural Caesura at the end of the fourth foot. See under these verses 
below. Other kinds of verse may have more than one Caesura, the 
place of which is not fixed. In Hexameter verse, however, the Caesura 
of the verse more usually occurs after the Arsis of the third foot. Thus, 

KiAAcxv Te 'C,o.-ji;jV i || TeveSoto re T<£i a/l-Tcec^, 
or in the Thesis of the third foot, thus, 

Kat tots Srj Sapcrrjcre, || koI yjvSa [xavris a^vfjuxiv. 

Rem. 2. The three kinds of Caesura often occur together ; for example, 
after the syllable 77 f of £c£r£riv, there is the Caesura of the foot, of the rhythm, 
and of the verse. 



§ 352. Different kinds of Verse. 

1. A verse is often named from its predominant foot. Thus Dactylic 
verse is so called, because the dactyl is the predominant foot, and Iambic 
verse, because the iamb is the predominant foot ; so Trochaic, Anapaestic, 
etc. Verses are also named from their inventors, as the Sapphic, from 
Sappho, Alcaic, from Alcaeus, etc. ; likewise from the kind of composi- 
tion in which they are used, as the Heroic, used in describing the 
achievements of heroes, also from the number of measures, as monometer, 
dimeter, trimeter, hexameter, etc. 

2. A verse is called acataleclic, when it has its full number of feet or 
syllables, as trimeter iambics, ~ — ~ — | w — "" - | v — « — . A verse is called 
catalectic, when one or two syllables are wanting to complete the verse, 
as the trimeter, - - - _ | - - - - | - - - . In dactylic verse, if the last foot 
wants one syllable, the verses are called catalectic on two syllables, e. g, 
_'v--_w_>-j if two syllables are wanting, catalectic on one syllable, e. g. 
.'-.vv., Verses in which the last dipody (a pair of feet) wants an 
entire foot, are called br achy catalectic, e. g. -— T-— |- — - — |- — . Verses 
which have one or two syllables more than enough, are called hypercala- 
lectic, e. g. ~-~-|--~-|~- w -~. 

Remark. When the regular rhythm ot a verse is preceded by an unero 



W 353—355.] versification. 573 

phatic introductory syllable, such syllable is called an Anacrusis, an upward or 
back beat; when there are two such syllables, forming an introductory foot, 
they are called a Base. The anacrusis and base belong to lyric verse. 



§353. Vie iv of the different kinds of Verse. 

The most usual kinds of verse are those which consist of the repeti- 
tion of the same foot. Of these the most frequent are the Dactylic, Iam- 
bic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic. 

§ 354. Dactylic Verse. 

The fundamental foot in this verse is the dactyl, the place of which 
may be supplied by a spondee. 

§ 355. Hexameter. 

The Hexameter was employed by the Greeks at an early period, and 
is the metre of Epic or Heroic and Pastoral poetry. 

The Hexameter consists of six feet ; the fundamental foot is the dac- 
tyl, the verse being formed by five repetitions of the dactyl with a dis- 
syllabic catalectus. The sixth foot is usually called a spondee ; but when 
the last syllable is short, it may be considered a trochee. 



In each of the first four feet, a spondee may take the place of the dac- 
tyl. The fifth foot is regularly a dactyl ; but sometimes it is a spondee, 
and the line is then called a spondaic line, as 

Ov yap iya) Tpcoojj/ eveK r)\v$ov a.l^p.rjrdoiV. 

- .-i --i - --j_ - i — i--. 

The principal Caesura in Hexameter verse occurs after the Arsis or in 
the Thesis of the third foot, and is called the Penthemim ; sometimes also a 
Caesura occurs after the Arsis of the fourth part, which is called the 
Hephthemim. This Caesura in the fourth foot is commonly preceded by 
one in the second foot, which is called the Triemim. The Caesura oc- 
curring at the end of the fourth foot is called the Bucolic Caesura, from 
its use in pastoral poetry 

AAA' 6 fxev At$to7ra<> 1 1 /xereKia^^ rrjX.oS' iovras 

AvSpa }XOl €VV€7T€, M-OVaa, 1 1 TToXvTpOTTOV O? jU,aA<X 7ToAAa 

*H Atas 1 1 rf 'iSopcevevg 1 1 t) Stos 'OBvcrcrevs 
Hye//,oV<ov, 1 1 ootis ol aprjv 1 1 krapoicriv dpWt 
Mi//.ra£av irapa vnval Kopwvio-iv, \\ ov ol hretra. 



580 VERSIFICATION. [$$ 356, 35? 

The beauty of Hexameter verse is promoted by varying the feet by 
an interchange of dactyls and spondees, and by introducing these in dif- 
ferent places in different verses. For the same reason it is desirable that 
the Caesuras should occur in different places in different lines. 



§ 356. Pentameter. 

This verse is divided into two parts, each of which consists of two 
dactyls and a catalectic syllable, thus, 

M-^Se $vpa£,e KeXtv || ovk eSeXovr Uvai. 
Spondees may take the place of the dactyls in the first half, but not in 
the second, because the numbers at their conclusion should run more 
freely, instead of being retarded by the slow movement of the spondees. 
The long syllable at the end of the second half can be short. The 
Caesura is here the same as in the Hexameter, except that there must be 
a division, by the ending of the word, in the middle of the verse. When 
the word, however, has more than two syllables, Elision may take place. 

This kind of verse is commonly found only in connection with Hex- 
ameter, a Hexameter and Pentameter following each other alternately. 
A poem composed of these two measures is called Elegiac, being at first 
devoted to plaintive melodies. 

"Apn fxe yevo/xevov ^ooa? (3pecf>os rjpTracre Aatfiwv Hexam. 

Ovk 618' €ir dya^tov 1 1 curios, eire Kaxwi/, Pentam. 

'KirX-qpoiT 'Ai'Sa, ft /ac v/jmov rjp7racra<5 acfivoi ; Hexam. 

Ti cr7rct'Sets ; ov croi | j 7ravres o^etAojaev a ; Pentam. 



§ 357. Dactylic Tetrameter . 

The dactylic tetrameter catelectic on one syllable consists of three feet 

and a syllable. 

ncAXa Bporojv Sia/A€i/3o/A.eva. 

-' -- | -'-*!_<-•• | -. 

The dactylic tetrameter catalectic on two syllables consists of three feet 
and two syllables, which may form a spondee or trochee. 
4>aiv6p.cvov kolkov oLkojS ayecr$ou. 

The dactylic tetrameter acatalectic consists of four feet ; instead of a 
dactyl, in the last a cretic is admissible. 



{ 358 361.] VERSIFICATION. 581 

Yttv o8w<x$ dSar^s, vttvz 8' dXyewv. 
Maxr, dye Ka\Aco7ra Svyarep Aios. 



* 358. Dactylic Trimeter. 

The dactylic trimeter catalectic on one syllable consists of two feet 
and a syllable. 

"EivSeu aetjofLevov. 

The dactylic trimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of two feet 
and two syllables, which may form either a spondee or trochee. 
Evpe't KVfxara 7rovno. 

§ 359. Dactylic Dimeter. 

The dactylic dimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of a dactyl 
and a spondee or trochee. 

^da-fiara (TTpovSwv 
Totcr8' o/xocfuavov. 



The dactylic acatalectic dimeter consists of two dactyls, and usually 
stands in connection with tetrameters. 

Ov<s V7rb retvecrt. 

§360. Trochaic , Iambic and Anapaestic Verse. 

It has been already observed (§ 350, 4.) that Trochaic, Iambic, and 
Anapaestic verse is measured by dipodies, i. e. by pairs of feet. Hence 
verses of two feet, are called monometer, of four, dimeter, of six, trime- 
ter, of eight, tetrameter. The Latins named these according to the 
number of feet, and not by dipodies. Thus a verse of four feet waa 
called quaternius, of six, senarius, of eight, octonarius. 

$ 361. Trochaic Verse. 

The Trochee is the predominant foot in this verse. The last syllable 
of each dipody may be doubtful ; hence the last foot of each dipody may 

49 # 



582 



VERSIFICATION. 



[$* 362, 363 



be a spondee. Therefore, a spondee is admissible in every even place 
(2, 4, 6, 8). The Arsis or long syllable of every foot can be resolved 
into two short ones, and hence, a tribrach can stand in every place ; a 
dactyl and anapaest can stand in the even places, instead of the spondee. 
A dactyl is not admitted, however, except in a proper name, and then 
may stand in all the places but the fourth and seventh. 

A trochaic tetrameter acatalectic would then present the following 
scheme : 



r r ' t 

v*w_ <^«_ ««_ **w — 



Remark. Trochaic verse has a rapid saltatory metre, and is used especially 
in the choral parts of Comic Poetry, when the Poet wishes to infuse more than 
ordinary wit and spirit into the colloquy, to arrest the spectator's attention and 
vary the grave monotony of the Iambic. 1 



k 362. Trochaic Monometer . 

The trochaic monometer acatalectic consists of two feet. It is gener* 
ally found in systems of trochaic trimeters. 



§ 363. Trochaic Dimeter. 

The trochaic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. 
KoX^tSo? t€ ya? ei/oiKCL. 

The trochaic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllable. 
It is usually found among acatalectic dimeters. 

Kat %KV$r]<s ofxikos, dl yas (acatalectic). 
"Eo-^arov tottov d/xc^l Mat- (catalectic). 
CiTiv expvcri Xljavolv. 

-•\ —ii- -I-:- 



1 See Manual of Greek Prosody, by L. P. Mercier. 



H 364, 365. 



VERSIFICATION. 



583 



§ 364. Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic. 

The trochaic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a syllable 
(two dimeters, the second catalectic). Its Caesura is at the end of the 
second dipody, and ia often omitted by comedians, but rarely ever by 
tragedians. 

T^Se 7ras cttov, SiWs | j koI tov avSpa TrvvSc 



At rives rr)povp,ev vjjl!x<; 

i -- 1 



t)v yap fj tls e 



£o8os. 



Remark. The Trochaic tetrameter acatalectic, which consists of two tro- 
chaic dimeters acatalectic, and the trochaic pentameter, which consists of nine 
feet and a syllable, are very rarely used by the Greek poets. 
E3f tis avfipwv evTvxv°' aL s '/) trvv ebZotyis ae&Acus, 
~2,vv id-e&S yap roi (pvrev&els o\fios av&pwiroHTi Trapfxovdorepos. 



$ 365, Iambic Verse. 

The fundamental foot in this verse is the iamb. Instead of the first 
iamb, every dipody may have a spondee. Hence a spondee is admis- 
sible in the odd places (1, 3, 5, 7). 

Again, as the long syllable of every iamb may be resolved into two 
short syllables, a tribrach may stand in every place, except the last ; and 
as the last syllable is common, a pyrrhic is admissible. In the odd places 
a dactyl or anapaest may stand instead of a spondee. 

Hence the iambic trimeter or senarius, would present the following 
scheme : 



tii 



Remark 1. The dactyl, however, is most frequent in the first place ; it occurs 
in the third place only when the first syllable of the foot is followed by the 
penthemimeral Caesura, or when the word is a monosyllable. The dactyl oc- 
curs in the fifth place only in Comedy, where it is admitted in all the uneven 
places. 

Rem. 2. The anapaest is admitted only in the first foot, except in Comedy 
and in proper names ; in these cases it is admissible in all the feet except the 
last. The anapaest in the first foot must be included in one word, except in 
case of the article or preposition and its Case. The anapaest in proper names 
must not be divided between two words. 



584 



VEESIFICATION. 



366—368 



Rem. 3. The Iambic is the opposite of the Trochaic, being a steady, grave. 
but easy metre, and was applied to the stage as best adapted to the language 
of ordinary life. 1 

§ 366. Iambic Monometer. 

Iambic monometer consists of two feet. Its use is very rare, and it 
occurs mostly in systems of dimeters, 

Kat rots koXols 



$ 367. Iambic Dimeter . 

Iambic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. 
''OS ev So/xoicri rots e/xois 

Iambi; dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllable. 
©eAco Xeyew 'ArpeiSas, 
Xatjooire Xonrbv rjjjuv 



This verse is commonly found in systems of acatalectic dimeters. 



$ 368. Iambic Trimeter Acatalectic, commonly called 
Senarius. 

This is the most noted of the Iambic verses. It consists of six feet. 
^O Tewa, KaS/xou rov iraXai via Tpocf>rj, 
'iKTrjpLois kX&Solctlv l^crrc^fxivoi; 
"AXXoiv aKOveiv, avrbs toS' iXrjXvSa 



The tragedians admit a dactyl only in the first and third foot ; they ad- 
mit an anapaest chiefly in the first foot, but in proper names, in any foot 
except the last. 

Mei/eAo)? 'EAev^v 6 Se K/Wai/Av^oTpas Ae^os, 

UoTOLfXWV T€ TT-qyat, TTOVTilJiV T£ KV/XOTCOV 

Ovk apL${xov aXXo)<s aX)C VTrtpraTOvs Qpvytov 



z i i z i i ~' li'ii i 



See Mercier. 



« 369, 370. 



VERSIFICATION. 



585 



The most frequent Caesura here is in the third foot (Penthemim). 
This Caesura, however, is often neglected, others being used, or some- 
times, none. 

'Ex$po>v aSoopa 1 1 Swpa kovk oy^cri/xa.. 
The Caesura is often found in the middle of the fourth foot (Hepthe^ 
mim). 

'E7T€t 7rarr]p ovtos o~6s, |[ ov Sprjvets del'. 
The Caesura at the end of the third foot is less frequent. 

§ 369. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic. 

The iambic tetrameter is very much used by the comedians. It con- 
sists of seven feet and a syllable. The Caesura is usually at the end of 
the fourth foot, but is sometimes omitted. The scheme is nearly the 
same as the trimeter iambic. The anapaest occurs in the seventh foot 
only in case of a proper name. 



/ / i i i i i 

r r r 

t r r / r r / 



Ou <frr)(Ti -vprjvcu rows veovs I j d<xK£iv ■ cyot) Se cprjixt, 

--' h- !l--'l--ll--l/-'lh-'h 

The iambic tetrameter acatalectic is but little used by the Greek poets. 



§ 370. Anapaestic Verse. 

1. The anapaest is the predominant foot in this verse. But by uniting 
the two short syllables in one long, the spondee may be substituted for 
the anapaest. Again, the second long syllable of the spondee may be 
resolved into two short syllables, and hence a dactyl take the place of a 
spondee. 

2. In Anapaestic verse the most usual system is the dimeter, consist- 
ing of a greater or less number of perfect dipodies, followed by a 
pair of dipodies, the second of which is catalectic. This catalectic dime- 
ter, consisting of three feet and a syllable, is called paroemiac (irapoi- 
/uai) from its use in proverbs. The anapaestic verse is, therefore, al- 
ways terminated by a catalectic dipody, and also by a long syllable ; i. e, 
if the final syllable is not long by itself, it is made long by its position 



586 



VERSIFICATION. 



[$$ 371—373 



with respect to the next line, the scanning being continuous, and an an 
apaestic series being constructed as if there were but one verse. The 
following is the scheme for an anapaestic tetrameter catalectic. 



_' U -_'|u u J w « __' ww'w^'lwvJ 



Remark. An anapaest does not follow a dactyl in the same dipody ; gen- 
erally a dactyl does not follow an anapaest or spondee in the same dipody. 
The third foot of the paroemiac is usually an anapaest ; hut a spondee is some- 
times found. The dactyl does not occur in the sixth and seventh feet. The 
Anapaestic metre was the favorite one for martial music. 



$371. Anapaestic JSIonometer Acatalectic. 
The anapaestic monometer acatalectic consists of two feet. 

§ 372. Anapaestic Dimeter Acatalectic. 

The anapaestic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. The legiti- 
mate Caesura occurs after the second Arsis, at the end of the second foot. 
But the Caesura is often found after the short syllable which follows the 

Arsis. 

'A7roXets /x, d"7roA.ets. | [ ov Karapv^ts 
TLpocr£f3r] /xavta. 1 1 tcs 6 TrrjSrjo-as, 
Urepvyoiv iperpLOLcriv || epccnro/Acn?. 



f r r ' 



$ 373. Anapaestic Dimeter Catalectic. 

The anapaestic dimeter catalectic {paroemiac) consists of three feel 
and a syllable, and has no Caesura, the Caesura not being used in the 

paroemaic. 

EiAero ^copas £<popeveiv 

Ata tov crov irputKrov 6<p\r]<T€i. 



4 374. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



557 



£374. Anapaestic Tetrameter Catalectic. 

The anapaestic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a sylla- 
ble, being formed by adding the anapaestic dimeter catalectic (paroemiac) 
to the anapaestic dimeter acatalectic. This verse is also called Aris- 
tophanic, from its use by Aristophanes, though not invented by him. 
The spondaic paroemiac, which sometimes occurs in the regular system, 
is not admissible in the tetrameter. 

The Caesura is at the end of the fourth foot, sometimes, though rarely, 
after the short syllable immediately following. There is generally also 
an incisure at the end of the second foot. 

Upoepei rts ael rwv opvu^cov 1 1 /xavrevofjiivio 7rept tov ttXov ; 
IIoj? 8' vyieiav Soxrova avrols. 1 1 ovaav irapa rotor t ^golctiv ; 
Ttov apyvpuov • ovtol yap tcracrt. 1 1 Xeyovai Se rot raSe irdvres. 



Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic does not seem to have been used by 
the Greek poets. 



APPENDIX B 



ABBKEYIATIONS. 

1. For the convenience of those who may wish to read some of the 
earlier editions of the Greek writers, the following table, containing old 
forms of some of the letters, and also abbreviations of certain words 
or parts of words, is subjoined. 

2. No. I. contains certain single letters or elements, which are of con- 
stant occurrence in the compound characters, and are found nowhere else. 
JS r o. II. contains characters, the elements of which would not at once be 
obvious, and for this reason alone they are not placed alphabetically in 
columns III — VI. Indeed, the characters in Nos. I. and II. might all 
have been arranged alphabetically in columns III — VI. The characters 
in columns III — VI. are arranged alphabetically ; the initial letter of 
these characters, by the aid of those in No. I., will be readily known. 1 



See Robinson's Buttmann, p. 466. 



553 



TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 



2\ 

a 



r k 
7 9 



I. 

6 X 



II. 

~ ov yap yap £i el eX -qv ov rco v 
III. 



cfy aX 
<ty aXX 

~&f dp 
ac/6 auxo 

Tfrfry 

>% r^ 
$ y«p 

Off' yiveiat 
rp yo 

■2^& dia 
<%$> (ha 



IV. 

ftfk y 

e ir) eivai 
cZv iv 



Ok 



bTri ineidrj 

'TToU EJ16V 
uS\ tTlL 

?(&) xecpaXatov 



V. 

ft? /"« 



Oioy 



^ » 
Ai ^ 

yO^ [xsvog 



Orw ouros 
Ifr^napa 
?£f> nep 
ir nepl 
T? no 

Z3 9° 
aa 

eg 06 

o5J o&ai 

G oo 

cor on 

OS 6G 



/J 



oV xal it 

VI. 

^§> rav&a 

T f 






r 



T7?£ 

TO 
TOV 
TOV 
TOV 



CSV TOl/^ 

?p TCQV 
V VI 

uv vv 
c \j^r vn 
& & 
& X° 



I. INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



N. B. The figures refer to sections. E. is used for remark. 



Abbreviations, Appendix B. p. 588. 

Ablative expressed by Dat. 285, 1. 

Absolute, Case Absolute, sec Cases. 

Abrogation of clauses by alia 322, 6. 

Abstracts 39, in PI. 243, 3, (3). 

Absorption of Diphth. in Crasis, 10, 
4,5. 

Acatalectic verse 352, 2. 

Accentuation 29 ; change and re- 
moval of the accent by Inflec, 
Compos, and Contract. 30 ; in 
connected discourse (Grave in- 
stead of the Acute), in Crasis, 
Elision, Anastrophe 31. Accent, 
of first Dec. 45 ; second Dec. 49 ; 
third Dec. 65 ; adjectives and 
participles 75 ; words ending in 
vg, act, v 76, II ; wg, uv 78. R. 
7, and 29, R. 5 ; ojv, ov 78, R. 9, 
and 65, 5 ; rjg, sg 78, R. 11 ; verb 
118. 

Accusative 27 6 sq. ; local relation, 
limit, aim 277 ; of the object pro- 
duced with a verb of the same 
stem or one of a cognate signifi- 
cation (|Ua/?jv tia/tafrai ; tfiv fifov) 
278, 1 and 2 ; with verbs denot- 
ing to shine, to flow, etc. 278, 3 ; 
object, design 278, 4; manner 
278, R. 3 ; of the object on which 
the action is performed or the 
50 



suffering object 279 ; with verbs 
signifying to profit, to hurt, etc. 

279, 1 ; of doing good or evil tc 
anyone, etc. 279, 2; to persevere, 
to wait for, etc. 279, 3 ; to turn 
back, flee from, etc. 279, R. 3 ; to 
conceal, to be concealed, to swear, 
and with cp&avuv, lunsiv 279, 4 ; 
with dsl, zqi] 279, R. 4 ; fiuivuv, 
tiIsiv, etc., which denote motion, 
etc., with verbs of sacrificing or 
dancing in honor of any one 279, 
R. 5 ; denoting an affection of 
the mind 279, 5 ; of space, time, 
quantity 279, R. 8; (xalbg xa 
0{t[xaT(x, alysl ri]V y.scpalrjv) 279, 
7 ; double accusative : <pil(a 
(fillav a?, etc. 280, 1 ; xalu, 
zay.a ttoloj, Isya as 280, 2 ; with 
verbs of beseeching, asking, teach- 
ing, reminding, dividing, depriv- 
ing, concealing, clothing and un- 
clothing, surrounding, etc. 280, 
3 ; with verbs of appointing, 
choosing, educating, naming, etc. 

280, 4 ; in the v/r^xa y.a& 3 blov 
x. pigog 266, R. 4; Ace. in 
adverbial expressions, e. g. y.a- 
xqov xlalsiv, [iey a xaignv 278, 
R. 1 ; xaqiv, dcogsav, tovto, 
therefore, 278, R. 2 ; tovtov tov 



690 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



tqottov, dlxrjv, ofuota 278, R. 3 ; 
Ti]v Ta%loTr t v ; uQyj t v, etc ; noXXd, 
saepe, oXlyov, etc. 279, R. 8; 
svQog, vipog, rdXXa, etc. 279, R. 
10 ; -with Pass, verbs 281 ; with 
verbal Adjectives in xeoc 284, 
R. 7. 

Accusative with. Inf. 307 ; instead of 
Norn, with Inf. 307, R. 4 ; instead 
of Gen. or Dat. with Inf. 307, R. 
2 ; as a subject after XiytTcu, do- 
■asT, etc. 307, R. 5 ; with the Art. 
see Inf. ; with exclamations 308, 
R. 2 ; in the subordinate clauses 
of the oratio obliqua 345, 6. 

iccusative with the Part. 310, 2 ; 
absolute 312, 5 ; with ag 312, 6 ; 
Ace. of Part, instead of another 
Case 313, 1. 

Active verbs 102, 248, 249. Comp. 
Transitive ; with the meaning to 
cause to do 249, R. 3. 

Acute accent 29, 4 (a). 

Addition of consonants 24. 

Adjective (and Part.) 74 sq. ; Dial. 
215; Accent. 75 ; of three end- 
ings 76, 77 ; of two endings 78, 
79 ; of one ending 80 ; Com- 
parison of 81 ; used as a Subs. 
263, a ; Attributive 264 ; as Subs. 
with the Gen. (?j noXXi] rr t g yr t g 
instead of to noXv tr\g yfjc) 264, 
R. 5 ; instead of the Adv. 264, 3. 

Adjectives Verbal, see Verbal Ad- 
jectives. 

Adjectives Numeral 96, 2. 

Adjective Substantive Clause 331, 
R. 4. 

Adjective pronoun used as a Subs. 
263, a. 

Adjective clauses 331 ; several con- 
nected together 334, 1 ; inter- 
changed with other subordinate 
clauses 334, 2. 

Adverb 100 ; formation 101 ; com- 
parison 85 ; expressed by an ad- 
jective 264, 3 as expressing an 



objective relation 314 sq. ; use-o 
as adjectives 262, d; as substan- 
tives (ol vvv) 263, c ; in a preg 
nant sense (pnoi y7]g ea^sv, etc.) 
300, R. 7 ; (6 ix£7,$sv noXs^og 
dsvQO rfei instead of 6 i/.n n.) 
300 R. 8 ; adverbs of place at- 
tracted 332, R. 7 ; inverse at- 
traction of Adv. of place 332 
R. 13. 

Adverbial correlatives 94, 3. 

Adverbial clauses 335 sq. ; of place 
336; time 337; cause 338 ; con- 
dition 339; concession 340, 7; 
consequence or effect 341 ; way 
and manner 342 ; quantity with 
oaoj, oaor 343. 

Adversative coordinate clauses ex- 
pressed by di, aXXo,, etc. 322 ; 
negative adversative coordinate 
clauses 321, 2. 

Agreement 240 sq. ; of the Attrib. 
Adj. 264, 1 ; of the Rel. Pron. 
in Gend. and Numb. 332 ; in 
Case 332, 6. 

Alphabet, history of, 2 b . 

Anacoluthon 347, 5 ; in the Part. 
construction 313, 1, (a). 

Anacrusis 352. R. 

Anapaestic dimeter acatalectic 372. 

Anapaestic dimeter catalectic 373. 

Anapaestic monometer acatalectic 
371. 

Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic 
374. 

Anapaestic verse 370. 

Anastrophe 31, IV. 

Anomalous substantives third Dec. 
67 sq.; Dial. 214 ; verbs 157 sq. 

Answer yes or NO 344, 7. 

Aorist 103 ; Aor. Pass, with a 131 ; 
first Aor. Act. without o- 154, 7 ; 
second Aor. with a 154, 8 ; sec- 
ond Aor. Act. and Mid. accord- 
ing to analogy of verbs in (it, 191 
sq. ; Aor. of some verbs with 
both a Mid. and Pass, from 197, 



INDEX OP SUBJECTS. 



591 



R. 1 ; Aor. of some Mid. verbs, 
whose Fut. has a Pass, from 197, 
R. 3 ; second Aor. Act. with In- 
trans. meaning and first Aor. Act. 
with Trans, meaning 141,4. — 
Syntax 256 ; iterative meaning 
256, 4, (b) ; in comparisons 256, 
4, (c) ; instead of the Pres. 256, 
4, (d) ; Aor. with xt ovv ov 
256, 4, (e) ; instead of the Fut. 
256, 4, (f ) ; to denote the com- 
ing into a condition 256, 4 (g) ; 
signification of the Aor. Subj., 
Opt, Imp., Inf. and Part. 257. 

Aorist, first and second Mid. always 
reflexive (or Intrans.) 251, 3 ; 
Aor. Subj. in subordinate clauses 
instead of the Fut. Perf. as used 
in Lat. 255, R. 9. 

Aphaeresis 14, 5. 

Apodosis 339, 1. 

Apocope 207, 7. 

Aposiopesis 340, 2, (b). 

Apostrophe 13, R. 1. 

Apposition 266 ; in Gen. with Poss. 
Pron. (ipbg tov a&Mov fiiog) 266, 
2 ; Distrib. or Partitive apposi- 
tion 266, 3. 

Arsis and Thesis 349, 2 ; place of 
349, 3. 

Article 91 ; 244 sq. ; demons, and rel- 
ative 247 ; as proper article 244 ; 
with common nouns 244, 2 — 5 ; 
with abstracts, nouns of material, 
proper names 244, 6 and 7 ; with 
the Adjective and Part, used as 
substantives 244, 8, 9 ; with ad- 
verbs of time and place, used as 
adjectives 244, 10 ; with pro- 
nouns and numerals 246; (t« 
Tr t g noXewg, ol nsqv rtva, oi vvv 
clv&Qbmoi) 244, 10. 263 ; with 
every word or part of speech 
244, 11 ; position 245 ; with nag, 
blog 246, 5 ; with cardinal num- 
bers 246, 9. 

Article omitted with common nouns 



244, R. 3 ; with abstracts 244, R. 4 ; 
with proper names 244,7; with Adj. 
and participles 244, R. 8 ; with 
demonstrative pronouns 246, R. 1. 

Article with the subject and predi- 
cate 244, R. 1. 

Article in apposition 244, R. 6. 

Article repeated 245, 2. 

Article in place of the Poss. pro- 
noun (o 7ictTi]Q instead of ifxcg 
n.) 244, 4. 

Asper, see Spiritus. 

Aspirate before another aspirate 
changed to a smooth 17, 4 ; 21, 3. 

Aspirates 5, (a). 

Asyndeton 325. 

Atonies 32. 

Attic second Dec. 48 ; Attic Redup. 
see Redup. 

Attraction of Gend. 240, 3 ; Numb. 
241, 6 ; with Prep, and Adv. 300, 
4, comp.300,3; with the Inf. 307, 
4. 308, 2; with aigis, 341,3; with 
the Part. 310, 2 ; of Modes 327 b ; 
of the relative 332, 6 ; of olog, 
uo~og, rjXUog, 332, 7 ; inverted 
attraction 332, R. 12 ; with ovdslg 
ogxig ov ; with adverbs of place 
332, R. 13; attraction of the 
relative in position 332, 8 ; at- 
traction of the relative in a 
clause subordinate to the adjec- 
tive clause 332, 9 ; attraction of 
the Case in comparative sen- 
tences introduced by cjg, wgneo, 
agTs 342, R. 3., comp. 344, R. 7. 
and 324, R. 2. 

Attribute 239, 2. 

Attributive relation of sentences 
262, sq. 

Augment, 108, 3 ; 119 sq. and 219 ; 
in compounds 125 and 215, sq^ 

Blending of two or more interroga- 
tive sentences into one (rig zlvoq 
ah tog eyivszo) 344, R. 7. 

BracJiylogy 346, 2. 



592 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



Barytones 29, R. 7, (f). 
Bucolic Caesura 355. 

Caesura 351. 

Cardinals 96, sq. 

Cases 41 ; Synt. 268, sq. ; Case 
Absolute: Gen. Abs. 312, 3; 
Ace. Abs. 312, 5. 

Cataleciic verse 352, 2. 

Characteristic of the verb 108, 5 ; 
of the tenses 110 ; pure and im- 
pure 142, 2 ; of verbs in pi 170. 

Circumflex accent 29, 4. 

Classes of verbs 102. 248. 

Clauses, principal and subordinate 
326 ; substantive clauses 328 sq.; 
adjective clauses 331 ; adverbial 
clause 335. 

Comparatio compendiaria 323, R. 6. 

Comparison of adjectives 81 sq. ; 
Dialects 216 ; of substantives 84, 
R. 4. 216. R. 2; of adverbs 85. 

Comparative degree 239 ; strength- 
ened and more definitely stated 
239 ; use of ?;' and of the Gen. 
with the comparative 323, 2 sq. 

Comparative without a second mem- 
ber of the comparison 323, R. 7.; 
apparently used instead of the 
positive 323, R. 7. 

Comparative i\ and the compar. 
Gen. 323 sq. ; compendious com- 
parison 323, R. 6. 

Comparative subordinate clauses 
342, 343. 

Composition of words 236. 

Compound words 236 sq. 

Concessive clauses 340, 7. 

Concretes 39. 

Conditional sentences, see h in the 
Greek Index. 

Conjugation 107 sq. ; in co 115 sq. ; 
in pi 168 sq., in the Dialects : 
in w 219, in pi 224. 

Conjunctions 199, 319. 

Consequence, clauses denoting, with 
uqu, ovv, Tolvvv, etc. 323, 3. 



Consonants 3,2; division 5 ; mova» 
ble at the end of a word 15 ; chan- 
ges 1 7 sq. ; metathesis 22 ; doub- 
ling 23 ; strengthening of and ad- 
dition 24 ; expulsion 25, 3 ; omis- 
sion 25 ; final consonant of a 
pure Greek word 25, 5 ; inter- 
change of consonants in the dia- 
lects 202—204 ; changes of in 
the dialects, 208. 

Coordinate attributive adjectives 
264, 2. 

Coordinate sentences 319 sq. ; cop- 
ulat. coordinate sentences (ts— 
x«t) 321, 1, a; negative (oL'tc, 
olds) 321, 2; (ov povov — ukXa y.al, 
etc.) 321, 3. adversative coordi- 
nate sentences, (psv — di) 322, 1 
— 5 ; (alia) 322, 6 ; disjunctive 
Q\ — »/, etc.) 323 ; reason, cause 
(yao) 324, 2 ; consequence or 
inference (iiqa, tolvvv) 324, 3. 

Copula tivai 238, R. 6. 

Copulative coordinate sentences 321. 

Coronis 10, R. 1. 

Correlative pronouns and adverbs 94. 

Crasis 10 sq.; in the Dialects 206 ; 
in relation to the accent 31, II. 

Customary, wont, 256, 4 (b). 

Dative 282 sq. 

Dative local (where ?) 283, 1 ; («) 
aviolg io"ig Xnnoig 283, 2. (/S) 
or^aTw, otoIm, nXr,&u, vavoi, 
etc. 285, R. 2 ; of time (when ?) 
tqItji ypiga ; of the condition 
under which anything happens, 
283, 3. 

Dative as a personal object 284 ; in 
a local relation (whither) with 
verbs of motion (avk%uv /ugcti, 
ovgavto) 284, R. 1 ; Dat. of com- 
munion 284, 3 ; with verbs ex- 
pressing mutual intercourse, as- 
sociating with, participation 284, 
3, (1) ; with verbs of contend- 
ing, approaching, yielding ; with 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



593 



the adjectives and adverbs, TiXt}- 
alog, ivavTiog, nilug (i/yvg) etc. 
284, 3, (2) ; with verbs of com- 
manding, entreating, counselling, 
inciting, following, serving, obey- 
ing, accompanying, trusting, with 
the adjectives and adverbs, axo- 
Xov&og, diado/og, k£ijg, etc. 284, 
3, (3) ; with expressions of like- 
ness and unlikeness 284, 3, (4) ; 
with expressions denoting to be 
becoming, suitable, pleasing 284, 
3, (5) ; of agreeing with, blam- 
ing, reproaching, being angry 
with, envying 284, 3, (6) ; of 
helping, averting and being use- 
ful 284, 3, (7) ; with all verbs 
and adjectives when the action 
takes place for the honor, advan- 
tage or disadvantage, etc. of a 
person (Dativus commodi et in- 
commodi) 284, 3, R. 4 ; with 
verbs of observing, finding, meet- 
ing with something in a person 
284, 3, (8) ; Dat. of possession 
with sivou and ylyvea&ai 284, 3, 
(9) ; instead of Lat. Dat. (ali- 
quid mihi est honori) 284, 3, (9) ; 
when an action takes place in 
reference to a person 284, 3, 
(10) ; ethical Dat. 284, 3, (10), 
(d) ; with Pass, verbs 284, 3, 
(11); with verbal adjectives in 
Tog and isog instead of vnb with 
the Gen. 284, 3, (12). 

Dative of the thing, or instrumental 
Dat. 285 ; of the ground or rea- 
son with verbs denoting the state 
of the feelings 285, 1, (1); of 
the means and instrument with 
XQriv&cu and vopl&iv 285, 1, 
(2) ; manner, material, standard, 
rule and measure 235, 1, (3). 

Dative with the Inf. 3C7, 2, (b). 

Dative with the Part. 310, 2. 

Dative of participle instead of anoth- 
er Case 313, 1, (a). 



Declension of the substantive 41, 3 : 
first Dec. 42 — 44 ; quantity and 
accent 45 ; Dialects 211 ; second 
Dec. 46 — 48 ; accent 49 ; gen- 
der 50 ; Dialects 212 5 third Dec. 
51 — 69 ; quantity 64 ; accent 65 ; 
gender 66 ; Dialects 213 ; anoma- 
lous nouns 67 sq. 214 ; defective 
nouns 69. 214, R. 2. 

Declension of adjectives and partici- 
ples 74 — 79, see adjectives. 

Declension of pronouns 87 sq. 

Declension of numerals 99, 5. 

Defectives of the third Dec. 69, 73, 
2. 214, R. 2. 

Demonstrative pronouns, see Pro- 
nouns. 

Denominative verbs 232, 1. 

Deponents 102, 3 ; Passive Depo- 
nents 197, Syn. 252. 

Derivation of words 232 sq., of ten- 
ses 128. 

Derivatives 231, 2, 4, (b). 

Desiderative verbs 232, Rem. 3. 

Diaeresis 4, R. 6 ; in the Dialects 
205, 6 ; metrical diaeresis 351 R. 

Dialects page 13 ; 202 sq. 

Diastole 37, 2. 

Digamma 5, 2, (a) ; 25, 2 ; 200. 

Dimeter 360. 

Diminutives 233, 2, (c). 

Dipody 350, 4. 

Diphthongs 4, 3. 

Disjunctive coordinate sentences 
323. 

Distributive apposition 266, 3. 

Division of syllables 36. 

Double consonants 5, 4. 

Doubling of consonants 208, 4. 

Dual number 41 ; 106 ; with a PI 
verb 241, 5 ; interchanged with 
the PI. 241, R. 8; Dual verb 
with a PI. Subj. 241, R. 9 ; Dual 
of the Fern, with the Masc. (toi> 
tw t« tz'xvu) 241, R. 10, (b). 



Elision 13 sq. ; in the Dialects 206, 



50* 



694 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



5 ; elision in respect to the ac- 
cent 31, m. 

Ellipsis 346, 1 ; of the subject and 
especially of the Subs. 238, 5 ; 
of the copula slvai 238, R. 6 
and 7 ; of the Subs, to which 
the attribute belongs 263 ; of uv 
260, R. 3. 6, 7 ; of the Protasis 
and Apodosis 340. 

Emphasis in sentences 321, 3. 

Enclitics 33 sq. ; accented 35. 

Enliansive sentences expressed by 
y.al, ov fiovov, alia v.a.1 321, 3- 

Epicenes 40, R. 5. 

Essential words 238, 1. 38, 4. 

Etymology 13. 

Euphonic Prothesis 16, 10. 

Expulsion of consonants 25. 

Factitive verbs 232, R. 1 and (c). 

Feminine PL with Sing, verb 241, 
R. 6 ; with the neuter (at fisra- 
fiolcn Ivjirjoov) 241, 2 ; with a 
Neut. (to yvvaly.iov ectti y.aXrj) 
241, 2, sq. ; Fern. Dual with the 
Masc. (rovrco xa xsyva) 241, R. 10. 

Final clauses 330. 

Frequentative verbs 232, R. 2. 

Formal words 238, 1. 38, 3. 

Formation of words 231 sq. 

Future tense 103 ; Attic 117 ; Doric 
in aov^ai 154, 3; without a 154, 

4 ; in ov[icu with mute verbs 154, 

5 ; Mid. instead of Act. (uy.ovu, 
axovooiiciL instead of ayovaa)) 
154, 1, and 198 ; Synt. 255, 3, 
4 ; Fut. Inf. after verbs of think- 
ing, hoping, etc. 257, R. 2. 

Future Perf. 103 ; in Act. form 
154, 6 ; Synt. 255, 5 ; instead 
of the simple Fut. 255, R. 8 ; 
the Lat. Fut. Perf., how ex- 
pressed in Greek 255, R. 9. 

Gender of the substantive 40 ; first 
Dec. 42 ; second Dec. 50 ; third 
Dec. 66 ; of Adj. and Part. 74. 



Gender of the adjective, etc. in th« 
const, y.ttxb. avvscriv 241 ; in gen- 
eral statements 241, 2 ; with sev- 
eral subjects 242 ; of the Superl. 
with Part. Gen. 241, 7; of the 
relative pronoun 332. 

Genitive, attributive 265 ; used cl- 
liptically 263, (b). 

Genitive in the objective relation 
270. 

Genitive, separative, with verbs of 
removal, separation, loosing, de- 
sisting, freeing, missing, depriv- 
ing, differing from 271, 2, 3 ; 
with verbs of beginniug 271, 4. 

Genitive of origin and author, with 
verbs of originating, being pro- 
duced from 273, 1. 

Genitive, possessive, (a) with tivm, 
yiyvEo&cu, (/S) loiog oh.tlog, etc. 
273, 2. 

Genitive of quality 273, 2, (c). 

Genitive, partitive, with uvui and 
ylyvEG&cu', xi&ivai, noiua&ai, 
f]y£ia-&ou 273, 3, (a) ; in attribu- 
tive relation with substantives, 
substantive adjectives, substan- 
tive pronouns, numerals and ad- 
verbs 273, R. 4 ; with words 
which express the idea of parti- 
cipation, sharing in ; with verbs 
signifying to touch, be in connec- 
tion with ; of acquiring and at- 
taining ; of physical and intellec- 
tual contact, of laying hold of; 
of hasty motion, striving after an 
object 273, 3, (b), and R. 7 ; with 
verbs of entreating and suppli- 
cating 273, R. 6 ; with the ad- 
verbs sv{rv, l&v, ftsygi ; with 
verbs of meeting and approach- 
ing 273, 3, R. 9 ; Part. Gen. in 
poetry 273, R. 7. 

Genitive of place 273, 4, (a). 

Genitive of time 273, 4, (b). 

Genitive of material 273, 5 ; with 
verbs of making, forming 273, 5, 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



595 



(a) ; of fulness and want (b) ; of 
eating, drinking, tasting, enjoy- 
ing, having the enjoyment of 
something intellectually, etc. (c) ; 
of smelling (d) ; of remember- 
ing and forgetting ; with expres- 
sions of being acquainted and 
unacquainted with, of experience 
and inexperience, ability, dex- 
terity, of making trial of, with 
verbal adjectives in -ixog, etc. ex- 
pressing the idea of dexterity 

(e) ; with words of sensation and 
perception (axoveiv, axgoucrirai, 
aia&avscr&ai, bacpQaivsa&cci (f) 
and R. 19.; with verbs of hear- 
ing 273, R. 18; with verbs of 
seeing, hearing, experiencing, 
learning, considering, knowing, 
judging, examining, saying, ad- 
miring, praising, blaming 273, R. 
20. 

Genitive of cause 274 ; with verbs 
denoting a desire, longing for 
(a) ; care, concern for (b) ; pain, 
grief, pity, with adjectives having 
a similar meaning, particularly in 
exclamations, with interjections 
(c) ; with verbs expressing an- 
ger, indignation, envy, admira- 
tion, praise and blame (d), (e), 

(f ) ; with verbs expressing re- 
quital, revenge, accusing and 
condemning 274, 2; rou with 
the Inf. 274, 3, (a) ; with the 
adverbs tu, y.alwg, fisiQiajg, wg, 
Tims, o 7i big, oiiwg, etc. connected 
with s%eiv, i]y.sn>, sipvu 274, 3, 
(b). 

Genitive with verbs of ruling, supe- 
riority, and inferiority, subjuga- 
tion, with the adjectives FynoaT^g, 
ay.qax^g 275, 1. 

Genitive after the comparative 275, 
2 ; use of the Gen. and i\ with 
the comparative 323, 2 sq. 

Genitive of price 275, 3. 



Genitive with substantives and ad- 
jectives 275, R. 5. 

Genitive, double, governed by one 
substantive 275, R. 7. 

Genitive with the Inf. 307, 2, (a). 

Genitive with the Part, 310, 2. 

Genitive absolute 312, 3 ; when the 
subject is the same as that of the 
predicate 313, 2; with atg after 
tidivat, vosiv, etc. 312, R. 12. 

Gentile nouns 233, 2, (a). 

Grave accent 29 ; instead of the 
acute 31. 

Heter oolites 59, R. 2; 67, (b) ; 71. 
Heterogeneous substantives 70, B. 
Hexameter verse 355. 
Hepthemim 355. 
Hiatus 8 ; 206, 7. 
Historical tenses 103, 2 ; 254, 3. 
Hypercatalectic verse 352, 2. 
Hypodiastole 37. 
Hypothetical sentences, see si. 

Iambic dimeter 367. 

Iambic monometer 366. 

Iambic trimeter acatalectic 368. 

Iambic tetrameter catalectic 369. 

Iambic verse 365. 

Imitative verbs 232, 1, (a). 

Imperative 104, III ; Synt. 258, 1, 
(c) ; use of the Imp. 259, 4 ; 
third Pers. Sing. Perf. Mid. or 
Pass. 255, R. 6. 

Imperfect tense 103 ; analogous to 
verbs in pi 196 ; Synt. 256, 2—4. 

Impersonal construction, see per- 
sonal construction. 

Impersonal verbs 238, R. 2. 

Inclination, see Enclitic. 

Indeclinable nouns 73, 1. 

Indicative 104, 1 ; Synt. 258, (a) ; 
Fut. with av 260, 2, (1) ; 
Impf., Plup. and Aor. with wV 
260, 2, (2) ; difference between 
the Impf., Aor. and Plup. 256 ; 
Fut. instead of the Imp. 255, 4 ; 



;9G 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



with ov, e.g. oxi navvy Xiyow ib.; 
Ind. of the Hist, tenses with words 
expressing a wish 259, R. 6; Ind. 
in subordinate sentences, see the 
separate conjunctions ; Ind. in 
oral, obliq. 344, 6. 

Indirect form of discourse, see ob- 
lique form. 

Infinitive 105, (a) ; Synt., the 
Pres. and Aor. Inf. 257, 1, (c) ; 
Aor. Pres. and Fut. after verbs 
of thinking, etc. 25 7, R. 2 ; with 
av 260, 2, (5). 

Infinitive 305 ; without the Art. 306 ; 
with verbs of willing and the 
contrary, etc. 306, 1. (a) ; with 
verbs of thinking, supposing, 
saying 306, 1, (b) ; after expres- 
sions denoting ability, cause, 
power, capacity 306, 1, (c) ; with 
adjectives and substantives, with 
uvai, iii.cfVY.ivai and ylyvsa&ai 
with a substantive, after avp(jal- 
vsi, dti, %Qij and the like, after 
substantives, adjectives, demon- 
strative pronouns, after verbs of 
giving, sending, etc. 306, 1, (d). 

Infinitive, or Ace. with Inf. differ- 
ent from Part. 311 ; Inf., or Ace. 
with Inf., different from oti, wg, 
that 329, R. 5; in forms express- 
ing command or wish 306, R. 11 ; 
in forms expressing indignation 
306, R. 11, c ; with al ydg, 
Ef&s 306, R. 11, (d). 

Infinitive with Nom., Gen., Dat. 
and Ace. 307. 

Infinitive with the Art. instead of 
the Inf. without the Art. 308, R. 1. ; 
in Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 
308, 2 ; in exclamations and 
questions implying indignation 
308, R. 2 ; as an adverbial ex- 
pression (to vvv nvai and the 
like) 308, R. 3. 

Infinitive Act. instead of the Pass. 
306, R. 10. 



Inflection 38. 

Inflection-endings of the verb 103 
sq. ; Remarks on 116; of verba 
in (it 171, 172. 

Intensive verbs 232, R. 2. 

Interchange of vowels 201 ; conso- 
nants 202—204. 

Interpunction-marks 3 7. 

Interrogative pronouns, see Pro- 
nouns. 

Interrogative sentences 344 ; modes 
in 344, 6 ; connection with a 
relative sentence 344, R. 3 ; 
change of a subordinate sentence 
into a direct interrogative sen- 
tence (oxav xl TtoirjcrojiTi) 344, 
R. 6 ; blending of two or more 
interrogative sentences into one 
(rig t hog ait log scftl) 344, R. 7. 

Intransitive verbs 248, (1) (/?) ; as 
Trans, with the Ace. 249, R. 2 ; 
instead of the Pass. 249, 3 ; in 
the Pass. 251, 4, and R. 6. 

Interrogative sentence with the Art. 
344, R. 3. 

Inversion 348, 5. 

Iota subscript 4, R. 4. 

Iterative form in a/.ov 221. 

Lengthening of the vowels 16, 3. 207 

Lenis Spiritus 6. 

Letters, sounds of 2 a . 

Limitation of sentences 322, 1 — 5. - 

Litotes 239, R. 3. 

Local substantives 233, 2, (d). 

Masculine PI. with Sing, verb 241, 

R. 6 ; connected with the Neut. 

(ol nollol dsivov) 241, 2 ; Masc. 

with a Neut. (^eiQaniov fort x«- 

Xog) 241, 1 ; Masc. PI. with Fern. 

241, R. 11. 
Metaplasm 67, (c). 72. 214, R. 1. 
Metathesis of the liquids 22. 208, 

3; of the aspirates 21, 3; verb 

156. 
Middle form 102 ; Synt. 248, (2) ; 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



597 



•with reflex, sense 250 ; with the 
meaning to cause to do 250, R. 
2; when an action is performed 
to the advantage or disadvantage 
of the subject 250, R. 3 ; with a 
reflex Pron. 250, R. 3 ; with a 
subjective meaning, figuratively 
250, R. 4 ; with a pass, sense 251. 

Modes 104 ; Synt. 258 sq. ; in subor- 
dinate clauses 327 b , 1 ; attraction 
of 32 7 b ; comp. the separate con- 
junctions, in Greek Index. 

Mode vowels 111; summary of 1 1 2 ; 
of verbs in fie 171 ; in the Dial. 
220. 

Movable final consonants 15. 

Multiplicatives 96, 1, (d). 

Negatives, ov, (nj 318; accumula- 
tion of negatives 318, 6 ; appa- 
rent Pleonasm of 318, 6 — 9. 

Neuter of names of persons con- 
nected with Masc. or Fern. 241, 2, 
R. 3 ; PI. instead of the Sing, with 
verb, adjectives 241, 3 ; PI. of 
pronouns 243, 4 ; PI. with Sing, 
verb 241, 4. 

Nominal question 344, 2. 

Nominative with the change of the 
Act. construction of the verb 
with the Gen. or Dat. into the 
Pass., e. g. ntaTsvoixcu 251, 4. 

Nominative Case 269 ; with ovo^ia 
sari pot,, bvofta l/co, with verbs 
of naming 269, K 3 ; Norn, of 
an abstract instead of a Lat. Dat. 
(mihi est honori) 269, R. 2 ; Nom. 
instead of the Voc. 269, 2 ; in 
<JXW a xa & olov y.cxl fxsgog 266, 
3, R. 4. 

Nominative with the Inf. 307 ; in- 
stead of the Ace. with the Inf. 
307, 4. 

Nominative with a Part. 310, 3 ; in- 
stead of another Case 313 ; with- 
out a finite verb 313, R. 1. 

Numerals 96 sq. 218, 



Number 41. 106 ; Synt. 243 ; in the 
const. Y.oiza avvsaiv 241 ; with 
verb, adjectives in jog tiog 241, 
3 ; the number of adjectives 
when they are connected with 
several subjects 242, 1 ; number 
of verb with several subjects 242, 
2 ; with several subjects disjunc- 
tively connected 242, R. 3 ; num- 
ber of the Rel. Pron. 332. 

Object in a sentence 239, 2. 

Objective construction of sentences 
267 sq. 

Oblique discourse 345 sq. 

Omission of consonants 25. 

Optative mode 104, II. see the Subj. 
Synt. ; nature of the Opt. 258, 1, 
(b). 259 ; with av 260, 2, (4) ; 
without av 260, R. 7; in exhor- 
tations 259, R. 1 ; Opt. Delib. 
259, 2 ; to express frequent rep- 
etition {as often as) 327 b , 2; to 
express a supposition, uncertain- 
ty, possibility, presumption, ad- 
mission 259, 3, (a) ; wish 259, 3, 

(b) ; instead of the Imp. 259, 3, 

(c) ; desire, wish, inclination 259, 
3, (d) ; in direct questions 259, 3, 
(e) ; Opt. without av instead of 
with av 260, R. 7 ; Opt. in sub- 
ordinate clauses, see the separate 
conjunctions ; in oratio obliqua 
345, 4. 

Oratio obliqua 345. 
Ordinals 96 sq. 
Organs of speech 3. 

Participle 74 sq. 105, (b) ; Synt 
309 sq. 

Participle as the complement of the 
verb 310 ; Nom., Gen., Dat., Ace. 
of the Part. 310, 2 ; after verba 
sentiendi 310, 4, (a) ; verba de- 
clarandi 310, 4, (b) ; verbs de- 
noting an affection of the mind 
(verba affectuum) 310, 4, (c) ; to 



f)98 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



be satisfied with, to enjoy, be full 
310, 4, (d) ; overlooking, permit- 
ting, enduring, persevering, 310, 
4, (e) ; beginning and ceasing 
310, 4, (f) ; to be fortunate, to 
excel, to be inferior, to do well 
or ill 310, 4, (g) ; after ntigbJfAui, 
Tzaycco-y.Evu^ofxaL, etc. 310, 4, (h); 
after the phrases it is Jit, useful, 
etc. 310, 4, (i) ; after I'xsiv, to be 
in a condition, or state, e. g. i'/co 
KTr t (i(x{Asrog 310, 4, (k) ; with 
Tvy/ava), Ictv-uavQ}, diaTslai, did- 
yw, cp&dvM, ol'xopai 310, 4, (1). 

Participle different from Inf. after 
several classes of verbs 311, and 
R. 

Participle as the expression of ad- 
verbial subordinate relations 312. 

Participle with ug 312, 6; with 
wgTS, wen eg, ixxe, ola, oiov 312, 6, 
R. 13. 

Participle with tivai, instead of a 
simple verb 238, R. 5. 

Participle with av 260, 2, (5). 

Participials 105 ; see Inf. and Part. 

Participial construction 309 ; ana- 
coluthon 313, 1. 

Particles 38, R. 

Particles expressing purpose, design 
330. 

Parts of Speech 38. 

Passive verb 102; Synt. 248, (3). 
251. 

Patronymics 233, 2, (b). 

Pentameter verse 356. 

Perfect tense 103 ; with a 131 ; ni- 
nvauai, etc. 223, 14; Subj. and 
Opt. Perf. or Plup. Mid. or Pass, 
formed without the aid of an aux- 
iliary verb 154, 9 ; Perf. and 
Plupf. of verbs in (xi with short- 
ened form 193; Perf. and Plup. 
analogous to verbs in y:i 193 — 
195 ; second Perf. with Intrans. 
meaning 141, 4. 249, 2 ; Synt. 
255, 2 ; in the third Pers. Sing. 



Imp. Mid. or Pass. 255, iJ. 6 ; 
with the signif. of the Pre;i. 255, 
R. 5; instead of the Fur. 255, 
R. 7. 

Person of the verb 106 ; with sev- 
eral subjects 242 ; in adjective- 
clauses 332, 2. 

Persons, interchange of in the orat. 
obliq. 345, R. 6. 

Personal construction, instead of 
the Impers. with Inf. 307, R. 6 
and 7; with Part. 310, R. 3; 
with oil, ag 329, R. 7. 

Personal endings 111 : view of 113 ; 
difference between endings in 
the principal and subordinate 
tenses 114 ; of verbs in ui 172 ; 
Dialects 220. 

Personal pronouns 87 — 90. 

Plural number 41 ; with the sub- 
stantive in the Gen. 241, R. 2 ; 
PL subst. with Dual verb 241, R. 
9 ; PL of subst. in proper names, 
names of materials, and abstracts 
243, 3 ; change to the Sing. 241, 
R. 1 2 ; in an address to one per- 
son 241, R. 13; the first Pers. 
PL instead of the Sing. 241, R. 
12 ; Neut. PL in verbal adjec- 
tives instead of the Sing. 241, 3 ; 
PL of verbs with collective nouns 
in the Sing. 241, 1 ; with sub- 
stantives in the Dual 241, 5 ; 
Tavicc, Tads, ixstva used of one 
idea 241, R. 3 ; PL interchanged 
with the Dual 241, R. 8. 

Pluralia tan turn 73, 2. 

Pluperfect 103. Comp. Perf. Synt. 
256, 2. 

Position of words 348. 

Position of av 261 ; article o, i], xo 
245 ; prepositions 300, 6 ; pro- 
nouns, see the separate pronouns. 
Adverbs and particles, see the 
separate adverbs and particles ; 
of T£ 321, R. 3 ; (iiv and 8s 322, 
R. 2. 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



599 



Positive degree, see Comparative. 

Possessive pronouns 90. 

Predicate 238, 2. 

Predicative relation of sentences 238. 

Pregnant construction 300, 3. 

Prepositions 199 ; Synt. 286 sq. ; as 
adverbs of place 300 ; Tmesis 
300, R. 4 ; in const. Praeg. nin- 
tuv iv yovvaai) 300, 4 ; with 
the Art., attracted (oi in rrjg uyo- 
oag oiv&Qanoi i'cpvyov) 300, 4 ; 
repeated and omitted 300, 5 ; po- 
sition 300, 6. 

Present tense 103 ; Pres. and Impf. 
analogous to verbs in [u 196 ; 
Synt. 255, 1 ; Hist. Pres. 255, 1 ; 
instead of the Perf. 255, R. 1 ; 
instead of the Fut. 255, R. 3. 

Primitives 231, 2. 

Principal clauses 326. 

Principal tenses 103, 2. 254, 2. 

Proclitics 32. 

Pronouns 86; Dialects 217; De- 
clension 87 sq.; Synt. 301— 304. 

Pronoun, correlative 94 ; demon- 
strative, Decl. 91; Dialects 217, 
4. 303, 1 and 2 ; avxoc 303, 3 ; 
prospective and retrospective 
304 ; omitted before a relative 
331, R. 3. 

Pronoun indefinite rig tI Decl. 93. 
303, 4 ; position 303, R. 5. 

Pronoun interrogative, rig Decl. 93 ; 
see Interrog. sentences ; with Art. 
prefixed 344, R. 3. 

Pronoun personal Decl. 87. 302 ; 
third Pers. prospective 304; re- 
trospective 304, 3. 

Pronoun possessive 90 ; Dialects 
217, 3. 

Pronoun reciprocal Decl. 89. 

Pronoun reflexive Decl. 88. 302, 2 ; 
third Pers. instead of the first 
and second 302, 8 ; instead of 
the reciprocal 302, R. 7. 

Pronunciation 29, 36 ; of letters 3. 

Purpose, particles denoting 330, 1. 



Proportionals 96, 1, (e). 
Protasis 339. 

Prothesis Euphonic 16, 10. 207, 8. 
Punctuatio w-marks 37. 

Quantity 27 sq. ; in Dialects 209 , 
first Dec. 45, (a) ; third Dec. 64 

Redundant nouns 70. 

Reduplication 108, 4. 123, 219 ; in 
sec. Aor. 219, 7 ; Att. in Perf. 
and Plup. 124 ; second Aor. 124; 
R. 2 ; in compound words 1 25 
sq. ; as strengthening of the stem 
163. 

Reflexive verbs 102 ; Synt. 248, (2). 

Reflexive pronouns 88. 

Relation of the Attrib. Adj. 264, 2. 

Relative construction changed to the 
Demonstrative 334, 1. 

Relative pronoun Decl. 92; Synt. 
331 sq. ; instead of the demons. 
331, R. 1; agreement of gender 
and number 332 ; Case (attrac- 
tion) 332, 6 ; attraction with 
oiog, oaog, i\XUog 332, 7 ; inverse 
attraction 332, R. 11 ; with ovdslg 
bgTig ox) 332, R. 12 ; with ad- 
verbs of place 332, R. 13 ; at- 
traction in position 332, 8 ; rela- 
tive pronoun of an intermediate 
clause attracted 332, 9 ; construc- 
tion of the relative pronoun 333 ; 
rel. pron. changed to a demons, 
or pers. 334, 1 ; rel. pron. in- 
stead of a demonstrative 334, 3. 

Relative clause, see adjective clause. 

Reciprocal pronouns 89. 

Reciprocal verbs 248, R. 1. 

Resolution of contract verbs 222. 

Restriction of sentences 322, 1 — 5. 

Rhythm 349. 

Roots 231, 2. 

Scheme, see ayj](ia in Greek Index. 

Sentences 238, 1. 

Sentences denoting effect or re- 



600 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



suit with aga } ovv, toivvv, etc. 
324, 3. 

Sequence of tenses 327 a . 

Shortening of the vowels 16, 4. 
207,4. 

Singular verb with Masc. or Fern. 
PI. 241, R. 6 ; with Neut. PI. 241, 
4 ; with several common nouns 
in PI. 242, R. 2. 

Singular of substantives 243, 1 ; 
changed to the PI. 241, R. 12 ; 
Sing. Imp. e. g. elns in an ad- 
dress to several 241, R. 13. 

Spiritus Len. and Asp. 6. 

Stem of the verb 108, 1 ; pure and 
impure 138 ; strengthening the 
consonant and prolonging the 
stem-vowel 139. 

Stems 231, 4, (a). 

Strengthening of the vowels 16, 1 ; 
consonants 24 ; stem of impure 
verbs 139. 

Subject 238, 2 ; change of the ac- 
tive construct, into the Pass., e. g. 
7nr7TstO|Uafc from ttkttsuco tivI 
251, 4 ; ellipses of 238, 5. 

Subjunctive Mode 104, II. Perf. 
and Pip. Mid. or Pass, without 
an auxiliary verb 154, 9 ; Subj. 
and Opt. Act. and Mid. of verbs 
in vpi without auxiliary verb 
176, 5. Synt. 258, 1, (b). 259 ; 
Subj. Aor. instead of Fut. Perf. 
of Latin 255, R. 9. 

Subjunctive with av 260, 2, (3) ; 
(with and without av) instead of 
the Fut. Ind. 259, R. 4; Subj. 
hortative 259, 1 (a) ; delibera- 
tive 259, 1, (b). 260, 2, 3, (b) ; 
Subj. to den. indefinite frequen- 
cy (as often as) 327 b , 2, 333, 3 ; in 
comparisons 333, R. 2 ; with [xi] 
instead of the Imp. 259, 5 ; in 
subordinate clauses, see the sep- 
arate conjunctions ; in Or. obliq. 
345, 5. 

Subordinate sentences 326 sq.; class- 



es 326, 3 ; characteristics 326, R. 
4 ; subordinate sentences changed 
into direct interrogative senten- 
ces 344, R. 6. 

Substantive 39 sq. ; Gen. 40 ; Numb., 
Case and Dec. 41 ; Dec. I. 42 
sq. ; Dec. II. 46 sq. ; Dec. III. 
51 sq. 

Substantive 39 sq. ; number 242. 

Substantive instead of adjective 264, 
R. 3. 

Substantive clauses expressing design, 
aim, with wg, ouag, iV«, etc. 
330. 

Substantive clauses with cm, wg, that 
329. 

Superlative^>l sq. Synt. 239 ; strength- 
ening and more exact definition 
of, 239, R. 2; Gend. with the 
Part. Gen 241, 7. 

Syllables, division of 36. 

Synizesis 12. Dialects 206, 4. 

Syncope 16, 8. 207, 6; in substan- 
tives 55, 2 ; in verbs 155. 

Syntax 238 sq. 

Tenses of the verb 103 ; of the sub- 
ordinate modes 257; derivation 
128 ; formation of the secondary 
tenses, use of the same in con- 
nection with the primary 141 ; 
Tenses primary and Sec. 103, R. 
141. 

Tenses, Syntax 254 ; sequence of 
in subordinate clauses 327 a . 

Tense-formation of verbs in co 127 ; 
pure verbs 129 ; mute 142 sq. ; 
liquid 149 ; verbs in pi 173 ; in 
Dialects 223. 

Tense-characteristic, see character- 
istic. 

Tense-endings 110. 

Tense-stem 110, 2. 

Theme of the verb 138, 3. 

Thesis and Arsis 349. 

Time, difference between Gen. and 
Dat. of time, 273, R. 13. 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



60 v 



Tmesis of Prepositions 300, R. 4. 

Transitive verbs 248, (a) («) ; with 
Intrans. or Reflex, signif. (rgsTtca 
instead of tqsjioikxl) 249, 1, 2 ; 
with 'he sense to cause to do 249, 
R. 3. 

Transition from direct discourse to 
indirect and vice versa 345, R. 6. 

Transposition of the attributive 
adjective and Subs, (ol xgriaxol 
twv avd-Q(07uav instead of ot /qn- 
(jTot viv&qojtcol) 264, R. 5. 

Triemim 355. 

Trochaic verse 361. 

Trochaic monometer 362. 

Trochaic dimeter 363. 

Trochaic tetrameter catalectic 364. 

Variable vowels 16, 6 ; in the stem 
of impure verbs 140 ; change of 
u into ot 140, 4 ; of s into o 
231, 6. 

Verb 102 sq. 219 sq. ; division of 
verbs in cu according to the char- 
acteristic 127 ; barytones 127, 
R.; pure verbs (and contract) 
129—137; Perispomena 127, R; 
impure 127. 138—141 ; mute 
127. 142—148; liquid 127. 149 
— 153 ; special peculiarities of 



verbs (pure and impure) 154 ; 
anomalous in w 157 sq. ; in yii 168 
sq. ; in cu which in certain tenses 
are analogous to verbs in [it, : sec- 
ond Aor. Act. and Mid. 191 sq. ; in 
Dialects 227 ; Perf. and Plup. 
193—195 ; in Dialects 228 ; 
Pres. and Impf. 196 ; verbs De- 
nom., Frequent., Imitat, Intens., 
Fact, Desid. 232. 

Verbs active, with Mid. Fut. 198 ; 
those which have both an active 
and middle form for the Fut. 
198, R. 

Verb Act. Trans., Reflex., Recip., 
Pass., Intrans., Mid. 248 — 251. 

Verb Jinitum and infinitum 105, R. 

Verbal adjectives in tog and rsog 
234. 1, (i) ; PI. instead of Sing. 
241, 3 ; Construction 284, 3, (12). 

Verb characteristic 108, 5. 

Versification 349. 

Vowels 4 ; change 8 — 16 ; weaken- 
ing or attenuation of 16, 2 ; in- 
terchange in the Dialects 201; 
change in the Dialects 205 — 207. 

Weakening of vowels 16, 2. 

Zeugma 346, 3. 



53 



II. GREEK INDEX. 



Abbreviations. Adv. aiverb ; adj. adjective ; Comp. compare; comp. com- 
pared ; c. a. with the accusative ; c. d. with the dative ; c. g. with the genitive ; c 
inf. with the infinitive ; c. part, with the participle ; coll. collective ; con. construction ; 
Dec. declension ; dec. declined ; euph. euphonic ; ins. instead of; int. intensive ; 
intr. intransitive ; pers. personal ; prep, preposition ; priv. privative ; R. remark ; 
trans, transitive. 



h pure 43, 1, (a) ; a priv., 

coll., int. 236, R. 3, (b) ; 

a euph. 16, 10. 
aya&os comp. 84, 1. 
hydXXeoSai c. dat. 285, 

1, (1); c. part. 310, 4, 

(c). 
ayavaKreiv c. d. 285, 1, 

(1); c. part. 310, 4, (c). 
ayairuu c. a. and d. 274, 

R. 1; c. d. 285, 1, (1); 

c. part. 310, 4, (c). 
&ya<r&cu c. gen. and ace. 

273, R. 20; two. twos 

21 A, 1, and R. 2. 
ayysKhsiv c. Inf. and part. 

311, 10. 
a.yy4\\sTai pers. ins. c. a. 

and inf. 307, R. 6. 
&ye referring to several 

persons 241, R. 13. 
ay voeiu c. part. 310, 4, (a). 
ayopdfav c. g. 275, 3. 
ayvievs dec. 57, R. 2. 
&y X i c. g. 273, R. 9. 
aywv, with, 312, R. 10. 
aywiCe(rSaLcA.284:,3 (2). 
ada-ns c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
ade\<p6s C. g. 273, 3, (b). 
adiKeTv c. a. 279, 1 ; c. two 

ace. 280, 2; c. part. 310, 

4, (g). 
a-riditiv dec. 55, R. 2. 
'AS6ws dec. 212, 7. 
ai see et ; al yap c. inf. 

306, R. 11, (d). 
al8e7afrai c. a. 279, 5; c. 

part, and inf. 311, 14. 
aldolos comp. 82, I, (d). 
tiSws dec. 60, (b). 



aXpeiv riva fieyav etc., 

280, 4. 
alpsiv c. g. 274, 2. 
a/percr&ai c. two a. 280, 4. 
alaSrduofjiai ins. the perf. 

255, R. 1. 
alo-frdveo-frai c. g. and a. 

273, 5, R. 19; c. part. 

310, 4, (a). 
aiaaeiv c. a. 279, R. 5. 
alcrxp6s comp. 83, II. 
alo~xvi'e<T&ai c. a. 279, 5 ; 

c. d. 285,1. (1); c.part. 

and inf. 311. 14. 
afoeiv c. two a. 280, 3. 
alTiaaSai C g. 274, 2. 
oXtlos elfii c. inf. 306,1, (c). 
o.k6AovSos, -e?f, -as, --fjrt- 

kos c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
aKovri^iif c. g. 273, R. 7. 
anoveiv, audivisse, 255, 

R. 1. 
anoveiv c. g. and a. 273, 5, 

(f) and R. 19; to obey, 

c. g. and d. 273, R. 18; 

c. inf. and part. 311, 1. 
aKparriy c. g. 275, 1. 
aKparos 82, I, (e). 
aKpoaa&ai c. g. 273, 5, (f ) 

and R. 19. 
aXyuvc. d. 285, 1, (1). 
a\yeiv6s comp. 84. 4. 
aAe|e«/C. d. 284, 3, (7). 
aAteus dec. 57, R. 2. 
aAts c. g. 273, 5, (b)v 
aAiffKeabai C. p. 310, 4, ( b). 
aAAa 322, 6 ; in a ques- 
tion i'6. ; aAAa yap 324, 

R. 1. 
&\Aa, aAAoi, ol aAAot,with- 



out Kai in a series 325, 
(e) ; aAA' % (ouk, ovSev 
aAA' ij ; oi/Seu #AAo, aAA' 
ij;rld\\o, aAA'#;aAAo 
ti, aAA' ¥i) 322, R. 10. 

aXXaiTeiv, -z<r&ai c. g. 
275, 3. 

aAAvjAwv dec. 89 ; use of 
302, R. 7. 

aAAo or aAAo ti ij ellipti- 
cal 346, 2, (d). 

a\Xo?os c. g. 271, 3. 

aAAos aAAo;/ (oAAos &\\o- 
&ev) with another Nom. 
266, 3. 

aAAo ti ij and aAAo n in 
a question: nonne 344, 

5, (g). 
aAAoVotos c. g. 271. 3. 
a\s dec. 54, (a) and R. 1. 
aXoovai c. g. 274, 2. 
aAwi' dec. 56, R. 1. 
a\ws dec. 48, R. 1. 70, A, 

(a). 72, (b). 
a/xa c. d. 289, R. ; with 

part. 312, R. 6; c. d. 

and part. 312, R. 5. 
a/xaprdveiv c. g. 271, 2 : C 

part. 310, 4, (g). 
a/xeificiv, -eoftai c. g. 275 

3; c. a. 279, 1. 
afAeiveov 84, 1. 
a/xeX^v c. g. 274, 1 ; c. 

inf. 306, 1, (a). ■ 
ajxr]xav6s el/j.i c. inf. ins. 

a/x-nxav6u iffTi c. a. et 

inf. 307, R. 6. 
'dfxoipos c. g. 273, 3. (b). 
afjLvveiv c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
a/jicpi prep. 295, 1, (2) ; e 



GREEK INDEX. 



603 



d. in a pregnant signif. 

ins. c. a. 300, 3, (a). 
afxtyl irepi 300, R. 1. 
afupievi/vvai c. two a. 

280, 3. 
a/MQisPriTeiu c.d. 284,3, (2). 
&/x(pca dec. 99, R. 
to- priv. 236, R. 3, (b). 
to 260; c. ind. fut. 260, 

2, (1) ; ind. impf., plup. 
and aor. 260, (2) and 
333, 7; c. subj. 260,(3); 
c. opt. 260, (4) ; c. inf. 
and part. 260, (5) ; po- 
sition and repetition of 

r ik 261. [2, (3), (d). 
to with conjunctions 260, 
to Ke 261, R. 3. 
to with the relative 333, 3. 
to in Protasis 340, 6. 
to omitted with the Opt. 

260, R. 7; with Pret. 

Ind. omitted 260, R. 3 

and 6. 
to ins. idv, which see. 
toa voc. 53, R. 4. 
too. inst. of aud(TTT]bi 31, 

R. 3. 
foctprep. 290, 1. 
avaPd\\e<r&ai c. inf. 306, 

1, (a). 
toay redrew Tivd ri 278, 4. 
toaKayydfav c. a. 278, 3. 
ava/j.iiJiu7i<TKeii' c. two a. 

280, 3. 
toa£ dec. 54, (c). 
toSdveiv c. d. 284, 3, (5). 
aueiTKTT'qjxcov c. g. 273, 5, 

(e). 
toev c. g. 271, 3. 
toex^crSrai c. g. 275, 1. 
oj/exeo-frcu c. inf. 311, 15; 

c. part. 310, 4, (e). 
toea(s) 25, 4, (c). 
aurjp dec. 55, 2 ; to denote 

employment (avfip,(idv- 

tis) 264, R. 3. 
aviaa&ai c. d. 285, 1. 
avKnopslv c. two a. 280, 3. 
toTex^o^rai c g. 273, 3, 

lb). 
tori prep 287, 1. 
avTxaCetf C. d. 284, 3, (2). 
ai>TiAa/J.[}dve<T&ai C. g. 273, 

3, (b). 

dj/Tt'os and dvriov c. g. 273, 

R. 9. 
ai/Ti7nHei(j-a-cuc.g.273,3,(b). 



aj/aryewi/ dec. 48. 

&£i6s elfu c. inf. 307, R. 6 

d£i6s, a£icos, a^iovv, -ova- 

Sai c. g. 275, 3 ; &£i6s 

tlv6s el/xi rivi 284, 3, 

(10) (b). 
aZiovv c inf. 306, 1, (a). 
airayopeveLv (ev, Ka/ccDs) C. 

a. 279, 2; c inf. 306, 1, 

(a). 
airaidevros c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
airairetir c. two a. 280, 3. 
airaWdTreiv C. g. 271, 2 ; 

-eo-frcu c part. 310, 4, 

airavrav C. g. 273, R. 9 ; 

C.d. 284, 3. (1). 
hve&eiv c. g. 273, R. 19 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
<XTrei7reiV c. part. 310, 4, (e). 
toeipos e.g. 273, 5, (e). 
aireipcos %X ilv c - g- ^73, 5, 

airexew, cbr e'xecdcu C. g 
271, 2. 

airi<TTe7i/ c. inf. 306, 1, (b). 

airXovs, -rj, -ovu dec. 77. 

cmAovs comp. 82, I, (b). 

cltto prep. 288, 1 ; with 
pregnant sense ins. eV 
c. d. 300, 3, (c); (enro 
with the art. ins. eV 
(ot enrb rrjs ayopas 
to&pooTToi dir4<pvyoi>)300, 

4, (a). 

airb — evena 300, R. 2. 
a-rrodex^o'^ai C g. 273, 

R. 20. 
aTTodidcxr&aL c. g. 275, 3. 
aivodiZpda-Keiv c. a. 379, 3. 
a-rroXaveiu c. g. 273, 5, (c). 
cnroAoye'i(r&cu c. d. 284, 3, 

(')■ 
'AiroKXav dec. 53, 4, 1, 

(a); 56, R. 1. 
aTT07reipci(T&cu. C. g. 273, 

5, (g). 
aTroirpd 300, R. 1. 
aTcopziv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
airo(TTepe7u c. g. 271, 2; 

Til/c£ Ti, TiVOS Ti, TiJ/(f? 

nya 280, 3, and R. 3. 
a.iro<TTiAf5<Eiv e.g. 273, R. 16. 
aTToffTpecpea&cu c. g. 279, 

R. 3. 
airocpaiveiv c. part, and inf. 

311, 11. 
airo<pfvyeiv c. a. 279. 3. 



&7i7>e7nis c. d. 284, 3, (5). 
airrea&cuc. g. 273, 3, (b) 
&pa 324, 3. 

apa ins. dpa 324, R. 5. 
Spa interrogative 344, 5, 

dpecTKeiy rivd 279, 1 ; ap- 
eV/ceo-3-ai c. d. 284. 3, 
(5); c. dat. of the in- 
strument 285, 1, (1). 

ap-qyeiv c. d. 284, 3, (7). 

"Apris dec. 59, R. 2. 

&pi(TTOS 84, 1. 

'ApKTTOfpdvrjs dec. 59, R. 2. 

apiceTcrSai C. d. 285, 1.(1). 

apfx6rTeiv c d. 284, 3,' (5). 

apyeiofrai c. inf. 306, l,(b). 

dpu6s 55, R. 3. 

dp£dfj.ei/os dir6 twos, par~ 
ticularhj 312, R. 3. 

dpx*w, t° begin, c. g. 271, 
4 ; to rule, c. g. 275, 1. 

apxeo-frat c. g. 271, 4 ; c. 
part. 310,4, (f); c.part. 
and inf. 311, 16. 

apxofxeuos, in the begin- 
ning, originally, 312, 
R. 3. 

haefieiv C a. 279, 1. 

O.GK.OV, aO~K6(J.7]V 221. 

ao-fxej/os comp. 82, R. 6. 

toaa, da-ffa 93. 

aarrip dec. 55, R. 3. 

darpdiTTeiv c. a. 278, 3. 

do-rv dec. 63. 

<xtch ins. vTai 144, R. 1. 

aro> 322, 7. 

aVe c. part. 312, R. 13. 

aTepos 10, R. 2. 

"ArAa Voc. 53, R. 2. 

aTo ins. vto 144, R. 1. 

arpejttafs) 25, 4, (c). 

oVtc* and aTTa 93. 

au, aiiTap 322, 7. 

avTiKa with part. 312., R.6. 

auTtk dec. 91 ; Dial. 207, 

4, (c). 
ctuT&r use 302, 4 ; 303, 

3 ; with the art. 246, 

3, 8. 
ovt6s in avTols "rnrois, to- 
gether with the horses etc. 

283, 2, (a) ; 6 uvtSs c. 

d. 284, 3, (4). 
ai/Tov dec. 88 ; use 302, 2. 
dcpaipeloSrai c. two a. and 

Tivd tivos, tiv6s t< 280, 

3, and R. 3. 



604 



GBEEK INDEX. 



dcp&ovos comp. 82, E. 6. 
dtyievai., -iecr&ai C. g. 271, 2. 
&<pvw(s) 25,4, (c). 
&X&*oSrai c. d.285, 1,(1); 
c. part. 310, 4, (c). 

B euph. 24, 2. 

fiaiveiv 7ro'5a and the like 

279, K. 5. 

fiapeoos (pepeiv c. d. 285, 
(1) ; e7rt Tij/t and c. a. 
285, B. 1. [(c). 

BapvveoSrai c. part. 310, 4. 

3a<n\eveiv c. g. 275, 1. 

fia<nAevs dec. 57, 2. 

BaarKaiveiv c. d. and a. 
284, 3, (b). 

BoTTew 212, 3. 

Bad 97, 2. 

BeATaros 84, 1. 

BeArepos 84, 1 . 

B4Atl(ttos, BeAriuv 84, 1. 

BAairreiv c. a. 279, 1. 

BAairreiy fieyaAa, etc. C a. 

280, E. 1. 
BAeireiu c. a. 278, 3. 
Bov&e7v c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
/So/JpSs Dec. 44, E. 2. 
£twAei c. subj. 259, 1, (b). 
BovAea&aic. inf. 306,1, (a). 
BovAevea&ai c. inf. 306, 1, 

(a) ; c. oVous and ind. 

fut- 330, 6. 
Bovs dec. 57, 2. 
£peVas dec. 61, E, 1. 
Bpteeiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
Ppi/xovafrai c. d. 284, 3, v 6). 

TaAa dec. 54, (c). 
yd\ws dec. 212, 7. 
7ap 324, 2 ; in an answer 

344, 7. 
yaarjip dec. 55, 2. 
ye 317. 2 ; in an answer 

344. 7. 
yeAav c. a. 278. 3. 
yeAcos dec. 71, B, (c). 
ye/xeiv C. g. 273, 5, (b). 
7ei/i>aj/, parentem esse 255, 

E. 1. 
yeVos dec. 61 (b). 
yepaios comp. 82, I, (c). 
yepas dec. 54, E. 4. 
yeveiv, 7eu€0"&at C. g. 273, 

5, (c). 
yypas dec. 54, E. 4. 
yiyvea&ai syncopated, 

155, 2 ; with the sense 



of thePres. 255, E. 1: 

c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. g. 

posses. 273, 2 ; c. g. 

partit. 273, 3, (a); c.d. 

^84,3,(9). 
yiyverai fxoi TiBovAofxevco, 

iAiro/xevw 284, 3,10, (cj ; 

yiyverai and an abstract 

substantive with an inf. 

306, 1, (d). 
yiyvuxrutLv c. g. 273, E. 2C 

ti nvL 285, 1, (3); c 

part. 310, 4, (a) ; c. inf 

and part. 311, 4. 
yiyvcixTKw c. u>s and gen. 

abs. 312, E. 12. 
yiyvdxTKw ins. eyvooxa 255. 

E. 1. 
y\-r)X uv dec. 56, E. 1. 
7Aixe<r&ai c. g.273.3, (b). 
yow dec. 54, (c) ; 68, 1. 
ypavs dec. 57, 2. 
ypd<pe<r&ai c. g. 274, 2. 
yvp.v6s c. g. 271, 3. 
7^7/ dec. 68, 2. 

A euphon. 24, 2. 

SSeo Voc. 53, 4, (1) (a). 

5cu315, 7. 

daieoSrai c. two ace. 280, 3. 

5a/cpu and Sdxpvov 70 B. 

Sao-w c. g. 273, 5, (b). 

Se 322, in a question E, 6. 

5e suffix 235, 3 and E. 3 ; 

after a demons. 95, (c). 
S'SoiKevai c. inf. 306, l,(a). 
Selc. g. 273, 5, (b); c. ace. 

and dat. 279, E, 4 ; c. 

inf. 306, 1, (d): c. d. 

and ace. c. inf. 307, 

E. 3. 
5eT o-' oTTws 330, E. 4. 
Seinvvvai c. part. 310, 4, 

(b) ; c. part, and inf. 

311, 11. 
Selva dec. 93, E. 2. 
Seivos c. inf. 306, 1 (c). 
Seto-at c. a. 279, 5. 
SeTo-fta* c. g. 273, 5, (b) ; 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
Senas c. g. 208, E. 
Sevdpos dec. 72, (a). 
Senas dec. 61, (a). 
SepKec&at c. a. 278, 3. 
Seo-Tro(eiv C g. 275, (1). 
SecriroTTjs dec. 45, 6. 
hevnv c. a. 278. 2. 
Sevtepos c. g. 275, 2. 



Sexeo-^cu c. two ace. 280, 
4 ; rivi ri 284, E. 4. 

5tj 95, (b); 315, 1.2. 

SrjSeu 315, 5. 

8?}Aoi/ elVcu, iroietv with 
part. 310, 4, (b) ; $rj\4s 

el/ULl TTOIWV Ti 310, E. 3. 

S9jAos elfit on 329, E. 4. 

S7jAow c. g. and a. 273, 
E. 20 ; c. part. 310, 4, 
(b) ; c. inf. and part. 

311, 12. 
A7][xr)TT]p dec. 55, 2. 
ArnAoo-&ej/7}s dec. 59, E. 2. 
Sr?7roT6 95, (b). 
fo'lirovSev 315, 6. 

5t?tci 315, 3. 
SiaPrep. 291. 
8ia irp6 300, E. 1. 
Siaye^ c. part. 310, 4, (1 j. 
SiayiyveoSai c. part. 310, 

4,a). 

SiaSexeciS-ai, SidSoxos, 81- 

aSoxrj c. d. 284, 3, (3). 

SiaSiSovai c. g. 273,3, (b). 

SiaSoxos c. g. and d. 273. 

3, (b); 284,3,(3). 
Siaipelv c. two ace. 280, 3. 
SiaKela^ai r)]v yva>p.r)y 

with &s and gen. abs. 

312, E. 12. 
SmAe^eo-frcu c. d. 284, 3, 

(!)• 
SiaAiirwv XP°' V0V 312. E. 3. 
ZiaAAarreiv c. part. 310, 

4, (f )• 
SiaXXarTeiv, -aTTeo~&ai C 

d. 284, 3, (1). 
SLa/neifSea&ai c. g. 275, 3. 
Siave^eiv c. two ace. 280, 3. 
5iavoe?<r&ai c. 07ra>s c. ind. 

fut. 330, 6 ; c. us and 

g. abs. 312, E. 12. 
SiaTrpaTTeoSai c. inf. 306, 

1, (c). 
Stare Ae?v c. part. 310, 4, 

(b). 
Stacpepeiv C. g. 271, 2. 
Sid<popos c. g. 271, 3 ; c d. 

284, 3, (4). 
Sidcpavos c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
Siaxpvcr&ai c. d. and ace 

285, 1, (2). 
ZiSdffKeiv c. two ace. 280, 

3; c. inf. 306, 1, (C. 
SiSovai c. g. partit. 273 
3, (b) ; c. g. price, 275^ 
3. 



GREEK INDEX 



605 



Ste'xeu' c. g. 271, 2. 
8iicd(eiv c. g. 274, 2; 8i- 

Kd(ea&ai c. d. 284,3, (2). 
SiKaios el/j.1 c. inf.,personal 

ins. SiicaiSv ecrri c. a. 

and inf. 307, R. 6. 
Sucaiovv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
8ikt}v c. g. 288, R. 
8iopt(eiv c. g. 271, 2. 
Siort see o-rt. 
5t'xa c. g. 271, 3. 
Stya and dtxpos 70, B. 
5tij/7> c. g. 274, 1. 
Siconeiv c. g. 274, 2. 
5o/ceti> c. inf. 306, 1, (b) ; 

videri, pers. 307, R. 7. 
8<Wdec. 54, (c) and 68, 3. 
dopvcpope?v c. a. 279, 1. 
SpaireTeveiv C. a. 279, 3. 
bpaTTecr&cu C. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
5iWr&cu c. a. 279, 6 ; c. 

inf. 306, 1, (c). 
Suvaros el/xi c. inf. 306, 1, 

(c) ; personal ins. Svva- 

t6v 4<rri c. ace. and inf. 

307, R. 6. 
Svo dec. 99, 5; with the 

Subst. in the PI. 241, 

R. 10. 
dus in composition, 236, 

R. 3, (b), (0). 
hvsx^po-'i-veiv c. a. 279, 5 ; 

c. d. 285, 1, (1). 
Sapeav, gratis 278, R. 2. 
8ccpe?(r&ai rivi n and nvd 

rivi 279, R. 2. 
Awpievs dec. 57, R. 2. 

*Eav c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
idv cons. 339, 2, II, (b) ; 

ivhether, an 344, 4 ; eat/ 

Se ins. idv Se ,1*77 340. 4 ; 

ecu/ /cat ib. 7. 
idv re — eaV Te 323, 1. 
zap dec. 56, R. 2. 
earai, earo ins. r\vTai, r\v- 

to, ovtq 220, 13. 
eauToC dec. 88 : use 302,2. 
e'dW215, R. 
eyyi(eiv c. g. 273, R. 9 ; 

c d. 284, 3, (2). 
iyyvs c. g. 273, R. 9 ; a 

d. 284, 3, (2). 
iyKa\e?v c. g. 274, 2 ; C.d. 

284, 3, (6). 
iyKpaT-fts C. g. 275, 1. 
tyXf\vs dec 63, R. 5. 



4ycb dec. 87 ; use, 302, 1 . 

670)76 95, (a). 

irjos from iiis 215, R. 

4&e\eiv C. inf. 306, 1, (a). 

et ins. 77 aug. 122, 3. 

et ins. redup. 123, 3. 

et II. Pers. ins. 77 116, 11. 

el cons. 339. 

et concessive 340, 7 ; in 
wishes 259, 3, (b). 

et an, whether 344, 5, (ij. 

el ydp 259, 3, (b). 

el 8' &ye 340, 3. 

ei Se ellipt., 340, 3 ; et 8e 
ins. et Se /uL-fj and et 5e 
/177 ins. el 8e 340, 4. 

el Kai 340. 7. 

e? Ke see e'dV. 

et ^77 iron. 324, 3, (a) ; et 
yA\ except 340, 5 ; et /*?> 
et, JMSZ, si, ib. 

eia, eias, ete, etay opt. ins. 
aifii and etc. 116, 9. 

et'SeW c. g. 273, R. 20 ; c. 
partic. 310, 4, (a) ; dif- 
ference between inf. 
and part. 311, 2; c. &s 
and g. abs. 312, R. 12. 

etd-e in wishes 259, 3, (b) 
and R.3, 6. : c. inf. 306, 
R. 11. 

eUd^eiv rl tlvi 285, 1, (3). 

eiiceiv c. g. 271, 2 ; c. d. 
284, 3, 2. 

elKos, elnoTios C. dat. 284, 
,3,(5). 

elK&v dec. 55, R. 2. 

eTjitej', etre, etey ins. et?7- 
juej', etc. 116, 7. 

elvai as copula 238, 6 ; as 
an essential word (to be, 
to exist, etc.) 238, R. 4 ; 
with adv. 340, R. 4; 
tlvai with a part. ins. 
of a simple verb 238, 
R.5; omitted 238, R.6,7. 

elvai apparently unneces- 
sary with bvo/xd(eiv, 
-eabat 269, R. 1. 

elvai c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. 
g. possess. 273, 2 ; e.g. 
partit. 273, 3, (a) ; c.d. 
284, 3, (9) ; elvai and a 
subs. c. inf. 306, 1, (d). 

etVe referring to several 
persons 241, R. 13, (a). 

elirelu ev, nances riva 279, 
2;KaKa,KaAaca.230 ) 2. 
51* 



elirelv c. d. 284, 3, ( 1 | ; c. 
d. and a. c. inf.307, R. 3. 

etpyeiv, -ar&ai c. g. 271, 2. 

els (is) Prep. 290, 2; in 
pregnant sense ins. 4v 
c. d. 300, 3, (b) ; with 
the art. ins. ev (rj \ifxvt) 
4kSi8o? is t)\v 'S.vpriv 
4s Ai&vrjv) 300,4, (b). 

els, fj.ia, ev dec. 99, 5. 

eh with Superl. 239, R. 2. 

elsdyeiv C. g. 274, 2. 

eicrav ins. eaav in plup. 
, 116,6. 

elsopav, to permit c. part. 
j 310, 4, (e). [3. 

elsirpdrreiv c. two.acc.280, 

elra with Part. 312, R. 8 ; 
eha in a quest. 344, 5, 
(e). 

efre— efre 323, R. 1 ; et— 
etVe, etre — et Se etc. 323, 
R. 1 ; in an indirect 
question 344, 5, (k). 

elco&evai c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 

4k, e'| 15, 3; Prep. 288,2; 
in Preg. sense inS: ev 
c. d. 300, 3, (c) ; 4k 
with the Art. ins. 4v 
(ol 4k rrjs ay pas 
av&pcoivoi dire<bvyov) 
300, 4, (a). 

ends c. g. 271, 3. 

eKaaTos with the Art. 246, 
6. 

indveiv c. two ace. 280, 3. 

eKeT^ev with the Art. ins. 
e/cet (6 eice?&e v ir6\e- 
/xos Sevpo^ei) 300,R. 8. 

ineTvos dec. 91 ; Dial. 21 7, 
4, (d); use 303, 2; with 
the Art. 246, 3. 

eKeivoai(v) 15, 1. (e). 

4Ke?ae in Preg. sense ins 
e/ce? 300, R. 7. 

e/cTjrt c. g. 288, R. 

inXeiireiv C. part. 310, 4 
(f). 

4Kir\T)TTecrSai c. a. 279, 5 ; 
c. d. 285, 1. 

eKO-Trjvai c. a. 279, R. 3. 

eKTpeTrecr&ai c. a. 279,R.3. 

enwv elvai 306, R. 8. 

eXarrov without ij 323, 
R. 4. 

eA.aTToDa-3-cu C. g. 27. S, 1. 

iXarrav 84, 6. 

4\dx"rTos 84, 6. 



606 



GREEK INDEX. 



ih.4yxtiv c. part.310,4,(b). 
£\4yxL<TTOs 84, R. 4. 
iAeeiv c. g. 274, 1, (c) ; 

c. a. 279, 5. 
f\ev&cpos, iAev&epovv C. 

g. 271, 2, 3. 
kkiaveiv &e6v 279, R. 5. 
sXfiivs dec. 54, (c). 
eATri'Ce^ C d. 285, 1(1); 

c. inf. 306, 1, (b). 
i/xavrov dec. 88 ; use 

302, 2. 
ififo ins. fiov, 302, E. 2. 
e^7ra(s) 25, 4, (c). 
e/jureipos c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
ifnreAd£e(T&ai C. g. 273, R. 

9; c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
ip.iriirkacrSa.1 c. part. 310 

4, (d). 
cixirpocr&ev c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
i/jL<pepr]s c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
ei> ins. y\ffav 220, 14. 
eV Prep. 289, 1 ; in Preg. 

sense ins. els 300, 3, 

(a)j e.g. 23(b). 
ey rots, eV tows C. Superl. 

(e.g. irp&Toi) 239, R. 2. 
ivavriovy -ios c g. and d. 

273, R. 9 and 284,3,(2). 
cvde-ns e.g. 273, 5, (b). 
evSo&ej/ with the Art. ins. 

evSov {t))v evdo&ev rpd- 

irzfav (pepe) 300, R. 8. 
cvSueij' e. two ace. 280, 3. 
ivsSpeveiv c a. 279, 1. 
evetca, eVe/cer, etVe/ca, ei'- 

j/e/ce^oi/Ve/ca c. g. 288, R. 
efeo-Tij/ c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 
iv&v/JLtTo-frai c.g.273,R.20; 

c. part. 310, 4 (a). 
tvt ins. ej>eo-n 31, R. 3. 
ivvotlv c. g. 273, R. 20. 
ivoxht?i e. a. 279, 1 ; c. d. 

284,3, (6). 
iyradSi with Part. 312, 

R. 7. 
4i>Tp<Eire<T&cu 273, 3, (b). 
e| Prep. 288, 2 ; see e/e. 
l\ai<pvi)s with Part. 312, 

R. 6. 
Qdpxeiv C. g. 271, 4. 
e|eAe'7Yeif c. part. 310, 4, 

(b). 
e£eo-Tii/ c. inf. 306, 1, (c); 

c. d. and a. c. inf. 307, 

R. 3. 
i^rdCeiv c. g, 373, R. 20; 

c. two ace. 280, 3. 



e^rjs c. g. 273, 3, (b) ; c. 

d. 284, 3, (3). 
Q(<TTa<T&ai c. g. 271, 2. 
i^opKovv c. a. 279, 4. 
e£o> c. g. 271, 3. 
eWeW c. d. 284, 3, (4) ; 
c. inf. 307, R. 7.; c. 
part. 310, R. 2; c. inf. 
and part. 311, (9). 
e6s ins. ifios, <r6s 302, R. 8. 
iivcuvtiu c. g. and a. 273, 
R. 20 )tivcltivos 274,1. 
iiraipeiv rivd ti 278, 4. 
iiraipecrbai c. d. 285,1, (1). 
£irai<r<T€iv c. g. 273, R. 7. 
e7ra:Tm(rd-aj c. g. 274, 2. 
eVcfo|«s dec. 213, 19. 
iirav see oVa^ under ore. 
eVap/ceii/ c. g. 273, 3, (b) ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (7). 

iirei see ore ; in interrog. 

and imp. clauses 341, 

R.4. [(b). 

iTreiyea&cu C. g. 273, R. 7, 

eVeiSai/ see 6'rcu' under 

ore. 
eVeiS^ see 0T6. 
67reiTo in a question 344, 

5, (e). 
eireira with part. 312, R. 8. 
e7re|ieVat C. g. 274, 2. 
eVe<r&cu c. d. 284,3, (3). 
iirriv see eVar. 
iVl inS. €TT€(TTl 31, R. 3. 

e7r£ Prep. 296 ; c. dat. in 

Preg. sense ins. c. a. 

300, 3, (a); c. g. and 

part. 312, R. 5. 
e7n/3aAAe<rftai C. g.273,R7. 
iiridotfs el/xi c. inf. 307, 

R. 6. 
iTr&v/ji.e?v c. g. 274, (1); 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
€iriKa\e7u c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
iniKovpeTv c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
iiri\a[ji.pdv€<r&cu C gen. 

273, 3, (b). 
i-rriXavfrdveaSrai C g. 273, 

5,(e); c.part.310,4,(c). 
iiriAeiireiv C a. 279, 4; C. 

part. 310, 4, (f ). 
eTTt/xaitaScu C. g.273,R. 7. 
eTn^eAecr^a:, -e?<rfrat C. g. 

274, 1 ; c. oTrcos c ind. 
fut. 330, 6. 

eVnreSoy comp. 82, R. 6. 
iTrnr\r)(T<T€iv c. d. and ace. 
284, 3, (6). 



£Ki<ritT)irTeo$ai c. g. 274,2, 
iirKTTdfxevos c. g.273,5,(e). 
iiria-TaaSrat c. g. 273,R.20; 
c. partic. 310, 4, (a); c. 
part, and inf. 311, 2 ; c. 
&s and gen. abs. 312, 
R. 12. 
iiri(TTaTe?y C g. 275, 1. 
iiriariiixccv e.g. 273, 5, (e). 
emaxcov xp&vov 312, R. 3 
iirirdTT€iy c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
iirireWeiv e.inf.306,l,(a). 
iiriT-fidewsc. inf. 306, 1, (c). 
iiriTtfiavc. d. 284, 3, (6). 
iiriTpeirGLi/ c. inf. and part. 
^ 311, 15. 
iiriTpoireveiv c. g. 275, 1 ; 

c. a. 279, 1. 
ini(p&6vws Sto/ceTc^-ot C. g. 

274, 1, (e). 
iirixeipelu c.inf. 306, l,(a). 
iirix^pios c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
kirojxivws c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
eTTOTpvveiv Tivd ti 278, 4. 
e'pa*/, epaa&ai Cg.274, 1. 
ipyd£ea&at KaAa, «a/ca c. 

a. 280, 2. 
epecrdrai c. two ace. 280, 3. 
epeeiVetv c.two ace. 280, 3. 
eprj/nos, ipri/JLOvv c. geD 

271, 2, 3. 
£pt]TV€LV c. g. 271, 2. 
epf&iy c d. 284, 3, (2). 
ippccpLevos comp. 82, 1, (e). 
eparav C. two ace. 280, 3. 
ipccTiKws %X* lv c ' £• 274, 1 . 
ia&leiv c. g. and a. 273, 5, 

(c) and R. 15. 
etTKov, eoKOjXTiv 221. 
isT &u see ews. 
esTe see ecos. 
ecrrt fioi ti fiovAo/iieva 284 

3, (10) (c). 
Zan {licet) c.inf. 306,1, (c). 
eW with the PL 241, R. 6. 
ianv o'l, &v etc. 341, R. 4. 
tffTiv ore, ottov, Utttj^ttus, 

ov,'(va, &/&a,^331,R.5 
iffx^Tos with 'the Art 

245, R. 5. 
erepos in Oasis 10, R. 2 

c. g. 271, 3. 
in with the Comp. 239, 

R. 1. 
err 7roAA<£ with the Comp. 

239, R. 1. 
eu and eSin the Aug 121, 

R.; 125, 2. 



GREEK IAD EX. 



60 ; 



e5 \4yeiv, iroieii/, etc. c. a. 
^279, 2. 
«3 troisiv c. part. 310,4, (g). 
Ev&oevs dec. 57, E. 2. 
€vdcu/ioi'i£eiv, evdatuccu C. 

g-274, 1, (f) 
ei/8ios comp. 82, I, :c' 
cvepyeTeTv c. a. 279, 2. 
eijfapos comp. 82, R. 6. 
eu&u c. g. 273, R. 9. 
evfrvs with Part. 312, R. 6. 
cv\aPe?cr&ai c. a. 279, 1. 
evAoyelV c a. 279, 2. 
eviropuv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
evpLo-iceiv, -ear&tu c. part. 

310,4, (b). 
evo-efielv c. a. 279, 1. 
evrvxew C. part.310,4,(g). 
ei/ X eo-^ai c. d. 284, 3, (1); 

c. inf. 306, 1, (b). 
evwxe?(T^ai e.g. 273, 5, (c). 
scpeZrjs c. g. and d. 273, 3, 

(b); 284, 3, (3). 
icpieaScu c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
eipiKveTadcu c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
icpopau c. part. 310, 4, (e). 
icp' &, i<p <?re c. ind. fut. 

or inf. fut. 341, R. 5. 
exetv c. inf. 306, 1, (c) ; c. 

part, iroirjaas £x&> 310, 

4, (k). 
eX*"' ew, /cctAcDs, etc. c. g. 

274, (3). 
exetv yvdi^v c. a>s and g. 

abs. 312, R. 12. 
exe<r&cu c g- 273, 3, (b). 
ix&pos comp. 83, II. 
eX&>, possum, c. inf. 306, 1, 

(c). 
t^aic Xrjptls, <p\vape?s 312, 

R. 9 ; ex**", ^, 312, 

R. 10. 
ews dec. 48. R. 1. 
iws construction 337. 

Zaxpt](ov 213, 14. 
Ce suffix 235, R. 3. 
Zeus dec. 68, 4. 
CtjAow c. g. 274, 1 ; c. a. 

279, 1. 
CvreTv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
(vy6s and (vy6v 70, A,(b). 

H, (a) ¥i alternativum, or, 
323, 2 ; in a question 
344, 5, (h) 5 — (b) V 
comparativum 323, 2 ; 



after the omission of 
(xaXXov 323, R. 3 ; omit- 
ted with iv\4ov, TrXeioD, 
sXclttov in connection 
with the numeral 323, 
R. 4; with the Gen. 
after a compai-ative 
323, R. 5. 

r] ins. eiu in Plup. 116, 6. 

V union vowel 237, R. 1. 

3) Kara, or y) irp6s c. a. 
323, 7. 

3) #sre c. inf. 341, 3, (a). 

i] 316, 2. 

^ fxrjv 316,2. 

^ ttou 316, 2. 

?7 with Sup. 343, R. 2. 

^ interrogative 344, 5. 

^ S'6's331, R. 1. 

yyuafrai c. g. 273, 3, (a) ; 
c. g. and d. 275, 1, and 
R. 1 ; c. two a. 280, 4 ; 
c. inf. 306, 1, (b). 

riye/noj/eveiv c. g. and d. 
275, 1, andR. 1. 

r/8e, and, 323, R. 2. 

^5eo-&c« c. d. 285. 1, (1); 
c. part. 310, 4, (c). 

r)8v/uios comp. 82, R. 6. 

7]5vs comp. 83, I. 

%kgiv ev, KaXcos etc. C. g. 
274, 3, (b). 

riKKTTOs 216, 2. 

Va>, uem, 255, R. 2. 

tjXlkos attracted 332, 7. 

ri/xey— r/5e 323, R. 2. 

?jjiu in compos. 236, R. 3, 

. (b).„ 

rifjLiv, rifxiv 87, R. 4. 

T^fiiavs dec. 76, R. 2 ; f] 
■ti/xlcreia ttjs yrjs and the 
like 264, R. 5, c. 

%H<av 87, R. 4. 

ijv see ea//. 

tjvIkiz, when, see oVe. 

•^pe'jua comp 84, R. 3. 

Vipws dec. 60, (a). 

ficr&cu c. a. 279, R. 6. 

77<T0"«j', Attic ^TT«f 84. 

7l<T<T<av elfxi C. inf. 306. 1, 
(c). 

riavxos comp. 82, I, (d). 

tfroi 316, 2 ; tfrot. — ^ 076 
303, R. 2. 

?;TTa<Ti&cu c. g. and u7r^ 
tjj/os 275, 1, R. 2. 

^TTac&ou with the sense 
of the Perf. 255, R, 1. 



7]TTao-&cu c. pait. 310, 4 S 

(g). 

r/x^ dec. 60, (b). 
^ws dec. 60, (b). 

0aA7js dec. 71, A. (a). 
^aWeii/ c. a. 278, 3, (a). 
frapfelv c. a. and d. 279, 3, 

and R. 3. 
^ctcro-eij/ c. a. 279, R. 6. 
Sdcrcrwv 83, I. 
Sarepa, etc. 10, R. 2. 
^at^a^ai/ c. g. and a. 273, 

R. 20; Tivd tivos 274, 

1, (f) and R. 2; c. d. 

285, ( 1 ) ; hri ru/i 285, 

R. 1. 
^av/xaenhv oaou 332, R. 

10. 
freacr&ai C g. 273, R. 20. 
freXetv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
&e>us 73, 1, (c). 
frev suffix 235, 3, and R. 

1 and 2. 
frepaireveiv c. a. 279, 1. 
frepdirccv dec. 68, 5. 
^1/315,4. 
&* suffix 235, 3. 
^177^6^ c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
Svr)<rKsiv ins. Perf. 255, 

R. I; vtt6 tivos 249, 3. 
Srpdao-ca 17, R. 4. 
VI dec. 54, (c). 
Svy&Tfip dec. 55, 2. 
frveiv iiriviKia, yeve&Xia, 

ydfiovs 278, 2. 
^f^oGcr^ai C g. 274, 1 j 

c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
frooirevsiv, frdoirTeiv c. a. 

279, 1. 
S-«6s dec. 60, (a). 



R. 2. 
tSe, referring to several 

persons, 241, R. 13, (a), 
tSios comp. 82, I, (d). 
V8ios c. g. 273, 2. 
i§ic6T77? c. g. 273, 5, (c). 
Idpws dec. 213, 7. 
i'eVou, elfj.1 with the mean 

ing of the Fut. 255 

R. 3. 
Upos c. g. 273, 2. 
l^v(s) c. g. 273, R. 9. 
iKav6s c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 
i/cereuetj/ C. g. 273, R. 6 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 



60S 



GREEK INDEX. 



iKvz7(T&ai c. g. 273, R. 6. 
iva, that, in order that 330 
'Iva tI 344, R. 6. 
Xffos comp. 82, I, (d). 
Xaos c. g. and d. 273, 3 

(b), and 284, 3, (4). 
l<TTope7v c. two a. 280, 3. 
Ix&vs dec. 62. 
i\w ins. Ix&pa 213, 11. 

K movable 15, 4. 
<ca&apo'<? e. g. 271, 3. 
Ka&i&Lu c. a. 279, R. 6. 
Ka&iardvai c. two a. 

280, 4. 
Ka&opai/, to permit, c. part. 

310, 4, (e). 
Kaf 321, 1 ; with Sup.239, 

R. 2; with part. 312, 

R. 8; /cat ins. 6Ve321, 1. 
not yap 324, R. 1 and 3. 
koI 4dv, teal el 340, 7. 
■cal jxaXiara with Sup. 

239. R. 2. 
teal os ins. /cal oStos 331, 

R. 1. 
teal ov, Kal /j.7) 321, 2. 
«:ai taxna with part. 312, 

R. 8. 
tcaiirep with part. 312,R.8. 
KcuVoi 322, 7 ; with part. 

312, R. 8. 
tcdKicrros, KanitoV, 84, 2. 
Kai<oXoye7v, KaKOiroie7v C. 

a. 279, 2. 
/ca/cos comp. 84, 2. 
/ca/cJs eiVue-rnf- 30 ^) 1 ^ )' 
KaKovpyeiv c. a. 279. 2. 
KaKws Xeyeiv, iroieTv, dpav 

etc. c. a. 279, 2. 
KaXe7v c. two a. 280, 4. 
KaXXiareveiv C g. 275, 1. 
KaXXicrros, xaXXicov 84, 3. 
/caA<$s comp. 84, 3. 
KaXov/xevos, so called 264, 

R. 1. 
KaXws dec 48 ; 70, A, (a). 
ndp.veiv c. part. 310, 4,(e). 
Kanti ra with part. 312, 

R. 8. 
Kapa dec. 68, 6. 
Kaprepe7v c.part.310, 4,(e). 
Kara Prep. 292 ; Kara in 

composition, construc- 
tion with 292, R. 
K$ra with part. 312, R. 8. 
tcaraKoveiv, to obey, c. g. 

273, R. 18 and 19. 



KaTaXXdrreiv, -dTTea&ai, 

c. d. 284, 3, (1). 
na.Tavep.eiv c. two a. 280,3. 
KarairXrjTTea&ai ?. a. 279, 

5; c. d. 285, i). 
Karapao-frai C. d. 284, 3,(1 ). 
Kardpx^v c. g. 271, 4. 
KaraxpricrSai c. d. and a. 

285, 1, (2). 
Karevavriov c. g. 273, R. 9. 
KaTepyd(e<r&ai c. inf. 306, 

l,(c). 
Karex^iv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
KaT-tjKoos c. g. and d. 273, 

R. 18. 
k4, Kev, see &v. 
Ke7vos see eKe7vos. 
Ke7<r&ai c. a. 279, R. 6. 
KeXeveiv c. inf. 306, 1, (a) ; 

c a. et inf. 307, R. 1. 
nev6s c. g. 271, 3. 
Kepa/xeovs 76, 1. 
tcepas dec. 54, R. 4. 
KepSicov 216, R. 2. 
Kev&eii/ c. two a. 280, 3. 
/ajSecr&cw c. g. 274, 1. 
/ajyos see iice7vos. 
Kivdweveiv c. inf. 306, 1, 

(b). 
kls dec. 62. 
nXeis dec. 68, 7. 
KXeos dec. 61, (b). 
jt\67TT7js comp. 82, II. 
K\ripovop.e7v c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
KAuetj/ c. d. 284, R. 4. 
Kv4(pas dec. 61, R. 1. 
kolvos, KOLvovcr&ai C. g. 

273, 3. (b). 
koiv6s, koivovv, -ovcr&ai c. 

d. 284, 3, (1). 
Koivwvelv c. g. 273,3, (b) ; 

c d. 284,3, (1). 
koivoovSs dec. 72, (a). 
KoXaiceveiv C. a. 279, 1. 
KopevvvoSai c. g. 273, 5, 

Kows dec. 212, 7. 
npare7v c. g. and a. 275, 1, 

and R. 1. 
Kpareiv c. part. 310, 4, (g). 
Kpariaros 84, 1. 
/cpeas dec. 54, R. 4. 
Kpeiarcrwv, Kpe'moiV 84, 1. 
lepiVeij/ c. g. 273, R. 2 and 

20 ; Kpiveo-bai c. g. 274, 

2 ; Kpiveiv t'i tivi 285, 1, 

(3). 



Kpivov dec. 72, a). 
Kpoio-ew 212, 3 
KporaXi£eiv c. a. 279, R. 2 
KpoTetv c. a. 279, R. 5. 
Kpvirreiv -ea&ai C. a. 279, 

4 ; c. two a. 280, 3. 
Kpvcpa c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
KTacr&ai. c. g. 275, 3. 
KvSpos comp. 83, II. 
kvksw 56, R. 1.213, 11. 
Kvvrepos 216, R. 2. 
Kvpios c. g. 273, 2. 
kiW dec. 68, 8. 
/was dec. 61, R. 1. 
KwXveiv c. g. 271, 2 ; «». 

inf. 306, 1, (a). 

Aas dec. 72, (a). 
Xafiwv, with, 312, R. 10. 
Aayxdveiv c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
Xaycos dec. 48, R. 1 ; 70, 

A, (a). 
Xa&pa, Xa&paiws c. g. 273, 

5, (e). 
Xa&dv, secretly 310, R. 4. 
\d\os comp. 82, I, (f ). 
XapifidveaSai c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
Xd/xireiv C. a. 278, 3- 
XavSdveiv c. a. 279, 4. 
Xav&dve<r&ai. c. g. 273, 5, 

(e). 
XavSrdveiv c. part. 310, 4, 

(1). 
Aads and Xedos 70, A, (a). 
Ae^eii/ c. g. 273, R. 20. 
XeyeLV C. two a. 280, 4 ; C. 

d. 284, 3, (1); c inf. 

306, 1, (b) ; c. d. and a. 

and inf. 307, R. 3. 
Xeyeiv c. us and g. abs. 

312, R. 12. 
Xeyeiv ev, KaKws C. a. 279, 

2 ; KaXa, Kcwca, etc. c. a. 

280, 2. 
Xeyerai C. a. et inf. 307, 

R. 6. 
Xey6/xevos 264, R. 1. 
Xeiireiv c. a. 279, 4. 
AeiTreo-frcu C. part. 310, 4, 

ATryeu/ c. part. 310, 4. (f ). 
Xrjpe7s %x a>v 323, R. 9. 
Afar' iXalw 68, 9. 
Xnrape7v c. part. 310, 4, 

(e). 
Ais dec. 214, R. 2. 
AiVo-ea-dat c. g. 273, R 6. 



GREEK INDEX. 



609 



hoyl&Tfrcu c.inf.306,l,(b). 
KoiSope7v c. a. 279, 1. 
\otdope'io~&al tlvl 284, 3, 

(6). 
\ove<r&ai c. g. 273, K. 16. 
\oxw c. a. 279, 1. 
\vttv c. g. sep. 271, 2; c. 

g. of price 275, 3. 
\vuaiveo-&ai c. a. 279, 1 ; 

c. d. 279, R. 1. 
Av7re?(r&at c. d. 285, (1). 
Xuo-tT€Ae?j/C.d. 284,3, (7). 
AwPaa&ai c. a. 279, 1 ; c. 

d. 279, R. 1. 

AcoCTTOS 84, 1. 

\cpwv 84, 1. 

Ma 316, 4; fih Ala 279, 4. 
ua/cpos comp. 84, 5. 
uaKpy with Com. and 

Sup. 239, R. 1 and 2. 
uaXiGTa with Sup. 239, 

R. 2. 
uaWov with Com. 239, 

R. 1. 
juSAAo;/ *} ow 318, R. 7. 
udv 316, 1. 
uaj'&aVeii/ with sense of 

the Perf. 255, R. 1. 
yLavStausiv c. g. and a. 273, 

R. 20; c. part. 310, 4, 

(a j ; c. part, and inf. 

311,3. 
udprvs dec. 68, 10. 
udo-awv 84, 5. 
\jxltt\v, incassum 278, R. 2. 
/xdxev&ai c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
/xeya with Com. and Sup. 

239, R. 1 and 2. 
ueyalpeiv c. g. 274, 1. 
ueyas dec. 77 ; comp. 84, 8. 
usyuriov with Sup. 239, 

R. 2. 
ue&le<T&ai c. part. 310, 

4, (f ). 
ueifav 84, 8. 
uei\l<ro-eo~frai c. g. 273, 

R. 16. 
uetov without ff 323, R. 4. 
uets 214, 4. 

ueioveKielv c. g. 275, 1. 
ueiovaSrai c. g. 275, 1. 
uelav 84. 
/xe'Aet juo£ tij/os and tj 274, 

1, and R. 1. 
ueWeiv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
uefx.vr)iJ.ai '6re ins. '6ti 329, 

R. 6. 



ueucpeoSai c. g. and a. 273, 
R. 20; tlv2 tivos 274, 
l,(f); c. d. and a. 284, 

3, (6). 

jueV ins. u-f)v 316, R. 
/xeV — Se 322, 5. 
fiev&fi 316, R. 
ueveiv c. a. 279, 3. 
uevovv 316, R. 
/*eVroi 316, R. 322, 7. 
^60-7771^(5) 25, 4, (c). 
jueVos comp. 82, 1, (d) and 

R.5; with the Art. 245, 

R. 5. 
uearbv elvat c. part. 310, 

4, (d). 

[aco-tos c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
uerd Prep. 294 : /xeVa ins. 

uereffTi 31, R. 3. 
ueTadib~6vai c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
U€Taue\ei juoi tivos and n 

274, 1, (b) andR. 1. 
^cra^eAe? c. part. 310, 4. 

(c). 
U£Taueh£?o~&at c.part. 31C 

4, (c). 
jUeTa|u c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
uera£v with part. 315. 

R. 6. 
uerecrTi uoi tivos 273, 3, 

(b). 
jUeTe'xeii' c. g. 273, 3, (t). 
uexpi(s) 25, 4, (b). 
^e'xp^s) c. g. 273, R. 9; 

uexpi(s) dv, see ews. 

yUTj c. imp. and subj.259,5. 

jUtj 318; /i7j pleonastic, 
after expressions signi- 
fying to fear, to doubt, 
etc. 318, 8. 

urj interrog. 344, 5, (d). 

uy cm, urj oirocs — aAAa 
Kai (aAAa) 321, 3. 

uh ov 318, 10. 

ftrjU 321, 2, (a). 

U7)5eis dec. 99, R. 

U^KICTTOS 84. 

^316, 1. 
uyvleiv c. g. 274, 1. 
firji'is dec. 63, R. 5. 
u-nre — uvre 321, 2, (c). 
pA\Ti]p dec. 55, 2. 
lx7]Tpa}s dec. 71, B, (c). 
jLt77xaj/5(r3-at a inf. 306, 

1, (a) ; c. ottos and ind. 

fut. 330, 6. 



uiyvvvai, uiyvvcr&ai c. d. 

284,3, U). 
uiKp6s comp. 84, 6. 
uiuela&ai c. a. 279, 1. 
uiuv7]crK€iv -eo-&ai C. g 

273, 5, (e). 
ui/j.vfjffKeo'^aL c. part. 310. 

4, (a) ; c. part, and inf. 

311,2. 
Mivws&ec. 71, C. 
uoi, ethical Dat. 284, 3, 

(10) (d). 
/x6vos with the Art. 245, 

R. 6 ; different from 

uovov 264, R. 7. 
juJj/os c. g. 271, 3. 
uovocpdyos comp. 82, 1, (f ). 
uov, uoi, ue use 87, R. 1. 
uvktjs dec. 71, A, (a). 
uvo-aTTecr&ai c. a. 279, 5. 
iwv 344, 5, (c). 

N i<p€\KvaTu<6v 15, 1 and 

R. ; in the Dialects 

206, 6. 
vat 316, 4; vol ua. Ala 

279, 4. 
rack and recta 70, A. (a). 
vdirr) and i/aVcs 70, P>. 
vdo-o-eiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
raw dec. 68, 11. 214, 5. 
viaTos 82, R. 5. 
vews and iWs 70, A, (a). 
vy 316,4; j/t> Ala 279, 4. 
//7]T77 from v4os 82, R. 5. 
yi/cSi' '0\i>uiTia, yvdour\v 

278, 2. 
j/i/cSi/ with sense of the 

Perf. 255, R. 1. 
vikov c. part. 310, 4, (g). 
vlv (viv) ins. avTovs or 

auTas 87, R. 3. 
voe?v c part. 312, R. 12. 
voulCzw c. two a. 280, 4j 

c. d. (uti) 285, (2) ; c. 

inf. 306, 1, (b) ; c. part. 

311, 2. 
voo-<pi(eiv C. g. 271, 2. 
vovfreTeTv C. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
j/v316, 3. 
vwtos and j/<£tw 70, A. 

(b). 

Eej/ovo-frai c d.284,3, (1). 
£eVcos eve**/ c. g. 273, 5, 

(e). 
%uu<pop6v eVrt c. d. and a. 

c. inf. 307, R. 3. 



610 



GREEK INDEX. 



li/v Prep. 289, 2. 

union-vowel 237, 2. 

b- in biroios, oiroaos, etc. 

93, R. 1. 
6, r), t6 dec. 91 ; relat., 

demons., as a prop. Art. 

see under Article. 
6 fcitcos attract. 332, R. 9. 
6 olos attract. 332, R. 9. 
076 use 303, R. 2. 
S5e, ride, ToSe dec. 91 ; 

Dialects 217, 4, (b) ; 

use 303, 1 ; with the 

Art. 246, 3. 
68i 95, (e). 
6(eLv c. g. 273, 5, (d): c. 

a. 278, 3, (b). 
bbovvtua ins. on 329, R. 

1 ; because 338, 2. 

01 afj.<pi (irept) Tiva2Q3,(d). 
61a c. part. 312, R. 13. 
OlSiwovs dec. 71, B. (b). 
olneTos c. g. 273, 2. 
olKTeipeiv c. g. 274, 1, (c). 
olKTpSs comp. 83, II. 
olov apart. 312, R. 13. 
olos with Sup. 239, R. 2 ; 

oTos, oTos t elftl c. inf. 

306, 1, (c). 

olos ins. on toiovtos 329, 

R. 8. 
ofos attracted 332, 7 ; c. 

inf. 332, R. 8. 
olos ins. SsTe 341, R. 2. 
olcid- 5 dpacrov, olcrdr' &s 

ttoitjo-ou 259, R. 10. 
oixo/xcw, a&iY, 255, R. 2. 
otxofj.a.1 c. part. 310, 4, (1). 
oki^ c. inf. 306, 1, (a.) 
bxiyos comp. 84, 7. 
b\iyw, oXiyov with Com- 

pa'r. 239, R. 1. 
oKiyccpelv c. g. 274, 1, (b). 
oXocpvpetrfrai c. g. 274, 1, 

(c); c. a. 279,5. 
cixiXetv c. d. 284, 3. (1). 
ofjivwai c. a. 279, 4. 
0,1101a toTs c. Sup. 239, 

R. 2. 
ofxoiou thai c. partic. 310, 

R. 2. 
'6/xolos c. g. 273, 3, (b); 

Ofxoios, dfxoiovv, -ovcr&at, 

d/j.oia>s c. d. 284, 3, 4. 
^oA^eTi/ c. d. 284,3,(6). 
i/j.o\oye7Tai c. a. and inf. 

307, R. 6. 



ofioos 322, 7 ; with a part. 
312, R. 8. 

bueiSiCeiv c. d. 284, 3, (6). 

oveipos dec. 72, (a). 

bvivdvai, -acrSrai c. a. 279,1. 

ovofxd icrri fxoi and the 
like 266, R. 1. 

bvoixa'£eiv c. two a. 280, 4. 

ovroov ins. eTwcrav 116, 12. 

O7no-&ev c. g. 273, 3, (b). 

oVoi in pregnant sense 
ins. ottov 300, R. 7. 

oirorav see orav under 'ore. 

OTTOTe see ore. 

ottov in pregnant sense 
ins. oTi-o! 300, R. 7 ; 
ottov, quandoquidem see 
ore. 

birws with Sup. 239, R. 2. 

07rws ins. 8ti 329, R. 1. 

oirus, ifAotf, t'ft order that, 
330 ; oVcos and '6ttws ui) 
c. ind. fut. ellip. 330, 
R.4. 

bircas, when, see oVe. 

ottws, as 342. 

opau C. g. 273, R. 20 ; opav 
a\Kr)v 278,3, (c) ; with 
verbs of appearing, 
showing 306, R. 9 ; c. 
part. 310, 4, (a). 

bpyi&cr&ai c. g. 274, 1 ; c. 
part. 310, 4, (c). 

dpeyear&ai c. g. 273,3, (bj. 

bpSpios comp. 82, I, (d). 

op^Scr&cu c. g. 273. R. 7, 
(b). 

bpvifroSrhpas dec. 44, R. 2. 

d>*/isdec.54,(c) and 68,12. 

bp<pav6s c. g. 271, 3. 

'6s, 7), 6'dec. 92; use 331, 
sq. ; agreement in gen. 
and num. 332, sq.; Case 
(attraction) 332, 6 ; 
Attractio inversa 332, 
R. 11 ; attraction in 
position 332, 8 ; os, 
7), before intermedi- 
ate clauses, attracted 
332, 9 ; modes 333 ; 6's 
changed into a demons. 
334, 1 ; os ins. the de- 
mons. 334, 3 ; os ins. 
on, since, because, ins. 
'Iva, ut (after ovtws, 
wde, toiovtos, tttXikov- 
tos, Toaovros) &sre, ins. 
idv or el 334, 2. 



os, 5J, o ; os fx4v — bs Se ; 
os Kal '6s demons. 331. 
R. 1. 

bcrov (oV<w) — roaovTov (to 
ctovtw) 343. 

Scrov, bcra> with Comp. 
and Sup. 239, R. 1 and 
2 ; bcrov, ocra c. inf., e. 
g. ocrov y efjL et'SeVcu 
341, R. 3. 

6'0-os ins. on t6ctos 329, 
R. 8. 

ocros attracted 332, 7. 

ocros ins. &sTe 341, R. 2. 

ocrTeov = octtovv dec.47,1. 

osTis dec. 93. 

bcr<ppaivecr&ai c. g. 273, 5, 
(f), andR. 19. 

bcrca — toctovtw 343,2, (b). 

brav see oVe. 

ot€ and orav const. 337. 

oVe fundamental mean- 
ing 338, 1. 

on with Sup. 239, R. 2. 

oVi, that, const. 329 ; dif- 
ference between '6ti, a 
c. inf. and part. 339, R. 
5 ; in citing the words 
of another 329, R. 3. 

oti, since, because, const 
338, 2. 

6Vt ti 344, R. 6. 

ov(k) 15, 4. 17, R. 2; 08 
at the end of a sen- 
tence 15, 4. 

ou 318 ; ou pleonastic, af- 
ter expressions denot- 
ing doubt, denial, after 
Comp. and Sup. ex- 
pressions 318, 8, and 
R. 7. 

ov yap a\\d 322, R. 11. 

ov interrog. 344, 5, (d). 

ov with Sup. negative 
adjectives 239 R. 3. 

ov fievToi aWa 322, R. 1 1 . 

ov fxi) 318, 7. 

ov fir) c. second pers. ind. 
fut. interrog. [ov jx), 
cpXvaprjcreLS ; ins. /j.i, 
cphvdpei) 255, 4. 

ou /j.r)v aWa 322, R. 11. 

ov fxovov — aXXa Kai 321,3 

ov pron. dec. 87 ; use 
302, R. 3. 

ovdas dec. 61, R. 1. 

ouSe 321, 2. 

ovdeis dec. 99, R. . 



GREEK INDEX. 



611 



fv&tls 'ostls ov attracted 
332, E. 12. 

owe en'Tiv otov, Situs 331, 
R. 5. 

ovkovv and ovkow 324, 
R. 7. 

ovu suffix 95, (b); con- 
clusive 324, 3, (b); in 
an answer 344, 7. 

ovveKa c. g. 288, R. ; ov 
vena ins. #-n 329, R. 1 j 
smce, because 338. 2. 

o5s dec. 54, R. 4. 

ofrre — ovre ; outs — Te 
321,2. 

ovtos dec. 91 ; Dialects 
217,4, (c); use 303, 1; 
with the Art. 246, 3. 

ovtos, heus! 269, 2, (a). 

oirroo-'i 95, (e). 

o&ro>(s) 15, 2. 

ovtws, o>s in wishes 342. 
R. 2. 

ovtcos with part. 312, R. 7. 

OU^ 07TCCS (0Tj), OUX OTt, 

— ctAAct /cat ; ol>x oTo?/ 

— ctAAa321, 3. 
6<ppa, that, so that, 330. 
6<ppa, until, see 'decs, 
otyios comp. 82, I, (d). 
otyoepdyos comp. 82,1. (f). 

naiVoc. 53,4, (1), (c). 
iraiZeveiu c. two a. 280, 3. 
naXaLSs comp. 82, I, (c). 
vavTolou eJvai, yiyvecr&oii 

c. Part. 310, 4, (h) ; c. 

a. c. inf. 311, 18. 
trapd Prep. 297 ; irapd c. 

g. ins. c. d. 300, 4, (a). 
irdpa ins. irdpeaTL 31, R. 3. 
irapaiveiv c. d. 284, 3, (3) ; 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
irapa.Ke\zv€0~&ai c. d. 284, 

3, (3). 
irapaXa/Afiavt.s c. g. 275, 

3 ; c. two a. 280, 4. 
irapairXrjo-ios c. g. 273, R. 

9; c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
irapao-KevdCscr&ai 306, 1 , 

(a) ; c. Stvcos c. ind. fat. 

330, 6 ; c. part, and c. 

o>s and part. 310, 4. (h). 
Ttapaxuptiv c. g. 271, 2; 

C. d. 284, 3, (2). 
jrope/c, ?rape|, 7rctpe|, 300, 

R. 1. 
wdpiffTiv c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 



irapo^vveiv c. inf. 306,1, (a) 
ttus with the Art. 246, 5. 
iras ris with the second 
pers.imp.241,R.13, (c). 
irdarauv 216, 2. 
itdaxtw vtt6 rivos 249, 3. 
■Kox-np dec. 55, 2. 
irdrpus dec. 71, B. (c). 
iraveiv, -ecr&cu C g. 271,2; 

c. part. 310, 4, (f ) ; c 

part, and inf. 311, 17 
iraxvs comp. 216, 2. 
irei&eiv Tivd tl 278, 4 ; c. 

a. 279, 1; c. inf. 306, 1, 

(a) ; c. ws 306, R. 2. 
irei&eo-frcu c. g. 273, R. 18 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
Trcivrju c. g. 274, 1. 
Tletpaievs dec. 57, R. 2, 
Treipaa&cu C. g. 273, 5, (e); 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a); c. 

part, and inf. 311, 18. 
ir€Ad£siv, 7reAas c. g. 273, 

R. 9; c. d. 284, 3. (2). 
Trevea&ai, tt4vtjs c. g. 273, 

5, (b). 
Trev&iKcos £X* LV c - S- ^74, 

1, (c). 
Treirepi dec. 63, R. 1. 
7re7roi&eW C d.284,3, (3). 
Tveiroov comp. 84, 11. 
irip 95, d; Synt. 317, 1. 
irepcuos comp. 82, I, (c). 
irepav c. g. 271,3. 
irtpav c. a. 279, R. 5. 
Trepi Prep. 295, 1 and 3. 
Trepi — evena 300, R. 2. 
irepi c. d. in pregnant 

sense ins. of the ace. 

300, 3, (a). 
Trepi ins. 7r epiecm 31, R. 3. 
irepifidWeiv c.two a. 280,3. 
Trepiyiyvea&cu C g. 275, 1. 
TreptoiSoa&cu c g. 275, 3. 
irepieTvai c. g. 275, 1. 
7re/)texecrftcu c. g. 273, 3, 

Trepi&eiv see ireptopav. 
UepiKXrjs dec. 59, 2. 
irepifxeueiu c. a. 279, 3. 
Trepiopav c. part. 310, 4, 

(e) ; c. part, and inf. 

311, 15. 
nepiopao-^ai c. g. 274, 1. 
Trept irpo 300, R 1. 
Trepm6s c. g. 275, 2. 
TrecpvKei>ai c. inf. 306, 1, (d). 
irrixvs dec. 63. 



Trietpa 78, R. 8. 
7ri/j.7rXr)/jLi c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
inVeij/ c. g. and a. 273, 5, 

(c) and R. 15 
iriineiv into tlvos 249, 3. 
■KiGTsve.iv c. d. 284, 3. (3). 
iriuv comp. 84, 12. 
TrXeiv c. a. 279, R. 5. 
irKeicTou with Sup. 239 ; 

R.2. 
nKeiov without rj 323, R. 4 
irXeiuu, 7rAeroTos 84, 9. 
TrAeoj/ ins. 7rAeW 78, R. 5. 
TrAeV without ff 323, R. 4. 
TvXeoveKTetv C. g. 275, 1. 
TrAeo's c g. 273, 5, (b). 
irAeus dec. 78, R. 5. 
ttAtj&co e.g. 273, 5, (b). 
7rAr)v c. g. 271, 3. 
TrKr)pr)s, TrXripoco C g. 278, 

5, (b). 
Tr\7)0-id£eiv, irXrjcriov C g. 

273,R.9;c. d.284,3, (2). 
ir\T]o~iov comp. 84. 
ttx6os = 7rAo0s dec. 47. 
ttXovctios C g. 273, 5, (b). 
irveiv c. g. 273, 5, (d); c. 

a. 278, 3, (b). 
irvvl dec. 68, 13. 
TTo&eiv c. a. 274, R. 1. 
-n-oi in Preg. sense ins. irov 

{ubi) 300, R. 7. 
7roie?i/ c. g. of material 

273, 5, (a) ; c. two a. 

280, 4. 
TToielv ev, KaKcas c. part. 

310, 4, (g); c. a. 279, 2; 

aya&d, /ca/cct etc. C. a. 

280,2;c.inf.306,l,(c). 
iroieiv c. part. 310, 4, (b) ; 

c. part, and inf. 311, 

13. 
7roie7<T&ai c. g. 273, 2 and 

3, (a) ; c. g. of pricj 
275,3.' 

irolos with the Art. 344 

R. 3. 
TTohefieTu C d. 234. 3, (2). 
tt6\is dec. 63. 
7roAAo?> elvai, iytceToftcUi 

yiyvea&ai c. part. 310, 

4, (h). 

ttoAXov Sew c. inf. 307, 

R. 6. 
7toAA&3 with comp. and 

superl. 239, R. 1 and 2. 
tto\v with Comp. and 

Superl. 239, R.l and 2. 



612 



GREEK INDEX. 



rroXvs dec. 77. 

rio<re;5«y dec. S3, 4. (1) 
(d); 56, R. 1. 

iroTe, ris irore etc. 344, 
R.2. 

7i 6repa, irorepov — tf in a 
direct and indirect 
question 344, 5, (f ). 

wpaos dec. 76, XIV. 

wpdrreiv eu, KaKws C. a. 
279, 2 ; signification of 
the first and second 
Perf. 249, 2; 070^0, 
Kuxd etc. c. a. 280, 2 ; 
Trpdrreiv, -ecr&cu, to de- 
mand, c. two ace. 280, 
3; c. d. 284,3, (1). 

irpeT.etv, irpeir6vTu>s C. d. 
284, 3, (5) ; c. inf. 306, 
1, (d) ; c. d. and a. c. 
inf. 307, R. 3. 

TrpeVei c. part. 310, 4, (i). 

irpecrfieis, irpeafivrris, trpi- 
(Tfrvs 70, B. 

Trpeafieveiv c. g. 275, 1. 

TTpecrfiHTTOs 83, R. 2. 

vpiavSai c. g. 275, 3. 

7iynV, irp\v av, irp\v 77 const. 
337. 

irp6 Prep. 287, 2. 

•Kpo&X*w c. g. 275, 1. 

trpohv^ov eluat, irpo^vfxe?ff- 
frai c. inf. 306, 1, (a) ; 
c ftiroos c. ind. fut. 330, 6. 

irpo?Ka 278, R. 2. 

■KpoKahzlaSai nvd ti 278, 
4. 

TTpOKpiUdlV c. g. 275, 1. 

irpovoeiv c. g. 274, 1. 

irpoolfxiou 17, R. 4. 

•npoopav c. g. 274, 1. 

wp6s Prep. 298 ; c. d. in 
Preg sense ins. c. a. 
300, 3, v a). 

irposfiaWtiv c. g. 273, 5, 
(d). 

irposSMvai C. g. 273, 3, (b). 

Trpos-f]Keivc6. 284,3,(5); 
c inf. 306, 1, (d); c.d. 
and a. c. inf. 307, R. 3. 

Trpos-f]K€i fxoi c. g. 273, 3, 
(b). 

vp6s&eu c. g. 273, 3, (b). 

irposKaAelo-frat c. g. 274, 2. 

irposicvue7v- c. a. 279, 1. 

■npooToadv c. g. 275, 1. 

7rposTdTTetJ' c. d. 284, 3, 
(3); c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 



Trpo<T(pepr}S C. d. 284, 3, (4). 
irpoTt/xav c. g. 275, 1. 
irpovpyiaiTepos 84, R. 3. 
irpo(p4peiv c. g. 275, 1. 
ivpoxovs dec. 71, B, (b). 
irp&ios comp. 82, I, (d). 
irpwrevav C. g. 275, 1. 
TTpwros and irpwrov 264, 

R. 7. 
TTTi](T(Teiv c. a. 279, 5. 
7TTo>x<fc comp. 82, I, (f ). 
irvi'&dj'evSrcu with the sig- 

nif. of Perf. 255, R. 1. 
Trvvfrdveoftcu C. g. 273, R. 

20 ; c part. 310, 4, (a); 

c part, and inf. 311, 6. 
ttccXuv c. g. 275, 3. 
iras &y c. opt. 260, 2, (4) 

(d). 

'Po5/a>s <pepeiv c. part. 310, 

4, (c). 
paow, pacTTOs 84, 10. 
pe?»/ c. a. 278, 3, (a). 
peireiv c. a. 279, R. 5. 
f>ovs dec. 47. 

2 omitted 25, 1 ; mova- 
ble at the end of a 
word 15; in the for- 
mation of tenses of 
pure verbs 131, and 
133; euphonic or con- 
necting letter 237, 1 
and R. 2. 

(rdrreip c. g. 273, 5, (b). 

cravjov or aeavrou dec. 
88 ; use 302, 2. 

<re Suffix 235, 3 and R. 3. 

aeAas dec. 61, (a). 

0-7/s dec. 68, 14. 

ad- in inflex. changed to 
&25, 3. 

aba inflex. 116, 2. 

<T$roov ins. abuo-af 116, 12. 

ai union syllable 237, 1. 

aivairi dec. 63. 

ciptabai c. a. 279, 1. 

(TKOV, (TKop.'qv 221. 

(TKoireiv c. g. and a. 273, 
R. 20 and 21. 

(TKcf>p dec. 68, 15. 

(xoi ethical Dat 284, 3,(10) 
(d). 

g6s ins. gov 302, R. 2. 

a-rravi^iy c. g. 273, 5, (b). 

(nrtvfeff&cu c. d- 284. 3, 



(nrsvoeiv c, a. 279, R. 5. 
fnrovMfav c. inf. 306, 1 , a 
<nrov8a?os comp. 82, R. 6. 
ardCeiu c. a. 278, 3, (a). 
(TTaSffjiaa-^ai ri rivi 285, 1, 

(3). 
arreap dec. 68, 16. 
(TTevdCeiv c. d. 285, 1, (1). 
(TTepysiv c. a. and d. 274, 

R. 1 ; c.d. 285, (1). 
arepe?!/ c. g. 271, 2; C. 

two ace, Tivd tluos 280, 

3 and R. 3. 
arrival c. a. 279, R. 6. 
2T?see Bad 97, 1. 
o-TOxdfcaSrai c. g. 273, 3. 

(b). 
(rrpaTrjyeTj/ c. g. 275, 1. 
ay dec. 87 ; use 3C% 1. 
avyyiyvu>(TKu> efxavTy C. 

part. 310, R. 2. 
(n/7'vi'a)uwj' c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
(n»7\«peri/ c. inf. 306,1, (a). 
(tvXuu c. two ace. 280, 3. 
avfjt.Paiveu' c. inf. 306, 1, 

(d) ; c. d. and a. c. inf. 

307, R. 3; personal 307, 

R. 6. 
(rvufSovXeveiv C. inf. 306, 

1, (a). 
crvfAirpdrTeiv c d. 284, 3, 

(7). 
av/xcpepeLv C. d. 284, 3, (7). 

<ru/j.(pepei c. part. 310, 4, 

(i). 
(rv/j.(pop6v ian c. d. and 

ace. c. inf. 307, R. 3. 
(tw, l&v Prep. 289, 2. 
avvaipecr&ai. c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
avve\6vTi 284, 3, 10, (a). 
(Tvveirec&ai c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
avvepyos c. g. 273, 3, b. 
cwihai c. g. and c. g. and 

a. 273,5, (f) and R. 19. 
crvuoida i/j.avrq> c. part. 

310, R. 2. 
avvTeix6vTi 284, 3, 10, (a). 
cvs dec. 62. 

a(pd\Ae(T&ai C g. 271, 2. 
(T<pi(Tiv ins. fyuV 302, R. 8. 
trxeSoV c. g. 273, R. 9.^ 
G%T\p.a Ko*i '6\ov na\ uepos 

with the Nom. 266, 3; 

with the Ace. 266, R. 4. 
o-XoAcuos comp. 82, 1, (c). 
SoKpaTTjs dec. 59, 2 &n4 

R. 2. 



GREEK INDEX. 



615 



Omus cicc. 78, R. G. 

trcorsp Voc. 53, 4, (1) (a). 

Ta roiavra without Kal 

following 325, 1, (e). 
rapdrreiu TroXe/xov 278, 2. 
ravra referring to one 

thought 241, R. 3. 
raxvs comp. 83, I. 
raws dec. 72, (b). 
T€ 321, 1 ; T6 — Kai, ib. 
reyyeiv c. a. 278, 3. 
reKfxaipeor&al ri rivi 285, 

1,(3). 
tckuovu, parentem esse255, 

R. 1. 
7-e'A.etos c. g. 273, 5. (e). 
reXevTwv, finally, lastly 

312, R. 3. 
rkpcvsiv c. two ace. 280, 3. 
recces dec. 54, R. 4. 
r4pTre<T&ai c. part. 310, 4, 

(d). 
rerrapes dec. 99, 5. 
t7)\ikovtos dec. 91. 
ri Be 344. R. 4. 
t/ ju.a.9-wi/, ti Tra&aiv 344, 

R. 5. 
W ov, ri ovv ov 256, 4, (e). 
T&cvai, -eo^rai c. g. 273, 

3, (a) ; c. two ace. 280,4. 
rixTeiv, parentem esse 255, 

R. 1. 
ripiw, TipiaoSai C. g. 275, 3. 
Tiixopw c. d. 284, 3, (7); 

rificopeTa^ai nvd rivos 

274, 2 ; c. a. 279, 7. 
rls and ris dec. 93. 
rls or 7ras -ns with the II. 

pers. Imp. 241, R. 13. 
rls use 303, 4; rls 

omitted 238, 5, (e). 
Tt's ins. osris in indirect 

question 344, R. 1 . 
r6, rod, r£) c. inf. or c. a. 

c. inf. 308 ; r6 c. inf. or 

c. a. c. inf. in exclam. 

and question 308, R. 2. 
rb Kal to, rbv Kal r6v 

247, 3. 
rb vvv ehai, rb rv/xepoi/ 

elvai, rb Kara -rovrov 

ehai 308, R. 3. 
roi 317, 3; in answers 

344, 7. 
roiyap, rotyapovv 324, 3, 

(c). 
roiydpro'. 324, 3, (c). 



rolvvv 324, 3 (c). 
roiovros dec. 91 ; roiov- 

r6s el/xi c. inf. 341, R. 2. 
rolsSeffi 217, 4. 
roKpiav c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
ro^eveiv c. g. 273, R. 7. 
roaovrov — oaov ; roaovrw 

—Qtru 343, 2, (b). 
toctovto -ovrw with Com. 

and Sup.' 229, R. 1 

and 2. 
rocrovros dec. 91. 
roaovrov Sew c. inf. and 

fore c. inf. 307, R. 6. 
rod or rov fj.{] c.inf. 274.3, 

(b). 
rpacpeis twos 275, R. 5. 
rp^lv c. a. 279, 5. 
rptis dec. 99, 5. 
t/h/3o>z/ c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
rpiT]pr)s dec. 59, 2. 
rvyxdvetv c. g. 273,3, (I)); 

c. part. 310, 4, (1). 
rvpavvCiv, -veveii/ C. g. 

275, 1. 
rv<pws dec. 72, (b). [(c). 
rcavro ins. to avro 217, 4, 

'r/3pi(eiv c. a. 279, 1. 
vfipiar6Tepos 82, II. 
£f5w/j dec. 68, 13. 

uWs dec. 72, (a). 

V/J.00U, VjAlV, vfj.iv 87, R. 4. 
virdyeiv c. g. 274, 2. 
viraKovsiv c. g. 273, R. 18 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
vTravicrraoSai C. g. 271, 2. 
viravrav, viravTid£eiv C. g. 

273, R, 9 ; c. d. 284, 
, 3, (2). 
i/Trapxtiv C. g. 271, 4 ; C.d. 

284, 3, (9) ; c. part. 

310, 4, (f.) 
vireiKeiv c g. 271, 2 ; c. d. 

284, 3, (2). 
vireKSOO, R. 1. 
vTreKTpeirea&ai c. a. 279, 

R. 3. [R. 3. 

inre^epx^o-^aL c. a. 279, 
virep 293. 
inrepfidWeiv c. g. and a. 

275, 1. 
V7repe'x6iz/ c. g. 275, 1. 
virepopav C g. 274, 1 . 
virep<p4peiv C. g. 275, 1. 
virfiKoos c g. and d. 273, 

R. 18. 
inrt)x^v c a. 278, 3, (b). 
52 



vtt6 Prep. 299 ; c. d. in 

Preg. sense ins. c. a 

300, 3, (a) ; c. a. and 

part. 312, R. 5. 
vtto ins. virec-ri 31, R. 3. 
viro/xeueiv c. inf. 306, 1. (a) 

311, 15; c. part. .310 
e 4, (e). 
viro/j.ifj.i'rio-Keiy c. two arc 

280, 3. 
virovoeiv c. g. 273, R. 20. 
vTToarTJvat c. d. 284, 3, (2) 
virox^p^v c. g. 271, 2. 

c. a. 279, R. 3. 
varepeTv, varepov €li/at y 

vo-repi(eiu C. g. 275, 1. 
vd>io-Taa&ai c. d. 284, 3. 

(2). 
t>>o~ros216, R. 2. 

4>a7e?v c. g. and a. 273, 5. 

(c) and R. 15. 
(paiueii/, (palveo-frat C. part 

310, 4, (b) ; (palyofiat 
iroioov ri ib. R. 3. 

(paiueaSrai c. inf. and part 

311, 8. 

fydvai c. int i 96, 1, (b.) 
(pavepos el/xi ivoioov ri 310 

R.3. 
(peideoSrai C. g. 274, 1, (b). 
(pepe, referring to several 

persons 241, R. 13, (a j. 
(pepo/xevos, <pep<vv, maxim** 

studio 312, R. 9 ; <p4pwt' 

with ib. R. 10. 
<p4praros 84, 1. 
(peprepos, (pepiaros 84. 1 
(pevyew with signif. (i 

Perf. 255, R. 1 ; <pe- 

yeiv C. g. e. g. kAo7t',s 

274,2; vtto rivos 249. 3. 
(pevyeiv c. a. 279, 3 ; c inf. 

306, 1, (a). 
(pfrd/JLtvos, <pibds, quickly 

310, 4, (e). 
<p&di>etv c. a. 279, 4 ; c. 

part, followed bv ^, 

w/olp ^' 310, 4, (1) 
(p&4yyea&ai c. a. 278, 3. 
(j^J-yyos and $$077^ 70, 

B. 
^oisdec. 68, 17. 
<p&ove7i/ C g. 274, 1, ( t) ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
(piAos comp. 82, R. 4. 
<£iAos c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
<pi(v) suffix 210. 



614 



GREEK INDEX. 



tpoPela&a, c. a. 279, 5 ; c. 

inf. 306, 1. (a). 
<poiviKcvs 76, R. 3. 
tpovevu) with signif. of 

Perf. 255, R. 1. 
(ppd(eiv c. d. and a. c. inf. 

307, R. 3. 
tppeap dec. 68, 16. 
<bpoi/j.iov 1 7, R. 4. 
(ppovTi(eiv e.g. and a. 274, 

1 and R. 1 5 c. cos and 

g. abs. ^12, R. 12; c. 

ottos c. ind. fut. 330, 6. 
(ppovdos 17, R. 4. 
ipveiv ; ^5rai c. g. 273, 1. 
<pvAaTT6(T&cu c. a. 279, 1. 

Xaipeiv c. d. 285, (1) ; c 

part. 310, 4, (c). 
Xa-Xeiraiveiv C. g. 274, 1 ; 

C d. 284, 3, (6). 
XatenSs el/xi c. inf. ins. 

XaXeirou 4<tti with ace. 

c. inf. 307, R. 6. 
Xateiras (pepeiv C. g. 274, 

l,d; c. d. 285, (1); c. 

iiri tivi and c. a. 285, R. 

1 ; c. part. 310, 4 (c). 
Xdprjs dec. 71, A, (a). 
X^i»'278, R. 2; e.g. 288, 

R. ; x&pw ip.T\v, (tt]v ib. 
X^Lp dec. 55, R. 1. 
XtipiGTos, x^P°° v 84, 2. 
XeAiScoj/ dec. 55, R. 2. 
X"t]povv c. g. 271, 2. 
XyoOy dec. 47. 
■jtocus dec. 57 and 68, 18. 



XoXovcr&ai C. g. 274, 1 ; c. 

d. 284, 3, (6). 
Xopeveiv &e6i> 279, R. 5. 
XoOs dec. 68, 18. 
XpaLcrfielu c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
Xpefo 73, 1, (c). 
XP«t>s dec. 69. 
Xp"h c g. 273, 5, (b) ; c. a. 

and d. 279, R. 4, c. inf. 

306, 1, (d); xpv c. d. 

and a. c. inf. 307, 6, 

and R. 3. 
Xprjv&a'i rtvi ri 278, 4 ; c. 

d. 285, (2). 
Xpus dec. 68, 19. 
Xoopuu c. d. 284, 3, v-)- 
Xoopi(eiv c. g. 271, 2. 
XwpLs c. g. 271, 3. 
X&pos and x^P a 70, B. 

Waveiu c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
tyeyeiv c. g. and a. 273, 

R. 20. 
xPevSea&ai c. g. 271. 2. 
^cuStjs comp. 82, II. 
$i\6s e.g. 271, 3. 

T n5e with Part. 312, R. 7. 

Smx|, dim 53, R, 4. 

«j/e«r&ai c. g. 275, 3. 

o>s Prep. 290, 3 and R. 2. 

ws that, see 6Vt. 

«s u£, in ivishes (utinam) 
259, 3, (b). 

ws, as, so as, const. 342 ; 
ovtws (&s) — cos in wish- 
es and asseverations 



242 v R. 2; d>s with C 

Subs, (as might be ex- 
pected, ccs AaKeSai/u.6- 
vios, ut Laced, for a La- 
cedaemonian) 342, R. 4, 

cos with Superl. 239, R.2, 

cos c. d., as : us yeooVn, 
cos i/J-oi, meo judicio, cos 
ifiy So'|r? 284,3. (10) (b). 

oos c. part, and case abs. 
312, 6 ; c. part. fut. 312, 
6, (a). 

cos ins. on ovrcos 329, R. 8. 

cos, that, so that 330 ; &s kc, 
c. opt. utinam 260, R. 9. 

cos, when, see ore. 

cos ins. cosre, so that, see 

COSTS. 

cos elireiv and cos tiros el- 

ireiv 341, R. 3. 
cos els, eVi, irpos C. a., us 

eVi c. d. 290, R, 2. 
&>s ri 344, R. 6. 
ws &<pe\ov, -es, -e c. inf. 

259, R. 6. 
usirep, as, const. 342 ; with 

Part. 312, R. 13. 
fore c. inf. ins. of a sim- 
ple inf. 306, R. 3. 
usre c. part. 312, R. 13. 
&sre t so that, const. 341. 
usre, as, so as, const. 342. 
uvros ins. o avr6s 217. 4, 

(e). 
ucpeXelu e. a. 279, 1 ; c. 

two a. 280, R. 1 ; c. d. 

279, R. 1. 



III. INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF THE VERBS. 



Abbreviations. A. Aorist ; A. I. first Aor. ; A. II. second Aor. ; Aug. Aug- 
ment ; Char. Characteristic; Comp. Compare; Dial. Dialect; P. Future; P. 
Passive; Pf. Perfect; Pf. M. Perfect Middle; PI up. Pluperfect; R. Remark; 
Red. Reduplication. 



Adu 230. 
ayaiojxai 230. 
fryajiccu 179, 1. 
aydo/xai, ayaiofxat 230. 
&ye(pa> Pf. with Att. Red. 
124, 2, {b). Dial. 230. 



ayvoeu 230. 

&yvv[j.i 187. 1. Dial. 230. 

liyu, A.I. 7}|a, a£ai in Thu. 
and Xen. ; A. II. 124, 
R.2; Pf.I.Act. 124,2; 
Pf. M. ^7/uoj. Dial. 230. 



ddu (Poet, aeiSu), P. 0V0- 
/xat (aeicro/xai), Att. 
(aeurw, a<rw n on- Att.); 
Aug. 122, 1. Dill. 230. 

aeipu 230. 

ar]Si(o/xai Aug. 122, 1. 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



615 



AH MI 230. 

*ld(a> Char. 143, 6. 

aldeo/xai, a'tOofxai 166, 1. 

Dial. 230. 
alviw, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (d), 2. 
afyvfiai 230. 
cupiw 167, 1. Dial. 230. 
cupu) see detpco 230. 
aloSdvofxcu 160, 1. 
aia-ao) Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 

230. 
Ma Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 230. 
axaxlfa 230. 
aKax^vos 230. 
a.Keojxa.1, formation of 

tenses 130, (d), 1. 
aKTjdew 230. 
aitovco, Pf. with Att. Red. 

124, 2 ; F. a.KOvffOjxa.1. 

Pass, with (r 131, 2. 
aKpodo/j.a.1, F. -acrouai 129. 

R. 1. 
aAaAa^y, Char. 143, 6. 
dKaoixai 230. 
dAo7rd<> 223, 5. 
aXSaiva) 230. 
dXeictxc, Pfwith Att. Red. 

124, 2. 
dAe£o> 166, 2. Dial. 230. 
dAeofxai or dAev<tyiai 230. 
dAeco, formation of tenses 

130, (d), 1. 
a.\£rfi<TKu, -bio-Ka 230. 
b.\iaKop.ai 161, 1. 
aXiTaivca 230. 
aKud&eiv, see dAe£o> 162. 
aAhdacrco, Char. 7. 143, 1. 

—A.I. and II. P. 141. 
, 4, (b). 
akAop.ai, a in format. 149, 

R. 2. Dial. 230. 
dAodw, F. -d<ra>. 129, R. 1. 
a.\vKT€co 230. 
aA'Vtfw 230. 
aX<paivu>, -dvoo 230. 
a,uxpTdv<a 160, 2. Dial. 

230. 
d,u.j3A.i(TKaj 161, 2. 
u.aTre'xw 159, 4. 
a/j.'ir\ai<iaK(a 230. 
a.jj.vi/01}, ap.vvo&ov 162. 
a/A(piyvoeco, Aug. 126, 1 

and 3. 
kp.<pi4vvvp.i 184, 1. 
d/j.<pis^T4(a, Aug. 126, 2. 
o.va^t(t3(TKOfxai 161, 3. 
i.vahio~Koi 161, 4. 



dySdz/« 230. 

'ANEQH 230. 

dvexopiai Aug. 12(i, 1. 

dvrjuo&a (Ep.J 230. 

dvoiyvvpu, dvoiyco 187, 6. 

dfop^w, Aug. 126, 1. 

avrdco 230. 

dj/uVaj, dww formation of 
tenses 130. (b), l.Dial. 
230. 

01/070 230. 

d7rai>pda? 230. 

aira(pt<TK0i} 230. 

direiAeco 230. 

a.7re^i3-d^o^.aj 160, 3. 

oTro'epo-e 230. 

dirSxpv 177, 3, contrac- 
tion 137, 3. 

diroxp&fJ-ai 230. 

'APAfl 230. 

dpeV/cw 161, 5. 

apnea, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (d), 1. 

dpixoTTw, -Ceo, Char. 143. 3. 

apvvixai 188, 1. Comp.230. 

dp6co, formation of tenses 
130, (e). 

dp-rdfa, Char. 143, 7. 

dpvrca, dpva, formation 
of tenses 130, (b), 1. 

'APX1, dpaplana 230. 

dW&>, dicTcrc!) 230. 

avaiva, Aug. 122, 1. 

'ATAAZOMAI, Char. 143, 
6. 

AYPAfl, see diravpdw. 
Comp. 230. 

av^dvea, av£a, 160, 4. 

'ATPI2KOMAI, iiravp.230. 

d(pLKueofj.ai 159, 2. 

depvo-aw, Char. 143. 4. 

'A*n, dwacpia-Kcc 230. 

&X&o,uai 166, 4. 

'AXn, aucaxitu 230. 

'AH, (Ep.) 230. 

dapro (deipoo) 230. 

B<f£«, Char. 143, 6. 
flaiVco 158, 1. Dial. 230. 
/3oAAco 156,2. Comp.230. 
pawTca, Char. 0. 143, I. 
jSape'w 230 

/3oo-to(>, Char. 143, 7. 
BAH, see flaiVw. 
fieiop.ai, /3eo/xai 230. 
Pido/uai 230. 

8i&d(ca 163, 1. Comp. 
0at'j/a> 230 



Pij3puo~Kca 161, 6 Dial 

230. 
jSuta 192, .0. 
fiidtxTKo/xai 161, 3. 
0Aa7rr&>, Char. 0, 143, 1 

Red. 123, 2. 
fiAao-rdvca 160, 5. 
flAao-^juew, Red. 123, 2. 
j8A«r», A. II. P. 140 R, 1. 
0Aitt« Char. 143, 3. 
PXaxraca 230. 
jSoow 230. 
jSoovca 166, 5. 
0oi\opai 166. 6. Dial. 230 
fipdo-arw, Char. 143, 3. 
£/>exco A. II. P. 140, 2. 
jSpffw, Char. 143. 6. 
Ppvxdo/xai 230. 
/Bvveco, fivvoixai, /Sua; 1 59, 1 

Ta/iew 165, 1. Comp. 230. 

ydvvjxai 230. 

TAfi, see yiyvofxai. Comp 
230. 

yeyoovto-Kw 161, 7. Comp 
yeyava 230. 

yeivo/xai 230. 

7eAd«, formation of ten- 
ses 130 (c). 

ydvro 230. 

TENH, see ylyvo/xai. 

yeva, A. P. with a 131, 3 

77?&e'a> 165, 2. 

yr)pd<TK03, yqpda 161, 8. 
Dial. 230. 

yiyvojxai, yivofxai 163, 2. 

yiyvcxxTKca, ylvuxTKU) 161,9 

700ft) 230. 

yprjyopea, see iyeipw. 

Aaifa 143. 6. 223, 5. 

8afri//Af 230. 

Sato) 230. 

SaKvco 158, 9. 

SojUaa), Sa/xd^co 156, 2. 

SaiAvdo} 230. 

dapfrdva) 160, 6. Dial. 230. 

Sareo/xai 230. 

AAn 230. 

Seoro 230. 

5e7166, 7. 

SeiSw, Pf. Se'Sta 193. 

Comp. 230. 
SeiW/xt 175, 187, 2. Dial 

230. 
5e?y, see Set. 
AEKXi, see SeUvufit and 

Se'xOjUot. 



616 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF \ERBS. 



oefj.o}, formation of ten- 
ses 156, 2. 

Beo/mi contract. 137, 2. 

Sepfco/xat., Pf. Sedopxa with 
the meaning of the 
Pres. 140, 4. Dial. 230. 

5e>«, A. II. P. and Pf. A. 
140, 2 and 4. 

Sexojuai 230. 

tievw 230. 

Sew, formation of tenses 

130, (d), 2, contraction 
137, 2. 

5ew, see 8e?. 
SicuTao;, Aug. 126, 2. 
SiaKovew, Aug. 126, 2. 
5ioA.67o/*oi, Aug. 123, R. 2. 
Si5c«r/ca> 161, B. 
AIAHMI 230. 
didpdcrnto 161, 10. 
diSco/xi 175. 
5i'6?/«m 180, R, 3. Dial. 

230. 
AIHMI 180, R. 3 Dial. 

230. 
8t<rn££», Char. 143, 7. 
5i^/aw, contracted 137, 3. 
Stw 230. 

Siw/cw. iSi^ftaStov 162. 
Soacro-aTO 230. 
So/cew 165, 3. 
Sovireco 230. 
Spaw, formation of tenses 

131, 3. 
APEMH see rpex?- 
dvva/xai 179, 2. Accent 

176, 1. Dial. 230. 
8tW, Dvco 158, 2. Dial. 
230. 

'EdcpS-n see a7TT&> 230. 

eao, Aug. 122, 3. For- 
mation of tenses 129, 
It. 1. 

iyeipco Pf. with Att. Red. 
124,2, (b) ; Pf. II. with 
variable vowel 140, 4. 
Aor. II. M. 155, 1. 
Dial. 230. 

'ErKH, see cpepw. 

iyXeipeco, Aug. 126. 5. 

e5co, see icrbico. 

k£o/j.ai, see Kft9-i'{«. 

eSeXco 166, 8 

i&i£co, Aug. 122, 3. 

E©n Aug.l22,3,Dial.230. 

'EIAH, see opdte. 

flKofa, Aug. 121, R. 



'EIKfl, Pf. eWu, Plup. 

itoK&v 140, R. 3 ; Aug. 

122, 5. Inflection of 

eoiica 195, 2. Dial 230. 
efrcw, eiKoS-oj/ 162. 
elXeco, elXeco, ei'AAo* and 

etAAco, see e'/Aco. 
ei'Auw 230. 
e/fAco 166, 9. 
e f >t 181 and 225. 
elfxi 181 and 226. 
e'ivvjxi, see afxcpUvvvfXL. 
'Einn, see $77,1*1. 
e'ipyvvjxi 187, 3. 
dpya 187, 3. Comp. 230. 
'EIPOMAI 166,11. Comp. 

230. 
'EIPTMI, see ipvio 230. 
elpvco, see ipveo. 
eipco 230. 
elect, Aug. 122, 3, Dial. 

230. 
e'ioo&a, see e&i(co. 
eXavvcc 158, 3. Dial. 230. 
eXacc, see eXavvcc. 
iKeyxeo, Pf.with Att.Red. 

124, 2. 
e'AeAi(>, Char. 143, 6. 

Dial. 230. 
'EAEY0f2, see epxofiai. 
kXicTcrco, Aug. 122, 3.— Pf. 

with Att. Red. 124, 2. 
'EAKTH, see eXtcto. 
hXKto 166, 10. 
eKirco, Pf. eoX-rra, Plup. 

edoXireiv 140, R. 3. Aug. 

122, 5. 
'EAH, see atpeco. 
efxeca, formation of tenses 

130, (d), 1. 
4/jLfj.l 225. 

i[Xwf]/J.VK€, See 7]/XVCC. 

ifxivi-KXriixi 177, 5. 
ivap((cc, Char. 143, 6. 
ivavco, Pass, with a 131,2. 
'ENE0H, see h'i\voba. 
'ENEKfl, see epepec. 
eVeVa>, see cprj/xi. Comp. 

230. 
ivwo&a 230. 

iviTTTCO 230. 

ivveirco, see ^77/xi. Comp. 

230. 
kvvv/j.1, see c\fj.(pieuvvij.i. 

Comp. 230. 
eVoxAe'u, Aug. 126, 1. 
^ot«:a, see 'EIKH. Comp. 

230. 



copy a, see 'EPrn. 
kopTafa, Aug. 122, 5 
eW'w 230. 
iiravpicTKco 230. 
i-rreiyo/j.ai 197, R. 2. 
i7ri&v/j.<Eco, Aug. 126, 5. 
iirlcTTafxai 179, 3. Dial 

230. 
fW, Aug. 122, 3. Comp 

230. 
epa/xac 179, 4. 
epaoj see epajxai. 
ipyd£op.ai, Aug. 122, 3. 
6^70) 230. 
5 EPm, p]'ap. iwpyeiv 122, 

5. — Perf. with variable 

vowel 140, R. 3. 
epSco see 'EPm. Comp. 

230. 
ipeiSco, perf. with Att. 

Red. 124, 2. Dial. 230. 
epeiircc 230. 
epeacrcc 143, 3. 
iptSaivcc 230. 
ipi£to 230. 
'EPOMAI see 'EIP. 
epirv(co, epircc, Aug. 122, 3 
%ppco 166, 12. Dial. 230. 
epvyydvco 160, 13. 
ipv&aivco 230. 
epvKcc 230. 
epv/xai see epuo) 230. 
epyw, formation of tenses 

223, 1. Comp. 230. 
epxojxo.1 167, 2. Comp. 

230. 
eV&iw, §V&o> 167, 3. 
ecrndo), Aug. 122, 3. 
evade see avddvco. Comp 

230. 
evSco see Ka&evSco. 
evpicTKCo 161, 11. 
evxofJ.ai Aug. 121, R. 
eX^duofiai see <x7rex&. 
e X w 166, 14. Comp. 230 
e^o) 166, 15. 

Zdco, contract. 137, 3 

Comp. fiioco. 
(evvvfjii 184,2. Comp. few. 
^eiyvvfii 187, 4. 
£ea>, formation of tenses 

130, (1), d. 
(toi'uvfj.i 186, 1. 

JlfidffKLo, rifidco, 161, 12. 
r\yepe&op.ai see a7< f p* 
Comp. 230. 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



61? 



fepebopai see aXpca. Comp. 

230. 
ripai 190. Dial. 230. 
tfpfipoTov see ap.apTa.voo. 
r)pi 178, R. 3. 
l/xvw 230. 

ectrrTO), Char. c/> 143, 1. 
&eA« see i&eXa). 
Sepopai 230. 
&e'« 154, 2 ; contract. 137, 

1. Comp. Tpex<0> 
Sfr]\4w 230. 

eHnn 230. 

<d-i77dVco 160, 14. 

SAa&>, formation of tenses 

130, (c). 
brt\<TKw 161,13.Comp.230. 
bpoLTTw from TapdrTw 1 56, 

R 
Sfpava) Pass, with <r 131, 3. 
&pvXXt(a), Char. 223, 5. 
&pvTTT(0, Char. c/> 143, 1. 
SpJxTKw 161, 14. 156, 2. 

Dial. 230. 
Svvca and ftvcu 158, 4. 
&uw, formation of tenses 

130, (b) 2. 

'ISjoJw, contract. 137, R. 

1. Dial. 230. 
l£dva) see Ka&ifa. 
((w see tcaSifa. 
'it]fj.i 180. Dial. 230. 
iKveopai, t/cco 159, 2. See 

acpLnveo/xai. Comp. 230. 
iXacTKopai 161, 15. 
'IAHMI 230. 
%\\(t) see ei'Aw. 
Ipdcrcra), Char. 143, 3. 
fcrd^ut 230. 

'i(TT7lp.l 175. 

l(Tx va ' lV(a i a hi for mat. 149, 

R. 2. 
tVxfeo^at and to-x^M*" 

see inri(rxveopai. 
'in see elyta. 

KAA-, KAIA-, see kcu- 

ua&4(op.aL, Aug. 128, 3. 
Kct^e5oi;/xat 154, 5. 
Ka&euSco 166, 13. 
Ka&7)p.ai, Aug. 126. 3. 
/ca\h£aVa> see /caS-i^a). 
Kaivvpai 230. 

dtofw /edeo 154, 2. Dial. 
230. 



/caAew, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (d) 2: Opt. 

Plup. M. or. P. 154, 8; 

metath. in Pf. 156, 2. 
Kaixva 149, 5, and 158, 10. 

Dial. 230. 
napLiTTco Pf. M. or P. 144, 

R. 2. 
KaTTjyopecc, Aug. 126, 5. 
/caa> see Kaico. 
KiTfxai 189. Dial. 230. 
Keipco 230. 
KEIH see Ke7p.ai. 
/ceAevo), Pass, with cr, 

131,2. 
/ce'AAco 230. 
KtXopai 230. 
Kevrecc 230. 
Kepdvvvpi 183, 1. Dial. 

230. 
KepSaiVw, d in foi-mat.149, 

R. 2. Pf. I. Act. 149, 6. 

Comp. 230. 
Kev&w 230. 

kt}8oj 166, 17. Dial. 230. 
KiSvapai 230. 
Kivvpai 230. 
Kipvdw 230. 
Kr\;aVa>, -Oyuai 230. 
idxpVL" 177, I- 
/aa> 230. 

KXayydva) 160, 8. 
/<Aa£o, Char. 77 143, 8. 

Dial. 230. 
icXala 154, 2 and 166, 18. 
K\doj formation of tenses 

130, (c). 
icXeia) Pass, with cr 131,3. 

Dial. 230. 
KA67TTC0, Char, it 143, 1. 

P. M., A. II. P. 140, 2. 

Pf. I. and Pf. M. or P. 

140, 5. 
kX4o) 230. 
kXti'loo, /cArfco see kXcIw 

230. 
K\lv<a, Pf. A. and M. or 

P. and A. I. P. 149, 7. 

and R. 4. 
icXva) 230. 

/cvouw Pass, with cr 131. 2. 
Kvdco Pass, with cr 131, 2. 

contract. 137, 3. 
Kvcoacrco, Char. 143, 3. 
Koi(a>, Char. 143, 6, 
KotXaivca, a in form. 149, 

R. 2. 
KoAouo),Pass.with cr 131, 3. 



kStttw, Chai*. 7r, 143, 1 

Dial. 230. 
Ko; evvvp.1 1 82. Dial. 230. 
Korea) 230. 
Kpd(a>, Char. 7 143, 65 

Perf. 194, R. Comp. 

230. 
Kpaiva) 230. 
Kp4p.ap.ai 179, 5. 
Kpep:dvvvpi 183, 2. 
/cptVo? Pf. A. and M. or 

P. and A. I. P. 149, 7, 

and R. 4. 
Kpova), Pass.with cr 131,3. 

KpVTTTO) 143, 1. 

Kpc&fa, Char. 143, 6. 
Krdopai, Red. 123. R. 1 ; 

Subj. Pf. and Opt. 

Plup. 154, 8. 
KTeivvp.1 188, 2. 
KTelvw, F. KTevu. A. I. e«- 

reiva, (A. II. eKTavop 

doubtful in pi-ose) ; Pf. 

A. eKTova 141, 4; Pf. 

P. eKTapai and Aor. 

P. iKrd&rjv ( tKTav&riv 

in later writers) 149, 

R. 3. Poet, and Dial 

230. 
KTivvvpi sec KTeivvpi. 
KTvirea) 165, 4. 
KvXica, Pass with or 131, 2 
icvvea) 159, 3. 
Kvpea), Kvpa) 230. 

AcryxdVw 160, 15. Dial. 
230. 

AAZTMAI 230. 

Xapfidva) 160, 16. Dial. 
230. 

■XavSrdva) 160, 17. Dial. 
230. 

Kdo-KO) 230. 

Ae'7 w > (a) to say, without 
Pf. A.; Pf. M. AeAe7- 
pai. A. P. e'Ae'x^J'.— 
(b) to collect, and ia 
compounds Pf. e3fAox«, 
M. or P. e'tXeypat 140, 
5 ; Aug. 123, 3 ; A. II. 
P. iXeyrjv and A. I. P. 
140,R. 1. Comp.AEXfi. 

Xeiira), A. eXlirov, Pf. II. 
AeAoiTra 140, 4. A. II, 
A. and P. 141, 3. cor- 
responding form 160. 
18. 

Ae7ra>, A. II. P. 140, B.l 



615 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



\evKa'iuoo,a in for.149, R. 2. 
\evcrcra), Char. 143, 3. 
\6u«, Pass, with o- 131,2. 
AEXn 230. 
Ki/j.irdvci) see \eiirw. 
XtfiuTTco, Char, t 143, 3. 
Aia-ao/nai, Char. 143, 3. 
\ovw, contract. 137, 5. 

Dial. 230. 
Kvfxaivafiai Pf. M. or P. 

149, 8. 
\i'o>, formation of tenses 

130, (b) 2. Dial. 230 

Maii/ofjLai 230. 
jj.aiou.ai 230. 

(jurv^dva 160, 19. Dial.230. 
(xapvatxai 230- 
/j.aprop4ci) 165, 5. 
uda-o-oj, Char. 7 143, 1. 
{ia<TTi£w, Char. 143. 6. 
^axo^cu 166, 19. 'Dial. 

230. 
MAH 230. 
(j.^vcrK(a 161, 16. 
lAttpo/Aai 230. 

/ue'Aei 168, 21. Dial. 230. 
peWw 166, 20. 
/^eAw see jueAet. Comp. 

230. 
jj,evoivdcc 230. 
peW 149, 5; 166, R. 2. 

Comp. MA£i. 
u,eTafJ.e\ei, /J.era/j.e\o/jai, 

166,21. 
/xepuTipiCw, Char. 223, 5. 
p.7]Kvo/j.ai 230. 
p.iaiva>, fiirjuai, jj.ia.vai 149, 

R. 2= Pf. Act. /j.eu.iayKa 

149, 6. Pf. M. or P. 

fiefiiafffiai 149, 8. Dial. 

230. 
/wV"/" 18 <\ 5 - Dial. 230. 
fj.ilxv7}<TK<a Sub]. Pf. and 

Opt. Plpf. M. 154, 8; 

161, 17. 
u,io~yco see [xlyvv/j,i. 
\io\ovfuu see P\cco~koj. 
PloXvvu, Pf. M.or P. 149,1. 
lxv(co, to suck, 166, 22. 
p.vtw, to groan. 143, 7. 
^.vKaofxo.i 230. 
ftwct), formation of tenses 

130, (b) 1. 

Naiu 230. 
vaaau; 143, 4. 
i/ei/cca 230. 



veiacro/xai see viao~o/j.ai. 

ve/jca 166, R, 2. 

i/6« 154, 2. 

j/eo> (p^id-cu). Pass, with 

<rl31,3. 
via), Pf. M. or P. with 

and without <r 131, 3. 
vicro-oixai, Char. 143, 3. 

Dial. 230. 
j/oew contract 205, 5. 
wo-t6.£u> 143, 7. 

Eea>, formation of tenses 

130, (d) 1. 
jpipaivu Pf. M. or P. 149, 8. 
qvpeca 165, 6. 
£vw, Pass, with a, 131, 2. 

'O3a£o, Char. 143, 6. 
wStWo-frcu see OAT2- 

SOMAI 230. 
6(o> .*t>, 23. 
olaicifa Aug. 122, 1. 
o'iyvv/j.L, oiiyw see avoiy. 
ol5a see opaco. Comp. 

230. 

160, 9. 
otKOvpew 122, 2. 
oljxaL see o'iojjaL. 
olfidca 122, 2. 
oi/«$£<» 143, 6. 
oty/<io 122,2. 
olvoxoeco 219, 5. 
olvou, Aug. 122, 2. 
oifo/*atl66, 24. Comp. 230. 
olooi, olwbrjv 122, 1. 
olarpito 122, 2. 
o'l'xo/jai 166, 25. 
0ict> see ofo/mai and <pepa). 
b\icrbdv<a 160, 10. 
#AA.i//zt 182. B. 
oAoAv£b, Char. 143, 6. 
6/j.apTeoi), Epic ofxapr-qT-riv 

222, R. 1. 
5/wy/u 182, B. 
bixonXau), Epic 6/AOKAeov 

222, I. A. (2). 
b/jopyvv/xi 187, 7. 
'OMOn see u/jvv/j.1. 
bveipwTTto 143, 3. 
»'ivr)/j.i 177. 4. 
B^o*u« 230. 
'OnT.a see 6pao>. 
opaa> 167, 4. 230. 
bpyaivoj, a in form. 149. 

R. 2. 
'OPEfNTMI 230. 



opeyoi) 230. 
opvv/j.1 230. 
bpvero-co, Char, -y 143, 1 

Pf. with Att.Red.l 24,2 
bcrcppaivojxai 160, 11. Dial 

230. 
bvcppaoSai see baeppaivo 

fj.ai. 
ovpecc, Aug. 122. 4. 
ovrdca 230. 
o^efAw 166, 26. Dial 

230. 
6<pe\\a> 230. 
b(phio~i(dvco 160, 12. 

riai(>, Char. 143, 7. 

7rcuw 166, 27. 

■n-aAaiu Pass.with <r 131. 2. 

TrdWco 230. 

Trapavo/xeo), Aug. 126, 5. 

irapoivew, Aug. 126, 1. 

ivapo^vvca Pf. M. or P. 

149, 8. 
■n-dcraa), Char. 143, 3. 
irdo-xo) 161, 18. Dial.230. 
TTaTeo/xaL 230. 
■navco, A. P. with <r 131,4. 
ttoxww Pf- M.or P. 149, 8. 
7reid-«, Pf. II. TreTroi&Q 

140, 4. Dial. 230. 
7rej!/aa>, contract. 137, 2. 
Tr€K7ecc,Tr<EKT(ti.TretKa) 143,2. 
■7rekd(w 230. 
7T€Ae/i^«, Char. 223, 5. 
ire/iir«, Pf. I. and Pf. M\ 

or P. 140, 5. 
nEN0n, see Trd(xx w - 
TreTraivw, d in the format. 

149, R. 2. 
irepaiva, a in form. 149, R. 

2; Pf. M.or P. 140, 8. 
7T€pda, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (c). 
vepSu 166,28. 
irep&w 230. 
irerdvvvixi 183, 3. 
TreTo/jai syncopated Aoi 

i-rvTOfxriv 155; 166, 29 

Dial. 230. 
nETn see iriirTto. 
irev&o/jai, see irvv&dvofia.. 
irecpvov, &ce4>vov 230. 
irjiyuvpi 187,8. Dial.230. 
■jriXva/iai 230. 
vifivKrifii 177, 5. Dial.230 
7ri(Lt7rprj(Lt: 177, 6. 
■7rVw 158, 5. 
iwriffKO) 161, 19. 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



619 



irrnpdffKw 161, 20. 
TriVrw 163, 3. Dial. 230. 

ITLTUaCO 230. 

ir\d(<a, Char. 77 143, 8. 

ir\a&w, see weAdfa. 

irAdatra, Char. 143, 3. 

v\4kw A II. P. 140, R. 1. 

7rAe«, formation of ten- 
ses 154, 2; contract. 
137, 1. 

irh-fjo-o-ca, Char. 7 143, 1 ; 
A. II. P. 140, R. 2. 

ir\vuw, Pf. A. and M. or 
A. I. P. 149, 7 and R. 4. 

TrAwGti 230. 

7rj/£a), formation of ten- 
ses 154, 2; contract. 
137, 1. 

7ro3-ew, format, of tenses 
130, (d), 2. 

iroAe/xifa, Char. 223, 5. 

7rov€w, format, of tenses 
130, (d), 2. [143, 1. 

Trpacraoi), irpdrru}, Char. 7 

irpiaafrai 179, 6. 

7Tpua, Pass, with a 131, 2. 

irpo&unov/jLcu, Aug. 126,5. 

TTTalw, Pass, with cr 131,2. 

TTTTjcrcrw 230. 

irricrcru 143, 3. 

tttuw 130, (b), 1. 

Trvv&dvofxai 160, 20. 

'PaiVwPf.M. or P. 149, 8; 

Dial. 230. 
Utttu, Char. (p 143, 1. 
64(ca, Char. 143, 6. 
p4£<a, see epSw 230. 
64a>, formation of tenses 

154, 2 and 192, 7. 
'PEn, see (pnfii. 
otyvvfu 187, 9. 
biy4ca 230. 

a>iy6(a, contract. 137, 3. 
piiTTca, Char. <p 143, 1. 
frvirooo, Red. 219, 6. 
fWrc££w, Char. 143, 6. 
oxvvv/Ai 186, 2. 

5aA7ri(w, Char. 77 143, 8 

<ra6ca 230. 

crfiduyv/xi 184, 4. 

ceiw, Pass, with c 131, 2. 

aevca 230. 

o-tjttw 140, R. 2. 

<nj/xaivoo, 7} and d in for- 
mat. 149, R.2; Pf. M. 
149; 8. 



(TKd-KTca, Chai\ (p 143, 1. 
a-KeSdyuufxi 182, and 183,4. 
ovceAAw, cr/ceAew 166, 30. 
(TKiSi/afMai 230. 
(Tjuaw, contract. 137, 3. 
crovTcu, (rovcro (gov), see 

<j-7rao, format of tenses 

130, (c). 
aireipoo, Pf. ecnt.pa 140, 4. 
<rw4v§<a 144, R. 1. 
o-to^w, Char. 143, 6. 
o-raAdCo*, Char. 143, 6. 
(rreAAco, A. II. P. 140, 2. 
ci-ei/afc} Char. 143, 6. 
arepyw, Pf. II. ecrropya 

140, 4. 
<rTepio-K(a, o~Tep4a) 161, 21. 

Dial. 230. 
o-TepiCa}, Char. 143, 6. 
o-Ti'fc, Char. 143, 6. 
o-rop4vvvp.i,(TT6pvvpLi 184,5. 
crrpe<pco A. II. P. 140, 2. 

Pf. M. or P. 140, 6. 
a-Tpwuuvfj.1 182 and 186, 3. 
o~Tvy4ct) 230. 
cruActco, Ep. o-vA'(]T7]i> 222, 

R. 1. 
(Tupi^ (crupiTTw), Char. 

143, 6. 
o-(pd£o>}, o-cpdrra), Char. 7 

143, 1 and 6. 
acpiyyw, Char. 144, R, 2. 
acpvfa, Char. 143, 6. 
a-Xaco, format, of tenses 

130, (c). 
<rxK<»> Char. 143, 5. 
(tc^co, see <to.6(jo 230. 

TArfi 230. 

TAAAH 230. 

Tavvw, format, of tenses 

223, 1. Comp. 230. 
Tapdacrw, &pa.TTo> 156, R. 

Dial. 230. 
rdtro-ca, rdrTw, Char. 7 

143, 1. 
TetVw 149, R. 3. 
TeAew, format, of tenses 

130, (d), 1. 
r4fxvco 158, 11. 
TEMXi 230. 
rep7rco 230. 
t4t/xoi/, see TEMn. 
Terpaivco 163, 4. 
revxo) 230. 
-Hjkw 140, R. J 
TIEH 230. 



TiSrqixi 175. 

t/ktw 143, 2. 

rivvvixi 185 ; Comp. 230 

rtWo 158, 6. 

Tirpdw 163, 4. 

Tirpctxruo) 161, 22. 

Tio> 158, 6. 

TAAft, 194,4. 

rAyjvou 177, 7. 

TpL-fiyca 230. 

Tpaxwo Pf.M. or P. 149,8 

TpeVw, variable vowel in 
A. II. Act. M. P. 140, 
25 A.I.Act.M.P.141, 
3 ; Pf. I. Act. and Pf. 
M. or P. 140, 5, 6. 
Verb. Adj. Tpeirr6s and 
with middle sense 

TpaTT7]T40S. 

rp4(po}, Pf. T4rpocpa 140, 
4. Pf. M. or P. 140, 6. 
A. I. P. e&pecp&rji', ra- 
rer than A. II. P. irpd- 
(pt]u 140, 2. Dial. 230. 
verb Adj. &pe7rr6s. 

rp4xc>> 167, 5. 

rp4co, format, of tenses 
130, (d), 1. 

rpify, Char. 7 143, 6. 

rvyxdvco 160, 21. 

TU7TTC0 166, 31. 

'T7T6^j/^/iu/c6 see riixvw 230. 
vinaxv4opuxi 159, 4. 
vTTvdoTTa, Char. 143, 3. 
f/co, formation of tenses 
with 0- 131, 2. 

*Arii see e<r&ia>. 

<pcuV« Pf. M. or P. 149, 8. 

Pf. II. Tr4(p7]va 149, 9. 

151. Dial. 236. 
<pd(TK(o 161, 23. 
<peidofj,ai 230. 
$ENn see ir4(pvov 230. 
<pep&> 167, 6. comp. 230 
(psvyo) see (pvyydvca. corup, 

230. 
<f>?j/*f 167, 7, 178. 
c/j2rdVco 158, 7. Dial. 230. 
^efpa>, A. II. P. 140, 2 

Pf.II. 140,4. comp. 230 
(p&iyca 158, 8. Dial. 230. 
(pi\4a) 135. Dial. 230. 
<p\4y(o,A. II. P. 140, R. 1. 
(pAu^w Char. 143, 6. 
(poirdoo, Ep. <poiT^T7jv 922; 

R. 1. 



o20 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



4>pdyvv/j.i 187, 10. 
<ppai<a 148. Dial. 230. 
(ppdcro-ca, Char, y 143, 1. 
(ppew, formation of ten- 
ses, 131, 2. 
<ppt(T(Tu, Char. k. 143, 1. 
■pvyyduca {<pevya>) 160, 22. 
(pvpw 230. 
<pva> 192, 11. eomp. 230. 

X.d(o/j.ai 230. 

Xaipu 166, 32. comp. 230. 

XaXdcc, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (c). 

XcvSdvw 160, 23. comp. 
230. 



xd(TKCo 161, 24. 

Xefc, Char. 5 143, 5 ; Pf. 
II. nexoSa 140, 4. Fut. 
Xstov/jlcu 154. 3. A. II. 
Act. according to the 
analogy of A. 1. 1 54, 8. 

Xew, formation of tenses 
154, R. 1. 230. 

x6a, Pass, with a- 131, 2. 

Xpdoficu, formation of 
tenses 129, R. 2.; A. P. 
with <r 131, 4; con- 
tract. 137, 3. 

Xpeta>, formation of ten- 
ses 129, R. 2 ; contract. 
187. 3 



XPV 177, 2. 

Xpiw, formation of tenses 

130, (a). 
Xp&vvv\u 186, 4. 

Yavco, Pass, with o- 131,2, 
\pdco, Pass, with cr 131, 3; 

contract. 137, 3. 
yficyu, A. II. P. 140, R. 1. 
^X«, A. II. P. 1 41 , R 

Wi^e'w 165, 7. 

tcveofxai, Aug. 122, 4 
comp. irokwdcu. 



nr.T 5 - 1950 






A A 










x <xy <? ' ,V/'^ s c yr ^ 









<v 





















/ , 




* ^ 
.# 



'<> 



0° 



0° V 



-> 6 ;r-:<% 



~^e 



^o* .*■* 






/ <-/•■ 



\^ * 



^ n ^ /rftig 



^ ,# - 



v * * * " ,■ -^ 



V 



% 



%^ y,^ y t v vt 



* ^ 









^3* ^ 



tf 





^0 V 



*>^ 



^« V > /, 












v ^e. 




a: %<? 



&#*'■ t 



cpv;\°v«% 






&°*« 



> % ' v.*".*.'''. % 






& °- ' 













3Vr$ 



^0 






\> 






°o/' 
















0^ . 



^ ^ 



V' :Vo ^ 











kV °^ 







V*". 




\> , 







\,^ 



J ^\" 






r 0^ 



r# 



"^A 0^ 







^o^ 

^ ^ 




,^^ 






^s ^, 



^% ' 










^» r4f 



